CHM Map_ug Map Ug

User Manual: CHM map_ug

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 1856 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

AutoCAD®Map 3D 2009
User's Guide
April 2008
©2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI,
AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk
Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap,
AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil
3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer,
Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer,
DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert,
DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver,
Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo),
LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore,
Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG,
Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik,
ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus,
Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 Mclnnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents
Users Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Getting Started with AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Overview of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Overview of Map Files and Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Autodesk Value Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Create, Edit, and Share Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Integrate GIS and CAD Data from Many Sources . . . . . . . . . . 18
Work with Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects . . . . . . . 21
Manage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
The Autodesk Spatial Data File (SDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Edit Data In Its Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Theme and Analyze Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Send Maps to the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Post Maps on a Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Overview of Map Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Introduction to the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Switching Between Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Menus and Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Viewing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
iii
The Task Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
The Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using InfoCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Getting Help with AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Viewing the Readme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Other Sources of Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Autodesk Training Programs and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Printing this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
AutoCAD Map 3D Sample Data and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Sample Data - Real World Data Sets and Data from Data
Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Templates for Maps and Map Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response . . . . 61
Symbols for General Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements . . . . . . . . 63
Getting Additional Geospatial Data to Enhance Your Maps . . . . 65
Tutorial Sample Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Additional AutoCAD Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Chapter 2 Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Overview of Setting Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Customizing Your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Creating New Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Setting Up Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Setting Up for Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Setting Up Your Map File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Assigning Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Attaching Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setting Up a Query Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Setting Up Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Setting Up Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Using Data from Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Overview of Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Setting Task Pane Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Setting Drawing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting Multi-user Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
iv | Contents
Setting System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Setting Coordinate System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Setting Data View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Setting Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting InfoCenter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions . . . . . . . 219
Setting Query Options (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Using Associative Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Saving Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Setting Raster Image Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Customizing and Automating Import and Export . . . . . . . . 236
Chapter 3 Bringing In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Overview of Bringing In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Before You Bring In Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Creating a Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Organizing Layers in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Bringing in GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map . . . . . . . . 270
Bringing In Features from Oracle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Bringing In Features from SQL Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Bringing In Features from MySQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Bringing In Features from SHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Bringing In Features from SDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Accessing Data from ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Bringing In Features from WFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Repairing Broken Feature Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files . . . . . 297
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers . . . . . . . 301
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data . . . . . . 308
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology . . . . . . . . . 311
Combining Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects . . . . . . 315
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Styling Drawing Data Converted From a Geospatial Data
Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Contents | v
Supported Import Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Specifying an Area to Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Assigning an Object Class During Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import . . . . . . . 357
Importing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Specifying How to Import Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Importing Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Creating Centroids for Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database . . . . . . 366
Displaying Attribute Data as Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Adding Rasters and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Adding 2D Rasters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) . . . . . . . . 377
Making an Image Transparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Specifying Image Insertion Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Using Other Raster Image Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Joining Data to GIS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Overview of Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Creating a Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Modifying or Removing Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Editing Joined Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Using Joins with Calculated Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Sharing Joined Data with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data) . . . . . . . 451
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . . 451
Creating a Link Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Opening a Linked Database Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . . . . 457
Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects . . . . . . . 458
Converting Object Data to Database Links . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Editing Database Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Editing a Link Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Using Open Source FDO Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Chapter 4 Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Overview of Managing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas . . . . . . 479
Overview of Geospatial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Working with FDO Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Working with Oracle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Working with SQL Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
vi | Contents
Working with MySQL Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Working with SDF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Working with SHP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Working with ODBC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Working with WFS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Working with Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Overview of Working with Feature Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Setting Up Database Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Creating a Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Deleting a Feature Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Working with Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Overview of Working with Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Creating a New Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema . . . . . . . . . . 514
Importing and Exporting a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Viewing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Editing a Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Deleting Schemas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Undoing Schema Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Migrating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Overview of Migrating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types . . . . . . 526
Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Migrating DWG Data to GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Overview of Visualization and Styling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Controlling the Display of Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Overview of the Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Controlling Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Setting Map Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Creating Multiple Display Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Overview of Styling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Defining Scale Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Styling Point Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Styling Line Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Styling Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Labeling Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Contents | vii
Styling a Drawing Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Creating a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Combining Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Modifying a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Saving a Display Style in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Referencing a Library Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Styling Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Overview of Styling Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Viewing Raster Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Overview of Creating and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Working with Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Overview of Working with Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Creating New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Checking In Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Checking Out Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Cancelling Check Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Updating Edits Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Working Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Managing Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Editing Data in Attached Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Cleaning Up Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Using Map Editing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Working with Polygon Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
Adding and Deleting Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Using Object Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Entering Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands . . . . . . . . . . 850
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . 854
Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . 856
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . 857
Working with Attribute Data and Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data . . . . . 859
Entering and Editing Object Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
viii | Contents
Overview of Digitizing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Overview of Digitizing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize . . . . . . . . . 895
Chapter 7 Annotating Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Overview of Annotating Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Adding Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Adding Labels to Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Annotating Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
Overview of Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Attaching Annotation to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Refreshing Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Updating Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
Deleting Annotation from Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
Working with Annotation Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Creating Annotation Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Styling an Annotation Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
Adding Text to an Annotation Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Editing an Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Adding a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Annotating with AutoCAD Text Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
Chapter 8 Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Overview of Analyzing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Getting Information About Features and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Getting Information about Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Getting Information About Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Overview of Measuring and Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Tracking Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Measuring Geodetic Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Measuring Coordinate Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Overview of Creating Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Theming Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Theming Drawing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
Viewing Surfaces in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Contents | ix
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration . . . . . . . . . . . 986
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect . . . . . 989
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Finding and Selecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Finding and Selecting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Buffering Features in Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Performing a Shortest Path Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
Performing a Best Route Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Performing a Flood Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Overlaying Two Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
Dissolving a Composite Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Buffering a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
Querying a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
Saving a Temporary Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
Overview of Publishing and Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
Publishing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Overview of Publishing Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Publishing a Map to a Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
Publishing to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Publishing to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Publishing to a Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
Using eTransmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Publishing to MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
Viewing Publish to MapGuide Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Publishing Map Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Converting and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
Overview of Converting and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Supported Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Supported Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
Exporting To Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) . . . . . . . . . . 1173
Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175
Exporting To ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178
Exporting to ESRI ArcSDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179
Exporting to ESRI ShapeFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180
Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
Exporting To MapInfo TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 . . . 1186
Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) . . . . . . . 1189
Exporting To VML (Vector Markup Language) . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Exporting to Multiple Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
Exporting To Shape Multiclass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
x | Contents
Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties . . . . 1197
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology . . . . . . . . . . 1200
Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Exporting Maps to DWG Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again . . . 1207
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer . . . . . . . . . . 1210
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
Exporting from the Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214
Printing from the Data View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
Chapter 10 Working with Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
Overview of Working with Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223
Setting Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
Creating and Viewing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Working with Metadata Style Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229
Working with Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Overview of Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Using Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Previewing Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234
Setting a Default Metadata Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Deactivating Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Exporting Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Removing Metadata Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
Editing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
Overview of Editing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239
Updating Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Copying and Pasting Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Adding and Deleting Records in the Metadata Editor . . . . . . 1245
Working with Compound Metadata Elements . . . . . . . . . . 1246
Using the Record Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
Auditing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Sharing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Overview of Sharing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Importing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
Exporting Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
Publishing and Printing Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Contents | xi
Chapter 11 Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Mapping Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Discontinued Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
Improving Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
Arithmetic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
String-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
Equality and Conditional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286
Symbol-Handling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
Conversion Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Dot Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289
Object Data Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
Block Attribute Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292
SQL Variables and Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293
Object Classification Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
EED Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
Using Color in Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator . . . . . . . . . . 1297
Chapter 13 Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Using the Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
Buffer Features dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303
Buffer Warning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
Contour dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Hillshade Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
Annotation Delete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
Annotation Refresh dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307
Annotation Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Annotation Update dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
Define Annotation Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310
xii | Contents
Edit Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
Insert Annotation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312
New Annotation Template Name dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Publish to Autodesk MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315
Publish to MapGuide Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Expression dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316
Define New Object Data Field dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Cleanup Methods Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323
Error Markers Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325
Select Actions Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
Drawing Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329
Select Objects Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
MAPDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box . . . . . . . 1337
Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Create a Join / Edit a Join dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Create Data Store dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1340
Feature Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
Feature Source Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
Feature Source Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Feature Source Connection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Manage Layer Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
Save Features dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343
Save Version dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344
User Credentials dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
View Query Statement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
Chapter 20 Data Table Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
Data Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347
Contents | xiii
Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1351
Data to Attach dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1352
Digitize Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
Link Template Data Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356
Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command) . . . . . . . . . . 1357
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command) . . . . . . . . 1357
Alter Block Insertion dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Alter Line Format dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Alter Linetype dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Alter Lineweight dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Alter Plotstyle dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Copy Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Define Hatch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
Edit Text Instance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
Import Old Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
New Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Range of Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Select Display Element dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
Source Drawing Scope dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
Style Band dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369
Style Label dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370
Style Line dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372
Style Point dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373
Style Area dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Style Text Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376
Thematic Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1377
Thematic Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379
Theme dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
MAPFEATUREMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388
MAPFEATURESPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1392
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394
xiv | Contents
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
MAPPOINTCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
MAPPOLYGONCREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401
MAPPOLYGONEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
Split and Merge Rules dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Associate Database Versions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Column dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412
Column Values dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
Configure Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Connect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1416
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE) . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) . . . . . . . . . . 1419
Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
Disconnect Data Source dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
Header/Footer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Link Template Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
Page Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1423
Select Database Version dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1424
Select Existing Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
Select Link Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
Select Link Templates dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426
Select Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
Sort dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428
Table Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
Table Filter History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432
Table Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
Zoom Scale dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433
Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Attribute Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Block Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
Conflict Resolution dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
Coordinate System Translation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440
Contents | xv
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . 1450
Layer Mapping dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453
Link Template to Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454
Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . 1454
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . 1455
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) . . . . . . . . 1457
Map Export dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Map Export Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1459
New Property Data Type dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
Property Value Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462
Map Import dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463
New Layer dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
Object Data Table dialog box (Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464
Object Data Table dialog box (Import) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465
Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1465
Point Mapping dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
Design File Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
Design File Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470
Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
Schema Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471
Bulk Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Create Data Store Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476
Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479
Metadata Viewerdialog boxesMetadata ViewerMetadata Viewer . . . 1479
Metadata Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
Metadata Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1485
Import Metadata Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486
Export Metadata dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487
Create Metadata Template dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
Compound Element Metadata Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects command) . . . . 1511
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1512
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects command) . . . 1512
xvi | Contents
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1513
Classified Property List dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
Classify dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1514
Classify Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
Color Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1515
Define Object Classification dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1517
Layer Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
Linetype Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
New Object Class Definition File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
New Property dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1523
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524
Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
Attach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528
Edit Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529
Rename Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
Select Link Template Key dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1531
Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to Polygons
command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551
MAPUSEMPOLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1552
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1555
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1557
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1558
Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1561
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box . . . . . . . . . 1563
Map Book Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1564
Tile Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
Map Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
Plot Map Set dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1567
Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Alternate Font dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Change Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Data Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1570
Define New Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572
Define Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1572
Contents | xvii
Define Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1577
Define Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580
Hatch Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582
Load Internal Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583
Location Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584
New Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
Output Report Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
Property Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
Query Library Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1593
Rename Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
Rename Range Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
Run Library Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596
Save Current Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596
Set Property Alterations dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
SQL Condition History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
SQL Link Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601
Type SQL Condition dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
Image Correlation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1607
Image Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
Image Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
Image Management Layout dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
Image Select dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
Insert Image dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1612
Raster Extension Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
Transparency Color dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1617
Chapter 35 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1619
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command) . . . . . . 1619
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command) . . . . . . . . 1620
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) . . . . . . . . 1621
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1621
Who Has It Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
MAPABOUT (About AutoCAD Map 3D command) . . . . . . . . . . 1625
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
MAPEDITSETAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
MAPWSFOCUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
xviii | Contents
MAPWSREFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1637
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
Drawing Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
Drawing Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
Drawing Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
Drive Alias Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
Feature Editing Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
Generate Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
Index Maintenance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
Remove Object Data Index dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
Select Alias dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
User Administration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1653
User Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
User Login dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1657
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) . . . . . . . . . . 1658
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1660
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link command) . . . . 1662
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command) . . . . . . . . . . 1662
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command) . . . . . . . . . . 1666
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . . 1667
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . . 1667
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command) . . . . . . . . 1668
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT . . . . . . 1669
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1670
Centroid Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671
Create Closed Polylines dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . 1673
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1674
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1676
Contents | xix
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box . . . . . 1679
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . 1680
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box . . . . . . . . 1681
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1683
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . 1684
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box . . . . . . . 1686
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1688
Create Topology Warning dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Delete Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Edit Direction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1691
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692
Edit Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1692
Link Objects dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1694
Load Topology Conflict dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1695
Load Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1697
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box . . . . . . 1698
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1701
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box . . . . . . . . 1703
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies) . . . . . 1705
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706
Rename Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1708
Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . . . 1710
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1711
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . 1712
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box . . 1713
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1714
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1716
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1717
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1718
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box . . . . . . . . 1719
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1722
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box . . . . . . . . . 1723
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box . . . . . . . 1724
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box . . . . . . 1726
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box . . . 1727
Topology Query dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
Topology Query Result dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1730
Topology Selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
Topology Statistics dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
xx | Contents
Chapter 38 Viewing Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
Quick View Drawings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1733
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
Define Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1735
Define Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737
Document View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738
Key View dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
Chapter 39 Programming Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767
Contents | xxi
xxii
Users Guide
This section explains AutoCAD Map 3D’s features by introducing concepts, providing
step-by-step procedures, and providing quick reference information.
For information on AutoCAD commands, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
1
2
Getting Started Guide
This section introduces the main concepts of AutoCAD Map 3D, provides a quick tour of the
user interface, and describes the documentation available to help you learn more about the
program.
For a general overview of working with geospatial data, see Best Practices for Managing Geospatial
Data.
For a tutorial that introduces the concepts and leads you through the basic steps of creating
a map, see Introducing AutoCAD Map 3D 2009.
Getting Started with AutoCAD Map 3D
Overview of Features
AutoCAD Map 3D is the leading engineering solution for creating and managing
spatial data. Bridging the gap between Computer Aided Design (CAD) and
Geographic Information Systems (GIS), AutoCAD Map 3D provides direct access
to the leading data formats used in design and GIS. AutoCAD Map 3D enables
the use of AutoCAD® tools for maintaining a broad variety of geospatial
information and allows design processes to integrate GIS functions in a single
environment for more efficient workflows. The results are better designs,
increased productivity, and better data quality.
DescriptionFeature
AutoCAD Map 3D is built on the latest release of AutoCAD®
software and is enhanced with a suite of geospatial tools. It
Built on the AutoCAD®
platform
contains all the features and functionality of AutoCAD, which
is automatically installed when you install AutoCAD Map 3D,
1
3
DescriptionFeature
so you know you’re working with proven, reliable, industry-
leading software.
Work with more than 4,000 real-world coordinate systems or
define your own custom coordinate system and use tools such
Geographic Coordin-
ate Systems
as transform, rubber sheeting, and track coordinates to accur-
ately georeference your AutoCAD design data.
AutoCAD Map 3D software integrates computer-aided design
(CAD) and geographic information system (GIS) data. Directly
Direct Data Access
access and edit spatial data that resides in a variety of data
sources including files and databases such as DWG™ and ESRI
SHP, Oracle® , and ESRI® ArcSDE® managed databases or use
Oracle, Microsoft® SQL Server™ and MySQL to store spatial
data without expensive middleware. Access raster imagery
and connect to web services such as Web Map Services (WMS)
and Web Feature Services (WFS) to take advantage of publicly
available data sources. Direct access means no data transla-
tions, which helps ensure data integrity.
AutoCAD Map 3D is interoperable with all major design and
GIS software, so you can read, write, and convert data
Data Exchange
between standard formats, including DWG™, Arc/Info® cov-
erages, SHP and E00 from ESRI®, MapInfo MIF/MID™, MapInfo
TAB, MicroStation® DGN (V7 and V8), Generalized Markup
Language (GML 3.1.1), Ordnance Survey MasterMap (DNF)
(GML2, read-only), Vector Product Format (VPF, read-only),
Autodesk SDF, and Spatial Data Transfer Standard (SDTS,
read-only). After working with the data, you can maintain it
in a DWG™ file; convert it to an external file, or move it into
a spatial database.
Using Drawing Cleanup tools, you can automate the often
time-consuming correction of common drafting and digitizing
Data Cleanup
errors. Delete duplicates, correct undershoots and dangling
objects, and more. Help ease the integration of data into your
GIS or mapping system with clean and accurate spatial data.
4 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
DescriptionFeature
Using DWG query functionality, multiple users can access,
search and edit the same sets of DWG files or base maps
DWG™ Query
simultaneously. This efficient and reliable way to work collab-
oratively with DWG-based information reduces the need for
version control and minimizes time wasted waiting for data.
Input and Inquiry tools help you create and measure simple
Coordinate Geometry (COGO) for lines, curves, closed poly-
Lightweight COGO
Tools
lines, and polygons. This functionally streamlines the process
of drawing plats and existing conditions by allowing for the
input of geometry in terms of bearing, direction, deflection,
and azimuth angle.
Data accessed through FDO can be directly edited with
standard AutoCAD commands such as Pedit, Trim, Break, Join,
CAD editing on Geo-
spatial Data
Offset, Extend, Rotate, Move, and Cut/Copy/Paste. Easily edit
polygon objects with new split and merge functions, and use
the new Expression Builder to populate attributes with data
calculations and intrinsic object properties.
Organize objects in your drawing by the real-world features
that they represent (e.g. roads, parcels, cables, or water pipes).
Classification
When you create an object using object classification, the
object automatically takes its properties and values from its
object class, maintaining consistency and establishing stand-
ards in your drawing. By applying a classification to an existing
or new object, you can be assured that it meets your standards
for both data and display.To download free industry-specific
toolkits that can help fast-track the classification process, visit
http://www.autodesk.com/map-downloads
Cartography tools enable you to create maps that, in the past,
had to be created with additional GIS-specific software. Easily
Map Creation and
Stylization
create stylized maps that highlight specific features or inform-
ation such as service areas, zoning districts, land usage, pipe
and cable installation dates and diameters, and much more.
Call out details with attribute-driven labels that provide text
along a curve and segment-stitching functionality. Blend data
using transparency, save and reuse styles in any project, saving
Overview of Features | 5
DescriptionFeature
time and streamlining map production. Move beyond basic
CAD maps to advanced cartography and presentations.
Answer questions about your data and make decisions. Utilize
information in vector and tabular formats and link the data
GIS Analysis
together. Perform data queries, create thematic maps, build
topologies, create reports, perform buffer and tracing analysis,
and much more. With integrated GIS tools, AutoCAD Map
3D provides easy visualization and evaluation of design and
asset management projects.
Visualize and analyze large-scale topographic information—di-
gital elevation models (DEM) and ESRI GRID files—for eleva-
GRID (Raster) Surfaces
tion, slope, and aspect, as well as create contours and perform
sunlight studies with hillshading. Use draping functionality to
combine topography data with aerial photographs and vector
data for stunning and revealing 3D renderings that can be
published to 3D DWF files for viewing in free Autodesk®
Design Review software by non-technical users.
AutoCAD Map 3D provides open, standards-based database
support. Easily join CAD objects to commonly used databases
Database Integration
such as Microsoft® Access and easily store CAD and GIS data
in popular relational database management systems (RDBMSs)
including ESRI® ArcSDE® managed databases. Use existing
data models or create your own schemas using straightforward
tools and use databases such as Oracle®, Microsoft® SQL
Server™ or MySQL® to store spatial data without expensive
middleware.
Easily and effectively manage spatial data in virtually any
format. Use intuitive tools to quickly and easily create users,
Data Management
Tools
define schemas (databases and files) or load data models via
XML Metadata Interchange (XMI) from industry standard
modeling programs. Easily move and convert data that resides
in one data store to another (e.g., SDF/SHP to Oracle). Auto-
CAD Map 3D acts as a hub for managing large amounts of
spatial data, allowing you to unlock legacy spatial information
and streamline workflow.
6 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
DescriptionFeature
The spatial data file (SDF) enables you to organize and manage
your data as real-world features. Increased storage capacity
Spatial Data File (SDF)
and faster performance compared to DWG make this easy-to-
manage file-based data repository a smart choice when an
enterprise database doesn’t make sense. SDF supports rich
geometry, multiple tables, and spatial indexing and provides
a solid foundation for a smooth transition to an RDBMS in the
future if the need arises.
Maintain your investment in spatial data with tools to create
and edit metadata (the who, what, when, where, why, and
Metadata
how) about your spatial information and publish it in standard
formats including International Organization for Standardiza-
tion (ISO) (19115 and 19139) and Federal Geographic Data
Committee ( FGDC). With automatic metadata creation it is
easy for you to share your data with other people in your or-
ganization or externally with contractors and regulatory
agencies.
Distribute your geospatial data, maps and designs in a variety
of ways to meet your organizations needs. For instance, create
Publishing Tools
and design maps within AutoCAD Map 3D and quickly publish
them to the internet using Autodesk MapGuide® Enterprise
software, or distribute them as individual geo-referenced
DWF™ files, multisheet DWF Map Books and paper plots. Help
ensure that customers and teams throughout the organization
are using the latest information.
With the power of FDO Data Access Technology (FDO) on
the desktop, AutoCAD Map 3D makes it easy for you to take
Extensibility via Open
Source
advantage of the open source world by extending data access
with third party and open source FDO Providers for data stores
not currently supported by Autodesk (e.g., ESRI Personal
Geodatabase and PostGIS).
To help make it easier for developers to extend capabilities of
FDO, Autodesk released FDO as an open source project (ht-
tp://fdo.osgeo.org) under the Open Source Geospatial
Foundation (OSGeo) http://www.osgeo.org. This initiative en-
Overview of Features | 7
DescriptionFeature
ables developers all over the world to tap into powerful geo-
spatial data access technology.
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with robust .NET application pro-
gramming interfaces (APIs) that organizations can use to cre-
Robust API
ate custom tools and automate common procedures.Addition-
ally,AutoCAD Map 3D and Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise
software share a unified geospatial API as well as unified FDO
data access technology that can be used to build custom ap-
plications which share business logic and common code.
Overview of Map Files and Data Sources
What is a map?
When we refer to a map in AutoCAD Map 3D we are referring to a file that
has links to all the data and images you want to include in your map.
An AutoCAD Map 3D map can include standard AutoCAD objects, spatial
data from a database, raster images, and attribute data.
You coordinate all this data using the Display Manager. Each set of data is
represented by a layer in the Display Manager.
8 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
For an introduction to the parts of the AutoCAD Map 3D window, see
AutoCAD
Map 3D User Interface Overview
.
Display Manager layers are not the same as AutoCAD layers. Each layer in the
Display Manager represents a specific set of data. For example, a raster layer
might display an aerial photograph of a city, an SDF layer might display an
SDF file representing parcels within the city, and a drawing layer might dipslay
objects from the current drawing or from an attached drawing file representing
geographic features such as rivers.
Overview of Map Files and Data Sources | 9
This map contains a surface raster image, parcels stored in an SDF file, and river data
stored in a DWG file. Each set of data comes from a different source and appears on
its own layer in the Display Manager
In the Display Manger, you can style each layer separately and view and plot
the result. You can specify line styles, color, and weights; fill colors and styles;
labels; and more.
Use themes to style layers according to their attribute values, for example, to
vary fill color by property value or parcel area.
10 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
What’s in a map file?
Each AutoCAD Map 3D map file contains the information for connecting to
the data sources, drawings, raster images, and attribute data for its contents.
It also stores queries, object data, styling information, printing layouts, and
any customized settings.
Whenever you open a map file, all of this information is immediately available
to you.
For example, a city planner can create a map that connects to an SDF file
containing parcel data, the city assessor’s Oracle database of parcel ownership
information, the county’s raster server of aerial photos, and queries that locate
selected parcels and highlight them. A facilities manager can create a map for
a building and attach drawings with electrical and floor plan information and
a database of maintenance information.
What is a data source?
A data source is any source of information that can be used in a map. It can
be a spatial database created with Oracle, SQL Server or another relational
database management system; a file-based spatial data store, such as Autodesk
SDF or ESRI SHP; an AutoCAD drawing file; a spreadsheet or other ODBC
source that contains attribute data; or a raster image, such as a TIFF or DEM
file.
In the map file, the items in the map are all connected to their original sources.
If the information in the sources changes, the items in your map change too.
If you make changes to items, the original sources update to show those
changes.
What can you do with a finished map?
Once you’ve created a map, AutoCAD Map 3D provides many ways to share
the map with others. You can share maps even with viewers who don’t have
access to AutoCAD Map 3D. For example, you can print maps; save them as
DWFs (which can be viewed with Autodesk Design Review, available from the
Autodesk Website); publish them to MapGuide; convert all the data to
AutoCAD DWG data; or post them on the Web.
To share a map and all its data with another AutoCAD Map 3D user, you can
package all the map’s files with the eTransmit feature.
Some information in an AutoCAD Map 3D file cannot be read by AutoCAD,
such as links to external spatial data.To share a map with an AutoCAD user,
convert all the data in your map to DWG format, including data from spatial
Overview of Map Files and Data Sources | 11
data stores. For more information, see Exporting Maps to DWG Format on
page 1202
The Autodesk Value Chain
The Autodesk Geospatial Value Chain provides a useful model to help
understand how organizations currently use geospatial technology, and
provides a deliberate path for growing and extending their capabilities over
time. The Autodesk Geospatial product line effectively supports an organization
at any stage, as well as facilitates easy transition from one stage to the other
as the organization’s geospatial data needs evolve. The following section
outlines each stage in the value chain.
■Stage 1: At Stage 1, organizations use a CAD product, such as AutoCAD
or AutoCAD LT® to design and manage infrastructure data. AutoCAD is a
world-leading design tool that is used to create a majority of the world’s
infrastructure design data. However, it does not support georeferencing
(geographic location in the real world), multi-user editing, or GIS data
formats. When an organization needs to add location intelligence to its
data, bring in data from other sources, or allow multiple designers to edit
the same data, it has outgrown Stage 1and may be ready to move to Stage
2 or Stage 3.
■Stage 2: At Stage 2, an organization uses CAD files as its primary data
source and AutoCAD Map 3D for collaboration and to share this
infrastructure information. AutoCAD Map 3D makes it easier to share data
or split the workload. Project teams can use their AutoCAD knowledge and
training while taking advantage of more traditional GIS tools and functions.
When an organization wants to extend its CAD information to more people
and leverage additional mapping capabilities—to know, for example, where
there are undeveloped parcels or how many manholes are on new
roads—they may be ready to move to Stage 3.
■Stage 3: In Stage 3, an organization increases the value of its data by
applying standards and organizing data using the AutoCAD Map 3D
platform. By organizing data and leveraging FDO Data Access
Technology—Autodesk’s geospatial data access platform—organizations
can enhance the performance of large data sets and use their CAD and
geospatial data together to make business decisions. To scale the availability
of data to a larger number of people, the organization moves to Stage 4.
■Stage 4: To extend the use of their information, organizations transition
from Stage 3 to Stage 4. They move from a file-based environment using
12 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
DWG, SHP, or SDF to a spatial database environment using the full
functionality of a relational database management system (RDBMS) to
allow hundreds of people to create, edit, and manage the same data. While
the information in Stage 3 and Stage 4 may be the same, organizations in
Stage 4 leverage the added power of an RDBMS to scale the availability
and management of their geospatial information.
■Stage 5: When an organization moves from Stage 4 to Stage 5, it shares
spatial data with other departments and applications and makes spatial
data a central part of its IT ecosystem. The organization integrates geospatial
data and GIS functionality with other business systems, such as assessor
databases, permitting systems, and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
systems. Autodesk, Autodesk resellers, partners, and system integrators
build powerful solutions to meet the organization’s specific business goals
and processes.
For further information on Autodesk Geospatial and the value chain visit
http://www.autodesk.com/geospatial.
Create, Edit, and Share Maps
AutoCAD Map 3D lets you view and edit data from many sources. You can
style and theme the data, edit the data, and publish single maps or map books.
Use the full set of AutoCAD editing tools and commands to add or change
map objects, no matter what the object source and without converting the
data. View and style with the ease of GIS, edit with the power of CAD.
Create, Edit, and Share Maps | 13
The layers in Display Manager on page 1748 represent the data sources to which
this map is connected. Their data appears in the map immediately, but you can style
it to change its appearance. The Data Table on page 1747 lets you edit the
information for individual items in a layer.
14 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Create Maps
Create a map by connecting to the data to include.
Use data from many formats, including
feature databases such as Oracle and Arc-
SDE, file-based feature sources such as SDF
or SHP, Web servers such as WMS and
WFS, CAD drawing files, raster images (in-
cluding surfaces that show elevation) and
other formats such as DGN or SDTS.
Connect to the data from the Task Pane.
The Data Connect dialog box lets you choose
the data source and which feature classes
to add to your map. Each feature class you
add becomes a layer in the Display Manager.
Style Objects
Use styling to change the appearance of objects and features in your map. For
example, you can change the linetypes and colors for roads and use symbols
for schools and libraries. You can also use color themes to show the elevation
of terrain or illustrate the population density of counties.
Create, Edit, and Share Maps | 15
The colors give the viewer an immediate sense of the population distribution in
California
Your styles and themes are saved in your map. You can export styles to share
with others.
Edit Data
When you connect to data sources, your map is a window onto that data. The
data remains in its source location — any changes you make appear in the
source and any changes in the source are immediately reflected in your map.
Use the powerful, high-precision AutoCAD
tools to edit the feature, then save your
changes back to the data source.
When you check out a feature for editing, AutoCAD Map 3D locks the feature
so no one else can edit it (to the extent supported by the data source). You
check in the feature when you are finished editing it to update its source. If
you prefer, you can work offline and update the source when you reconnect.
You can also import data, rather than connecting to it. Importing breaks the
connection to the source and adds a “snapshot” of the data to your map.
16 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Share Data
AutoCAD Map 3D makes it easy to share data, both within and outside your
organization.
When you edit data in the original source,
your changes are immediately visible to
others in your organization.
To share finished maps, you can print single-page or multi-page maps to paper
or to a file, publish to DWF, export to another format such as DGN or SHP,
publish to a Web page, or export all your map data in a format that can be
used by MapGuide.
More Information
See...For information about...
Bringing in GIS Features on page 265Adding feature data to maps
Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files
on page 296
Adding drawing objects to maps
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data
to Drawing Objects on page 316
Importing data from other formats
Working with Features on page 575Editing features
Working with Drawing Objects on page
604
Editing drawing objects
Styling Features on page 540Styling features
Styling Drawing Layers on page 549Styling drawing objects
Create, Edit, and Share Maps | 17
See...For information about...
Creating Themes on page 953Creating themes
Publishing Map Books on page 1144Creating multi-page maps
Publishing to DWF on page 1128Publishing to DWF
Converting and Exporting on page 1164Exporting to other formats
Integrate GIS and CAD Data from Many Sources
Use data from many sources and edit it in its original source—you won’t need
to manually transfer data between applications.
Spatial Data
Combine feature data from a spatial database with objects from CAD drawings,
raw geometry from a spreadsheet, and raster images.
Combine data from many sources.
18 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Features and objects are automatically transformed to the coordinate system
used in the map.
Attribute Data
Use the Data Table to view and edit attribute data. The Data Table displays
attribute data for spatial tables (which have geometry) and non-spatial tables
(which contain only attributes).
You can highlight data for specific features and objects in your map. AutoCAD
Map 3D maintains the link between spatial data and attribute data; when you
update the attribute data, the updates are dynamically reflected in your
drawing.
Data for a selected parcel appears in the Data Table.
Integrate GIS and CAD Data from Many Sources | 19
Raster Images
Raster images add context to your map. Add aerial photos, contour maps,
DEM surfaces, and many other raster formats.
When you add a raster or surface to your
map, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the place-
ment data from the raster file.
■Georeferenced images are displayed
in the correct location.
■Surface rasters are draped over your
elevations.
More Information
See...For information about...
Bringing in GIS Features on page 265Accessing feature data
Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files
on page 296
Accessing drawing objects
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data
to Drawing Objects on page 316
Importing from other formats
Joining Data to GIS Features on page 439Joining attribute data to spatial data
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects on
page 450
Linking attribute data to drawing objects
Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370Using raster images
20 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Work with Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects
Using AutoCAD Map 3D, you can work both with CAD objects and with
geospatial features. You can combine them in your map, edit either type of
object, and move objects from one format to the other.
Features
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road or a
utility pole. Features are stored in a spatial database or file in formats such as
Oracle, ArcSDE, SDF, or SHP. The spatial database or file is referred to as a
feature source.
Using Open Source FDO Data Access Technology, AutoCAD Map 3D natively
accesses spatial data, providing easy management of large geospatial data sets
while streamlining entire workflows. To work with features, connect to the
database or file and then select the sets of features (feature classes) to include
in your map.
Drawing Objects
A drawing object is any object in a DWG file, such as a line, circle, or closed
polyline.
You can create and store drawing objects in the current map, or you can attach
a DWG file to the current map and query in objects from that file. AutoCAD
Map 3D remembers the original location of the objects and saves edited objects
back to their original file.
Working with Features vs. Objects
You work with features and objects in your map in different ways. The table
below outlines the differences.
Drawing ObjectsSpatial FeaturesAction
Attach drawings to the cur-
rent map, and then run a
Use Data Connect to con-
nect to your data and select
Add objects to a map
query to bring selected ob-the feature classes. All fea-
jects from those drawingtures from the feature class
into your map. See Bringingimmediately appear in your
In Drawing Data From DWG
Files on page 296.
map. See Bringing in GIS
Features on page 265.
Work with Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects | 21
Drawing ObjectsSpatial FeaturesAction
Use Attach Data Source to
connect the attribute data
Attribute data in your data
source is visible in the Data
Use attribute data
to the map. Create a linkTable. You can join data
template for the attributefrom an external source to
data table. See Setting Upthe feature and use the
Data Sources for Drawingscombined set of data for
on page 184 and Viewingtheming or styling. See
Properties and Attributes ofViewing Data for a Selected
Drawing Objects on page
937.
Link records in the object
data table to objects in your
Layer, Join, Unfiltered Fea-
ture Class, or Non-Spatial
Data Table on page 928.
drawing. See Adding Attrib-
utes to Drawing Objects on
page 450.
Use Object Data to store
attribute data in the map
itself. See Storing Attribute
Data in the Drawing (Ob-
ject Data) on page 451.
Select the object. Edit it us-
ing AutoCAD commands.
Select the feature and check
it out. Edit it using AutoCAD
Edit objects
See Working with Drawing
Objects on page 604.
If the object is from an at-
tached drawing, save it
commands and special fea-
ture editing commands.
Check the feature in to up-
date it and unlock it in the
back to update and unlockfeature source. See Working
with Features on page 575. the object in the attached
22 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Drawing ObjectsSpatial FeaturesAction
TIP Some AutoCAD com-
mands will not work on
features. To use these com-
mands, extract the feature
geometry, edit the geo-
metry using the AutoCAD
commands, and update the
feature with the new geo-
metry. See Using AutoCAD
Commands on Features on
page 597.
drawing. See Editing and
Saving Objects in Attached
Drawings on page 611.
Use the Properties Palette.
See Styling Drawing Layers
on page 549.
Use the Style Editor. See
Styling Features on page
540.
Style objects
Add a Theme style. See
Theming Drawing Data on
page 965.
Use the Theme option on
the Style Editor. See Them-
ing Features on page 955.
Theme objects
Apply Object Classification.
See Using Object Classifica-
tion on page 836.
All features are classified.Classify features and ob-
jects
From Display Manager,
query in objects from the
Edit the query for the layer.
See Filtering a Feature Layer
on page 1002.
Filter a layer to see only
objects that match certain
criteria current drawing to create a
drawing-based layer that
contains just those objects
on page 313. Other objects
become part of the Map
Base layer.
Use New Feature From
Geometry. See Creating a
Use Extract Geometry From
Feature. See Extracting Fea-
ture Geometry on page 598.
Only the geometry is con-
verted. Properties and attrib-
ute data are not converted.
Convert objects between
drawing and spatial data
format New Feature from a Draw-
ing Object on page 581.
Work with Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects | 23
Drawing ObjectsSpatial FeaturesAction
Only the geometry is con-
verted. Properties and attrib-
ute data are not converted.
You can also export your
entire map to a DWG file,
converting its features to
You can also export draw-
ing objects to Oracle, SDF,
DWG objects in the result-
ing file. See Exporting Maps
to DWG Format on page 1202 or SHP format. See Moving
Attribute data is not conver-
ted.
DWG Data to a Spatial Data
Store and Back Again on
page 1207.
Manage Data
FDO features use schemas to define their feature classes and feature properties.
You can edit the schema (for spatial data formats that support editing), or
create a new data store and add a schema to it.
You can move DWG data to Oracle format, ESRI ArcSDE format on page 1203,
or Autodesk SDF on page 25, or copy data from one spatial data format to
another using Bulk Copy.
More Information
See...For information about...
Working with Schemas on page 507Creating and editing schemas
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store
on page 1203
Exporting DWG objects to Oracle or ESRI
ArcSDE
Overview of Converting and Exporting on
page 1166 and Importing Autodesk SDF
(Spatial Data Files) on page 323
Exporting DWG objects to SDF format
Migrating Data on page 522Copying data between geospatial formats
24 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The Autodesk Spatial Data File (SDF)
Autodesk SDF lets you store geometry and attribute information in a file-based
geospatial format This format gives you great flexibility for moving data from
one format to another, including to and from DWG format.
■Use Data Connect to connect directly to an SDF file. Because this is a direct
connection, any edits you make are made to the SDF file.
■You can import data from SDF. The imported data becomes drawing objects
in your map and the live connection to the SDF file is broken. This is one
way to convert the data from SDF to DWG.
■You can copy data to SDF format from other geospatial formats, and from
SDF to those formats, using Bulk Copy. For example, you can copy an SDF
feature to SHP format, and vice versa.
More Information
See...For information about...
Bringing In Features from SDF on page 287Connecting to SDF files
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data
to Drawing Objects on page 316
Importing SDF data as DWG objects
Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files)
on page 323
Overview of Converting and Exporting on
page 1166 and Importing Autodesk SDF
(Spatial Data Files) on page 323
Exporting DWG objects to SDF format
Migrating Data on page 522Copying data to SDF format from other
geospatial formats, and from SDF to those
formats
The Autodesk Spatial Data File (SDF) | 25
Attribute Data
Attribute data is additional, non-geometry data about a drawing object or
feature. For example, if you have a drawing of parcels, you might have attribute
data from the assessor's department that lists the owner and improvements
for each parcel.
Use the Data Table to view both spatial data and attribute data in a feature
source.
The Data Table displays geometry and attribute data for a feature. You can search and
theme features based on any data in the feature source.
To link attribute data to drawing objects, attach the database to the current
map and then use a link template to connect the data to the objects.
26 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Link attribute data to drawing objects, then highlight
objects in your map by selecting the linked data in
the table.
More Information
See...For information about...
Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join,
Unfiltered Feature Class, or Non-Spatial
Data Table on page 928
Viewing attribute data for features
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on
page 184
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects on
page 450
Linking attribute data to drawing objects
Edit Data In Its Source
When you connect to a feature source, your map is a window onto the data.
Your edits are made directly to the source.
When you edit objects from attached drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D keeps track
of the original location of each object and saves them back to their original
source.
Edit Data In Its Source | 27
Use queries to find a specific feature or object based on its location, its
properties, or attribute data linked to it from another source.
Once you find the feature or object, edit it using the full power of CAD editing
commands. AutoCAD Map 3D includes all the AutoCAD editing tools as well
as tools specifically designed for creating maps, such as using coordinate
geometry to specify a point.
While you edit, AutoCAD Map 3D locks the original objects so no other users
can modify them, to the degree that the feature source supports locking.
Locking CapabilitySpatial Data Type
Individual features are locked when you
check them out.
Oracle and ArcSDE
Individual objects are locked when you
query them into the map.
Attached drawings (DWG)
More Information
See...For more information...
Working with Features on page 575Editing feature data
28 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
See...For more information...
Working with Drawing Objects on page
604
Editing drawing objects
Theme and Analyze Data
Create styled and themed maps, and use buffers to analyze data.
Use the Theme option in the Style Editor to create
style ramps that vary the color of features,
depending on the value of a particular attribute.
Theme and Analyze Data | 29
In this example, parcels are different shades of green depending on their land
value.
30 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Create complex styles, such as roads with a thick black line with a double
yellow stripe down the middle, or use specific colors and line types for different
features.
Create themes by varying the style based
on an attribute of the feature; for example,
change the color of parcels based on their
size.
Analyze geospatial data by exaggerating
elevations or looking at maps in different
light conditions.
Use buffers to analyze features by proximity.
Theme and Analyze Data | 31
This map contains a buffer that defines an area within 1000 feet of
the river. You can use the buffer to determine which parcels lie within
the flood zone.
More Information
See...For information about...
Styling Features on page 540 and Styling
Drawing Layers on page 549
Creating styles
Creating Themes on page 953Creating themes
32 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
See...For information about...
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces on page
975
Analyzing surfaces
Buffering Features in Your Map on page
1004
Using buffers
Send Maps to the Field
You can plot/print your maps, publish them to DWF or PDF format, or create
a multi-page map book.
When you publish maps electronically, you can include attribute data.
More Information
See...For information about...
Publishing a Map to a Plotter on page 1127Plotting
Publishing to DWF on page 1128Publishing to DWF
Publishing Map Books on page 1144Creating multi-page map books
Post Maps on a Web Site
You can publish your map as a single HTML page or you can publish it to
MapGuide.
When you save your map in HTML format, the result is a “snapshot” of the
map that can be viewed by any Web browser.
When you publish to MapGuide, all layers, layer definitions, dynamic labels,
queries, filters, and styles (including point, line, raster, and other styles) in
your map are published in the format that MapGuide needs. If you set up
different styles for different zoom levels, the map’s appearance changes as the
Send Maps to the Field | 33
end-user changes the zoom level in a Web browser and uses the stylization
rules you established in AutoCAD Map 3D.
More Information
See...For information about...
Publishing to a Web Page on page 1137Publishing to a Web page
Publishing to MapGuide on page 1140Publishing to MapGuide
Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format on
page 1175
Exporting to MapGuide 6.5 and earlier
Overview of Map Creation
The following table provides an overview of the workflow you follow when
you create a map. To learn more about this workflow, see Tutorial: Building a
Map.
ProcedureTask
Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Co-
ordinate System.
Assign a coordinate system to the map
Connect to a feature source and display
features in your map
1In the Display Manager, click
Data ➤ Connect to Data.
2Select the feature source. Click
Connect.
3Select the feature classes. Click
Add To Map.
Connect to a drawing and display drawing
objects in the map
1In the Display Manager, click
Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤
Attach Source Drawings.
34 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
ProcedureTask
2In the Display Manager, click
Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Query Source Drawing.
3Define a query that selects the
objects you want.
4Click OK.
Filter the display of drawing objects in the
map
1In the Display Manager, click
Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤
Query Current Drawing.
2Define a query that selects the
objects you want.
3Click OK.
In the Display Manager, right-click the
layer ➤ Query to Filter Data.
Filter a feature source layer
Attach attribute data to a drawing object 1In the Map Explorer, right-click
Data Sources ➤ Attach.
2Double-click the table to open
Data View.
3Create a link template and link
records in the table to objects
in the drawing.
Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
Once the tables are defined, you can at-
tach data to objects.
Create object data tables
Click Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Ob-
ject Data.
Overview of Map Creation | 35
ProcedureTask
In the Display Manager, right-click a lay-
er ➤ Edit Style.
In the Style Editor, specify the style you
want.
Style features in your map to show themes
or to highlight specific features.
In the Display Manager, right-click a lay-
er ➤ Add Style ➤ choose a style type.
On the Display tab of the Properties
palette, specify the style settings.
Style drawing objects in your map to show
themes or to highlight specific objects.
For themes, in the Display Manager, right-
click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤ Theme. Spe-
cify the theme in the Thematic Mapping
dialog box.
Edit a feature from a feature source 1Select the feature in your map.
2Right-click the feature ➤
Check-out Feature.
3Make your edits.
4Right-click the feature ➤
Check-in Feature.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 152
■Setting Options on page 195
■Working with the Display Manager on page ?
■Working with Features on page ?
■Working with Map Books on page ?
36 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
The User Interface
Introduction to the User Interface
The menus, toolbars, and Task Pane on page 1764 provide quick access to the
most commonly used tools. The Data Table on page 1747 lets you view attribute
data for features (Data View shows attribute data for drawing objects). For
experienced AutoCAD users, the command interface allows for efficient editing
using keyboard entry. For an interactive look at the user interface, see Taking
a Quick Tour of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Menus and toolbars on page 39. The menus and toolbars include the
commands you need to complete your mapping tasks.
Data Table and Data View on page 39. Display spatial and attribute data
in a table format. Use the Data Table for viewing spatial data and attribute
data for geospatial features; use the Data View for viewing attribute data linked
to drawing objects.
Task Pane on page 40. The Task Pane has three tabs for managing and
displaying maps and publishing multi-page map books.
Status bar. Check the current cursor location, change exaggeration and
scale settings, switch between 2D and 3D, and use common tools.
Command interface at the cursor on page 44. Launch commands and
respond to prompts at the cursor location using Dynamic Input.
The User Interface | 37
See also:
■Customizing Your Work Environment on page 76
■Switching Between Workspaces on page 38
■Setting Options on page 195
Switching Between Workspaces
You can customize the AutoCAD Map 3D work environment to look and
function the way you want. For example, you can add options to the menus
and the toolbars.
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with predefined workspaces. Each workspace shows
a different set of commands and toolbars. You can switch between the
following workspaces:
■Map 3D for Geospatial — the default workspace, customized for working
with feature sources
■Map 3D for Drawings — customized for working with drawing objects
■Map Classic — sets up the menus (including the AutoCAD menus) the way
they were in earlier versions of the product
No matter which workspace you use, all AutoCAD and AutoCAD Map 3D
commands are available, many from right-click menus.
To change the workspace
1Click View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout.
2Select a workspace.
See also:
■Menus and Toolbars on page 39
■Customizing Your Work Environment on page 76
38 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Menus and Toolbars
In AutoCAD Map 3D, the menus and toolbars are organized so the commands
you need for a specific task are together. For example, the commands you
need to analyze map data are on a menu called Analyze.
The Analyze menu contains analysis
commands
Only the options you need most are presented by default.
You can customize the menus and toolbars to include the commands you
want. You save your customized settings as a “workspace.”
For information about the AutoCAD Map 3D predefined workspaces, see
Switching Between Workspaces on page 38.
See also:
■Customizing Your Work Environment on page 76
Viewing Attribute Data
AutoCAD Map 3D provides a window onto your attribute data. You can view
and edit the data, link data to objects in your map, and find features and
objects based on attribute data.
■To view attribute data for features, use the Data Table.
■To view attribute data linked to drawing objects use the Data View.
Menus and Toolbars | 39
Use both the Data Table and Data View to find features and objects in your map by
selecting linked data in the table, or find data in the table by selecting features and
objects in your map.
The Task Pane
The Task Pane provides centralized access to the tasks and tools you need to
create, manage, display, and publish maps.
40 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Switch between Display Manager, Map
Explorer, and Map Books in the Task
Pane
Each view of the Task Pane has its own menu area. You can also right-click
any item in the Task Pane to see a customized menu for that item.
See also:
■Setting Task Pane Options on page 199
Map Explorer
Use Map Explorer to manage the data sources included in your current map.
The Task Pane | 41
Use Map Explorer to manage the following:
■feature sources on page 266 (such as Oracle, ArcSDE, SHP, and SDF)
■attached source drawings on page 297
■drawing queries on page 1023
■object classes on page 109
■external data sources for drawing objects on page 184
■topologies on page 689
■link templates on page 451
Display Manager
The Display Manager lets you create display maps. Each display map contains
a set of styled layers. You can have more than one display map in a map file,
and you can style the same data differently in each one.
Use Data Connect on page 1746 to add features to your map, or drag data sources
into Display Manager to add them as layers. For example, drag an SDF file
from Windows® Explorer into the layer area to add it.
42 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Select a layer and click to change its appearance, or click to view
and edit its attributes.
You can organize layers by groups you create, or by the draw order (z-order)
in which you want them to appear in your map.
You can also right-click any layer to see options specific to that layer.
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager on page 535
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 296
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Accessing Data from ODBC on page 289
■Styling Features on page 540
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
■Viewing Properties and Attributes of Drawing Objects on page 937
■Organizing Layers in Your Map on page 261
■Controlling Display Order on page 537
Map Book
Use Map Book to create printed maps, map books, and multi-page DWFs from
styled maps. Map Book uses the AutoCAD Sheet Set Manager, and provides a
tree view of the tiles in the map book, like pages in an atlas. Use navigation
arrows to move between tiles in your map.
The Task Pane | 43
See also:
■Publishing Map Books on page 1144
The Command Prompt
AutoCAD Map 3D provides a command interface near the cursor. This interface
is called Dynamic Input. The older command line window is hidden by default,
but you can display it at any time.
With Dynamic Input, you can
■Launch commands by typing them directly into the drawing area.
■Respond to command prompts in a tooltip or tooltip menu near the cursor,
instead of on the command line.
■View the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip.
■Enter coordinate values in the tooltip when a command prompts for a
point, instead of on the command line.
44 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
■View distance and angle values when a command prompts for a second
point.
For more information, see Dynamic Input in the AutoCAD Help.
NOTE With the command line hidden, some detailed information for some
commands is not visible. To see this information, display the command line by
pressing CTRL+9 on the keyboard.
To hide or show the command line
■Press CTRL+9 on the keyboard
To display the AutoCAD text window with all your past command-line
input history, press F2. To hide this information, press F2 again.
To turn dynamic input on or off
■On the status bar, click , or press F12.
The Command Prompt | 45
To control Dynamic Input settings
■Right-click and click Settings.
NOTE By default, Dynamic Input is set to relative (not absolute) coordinates.
For example, entering 10,10 and then 20,20, draws a line from 10,10 to 30,30.
This is one of the settings you can change if you frequently enter absolute
coordinates.
To turn off dynamic input temporarily
■Hold down the F12 key while you work.
Finding Information
Using InfoCenter
InfoCenter is available from the menu bar in AutoCAD Map 3D.
Type a question and click Search (the magnifying glass) to search multiple
sources (for example, Help, the New Features Workshop, and specified files)
at one time, or choose to search a single file or location. To add a location
(file or document) to search, click the arrow next to Search and select Add
Search Location.
The results are displayed as links on the InfoCenter Search Results panel. You
can click any of these links to display the topic, article, or document.
You can change some settings for InfoCenter. For more information, see
Specify InfoCenter Settings in the Help.
46 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Using the Help
AutoCAD Map 3D Help contains the AutoCAD Help, AutoCAD Map 3D online
User’s Guide, Reference Guide, Getting Started Guide, and additional
information.
The online User’s Guide displays related information on three tabs:
■Concept — Conceptual information about performing the task and hints
to help you use the feature.
■Procedure — Step-by-step instructions to perform the task.
■Quick Reference — The commands you need for this task, and where to
find them on the menus and toolbars.
Use the tabs in the left pane to find information:
Topics are listed by subject. Browse by selecting and expanding
topics. If you use the Index or Search tabs to find a topic, the Con-
tents tab updates to show you where that topic is.
Contents
Both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD Help topics are listed in the
Contents.
In the alphabetical list of keywords, look up the name of a feature,
command, or operation, or an action you want the program to
perform.
Index
You can look up topics for both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD.
Create your own list of favorite topics. To add a topic to the list,
open the Favorites tab and click the Add button.
Favorites
Find information using a question phrased in everyday language.
The resulting topics are ranked by relevance.
Search
NOTE Depending on the language version of the product, the
Search tab provides either the traditional Microsoft® search that
locates keywords and exact phrases, or a natural-language search
that analyzes phrases or questions.
Using the Help | 47
Tutorials
Try the tutorials to get started or to learn AutoCAD Map 3D's advanced
functionality.
To launch the tutorials, click Help menu ➤ Tutorials.
Getting Help with AutoCAD
AutoCAD Map 3D includes the complete functionality of AutoCAD, including
all the AutoCAD commands and system variables. Help for the two programs
is integrated into a single Help file. For help with AutoCAD commands, search
for the command name in the Help file.
Viewing the Readme
The Readme contains updates about this release of AutoCAD Map 3D, including
late-breaking product news and known software issues.
View the Readme
Other Sources of Information
Additional Documentation
■Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data— Learn the key concepts of
working with geospatial data and the best way to use AutoCAD Map 3D
to achieve your goals.
■GIS Skills for Engineers— See over 80 animations that help you take your
skills to the next level.
■Developer Documentation on page 1741 — Learn how to use the AutoCAD
Map 3D Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including ObjectARX,
ObjectARX Managed Wrappers, ActiveX, and AutoLISP. For more
information, click Help menu ➤ Additional Resources ➤ AutoCAD Map
3D Developer Help.
48 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
■FDO Developer Help — Use the FDO developer help to extend the
functionality of the feature source providers. See FDO Developer’s Guide,
The Essential FDO, and the API references for each provider:
■FDO Provider for Oracle API Reference
■FDO Provider for ArcSDE API Reference
■FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference
■FDO Provider for MYSQL API Reference
■FDO Provider for SHP API Reference
■FDO Provider for SDF API Reference
■FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference
■FDO Provider for Raster API Reference
■FDO Provider for WMS API Reference
■Specialized AutoCAD Manuals — Other AutoCAD manuals, such Build Your
World and Getting Started, are available on the product CD. For information
on printing these manuals, see Printing this Documentation on page 51.
■New Features Workshop — View a series of animated demos, tutorials, and
new feature overviews designed to help you learn about the new features
in AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD. Click Help menu ➤ New Features
Workshop.
Other Online Resources
■Product Support Resources— Get answers quickly and efficiently via email
or get Product Support phone numbers.
■AutoCAD Map 3D Discussion Groups— Share product information, ideas,
and solutions with other AutoCAD Map 3D and other Autodesk product
users.
■Training Resources— Learn about the training resources available for
AutoCAD Map 3D and other Autodesk products.
■Developer Center— Learn about programming and development tools to
help customize AutoCAD Map 3D or build your own applications.
Other Sources of Information | 49
■Subscription Center — Access your subscription services including support
and training through the InfoCenter Communication Center. For more
information, see Overview of Communication Center in the AutoCAD help.
■Communication Center — Receive Autodesk company news and product
announcements, breaking news from Autodesk Product Support, new
article notifications, tips, and more. For more information, see Overview
of Communication Center in the AutoCAD help.
■Geospatial Resource Center — Access maps, images, and other content (such
as blocks, symbol libraries, manufacturer content, and online catalogs) to
help create your maps and drawings. For more information, see Geospatial
Resource Center.
For an overview of the types of information available to help you learn and
use AutoCAD Map 3D, see Learning Resources
Autodesk Training Programs and Products
Training programs and products from Autodesk help you learn the key
technical features of your Autodesk software and improve your productivity.
For the latest information about Autodesk training, visit
http://www.autodesk.com/training or contact your local Autodesk office.
Autodesk Authorized Training Centers
Be more productive with Autodesk software. Get trained at an Autodesk
Authorized Training Center (ATC) with hands-on, instructor-led classes to
help you get the most from your Autodesk products. Enhance your productivity
with proven training from over 1,400 ATC sites in more than 75 countries.
For more information about Autodesk Authorized Training Centers, contact
atc.program@autodesk.com or visit the online ATC locator at
http://www.autodesk.com/atc.
Autodesk Courseware
Autodesk publishes many courseware titles each year for users at all levels to
improve their productivity with Autodesk software. The preferred training
materials of Autodesk partners, these books are also well-suited for self-paced,
standalone learning. All courseware simulates real-world projects with
hands-on, job-related exercises. Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC)
is developed by Autodesk. Autodesk Authorized Training Courseware (AATC)
50 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
is developed by Autodesk partners, including titles in a growing number of
languages. Autodesk Official Certification Courseware (AOCC) teaches the
knowledge and skills assessed on the Certification examinations. Visit
http://www.autodesk.com/aotc to browse the Autodesk Courseware catalog.
Autodesk Certification
Gain a competitive edge with your career by obtaining Autodesk Certification,
validating your knowledge and skills on Autodesk products. Autodesk provides
an end-to-end solution for assessing your readiness for certification, preparing
for certification, and obtaining certification. For more information on Autodesk
Certification, visit http://www.autodesk.com/certification.
e-Learning
Autodesk e-Learning for Autodesk Subscription customers features interactive
lessons organized into product catalogs. Each lesson is 20-40 minutes in length
and features hands-on exercises, with an option to use a simulation or the
software application. You can also use an online evaluation tool that identifies
gaps in skills, determines what lessons will be most helpful, and gauges learning
progress.
If you are a member of Autodesk subscription, you can access e-Learning and
other subscription services from within your Autodesk product. For more
information about Autodesk subscription resources, visit
http://www.autodesk.com/subscription.
Printing this Documentation
You can print the Help and other manuals.
Printing PDF Versions of the Help
Most of the onscreen Help, including AutoCAD Map 3D Users Guide (the help
system), the AutoCAD User’s Guide, and the AutoCAD Command Reference,
are available in PDF format.
Some AutoCAD manuals, including Building Your World and Getting Started,
are available only in PDF format.
NOTE You must have Adobe® Acrobat Reader™ installed to view and print PDF
documents.
Printing this Documentation | 51
To print the AutoCAD Map 3D Users Guide
1Open the AutoCAD Map 3D User’s Guide.
2Click the Print icon.
WARNING The User’s Guide is over 1000 pages long! You may want to print
individual chapters.
To print the other manuals
1Insert the AutoCAD Map 3D CD or DVD into the drive.
2When the CD Browser starts, click the Documentation tab. If the CD
Browser does not start automatically, double-click the Setup.exe file.
3On the Documentation tab, select the book to print.
4Click the Print icon.
AutoCAD Map 3D Sample Data and Templates
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with an extensive set of sample data. Use this data
to experiment with map techniques before deploying your own data.
Also included with AutoCAD Map 3D are sample symbol sets, templates, and
map elements, such as north arrows, scale bars, and legends, that you can use
to create maps more quickly and easily, enhance new and existing maps, and
help promote standards and improve consistency. They can also serve as the
basis for developing your own data.
52 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
© IGN - 2007, NAVTEQ, DigitalGlobe, Intermap Technologies
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with sample data, symbols, and templates
Sample Data - Real World Data Sets and Data from Data
Providers
Most of the AutoCAD Map 3D sample data is stored in a folder called "AutoCAD
Map 3D 2009 Sample Data". Depending on which version of the product you
have, this folder is located on your product DVD, on a separate CD, or as a
separate download.
Due to the large files that are included (aerial images, DEMs, and so on), the
sample data folder is not installed by default. To explore it, you must copy
the folder of data to the root of your C: drive.
For all data connections to be correct and connected automatically, the final
location of your sample data should be: C:\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 Sample
Data. If you put it in a different location, you will need to fix data connections.
Sample Data - Real World Data Sets and Data from Data Providers | 53
The sample data folder includes the following:
■City of Redding, California
A real-world data set from the City of Redding, California, in the United
States. Data includes parcel data, soil drawings, water data, metadata, and
more.
■Institut Geographique National, France
A comprehensive set of sample data from Institut Geographiqe National
(IGN), the national mapping agency of France. The data covers "department
92" in France. Departments are administrative units of France, roughly
analogous to English counties. Department 92 includes several cities just
outside of Paris. The area is often called Haute-de-Seine.
54 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
© IGN - 2007
■NAVTEQ Data
Data sets for 3km x 3km areas of seven sample cities from around the
world. NAVTEQ data is used in a broad range of location-based applications,
navigation products, and mapping sites. They provide vector data, street
centerline map data, and much more. You can use the sample data to get
an idea of what NAVTEQ can provide and how you can use to enhance
your maps in AutoCAD Map 3D.
■DigitalGlobe Imagery
Imagery for the seven sample cities. DigitalGlobe is a provider of high
resolution aerial and satellite imagery.
■Intermap 3D Elevation Data
Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) for seven sample cities. Intermap
Technologies provide high-quality, precise, 3D digital-elevation data and
images.
Sample Data - Real World Data Sets and Data from Data Providers | 55
■DigitalGlobe ImageConnect
A "plug-in" you can install on top of AutoCAD Map 3D that allows you to
bring in georeferenced satellite and aerial photos from DigitalGlobe's online
image server. ImageConnect is a quick, cost-effective way to add
high-resolution imagery to your maps.
■Map Book Templates
A copy of the map book templates that are installed with AutoCAD Map
3D.
56 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
■More 3D Elevation Data
Additional DEMs to experiment with.
■Sample Maps
These maps use sample data from NAVTEQ, Intermap Technologies, and
DigitalGlobe, and other real-world maps from Redding, Grand Forks, Crater
Lake, and more.
Sample Data - Real World Data Sets and Data from Data Providers | 57
■Symbols
A copy of the symbol sets, north arrows and scale bars that are installed
with AutoCAD Map 3D.
For more information about the data, see the documentation in the AutoCAD
Map 3D 2009 Sample Data folder.
In addition, smaller sets of sample data are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D:
■Additional sample data and maps, including Crater Lake, US Geology, and
Grand Forks, North Dakota are installed here:
. \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\Sample\Maps
■Tutorial sample files
58 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Templates for Maps and Map Books
Templates allow you to reuse or standardize map settings, layouts, layer
definitions and settings, block definitions, data connections, coordinate system
information, and more.
Instead of manually reproducing the settings and common parts of your maps,
you save them in a template file (.dwt) and then you can use the template as
you create new files.
This helps time and improves consistency if you are creating a series of maps.
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with two types of templates:
■Templates for creating new maps
There are four templates available to choose from - mad2d.dwt,
map2diso.dwt, map3d.dwt, map3diso.dwt - with settings to optimize 2D
display, 3D display, and iso and ansi settings, respectively. To create a new
map using one of these templates, click File > New, and then select a
template from the list.
Example map templates - map2d.dwt and map3d.dwt
■Templates for creating tiled Map Books and tiled DWFs
Templates for Maps and Map Books | 59
These allow you to quickly create attractive printed Map Books or tiled
DWFs with a minimal amount of layout work. There are three different
designs available, each with numerous paper sizes, both metric (ISO) and
imperial (ANSI). You use Map Book templates in the Map Books feature.
Each design is unique, with its own navigation arrows, layout settings,
title blocks, and more.
Example Map Book Templates: Elegant, Classic, and Original Designs
You can use these both these types of templates as-is or adapt them to suit
your needs.
Templates are available in \Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local
Settings\Application Data\Autodesk\ AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\R17.2\enu\Templates
Additional, industry specific templates are available in the Industry Toolkits,
which are available as free downloads on autodesk.com.
60 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with a number of sample symbol sets to help you
create maps for water networks, gas utilities, electric utilities (North America),
and emergency response planning. You can use the sample symbols as-is or
use them as a basis for developing your own symbols.
Using symbols helps can help promote standardization and consistency in
your organization, and can also improve communication through the use of
familiar symbology.
Each set of symbols comes in a separate DWG file. For example, there is Map
- Water.dwg, Map - Electric.dwg, and so on. There are a number of different
files for Emergency Response.
Example Electric Symbols from "Map - Electric.dwg"
Example Gas Symbols from "Map - Gas.dwg"
Example Water Symbols from "Map - Water.dwg"
Example Emergency Response Symbols from "Map - ER Incident Centers.dwg"
The symbols are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\Sample\Symbols.
The symbols are in dynamic block format, making them easy to rotate, resize,
and color. They are colored by block, which optimizes them for use in DWGs,
but you can also use them in the Display Manager's Style Editor when styling
points.
Symbols for Water, Gas, Electric, and Emergency Response | 61
To set up the symbols for easy drag and drop into your DWG maps, you can
add them to a Tool Palette.
Symbols for General Use
In addition to the sample symbols for utilities like water and gas, AutoCAD
Map 3D comes with sample symbols for more general purpose uses, such as
points of interest, transportation and local government.
Like the industry symbols, you can use the general purpose symbols as-is, or
as a basis for developing your own symbols.
Using symbols helps can help promote standardization and consistency in
your organization, and can also improve communication through the use of
familiar symbology.
The symbols come in two formats:
■Dynamic Block (Map - Points of Interest.DWG) - These symbols are in
dynamic block format so you can easily scale and rotate them. Outline
and fill colors have been optimized for use in the Display Manager's Style
Editor - so you can easily control outline and fill separately. Doing so,
means they are black by default when viewed in the DWG.
Example General Use Symbols from "Map - Points of
Interest.dwg", as Seen When Styling Points Using the Style
Editor
■Bitmap versions in .png format for more a graphical representation of your
points
62 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
Example Bitmap Symbols
The general use symbols are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\Sample\Symbols.
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements
Sample north arrows and scale bars (both metric and imperial) are available
as dynamic blocks for you to insert into your maps.
Example North Arrows
North Arrows, Scale Bars, and Other Map Elements | 63
Example Scale Bars
Because they are in dynamic block format, they are easy to scale, rotate and
color. In addition, the scale bars have attributes that allow you to set the
correct scale.
The samples are available in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\Sample\Symbols.
Also available in AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 is a new legend style, which is
automatically available when you add a legend to a map. It has an improved,
modern design and is easier to read.
64 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
New Legend Style - How it Looks in Your Map Drawing and When It Is Published
Getting Additional Geospatial Data to Enhance Your Maps
As you create maps, you may want to add data to enhance them. For example,
you may want to add raster 3D elevation data to help you create 3D maps,
add new vector data such as land plots or points of interest, or add satellite
imagery for your area.
So that you can get the high resolution precision geospatial data you need
quickly, easily and at lower cost, Autodesk has partnered with leading
geospatial data providers to provide a geodata portal that gives you access to
all the geospatial data you need.
Visit the geodata portal at http://www.autodesk.com/geodata.
Examples of the types of data available on the portal:
■Aerial and satellite imagery from DigitalGlobe
■3D raster elevation data from Intermap Technologies
Getting Additional Geospatial Data to Enhance Your Maps | 65
■Vector data such as roads and land parcels from NAVTEQ
■Weather data from WeatherBug
Data from: Intermap Technologies, NAVTEQ, and DigitalGlobe
Tutorial Sample Files
The tutorials are accessible from the Help menu.
After installation, the tutorial sample files are located in Program Files\AutoCAD
Map 3D 2009\Help\Map 3D Tutorials. The tutorials advise you to copy the
sample files to your My Documents folder so you do not modify the original
files.
Additional AutoCAD Samples
AutoCAD provides additional sample drawings, sample sheet sets, sample
blocks, VBA samples, and more.
66 | Chapter 1 Getting Started Guide
After installation, the files are located in C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\Sample.
Additional AutoCAD Samples | 67
68
Setting Up
Overview of Setting Up
You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D and set up each map file you create to
make your work easier and more productive.
The following tables summarize your setup options on a product-wide and
map-wide basis.
To get this result...Use this method...On a product-wide
level...
The system administrator assigns
login names and passwords to
Click Setup menu ➤ User Administra-
tion.
Set up user access.
users, and specifies what each
user can do within the product.
See Setting Up Users and Assign-
ing Rights on page 74.
Customize the menus, toolbars,
and dockable windows.
See Customizing Your Work En-
vironment on page 76.
Click View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar
Layout ➤ Customize.
Set up your workspace.
Create a completely new coordin-
ate system or use a predefined
Click Setup menu ➤ Define Global
Coordinate System.
Create new coordinate
systems.
coordinate system as a basis for
creating your own.
See Defining Coordinate Systems
on page 82.
2
69
To get this result...Use this method...On a product-wide
level...
Define a set of standard objects
for your organization so that new
Set up object classifica-
tion.
1Select a sample object for
the object class.
objects of that type use the
properties you defined.
See Overview of Setting Up Ob-
ject Classification on page 109.
2Attach an object definition
file.
3On the Map Explorer tab of
the Task Pane, right-click
Object Classes. Click Define
Object Class.
Convert paper-based graphical
information into a digital format
Set up for digitizing 1Configure the digitizer in
the AutoCAD Options dia-
log box. using drawing commands to
trace data from the paper map
into a DWG file.
See Setting Up for Digitizing on
page 121 and Overview of Digitiz-
ing Objects on page 890.
2Register the map using the
TABLET command.
3Set digitizing specifications
in the Digitize Setup dialog
box.
4Use the MAPDIGITIZE com-
mand to digitize the objects.
Change settings that affect the
work environment, how the
Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map
Options.
Set default values and set-
tings.
program starts up, whether users
need to log in, and settings for
your current drawings, data
sources, and more.
See Setting Options on page 194.
Changes settings related to the
Raster Extension, such as where
Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
Set options related to im-
ages you added with Ras-
ter Extension. image-related files are stored,
how images display in maps, and
memory usage options. These
70 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To get this result...Use this method...On a product-wide
level...
options do not affect images you
added with Data Connect.
Setting Raster Image Options on
page 226
Modify the .ini files that specify
import and export settings.
See Customizing the Import and
Export .ini Files on page 240.
Edit the mapexport.ini file using a text
editor such as WordPad.
Customize and automate
import and export opera-
tions.
To get this result...Use this method...On a map-wide basis...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems on page
133
Click Setup menu ➤ Assign
Global Coordinate System.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings on
page 144
Drag the drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
on page 152.
Click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
on page 161.
Set up queries. 1To save the cur-
rent query, click
Setup menu ➤
More DWG Op-
tions ➤ Define
Query.
Overview of Setting Up | 71
To get this result...Use this method...On a map-wide basis...
2To run a saved
query, click Edit
menu ➤ DWG
Query.
Define the information to display in an
annotation and the layout of that informa-
Click Setup ➤ Define An-
notation Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
tion. Then you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates on
page 174
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table on page
180.
Click Setup menu ➤
Define Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source on page 187.
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Your Map File on page 130
■Setting Options on page 194
■To add a new user on page 75
■To create a new workspace on page 77
■To add menu and toolbar options on page 78
■To add entire menus or toolbars to a workspace on page 78
■To switch between Map 3D Geospatial, Map 3D Drawing and Map Classic
workspaces on page 78
72 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To restore the default colors on page 79
■To show the command line interface in the Map3D Geospatial and Drawing
workspaces on page 79
■To hide the map status bar on page 80
■To enable Update Edits Automatically by default on page 80
■To disable connection pooling by default on page 80
■To turn file selection dialog boxes on or off on page 80
■To turn other dialog boxes on or off on page 80
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D
You can customize AutoCAD Map 3D to make your work easier and more
productive. Your changes affect all future sessions of AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Your Map File on page 130
■Setting Options on page 194
The following table summarizes your customization options.
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems on page
133
Click Setup menu ➤ Assign
Global Coordinate System.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings on
page 144
Drag the drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
on page 152.
Click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Overview of Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D | 73
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Save and reuse queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
on page 161.
Set up queries. 1To save the cur-
rent query, click
Setup menu ➤
More DWG Op-
tions ➤ Define
Query.
2To run a saved
query, click Edit
menu ➤ DWG
Query.
Define the information to display in an
annotation and the layout of that informa-
Click Setup ➤ Define An-
notation Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
tion. Then you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates on
page 174
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table on page
180.
Click Setup menu ➤
Define Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source on page 187.
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights
The system administrator controls who has access to AutoCAD Map 3D by
assigning login names and passwords to users. Also, the system administrator
can specify the privileges or operations available to each user.
74 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the settings for several AutoCAD Map 3D options
with your login name, which means that these option settings are in effect
whenever you log in under that name to that copy of AutoCAD Map 3D on
that machine. After you log in, AutoCAD Map 3D sets up your user
environment, including user privileges and user-specific options, such as Task
Pane options and Data Source options.
See also:
■Setting Task Pane Options on page ?
■Setting Data Source Options on page ?
To add a new user
1Click Setup menu ➤ User Administration.
2Under User Profile, in the Login Name box, enter a name for the user.
The login name must be unique. It is not case sensitive. Use any characters
except the following: " / \ [ ] : ; | = , + * ? < >
3In the Password box, enter a password for the user. Passwords are case
sensitive.
4Under Privileges, specify the operations available to the user by selecting
one or more of the following:
■Superuser — User can perform user administration tasks, set system
options, and perform any other AutoCAD Map 3D operation.
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (case insensitive) and
the password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue,
make sure you change the default superuser login and password.
■Alter Drawing Set — User can attach and detach drawings. If this
option is not selected, the user can activate and deactivate drawings,
but cannot attach and detach them.
■Alter Object Class — User can define and edit object class definitions.
If this option is not selected, users can only assign object classes and
change the current object classification file.
■Edit Drawing — User can edit objects and save them back to source
drawings. If this option is not selected, the user can edit objects but
cannot save them back to source drawings.
Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights | 75
■Draw Query — User can execute Draw mode queries, which copy
objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users
can do Preview and Report mode queries only.
5Click Add.
6Click OK.
To edit an existing user profile, select the name in the User List and modify
the settings you want. Click Update.
Quick Reference
MAPUSERADMIN
Performs administrative functions
Setup menu ➤ User Administration
Menu
MAPUSERADMINCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent Drawing ➤ User
Admin
Task Pane
User Administration dialog boxDialog Box
Customizing Your Work Environment
Your work environment – that is, the way the menus, toolbars, and dockable
windows are laid out – is saved in a workspace.
You can customize a workspace to look and function just the way you want,
or create a new workspace. You can save different workspaces for different
tasks, use them to help you streamline common tasks, or set up best practices
for mapping tasks and workflow.
For example, you can set up a map creation workspace to streamline acquiring,
integrating, and building maps, and another workspace for creating and
publishing map books and atlases.
Within a session, you can easily switch between workspaces.
76 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Listed below are the predefined workspaces that are included with AutoCAD
Map 3D:
■Map 3D Geospatial - For more information on Geospatial features, see
Work with Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects on page 21
■Map 3D Drawing
■Map 3D Classic
You can customize any of these workspaces and easily switch between them.
See also:
■Switching Between Workspaces on page 38
■To create a new workspace on page 77
■To add menu and toolbar options on page 78
■To add entire menus or toolbars to a workspace on page 78
■To switch between Map 3D Geospatial, Map 3D Drawing and Map Classic
workspaces on page 78
■To restore the default colors on page 79
■To show the command line interface in the Map3D Geospatial and Drawing
workspaces on page 79
■To hide the map status bar on page 80
■To enable Update Edits Automatically by default on page 80
■To disable connection pooling by default on page 80
To create a new workspace
1Click View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout ➤ Customize.
2In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, right-click the Workspace node, and select New, or right-click
an existing workspace, and select duplicate.
3Select the new workspace.
4Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
Customizing Your Work Environment | 77
5In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
6Click Done.
7Click OK.
To add menu and toolbar options
1In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2Under Customizations In All CUI Files, expand the item you want to
customize so that you can see all the items underneath it.
For example, expand the Topology menu to see the topology options
underneath.
3Under Command List, click and drag the tool you want to include to the
item in Customizations In All CUI Files.
4Click Apply.
5Click OK.
To add entire menus or toolbars to a workspace
1In the Customize User Interface dialog box, under Customizations In All
CUI Files, select the workspace you want to modify.
2Under Workspace Contents, click Customize Workspace.
3In the Customizations In All CUI Files tree, check the items you want to
include.
4Click Done.
5Click OK.
To switch between Map 3D Geospatial, Map 3D Drawing and Map Classic
workspaces
1Right-click any toolbar or in the menu toolbar area, select ACAD and
scroll down to Workspaces.
A floating toolbar will open with all workspace options available. You
can either dock this toolbar, leave it floating or close it.
78 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2In the Workspaces toolbar, use the drop-down list to select the workspace
you want. Unless you specify otherwise, AutoCAD Map 3D opens with
the Map 3D Geospatial workspace.
For more information, see Switching Between Workspaces on page 38.
To restore the default colors
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2In the Options dialog box, click the Display tab, and then click Colors.
3In the Color Options dialog box, select the element you want to change
by clicking the images for the Model tab or Layout tabs.
As you click areas of the images, the selection is displayed in the Window
Element list. You can also change an attribute by selecting it from the
Window Element list. For example, for the Map background, select Model
Tab Background.
4From the Color list, click Select Color.
5In the Select Color dialog box, click the Color Books tab, and then select
AutoCAD Map 3D Colors from the Color Book list.
The AutoCAD Map 3D color book displays the default colors used in the
application. You can select a color or use the color book as a reference.
It does do not control the defaults in the application; do not attempt to
modify it.
6Select a color by clicking a color chip.
For example, click the blue Map Background chip to use the new map
background color (model tab).
7Click OK.
8In the Color Options dialog box, click Apply and Close to record the
current option settings in the system registry and close the dialog box.
9In the Options dialog box, click OK.
To show the command line interface in the Map3D Geospatial and Drawing
workspaces
1Click View ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout ➤ Customize.
2In the Customize User Interface dialog box, click Map 3D for Geospatial
or Map 3D for Drawings.
Customizing Your Work Environment | 79
3In the Workspace Contents area, double-click Palettes, scroll to the bottom
of the list, and then click Command Line.
4In the Properties area under Appearance, click Show, and then select Yes
from the drop-down list.
5Under Workspace Contents, click the Customize Workspace button.
6Click OK.
To hide the map status bar
1At the Command prompt, enter mapstatusbar.
2Enter hide.
To enable Update Edits Automatically by default
1At the Command prompt, enter mapeditsetautodefault
2Enter active.
To disable connection pooling by default
1At the command prompt, enter mapconnectionpooling.
2Enter deactive.
To turn file selection dialog boxes on or off
NOTE If you use scripts to automate some AutoCAD Map 3D functions, you may
find it useful to turn dialog boxes off.
1At the command prompt, enter filedia.
2To turn dialog boxes on, enter 1. To turn dialog boxes off, enter 0.
To turn other dialog boxes on or off
1At the command prompt, enter cmddia.
2To turn dialog boxes on, enter 1. To turn dialog boxes off, enter 0.
80 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT
Specifies the default setting for updating edits to the feature source
automatically
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULTCommand Line
MAPSTATUSBAR
Toggles the Map status bar on and off
MAPSTATUSBARCommand Line
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING
Toggles connection pooling on and off
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLINGCommand Line
Customizing Your Work Environment | 81
Creating New Coordinate Systems
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with an extensive library of coordinate systems. If
no suitable coordinate system exists, you can define a customized coordinate
system.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■To define coordinate systems on page 82
■To work with grid data files and datum shifts on page 95
Defining Coordinate Systems
You can define customized coordinate systems in AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing on page 137
To define coordinate systems
■To define a coordinate system on page 85
■To define a datum on page 86
■To define an ellipsoid on page 88
■To create a coordinate system category on page 89
■To modify or delete a coordinate system on page 90
■To modify or delete a datum on page 91
■To modify or delete an ellipsoid on page 92
■To edit or delete a coordinate system category on page 94
Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems
You can create a completely new coordinate system or use a predefined
coordinate system as a basis for creating your own. You can also modify or
82 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot delete any of the
predefined coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
When you define a coordinate system you must specify the following
parameters:
■map projection on page 1755 — Used to convert points from latitude and
longitude to Cartesian coordinates.
and one of the following:
■datum on page 1747 — Reference point, line, or surface for mapping.
■ellipsoid on page 1750 — Geometric surface whose plane sections are all circles
or ellipses.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
Define, delete, or modify using this
method...
For this item...
To define a coordinate system on page 85
To modify or delete a coordinate system
on page 90
Global coordinate system
To define a datum on page 86
To modify or delete a datum on page 91
Datum
To define an ellipsoid on page 88
To modify or delete an ellipsoid on page
92
Ellipsoid
To create a coordinate system category
on page 89
To edit or delete a coordinate system cat-
egory on page 94
Coordinate system category
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 83
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Defining a Global Coordinate System
You can define new coordinate systems based on your own data or use a
predefined coordinate system as a basis for creating your own.
Depending on the projection you use to define a custom coordinate system,
you must provide certain information. For example, if you use the Transverse
Mercator projection, you must specify a longitude value called the central
meridian.
False Origin
When defining a custom coordinate system, you may want to enter a false
origin, with northing and easting values. For example, if you are using the
Transverse Mercator projection, and the central meridian bisects the mapping
region, half of the X coordinates are negative values. Coordinate system
definitions usually include an offset called the false origin that is added to all
coordinates to make them positive. The X coordinate of this offset is called
the false origin easting. The Y coordinate of this offset is called the false origin
northing.
Scale Reduction Factor
To produce the smallest possible distance between the projection surface and
any point in the region you are mapping, you must specify a scale reduction
factor. This is particularly important when you are mapping large regions. For
the Transverse Mercator projection, you enter this value in the Scale Reduction
Factor At The Central Meridian edit box.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
84 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
To define a coordinate system
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select a category.
3Do one of the following:
■To create a new coordinate system, click Define.
■To create a new coordinate system based on an existing, predefined
coordinate system, select the coordinate system from the Coordinate
Systems In Category list. Click Modify.
4On the General tab of the Define Coordinate System dialog box, enter a
unique code in the Code box.
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
If you are creating a new coordinate system based on an existing,
predefined coordinate system, you must change the code before you can
change any of the other information.
5Enter a description.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Coordinate Systems In
Category list of the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box.
6In the Units box, select the units to use for this coordinate system.
7Under Coordinate System Type, select one of the following:
■To base the coordinate system on a datum on page 1747, select Geodetic.
Click Select to specify the datum.
■To base the coordinate system on an ellipsoid on page 1750, select
Non-Geodetic. Click Select to specify the ellipsoid.
8On the Projection tab, select a projection.
The projection you choose determines how many projection parameters
you must enter and the units you can use.
9Optionally, under False Origin, enter Northing and Easting values.
10 Under Projection Parameters, enter values for the remaining fields in the
dialog box. Click OK.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 85
These fields vary according to the projection you select.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Defining a New Datum
You can define new datums based on your own data or use a predefined datum
on page 1747 as a basis for creating your own.
When defining a custom datum, select the conversion technique, either
Molodensky, Bursa/Wolfe, or Seven Parameter Transformation. After choosing
the conversion technique, specify the appropriate conversion parameters for
the technique you chose.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■Defining an Ellipsoid on page 87
To define a datum
1On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
2In the Datum Manager dialog box, click Define.
3On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box, enter a code and
description for the datum on page 1747.
86 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Datums list of the
Datum Manager dialog box.
4Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid on page 1750 to use for the new
datum.
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid on
page 88.
5On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
6Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Under Conversion Parameters, under Vector Component Deltas To
WGS-84 In Meters, enter the vector component deltas to WGS-84.
If you use the Bursa/Wolfe or Seven Parameter Transformation conversion
method, fill in all four edit boxes under Rotation Angle From WGS-84 In
Arc Seconds.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Defining an Ellipsoid
You can define a new ellipsoid on page 1750 based on your own data or use a
predefined ellipsoid as a basis for creating your own.
When defining a custom ellipsoid, you must specify the calculation method
and values used to determine the dimensions of the ellipsoid. After choosing
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 87
the calculation method, you supply two of the required values, and AutoCAD
Map 3D determines the remaining two values for you.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■Defining a New Datum on page 86
To define an ellipsoid
1Do one of the following:
■On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify
Datum dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
■Under Coordinate System Type on the General tab of the Define
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Non-Geodetic. Click
Define.
2In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, click Define.
3In the Define Ellipsoid dialog box, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid on page 1750.
The code must be unique within a category and across all coordinate
systems and must not contain spaces. Only the following characters are
valid: A-Z (upper or lower case), 0-9, dash, and underscore.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the description in the Available Ellipsoids list.
4Under Ellipsoid Dimensions, do the following:
5Select a calculation method.
6Enter values for the two parameters that correspond to the calculation
method you chose. AutoCAD Map 3D computes the other two values
based on the ones you enter.
7Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
88 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Coordinate System Category
You can organize your coordinate systems by creating categories and moving
coordinate systems into those categories.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
To create a coordinate system category
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
3In the Coordinate System Category Manager, click New.
4Type a name in the Category Name box.
5From the Available Categories list, select a category that contains
coordinate systems to include in the new category.
6In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select the coordinate systems
to include in the new category.
7Click Add.
You can select any number of coordinate systems from existing categories
to include in the new category.
8When you have finished adding coordinate systems, click OK.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 89
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying or Deleting a Global Coordinate System
You can modify or delete any coordinate systems that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map
3D.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Creating a Coordinate System Category on page 89
To modify or delete a coordinate system
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, select the category
that contains the global coordinate system to modify or delete.
3Select the coordinate system from the Coordinate Systems In Category
list.
4To modify the coordinate system, click Modify.
To delete the coordinate system, click Remove. Click OK.
5If you are modifying the coordinate system, in the Modify Global
Coordinate System dialog box, change information as necessary.
To modify a predefined coordinate system, you must change the code
on the General tab before you can make changes to the other coordinate
system properties.
90 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying or Deleting a Datum
You can modify or delete any datum on page 1747 that you define. You cannot
modify or delete predefined datums supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
If you modify or delete a datum that you have defined, you must also modify
or delete any coordinate systems that reference that datum.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■To define an ellipsoid on page 88
To modify or delete a datum
1On the General tab of the Define Global Coordinate System dialog box
or the Modify Global Coordinate System dialog box, select Geodetic.
Click Define.
2In the Datum Manager dialog box, select a datum on page 1747.
3To modify the datum, click Modify.
To remove the datum, click Remove.
4If you are modifying the daturm, on the General tab of the Define Datum
dialog box, change the code and description for the datum.
To modify a predefined datum, you must change the code on the General
tab before you can make changes to the other datum properties.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 91
5Under Ellipsoid, select or define an ellipsoid on page 1750 to use for the
datum.
For information about defining ellipsoids, see Defining an Ellipsoid on
page 88.
6On the Datum Conversion tab, select a conversion technique from the
Datum Conversion Technique list.
7Enter the appropriate conversion parameters for the conversion technique
you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying or Deleting an Ellipsoid
You can modify or delete any ellipsoids that you define. You cannot modify
or delete predefined ellipsoids supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D.
If you modify or delete an ellipsoid on page 1750 that you have defined, you
must also modify or delete any coordinate systems that reference that ellipsoid.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■To define an ellipsoid on page 88
To modify or delete an ellipsoid
1On the General tab of the Define Datum dialog box or the Modify Datum
dialog box, under Ellipsoid, click Define.
92 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2In the Ellipsoid Manager dialog box, select an ellipsoid on page 1750.
3To modify the ellipsoid, click Modify.
To delete the ellipsoid, click Remove.
4If you are modifying an ellipsoid, enter a code and description for the
ellipsoid.
To modify a predefined ellipsoid, you must change the code before you
can make changes to the other ellipsoid properties.
5Under Calculation Method, select a calculation method.
6Enter the appropriate ellipsoid dimension parameters for the calculation
method you selected.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying or Deleting a Coordinate System
Category
You can modify categories by adding or removing coordinate systems, or
moving coordinate systems from one category to another. You can also delete
categories.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Creating a Coordinate System Category on page 89
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 93
To edit or delete a coordinate system category
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System.
2In the Global Coordinate System Manager dialog box, click Category
Manager.
3In the Coordinate System Category Manager, select a category.
4To modify the category, click Edit.
To delete the category, click Remove.
5If you are modifying the category, do one or more of the following:
■To remove coordinate systems from the category, click the coordinate
system names in the list under the Category Name box. Click Remove.
■To add coordinate systems to the category, click the coordinate system
names in the list under the Available Categories list. Click Add.
■To add coordinate systems from different categories, select the category
name in the Available Categories list.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
Grid Data Files and Datum Shifts
AutoCAD Map 3D uses grid data files to specify datum on page 1747 shift
information and Grid Data Catalog files to determine the order for those files
when converting from one datum to another.
See also:
■Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
94 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
To work with grid data files and datum shifts
■To set up a new grid data file on page 97
■To set up a new grid data file for the United States on page 100
■To set up a new grid data file for Australia or New Zealand on page 102
■To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum on page 103
■To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation on page 104
■To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation on page 105
■To modify a coordinate system definition file on page 108
Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues
When converting between certain coordinate systems in North American,
Australia, and New Zealand, AutoCAD Map 3D uses grid based data files called
grid data files to obtain datum on page 1747 shift information.
For United States, Australia, and New Zealand geography, the grid data files
are in the public domain and are distributed with AutoCAD Map 3D. The grid
data files which cover Canadian geography are not in the public domain and
must be obtained from the proper authorities in Canada.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum on page 1747 to another.
See also:
■Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users on page 103
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand on page 101
■Grid Data Files for the United States on page 97
■Coordinate System Files on page 105
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes on
page 102
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 95
You can do the following with grid data files
See this topic...To do this...
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files on page 96Set up a new grid data file
Grid Data Files for the United States on
page 97
Specify a new grid data file for the United
States
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zeal-
and on page 101
Specify a new grid data file for Australia or
New Zealand
Australian Datum Transformation and Co-
ordinate System Changes on page 102
Use the high accuracy GDA94 datum for
Australia
Datum Shift Issues for North American
Users on page 103
Specify a grid data version to resolve differ-
ences between source and destination co-
ordinate systems for Canada
Coordinate System Files on page 105Modify a coordinate system file
Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files
AutoCAD Map 3D uses Grid Data Catalog (GDC) files to determine the order
in which grid data files are used in areas of overlap when converting from one
datum on page 1747 to another in certain parts of the world, such as North
America, Australia, and New Zealand.
In the case of an overlapping coverage, AutoCAD Map 3D selects the grid data
file with the smallest grid cell in the region of the conversion. If the grid cell
sizes are the same, AutoCAD Map 3D selects the grid data file that appears
first in the GDC file.
Grid Data Catalog files are ASCII text files with a .gdc extension that are stored,
by default, in the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f folder. The base name of a GDC file is generally
based on the transformation with which it is associated. For example, the
GDC file for the NAD27 to NAD83 transformation is Nad27toNad83.gdc.
Each line in a GDC file points to a grid data file (also known as a datum shift
data file). GDC files also often include comments that are preceded by a pound
96 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
sign (#) and a fallback datum definition that is used when none of the grid
data files provide coverage for a point being converted.
See also:
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users on page 103
■Coordinate System Files on page 105
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■Grid Data Files for the United States on page 97
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand on page 101
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes on
page 102
To set up a new grid data file
1When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default C:\Program
Files\Common Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f.
2Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum on page 1747 definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for the United States
AutoCAD Map 3D uses North American Datum Conversion (NADCON) grid
data files from the National Geodetic Survey to obtain latitude and longitude
shift information for converting between coordinate systems within the United
States. A pair of grid data files is required for each area or state covered: a .las
file is required for latitude shift values (latitude seconds) and a .los file for
longitude shift values (longitude seconds).
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 97
The NADCON files include grid data files for transformations between NAD83
and state readjustments to HARN (High Accuracy Resolution Network) projects.
The .las and .los files are in the public domain and are distributed with
AutoCAD Map 3D. The files are stored in the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f\Usa\Nadcon.
The following is a list of NADCON grid data files.
Area/StateNADCON (North American
Datum Conversion)
Files (.las and
.los)
United States (USA) - lower 48 states including
EEZ
NAD27 to NAD83conus
AlaskaAlaska to NAD83alaska
HawaiiOld Hawaiian to NAD83hawaii
Puerto Rico, Virgin IslandsPuerto Rico to NAD83prvi
St Lawrence: off the coast of AlaskaSt. Lawrence Island to NAD83stlrnc
St Paul: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of AlaskaSt. Paul Island to NAD83stpaul
St George: Pribiloff Islands off the coast of
Alaska
St. George Island to NAD83stgeorge
HARN Readjust-
ments
AlabamaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)alhpgn
ArizonaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)azhpgn
California, south of 38 degrees NorthNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)cahpgn
California, north of 38 degrees NorthNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)cnhpgn
98 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Area/StateNADCON (North American
Datum Conversion)
Files (.las and
.los)
ColoradoNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)cohpgn
Idaho and Montana, east of 113 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)emhpgn
Texas, east of 100 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)ethpgn
FloridaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)flhpgn
GeorgiaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)gahpgn
KentuckyNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)kyhpgn
LouisianaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)lahpgn
Maryland and DelawareNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mdhpgn
MaineNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mehpgn
MichiganNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mihpgn
MississippiNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)mshpgn
NebraskaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nbhpgn
North DakotaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)ndhpgn
New England (Connecticut, Massachusetts,
New Hampshire, Rhode Island, and Vermont)
NAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nehpgn
New MexicoNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nmhpgn
New YorkNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)nyhpgn
OklahomaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)okhpgn
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 99
Area/StateNADCON (North American
Datum Conversion)
Files (.las and
.los)
Puerto Rico, Virgin IslandsNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)pvhpgn
South DakotaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)sdhpgn
TennesseeNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)tnhpgn
Virginia, excluding West VirginiaNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)vahpgn
WisconsinNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wihpgn
Idaho and Montana, west of 113 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wmhpgn
Washington and OregonNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wohpgn
Texas, west of 100 degrees WestNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wthpgn
WyomingNAD83 to NAD83 (HARN)wyhpgn
For more information about NADCON grid data files, refer to the National
Geodetic Survey web site.
See also:
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users on page 103
■Coordinate System Files on page 105
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand on page 101
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes on
page 102
To set up a new grid data file for the United States
1When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
100 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f\Usa\Nadcon.
2Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum on page 1747 definition, or adding
comments.
Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand
AutoCAD Map 3D comes with grid data files for Australia and New Zealand.
These files are installed in folders under the Autodesk shared coordinate system
folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f.
Following is a table of the grid data files and GDC files used for Australia and
New Zealand.
GDC FileGrid Data File (GSB)TransformationArea
agd84ToGda94.gdcQLD_1299.gsbAGD84 to GDA94Australia
agd66ToGda94.gdcvic_0799.gsbAGD66 to GDA94Victoria
agd66ToGda94.gdctas_1098.gsbAGD66 to GDA94Tasmania
agd66ToGda94.gdcNt_0599.gsbAGD66 to GDA94Northern Territory
Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdcnzgd2kgrid9911.gsbNew ZealandNew Zealand
For more information about Australia and New Zealand coordinate systems,
go to http://www.ga.gov.au.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 101
See also:
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes on
page 102
■Datum Shift Issues for North American Users on page 103
■Coordinate System Files on page 105
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■Grid Data Files for the United States on page 97
To set up a new grid data file for Australia or New Zealand
1When you obtain a new grid data file, copy it into the appropriate folder
under the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder, by default
C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f\.
2Open the appropriate GDC file in any text editor or word processor that
can produce an ASCII file, such as Notepad or Wordpad.
NOTE Back up GDC files before you edit them, so you can restore them to
their previous state, if necessary.
3Edit the file to point to the name and location of your new grid data file.
4Make other changes needed, such as rearranging or replacing grid data
files, changing the fallback datum on page 1747 definition, or adding
comments.
Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate
System Changes
The Geocentric Datum of Australia (GDA) is the new Australian coordinate
system, replacing the Australian Geodetic Datum (AGD). GDA is part of a
global coordinate reference frame and is directly compatible with the Global
Positioning System (GPS).
Due to differences in the way the two datums were created, the GDA94
coordinates of a point appear to be about 200 meters northeast of the AGD
coordinates of the same point. The precise size and orientation of the difference
will vary from place to place. For more technical information on the GDA, go
to http://www.icsm.gov.au/icsm/gda/
102 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
The new implementation of GDA94 and the associated datum on page 1747
transformations are available by using the coordinate system files supplied in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand on page 101
■Coordinate System Files on page 105
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
To use the new high accuracy GDA94 datum
1Reassign one of the following coordinate systems to your drawing:
■AMG66-49-Grid through AMG66-57-Grid
■AMG-49-Grid through AMG-57-Grid
■MGA-48-Grid through MGA-58-Grid
■ISG_54-2-Grid through ISG_56-2-Grid
■SGC-Grid
■VICT-Grid
■LL-AGD84-Grid
For example, if you have a drawing that uses AM666-49, reassign it to
AM666-49-Grid before using GDA94.
2Do one of the following:
■To define a new coordinate system using high accuracy datum on page
1747 transformations, use ASTRLA66-Grid and ASTRLA84-Grid.
■To define a new coordinate system using the 3-Dimensional Similarity
Transformations, use ASTRLA66-7P, STRLA66-Tasm-7P,
ASTRLA66-VictNSW-7P, ASTRLA66-ACT-7P, and ASTRLA84-7P.
Datum Shift Issues for North American Users
If the source and destination coordinate systems use different datums,
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically performs a datum on page 1747 shift. Within
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 103
North America, this is most often a shift between the NAD27 and NAD83
datums.
For United States users, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the freely distributable
NADCON grid data files on page 97 supplied by USGS.
Canadian users may use either version 1 or version 2 of the Canadian National
Transformation supplied by Geomatics Canada. If both versions of the
Canadian National Transformation are present, AutoCAD Map 3D uses version
2.
WARNING Geomatics Canada no longer supports version 1, and many Canadian
provinces do not consider it to produce valid results. If you are in Canada and
doing NAD Shifts, it is recommended that you use version 2.
See also:
■Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand on page 101
■Grid Data Files for the United States on page 97
■Coordinate System Files on page 105
■Australian Datum Transformation and Coordinate System Changes on
page 102
To use version 2 of the Canadian National Transformation
1Obtain a copy of the data file.
Contact Information Services, Geodetic Survey Division, Geomatics
Canada
615 Booth Street
Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0E9
(613) 995-4410
http://www.geod.nrcan.gc.ca
2Once you have the file, copy it into the Autodesk shared coordinate
system folder, by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f\Canada, and give it the name Ntv2_0.gsb.
3Using a text editor such as Notepad, open Nad27ToNad83.gdc (located
by default in the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f folder).
104 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
4Delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that begins:
#.\Canada\Ntv2_0.gsb.
To use version 1 of the Canadian National Transformation
1Obtain a copy of the data file.
2Copy it into the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f\Canada folder, and give it the name grid11.dac.
3Open Nad27ToNad83.gdc.
4Delete the initial pound sign (#) from the line that begins:
#.\Canada\grid11.dac.
For more information on editing GDC files, see Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files
on page 96.
Coordinate System Files
AutoCAD Map 3D uses certain files for storing coordinate system definitions
and defining datum on page 1747 transformation information.
Following is a list of these files. Files that should not be modified are marked
with an asterisk (*).
DescriptionFile
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data files:
agd66ToGda94.gdc
Vic_0799.gsb, nt_0599.gsb, and
TAS_1098.gsb. Default fallback datum on
page 1747: ASTRLA66.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within Australia. Default grid data file:
agd84ToGda94.gdc
QLD_1299.gsb. Default fallback datum:
ASTRLA84-7P.
Grid Data Catalog file for determining the
geoid height for any position in the United
GeoidHeight.gdc
States. Default data files are
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 105
DescriptionFile
GEO96AN.GEO, GEO96AS.GEO,
GEO96HW.GEO, GEO96NC.GEO,
GEO96NE.GEO, GEO96NW.GEO,
GEO96PR.GEO, GEO96SC.GEO,
GEO96SE.GEO, and GEO96SW.GEO. Fall-
back datum definition is not recommen-
ded.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default data files:
Nad27ToNad83.gdc
Conus.l?s, Alaska.l?s, PrVi.l?s, Hawaii.l?s,
STGEORGE.l?s, STLRNC.l?s, and ST-
PAUL.l?s. Default fallback datum: NAD27-
48.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within North America. Default grid data
Nad83ToHarn.gdc
files: alhpgn.l?s, azhpgn.l?s, cnhpgn.l?s,
cohpgn.l?s, cshpgn.l?s, emhpgn.l?s, ethp-
gn.l?s, flhpgn.l?s, gahpgn.l?s, hihpgn.l?s,
kshpgn.l?s, kyhpgn.l?s, lahpgn.l?s, mdhp-
gn.l?s, mehpgn.l?s, mihpgn.l?s, mshp-
gn.l?s, nbhpgn.l?s, ndhpgn.l?s, nehpgn.l?s,
nmhpgn.l?s, nvhpgn.l?s, nyhpgn.l?s, ohh-
pgn.l?s, okhpgn.l?s, pvhpgn.l?s, sdhp-
gn.l?s, tnhpgn.l?s, uthpgn.l?s, vahpgn.l?s,
wihpgn.l?s, wmhpgn.l?s, wohpgn.l?s,
wthpgn.l?s, wvhpgn.l?s, and wyhpgn.l?s.
Fallback datum definition is not recommen-
ded.
Grid Data Catalog file for transformations
within New Zealand. Default grid data file:
Nzgd49ToNzgd2K.gdc
nzgd2kgrid9911.gsb. Default fallback
datum: NZGD49-7P.
Grid Data Catalog file for computing the
modeled difference in orthometric height
Vertcon.gdc
between the North American Vertical
106 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
DescriptionFile
Datum of 1988 (NAVD 88) and the Nation-
al Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929 (NGVD
29) for a given location specified by latit-
ude and longitude. Default grid data files:
VERTCONC.94, VERTCONE.94, and VERT-
CONW.94. Fallback datum definition is not
recommended.
A binary compiled file used for storing co-
ordinate system category definitions. Also
called a dictionary file.
Category.csd *
Coordinate systems dictionary file.Coordsys.csd *
Datums dictionary file.Datums.csd *
Ellipsoids dictionary file.Elipsoid.csd *
Multiple Regression Transformation binary
files that store the coefficients required for
.mrt files *
multiple regression analysis. The base name
of the file is the same as the key name of
the datum with which it is associated.
Grid data files used by Vertcon.gdc..94 files *
Data files for determining the geoid height
for any position in the United States. These
.geo files *
are in GEOID96 format and are used by
GeoidHeight.gdc.
Grid data files for Canada, Australia, and
New Zealand. Both latitude and longitude
.gsb files *
shifts (as well as accuracy values) are incor-
porated into a single .gsb file. The file
structure also supports the concept of
multiple grids, and sub-grids within a ma-
jor grid.
Creating New Coordinate Systems | 107
DescriptionFile
Grid data files for United States geography..las and .los files *
See also:
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
■Grid Data Catalog (GDC) Files on page 96
■Grid Data Files for Australia and New Zealand on page 101
■Grid Data Files for the United States on page 97
To modify a coordinate system definition file
1Find the file to modify in the Autodesk shared coordinate system folder,
by default C:\Program Files\Common Files\Autodesk
Shared\GIS\CoordSys\11f.
2Make a backup copy of the file before modifying it.
NOTE Files that should not be modified are marked with an asterisk (*) in
the table on the Concept tab of this topic.
3Edit the file in a text editor.
Setting Up Object Classification
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification on page 109
■Defining an Object Class on page 111
■Using Base Object Classes on page 114
■Specifying Ranges and Defaults on page 116
■Modifying an Object Class Definition on page 118
■Creating an Object Classification File on page 119
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification on page 109
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File on page 849
■To set up object classification on page 109
108 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To define an object class on page 112
■To base a new object class on an existing class on page 115
■To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class on page 115
■To specify a default value and a range for a property on page 116
■To modify an object class definition on page 118
■To create a new object classification file on page 120
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification on page 109
Overview of Setting Up Object Classification
Object classes define a set of standard objects for your organization. When a
user adds one of these standard objects to a drawing that uses object
classification, the object is created using the properties you have defined and
is a “classified” object.
A classified object is created using the appropriate object type. It has the object
data, external data, and topology data that you have defined for the object
class, and all properties included in the object class definition have values
that fall within the range you specified for the property.
When users edit the properties of classified objects, they can enter only values
that fall within the ranges you have specified for the property.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges on
page 74.
See also:
■Using Object Classification on page 836
■Understanding Object Classification on page ?
To set up object classification
■Determine the standard objects for your organization.
■Determine the hierarchy of object classes.
You can create categories of object classes and have all object classes in a
category inherit certain settings from the base object class for that category.
Setting Up Object Classification | 109
■Create a sample object that has all the data and properties that to include
in the object class definition file.
■Attach on page 849 an existing object definition file or create on page 120
a new object class definition file.
■Define on page 112 the new object class.
To use this object class as a base class on page 115, set the default value and
the range of allowable values on page 116 for each object that you include.
■Store the object class definition file in a location that is accessible to all
the people in your organization who need it.
■You can attach the object class definition file to your drawing template so
it is attached to all new drawings.
Quick Reference
ATTACHDEF
Changes the current feature definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Attach Definition
File.
Menu
ATTACHDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Attach Definition File
Task Pane
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
110 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition
File.
Menu
NEWDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ New Definition File
Task Pane
New Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
Defining an Object Class
Define an object class by selecting a sample object in your drawing, choosing
which of its properties to include in the definition, and specifying the allowable
settings.
For example, if you want to define an object class for manhole covers, select
an existing manhole cover in your drawing.
If you do not have a sample object in your drawing, create an object with the
data and property settings that you want to include in the object class
definition.
For each object class, AutoCAD Map 3D stores information on how to create
the object, what properties it should have, what data should be attached, and
what topology information should be associated with it. All objects you create
using this object class definition will have the selected properties and values.
Editing Object Class Definitions
To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class Privileges on page
74.
WARNING Only one person should edit object class definitions at a time. If two
people edit at the same time, one set of edits may be lost.
If the definition file has just been edited by someone else, quit AutoCAD Map
3D and restart to get the updated definitions.
Setting Up Object Classification | 111
Renaming an Object Class
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
class definition file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are
unchanged. Since these objects point to a name that no longer exists in the
object class definition file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
See also:
■Using Base Object Classes on page 114
■Modifying an Object Class Definition on page 118
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File on page 849
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges on
page 74.
To define an object class
1Select a sample object for the object class.
The sample object must have the properties, links, and attributes that
you want to include in the definition of the object class.
2If an object definition file is not attached, enter attachdef at the command
prompt and attach the file.
3On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click Define Object Class.
4When prompted to select a sample object, select the sample object. Press
Enter.
5In the Define Object Classification dialog box on page 1517, enter a name
and a description.
6To base this object class on an existing object class on page 115, select the
existing object class from the Based On list.
To use this object class as a base only, select Use As Base Object
Classification Only.
7On the Applies To tab, select the object type for this object class.
You must select the object type before you can select properties on the
Properties List tab.
112 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
For best results, select the most specific object type that applies to all
objects in this class.
NOTE If you plan to use this object class with objects from a drawing source,
do not select more than one object type.
8On the Properties List tab, select each of the properties you want to
include in the definition. For each property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values on page 116.
To specify a lineweight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For example,
to specify a lineweight of 0.13, enter 13.
9On the Class Settings tab, select the object to use to create the feature.
For example, if you are defining an object class for roads, select Polyline
as the creation method.
NOTE You can select only objects that match the object type you selected
on the Applies To tab.
You can also specify the icon to display for the object class and whether
or not you want the object class to appear on the Map Explorer tab of
the Task Pane.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Object Classification | 113
Using Base Object Classes
You can create hierarchies of object classes. When you base a new object class
on an existing object class, the new object class has all the properties of the
base class.
You cannot change base properties, but you can modify their attributes,
including the default value and the range of allowable values, and you can
include additional properties.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges on
page 74.
Sample Use
1Define an object class called Roads with the basic properties that you
want to assign to all roads.
2Define object classes called Primary Roads, Local Roads, and Fire Roads,
and base each of them on Roads.
Because the new object classes are based on Roads, they include all the
properties selected for Roads.
When you select all objects in a base class, objects in object classes based
on that class are also selected.
Using Object Classes as Base Classes Only
Sometimes when you create a base class, you intend that it be used only as a
base for other object classes and not to create objects in drawings. For example,
you may not want the object class Roads to be used to create roads. You want
people to create roads using the Primary Roads and Secondary Roads classes
that are based on the Roads class. You can specify that an object class can be
used only as a base class.
Editing Base Classes
To edit a definition for an object class, you must have a sample object in the
drawing. However, if you use an object class as a base class only, you will not
have any example objects. For these object classes, you must edit the .xml
definition file directly.
114 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Defining an Object Class on page 111
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges on
page 74.
To base a new object class on an existing class
1Define the object class on page 112.
2For Based On, select the object class on which you want to base this new
object class.
The selected properties of the base object class appear in the list.
3You cannot clear any of the properties of the base object class, but you
can edit the property attributes, including the default and the range of
allowable values.
4Add any additional properties you want, and finish defining the object
class.
To specify that an object class can be used only as a base class
1Define the object class on page 112.
2In the Define Object Classification dialog box on page 1517, select Use As
Base Object Classification Only.
Users can select objects using the base object class, but they cannot create
objects using it.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Setting Up Object Classification | 115
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying Ranges and Defaults
When you define an object class, you can specify a range of allowable values
and a default value for new objects created using the object class.
When someone creates a new object using this object class, AutoCAD Map
3D creates the object using the current settings for the property. If the current
settings do not match the range, the object is created using the specified
default value.
When users edit the values for properties associated with the object class, they
can only values that are within the allowable range. (This applies only if you
edit the properties using the Object Class Data tab of the Properties palette.)
When users classify existing objects, they can skip objects whose values are
not within the specified range. If they do not skip these objects, the objects
are assigned the default values.
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges on
page 74.
See also:
■Defining an Object Class on page 111
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
NOTE To define an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges on
page 74.
To specify a default value and a range for a property
1Create the object class and select the object type on page 112 on the Applies
To tab of the Define Object Classification dialog box on page 1517.
116 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2On the Properties List tab, select a property.
3Under Property Attributes, for Default, enter the default value for this
property.
4For Range, specify the range of allowable values.
Click … to select from a list of properties if available, otherwise, enter
the values.
■To enter a list of values, separate them with commas, for example:
1,5,9
■To enter a range of numbers, enclose the first and last numbers in
square brackets and separate the numbers with a comma, for example:
[3,7]
■You can combine a range with additional values, for example: 1,[3,7],9
■To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ).
Note that range values are case-sensitive. For example, if you specify "Road"
as an allowable value in the range, "ROAD" will not match this value and will
be considered outside of the range.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Object Classification | 117
Modifying an Object Class Definition
To add properties to an object class definition, you must have a sample object
that includes the properties you want to add.
Notes and Warnings
When you rename an object class, you change the name only in the object
classification file. Any objects tagged with the object class name are unchanged.
Since these objects point to an object class name that no longer exists in the
object classification file, the objects become undefined. You can search for
these undefined objects and update their object class name.
NOTE To modify an object class, you must have Alter Object Class privileges on
page 74.
See also:
■Defining an Object Class on page 111
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
NOTE To modify an object class definition, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges on page 74.
To modify an object class definition
1Open a drawing that contains an object classified with the object class
you want to modify.
To add properties to the object class definition, the sample object must
have the properties you want to add to the object class definition.
2If an object classification file is not attached, enter attachdef at the
command prompt and attach the file.
3On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the object class
whose definition you want to modify. Click Define Object Class.
4Select the sample object. This object must be classified with the object
class you want to modify.
5In the Define Object Classification dialog box on page 1517, modify
properties.
■You cannot change the object type used for the feature.
118 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■On the Properties List tab, select or clear properties you want to include
in the definition. For each new property, enter a default value and a
range of possible values on page 116.
To specify a lineweight, enter the decimal value as an integer. For
example, to specify a lineweight of 0.13, enter 13.
■On the Class Settings tab, specify the icon to display for the feature
and whether the data appears on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
Quick Reference
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
Creating an Object Classification File
The object classification file contains information on object classes you have
defined. You can create a new object classification file.
As a general rule, you want to use the same object classification file across all
your drawings. This ensures that you have the same object class definitions
for all source drawings attached to a drawing. You may want to attach the
object classification file to the drawing template, and make sure that everyone
has the same alias to the path.
If the object classification file is shared by users in your organization, store it
on the network in a place accessible to all users.
Setting Up Object Classification | 119
To use object classification, users attach the object classification file to their
drawing. They can then create standard objects using the object class
definitions.
Only the object classes defined in the object classification file attached to a
drawing can be assigned to objects or used to create new objects.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges on page 75.
See also:
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File on page 849
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
To create a new object classification file
1On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Object Classes.
Click New Definition File.
2Specify a name for the new object classification file. Click OK.
NOTE To create a new object classification file, you must have Alter Object Class
privileges on page 75.
Quick Reference
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition
File.
Menu
NEWDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ New Definition File
Task Pane
New Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
120 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setting Up for Digitizing
■Overview of Digitizing on page 121
■Configuring the Digitizer on page 122
■Registering the Map on page 124
■Setting Digitizing Specifications on page 127
See also:
■Digitizing Objects on page 884
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
■To prepare for digitizing on page 121
■To configure the digitizer on page 123
■To register the map on page 126
■To set digitizing specifications on page 129
Overview of Digitizing
Digitizing is the process of converting paper-based graphical information into
a digital format. When you digitize a map, you use drawing commands to
trace data from the paper map into a DWG file.
See also:
■Digitizing Objects on page 884
■Configuring the Digitizer on page 122
■Registering the Map on page 124
■Setting Digitizing Specifications on page 127
To prepare for digitizing
1Configure the digitizer. on page ?
2Register the map. on page ?
3Set the digitizing specifications. on page ?
Setting Up for Digitizing | 121
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLETCommand Line
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Menu
MAPDIGISETUPCommand Line
Digitize Setup dialog boxDialog Box
Configuring the Digitizer
You must configure the digitizer so a movement on the digitizing tablet can
be recorded directly into an existing drawing file as you digitize.
To configure the digitizing tablet, you define screen pointing areas. A screen
pointing area is a rectangular region on the digitizer surface within which the
digitizer acts like a mouse and can access windows, menus, and dialog boxes.
You can configure two screen pointing areas, one fixed and one floating.
When you digitize, the fixed screen pointing area is disabled. To access the
menus from the digitizer, use the floating screen pointing area.
You can toggle between the fixed and floating screen pointing areas with the
F12 key.
See also:
■Registering the Map on page 124
122 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Setting Digitizing Specifications on page 127
■Digitizing Objects on page 884
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
To configure the digitizer
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options. In the Options dialog box, click
the System tab.
2Select your digitizer in the Current Pointing Device list.
3Start the TABLET command, and use the CFG option to configure the
tablet. Specify the fixed screen pointing area and a floating screen pointing
area in a corner of your tablet area.
4Mark the floating screen area on your tablet with a marker or piece of
paper.
When you complete the configuration, two new options appear on the
status bar at the bottom of the AutoCAD Map 3D window. TABLET and
FLOAT let you toggle the two modes.
You must use the Options dialog box to disable the mouse while you are
digitizing.
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options. In the Options dialog box, click
the System tab.
2Under Accept Input From, select Digitizer Only.
3Click OK.
When you complete digitizing, return to the Options dialog and select the
Digitizer And Mouse option to use both input devices.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Setting Up for Digitizing | 123
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLETCommand Line
Registering the Map
Registration is the process of making a map's coordinate system correspond to
the Cartesian coordinate system used by AutoCAD Map 3D.
You select specific calibration and control points for each map that you digitize.
The crosses in this illustration mark the digitizer calibration points.
Choosing the Number of Calibration Points
Selecting a maximum of nine points is a good rule; specifying more only
increases computation time with little increase in precision. If the original is
not badly distorted, four corner points and some intermediate points should
be sufficient. It is more important to distribute the points evenly around the
whole map than to concentrate more points in an area.
124 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Calibration Options
To complete the calibration, select one of the following transformation options:
■Orthogonal — Needs only two digitized and specified calibration points
to create a transformation consisting of arbitrary translation, uniform
scaling, and rotation. This method is not recommended unless only two
control points can be found.
■Affine — Requires three calibration points. Allows a tablet transformation
combining translation, independent X and Y scaling, rotation, and some
skewing. Provides an arbitrary linear transformation in two-dimensional
space. This is the preferred method for registering paper maps drawn in a
Cartesian coordinate system.
■Projective — Needs at least four calibration points. Makes a transformation
equivalent to a perspective projection of any plane onto another plane.
Allows for some stretching of an original paper drawing by different
amounts along a perspective projection. This is the best option for
orthophotos.
The TABLET command calculates the errors associated with the available
transformation options, depending on how many points you digitized. When
the calculations are complete, or when you cancel the calculations, a table
showing the results of your calibration appears. Here is a sample output:
ProjectiveAffineOrthogonalTransformation type:
ExactSuccessSuccessOutcome of fit:
79154RMS Error:
167Standard deviation:
80208Largest residual:
43At point:
8191Second largest residual:
34At point:
Setting Up for Digitizing | 125
There are four possible responses from the calibration calculations for each
transformation type:
■Exact — Number of points specified is correct for this type of
transformation.
■Success — More points specified than needed. For a Success, the RMS error
and standard deviation are reported.
■Impossible — Not enough points specified to define a transformation.
■Failure — Points specified are colinear or coincidental. The transformation
may not have valid definition.
If you get either Impossible or Failure, do not use that transformation. If all
the results are Impossible or Failure, check the calibration on the digitizer,
recalibrate, and digitize the map again.
RMS Error, Standard Deviation, and Residual Values
The RMS error indicates how uniform or extreme the required transformation
is: the lower the value, the better the calibration.
Standard deviation is reported at all calibration points. The residual error is
the difference between the actual calibration point and the computed
transformation point. A large difference indicates a procedural error. You may
have entered the wrong coordinates or digitized a wrong point.
If the RMS and standard deviation values seem high, you might have made
an error when entering location values or the map might have slipped during
calibration. In this case, restart the procedure to calibrate the digitizer.
See also:
■Configuring the Digitizer on page 122
■Setting Digitizing Specifications on page 127
■Digitizing Objects on page 884
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
To register the map
1Tape the map on the tablet. The map on the tablet should be flat, with
no bumps or wrinkles, and securely fastened.
126 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2Start the TABLET command and use the CAL option.
3Digitize the control points of the map, and enter X and Y coordinate
values for the locations.
4When you complete the control points, press Enter. Wait for the
calculations to complete.
5At the prompt, enter the calibration option to use. Select the
transformation that gave an Exact outcome. If all the transformations
were a Success, select the option with the lowest RMS and standard
deviation errors.
Quick Reference
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing table
TABLETCommand Line
Setting Digitizing Specifications
To use the options provided by the MAPDIGITIZE command, you must
configure the digitizer and register the map.
Attaching Data
You can link data to objects as you digitize. Although you can store data in
AutoCAD Map 3D as block attributes, you can perform more sophisticated
analysis of the data if you use one of the following methods:
■Data linked to an object is stored as object data in the drawing.
■Data linked to an object is stored in an external database.
Label Point
A label point is the point used to insert text to describe the digitized object.
You can specify a label point for each object as you digitize.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 127
Layer
Plan the layers you will use in your drawing. A layer is a logical grouping of
data, which simplifies organizing and viewing data. For more information,
look up "layers, creating" in the help index.
Each object that represents a different type of map data should go on a separate
layer. For example, a polyline representing a coastline could go on a layer
named COASTLINE, interstate highways on a layer named INTERSTATE, land
boundaries on a layer named LOTS.
If you have not established a scheme for layer names, you can create one using
the numeric feature-classification code found in some digital source data. For
example, major roads might be on a layer named "170-201". A better naming
convention combines names that suggest their function and a structure that
allows selection with wild cards and groups of layer names. For example, you
might decide that all topographic objects should go on layers beginning with
the letters TP. So you might put rivers on a layer named TP_RIVERS, and
contours on a layer named TP_CONTOURS. To freeze, thaw, lock, or unlock
all layers with topographic data, you use the expression TP*. For more
information on wild-card characters, look up "wild-card characters" in the
help index.
Block Name or Linetype
To represent nodes using blocks available in the current drawing, select a block
name or ACAD_POINT for the block name.
Choosing ACAD_POINT places a point object at each node position. For
information about changing the appearance of this point object, look up
DDPTYPE in the help index.
Wherever possible, use the linetypes supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D to
indicate different types of boundaries, road types, and waterways. Using
standard linetypes ensures consistency across maps and helps you keep track
of what you have digitized. Associate each linetype with a different layer.
Object Snap
Use object snap to tie nodes or segments to linear objects that are already in
place. For example, always use object snap to position junctions of pipes,
roads, or railways.
128 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Width
Linear objects that contain three-dimensional information cannot have a
width.
See also:
■Registering the Map on page 124
■Configuring the Digitizer on page 122
■Digitizing Objects on page 884
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
To set digitizing specifications
1At the command prompt, enter mapdigisetup.
2In the Digitize Setup dialog box on page 1353, select an object type.
Select Nodes to digitize points or blocks. Select Linear to digitize polylines.
3To attach data to objects as you digitize them, select Attach Data.
Click Data To Attach and select the table to use for the data. As you
digitize the objects, you are prompted for the data to attach to the object.
4To change the label point for objects as you digitize them, select Prompt
For Label Point.
5Specify the layer for new objects.
6Specify the block (for nodes) or the linetype (for linear objects) to use
when creating the new objects.
7Specify whether to snap to the closest endpoint (for nodes) or insertion
point (for linear objects).
8For nodes, select whether to specify the rotation and scale of each node
block.
For linear objects, select whether the objects are 2D or 3D. For 2D objects,
specify a width.
9Click OK to close the dialog box and save your settings.
Setting Up for Digitizing | 129
Quick Reference
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Menu
MAPDIGISETUPCommand Line
Digitize Setup dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Your Map File
See also:
■Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D on page 72
■Setting Options on page 194
■To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D on page 133
■To assign coordinate systems on page 134
■To attach drawings on page 144
■To set up a query library on page 161
■To set up annotation templates on page 171
■To set up object data on page 179
■To set up data sources for drawings on page 184
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File
You can set up each map file you create to make your work easier and more
productive.
See also:
■Setting Up AutoCAD Map 3D on page 72
■Setting Options on page 194
130 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
The following table summarizes your customization options for a map file.
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Specify the coordinate system used for at-
tached drawings and for the current
drawing.
See Assigning Coordinate Systems on page
133
Click Setup menu ➤ Assign
Global Coordinate System.
Assign a coordinate system.
Work with objects from other drawings by
attaching those drawings to the current
map and querying in the objects.
See Overview of Attaching Drawings on
page 144
Drag the drawing file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Attach drawings.
Specify how attached drawings work with
the current drawing and view information
about attached drawings.
See Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
on page 152.
Click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set.
Modify the settings for at-
tached drawings.
Save and reuse queries in a library.
See Overview of Using the Query Library
on page 161.
Set up queries. 1To save the cur-
rent query, click
Setup menu ➤
More DWG Op-
tions ➤ Define
Query.
2To run a saved
query, click Edit
menu ➤ DWG
Query.
Define the information to display in an
annotation and the layout of that informa-
Click Setup ➤ Define An-
notation Template.
Define annotation tem-
plates.
tion. Then you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing.
See Defining Annotation Templates on
page 174
Overview of Setting Up Your Map File | 131
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Create tables with fields for text and numer-
ical information. Attach records from the
table to objects.
See Creating an Object Data Table on page
180.
Click Setup menu ➤
Define Object Data.
Set up object data.
Attach a database to your map and link
records from that table to objects in your
map.
See Attaching a Data Source on page 187.
Drag the database file from
Windows Explorer to the
Map Explorer tab of the
Task Pane.
Set up data sources for
drawings.
Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D
When you log into AutoCAD Map 3D, your work environment is automatically
set up as it was last saved, including user privileges and user-specific options.
Depending on your organization, you may be required to log in. System
Administrators can set this AutoCAD Map 3D multi-user option.
If user login is not required, you can work with AutoCAD Map 3D without
logging in. However, you may log in at anytime to restore settings that you've
saved to your user name or to use privileges associated with your user name.
User Privileges
To perform some AutoCAD Map 3D commands, you must be logged in as a
user with the appropriate privileges.
Example: To change Multi-user settings in the AutodCAD Map Options dialog
box, you must have Superuser privileges.
The default superuser name is Superuser, and the default superuser password
is SUPERUSER (case sensitive).
TIP You can customize many AutoCAD Map 3D settings. Some of these
customizations are saved to your user name. To customize the settings differently
for each drawing, set up multiple user names and log in with the appropriate
name for each drawing.
132 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Setting Multi-user Options on page 205
■Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights on page 74
To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D
1Click Setup menu ➤ User Login.
2In the Login Name box, enter the login name provided to you by your
system administrator.
3In the Password box, enter your password.
The default superuser login name is SuperUser (case insensitive) and the
password is SUPERUSER (case sensitive). If security is an issue, make sure
you change the default superuser login and password. See To add a new
user on page 75.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPLOGIN
Allows you to log in as an AutoCAD Map 3D user
Setup menu ➤ User Login
Menu
MAPLOGINCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent Drawing ➤ User
Login
Task Pane
User Login dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning Coordinate Systems
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can combine data from maps that use different
coordinate systems.
See also:
■Defining Coordinate Systems on page 82
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 133
■Grid Data Files and Datum Shifts on page 94
To assign coordinate systems
■To use coordinate systems with maps on page 135
■To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing on page 136
■To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing on page 138
■To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic on page 139
■To turn off a global coordinate system on page 140
■To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing on page 141
■To transform the coordinate system of a drawing on page 142
Overview of Coordinate Systems
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can combine data from maps using different
coordinate systems. To do this, you specify the coordinate system used for
attached drawings and for the current drawing. When you bring objects from
attached drawings into the current drawing, the objects are transformed to
the coordinate system of the current drawing.
The coordinate system you assign to your drawing specifies the system that
was used when creating the drawing. For example, if you created a map using
Universal Transverse Mercator, Zone 27, US Survey Feet, you assign the code
UTM-27F to the map.
You specify the coordinate system used for the current drawing and for
attached source drawings before querying any items from the source drawings.
When you query objects from source drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically converts them to the coordinate system of the current drawing.
This operation is called coordinate transformation. When you save objects back
to source drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D reverses the conversion.
The coordinate system code and definition are stored in the drawing file. You
can share the drawing with anyone using Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or
later, and they will have the correct coordinate system.
When the coordinate system you select is assigned to the selected attached
drawings, a backup file, with a .bak extension, is made of each source drawing
before assigning the coordinate system information.
The coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D include the Universal
Transverse Mercator System and the State Plane Coordinate systems used in
the USA, as well as many international coordinate systems used around the
134 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
world. For a complete listing of supported systems, see the Global Coordinate
System Manager dialog box.
See also:
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
To use coordinate systems with maps
■Assign a coordinate system on page 136 to your current drawing and to the
source drawings.
■Set Coordinate System Options on page 208
■Define a coordinate system on page 84
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 135
Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source
Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for each attached source drawing to
take advantage of the coordinate transformation capabilities in AutoCAD Map
3D.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing on page 142
■Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a Source Drawing on page
141
■Removing an Assigned Coordinate System on page 140
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing
1Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box on page 1336, under
Source Drawings, click Select Drawings and select the source drawings.
You cannot assign a coordinate system to a source drawing that currently
has queried objects in the current drawing.
3Under Source Drawings, enter the coordinate system code for the selected
source drawings.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
of available coordinate systems. You can also search for coordinate systems
by code or description using the Search box. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system.
To remove an assigned coordinate system, in the Code box in the Assign
Global Coordinate System dialog box, type a period.
4Click OK.
136 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current
Drawing
You must specify a coordinate system for the current drawing to take advantage
of the coordinate transformation capabilities in AutoCAD Map 3D.
After you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the coordinate
transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source drawings.
The save-back process uses the original settings to determine whether
adjustments are necessary to restore objects to the correct coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing on page 142
■Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing on page 136
■Removing an Assigned Coordinate System on page 140
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Overview of Grid Data Files and Datum Shift Issues on page 95
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 137
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing
1Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box on page 1336, under
Current Drawing, enter the coordinate system code for the current
drawing.
If you do not know the code, click Select Coordinate System. In the Select
Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select from a list
of available coordinate systems. You can also search for coordinate systems
by code or description using the Search box. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Using a Geodetic Coordinate System
All geographic data is created in some coordinate system, and in the context
of some datum on page 1747. A datum includes ellipsoid on page 1750 information
and a datum definition. For example, the Gauss-Kruger Conformal projection
system used in Germany uses the Bessel ellipsoid and Potsdam datum
definition. Some coordinate systems only specify the ellipsoid; these are
non-geodetic. Coordinate systems that specify the complete datum are
geodetic.
138 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Most of the coordinate systems supplied with AutoCAD Map 3D are geodetic,
but about ten percent are non-geodetic. Therefore, you should determine
whether the coordinate systems you use are geodetic or non-geodetic before
you assign a coordinate system to a drawing. If you have data in a drawing
that uses a non-geodetic coordinate system, but don't know what datum the
data came from, you might introduce errors if you convert the drawing to a
geodetic coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing on page 142
■Overview of Creating New Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Defining a New Datum on page 86
■Defining an Ellipsoid on page 87
To determine if a coordinate system is geodetic
1Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box on page 1336, under
Current Drawing or Source Drawings, click Select Coordinate System.
3In the Category list, select the category that contains the coordinate
system you want.
4In the Coordinate Systems In Category list, select a coordinate system.
5Click Properties.
The type of coordinate system is displayed under Coordinate System Type on
the General tab of the Global Coordinate Systems Properties dialog box. If the
coordinate system is geodetic, the datum on page 1747 is displayed in the Datum
box.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 139
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System
For ADE data, using the AutoCAD Map 3D coordinate systems requires many
complex calculations that can decrease performance when querying objects
from attached drawings and saving back the objects. With FDO data these
calculations are unnecessary, so there is no performance impact.
You can turn off a coordinate system while working in a particular drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
To turn off a global coordinate system
1Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box on page 1336, in the
Code box under Current Drawing, enter a period (.). Press Enter.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
140 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Viewing the Assigned Coordinate System for a
Source Drawing
If the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system, you can view the
code in the Drawing Settings dialog box.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing on page 142
■Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing on page 136
■Removing an Assigned Coordinate System on page 140
To see the assigned coordinate system for a source drawing
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the active drawing's global coordinate system code
to the right of the drawing name.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Statistics
Menu
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 141
ADEDWGSTATCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
Transforming the Coordinate System of a Drawing
You can transform an existing map from one coordinate system to another
by querying the objects from the attached source drawing into the current
drawing.
The original source drawing is unchanged, but the objects in the current
drawing use the new coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source Drawing on page 136
■Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing on page 137
■Querying Objects from Attached Drawings on page 1023
To transform the coordinate system of a drawing
1Open a new drawing.
2Attach the drawing whose coordinate system you want to transform. See
Attaching Drawings on page 144.
3In the new drawing, assign the new coordinate system to the current
drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing on
page 138.
4If you have not already assigned a coordinate system to the original
drawing, do that now. Assign the coordinate system that was used to
create the original drawing. See Assigning a Coordinate System to a Source
Drawing on page 136.
5Define a query to bring in all objects from the source drawing. The easiest
way to do this is to define a location condition and use the Boundary
Type "All." This retrieves all objects in the source drawing. See Finding
All Objects in a Specified Location on page 1027.
142 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
As the objects are retrieved from the source drawing into the current drawing,
they are transformed from the coordinate system of the source drawing to the
coordinate system of the current drawing.
Once the objects are in the new drawing, you can detach the source drawing
and save the new drawing. The objects are unchanged in the source drawing,
but they use the new coordinate system in the new drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigning Coordinate Systems | 143
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Attaching Drawings
When you attach a drawing to the current drawing, you can work with any
objects and data in that drawing, edit them, and save them back to the attached
drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
To attach drawings
■To create a drawing set on page 146
■To attach drawings on page 148
■To activate a drawing on page 149
■To activate a group of drawings on page 149
■To create a drive alias on page 150
■To open an active attached drawing on page 152
Overview of Attaching Drawings
You can work with objects from other drawings by attaching the other drawings
to the current drawing. The group of drawings attached to the current drawing
is called a drawing set.
Example: You have separate drawings for each quadrant of a town. You attach
those dravings to the current drawing, and then view all the quadrants
simultaneously.
144 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Aligning Attached Drawings
If an attached drawing has a global coordinate system assigned to it, objects
from that drawing are automatically converted to their appropriate size and
location in the current drawing.
If an attached drawing does not have a global coordinate system assigned to
it, you can specify how to align objects from that drawing when they are
copied into the current drawing.
Current DrawingAttached Drawings
Tile drawings by specifying the drawing offset for each attached drawing.
For each attached drawing, you can specify a drawing offset. You can also
specify how objects from the attached drawings are scaled or rotated when
they are brought into the current drawing.
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
See also:
■Setting Transformation Options on page 155
Attaching Drawings | 145
■Viewing Information about Attached Drawings on page 159
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set on page 624
To create a drawing set
1If necessary, create a drive alias on page 150.
2Attach the drawings on page 146 you plan to use with the project.
3Activate the drawings on page 149 to query.
If you no longer use an attached drawing with the current drawing, you can
remove the drawing from the drawing set.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 152.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Attaching a Drawing
Nested Drawings
If you attach a drawing that has other drawings already attached to it, those
other drawings appear in the list as nested drawings.
146 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
You can query objects from nested drawings. If a top level drawing is not
active, you cannot see or activate nested drawings. However, if the top level
drawing is active, you can deactivate a nested drawing.
Working with Xrefs
To query data in an external reference, delete the external reference from the
attached drawing and attach the reference drawing to the current drawing
The Order of Attached Drawings
The order in which you attach drawings can affect the properties of objects
retrieved by queries.
If two drawings use the same name for a block, layer, group, or text style,
AutoCAD Map 3D will use the definition from the first retrieved object that
uses that item.
For example, if you create a query to retrieve objects on LAYER_A, and LAYER_A
does not exist in the current drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the definition
of LAYER_A in the first active attached drawing that contains objects on
LAYER_A. Objects retrieved from LAYER_A in other drawings acquire the color
and linetype that is defined for LAYER_A in this drawing. This change also
applies when you save changes back to attached drawings.
TIP To maintain consistency between drawings, define blocks, layers, groups,
and text styles in the current drawing. For example, if you define a LAYER_A in
the current drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D applies the current drawing definition of
LAYER_A to objects retrieved from LAYER_A in all attached drawings, and when
you save back, applies the current drawing layer definition to the saved objects.
For information about passwords and security, see AutoCAD help.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Viewing Information about Attached Drawings on page 159
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set on page 624
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 152
Attaching Drawings | 147
To attach drawings
■Drag the file from Windows Explorer to the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
- or -
1Open the drawing to which you want to attach another drawing.
2Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
3In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box on page 1638, click Attach.
4In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, select the drawings to attach.
Click Add.
To modify the settings for attached drawings, such as the offset, scale, or save
back extents, see Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 152.
For information on viewing the attached drawings, see Viewing All Objects
in Selected Attached Drawings on page 618.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Activating a Drawing
When you run a query to retrieve objects from attached drawings, AutoCAD
Map 3D retrieves objects only from active drawings.
148 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
You cannot make a drawing active or inactive when there are locked objects
in the drawing.
NOTE If an attached drawing is active in the current drawing, you cannot open
that drawing directly.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 152
To activate a drawing
1In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click the drawing name.
Click Activate.
NOTE To activate a nested drawing, you must first activate the drawing to which
it is attached.
To activate a group of drawings
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2Select the drawings to activate.
3Click Activate.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
Attaching Drawings | 149
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Drive Alias
If you plan to share drawings with other users, use drive aliases to specify the
location of attached drawings
Example: You connect to the drawing server as drive J, but another user
connects as drive K. This makes it difficult to share drawings, since your
drawing specifies J as the location for the attached files. However, if you both
assign the same drive alias to the server, such as ProjectMaps, you can specify
the location of the attached drawings by this drive alias.
AutoCAD Map 3D provides a default drive alias called C. To store drawings
in a location other than drive C, create a drive alias for the location.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 152
To create a drive alias
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2In the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box, click Attach.
3In the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box, click .
4In the Drive Alias Administration dialog box on page 1647, type a name
for the alias.
The name must use only alphanumeric characters (including hyphen
and underscore), contain no spaces or colons, and start with a character.
NOTE If you are creating a drive alias for a drawing with an undefined alias,
type that alias name exactly.
5Specify a path for the new alias.
150 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
6Click Add.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFCRDSYS
Defines a global coordinate system
Setup menu ➤ Define Global Coordinate System
Menu
ADEDEFCRDSYSCommand Line
Global Coordinate System Manager dialog boxDialog Box
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Opening an Active Attached Drawing
You cannot directly open an attached drawing that is activated in the current
drawing. You must first deactivate it in the current drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 152
Attaching Drawings | 151
To open an active attached drawing
1Do one of the following:
■Deactivate on page 149 the attached drawing.
■Close the drawing containing the attached drawing.
2To open the drawing, click File menu ➤ Open.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
■Overview of Modifying Attached Drawing Settings on page 153
■Creating a Drawing Description on page 154
■Setting Transformation Options on page 155
■Setting Save Back Extents on page 158
■Viewing Information about Attached Drawings on page 159
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■To create a drawing description on page 155
152 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To set transformation options on page 157
■To set save back extents on page 158
■To view information about attached drawings on page 160
Overview of Modifying Attached Drawing Settings
You can specify how attached drawings work with the current drawing. You
can also view information about attached drawings.
NOTE You cannot specify drawing settings for nested drawings.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
Use this method...To do this...
Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify
Drawing Set. Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Creating a Drawing Description on
page 154.
Create a drawing description
Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify
Drawing Set. Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Setting Transformation Options on
page 155.
Specify how to adjust the scale, rotation,
and XY offset of objects retrieved from an
attached drawing.
Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify
Drawing Set. Click the Drawing Settings
tab.
See Setting Save Back Extents on page 158.
Specify save back extents that are different
from the drawing extents.
In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane,
right-click Drawings. Click Statistics.
See Viewing Information about Attached
Drawings on page 159.
Vew information about attached drawings
such as the number and type of objects,
symbol tables, object data tables, and ob-
ject classes.
Attaching Drawings | 153
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTATCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Drawing Description
Providing a description for an attached drawing helps you and other users
identify the drawing more easily.
TIP You can filter a drawing list by the drawing description. For example, when
you are selecting drawings to Quick View, you could display only drawings with
the word 'sewer' in their description.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
154 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To create a drawing description
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
3In the Drawing Settings dialog box on page 1642, select the drawing for
which you want to add a description.
4In the Drawing Description box, enter a description.
5Click Apply.
If you later want to modify the description, return to the Drawing Settings
dialog box and enter a new description.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Transformation Options
Set simple transformation options to specify how to adjust the scale, rotation,
and XY offset of objects retrieved from an attached drawing. Use these settings
to make items from the attached drawings appear at the proper orientation,
size, and placement in the current drawing.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the current drawing. The
attached drawing does not change, which is useful for overlaying drawings
or tiling them.
Attaching Drawings | 155
You can rotate objects from attached drawings so they
match the rotation of the current drawing.
Example: You have individual maps for each square-mile sector. You create a
drawing that encompasses a 5-square mile area, and you attach each of the
square-mile maps. You set the appropriate offset for each attached map so it
appears correctly in the current drawing.
If you save edited objects back to attached drawings, the objects are restored
to their original rotation, scale, and offset.
NOTE If you have set a global coordinate system code, these simple transformation
options are unavailable.
Use these simple transformation settings to temporarily adjust objects from
attached drawings so they align correctly in the current drawing. You can also
permanently edit the location, rotation, or scale of an object.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object on page 789
156 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set transformation options
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
3In the Drawing Settings dialog box on page 1642, select the drawing whose
objects you want to transform.
4Under Simple Transformation, select On/Off.
5In the Scale box, enter the scale factor to scale the objects.
A value of 2 doubles the size of objects; a value of 0.5, halves the size of
objects.
6In the Rotation box, enter the angle in degrees to rotate the objects.
7In the Offset (X,Y) boxes, enter the amount to offset objects using the
drawing units from the attached drawing.
8To select coordinates manually, click Pick.
When prompted, specify the points on which to base the simple
transformation. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the scale, rotation, and
offset based on the four points you specify; the base point for the rotation
is 0,0.
9Click Apply.
This procedure transforms objects from the attached drawing as they are
queried into the current drawing. When objects are saved back to the attached
drawing, the transformation is undone. To permanently transform selected
objects, use the ADETRANSFORM on page 789command.
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
Attaching Drawings | 157
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Save Back Extents
For an attached drawing, you can specify save back extents that are different
from the drawing extents.
This is useful if you save objects back to attached drawings based on their
location. If you don't specify save back extents, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
attached drawing extents as the save back extents.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set on page 624
To set save back extents
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
2Click Drawing Settings.
3In the Drawing Settings dialog box on page 1642, select the drawing for
which you want to define save back extents.
4Under Save Back Extents, click Define <.
5Specify the boundary by using your pointing device or by entering
coordinates on the command line. When you finish specifying the
boundary, press Enter.
6Click Apply.
TIP To view the save back extents, click Show <.
NOTE Simple transformations modify the default save back extents but do not
affect user-defined save back extents.
158 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
Viewing Information about Attached Drawings
Vew information about attached drawings such as the number and type of
objects, symbol tables, object data tables, and object classes:
■Object Counts — The number and type of objects in the attached drawing.
■Symbol Tables — Displays information stored in symbol tables, for example,
block names, layer names, linetypes, and registered applications (regapps).
NOTE Regapps are registered applications that contain extended data (Xdata).
■Object Data — Displays information stored in object data.
■Object Classes — Displays object classes used in the selected drawings and
the number of objects in each object class.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Editing Data in Attached Drawings on page 605
Attaching Drawings | 159
To view information about attached drawings
1In the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, right-click Drawings. Click
Statistics.
2Select drawings from the Active Drawings list.
3Click a button:
■Object Counts displays the number of each type of object in the
selected drawings.
■Symbol Tables displays all symbol tables in the selected drawings.
■Object Data displays all link templates, object data tables, and
attributes.
■Object Classes displays objects used in the selected drawings and the
type of data in each object class.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGSTAT
Displays drawing statistics
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Statistics
Menu
ADEDWGSTATCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Drawing Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up a Query Library
You can save and organize your queries in the query library.
See also:
■Defining Queries on page 1006
■Executing Queries on page ?
160 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set up a query library
■To use the query library on page 161
■To save a query on page 164
■To run a query from the Query Library on page 165
■To run a query from Map Explorer on page 165
■To run an external query on page 166
■To reference an external query in the query library on page 167
■To add a category to the query library on page 168
■To edit a query saved with the current drawing on page 170
■To edit an external query on page 170
Overview of Using the Query Library
If you plan to run a query more than once, you can save it. Once you have
saved a query, you can run it anytime.
■Saving a Query on page 163— Save the current query to the query library
or to an external file.
■Running a Saved Query on page 165— Run a query saved in the query
library.
Each drawing has a query library where you can organize your saved queries
into categories.
■Adding an External Query to Your Library on page 167
■Using Query Library Categories on page 168
■Editing a Saved Query on page 169
See also:
■Defining Queries
■Executing Queries on page ?
To use the query library
1On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click Query Library. Click
Administration.
Setting Up a Query Library | 161
2In the Query Library Administration dialog box on page 1593, under
Category, select the category for the query you want, or click New to
create a new category on page 168.
3Under Available Queries, select the query.
You can assign the query to a different category, change the query’s name,
description or location, or add an external query to the library.
4If you've modified the settings for an existing query, click Update. If
you've added a new query, click Add
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickQuery
Library ➤ Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog boxDialog Box
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Click Map ➤ Query ➤ Run Topology Query.
Menu
Run Query
Icon
ADERUNQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent Query ➤ Execute
As Preview-or- Right-clickCurrent Query ➤ Execute
Task Pane
As Defined-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As
Preview-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Defined
162 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Run Library Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADERUNXQUERY
Runs externally saved queries
Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run
External Query
Menu
ADERUNXQUERYCommand Line
Saving a Query
If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it.
You can save the query with the current drawing, or you can save it to an
external file. Saving to an external file is useful if you want to share a query
with another user or use it in another drawing.
If you save the query to an external file you can specify several additional
settings:
■Save List Of Active Drawings — Sets the drawing status to Active for
drawings involved in the saved query.
■Save Location Coordinates — Stores the coordinates used for location
queries. If you don't save the location query coordinates, AutoCAD Map
3D prompts you for them when you execute the query.
■Keep Reference In Library — Maintains a list of the external queries in the
Query Library. If you plan to reference the query in the Query Library, you
must provide a name and description for it.
■Save Alter Properties — Saves the property alteration definition with the
query.
■Auto Execute — Executes the query in addition to loading it. If you don't
select Auto Execute, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the query in the Define
Query dialog box and waits for you to click Execute Query. Do not select
this option if you want to modify a query before you run it.
You can .
Setting Up a Query Library | 163
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Drawing Queries on page 1071
■Adding an External Query to Your Library on page 167
To save a query
1Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
2Make sure the query to save is the current query. If it is not, modify the
current query or click load a different query.
3Click Save Query.
4In the Save Current Query dialog box on page 1596, select a category for
the query.
5Enter a name and description for the query.
6Select any other query options you want.
7To save the query to an external file, select Save To External File and
specify a file name.
To display the external query in the Run Library Query dialog box and
the Query Library Administration dialog box, select Keep Reference In
Library.
8Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
164 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Running a Saved Query
After you save queries, you can load, revise, and execute them.
NOTE If you plan to modify an externally saved query before executing it, do
not set Auto Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you
run the query, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the query in the Define Query dialog
box but does not execute it.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Drawing Queries on page 1071
■Adding an External Query to Your Library on page 167
■To run a query from the Query Library on page 165
■To run a query from Map Explorer on page 165
■To run an external query on page 166
To run a query from the Query Library
1Click Edit menu ➤ DWG Query.
2In the Run Library Query dialog box on page 1596, select the category for
the query.
3Select the query in the Available Queries list.
4Click Execute Query.
To run a query from Map Explorer
1On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click the query name.
Setting Up a Query Library | 165
2Do one of the following:
■Click Execute As Preview to execute the query as a preview query,
regardless of whether it was defined as a preview, draw, or report mode
query.
■Click Execute As Defined to execute the query using the query mode
with which it was defined.
To run an external query
1Click Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External
Query.
2In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3Click OK.
If you turned off the Auto Execute option when you saved the query, the
query loads but doesn't execute. To execute the query, click Setup menu ➤
More DWG Options ➤ Define Query. In the Define Query dialog box, click
Execute Query.
Quick Reference
ADERUNQUERY
Runs queries in the Query Library
Click Map ➤ Query ➤ Run Topology Query.
Menu
Run Query
Icon
ADERUNQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent Query ➤ Execute
As Preview-or- Right-clickCurrent Query ➤ Execute
Task Pane
As Defined-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As
Preview-or- Right-click a query ➤ Execute As Defined
Run Library Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADERUNXQUERY
166 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Runs externally saved queries
Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run
External Query
Menu
ADERUNXQUERYCommand Line
Adding an External Query to Your Library
You can list an external query in the query library. By adding a reference to
the external query to the library, you can organize the query with your other
queries. In addition, you can give the query a name and a description to help
you identify it.
You can add an external query to the Query Library for more than one drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Drawing Queries on page 1071
■Adding an External Query to Your Library on page 167
To reference an external query in the query library
1Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
2In the Query Library Administration dialog box on page 1593, select a
category.
3Under Selected Query, make sure the Query Type is set to External.
4Click Browse. Select the file that contains the external query.
5Specify a name and description for the query.
6Click OK.
To execute the query, click Edit menu ➤ DWG Query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Setting Up a Query Library | 167
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickQuery
Library ➤ Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog boxDialog Box
Using Query Library Categories
The Query Library lets you organize your queries into categories.
You can move a query to a new category, change a query’s name or description.
If you move an external query, you can specify the new location for the query.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Drawing Queries on page 1071
■Adding an External Query to Your Library on page 167
To add a category to the query library
1Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
2In the Query Library Administration dialog box on page 1593, do one of
the following:
■To add a category, under Category, click New.
Enter a name for the category. Click OK. Do not include spaces in the
name.
■To assign a query to a different category, under Category, select the
current category of the query.
From the Available Queries list, select the query. Click Category.
In the Change Category dialog box, under New Category, select the
new category for the query. Click OK.
168 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To change the name or description of a query, under Category, select
the category for the query.
Under Available Queries, select the query.
Under Selected Query, edit the query's name or description. For
external queries, you can specify a new location for the query.
Click Update.
■To delete or rename a category, select the category and click Remove
or Rename.
You cannot remove a category that contains queries. You must first
delete the queries or move the queries to a different category and then
remove the empty category.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERYLIB
Maintains the library of queries
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library
Menu
Query Library
Icon
ADEQUERYLIBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickQuery
Library ➤ Administration
Task Pane
Query Library Administration dialog boxDialog Box
Editing a Saved Query
Once you've saved a query to the query library, you can reload the query at
any time to review it or revise it.
If you save the query to an external file, it is saved as an AutoLISP script. Using
a text editor, you can modify an external query file and include AutoLISP API
commands. For more information, refer to "Editing Query Files", under "Using
Interface Functions" in the online AutoCAD Map 3D AutoLISP Reference.
Setting Up a Query Library | 169
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Drawing Queries on page 1071
■Adding an External Query to Your Library on page 167
To edit a query saved with the current drawing
1On the Map Explorer of the Task Pane, right-click a query name. Click
Edit. The Define Query dialog box on page 1572 appears with the selected
query loaded.
2Modify any conditions on page 1043.
3Modify any property alterations on page 1069.
4In the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
To save the changes to a new query, enter a new name and description.
Click OK.
5In the Define Query dialog box, click OK to save your changes without
running the query.
To edit an external query
1Click Edit menu ➤ More DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External
Query.
2In the Run External Query dialog box, select the query.
3Click OK.
The external query runs and becomes the current query.
4Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
5Modify any conditions on page 1043.
6Modify any property alterations on page 1069.
7Click Save.
NOTE To be able to edit an external query before you execute it, do not set Auto
Execute in the Save Current Query dialog box. That way, when you execute the
query, AutoCAD Map 3D loads the query in the Define Query dialog box but does
not execute it.
170 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Annotation Templates
To set up annotation templates
■To set up annotation on page 173
■To make an XREFed drawing with annotation templates available in the
current drawing on page 173
■To define an annotation template on page 174
■To change an annotation template on page 176
■To delete all references to a selected annotation template on page 178
■To delete an annotation template on page 178
Overview of Annotation Templates
In an annotation template, you define the information to display in the
annotation and the layout of that information. Annotation templates are
stored as specially named blocks within your drawing.
After you create an annotation template, you can insert instances of the
annotation into your drawing. Creating annotation templates and inserting
annotation is similar to creating and inserting blocks.
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 171
Using Annotation Templates from XREF Drawings
Use annotation to label objects with data value, such as the following:
■Attributes, such as object data
■Display properties, such as a lineweight
■Geometric values, such as the line direction
■Graphics, such as arrows, static text, or other geometry, added with
standard AutoCAD drawing commands
Text and properties are defined in the annotation template, and any values
defined by expressions are determined when the annotation is inserted. When
you add or remove textual elements or change properties or expressions in
an annotation template, the existing annotations based on that template do
not refresh automatically. Use the Refresh or the Update command to see
those changes.
Annotation templates are stored in the drawing as special blocks. The two
things that distinguish an annotation template block from a regular block are:
■The block name is prefixed with "ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" followed by
the annotation template name as specified in the Define Annotation
Template dialog box.
■There are special table objects stored within the block's extension
dictionary.
If you attach a drawing containing annotation templates as an XREF, the block
names in the XREFed drawing have a prefix that consists of the XREF drawing
file name followed by a vertical bar. Because the annotation commands identify
annotation templates by looking for the "ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_" at the
beginning of the block name, the templates within the XREFed drawing will
not be available via the annotation commands. Therefore, you will not be
able to edit those annotation templates or use them to annotate any objects
in the main drawing.
When you BIND an XREFed drawing containing annotation templates, the
XREFed block names will still have a prefix. To make these annotation
templates available in the current drawing, alter the block name of the
annotation template blocks using the RENAME command.
If you use the Insert option when you BIND an XREFed drawing containing
annotation templates, any annotation templates in the XREFed drawing are
immediately available in the main drawing as annotation templates. However,
172 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
if there is a name conflict between an annotation template in the XREFed
drawing and one in the main drawing, the template in the main drawing is
retained, and the similarly-named template in the XREFed drawing is discarded.
For more information, see Attach, Update, and Bind External References in
the AutoCAD help.
See also:
■Overview of Annotation on page 905
To set up annotation
1Define an annotation template. on page ?
2Attach annotation to objects. on page 907
When you BIND an XREFed drawing containing annotation templates, you
must remove a prefix from the XREFed block names to make them available
in the current drawing.
To make an XREFed drawing with annotation templates available in the
current drawing
1Using the RENAME command, select Blocks from the Named Objects list.
2Select the annotation template from the list of blocks in the Items list.
You will find blocks with names like
xrefdwgname$0$ACMAP_ANN_TEMPLATE_templatename.
3Remove xrefdwgname$0$ from the name of each template you want.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 173
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
At the Command prompt, enter mapanntext.Menu
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXTCommand Line
Annotation Text dialog boxDialog Box
Defining Annotation Templates
Annotation may have both textual and graphic contents. The textual contents,
as well as properties such as layer, color, insertion point, etc., are defined in
the annotation template, and any values defined by expressions are determined
when the annotation is inserted. When you add or remove textual elements
or change properties or expressions in an annotation template, the existing
annotations based on that template do not refresh automatically. Use the
Refresh or the Update command to see those changes.
See also:
■Attaching Annotation to Objects on page 907
To define an annotation template
1Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template.
2Click New.
3In the New Annotation Template Name dialog box on page 1314, type a
name for the template, and click OK.
A new drawing window opens, called Map Annotation Template
Editor.dwg. Define the template in this window and save it before
returning to the Define Annotation Template dialog box.
4On the command line, enter mapanntext. Press Enter.
This opens the Annotation Text dialog box on page 1308, in which you
specify what text will be included in the annotation template.
174 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
5In the Annotation Text dialog box, under Attribute, enter a Tag name
and Value for the annotation text.
For the value, enter static text or an expression that displays different
text depending on the object being annotated. Click to select from
a list of available properties and attributes.
NOTE To add multiple pieces of text to a template, each one must have a
tag name that is unique within that template.
6Specify the Object Properties and Text Options for the annotation text.
Enter static values or expressions that are evaluated against the object to
annotate. Click to select from a list of available properties and
attributes.
7Click OK.
8In the Map Annotation Template Editor.dwg window, click where the
text should start.
9Optionally, to include geometry as a part of the annotations, create it in
the Map Annotation Template Editor.dwg.
10 When you finish adding elements to the template, click Save Annotation
on the AnnTemplate toolbar.
The Map Annotation Template Editor.dwg window closes, returning to
the Define Annotation Template dialog box.
11 In the Define Annotation Template dialog box, specify default properties
and insertion options.
These settings control the appearance of the annotation template block.
If you selected ByBlock for any of the properties or options in the
Annotation Text dialog box, these are the settings that will be used.
12 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 175
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
At the Command prompt, enter mapanntext.Menu
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXTCommand Line
Annotation Text dialog boxDialog Box
Changing Annotation Templates
You can change the expressions in an existing template, for example, the
expression used to determine the value or location of the text element. You
can change the template definition, for example, adding or removing text
elements.
After changing a template, refresh or update the annotation associated with
that template to see the text changes in your drawing. If you change the
graphic elements in the template, the elements update automatically.
See also:
■Overview of Annotation on page 905
■Refreshing Annotation on page 909
■Updating Annotation on page 910
To change an annotation template
1Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template.
176 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2In the Template Name list, click the template to change.
3Do one or more of the following:
■Click Copy to make a copy of the template.
■Click Rename to rename the template.
■Click Edit Template Contents to modify the text or geometry elements
of the template.
■Change any properties or insertion options.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
At the Command prompt, enter mapanntext.Menu
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXTCommand Line
Annotation Text dialog boxDialog Box
Deleting Annotation Templates
You can delete an annotation template only if you first delete all references
to that template from the drawing.
Setting Up Annotation Templates | 177
See also:
■Overview of Annotation on page 905
■Deleting Annotation from Drawings on page 911
To delete all references to a selected annotation template
1Delete all references to the annotation template you plan to delete.
2Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete.
3Select an annotation template. Click OK.
All annotation based on the selected template is deleted.
To delete an annotation template
1Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template.
2Select the annotation template to delete from the Template Name list.
3Click Delete.
The selected annotation template is deleted.
Quick Reference
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
178 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setting Up Object Data
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the
table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
See also:
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
To set up object data
■To set up object data on page 179
■To create an object data table on page 180
■To modify an object data table on page 182
■To rename or remove an object data table on page 183
Overview of Setting Up Object Data
Object data tables store text and numerical information related to an object.
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table on page 180
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
To set up object data
1Specify a set of fields for the table. on page ?
2Assign a name, description, data type, and default value to each field.
3Use a separate procedure on page ? to attach a record from the table to
an object.
Setting Up Object Data | 179
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Creating an Object Data Table
You can create multiple object data tables in a single drawing. For example,
you can create one table with pipe flow information and a separate table with
inspection information.
Using the Same Table Name in Other Drawings
Take care when naming your tables. If you use the same table name in more
than one source drawing, be sure that all tables with same name have the
same fields and field types. If your current drawing has more than one source
drawing with the same object data table name, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
object table definition (or structure) for the first drawing that you activate. If
the other source drawings have tables with the same name but with different
fields, you will not be able to use those tables in the current drawing. If
necessary, you can rename or redefine an object data table.
See also:
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
To create an object data table
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
180 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
2In the Define Object Data dialog box on page 1539, select a table to modify,
or click New Table to create a new table.
■If you select an existing table, the Object Data Fields list displays fields
already defined for the table.
■If you click New Table, enter a name for the new table.
3To create a new data field, fill in the Field Definition area:
■Enter a name and description for the field.
■Select the field type. The type specifies what kind of information can
be entered in the field. For example, if you specify a numeric type,
you will not be able to enter letters in the field.
■Specify the default value for the field. This value is attached to the
object unless you change it.
4Click Add to add the new field to the table.
5Add any additional fields to the table.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying an Object Data Table
You can add, modify, and delete fields in newly defined object data tables
until you perform a save operation (either saving objects back to source
drawings or saving the current drawing). Once you perform a save operation,
Setting Up Object Data | 181
the table can be modified only by a Superuser. Also, you cannot modify an
object data table if you have already queried any object from a source drawing.
When you modify an object data field, AutoCAD Map 3D updates all instances
of the field attached to objects. If the object data table is large, this process
may take a long time.
Renaming and Deleting Tables
You can rename or delete object data tables if you have Superuser privileges.
You cannot rename or delete an object data table if you have already queried
any object from a source drawing.
If you rename a table, the new name must not duplicate an existing table
name.
WARNING When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table on page 180
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
Use the MAPLOGIN command to log in as a Superuser, or contact your system
administrator.
To modify an object data table
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
2In the Define Object Data dialog box on page 1539, under Table, select the
object data table to modify.
3Click Modify.
4In the Define New Object Data Table dialog box on page 1537, delete, add,
or update the fields:
■To add a field, under Field Definition, enter a name, type, description,
and default value for the field. Click Add.
182 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To modify a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to modify.
Under Field Definition, change any information. Click Update.
AutoCAD Map 3D updates the object data field and all instances of
it attached to objects. If you change the data type of a field from Real
to Integer, AutoCAD Map 3D drops everything to the right of the
decimal point, leaving only the value to the left of the decimal point.
■To delete a field, under Object Data Fields, select the field to delete.
Click Delete.
To rename or remove an object data table
1Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
2In the Define Object Data dialog box, under Table, select the object data
table you want to rename or remove.
3To rename the table, click Rename. Enter a new table name and click OK.
To delete the table, click Delete. The table and its object data fields and
field values are deleted from every object to which they are attached.
NOTE When you delete an object data table from a drawing, the table is
deleted from all attached, active source drawings.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up Object Data | 183
Using Data from Feature Sources
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility
pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial
database or file is referred to as a feature source. You can bring feature source
data into your map using Data Connect. For detailed information about using
feature sources, see Working with Feature Sources on page 501.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings
You can attach a database to your drawing and link records from that table
to objects in your drawing.
To set up data sources for drawings
■To use a database in a drawing on page 185
■To display information about a database table on page 185
■To open a table or database query on page 185
■To open a linked table or query on page 185
■To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane on
page 188
■To attach a data source by right-clicking the Data Sources folder in the
Task Pane on page 188
■To automatically configure a data source on page 191
■To manually configure a data source on page 192
■To modify an existing data link file on page 192
■To connect a data source on page 193
■To disconnect a data source on page 193
Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings
A data source is a database table or a set of tables.
When you attach a data source to a drawing, the data source is listed on the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. You can view and edit data in the data
source or link records from the data source to objects in the drawing.
While keeping the data source attached, you can disconnect the data source
to save resources and reconnect when you are ready to work with the data.
184 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
TIP You can work with an external database table without using the database
application itself.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■To use a database in a drawing on page 185
■To display information about a database table on page 185
■To open a table or database query on page 185
■To open a linked table or query on page 185
To use a database in a drawing
Do one of the following:
■From Windows Explorer, drag a database file to the Map Explorer tab of
the Task Pane.
If the Map Explorer tab does not immediately display the data source,
right-click a blank space in the Map Explorer tab. Click Refresh.
■Right-click the Data Sources folder on the Map Explorer tab and select
Attach.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates the files it needs to communicate
with the database application. However, for some database types, you must
configure these files yourself.
■Click File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External Records.
To display information about a database table
■Right-click the table name in the Map Explorer tab. Click Properties.
You can see information such as column names and types.
To open a table or database query
■Double-click the item.
To open a linked table or query
■Double-click the link template name.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 185
NOTE The instructions in this section of the Help will not work if you connect
your database using the dbConnect command. For information on using the
dbConnect command and features, look up "dbconnect" in the help index.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External
Records
Menu
MAPATTACHDBCommand Line
Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tabTask Pane
MAPCONFIGDB
Configures the connection to an external data source
Click Setup ➤ Create/Edit a Source of Data ➤ External
Records.
Menu
MAPCONFIGDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickData Sources ➤ Configure
Task Pane
Configure Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPCONNECTDB
Connects to an attached data source
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Connect To
External Records
Menu
MAPCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template ➤ Connect-or- To connect all data sources:
Right-clickData Sources ➤ Connect All
Task Pane
Connect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
186 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Detach External
Records
Menu
MAPDETACHDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Detach
Task Pane
Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect
From External Records
Menu
MAPDISCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data
source ➤ Disconnect-or- To disconnect all data
sources: Right-clickData Sources ➤ Disconnect All
Task Pane
Disconnect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
Attaching a Data Source
To use data from an external data source, attach the data source to the drawing.
When you attach a data source, it appears in the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane along with the tables and database queries associated with it.
For the following data sources, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates the
files it needs to communicate with the data source:
■.dbf
■.db
■.mdb
■.xls (must have at least one named range)
■.udl
For other data sources, you must manually create the files on page 189 before
you can attach the data source.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 187
Tips
You can set an option on page 212 to have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you for
the database version each time you attach a data source or you can specify a
default version.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the UDL (Universal Data Link) on page 1765 files in a
specific directory. If it does not find a UDL file in this directory, it creates a
new UDL file. You can change the directory used for UDL files.
See also:
■Configuring a Data Source on page 189
■Associating Database Versions with File Extensions on page 219
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings on page 212
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane
1Using Explorer or My Computer, select the database file and drag it to
the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
You can drag and drop databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db,
.dbf, .mdb, and .xls.
2If prompted, select a version and click OK.
3If prompted, enter your user name and password.
To attach a data source by right-clicking the Data Sources folder in the Task
Pane
1Right-click the Data Sources folder on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane and select Attach.
2In the Attach Data Source dialog box, select the file location and type.
You can attach databases with the following extensions: .udl, .db, .dbf,
.mdb, and .xls.
3Click Attach.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates the necessary configuration files and attaches the
database.
188 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
For information on using specific database types with AutoCAD Map 3D, see
the AutoCAD help.
Quick Reference
MAPATTACHDB
Attaches a data source to the current drawing
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External
Records
Menu
MAPATTACHDBCommand Line
Drag a data source onto the Map Explorer tabTask Pane
MAPDETACHDB
Detaches a data source from the current drawing
File menu ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Detach External
Records
Menu
MAPDETACHDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Detach
Task Pane
Source dialog boxDialog Box
Configuring a Data Source
Microsoft Windows uses UDL (Universal Data Link) on page 1765 files to point to
specific data sources. The UDL file lists the location of the data, the type of
database, the version of the database, and the appropriate database driver.
For each data source that you use with AutoCAD Map 3D, you must have a
UDL file in the AutoCAD Map 3D data source directory. Once the UDL file
exists in the data source directory, you can attach the data source to any
drawing.
For most data sources, AutoCAD Map 3D creates the UDL file automatically
when you attach a database. However, for some database types, you will need
to manually create the UDL file.
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 189
When you edit or create a UDL file, you use the Microsoft Windows Data Link
Properties dialog box. For more information on using this dialog box, refer to
your Microsoft Windows documentation.
Drivers
To read external data files, AutoCAD Map 3D uses drivers that translate the
data to a standard format. The first time you use a data source with AutoCAD
Map 3D, AutoCAD Map 3D determines the appropriate driver for the data
source. It stores this information in the UDL file.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports these drivers:
■Jet provider, which works with Microsoft Access database files
■SQL Server provider
■Oracle provider
■ODBC driver, which works with ODBC-compliant databases
These drivers are installed with AutoCAD Map 3D.
Because the ODBC provider works with many different database types, it
requires additional information about each specific database type. It gets this
information from a Data Source Name (DSN) that registers information about
the database type. You need only one DSN for each database type.
For the following ODBC-compliant databases, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a
DSN for you when you attach the database:
■Microsoft Access
■dBase
■Microsoft Excel
■Paradox
■Microsoft Visual FoxPro
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D connects to Microsoft Access using the Jet
provider, which does not require a DSN. If you want to connect to Microsoft
Access using the ODBC driver, you must create a DSN.
For information on creating a DSN, refer to your Microsoft Windows
documentation.
190 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Displaying Configuration Dialog Boxes
When you attach a data source that does not already have a UDL file, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates the UDL file and determines the settings for Windows data
source configuration.
If the Expert variable is set to 3 or more, AutoCAD Map 3D determines the
settings, and displays the data source configuration dialog boxes so you can
review or modify the settings.
NOTE If you are using the ODBC provider, before you manually create the data
link file, you must have a DSN (Data Source Name) for the database software.
Windows may have created this file when you installed your database software.
See also:
■Accessing Data from ODBC on page 289
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings on page 212
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■To automatically configure a data source on page 191
■To manually configure a data source on page 192
■To modify an existing data link file on page 192
To automatically configure a data source
1Drag and drop one of the following database types onto the Map Explorer
tab of the Task Pane:
■Microsoft Access
■dBASE
■Microsoft Excel (must have at least one named range; do not use
DATABASE or other reserved words as a range name)
■Paradox
■Microsoft Visual FoxPro
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 191
To manually configure a data source
1At the command prompt, enter mapconnectdb.
2Type a name for the data source and click OK. The data link file will have
the same name.
3On the Provider tab of the Data Link Properties dialog box, select the
database provider. If you are using the ODBC provider, select the name
of the DSN.
4Enter additional information as needed and click OK. The Data Link
Properties dialog box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
For help on database configuration, see the AutoCAD help. Additional
information is available by clicking Help in the Data Link Properties dialog
box.
To modify an existing data link file
1At the command prompt, enter mapconnectdb.
2Select the data source and click OK.
3Make the modifications and click OK. The Data Link Properties dialog
box is a Microsoft Windows dialog box.
NOTE If you modify a data link file for a data source that is currently attached
and connected, the changes will not take effect until the next time you connect
the data source.
NOTE If you have more than one copy of a UDL file, be sure to edit the copy in
the AutoCAD Map 3D data links directory.
Quick Reference
EXPERT
Controls whether certain prompts are issued (system variable)
EXPERTCommand Line
MAPCONFIGDB
192 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Configures the connection to an external data source
Click Setup ➤ Create/Edit a Source of Data ➤ External
Records.
Menu
MAPCONFIGDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickData Sources ➤ Configure
Task Pane
Configure Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
Connecting a Data Source
To free up memory or database connections, you can disconnect a data source
but keep it attached to the current drawing. When you want to use the data
source again, reconnecting is a one-step process.
TIP You can set an option to automatically connect on page 212 to all attached
data sources each time you open a drawing.
See also:
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings on page 212
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings on page 184
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
To connect a data source
■On the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, double-click the data source.
To disconnect a data source
■Right-click the data source. Click Disconnect.
Quick Reference
MAPCONNECTDB
Connects to an attached data source
Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings | 193
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Connect To
External Records
Menu
MAPCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source or a link
template ➤ Connect-or- To connect all data sources:
Right-clickData Sources ➤ Connect All
Task Pane
Connect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDISCONNECTDB
Disconnects an attached, connected database
File menu ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect
From External Records
Menu
MAPDISCONNECTDBCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data
source ➤ Disconnect-or- To disconnect all data
sources: Right-clickData Sources ➤ Disconnect All
Task Pane
Disconnect Data Source dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Options
You can change many settings that affect the work environment, how the
program starts up, whether users will need to log in, and settings for your
current drawings, data sources, and more.
See also:
■Setting Raster Image Options on page 226
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings on page 212
■Setting AutoCAD Options (look up “interface options, setting” in the help
index)
■To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 196
■To set Task Pane options on page 200
■To hide or display the Task Pane at startup on page 200
■To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session on page 200
■To refresh Map Explorer on page 200
194 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane on page 200
■To set drawing options on page 204
■To set multi-user options on page 206
■To set system options on page 208
■To specify coordinate system options on page 209
■To set coordinate geometry options on page 211
■To quickly change the azimuth bearing on page 211
■To set data source options on page 213
■To change the expert setting on page 213
■To change the default data link file directory on page 213
■To set Data View options on page 215
■To specify Feature Edit Options on page 217
■To set metadata options on page 218
■To associate database versions with files extensions on page 219
■To set query options on page 221
■To have hatch created by property alteration be associative on page 223
■To set AutoCAD Map 3D options on page 225
Overview of Setting Options
The following table summarizes the options you can set and where these
settings are located.
Go to...To change settings for...
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤ Task
Pane on page 1629 tab.
Default display of the Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Current Drawing on page 1629 tab.
The current drawing
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Multi-User on page 1635 tab
Login and object locking
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
System on page 1635 tab
Log files and data sources
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Current Drawing on page 1629 tab
Coordinate systems
Overview of Setting Options | 195
Go to...To change settings for...
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box on
page 1637
Coordinate geometry
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Data Source on page 1634 tab
Data sources for drawings (and file exten-
sion associations for them) and the Data
View window
Metadata Options dialog box on page 1225Metadata
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Query on page 1631tab
NOTE There are also query-related settings
on the following tabs:
■Save Back on page 1633
■System on page 1635
■Task Pane on page 1629
Queries
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box ➤
Query on page 1631tab
Associative hatch for drawing objects with
boundaries
Raster Extension Options dialog box on
page 1614
Raster images
mapimport.ini on page ? and mapforeign-
fileproperties.ini on page ?
Import defaults
mapexport.ini on page ?Export defaults
To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2Click a tab.
3Modify options.
4Click OK to save the settings.
196 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE
Docks and undocks the Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACECommand Line
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar
at the top of the pane (docked)
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command)Dialog Box
MAPWSPACE
Shows or hides the Task Pane
View menu ➤ Task Pane
Menu
MAPWSPACECommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Close
Task Pane
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command)Dialog Box
Overview of Setting Options | 197
MAPWSREFRESH
Redisplays the Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHCommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Refresh
Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHDialog Box
MAPCGAZBASE
Sets the azimuth base
Azimuth Distance
Icon
MAPCGAZBASECommand Line
MAPCGSETUP
Specifies coordinate geometry settings
At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup.Menu
Setup COGO Options
Icon
MAPCGSETUPCommand Line
Setting Coordinate Geometry OptionsDialog Box
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
198 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Setting Task Pane Options
You can specify what to display in the Task Pane and what displays when you
start the program.
■Map Explorer Categories To Display — Lets you select which categories
(nodes) you want to display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
The visibility of some nodes is dependent on the visibility of others. For
example, the Tables node is visible in the Map Explorer tab of Task Pane
only when you select both Data Sources and Tables.
NOTE When you attach drawings with the Topologies node visible, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates a list of all the topologies to display under Topologies in Map
Explorer. If you attach a large number of drawings containing topologies at
the same time, the creation of the topology list increases the processing time.
To reduce processing time, hide the Topologies node before attaching the
drawings.
■Show Task Pane On Startup — Specifies whether to display the Task Pane
when you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
If the Task Pane is not visible, you can display it by entering mapwspace
on the command line.
■Show Properties Palette On Startup — Specifies whether to display the
Properties palette when you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
If the Properties palette is not visible, you can display it by entering
properties on the command line.
■Show Display Manager On Startup — Specifies whether to use the Display
Manager, or the older Thematic Manager on startup.
This setting takes effect the next time you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■The Task Pane on page 40
■Getting Information About Drawing Objects on page 935
■To set Task Pane options on page 200
■To hide or display the Task Pane at startup on page 200
■To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session on page 200
Setting Task Pane Options | 199
■To refresh Map Explorer on page 200
■To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane on page 200
To set Task Pane options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Task Pane
tab.
3Modify the options you want:
■Under Map Explorer Categories To Display, select the categories to
display on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
■Select which palettes you want to show at startup.
4Click OK.
To hide or display the Task Pane at startup
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, click the Task Pane
on page 1629 tab.
3Select Show Task Pane On Startup.
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session
■Click View menu ➤ Task Pane.
To refresh Map Explorer
■Right-click a clear area in Map Explorer, and click Refresh; or enter
mapwsrefresh at the Command prompt.
To adjust the transparency of the Task Pane
1Right-click the title bar of the Task Pane and choose Transparency.
2In the Transparency dialog box, adjust the transparency level.
3Click OK.
200 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDOCKWSPACE
Docks and undocks the Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACECommand Line
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar
at the top of the pane (docked)
Task Pane
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command)Dialog Box
MAPWSPACE
Shows or hides the Task Pane
View menu ➤ Task Pane
Menu
MAPWSPACECommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Close
Task Pane
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command)Dialog Box
MAPWSREFRESH
Redisplays the Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHCommand Line
Right-click a blank area ➤ Refresh
Task Pane
MAPWSREFRESHDialog Box
Setting Task Pane Options | 201
Setting Drawing Options
You can specify general settings and coordinate transformation options for
the current drawing. If you are working with drawings that were created using
different global coordinate systems, AutoCAD Map 3D standardizes the
drawings based on the current drawings's global coordinate system.
NOTE Once you bring objects into the current drawing, do not change the
coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to source
drawings. The save-back process determines whether adjustments are necessary
to restore objects to the correct coordinate system when you save them back to
source drawings.
Activate Attached Source Drawings
Set any of the following options:
■From Last Session At Startup — Activates the drawings that were active the
last time you quit AutoCAD Map 3D. If you don't select this option, all
drawings are inactive on startup.
■After Attaching — Sets the status of a drawing to Active when you attach
it. If you don't select this option, all drawings are inactive when you attach
them.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments:Adjust Sizes And Scales
area
Set any of the following options:
■For Changes In Units — Use this option when you are working with text
and block objects from a source drawing that uses different coordinate
system units than the current drawing. For example, if your source drawing
uses meters and the current drawing uses U.S. Survey Feet, you can scale
text and blocks so that their size or scale measures in feet rather than
meters.
If you don't select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D does not adjust the size
or scale of text and block objects. For example, if you have a block that is
five meters long in the source drawing, it will be five feet long when you
bring it into the current drawing.
202 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Do not change this setting after you bring objects into the current drawing,
or you might introduce unintended changes to text and blocks when you
save them back to their source drawings.
■For Map Distortion — Use this option to adjust the size and scale of text
and blocks to correct for map distortion introduced when you represent
a spherical object (earth) in a Cartesian coordinate system.
For example, two objects, located at the northern and southern extremes
of a map, of equal length in coordinate system X will remain the same
length when transformed to coordinate system Y.
If you don't select this option, the two objects will be scaled to different
lengths in coordinate system Y according to the relative map distortion
(or grid scale factor).
For Map Distortion in the Adjust Sizes And Scales area is available only if
you selected the previous option, For Changes In Units.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments:Adjust Rotations area
Set any of the following options:
■For Map Distortion — Adjusts the angle of text and blocks to correct for
map distortion due to the convergence angle (the deviation of the Y axis
of a Cartesian coordinate system from true north).
■For Zero-Rotation Objects — Specifies that text and blocks that have a
rotation value of zero in the source drawing are adjusted to correct
distortion due to the convergence angle.
If you select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the convergence
angle for text and blocks with a zero rotation value. If you don't select this
option, AutoCAD Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero
rotation value, even if there is a convergence angle.
For Zero-Rotation Objects is available only if you selected the previous
option, For Map Distortion, in the Adjust Rotations area.
Select Adjust Elevations to adjust the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you
select For Changes In Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes And
Scales.
Setting Drawing Options | 203
Data Source Options
Set any of the following options:
■Select Reconnect Data Source When Drawing Opens to reconnect the
databases that were connected the last time you quit AutoCAD Map 3D.
■In the Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List box, enter the
number of SQL conditions to store in the SQL condition history list.
Reducing the size of this list saves memory and reduces the number of
conditions you must scroll through when you search for a particular
condition. The first condition added to the list is the first one to be dropped
when AutoCAD Map 3D reaches the maximum number you specify.
See also:
■Activating a Drawing on page 148
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings on page 212
To set drawing options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Current
Drawing on page 1629 tab.
3Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
204 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Multi-user Options
You can specify options that affect how AutoCAD Map 3D operates for all
users, across all drawings. For example, you can set login or object locking
options. The system administrator controls these settings.
These options apply to all AutoCAD Map 3D users in a single installation and
are set by the system administrator. The settings affect all drawings and, in
network installations, are common to all users.
Force User Login
You must have Superuser privilege to set this option.
If Force User Login is enabled, users are required to log in at AutoCAD Map
3D startup. If a user attempts to halt log in by pressing the Escape key,
AutoCAD Map 3D assigns view-only privileges, and the user cannot alter the
drawing set, edit drawings, or perform queries. Once logged in, a user may
log in under a different login name, even while working in a drawing with
active source drawings.
If Force User Login is not enabled and the user does not log in, AutoCAD Map
3D uses the user's operating system login name to identify the user when
locking objects, creating the .DWK file, and restoring options. A user may log
in using his or her login name while working in drawings, including drawings
with attached source drawings.
Enable Object Locking
Protects objects that are being edited from being modified by other AutoCAD
Map 3D users.
You cannot change the Enable Object Locking option while drawings are
attached. If this option is not selected, only one user at a time can attach a
drawing.
Setting Multi-user Options | 205
Object locking is recommended on networked systems to avoid conflicts when
querying and editing. If you are working on a stand-alone system, you don't
need object locking.
See also:
■Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D on page 132
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
To set multi-user options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Multi-User
on page 1635 tab.
3Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting System Options
You can specify options that affect the operation of a single installation of
AutoCAD Map 3D.
206 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Log File Options
■Select Log File Active to create a log file for AutoCAD Map 3D messages.
■In the File Name box, provide the path and name for a log file in which
to record error, warning, and diagnostic messages. The default name is
acadmap.log. Optionally, you can click Browse to search your file system
for an existing file. AutoCAD Map 3D appends messages to the file you
select.
■Specify one of the following under Message Level:
Level 0: Error Messages — The log file contains error messages that describe
potential problems you may encounter. For example, if you attempt to
attach a drawing that is already attached, AutoCAD Map 3D produces an
error message that is stored in the log file.
Level 1: Error And Warning Messages — The log file contains warning
messages in addition to error messages. Warning messages alert you to
potential problems. For example, if you use duplicate link template names,
AutoCAD Map 3D produces a warning message that is stored in the log
file.
Level 2: Error, Warning And Diagnostic Messages — The log file contains
status messages as well as error and warning messages.
Number of Drawings Loaded Into Memory At Once
When you attach and activate drawings, AutoCAD Map 3D opens them in
memory. You do not see the open drawings, but AutoCAD Map 3D must open
them to perform operations.
The number of drawings that AutoCAD Map 3D can open in memory at the
same time depends on several factors. These include the size of the drawings,
amount of memory, and your system setup.
The number you specify here does not limit the number of active drawings.
AutoCAD Map 3D opens and closes files in memory as it needs them. If your
system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number (up to 200) to
make queries go faster.
Default Directories
To specify a default directory for externally saved queries or cache files, enter
the path in the appropriate box. Or click Browse to locate an existing directory.
Setting System Options | 207
See also:
■Editing Data in Attached Drawings on page 605
■Overview of Using the Query Library on page 161
To set system options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the System
on page 1635 tab.
3Modify the options you want. For information on each option, see the
Concept tab of this topic.
4To to enhance the performance of AutoCAD Map 3D, click Clear Cache.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Coordinate System Options
You can set a number of options to determine how AutoCAD Map 3D performs
coordinate system transformations and responds when you open drawings
with embedded coordinate system definitions.
208 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
These options apply only to the current drawing. Each time you open a
drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect other drawings.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments
Coordinate transformation allows the manipulation of the coordinate
geometry. Use the Coordinate Transformation Adjustment options to specify
how AutoCAD Map 3D performs coordinate transformations through
adjustments for size, scale, rotation, and elevation.
After you query objects into a drawing from source drawings, do not change
the coordinate transformation options if you plan to save changes back to the
source drawings.
NOTE The AutoCAD Map 3D simple transformation options, available in the
Drawing Settings dialog box, cannot be used with coordinate transformations.
Storing Coordinate Systems in the Drawing
When you open a drawing that has a coordinate system that is not in your
dictionary, AutoCAD Map 3D can add that coordinate system definition to
your dictionary. You can choose to always add the definitions, never add the
definitions, or have AutoCAD Map 3D prompt you each time.
Units
Specify the units to use when displaying geodetic distance.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Defining Coordinate Systems on page 82
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Setting Drawing Options on page 202
To specify coordinate system options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options. Click the Current Drawing
on page 1629 tab.
2Under Coordinate Transformation Adjustments, specify how you want
AutoCAD Map 3D to perform coordinate transformations.
Setting Coordinate System Options | 209
3Click the Coordinate Systems tab on page 1636.
■Under Coordinate System Definitions Stored In Drawing, specify how
you want AutoCAD Map 3D to respond when you open drawings
with embedded coordinate system definitions.
■Under Geodetic Distance, select the units to use when displaying
geodetic distance.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options
You can set the following coordinate geometry options:
■If North on your map is not aligned with the Y axis, specify the angle for
North.
■If azimuth bearings on your map are measured relative to South, set the
azimuth base to South. Otherwise, leave it set to North.
■If your COGO information sometimes includes elevation information, set
the COGO commands to prompt for 3D data. If you never include 3D data,
you can turn this prompt off.
210 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands on page 850
To set coordinate geometry options
1From the Input and Inquiry toolbar typically located at the bottom left
of your application window, select .
2In the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box on page 1637, set any of the
following options.
■To change the setting for North, under Set North Direction, specify
the direction from the Y axis to North on your map. Enter a number
that represents the angular distance measured clockwise from the Y
axis.
■Specify whether bearings in your map are relative to North or South.
■To have AutoCAD Map 3D always prompt for elevation, grade, or
slope, select Prompt For 3D Data Input.
3Click OK to save your settings.
To quickly change the azimuth bearing
1At the command prompt, enter mapcgazbase.
2Enter n for North or s for South and press Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPCGAZBASE
Sets the azimuth base
Azimuth Distance
Icon
MAPCGAZBASECommand Line
MAPCGSETUP
Setting Coordinate Geometry Options | 211
Specifies coordinate geometry settings
At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup.Menu
Setup COGO Options
Icon
MAPCGSETUPCommand Line
Setting Coordinate Geometry OptionsDialog Box
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings
You can specify a number of options for attaching data sources.
■Specify whether data sources, tables, database queries, and link templates
appear on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
■Specify whether AutoCAD Map 3D automatically reconnects the data
sources that were connected the last time you closed this drawing.
■Specify the default driver to use when you drop an MDB file onto the Map
Explorer tab.
■Specify the default database version for files with a .db, .dbf, or .xls file
extension that you drop on the Map Explorer tab.
■Change the Expert setting to display or hide the data source configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 3 or above displays the configuration
dialog boxes. An Expert setting of 2 or less hides the dialog boxes.
■Change the default location for UDL (Universal Data Link) on page 1765 files.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings on page 184
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■To set Data View options on page 215
■To set data source options on page 213
■To change the expert setting on page 213
■To change the default data link file directory on page 213
212 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To set data source options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628:
■On the Task Pane on page 1629 tab, select the items to display on the
Map Explorer tab.
■On the Current Drawing on page 1629 tab, specify whether to
automatically connect to attached data sources when you open a
drawing and how many filters or conditions should be stored in the
History List.
■On the Data Source on page 1634 tab, specify the default driver to use
when you drop an MDB file on the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
Click Associate to specify the default database version
To change the expert setting
1At the command prompt, enter expert.
2Enter an expert setting.
For information on the Expert system variable, look up "system variables" in
the help index.
To change the default data link file directory
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2On the Files tab of the Options dialog box, specify the Data Sources
Location.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
Setting Data Source Options for Drawings | 213
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Data View Options
Data View options apply to a single user's AutoCAD Map 3D environment.
All drawings opened by a particular user display these settings, but they do
not affect others who open the same drawings.
Display Of Multiple Tables
You can specify the number of Data Views to use when displaying tables.
■Show Each Table In A Separate Data View: Opens a new Data View window
for each open table. Move between tables by clicking on the window you
want.
■Show All Tables In One Data View: Opens only one Data View window.
When you open a new table, the previous table is automatically closed.
Data Views
You can specify the behavior of the Data View.
■Open In Read-Only Mode: Opens the Data View in read-only mode. When
this option is selected, you cannot edit data in the Data View.
■Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing: Saves all formatting
changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders, that you make in
the Data View.
214 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Keep On Top: Specifies whether the Data View window remains on top of
all other windows, even when it is not the active window.
See also:
■Overview of Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Objects on page
860
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
To set Data View options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Data
Source on page 1634 tab.
3Modify the options you want.
4To change the number of filters that AutoCAD Map 3D displays in the
Table Filter History dialog box, select the Current Drawing on page 1629
tab. Enter a new number.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
Setting Data View Options | 215
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Geospatial Feature Editing Options
You can specify options for editing geospatial features.
■Automatic Checkout: You must check out geospatial features before editing
them. This option allows you check out features automatically when you
edit them.
■Automatic Edit Update: When you edit geospatial features in AutoCAD
Map 3D you can also update the original data resources. This option allows
you to automate updating your feature source.
■Feature Checkout Options: You can check out geospatial features with as
drawing objects or geospatial features.
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use some common ACAD
editing commands in addition to geospa-
Allows you to use many common ACAD
editing commands
tial feature-specific editing commands (for
example, MAPFEATURESPLIT on page 1389
and MAPFEATUREMERGE on page 1388)
Edited features are represented as geospa-
tial geometries (for example, MAPPOLY-
GONS).
Edited features represented as AutoCAD
geometries (for example, closed polylines
are used to represent polygonal features)
Supports multipart (multipolygons, mul-
tilines, and multipoints) geospatial features
and editing, such as the Hawaiian islands.
Most existing custom or third-party editing
applications (LISP, VB or ObjectARX)
should continue to work. Some may re-
quire minor updates.
Preserves and allows you to edit M and Z
values.
Some existing AutoCAD Map 3D editing
commands will continue to work on fea-
tures (for example, rubbersheeting [ADER-
SHEET on page 1386]).
Allows you to use feature styling.Allows you to use feature styling.
216 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Checkin Prompt Timer: This option allows you to set a recurring check-in
prompt.
See also:
■Editing Features on page 588
To specify Feature Edit Options
1Click the Feature Editing Options icon on the Data toolbar, or enter
mapfeatureeditoptions at the command prompt.
2Select the options you want using the checkboxes. If you select the
checkin prompt, specify the prompt interval in minutes.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS
Specifies options for editing features
Feature Edit Options
Icon
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONSCommand Line
Feature Editing Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Metadata Options
AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 supports FGDC metadata down to the feature source
and object class levels. You can set options for your metadata on the Metadata
Options dialog box. Options for metadata include metadata template import
and export, latitude/longitude precision, and automatic updating.
See also:
■Setting Metadata Options on page 1225
Setting Metadata Options | 217
To set metadata options
1Launch the Metadata Viewer on page 1228.
2On the Metadata Viewer toolbar, click Options.
3Do any of the following:
■To use a metadata template, click the Template tab and select Use
Template and select the template you want from the list. If no
templates appear, click Import and import an FGDC-compliant
template.
■To set Latitude/longitude precision, click the Preference tab and set
the number of digits that display after the decimal point for your
reported latitude and longitude values from 0 to 10. Both values are
6 by default.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Setting InfoCenter Options
The InfoCenter, located on the top menu bar, helps you find information
about AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 quickly. When you type a question into its
text-entry box, the InfoCenter searches the AutoCAD Map 3D documentation
as well as any documents you add to the search settings.
Using the InfoCenter, you can:
■Search a custom set of the documents, such as all the User Guides and
Tutorials. If you're a developer, you can set InfoCenter to search your
favorite developer Help.
■Search a specific document.
218 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Add your own documents to the search.
■Keep up-to-date on your favorite RSS feeds, such as the Knowledge Base
and the Discussion Boards.
For details about the InfoCenter, see the AutoCAD help.
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions
This information applies only to drawing objects.
When you drag and drop a database onto the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane, you can select the version of the database used to create the database.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you each time to specify the version
that was used. If all your databases were created with a specific version of the
software, you can set an option to automatically select that version.
See also:
■Attaching a Data Source on page 187
■Configuring a Data Source on page 189
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings on page 212
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
To associate database versions with files extensions
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Data
Source on page 1634 tab.
3Under Associate Database Versions With File Extensions, select Associate.
4In the Associate Database Versions dialog box on page 1411, under each
database name, do one of the following:
■To be prompted each time you drag and drop a database file onto the
Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane, select Always Prompt.
■To associate a database file extension with a specific version of the
database software, select Always Use. Select the correct version.
Associating Database Versions with File Extensions | 219
When you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer tab, AutoCAD
Map 3D checks the file extension and uses the specified version of
the database software.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Query Options (DWG)
You can set several options that determine how queries run, how they appear
onscreen, and how they are saved.
On the Task Pane Tab
You can hide or display the query node on the Map Explorer tab of the Task
Pane.
NOTE The Queries option that appears under the Data Sources category is for
database queries.
Options you set on the Task Pane tab apply to a single user's AutoCAD Map
3D environment. All drawings opened by a particular user display these
settings, but they do not affect others who open the same drawings.
220 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
On the Query Tab
You can set specific query options, including the default joining operator,
display parameters for preview queries, and options for location conditions.
Options you set on the Query tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
On the Save Back Tab
You can set options that determine if queried objects are added to the save
set.
Options you set on the Save Back tab apply only to the current drawing. Each
time you open this drawing, these settings take effect, but they do not affect
other drawings.
On the System Tab
You can specify a default directory for externally saved queries.
See also:
■The Task Pane on page 40
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
To set query options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2Click the Task Pane on page 1629 tab to hide or display the query node on
the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane.
3Click the Query on page 1631 tab to set specific query options.
4Click the Save Back on page 1633 tab set options that determine if queried
objects are added to the save set.
5Click the System on page 1635 tab to specify a default directory for
externally saved queries.
6Click OK.
Setting Query Options (DWG) | 221
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Using Associative Hatch
You can set an option to specify whether hatch objects created by property
alteration queries and thematic mapping are associative.
Hatch patterns used in thematic maps.
Associative hatch maintains a link between a hatch object and its boundary:
if the boundary is modified, the hatch updates automatically. However, if the
boundary if modified so that it no longer encloses the hatch or if any of the
boundary objects are deleted, the association between the hatch and the
boundary is lost.
When querying multiple files, it is very easy to lose the association between
a hatch object and its boundary. If you want associative hatch, the easiest
solution may be to delete the old hatch object and recreate the associative
hatch after you finish modifying the attached drawings.
222 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
To maintain an existing association, keep these points in mind:
■If you modify an object that is part of a hatch boundary, be sure your
changes do not break the boundary. That is, you can enlarge a circle, but
don't trim it. You can extend the corner of a square, but don't open it up.
■To save a new associative hatch object to an attached drawing, all the
boundary objects must be in the same attached drawing. In addition, all
objects must be saved to the attached drawing at the same time. If any of
the boundary objects are saved to a different file or are saved at a different
time, the association is lost.
■When you add an associative hatch object to the save set, all its boundary
objects are added automatically. If any of the boundary objects are locked,
the hatch is not added to the save set.
■When you remove an associative hatch object from the save set, boundary
objects are removed from the save set automatically.
■When you add a boundary object to the save set, hatch objects associated
with that boundary are not added to the save set automatically. To maintain
the association, add the hatch object to the save set.
■When combining solid hatch with text, use the DRAWORDER command
to make the text visible on top of the hatch.
See also:
■Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page
1044
■Setting Polygon Options on page 832
To have hatch created by property alteration be associative
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options. Select the Query on page
1631 tab.
2Under Query Options, select Create Associative Hatch Objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Using Associative Hatch | 223
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Saving Option Settings
AutoCAD Map 3D saves your options in one of three places, depending on
the option type.
■Drawing options are saved in the drawing.
■User and installation options are saved in the acadmap.ini file. On startup,
AutoCAD Map 3D searches for the acadmap.ini file first in the current
directory, then in all the directories listed in the AutoCAD Map 3D path,
and finally in the AutoCAD Map 3D executable directory. If it does not
find the acadmap.ini file, the program creates the file in the current working
directory.
■Multi-user options are saved in the binary acadmap.sys file. The acadmap.sys
file is located in the AutoCAD Map 3D executable directory. After setting
the multi-user options, the system administrator should make the file
read-only to prevent users from modifying or deleting it.
NOTE When you uninstall AutoCAD Map 3D, acadmap.ini is also uninstalled. If
you have modified the settings in this file, you should save acadmap.ini prior to
uninstalling. If you uninstall and then re-install AutoCAD Map 3D, you can simply
replace the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved one. Note that Map release
4 and earlier saved option settings in the ade.ini file. If you uninstall release 4 or
earlier and then install a newer release of AutoCAD Map 3D, you cannot replace
the newly installed acadmap.ini with the saved ade.ini. Instead, you will need to
reset your options in the AutodCAD Map Options dialog box.
224 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Setting Drawing Options on page 202
■Setting Task Pane Options on page 199
■Setting System Options on page 206
■Setting Multi-user Options on page 205
■Setting Data Source Options for Drawings on page 212
■Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights on page 74
To set AutoCAD Map 3D options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutodCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, modify the options
you want.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
Saving Option Settings | 225
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Raster Image Options
or raster images inserted with Raster Extension, set options in the Raster
Extension Options dialog box.
■To change options for images inserted with Raster Extension on page 226
■To set the resource file directory on page 228
■To change how image frames are displayed on page 229
■To change the image display quality on page 230
■To choose an image detach method on page 231
■To turn on Shift + left-click on page 232
■To set the correlation defaults on page 233
■To configure memory for images on page 235
Overview of Setting Raster Image Options
Raster image options are available for images you insert using the Raster
Extension. You can connect to many raster image files using Data Connect,
but you may still use the Raster Extension to insert and correlate raster images
with formats that are not supported by Data Connect, or to specify correlation
information for images that do not contain this information within their files.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Modifying Raster Images on page 420
To change options for images inserted with Raster Extension
■Set the resource file directory. on page ?
■Change how frames are displayed. on page ?
■Change image display quality. on page ?
■Choose a method for detaching images. on page ?
■Use Shift + Left-click to select raster images. on page ?
226 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Set correlation defaults. on page ?
■Configure image-related memory options. on page ?
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting the Resource Files Directory
Resource files store information about an image's insertion point, scale,
rotation, and density. The Resource File Directory indicates where AutoCAD
Map 3D will search for resource files for images you insert with Raster Extension
(not those you add with Data Connect). Resource files have the same base
name as the raster image with a .res extension.
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D looks for associated correlation
sources, such as world files, resource files, and tab files. By default, AutoCAD
Map 3D looks in the directory containing the image. However, for resource
files, you can specify an additional location. The additional location applies
only to resource files (.res). It does not apply to other correlation sources.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Modifying Raster Images on page 420
■Viewing Image Information on page 405
■Creating a Search Path for Raster Images on page 410
Setting Raster Image Options | 227
To set the resource file directory
1Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box on page 1614, select the Paths
tab.
3Under Resource File Directory, type the directory path for the resource
files or click Browse to select a directory.
4If you want AutoCAD Map 3D to search the Resource File Directory before
searching the image directory, select Use Resource File Directory Before
Using Image Directory.
5Click OK to save your changes.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can choose to display the
image frame in front of an image, behind an image, or you can hide the frame.
When the frame is behind the image, you can still select the image by selecting
the frame. However, if you hide the frame, you cannot select the image by
selecting the frame.
These options do not apply to images you add with Data Connect.
NOTE If you use the Toggle Frames command to hide frames, and then redisplay
them, the frames appear in front of the images.
228 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During Insertion on page 396
■Selecting an Image on page 424
■Displaying Image Frames on page 425
■Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images on page 232
To change how image frames are displayed
1Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box on page 1614, select the General
tab.
3Under Display Preferences, select an option from the Image Frame list.
■Frame Drawn Above Image displays the frame above the image.
■Frame Drawn Below Image hides the frame behind the image. You
can still select the image by selecting the frame.
■Frames Off hides the frame. If frames are hidden, you select images
by pressing Shift + left-click select method on page 424.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Raster Image Options | 229
Changing Image Display Quality
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can choose high quality or
draft quality display. High quality dithers the pixels so that the areas between
shading appear more gradual. Draft quality can speed up the performance of
your system, but may reduce the quality of how some color and grayscale
images appear onscreen. These options do not affect images you add with
Data Connect.
NOTE The display quality setting affects only how AutoCAD Map 3D displays the
image onscreen. It does not alter the contents of the image file.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Modifying Raster Images on page 420
■Changing Image Display Quality and Speed on page 429
■Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade on page 427
To change the image display quality
1Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box on page 1614, select the General
tab.
3Under Display Preferences, select a Display Quality option:
■High dithers the pixels, making differences in shading more gradual.
If you are using a 256 color palette to display images, dithering helps
make an image that has more than 256 shades appear more realistic.
■Draft does not dither the pixels. This setting is recommended for
bitonal images.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
230 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Choosing an Image Detach Method
When you delete images you added with Raster Extension, from a map,
information about that image is still stored in the map file. To delete this
information, detach the image. You can choose whether images are detached
automatically when you remove the last instance of the image from the map.
This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Modifying Raster Images on page 420
■Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images on page 412
To choose an image detach method
1Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box on page 1614, select the General
tab.
3Under Image Detach Preferences, select one of the following methods:
■Ask Before Detach prompts you to detach an image when you erase
all image frames that reference that image.
■Always Detach automatically detaches an image when you erase all
image frames that reference that image.
■Never Detach does not detach an image when you erase all image
frames that reference that image.
4Click OK.
Setting Raster Image Options | 231
NOTE You can manually detach an image by using the IMAGE command.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Using Shift + Left-click to Select Images
For images you insert with Raster Extension, you can change your selection
method. This is useful when you are zoomed in on the image and you cannot
see the image frame. This option does not affect images you add with Data
Connect.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Selecting an Image on page 424
■Modifying Raster Images on page 420
To turn on Shift + left-click
1Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box on page 1614, select the General
tab.
3Select Shift + Left-click Image Select to be able to select images on page
424 by pressing Shift and clicking the left mouse button.
Clear if you do not want to use this feature.
4Click OK.
232 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Correlation Defaults
Most images have correlation data that is stored in the image file header or
in a correlation source file. However, some images may not have any
correlation data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data. In
addition, if the correlation source does not contain information on scale or
density, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the default settings for those items.
NOTE Setting default correlation data can save you time if you have multiple
images that require the same insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion on page 393
■Setting Image Density on page 398
■Viewing Image Information on page 405
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image on page 432
To set the correlation defaults
1Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box on page 1614, select the Image
Defaults tab.
Setting Raster Image Options | 233
3Under Insertion Point, type default insertion point coordinates in the X
and Y boxes. The precision of these points depends on the precision value
in the Drawing Units dialog box. For more information about the
AutoCAD UNITS command, see the AutoCAD help.
4To set an elevation for image frames, type the elevation in the Z insertion
point box.
This value is useful to establish the elevation of a floor plan image, for
example.
5In the Rotation box, type a default rotation angle for images. The unit
of measurement depends on the selected value in the Drawing Units
dialog box.
6In the Scale box, type a default scale for images. Image scale does not
change the scale of the vector drawing.
7In the Density box, type a default density for images. This should usually
be the scanned resolution. For example, if the majority of your images
were scanned at 300 dots per inch, then type 300 in this box.
8In the Units box, select the default unit for the insertion point and density
of images. For example, if the majority of your images were scanned at
300 dots per inch, then select Inch as the default.
9Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Configuring Memory Use
AutoCAD Map 3D reserves 25% of the total physical memory (RAM) on your
system for inserting images with the Raster Extension. If you increase the
234 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
default amount, more of the physical memory is used for images and less is
available for other operations in AutoCAD Map 3D and for other applications
you might be running.
If you require additional memory for your images, the Raster Extension uses
a temporary swap file. For example, if you insert a 100 MB file, and the Memory
Limit is 8 MB, AutoCAD Map 3D stores the remaining 92 MB in a temporary
file. You can specify where the swap file is created.
You can change the following Raster Extension memory settings:
■Temporary File Location — The default directory for the temporary swap
files is the Windows temp directory.
TIP For best performance, use a local drive for your temporary swap file. It is
recommended that you do not use the drive where the operating system is
installed as the drive for the swap file unless this is your only local drive.
■Memory Limit — Specify the maximum amount of computer memory that
AutoCAD Map 3D can use to store image files.
NOTE The more physical RAM you have, the higher you can make your Memory
Limit. The higher the Memory Limit, the less swapping to hard disk occurs and
the faster your images load and display. However, do not allocate all available
physical RAM because doing so slows overall performance.
NOTE Close and restart AutoCAD Map 3D after adjusting these settings.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Unloading an Image on page 417
To configure memory for images
1Click Setup menu ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box on page 1614, select the Memory
tab.
3To locate a drive for your temporary swap file location, click Browse under
Temporary File Location, and locate a drive.
Setting Raster Image Options | 235
4To change the amount of memory reserved for inserting images, type a
new value in the Memory Limit box. Be careful that you do not use all
of your system resources.
NOTE You can click Default to return this setting to the recommended value.
5Click OK to accept the changes.
You must quit and restart AutoCAD Map 3D for these settings to take effect.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Customizing and Automating Import and Export
Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export.
■To create a profile on page 239
■To use a profile on page 239
■To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based on page 245
■To export to .shp as file-based rather than folder-based on page 245
■To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs,
and ellipses on page 246
■To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files on page 246
■To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric on page 247
■To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select,
or file-based on page 247
■To specify DGN cell import options on page 248
■To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors on page 248
■To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages on page
249
■To specify object properties on page 250
236 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
Overview of Customizing Import and Export
Use profiles and .ini files to customize and automate import and export.
Use this method...To customize or automate this...
Save a profile in the Export dialog box.
See Using Profiles on page 238
Export settings
Save a profile in the Import dialog box.
See Using Profiles on page 238
Import settings
Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See Customizing the Import and Export
.ini Files on page 240
Export defaults
Edit the mapimport.ini file.
See Customizing the Import and Export
.ini Files on page 240
Import defaults
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 237
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Using Profiles
To reuse or share your settings, save them as a profile.
Export Profiles
When you save an export profile, it does not store the current file name or
the current selection set.
When you load an export profile, if the specified data source doesn't exist,
Include Table Data is set to No.
Import Profiles
When you save an import profile, it does not store the current file name.
When you load an import profile, the table settings are reset for any input
layers that match an input layer name in the saved profile. Layers that do not
match an input layer in the saved profile are not reset.
■If the specified coordinate system code isn't in the dictionary, the
coordinate system is set to <None>.
■If the data field name to be used for a layer doesn't exist, the drawing layer
is set to Layer 0. If the specified drawing layer doesn't exist, it will be
created.
■If the data field name to use for the block name doesn't exist, or if the
specified block doesn't exist, the block is set to ACAD_POINT.
When you load an import profile containing object class settings, AutoCAD
Map 3D checks for potential problems and handles them as follows:
■If the appropriate object classification file is not attached to the drawing,
the object class settings are ignored.
238 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■If the object class settings to be used for a layer contradict the import file,
the object class settings are not applied.
■If the specified object class does not exist, the object class assignment is
set to <None>.
■If the object class attribute settings conflict with the import file, AutoCAD
Map 3D displays the Conflict Resolution dialog box on page 1437.
Compatibility with Previous Releases
■Profiles saved with AutoCAD Map 3D 2004-2007 and versions 4.5, 5, and
6 are compatible with this release.
■Profiles saved with Autodesk Map 2000 Release 4 or earlier cannot be used
with this release.
■Profiles created in this release may contain additional information that
cannot be used with previous releases. Such incompatible profile
information is ignored when a profile is used in a previous release.
See also:
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects on page 316
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
To create a profile
1Open the Import or Export options dialog box.
2Specify the settings you want to save.
3Click Save.
4Enter a name for the profile.
To use a profile
1Open the Import or Export options dialog box.
2Click Load.
3Select the profile.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 239
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
Some of the defaults for import and export settings are stored in .ini
(initialization) files. When you use a new format with AutoCAD Map 3D, the
information about that format is added automatically to the .ini files. However,
in some instances, you may want to modify these files yourself. In addition,
you can set some formatting options in these files.
You can modify the following .ini files:
■mapexport.ini — Set options to export a file-based format as a folder based
format (which is especially useful for Shapefiles); to specify how to segment
arcs and circles; to define the default seed file for exporting DGN files
(which determines defaults such as units of measure and 2D vs. 3D); and
to specify language encoding settings for exporting GML data in Asian
languages.
240 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■mapimport.ini — Set options to use for file or folder selection; to set default
import options for DGN; to import object colors to their RGB (True Color)
equivalent; and to specify language encoding settings for importing GML
data in Asian languages.
■mapforeignfileproperties.ini — Set options to specify linetype, lineweight,
font, and justification.
Exporting to ArcView ShapeFiles
If you are exporting to ArcView ShapeFiles, you can treat it as a folder-based
format. To do this, you must modify the following items in the MapExport.ini
file:
■Specify that it requires a folder rather than a file.
■Specify that it requires a prefix name.
■Specify that it no longer requires a type (point/line/polyline/text).
If you modify these items, be sure to modify them only for a driver that
supports this change.
Segmenting Certain Entity Types When Exporting
When you export Splines and polylines with bulges, they are broken into
polyline segments. The number of degrees used for segmentation is set by the
SegmentationDegrees option. By default, SegmentationDegrees is 2 degrees.
In addition, when you exporting to a file format that doesn't support arcs or
ellipses, such as Shape or Coverage, or doesn't support ellipses that have axes
at an angle, such as MIF/MID, you can further modify the segmentation by
changing the value for FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE. By default,
FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE is 5 degrees.
You can change SegmentationDegrees and FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE
to be larger or smaller.
Exporting to MicroStation DGN Files
When exporting to DGN files, AutoCAD Map 3D reads a seed file to determine
default information, such as whether the destination DGN file will be in
imperial units or metric and whether the file will be 2D or 3D. There are
separate seed files for DGn version 7 and version 8. For more information
about seed files, see MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 on page 340.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 241
To change the default units of measure (or other defaults), you must change
the default seed files specified in the MapExport.ini file.
Specifying the File and Folder Selection Options to Use for Import
By default, when you import ArcView ShapeFiles, MapInfo MIF/MID, MapInfo
TAB, or VPF files, you can select one or more files in a folder to import. This
is called multi-select.
If you want, you can change the settings in the mapimport.ini file so that these
formats are considered folder-based formats (you select a folder and all the
files in the folder are imported) or single-select formats (only one file can be
selected for import). Note that VPF can be folder-based or multi-select only.
Importing DGN Cells
When you import data from a DGN file, you can specify many of the DGN
import options available in Driver Options.
Importing Object Colors as RGB (True Color) Colors
By default, objects are imported using the ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
When you import from DGN or MIF/MID, you can specify that objects
maintain their RGB color values.
Even if you import using RGB colors, white objects are always imported to
the ACI White, which displays white on a black background and black on a
white background. Black objects are assigned the ByLayer color. If you want
to export objects to MIF/MID as black, change the layer color to black before
exporting.
Note that if your Model Tab Background color is something other than Black
or White and you import using RGB colors, you may not be able to see objects
whose color is close to the background color.
Language Encoding Settings for Importing and Exporting GML Data
When exporting GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that
mapexport.ini contains the language encoding settings needed to export valid
GML data for the language you want.
Using Fixed schema mode when exporting is recommended, as it can recognize
certain multi-byte characters that can be problematic in Create mode.
When importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify that the
language encoding settings specified in AutoCAD Map 3D’s mapimport.ini
242 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings need to match for
the import to be successful.
Adding Custom Tags
If you are familiar with the options for a driver, you can add custom tags. Use
the format:
Driver:XXX
Where XXX is the code you want to send to the driver. Add the line to the
appropriate section of the MapExport.ini file. Incorrect tags will have
unpredictable results.
Location of the .ini File
When exporting, AutoCAD Map 3D looks first for the .ini file in the current
directory. If no .ini file is there, it uses the .ini file in the C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2
folder. To always use the same settings, do not create additional .ini files.
Changing Font, Linestyle, Lineweight, or Justification
You can set a number of formatting options in the mapforeignfileproperties.ini
file. Use the [DGN_V7_FieldMappping] or [DGN_V8_FieldMapping] section
to enable a particular formatting option:
■igds_font=MapFont
■igds_justification=MapJustification
■igds_weight=MapLineWeight
■igds_style=MapLineStyle
DGN Fonts
Use the [DGN_V7_Font] section or [DGN_V8_Font] section to map DGN font
numbers to textstyles that you've defined.
DGN Linestyles
Use the [DGN_V7_LineStyle] or [DGN_V8_LineStyle] section to map DGN line
styles to linestyles loaded in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
DGN Lineweight
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 243
Use the [DGN_V7_LineWeight] or [DGN_V8_LineWeight] section to map
DGN lineweights to allowable AutoCAD Map 3D lineweight values.
The DGN lineweight range is 0-31. AutoCAD Map 3D lineweights are in 100ths
of a millimeter and only the following values are supported: 0, 5, 9, 13, 15,
18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, 211,
-1, -2 and -3. The AutoCAD Map 3D values -1, -2, and -3 indicate ByLayer,
ByBlock, and by lineweight default respectively.
DGN Justification
Use the [DGN_V7_Justification] or [DGN_V8_Justification] section to map the
DGN justification to AutoCAD vertical and horizontal modes or AutoCAD
attachment.
DGN justification values range from 0-14:
0 is Left/Top, 8 is Center/Bottom, 1 is Left/Center, 9 is Right Margin/Top, 2
is Left/Bottom, 10 is Right Margin/Center, 3 is Left Margin/Top, 11 is Right
Margin/Bottom, 4 is Left Margin/Center, 12 is Right/Top, 5 is Center/Bottom,
13 is Right/Center, 6 is Center/Top, 14 is Right/Bottom, 7 is Center/Center,
Default is 5
The following values are supported for AutoCAD Map 3D justifications:
TopLeft, TopCenter, TopRight, MiddleLeft, MiddleCenter, MiddleRight,
BottomLeft, BottomCenter, BottomRight, BaseLeft, BaseCenter, BaseRight,
BaseAlign, BottomAlign, MiddleAlign, TopAlign, BaseFit, BottomFit, MiddleFit,
TopFit, BaseMid, BottomMid, MiddleMid, TopMid
MIF Justification
Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set justification for MIF. Allowed MIF
Justifications are left, center, and right.
When importing from MIF to AutoCAD Map 3D, the last mapping in the table
is used.
Arc/INFO and E00 Justification
Use the [ARCINFO_Justification] and [E00_Justification] sections to set
justification for Arc/INFO and E00.
When importing from Arc/INFO or E00 to AutoCAD Map 3D, the last mapping
in the table is used.
See also:
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects on page 316
244 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Supported Formats on page 1172
■To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based on page 245
■To export to .shp as file-based rather than folder-based on page 245
■To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs,
and ellipses on page 246
■To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files on page 246
■To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric on page 247
■To specify DGN cell import options on page 248
■To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select,
or file-based on page 247
■To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors on page 248
■To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages on page
249
■To specify object properties on page 250
To export to .shp as folder-based rather than file-based
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder
2Find the [SHP] section.
3Specify File=False.
4Specify Rootname=True.
5Specify EntTypes=All.
6Save and close the ..ini file.
To export to .shp as file-based rather than folder-based
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 245
2Find the [SHP] section.
3Specify File=True.
4Specify Rootname=False.
5Specify EntTypes=Types.
6Save and close the .ini file.
To change the segmentation size for splines, polylines with bulges, arcs, and
ellipses
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder.
2Find the [Options] section.
3To change the segmentation of splines and polylines with bulges, edit
the SegmentionDegrees value to the number you want.
By default, the value is 2 degrees.
4To change the segmentation of arcs and ellipses, find the File section
pertaining to one of the following file formats: Arc/INFO, E00, MIF,
MapInfo, or Shape.
5Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the following line:
Driver:FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE=5
6Change the FME_ARC_DEGREES_PER_EDGE value to the number you
want.
7Save and close the .ini file.
To change the default seed file for exporting DGN files
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder.
2Find the [DGCN_V7] or [DGN_V8]section . This is where the default seed
file is specified.
3Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
246 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4Save and close the .ini file.
To export DGN files in imperial units rather than metric
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
2Find the [DGN_V7] or [DGN_V8]section.
3Change the default seed file to the seed file you want.
For example, change the default seed file to one that specifies imperial
units rather than metric:
Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn"
NOTE Make sure to choose a seed file for the appropriate version of DGN.
If you export to DGN version 7 using a DGN version 8 seed file, the operation
will fail.
4Save and close the .ini file.
To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as folder-based, multi-select, or
file-based
1Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder
2Find the File section pertaining to one of the following file formats:
ShapeFile, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF.
The File section is preceeded by a comment such as, "This section
determines how you want to Import Mif/Mid files" and has several lines
containing the word File.
3Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
■File=MultiSelect
The format will be considered a multi-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one or more individual files in
the Import Location dialog box to include in the import process.
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 247
■File=SingleSelect
The format will be considered a single-select, file-based format. This
means that you will be able to select one file only in the Import
Location dialog box. Note that this is not a valid option for VPF.
■File=False
The format will be considered a folder-based format and all files in
the selected folder will be included in the import process.
4Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5Save and close the .ini file.
To specify DGN cell import options
1Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder.
2Find the [DGN_V7_V8] section.
NOTE You can also use the Cell Expansion options in the Import dialog box
on page 340 to expand cells as blocks or points, or to explode them.
3Find Driver:DGN_XPAND_CELL.
4Change this to CELLS2BLOCKS, EXPLODECELLS, or CELLS2POINTS.
5Save and close the .ini file.
To import objects using RGB (True Color) colors
1Open the mapimport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder.
2Find the Color section for either DGN_V7-V8 or MIF (MapInfo).
3Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the line for the option you
want:
■Color=Closest ACI only
The RGB values from the file will be converted to the closest ACI
value.
248 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
■Color=RGB only
The RGB values from the file will be preserved. Objects whose color
is black (0,0,0) will be assigned the color ByLayer. Objects whose color
is white (255,255,255) will be assigned the color ACI White.
■Color=Equivalent ACI and RGB
For any RGB value that exactly matches an ACI, the objects will be
imported using the ACI color value. All other objects will use their
RGB values.
4Make sure there is a semicolon at the beginning of the line for the options
you do not want to use. The semicolon tells AutoCAD Map 3D to ignore
the line.
5Save and close the .ini file.
To specify language encoding settings for GML in Asian languages
1Open the mapimport.ini or mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
2Find the [GML2] section.
3Delete the semicolon at the beginning of the lines for the language
encoding settings you want to use. For example, for mapimport.ini, here
are the settings you can use for Japanese.
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
For mapexport.ini you can use:
Driver:GML2_FEATURE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_OUTPUT_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Driver:GML2_MAPPING_FILE_ENCODING=Shift-JIS
Below is a summary of some of the specific settings you can use.
Possible SettingsLanguage
Big5Chinese
GB2312
GB18030
GBK
EUC-JPJapanese
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 249
Possible SettingsLanguage
Shift-JIS
EUC-KR
KSC5601
Korean
4Save and close the .ini file.
To specify object properties
1Open the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file using a text editor such as
WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\R17.2 folder.
2For information on each of the settings, refer to the instructions in the
file.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
250 | Chapter 2 Setting Up
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Customizing and Automating Import and Export | 251
252
Bringing In Data
Overview of Bringing In Data
A map file in AutoCAD Map 3D is a specialized drawing (DWG) file in which
you can combine data from many sources. A map file holds all the information
needed to create, edit, view, and publish your map, including the following:
■Drawing objects and information about attached drawing files
■Attribute information
■Information needed to connect to databases like Oracle and ArcSDE
■Information needed to connect to geospatial files
■Information needed to connect to web-based resources
■Metadata
■Styling information
■Map layouts
AutoCAD Map 3D is your window onto all this data. You have two ways to
access data: you can connect to drawing files, geospatial files, or other data
sources and view and edit entities in their original sources, saving your changes
3
253
in the native format; or you can convert the data to DWG format, breaking
any connection to the original source.
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
All features in the selected feature
class appear in the map. Any edits
Edit features from the
following sources in
their native format:
1In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Con-
nect To Data. you make are saved back to the
original source.
■ArcSDE on page
274 2Select the data
source and feature
classes.
■Autodesk SDF on
page 287
■ESRI SHP on page
285
■MySQL on page
282
■ODBC on page 289
■Oracle on page 271
■SQL Server on
page 279
■WFS on page 293
If you use a provider to connect
to the data, you can edit it dir-
Use formats that are
not listed in the Data
■To connect to the data,
use an open-source or
Connect window on
page 467
ectly in its native format. If you
convert and import it, you edit a
copy of the data in DWG format.
third-party provider on
page 467.
■To use a copy of the data
on page 316, Click
File ➤ Create DWG
From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Both the original data for the fea-
ture layer and the joined data ap-
pear in the Data Table.
Join attribute data to
features from Oracle,
SDF, etc. on page 439
1Connect to the
source of attribute
data (for example,
connect to an
ODBC source such
as a Microsoft Ac-
cess table) using
254 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Data ➤ Connect To
Data.
2Right-click a layer
and click Create A
Join.
3Specify the connec-
ted attribute data
source.
Only the objects that match your
query are added to the map.
Add DWG objects
from the current
drawing on page 296
1In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add
Drawing Data ➤
Query Current
Drawing.
2Define a query to
retrieve objects.
Only the objects that match your
query are added to the map.
Add drawing objects
from other drawings
1Attach the drawings
to the current draw-
ing. on page 144. When you edit the objects, you
can choose to update the original
drawings or not.
2In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add
Drawing Data ➤
Query Source Draw-
ing.
3Define a query to
retrieve objects. See
Bringing In Draw-
ing Data From
DWG Files on page
296.
Overview of Bringing In Data | 255
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
A copy of the data is added to the
map in DWG format. The connec-
Convert geospatial
data to drawing data
on page 316
■Click File ➤ Create DWG
From ➤ Map 3D Import.
tion to the original source is
broken, and changes are not
saved back to that source.
A copy of the data is added to the
map in DWG format. The connec-
Convert SDF files to
drawing data on page
323
■Click File menu ➤ Cre-
ate DWG From ➤
Autodesk SDF for the tion to the original source is
broken, and changes are not
saved back to that source.
current version of SDF.
See Overview of Convert-
ing Geospatial Data to
Drawing Objects on page
316.
■File menu ➤ Create
DWG From ➤ Autodesk
SDF 2 (MapGuide 6.x)
for the version supported
by MapGuide 6.5 and
earlier. See Importing
Autodesk SDF 2 on page
325.
You can view or edit the data by
double-clicking the table name in
Map Explorer.
Add attribute data to
use with drawing ob-
jects
1Add the data source
to the map. See Set-
ting Up Data
Sources for Draw-
ings on page 184.
2Define a link tem-
plate for the data.
See Creating a Link
Template on page
454.
3Link records to
drawing objects. See
Manually Linking
256 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To get this result...Use this method...To do this...
Database Records to
Objects on page 457.
The image appears in your map,
where you can style it or move it
behind other features.
Add raster images on
page 370 in the follow-
ing formats:
DEM, ESRI Grid, DTED,
JPEG and JPEG2K ,
1In Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Con-
nect To Data.
2Specify the folder
that contains the
PNG, MrSID, TIFF,
ECW raster and select the
raster.
The image appears in your map,
where you can clip it on page 436
Add raster images in
other formats on page
385
1Click Map ➤ Im-
age ➤ Insert. or change its transparency on
page 430, brightness and other
settings on page 420.
2Select the image
and specify the im-
age placement and
settings.
For ECW and MrSID formats,
you must download the free
raster object enabler available
from ht-
tp://www.autodesk.com/Raster-
OE
The data appears in your map like
any other SDF or DEM data.
Connect to data from
Civil 3D on page 470
1From Civil 3D, ex-
port feature data
(such as parcels and
alignments) in SDF
format and save
surfaces in DEM
format.
2Connect to the res-
ulting files in Auto-
CAD Map 3D.
Overview of Bringing In Data | 257
See also:
■Overview of Map Creation on page 34
Before You Bring In Data
Creating a Map
When you create a new map file, you do the following:
■Choose a template.
The map2d.dwt template contains the optimal display settings, tools, and
views for 2D maps, while the map3d.dwt template is optimized for 3D
maps. You can also create your own templates. For information on this,
see the AutoCAD Help topic called “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing.”
■Assign a coordinate system.
Data you add to your map file is transformed to use the coordinate system
assigned to your map. When you save it back to its source, it is transformed
back to its original coordinate system.
■Add data.
You can combine data from many sources.
■Geospatial data
For many geospatial formats, such as Oracle and ArcSDE, you can
connect to the source to add data using FDO on page 1750 Data Access
Technology. You access data live, in its native format. You can extend
your data access capabilities by adding an open source or third-party
FDO provider on page 1750.
You can also convert data from most of these formats to DWG format.
To do this, you import the data (rather than connect to it). However,
this method adds only a snapshot of the data and your changes do not
update the data at its source.
For other formats, such as MicroStation Design (DGN) and Arc/INFO,
you must import the data.
■Drawing (DWG) data
You can attach AutoCAD drawing files to your map and query in objects
from those drawings, or import data from non-drawing sources to add
it as drawing data.
258 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE When you import data, you make a copy of the data and bring that
copy into your map as drawing objects. When you edit the data, you are
editing the copy. The original data is unchanged.
■Raster data
Connect to raster images and surfaces, or use the Raster Extension
feature.
■Attribute data
Join additional attributes to GIS features, or add attributes to drawing
objects using database linking or object data.
■Data from AutoCAD Civil 3D
Export Civil 3D feature data, such as parcels and alignments, in SDF
format. Connect to the resulting SDF file in AutoCAD Map 3D. You
can also save surfaces as DEMs in Civil 3D and connect to the resulting
DEM files in AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Create Display Manager layers.
Geospatial data that you add to your map is automatically organized into
display layers by feature class. You can also add drawing data to layers.
Layers give you control over draw order (Z-order), styling, and more.
See also:
■Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing on page 137
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Joining Data to GIS Features on page 439
■Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects on page 450
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Open Source FDO Providers on page 467
■Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data on page 470
■Organizing Layers in Your Map on page 261
■Overview of Visualization and Styling on page 533
Creating a Map | 259
■Overview of Creating Themes on page 953
■Overview of Creating New Features on page 577
■Getting Help with AutoCAD on page 48
To create a map
1Start a new drawing, choosing either the map2d.dwt or map3d.dwt
template, or a custom map template you created.
2Assign a coordinate system to the map. on page 137
NOTE If you do not assign a coordinate system to the map, data that you
bring into the map will appear using its native coordinate system. If you bring
in data from more than one coordinate system, entities may not align correctly
in the map.
3Add features on page 268and drawing objects on page 300to the map.
4Optionally, add attribute data to features on page 439 and drawing objects
on page 450.
5Optionally, To add a raster-based surface to your map on page 374.
6Optionally, add open-source or third-party providers on page 467 to access
additional data formats, or add data from AutoCAD Civil 3D on page 470.
7Organize the layers on page 261 that comprise your map.
8Change the appearance of the map using styles on page 533 and themes
on page 953.
NOTE You can create multiple display maps from the same data. See Creating
Multiple Display Maps on page 539.
9Optionally, create new features on page 578 or drawing objects. You can
use many AutoCAD commands on page 48.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
260 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
ADEATTACHDATA
Attaches object data to objects
Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data
Menu
Attach/Detach Object Data
Icon
ADEATTACHDATACommand Line
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Organizing Layers in Your Map
Display Manager organizes the data in your map into layers, which you can
display and style independently. Each layer contains one type of data. For
example, you might have a layer of drawing objects, a layer that represents a
Organizing Layers in Your Map | 261
feature class from Oracle, a DEM surface layer, and a raster image layer. When
you use FDO on page 1750 to connect to a data source (via Data Connect), each
feature class or image in that data source becomes a separate layer
automatically. You can create drawing layers for drawing objects, and these
objects can be members of multiple layers.
NOTE Display Manager layers are different from the classic “AutoCAD layers” you
see in the Layer Properties Manager. AutoCAD users cannot see Display Manager
layers unless they use AutoCAD Map 3D. You use different techniques to style the
two different layer types.
You can view the layers in Display Manager in two ways:
■Layers By Group organizes the list of layers. For example, you can create
a group for as-built data and a separate group for proposed changes.
■Draw Order determines the draw order (Z-order) of the layers. Items at the
top of the draw order are drawn on top of items below them on the list.
If an object is a member of more than one layer, it is styled by each layer of
which it is a member. For example, if a line is in both the Transportation layer
and the Roads layer, it will be styled by both layers. If the layers specify
conflicting style or visibility settings, the object uses the style and visibility
settings of whichever layer is higher in the Display Manager list.
You can specify a thumbnail icon for drawing layers, which is used in Display
Manager and in any legends you create for this map. This affects drawing
layers only, and is not available for feature layers.
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager on page 535
■Controlling Display Order on page 537
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 296
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■To add a feature layer using FDO (Oracle, ArcSDE, SDF, SHP, WFS) on page
263
■To add a drawing layer on page 263
262 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To add a raster-based surface to your map on page 374
■To create a group on page 263
■To change the draw order on page 263
■To change the thumbnail style for a drawing layer on page 264
To add a feature layer using FDO (Oracle, ArcSDE, SDF, SHP, WFS)
■Connect to the FDO source. on page 265
To add a drawing layer
■Attach a drawing and query in objects on page 296
To add a raster or surface layer
■Connect to the raster or surface file or folder. on page 370
To create a group
1In Display Manager on page 1748, change to the Layers By Group view by
clicking Order ➤ Layers By Group.
NOTE If you see the Groups button instead of the Order button, you are
already in the Layers By Group view.
2In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ New Group.
3To change the group name, select the group then click the existing name.
Type a new name and press Enter.
4Drag layers into the group.
NOTE Until you use the Draw Order view to specify a draw order, AutoCAD Map
3D uses the Layers By Group order as a default draw order for the map. Once you
use the Draw Order view, changes in the Layers By Group view do not affect the
draw order.
To change the draw order
1In Display Manager on page 1748, ensure you are in the Draw Order view.
Click Groups ➤ Draw Order if needed.
Organizing Layers in Your Map | 263
2Drag layers up or down to change their display order.
Items at the top of the draw order are drawn on top of items below them on
the list.
To change the thumbnail style for a drawing layer
1Select the layer.
2In Display Manager on page 1748, click the Style button.
3On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Thumbnail Preview,
select the style of thumbnail to use.
For example, select the polyline icon to display an icon of a wavy line,
or choose the polygon icon to display hatch or fill.
This setting affects both the Display Manager layer and the legend for this
map.
Quick Reference
Change the display order of Display Manager layers
Control which layers appear on top (or behind) other layers
In Display Manager, drag an item up or down in the
list
Task Pane
New Display Manager Group
Creates a new Display Manager group
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ New Group
Task Pane
Sort Layers in Display Manager
Sorts the map layers alphabetically
In Display Manager, click the thin down arrow next
to the Map list and choose Sort Contents
Task Pane
264 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Bringing in GIS Features
When you access data through FDO on page 1750, you use an FDO provider on
page 1750 to connect directly to a data source, such as SDF, SHP, Oracle, SQL
Server, or ArcSDE, and work in its native format.
For FDO data sources with geometry, you select the feature classes to include
in your map.
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity, such as a road, a
utility pole, or a river. Features are organized into collections, called feature
classes, and are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial database or file
is sometimes referred to as a feature source on page 1751.
See also:
■Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map on page 270
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Working with FDO Schemas on page 481
■To access data through FDO on page 268
■To filter feature data when you add it to a map on page 270
■To bring in features from Oracle on page 272
■To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier on page 274
■To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.2 (or if you use the 9.1 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.2 server) on page 276
■To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.1 (or if you use the 9.2 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.1 server) on page 277
■To bring in features from ESRI ArcSDE on page 277
■To bring in features from SQL Server on page 280
■To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier on page 281
■To bring in features from MySQL on page 283
■To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier on page 284
■To bring in features from SHP on page 286
■To bring in features from SDF on page 288
■To access ODBC data on page 291
■To create a DSN in Windows XP on page 292
■To define the table ranges needed to access Excel data on page 292
■To bring in features from WFS on page 294
Bringing in GIS Features | 265
■To reconnect to feature data without losing styling information on page
296
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
A feature is the spatial description of a real-world entity such as a road, a utility
pole, or a river. Features are stored in a spatial database or file. The spatial
database or file is referred to as a feature source on page 1751.
The feature source could be a database (such as Oracle, ArcSDE, SQL Server,
or MySQL), a file-based feature source (such as SDF or SHP), a web server (such
as WFS), or a table of feature geometry data (such as Microsoft Access).
You use FDO on page 1750 to connect directly to a data source and work in its
native format. Each data source type uses its own FDO provider on page 1750,
and each provider has different capabilities.
For example, Oracle and ArcSDE support locking on the feature level. When
you check out a feature, other users cannot edit it, even though they can view
your edits and edit other features in the feature source. Oracle and ArcSDE
also support persistent locking, so the object stays locked until you check it
back in.
SHP feature sources, on the other hand, support locking on the file level.
When you check out a feature, its entire SHP file is locked. Other users cannot
edit features from that file until you close the map, which releases your lock
(even if you still have features checked out at the time). Be careful to check
in your changes before you close the map.
Versioning on page 1765 allows multiple copies of a spatial dataset to be stored
and tracked by date of creation, date of change, and so on. Not every FDO
provider supports versioning.
A schema on page 1760 is the definition of multiple feature classes and the
relationships between them. It determines the criteria an individual feature
must meet in order to be a member of a particular feature class. For some
feature sources, you can add and edit a schema and its feature classes and
properties. For more information about editing schemas, see Working with
Schemas on page 507.
NOTE WMS and Raster are used to access images, not features. You cannot edit
or lock these images, and they do not use schemas.
266 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
FDO Provider Capabilities
The following table lists the level of locking, versioning, and schema editing
supported by each feature source type.
Edit
Schema
VersionsPersistent
Locking
Lock LevelFeature Source
Type
NoYesYesFeatureArcSDE on page
274
YesNoNoNoneMySQL on page
282
NoNoNoFileODBC on page
289
YesYesYesFeatureOracle on page
271
YesNoNoNoneSDF on page 287
YesNoNoFileSHP on page 285
YesNoNoNoneSQL Server on
page 279
NoNoN/AN/AWFS on page 293
N/AN/AN/AN/AWMS on page 377
N/AN/AN/AN/ARaster on page
370
Once you connect to a feature source, you select the types of features to include
in your map. Each type of feature is called a feature class on page 1750. AutoCAD
Map 3D displays all the features from the selected features classes in your map,
and each feature class becomes a layer in Display Manager. For example, a
feature class called Roads contains individual streets and appears on a layer
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features | 267
called Roads in Display Manager. You can apply a single style to this layer,
and all the streets in the layer will use that style.
See also:
■To bring in features from Oracle on page 272
■To bring in features from ESRI ArcSDE on page 277
■To bring in features from SQL Server on page 280
■To bring in features from MySQL on page 283
■To bring in features from SHP on page 286
■To bring in features from SDF on page 288
■To access ODBC data on page 291
■To bring in features from WFS on page 294
■To add a raster-based surface to your map on page 374
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
■About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas on page 479
■Help menu ➤ Best Practices Guide, Overview of Geospatial Data on page
479, and Working with FDO Schemas on page 481
To access data through FDO
1Make sure your feature source is set up correctly. If you have questions,
refer to the Readme file.
2Find out your user name and password, if required.
Your CAD Manager or Database Administrator can help you with this.
3Open or create the map on page 258 that will include the data from this
feature source.
4If you are working with data from various coordinate systems, assign a
coordinate system to the current map. See Assigning a Coordinate System
to the Current Drawing on page 137.
268 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
All the data you bring into this map will be converted to the map’s
coordinate system. If you edit the data and save it back to its source, it
will be converted back to its original coordinate system.
5In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
6In the left pane of the Data Connect window, select the feature source.
7In the right pane, enter a name for this connection and specify the
information needed to connect to the feature source. Click Connect.
8In the Add Data To Map section, under Schema, select the feature classes
to include in your map.
9If necessary, click Edit Coordinate Systems to specify the coordinate
system for the incoming data.
You must specify the coordinate system that the data uses in its data
source. Do not specify the coordinate system for the current
map—AutoCAD Map 3D will transform the data to the target coordinate
system when it adds it to your map. Hold your cursor over the entry in
the Data Connect window to see its coordinate system and spatial context
information.
10 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query. See Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map
on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data to your map, see
Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Overview of Bringing In GIS Features | 269
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map
When you connect to a geospatial data store, you can choose Add To Map
With Query to filter the data you bring into your map.
You can filter a single layer or multiple layers at one time. You can filter the
data by its location in the map or by property conditions that you define. For
example, you can add only streets that cross a circle you draw on the map, or
only parcels on a particular street.
See also:
■Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002
To filter feature data when you add it to a map
1Connect to the data source on page ? in the Data Connect window.
2Under Add Data To Map, check the layers to add.
3Click the Add To Map down arrow and select Add To Map With Query
to create your expression.
Any query you create will apply to all selected layers.
4Create the expression for your query.
■To filter the layer based on one of its properties (for example, to add
only the parcels whose Address property specifies a particular street),
create a query that evaluates a property.
■To filter the layer based on location (for example, to bring in only
roads within a circle you define by drawing it on the map), create a
location-based query.
270 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from Oracle
You can bring features from an Oracle data source into your map, creating a
feature layer on page 1751 in Display Manager. When you do this, you can:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■View and edit the features
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock individual features when you check then out for editing.
■Keep features checked out and locked even when you close your drawing.
Features are not checked back in and unlocked until you specify.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make. Your edits
are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■Create versions of your data. Versioning on page 1765 creates a copy of the
data in the data source. Your changes are made to the new version of the
data. Versioning is useful for proposed changes or changes that need
approval. When the changes are final, you can make your version the
current one.
■Use a data source set up for AutoCAD Map 3D. If your data source schema
is not set up to work with AutoCAD Map 3D, AutoCAD Map 3D will create
a custom mapping so you can use the data in your map.
Bringing In Features from Oracle | 271
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create an Oracle data source.
■Move SHP data into Oracle to take advantage of better data sharing.
■Bring in a static copy of Oracle data as drawing objects.
■Customize the Oracle FDO provider on page 1750.
In the 2008 release of AutoCAD Map 3D, a new column called geometrytype
was added to the table named F_AttributeDefinition. To use AutoCAD Map
3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created in AutoCAD Map 3D
2007 and earlier, you must first connect to the data store containing this table
and run a SQL script. Instructions for this are on the Procedure tab of this
topic. To do this, you must have the privileges required to execute the ALTER
TABLE request. In the command line, enter the following:
sqlplus <datastorename>/<yourpassword>@<tnsServiceName>
@<MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com/AlterSchemaOracle.sql; exit;
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for Oracle API Reference. The API has custom commands for
gathering information about a provider, transmitting client services exceptions,
getting lists of accessible data stores, creating connection objects, and creating
and dropping spatial indexes.
See also:
■Working with Oracle Data on page 482
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Migrating Data on page 522
■Importing From Oracle on page 345
■Styling Features on page 540
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
To bring in features from Oracle
1Make sure your feature source is set up correctly.
272 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connect window, select Add Oracle Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
4Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
5Under Service Name, enter the service name for the Oracle data store. If
you do not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
6Click Login.
7In the User Name & Password dialog box, enter your user name and
password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
log you in whenever you open this drawing.
8Under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do not know this
name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow.
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a AutoCAD Map 3D
schema. Select Show All Data Stores to add these to the list. AutoCAD Map
3D will create a mapping to use these data stores with AutoCAD Map 3D.
9Optionally, select a version of the data store.
10 Click Connect.
11 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
12 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data
to your map, see Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
Bringing In Features from Oracle | 273
To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier
1Verify that you have the privileges required to execute the ALTER TABLE
request.
2In the command line, enter the following:
sqlplus <datastorename>/<yourpassword>@<tnsServiceName>
@<MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com/AlterSchemaOracle.sql;
exit;
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE
When you view and edit features from an ArcSDE data source, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock individual features when you check then out for editing.
■Keep features checked out and locked even when you close your drawing.
Features are not checked back in and unlocked until you specify.
274 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■Create versions of your data. Versioning on page 1765 creates a copy of the
data in the data source. Your changes are made to the new version of the
data. Versioning is useful for proposed changes or changes that need
approval. When the changes are final, you can make your version the
current one. To use this feature, you must have versioning support turned
on in your database.
NOTE Long transactions must be set in the data store to be available in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
■View the schema definition.
■Bring in a static copy of ArcSDE data as drawing objects.
Supported Versions
AutoCAD Map 3D supports ArcSDE 9.1 and 9.2. To use ArcSDE, install the
following DLL files on the computer on which you run AutoCAD Map 3D:
For version 9.2For version 9.1
pe.dllpe91.dll
sde.dllsde91.dll
sg.dllsg91.dll
The provider for this data store will check for the 9.2 versions of the DLL files
first, and will use them if they are found. If the 9.2 versions are not found, it
will check for (and use) the 9.1 versions. The client DLL version should match
the server version that is being used.
If the client and server versions of ArcSDE do not match (for example if you
use the 9.1 client and you access the ArcSDE 9.2 server), set up your system
for the server version you are using.
Set up the services and hosts files for the appropriate version, and then use
these names when you connect to the data in the Data Connect dialog box.
For example, specify arcsdehost\esri_sde_nv, and not the values. Setup
instructions are on the Procedure tab of this topic.
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE | 275
The PATH environment variable must reference the local folder containing
these DLL files. To accomplish this, you can install an ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop
application or the ArcSDE SDK. For more information about ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop
applications and the ArcSDE SDK, refer to the ESRI documentation.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for ArcSDE API Reference.
See also:
■Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data on page 498
■Importing ESRI ArcSDE Data on page 327
■Styling Features on page 540
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.2 (or if you use the 9.1 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.2 server)
1Install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run
AutoCAD Map 3D.
Copy the files to the directory in which the ArcSDE provider is installed.
Usually, the directory is C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\FDO\bin
pe.dll
sde.dll
sg.dll
2Add entries in your C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file.
The entries look like this:
esri_92ora 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - Oracle
esri_92sql 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer 2005
esri_sde 5151/tcp #ArcSDE 9.1- Oracle
esri_sde_ss 5152/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer
3If you have trouble connecting, add a new line in your
C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file.
The line looks like this:
192.168.0.100 arcsdehost
276 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To set up your system for ArcSDE 9.1 (or if you use the 9.2 client and you
access the ArcSDE 9.1 server)
1Install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run
AutoCAD Map 3D.
Copy the files to the directory in which the ArcSDE provider is installed.
Usually, the directory is C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\FDO\bin
pe91.dll
sde91.dll
sg91.dll
2Add entries in your C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file.
The entries look like this:
esri_92ora 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - Oracle
esri_92sql 6161/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer 2005
esri_sde 5151/tcp #ArcSDE 9.1- Oracle
esri_sde_ss 5152/tcp #ArcSDE 9.2 - SQLServer
3If you have trouble connecting, add a new line in your
C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\hosts file.
The line looks like this:
192.168.0.100 arcsdehost
To bring in features from ESRI ArcSDE
1Make sure your feature source is set up correctly. For a list of issues, refer
to the Readme.
2In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connect window, select Add ArcSDE Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
4Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
5Under Server Name and Instance Name, enter the information for the
ArcSDE database. If you do not know the name, check with your System
Administrator.
6Click Login.
Bringing In Features from ArcSDE | 277
7In the User Name & Password dialog box, enter your user name and
password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
log you in whenever you open this drawing.
8Click OK.
9In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the database name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of databases, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
databases. If you set up your hosts and services files as described, use
these names. For example, specify arcsdehost\esri_sde_nv, and not the
values.
10 Optionally, select a version of the database.
11 Click Connect.
12 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
13 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data
to your map, see Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
278 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from SQL Server
When you view and edit features from a SQL Server data source, you can do
the following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create a SQL Server data source.
■Move other geospatial data (for example, SHP data) into SQL Server, to
take advantage of better data sharing.
In the 2008 release of AutoCAD Map 3D, a new column called geometrytype
was added to the table named F_AttributeDefinition. To use AutoCAD Map
3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created in AutoCAD Map 3D
2007 and earlier, you must first connect to the data store containing this table
and run a SQL script. Instructions for this are on the Procedure tab of this
topic.
NOTE You can customize the SQL Server FDO provider on page 1750. The API has
custom commands to support schema read/write and geospatial and
non-geospatial data read/write. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for SQL Server API Reference.
See also:
■Working with SQL Server Data on page 486
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Migrating Data on page 522
■Styling Features on page 540
Bringing In Features from SQL Server | 279
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
To bring in features from SQL Server
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SQL Server Connection in the
Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Service Name, enter the information for the SQL Server data source.
If you do not know the name, check with your System Administrator.
5Click Login.
6In the User Name & Password dialog box, enter your user name and
password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
log you in whenever you open this drawing.
7Click OK.
8In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
data stores.
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a AutoCAD Map 3D
schema. Select Show All Data Stores to add these to the list. AutoCAD Map
3D will create a mapping to use these data stores with AutoCAD Map 3D.
9Click Connect.
10 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
11 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data
to your map, see Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
280 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier
1Verify that you have the privileges required to execute the ALTER TABLE
request.
2In the command line, enter the following:
cd <MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com
3Do one of the following:
■For SQL Server 2005, enter sqlcmd -UMyUserName -P MyPassword -S
SQLServerHostName -d MyDatastore -i AlterSchemaSQLServer.sql
■For SQL Server 2000, enter isql -UMyUserName -P MyPassword -S
SQLServerHostName -d MyDatastore -i AlterSchemaSQLServer.sql
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from SQL Server | 281
Bringing In Features from MySQL
When you view and edit features from a MySQL data source, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■Use a data store set up for AutoCAD Map 3D or in other applications. If
your data source schema is not set up to work with AutoCAD Map 3D, for
example, AutoCAD Map 3D will create a custom mapping so you can use
the data in your map.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Create a MySQL data source.
■Move data from other geospatial sources (for example, SHP data) into
MySQL, to take advantage of better data sharing.
For AutoCAD Map 3D 2009, the recommended version of MySQL is 5.0.27.
In the 2008 release of AutoCAD Map 3D, a new column called geometrytype
was added to the table named F_AttributeDefinition. To use AutoCAD Map
3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created in AutoCAD Map 3D
2007 and earlier, you must first connect to the data store containing this table
and run a SQL script. Instructions for this are on the Procedure tab of this
topic.
NOTE The MySQL architecture supports different storage engines, each with
varying characteristics and capabilities. The API has custom commands for gathering
information, transmitting exceptions, getting lists of accessible data stores, and
creating connection objects. There is support for spatial data types and spatial
query operations. For more information, refer to the FDO API Reference and the
FDO Provider for MYSQL API Reference.
See also:
■Working with MySQL Data on page 489
282 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Migrating Data on page 522
■Styling Features on page 540
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
To bring in features from MySQL
1Before connecting to a MySQL database, install the library file libmysql.dll.
2In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connect window, select Add MySQL Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
4Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
5Under Service Name, enter the information for the MySQL data source.
If you do not know the name, check with your System Administrator.
6Click Login.
7In the User Name & Password dialog box, enter your user name and
password.
Optionally, select Remember Password if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
log you in whenever you open this drawing.
8Click OK.
9In Data Connect, under Data Store, enter the data store name. If you do
not know this name, check with your System Administrator.
To select from a list of data stores, click the down arrow. AutoCAD Map
3D connects to the specified server and instance and lists the available
data stores.
NOTE If the data store is not in the list, it may not use a AutoCAD Map 3D
schema. Select Show All Data Stores to add these to the list. AutoCAD Map
3D will create a mapping to use these data stores with AutoCAD Map 3D.
10 Click Connect.
Bringing In Features from MySQL | 283
11 In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
12 Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data
to your map, see Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
To use AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 to access FDO data stores that were created
in AutoCAD Map 3D 2007 and earlier
1Verify that you have the privileges required to execute the ALTER TABLE
request.
2In the command line, enter the following:
cd <MapInstallDir>/Fdo/bin/com
mysql --user=MyUserName --password=MyPasswordMyDatabase
<AlterSchemaMySQL.sql> MyLogFile
quit
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
284 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Bringing In Features from SHP
You can access existing spatial and attribute data in ESRI SHP files, which store
both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A single shape can have a
number of separate files: SHP (shape geometry), SHX (shape index), PRJ
(projection information), CPG (code page files), IDX (spatial index), and DBF
(shape attributes in dBASE format). AutoCAD Map 3D treats each SHP and
associated DBF file as a feature class with a single geometry property.
When you view and edit features from a SHP data source, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock the file when you connect to it.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
■View and edit the schema definition.
You can bring SHP data into your map in two ways:
■Use Data Connect to view and edit the data directly in the SHP file. Use
this method to edit geometry and attributes or to style and theme the data.
For information, click the Procedure tab at the top of this Help topic.
■Import the data into this drawing, which converts it to drawing objects.
Use this method to clean the data or to create a DWG file. You can export
the objects back to SHP format.
NOTE For information on customizing the SHP FDO provider on page 1750, refer
to the FDO API Reference and the FDO Provider for SHP API Reference.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Converting and Exporting on page 1164
■Working with SHP Data on page 494
■Styling Features on page 540
Bringing In Features from SHP | 285
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
To bring in features from SHP
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SHP Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source File Or Folder, specify the location of the file. To include
multiple files in a group, specify a folder.
Click to browse to a file. Click the folder icon to browse to a folder.
5Click Connect.
6In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
7Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. To change a coordinate
system, click the coordinate system and select a new one from the list.
8Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data
to your map, see Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
286 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from SDF
You can access spatial and attribute data in an Autodesk Spatial Data File (SDF).
SDF supports spatial indexing and can store geometric and non-geometric
data with minimum overhead.
When you view and edit features from an SDF data source, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
■View and edit the schema definition.
■Move SDF data into other geospatial formats, to take advantage of better
data sharing
NOTE The procedures here apply to the current version of SDF (SDF3). For SDF
2 files (created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier), you cannot use these
procedures. Instead, import on page 325 the file.
You can bring SDF data into your map in three ways:
■Use Data Connect to view and edit the data directly in the SDF file. Use
this method to edit geometry and attributes or to style and theme the data.
For information, click the Procedure tab at the top of this Help topic.
■Import the data into the current map, which converts the SDF data to
drawing objects. Use this method to clean the data or to create a DWG
file. You can export the objects back to SDF.
Bringing In Features from SDF | 287
■For SDF 2 files (created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier), use the separate
SDF 2 Import on page 325 and SDF 2 Export on page 1175 commands.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for SDF API Reference.
See also:
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Importing Autodesk SDF 2 on page 325
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Converting and Exporting on page 1164
■Working with SDF Data on page 491
■Migrating Data on page 522
■Styling Features on page 540
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
To bring in features from SDF
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add SDF Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source File, specify the file.
5Click Connect.
6In the feature class list, select the feature classes to include in the map.
7Verify that the coordinate systems are correct. To change a coordinate
system, click the coordinate system and select a new one from the list.
8Click Add To Map.
288 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data
to your map, see Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. You can style,
theme, and edit the features.
If you need additional properties related to this data, you can connect
additional data to a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
NOTE For SDF files created for MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier, you cannot use
this procedure. Instead, import on page 326 the file.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Accessing Data from ODBC
Use an ODBC connection to access attribute or point data in Microsoft Access,
Microsoft Excel, or dBASE.
Attribute data allows you to join information from a non-geometry source to
a geometric feature. For example, you can join assessor data to a parcel layer.
For information about joins, see Joining Data to GIS Features on page 439.
Point data can include survey points, LIDAR on page 1754 data, or GPS data,
which is typically specified either by Latitude and Longitude columns or by
XY coordinates.
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D maps each table in the database to a “feature
class” while each column becomes a “property.”
Accessing Data from ODBC | 289
When you view and edit data from an ODBC database, you can do the
following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Style, theme, and edit the features.
■Lock the file when you connect to it.
■Automatically update the data source with any edits you make.
Your edits are immediately visible to anyone else using the data source.
■Define feature classes for any relational database table with X, Y (and,
optionally, Z) columns. Object locations are stored in separate properties
in the object definition of a feature, which is accessible through the
Geometry class property. You cannot create or delete feature schemas.
Microsoft Excel Data
To access Microsoft Excel data, you must define table ranges in Excel. These
named ranges in the worksheet can then be treated as separate ODBC tables,
with each one mapping to an FDO on page 1750 feature class. If you don’t define
named ranges, no feature classes are available to add to your map. Instructions
for defining a table range are on the Procedure tab of this topic.
Microsoft Access Data
Some Microsoft Access databases have primary keys that are auto-generated
by the application. You can load data from Microsoft Access databases without
these primary keys and use that data for joins, etc. However, without a primary
key you cannot create and update data.
To perform a AutoCAD Map 3D location query in a Microsoft Access database
that contains long integer values (longs), use the tools in Access to remove
the indexes from location-based x/y columns.
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and the FDO Provider for ODBC API Reference.
See also:
■Working with ODBC Data on page 496
■Styling Features on page 540
290 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Theming Features on page 955
■Using Feature Editing Commands on page 590
■To access ODBC data on page 291
■To create a DSN in Windows XP on page 292
■To define the table ranges needed to access Excel data on page 292
To access ODBC data
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add ODBC Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source Type, select one of the following:
■Data Source Name (DSN) — Use a DSN you have defined in your
Windows Control Panel. See below.
■Connection String — The connection string specifies the driver and
path to use.
5Under source, specify the table.
■Data Source Name (DSN) — Click the browse button and select the
DSN.
■Connection String — Specify the driver and path. For a Microsoft
Access database, use the format:
Driver={Microsoft Access Driver
(*.mdb)};DBQ=pathname\filename.mdb
Where pathname\filename.mdb is the complete path and filename of
the Microsoft Access database. Note the curly braces and the space
before “(*.mdb)” For more information, see the ODBC documentation
on the Microsoft Web site.
6If required by the table, enter your user name and password.
7Click Connect.
Accessing Data from ODBC | 291
8Under Add Data To Map, select the tables.
9For each table, specify the coordinate system.
10 Specify the columns to use for point geometry. This can be
latitude/longitude or X, Y, and Z coordinates. To specify the column
name, click in the field, then click the down arrow to choose from a list
of column names.
11 Click Add To Map.
If Add To Map is greyed, check that you have specified the coordinate
system and X and Y columns for the table.
To create a DSN in Windows XP
1From your Windows desktop, click Start menu ➤ Settings ➤ Control
Panel and open the Administrative Tools control panel.
2Double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
3In the ODBC Data Source Administrator, click User DSN or System DSN.
A User DSN is visible only to you. A System DSN is visible to all users on
the current machine.
4Click Add and select the driver to use.
For example, to create a DSN for an Access database, select Microsoft
Access Driver.
5In the ODBC Microsoft Access dialog box, enter information about the
data. When you finish, click OK. Click OK again to close the ODBC Data
Source Administrator dialog box.
The DSN you defined will appear in the DSN list in the Data Connect window.
To define the table ranges needed to access Excel data
1In Excel, open the Excel worksheet.
2Select all the data by pressing Ctrl + A.
3Click Insert menu ➤ Name ➤ Define to define a named range.
4Enter a name for the feature class, for example, Country_Literacy.
5Close Excel.
292 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Bringing In Features from WFS
You can bring in web-based features that have been published to a public web
server using the WFS (Web Feature Service) open standard developed by the
OpenGIS OpenGIS Consortium (OGC).
Once you have located the WFS data you want, determine the URL of the page
that serves the published layers. Often, this is not a standard web page that
you can open in a browser, but a page that has been programmed using a
scripting language such as CGI, PHP, or ASP. See below for some examples.
You paste the address into the Data Connect window in AutoCAD Map 3D
to access the data on that page.
When you bring in features from a WFS data source, you can do the following:
■Select the feature classes to include in your map.
■Set conditions to limit the features in your map.
■Reproject the data to the coordinate system of your map. Attribute data
may also be available for the WFS layers.
Bringing In Features from WFS | 293
■Style and theme features. You cannot edit features from a WFS data source.
Example WFS Data Sources
DescriptionWFS Data Source
Data layers such as boundaries, terrains,
physiography, utilities, and more.
http://demo.cubewerx.com/demo/cube-
serv/cubeserv.cgi?datastore=Foundation
Virginia, USA Census tracts, Congressional
districts, counties, interstates, POI, and
places.
http://regis.inter-
graph.com/wfs/dcmetro/request.asp?
NOTE For information on customizing this provider, refer to the FDO API Reference
and The Essential FDO.
See also:
■Working with WFS Data on page 500
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) on page 377
■Styling Features on page 540
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
To bring in features from WFS
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add WGS Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under server name, specify the URL for the WFS server. Click the down
arrow to choose from a list of recently-used URLs.
5If required, enter your user name and password.
6Click Connect.
7In the Add Data To Map area, select the feature classes to include.
294 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
8For each feature class you select, verify the coordinate system.
9Click Add To Map.
To bring in a subset of the data, click the down arrow and select Add To
Map With Query on page 270. To filter data after you’ve added the data
to your map, see Filtering a Feature Layer on page 1002.
Features from the selected feature classes appear in your map. If you need
additional properties related to this data, you can connect additional data to
a feature source layer using a join on page 439.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Repairing Broken Feature Connections
If a data file moves from its original location, you may get an error when you
open the map that references that data. For example, someone else might
create a map using an SDF file. That person then sends the map and SDF file
to you. If you store the SDF file with a different path name than the one used
by the original map creator, AutoCAD Map 3D will display an error.
Repairing Broken Feature Connections | 295
To resolve this problem, you need to reconnect the data using the correct
path. By doing so, you maintain styling information.
TIP To avoid this problem, use eTransmit to package and transfer files for a map.
Although this method does not work for database data (such as Oracle or SQL
Server data stores), it will preserve the connections of all file-based data, such as
SDF and SHP.
See also:
■Using eTransmit on page 1139
To reconnect to feature data without losing styling information
1In Data Connect, select the data connection that is broken.
For example, select SDF_1, if the first SDF connection is broken.
2For Source File Or Folder, type or browse to the correct data store location.
3Click Connect, but do not click Add.
Clicking Add creates a new layer in your map, without the styling
information from the original layer.
Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files
Your map can include drawing objects from the current drawing or from other
drawings. To include objects from other drawings, you must first attach those
drawings to your map.
NOTE To properly open a DWG file that was created with, or contains feature
source provider data, do not double-click the icon that represents the file. Click
File ➤ Open.
296 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Each set of objects you select is stored in a layer in Display Manager. A layer
that includes drawing objects is a drawing layer on page 1748.
Drawing layers in Display Manager are different from “classic” AutoCAD layers
that you see in the AutoCAD Layer Properties Manager. AutoCAD users who
do not have AutoCAD Map 3D do not have Display Manager and so cannot
see Display Manager layers.
You style AutoCAD layers using the Layer Properties Manager. When you
bring in data by object class, location, property, or query, and store that data
in a Display Manager drawing layer, you can style and theme the layer using
Display Manager tools, and use the mapping and GIS tools available in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Attaching a Drawing on page 146
■Use these procedures to bring drawing objects into your map on page 300
■To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
on page 301
■To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing
on page 303
■To bring in drawing objects based on location on page 304
■To bring in drawing objects based on object properties on page 307
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
on page 309
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data on page 309
■To bring in drawing objects based on external (SQL) data on page 310
■To bring in drawing objects based on topology on page 312
■To bring in drawing objects by combining query conditions on page 313
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files
You can include drawing objects in your map so you can view, edit, style and
theme them.
You can select objects from the current drawing and from attached drawings.
For information about attached drawings, see Attaching Drawings on page
144.
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files | 297
Each set of objects you select is stored in a drawing layer on page 1748 in Display
Manager.
From...It includes...When you create a
drawing layer based
on...
The current drawingAll the objects on the selected
AutoCAD layer
AutoCAD Layer on page
301
The current drawingAll the objects in the selected object
class
Object class on page 302
The current drawingAll the objects in the selected topo-
logy
Topology on page 311
The current drawing, at-
tached source drawings,
or a selected topology
All the objects in the specified loca-
tion
Location on page 304
The current drawing, at-
tached source drawings,
or a selected topology
All objects that have the selected
property, such as elevation, layer,
or area
Object property on page
306
The current drawing, at-
tached source drawings,
or a selected topology
All objects with the specified data,
such as object data or linked records
from an external database
Attached data on page
308
298 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In this city map example, there are separate drawing layers for each set of
entities comprising the water system.
Use the Display Manager check boxes to turn off layers, which hides the objects on
that layer, or to turn off styles, which displays the drawing objects on that layer without
styles. For more information on styling drawing layers, see Overview of Styling Drawing
Layers on page 550.
Map Base
Objects in the current drawing that are not included in any layer are included
in the Map Base layer. You can hide all objects on this layer.
NOTE Objects from attached drawings that you have queried into the current
drawing using a standard query are added to the Map Base layer. To style these
objects separately in your map, create a query to bring them into the display.
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files | 299
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Assigning Coordinate Systems on page 133
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class on page 302
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology on page 311
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location on page 304
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property on page 306
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Overview of Bringing In GIS Features on page 266
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
Use these procedures to bring drawing objects into your map
■To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
on page 301
■To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing
on page 303
■To bring in drawing objects based on location on page 304
■To bring in drawing objects based on object properties on page 307
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
on page 309
■To bring in drawing objects based on topology on page 312
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
300 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers
In your map, you can create a drawing layer on page 1748 in Display Manager
that includes all the objects from selected AutoCAD layers in the current
drawing.
For example, you can create a layer that includes all the fire hydrants by
selecting the HYDRANT AutoCAD layer.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects on an AutoCAD layer, use a query to add
the objects to your map and combine several conditions. For example, select only
the fire hydrants within 1000 meters of a corporation yard.
See also:
■Combining Conditions on page 313
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class on page 302
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology on page 311
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location on page 304
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property on page 306
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤
Drawing Layer.
Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers | 301
2In the Select Layers dialog box on page 1368, select the AutoCAD layers
that include the objects to display.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each AutoCAD
layer you select.
3To group the layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4Click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects on the selected AutoCAD
layer are included in this layer. If you selected multiple AutoCAD layers,
multiple layers are created in your map. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - AutoCAD Layer
Creates a new layer from AutoCAD layers in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Drawing Layer
Task Pane
Select Display Element dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class
In your map, you can create a drawing layer on page 1748 in Display Manager
that includes all the objects in an object class in the current drawing.
For example, to create a layer that includes all the primary roads, select the
PRIMARY_ROADS object class.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
TIP To select just some of the objects in an object class, use a query to add the
objects to your map and combine conditions. For example, you can select only
the primary roads in the West quadrant of the county.
302 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Combining Conditions on page 313
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology on page 311
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location on page 304
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property on page 306
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Object
Class.
2In the Select Classes dialog box on page 1368, select the object classes that
include the objects to display.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each object class
you select.
3To group the object class layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4Click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects in the selected object
class are included in this layer. If you selected multiple object classes, multiple
layers are created. To see the objects, you may need to zoom to the drawing
extents. Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Object Class
Creates a new object class layer in the Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Object Class...
Task Pane
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class | 303
Select Feature Classes dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location
In your map, you can create a drawing layer on page 1748 in Display Manager
that includes the objects in a specified location. You can select from objects
in the current map, in attached drawings, or in a topology.
For example, you can select all utility poles within 100 feet of a specified road
or all parks within a specified quadrant of the city.
TIP You can use a query to combine a location condition with other conditions.
For example, you can find all parcels that are zoned residential and are within 500
meters of a contaminated well.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Combining Conditions on page 313
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class on page 302
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology on page 311
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property on page 306
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
To bring in drawing objects based on location
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤
Query Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached on page 144 the DWG files to
query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
304 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, click Location.
3In the Location Condition dialog box on page 1584, select a boundary to
determine the type of area to query.
Select Fence to specify a new polyline; select Polyline to use an existing
polyline.
4Choose a selection type:
■Inside includes only objects that are completely inside the boundary.
■Crossing includes all objects that are inside the boundary or crossing
the boundary.
5If you select the Polyline boundary, specify a polyline mode.
6To define the coordinates of the boundary, click Define and use any
AutoCAD Map 3D selection method to define the boundary.
7Click OK.
8Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions on
page 313.
9In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location | 305
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property
In your map, you can create a drawing layer on page 1748 in Display Manager
that includes objects that have a specific property. You can select from objects
in the current map, or from objects in attached drawings.
For example, you can select all roads with a dashed linetype.
TIP You can combine a property condition with other conditions to create very
specific queries. For example, you could find all parcels that are zoned Residential
and have an elevation lower than 50.
Additional Information
■If an object has the property set to BYLAYER, it will be selected only if you
set the search value to BYLAYER.
For example, if you search for a DASHED linetype, you will get only objects
that have the linetype set to DASHED; you will not get objects that have
that linetype because they reside on a layer with a DASHED linetype. To
get these objects, you must set the search value to BYLAYER.
■Custom objects will not appear in the Object Type values list until you
load the DBX module for the object.
■Because topology information is stored in object data, use a data condition
to search for the following properties of topology objects: area, length,
perimeter, direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Combining Conditions on page 313
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class on page 302
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology on page 311
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location on page 304
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
306 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To bring in drawing objects based on object properties
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Query Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached on page 144 the DWG files to
query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
2In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, click Property.
3In the Property Condition dialog box on page 1589, select a property.
4Select an operator.
For some properties, such as layer, the only available operator is = (equal).
5Enter a value for the property.
To select from a list of values, click Values. For example, if you select the
layer property, click Values to display a list of layers in the drawings.
You can use wild-card characters to enter values for the following
properties: Block Name, Color, Text Style, Object Type, Group, Layer,
Feature Class, Linetype, and Plotstyle.
6Click OK.
7Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions on
page 313.
8In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property | 307
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data
In your map, you can add a drawing layer on page 1748 in Display Manager that
contains objects based on attribute data associated with the object, for example,
object data or data in a linked external database. Select from objects in the
current map, or from objects in attached drawings.
For example, if you have a linked database that lists pavement surfaces, you
can select all objects with a gravel pavement surface.
TIP Combine a data condition with other conditions to create very specific queries.
For example, you could find all parcels that are zoned Residential and are within
500 yards of a contaminated well.
Notes
■You cannot retrieve objects based on constant block attributes.
■For Data queries, the Database Link option tests the link data stored on
the object, not the data in the database table. To retrieve objects based on
data in the linked database table, create a SQL condition.
■Because topology information is stored in object data, use a data condition
to search for the following properties of topology objects: area, length,
perimeter, direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Combining Conditions on page 313
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class on page 302
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology on page 311
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location on page 304
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property on page 306
308 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
on page 309
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data on page 309
■To bring in drawing objects based on external (SQL) data on page 310
To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data
■To select objects based on object data on page ?
■To select objects based on external (SQL) data on page ?
To bring in drawing objects based on object data
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Query Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached on page 144 the DWG files to
query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
2In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, click Data.
3In the Data Condition dialog box on page 1570, select the type of data to
use.
4Specify the location of the data.
■To retrieve objects based on object class, in the Class list, select the
object class of the objects to retrieve. Under Properties, select the
specific properties to query.
■To retrieve objects based on object data, select the table and field to
query.
If two attached drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you
activate.
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data | 309
■To retrieve objects based on database link data, in the Link Template
list, select the link template associated with the objects to retrieve.
Under Key Columns, select the key column to query.
To search for objects in attached drawings, only link templates defined
in your attached drawing are displayed in the list.
■To retrieve objects based on block attribute information, in the Blocks
list, select the block that contains the attribute tag information to
query. Under Attribute Tags, select the attribute tag to query, or select
* in the Blocks list to see a list of all the attribute tags of all the blocks
in the active drawing.
5Select an operator.
When you query database link data, only the = operator is available.
6Enter the data value.
You can use wild-card characters for Value. For more information about
wild cards, see Wildcard Characters on page 1278.
7Click OK.
8In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, verify that the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
To bring in drawing objects based on external (SQL) data
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Query Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Query Source Drawing. Be sure you have attached on page
144 the DWG files to query.
■In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Query Topology.
2In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, click SQL.
3In the SQL Link Condition dialog box on page 1601, select the link template
for the table to search.
310 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
If you chose Attached Drawings in Step 1, the link template list includes
only link templates for active attached drawings. If the link template is
not listed, verify that it is defined in the attached drawing.
4Create a SQL condition by selecting a column, an operator, and a value.
To type the condition, click Type Condition.
5Click Add Condition to add the condition to the Current SQL Condition
list.
6To add more conditions, select And or Or. Create another condition.
7When you finish building the SQL condition, click OK.
8Optionally, define another condition. See Combining Conditions on
page 313.
9In the Define Query dialog box, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology
You can create a drawing layer on page 1748 in Display Manager that includes
all the objects in a topology.
For example, to create a layer that includes all the objects in the Streets
topology, select the STREETS topology.
You can organize layers into groups. Grouping layers lets you quickly turn off
the display of all the objects in the group.
Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology | 311
TIP To select just some of the objects in a topology, combine conditions. For
example, you could find only the streets with four or more lanes.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Combining Conditions on page 313
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class on page 302
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location on page 304
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property on page 306
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Creating Topologies on page 689
To bring in drawing objects based on topology
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Topology.
2In the Select Display Element dialog box on page 1368, select the topologies
that include the objects to display.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a layer in Display Manager for each topology
you select.
3To group topology layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the layers in a group, you can turn the display of the
group on or off.
4Click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. All objects in the selected topology
are included in this layer. If you selected multiple topologies, multiple layers
are created. To see the objects, you may need to zoom to the drawing extents.
Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Topology
312 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Creates a new topology layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Topology...
Task Pane
Select Display Element dialog boxDialog Box
Combining Conditions
You can combine query conditions to select specific drawing objects for a new
drawing layer on page 1748 in Display Manager.
For example, you can combine a layer condition with a location condition to
find utility lines in the West quadrant of a city.
You can select from objects in the current map, in attached drawings, or in a
topology.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Object Class on page 302
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Topology on page 311
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Location on page 304
■Bringing In Drawing Objects by Property on page 306
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
To bring in drawing objects by combining query conditions
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Query Current Drawing.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawing. Be sure you have attached on page 144 the DWG files to
query.
■In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
Combining Conditions | 313
2In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, create the first condition by
clicking Query Type.
■Location — Selects objects based on their location. Click Zoom Ext
to zoom to the extents of all active attached drawings.
■Property — Selects objects based on an object property, such as layer,
color, or area.
■Data — Selects objects based on object class, object properties, database
links, object data, or attributes.
■SQL — Selects objects based on linked external data.
When you finish defining the condition, you return to the Define Query
dialog box with the condition listed in the Current Query area.
3Before you create the next condition, select a joining operator.
■And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true.
■Or — Finds objects if either condition is true.
■And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the
second condition is false.
■Or Not — Finds objects if either the first condition is true or the second
condition is false.
4Create the next condition by clicking Query Type.
5Continue to create conditions.
6To group conditions, select the first and last condition in the group. Click
Group. Conditions inside the parentheses are evaluated first.
7When you finish defining conditions, click OK.
The new layer appears in Display Manager. Objects that meet the conditions
of the query are included in this layer. To see the objects, you may need to
zoom to the drawing extents. Click View ➤ Extents.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Layer - Query
Creates a new query layer in Display Manager
314 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data
and then select a query type
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing
Objects
You can import maps from other formats into AutoCAD Map 3D. The imported
data is brought into the current drawing and the geometry is converted to
drawing objects . The attribute data and display options associated with the
objects can also be imported.
In addition, you can specify an area of the map to import, assign incoming
objects to existing object classes, and automatically perform a coordinate
conversion on the objects as they are imported.
When you directly access data through FDO (using Data Connect), you make
all edits and changes directly to the source. When you import data, you bring
in a copy of the data and you cut the connection to the data source. Your
changes are made only to the copy in your map.
See also:
■Supported Import Formats on page 323
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
■Converting and Exporting on page 1164
■Digitizing Maps on page 1353
■To import data from other formats on page 318
■To style drawing data on import on page 321
■To specify an area to import on page 351
■To specify an AutoCAD layer during import on page 353
■To assign an object class to an input layer on page 355
■To perform a coordinate conversion on page 357
■To specify the data to import on page 359
■To specify how to import points on page 361
■To import polygons on page 363
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 366
■To import objects with links to an external database on page 367
Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects | 315
■To import a file with attribute data and display the data as text on page
368
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing
Objects
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D copies data from the input file into the
active AutoCAD Map 3D drawing and converts the data to drawing objects.
Connecting to Data Directly vs. Importing
You can work with your data using Data Connect or by importing it.
When you use Data Connect (from Display Manager), you view and edit data
in its source. Edits are saved back to the source. The data stays in its original
location.
When you import data, you make a copy of the data and bring that copy into
your map. When you edit the data, you are editing the copy. The original data
is unchanged.
For some formats, such as MicroStation Design (DGN), Arc/INFO, and SDF 2
(Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can only import and export the
data. For most other formats, you can either connect directly to the data or
use import and export.
For more information, see Overview of Bringing In GIS Features on page 266.
Before You Import a File
Before you import a file, determine the following:
■Determine whether to limit the import to the current display area or to
an area that you define.
■Decide where to put objects: on an existing layer in the map, on a new
layer, or on a layer specified in the file you are importing.
■Determine which incoming data values to use to populate the object class
data fields, and decide how to handle data values that don't fall within
the acceptable object class range (keep them as-is or assign them default
object class values).
316 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Assign a coordinate system to the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You
need to know which coordinate system is used with the input files.
■Determine whether to import the data as object data or as external data,
and whether to use an existing table or create a new one.
■Import point objects as points, text, or blocks. When you import as blocks,
be sure you've copied the block you want into the AutoCAD Map 3D
drawing.
Supported Formats
For information on importing specific formats, see the following:
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) on page 323 (version 3,
MapGuide Enterprise)
■Importing Autodesk SDF 2 on page 325
■Importing DXF Files on page 327
■Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages on page 330
■Importing From ESRI ArcSDE on page 327
■Importing ESRI ShapeFiles on page 333
■Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML) Files on page 347
■Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files on page 335
■Importing MapInfo TAB Files on page 338
■MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 on page 340
■Oracle on page 345
■Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) Files on page 349
■Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files on page 350
See also:
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
■Converting and Exporting on page 1164
■Digitizing Maps on page 1353
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects | 317
To import data from other formats
1Do one of the following:
■If you are importing data from an Oracle or ArcSDE data source, Click
File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection.
You cannot use the rest of this procedure. Instead, see Importing From
Oracle on page 345 or Importing From ESRI ArcSDE on page 327.
■If you are importing an SDF file, click Click File ➤ Create DWG
From ➤ Autodesk SDF.
■If you are importing an Autodesk SDF 2 file, click File menu ➤ Create
DWG From ➤ Autodesk SDF 2 (MapGuide 6.x).
Do not follow the rest of this procedure. Instead, see Importing
Autodesk SDF 2 on page 325.
■If you are importing a DXF file, Click File ➤ Open. Change Files of
Type to DXF.
Select the file you want and click Open. Do not follow the rest of this
procedure.
■If you are importing any other file type, Click File ➤ Create DWG
From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Continue with the steps below.
2In the Import Location dialog box, under Files Of Type, select the format
of the map to import.
3Select the file or folder to import. Click OK.
4For formats with additional options, in the Import dialog box, click Driver
Options.
For more information about the formats with additional options and
their associated driver options, see one of the following:
■Importing ESRI ShapeFiles on page 333
■Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages on page 330
■Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML) Files on page 347
■Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files on page 335
■Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files on page 335
■MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 on page 340
■Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard) Files on page 349
318 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files on page 350
NOTE Change any driver options before you modify other settings in the
Import options dialog box. Changing driver options can invalidate other
changes you've made in this dialog box.
5In the Import dialog box on page 1446, under Spatial Filter, specify whether
to limit the area where data will be imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■Define Window — Limit the import to an area you define. To use this
option, click Select. Respond to the prompts to define the area.
6Specify the import settings for each input layer (sometimes called a theme,
level, or file).
■Drawing Layer on page 353— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■Object Class on page 355— Assign incoming objects to an existing
object class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the
object class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have
object classes defined in your map. For more information about setting
up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification on page ?.
■Input Coordinate System on page 357— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data on page 359— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points on page 361— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming
point objects.
NOTE If you import points that you assigned to an object class with a
creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points to
blocks so the objects can be classified. Object classification does not
automatically convert points to blocks.
7By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To import them
as closed polylines, select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines.
Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects | 319
8If you assigned incoming objects to object classes and want to use the
object class defaults for any incoming data that is out of the defined
object class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values.
If you do not select this option, incoming data will be imported as is,
which may include some out of range values. If you later view the data
on the Object Class tab of the Properties palette, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically modifies the data, using defaults as needed, so that the
data is in range and properly classified.
9To save your settings as a profile, click Save. Saved profiles can be loaded
when you import other files, and they can be used to automate
command-line scripts.
10 Click OK to begin the import process.
If you cancel the Import operation, all objects imported prior to canceling
will remain in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You can delete these objects
and any associated data.
Notes and Warnings
■To copy the contents of a field, right-click in the field to copy and click
Copy. Right-click in the target field and click a Paste option. To copy the
contents of a field to all other layers, right-click in the field to copy and
click Paste To All Layers.
■When pasting into Object Class fields, the object class name and the data
mappings are pasted separately. The paste data mappings options are
available only if the same fields exist in the incoming data for all mapped
fields.
■You cannot copy a "By Data" or "ACAD_TEXT" setting.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
320 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORTFDO
Import FDO data.
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection....
Menu
MAPIMPORTFDOCommand Line
Styling Drawing Data Converted From a Geospatial Data
Store
When you convert data from a geospatial format to DWG format, you can set
up appropriate DWG layers and styling information for the incoming data
automatically. This allows you to send out appropriately styled drawing files
to AutoCAD users.
You use AutoCAD layers to set up the styles. You can also create blocks,
linetypes, and other elements you need for styling. You save these items in a
drawing template, and then create a new map using that template to hold the
imported data.
To style drawing data on import
1Create a drawing file in AutoCAD Map 3D that defines all the coordinate
system, layers, blocks, linetypes, and other elements you need for styling.
■In Map Explorer, right-click Current Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
and specify the coordinate system.
■To create layers, --
For information about creating block and other elements, see the
AutoCAD Help.
2Change the properties of the layer to reflect the styling you want.
For more information about styling layers, see Overview of Styling
Drawing Layers on page 550.
Styling Drawing Data Converted From a Geospatial Data Store | 321
3Save the resulting drawing as a template (DWT) file.
■Click File ➤ Save As.
■In the Files Of Type list, choose AutoCAD Drawing Template (*.dwt).
■Name and save the file.
■Set the template options (English or Metric and New Layer
Notification) and click OK. For more information about these options,
see the AutoCAD Help.
4When you are ready to import the data, create a new map using the
template you created.
■Click File ➤ New.
■Select the template you created and click OK.
5Import the data into the new file.
■Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
■Specify the file to import and click OK.
6In the Import dialog box on page 1446, under Import Properties For Each
Layer Imported, specify the import settings for each input layer
(sometimes called a theme, level, or file).
■Drawing Layer on page 353— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■Object Class on page 355— Assign incoming objects to an existing
object class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the
object class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have
object classes defined in your map. For more information about setting
up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification on page ?.
■Input Coordinate System on page 357— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data on page 359— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points on page 361— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming
point objects.
322 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE If you import points that you assigned to an object class with a
creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points to
blocks so the objects can be classified. Object classification does not
automatically convert points to blocks.
7Click OK.
8Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
The imported objects use the styling information specified in your
template.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Supported Import Formats
Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files)
SDF is a native Autodesk file-based geospatial format that is optimized for
storing large, classified data sets.
SDF is similar to SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute
data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather
than a set of files.
When drawing data is stored as SDF, you can use Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2007 to style and publish the data to the Internet. You can also
publish map data directly to MapGuide on page 1140, without exporting to SDF.
Supported Import Formats | 323
Versions
The current version, which works with AutoCAD Map 3D and Autodesk
MapGuide Enterprise, is SDF version 3. AutoCAD Map 3D refers to this version
as “SDF.”
SDF version 2 is still supported by MapGuide 6.5 (and earlier releases), and
AutoCAD Map 3D can import and export SDF 2 using a separate import/export
interface.
Advantages
SDF has the following advantages over DWG:
■It stores and manages an order of magnitude more data than DWG
■It is very fast, allowing Autodesk applications, such as AutoCAD Map 3D
and MapGuide, to read and display tens of thousands of features per second.
■It provides the power of a database without the overhead and cost of a full
relational database management system (RDBMS) such as SQL Server or
Oracle.
■An SDF file can store a single feature class, or it can store multiple feature
classes.
■It is easy to manage, providing access to the database schema.
Importing
When importing SDF, you can import each feature class in the SDF to a separate
layer. You can specify how you want to bring in attribute data and points.
You can also set an option to import polygons as closed polylines.
Driver Options
SDF has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
To import an SDF file
■Import from SDF on page 316 – Imports from SDF (version 3).
324 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Import from SDF 2 on page 325– Imports from SDF (version 2).
To access and work with SDF
■Connect to SDF on page 287– Allows you to view and edit the SDF data live
in its native format (SDF version 3).
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing Autodesk SDF 2
While importing SDF 2 files (Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 and earlier), you can
perform coordinate conversions, create object data tables from the key, name,
and URL fields, and create hyperlinks on imported objects. Import a selected
portion of the SDF by specifying four corner points of an area.
NOTE SDF 2 files can only be imported (and exported). They cannot be accessed
using Data Connect. However, SDF 3 files, using the new MapGuide technology,
use Data Connect. For information, see To bring in features from SDF on page
288.
See also:
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) on page 323
■Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format on page 1175
■Bringing In Features from SDF on page 287
Supported Import Formats | 325
To import SDF 2 files
1Click File menu ➤ Create DWG From ➤ SDF 2 (Autodesk MapGuide
6.x).
2In the Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box, select a file. Click Open.
3In the Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box on page 1320, under Import
Layer, select the target AutoCAD layer for the SDF information.
To create a new AutoCAD layer, click Create New Layer.
4Under Coordinate Conversion, select Convert From. Enter a coordinate
system code.
To select the code from a list, click Select Coordinate System.
5Under Data Elements, select Assign To Object Data Table. Specify the
object data table and fields.
To create a new table or field, click Create New Table or Create New Field.
6Optionally, under Data Elements, select Create Hyperlinks From URL.
7Under Import By Location, select Define An Area To Import From The
SDF File and enter the coordinates for the area to import.
The coordinates must be in the coordinate system of the SDF file.
8To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
9Click OK.
The objects in the SDF file are imported into the drawing.
Quick Reference
MAPSDFIN
Imports an SDF 2 format file from Autodesk MapGuide 6.5 or earlier
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Autodesk SDF 2
(MapGuide 6.x).
Menu
MAPSDFINCommand Line
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog boxDialog Box
326 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Importing DXF Files
You can use DXF files created by other applications to bring information into
AutoCAD Map 3D. When you import objects from DXF files, they do not have
links to other objects or to data. For example, a polygon that encloses a parcel
ID is not linked to the parcel ID except visually. Data imported from a DXF
file does not have any links to object data or external databases.
You cannot attach a source drawing to a DXF file or attach DXF files to another
drawing.
See also:
■Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File on page 1202
To import a DXF file
1Click File ➤ Open.
2In the Select File dialog box, under Files Of Type, select DXF (*.dxf).
3Select the file. Click Open.
Quick Reference
OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file
File menu ➤ Open
Menu
Open Drawing
Icon
OPENCommand Line
Importing From ESRI ArcSDE
You can import data from a connected ESRI ArcSDE database into your map
DWG. Using this option, your data will be imported as drawing objects. The
data will be a snapshot of your ArcSDE data. You can also make a live
connection with ArcSDE (one where edits will go into the database.
Supported Import Formats | 327
See also:
■Bringing In Features from ArcSDE on page 274
To import data from an ESRI ArcSDE data source
1Before moving ArcSDE data into your map, assign a coordinate system
to the map. This lets you position your data accurately in a real-world
geographic location and align imported survey or GPS point data.
2In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
For more information, see Bringing In Features from ArcSDE on page 274
NOTE Follow the steps up until clicking Connect; then stop. Do not add the
features to your map.
3Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection.
4In the Map Import From FDO dialog box, select the ArcSDE data source
connection from which to import data.
5Click OK.
6In the Import dialog box on page 1446, review the Current Drawing
Coordinate System to make sure it’s correct.
7Under Spatial Filter, specify whether to limit the area where data will be
imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■Define Window — Limit the import to an area you define. To use this
option, click Select. Respond to the prompts to define the area.
8Specify the import settings for each input layer:
■Drawing Layer on page 353— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■Object Class on page 355— Assign incoming objects to an existing
object class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the
object class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have
object classes defined in your map. For more information about setting
up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification on page ?.
328 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Input Coordinate System on page 357— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data on page 359— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points on page 361— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming
point objects.
NOTE If you're importing points and have assigned them to an object class
with a creation method of Blocks, you must use the Points column to convert
the points to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification
does not convert points to blocks for you.
9By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To import them
as closed polylines, select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines.
10 If you assigned incoming objects to object classes and want to use the
object class defaults for any incoming data that's out of the defined object
class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values.
If you do not select this option, incoming data will be imported as is,
which may include some out of range values. If you later view the data
on the Object Class tab of the Properties palette, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically modifies the data, using defaults as needed, so that the
data is in range and properly classified.
11 To save your settings as a profile, click Save. These saved profiles can be
loaded when you import other files, and they can be used to automate
command-line scripts.
12 Click OK to begin the import process.
If you cancel the import operation, all objects imported prior to canceling
will remain in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You can delete these objects
and any associated data.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORTFDO
Import FDO data.
Supported Import Formats | 329
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection....
Menu
MAPIMPORTFDOCommand Line
Importing ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages
AutoCAD Map 3D supports Arc/INFO version 7.2, 7.3, and 8.x, and E00.
Importing
Arc/INFO stores coverages on your hard disk as a directory of files.
In the coverage directory, each file contains specific data pertaining to the
coverage. For example, ARC files contain coordinates for arcs and LAB files
contain the coordinates for label points.
NOTE ARC files also contain TIC and Bounds settings. For import, these are driver
options, and are not imported or displayed by default. Tics are points with known
real-world coordinates. Coverages use tics to ensure that stacked coverages and
adjoining tiled coverages align accurately.
The following table shows how coverage features are translated to drawing
objects on import:
Drawing ObjectCoverage Feature
Point on _point layer, PAT attributes in object data
or in an external database.
Point
Sketch on _arc layer, AAT attributes in object data
or in an external database.
Arc
Closed polyline on _poly layer, PAT in object data
attached to polyline. In addition, all segments are
duplicated as sketches on the _arc layer.
Polygon
Geometry converted as above, attribute in object
data.
Point, Arc, and Polygon with FAT
(feature allocation table) in dBASE
Text on _text layer. Text arrows on _textarrow layer.Annotation
330 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Drawing ObjectCoverage Feature
Points on _tic layer, attributes in object data.Tics
Importing Restrictions
The following features are not supported when importing an Arc/INFO coverage
into a drawing:
■feature attribute tables
■text attributes
■route systems
■address files
■turntables
■LOG files
■fonts
■symbols
■linetypes
■shades
If a coverage has a field that describes Z values, commonly SPOT or
ELEVATION, the field is treated only as an attribute. It is not translated into
a Z value. You may be able to use a property alteration query to change the
elevation of the resulting drawing objects. (This will depend on the object
type. Elevation is not supported for all object types.)
When importing polygon coverages, polygon areas may be imported as closed
polylines. If you plan to recreate the topology in AutoCAD Map 3D, use the
MAPCREATECENTROIDS command to create centroids and move any attribute
data from the polyline or polygon to the centroids. Use the _arc layer to create
the topology using the topology commands.
In addition, AutoCAD Map 3D supports the coverage exchange format E00.
Supported Import Formats | 331
Driver Options
You can set the following options when importing Arc/INFO coverages or E00
files:
DescriptionOption
Select Follow, Fit, or Ignore.Text Curves
Select Extract Bounds, or Extract Tics.Optional Feature Types
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
■To recreate an Arc/INFO topology in AutoCAD Map 3D on page 332
To import from Arc/INFO
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
To recreate an Arc/INFO topology in AutoCAD Map 3D
1Use the MAPCREATECENTROIDS command to create centroids. on page
748
2Move any attribute data from the polyline or polygon to the centroids
on page 748
3Use the _arc layer to create the topology using the topology commands.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
332 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing ESRI ShapeFiles
AutoCAD Map 3D supports up to ArcView version 3.2 and 8.x.
About SHP Files
ESRI SHP files store both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A single
shape can have as many as five physical files with the same filename, but
different file extensions:
■.shp— Geometric data. Data for multiple points, polylines, and polygons
can be stored in one SHP file, but each SHP file can store only one type of
geometry. For example, a line SHP file can contain data for rivers, roads,
and pipes.
■.shx — A geometric index to the map features, which can be used by some
applications to find features in disparate sections of a large map.
■.dbf— Attribute data associated with the map features.
■.prj—Projection and coordinate system data. This file is created only if your
map has an assigned coordinate system.
■.idx—Identifies the index field for the related SHP file, which is the unique
identifier for each entity in the SHP file.
Importing
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers SHP files a multi-select, file-based
format, that is, you select one or more individual .shp files during a single
import process. You can change the default in the mapimport.ini file so that
AutoCAD Map 3D considers SHP files a folder-based format (all files in the
folder are included in the import) or a single-select format (only one file can
be selected for import).
When importing SHP files, it is important that you have the complete set of
.shp, .shx, and .dbf in the same folder. The import operation will work if you
Supported Import Formats | 333
have only the .shp file, but only the geometries will be imported. To import
data with its geometry, you need the full set of files.
The link to the data stored in the .dbf file can be maintained during the import
operation, or the data can be imported into object data in the AutoCAD Map
3D drawing.
You can import TEXTSTRING information from SHP classes you bring back
into AutoCAD Map 3D by importing points as text.
Import Restrictions
SHP files don't include color information. Imported objects will have the same
color as the AutoCAD Map 3D layer.
Point symbols, line styles, and fill styles are not maintained when importing
from SHP files. Before the translation, put these items into one or more fields
in the associated database so you can reassign the display properties of the
graphical objects using these values in the drawing file.
Driver Options
SHP does not have import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■Specifying How to Import Points on page 361
■To import SHP data on page 334
■To change the single file/folder default setting for SHP files on page 334
■To access and work with SHP files on page 335
To import SHP data
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
To change the single file/folder default setting for SHP files
■Modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To export to .shp as folder-based rather than
file-based on page 245
334 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To access and work with SHP files
■Connect to SHP on page 285 – Allows you to view and edit the SHP live in
its native format
■Bulk Copy on page 522 – Move data to and from SHP to other geospatial
data stores.
To import TEXTSTRING information from SHP classes you bring back into
AutoCAD Map 3D
■Select the import option to import points as text. See Specifying How to
Import Points on page 361.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing MapInfo MIF/MID Files
MIF/MID is a file standard used by MapInfo, a desktop mapping system.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports MapInfo up to version 7 MIF/MID files.
About MapInfo MIF/MID Files
MapInfo MIF/MID format stores both geometry and attributes (data) for
features, and is a set of two physical files that work together:
■.mif— Vector geometric data. A single .mif file can contain many different
types of geometry.
■.mid— Attributes for the geometric data.
Supported Import Formats | 335
Importing
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers MapInfo MIF/MID a multi-select,
file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual .mif files during
a single import process. To change the default so that AutoCAD Map 3D
considers MIF/MID a folder-based format (all files in the folder are included
in the import) or a single-select format (only one file can be selected for
import), modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
When you import MapInfo MIF/MID files, it is important that you have both
the .mif and .mid files in the same folder.
Symbol types are similar to AutoCAD Map 3D point objects. You cannot
import MIF/MID symbol types directly. However, if you store the symbol type
information in a column in a MID file, you can map each symbol type to a
block in the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. To do this, prepare the MIF
file by putting the name of the symbol type into a field in the database. Prepare
the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing by creating similar symbols as blocks in the
AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. Then, during import, perform a point-block
mapping and select the check box to get the block name from data and select
the symbol type field you created.
In MapInfo, polygons are represented as closed areas. When you import
polygons into AutoCAD Map 3D, they appear as polygons unless you select
Import Polygons As Closed Polylines in the Import dialog box.
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), edit the
mapimport.ini file.
To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID, edit the
mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo MIF/MID has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
■To change import settings for MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
■To import object colors using RGB (True Color) on page 337
336 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID on page 337
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
To change import settings for MapInfo MIF/MID
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To import object colors using RGB (True Color)
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To change the default text justification setting for MIF/MID
■Edit the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Use the [MIF_Justification] section to set justification for MIF. Allowed MIF
Justifications are left, center, and right. For more information, see To edit
the .ini file on page ?.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Supported Import Formats | 337
Importing MapInfo TAB Files
MapInfo TAB, also referred to as the MapInfo native format, is a
two-dimensional format that stores both feature geometry and attributes (data)
in a set of physical files that have the following file extensions:
About MapInfo TAB Files
■.tab— The main file for a MapInfo table. It is associated with the appropriate
.dat, .id, .map, and .ind files.
■.dat— Tabular data for a table in MapInfo's native format.
■.id— An index to a MapInfo graphical objects .map() file.
■.map— Contains geographic information describing map objects.
■.ind— An index to a MapInfo tabular (.dat) file.
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import and export MapInfo TAB up to version
7.
Importing
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers MapInfo TAB a multi-select, file-based
format, that is, you select one or more individual .tab files during a single
import process. To change the default so that AutoCAD Map 3D considers
MapInfo TAB a folder-based format (all files in the folder are included in the
import) or a single-select format (only one file can be selected for import),
modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
When you import MapInfo TAB files, it is important that you have the
complete set of physical files (.tab, .dat, .id, .map, and .ind) in the same folder.
Symbol types are similar to AutoCAD Map 3D point objects. You cannot
import TAB symbol types directly. However, if you store the symbol type
information in a column in a DAT file, you can map each symbol type to a
block in the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. To do this, prepare the TAB
file by putting the name of the symbol type into a field in the database. Prepare
the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing by creating similar symbols as blocks in the
AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. Then, during import, perform a point-block
mapping and select the check box to get the block name from data and select
the symbol type field you created.
338 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In MapInfo, polygons are represented as closed areas. When you import
polygons, the polygons appear as polygons in AutoCAD Map 3D unless you
select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines in the Import dialog box.
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), you must edit
the mapimport.ini file.
To change the default text justification setting for TAB, edit the
mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo TAB has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To import from MapInfo TAB on page 339
■To import object colors using RGB (True Color) on page 339
■To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB on page
339
To import from MapInfo TAB
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
To import object colors using RGB (True Color)
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB
■Edit the mapforeignfileproperties.ini file.
Use the [MAPINFO_Justification] section to set justification for TAB.
Allowed TAB Justifications are left, center, and right. For more information,
see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240.
Supported Import Formats | 339
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8
You can import and export Microstation DGN version 7 and 8. Bentley Systems,
Inc., and MicroStation programs use the DGN format, which is similar to a
DWG file; points, lines, areas, text, and other object types can all be present
in the same file.
Importing
Data-element information is stored in an external database file and linked to
graphic objects. AutoCAD Map 3D imports database link information so you
can maintain the linkage during import on page 366.
By default, object colors are imported to their closest ACI (AutoCAD Color
Index) color. To import object colors using RGB (True Color), edit the
mapimport.ini file.
For DGN8, the Input Layer column lists the model name. To see the layers
for a specific model, you may need to scroll the list.
340 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Driver Options for DGN 7
You can set the following options when importing DGN 7 files:
DescriptionOption
Choose Geometry to group incoming objects by entity type.
Choose Level to group them by their DGN level or level name.
Only levels that contain elements will be imported.
Group Elements By
Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage
values from the DGN 7 file. If you select MSLinks, AutoCAD
Linkage Extraction
Map 3D imports up to three links per object for DGN 7. For
each link, two fields are added to the object data table:
mslinks_n, which specifies the key value, and entity_num_n,
which specifies the table. If you select FRAMME, the following
fields are added to the object data table: comp_count,
comp_num, dgnfile, feat_num, state_num, and ufid.
Each DGN 7 file defines a UOR (unit of resolution); in addition,
it can define Sub units and Master units. Select Master or Sub
Coordinate Units
to specify which of these units in the DGN 7 file matches the
default unit in the AutoCAD Map 3D map. For example, if
the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map is meters, and
meters are the Sub unit in the imported file, select Sub. If you
select Sub or Master, the UORs in the DGN 7 file are conver-
ted to Sub or Master units according to the conversion factor
in the DGN file header.
When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever
you choose) will become one drawing unit in your AutoCAD
Map 3D map. The Unit Ratio value indicates the ratio between
the Master and Sub units. For example, if the ratio is 1:12 (as
it would be for Feet/Inches), imported object coordinates will
be scaled 12 times bigger if you select Sub.
NOTE When you import or export a DGN file with a master
unit of Imperial feet, AutoCAD Map 3D converts the master
unit from feet to meters. In addition, it does not recognize
any sub-unit selection during the import or export process.
Select the options to use during import. For example, select
Explode Complex Strings to return each component of a
Element Expansion
Supported Import Formats | 341
DescriptionOption
complex chain as its own feature (no feature will be returned
for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements
of the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any
arcs in the complex chain become linestrings, and any link-
ages on the component elements themselves are lost. Select
Propagate Member Linkages to return the linkages attached
to the first component of the complex chain to supplement
any existing linkages. Otherwise, any linkages on the compon-
ent elements themselves are lost and only linkages attached
to the complex chain itself are returned.
By default, cells are converted into blocks, maintaining the
cell grouping. You can choose to convert the cells to points
Cell Expansion
instead. You can also explode the contents of the cells into
their component parts, but the explosion is one level deep
only.
Select Create DWG to read all external reference files (xrefs)
attached to the source data set. If the reference file has nested
Reference Files
references, they are also imported, but circular references are
not. If you select this option, you specify a location for the
folder for these files. If the folder already exists, you can
choose to replace it (overwrite its contents) or cancel and
specify a different location. The default folder location is the
same as the selected DGN file location.
If you select Ignore, reference files are not imported and you
cannot change the location of the folder.
Driver Options for DGN 8
You can set the following options when importing DGN 8 files:
DescriptionOption
Choose Geometry to group incoming objects by entity type.
Choose Level or Level Names to group them by their DGN
Group Elements By
level or level name. Only levels that contain elements will be
imported.
342 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
DescriptionOption
By default, cells are converted into blocks, maintaining the
cell grouping. You can choose to convert the cells to points
Cell Expansion
instead. You can also explode the contents of the cells into
their component parts, but the explosion is one level deep
only.
Each DGN 8 file can define Sub units and Master units. Specify
which of these units in the DGN 8 file matches the default
Coordinate Units
unit in the AutoCAD Map 3D map. For example, if the default
unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map is meters, and meters are
the Sub unit in the imported file, select Sub.
When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever
you choose) will become one drawing unit in your AutoCAD
Map 3D map. The Unit Ratio value indicates the ratio between
the Master and Sub units. For example, if the ratio is 1:12 (as
it would be for Feet/Inches), imported object coordinates will
be scaled 12 times bigger if you select Sub.
NOTE When you import or export a DGN file with a master
unit of Imperial feet, AutoCAD Map 3D converts the master
unit from feet to meters. In addition, it does not recognize
any sub-unit selection during the import or export process.
Select the options to use during import. For example, select
Explode Complex Strings to return each component of a
Element Expansion
complex chain as its own feature (no feature will be returned
for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements
of the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any
arcs in the complex chain become linestrings, and any link-
ages on the component elements themselves are lost.
Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage
values from the DGN 8 file. For each link, two fields are added
Linkage Extraction
to the object data table: mslinks_n, which specifies the key
value, and entity_num_n, which specifies the table. If you
select FRAMME, the following fields are added to the object
data table: comp_count, comp_num, dgnfile, feat_num,
state_num, and ufid.
Supported Import Formats | 343
DescriptionOption
Select Create DWG to read all external reference files (xrefs)
attached to the source data set. If the reference file has nested
Read Reference Files
references, they are also imported, but circular references are
not. If you select this option, you specify a location for the
folder for these files. If the folder already exists, you can
choose to replace it (overwrite its contents) or cancel and
specify a different location. The default folder location is the
same as the selected DGN file location.
If you select Ignore, reference files are not imported and you
cannot change the location of the folder.
Other Import Options
You can set a number of options in the MapForeignFileProperties.ini file. See
Customizing and Automating Import and Export on page 236.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■Importing Objects with Links to an External Database on page 366
■To import object colors using RGB (True Color) on page 344
■To maintain a link to external data when you import DGN files on page
344
■To import DGN files on page 344
To import object colors using RGB (True Color)
■Edit the mapimport.ini file.
For more information, see To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To maintain a link to external data when you import DGN files
■Use a link template to maintain the linkage during import on page 366.
To import DGN files
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
344 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
For driver options, see Design File Input Settings on page 1467.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing From Oracle
You can import data from a connected Oracle database into your map. Using
this option, your data will be imported as drawing objects. The data will be a
snapshot of your Oracle data. You can also make a live connection with Oracle
(one where edits will go into the database.
See also:
■Bringing In Features from Oracle on page 271
To import date from an Oracle data source
1Before moving Oracle data into your map, assign a coordinate system to
the map. This lets you position your data accurately in a real-world
geographic location and align imported survey or GPS point data.
2In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
For more information, see Bringing In Features from Oracle on page 271
NOTE Follow the steps up until clicking Connect; then stop. Do not add the
features to your map.
3Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection.
Supported Import Formats | 345
4In the Map Import From FDO dialog box, select the Oracle data source
connection from which to import data.
5Click OK.
6In the Import dialog box on page 1446, review the Current Drawing
Coordinate System to make sure it’s correct.
7Under Spatial Filter, specify whether to limit the area where data will be
imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
■Define Window — Limit the import to an area you define. To use this
option, click Select. Respond to the prompts to define the area.
8Specify the import settings for each input layer:
■Drawing Layer on page 353— Select a target layer for each layer in the
incoming file.
■Object Class on page 355— Assign incoming objects to an existing
object class and map incoming attribute data to the data fields in the
object class. The Object Class fields are available only if you have
object classes defined in your Map drawing. For more information
about setting up object classes, see Setting Up Object Classification
on page ?.
■Input Coordinate System on page 357— Specify the coordinate system
of the incoming file. If the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a coordinate
system assigned to it, incoming objects are converted to the coordinate
system of the drawing.
■Data on page 359— For each layer, specify how to import data.
■Points on page 361— For each layer, specify how to treat incoming
point objects.
NOTE If you're importing points and have assigned them to an object class
with a creation method of Blocks, you must use the Points column to convert
the points to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification
does not convert points to blocks for you.
9By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To import them
as closed polylines, select Import Polygons As Closed Polylines.
346 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
10 If you assigned incoming objects to object classes and want to use the
object class defaults for any incoming data that's out of the defined object
class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values.
If you do not select this option, incoming data will be imported as is,
which may include some out of range values. If you later view the data
on the Object Class tab of the Properties palette, AutoCAD Map 3D
automatically modifies the data, using defaults as needed, so that the
data is in range and properly classified.
11 To save your settings as a profile, click Save. These saved profiles can be
loaded when you import other files, and they can be used to automate
command-line scripts.
12 Click OK to begin the import process.
If you cancel the import operation, all objects imported prior to canceling
will remain in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. You can delete these objects
and any associated data.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORTFDO
Import FDO data.
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ FDO Connection....
Menu
MAPIMPORTFDOCommand Line
Importing Geographic Markup Language (GML)
Files
GML (Geography Markup Language) is an OpenGIS® Implementation
specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of
geographic information. The specification can be found on the OpenGIS
Consortium web site.
You can import and export GML in and out of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Supported Import Formats | 347
Importing
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import GML version 2 or version 3. There
is a separate drop down option that also allows you to import Ordnance Survey
of Great Britain MasterMap GML version 2 files.
Because the GML format is flexible and allows you to specify your own
schemas, semantics, and options, there are many variations of the format.
AutoCAD Map 3D reads many of these, but some may not be compatible with
the AutoCAD Map 3D GML driver.
In addition, before importing GML data in Asian languages, you must verify
that the language encoding settings specified in the AutoCAD Map 3D
mapimport.ini file match the settings in your incoming file. The settings need
to match for the import to be successful. For more information, see
Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240.
Driver Options
GML has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To verify language encoding settings for import from GML on page 348
■To import GML files on page 348
To verify language encoding settings for import from GML
■Make sure the language encoding settings in the mapimport.ini file match
the settings in your incoming file.
For more information, see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
on page 240.
To import GML files
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
348 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard)
Files
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer Standard). SDTS is an
import-only format. You cannot export to this format.
Importing
When you select an SDTS catalogue file, AutoCAD Map 3D imports objects
and attributes from the dataset specified in the catalogue file. Typically, a
dataset is a group of .ddf files with the same filename prefix.
AutoCAD Map 3D imports only one record per object. If an object has multiple
records attached, only one of the records will be imported.
Driver Options
SDTS has no import driver options.
To import SDTS files
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Supported Import Formats | 349
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing VPF (Vector Product Format) Files
You can import Vector Product Format (VPF) files into AutoCAD Map 3D. You
cannot export to this format.
VPF is a standard format, structure, and organization for large geographic
databases that are based on a georelational data model. It is commonly used
by military departments and defense agencies.
The VPF specification is available on the National Imaging and Mapping Agency
(NIMA) web site
Importing
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D considers Vector Product Format (VPF) a
multi-select, file-based format, that is, you select one or more individual files
during a single import process. You can edit the mapimport.ini file to specify
that all files in the folder are included in the import or that only one file can
be selected for import.
NOTE VPF data sets can be very large. You can use a spatial filter to limit the size
of the DWG you create from VPF data. See Specifying an Area to Import on page
351.
Driver Options
VPF has no import driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
To change the default so that AutoCAD Map 3D considers VPF a folder-based
format
■Modify the settings in the mapimport.ini file.
350 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
For more information, see To import Shapefiles, MIF/MID, TAB, or VPF as
folder-based, multi-select, or file-basedOpen the mapi... on page ?.
To import from VPF
■Use the Import instructions. on page 316
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying an Area to Import
When importing data from another file format, you can specify (or limit) the
area into which incoming objects will be imported.
You can import objects into the current drawing area, into an area you define
in the map, or import the entire file.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
To specify an area to import
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, under Spatial Filter, specify whether
to limit the area into which data will be imported:
■None — Place no area limits on the incoming file.
■Current Display — Limit the import to the current drawing area.
Specifying an Area to Import | 351
■Define Window — Limit the import to a rectangular area you define.
To use this option, click Select. Drag your cursor from right to left to
define the area. Objects within the rectangular window are imported.
■AutoCAD Map 3D does not display a preview of the incoming data.
■If the coordinate system assigned to the Map drawing differs from the
coordinate system specified in the Coordinate System column, AutoCAD
Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine the correct
coordinate space (area) for the incoming data.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D imports data to an AutoCAD layer with the
same name as the layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the input
file. If an AutoCAD layer with this name already exists, objects are copied to
that layer. Otherwise, a new AutoCAD layer is created and objects are copied
to the new layer.
If you assign the input layer to an object class with a layer property, the default
will instead be the default AutoCAD layer defined by the object class, and the
Drawing Layer field displays <By Class>.
You can specify one of the following layer options:
■Put objects on an existing AutoCAD layer.
352 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Put objects on a new AutoCAD layer.
■Put objects on an AutoCAD layer based on data attached to the objects.
■Put objects on the AutoCAD layer specified by the assigned object class
(available only if you assigned the input layer to an object class with a
layer property).
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Bringing In Drawing Objects from AutoCAD Layers on page 301
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, review the target drawing layer for
each input layer (sometimes called a schema, level, or file) in the incoming
file.
3To change the AutoCAD layer, click in the Drawing Layer field for the
input layer to change. In the Import dialog box on page 1446, do one of
the following:
■To import objects to an existing AutoCAD layer, click Create on
Existing Layer. Click the down arrow and select the layer.
■To import objects to a new AutoCAD layer, click Create On New Layer.
Click in the cell and enter a layer name.
■To import objects to an AutoCAD layer whose name is specified in
data stored on the imported object, click Use Data Field For Layer
Name. Select the data field to use. Click OK to close the Layer Mapping
dialog box.
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value specifies a layer that already exists, the
object is imported to that layer. If the data value specifies a layer that
does not exist, the layer is created. If an object does not have a data
value attached, the object is imported to Layer 0.
■To import objects to a layer with the same name as the input layer,
right-click the Drawing Layer column heading in the table. Click Use
Input Layer Names.
Specifying an AutoCAD Layer During Import | 353
■To import objects to the layer specified by the assigned object class,
verify that <By Class>; is displayed in the Drawing Layer field. If it is
not, type <By Class>; into the field.
NOTE If the layer specified in the Drawing Layer column is different from the one
specified in Object Class, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the Drawing Layer setting unless
it violates the range specified by the Object Class.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Assigning an Object Class During Import
As you import objects, you can assign them to an existing object class in the
AutoCAD Map 3D drawing and map the incoming attribute data to the object
class definition.
For example, objects being imported from a SHP input layer can be classified
and included in the "LAND USE" object class, and data values from the SHP
file can be mapped to the "LAND USE" object class definition.
Because some of the incoming data values may conflict with data ranges
defined in the object class, AutoCAD Map 3D gives you the option of using
the object class default values instead of the incoming data values for values
that are not within the acceptable range. This ensures that incoming data is
accurately classified but may require changing incoming data values.
To assign an object class, you must first define object classes in your AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing. For more information, see Setting Up Object Classification
on page 108.
354 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
To assign an object class to an input layer
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, review the settings in the Object
Class column.
NOTE To make selections in the Object Class column, first define object
classes in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing. If there are no object classes defined,
the fields in the Object Class column are grayed-out. For more information,
see Setting Up Object Classification on page 108.
3For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Object Class field.
4Select an object class.
5Click to map incoming attribute data to the AutoCAD Map 3D
object class definition.
6In the Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box on page 1445, verify that
the object class you just selected is highlighted in the Select An Object
Class list.
7On the right, review the Input Fields list, which displays the incoming
attribute data fields that are available to be mapped to Target Fields in
the object class definition.
8For each Input Field to map, click the down-arrow under Target Fields,
and select a target field in the object class definition. The syntax used for
the target field is:
CATEGORY:TABLE:FIELD
■CATEGORY — Type of data, for example "OD" for object data, or "LT"
for link template (linked external database).
■TABLE — Object data table name or database table name.
■FIELD — Data field name.
Assigning an Object Class During Import | 355
After you map a target field, it no longer appears in the Target Fields list.
This ensures that each target field is mapped to only one incoming data
field.
9Map as many of the Target Fields as needed. If there are no more target
fields in the Target Fields list, you've mapped them all. If you do not map
a target field, the default object class value is used.
10 Click OK to close the Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box.
11 To use object class default values for incoming data values that are not
within the specified object class range, select Use Class Defaults For Out
Of Range Values. Properties such as Layer and Color are also enforced.
This ensures that incoming data will be accurately classified but may
require AutoCAD Map 3D to change some of the incoming data values.
■If you're importing points and have assigned them to an object class with
a creation method of Blocks, use the Points column to convert the points
to blocks so that the objects can be classified. Object classification does
not convert points to blocks for you. For more information, see To specify
how to import points on page 361.
■To copy the object class names and attribute mapping settings from one
layer to another, right-click in the Object Class field to copy. Click Copy.
Then right-click in the field in the target layer and choose whether to paste
the object class name or attribute mapping. To copy to all other layers,
right-click and choose whether to paste the name or the attribute mapping
to all layers. If attribute mapping conflicts are detected, the paste attribute
mappings options is not available.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
356 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import
As you import objects, you can convert them from the coordinate system of
the input file to the coordinate system of the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
To perform this conversion, you must first assign a coordinate system to the
current drawing on page 137. Then, for each layer that you import, you must
specify the appropriate coordinate system.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
To perform a coordinate conversion
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, note the coordinate system assigned
to the current drawing.
NOTE If the current drawing does not have a coordinate system assigned,
click Assign Global Coordinate System and select the coordinate system for
the current drawing.
3For each layer in the incoming file, click in the Input Coordinate System
field.
4Enter a new global coordinate system code, or click to select from
a list of global coordinate systems.
5In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select the category
and coordinate system for the incoming layer.
6Click OK to close the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box.
You can copy the settings from one layer to another. Right-click in the field
to copy. Click Copy. Then right-click in the field in the target layer. Click
Paste. To copy the setting to all other layers, click Paste To All Layers.
Performing a Coordinate Conversion During Import | 357
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Importing Attribute Data
As you import objects, you can import the attribute data attached to the
objects.
You can import the data to one of the following:
■Existing object data table — By default, incoming fields are imported into
object data fields with the same name. If no object data field exists with
the same name, the incoming field is not imported. If you don't want to
do this, use Object Data Mapping to manually map incoming fields to
object data fields with other names or to create new fields.
Incoming data is converted to the data type of the existing object data
field. If this conversion fails (for example, if you import characters to an
integer field), AutoCAD Map 3D uses 0 for integers, 0.0 for real numbers,
and "" for text.
■New object data table — By default, the fields in the new object data table
match the fields you've chosen to import. If you don't want to do this, use
Object Data Mapping to select the fields to import or to change the names
of the object data fields.
When the data is imported, it will be converted to the following object
data types:
■Integer32, Integer16, and Boolean data types are converted to the
Integer data type. For Boolean data, False is converted to 0 and True is
converted to 1.
358 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Float, Double, and Decimal data types are converted to the Real data
type.
■Char and Date data types are converted to the Character data type.
Data is imported only if it is attached to an incoming object. If no objects
are found for an input layer, then the object data table will not be created.
■External database — Imported data is added to the external database table
as new records.
■External database, link only — If you don't need to add the data to the
external database, you can import just the links to the data. When you
import links only, the link from the object to the external data are
maintained, but the external database is not modified. This is much faster
than importing the entire record. This is a good option when importing
SHP data.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■To import objects with links to an external database on page 367
■Setting Up Object Data on page 179
To specify the data to import
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, review the settings in the Data
column.
3To change the setting for a layer, click in the Data field for the layer to
change. Click .
4In the Attribute Data dialog box on page 1435, select an option:
■If you do not want to import data, click Do Not Import Attribute Data
and close the dialog box.
■To import data as object data, click Create Object Data and enter a
name for the object data table or select an existing object data table.
Click Select Fields to map incoming fields to object data fields.
Importing Attribute Data | 359
Select Add Unique Key Field to automatically create a unique key for
each incoming record.
■To import data to an external database, click Add To Database Table
and select a link template.
To import only the link data, select Create Link Only.
Click Select Fields to map incoming fields to fields in the external
database table.
5Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
■To import data to object data tables with the same name as the input layer
names, right-click the Data column header in the table. Click Use Input
Layer Name For Table Name.
■To import data to an external database, attach the data source and define
the link template before you start the import process.
■If conflicts are found between the settings made in the Data column and
an assigned object class definition, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the Conflict
Resolution dialog box on page 1437, where you can resolve the conflicts
before proceeding with the import.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
360 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Specifying How to Import Points
As you import objects, you can choose how to import points.
■Import points as points, using ACAD_POINT.
■Import points as text, using text specified in data attached to the objects.
■Import points as blocks, using a specified block definition.
■Import points as blocks, using a block name specified in data attached to
the objects.
If you import points as blocks, you can choose to import the attribute data
with the objects. If an attribute name on the block that is being created
matches a field name on the incoming point, the data for that attribute will
be imported with the point.
NOTE If the attribute data includes the values used to link the object to an external
database, you can recreate these links on page 458 in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing
using the ADEGENLINK command.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Accessing Data from ODBC on page 289
To specify how to import points
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, review the settings in the Points
column.
3To change the setting for a layer, click in the Points field for that layer.
Do one of the following:
■To import points as points, click the down arrow and select
ACAD_POINT.
■To import points as mtext, click in the Import dialog box on
page 1446, click Create As Text From Data, and select the data field to
Specifying How to Import Points | 361
use. If an object does not have a value in the selected data field, the
point is imported using ACAD_POINT.
Text uses the text style for the current drawing. To change the text
style for the current drawing, click Text Style and select a style.
■To import points to a specific block, click the down arrow and select
the block name.
■To import points to a block whose name is specified in data stored
on the imported objects, click in the Point Mapping dialog box,
click Get Block Name From Data, and select the data field to use.
During import, AutoCAD Map 3D reads the specified data value for
each object. If the data value stored on the object specifies a valid
block name, the object is imported to that block. If the data value
stored on the object specifies a block name that does not exist or if
the object does not have a data value attached, the point is imported
using ACAD_POINT.
4To fill attributes with values from fields in the input file, select Get
Attribute Values From Fields. This works with either the Create As Blocks
or the Get Block Name From Data option.
NOTE This option works only if incoming field names match the block
attribute tags. If they do not match, you can map specific incoming fields to
specific block attributes using the Object class column.
5Click OK to close the Point Mapping dialog box.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
362 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Importing Polygons
By default, polygons are imported as polygon objects. However, to use the
polygons in a topology, you must import them as polylines and create centroids
for them.
If a polygon has attribute data attached, the data is initially attached to the
polyline. You must move the attribute data from the polyline to the centroid.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Creating Centroids for Polygons on page 364
To import polygons
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Then import the
attribute data as object data on page 359.
2If you plan to use the polygons in a polygon topology, in the Import
dialog box on page 1446, select the option to Import Polygons As Closed
Polylines.
NOTE To set the default state of this option, use the MAPUSEMPOLYGON
command.
3Run To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 749 to
create centroids in the polygons and move the data from each closed
polyline or polygon to its centroid.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Importing Polygons | 363
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful:
■After you import or digitize objects.
■Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
■When working with topology.
364 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Object data attached to closed polylines (top) and object data moved to
centroids (bottom).
AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
See also:
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects on page 316
■Importing Polygons on page 363
Creating Centroids for Polygons | 365
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects. It does not apply to features
from a feature source.
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1Click Create ➤ Centroids.
2In the Create Centroids dialog box on page 1535, specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database
If objects in a file you are importing have links to attribute data in a separate
database, you can maintain those links.
366 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Importing Attribute Data on page 358
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
To import objects with links to an external database
1Make sure you have created a link template on page 454 for the external
database, and that the database is attached on page 188 and connected.
2Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
3In the Import dialog box on page 1446, click in a field in the Data column.
Click .
4In the Attribute Data dialog box on page 1435, select Add To Database Table.
5Select the link template to use.
6Select Create Link Only.
7Click OK to close the Attribute Data dialog box.
When you import objects, the attribute data on the objects will be converted
to link data for the selected link template.
Quick Reference
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
MAPOD2ASE
Importing Objects with Links to an External Database | 367
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
Displaying Attribute Data as Text
If you have attribute data attached to objects, you can display that data as
text next to the object. This works whether the data is object data, external
data linked to the object, or block attributes.
TIP If you are importing points, you can import the points directly as attribute
data. See Specifying How to Import Points on page 361.
See also:
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
■Adding Annotation on page ?
To import a file with attribute data and display the data as text
1Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import. Then import the
attribute data as object data on page 359. Save and close the file.
2Open a drawing and attach the drawing file on page 144 containing the
imported objects.
3Define a query that includes the objects you want. If you have only one
file attached, define a Location condition on page 1027 to find all objects
in the source drawing.
4As part of the query, define a property alteration that displays the object
data as text on page 1062. When specifying the text, click Expression and
choose the object data table that contains the imported attribute data.
5Optionally, save the changes on page 626 back to the attached (source)
file.
368 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
ADEDRAWINGS
Manages the drawing set
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Menu
Define/Modify Drawing Set
Icon
ADEDRAWINGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer,
right-clickDrawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set
Task Pane
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog boxDialog Box
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Displaying Attribute Data as Text | 369
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMPORT
Imports an external file format into AutoCAD Map 3D
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import..
Menu
Import Map File
Icon
MAPIMPORTCommand Line
Import dialog boxDialog Box
Adding Rasters and Surfaces
■To add a raster image to the map on page 372
■To add a raster-based surface to your map on page 374
■To add 2D rasters to your map on page 376
■To add a WMS-based image to your map on page 379
■To make a raster image translucent on page 381
■To specify an image insertion point on page 383
■To manually insert the image on page 383
■To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point on page 383
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces
When creating a map, you can add raster images and surfaces to the display.
370 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Adding an image behind your map can give context to the map.
Use the following raster image and surface types in your map.
FormatsRaster Type
DEM (Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid, or Digital Terrain El-
evation Data (DTED)
Raster-based surfaces
on page 373
JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Experts Group), PNG
(Portable Network Graphic), MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless
2D raster on page 375
Image Database), TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), ECW (En-
hanced Compressed Wavelet)
Maps on a serverWMS raster on page
377
BMP, CALS-I, ECW, FLIC, GeoSpot, IG4, IGS, IKONOS, JFIF,
LANDSAT FAST, L7A, NITF, PCX, PICT, Quickbird TIFF, RLC 1
and 2 , TARGA
Other raster formats
on page 385
NOTE Layers in the map are rendered based on the draw order of the layers in
Display Manager. To display drawing objects in front of the raster image, put the
raster image layer at the bottom of the list. .
See also:
■Organizing Layers in Your Map on page 261
■Specifying Image Insertion Point on page 382
Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces | 371
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) on page 377
To add a raster image to the map
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
If you are adding a WMS image, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web
Map Service) on page 377. If you are adding an image whose format does
not appear in the Data Connect window, see Using Other Raster Image
Formats on page 385.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Click the folder icon to browse to the folder containing multiple images,
or click the image icon to specify a single image.
5Click Connect.
6In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
7For each image you select, make sure the Coordinate System and Vertical
Units entries are correct.
■Hold your cursor over an image name to see its native coordinate
system. The Coordinate System entry should match this.
■Scroll the table if necessary to see all the columns.
■To change the coordinate system, click Edit Coordinate Systems and
choose the appropriate coordinate system.
■To change the vertical units, click the current entry to display a down
arrow that lets you choose a different one.
8To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer; for example, you can combine GeoTIFs of each county to create a
state map.
9Click Add To Map.
372 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation on page 383 for each
image.
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
11 In Display Manager, make sure the image layer is in the correct display
order.
You can move the raster layer below objects and features.
■In Display Manager, click Groups ➤ Draw Order. (If this button is
already labeled Draw Order, you can omit this step.)
■Drag the raster layer down in the list. Layers at the bottom of the list
appear behind the ones above them.
NOTE You must use a different process on page 385 to insert an image whose
format is not available in Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for
an image whose file does not specify it.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map
You can add 3D raster-based surfaces to your map. For example, add DEM
(Digital Elevation Model), ESRI Grid, or Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED)
surfaces.
Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map | 373
After you add raster-based surfaces to your map, you can create contour maps
to help you analyze 3D terrain. You can use raster-based theming to analyze
elevation, slope, and aspect, and drape map data over surfaces. You can view
the data in 3D with walkthrough and flythrough options.
See also:
■Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces on page 975
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) on page 377
To add a raster-based surface to your map
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Specify the folder that contains your surface. Click the folder icon to
browse to the folder.
5Click Connect.
6Hold your cursor over the name of the surface file to see a pop-up window
that displays its coordinate system, for example, UTM27-10.
When you add data to your map, you must specify its original coordinate
system. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically converts the data from that
coordinate system to the one specified for your map.
7Click Edit Coordinate Systems and, in the Edit Spatial Contexts dialog
box, click the entry and click Edit.
Select the entry and click Edit to specify the coordinate system for the surface
374 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
8Select the coordinate system you saw in the pop-up window. Click OK
twice to return to the Data Connect window.
9In the Add Data To Map area, select the surfaces to include.
10 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer.
11 Click Add To Map.
The surface is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Adding 2D Rasters
You can add a two-dimensional image to your map. For example, add an aerial
photograph, an artist’s sketch, or your company logo.
Use the steps on the Procedure tab to add images in these formats:
■JPEG and JPEG2K (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
■PNG (Portable Network Graphic)
■MrSID (Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database)
■TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
■ECW (Enhanced Compressed Wavelet)
Adding 2D Rasters | 375
You can also add surface-based rasters on page 373such as DEM and ESRI Grid
files.
NOTE You must use a different process on page 385 to insert an image whose
format is not available in Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for
an image whose file does not specify it.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) on page 377
To add 2D rasters to your map
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Click the folder icon to browse to the folder containing multiple images,
or click the image icon to specify a single image.
5Click Connect.
6In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
7For each image you select, make sure the Coordinate System and Vertical
Units entries are correct.
■Hold your cursor over an image name to see its native coordinate
system. The Coordinate System entry should match this.
■Scroll the table if necessary to see all the columns.
■To change the coordinate system, click Edit Coordinate Systems and
choose the appropriate coordinate system.
■To change the vertical units, click the current entry to display a down
arrow that lets you choose a different one.
376 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
8To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer.
9Click Add To Map.
10 If prompted, specify the location, scale, and rotation on page 383 for each
image.
Some image files contain placement information and are placed
automatically in your map. For images that do not contain placement
information, you are prompted for the location, scale, and insertion
point.
The image is added to your map.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service)
You can incorporate web-based raster image data (such as satellite photographs)
that have been published to a public web server using the WMS (Web Map
Service) open standard developed by the OpenGIS Consortium (OGC).
AutoCAD Map 3D supports WMS versions 1.1.0, 1.1.1, and 1.3.
Data from WMS web services can be used to provide background layers for
your map. With WMS data, you take the data as it is; you cannot reproject it.
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) | 377
The number of Web Map Services (WMS) that implement OpenGIS interfaces
on the Internet is increasing all the time, as more organizations adopt the
open standards.
Once you have located some WMS data, determine the URL of the page that
serves the published layers. Often, this is not a standard web page that you
can open in a browser, but a page that has been programmed using a scripting
language such as CGI, PHP, or ASP. A typical web server address looks like
this:
http://wms.jpl.nasa.gov/wms.cgi
Paste the address into the Data Connect window in AutoCAD Map 3D.
NOTE Websites that host web services appear and disappear or are under
construction. Not all sites that you find will work perfectly (or at all).
You can also bring in web-based feature data on page 293.
Example WMS Image Sources
DescriptionWMS Image Source
Weather datahttp://maps.customweather.com/image
Global SRTM and DTED datahttp://wms.jpl.nasa.gov/wms.cgi?
All types of data for the globe - soils, tem-
perature, land cover, boundaries, etc.
http://globe.digitalearth.gov/viz-
bin/wmt.cgi
USGS orthographic and topographic mapshttp://terraservice.net/ogccapabilities.ashx
Source of different types of data layers,
such as boundaries, terrains, physiography,
utilities, SRTM, etc.
http://demo.cubewerx.com/demo/cube-
serv/cubeserv.cgi?
Various orthographic images for USA cities,
for example, San Francisco, Reno, and
Chattanooga.
http://edcw2ks51.cr.usgs.gov/ser-
vlet/com.esri.wms.Es-
rimap?WMTVER=1.1.0&Service-
Name=133urban&
Various Canadian features - provincial
boundaries, lakes, railroads, and more.
http://www2.dmsolutions.ca/cgi-
bin/mswms_gmap
378 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
DescriptionWMS Image Source
Geospatial data from NGA (U.S.), Inteva-
tion (Germany) and OGC (U.S.)
http://demo.deegree.org:8080/dee-
gree/wms?
Geoscience Australia national geoscience
datasets
http://www.ga.gov.au/bin/getmap.pl?data-
set=national&amp;
See also:
■Bringing In Features from WFS on page 293
To add a WMS-based image to your map
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add WMS Connection in the Data
Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Specify the URL for the WMS server. Click the down arrow to choose
from a list of recently-used URLs.
5Specify the WMS version of the data you want.
The OpenGIS Consortium updates the WMS format periodically, so there
are multiple versions. AutoCAD Map 3D requests the highest version
(currently 1.3.0) by default. If you do not change this setting, the server
will provide the highest version it supports. Some servers support multiple
WMS versions, each corresponding to a different set of capabilities and
resulting layers. If you need to use a specific version of the image, select
it from the list. The server may or may not support the version you
request.
6Click Connect.
7If required, enter your user name and password.
8In the Add Data To Map area, select the images to include.
Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) | 379
9For each image you select, do the following:
■Click the Image Format entry to the right of the image name to choose
the format for the image you add to your map.
The available format types include PNG, TIF, JPG and BMP.
■Click the Server CS Code entry for the image and choose from the
available coordinate systems for the server (the EPSG codes).
A WMS layer can support multiple coordinate systems. AutoCAD Map
3D may not recognize all the EPSG codes the WMS server provides.
If this occurs, you can choose the EPSG code that best serves your
purposes.
WMS layers inherit supported EPSG values from their parent objects,
so a child layer (one indented below a parent layer in the list) may
have both its own EPSG setting and the setting of its parent.
■Click the Layer CS Code entry to choose the coordinate system for
the layer.
Unless you know the coordinate system of the source image, do not
change the default. AutoCAD Map 3D will automatically convert the
image to the coordinate system for your map when it adds the image.
■Click the Style entry to choose one of the available styles.
■Click the Background entry to specify a transparent background for
the layer or choose a background color from the list.
10 To combine all the images on one map layer, select Combine Into One
Layer. This is useful for combining a series of images to create a single
layer; for example, you can combine images of each county to create a
state map.
If you combine the images, you must specify a single Image Format, Server
CS Code, and Background for the resulting layer.
When you select Combine Into One Layer, an Order entry appears next
to each selected layer. Click the entry to change the order of the selected
images within the combined layer.
11 Click Add To Map.
The image is added to your map.
380 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Making an Image Transparent
You can edit the properties of a Display Manager layer that contains a raster
image to add an “opacity” property, and then set that opacity property to a
value below 1 to change the transparency of the layer.
To do this, you must save the layer to a file and edit the file in a text editor,
such as Notepad.
NOTE The transparency will not appear in printed versions of the map.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■Adding 2D Rasters on page 375
■Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) on page 377
To make a raster image translucent
1Add the raster on page 370 to AutoCAD Map 3D.
You can use any type of raster, including a WMS image. The image does
not need to be transparent or have an opacity setting already.
2Right-click the layer containing the image and choose Save Layer.
Save the layer to a .layer file.
Making an Image Transparent | 381
3Open the resulting .layer file in a text editor, such as Notepad, and find
the <FeatureName> entry.
4Just under the <FeatureName> entry, add the opacity setting, using the
following syntax:
<Opacity>0.6</Opacity>
An opacity setting of 1 makes the layer completely opaque. A setting of
.1 makes it virtually transparent.
5Save the .layer file.
6In AutoCAD Map 3D, switch the Task Pane to Display Manager on page
1748 and remove the original raster layer.
7Add any other entities to your map that will appear on layers beneath
the translucent image, and theme or style those layers.
8Click Data ➤ Load Layer and select the .layer file you edited.
The translucent raster image overlays the opaque layers, and they appear
beneath it.
Quick Reference
MAPCONNECT Connect Feature Source Connects a feature source. Map 3D
for Geospatial workspace File Da...
Specifying Image Insertion Point
If an image does not contain location information, you can specify its insertion
point and rotation so the image is inserted correctly in relation to other data.
You can also adjust the scale so it matches the scale of the other data.
AutoCAD Map 3D saves the insertion-point setting with the drawing. The
changes are not saved back to the image file or to the correlation source file.
To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing application
such as Autodesk Raster Design. If you modify the original settings in the
image, reinsert the image to see the changes in your map.
See also:
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
382 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To specify an image insertion point on page 383
■To manually insert the image on page 383
■To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point on page 383
To specify an image insertion point
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, select Add Raster Image or Surface
Connection in the Data Connections By Provider list.
3Under Connection Name, type a name for this connection.
You can give the connection any name you like. This name appears in
Map Explorer as the name of the feature source.
4Under Source File Or Folder, click the folder icon and browse to the folder
than contains your image. Click Connect.
5Select the image to insert and click Add To Map.
6In the Image Insertion dialog box specify where to insert the image. You
can enter X,Y coordinates for the image or manually specify the insertion
point in the drawing. Each option is described below.
To manually insert the image
1In the Image Insertion dialog box, on the Insertion tab, click Pick.
2Pick the base point for the frame.
You can also type coordinates at the command prompt.
3Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
Rotation is in degrees or in the units set by the AUNITS variable. The
image is rotated around the insertion point.
4Pick the second corner point to define the size of the frame.
The Image Insertion dialog box displays the new coordinates, rotation,
and scale.
5Click OK to insert the image into the specified frame.
To enter the coordinates for the image insertion point
1Specify the insertion point for the lower-left corner of the image frame.
Specifying Image Insertion Point | 383
The insertion point values on the Source tab use the unit specified at the
bottom of the Source tab. The insertion point values on the Insertion tab
are translated to the current AutoCAD Map 3D drawing unit.
2Specify the rotation.
Use current drawing angle units. This value uses the lower-left corner as
the base point.
3Specify the scale.
If the image you insert contains correlation information, the image is
inserted at the scale specified by that information. Otherwise, the image
is inserted at a scale factor of 1 image unit of measurement to 1 AutoCAD
Map 3D unit of measurement.
A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the image, while a scale factor less
than 1 makes the image smaller. For example, to make the image twice
as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
You can change the scale to align the image with the vector geometry in
the drawing. For example, if your raster image has a scale of 1 inch equals
50 feet or 1:600, and your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing has a scale of 1
unit equals 1 inch, enter 600 as the scale.
4Specify the units for insertion point and density.
For bitmaps, the density unit used in the image may be in dots per inch.
For satellite photos, the density may be in miles. This unit is also used
for the insertion point.
For example, if your image was scanned at 300 dpi, then select Inches as
the unit.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
384 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats
Use this feature to connect to raster image formats that are not supported by
Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for images that do not
contain this information within their files. Images attached using the following
methods support a limited set of styles.
NOTE To use this technique to insert some raster image formats, such as ECW
and SID, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from
http://www.autodesk.com/RasterOE.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling
and other options.
■To insert raster images on page 386
■To manage raster images on page 404
■To manage the appearance of raster images on page 413
■To modify raster images on page 421
Inserting Raster Images
Use the Raster Extension features to insert and correlate raster images with
formats that are not supported by Data Connect, or to specify correlation
information for images that do not contain this information within their files.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 385
To use this technique to insert some raster image formats, such as ECW and
SID, you must first download the free Raster Object Enabler from
http://www.autodesk.com/rasteroe.
■Overview of Inserting Raster Images Outside Data Connect on page 386
■Inserting a Raster Image on page 391
■Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion on page 393
■Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During Insertion on page 396
■Setting Image Density on page 398
■Adding an Image in a Drawing to a Display Manager Layer on page 401
■Inserting an Image from the Command Line on page 402
NOTE If you are inserting large images or multiple images at once, you can set
Raster Extension memory options.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling
and other options.
See also:
■Configuring Memory Use on page 234
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
To insert raster images
■To insert a raster image (overview) on page 390
■To insert a raster image on page 391
■To correlate an image during insertion on page 395
■To manually adjust the image frame during insertion on page 396
■To change the density unit when inserting an image on page 400
■To set the default density value and density unit on page 400
■To add an image to a new Display Manager layer on page 401
■To insert an image from the Command prompt on page 402
Overview of Inserting Raster Images Outside Data
Connect
You can connect to many raster image files using Data Connect. Use the Raster
Extension features to insert and correlate raster images with formats that are
386 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
not supported by Data Connect, or to specify correlation information for
images that do not contain this information within their files.
Some image-editing applications, such as Autodesk® Raster Design, store
information about image location in an associated correlation source file.
When you insert a raster image using the Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
command, AutoCAD Map 3D reads coordinate correlation information and
places the image in the precise coordinate location in the drawing.
Inserting a raster image into a city map. Move your cursor over the image to see the
results.
After you insert the image, you can change the image display order on page
407 to have the features and drawing objects display on top of the image.
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D links the image to the drawing
file through a path name or a data-management document ID. When you
update a linked image, the updates appear in the drawing. Because the image
itself is not included in the drawing, the image does not increase drawing size.
Once you have inserted an image, you can reinsert it multiple times treating
it as if it were a block. Each insertion has its own clip boundary and its own
settings for brightness, contrast, fade, and transparency. A single image can
be cut into multiple pieces that can be rearranged in your drawing.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 387
NOTE If you are inserting large images or multiple images at once, you can set
Raster Extension memory options. See Configuring Memory Use on page 234.
Supported Image Formats
AutoCAD Map 3D supports the most common image file formats used in
computer graphics, document management, mapping, and geographic
information systems (GIS). Images can be bitonal, 8-bit gray (grayscale), 8-bit
color (indexed color), or 24-bit color (true color).
Several image file formats support images with transparent pixels. When image
transparency is on, AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes those transparent pixels and
allows graphics on the AutoCAD Map 3D screen to show through those pixels.
(In bitonal images, background pixels can be treated as transparent.)
Transparent images can be grayscale or color.
In addition, you can select the transparent color for grayscale or color images,
and you can set the opacity for raster images.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports the following raster file formats. Some formats,
such as SID and ECW, are supported as OLE objects and not as image files.
AutoCAD Map 3D determines the file format from the file contents, not from
the file extension.
File extensionDescription and versionType
.bmp, .rle, .dibWindows and OS/2 bitmap formatBMP
.rst, .gp4, .mil, .cal, .cg4Computer Aided Acquisition and Logist-
ics Support
CALS-I
.doqDigital orthophoto quadrangle raster
image format (used for aerial photos
that are processed to remove distortion)
DOQ
.ecwEnhanced Compressed Wavelet (a
highly-compressed multiresolution im-
age format from ER Mapper
ECW
.flc, .fliAutodesk digital animation formatFLIC
388 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
File extensionDescription and versionType
.bilSPOT Image Corporation format with
georeferencing information
GeoSpot
.tifTIFF with georeferencing informationGeoTIFF
Graphics Interchange Format (a raster
image format from CompuServe)
GIF
.ig4Image Systems Group 4IG4
.igsImage Systems Gray ScaleIGS
8- or 16-bit satellite imageryIKONOS
.jpgJPEG File Interchange FormatJFIF
.jpgJoint Photographics Expert GroupJPEG and JPEG
2000
Multispectral image format used by the
Landsat 7 satellite
LANDSAT FAST
L7A
National Imaging Transmission Format
(a multiframe image format commonly
used by US federal agencies and NATO)
NITF
.pcxPC Paintbrush ExchangePCX
.pctMacintosh PICT1, PICT2PICT
.pngPortable Network GraphicsPNG
Multispectral image format from Digit-
alGlobe’s Quickbird Satellite
Quickbird TIFF
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 389
File extensionDescription and versionType
.rlcRun Length Encoding format (version
1 has no header; version 2 has IST
headers)
RLC 1 and 2
.sidMultiresolution Seamless Image Data-
base (a highly-compressed LizardTech
format)
SID (MrSID)
.tgaTrueVision image file formatTARGA
.tifTagged Image File FormatTIFF
NOTE You can also use Data Connect on page 370to add JPEG, PNG, MrSID, and
TIFF images.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
To insert a raster image (overview)
1To insert an ECW or SID file, you must first download the free Raster
Object Enabler from http://www.autodesk.com/rasteroe.
2Select the image on page 391 to insert.
3Specify correlation settings on page 395 for the image.
4Specify image density on page 400.
5Add the image to a Display Manager layer on page 401.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
390 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Inserting a Raster Image
When you insert an image into a drawing using the Insert An Image command,
you can preview the image, modify the image frame (also referred to as a
boundary, a frame is a vector object that encloses the image) and image density,
and correlate the image on page 393 with existing vector information or with
a previously correlated image. You can use correlation settings from an external
file, or you can enter the settings manually. You can also modify the correlation
settings after you insert the image on page 432.
After you insert several images, use REGEN to display the correct draw order
of the images. See Changing Image Draw Order on page 407.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling
and other options.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
To insert a raster image
1To insert an ECW or SID file, you must first download the free Raster
Object Enabler from http://www.autodesk.com/RasterOE.
2Click Map ➤ Image ➤ Insert.
3In the Insert Image dialog box on page 1612, select the drive and folder
that contains the image(s).
4In the Files Of Type box, select the file format of the image(s) to insert.
NOTE To insert more than one image type at a time, select All Images.
5In the list of images, select the images to insert.
TIP For information about an image, click Information to display the file
size, creation date, and other information, as well as a preview of the image.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 391
6To view or modify the image correlation data, select Modify Correlation.
7Click Open.
If Modify Correlation is not selected or if you are inserting more than
one image, the Image Correlation dialog box does not appear and the
images are inserted using their default correlation information. AutoCAD
Map 3D searches in this order for correlation information:
■World file
■Resource file (.res extension)
■Tab file (.tab file)
■Image file
■Settings from the Raster Extension Options dialog box
If you selected Modify Correlation, the Image Correlation dialog box
displays. The image frame, which indicates where the image will be
inserted, is displayed in your drawing.
TIP If you cannot see the image frame, use the ZOOM or PAN commands
to bring it into view while leaving the Image Correlation dialog box open.
8Do one of the following:
■To insert the image using the current settings, click OK.
■To use a different correlation source on page 395, select the correlation
source from the Correlation Source list.
■To change the insertion point, rotation, or scale, type the appropriate
values. For more information, see To correlate an image during
insertion on page 395.
■To resize or orient the image to existing vectors or images, click the
image frame while the Image Correlation dialog box is open.
■To define the insertion point, rotation, and scale onscreen, select the
Insertion tab. Click Pick. For more information, see To manually adjust
the image frame during insertion on page 396.
■To specify the density units for the image, select the Source tab. Select
Units on page 400.
9Click OK.
392 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
The image is inserted on the current AutoCAD layer and its correlation data
is saved in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the image
is displayed automatically using these settings.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Correlating a Raster Image During Insertion
When you insert an image using the Insert An Image command, you can
correlate the image with your existing vectors or a previously correlated image.
You can change the insertion point and rotation of the image so that it is
inserted correctly in relation to other data. You can also adjust the scale so
that it matches the scale of the other data.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling
and other options.
You can set the following options when inserting an image:
■Correlation source
■Insertion point (georeferencing correlation information)
■Rotation
■Scale
■Density
■Units for insertion point and density
■Color
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 393
If you modify the correlation settings, AutoCAD Map 3D saves the changes
with the drawing. The changes are not saved back to the image file or to the
correlation source file.
NOTE To modify the settings stored in the image file, use an image-editing
application such as Autodesk Raster Design. If you modify the original settings in
the image, you must reinsert the image to see the changes.
Correlation Settings
■Correlation Source — Displays available correlation sources. (See the
Correlation Sources section, below.) If a source is not listed, it may not be
in the same directory as the image file or, if it is a resource (.res) file, it may
not be on the specified resource file path.
NOTE To specify the path for resource (.res) files, click Click Setup ➤ Raster
Options. Select the Paths tab.
■Insertion Point — The insertion point is the lower left corner of the image
before any rotation is applied.
The insertion point values on the Source tab of the Image Insertion dialog
box use the unit specified at the bottom of the Source tab. The insertion
point values on the Insertion tab are translated to the current AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing unit.
You can edit the settings or select an insertion point in the drawing by
clicking Pick on the Insertion tab and then picking a location in the
drawing.
■Rotation — Rotation is in degrees or in the units set by the AUNITS variable.
The image is rotated around the insertion point.
■Scale — If the image you insert contains correlation information, the image
is inserted at the scale specified by that information. Otherwise, the image
is inserted at a scale factor of 1 image unit of measurement to 1 AutoCAD
Map 3D unit of measurement. You can change the scale to align the image
with the vector geometry in the drawing. For example, if your raster image
has a scale of 1 inch equals 50 feet or 1:600, and your AutoCAD Map 3D
drawing has a scale of 1 unit equals 1 inch, enter 600 as the scale on the
Insertion tab.
■Density — For bitmaps, the density unit used in the image may be in dots
per inch. For satellite photos, the density may be in miles. This unit is also
used for the insertion point.
394 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To see how your correlation settings translate to AutoCAD Map 3D units,
select the Insertion tab. To preview the settings in the drawing, click Apply.
NOTE To modify correlation settings after you insert an image use the Properties
palette.
Correlation Sources
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D searches for correlation files
for the image and displays them in the Correlation Source list of the Image
Correlation dialog box. You may see the following sources listed.
■World File (Various file extensions)
■Resource File (.res) — You can specify an alternate location for resource
files. See Setting the Resource Files Directory on page 227.
■Tab File (.tab)
■Image File — For certain types of images, correlation data can be saved as
part of the image file. These file types include RLC, IG4, IGS, GeoTags in
GeoTIFF, or HDR File in GeoSPOT.
■Default — The values that you set on the Image Defaults tab of the Raster
Extension Options dialog box.
See also:
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image on page 432
To correlate an image during insertion
1Insert an image on page 391
2In the Image Correlation dialog box on page 1607, do one or more of the
following:
■Select a correlation source.
■Type new coordinates for the image frame. The insertion point
represents the lower-left corner of the frame.
■Scale the image.
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
■Rotate the image. The units of the rotation value depend on the setting
of the AUNITS system variable.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 395
NOTE You can click on the frame while the Insert An Image dialog box
is open and use the grips to move, scale, or rotate the frame.
3Click Apply to see your changes.
4Click OK to insert the image.
AutoCAD Map 3D inserts the image on the current layer and saves its
correlation data in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing, the
image displays using these settings.
TIP If your image is not visible, click View menu ➤ Extents.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Manually Adjusting the Image Frame During
Insertion
If you do not know the exact coordinates for the image, you can specify the
insertion point, rotation angle, and scale of the image by adjusting the frame
at the time of insertion. As you draw the frame onscreen, the program
maintains the aspect ratio of the image that you are inserting.
See also:
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image on page 432
To manually adjust the image frame during insertion
1Insert an image on page 391.
396 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2In the Image Correlation dialog box on page 1607, on the Insertion tab,
click Pick.
An outline of the frame appears onscreen. This outline reflects the aspect
ratio of the image that you are inserting.
3Pick the base point for the frame.
You can also type coordinates at the Command prompt, or, if there is
already correlation data for the image, press Enter to accept the existing
coordinates.
4Type a rotation angle or pick a point to define the rotation angle.
5Pick the second corner point to define the size of the frame.
TIP You can use UNDO to undo a point.
The Image Correlation dialog box is redisplayed with the new coordinates,
rotation, and scale.
6Click OK to insert the image into the specified frame.
AutoCAD Map 3D inserts the image on the current layer and saves its
correlation data in the drawing file. The next time you open the drawing,
the image displays using these settings.
TIP You can select the frame and use the grips or standard AutoCAD Map 3D
commands to size, move, or rotate the image while the Image Correlation dialog
box is open.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 397
Setting Image Density
For some images, the density value and units are already stored in the image
file or correlation source. When you use the Insert An Image command to add
an image that does not have correlation information, AutoCAD Map 3D uses
the settings from the Image Defaults tab in the Raster Extension Options dialog
box.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling
and other options.
You can change the density unit when you insert an image but not the density
value. You must set the default density value from the Raster Extension Options
dialog box.
■Density — Shows the dots (or pixels) per unit for the image. If this
information was not stored with the image or the correlation source, then
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the default density from the Raster Extension
Options dialog box.
■Units — Select the units for the density from the Units list. For example,
if your image was scanned at 300 dots per inch, then select Inch as the
density unit.
Some image formats, such as GeoTIFF, GeoSPOT, and any image with a World
file for correlation source, have density units that are in real-world coordinates.
For example, a satellite photo can be based on dots-per-mile. In this case,
select Mile as the density unit.
The density unit that you specify can vary depending on what type of image
you are inserting. The following two examples explain the difference between
inserting an image that was scanned using dots per inch, and an aerial
photo/satellite photo that was saved in real-world units.
Setting Density Units for an Image That Is Not Georeferenced
The following example shows the relationship between paper scale, density
units, and insertion scale for an image that is not georeferenced (an image
that was not saved with real-world unit data). Any image that is drawn using
a scale (such as a floor plan) and captured with a scanner will likely fall into
this category.
398 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
The image in the following example was drawn at a paper scale of 1" = 48",
scanned at 300 dots per inch, then inserted into a drawing using 300 as the
density value and Inches as the density unit. Then it was scaled based on its
paper scale of 1" = 48".
The density units that you select when you insert an image that is not
georeferenced should match the units at which the image was scanned. In
this case, the units are inches because the image was scanned in dots per inch.
NOTE Remember that the scale must be based on the same units. For example,
if the scale in the original floor plan is 1" = 4', you must convert both sides to the
same unit. In this case, convert the 4 feet to inches, which is why you use 1" = 48"
as the scale factor.
Setting Density Units for an Image That Is Georeferenced
The following example shows the relationship between density units and a
georeferenced image. Because there is no paper scale to consider, you can
insert the image using the units that the image represents, such as feet or
miles, and you do not have to scale the image when you insert it.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 399
Georeferenced images include GeoSPOT and GeoTIFF file types, and images
that use World files as their correlation source.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To change the density unit when inserting an image
1Click Map ➤ Image ➤ Insert.
2In the Insert Image dialog box on page 1612, select the image(s) to insert.
3Select Modify Correlation.
4Click Open.
5Select the Source tab. Select the units.
To set the default density value and density unit
1Click Setup ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, select the Image Defaults tab.
3In the Density box, type a default density for images. This should be the
scanned resolution on page 1759. For example, if the majority of your images
were scanned at 300 dots per inch, type 300.
4In the Units box, select the default unit for the insertion point and density
of images. For example, if the majority of your images were scanned at
300 dots per inch, then select Inch.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
400 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Adding an Image in a Drawing to a Display
Manager Layer
You can move an image you inserted directly into the current drawing to a
new Display Manager on page 1748 layer. (Click Map ➤ Image ➤ Insert.) This
allows you to position it relative to other Display Manager layers.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To add an image to a new Display Manager layer
1Insert the image using the Insert An Image command.
2In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Raster Image.
3In the Select Image dialog box, select the image.
4To group the image layers, select Group Selection.
If you combine the image layers in a group, you can turn the display of
the group on or off.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 401
Inserting an Image from the Command Line
You can insert an image at the Command prompt by setting the FILEDIA
variable to <0>. This feature is useful if you already have correlation data stored
with your images or to use an AutoLISP routine to insert images into your
drawing.
NOTE If the image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your
map using Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling
and other options.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses correlation data if available, searching for a correlation
source in the following order:
■world file
■resource file
■tab file
■image file
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the correlation information from the first source that
it locates. If it cannot find a correlation file, then the image is inserted using
the default insertion point information that you defined in the Raster
Extension Options dialog box. You can specify a default location for resource
files, and you can specify that AutoCAD Map 3D search for correlation
information in the resource directory before checking the image directory. If
the correlation source does not include information on scale or density,
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the scale and density specified on the Image Defaults
tab of the Raster Extension Options dialog box.
See also:
■Setting the Resource Files Directory on page 227
■Setting Correlation Defaults on page 233
To insert an image from the Command prompt
1Set the FILEDIA system variable to 0.
Consult the AutoCAD Command Reference if you need more information.
2At the Command prompt, enter mapiinsert.
402 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
3Do one of the following:
■Type the name of the image to insert including its file extension.
If you do not specify a path to the image, then AutoCAD Map 3D
searches for the image using the Project Files Search Path set in the
Files tab of the AutoCAD Options dialog box.
■Type the path to the image, the image name, and the file extension,
for example: c:\Projects\Images\contour.rlc
AutoCAD Map 3D searches for the image on the path that you specify.
If it cannot locate the image on this path, then it searches for the
image using the Project Files Search Path.
NOTE When FILEDIA is set to <0>, you can display the Insert Image dialog box
by typing a tilde (~) in response to a command prompt.
When AutoCAD Map 3D locates the image, it inserts it into your drawing. If
there is correlation data stored with the image, then AutoCAD Map 3D inserts
the image using this data.
TIP If you cannot see the image after you insert it, zoom to the extents of the
drawing or use the Image Management dialog box to zoom to the image on page
412.
Quick Reference
MAPIINSERT
Inserts a raster image
Create menu ➤ Insert An Image
Menu
MAPIINSERTCommand Line
Insert Image dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 403
Managing Raster Images
You can view and modify information about images you inserted using the
Insert An Image command.
To manage raster images
■To display the Image Management dialog box on page 405
■To display the Image Information dialog box on page 406
■To display the Properties palette on page 406
■To change the draw order of images on page 408
■To change the draw order of images and objects on page 409
■To change an image name on page 410
■To create a search path on page 411
■To zoom to an image on page 412
Overview of Managing Raster Images
When you insert an image into a drawing using the Insert An Image command,
only information about the image is stored in the drawing, along with a
pointer to the actual image.
You can view and modify this stored information.
Use this method...To do this...
Display the Image Management or Image
Information dialog box, or the Properties
palette.
See Viewing Image Information on page
405.
View information about images in maps.
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
See Changing Image Draw Order on page
407.
Change the draw order of raster images
and vector objects you inserted using the
Insert An Image command.
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
See Changing an Image Name on page
409.
Change the name of an image you inserted
using the Insert An Image command.
404 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Use this method...To do this...
Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options. On the
Files tab, select Project Files Search Path.
Click Add.
See Creating a Search Path for Raster Im-
ages on page 410.
Specify the location of an image you inser-
ted using the Insert An Image command,
if it has been moved or deleted.
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
See Zooming to an Image on page 412.
Zoom to images you inserted using the
Insert An Image command.
Viewing Image Information
You can view information about images in maps in the following ways:
■The Image Management dialog box displays information about the number
of instances of an image in the map, the draw order of images, and other
image information.
■The Image Information dialog box displays information about the file, the
image, properties, and correlation information.
■The Properties palette provides access to image properties.
NOTE These options work for all images, no matter how they were added to your
map.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To display the Image Management dialog box
■Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
You can click Layout to modify the columns in the Image Management dialog
box. You can hide or display topic columns, or change the order of topic
columns.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 405
To display the Image Information dialog box
1Click the frame of the image to select it.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frame, press Shift +
left-click on page 424 to select the image.
2Right-click the image ➤ Image ➤ Information.
To display the Properties palette
1In the drawing, select the image to modify.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
Quick Reference
MAPIINFO
Displays file, image, object property, and correlation information about
selected images
View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Information
Menu
MAPIINFOCommand Line
Image Information dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIMANAGE
Allows you to view a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing
order, erase or zoom to selected images
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Menu
MAPIMANAGECommand Line
Image Management dialog boxDialog Box
406 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Changing Image Draw Order
When you insert raster images, the images draw in the order in which you
insert them. You can change the draw order of:
■Raster images.
■Raster images and vector objects.
You can change the draw order of images and vector objects. By sending an image to
the back, the vector objects display on top of the image. Move your cursor over the
image to see the results.
NOTE If you change the draw order and then undo the change, images may not
appear in the correct draw order. Use the REGEN command to display the correct
draw order of the images.
The following conditions affect the image draw order:
■Image insertion order
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 407
AutoCAD Map 3D uses image insertion order first. For example, if you
insert images A, B, C in that order, and then reorder them so that they are
arranged as B, C, A, use REGEN when you open that drawing again to
restore the order to B, C, A.
AutoCAD Map 3D always uses this optimization feature and applies it to
the draw order of all objects, not just to images.
■Image selection
You can set an option to draw hatch marks over a selected image. Click
Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options. Select the Display tab. Under Display
Performance, set Highlight Raster Image Frame Only to off.
If Highlight Raster Image Frame Only is off, when you select an image, it
rises to the top of the display order, obscuring any vectors that cross it.
Use the REGEN command to restore the proper display order.
NOTE For images you added with Data Connect on page 1746, use Display Manager
on page 1748 to change the draw order. See Organizing Layers in Your Map on
page 261.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
NOTE For images you added with Data Connect on page 1746, use Display Manager
on page 1748 to change the draw order. See Organizing Layers in Your Map on
page 261.
To change the draw order of images
1Enter the mapimanage command.
2In the Image Management dialog box on page 1609, select an image name
and drag it up or down in the Image column.
The current draw order is indicated in the Image column. The top image
in the list is drawn on top of all the other images and is the last drawn.
The last image in the list is drawn beneath any images that may overlap
it.
408 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To change the draw order of images and objects
1Select the image.
2Do one of the following:
■Click Modify menu ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring To Front.
■Click Modify menu ➤ Draw Order ➤ Send To Back.
If necessary, use REGEN.
NOTE Changes made using Draw Order are reflected in the Image Management
dialog box.
Quick Reference
REGEN
Regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport
View menu ➤ Regen
Menu
REGENCommand Line
MAPIMANAGE
Allows you to view a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing
order, erase or zoom to selected images
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Menu
MAPIMANAGECommand Line
Image Management dialog boxDialog Box
Changing an Image Name
Image names are not necessarily the same as image file names. When you
attach an image to a drawing using the Insert An Image command, AutoCAD
Map 3D uses the file name without the file extension as the image name. You
can change the image name without affecting the name of the file.
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 409
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To change an image name
1Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
2In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name.
3Click the image name again to edit it.
4Enter the new name.
5Click OK.
TIP You can also change the image name by pressing F2 while in the Image
Manager dialog box and editing the name.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
Creating a Search Path for Raster Images
When you insert an image with the Insert An Image command, AutoCAD
Map 3D stores the location of the image in the drawing file. When you open
a drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D searches this stored location for the file. If the
image has been moved or deleted, AutoCAD Map 3D searches the Project Files
Search Path.
410 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To create a search path
1Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2On the Files tab, select Project Files Search Path. Click Add.
A folder named Projectx (where x indicates the next available number)
appears under Project Files Search Path.
3Enter a name for the project.
The project name cannot contain leading spaces or terminating spaces.
4Click Apply.
5With the project name selected, click Set Current.
6Click Add.
A path entry is created under the project name.
7Enter the search path or click Browse to select a directory.
8Click OK.
For more information about using project files and alternate search paths,
refer to PROJECTNAME in the online AutoCAD Command Reference.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 411
Zooming to an Image
You can zoom to images you inserted with the Insert An Image command.
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To zoom to an image
1Enter the mapimanage command.
2In the Image Management dialog box on page 1609, select an image.
3Right-click the image. Click Zoom To.
Quick Reference
MAPIMANAGE
Allows you to view a list of images in the current drawing, change drawing
order, erase or zoom to selected images
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Menu
MAPIMANAGECommand Line
Image Management dialog boxDialog Box
Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images
You can increase redrawing speed by hiding or unloading images you inserted
using the Insert An Image command that you do not need in the current
drawing session.
■Overview of Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images on page
413
■Hiding an Image on page 416
■Unloading an Image on page 417
412 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Erasing an Image on page 418
■Detaching an Image on page 419
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To manage the appearance of raster images
■To hide an image on page 416
■To unload an image on page 418
■To erase an image on page 419
■To detach an image on page 420
Overview of Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and
Erasing Images
When you insert an image using the Insert An Image command, AutoCAD
Map 3D stores information about the image in the drawing, loads the image
into memory, displays it onscreen, and locks the image file on the disk.
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
You can increase redrawing speed by hiding or unloading images you do not
need in the current drawing session. Hidden images are not displayed or
plotted; only their drawing boundaries are displayed. You can choose to hide
an image regardless of the current viewport coordinate system. If you no longer
need the image in the drawing, you can erase a single instance of the image
or you can detach the image to erase all instances of the image and the image
information.
Aside from locking the image file, none of these actions modify the original
image file itself.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 413
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
Use this method...To do this...
Select and right-click the image frame ➤
Image ➤ Show Image.
See Hiding an Image on page 416.
Hide an image you added using the Insert
An Image command.
At the command prompt, enter extern-
alreferences. Right-click the image and click
Unload.
See Unloading an Image on page 417.
Remove an image you added using the
Insert An Image command from memory
(unload it).
Select the image and Click Modify ➤ Erase.
See Erasing an Image on page 418.
Erase an image you added using the Insert
An Image command from the map.
Click Setup ➤ Image Management. Click
the image and click Detach.
See Detaching an Image on page 419.
Remove all instances of an image you ad-
ded using the Insert An Image command
from the map (detach it).
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
MAPISHOWIMAGE
Hides or displays a raster image
414 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Right-click a selected image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show
Image
Menu
MAPISHOWIMAGECommand Line
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify menu ➤ Erase
Menu
Erase
Icon
ERASECommand Line
Select objects to erase. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Erase
Task Pane
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify menu ➤ Erase
Menu
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 415
Erase
Icon
ERASECommand Line
Select objects to erase. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Erase
Task Pane
Hiding an Image
When you hide an image, the image does not display onscreen, nor does it
plot. Only the image boundary displays onscreen. However, the image is still
loaded in memory, and the image file is still locked on the disk. It cannot be
deleted or modified. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed regeneration
time. You can redisplay the image when you are ready to plot.
This command is not available if you have selected more than one image. To
show or hide multiple images, use the Properties palette.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect.
NOTE You can also control the display of images by using the LAYER command.
When you insert an image, it is inserted on the current layer, but you can move
it to another layer. You can then use the LAYER command to control the layer
visibility.
The images are also affected by other layer attributes such as whether a layer
is locked or frozen. If you are working with several images and you do not
want to modify certain images, then move those images to a separate layer
and lock the layer.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To hide an image
1Select the image frame.
2Right-click the image ➤ Image ➤ Show Image.
To show a hidden image, follow the same steps.
416 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE You can also modify this setting on the Properties palette.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
MAPISHOWIMAGE
Hides or displays a raster image
Right-click a selected image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show
Image
Menu
MAPISHOWIMAGECommand Line
Unloading an Image
To conserve memory and enhance performance, unload images that you do
not need to view and/or plot.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect.
When you unload an image, you remove the image from memory. It does not
display onscreen, nor does it plot, and it is no longer locked on the disk. Only
the image boundary displays onscreen. Information about the image, such as
its path and scale, remains in the drawing. Before you can plot the image, you
must reload it into memory.
See also:
■Changing Image Display Quality and Speed on page 429
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 417
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To unload an image
1At the command prompt, enter externalreferences.
2In the External References palette, right-click the image.
3Click Unload.
This status is saved with the drawing when you close the drawing.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
Erasing an Image
When you erase an image, that instance of the image is erased from the
document. Erasing an image does not delete the image information. You can
set an option so that when the last instance of an image is erased from the
drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D detaches the image, deleting the image
information.
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect.
See also:
■Choosing an Image Detach Method on page 231
418 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To erase an image
1Select the image.
2Click Modify ➤ Erase.
If you erase all instances of an image within a drawing, you may be
prompted to detach the image on page 420 from the drawing.
Quick Reference
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify menu ➤ Erase
Menu
Erase
Icon
ERASECommand Line
Select objects to erase. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Erase
Task Pane
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Detaching an Image
When you detach an image, all instances of the image are removed from the
drawing, the image information is deleted, and the image file is unlocked.
Detach images that you no longer need in the drawing.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 419
NOTE This command does not affect images you added using Data Connect.
See also:
■Choosing an Image Detach Method on page 231
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To detach an image
1Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
2In the Image Manager dialog box, select the image name.
3Click Detach.
The image is no longer linked to the drawing file, and all instances of the
image are removed from the drawing.
Quick Reference
IMAGE
Manages images
Setup menu ➤ Image Management
Menu
Manage Images
Icon
IMAGECommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Image Manager
Task Pane
Modifying Raster Images
You can modify an image with grip modes, adjust an image for contrast, clip
the image with a rectangle or polygon, or use an image as a cutting edge for
a trim.
■Overview of Modifying Raster Images on page 421
420 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Selecting an Image on page 424
■Displaying Image Frames on page 425
■Changing Image Alignment on page 426
■Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade on page 427
■Changing Image Display Quality and Speed on page 429
■Making an Image Transparent on page 430
■Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image on page 432
■Modifying Other Image Properties on page 434
■Clipping an Image on page 436
To modify raster images
■To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click on page 424
■To turn on the Shift + left-click option on page 425
■To display image frames on page 426
■To change image alignment on page 427
■To adjust brightness, contrast, and fade on page 428
■To change image display quality on page 429
■To hide a drawing or show clipped images on page 430
■To make an image transparent on page 431
■To change the color that is transparent on page 431
■To modify the correlation settings for an image on page 433
■To modify image properties on page 435
■To clip an image on page 438
Overview of Modifying Raster Images
You can copy, move, or clip raster images. You can modify an image with grip
modes, adjust an image for contrast, clip the image with a rectangle or polygon,
or use an image as a cutting edge for a trim.
NOTE These options do not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
Image Frames
AutoCAD Map 3D inserts images into frames. A frame is a rectangular vector
object that encloses the image. When you select the frame, you create a
selection set that you can manipulate using any editing command. You can
copy, move, stretch, rotate, and scale images.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 421
Use this method...To do this...
Press Shift and click the left mouse button.
See Selecting an Image on page 424.
Select an image you added with the Insert
An Image command.
Click View ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle
Frames.
See Displaying Image Frames on page 425.
Dislay frames for images you added with
the Insert An Image command.
At the Command prompt, enter align.
See Changing Image Alignment on page
426.
Change the alignment and scale of an im-
age you added with the Insert An Image
command.
--
See Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast,
and Fade on page 427.
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and fade
of an image you added with the Insert An
Image command.
--
See Changing Image Display Quality and
Speed on page 429.
Adjust the image display quality of an im-
age you added with the Insert An Image
command.
Right-click the image. Click Properties. In
the Properties palette, select Transparency.
See Making an Image Transparent on page
430.
For an image you added with the Insert An
Image command, make all pixels of a spe-
cific color in a grayscale or color image
transparent.
Right-click the image. Click Properties. In
the Properties palette, change the position
or rotation of the image.
See Modifying the Correlation Settings for
an Image on page 432.
Specify a precise location for an image you
added with the Insert An Image command
Right-click the image. Click Properties. In
the Properties palette, change the color,
layer, or linetype.
See Modifying Other Image Properties on
page 434.
For an image you added with the Insert An
Image command, modify frame properties.
--
See Clipping an Image on page 436.
Display only a portion of an image you
added with the Insert An Image command.
422 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
MAPIFRAME
Makes frames enclosing raster images visible or invisible
View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames
Menu
MAPIFRAMECommand Line
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command)Dialog Box
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
ALIGNCommand Line
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 423
Clip Image
Icon
IMAGECLIPCommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Clip
Task Pane
Selecting an Image
If an image frame is visible, you can select the image by clicking on the frame
or by drawing a crossing window around a frame edge. When you select an
image by selecting its frame, grips are displayed.
NOTE These options do not affect images you inserted with Data Connect.
You can also select an image by placing your cursor over the image and pressing
Shift + left-click. This feature is useful when you are zoomed in to the image
and you cannot see the image frame or if the image frames are turned off.
After you select an image frame, you can:
■Right-click to display the Raster Extension shortcut menu.
■Select a grip. Right-click to display the AutoCAD Map 3D shortcut menu.
■Manipulate the image using AutoCAD Map 3D commands.
NOTE You can set an option to draw hatch marks over a selected image. Click
Tools ➤ Options. Select the Display tab. Under Display Performance, set Highlight
Raster Image Frame Only to off. If Highlight Raster Image Frame Only is off, when
you select an image, it rises to the top of the display order, obscuring any vectors
that cross it. Use the REGEN command to restore the proper display order.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click
1Position your pointer so that it is over the image or images to select.
424 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2Press Shift and click the left mouse button.
If you clicked more than one image, the Image Select dialog box appears.
This dialog box displays the names of all the images that are inserted into
your drawing. The image(s) that are already selected are highlighted (not
just the images that you selected by pressing Shift + left-click).
3Click the images in the list to select. Click OK. To select all the images
in your drawing, click Select All. To clear the selection set, click Select
None.
NOTE If Shift + left-click is not working, you may need to load the Raster Extension
by using an image command such as Insert An Image, or you may need to turn
on the option.
To turn on the Shift + left-click option
1Click Setup ➤ Raster Options.
2In the Raster Extension Options dialog box, select the General tab.
3Select Shift + Left Click Image Select.
4Click OK to exit the dialog box.
Quick Reference
MAPIOPTIONS
Specifies default image correlation settings, display options, detach options,
paths, and memory settings
Setup menu ➤ Raster Options
Menu
MAPIOPTIONSCommand Line
Raster Extension Options dialog boxDialog Box
Displaying Image Frames
An image frame is a vector object that encloses each image you insert.
NOTE This option does not affect images you inserted with Data Connect.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 425
Hiding an image frame ensures that the image cannot accidentally be moved
or modified by a single- or double-click and prevents the frame from being
plotted or displayed. When image frames are hidden, clipped images are still
displayed to their specified frame limits; only the frame is affected. Showing
and hiding image frames affects all images attached to your drawing.
When you attach an image to a drawing, the image frame inherits the current
color, layer, linetype, and linetype scale.
See also:
■Changing How Image Frames Are Displayed on page 228
■Modifying Other Image Properties on page 434
To display image frames
■Click View ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames.
NOTE If frames are invisible or an image is on a locked or frozen layer or a layer
that is turned off, then you cannot select the image by clicking the frame. However,
if frames are hidden but the image is on an editable layer, then you can select the
image using Shift + left-click on page 424.
Quick Reference
MAPIFRAME
Makes frames enclosing raster images visible or invisible
View menu ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Toggle Frames
Menu
MAPIFRAMECommand Line
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command)Dialog Box
Changing Image Alignment
You can change the alignment and scale of an image. You can reference two
points in vector space and two points on a raster image to move, scale, and
rotate the image to the vector coordinates. This process performs a simple
transformation but does not rubber sheet the image.
426 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object on page 789
To change image alignment
1At the Command prompt, enter align.
2Select the image and press Enter.
3Specify a first source point on the image and a first destination point in
the drawing.
4Specify a second source point on the image and a second destination
point in the drawing.
5Press Enter.
6To scale the image, type y (Yes) and press Enter.
The image aligns with the drawing according to the reference points you
specified.
Quick Reference
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
ALIGNCommand Line
Adjusting Image Brightness, Contrast, and Fade
When you adjust image brightness, contrast, and fade in AutoCAD Map 3D,
the changes you make affect the display of the image as well as the plotted
output, but do not affect the original raster image file. Adjust brightness to
darken or lighten an image. Adjust contrast to make poor-quality images easier
to read. Adjust fade to make vectors easier to see over images or to create a
watermark effect in your plotted output.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 427
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
NOTE Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for brightness, contrast, or fade. Bitonal
images fade to the current screen background when displayed, and fade to white
(the color of most paper) when plotted.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To adjust brightness, contrast, and fade
1--
2Select the image to modify. Press Enter.
3In the Image Adjust dialog box, specify settings:
■To adjust brightness or contrast, use the Brightness or Contrast slider
bar.
■To adjust image fade, use the Fade slider bar.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
428 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Changing Image Display Quality and Speed
Changing Image Display Quality
You can change image display quality. Draft-quality images may be grainier,
but they display more quickly than high-quality images. Changing the image
display quality setting affects all images attached to your drawing.
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported , connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
Hiding Images
You can hide an image. Hidden images are not displayed or plotted; only the
drawing frame is displayed. You can choose to hide an image regardless of the
current viewport coordinate system.
Clipping Images
You can clip the image so that only the parts of the image you want visible
are displayed. To display more than one piece of the image, create additional
insertions of the image, each with a different clip boundary.
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported , connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
See also:
■Hiding, Unloading, Detaching, and Erasing Images on page 412
■Changing Image Display Quality on page 230
To change image display quality
1--
2Type d (draft) or h (high). Press Enter.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 429
To hide a drawing or show clipped images
1Click the frame of the image(s) to change.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frames, press Shift +
left-click to select the image(s).
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, select one of the display options.
■Select Show Image and set it to No if you do not want to display the
image.
■Select Show Clipped and set it to Yes to display any clip boundaries
you have made on an image using the imageclip command.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Making an Image Transparent
You can make all pixels of a specific color in a grayscale or color image
transparent. (The transparency color of a bitonal image is always the
background color of the image.) This is useful for overlaying two images or
placing an image in front of objects.
430 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported , connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
This option is not available if the image is currently unloaded or if the Raster
Extension is not loaded. To load the Raster Extension, use an image command,
such as Insert An Image.
NOTE The transparency color is stored in the drawing as an AutoCAD Map 3D
custom object. If you send the drawing to other users, they can see the
transparency color only by opening the drawing in AutoCAD Map 3D or Autodesk
Raster Design. If they open the drawing in AutoCAD, they see a message that
AutoCAD cannot reference the custom object and will not display the transparent
color.
You can also change the opacity of an entire raster image, so that the image
is translucent and items below it are visible.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To make an image transparent
1Select the image.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, select Transparency.
4Click the down arrow at the right of the box and select Yes.
Specify which color will be transparent.
To change the color that is transparent
1Zoom in close to the image so that you can accurately select the color.
2Click the image frame.
NOTE If you are zoomed so you cannot see the image frame, press Shift +
left-click to select the image.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 431
3Right-click the image. Click Properties.
4In the Properties palette, select Transparency Color.
If Transparency Color doesn't appear in the Properties palette, the image
may not be loaded or the Raster Extension may not be loaded. To load
the image, select the image. Right-click the image ➤ Image ➤ Show
Image. To load the Raster Extension, choose an image command such as
Insert An Image.
NOTE You can choose the transparency color for grayscale and color images.
In bitonal images, the transparency color is always the background color of
the image.
5Click to display the Transparency Color dialog box.
6Click Select and pick the desired color on the image. Click OK.
7To turn on transparency, select Transparency in the Properties palette
and set it to Yes.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Modifying the Correlation Settings for an Image
You can specify a precise location for an image.
432 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported , connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
NOTE When you change the insertion point values, AutoCAD Map 3D repositions
the image in the drawing and saves the settings in the drawing. However, these
correlation changes are saved only in the drawing and are not saved back to the
original image file. To change the original correlation information in the image
file, use an image-editing application such as Autodesk Raster Design.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To modify the correlation settings for an image
1Select the image.
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, do one of the following:
■To move the image, type new coordinates in the Position X, Y, and
Z boxes. This insertion point represents the lower-left corner of the
image frame before any rotation is applied.
■To rotate the image, type a new value in the Rotation box. The units
of the rotation value depend on the units that the drawing is using.
AutoCAD Map 3D rotates the image around the insertion point.
■To scale the image, type a new value in the Scale box. For example,
to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
4Close the Properties palette.
TIP You can also click the Pick icon to adjust the frame on page 396 location and
size.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 433
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Modifying Other Image Properties
Use the Properties palette to modify image properties such as the following:
■Frame color, layer, linetype, and linetype scale
■Image brightness, contrast, and fade
■Location
■Rotation, width, height, and scale
■Image transparency and transparency color
The settings apply only to the selected images.
NOTE These options do not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
Rotation is in degrees (or the units set by the AUNITS system variable); scale,
width, and height are based on the unit of measurement used in the drawing.
When you insert an image, it is inserted on the current AutoCAD layer. Since
AutoCAD Map 3D controls the visibility and behavior of the layers, you can
move an image to another AutoCAD layer to take advantage of the layer
properties. For example, to display images, but not edit them, move the images
to an AutoCAD layer and lock the layer.
See also:
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
434 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To modify image properties
1Click the frame of the image(s) to change.
NOTE If you are zoomed in and cannot see the image frames, press Shift +
left-click to select the image(s).
2Right-click the image. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, select the property to modify. For example:
■Color — Select a color or click Select Color to display the Select Color
dialog box.
Select the desired color or select ByLayer to set the frame color of the
image to the color of the layer it is on. The frame color is also the
foreground color for bitonal images.
Click OK to apply the new color to the selected image(s).
■Layer — Select the target AutoCAD layer for the image(s).
■Linetype — Select a linetype for the image frame(s). Select any linetype
that is loaded in your drawing or select ByLayer to use the linetype
defined for that layer.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 435
Clipping an Image
By clipping an image, you can display and plot only a portion of the image.
The clipping boundary can be a rectangle or a two-dimensional polygon with
vertices constrained to lie within the boundaries of the image. Multiple
instances of the same image can have different clipping boundaries.
436 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Image Clip lets you show only the part of an image you require. Move your cursor over
the image to see the clipped portion of the image.
You can display a clipped image using the clipping boundary, or you can hide
the clipping boundary and display the original image boundaries.
Using Other Raster Image Formats | 437
NOTE To clip an image, the image boundary must be visible. See Displaying
Image Frames on page 425.
A clip boundary is a display-only feature that you can use for viewing and
plotting purposes. It does not permanently change image data. When you
delete a clipping boundary, the original image boundary is restored. To
permanently clip the image, use an image-editing application such as Autodesk
Raster Design.
NOTE This option does not affect images you added with Data Connect. If the
image you are inserting is supported, connect to it and add it to your map using
Data Connect on page 370. This gives you more control over styling and other
options.
See also:
■Displaying Image Frames on page 425
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
To clip an image
1--
2Select the image on page 424 to clip. You can only clip one image at a
time.
3Press Enter or type n to create a new clip boundary.
4Type r to create a rectangular boundary, or type p to create a polygonal
boundary.
5Pick the points to define the clip boundary. You must pick at least three
points to define a polygonal boundary.
To restore the image, use these steps: --Type off.
You can modify the clip boundary by defining a new boundary for the image
or by using object grips.
You can also choose to show or hide clip boundaries by changing the image
display properties on page 429 in the Properties palette.
438 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
Clip Image
Icon
IMAGECLIPCommand Line
Select an image. Right-click in drawing
area ➤ Image ➤ Clip
Task Pane
Joining Data to GIS Features
You can add properties from a different data source to GIS features in your
map using joins. For example, you can join employment rates stored in a
Microsoft Access database file to city features stored in an SDF file, or to
counties stored in an Oracle database. Once you join the two data sources,
you can use the joined information to style the feature, the same way you use
its native information. For example, you can theme the city features based on
the employment rates you joined.
Overview of Joins
Use joins to add extra data to GIS features in your map. For example, join
income data to a parcel layer to add that information to those features. You
can join data from the Internet, other organizations you work with, or GIS
data repositories.
After you create the join, you can use the additional properties the same way
you use the native properties of the feature class: to label, theme, style, and
analyze the layer’s features.
For example, after you join a table of voter turnout data to a map of regions
in your area, you can create a theme that varies in appearance, depending on
the number of participating voters in each region.
With joins, you can keep your data in separate tables, focused on specific
topics, instead of in one large database or file. This can ease administration
and reduce complexity.
Joining Data to GIS Features | 439
Typically, a join connects a separate table of data (a secondary table) to a
feature class layer (the primary table). The most common type of join is a
one-to-one join, which connects one record in a table of data to one feature
in a feature class.
Typically, you join data tables from an application such as Microsoft Access
to FDO layers from SDF, SHP, Oracle, and ArcSDE data. However, you can also
join feature sources such as SHP to other feature sources.
See also:
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
■Create a join. on page ?
■Modify joins. on page ?
■Edit joined data. on page ?
■Export joined data to a .LAYER file. on page 449
■Export data from the Data Table. on page 449
Creating a Join
A join adds the properties from a data table (secondary table) to an existing
feature-class layer (primary table). The original data remains unchanged in its
source—the join exists only within your map.
The secondary table can be an actual table, such as a named range in an Excel
spreadsheet, or the tabular data contained in a feature source, such as an Oracle
database or an SDF file.
One-to-One Joins
The most common type of join is a one-to-one join, in which one feature is
matched to one secondary record and any additional secondary records are
ignored. For example, if you are joining a table of income data to a layer
representing parcels, you may have more than one income value for a particular
property (if there are multiple residences on that parcel, for instance, or
multiple earners in a residence). In a one-to-one join, the first income value
found for a parcel is matched to that parcel, and any other income information
is ignored.
440 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
One-to-Many Joins
You can also create a one-to-many join. In this case, when there are multiple
secondary records for a single feature, additional features are generated to
represent the extra values. Using the same example as above, a parcel that
matches multiple income values will result in multiple Data Table entries for
that parcel, each with a separate income value (even though there is still only
one actual feature). If you style the parcel layer based on income values, only
one is visible in your display map. You can still edit the feature in your map
(for example, to resize it). The real feature in your data will be updated.
NOTE Adding features to your map can have performance implications; some
operations take longer when there is more feature data.
Join Keys
To be joined, the primary and secondary tables must contain matching fields
with common values. These matching fields are the join keys.
For example, when joining a data table containing employment rates to a
layer representing counties, the join key might be County_Name, if that field
is common to both tables.
A join key does not need to have the same name in both data sources, but it
must have the same data type (numeric, string, Boolean, and so on). For
example, you can match the Parcel_ID field in one table to the Lot_Number
field in the second table, so long as Parcel_ID and Lot_Number use the same
data type.
NOTE Joins that use String fields are case-sensitive. The values in the fields must
match exactly. Jones will not match JONES.
Advanced Joining
You can join multiple secondary tables to a feature layer There are several
ways to do this.
You can join a new table to the joined secondary table to create a “chain” of
joins. For example, you can begin by joining income information to a layer
of parcel features, using the Parcel_ID as the common join key. Then you can
add a join to a table of employment data, using Job_Title as a common join
key between the income table and the employment table. Even though the
parcel feature does not contain a property for Job_Title, you can style the
parcels by job type after you complete both joins.
Creating a Join | 441
You can join multiple tables to a single feature using the same join key. For
example, you can join a table of traffic information to a roads layer, using the
Road_Name field as the join key. You can then join a second table of
maintenance schedules to the roads layer, using the same join key.
You can also join multiple tables to a single feature using different join keys.
For example, you can join population information to a layer representing
counties, using the County_Name field as the join key. Then you can join
flood-zone data to the same layer using Elevation as the join key.
In all cases, you can use all of the joined data when styling or theming the
feature layer.
Using Joins for Calculated Fields
You can create a calculated field that uses native data and joined data. For
example, if you join assessor data to parcel data, you can create a field that
represents the cost per acre for each parcel. You create a calculated field using
an expression.
Non-matching Data
When you create a join, you can specify how to deal with features in the
primary table that do not find a match in the secondary table. For example,
if you are joining assessor data to a parcel layer, you can decide what to do
with parcels that have no assessment data. The choices are as follows:
■Keep All Records On The Left – Keeps all features, even if there is no match
in the secondary table (a left outer join).
■Keep Only Left-Side Records With A Match – Hides features if there is no
matching record in the secondary table (an inner join).
See also:
■Modifying or Removing Joins on page 444
■Accessing Data from ODBC on page 289
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
■Editing Joined Data on page 446
■Using Joins with Calculated Properties on page 448
442 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To create a join
1Prepare to create a join by doing the following:
■Ensure the primary and secondary sources share one or more common
fields, for example Parcel_ID or County_Name. These fields do not
have to have the same name in both sources, but they must use the
same data type.
■Simplify your secondary table data as much as possible. For example,
remove unnecessary records or tables.
■Connect to both the primary and secondary sources using one of the
FDO providers in Data Connect. When you connect to a secondary
source that has no geometry data, you don’t need to add anything to
the map—you can just establish the connection and close the Data
Connect window.
NOTE If your secondary source is a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
table, connect to it using an ODBC connection. For information about
setting up ODBC sources, see Accessing Data from ODBC on page 289.
2In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Create A Join.
The layer you right-click is the primary source.
3In the Table (Or Feature Class) To Join To list in the Create A Join dialog
box, select the table or feature class whose data you will to join to the
layer.
Your selection is the secondary source. If this source contains multiple
tables, choose the one to use for the join.
4In the This Column From The Left Table list, select the join key (the
common field or property) for the primary source, for example, Parcel_ID
or County_Name.
5In the Matches This Column From The Right Table list, select the
matching field or property in the secondary source.
Only fields with matching data types are displayed in the right-hand list.
The fields do not need to have the same name in both data sources, but
they must have the same data type (numeric, string, Boolean, and so on).
For example, you can match the Parcel_ID field in one table to the
Lot_Number field in the second table, so long as Parcel_ID and
Lot_Number use the same data type.
Creating a Join | 443
6Under Type Of Joins, select the type of join to create:
■Keep All Records On The Left (a left outer join)
■Keep Only Left-Side Records With A Match (an inner join)
7Under Relationship With Secondary Records (Cardinality), choose one
of the following:
■One-To-One matches one secondary source record to each primary
source item. Any extra secondary source records are ignored.
■One-To-Many creates a new feature for each extra record in the
secondary source.
8Click OK.
In the Data Table on page 921 for the primary source (the feature layer to which
you joined the data), the newly joined properties are appended to the right
of the native feature data. The joined properties are gray, to indicate that they
are read-only. In the column title, the name of the table you joined precedes
the property name.
NOTE To edit joined data, you must edit the secondary source itself, and not the
layer to which it is joined. See Editing Joined Data on page 446.
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
Modifying or Removing Joins
After you create a join, you can change the settings you specified when you
created it. You can remove one (of multiple) joins from a feature layer, or
remove all joins from the feature layer at once, restoring the properties for
that layer to its native data only.
444 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
See also:
■Overview of Joins on page 439
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Joined Data on page 446
To modify a join
1In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer with the join to modify,
and select Manage Joins.
2In the Manage Layer Data dialog box on page 1343, select the join to modify,
and click Edit.
3In the Edit A Join dialog box, change any settings.
The settings are the same ones you used when you created the join on
page ?. For example, you can change this join from One-To-Many to
One-To-One to get rid of extra features created by the original join.
4To delete one (or multiple) joins for this feature layer, click the join to
delete (use Ctrl or Shift to select multiple joins). Click Delete.
5When you are finished, click OK.
Changes can affect the styles, themes, and labels you set up in your map, if
they were based on the joined data.
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
Modifying or Removing Joins | 445
Editing Joined Data
To help you maintain the integrity of your original data, a few limitations
apply when editing joined data:
■When you edit a feature layer that has a one-to-one join on page 1757 in the
Data Table, you can change the native feature data (from the primary table)
but you cannot change the joined properties (from the secondary table).
To edit the joined data, display Map Explorer, expand the data source
containing the table to edit, select that table, and click Table.
NOTE You cannot add or delete records from an ODBC data source using the
Data Table. Use the source application, for example Microsoft Access, to do
this.
■For one-to-one joins, you can delete records from the primary source only.
You cannot edit one-to-one inner joins.
■You can insert records in the primary source for a left outer join on page
1754. You cannot do so for an inner join on page 1753, because the lack of a
matching secondary record would make the feature disappear.
■You cannot edit one-to-many joins. To make changes, you must open the
table itself from Map Explorer.
■In general, you cannot edit primary keys.
Each feature class has a property whose value uniquely identifies each
feature within that class. This is called the primary key. Many feature classes
use a single property for this purpose, for example, FeatureId. However, a
feature class could have a list of properties such as street number, street
name, and street type to uniquely identify a house address.
An FDO provider on page 1750 may also support the concept of autogenerated
ID values. When you add objects to your map using such a provider, the
identity property will not have a value, but it is still the primary key.
■When working offline on page 600, the above rules apply, and you cannot
insert records at all.
See also:
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or
Non-Spatial Data Table on page 928
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
446 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To edit joined data
DeleteInsertEditFor this type of
join or data...
You can delete only re-
cords only in the
primary table.
You cannot insert
data for an inner
join on page 1753
You can edit the
primary table (the
native feature data)
when you display the
One-to-One
because it might
Data Table for the cause the new
feature layer. To edit primary record to
the secondary table “disappear” when
(joined data) open there is no match-
the table in Map Ex- ing secondary re-
plorer. You cannot cord. For a left
edit the primary key outer join on
on page 1758, but page 1754, you can
you can edit the join
key.
insert records only
in the primary
table.
Not available.Not available.You cannot edit the
primary table (the
One-to-Many
native feature data)
or the secondary
table (joined data) in
the Data Table from
Display Manager. In-
stead, open the tables
in Map Explorer.
You can delete only re-
cords only in the
primary table.
Not available.You can edit (as
above) while you
work offline, but you
cannot insert records.
Offline
You can delete data
from read/write feature
sources.
You can insert data
for read/write fea-
ture sources.
You can edit
read/write feature
sources.
Feature data
Editing Joined Data | 447
DeleteInsertEditFor this type of
join or data...
Not available. Use the
source application, such
Not available. Use
the source applica-
You can edit records
in Data Table.
ODBC data table
as Microsoft Access, to
delete records.
tion, such as Mi-
crosoft Access, to
insert records.
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
Using Joins with Calculated Properties
Calculated properties combine information in existing properties using
expressions. The existing fields can be native to the current feature layer, or
they can be joined to that feature layer. For example, you can join an assessor
database to a parcel layer and create a calculated property to determine value
per acre based on the parcel value in the assessor data and the parcel area in
the parcel layer.
To create a calculated property based on joined data
1Connect to both data sources and join them, based on a common
property. on page 440
2In the Display Manager, select the primary source (the feature layer to
which you joined the data) and click Table.
3In the Data Table, click Options menu ➤ Manage Calculations.
4In the Manage Layer Data dialog box on page 1343, click New menu ➤
Calculation.
5Create the expression for the calculation.
The available properties and values reflect both the source layer and the
joined data.
448 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINEJOIN
Defines a join for feature data.
MAPDEFINEJOINCommand Line
Sharing Joined Data with Others
Use these techniques to share joined data and join definitions with others:
■Export layer(s) to an SDF file on page 1210 – When you export feature layers
to an SDF version 3 file, joined properties are included. The SDF file can
be re-used or shared with other AutoCAD Map 3D, Civil 3D, and MapGuide
customers or other programs that support SDF. The resulting file does not
contain styling data.
■Save a layer to a .LAYER file on page 1210 – When you save a layer to a .layer
file, it retains its styling information and pointers to the data source that
defines its geometry and attributes (including joined data). You can drag
and drop saved layers into any map to re-use them, or use them with
MapGuide Enterprise.
■Copy or export data from the Data Table on page 1214 – When you copy
selected features in the Data Table and past them into other programs like
Microsoft Access or Excel, joined properties are included. You can also
export selected data to a comma-separated file for use in other programs.
When you copy data from one feature source to another using Bulk Copy,
joined properties are not included.
To save layer and joined properties to an SDF file on page ?
To export layer connections and joins to a .LAYER file on page ?
To export data from the Data Table on page ?
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Sharing Joined Data with Others | 449
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAP2SDF
Exports an SDF 2 format file for use with Autodesk MapGuide, versions 6.5
and earlier.
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Autodesk SDF2
(MapGuide6.x...).
Menu
MAP2SDFCommand Line
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog boxDialog Box
Adding Attributes to Drawing Objects
Link attribute data to objects in your drawing.
See also:
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
To add attribute data to drawing objects
■To store attribute data in the drawing on page 451
■To link records to objects on page 452
■To create a link template on page 454
■To open a linked database table on page 456
■To manually link a record to an object on page 458
■To automatically link records to objects using object data on page 460
■To automatically link records to objects using text or block attribute data
on page 460
■To convert object data to a linked database table on page 463
■To edit or delete a database link on page 465
■To delete links for a group of objects on page 465
■To edit the database path in a link template on page 466
■To delete a link template on page 467
450 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■To store attribute data in the drawing on page 451
■To link records to objects on page 452
■To create a link template on page 454
■To open a linked database table on page 456
■To manually link a record to an object on page 458
■To automatically link records to objects using object data on page 460
■To automatically link records to objects using text or block attribute data
on page 460
■To convert object data to a linked database table on page 463
■To edit or delete a database link on page 465
■To delete links for a group of objects on page 465
■To edit the database path in a link template on page 466
■To delete a link template on page 467
Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data)
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. To use object data, first define the format for the
table, and then create each record as you attach it to an object.
See also:
■Setting Up Object Data on page 179
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
To store attribute data in the drawing
■To create an object data table on page 180
■To attach data to an object on page 876
■To bring in drawing objects based on object data on page 309
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects
You can create a link between a record in an external database and an object
in your drawing. Once the link exists, use the information in the database to
help you analyze, select, and display objects in your drawing.
Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data) | 451
For example, you can link property ownership data to a map of a housing
development. Select records based on property value and highlight all objects
linked to those records. Alternately, select all the houses in a specified area
and highlight records that are linked to the selected houses.
Linking records takes two steps:
■Create a link template for each database. The link template specifies which
column in the database table to use as a key column.
■Link specific objects to specific records in the table.
When you link a record from a database to an object in your drawing, AutoCAD
Map 3D stores link data on the object.
See also:
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
To link records to objects
1Before you can link a database record to an object, you must attach the
data source to the drawing on page 188 and create a link template for the
table on page 454.
2Create links using one of the following methods:
■Manually link a specific record to a specific object on page 458.
■Link objects automatically based on text or blocks in the drawing on
page 460.
■Convert existing object data to a linked database table on page 463.
3If necessary you can edit the link on page 465.
Quick Reference
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links
Menu
452 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
ADEGENLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template ➤ Generate Links
Task Pane
Generate Data Links dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
In the Data View:Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Menu
Link Records to Objects
Icon
MAPDELETELINKS
Deletes database links from objects
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤
Delete Links
Menu
MAPDELETELINKSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Links
Task Pane
Select Link Templates dialog boxDialog Box
MAPLINKMANAGER
Edits the link data attached to an object
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link
Manager
Menu
MAPLINKMANAGERCommand Line
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects | 453
Creating a Link Template
A link template specifies how to link objects in a drawing to records in a
specific database table.
A link template specifies the name of the database table and the key columns
to use to uniquely identify each record.
The link template is stored in the current drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
NOTE Before you create a link template, make sure the data source for the table
is currently attached on page 188 and connected on page 193.
To create a link template
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, right-click the table and click Define Link
Template.
2In the Define Link Template dialog box, type a name for the link template.
454 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
3Under Key Selection, select the column to use as the key by clicking the
check box in the Key column.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the value in the key column to uniquely identify
a record, so select a column or a combination of columns that contains
a unique value for each record in the database.
4Click OK.
NOTE If the link template does not immediately appear on the Map Explorer tab
of the Task Pane, right-click a blank space in Map Explorer. Click Refresh.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Define Link Template
Creates a new link template
In the Data View:Links ➤ Define Link Template
Menu
Define Link Template
Icon
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)Dialog Box
MAPDEFINELT
Defines a link template for a database table
Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete
Link Template.
Menu
Define Link Template
Icon
MAPDEFINELTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source table or
query ➤ Define Link Template
Task Pane
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)Dialog Box
Creating a Link Template | 455
Opening a Linked Database Table
Once you have a defined a link template for a table, you can open the table
as a linked table. When a table is opened as a linked table, AutoCAD Map 3D
tracks the relationship between the records in the table and the objects in
your drawing.
See also:
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects on page 1008
To open a linked database table
■In Map Explorer on page 1755, double-click a link template. Depending on
the data source option setting, the linked table opens in either Edit mode
or View mode. If the table is write-protected, it opens in View mode. Queries
always open in View mode.
■To open a table in View mode, right-click the link template. Click View
Linked Table.
Quick Reference
MAPVIEWLINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the
Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Linked
Table.
Menu
MAPVIEWLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View
Linked Table
Task Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
456 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects
You can create a link between an object in the drawing and a record in a
database table. You cannot create a link to a feature from a feature source.
You cannot create links for non-graphical objects, such as layers and linetypes.
Link Data
When you create a link, link data is stored on the object. The link data has
two parts: the name of the link template to use, and the actual value to search
for in the key column. The record with the matching key value is linked to
the object.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects on page 458
Manually Linking Database Records to Objects | 457
NOTE To link records to objects, you must first define a link template for the table
on page 454, and you must open the table as a linked table on page 456.
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source.
To manually link a record to an object
1Open a linked database table in the Data View on page 865.
2In the Data View window, select a record.
3In the Data View, click Links menu ➤ Link Records To Objects.
4Select the objects in your drawing. Press Enter.
NOTE If you are linking data to a polygon and plan to use the data with
topology functions, be sure to link the data to the centroid of the polygon.
Topology functions do not use data linked to the polygon border.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
In the Data View:Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Menu
Link Records to Objects
Icon
Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects
If information in your drawing, such as object data, text, or block attribute
data, matches information in a database table, you can automatically create
links from each selected object to a matching record in the database table.
458 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
For example, if each parcel in a parcel map has attached object data that
contains the parcel ID, you can automatically link each parcel to the correct
record in a database of parcel information.
Or if you have district code stored as block attribute data and also have a table
that has a column for district codes, you can automatically link each code in
the map to the corresponding record in the table.
If no matching record is found in the database table, you can set an option
to create the record.
If you are using block or text, you can set an option to use the insertion point
point of the block or text as the label point for the object.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
■Defining the Text Insertion Point on page 793
■Converting Object Data to Database Links on page 461
■Manually Linking Database Records to Objects on page 457
NOTE You can link records to drawing objects. You cannot link records to features
from a feature source.
Before you begin, be sure you have defined a link template on page 454 for the
database you will use, and the objects to link to are accessible. You cannot
create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or turned off.
Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects | 459
To automatically link records to objects using object data
1Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
2In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box on page 1416,
under Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
3Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4Under Target Link Template, select Link Object Data To Database.
5Click Define to specify the link template.
6In the Select Existing Link Template dialog box on page 1425, under Link
Template, select an available link template.
7For each key field in the link template, select a field in the object data
table.
8Select a Database Validation option:
■None — Creates links without checking to see if a matching record
exists in the table
■Link Must Exist — Creates a link only if the value in the drawing
matches the key field value of an existing record. If no record has a
matching value, a link is not created for that object.
■Create If New — Creates a new record in the table if no existing record
has a matching value.
9Click OK.
10 In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
11 Click Proceed.
To automatically link records to objects using text or block attribute data
1Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links.
2In the Generate Data Links dialog box, select a linkage type.
3Under Data Links, select Create Database Links.
4Select a link template.
460 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
If you are creating links to enclosed text, select a link template that has
only one key field.
5If you are creating links to blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of
the block.
For each key field in the link template, select a tag from the block
attribute. You can assign a tag to only one key field.
6Select a Database Validation option.
7Optionally, select Use Insertion Point As Label Point.
8Click OK.
9Enter a to use all blocks or text objects, or enter s to select block or text
objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links
Menu
ADEGENLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template ➤ Generate Links
Task Pane
Generate Data Links dialog boxDialog Box
Converting Object Data to Database Links
You can convert object data into linked records in an external database table.
Converting Object Data to Database Links | 461
You can do one of the following
■Create a new table in an existing data source. For the new link template,
you can use an existing field as the key field, or you can have AutoCAD
Map 3D create a new field and assign a unique value to each record.
■Add the data to an existing database table.
Field Names in the New Table
By default, the fields in the new database table have the same names as the
fields in the object data table. AutoCAD Map 3D resolves any conflicts in the
following ways:
■Truncates fields that are too long and adds an incremental digit to the
resulting duplicate field names
■Replaces unsupported characters in a field name with an underscore (_)
■Converts unsupported field types to character
■Converts point fields to a character string and separates coordinates with
commas
In addition, if you have object data that matches information in a database
table, you can automatically create links from each selected object to a
matching record in the database table.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
■Automatically Linking Database Records to Objects on page 458
If you plan to create a new table in an existing data source, make sure the
appropriate data source is currently attached on page 188 and connected on
page 193.
NOTE During the conversion, field names in the object data table become field
names in the database table. Make sure that the field names in your object data
table are not SQL reserved words such as DATE, SELECT, or CURRENT. If necessary,
rename the fields in your object data table before you convert it.
462 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To convert object data to a linked database table
1Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
2In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box on page 1416,
under Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
3Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4Under Target Link Template, select Convert Object Data To Database.
5Click Define to specify the link template.
6In the Define Link Template dialog box, select an available data source.
Click Connect.
7Enter a table name.
8Specify the fields to use as key fields (columns). To enter more than one
field name, separate names with a comma.
To select from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename
the fields, click Select to display the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog
box.
You can use an existing object data field as the key column or create a
new field. If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the field
in the Generate Key area. AutoCAD Map 3D sets the first record in the
database table to 1, and increments each subsequent record by 1. Click
OK to close the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog box.
9In the Define Link Template dialog box, enter a name for the link template
and click OK.
The link template stores the address of the database table and the name
of the key field. Accept the default or enter a new unique name.
10 In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
11 Click Proceed.
AutoCAD Map 3D converts the object data into linked database tables.
Converting Object Data to Database Links | 463
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
Editing Database Links
To link an object to a different record in a database table, you can either delete
the old link and create a new link, or you can edit the link data stored on the
object.
The link data specifies the following:
■the link template for the database table
■the link value for the record
The object is linked to the record in the database table where the value in the
key column matches the link value on the object. If you edit the link value,
you link the object to a different record in the table.
For example, a database has a record for each piece of equipment. The link
template for the database table specifies the serial number column as the key
column. If you replace a piece of equipment, you must edit the link value on
the object in the drawing to reflect the new serial number. This links the object
to the record with the new serial number.
Editing Linked Objects
If you move, copy, or delete a linked object, the link data is moved, copied,
or deleted with it. Deleting the object and its link data does not affect the data
in the database table.
You can also delete the link from the object.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
464 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
To edit or delete a database link
1Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link Manager.
2Select the object with the link to edit.
3In the Link Manager dialog box, review or edit the link data.
4To modify link data, click the value to edit. Type a new value, or click…
to select from a list of values in the database.
5To delete a link, click the link template and click Delete.
6When you finish, click OK.
To delete links for a group of objects
1Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete Links.
2Select the object or objects with the links to delete.
3In the Select Link Templates dialog box, select the link templates whose
links you will delete from the objects.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPDELETELINKS
Deletes database links from objects
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤
Delete Links
Menu
MAPDELETELINKSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Links
Task Pane
Select Link Templates dialog boxDialog Box
MAPLINKMANAGER
Editing Database Links | 465
Edits the link data attached to an object
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link
Manager
Menu
MAPLINKMANAGERCommand Line
Editing a Link Template
If you rename a database table or change the location of the database, you
must edit the link template associated with that database table.
When you edit a link template, all objects in the drawing that reference the
link template use the new information.
If you no longer use a link template in a drawing, you can delete the link
template from the current drawing. When you delete a link template, all links
that reference that link template are deleted from the drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
NOTE The procedure below edits the link template in the active drawing. It does
not update the asi.ini file (which stores data source mapping information), source
drawings, or other drawings that use this link template.
To edit the database path in a link template
1Click Setup ➤ Edit Link Template Properties.
2Select the link template. Click OK.
3In the Link Template Properties dialog box on page 1422, select a new data
source, catalog, schema, or table.
4Click OK.
5Right-click the Map Explorer tab of the Task Pane. Click Refresh.
466 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To delete a link template
1Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete Link Template.
2In the Select Link Template dialog box, select the link template. Click
OK.
Quick Reference
MAPDELETELT
Deletes a link template
Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤
Delete Link Template
Menu
MAPDELETELTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ Delete
Link Template
Task Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPPROPSLT
Edits the database table name or location in a link template
Setup menu ➤ Edit Link Template Properties
Menu
MAPPROPSLTCommand Line
Using Open Source FDO Providers
To make it easier to extend the capabilities of FDO Data Access Technology
used within AutoCAD Map 3D, Autodesk has released FDO as an open source
project under the Open Source Geospatial Foundation™ (OSGeo™).
This has enabled developers from all over the world to tap into powerful web
mapping and geospatial data access technology and develop additional FDO
data providers that work with AutoCAD Map 3D.
Using Open Source FDO Providers | 467
Often, developers make the providers they develop available for free. They
can be integrated into AutoCAD Map 3D and then used to access additional
data formats not included in the box.
DescriptionExamples of Third Party and Open
Source Providers Available
Open source, available on http://fdo.os-
geo.org
OGR Provider (supports vector formats
such as ESRI Personal Database, GRASS,
and SDTS).
Open source, available on http://fdo.os-
geo.org
GDAL Provider (supports raster formats
such as NITF, Imagine, PCIDSK, and HDF).
Available on ht-
tp://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/ser-
vlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
SL-King Oracle Provider.
Available on ht-
tp://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/ser-
vlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
Safe Software FME Provider for FDO.
Check http://fdo.osgeo.org and
http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908 periodically
for additional providers.
If you are a developer, you can also create your own data providers. The open
source version of FDO Data Access Technology and developer documentation
is available on http://fdo.osgeo.org .
NOTE FDO Providers from sources other than Autodesk are not supported or
warrantied by Autodesk.
■To download a third party or open source FDO provider on page 468
■To integrate a new FDO provider into AutoCAD Map 3D on page 469
■To develop a new FDO provider on page 470
To download a third party or open source FDO provider
■Go to http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=8824908
or http://fdo.osgeo.org to see the providers available for download.
468 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
To integrate a new FDO provider into AutoCAD Map 3D
1Close AutoCAD Map 3D if it is running.
2In Windows Explorer, navigate to \AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\FDO\bin.
3Make a backup copy of providers.xml. Give the back up a new name such
as providers_backup.xml.
4In WordPad, open \AutoCAD Map 3D 2009\FDO\bin\providers.xml.
NOTE Do not use Notepad.
5Copy a section for an existing provider, for example the section OSGEO
WMS, and paste it to a new location in the XML file.
Be sure you copy the entire section, from <Feature Provider> to
</FeatureProvider>.
6Modify the following elements in the new section as needed:
■Name – Name of your new provider.
■Display Name – Name that will be displayed in the Data Connect
window in AutoCAD Map 3D
■Description – Description that will be displayed in the Data Connect
window
■IsManaged – False if the provider was developed using unmanaged
code like C++; True if uses managed code.
■Version – The DLL version number. The version number must match
the version number of the DLLs.
■FeatureDataObjectsVersion – FDO version number
■LibraryPath - Path to the DLLs for the new provider
7Save and close providers.xml.
8Start AutoCAD Map 3D.
9In Display Manager, click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
The provider you added should appear under Data Connections By
Provider.
10 In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
the new provider. For example, select “Add OGR Connection”.
Using Open Source FDO Providers | 469
11 Enter the connection information.
NOTE For the OGR provider, you need to enter the complete path to the
geodatabase for Data Source.
12 The ReadOnly field indicates whether you can edit the data. TRUE means
the data is read-only. FALSE means it will be read / write.
13 Click Login.
14 Click Connect to bring the data into your map.
To develop a new FDO provider
■Go to http://fdo.osgeo.org to download the API and access the
documentation needed to develop a provider.
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data
You can bring in the following types of data from AutoCAD Civil 3D projects:
■Features (Alignments, points, parcels, and pipe networks)
■Surfaces
To bring in Civil 3D data, you must first export it from Civil 3D to formats
that can be read by AutoCAD Map 3D.
The table below lists the AutoCAD Civil 3D features and attributes that are
exported to the SDF file.
Exported AttributesAutoCAD Civil 3D Feature
Alignment ■Alignment Name
■Length
■Design Speed
■Starting Station
■Ending Station
470 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
Point ■Point Number
■Point Name
■Elevation
■Description
■Raw Description
■Latitude
■Longitude
Parcel ■Parcel Name
■Parcel Number
■Area
■Perimeter
Pipe ■Network Name
■Length
■Slope
■Inside Diameter
■Outside Diameter
■Shape
■Elevation at Start
■Elevation at End
■Structure Start
■Structure End
Structure ■Network Name
■Rim Elevation
■Structure Name
See also:
■Bringing In Features from SDF on page 287
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data | 471
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF on page 472
■To access the SDF file from a map on page 472
■To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil 3D to DEM on page 472
■To access the DEM from a map on page 472
To export features from AutoCAD Civil 3D to SDF
1Open the project in AutoCAD Civil 3D. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, click File
menu ➤ Export ➤ Export to SDF.
2In the Export To SDF dialog box, specify a name for the SDF file.
3Specify the coordinate system.
NOTE If the drawing already has a coordinate system specified, it is used
automatically and the Select Coordinate System controls in the Export To
SDF dialog box are grayed out.
4Click OK to export the file.
To access the SDF file from a map
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
2In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
Add SDF Connection.
3Specify information to connect to the SDF file. For more information,
see To bring in features from SDF on page 288.
To export surfaces from AutoCAD Civil 3D to DEM
1Open the project in AutoCAD Civil 3D.
2In AutoCAD Civil 3D, export the surface as a DEM file.
To access the DEM from a map
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
472 | Chapter 3 Bringing In Data
2In the Data Connect window, under Data Connections By Provider, select
Add Raster Image Or Surface Connection.
3Specify information to connect to the DEM file. For more information,
see To add a raster-based surface to your map on page 374.
Quick Reference
Connect Feature Source
Connects a feature source
Click File ➤ Connect To Data.
Menu
Connect
Icon
MAPCONNECTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click and click Connect to
Data
Task Pane
Bringing In AutoCAD Civil 3D Data | 473
474
Managing Data
Overview of Managing Data
Different geospatial data formats have different capabilities. Use the following
table to determine the options available for your data stores.
NOTE WMS and raster data providers are not covered here. For information about
those providers, see Adding an Image from a WMS (Web Map Service) on page 377
and Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370.
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQL Serv-
er
Oracle
Set up
users on
page 502
Set up
users on
page 502
Set up
users on
page 502
Create
data
Create
data
Set up
data
Create
data stores
Create
data stores
Create
data stores
storesstoresstores on
page 496
on page
504
on page
504
on page
504 onon page
504 page
504
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add
data to
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
Add data
to your
youryouryouryourmap on
page 289
map on
page 282
map on
page 279
map on
page 271 map on
page 293
map on
page 274
map on
4
475
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQL Serv-
er
Oracle
page
285
map on
page 287
Style
data on
page 540
Style
data on
page 540
Style
data on
page
540
Style
data on
page 540
Style data
on page
540
Style data
on page
540
Style data
on page
540
Examine
or edit
Exam-
ine or
Examine
or edit
Examine
or edit
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
Examine
or edit at-
attributeedit at-attributeattributetributetributetribute
data on
page 595
tribute
data on
data on
page 595
data on
page 595
data on
page 595
data on
page 595
data on
page 595
page
595
Join
data to
Join
data to
Join
data to
Join data
to a dif-
Join data
to a dif-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
Join data
to a differ-
a WFSa differ-a differ-ferentferentent fea-ent fea-ent fea-
feature.ent fea-ent fea-feature.feature.ture. on
page 440
ture. on
page 440
ture. on
page 440 on page
440
ture. on
page 440
ture. on
page
440
on page
440
on page
440
Create
a
Create a
schema
Create a
schema on
page 509
Create a
schema on
page 509
Create a
schema on
page 509 schemaon page
509 on
page
509
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema
View a
schema on
page 518
View a
schema on
page 518
View a
schema on
page 518 on page
518
on
page
518
on page
518
on page
518
476 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQL Serv-
er
Oracle
Edit a
schema
Edit a
schema on
page 519
Edit a
schema on
page 519
Edit a
schema on
page 519 on page
519
Delete a
schema
Delete a
schema on
page 521
Delete a
schema on
page 521
Delete a
schema on
page 521 on page
521
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy
data
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
Copy data
to/from a
to/fromto/fromto/fromto/fromdifferentdifferentdifferent
a differ-a differ-a differ-a differ-datadatadata
ent dataentent dataent dataformat on
page 522
format on
page 522
format on
page 522 formatdataformatformat
on page
522
NOTE You
can
copy
data in-
to an
ArcSDE
schema
if the
data
store
and
schema
are
already
defined
in the
target.
format
on
page
522
on page
522
on page
522
Overview of Managing Data | 477
WFSESRI
ArcSDE
SHPSDFODBCMySQLSQL Serv-
er
Oracle
NOTE You
can use
Bulk
Copy to
copy
ODBC
data to a
different
provider,
such as
Oracle,
MySQL,
SQL Serv-
er, SDF,
and SHP.
You can
copy
data to
an
ODBC
data
store,
but you
must
define
the tar-
get
schema
properly,
and have
write per-
missions.
478 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and
Schemas
Overview of Geospatial Data
Geospatial data is organized as follows:
■Feature: The spatial representation of a real-world entity, such as a specific
road or an individual utility pole, that specifies the geometry and other
properties of the feature.
■Feature class: A category of features with rules that define the allowable
data types, default values, and constraints for its member features. For
example, you might have feature classes for a set of roads, utility poles,
and so on.
■Schema: A collection of related feature classes.
■Data store: A collection of feature data in a single storage location.
SDF data stores allow only one schema per file, but database stores such
as Oracle or SQL Server can have multiple schemas. (SHP files can include
only one geometry type per file, but you can stored and copy to multiple
SHP files in a folder. You can use a configuration file to support multiple
schemas when you establish your connection to a SHP file.)
The data hierarchy
Geospatial data is stored in a hierarchical fashion, like a set of tables: each
row within a table is an individual feature, and each column is a property on
page 1758 of that feature. The entire table (including its name, column names,
data types, default values, and constraints) represents a feature class. The set
of related tables is called a schema, and the entire collection of data resides
in a data store.
For example, you might use a data store such as Oracle, which can encompass
multiple schemas. The database might define the utilities for a town, with
schemas for different types of utilities, such as electrical and water. The
electrical schema would include feature classes for utility poles and boxes,
while the water schema would include feature classes for pipes and hydrants.
About Geospatial Feature Classes, Data Stores, and Schemas | 479
Properties
Each feature class has properties that define it. The Pole feature class would
have properties such as identification number, name, model, material, height,
installation date, and so on. The properties that define a feature class can have
data types, default values, and constraints. These can help ensure that a feature
meets certain criteria in order to be included in a particular feature class. For
example, the “Large Roads” feature class can include a field called “Lanes.”
The constraint for “Lanes” can specify that its value must be six or higher in
order for a road to be included in the “Large Roads” feature class.
Data stores
Features can be stored in a spatial database (such as Oracle, MySQL, or
SQLServer), or in the ESRI ArcSDE data store, which can use either an Oracle-
or SQL Server-based spatial database. Features can be stored in a file (such as
SHP or SDF). Related SHP files might be stored in a folder.
Features can be accessed from a Web-based service (such as WFS or WMS).
AutoCAD Map 3D also supports ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity), a
standardized interface for accessing a database from a program.
A data store usually contains a spatial context, which describes the spatial
metadata or parameters within which geometry for a collection of features
resides. The spatial context can specify the coordinate system, extents, and
tolerance. A data store can include multiple spatial contexts, for example, one
context for ground-based data and another context for schematic data.
For more information about features, feature classes, and schemas (including
diagrams that illustrate these concepts), see “What Are Features?” and “What
is a Schema?” in Best Practices for Managing Geospatial Data, available from the
Help menu in AutoCAD Map 3D.
Working with features in your map
To add a feature to your map, you connect to its data store and select the
feature classes to include. After you connect to a data store in AutoCAD Map
3D, that data store is a feature source on page 1751 for the current map. Feature
sources are listed by provider (for example, all SDF feature sources are listed
together in Data Connect). Each feature class you add becomes a feature layer
on page 1751 in your map. You can apply filters and spatial queries to the layers
to show only some of the features within that layer. Filters are based on
attributes, and queries are based on spatial location.
480 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
■Overview of Bringing In GIS Features on page 266
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Styling Features on page 540
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Migrating Data on page 522
To work with geospatial data
■Set up users for database data stores on page 502
■Create data stores on page 504, if your data source supports that option.
■Add data to your map on page 265
■Style the data on page 540
■Examine or edit attribute data for any feature on page 595
■View the schema on page 518 for any data source.
■Create a schema on page 509, if your data source supports that option.
■Edit a schema on page 519, if your data source supports that option.
■Delete a schema on page 521, if your data source supports that option.
■Copy data to/from a different data format on page 522, if your data source
supports that option.
Working with FDO Schemas
You can view a schema on page 1760, feature class on page 1750, or property on
page 1758 from any FDO provider on page 1750, but the ability to change them
depends on the provider and your access rights. You cannot edit or delete any
schema, feature class, or property if there are existing features that use it.
You can create schemas within AutoCAD Map 3D, or import existing FDO
schemas into your maps.
Working with FDO Schemas | 481
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
To work with FDO schemas
■View the schema on page 518 for any data source.
■Create a schema on page 509, if your data source supports that option.
■Import on page 517 existing FDO schemas into a map.
■Edit a schema on page 519, if your data source supports that option.
■Delete a schema on page 521, if your data source supports that option.
Working with Oracle Data
AutoCAD Map 3D, supports Oracle versions 10gr2, 11g, and XE. You can
create and edit an Oracle data store on page 1747 and schema on page 1760, and
you can access existing spatial schemas in Oracle that were created by other
applications. Oracle has comprehensive support for all the data types and
operations that AutoCAD Map 3D supports, including spatial index on page
1762, long transaction on page 1754, and persistent locking on page 1758.
Before you add features to an Oracle data store, make sure your user privileges
for that Oracle data store are adequate and appropriate, and that the data in
that data store is accurate and current.
You can add a user for an Oracle data store using a utility on page 502 provided
with AutoCAD Map 3D.
What Oracle Schemas Support
An Oracle schema can support the following:
■Inheritance
482 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties (with limitations)
■Association properties (with limitations)
■Schema overrides
■Auto ID generation
■Data store scope unique ID generation
■Default values
■Inclusive value range constraints
■Exclusive value range constraints
■Value constraints list
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Composite unique value constraints
■Spatial contexts
■These geometry types: point, line string, polygon, multi-point, multi-line
string, multi-polygon, curve string, curve polygon, multi-curve string,
multi-curve polygon, linear ring, line string segment, circular arc segment,
and ring
■Multi-geometry
Restrictions of Oracle Schemas
When you create an Oracle schema, the following restrictions apply:
■A feature class on page 1750 must define or inherit at least one identity
property on page 1758.
■You cannot add a non-nullable data property to a class that already has
data.
■Identity properties cannot be nullable.
■Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
■The length for string properties must be between 1 and 4000 bytes inclusive.
Working with Oracle Data | 483
■For decimal properties, precision must be between 1 and 38 inclusive and
scale must be between -84 and 127 inclusive.
■A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. Although it is not
mandatory, having a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class
can help you to identify which geometry property to use as the default for
queries and rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
Version Enabling
The Autodesk FDO Provider for Oracle included with AutoCAD Map 3D 2009
creates tables in the FDO data store on page 1747 that are not automatically
version-enabled. Therefore, when you create a new Oracle data store using
the default options, the resulting table is not version-enabled, so persistent
locking on page 1758 and long transaction on page 1754 are not supported. (This
differs from previous releases.)
Oracle Workspace Manager (OWM) is used for versioning and persistent
locking support.
NOTE Versioning and persistent locking are not available with the Oracle XE
version.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Setting Up Database Users on page 502
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Bringing In Features from Oracle on page 271
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Migrating Data on page 522
484 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
To enable versioning for an Oracle data store
1You enable versioning with the Oracle SQL*Plus tool, which you use to
execute the scripts. Before executing the scripts, make sure the following
conditions are true:
■You connect directly to the Oracle user (or FDO data store) to be
processed.
■The Oracle user executing the script has sufficient privileges (has been
granted the Workspace Manager role WM_ADMIN_ROLE).
■The Oracle user executing the script is the only user processing or
accessing the current Oracle user (or FDO data store) during the
execution of the script. Otherwise, a script failure may result from a
session conflict.
2To create a script log file, execute the spool <log file name>; command
before invoking the scripts and the spool off; command after the
invoked script finishes. The log file can help you resolve any issues
encountered by the scripts.
3Read the documentation contained within the script files themselves to
determine what privileges are required for each script, how to run the
scripts, and what errors may occur.
Problems can occur if you respond incorrectly to errors you encounter
while running a script.
4Execute the EnableVersioning.sql script in the /FDO/bin/com folder in your
AutoCAD Map 3D folder.
This will enable the tables for OWM.
NOTE The DisableVersioning.sql script in the same folder provides the opposite
functionality.
5If you create a data store in AutoCAD Map 3D 2009 that you want to use
with the 2007 version of AutoCAD Map 3D, you must set the value of
the lock and long transaction options in the table F_Options in the
generated data store to 2. You can do this with the supplied SQL script
EnableVersioning.sql, which also enables versioning for all tables and allows
the creation of conditional data. Do not make this change to F_Options
in the database if you do not plan to use it with the previous version of
AutoCAD Map 3D.
Working with Oracle Data | 485
To work with Oracle data
■Set up users on page 502
■Create data stores on page 504
■Add Oracle features to your map on page 271
■Style Oracle features on page 540
■Join Oracle data to a different feature on page 440
■Examine or edit attribute data on page 595
■Create an Oracle schema on page 509
■View an Oracle schema on page 518
■Edit an Oracle schema on page 519
■Copy data to/from a different data format on page 522
Working with SQL Server Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server version 2005. SQL Server provides
comprehensive data support, along with spatial indexing, optimistic
concurrency, and read-committed transaction isolation. It uses a revision
number for optimistic concurrency.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports SQL Server authentication for SQL Server data
stores. The FDO on page 1750 User is mapped to the SQL Server login. Grant
access to the databases whose data you want to use.
What SQL Server Schemas Support
A SQL Server schema on page 1760 can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties (with limitations)
■Association properties (with limitations)
■Schema overrides
■Auto ID generation
486 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Default values
■Inclusive value range constraints
■Exclusive value range constraints
■Value constraints list
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Composite unique value constraints
■Spatial contexts
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon,
circular arc segment
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: ring, linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve
string, multi-curve string
■Multi-geometry
Restrictions of SQL Server Schemas
When you create a SQL Server schema, the following restrictions apply:
■A feature class on page 1750 must define or inherit at least one identity
property on page 1758.
■Identity properties cannot be nullable.
■Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
■A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. Although it is not
mandatory, having a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class
can help you to identify which geometry property to use as the default for
queries and rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
■The maximum length of a string is 8000 characters.
Working with SQL Server Data | 487
■For decimal properties, the precision must be between 1 and 38 inclusive,
and the scale must be between 0 and 38 inclusive.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Setting Up Database Users on page 502
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Bringing In Features from SQL Server on page 279
■Styling Features on page 540
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
■Migrating Data on page 522
To work with SQL Server data
■Set up users on page 502
■Create data stores on page 504
■Add SQL Server features to your map on page 279
■Style SQL Server features on page 540
■Join SQL Server data to a different feature on page 440
■Examine or edit attribute data on page 595
■Create a SQL Server schema on page 509
■View a SQL Server schema on page 518
■Edit a SQL Server schema on page 519
■Delete a SQL Server schema on page 521
488 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Copy data to/from a different data format on page 522
Working with MySQL Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports MySQL 5.0.27 In AutoCAD Map 3D, you can
create, edit, and delete a MySQL data store on page 1747 or schema on page 1760.
You can also access existing databases in MySQL that were created by other
applications. AutoCAD Map 3D supports native MySQL geometry, indexing,
two-dimensional geometry (compatible with the OGC Simple Feature
specification), and spatial query operations, but not transactions.
Auto-generated properties are automatically incremented (auto-incremented).
MySQL uses a revision number for optimistic concurrency.
NOTE If you cannot connect to your MySQL data source and you receive the error
message, "Specified credentials are not valid or the provider is unable to establish
a connection," copy the libmySQL.dll file into the AutoCAD Map 3D\FDO\bin folder
and try again.
What MySQL Schemas Support
A MySQL schema can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties (with limitations)
■Association properties (with limitations)
■Schema overrides
■Auto ID generation
■Default values
■Null value constraints
■Unique value constraints
■Composite unique value constraints
■Spatial contexts
Working with MySQL Data | 489
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon,
circular arc segment
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: ring, linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve
string, multi-curve string
■Multi-geometry
Restrictions of MySQL Schemas
When you create a MySQL schema, the following restrictions apply:
■A feature class on page 1750 must define or inherit at least one identity
property on page 1758.
■Inclusive value range constraints are not supported.
■Identity properties cannot be nullable.
■Read-only identity properties must be auto-generated.
■A feature class can have multiple geometric properties. Although it is not
mandatory, having a main geometry as an attribute of the feature class
can help you to identify which geometry property to use as the default for
queries and rendering. Both HasMeasure and HasElevation are supported.
■The maximum length of a string is 65,535 bytes.
■For decimal properties, the precision must be between 1 and 65 inclusive
and the scale must be between 0 and 30 inclusive.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Setting Up Database Users on page 502
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Bringing In Features from MySQL on page 282
■Styling Features on page 540
490 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
■Migrating Data on page 522
To work with MySQL data
■Set up users on page 502
■Create data stores on page 504
■Add MySQL features to your map on page 282
■Style MySQL features on page 540
■Join MySQL data to a different feature on page 440
■Examine or edit attribute data on page 595
■Create a MySQL schema on page 509
■View a MySQL schema on page 518
■Edit a MySQL schema on page 519
■Delete a MySQL schema on page 521
■Copy data to/from a different data format on page 522
Working with SDF Data
The Autodesk SDF file format is a standalone, file-based spatial database format
that supports multiple features classes and properties in a single file, and
provides spatial indexing, interoperability, and high performance for large
data sets.
Working with SDF Data | 491
Characteristics of the SDF File Format
The SDF file format has the following characteristics:
■SDF files can be read on different platforms.
■One schema on page 1760 in a single SDF file supports multiple feature classes
on page 1750.
■SDF files have their own spatial indexing.
■SDF files can store geometric and non-geometric data with minimal
overhead.
■The SDF file format supports a single writer at any time, with multiple
readers.
What SDF Schemas Support
An SDF schema can support the following:
■Auto ID generation
■Default values
■Exclusive and inclusive value range constraints
■Value list constraints
■Null value constraints
■Spatial contexts
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon, curve polygon, multi-curve polygon,
circular arc segment
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: ring, linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string, curve
string, multi-curve string
■Multi-geometry
492 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Setting Up Database Users on page 502
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Bringing In Features from SDF on page 287
■Styling Features on page 540
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
■Migrating Data on page 522
To work with SDF data
■Create data stores on page 504
■Add SDF features to your map on page 287
■Style SDF features on page 540
■Join SDF data to a different feature on page 440
■Examine or edit attribute data on page 595
■Create an SDF schema on page 509
■View an SDF schema on page 518
■Edit an SDF schema on page 519
■Delete an SDF schema on page 521
■Copy data to/from a different data format on page 522
Working with SDF Data | 493
Working with SHP Data
The standalone ESRI SHP file format supports GIS data using the following
file types:
■SHP (shape geometry)
■SHX (shape index)
■PRJ (projection information)
■CPG (code page files)
■IDX (spatial index)
■DBF (shape attributes in dBASE format)
You must have either a SHP or DBF file present to connect to data or work
with schemas on page 1760. Otherwise, these files are optional. If they do not
exist initially, the system creates files with empty records.
Characteristics of the SHP File Format
The Schema Editor treats each SHP file, and its associated DBF file, as a feature
class on page 1750 with a single geometry property on page 1758 and, optionally,
data attribute properties. The SHP file format supports a single writer at any
time, but can have multiple readers.
SHP files can include only one geometry type per file, but you can stored and
copy to multiple SHP files in a folder. You can use a configuration file to
support multiple schemas when you establish your connection to a folder
containing SHP files.
What SHP Schemas Support
A SHP schema can support the following:
■A single geometry type per file
■Spatial contexts (determined by coordinate system information in the PRJ
file)
■Auto ID generation
■Null value constraints
494 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■The following geometry types:
■Polygons: polygon, multi-polygon
■Points: point, multi-point
■Rings: linear ring
■Line strings: line string, line string segment, multi-line string
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Setting Up Database Users on page 502
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Bringing In Features from SHP on page 285
■Styling Features on page 540
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Migrating Data on page 522
To work with SHP data
■Create data stores on page 504
■Add SHP features to your map on page 285
■Style SHP features on page 540
■Join SHP data to a different feature on page 440
■Examine or edit attribute data on page 595
■View a SHP schema on page 518
■Copy data to/from a different data format on page 522
Working with SHP Data | 495
Working with ODBC Data
To set up a Data Source Name (DSN) for your ODBC data store, you add a DSN
in Windows. The configuration options you specify depend on the type of
ODBC data store you use. The login ID and password you enter when setting
up your DSN are used only for defining the DSN, and not when you connect
with the ODBC provider via FDO.
NOTE For MySQL, be sure to install the MySQL driver from MyODBC 3.51 at
http://dev.mysql.com/downloads/connector/odbc/3.51.html.
What ODBC Schemas Support
For ODBC, AutoCAD Map 3D supports point geometry, with X, Y, and
optionally, Z columns for defining points. Although the default column names
are X, Y, and Z, when you select the columns to represent these points, you
must override the defaults. Because this information is stored in the map file
itself, if you perform the same steps ( in another map, you will need to override
the settings again..
In some cases, ODBC schemas support default values.
Restrictions of ODBC Schemas
■There is no spatial indexing.
■Geometry points are stored as separate properties in the object definition.
■The existing schema on page 1760 is used; you cannot edit or delete it. You
cannot add a new schema or add FDO on page 1750 metadata to the data
store on page 1747.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Accessing Data from ODBC on page 289
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■To set up an ODBC data store for use with AutoCAD Map 3D on page 497
■To set up a database range for Excel on page 498
496 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■To work with ODBC data on page 498
To set up an ODBC data store for use with AutoCAD Map 3D
1From your Windows desktop, click Start menu ➤ Settings ➤ Control
Panel and open the Administrative Tools control panel.
2Double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
3Click Add.
4Select a driver.
■For a SQL Server data store, use the SQL Server or SQL Native Client
driver. Specify either Windows NT or SQL Server, and select the default
database that matches yours.
■For an Oracle provider, do not use the Microsoft ODBC for Oracle
driver because it is incompatible with AutoCAD Map 3D. Instead, use
the driver installed with the Oracle client.
5Click Finish.
6Specify the DSN information.
■For a MySQL Server data store, specify the Data Source Name, Server,
User, Password, and Database.
■For an Oracle provider, specify the Data Source Name, the TNS Service
Name (the service to which you are connecting), and the User ID (the
database to access). The User ID predefines the tables available in
AutoCAD Map 3D (it is the equivalent of the OWNER field in an
Oracle metaschema). If you do not specify it here, the entire schema
of the Oracle instance (based on your user privileges) will be used. It
is case-sensitive and should match the value in the Oracle instance
(all uppercase is the usual case). This process can take several minutes,
depending on your Oracle instance.
7Under Database, click Select and select the data store to use.
8Click OK in the Select Database and ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog
boxes.
9In the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, select the new data
source and click Configure.
Working with ODBC Data | 497
10 Specify the appropriate configuration options for your data store type:
■For SQL Server, some column data types (for example, nchar) can cause
a failure when connecting to the SQL Server, because they are
converted to unsupported formats by the ODBC driver.
■For a MySQL Server data store, some column types can return the
wrong length and prevent the ODBC provider from reporting the
column. To resolve this, check Don't Optimize Column Width.
■For a Microsoft Excel schemas, you must specify at least one named
range. You can then expose different named ranges in the worksheet
as different ODBC tables. Also, the ODBC tables map to FDO classes.
To set up a database range for Excel
1Open the Excel worksheet.
2Select all the data in the worksheet.
Press Ctrl + A to select everything.
3Define a named range for all the data in the table.
■Click Insert menu ➤ Name ➤ Define.
■Type a name for the FDO class.
Do not use DATABASE or any other reserved word as a range name.
To work with ODBC data
■Add data to your map on page 289
■Join ODBC data to a different feature on page 440
■Examine or edit attribute data on page 595
Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data
You can connect via ArcSDE to an underlying Oracle or SQL Server database.
You can insert, select, update, and delete feature data in existing ArcSDE
schemas on page 1760. You cannot create or modify an ArcSDE schema in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
498 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
AutoCAD Map 3D supports ArcSDE 9.1 and 9.2. To work with ArcSDE, you
must install ArcSDE 9.1 and a supported data source on page 1747, such as Oracle
9i, in the network.
Install the following DLL files on the computer on which you run AutoCAD
Map 3D:
For version 9.2For version 9.1
pe.dllpe91.dll
sde.dllsde91.dll
sg.dllsg91.dll
For instructions on installing the DLL files and setting up your hosts and
services files for ArcSDE, see Bringing In Features from ArcSDE on page 274.
The PATH environment variable must reference the local folder containing
these . To accomplish this, you can install an ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop application
or the ArcSDE SDK. For more information about ArcGIS 9.1 Desktop
applications and the ArcSDE SDK, refer to the ESRI documentation.
What ESRI ArcSDE Schemas Support
AutoCAD Map 3D uses facilities provided by ArcSDE for long transaction on
page 1754 versioning on page 1765 and persistent locking on page 1758. (ArcSDE
supports one or the other, but not both, on the same class). AutoCAD Map
3D uses the standard ArcSDE API and ArcSDE-supported storage on both the
Oracle and SQL Server platforms. AutoCAD Map 3D does not use FDO on page
1750 metadata for ArcSDE schema—it uses existing metadata only.
Restrictions of ArcSDE Schemas
If ArcSDE encounters curved segments, it converts them to a series of line
segments that approximate the original arc segment (an approximation of
the original geometry).
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
Working with ESRI ArcSDE Data | 499
■Bringing In Features from ArcSDE on page 274
■Styling Features on page 540
■Creating a Join on page 440
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Migrating Data on page 522
To work with ESRI ArcSDE data
■Add ArcSDE features to your map on page 274
■Style ArcSDE features on page 540
■Join ArcSDE data to a different feature on page 440
■Examine or edit attribute data on page 595
■View an ArcSDE schema on page 518
Working with WFS Data
An OGC Web Feature Service (WFS) provides access to geographic features
that are stored in an opaque data store on page 1747 in a client/server
environment. A client uses WFS to retrieve geospatial data that is encoded in
Geography Markup Language (GML) from a single or multiple WFS. The
communication between client and server is encoded in XML. If the WFS
response includes feature geometries, it is encoded in Geography Markup
Language (GML), which is specified in the OpenGIS Geographic Markup
Language Implementation Specification. WFS is a read-only provider.
What WFS Schemas Support
A WFS schema on page 1760 can support the following:
■Inheritance
■Multiple schemas
■Object properties
■Association properties
500 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■These geometry types: point, line string, polygon, multi-point, multi-line
string, multi-polygon, multi-geometry, curve string, curve polygon,
multi-curve string, multi-curve polygon, linear ring, line string segment,
circular arc segment, and ring
■Multi-geometry
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Bringing In Features from WFS on page 293
■Styling Features on page 540
■Creating a Join on page 440
To work with WFS data
■Add WFS features to your map on page 293
■Style WFS features on page 540
■Join data to a WFS feature on page 440
Working with Feature Sources
After you connect to a data store in AutoCAD Map 3D, that data store is a
feature source on page 1751 for the current map.
Overview of Working with Feature Sources
After you connect to a data store in AutoCAD Map 3D, that data store is a
feature source on page 1751 for the current map. Feature sources are listed by
provider (for example, all SDF feature sources are listed together in Data
Connect on page 1746).
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Overview of Bringing In GIS Features on page 266
Working with Feature Sources | 501
To set up a feature source on page 1751
1Set up database users for the feature source, if necessary. on page ?
2Do one of the following:
■Create a database datastore. on page 505
■Create an SDF or SHP data store. on page 506
NOTE You can also delete a data store. on page ?
Setting Up Database Users
You can use the FDO User Manager utility that comes with AutoCAD Map 3D
to set up database users for Oracle, SQL Server, and MySQL.
For an Oracle data store on page 1747, AutoCAD Map 3D separates the concept
of the Oracle user who owns the schema on page 1760 from the Oracle user who
accesses the schema.
When you create a new Oracle data store in AutoCAD Map 3D on page 504,
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically creates a new corresponding Oracle user who
is the owner of that data. For example, creating a data store called mycitydb
creates an Oracle user called mycitydb. However, you must also create separate
Oracle users for the purpose of accessing the data store. These Oracle users
match the end-users who will access the data. For example, if an end-user
named JSmith will be connecting to the new data store, you create an Oracle
user with that name and grant him access to the new data store. This allows
different users who access the same data to have different privileges.
To access data that resides in a relational database, AutoCAD Map 3D requires
that database users have certain privileges. Use FDO User Manager to add a
new user with the appropriate roles. FDO User Manager is a command-line
utility that lets you manage database users and accounts consistently across
database management systems.
When you create users for an Oracle instance with the FDO User Manager
tool, those users have the privileges that support data access operations for
that data store. If you access the data store as an Oracle user who was not
created using FDO User Manager, the Database Administrator must ensure
that the user has sufficient privileges to work with the data. If you use Oracle
Workspace Manager, you must use separate users to create the data store and
502 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
to access the data store, because locking is tracked by individual user and will
not be effective if everyone connects as the same data store user.
In FDO User Manager, you choose an FDO provider on page 1750 and connection
and then perform provider-specific tasks, including:
■Adding, dropping, or listing users
■Assigning, revoking, or listing roles and privileges
■Granting, revoking, or listing access to data stores
Note: Database users are not the same as AutoCAD Map 3D users, which are
managed separately on page 74.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights on page 74
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
To manage database users and accounts
1Start FDO User Manager.
By default, FDO User Manager is located in \Program Files\AutoCAD Map
3D\FDO\bin\. To start it, either double-click FdoUserManager.exe in
Windows Explorer or enter FdoUserManager at a command prompt. (To
invoke FdoUserManager from any prompt, add its directory to your path.)
2At the Choose a Provider menu, enter the digit that corresponds to your
FDO provider and press Enter.
3Enter each connection parameter when prompted and press Enter.
For example, enter the required service name and username/password.
For more information, contact your database administrator.
4After you are connected, follow the instructions on the screen.
If you are adding a user, enter the user name and password.
New users you create with this utility automatically have the roles and
privileges required by the AutoCAD Map 3D FDO functionality. However,
FDO User Manager allows you to grant some additional privileges. Use
commas to separate the role names, with no spaces. You can enter ? to
Setting Up Database Users | 503
see a list of roles. To verify the roles after you add them, select List All
Roles And Privileges Of A User.
5When you finish, enter 0 (a zero) to exit FDO User Manager.
Creating a Data Store
Features are stored in a data store on page 1747, which is a collection of feature
classes in a single data storage location. To add a feature to your map, you
connect to its data store and select each feature class on page 1750 to include.
The main reason to create a new data store is to migrate existing data on page
522 to the new FDO provider on page 1750, or to create new data in that provider
format.
You can create new data stores for database FDO providers (Microsoft SQL
Server, MySQL, or Oracle) and file-based FDO providers (SDF or SHP) from
within AutoCAD Map 3D if you have the necessary privileges for the target
database or directory. After you create a data store, you can define or import
a schema for it, which specifies the feature classes available in that data store
and their properties.
Before creating a database data store, make sure you have created a user for
the data store with the proper privileges on page 502.
To overwrite an existing data store, you must first delete the old one. For data
stores from database FDO providers, use DBMS-specific tools to drop existing
tables.
After you create a data store and define a schema on page 509 for it, AutoCAD
Map 3D users can create, store, and access on page 265 geospatial data in that
data store.
If you have DWG data that you want to move to a feature source on page 1751,
see Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page 530.
When you create a data store, you specify the minimum and maximum X
and Y spatial extents for new data store in the Create Data Store Dialog Box
on page 1476. This is especially important if you later use Bulk Copy on page
522 to move data to that data store. You must make sure that the data you are
moving are inside the extents of the destination data store. MySQL and Oracle
support expanding the extents automatically if incoming data are beyond the
scope of the extents.
504 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Setting Up Database Users on page 502
■Migrating Data on page 522
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page 530
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
Instructions for creating a data store are different for database data stores and
for file-based data stores.
■To create a data store for a database provider on page 505
■To create an SDF or SHP data store on page 506
To create a data store for a database provider
1On the Task Pane, click either the Map Explorer on page 1755 or Display
ManagerDisplay Manager on page 1748 tab.
2Click Data menu ➤ Connect To Data.
3In the Data Connections By Provider list in the Data Connect window,
select the appropriate choice (for example, Add Oracle Connection).
4In the right-hand pane, enter a connection name (the name you will call
this data store in AutoCAD Map 3D) and the information required to
connect to the data store, for example, a service name.
NOTE Do not use the same name you used when you created a user for the
data store on page 502.
5Log into the service for the store.
6In the Data Store list, select Add New Data Store (or type a name that
does not appear in the list already) and press Enter.
You are asked if you want to create a new data store. Click Yes.
7In the Create Data Store Dialog Box on page 1476 for this provider, enter
the settings for the new data store.
8Click OK.
Creating a Data Store | 505
If the data store is created successfully, you see a confirmation message
prompting you to edit its schema. Use the Schema Editor to create on
page 509 or import on page 517 the schema for the data store.
You are connected to the new data store automatically.
To create an SDF or SHP data store
1In Map Explorer, do one of the following:
■Click Schema ➤ Create SDF.
■Click Schema ➤ Create SHP.
2In the Create File dialog box, specify the path and file name of the data
store to create.
3Enter the coordinate system code for the new data store.
If you do not know the code, follow these steps to select a coordinate
system:
■Click
■In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category.
■Select from a list of available coordinate systems.
Select a coordinate system that both the provider and AutoCAD Map
3D support.
■Click Properties to view the properties of the selected coordinate
system.
■Click OK.
4Click OK.
You must define a schema for the new data store. A confirmation message
prompts you to use the Schema Editor to create on page 509 or import on
page 517 the schema for the data store.
The new data store is created when you click Apply in the Schema Editor.
You are connected to it automatically.
506 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Deleting a Feature Source
When you delete a feature source on page 1751, you remove all of its data and
stylization information from layers in the current map that reference its data
store. The data store on page 1747 itself is unaffected.
To delete a feature source, you must first disconnect from it.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Overview of Bringing In Data on page 253
To delete a feature source
1In Map Explorer, click Data ➤ Connect to Data.
2In the Data Connections By Provider list in the Data Connect window,
right-click the feature source on page 1751 to delete and click Disconnect.
Feature source entries display page icons. Each entry below a feature
source is a feature class within that feature source.
3Right-click the feature source again and click Delete.
Working with Schemas
Use the Schema Editor to work with schemas
Overview of Working with Schemas
Geospatial data is stored in a hierarchical fashion, like a set of tables: each
row within a table is an individual feature, and each column is a property on
page 1758 of that feature. The entire table (including its name, column names,
data types, default values, and constraints) represents a feature class on page
1750. The set of related tables is called a schema, and the entire collection of
data resides in a data store.
Deleting a Feature Source | 507
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Overview of Bringing In Data on page 253
Use this method...To do this...
In the Schema Editor, select Schemas in
the Schema tree. Click New Schema on
the Schema Editor toolbar.
See Creating a New Schema on page 509
Create a schema
In the Schema Editor, select Schemas in
the Schema tree. Click Import Schema on
the Schema Editor toolbar.
See Importing and Exporting a Schema on
page 517
Import a schema
In the Schema Editor, select Schemas in
the Schema tree. Click Export Schema on
the Schema Editor toolbar.
See Importing and Exporting a Schema on
page 517
Export a schema
In the Schema Editor, click any schema
on page 1760, feature class on page 1750,
or property on page 1758.
See Viewing a Schema on page 518
View a schema
In the Schema Editor, click any schema,
feature class, or property. Change any set-
tings.
See Editing a Schema on page 519
Edit a schema
In the Schema Editor, right-click any
schema, feature class, or property. Click
Delete.
See Deleting Schemas on page 521
Delete a schema
508 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Creating a New Schema
Use the Schema Editor to define a new schema on page 1760 in a new on page
504 or existing feature source on page 1751 for a database FDO provider on page
1750 (Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle) or for an SDF data store. You
cannot create a schema for an existing SHP feature source, but you can create
a new file-based data store on page 504 and create a new schema for it during
the creation process. You must use ESRI tools to create an ArcSDE schema—you
cannot use AutoCAD Map 3D to create a schema for ArcSDE.
Some FDO providers allow the client to override the default logical and physical
mapping specified in their schema. You can use the Schema Editor to override
classes, physical table names (to create a new table), Oracle tablespace names,
MySQL storage engines, table-type mapping (base or concrete), properties,
and column names when you define a new schema. You cannot map to an
existing table.
If you are mapping to an existing table or view in another data store on page
1747, make sure all column overrides correctly map to existing columns. If you
map to a table or view with a different owner, have the owner of that table
grant access to the FDO data store. You can create a local view that selects
from the other table, and map to the local view, but this may not be necessary.
The local view will be created automatically if it is not present when you apply
your changes.
If you are mapping to a table and column in the current data store that does
not yet exist, make sure the column name is valid for your database.
You must create schema elements hierarchically: create the schema first, then
its feature classes on page 1750, and then its properties.
For feature sources from some FDO providers, you can create multiple schemas
within the same feature source and change on page 519 the schemas after you
define and save them the first time.
You can view on page 518 a schema from any FDO provider, but you cannot
edit or delete it if there are existing features that use it.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor on page 511
■Importing and Exporting a Schema on page 517
Creating a New Schema | 509
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
To create a schema
1Connect on page 265 to the feature source in which you want to create
the schema on page 1760.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source on page 1751 in the connection
tree (at the top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor, expand the Schema tree and do one of the
following:
■To create a schema, select Schemas (the top-most node in the Schema
tree) and click New Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar.
■To create a feature class on page 1750, select the parent schema in the
Schema tree and click New Feature Class on the Schema Editor toolbar.
■To create a property on page 1758, select the parent feature class in the
Schema tree and click New Property on the Schema Editor toolbar.
4Specify the settings for the new schema element on page 1471 in the
right-hand pane.
See Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor on page 511 for
information on limiting the valid values for a property.
5Repeat the preceding two steps as needed to create other schema elements.
6Click Apply to apply your changes.
7Click OK when you finish.
510 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor
When you create a schema, you can limit the values that are valid for particular
properties. The types of constraints supported by AutoCAD Map 3D are
described in the following table.
Data Table BehaviorDescriptionType of Con-
straint
Any value outside the specified
range generates an error and you
must enter a different value.
Valid values must be
within the range spe-
cified. You can include or
Range
exclude the minimum
and maximum values. For
example, you can specify
1-10 inclusive, and then
1 and 10 are both valid.
You click a down-arrow to display
the list, and then choose one of the
items as a value for the property.
You supply the list entries
that are valid for the
property.
List
If you leave the property value
empty when you close the Data
The property’s value can-
not be empty.
Not null
Table, an error message prompts
you to enter a value.
If you enter a value that is used by
any other feature in this feature
The property’s value must
be unique within the fea-
Unique
class, an error message prompts youture class. If you define
to change it. You will not see thethe property as an auto-
error message until you check in the
feature.
If the table has two columns that
together must be unique (like
generated field, or if it is
defined in the data store
as a key field, it will have
this constraint.
"Lastname" and "Firstname"), a
message appears on each column
involved in the paired uniqueness
constraint.
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor | 511
When you edit the properties on page 595 in the Data Table, you can enter
only the values allowed by the constraint. For example, for a Roads feature,
you can specify that the values for the Number_Of_Lanes property be within
the range 1 through 8. If you enter 9 lanes, you will receive an error message.
You will see an error message as soon as you enter the invalid value. When
you check the feature in, your edits are validated again against the data store
and you may be notified of further errors, depending on the data provider’s
capabilities.
You cannot edit a schema to convert an existing field to use a different
constraint type if the table already contains data. The table must be empty.
Not every data provider supports all constraints. The following table shows
supported constraints by provider.
UniqueNot NullListRangeProvider
YesYesYesYesOracle
YesYesYesYesSQL Server
YesYesNoNoMySQL
NoYesYesYesSDF
YesYesNoNoArcSDE
NoYesNoNoSHP
The Schema Editor checks the provider capability and allows only the
constraints supported by that provider.
A property that uses constraints can have any data type, except for Boolean
(which can have not-null constraints only). You cannot constrain properties
with BLOB or CLOB data types.
To create a constrained property
1In the Schema Editor, expand the Schema tree and select the property to
constrain.
2Ensure that the data type for the property will allow the constraint you
want.
512 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
For example, Boolean properties can have not-null constraints only.
3Do one of the following:
■To specify a range for the property, set Constraint Type to Range and
specify the range values.
In the Constraint Type field, click the down-arrow and click Range.
Enter a minimum and maximum value for the range and, for each
one, specify whether the range is inclusive or exclusive of that value.
For example, if the range is 1-10, specify whether 1 and 10 are included
or not.
■To specify a list of possible values, set Constraint Type to List and
specify the list values.
In the Constraint Type field, click the down-arrow and click List. Click
Value List and click . Type the list, pressing Enter after each
item.
If the data type for this property is String , specify the maximum
length of the string before entering values in the list.
If the data type for this property is Decimal , define the precision and
scale before entering values in the list. If you enter values in the list
that exceed the precision or scale, those values will be rounded.
If the data type for this property is DateTime, the list editor displays
a calendar from which you can select specific dates. Once you choose
the first date, the list creates a new entry and you can choose the next
date.
When you click OK, AutoCAD Map 3D will check the values in the
list. If the values are not valid, for example, if they do not match the
data type or they exceed the length of the string definition, you will
see an error message.
■To ensure that the property is not allowed to have an empty value,
set Nullable to False.
In the Nullable field, click the down-arrow and click True or False. If
you set Nullable to False, you can enter a Default Value to ensure that
new features have an entry for this property.
4To specify a “uniqueness” constraint, select the appropriate feature class
in the tree on the left.
You can specify a single-property uniqueness constraint or a
composite-property uniqueness constraint. A single-property uniqueness
constraint ensures that the value for that property is unique within the
Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor | 513
feature class. A composite-property uniqueness constraint (sometimes
called a “paired constraint”) specifies multiple properties whose combined
values are unique. For example, you can constrain the combined
Street_Number, Street_Name, and City fields to uniquely identify a
building address.
■Click New (under Specify Constraints (And The Order).
■Select the boxes for the properties that must have unique values.
The properties designated as unique appear in the list at the bottom
of the dialog box.
■If desired, use the up and down arrows for the list to change the order
of the properties.
5Click Apply.
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema
A database view is a virtual or logical table composed of the result set of a
query. Unlike ordinary tables in a relational database, a view is not part of the
physical schema. It is a dynamic, virtual table computed from data in the
database. Changing the data in a table alters the data shown in the view.
Views can provide advantages over tables:
■You can use a view to make a subset of data available to certain users.
■A view can join and simplify multiple tables into a single virtual table.
■Views can aggregate data (using a sum, average, or other function) to
calculate and present data.
Mapping Existing Views to Feature Classes
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically displays as classes existing database views
that are defined in their native databases. If the view includes geometry, it
will be displayed as a feature class. The following restrictions apply:
■You cannot create or modify the view definition within AutoCAD Map
3D.
■In the Data Table, you can edit data in views only if you have permissions
to do so and only if the data store supports editing of view-based data.
514 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■The ability to insert, update, and delete data in the view depends on how
the view is defined in its native data store.
■For existing Oracle schemas, geometry that is included in a view needs a
separate entry in the user_sdo_geom_metadata table. This allows AutoCAD
Map 3D to determine the correct spatial context to use when for that view
when displaying it as a feature class.
If you plan to use a database view with AutoCAD Map 3D, keep the following
points in mind:
■Your native view must contain a primary key.
■Your native view must use a spatial index.
In the Schema Editor, the columns defined for the view appear as properties,
but you cannot edit them. However, you can use the Schema Editor to create
feature classes and properties that mimic database views.
For example, although you have an Oracle table, Rivers, with twenty properties,
you may want certain people to see only six of those properties. You can use
the Schema Editor to create a new feature class based on the existing Rivers
table, and add the six properties you want to expose.
Schema Editor allows mapping directly into the physical database objects
(tables or views).
Accessing Views from Native Schema
In addition to mapping feature classes to existing views in a FDO-enabled
datastore, you can “reverse-engineer” views in native, existing,
non-FDO-enabled datastores into feature classes.
To do this, the following must be true:
■The primary key or unique index columns must be exposed in the view.
If the view contains a join, columns that identify each row uniquely must
also be exposed.
If a class has no primary key, you can still expose it in AutoCAD Map 3D,
but it will be read-only.
■For Oracle data stores, if there is geometry in the view, there must be an
entry in user_sdo_geom_metadata for that geometry. This will provide the
spatial context and coordinate system information.
Exposing a Native Database View in a Schema | 515
■For Oracle non-simple views, you can specify which columns to use for a
primary key for the resulting feature class. Provide this information with
the view, as shown in this example:
alter view <viewname> add constraint <constraintname> primary key
(columnnames) disable novalidate;
NOTE This procedure is needed only for FDO on page 1750-enabled schemas. For
existing schema data stores, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically displays the view as
a feature class, with no further action on your part.
To create a feature class that maps to a database view
1Create an FDO-enabled data store.
You can use the Schema Editor to do this. See Creating a New Schema
on page 509
2Create a database view using the native tools for your database.
For Oracle, use sqlplus. For SQL Server, use sqlcmd. For MySQL, use
mysql.
3Reconnect to the data store in AutoCAD Map 3D.
4In the Schema Editor, select the target schema Name and click New
Feature Class.
For information about creating feature classes and properties, see Editing
a Schema on page 519.
5If the Logical Feature Class tab is displayed, click the Physical
Configurations tab.
6For Table Name type the name of the view you created in step 1. Click
OK.
7Switch back to the Logical Feature Class tab and type the name, class
type, and other required information.
8Click New Property to add a property.
9Switch to the Physical Configuration tab.
10 Type the name of the view column (from the view you created in step 1)
to map to the new property. Click OK.
11 Switch back to the Logical Property tab and set the property attributes.
516 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Attributes such as data type, length, scale, precision, nullability,
uniqueness, and other constraints must match the corresponding column
attributes. For example, you cannot create a property that has the string
data type and map it to a column that uses the number data type.
12 Repeat steps 8 through 11 to create the remaining properties.
13 Be sure to fill in the Primary Key column for the new view record before
you check it in (if it is not defined to be auto-generated).
Importing and Exporting a Schema
You can export a schema on page 1760 as an XML file to do any of the following:
■Share a schema you created in the Schema Editor with other AutoCAD
Map 3D or GIS-software users.
■Back up a schema you created in the Schema Editor as an XML file.
■Save your work in progress if the original data source or directory becomes
unavailable.
You can import an XML schema that you exported, and use it to define a new
schema for another data store. This is useful for creating multiple data stores
based on the same schema.
The AutoCAD Map 3D XML schema format is a subset of the Geography
Markup Language (GML). For information about GML, go to
http://www.opengis.net/gml. GML was standardized by the Open Geospatial
Consortium (OGC). For information about OGC, go to
http://www.opengeospatial.org. You can also consult the Autodesk FDO API
Developer’s Guide and The Essential FDO.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
Importing and Exporting a Schema | 517
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
To import an XML or XMI schema
1Connect to the feature source into which you want to import the schema.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor, select Schemas (the top-most node in the Schema
tree) and click Import Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar.
4In the Open dialog box, choose the file format for the file you are
importing (XML or XMI), navigate to the file you want, and then click
Open.
The Schema tree displays the imported schema.
5Click Apply to make the changes permanent.
To export an XML schema
1Connect to the feature source whose schema you want to export.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor, select Schemas (the top-most node in the Schema
tree) and click Export Schema on the Schema Editor toolbar.
4In the Save dialog box, navigate to the desired directory and enter a name
for the file.
5Click Save.
Viewing a Schema
You can inspect a schema on page 1760 for any feature source on page 1751,
including those of FDO providers on page 1750 that don't support updateable
schemas. When you open an updateable schema, you can edit on page 519 it.
If you change an updateable schema mistakenly, click Cancel to undo on page
522 the changes. Providers that support updateable schemas include Microsoft
SQL Server, MySQL, SDF, and Oracle.
When you open a non-updateable schema, you cannot edit it.
518 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Importing and Exporting a Schema on page 517
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
To view a schema
1Connect to the feature source whose schema you want to view.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor, expand the Schema tree and then click any schema,
feature class, or property to view its settings in the right-hand pane.
4When you finish inspecting the schema, click Cancel to close the Schema
Editor.
Editing a Schema
You can edit a schema on page 1760, feature class on page 1750, or property on page
1758 if the FDO provider on page 1750 supports updateable schemas (for example,
Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, Oracle, and SDF all support updateable schemas).
If you open a non-updateable schema in the Schema Editor, you can view on
page 518 its settings, but you cannot change them.
You cannot edit or delete any schema, feature class, or property if there are
existing features that use it.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
Editing a Schema | 519
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor on page 511
■Importing and Exporting a Schema on page 517
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
To edit a schema
1Connect to the featue source whose schema you want to edit.
2In Map Explorer, select the feature source in the connection tree (at the
top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor, expand the Schema tree and click the schema,
feature class, or property to edit.
The current settings appear in the right-hand pane.
4Edit the settings for the schema element. on page 1471
The settings you can change depend on what the provider supports and
which settings are editable. For example, the long transaction on page 1754
section does not appear or is unavailable if the provider does not support
versioning.
5To add a new feature class, select the schema entry on the right and click
New Feature Class at the top of the window. Specify the information for
the new feature class on the left side of the window.
6To add a new property, select the feature class entry for that property on
the right and click New Property at the top of the window. Specify the
information for the property on the left side of the window.
See Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor on page 511 for
information on limiting the valid values for a property.
7For a feature class and property, click the Physical Configurations tab
and edit the physical settings if necessary.
Each provider maps a correspondence between a schema element and a
physical object in a feature source. The physical structure of feature sources
varies by provider, as do the types of schema mappings and default
settings. Oracle, for example, maps each feature class onto a table in the
Oracle database where the feature source resides, giving the class and
table the same name. You can override these defaults by changing the
settings on the Physical Configurations tab. The settings on this tab vary
520 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
by provider. The tab is unavailable for providers whose defaults cannot
be changed.
8Click Apply.
9Repeat the preceding four steps as needed to edit other schema elements.
10 Click OK to make all the changes permanent.
Deleting Schemas
When you delete a schema on page 1760, feature class on page 1750, or property
on page 1758 in the Schema Editor, its icon disappears from the Schema tree,
along with the icons of its child elements (if any). However, the changes are
not transferred to the underlying feature source on page 1751 until you apply
them. If you delete a feature class, for example, neither the class nor its
properties appear in the Schema tree, but its table remains in the feature source
until you click Apply. You can undo on page 522 changes until you click Apply.
NOTE You cannot delete a schema, feature class, or property if feature data exist
for that item.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Importing and Exporting a Schema on page 517
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
To delete schema elements
1Connect to the feature source containing the schema elements to delete.
2In Map Explorer, right-click the desired connection in the connection
tree and select Edit Schema.
3In the Schema Editor, expand the Schema tree to see its feature classes
and properties.
Deleting Schemas | 521
4Right-click the schema, feature class, or property to delete, and click
Delete for that schema element.
5When prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The Schema tree updates to show the deletion.
6Repeat the preceding two steps as needed to delete other schema elements.
7Click OK to make all the deletions permanent.
Undoing Schema Changes
When you make changes in the Schema Editor, the Schema tree and right-hand
pane reflect your changes. However, the changes are not applied to the
underlying feature source until you click Apply. If you click Cancel before you
click Apply, all changes you made since the last Apply are canceled.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Creating a New Schema on page 509
■Importing and Exporting a Schema on page 517
■Viewing a Schema on page 518
■Editing a Schema on page 519
■Deleting Schemas on page 521
To discard all Schema Editor changes since the last Apply
■In the Schema Editor, click Cancel.
Migrating Data
Use Bulk Copy to copy data from one feature source on page 1751 to another,
either in the same format or in a different one.
522 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Overview of Migrating Data
You can use Bulk Copy to copy data from one feature source on page 1751 to
another, either in the same format or in a different one.
You can move DWG objects and their attributes to a variety of geospatial
formats and, in some cases, move the data back into AutoCAD drawings.
See also:
■Overview of Geospatial Data on page 479
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
Use this method...To move data...
Click File menu ➤ Export As SDF
See Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page
530.
From DWG format to SDF
Click File menu ➤ Export As SDF2
See Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format
on page 1175.
From DWG format to SDF 2 (an earlier
version of SDF)
In the Display Manager, right-click a layer
➤ Export Layer Data to SDF.
See Saving or Exporting a Display Manager
Layer on page 1210.
From a Display Manager layer to SDF
In Map Explorer, click Tools ➤ Bulk Copy.
See Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) on
page 523.
From one geospatial format to another
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy)
You can use Bulk Copy to copy data from one feature source on page 1751 to
another, either in the same format or in a different one.
If you are moving data from DWG format to any other format, you cannot
use Bulk Copy. Instead, see Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page 530.
Overview of Migrating Data | 523
If you are moving geospatial data into SDF format, it may be easier to save or
export its Display Manager layer to SDF, without going through Bulk Copy.
See Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on page 1210.
Using Bulk Copy, you can copy the complete feature source on page 1751 or a
subset based on a specified schema on page 1760, feature class on page 1750, or
property on page 1758. Use Bulk Copy to do the following:
■Make your own copy of data owned by another department.
■Upgrade from file-based (SDF or SHP) data storage to multi-user database
storage (Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, or Oracle), which provides advanced
features, such as versioning on page 1765 and long transaction on page 1754.
■Transform coordinate systems easily.
■Convert a foreign schema to a native format.
When using Bulk Copy, keep the following points in mind:
■The copied schema is created if it does not exist in the destination feature
source.
■The names of schemas, feature classes on page 1750, and properties in the
source feature source do not need to match the names in the destination
feature source.
■You can save or load an XML mapping file to set up the mapping between
the source and destination feature sources.
■You can copy geometry with no transformation of the coordinates.
■You must make sure that the data you are moving are inside the extents
of the destination data store. (When you create a data store on page 504,
you specify the minimum and maximum X and Y spatial extents for the
new data store.) MySQL and Oracle support expanding the extents
automatically if incoming data are beyond the scope of the extents.
■If you don’t have adequate rights to the target data store, you must either
create a new, empty data store as the target or ask your administrator to
grant you the rights required to insert data in the target tables.
See also:
■Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types on page 526
■Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy on page 528
524 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information on page 529
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page 530
■Creating a Data Store on page 504
■Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on page 1210
To copy data from one feature source to another
1Connect to the source and destination feature source on page 1751.
NOTE To copy data to a new SHP data store, create a folder for the new SHP
files and connect to that folder. Do not create the SHP files themselves.
2In Map Explorer, click Tools ➤ Bulk Copy.
3Under From, select a feature source in the Connection Name list. This is
the source, from which the data will be copied.
You can also drag the originating feature source onto the target source
in the Data Connect dialog box to initiate a Bulk Copy. The item you
drag becomes the From entry and the item you drop it on becomes the
To entry.
4If the selected feature source supports versioning, select a version in its
Version list.
5Under To, select the destination feature source in the top list.
6If the destination feature source supports versioning, select a version in
its Version list.
The schema trees in Bulk Copy update automatically as you make your
choices.
7Under Select items to copy, check the boxes for the individual schemas,
features classes, and properties to copy to the destination feature source.
Selecting any schema element automatically selects all its child elements
(for example, selecting a feature class also selects all its properties). A
square (instead of a check) in a check box means that some of that
element’s children are not selected.
In the right-hand tree, AutoCAD Map 3D displays a default name for the
item. Select the default name and enter a different one if you want.
Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) | 525
8Check the error types to ignore during processing. For any error types
whose boxes are not checked, Bulk Copy stops processing and reports
errors when they occur.
For information about these options, see Bulk Copy on page 1474.
9To save the current settings in an XML mapping file, click Save under
Schema Mapping. Click Load to open a saved mapping file.
NOTE Before loading a mapping file, connect to the source and destination
feature sources.
10 To begin the Bulk Copy operation, click Copy Now.
The data for the specified schema elements is copied from the source
feature source to the destination feature source.
Bulk Copy displays the progress of the operation. If you click Cancel
during the operation, the copying process will stop but the data will not
return to its original state. There is no way to roll back the data from
within AutoCAD Map 3D once the process is initiated.
When the operation is complete, Bulk Copy reports the results. Click
View Log in the Bulk Copy Results dialog box to see details on page 529.
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types
During copying, Bulk Copy retains the same data type when possible but will
perform a conversion if needed. For example, if you are copying data from a
source that uses a Boolean data type and that data type is not available in the
target, Bulk Copy converts the data to byte values, if available. If byte is not
available, Int16 is used, and so on. The following table illustrates how
conversion is performed (for each source data type, Bulk Copy tries to create
target data type 1, but if that is not possible it tries data type 2, and so on):
Target data
type 4
Target data
type 3
Target data
type 2
Target data
type 1
Source data
type
Int64Int32Int16ByteBoolean
Int64Int32Int16Byte
Int64Int32Int16
526 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
Target data
type 4
Target data
type 3
Target data
type 2
Target data
type 1
Source data
type
Int64Int32
Int32Int64
SingleDoubleDecimal
DecimalDoubleSingle
SingleDecimalDouble
The following FDO providers on page 1750 support the following data types:
SQL Serv-
er
WFSSHPSDFODBCMySQLArc-
SDE
Oracle
YYYYYYYBoolean
YYYYYYByte
YYYYYYYYDate/Time
YYYYYYYInt16
YYYYYYYYInt32
YYYYYYInt64
YYYYYYYDecimal
YYYYYYYSingle
YYYYYYYDouble
YYYYYYYYString
Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types | 527
Bulk Copy copies geometry properties as is, except that it will convert an arc
to line segments if the destination does not support arcs.
Bulk Copy uses the following rules when copying an auto-generated identifier
from the source feature source on page 1751:
■If the identifier exists in the destination schema on page 1760 and is not
auto-generated, the identifier is copied from the source feature source.
■If the identifier exists in the destination schema and is auto-generated, the
identifier is generated by the destination provider.
■If the identifier does not exist in the destination schema and the destination
schema does not support auto-generated identifiers, the schema is created
with a non-auto-generated identifier and the identifier is copied from the
source feature source.
■If the identifier does not exist in the destination schema and the destination
schema supports auto-generated identifiers, the schema is created with an
auto-generated identifier and the identifier is generated by the destination
provider.
See also:
■Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) on page 523
■Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information on page 529
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page 530
To copy data from one feature source to another on page ?
Fixing Geometry Issues After a Bulk Copy
For foreign schemas, the Bulk Copy operation uses the first geometry it finds
to create the geometry in the target data store. If there are multiple spatial
indexes for the geometry properties in the original data store, the geometry
property in the resulting data store’s schema will be different from the order
in the original data store. As a result, the geometry in the new data store may
not match the geometry in the source.
You can fix this problem in the original data store or in the resulting data
store. If you fix the problem in the resulting data store, you modify the
schema’s XML file and import the modified version into the data store.
528 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem in the original data store
■Remove the unwanted spatial indexes from the geometric properties in
the original data store.
If only one geometric property is indexed, it will be chosen as the main
geometry for the feature class.
To fix a Bulk Copy geometry problem in the resulting data store
1Connect to the new data store before you perform the Bulk Copy
operation.
2Using the Schema Editor on page 519, save the source data store to an
XML file on page 518.
3Edit the XML file and add the following to the <xs:complexType> entry
for the feature class in question, where {geom_prop_name} is the name of
the geometric property to use:
fdo:geometryName="{geom_prop_name}"
4Import the modified XML file on page 518 into the target data store and
apply the changes.
5Bulk Copy the data from the source to the target data store, making sure
to properly map the geometry properties before executing the Bulk Copy.
Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information
When you perform a Bulk Copy operation, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a log
file that displays information about the source and target of the Bulk Copy
operation. It lists any schemas on page 1760 you created, information about
feature classes on page 1750, the number of objects that were copied, and how
much time the operation took. Here is an example:
“Source ConnectionProperty: 'File', Value: 'C:\San
Francisco\County\SDF\bayarea_county.sdf'
Property: 'ReadOnly', Value: 'false'Target ConnectionProperty: 'File',
Value: 'C:\old_version.sdf'
Property: 'ReadOnly', Value: 'false'Creating schema 'My_Schema'
Property My_Schema:bayarea_county.COUNTY: String length is 0, setting
to 255
Reviewing the Bulk Copy Log Information | 529
Property My_Schema:bayarea_county.FIPSSTCO: String length is 0,
setting to 255
Inserting class 'My_Schema:bayarea_county'
9 objects inserted
Elapsed Time: 0.000110 seconds
Total: 9 objects inserted”
See also:
■Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) on page 523
■Understanding How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types on page 526
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page 530
To view the Bulk Copy log
1Run the Bulk Copy operation. on page 522
2Click View Log in the Bulk Copy Results dialog box to see the log file.
NOTE The Bulk Copy operation stores its log files under %temp%, using the naming
convention bulkcopyxxxxx.log, where the x characters are replaced by numbers.
Migrating DWG Data to GIS
You can move DWG objects and their attributes to a variety of geospatial
formats and, in some cases, move the data back into AutoCAD drawings.
NOTE When you export AutoCAD drawing data from AutoCAD Map 3D to a
geospatial data store, attributes remain with the geometry data but any visual
stylization you applied is lost, due to the different ways that the two environments
deal with stylization.
You can do the following:
■Export DWG data to the file-based SDF format on page 323
■Export DWG data to Oracle on page 1203
■Export the current map to DWG format on page 1202
530 | Chapter 4 Managing Data
■Perform a round-trip data migration on page 1207 from DWG to SDF or
Oracle and back again.
To move DWG data to a geospatial format
1Decide whether you will move the data to an existing data store, or create
a new data store for it.
2Decide whether you will use an existing schema or a new schema for the
data.
3Query the data from the DWG into your map. on page 300
4Export the data to SDF on page 1175, or to an FDO data store (Oracle or
ESRI ArcSDE) on page 1204.
5After the drawing data has been moved to a GIS format, add new data to
it on page 578 by right-clicking one of its feature class layers and creating
a new feature.
Migrating DWG Data to GIS | 531
532
Visualization and Styling
Overview of Visualization and Styling
The methods for styling features and drawing objects are different.
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
Use the Display Manager to
style features and drawing ob-
Show or hide the Display Manager
on page ?
Show or hide the Display Man-
ager on page ?
jects in your maps, and to adjust
the draw order.
A layer is a set of objects. When
you add objects to your map,
Create a feature layer on page ?.Create a drawing layer on page
?.
you add them to a Display
Manager layer. Each layer can
have its own style.
Add a subset of objects from a
drawing or feature source to a
Display Manager layer.
Use the Add To Map With Query
option to filter the data from the
feature source on page ?.
Query the current drawing on
page ? or attached drawings
on page ? to bring in objects
that match certain criteria.
Change color, linetype, linetype
scale, lineweight, or plotstyle.
Create a feature style. on page 541Create a drawing style on page
557.
You can choose the symbol
used to represent point objects.
For drawing objects, add hatch,
5
533
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
text, or annotation. For features,
add labels.
A theme varies the style based
on data associated with the ob-
ject.
Create a feature theme on page
958.
Create a drawing theme on page
970.
Use scale thresholds or ranges
to change the style as you zoom
Use scale ranges. on page 543Use scale thresholds. on page ?
in or out, for example, to turn
text off as you zoom out.
Specify a symbol style for a
point drawing layer. Use the
Style a point layer. on page ?Style points on page 557.
Point Style area of the Style Edit-
or to create a style for a point
feature layer.
Specify an entity style for a line
drawing layer. Use the Line Style
Style a line layer. on page ?Style lines. on page 557
area of the Style Editor to create
a style for a line feature layer.
Specify an entity or hatch style
for a polygon drawing layer. Use
Style areas or polygons. on page
?
Style polygons. on page 557
the Area Style area of the Style
Editor to create a style for a
polygon feature layer.
Layers are drawn from the bot-
tom up. Objects in the layer at
Change the display order of layers
on page ?.
Change the display order of lay-
ers on page ?.
the top of the Display Manager
are drawn last and appear on
top of other objects. If an object
is a member of more than one
layer, it is drawn based on the
highest layer to which it be-
longs. The Draw Order view
534 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
takes precedence over the order
in the Layers By Group view.
If a layer is turned off, objects
from that layer are hidden.
Hide layers or styles on page ?.Hide layers or styles on page ?.
When a style is turned off,
drawing objects are displayed
without styles.
The legend lists the styles used
in the map.
Add a legend. on page ?Add a legend. on page ?
See also:
■Overview of Creating and Editing Data on page 573
■Overview of the Display Manager on page 535
■Styling Features on page 540
■Styling Drawing Layers on page 549
■Styling Raster Images on page 567
Controlling the Display of Your Map
Use the Display Manager on page 1748 to determine which layers appear in your
map and the order of those layers. Use the scale control to set your current
stylization scale.
Overview of the Display Manager
The Display Manager on page 1748 displays styles for feature layers and drawing
object layers. The styles you create for the map do not affect the actual objects
in your map or in their original sources.
Drawing object layers are listed in italic text. Different operations are available
for feature and drawing layers. Right-click a layer to see the available
commands.
Controlling the Display of Your Map | 535
In addition to styling features and drawing objects, you can use the Display
Manager to change the display order and assign different styles to different
views based on scale.
Although Display Manager updates data automatically, you can update it
manually if things get out of synch. You can update the entire map or an
individual layer to reread attribute data, reevaluate expressions for styles and
themes, and requery layers. You may sometimes need to refresh the items in
the Display Manager. This operation does not affect the drawing.
Use the Display Manager to apply styles to features and drawing objects.
See also:
■Setting Task Pane Options on page 199
■To display the Display Manager on page 537
■To update the map or a single layer on page 537
■To refresh the Display Manager on page 537
536 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
To display the Display Manager
1Click View menu ➤ Task Pane.
2In the Task Pane, click Display Manager.
To update the map or a single layer
1Right-click the Display Manager or an individual layer.
2Click Update.
To refresh the Display Manager
■On the command line, enter mapwsrefresh.
Controlling Display Order
Layers in the map are displayed in the order they are displayed in the Display
Manager on page 1748 draw order view; layers higher in the list are drawn in
front of layers lower down.
You can change the display order by moving layers up or down in the list.
For example, to display drawing objects in front of a raster image, put the
raster layer at the bottom of the list.
See also:
■Organizing Layers in Your Map on page 261
Controlling Display Order | 537
■To change the order of layers on page 538
■To hide or show layers on page 538
■To hide or show styles on page 538
To change the order of layers
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click the layer to move.
NOTE You use the Draw Order view to change the display order. The Draw
Order view is useful for defining a display order that is different from the way
you organize layers in the Display Manager or in the legend. To change views,
in the Display Manager, click Groups ➤ Draw Order. Once you adjust the
Draw Order view, the Layers by Group view has no impact on Draw Order.
2Drag the layer up or down in the list.
Drawing objects from layers higher in the list are drawn on top of drawing
objects from layers lower in the list.
To hide or show layers
■In Display Manager on page 1748, select or clear the check box next to the
layer name.
To hide or show styles
■In Display Manager on page 1748, select or clear the check box next to the
style name.
Setting Map Scale
The scale control indicates and sets your current stylization scale. The list
includes all the scale ranges (for feature data) and thresholds (for drawing
data) defined in the current map. If you link scale to zoom by closing the lock
icon, styles update appropriately as you adjust the zoom, and zoom updates
when you select a scale. If you use the custom scale box, the correct style is
applied based on where the custom value lands within the scale ranges and
thresholds.
538 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
See also:
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
To set the map scale
1To link style to scale, close the lock icon on the Status Bar.
2On the Status Bar, select a scale from the list or
click Custom and enter a value in the Scale box.
Creating Multiple Display Maps
Each map file can contain multiple display maps. Each one has its own set of
layers, which are styled independently. For example, you can connect to a
data store that contains parcels and then create one display map that themes
the parcels by area and another that themes them by population.
If you use the same data store for multiple display maps, you connect to that
data store only once, but you add it to each display map separately. You can
copy a layer from one map to another and then change its styling.
NOTE If your map file contains data on its base layer, that data will appear on all
display maps you create in that file. You can clear the check box for the base layer
to hide its data.
All display maps in a map file use the same coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager on page 535
To create multiple display maps
1Connect on page 253 to the data stores to include in the various maps.
You can attach drawings and connect to geospatial feature sources.
2Create a new display map in the Display Manager by clicking Data ➤
New Map.
Creating Multiple Display Maps | 539
3Type a name for the new map in the Current Map box at the top of the
Display Manager.
4To copy a layer from another display map, follow these steps:
■Switch to the display map containing the layer you want by choosing
its name in the Current Map box.
■Right-click the layer and click Copy.
■Switch to the target display map.
■Right-click a blank area in the Display Manager and choose Paste.
5Style on page 533 each layer in the new display map.
Styling Features
■To create a map with styled feature layers on page 541
■To define scale ranges on page 544
■To apply styles to points on page 545
■To apply styles to lines on page 546
■To apply styles to areas on page 548
■To load a LAYER file on page 549
Overview of Styling Features
Styles control how features appear on a map. Default styles are applied to
features. When you add point and polygon features to the map, they appear
with default symbol, line, and fill styles. Polylines are given a default line
style. Each layer is given a distinctive color. For example, polygons are filled
with a color that is different from other polygon layers that are already in the
map. Change the default styles as needed.
For example, you can specify the scale ranges at which a feature is visible, set
line color, and add labels. To specify styles for a layer, you define a style for
a scale range. 0 - Infinity is the default scale range. Add narrower scale ranges
as you define styles to define how the data should appear at various scales.
For example, you could create one scale range that displays roads with thick
lines when you zoom in, and create a second scale range that displays roads
with thin lines when you zoom out.
540 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
You can also create a theme that displays data in varying styles to indicate
different values.
NOTE Instructions in this section are for geospatial features. If you are styling a
drawing layer, see Styling Drawing Layers on page 549.
See also:
■Creating Multiple Display Maps on page 539
■Setting Map Scale on page 538
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
■Styling Point Features on page 544
■Styling Line Features on page 546
■Styling Area Features on page 547
■Creating Themes on page 953
To create a map with styled feature layers
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ New Map.
2In the Current Map box, enter a name for the new display map.
3Assign a coordinate system on page 137 to the map.
4Connect on page ? to the features you want and add them to the current
display map. Attach drawings and query in on page ? the drawing objects
you want.
5Define the scale ranges. on page 543
6Click a layer in Display Manager and click Style.
7Specify a point on page 544, line on page 546, or polygon on page 547 style
or define a theme.
8Optionally:
■Change the display order on page ? of layers. Layers at the top of
the list appear on top of other layers.
Overview of Styling Features | 541
■Create a legend on page ?.
DescriptionUse this method...To do this...
Use the Display Manager to
style features and drawing ob-
Click View menu ➤ Task Pane.
In the Task Pane, click Display
Manager.
Show or hide the Display Man-
ager
jects in your maps, and to adjust
the draw order.
When you connect to a feature
from your map, you add the
Add a feature to the map using
Data Connect. on page ?
Create a feature layer.
objects in that feature to a Dis-
play Manager layer. Each layer
can have its own style.
Add a subset of objects from a
feature source to a Display
Manager layer.
Use the Add To Map With Query
option to filter the data from the
feature source on page ?.
Include only objects that match
certain criteria.
Options vary, depending on
whether you are styling points,
lines, or polygons.
Use the Style Editor on page 541.Create a style.
A theme varies the style based
on data associated with the ob-
ject.
Use the Style Editor on page 958.Create a theme.
You can define multiple styles
and assign each one to a differ-
ent scale range.
Use scale ranges. on page 543Change the style as you zoom in
or out.
For each feature, the property
you assign for the style appears
at the scale ranges you specify.
Include labels as part of a style and
assign a property for the labels. on
page ?
Label individual features.
Layers are drawn from the bot-
tom up. Objects in the layer at
Use Display Manager to change
the Draw Order on page ?.
Change the display order of lay-
ers.
the top of the Display Manager
542 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
DescriptionUse this method...To do this...
are drawn last and appear on
top of other objects.
If a layer is hidden, objects from
that layer are hidden. When a
Check the boxes in the Display
Manager for the layers or styles to
show on page ?.
Hide layers or styles.
style is hidden, drawing objects
are displayed without styles.
The legend lists the styles used
in the map.
Use the Display Manager to in-
clude and style the legend. on
page ?
Add a legend.
Defining Scale Ranges
The first step in creating styles is to define your scale ranges.
A scale range specifies the zoom level at which a particular style is applied to
the display of your features. When the zoom level of the map is within the
specified scale range, AutoCAD Map 3D redraws the features using the style
associated with the scale range.
The style is applied when the zoom level is greater than or equal to the From
value and less than the To value. When setting up adjacent scale ranges, use
the same To value as the next range's From value. For example, if one range
is 0 - 20,000 set the next range to 20,000 - 40,000.
NOTE When setting up multiple scale ranges for a map, make sure that they do
not overlap. For example, the ranges 500,000 - 5,000,000 and 2,000,000 -
10,000,000 overlap. In such cases, when the zoom level is within the overlapping
scale range, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the features using the style of the first scale
range listed.
See also:
■Setting Map Scale on page 538
■Overview of Visualization and Styling on page 533
Defining Scale Ranges | 543
To define scale ranges
1In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a feature layer.
2Click Edit Style to display the Style Editor.
3In the Style Editor, in the Scale Ranges area, under From, enter the lower
end of the scale range. Under To, enter the upper end of the scale range.
For example, to make a style visible when the map is zoomed anywhere
between 1:250,000 and 1:5,000,000, enter 250000 for From and enter
5000000 for To.
4To add a new scale range, click Add A Scale Range.
5Specify From and To values.
6When working with scale ranges:
■To copy a scale range, select the range and click Duplicate.
■To delete a scale range, select the range and click Delete.
■To change the position of a scale in the list, select the range and click
Move Up or Move Down.
Quick Reference
Update Display Manager
Refreshes the current display
Right-click the Display Manager. Click UpdateTask Pane
Styling Point Features
Use symbols to represent and display point features.
If precise placement of labels is important, you can display labels instead of
symbols at feature point locations. You can also specify whether other labels
on other layers should obscure symbols on this layer.
See also:
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
544 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
■Adding Labels to Features on page 900
■Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations on page 903
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points on page 903
To apply styles to points
1In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a feature layer that contains
points.
2Click Edit Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
4In the Point Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5In the Style Point dialog box, select the Style A Point Symbol check box.
6For Symbol, click .
7In the Select A Symbol dialog box, specify a symbol library and a symbol.
Click OK.
NOTE When creating a block for use as a symbol the Edge color applies to
any entities that are defined as ByBlock. The Fill color applies to any entities
that are defined as ByLayer.
8For Size Context, specify the type of units:
■Select Device Space to specify symbol widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
■Select Map Space to specify symbol widths and heights in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
9For Units, select the type of units to use.
10 For Width, enter the symbol width or specify the width using a number
expression.
For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions.
11 For Height, enter the symbol height or specify the height using a number
expression.
Styling Point Features | 545
For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions.
12 To maintain width-to-height proportions when you change the width
or height of the symbol, select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.
13 To change the fill and edge colors of the symbol, use the Fill Color and
Edge Color lists.
If you do not change the colors, the default colors from the symbol are
used.
14 For Rotation, do one of the following:
■Select a value from the drop-down list.
■Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle
in the box. Click OK.
■Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression.
For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions.
15 Click OK.
Styling Line Features
Specify the thickness, color, and pattern of polyline features. Style a single
line or build a composite line with several components and then style each
component. For example, to illustrate a highway, create a thick black line and
add a thinner, dashed, yellow line.
See also:
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
■Adding Labels to Features on page 900
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points on page 903
To apply styles to lines
1In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a feature layer that contains
lines.
2Click Edit Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
546 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges on
page 543.
4In the Line Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5In the Style Line dialog box, select the Apply Styles To The Line check
box.
6To style a single line, do the following:
■For Units (Device Space), select the type of units to measure line
thickness.
Lines are specified in Device Space units.
■Use the lists to specify polyline thickness, color, and pattern.
NOTE Select 0 thickness to draw the line as thinly as possible.
7To build a composite line, do the following:
■Click Create Composite Lines to expand the Style Line dialog box.
■Style the first line in the composite.
■Click New to add a new component to the line.
■Style the new component as desired.
■Control the position of the selected component in the overall
composite line by clicking the up and down arrows.
8Click OK.
Styling Area Features
Specify the fill style and color, background color, edge style and color, and
line thickness used to draw area (polygon) features.
See also:
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
■Adding Labels to Features on page 900
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points on page 903
Styling Area Features | 547
To apply styles to areas
1In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a feature layer that contains
polygons.
2Click Edit Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges on
page 543.
4In the Area Style area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
5To fill polygons, in the Style Area dialog box, select the Apply Fill To The
Area check box.
6For Fill Pattern, select Solid or a pattern.
■If you specified Solid fill, specify Foreground Transparency and
Foreground Color.
■If you specified a pattern fill, specify colors for Foreground Color and
Background Color. If you do not want a background color for the
pattern, click Transparent for Background Color.
NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on
the map may differ from the colors displayed in the preview frame because
the preview frame always uses a white background, which may differ from
the color beneath the transparent objects in your map.
7To add borders to polygons, select the Apply A Border To The Area check
box and then do the following:
■For Line Pattern, specify the pattern for the area border.
■For Units (Device Space), select the type of units to use to measure
border thickness.
■For Line Thickness, specify a thickness for the area border.
NOTE Select 0 thickness to draw the border as thin as possible.
■For Line Color, specify a color for the area border.
8Click OK.
548 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Labeling Features
You can label features on feature layers. For more information, see Adding
Labels on page 900.
Saving and Loading Styled Feature Layers
After you have styled feature layers, you can save the connection and styling
information to LAYER files that you can share with other users. A LAYER file
contains connection and style information only, no feature data.
When you load a LAYER file, AutoCAD Map 3D adds the source file to the
Map Explorer, creates the connection, adds the feature layer to the Display
Manager on page 1748, and styles the layer correctly. Drag and drop the LAYER
file from Windows Explorer to the Display Manager.
See also:
■Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on page 1210
To load a LAYER file
■Drag and drop the LAYER file from Windows Explorer to the Display
Manager on page 1748.
Styling Drawing Layers
When you define a style for a drawing layer, you specify how AutoCAD Map
3D displays drawing objects on that layer.
■To create a map with styled drawing layers on page 551
■To style a drawing layer on page 555
■To create a display style on page 557
■To add a display style to a layer on page 559
■To modify a display style on page 560
■To hide the drawing objects in a layer on page 560
■To save a style to the Display Library on page 561
■To create a new category in the Display Library on page 562
■To reference a style from the Display Library on page 563
■To turn off style referencing on page 563
Labeling Features | 549
■To create or modify a scale threshold on page 564
■To view a layer's styles at all scale thresholds on page 566
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers
When you define a style for a layer, you specify how to display drawing objects
on that layer.
Style the drawing objects in your map by creating layers and then applying
one or more styles to the selected layer.
TIP For better performance, create a new display map rather than modifying the
default map. There are circumstances when the default map is automatically
displayed, and if this map has a lot of objects, it could take a while to display.
■A single map can have many drawing layers.
■You can specify a different style for each drawing layer in your map, and
combine multiple styles for a single layer.
■You can create a theme for a drawing layer. A theme varies the style based
on data associated with the object, for example, a darker color to represent
a higher traffic volume.
You can apply one or more styles to layers in your map.
If a drawing object is a member of more than one drawing layer, it is styled
by each layer of which it is a member. For example, if a line is in both the
Transportation layer and the Roads object class layer, it will be styled by both
layers. If the layers specify conflicting style or visibility settings, the drawing
550 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
object uses the style and visibility settings of whichever layer is higher in the
Display Manager list.
Style objects by changing one or more of the following:
■Color
■Linetype
■Linetype scale
■Lineweight
■Plot style
■Symbol or image used to represent objects
■Adding hatch
■Adding text
■Adding annotation
NOTE Instructions in this section are for drawing objects. If you are styling a
geospatial feature layer, see Styling Features on page 540.
See also:
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 296
■Creating Multiple Display Maps on page 539
■Setting Map Scale on page 538
■Theming Drawing Data on page 965
To create a map with styled drawing layers
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ New Map.
2In the Current Map box, enter a name for the new map.
3Select the objects to stylize. on page 296
Each set of drawing objects is a drawing layer.
4For each layer, specify a style on page 556 or a theme on page 967.
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers | 551
5Optionally:
■Change the display order on page 537 of drawing layers. Layers at the
top of the list appear on top of other layers.
■Specify different styles at different view scales.
■Create a legend on page ?.
DescriptionClickTo Do This
Use the Display Manager to style features and
drawing objects in your maps, and to update
Click View menu ➤ Task
Pane. In the Task Pane,
click Display Manager.
Display the Display Man-
ager
the display for different drawing scale
thresholds.
A drawing layer is a set of objects. Each layer
can have its own style. See Bringing In Drawing
Data From DWG Files on page 296.
In the Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add Draw-
ing Data. Click the type
of layer to create.
Create a drawing layer
A query lets you define conditions to select
specific objects. See Bringing In Drawing Data
From DWG Files on page 296.
In the Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add Draw-
ing Data ➤ Query Cur-
rent Drawing.
Query objects in the cur-
rent drawing
A query lets you define conditions to select
specific objects. See Bringing In Drawing Data
From DWG Files on page 296.
In the Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add Draw-
ing Data ➤ Query Source
Drawings.
Query objects in attached
drawings
Change color, linetype, linetype scale, line-
weight, or plotstyle; change the symbol used
Right-click a layer. Click
Add Style, and then
Create a style
to represent the objects; or add hatch, text, orchoose the type of style
to create. annotation for objects using this style. See
Creating a Style on page 557.
A theme varies the style based on data associ-
ated with the object. See Overview of Theme
Styles on page 970.
In the Display Manager,
right-click a layer ➤ Add
Style ➤ Theme.
Create a theme style
552 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
DescriptionClickTo Do This
You can import a theme or map you created
in a previous version of AutoCAD Map 3D.
To import a theme: In the
Display Manager, click
Import a theme or map
from a previous version of
AutoCAD Map 3D Data ➤ Add Drawing
Data ➤ Import Old
Theme. To import a map:
In the Display Manager,
click Data ➤ Add Draw-
ing Data ➤ Import Old
Map.
When a style is turned off, drawing objects are
displayed without styles.
Select or clear the check
box next to the style
Turn a style on or off
name in the Display
Manager.
Use scale thresholds to change drawing layer
styles as you zoom in or out, for example, turn
In the Display Manager,
click Tools ➤ Show
Create a new scale
threshold
text off as you zoom out. Close the lock icon
on the Status Bar to link scale and style.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing
layers only. Feature layers use scale ranges. For
more information, see Defining Scale Ranges
on page 543.
Thresholds. Click the thin
down arrow next to the
Threshold list, and then
click Duplicate. Enter the
new threshold and click
OK.
Layers are drawn from the bottom up. Objects
in the layer at the top of the Display Manager
Drag the layer up or
down in the Display
Change the display order
of layers
are drawn last and appear on top of other ob-Manager using the Draw
jects. If an object is a member of more thanOrder view to change the
one layer, it is drawn based on the highestdisplay order. To change
layer to which it belongs. The Draw Order viewviews, in the Display
is useful for defining a display order that is dif-
Manager, click Groups ➤
Draw Order. ferent from the way you organize layers in the
Display Manager or in the legend. The Draw
Order view takes precedence over the order in
the Layers By Group view.
If a layer is turned off, objects from that layer
are hidden.
Clear the check box next
to the layer name
Hide objects in a layer
Overview of Styling Drawing Layers | 553
DescriptionClickTo Do This
The legend lists the styles used in the map. See
Adding a Legend on page 916.
In the Display Manager,
click Tools ➤ Create Le-
gend.
Add a legend
Reloads the entire drawing, including rereading
attribute data, reevaluating expressions for
Right-click the Display
Manager. Click Update.
Update the drawing
styles and themes, and requerying layers. To
update a single layer, right-click the layer. Click
Update.
You may sometimes need to refresh the items
in the Display Manager. This operation does
not affect the drawing.
On the command line,
enter mapwsrefresh.
Refresh the Display Man-
ager
Quick Reference
Update Display Manager
Refreshes the current display
Right-click the Display Manager. Click UpdateTask Pane
Styling a Drawing Layer
When you define a style for a layer, you specify how objects on that layer
appear in the current display map.
See also:
■Creating Multiple Display Maps on page 539
■Creating Themes for Drawing Layers on page 967
■Creating a Style on page 556
■Combining Styles on page 558
■Saving a Display Style in the Library on page 561
554 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
To style a drawing layer
1Select the layer.
2Do one of the following:
■Create a new style. on page 557
■Copy an existing style. on page ?
■Reference a library style. on page 563
■Create a theme on page 967.
3If you want, add another style to the layer on page 559.
Symbol styles can be combined only with other symbol styles. Themes
cannot be combined with any other styles.
4You can save your style on page 561 in the Display Library.
5If your map does not look exactly as desired, modify the style on page
560.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Task Pane
Styling a Drawing Layer | 555
Creating a Style
You can define a style for a drawing layer in a map. All the drawing objects
on this layer will be displayed using the style.
You can create more than one style for a drawing layer. The styles overlay each other.
Style Types
Specifies color, linetype, linetype scale,
lineweight, and plotstyle for drawing ob-
jects using this style.
Entity
Adds annotation, such as text, blocks, im-
ages, and information based on object
Annotation
properties, to drawing objects using this
style.
Adds hatch to drawing objects using this
style.
Hatch
Uses symbols such as blocks or annotation
to represent drawing objects using this
Symbol
style. Can be combined with other symbol
styles only.
556 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Style Types
Adds text to drawing objects using this
style.
Text
Specifies brightness, contrast, and fade for
images using this style.
Raster Image
Displays the Thematic Mapping dialog
box, where you can create a theme style.
Theme
All the properties of the style are displayed on the Display tab of the Properties palette,
where you can view or modify them.
See also:
■Saving a Display Style in the Library on page 561
■Referencing a Library Style on page 563
■Creating Themes for Drawing Layers on page 967
To create a display style
1In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the layer to style. Click Add
Style, and then choose the type of style to create.
■Entity Style
■Hatch Style
■Text Style
Creating a Style | 557
■Raster Image Style
■Annotation Style
■Symbol Style
2Select the style.
3If the Properties palette is not already visible, click the Style button.
4On the Display tab of the Properties palette, specify style settings.
NOTE When entering an expression, you may need to first select an item
from the list. Click to display the Edit Expression dialog box on page
1312.
NOTE If drawing objects are not stylized, remember that the Display Manager
does not stylize drawing objects that have been queried into the current drawing
using a standard Query. To stylize drawing objects from attached drawings, see
Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Task Pane
Combining Styles
You can combine styles for a single drawing layer.
Style roads by combining a thick continuous black line with a thin dotted yellow line.
558 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Styles are rendered from bottom to top. That is, the bottom style in the list is
rendered first.
NOTE Symbol styles can only be combined with other symbol styles. Themes
cannot be combined with any other styles.
See also:
■Creating a Style on page 556
NOTE If the layer has a symbol style applied, you can only combine it with other
symbol styles. You cannot combine a theme with any other styles.
To add a display style to a layer
1Select the layer.
2Do one of the following:
■Create a new style. on page 557
■Copy on page ? an existing style.
■Reference a library style. on page 563
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Style
Creates a new Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click a layer ➤ Add Style ➤
(select a style type)
Task Pane
Modifying a Style
The properties of the style are displayed on the Display tab of the Properties
palette. Modify the settings as desired.
Modifying a Style | 559
Modify style settings on the Properties palette.
Style Referencing
If a style references another style, any changes to the style in one location are
automatically reflected in any other locations where the style is used. If you
turn off referencing for a style, any additional changes you make to that style
do not affect the other locations.
See also:
■Creating a Style on page 556
■Referencing a Library Style on page 563
■Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold on page 564
To modify a display style
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click the style.
2If the Properties palette is not already visible, click the Style button.
3On the Display tab of the Properties palette, modify style settings.
To hide the drawing objects in a layer
■Clear the check box next to the layer's name in Display Manager.
560 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Saving a Display Style in the Library
If you plan to use a style more than once, you can save it in the Display Library.
Once a style is saved in the library, you can drag it to a drawing layer.
NOTE If you drag a style from the Library to a drawing layer, the style is referenced.
If you copy and paste the style, a new style is created.
When you drag a style from the library, you can reference the library style.
When a style references a library style, any changes to the style in one location
are automatically reflected in the other location.
TIP To have a layer look the same at all scale thresholds, store the style in the
Display Library. Then, at every scale threshold, reference the Library style. This
way, you can automatically modify the style at every scale threshold by updating
the style in the Display Library.
See also:
■Creating a Style on page 556
■Referencing a Library Style on page 563
To save a style to the Display Library
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the style to save ➤ Copy.
Saving a Display Style in the Library | 561
2If the Display Library is not already displayed: In the Display Manager,
click Tools ➤ Show Library.
3On the Display Styles tab of the Display Library, right-click, and choose
Paste.
Note that the style is not referenced. Only dragging from the Library to the
drawing layer creates a referenced style.
TIP You can also create styles from within the Display Library. Right-click in the
Display Library. Click Add Style, and define the style. For more information on
creating styles, see Creating a Style on page 557.
To create a new category in the Display Library
1On the Display Library palette, right-click the Display Styles tab. Click
Add Category.
NOTE You must right-click the tab and not in the palette.
2To change the name of the tab, right-click the tab name. Click Rename.
Enter a name for the tab.
Quick Reference
Display Library Palette
Turns the Display Library palette on and off
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARYCommand Line
In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Library or
Hide Library
Task Pane
Copy Display Manager Style
Copies a Display Manager style
In Display Manager, right-click the style ➤ Copy
Task Pane
562 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Referencing a Library Style
Use a style from the Display Library.
Example: The Display Library has a style called "Pipes" that colors drawing
objects blue. Reference this style from any pipe layer.
When you drag a style from the library, the style in the layer references the
style in the Display Library.
If a style references a library style, any changes to the style in one location are
automatically reflected in any other locations where the style is used. That is,
if you modify the style in the Display Manager, the style in the Display Library
is automatically updated, as are any other styles that reference the style in the
Display Library.
If you turn off referencing for a style, any additional changes you make to
that style do not affect the other locations.
NOTE Once you turn off referencing for a style, you cannot turn it back on.
See also:
■Creating a Style on page 556
■Saving a Display Style in the Library on page 561
To reference a style from the Display Library
1If the Display Library is not already displayed: In Display Manager on page
1748, click Tools ➤ Show Library.
2Select the style in the Display Library.
3Drag it onto the drawing layer to stylize in the Display Manager.
To turn off style referencing
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click the style for which to turn off
referencing.
2If the Properties palette is not already displayed, right-click the style.
Click Properties.
3On the Display tab of the Properties palette, under Style, click the box
next to Reference and select No.
Referencing a Library Style | 563
NOTE Once you turn off referencing for a style, you cannot turn it back on.
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold
You can define different styles at different scale thresholds.
Example: Turn on the display of road names only when the drawing scale
factor is below 1:5000
Referenced Styles
To display a layer the same way at multiple scale thresholds, save the styles
to the Library. For each new scale threshold, reference the style in the Library.
Any changes you make to the style at one scale threshold are reflected at the
other scale thresholds.
Turn off referencing for the styles that change from one scale threshold to the
next.
Example: Reference the Library Style for the Road layer at all scale thresholds
except when you are zoomed out. For that scale threshold, turn off referencing
so you can change the display of roads when you zoom out.
See also:
■Setting Map Scale on page 538
■Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds on page 566
■Bringing In Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 296
To create or modify a scale threshold
1Zoom the drawing to the scale factor for which you will be creating or
modifying the threshold.
2To display the Threshold list: In the Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show
Thresholds.
3Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list and click Duplicate.
4In the New Threshold dialog box, enter the new threshold value. Click
OK.
5Modify any of the styles that will be different at this scale threshold.
564 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
If the styles reference a Library Style, turn off referencing for the selected
style before you modify it. To turn off style referencing, select the style.
On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Reference, select No.
If you do not turn off Reference, any changes you make to the style in
this scale threshold are automatically reflected in any styles that reference
this style.
NOTE When creating and modifying styles, you can specify how you want to
display styles as you change scale thresholds.
■Close the lock icon on the Status Bar if you want the drawing
window to update using the appropriate styles for the each drawing scale
threshold. Styles will change as you adjust the scale threshold.
■Open the lock icon on the Status Bar if you want the drawing
window to update using the styles for the scale threshold that is currently
displayed. Styles will not change as you zoom.
Quick Reference
New Display Manager Scale Threshold
Creates a new Display Manager scale threshold
In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Show Thresholds.
Click the thin down arrow next to the Threshold list
and choose Duplicate.
Task Pane
Compare Display Manager Scale Thresholds
For the selected layer, lists the Display Manager styles for each scale threshold
In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose
Compare Thresholds
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold | 565
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Viewing Styles at All Scale Thresholds
You can view a layer's styles for each scale threshold in the map.
For the layer Roads, note how the drawing layer styles display more information as
you zoom in.
See also:
■Creating and Modifying a Display Manager Scale Threshold on page 564
To view a layer's styles at all scale thresholds
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the layer ➤ Show
Thresholds.
566 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
For the selected layer, the Compare Thresholds palette lists the styles for
each scale threshold defined in the map.
2To view the styles for a different layer, select the layer in Display Manager.
The Compare Thresholds palette displays the styles for the new layer.
TIP You can add a style to a layer by dragging it from the Display Library or
another scale threshold and dropping it on the scale where you want to add it.
Quick Reference
Compare Display Manager Scale Thresholds
For the selected layer, lists the Display Manager styles for each scale threshold
In Display Manager, right-click the layer and choose
Compare Thresholds
Task Pane
Styling Raster Images
You can style and view rasters brought into your map with Data Connect.
Overview of Styling Raster Images
For raster images you add to your map with Data Connect, you can do the
following:
■Adjust brightness and contrast.
■Display the image in grayscale or color.
■Make a single color in the raster transparent.
■Zoom to the raster’s extents.
■Requery the raster at a different zoom level.
See also:
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
Styling Raster Images | 567
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces on page 975
■Modifying Raster Images on page 420
Use this method...To do this...
Select the raster and, in the Style Editor
under Raster Style, do one of the following:
Adjust brightness and contrast for images
you added with Data Connect.
■To adjust brightness, enter a value
between -50 and 50 in the Brightness
box.
■To adjust contrast, enter a value
between -50 and 50 in the Contrast
box.
See Changing Brightness, Color, or Trans-
parency for Raster Images on page 569
Select the raster and, in the Style Editor
under Raster Style, click the Style drop-
down box. Select Color or Greyscale.
See Changing Brightness, Color, or Trans-
parency for Raster Images on page 569
Display an image you added with Data
Connect in grayscale or color.
Select the raster and, in the Style Editor
under Raster Style, click Transparent.
See Changing Brightness, Color, or Trans-
parency for Raster Images on page 569
Make a single color transparent in a raster
you added with Data Connect.
Right-click the image layer. Click Zoom To
Extents.
See Viewing Raster Images on page 570
Zoom to the extents of a raster you added
with Data Connect.
Right-click the image layer. Click Resample
Raster.
See Viewing Raster Images on page 570
Requery a raster you added with Data
Connect at a different zoom level.
568 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster
Images
You can use the Style Editor to modify the appearance of raster images brought
in to your map through an FDO provider. You can adjust the brightness and
contrast, set transparency for a single color, and display the image in color or
greyscale.
See also:
■Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
■Using Other Raster Image Formats on page 385
■Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces on page 975
■Modifying Raster Images on page 420
■To adjust brightness and contrast in a raster image on page 569
■To set transparency for a single color. on page 569
■To display your image in color or greyscale on page 570
To adjust brightness and contrast in a raster image
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the layer ➤ Edit Style.
2In the Style Editor, under Raster Style, do one of the following:
■To adjust brightness, enter a value between -50 and 50 in the
Brightness box.
■To adjust contrast, enter a value between -50 and 50 in the Contrast
box.
3Click Apply.
To set transparency for a single color.
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the layer ➤ Edit Style.
2In the Style Editor, under Raster Style, click Transparent.
3In the Transparency Color dialog box, click Select <.
Changing Brightness, Color, or Transparency for Raster Images | 569
4Select a color on your map, then click OK.
5Click Apply. AutoCAD Map 3D displays all parts of the raster image that
match the selected color with 100% transparency.
To display your image in color or greyscale
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the layer ➤ Edit Style.
2In the Style Editor, under Raster Style, click the Style drop-down box.
3Select Color or Greyscale.
4If you select greyscale, you can adjust the range for greyscale mapping
by changing the Cell Minimum and Cell Maximum values.
5Click Apply.
Viewing Raster Images
When you zoom in on a raster image AutoCAD Map 3D automatically requeries
the image from the source to improve the display. You can also use the
Resample Raster tool to improve the display of raster feature data if necessary
(if you are using server-based raster images, for example). This tool requeries
just the displayed portion of the image. When you zoom out, use the Zoom
To Extents tool for the feature layer to display the full extents for the zoom
position.
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager on page 535
■Overview of Adding Rasters and Surfaces on page 370
NOTE This functionality applies only to maps with raster-based surfaces that have
been added with Data Connect.
To requery a raster image
1Display the raster image at the desired zoom level.
2In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the image layer. Click
Resample Raster.
570 | Chapter 5 Visualization and Styling
To zoom to image extents
1Zoom out as desired.
2Right-click the image layer. Click Zoom To Extents.
Quick Reference
ZOOM
Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport
View menu ➤ Realtime
Menu
Zoom
Icon
ZOOMCommand Line
Viewing Raster Images | 571
572
Creating and Editing
Data
Overview of Creating and Editing Data
AutoCAD Map 3D works on two distinct types of objects: features and drawing
objects.
■Features are GIS objects stored in external files and databases. Display and
edit them in your map and then save the changes back to the original source.
Use the options described in Working with Features on page 575.
■Drawing objects are AutoCAD objects stored within a map or retrieved from
attached drawings using queries. Save changes to drawing objects in the
current map or back to the attached source drawing depending on the source
of each object. Use the options described in Working with Drawing Objects
on page 604 and Working with Attribute Data and Object Data on page 859.
Use both AutoCAD Map 3D and AutoCAD to edit features and drawing objects.
Many AutoCAD commands work on both types of objects. Some AutoCAD
commands can only be performed on a feature after you extract its geometry
and edit it as a drawing object. You can then save your changes back to the
original data store with no loss of precision.
6
573
Most AutoCAD Map 3D operations are specific to one or the other type of
object. Use the right-click menus to see the commands that are available for
the selected feature or drawing object.
For drawing objects...For features...
Add drawing objects to your map by at-
taching drawings and querying in objects.
See Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data
From DWG Files on page 297.
Add features to your map using Data
Connect.
See Overview of Bringing In GIS Features
on page 266.
Edit objects directly with AutoCAD and
AutoCAD Map 3D commands.
See Overview of Using the Map Editing
Tools on page 786.
Edit features by checking them out and
using AutoCAD and AutoCAD Map 3D
commands.
See Checking Out Features on page 583,
Using Feature Editing Commands on page
590, and Using AutoCAD Commands on
Features on page 597.
Create objects with AutoCAD and Auto-
CAD Map 3D commands.
See Working with Drawing Objects on
page 604.
Create new features using Display Man-
ager.
See Creating New Features on page 577.
Create drawing objects from features.
See Extracting Feature Geometry on page
598 and Exporting Maps to DWG Format
on page 1202.
Create features from drawing objects.
See Creating a New Feature from a Draw-
ing Object on page 581.
Save drawing objects back to their sources
by adding them to a save set.
See Editing and Saving Objects in Attached
Drawings on page 611.
Save features back to their sources by
checking them in.
See Checking In Features on page 582.
Work with object data in an object data
table.
See Entering and Editing Object Data on
page 873.
Work with attribute data in the Data Table.
See Editing Features using the Data Table
on page 595.
574 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
For drawing objects...For features...
Work with linked external data in Data
View.
See Overview of Viewing External Data
Sources for Drawing Objects on page 860.
Work with joined external data in the Data
Table.
See Editing Joined Data on page 446.
Use special commands available only for
drawing objects.
See Cleaning Up Drawing Data on page
636, Creating, Editing, and Managing Topo-
Use special commands available only for
features.
See Using Feature Editing Commands on
page 590.
logies on page 688, Using Map Editing
Tools on page 785, Digitizing Points Using
Coordinates on page 809, Working with
Polygon Objects on page 810, and Annotat-
ing Drawing Objects on page 904.
Working with Features
■Overview of Working with Features on page 576
■Creating New Features on page 577
■Checking In Features on page 582
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Cancelling Check Out on page 585
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
■Editing Features on page 588
■Working Offline on page 600
■Managing Versions on page 602
To work with features
■To edit features on page 577
■To create new features on page 577
■To check in features on page 582
■To check out features automatically on page 584
■To check out features on page 584
■To cancel check out on page 585
■To update edits automatically on page 587
■To edit features on page 588
■To work offline on page 601
■To return online on page 601
Working with Features | 575
■To clear the cache on page 601
■To rebuild the cache on page 602
■To create a new version on page 603
■To activate a version on page 603
■To commit changes back to the parent version on page 603
■To discard a version on page 604
Overview of Working with Features
When you connect to a geospatial data source and add it to your map, you
can see and edit the feature data. Features, must be checked out in order to
be edited. By default, features are automatically checked out upon editing.
You can use most AutoCAD editing commands to edit feature data. For some
of the more advanced commands, you can use Update Feature Geometry on
page 599 to convert a GIS feature to pure AutoCAD geometry. Once you have
done this, you can use these other AutoCAD commands, and then update the
feature without losing or affecting any of its attributes.
You can also create features from AutoCAD geometry on page 581. This gives
you the same functionality as Update Feature Geometry, but it creates a new
feature rather than changing an existing one.
Instructions for features assume that you are using the Map 3D for Geospatial
workspace, which is the default workspace. To switch to this workspace, choose
View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout ➤ Map 3D for Geospatial.
Working in a Multiuser Environment
If you share data in a multiuser environment, be aware of the locking status
of the following providers.
■Oracle and ArcSDE support feature level locking that is persistent when
the connection with the source is closed and you go offline.
■MySQL and SQL Server do not support feature level locking or persistent
locking. Locks are released when the connection is closed.
■SDF does not support locking. Be very careful when working in a multiuser
environment.
■SHP supports file locking only as long as you are connected to the data.
When you close your map, break the connection, or go offline, the file is
unlocked.
576 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Bringing in GIS Features on page 265
To edit features
1Attach the data source. on page ?
2If you do not have Check-Out Edits Automatically turned on, check out
the feature. on page ?
3Do one or both of the following:
■Use feature-editing commands to make your changes. on page ?
■Use AutoCAD commands to make your changes. on page 597
4Check the feature back in. on page ?
Creating New Features
To create new features
■To create new features on page 578
■To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature on page 578
■To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature on page 579
■To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature on page 580
■To create a new feature from geometry on page 581
Overview of Creating New Features
You can create new features using feature-creation commands or by creating
a feature from a drawing object’s geometry.
NOTE If the feature class for a layer does not provide automatically generated IDs
for new features, AutoCAD Map 3D will not create new features on the layer. To
create new features in this case, turn off Update Edits Automatically (on the Edit
menu). AutoCAD Map 3D will hold the features in a queue instead of attempting
to save them to the source immediately. Feature IDs are generated in the queue.
Creating New Features | 577
See also:
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
To create new features
■Use Display Manager to create Point or MultiPoint on page 578 features,
Polygon or MultiPolygon on page 579 features, and LineString or
MultiLineString on page 580 features.
If the provider supports curves, the arc option is available in the LineString,
MultiLineString, Polygon, and MultiPolygon creation commands.
■Create a new feature from a drawing object’s geometry on page 581.
Creating New Point and MultiPoint Features
If you have point feature layers in your drawing, you can create new Point
and MultiPoint features. MultiPoint features are multiple points that behave
like a single Point feature.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
See also:
■Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object on page 581
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Features on page 597
To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature
1Do one of the following:
■In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New Point feature_name.
■In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiPoint feature_name.
Here, feature_name is the name of the Point or MultiPoint feature layer.
2When prompted, specify the location for the new Point or MultiPoint
feature.
578 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
For MultiPoint features, specify the location of each point.
3For MultiPoint operations, press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the Data Table. To add information to the
feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595.
4Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Creating New Polygon and MultiPolygon Features
If you have polygon feature layers in your drawing, you can create new Polygon
and MultiPolygon features. MultiPolygon features behave like a single Polygon
feature.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
A polygon has one outer ring and can have one or more inner rings. A ring
within a polygon is considered a hole. To create polygons with multiple outer
and inner rings, create a MultiPolygon feature.
See also:
■Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object on page 581
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Features on page 597
To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature
1Do one of the following:
■In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New Polygon feature_name.
■In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiPolygon feature_name.
Here, feature_name is the name of the Polygon or MultiPolygon feature
layer.
2When prompted, specify the location for the new Polygon or
MultiPolygon feature.
Creating New Features | 579
3Use the command line or right-click to complete the new feature.
For more information, see MAPPOLYGONCREATE on page 1401 and
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE on page 1398.
4Press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the Data Table. To add information to the
feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595.
5Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Creating New LineString and MultiLineString
Features
If you have line feature layers in your drawing, you can create new LineString
and MultiLineString features. MultiLineString features are multiple lines that
behave like a single Line feature.
NOTE The feature creation commands available for a feature layer depend on the
capabilities of the feature class represented by the layer. Feature geometry follows
OGC specifications.
See also:
■Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object on page 581
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Features on page 597
To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature
1Do one of the following:
■In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New LineString feature_name.
■In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the feature layer for the
new feature ➤ Create ➤ New MultiLineString feature_name.
Here, feature_name is the name of the LineString or MultiLineString feature
layer.
580 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
2When prompted, specify the location for the new LineString or
MultiLineString feature.
3Use the command line or right-click to complete the new feature.
For more information, see MAPLINESTRINGCREATE on page 1392 and
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE on page 1394.
4Press Enter to complete the operation.
The new feature is added to the Data Table. To add information to the
feature, see Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595.
5Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Creating a New Feature from a Drawing Object
You can create new features using drawing object geometry.
See also:
■Overview of Working with Features on page 576
■Checking In Features on page 582
■Using AutoCAD Commands on Features on page 597
To create a new feature from geometry
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the layer to which you
want to add the feature. Click New Feature from Geometry.
2When prompted, select the object or objects to convert to features. Press
Enter.
All selected objects are converted into a single feature. To create multiple
features, perform this operation on one object at a time.
3When prompted to erase the drawing object, do one of the following:
■Click Yes to erase the original drawing object.
■Click No to keep the drawing object in the drawing.
Keep the object if you plan to use it to create other features. You can
store drawing objects on a separate layer and turn off visibility for the
layer.
Creating New Features | 581
To add information to the feature, see Editing Features using the Data
Table on page 595.
4Check in the new features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Quick Reference
New Feature from Geometry
Creates a new feature from drawing object geometry
Click Create ➤ New Feature from Geometry.
Menu
New Feature From Geometry
Icon
MAPCREATEFEATUREFROMGEOMETRYCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer. Click
New Feature from Geometry
Task Pane
Checking In Features
Checking in features saves your changes and additions to the feature source
and releases any locks.
You can update the source automatically as you edit or wait until you check
in the features. If you update the source with edits automatically, be sure to
check in features when you are finished working.
See also:
■Overview of Working with Features on page 576
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
To check in features
1Select the features to check in using one of the following methods:
■Click a feature or features.
582 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Right-click the feature layer in the Display Manager on page 1748. Click
Select Checked-Out Features.
2Right-click the drawing. Click Check-In Feature.
Quick Reference
Check In Feature
Checks in features, saves your changes and additions to the feature source,
and releases locks
Click Edit ➤ Check-In.
Menu
Check-In Features
Icon
MAPCHECKINCommand Line
Select Checked-Out Features
Selects features that have been checked out to edit
Click Edit ➤ Select Checked-Out Features.
Menu
Select Checked-Out Features
Icon
MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUTCommand Line
In Display Manager, right-click the feature layerTask Pane
Checking Out Features
Checking out features makes them available to edit. By default, features are
checked out automatically when you edit them.
If the data source supports locking, features or files will be locked. Checking
in or cancelling a check out operation unlocks locked features.
If you plan to work offline, check out the features you want to edit before
going offline.
Checking Out Features | 583
See also:
■Overview of Working with Features on page 576
■Working Offline on page 600
To check out features automatically
■Click Edit menu ➤ Check-Out Edits Automatically.
To check out features
NOTE Use this procedure if you do not have Check-Out Edits Automatically turned
on.
1Click a feature or features.
2Right-click the drawing. Click Check-Out Feature.
Grips are displayed on the checked-out feature. If you do not edit using
grips you can turn them off. For more information, see Use Grip Modes
in the AutoCAD Help.
Quick Reference
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT
Automatically checks-out features that are edited
Edit menu ➤ Check Out Edits Automatically
Menu
MAPAUTOCHECKOUTCommand Line
Check Out Feature
Checks out selected features and makes them available for editing
Click Edit ➤ Check-Out.
Menu
Check-Out Features
Icon
MAPCHECKOUTCommand Line
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS
584 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Specifies options for editing features
Feature Edit Options
Icon
MAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONSCommand Line
Feature Editing Options dialog boxDialog Box
Cancelling Check Out
You can cancel the check out of all, selected, or erased features. You can also
cancel the check out of features by layer. When you cancel check out, locks
are released and your changes are discarded.
NOTE If Update Edits Automatically is on, edits are made in the feature source
immediately. Cancelling check out will not discard changes or restore erased
features.
See also:
■Overview of Working with Features on page 576
■Working Offline on page 600
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
To cancel check out
1Click Edit menu ➤ Cancel Check-Out.
2When prompted, click one of the following options:
DescriptionOption
Cancels check out of all featuresAll
Cancels check out of all erased featuresErased
Prompts for a layer and cancels check out
of all features on the selected layer. This
Layer
option is the same as All if there is only one
layer.
Cancelling Check Out | 585
DescriptionOption
Prompts for features or cancels check out
of selected features
Select Objects
Quick Reference
Cancel Checkout
Cancels a checkout operation. If you have Update Edits Automatically
enabled, cancelling the checkout does not undo changes.
Click Edit ➤ Cancel Check-Out.
Menu
Cancel Feature Check-Out
Icon
MAPCANCELCHECKOUTCommand Line
Updating Edits Automatically
You can queue your edits and save them to the source all at once, or you can
save them as you work.
When Update Edits Automatically is off (the default), your changes remain
local until you check them in.
If you turn on Update Edits Automatically, AutoCAD Map 3D immediately
attempts to save any edits you have made to checked-out features back to the
feature source. If updating fails for any reason, the setting remains off so you
can resolve feature edits.
NOTE Cancelling a check out will not discard changes or restore features to their
state before the check out.
You can change the default setting on page 76 for Update Edits Automatically.
When you create layers for SHP and SDF data, AutoCAD Map 3D may create
a local cache the first time you edit those layers. For large files this may be
586 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
time-consuming. To avoid this, turn on Update Edits Automatically for large
SDF and SHP files.
Persistent Locking
If the feature source provider supports persistent locking on page 1758, and Update
Edits Automatically is on, checking out a feature locks that feature; checking
in a feature unlocks it. You can release locks on features by checking them
out (if you are the user who locked them) and then checking them back in.
If the feature source provider supports persistent locking and Update Edits
Automatically is off, use Cancel Checkout to unlock features without saving
your changes to them. When you do this, you synchronize the state of the
feature you checked out with those in the feature source. That is, you delete
new features created locally, and replace locally modified or deleted features
with the versions from the feature source.
Revision Numbers
Some providers (for example, Oracle, SQL Server, and MySQL) support revision
numbers, which increment a numeric value in the feature every time you
commit a change to that feature in the feature source. This allows AutoCAD
Map 3D to see if a feature has been edited by another user. If another user
modifies a feature while you have it checked out, a revision-number conflict
can occur. This might happen if you check out the feature while you are
offline, or if the feature source provider does not support persistent locking.
In such cases, you cannot overwrite the other user’s changes to the features.
Instead, turn Update Edits Automatically off and choose Cancel Checkout for
the features that have conflicts.
See also:
■Customizing Your Work Environment on page 76
■Working Offline on page 600
■Cancelling Check Out on page 585
To update edits automatically
■Click Edit menu ➤ Update Edits Automatically.
Updating Edits Automatically | 587
NOTE To change the default setting for Update Edits Automatically, at the
Command prompt, type MAPEDITSETAUTODESFAULT and specify Active (checked)
or Deactive (unchecked) as the default.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITSETAUTO
Turns on and off the setting for updating edits to the feature source
automatically
Click Edit ➤ Update Edits Automatically.
Menu
MAPEDITSETAUTOCommand Line
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT
Specifies the default setting for updating edits to the feature source
automatically
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULTCommand Line
Check In Feature
Checks in features, saves your changes and additions to the feature source,
and releases locks
Click Edit ➤ Check-In.
Menu
Check-In Features
Icon
MAPCHECKINCommand Line
Editing Features
To edit features
■To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
■To split a feature on page 592
■To turn on or off Ignore Split and Merge Rules on page 593
■To merge features on page 594
588 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■To edit features using the Data Table on page 595
■To use AutoCAD commands on features on page 597
Overview of Editing Features
Edit features by using specialized commands for certain geometry types,
changing entries in the Data Table, or using available AutoCAD commands.
Most common AutoCAD editing commands (such as PEDIT, ROTATE, and
TRIM) are available to use with features. To perform an AutoCAD operation
that is not available for features, extract the geometry from the feature, modify
it using AutoCAD, and then update the feature geometry.
NOTE To use common AutoCAD editing commands on features, make sure you
have selected Check out features as AutoCAD drawing objects in the Feature
Checkout Options area of the Feature Editing Options dialog box on page 1648
Use this method...To edit this...
Make sure that you have specified that
features will be checked out as geospatial
■Point features
■MultiPoint features features in the Feature Editing Options
■LineString features dialog box on page 1648 by selecting Geo-
■MultiLineString features spatial Features in the Feature Checkout
Options area.
■Polygon features Then use one of the feature editing com-
mands to change the geometry directly.
on page ?
■MultiPolygon features
with geospatial feature editing commands
Modify a feature in the Data Table to
change its data. on page ?
Feature data
Make sure you have selected Check out
features as AutoCAD drawing objects in
Feature geometry as AutoCAD drawing
objects
the Feature Checkout Options area of the
Feature Editing Options dialog box on
page 1648.
Then use any available AutoCAD com-
mands. on page ?
Editing Features | 589
Use this method...To edit this...
NOTE In some cases, when feature geo-
metry is checked out as AutoCAD drawing
objects, geospatial feature editing com-
mands may still be available to use on the
geometry.
See also:
■Extracting Feature Geometry on page 598
■Updating Feature Geometry on page 599
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Using Feature Editing Commands
Feature editing commands are available for Point, MultiPoint, LineString,
MultiLineString, Polygon, or MultiPolygon features. If you don’t have
Check-Out Edits Automatically turned on, check out a feature to use the feature
editing command specific to the geometry of that feature.
NOTE To improve performance when editing features, turn Update Edits
Automatically off.
590 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
■Editing Features on page 588
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Checking In Features on page 582
To edit a feature using feature editing commands
1Make sure that you have specified that features will be checked out as
geospatial features in the Feature Editing Options dialog box on page 1648
by selecting Geospatial Features in the Feature Checkout Options area.
2Check out the feature. on page 584
For more information, see Checking Out Features on page 583.
3Right-click the feature. Click Edit Feature.
The appropriate feature editing command for the geometry will apply to
the feature.
4Edit the Point, MultiPoint, LineString, MultiLineString, Polygon, or
MultiPolygon features.
For more information about editing these features see
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT on page 1397, MAPLINESTRINGEDIT on page 1393,
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT on page 1395, MAPPOLYGONEDIT on page
1402, and MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT on page 1399.
5Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Splitting Features
When you have a feature that you want to split into two parts, for example
a parcel, use the MAPFEATURESPLIT on page 1389 command. The resulting
feature property values are determined by rules you specify in the Split and
Merge Rules dialog box on page 1405.
When you split a feature, you can draw or select line or polygon to split the
feature. You can specify whether the result is a new feature or a multipart
feature. You can also specify whether the new feature uses the existing feature
ID or a new one.
Editing Features | 591
If you use a polygon (or mpolygon) to split a feature, the part that falls outside
of the polygon becomes one feature, and the part that falls inside the polygon
becomes another feature.
You can choose to ignore the rules specified in Split and Merge Rules dialog
box on page 1405 by turning on Ignore Split and Merge Rules.
See also:
■Split a Feature
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
■Editing Features on page 588
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Checking In Features on page 582
To split a feature
1Optionally, specify split rules on page 1405.
NOTE You can access the Split and Merge Rules dialog box on page 1405 in
the Data Table by clicking Set Split and Merge Rules on the Options drop
down menu.
2Select the feature.
3If you don’t have Check-Out Edits Automatically turned on, check out
the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features on page 583.
4Click Modify menu ➤ Split.
5Follow the prompts to specify whether the resulting feature(s) will be a
new or a multipart feature.
6Follow the prompts to specify whether the resulting feature(s) will use a
new or existing feature ID.
7Follow the prompts to select or draw a split line.
8Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
592 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To turn on or off Ignore Split and Merge Rules
■Click Modify menu ➤ Ignore Split and Merge Rules.
NOTE To change the default setting for Ignore Split and Merge Rules, at the
Command prompt, type MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES on page 1391 and specify
Yes or No as the default.
Quick Reference
MAPFEATURESPLIT
Splits features and assigns feature property values for resulting features
Modify menu ➤ Split
Menu
Split
Icon
MAPFEATURESPLITCommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
Determines whether or not the rules for split and merge are used
Modify menu ➤ Ignore Split and Merge Rules
Menu
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESCommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESDialog Box
Merging Features
When you want to merge two or more features, for example separate line
segments that represent the same road, use the MAPFEATUREMERGE on page
1388 command. The resulting feature property values are determined by rules
you specify in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box on page 1405.
You can merge two or more features of the same class into one feature. You
can also merge features with drawing objects. You can specify a new or existing
feature ID for the resulting feature.
Editing Features | 593
You can choose to ignore rules specified in this dialog box by turning on
Ignore Split and Merge rules (see To turn on or off Ignore Split and Merge
Rules on page 593).
See also:
■Merge Features
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
■Editing Features on page 588
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Checking In Features on page 582
To merge features
1Optionally, specify merge rules on page 1405.
NOTE You can access the Split and Merge Rules dialog box on page 1405 in
the Data Table by clicking Set Split and Merge Rules on the Options drop
down menu.
2If you don’t have Check-Out Edits Automatically turned on, check out
the feature(s).
For more information, see Checking Out Features on page 583.
3Select at least two objects, including at least one feature.
4Click Modify menu ➤ Merge.
5Follow the prompts to specify whether the resulting feature will use a
new or existing feature ID.
6Check in the merged feature.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Quick Reference
MAPFEATUREMERGE
Merges features and assigns feature property values for the resulting feature
Modify menu ➤ Merge
Menu
594 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Merge
Icon
MAPFEATUREMERGECommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
Determines whether or not the rules for split and merge are used
Modify menu ➤ Ignore Split and Merge Rules
Menu
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESCommand Line
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULESDialog Box
Editing Features using the Data Table
Use the Data Table to view and edit features by selecting data in the Data
Table window or by selecting areas of your map.
NOTE When you edit feature data in the Data Table, the corresponding geometry
is checked out and locked, if possible. You must check in the geometry when you
are finished editing.
See also:
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor on page 511
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Checking In Features on page 582
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
■Editing Features on page 588
To edit features using the Data Table
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, expand the Data Source tree and select the
feature layer to edit.
Editing Features | 595
2Click .
The Data Table window opens, displaying the feature data contained in
your map. If you have joined data on page 439 to a layer in your map, the
joined data is displayed, but it is gray. You cannot edit it in the Data
Table. Instead, select the original data source and update that in the Data
Table. Your changes will appear the next time you display this data as
joined data.
3Select and edit cells in the Data Table window.
When you edit data related to a feature, that feature is checked out
automatically (and the Update Edits Automatically setting is turned on).
Non-feature data cannot be checked out, so all edits to that type of data
are written back to their underlying sources immediately. You cannot
edit non-feature data unless you are connected to its source. See Updating
Edits Automatically on page 586.
Some data fields are "constrained" to allow only certain values. When
you enter values for constrained fields, you are prompted to enter only
valid values. For example, the prompt might tell you to enter only values
between one and ten.
4Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
5Close the Data Table window when you are finished.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
596 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Using AutoCAD Commands on Features
To use AutoCAD commands on features
■To edit features with AutoCAD commands on page 597
■To extract feature geometry on page 598
■To update feature geometry on page 599
Editing Features with AutoCAD Commands
By default, many common AutoCAD editing commands (such as PEDIT,
ROTATE, and TRIM) can be used on features directly.
NOTE To use common AutoCAD editing commands on features, make sure you
have selected Check out features as AutoCAD drawing objects in the Feature
Checkout Options area of the Feature Editing Options dialog box on page 1648
If there is an AutoCAD operation you cannot perform on a feature, you can
extract the geometry on page 598 from the feature, edit it using AutoCAD
commands, and then update the feature geometry. Feature data and rules are
preserved.
You can also merge AutoCAD geometry with existing features directly, without
extracting feature geometry first.
NOTE When you use EXPLODE on features, they are converted to AutoCAD
drawing objects.
See also:
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Checking In Features on page 582
■Updating Edits Automatically on page 586
■Editing Features on page 588
To edit features with AutoCAD commands
1If you don’t have Check-Out Edits Automatically turned on, check out
the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features on page 583.
Editing Features | 597
2Do one of the following:
■Enter the AutoCAD command you want to use and follow the
command prompts to select and edit the feature(s).
■Select the feature(s) and use the grips to edit the feature(s).
■Select the feature(s) and then enter the AutoCAD command you want
use and follow the prompts.
NOTE For help with AutoCAD commands, search for the command name
in the Help file or press F1 while you are using the command.
3Check in the revised features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Extracting Feature Geometry
Extract the geometry from a feature to use AutoCAD commands that are not
available for features.
See also:
■Editing Features on page 588
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Checking In Features on page 582
■Updating Feature Geometry on page 599
To extract feature geometry
1Check out the feature.
For more information, see Checking Out Features on page 583.
2Right-click the feature. Click Extract Geometry From Feature.
After you make your changes, you can merge the updated geometry back into
the feature.
598 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
Extract Feature Geometry
Creates new drawing objects from the selected feature geometry
Click Modify ➤ Advanced Feature Editing ➤ Extract
Geometry from Feature.
Menu
Extract Feature Geometry
Icon
MAPEXTRACTFEATUREGEOMETRYCommand Line
Updating Feature Geometry
You can merge new or existing drawing object geometry with a feature. If you
have extracted the geometry from a feature to edit it using AutoCAD, you
must update the feature geometry when you are finished editing.
You can use this command to combine spatially connected entities. For
example, you can use a line and an arc to update a single feature’s geometry
(resulting in one linestring or polyline). If the feature’s data store does not
support curves, this command will transform the curves into line segments.
For polygons, this command allows you to work on the boundary geometry
instead of the polygon itself.
See also:
■Editing Features on page 588
■Checking Out Features on page 583
■Checking In Features on page 582
■Extracting Feature Geometry on page 598
To update feature geometry
1Right-click the feature you want to merge with a drawing object. Click
Update Feature From Geometry.
2When prompted, select the drawing object to merge. Press Enter.
Editing Features | 599
3When prompted to erase the drawing object, do one of the following:
■Click Yes to erase the original drawing object.
■Click No to keep the drawing object in the drawing.
Keep the object if you plan to use it to create other features. You can
store drawing objects on an AutoCAD layer and turn off visibility of
the layer.
4Check in the edited feature.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
Quick Reference
Update Feature from Geometry
Merges new or existing drawing object geometry with a feature
Click Modify ➤ Advanced Feature Editing ➤ Update
Feature from Geometry.
Menu
Update Feature Geometry
Icon
MAPUPDATEFEATUREGEOMETRYCommand Line
Working Offline
When you work offline, AutoCAD Map 3D caches all your feature data
connections.
NOTE This procedure applies only to feature sources, not attached drawings.
Clear the cache periodically to improve performance. To be sure you are
working with the most current data for a data source, rebuild its cache by
refreshing its layer.
See also:
■Editing Features on page 588
■Checking Out Features on page 583
600 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Checking In Features on page 582
■To work offline on page 601
■To return online on page 601
■To clear the cache on page 601
■To rebuild the cache on page 602
To work offline
1Click Edit menu and turn off Update Edits Automatically.
2Check out the features you plan to use.
For more information, see Checking Out Features on page 583.
3Click the Online/Offline toggle on the Status Bar.
NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D caches the feature source. This can take some time.
You can still check out and edit features while you are offline. When you
return online, AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to lock features that you checked
out while you were offline. Non-feature data cannot be checked out, so you
cannot edit it unless you are connected to its source.
To return online
1Click the Offline/Online toggle on the Status Bar.
2Check in the checked out features.
For more information, see Checking In Features on page 582.
To clear the cache
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map 3D Options dialog box, click the System tab.
3Click Clear Cache. Click OK.
Working Offline | 601
To rebuild the cache
1Right-click a feature layer in Display Manager ➤ Refresh Layer.
Quick Reference
MAPWORKOFFLINE
Caches all checked-out features so you can work without being connected.
Online/Offline toggle on the Status Bar
Icon
_MAPWORKOFFLINECommand Line
Managing Versions
For feature sources that support versioning, you can create a version, edit
objects in that version, and then save (commit) changes from the child version
back to the parent version.
Support for versioning depends on the feature source. However, the following
guidelines apply to most feature sources that support versioning:
■Features queried from one version of the feature source can be saved back
to that version only. If you plan to edit features, be sure to query the
features from the version where you plan to save the edits.
■Objects locked in one version of the feature source are automatically locked
in all versions (if the feature source supports locking). This reduces the
chance of a conflict where an object is edited in two versions of the feature
source.
Conflicts can still occur, for example if one version is edited offline. In
these cases, you must specify how to resolve the conflicts before you save
the version.
■You cannot save or discard the active version.
■You cannot save or discard a version if it has children.
■You cannot save or discard a version if it has checked out features. You
must first unlock the objects by either checking them in or cancelling
check out.
602 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■When you save or discard a version, all features in the drawing that were
queried from that version are removed from the drawing.
■When you discard a version, all edits saved to that version are discarded.
■You cannot undo saving or discarding a version.
See also:
■Overview of Bringing In GIS Features on page 266
■Overview of Working with Features on page 576
■To create a new version on page 603
■To activate a version on page 603
■To commit changes back to the parent version on page 603
■To discard a version on page 604
To create a new version
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, right-click the feature source and click Manage
Versions.
This command is available only for feature sources that support
versioning.
2In the Versions dialog box, do one of the following operations:
■To create a child version of the default version, in the Versions dialog
box, click Add ➤ New Version.
■To create a child version of the selected version, in the Versions dialog
box, click Add ➤ New Child Version.
3Enter a name for the new version. Click OK.
To activate a version
■Select the version and click Active.
All queries are performed on the active version of the feature source.
To commit changes back to the parent version
1Check in features.
Managing Versions | 603
2Select the version and click Save.
If the parent version was changed since you created your version, you
must resolve which version to use.
To discard a version
1Check in any checked out features.
2Make sure the parent version is not connected in any other drawing.
3Select the version and click Remove.
Working with Drawing Objects
To work with drawing objects
■To edit data in attached drawings on page 605
■To clean up drawing data on page 636
■To create, edit, and manage topologies on page 688
■To use Map editing tools on page 785
■To work with polygon objects on page 811
■To use object classification on page 836
Overview of Working with Drawing Objects
You create and edit drawing objects using AutoCAD and AutoCAD-based
commands. This section describes how to create new drawing objects and edit
existing drawing objects.
Commands for drawing objects appear on the menus that are displayed in
the Map 3D for Drawings workspace, rather than the default Map 3D for
Geospatial workspace. To switch to the drawing workspace, choose View menu
➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout ➤ Map 3D for Drawings.
Use the following techniques to work with drawing data.
Use this method...To do this...
Work in a multiuser environment. ■Turn on object locking. on page ?
■Find out who has locked an object. on
page ?
604 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Use this method...To do this...
■Release locked objects for use by oth-
ers. on page ?
Query objects from attached drawings into
the current map, or edit objects from at-
Edit and save objects in attached drawings.
tached drawings and save them back. on
page ?
Use drawing cleanup. on page ?Correct common map errors resulting from
surveying, digitizing, and scanning errors,
and remove unnecessary detail.
Create node, network, or polygon topolo-
gies. on page ?
Use topology to analyze a set of objects
and data and their relationship.
Use map editing tools. on page ?Edit map-related data.
Use Track Coordinates to specify the exact
coordinates of the points. on page ?
Digitize new points in existing maps with
precision.
Use specialized polygon options. on page
811
Work with polygon objects.
Use annotation. on page ?Indicate textual values on an object.
Use object classification. on page 905Organize drawing objects based on the
real-world features that they represent.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings
To edit data in attached drawings
■To use object locking on page 606
■To edit and save objects on page 611
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 605
Sharing Attached Drawings
■Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
■Turning On Object Locking on page 608
■Finding Out Who Has an Object Locked on page 609
■Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User on page 610
See also:
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 611
To use object locking
■To turn on object locking on page 608
■To find out who has an object locked on page 609
■To release all locked objects on page 610
Overview of Sharing Attached Drawings
Object locking lets multiple network users simultaneously retrieve, edit, and
save back different objects while working in the same attached drawing. If
object locking is not selected, only one user can have write access to an active
drawing.
Use these techniques for object locking.
Use this method...To do this...
Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Op-
tions.
See Turning On Object Locking on page
608.
Turn on object locking.
Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Op-
tions ➤ Who Has It.
See Finding Out Who Has an Object
Locked on page 609
Find out who has locked an object.
606 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Use this method...To do this...
Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options
➤ Drawing Maintenance.
See Releasing All Locked Objects for a
Specific User on page 610.
Release locked objects.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
ADEWHOHASIT
Displays the current owner of a selected locked object
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Who Has
It?.
Menu
Show Who Has It
Icon
ADEWHOHASITCommand Line
Who Has It Information dialog boxDialog Box
ADEDWGMAINT
Removes locks from objects
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Maintenance
Menu
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 607
ADEDWGMAINTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Maintenance
Task Pane
Drawing Maintenance dialog boxDialog Box
Turning On Object Locking
If object locking is enabled, two network AutoCAD Map 3D users can edit
different objects in the same drawing at the same time, but cannot edit the
same object at the same time.
Any objects that you add to the save set are locked. Other users can view these
objects, but cannot save modifications back to the attached drawings until
you unlock the objects.
When you finish editing the objects, save them back to their attached drawings.
The objects are automatically unlocked.
Only a superuser can change object locking settings.
See also:
■Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D on page 132
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
NOTE You must have superuser privileges to change the Enable Object Locking
setting.
To turn on object locking
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Multi
User tab.
3Under Multi User Options, select Enable Object Locking.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
608 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Finding Out Who Has an Object Locked
Use the Who Has It operation at any time to find out who locked an object.
NOTE If the DWK file has been deleted, the user names are no longer available.
When this happens, AutoCAD Map 3D displays user names and drawing names
as *UNKNOWN*.
See also:
■Turning On Object Locking on page 608
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
To find out who has an object locked
1In the Drawing Workspace, click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options
➤ Who Has It.
2Select the object.
The Who Has It Information dialog box on page 1623 displays the name of the
user who has the object locked, the drawing that the object comes from, the
name of the current drawing, and the date and time the object was locked.
Quick Reference
ADEWHOHASIT
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 609
Displays the current owner of a selected locked object
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Who Has
It?.
Menu
Show Who Has It
Icon
ADEWHOHASITCommand Line
Who Has It Information dialog boxDialog Box
Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User
If a system failure occurs while objects are locked, you must manually release
the object locks. However, only a superuser can remove locks set by other
users.
NOTE If a drawing is activated in another user's drawing, you will not be able to
release locks in that drawing.
When you remove locks, the object is also removed from the save set. You
can restore the locks by adding the objects to the save set again.
See also:
■Logging Into AutoCAD Map 3D on page 132
■Turning On Object Locking on page 608
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
To release all locked objects
1Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance.
2Under Active Drawings, select the drawing that contains the locks to
release.
3Choose User List.
The names of the users responsible for the locks appear under User Name.
The number of objects locked by each user appears under Number of
Objects Locked.
4Choose Remove Locks.
610 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
If you do not have superuser privileges, you can remove only the locks that
you have set. AutoCAD Map 3D removes the objects from the save set.
If you have superuser privileges, you can select a user name and remove all
the locks set by that user.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGMAINT
Removes locks from objects
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Maintenance
Menu
ADEDWGMAINTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Maintenance
Task Pane
Drawing Maintenance dialog boxDialog Box
Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings
■Overview of Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 612
■Zooming to the Extents of Selected Drawings on page 616
■Viewing All Objects in Selected Attached Drawings on page 618
■Editing Objects in Attached Drawings on page 620
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Viewing Objects in the Save Set on page 624
■Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached Drawings on page 625
■Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings on page 627
■Saving Objects to the Current Drawing on page 628
■Saving Objects to a New Drawing on page 629
■Removing an Object from the Save Set on page 630
■Solving Problems When Saving Back to Attached Drawings on page 631
■Setting Save Back Options on page 634
To edit and save objects
■To zoom to the extents of selected drawings on page 618
■To view objects in source drawings on page 619
■To edit objects in attached drawings on page 621
■To save the edited objects back to their attached source drawings on page
621
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 611
■To add objects to the save set and lock the objects on page 624
■To view objects in the save set on page 625
■To save queried objects back to attached source drawings on page 626
■To save new objects to attached drawings on page 628
■To save objects to the current drawing on page 629
■To save objects to a new drawing on page 630
■To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects on page 631
■To redefine block definitions on save back on page 633
■To save back individual block components on page 633
■To check that the hatch pattern is in the save set on page 633
■To set editing and save back options on page 635
Overview of Editing and Saving Objects in
Attached Drawings
When you use AutoCAD Map 3D with multiple drawings, you can query
objects from attached drawings into the current drawing and create new
drawings, or you can edit the objects from the attached drawings and then
save them back.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
Use this method...To do this...
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click
Zoom Extents.
See Zooming to the Extents of Selected
Drawings on page 616
Zoom to the extents of selected drawings
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click
Quick View.
See Viewing All Objects in Selected At-
tached Drawings on page 618
View objects in source drawings
Edit objects in attached drawings 1Run a query on page 1023 to re-
trieve the objects to edit.
612 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Use this method...To do this...
2Click File menu ➤ Drawing
Save Set Options ➤ Add Items
to Save Set. Select the objects
to edit.
See Editing Objects in Attached Drawings
on page 620
Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Op-
tions ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
See Adding an Object to the Save Set on
page 622
Add objects to the save set and lock the
objects
Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Op-
tions ➤ Show Items in Drawing Save Set.
See Viewing Objects in the Save Set on
page 624
View objects in the save set
Add objects to the save set. Click File menu
➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
See Saving Queried Objects Back to At-
tached Drawings on page 625 and Saving
Save objects back to attached source
drawings
New Objects to Attached Drawings on
page 627
Click File menu ➤ Save.
Click File menu ➤ Save As.
Save objects to the current drawing or a
new drawing.
See Saving Objects to the Current Drawing
on page 628 and Saving Objects to a New
Drawing on page 629.
Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Op-
tions.
See Setting Save Back Options on page 634
Set editing and save back options
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 613
Quick Reference
ADEZEXTENTS
Zooms to display the drawing extents
Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Menu
Zoom Drawing Extents
Icon
ADEZEXTENTSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Zoom Extents
Task Pane
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog boxDialog Box
ADEQVIEWDWGS
Performs a quick display of active drawings
View menu ➤ Quick View Drawings
Menu
ADEQVIEWDWGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Quick
View-or- Right-click a drawing ➤ Quick View
Task Pane
Quick View Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADESELOBJS
614 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items
To Save Set
Menu
Add Objects to Save Set
Icon
ADESELOBJSCommand Line
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)Dialog Box
ADEREMOBJS
Removes objects from the save set so they aren't saved to source drawings
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove
Items From Save Set
Menu
Remove Objects from Save Set
Icon
ADEREMOBJSCommand Line
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set
command)
Dialog Box
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
SAVE
Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name
File menu ➤ Save
Menu
SAVECommand Line
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 615
SAVEAS
Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing
File menu ➤ Save As
Menu
SAVEASCommand Line
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Zooming to the Extents of Selected Drawings
Use Zoom Extents to zoom the current drawing to the extents of the selected
source drawings. Adjust the current drawing extents to view all objects after
you execute a query.
616 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
The drawing coordinates in the lower-left corner of the screen reflect the new
extents of the current drawing.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 617
See also:
■Setting Save Back Extents on page 158
To zoom to the extents of selected drawings
1In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click Zoom Extents.
2In the Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box on page 1734, select the drawings
to view.
3Click OK.
The command zooms the current drawing to the extents of the selected source
drawings. The drawing coordinates in the lower-left corner of your screen
reflect the new extents of the current drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEZEXTENTS
Zooms to display the drawing extents
Click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Menu
Zoom Drawing Extents
Icon
ADEZEXTENTSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Zoom Extents
Task Pane
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog boxDialog Box
Viewing All Objects in Selected Attached Drawings
Use Quick View to preview the contents of one or more active source drawings.
618 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick View shows all objects in the selected source drawings.
You can plot the results of a Quick View.
NOTE Quick View displays objects but does not bring them into the drawing. The
display contains one selectable picture for each source drawing. To bring objects
into the current drawing, define a query that copies the objects from the source
drawing into the current drawing. Quick View does not display shapes.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
To view objects in source drawings
1In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings. Click Quick View.
2In the Quick View Drawings dialog box on page 1733, select the drawings
to quick view.
To control the display of nested drawings, select them individually.
3To filter the list of active drawings on the basis of file names, descriptions,
or both, click Filter, specify the filter, and click OK. Then check the box
next to Filter.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 619
4Select Zoom To The Extents Of Selected Drawings to see the extents of
all the drawings to review with Quick View.
5Click OK.
The objects in the active source drawing appear. Although you see many
objects, each set of objects appears as a single object from each drawing.
If you attempt to select several objects, AutoCAD Map 3D reports "one
object found" for each of the source drawings.
You can zoom and pan, but you cannot select or edit individual objects. When
you regenerate or redraw, the pictures are cleared from the current drawing.
To edit the objects, define a query that copies the objects from the source
drawing into the current drawing. For more information, see Overview of
Queries on page 1023.
Quick Reference
ADEQVIEWDWGS
Performs a quick display of active drawings
View menu ➤ Quick View Drawings
Menu
ADEQVIEWDWGSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Quick
View-or- Right-click a drawing ➤ Quick View
Task Pane
Quick View Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
Editing Objects in Attached Drawings
To view and edit objects in attached drawings, create a query that specifies
the objects you want. When you run the query, AutoCAD Map 3D finds all
the objects in the attached drawings that match the query criteria, and copies
those objects to the current drawing.
Example: You have separate drawings for each quadrant of a town. You create
a main drawing and attach the other drawings, and then view all water mains
in the town or all emergency routes.
You can save the queried objects back to their attached drawings by adding
them to the save set before you edit them. When you save the current drawing,
620 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you to save the objects in the save set back to their
attached drawings. If you do not add modified objects to the save set, you can
save the modifications to the current drawing or to a new drawing, but the
changes are not saved back to the attached drawings.
Markup objects are not added to the save set. To copy them from the current
drawing to an attached drawing, open the attached drawing directly. Copy
the markup objects in the current drawing and paste them into the other
drawing.
WARNING If you work with an attached drawing from a previous release and
save back your changes, AutoCAD Map 3D updates the attached drawing to the
current format. To retain the attached drawing in the previous drawing format,
do not save back your changes.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 611
To edit objects in attached drawings
1Run a query on page 1023 to retrieve the objects to edit.
2Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
Select the objects to edit.
AutoCAD Map 3D locks the objects in the attached drawings so no other
users can modify them.
3Edit the objects.
To save the edited objects back to their attached source drawings
1Click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 621
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
Adding an Object to the Save Set
If you modify an object that was queried from an attached drawing, AutoCAD
Map 3D prompts you to add the object to the save set, which locks the object.
If an object is locked, other users cannot modify the object.
TIP Lock the objects before you edit them. This ensures that other users are not
modifying the same objects. To lock an object before editing, manually add the
object to the save set.
When you save changed objects back to attached drawings, only objects in
the save set are saved back.
NOTE You can set an option on page 634 to automatically add modified objects
to the save set without prompting, or you can turn the prompt off.
New objects are not automatically added to the save set. You must manually
add them to the save set.
622 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Additional Information
Keep these points in mind as you modify objects and add them to the save
set:
■If an object is on a locked layer in the attached drawing or you are working
in the Layout tab, you cannot add the object to the save set.
■If your system administrator has enabled object locking on page 606,
AutoCAD Map 3D locks the objects in the attached drawing when you add
the objects to the save set.
■By breaking a queried object into two pieces using the BREAK, TRIM,
FILLET, CHAMFER, or EXPLODE commands, you create both an altered
queried object and a new object. When you save back the objects, the
queried object is automatically saved back to its attached source drawing,
and the new object is automatically added to the save set. However, the
new object does not have an associated attached drawing; you must specify
the drawing to which it will be saved.
■If you experience a system failure while objects are locked, you must use
the Drawing Maintenance command to release the object locks on page
610.
■AutoCAD Map 3D cannot save edits back to a detached drawing. If you
query and edit objects from an attached drawing, do not detach that
drawing from the current drawing before you perform the save back
operation.
■If you decide you don't want to save changes to an object back to the
attached source drawing, remove the object from the save set. The changes
are maintained in the current drawing, but are not saved back to the
attached drawing.
■If you delete an object after adding it to the save set, you can restore it by
removing erased objects from the save set. AutoCAD Map 3D restores all
erased objects in the save set.
■After you add objects to the save set, you can undo the operation using
the UNDO command.
See also:
■Removing an Object from the Save Set on page 630
■Releasing All Locked Objects for a Specific User on page 610
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 623
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
■Setting Save Back Options on page 634
■Solving Problems When Saving Back to Attached Drawings on page 631
To add objects to the save set and lock the objects
1Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
2Enter n to add all new objects to the save set, or enter s and select the
objects to add.
Quick Reference
ADESELOBJS
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items
To Save Set
Menu
Add Objects to Save Set
Icon
ADESELOBJSCommand Line
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)Dialog Box
Viewing Objects in the Save Set
Objects that you have added to the save set are locked. You can highlight
these locked objects in your drawing.
See also:
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Removing an Object from the Save Set on page 630
■Turning On Object Locking on page 608
624 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To view objects in the save set
1Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items in Drawing
Save Set.
2All locked objects are highlighted.
To remove the highlighting, press Enter.
Quick Reference
ADESHOWOBJS
Displays the objects in the save set
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show
Items In Drawing Save Set
Menu
Show Objects in Save Set
Icon
ADESHOWOBJSCommand Line
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command)Dialog Box
Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached
Drawings
Objects saved back to their attached drawings replace the original objects.
AutoCAD Map 3D lets you save objects to attached drawings in read-only
directories.
You cannot undo a Save To Source Drawings operation. Once you perform a
Save DWG Save Set operation, attached drawings contain the modified objects.
WARNING If you work with an attached drawing from a previous release and
save back your changes, AutoCAD Map 3D updates the attached drawing to the
current format. To retain the attached drawing in the previous drawing format,
do not save back your changes.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 625
See also:
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Removing an Object from the Save Set on page 630
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
■Solving Problems When Saving Back to Attached Drawings on page 631
To save queried objects back to attached source drawings
1To make sure objects are in the save set, click File menu ➤ Drawing Save
Set Options ➤ Show Items in Drawing Save Set.
Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
Select the objects to save.
2Click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
3In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box on page 1621, select Save
Queried Objects.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
626 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings
If you create new objects that you want to add to attached drawings, select
save order options for the new objects.
■Selective — Prompts you to select the objects to save to each attached
drawing.
■Area — Saves new objects in to the attached drawing within whose save
back extents the objects lie. By default, the save back extents correspond
to the drawings extents. You can change the save back extents of attached
drawings.
The newly created arc crosses three tiled attached drawings but is saved to the first
drawing in the list of attached drawings. Drawings are listed in the order in which you
attach them.
■Layer — Saves new objects to attached drawing layers that use the same
names as the current drawing layers on which the objects lie. If more than
one active drawing contains a given layer name, AutoCAD Map 3D saves
the object to the first drawing that contains that layer.
■None — Disables all other save back options. For example, to manually
specify the objects to save and the attached drawing in which to save them,
set the first save back option to Selective, and set the other two options to
None.
If AutoCAD Map 3D is unable to save new objects using option 1, it uses the
setting for save order option 2, and so forth.
You can save objects to attached drawings located in read-only directories.
See also:
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Removing an Object from the Save Set on page 630
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 627
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
To save new objects to attached drawings
1To add the objects to the save set, click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set
Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set. Enter n to add all new objects to the
save set, or enter s and select the objects to add.
2Click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
3In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box on page 1621, select Save
Newly Created Objects.
4Specify the Save Order.
5Select the drawings to save objects to.
6Click OK.
When you use the Selective save method, select the objects to save to
each attached drawing.
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
Saving Objects to the Current Drawing
When you query objects from attached drawings into the current drawing,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates an association between the original object in the
attached drawing and the copy of the object in the current drawing.
628 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
If you edit one of these queried objects, you can save the edited object back
to the attached drawing, or you can save the edited object to the current
drawing. If you save an object to the current drawing, the original object is
unchanged in the attached drawings.
TIP When you close the current drawing, the association between queried objects
and their attached drawings is removed. If you want to save changes back to the
original drawing, you must save back before you close the current drawing.
See also:
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 611
■Removing an Object from the Save Set on page 630
To save objects to the current drawing
1Click File menu ➤ Save.
2If prompted to save objects to attached source drawings, do not do so at
this time, since this removes them from the current drawing.
To save the objects to both the current drawing and attached drawings, first
clear Erase Saved Back Objects on the Save Back tab on page 635 of the AutoCAD
Map Options dialog box.
Quick Reference
SAVE
Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name
File menu ➤ Save
Menu
SAVECommand Line
Saving Objects to a New Drawing
When you save objects to a new drawing, you create a copy of the current
drawing, including objects, options, queries, and attached drawings. If you
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 629
queried objects from attached drawings, the original objects are unchanged
in the attached drawings.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 611
To save objects to a new drawing
1Run a query to retrieve the objects you want. Be sure to use Draw mode
so the retrieved objects are copied to the current drawing.
2Click File menu ➤ Save As.
3Enter a name for the new drawing.
4If prompted to save objects to attached source drawings, do not do so at
this time, since this removes them from the current drawing.
To save the objects to both a new drawing and to attached drawings, first clear
Erase Saved Back Objects on the Save Back tab on page 635 of the AutoCAD
Map Options dialog box.
Quick Reference
SAVEAS
Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing
File menu ➤ Save As
Menu
SAVEASCommand Line
Removing an Object from the Save Set
You can manually remove an object from the save set. Removing the object
from the save set releases the lock on the object.
Generally, when you edit an object that was queried in from an attached
drawing, that object is locked so no one else can edit it. When you save objects
back to attached drawings, the locks are automatically removed. (To change
this default setting, use the Map Options command.)
630 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
In some cases, you may want to manually remove an object from the save set.
See also:
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 611
To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects
1Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove Items from
Save Set.
2Enter s to select the objects to remove, or enter e to remove objects that
have been erased from the current drawing.
If you enter s, select the objects to remove from the save set. Press Enter
when you finish selecting objects.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADEREMOBJS
Removes objects from the save set so they aren't saved to source drawings
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove
Items From Save Set
Menu
Remove Objects from Save Set
Icon
ADEREMOBJSCommand Line
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set
command)
Dialog Box
Solving Problems When Saving Back to Attached
Drawings
Several issues can arise when you save queried objects back to attached
drawings.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 631
Redefining Blocks on Save Back
When you retrieve a block, you can use the EXPLODE command to break the
block into its component elements, edit the separate objects, and then use
the BLOCK command to redefine the block.
To save the redefined block definition back to the attached source drawing,
make sure that the Redefine Block Definitions On Save Back option on the
Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box is selected. AutoCAD
Map 3D sets this option by default.
Exploding Blocks and Save Back
If you explode a block, the block definition is deleted, and you are prompted
to add the separate objects to the save set. If you answer Yes and use the default
settings, the block components are erased and not saved back. To save the
individual objects back to the attached source drawings, you must add the
individual components of the block to the save set.
Saving Back Dimensions
If you set a global coordinate system or use the Transform editing tool, you
might have problems saving back dimensions. If you use a location query to
retrieve one or more dimensions and save the dimension back to the attached
source drawings, you might find that another location query will not retrieve
the dimension. In this case, you should detach the source drawing and reattach
it before repeating the location query.
Saving Back Hatch Patterns
When you create an associative hatch pattern, information is written to the
boundary objects. When you add such a hatch pattern to a save set, the
boundary is also added to ensure data integrity.
When you modify a queried hatch boundary object, the geometry is modified
and AutoCAD Map 3D automatically updates the hatch pattern. You are
prompted to add the boundary to the save set. Even if you answer Yes, the
hatch pattern might not be added to the save set. Check that the hatch pattern
is in the save set before you save back the changed objects.
When you add an associative hatch pattern to the save set, AutoCAD Map 3D
attempts to add the boundary objects that define the hatch pattern. If all
boundary objects are not available, you cannot add the hatch pattern to the
save set.
632 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached Drawings on page 625
■Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings on page 627
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Removing an Object from the Save Set on page 630
To redefine block definitions on save back
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Save Back
tab.
3Under Save Back To Source Drawings, select Redefine Block Definitions
On Save Back.
4Click OK.
To save back individual block components
1Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
2Select all the block components.
3Press Enter.
To check that the hatch pattern is in the save set
1Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items in Drawing
Save Set.
2Check that the hatch pattern is highlighted.
3If the hatch pattern is not highlighted, make sure that all boundary objects
are added to the save set.
Quick Reference
ADESELOBJS
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 633
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items
To Save Set
Menu
Add Objects to Save Set
Icon
ADESELOBJSCommand Line
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)Dialog Box
ADESHOWOBJS
Displays the objects in the save set
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show
Items In Drawing Save Set
Menu
Show Objects in Save Set
Icon
ADESHOWOBJSCommand Line
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command)Dialog Box
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Save Back Options
You can specify a number of options that affect how queried objects are saved
back to attached drawings or feature sources. These options apply to the current
drawing.
634 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Save Set and Edit Set Options
■Don't Add Objects Automatically — Edited objects are not added to the
save set, and you are not prompted to add them.
Use this option if you are creating a new drawing and are not planning to
save changes back to attached drawings. You can still manually add objects
to the save set on page 622.
■Prompt To Add Objects — When you edit an object that was retrieved
from an attached drawing or a feature source, you are prompted to add
the object to the save set.
Use this option if you plan to save some edited objects, but not others,
back to attached drawing or feature source.
■Add Objects Automatically Without Prompting — When you edit an object
that was retrieved from an attached drawing or feature source, the object
is automatically added to the save set.
Use this option if you plan to save most modified objects back to attached
drawings and feature sources.
NOTE If you create new objects that you want to save to attached drawings, you
must manually add them to the save set. AutoCAD Map 3D does not prompt you
to add them.
See also:
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Saving Objects to the Current Drawing on page 628
■Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings on page 627
■Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached Drawings on page 625
■Saving Objects to a New Drawing on page 629
■AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628
To set editing and save back options
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
2In the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628, select the Save Back
tab.
Editing Data in Attached Drawings | 635
3Set the options you want.
■Use the Save Set options to specify settings for saving objects to
attached drawings.
■Use the Edit Set options to specify settings for saving objects to feature
sources.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
Cleaning Up Drawing Data
Use drawing cleanup to correct common map errors resulting from surveying,
digitizing, and scanning errors. You can also remove unnecessary detail from
complex maps.
To clean up drawing data
■To clean up objects in a map on page 638
■To select and anchor objects for drawing cleanup on page 640
■To select cleanup actions and set options on page 643
■To specify how to convert the objects after cleanup on page 646
■To set up markers for interactive mode on page 649
■To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile on page 650
■To load an existing drawing cleanup profile on page 651
■To edit a drawing cleanup profile on page 651
636 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■To select a correction method on page 652
■To select cleanup actions and set options on page 657
Overview of Cleaning Up Maps
Use drawing cleanup to correct common geometry errors resulting from
surveying, digitizing, and scanning before you define a topology, perform a
map analysis, plot a map, or export to a geospatial data format.
You can also remove unnecessary detail from complex maps.
Example: You digitized paper maps and now some street intersections do not
align correctly. You want clean the maps before you create a topology.
You can perform the following cleanup actions:
■delete duplicate objects
■erase short objects
■break crossing objects
■extend undershoots
■extend to apparent intersections
■snap clustered nodes
■dissolve pseudo nodes
■erase dangling objects (overshoots)
■simplify objects
■delete zero-length objects
■weed 3D polyline vertices
WARNING To edit topologies, use the topology editing commands on page 715.
Drawing Cleanup can make a topology invalid. In addition, when a cleanup action
creates a new object or breaks an object into multiple segments, classification
information remains with the segment that contains the start point of the original
object. Classify other segments manually.
See also:
■Correction Methods on page 651
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 637
■Cleanup Actions on page 657
■Overview of Editing a Topology on page 716
WARNING To edit topologies, use the topology editing commands on page 715.
Drawing Cleanup can make a topology invalid.
To clean up objects in a map
1Open the drawing containing the objects to clean or query the objects
into the current drawing.
2Because your map may be altered during the cleanup operation, back up
your data before starting.
3Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
4Follow these steps:
■Selecting and Anchoring Objects on page 640 Select the objects to
include in the cleanup operation and the objects to anchor. Click
Next.
■Setting Cleanup Options on page 643 Select cleanup actions and set
the parameters for each action you select. Specify whether to correct
errors automatically or to review and confirm each correction. Click
Next.
■Converting Objects After Cleanup on page 646 Specify how to treat
the original objects after the cleanup operation is complete. Click
Next.
■Setting Markers for Interactive Mode on page 647 If you selected
Interactive mode in Setting Cleanup Options to review error
corrections, specify the error markers to use. Click Next.
■Saving Cleanup Settings on page 650 To save your settings as a profile,
click Save.
5Click Finish.
AutoCAD Map 3D performs the cleanup with the options and values you
specified.
638 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
6Depending on whether you selected Interactive or Automatic, AutoCAD
Map 3D does one of the following:
■If you selected Interactive mode on page 653, AutoCAD Map 3D
displays a list of detected errors. You can review the errors and decide
how to handle them. For example, you can place markers on the
errors, correct them, or ignore them.
■If you selected Automatic mode on page 652, AutoCAD Map 3D corrects
all detected errors automatically and reports a summary of the results
on the command line.
You can run the operation again to verify that you corrected all existing errors.
Cleaning up geometry in a drawing creates new geometry and new
relationships between the objects. You may need to repeat the cleanup
operation.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Step 1: Selecting and Anchoring Objects
Start by selecting the objects to include in the cleanup. You can automatically
select all objects or select objects manually.
You also select the objects to anchor. Anchored objects are reference points
and are not altered or moved; objects being cleaned are moved towards
anchored objects.
In addition, you can filter object selection by layer and object class so that
only objects that belong to the specified layers and object classes are selected.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 639
Example: Select all objects on the Roads layer for cleanup, and anchor survey
points in the Monuments object class so that they maintain their accuracy.
NOTE In general, you can clean up linear objects only (lines, arcs, circles, and
polylines), although a few cleanup actions support additional object types, including
points, blocks, text, and mtext. Anchoring supports these additional object types.
Any unsupported object types are not cleaned up or anchored.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Select Objects Page on page 1331
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
To select and anchor objects for drawing cleanup
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Objects page, under Objects To Include In Drawing Cleanup,
select the objects to clean up.
■Choose the method to use for selecting objects. Click Select All to
select all objects. Click Select Manually to select individual objects.
■To limit object selection to objects on specific layers or in specific
object classes, specify the layers and object classes to include.
■If you chose Select Manually, click Select Objects To Be Included to
select objects in the drawing area. Press Enter to return to the Select
Objects page.
In general, you can clean up linear objects only (lines, arcs, circles, and
polylines). A few cleanup actions support additional object types, such
as points, blocks, text, and mtext. Unsupported object types are not
cleaned up.
The status line shows how many objects are selected and how many have
been filtered out.
3Under Objects To Anchor In Drawing Cleanup, select the objects to use
as reference points during the drawing cleanup. These points are not
altered. You can anchor linear objects, points, blocks, text, and mtext.
■To limit object selection to objects on specific layers or in specific
object classes, specify the layers and object classes to include.
640 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Click Select Objects To Be Anchored. Select the objects to anchor.
Press Enter to return to the Select Objects page.
4Click Next.
5Continue with To select cleanup actions and set options on page 643.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options
As you clean up a map, you select one or more cleanup actions to perform.
Each cleanup action detects a different type of map error, for example,
duplicate objects, undershoots, or zero-length objects.
For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines individually. Run
other cleanup actions individually or with a minimum of other actions.
Cleanup Actions
You can perform the following cleanup actions:
■Delete Duplicates on page 663
■Erase Short Objects on page 665
■Break Crossing Objects on page 667
■Extend Undershoots on page 669
■Apparent Intersection on page 671
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 641
■Snap Clustered Nodes on page 673
■Dissolve Pseudo Nodes on page 676
■Erase Dangling Objects on page 678
■Simplify Objects on page 680
■Zero-Length Objects on page 683
■Weed Polylines on page 684
Order of Cleanup Actions
The order of cleanup actions can produce different results. Specify the order
by moving cleanup actions up or down in the list. The action at the top of
the list is performed first.
Setting Cleanup Options
Set the options for each cleanup action individually. For more information,
see the individual help topics about each cleanup action.
Understanding the Tolerance Setting
Tolerance is the minimum distance allowed between linear objects or nodes.
If two linear objects or nodes are separated by a distance less than the tolerance,
AutoCAD Map 3D corrects the error.
642 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
If you set the tolerance too low, AutoCAD Map 3D might miss some errors.
If you set the tolerance too high, AutoCAD Map 3D might correct linear objects
that are not errors. Decide if the data constitutes an error and choose a suitable
tolerance to eliminate errors.
For example, a tolerance of 10 would eliminate dangles less than 10 meters
long; but in some cases, such dangles might be the correct mapping of a short
pipe or street.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Select Actions Page on page 1326
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
To select cleanup actions and set options
1On the Select Actions page, select the cleanup actions to perform by
adding them to the Selected Actions list.
To add a cleanup action to the Selected Actions list, select the action in
the Cleanup Actions on page 657 list, and click Add.
For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines individually.
Run other cleanup actions individually or with a minimum of other
actions.
2In the Selected Actions list, specify the order of cleanup actions. The order
can effect results. The first action in the list is performed first. To change
the order, highlight an action and click the up or down arrow.
3In the Selected Actions list, select the action for which you want to specify
settings.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 643
4Under Cleanup Parameters, specify the settings to use for the selected
action. For more information about each cleanup action, click one of the
following links:
■Delete Duplicates on page 663
■Erase Short Objects on page 665
■Break Crossing Objects on page 667
■Extend Undershoots on page 669
■Apparent Intersection on page 671
■Snap Clustered Nodes on page 673
■Dissolve Pseudo Nodes on page 676
■Erase Dangling Objects on page 678
■Simplify Objects on page 680
■Zero-Length Objects on page 683
■Weed Polylines on page 684
5To review detected errors before correcting them, under Options, select
Interactive. To have AutoCAD Map 3D correct all detected errors without
further input from you, select Automatic.
NOTE Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines are not interactive operations.
AutoCAD Map 3D makes these changes automatically during cleanup.
6Click Next.
7Continue with Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After Cleanup
on page 645.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
644 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After
Cleanup
As you clean up a map, you can specify how to treat the original objects after
the cleanup operation is complete.
■Modify Original Objects — Uses the original layer and as much of the
original data as possible. For example, linear objects are extended where
necessary.
■Retain Original And Create New Objects — Keeps the original objects and
creates new objects on a layer you specify. For example, to extend an
undershoot, new linear objects are created on the specified layer for the
undershoot and target linear objects, and the originals are retained.
■Delete Original And Create New Objects — Deletes all the original objects
and creates new objects on a layer you specify. For example, the original
undershoot is deleted, and a new linear object is created that extends to
the required location.
NOTE When you create new objects, existing object data and database links are
copied to the new objects. All created objects are assigned the current value of
the ELEVATION system variable.
Converting Objects to Polylines
You can specify whether to convert lines, arcs, and 3D polylines to 2D
polylines, and convert circles to arcs or 2D polylines. If you convert arcs to
polylines, the polyline is created using a true arc, not a set of straight line
segments. If you convert a circle to a polyline, the polyline is created using
two true arcs, not a set of straight line segments. Use these conversion options
in the following cases:
■You plan to use the results of the drawing cleanup operation in another
program that accepts only polylines.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 645
■You want to modify the line width of the arcs, circles, or lines so you can
use them in a thematic map. You can assign line width only to polylines.
NOTE If you convert objects to different entity types during the cleanup process,
classified objects may be modified so that they no longer meet the object class
definition and will be unclassified.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification on page 109
■Cleanup Methods Page on page 1323
To specify how to convert the objects after cleanup
1On the Cleanup Methods page, under Cleanup Method, specify how to
treat the objects after the conversion process is complete.
NOTE Creating new objects may increase file size significantly.
2If you are creating new objects, select the layer to use.
3Under Convert Selected Objects, specify whether to convert lines, arcs,
and 3D polylines to 2D polylines, and convert circles to arcs or 2D
polylines.
4To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
5Do one of the following:
■If you selected Interactive on page 653 on the Select Actions page, click
Next to continue with To set up markers for interactive mode on page
649.
■If you selected Automatic on page 652 on the Select Actions page, click
Finish to start the cleanup process.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
646 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Step 4: Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode
When you review errors interactively, AutoCAD Map 3D places error markers
on detected errors to help you locate the errors more quickly and evaluate
whether they need correction.
If you correct an error, the marker is removed. If you do not correct the error,
you can remove the marker and skip the error, or leave the marker in the map
for later reference.
You can mark each error with a different shape and color marker to indicate
each type of operation.
If you clean up a map multiple times, you can remove or maintain markers
from earlier operations. You can also remove or maintain markers after the
current operation.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 647
Set the type and color of markers used to mark errors.
■If you correct errors automatically, errors are not marked.
■The markers used in drawing cleanup are the same as those used when
creating a polygon topology. Before beginning either operation, existing
markers are removed.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm Corrections on page 653
■Error Markers Page on page 1325
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
NOTE The Error Markers page is available only if you select Interactive in Step 2
on page 643.
648 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To set up markers for interactive mode
1To remove markers placed by an earlier cleanup operation, on the Error
Markers page, select Erase Markers When Cleanup Starts. This is useful if
you repeat the cleanup process to catch errors missed in the first pass.
2To leave markers after this cleanup operation, select Maintain Markers
When Command Ends.
3In the Marker Size box, specify a marker size. A value between 3% and
7% is usually suitable.
4Under Blocks And Colors, select the marker shape and color for each type
of error.
5To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
6Click Finish.
The Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box appears, where you review errors
before correcting them on page 655.
You can run the operation again to verify that you corrected all existing errors.
Cleaning up geometry in a drawing creates new geometry and new
relationships between the objects. You may need to repeat the cleanup
operation.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 649
Saving Cleanup Settings as a Profile
Once you have specified the settings for drawing cleanup, you can save them
as a profile for later use. Profiles are also useful when you automate the drawing
cleanup process with scripts. Drawing cleanup profiles are saved as *.dpf files.
Saving Drawing Cleanup Settings as a Profile
Drawing cleanup profiles include all the options specified in the drawing
cleanup dialog boxes, including the layer names used for object selection and
anchoring, cleanup actions and settings, cleanup methods, and error marker
settings (if any). Drawing cleanup profiles do not include the actual objects
selected and anchored on the specified layers.
Loading Drawing Cleanup Profiles
Load a profile to make the saved settings current. Settings that are loaded
include the object selection and anchoring criteria, cleanup actions and
settings, cleanup methods, and error marker settings.
Editing Drawing Cleanup Profiles
You can edit drawing cleanup profiles in AutoCAD Map 3D and save your
changes, either replacing an existing profile or saving it as a new profile.
WARNING Do not edit drawing cleanup profiles outside of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Doing so may produce unexpected results.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2Specify the settings to save.
3Click Save.
4In the Save Drawing Cleanup Profile dialog box, enter a name for the
profile. Click Save.
650 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To load an existing drawing cleanup profile
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2Click Load.
3In the Select Drawing Cleanup Profile dialog box, select the profile to
load.
4Click Open.
The settings from the selected profile are made current.
To edit a drawing cleanup profile
1Load the profile as described above.
2Make changes to the drawing cleanup settings.
3Save the profile.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Correction Methods
You can correct errors automatically or review each error and decide how to
fix it.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 651
■Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After Cleanup on page 645
■Step 4: Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode on page 647
To select a correction method
■To correct errors automatically on page 652
■To review errors before correcting them on page 655
Using Automatic Mode to Correct Errors
You can configure AutoCAD Map 3D so that it cleans up detected errors
automatically. The results of the cleanup are displayed on the command line.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After Cleanup on page 645
■Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm Corrections on page 653
To correct errors automatically
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2In the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects dialog box, select the objects to
clean and the objects to anchor. Click Next.
3In the Select Actions Page, select cleanup actions by adding them to the
Selected Actions list. Specify the cleanup parameters for each action.
4In the Options area, select Automatic.
5Click Next to go to the Cleanup Methods Page where you specify how
you want to treat the objects after the cleanup process is complete.
6Click Finish.
AutoCAD Map 3D corrects the errors and displays a summary of the
results on the command line.
652 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm
Corrections
Use the Interactive option in the Select Actions Page if you want to review
the list of errors detected by the Drawing Cleanup command, place error
markers showing their location in the map, and zoom to and highlight errors
to better examine them. Correct errors one at a time or correct all the errors
detected for a selected cleanup action as a single action.
You can configure error markers on page 647 on the Drawing Cleanup - Error
Markers dialog box. You can also indicate whether to maintain markers both
from earlier cleanup operations and after the current cleanup operation.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 653
Review, mark, and correct errors interactively.
■All cleanup actions are represented in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog
box, with the exception of Simplify Objects which is not an interactive
operation.
■If you are cleaning up short objects, AutoCAD Map 3D divides the detected
errors into three groups: Short Degenerate Objects, Short Line Objects, and
Short Polyline Objects so you can evaluate and correct these types of errors
separately. If you are cleaning up zero length objects, AutoCAD Map 3D
divides the errors into two groups: Zero Length Line Objects and Zero
Length Polyline Objects.
■When you fix an error or group of errors, it may affect the errors further
down the list. For example, if you break two crossing objects and create
four new, shorter objects, the new objects may be shorter than the tolerance
specified for Erase Short Objects tolerance. Drawing Cleanup would detect
these as new, additional errors and add them to the list.
■Objects are not updated visually until you close the dialog box. When you
review the new errors, objects will not appear in their corrected state.
654 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 3: Specifying How to Convert Objects After Cleanup on page 645
■Step 4: Setting Up Markers for Interactive Mode on page 647
■Using Automatic Mode to Correct Errors on page 652
To review errors before correcting them
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2In the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects dialog box, select the objects to
clean and the objects to anchor. Click Next.
3In the Select Actions Page, select the cleanup actions to perform by adding
them to the Selected Actions list. Specify the cleanup parameters for each
action.
4To review errors before correcting them, in the Options area, select
Interactive.
5On the left side of the dialog box, click Error Markers in the list.
You can also continue clicking Next to set all the parameters for the
cleanup operation. After you click Next on the Cleanup methods page,
you can set the markers.
6In the Error Markers Page, specify the size, shape, and color of the error
markers to use for each cleanup action. Also specify whether to remove
markers from earlier operations or remove markers after this cleanup.
7To save your settings in a profile on page 650, click Save.
8Click Finish to run the cleanup process and review the list of detected
errors in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box.
In the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box, the first cleanup action with
detected errors is selected. All other actions are dimmed. Cleanup actions
are listed in the order specified on the Drawing Cleanup - Selected Actions
dialog box. The icons to the left of the action name show you what the
error marker for that action looks like.
All cleanup actions are represented in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog
box, with the exception of Simplify Objects which is not an interactive
operation. For short objects, AutoCAD Map 3D divides the detected errors
into three groups: Short Degenerate Objects, Short Line Objects, and
Short Polyline Objects. If you are cleaning up zero length objects,
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 655
AutoCAD Map 3D divides the errors into two groups: Zero Length Line
Objects and Zero Length Polyline Objects.
9You can address all errors for each cleanup action as follows:
■To correct all errors for the selected action, click Fix All.
NOTE Corrections are made after you finish reviewing and correcting
all errors.
■To display error markers for all errors for the selected action, making
them easily visible in the map, click Mark All.
■To ignore all errors for a selected action and remove any error markers,
click Remove All.
■To go to the next cleanup action in the list without correcting errors,
click Next Action.
10 To address errors one at a time, click the plus (+) next to the cleanup
action. Select Error 1 of... and choose an option:
■To correct the current error and go to the next one, click Fix.
NOTE Corrections appear after you finish reviewing and correcting all
errors.
■To leave a marker on the current error, click Mark.
■To go to the next error in the list without making a correction and
remove any error marker, click Remove.
■To skip an error, click Next.
11 You can highlight and zoom to errors in the map by setting the following
options under Zoom Settings:
■To dynamically zoom to selected errors, select Auto Zoom.
■To indicate the percent of the drawing display that selected error
occupies, enter a value in the Zoom % box. For example, specify 100%
to zoom the display to the extents of the selected error, or specify
60% to display more of the drawing outside the selected error. Specify
0 to maintain the current zoom level.
■To zoom to the selected error, clear the Auto Zoom check box and
click Zoom.
656 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
12 Click Close to make the corrections to your map.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Cleanup Actions
Drawing cleanup actions detect map errors (for example, duplicate objects,
undershoots, or zero length objects), simplify complex 2D maps, and weed
and supplement 3D polylines.
To select cleanup actions and set options
■To select cleanup actions and set options on page 661
■To delete duplicate objects on page 664
■To erase short linear objects on page 666
■To break crossing objects on page 668
■To extend undershoots on page 671
■To extend objects to their apparent intersection on page 673
■To snap clustered nodes on page 675
■To dissolve pseudo nodes on page 677
■To erase dangling objects on page 679
■To simplify objects on page 682
■To identify zero-length objects on page 683
■To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline on page 687
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 657
Overview of Cleanup Actions
Drawing cleanup actions can be used to detect map errors (for example,
duplicate objects, undershoots, or zero length objects), simplify complex 2D
maps, and to weed and supplement 3D polylines. Because drawing cleanup
may alter your data, make a backup of your data before cleaning up a map.
For best results, run cleanup actions individually or with a minimum of other
actions.
The following table shows examples of problems that Drawing Cleanup can
correct.
Cleanup ActionDescription of
Problem
After Drawing
Cleanup
Before Drawing
Cleanup
Delete Duplicates on page 663Duplicate objects
Erase Short Objects on page 665Short objects
Break Crossing Objects on page 667Crossing objects
Extend Undershoots on page 669Undershoots
Apparent Intersection on page 671Objects could be ex-
tended along their
natural paths to inter-
sect at a projected
point
658 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Cleanup ActionDescription of
Problem
After Drawing
Cleanup
Before Drawing
Cleanup
Snap Clustered Nodes on page 673Node cluster
Dissolve Pseudo Nodes on page 676Pseudo-nodes
Erase Dangling Objects on page 678Dangles or over-
shoots
Simplify Objects on page 6802D linear object sim-
plification
Zero-Length Objects on page 683.Zero-length objects
Weed Polylines on page 684Too many or too few
vertices in a 3D poly-
line
Order of Cleanup Actions
The order of cleanup actions can produce different results. Specify the order
by moving cleanup actions up or down in the list. The action at the top of
the list is performed first.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 659
Setting Cleanup Options
Set the options for each cleanup action individually. For more information,
see the individual help topics about each cleanup action.
Cleaning for Topology
Some types of errors should be fixed before you create a topology. The
following table indicates data errors that should be considered when you are
creating a network or polygon topology. Node topologies do not usually
require cleanup.
Polygon TopologyNetwork TopologyError
Must removeMust removeDuplicates
Can removeCan removeShort Linear Objects
Must removeCheck for validity. See Creating a
Network Topology on page 695.
Crossing Linear Objects
Must removeMust removeUndershoots
Must removeMust removeNode Cluster
Can removeCan removePseudo Nodes
Must removeCheck for validity. Can removeDangles or overshoots
Can applyCan applySimplify Linear Objects
Must removeMust removeZero-Length Objects
In addition, if you have closed polylines (polygons) that may be missing
centroids, you should create centroids on page 748 for them before using them
in topology.
Notes
■Cleanup affects objects on layers that are OFF. It does not affect objects
on layers that are FROZEN. It is recommended that you use drawing cleanup
660 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
on a layer-by-layer basis, or on selective sets of layers. Avoid using automatic
cleanup for all objects on all layers.
■All tools except Weed Polylines work in two dimensions only, ignoring
Z-values. When you use the 2D tools, Z data (indicating elevations) might
be lost when processing objects at different elevations.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Editing a Topology on page 716
To select cleanup actions and set options
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, select the cleanup actions to perform by
adding them to the Selected Actions list.
To add an action to the Selected Actions list, select the action in the
Cleanup Actions list. Click Add.
■To delete duplicate objects on page 664
■To erase short linear objects on page 666
■To break crossing objects on page 668
■To extend undershoots on page 671
■To extend objects to their apparent intersection on page 673
■To snap clustered nodes on page 675
■To dissolve pseudo nodes on page 677
■To erase dangling objects on page 679
■To simplify objects on page 682
■To identify zero-length objects on page 683
■To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline on page 687
3In the Selected Actions list, specify the order in which to perform the
cleanup actions. The order is important and can effect your results. The
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 661
first action in the list will be performed first. To change the order,
highlight an action and click the up or down arrow.
NOTE For best results, run Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines by
individually. If you run one of these with other actions, it will always be run
before other actions, regardless of its position in the list. In addition, these
actions will only be run once, regardless of how many times they are listed.
4In the Selected Actions list, select an action.
Each action has it's own set of options, and it is important that you take
the time to set up each one individually. For more information about a
specific action's settings, click one of the links above.
5Under Cleanup Parameters, enter the settings to use for the selected
action.
6To review detected errors before correcting them, under Options, select
Interactive. To have AutoCAD Map 3D automatically correct all detected
errors, select Automatic.
NOTE Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines are not interactive operations.
AutoCAD Map 3D makes these changes automatically during cleanup.
7Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
662 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Delete Duplicates
Delete Duplicates locates objects that share the same start and end points as
well as all other points within the tolerance distance. You can delete one of
the objects. You can include the following object types:
■Linear objects
■Points
■Blocks
■Text
■Mtext
WARNING Do not use Delete Duplicates with polygon topology because it deletes
important topology data.
■The coordinate locations of objects and the number of vertices (i.e., object
geometry) are considered when checking for duplicates, therefore, objects
with different directions, objects of different types (for example, lines and
polylines), and objects with different properties (for example, linetype and
color) can be considered as duplicates.
■You can choose to consider Z-value (elevation) when checking for
duplicates. For blocks, text, and mtext, you can also choose whether to
consider object rotation.
■Objects with the same geometry, but on different layers, are considered
duplicates. Use the Select Objects page to select objects on one layer at a
time.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 663
NOTE When deleting duplicate edges that are polyline segments, the command
deletes lines and arcs before breaking polylines. The command removes only
objects with the same geometry, even if the objects are on different layers.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Overview of Editing a Topology on page 716
To delete duplicate objects
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Delete
Duplicates. Click Add.
3In the Select Actions list, click Delete Duplicates to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly higher than
the distance between the objects.
Enter a value in the Tolerance box or click Pick to select two points that
define the tolerance.
5Select the object types to include in the Delete Duplicates calculation.
6To include rotation in the delete duplicates calculation for Blocks, Text,
or Mtext, select Rotation.
664 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
7To include z-values (elevation) in the delete duplicates calculation, select
Z-values.
8Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Erase Short Objects
Using the Erase Short Objects cleanup action, you can locate any objects
shorter than the specified tolerance and erase them. This removes short isolated
linear objects and short linear objects that are part of a polyline.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 665
This action is similar to the Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes action, except Erase Short
Objects removes both the linear object and associated nodes.
Depending on your data, use Snap Clustered Nodes next to correct errors that
might result from the Erase Short Objects option.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Dissolve Pseudo Nodes on page 676
To erase short linear objects
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Erase Short
Objects. Click Add.
3In the Select Actions list, click Erase Short Objects to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly smaller than
the shortest length you want to retain.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
666 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Break Crossing Objects
Use Break Crossing Objects, to locate objects that cross each other and have
no node at the crossing, break the crossing objects, and create a node at the
crossing. This action takes a complex system of lines, arcs, circles, and polylines
and breaks them at intersections into individual, unambiguous objects.
This action is important when you are establishing network topology or
working with topographic contours. The first example shows four linear objects
in a network topology that were digitized as two linear objects; after you use
Break Crossing Objects, the linear objects are four separate objects that intersect
at a common point.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 667
Closed objects, such as contours and lakes, can be cleaned up with the Break
Crossing Objects and Erase Dangling Objects actions. Use Break Crossing
Objects to create separate objects, and then use Erase Dangling Objects on
page 678 or the ERASE command. Verify that the shape created after editing
reflects the intended shape and that a distorted, closed area is not created.
NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when breaking crossing
objects. The Break Crossing Objects action corrects apparent problems across
layers and may break lines meant to indicate separate objects, such as rivers and
roads. Use Break Crossing Objects with one layer at a time to avoid this problem.
Using the Break Crossing Objects action on an arc whose endpoints are very close
may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Erase Dangling Objects on page 678
■Overview of Editing a Topology on page 716
To break crossing objects
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Break
Crossing Objects. Click Add.
668 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
3Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
■Break Crossing Objects does not use a tolerance value or other cleanup
parameters.
■Using the Break Crossing Objects action on an arc whose endpoints are
very close may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Extend Undershoots
Undershoots are often caused by inaccurate digitizing or when converting
scanned data. Using the Extend Undershoots cleanup action, you can locate
objects that come within the specified tolerance radius of each other, but do
not meet.
If one object can be extended to cross the other, it will be extended (while
maintaining the same direction) and snapped to a point on the object. If no
node exists, one will be created at the intersection.
If two objects pass within the specified tolerance and can be snapped without
changing their direction, they will be snapped together. If no node exists at
that point, one will be created.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 669
Undershoots are often found in the same drawing as dangles. Dangles, or
overshoots, are caused by a linear object going beyond an intersection with
a target linear object. See Erase Dangling Objects on page 678.
The Extend Undershoots action works in the same way as Break Crossing
Objects on page 667 works with undershoots, except that with Extend
Undershoots, you must select the Break Target option to break the target linear
objects at the intersections.
NOTE Using the Extend Undershoots action on an arc whose endpoints are very
close may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Erase Dangling Objects on page 678
■Break Crossing Objects on page 667
670 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To extend undershoots
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Extend
Undershoots. Click Add.
3In the Select Actions list, click Extend Undershoots to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly larger than
the largest gap.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5To break target linear objects at the intersections during the Extend
Undershoots operation, select Break Target.
6Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
NOTE Using the Extend Undershoots option on an arc whose endpoints are very
close may result in the duplication or extension of the arc.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Apparent Intersection
With Apparent Intersection, you can locate two objects that do not intersect
but that could be extended (within a specified tolerance radius) along their
natural paths to intersect at a projected point.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 671
The tolerance is used as a radius distance from the end of the two links. If the
endpoints of the objects and the apparent intersection fall within the specified
tolerance radius distance, and the objects can be extended without changing
their direction, they will be extended to the apparent intersection.
NOTE Apparent Intersection is based on the AutoCAD EXTEND command and
uses its Edge and Extend options. For more information, see EXTEND in the
AutoCAD Help.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
672 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To extend objects to their apparent intersection
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Apparent
Intersection. Click Add.
3In the Select Actions list, click Apparent Intersection to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4Under Cleanup Parameters, set the Tolerance to a value slightly higher
than the radius of a circle that includes the endpoints of the objects and
their projected intersection point. (Try to imagine a point where the
objects would intersect if they extended along their natural paths).
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
If AutoCAD Map 3D doesn't find an apparent intersection, try increasing
the Tolerance value.
5Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Snap Clustered Nodes
Use Snap Clustered Nodes to correct multiple nodes near the same point. With
Snap Clustered Nodes, you locate nodes within a specified tolerance radius
distance of each other and snap them to a single location. Nodes at the ends
of lines and polylines are automatically included in this cleanup action. You
can also include stand-alone nodes (points and blocks).
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 673
The snap point will be one of the existing nodes, and you can choose whether
you want it to be one of the link endpoints or one of the stand-alone nodes.
Based on your settings, AutoCAD Map 3D determines the best snap point,
calculating which point has the most weight based on its relative location to
the other nodes. Also considered are anchored nodes. While anchored nodes
are not altered or moved during the Snap Clustered Nodes operation, they are
included in the calculation that determines the snap point.
When using Snap Clustered Nodes, keep the following in mind:
■Nodes are moved to a single location but are not deleted, which can result
in multiple objects at the same location. Use Delete Duplicates to remove
duplicate objects.
■You can anchor objects during object selection so that they are not changed
during the snap operation. Note, however, anchored objects are included
in the selection set and will affect the snap point.
■As the endpoints of the links move, the direction of the links can also
change.
■Text and MText are excluded from the Snap Clustered Nodes operation.
674 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
To snap clustered nodes
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Snap
Clustered Nodes. Click Add.
3In the Select Actions list, click Snap Clustered Nodes to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly higher than
the radius of a circle that includes the link endpoints and nodes to snap
together.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5The endpoints of lines and polylines are automatically included in the
Snap Clustered Nodes operation. To include stand-alone nodes in the
calculation as well, select the types to include:
■Points
■Blocks
Text and Mtext are automatically excluded.
6Select the snap behavior to use:
■Snap To Node – Snaps to an existing node.
■Snap To Link – Snaps to an existing link endpoint.
7Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 675
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Dissolve Pseudo Nodes
A pseudo-node is an unnecessary node in a geometric link that is shared by
only two objects. For example, a long link might be divided unnecessarily
into many, smaller links by pseudo-nodes.
Using the Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes cleanup action, you can locate any
pseudo-nodes, dissolve the node, and join the two objects. This option removes
nodes that are at the intersection of two linear objects, but leaves the vertex
in place.
NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when dissolving
pseudo nodes.
676 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
When you dissolve a pseudo node on a 2D polyline with different Z values,
the first Z-value on the object is used. On a 3D polyline, the Z-value on the
first vertex is used. The object remains a 3D polyline. For all other properties,
the values on the first object are used.
WARNING Using Dissolve Pseudo-Nodes may result in the loss of certain types
of data. For example, if two lines have object data attached, the resulting single
polyline retains object data from only one of the lines. Similarly, if two lines on
different layers share an end point, the resulting polyline will reside on only one
of the layers.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Erase Short Objects on page 665
■Snap Clustered Nodes on page 673
■Simplify Objects on page 680
To dissolve pseudo nodes
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Dissolve
Pseudo Nodes. Click Add.
3Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
NOTE Dissolve Pseudo Nodes does not use a tolerance value or other cleanup
parameters.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 677
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Erase Dangling Objects
Use Erase Dangling Objects to locate an object with at least one end point
that is not shared by another object, and erase the object.
The Erase Dangling Objects action searches for and deletes all line, arc, and
polyline dangling edges, and nodes. Dangling objects do not include closed
polylines.
A dangle is often caused by inaccurate digitizing where an object extends
beyond its intended intersection with a target object. Usually you should use
Break Crossing Objects on page 667 before using Erase Dangling Objects.
678 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Break Crossing Objects on page 667
To erase dangling objects
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Erase
Dangling Objects. Click Add.
3In the Select Actions list, click Erase Dangling Objects to display the
cleanup parameters for this action.
4Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to a value slightly larger than
the longest dangle to erase.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 679
Simplify Objects
When maps are digitized, edges may be defined with more detail than
necessary. Use Simplify Objects to reduce unnecessary complexity in contour
lines, rivers, and coastlines. Simplifying objects, also known as generalizing
or weeding, reduces the number of points on a complex line.
Simplify Objects works in two dimensions, ignoring Z-values. For information
about how to add and remove vertices from 3D polylines, see Weed Polylines
on page 684.
When you use Simplify Objects, you simplify complex polylines by removing
all interior nodes that fall within the specified tolerance width. Polyline
segments falling within the same corridor are generalized into a single polyline.
Branching points, dead ends, and endpoints of polylines are not generalized.
Setting the Tolerance
AutoCAD Map 3D converts a set of connected polyline segments within the
same tolerance into a single polyline. You specify the tolerance corridor width.
680 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
The corridor values vary according to the scale of the map; maps with
coordinate values of millions use larger values than those using hundreds.
Simplifying linear objects removes as many points as possible from a polyline
while keeping it within the original tolerance corridor.
A coastline simplified at different tolerance settings
For best results, follow these guidelines:
■Run Simplify Objects individually. If you perform Simplify Objects with
other cleanup actions, AutoCAD Map 3D performs Simplify Objects first,
regardless of its position in the Selected Actions list.
■Use deleting duplicates on page 663 before simplifying linear objects.
■If your objects are lines, not plines, use Dissolve Pseudo Nodes to create a
single pline.
■Simplify Objects removes width from polylines. Save your map before you
simplify linear objects, so you can return to the original lines if necessary.
NOTE Simplify Objects is not an interactive operation. AutoCAD Map 3D makes
the changes automatically during cleanup.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 681
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Weed Polylines on page 684
■Delete Duplicates on page 663
■Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm Corrections on page 653
NOTE Simplify Objects works in two dimensions, ignoring Z-values. For
information about how to add and remove vertices from 3D polylines, see Weed
Polylines on page 684.
To simplify objects
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Simplify
Objects. Click Add.
NOTE For best results, run Simplify Objects individually. If you run Simplify
Objects with other actions, AutoCAD Map 3D runs Simplify Objects first,
regardless of its position in the Selected Actions list.
3In the Select Actions list, click Simplify Objects to display the cleanup
parameters for this action.
4Under Cleanup Parameters, set Tolerance to an appropriate value.
You can enter a value into the Tolerance box or click Pick to go to the
map and select two points that define the tolerance to use.
5To allow the introduction of arcs during the Simplify Objects operation,
select Create Arcs.
6Accept all other defaults.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically simplifies objects. Do not use the
Interactive option.
7Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
682 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Zero-Length Objects
Use Zero-Length Objects to locate lines, arcs, and polylines that have a start
point and an end point but have zero-length, or are missing an end point,
and erase them. The Zero-Length Objects cleanup action does not evaluate
closed polylines.
Zero-length objects can be introduced inadvertently when importing data
from other applications or when digitizing map data.
NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not refer to a tolerance value when identifying
zero-length objects.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
To identify zero-length objects
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Zero Length
Objects. Click Add.
3Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings.
NOTE Zero Length Objects does not use a tolerance value or other cleanup
parameters.
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 683
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Weed Polylines
Use Weed Polylines to add and remove vertices on 3D polylines. This is helpful
to control the drawing file size and contour appearance, or to remove
redundant information.
Using Weed Polylines, you enter Weeding and Supplementing Factors to
determine if a vertex should be added or removed from the 3D polyline.
Weeding Factors
Use Weeding Factors to reduce the number of points generated along 3D
polylines. Weeding factors ignore vertices that are closer together than the
Distance factor and that deflect less than the Angle factor. A larger distance
and deflection angle weeds a greater number of points. The distance factor is
measured in linear units and the angle factor is measured in angular units.
Weeding factors must be less than Supplementing Factors.
A point on the 3D polyline is weeded by calculating its location in relation
to the vertices before and after it. If the length between these three points is
less than the weeding length value, and the deflection angle is less than the
weeding angle value, then the middle point is not added to the contour data
file.
684 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Weeding factor parameters
Supplementing Factors
Use Supplementing Factors to supplement or add vertices along 3D polylines.
The supplementing distance is the maximum distance between vertices. If the
distance between vertices on a contour is greater than the Supplementing
Factor, then points are added along the contour at equal intervals that are less
than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance, the
greater the number of supplemented points.
Supplementing Factor parameters
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 685
Bulge
For curves, the bulge value is a ratio of the distance from the arc to the chord
divided by half the length of the chord. The bulge factor adds vertices to a
polyline curve, creating an approximation of the curve using straight line
segments. The length of these segments varies depending on the bulge factor
and the degree of curvature.
Bulge factor parameters
■Notes
It is recommended that you run Weed Polylines individually. If you run
it with other operations, it will always be run before other actions,
regardless of its position in the list. In addition, it will only be run once,
regardless of how many times it is listed.
■Weed Polylines is not an interactive operation. AutoCAD Map 3D makes
the changes automatically during cleanup.
See also:
■Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 637
■Step 2: Setting Cleanup Options on page 641
■Overview of Cleanup Actions on page 658
■Using Interactive Mode to Review and Confirm Corrections on page 653
686 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To weed or add vertices to a 3D polyline
1Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
2On the Select Objects page, select the 3D polylines from which you want
to remove extra vertices or add vertices. Click Next.
3On the Select Actions page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Weed
Polylines. Click Add >.
NOTE Run Weed Polylines by itself (without other cleanup actions). If you
run it with other actions, Weed Polylines runs only once, regardless of how
many times it's listed in the Selected Actions list, and it always runs before
other actions, regardless of its position in the list.
4In the Select Actions list, click Weed Polylines to display the Cleanup
Parameters for this action.
5Under Weeding Factors, enter the weeding distance in the Distance box,
or click Pick and use your pointing device to specify distance by selecting
two locations in the drawing.
6For Angle, enter the deflection angle, or click Pick to specify the angle
by selecting a starting point, a vertex, and an ending point.
Notes
■A point on a 3D polyline is weeded by calculating its location in
relation to the vertices before and after it. If the length between these
three points is less than the weeding Distance value, and the deflection
angle is less than the weeding Angle value, then the middle point is
weeded out.
■A larger distance and deflection angle weeds a greater number of
points.
■The weeding distance must be less than the supplementing distance.
■When using Pick to specify measurements, measurements are displayed
dynamically using a tooltip. The format and precision of of the
measurements are determined by the UNITS command.
7Under Supplementing Factors, enter the supplementing Distance, or click
Pick to specify distance in the drawing.
The supplementing distance is the maximum distance between vertices.
If the distance between vertices on a contour is greater than the
Cleaning Up Drawing Data | 687
supplementing factor, then points are added along the contour at equal
intervals that are less than or equal to the supplementing distance. The
smaller the distance, the greater the number of supplemented points.
8For Bulge, enter the bulge factor value, or click Pick to specify it in the
drawing.
The bulge factor adds vertices to a polyline curve, creating an
approximation of the curve using straight line segments. The bulge value
is a ratio of the distance from the arc to the chord divided by half the
length of the chord.
9Continue specifying Drawing Cleanup settings. Click Finish.
When the operation is complete, the total number of original vertices, the
total number of vertices removed, and the number of new vertices is reported
on the command line.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies
A topology is defined by a set of objects and data and their relationship. Use
the information in these sections to create, analyze, edit, and manage
topologies.
To create, edit, and manage topologies
■To create a topology on page 689
■To edit a topology on page 715
688 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■To manage topologies on page 760
Creating Topologies
Topology defines how map features represented by points, lines, and polygons
are connected and how to account for their adjacency. For example, topology
can show that parcels do not overlap, or that delivery routes follow roads.
Using AutoCAD Map 3D, you can create node, network, or polygon topologies.
For network topologies, you can specify the direction of movement allowed
for links and the resistance for links and nodes.
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Node Topology on page 693
■Creating a Network Topology on page 695
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Cleaning Data for a Polygon Topology on page 704
■Creating Topologies for a Land Use Map on page 705
■Sliver Polygons on page 706
■Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
To create a topology
■To create a topology on page 691
■create a node topology on page 694
■To create a network topology on page 697
■To fix crossing objects on page 704
■To create a topology for a land use and land cover map on page 705
■To find sliver polygons when you create a polygon topology on page 707
■To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
■To specify the direction for a link on page 712
■To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 714
Overview of Creating Topologies
Using AutoCAD Map 3D, you can create node, network, or polygon topologies.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 689
Node Topologies
■Define the interrelation of nodes (point objects).
■Are often used in conjunction with other topologies in analysis.
Network Topologies
■Connect links (lines) to form a linear network.
■Links can connect nodes.
An example of network topology is a water-distribution application that traces
the flow of water from a pumping station to residences. A street network is
another example. For network topologies, you can specify the direction for a
link and specify the resistance for a link or node.
Polygon Topologies
■Define polygons that represent enclosed areas such as land parcels and
census tracts. A single link defines the common boundary between adjacent
areas.
Uses of polygon topology include tax assessment and land planning in which
parcels of land are represented by polygons. Political boundaries, such as
voting districts, city, state, or provincial boundaries, special districts, and
school districts, are other examples of the use of polygon topology.
690 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Notes
When you create a topology, keep the following points in mind:
■Before you create network or polygon topologies, use the drawing cleanup
tools to clean up your map on page 636. Node topologies do not usually
require cleanup.
■Before you create a topology, freeze all layers containing objects in paper
space (Layout tab). Otherwise, these objects are included in the topology
creation when you use the "Select All" objects option.
■MAPTOPOCREATE can create topologies on layers that are turned off. It
does not affect layers that are frozen.
■When creating network or polygon topologies, if you enable the Create
New Nodes option, AutoCAD Map 3D detects where lines are connected
and assigns nodes to end points. It creates physical or explicit node objects
at all link end points where no objects exist. If the layer you specify does
not exist already, AutoCAD Map 3D creates the layer with a color of 7 and
a CONTINUOUS linetype.
■You can create nodes using ACAD_POINT. To change their appearance
and size, click Setup menu ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point Style.
■When you create a topology, information is stored as object data on each
element of the topology and is saved with the map. Each node, link, or
polygon is automatically given a unique identification (ID) number. Each
ID is automatically processed when you use any topology command.
WARNING Using the BREAK command affects topology. If you use BREAK, you
must use MAPTOPOCREATE again to recreate the topology. You might also need
to clean up the geometry in the drawing again.
See also:
■Cleaning Up Drawing Data on page 636
To create a topology
1Bring the nodes or links into the current drawing:
■Attach the drawings containing the objects, then query the objects
into the current drawing.
■Open the drawing containing the objects.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 691
2Click Create menu ➤ Topology.
3In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box on page 1688, enter a
name and description for the new topology.
4Under Topology Type, select the topology to create. Follow the steps for
that topology:
■create a node topology on page 694
■To create a network topology on page 697
■To create a polygon topology on page 702
5When you are done specifying settings, click Finish to create the topology.
6If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
As you create the topology, if AutoCAD Map 3D finds errors, it gives a warning
message and highlights the errors. Correct any errors; then create the topology
over again.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Create.
Menu
Create Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOCREATECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Create
Task Pane
Create Topology dialog boxDialog Box
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
692 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Creating a Node Topology
You can create a node topology with point objects, blocks, or text. A node
topology used in association with a network or polygon topology can hold
information about junctions and intersections between elements of the
topology.
Customer locations can be used as the basis for a node topology.
Object Data for Node Topology
Information about a node topology is held in an object data table as shown
in this table.
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
IDTPMNODE_SAMPLE_NODESAMPLE_NODE
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 693
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Changing the Appearance of Points on page 733
■Creating a Network Topology on page 695
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
create a node topology
1Do one of the following to bring nodes into the current drawing:
■Attach the drawings containing the nodes. Query the nodes into the
current drawing.
■Open the drawing containing the nodes.
■Import nodes from another file format.
2Click Create menu ➤ Topology.
3In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box on page 1688:
■Click Node to specify the type of topology to create.
■Enter a name and description for the new topology.
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen,
and dollar characters. Names cannot include spaces.
■Click Next.
4In the Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box, specify the nodes
to include in the topology:
■To include all nodes in the map, click Select All.
■To manually select the nodes to include, click Select Manually. Click
Select Nodes to select the nodes in the map. When you finish selecting
nodes, press Enter.
■To filter (restrict) node selection by layer (only the nodes that are on
specified layers will be selected), specify those layers in the Layers box.
To select from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. If the
layer is not listed, it may be Frozen, Locked, or Off. To use all layers,
enter an asterisk (*).
■To use only selected blocks as node objects, specify those blocks in
the Blocks box. To use points as nodes, select the ACAD_POINT block.
694 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■To filter node selection by object class, specify those object classes in
the Object Classes box. Only nodes that belong to the specified object
classes will be included in the topology.
The layer, block, and object class filters apply to both automatic and
manual selection of nodes.
5Click Finish to create the topology.
6If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Create.
Menu
Create Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOCREATECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Create
Task Pane
Create Topology dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Network Topology
Network topology defines the interconnection of links and, optionally, nodes
at link junctions. Networks may contain loops. Network segments have a
specified direction. Links can be lines, open polylines, or arcs. You can use
information from different layers to define a network topology.
If you plan to use the network topology for direction analysis, you can use
PEDIT to join a series of objects with the same flow direction into one object
with nodes at each vertex. The directions derived from arc objects might be
arbitrary; to control and edit these directions easily, use PEDIT to join segments
with the same direction.
When you create the network topology with nodes at each intersection, the
nodes do not significantly increase file size. You can use the nodes for path
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 695
traces on page 1090, best route analysis on page 1093, and flood traces on page
1099.
Object Data for Network Topology
Network topology information is stored on the links and nodes as object data.
Each element of the network topology has different object data values.
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
IDTPMLINK_SAMPLE_NETSAMPLE_NET
START_NODE
END_NODE
DIRECTION
DIRECT_RESISTANCE
REVERSE_RESISTANCE
By default, each link is bidirectional. Both resistance and direction are stored
as object data. You can edit both direction on page 710 and resistance on page
713 values.
If you create nodes when you create the network topology, the object data
table for each node has the following information.
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
IDTPMNODE_SAMPLE_NETSAMPLE_NET
RESISTANCE
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Node Topology on page 693
■Changing the Appearance of Points on page 733
696 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Performing a Shortest Path Trace on page 1090
■Performing a Best Route Analysis on page 1093
■Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099
To create a network topology
1Do one of the following to bring the linework into the current drawing:
■Attach the drawings containing the linework. Query the linework
into the current drawing.
■Open the drawing containing the linework.
■Import the linework from another file format.
2Click Create menu ➤ Topology.
3In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box on page 1688, do the
following:
■Click Network to specify the type of topology to create.
■Enter a name and description for the new topology.
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen,
and dollar characters. Names cannot include spaces.
■Click Next.
4In the Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box, specify the
links to include in the topology:
■To include all links in the map, click Select All.
■To manually select the links to include, click Select Manually. Click
Select Links to select the links in the map. When you finish selecting
links, press Enter.
■To filter (restrict) link selection by layer (only links on the specified
layers will be selected), specify the layers in the Layers box. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. If the layer is not
listed, it may be Frozen, Locked, or Off. To use all layers, enter an
asterisk (*).
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 697
■To filter link selection by object class, specify the object classes in the
Object Classes box. Only links that belong to the specified object
classes will be included in the topology.
Layer and object class filters apply to both the automatic and manual
selection of links.
■Click Next.
5In the Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box dialog box,
select the nodes to include:
■To include all nodes, click Select All.
■To manually select nodes, click Select Manually. Click Select Nodes
to select the nodes.
■To filter (restrict) node selection by layer (only the nodes on the
specified layers are selected), specify the layers in the Layers box.
■To use only selected blocks as node objects, specify the blocks in the
Blocks box. To use points as nodes, select the ACAD_POINT block.
■To filter node selection by object class, specify the object classes in
the Object Classes box. Only nodes that belong to the specified object
classes are included in the topology.
■To have AutoCAD Map 3D create node objects at the endpoint of
links, click Next. Otherwise, go to step 7.
6In the Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box, do the
following:
■To create new nodes, select Create New Nodes.
■Select a layer for the new nodes.
■Select a block to use for the nodes. To use a point object, select
ACAD_POINT. Modify the appearance of a point object using the
PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables. For more information, see
POINT in the AutoCAD Help.
7Click Finish to create the topology.
8If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
For information about adding direction and resistance, see the following
topics:
698 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Create.
Menu
Create Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOCREATECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Create
Task Pane
Create Topology dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Polygon Topology
Polygon topology is an extension of network topology and focuses on
area-based relationships. Every area forms a polygon; and each polygon in a
topology consists of a set of links. A polygon in a topology has a centroid,
which is a point or block element within the polygon, and contains
information about the area it encloses.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 699
A polygon in a topology consists of a centroid containing information about the
surrounding links. Intersecting links can have nodes. A polygon can contain one or
more islands.
You cannot create a polygon topology from ellipses or from closed polylines
that share an edge or intersection with other polygons. You must explode a
closed polyline before you create the topology. You can use information from
different layers to define a polygon topology.
Object Data for Polygon Topology
Information about a polygon topology is held in the centroids and links. The
object data table for each centroid has the following information.
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
IDTPMCNTR_SAMPLE_POLYSAMPLE_POLY
AREA
700 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
PERIMETER
LINKS_QTY
The object data table for each link in a polygon topology has the following
information.
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
IDTPMLINK_SAMPLE_POLYSAMPLE_POLY
START_NODE
END_NODE
DIRECTION
DIRECT_RESISTANCE
REVERSE_RESISTANCE
LEFT_POLYGON
RIGHT_POLYGON
If you create nodes when you create the polygon topology, the object data
table for each node has the following information.
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
IDTPMNODE_SAMPLE_POLYSAMPLE_POLY
RESISTANCE
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 701
■Creating a Node Topology on page 693
■Creating a Network Topology on page 695
■Sliver Polygons on page 706
■Cleaning Up Drawing Data on page 636
■Querying a Topology on page 1114
To create a polygon topology
1Do one of the following to bring linework into the current drawing:
■Attach the drawings containing the linework. Query the linework
into the current drawing.
■Open the drawing containing the linework.
■Import the linework from another file format.
2Click Create menu ➤ Topology.
3In the Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box on page 1688:
■Under Topology Type, click Polygon to indicate that you want to
create a polygon topology.
■Enter a Topology Name and Topology Description for your new
topology.
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore, hyphen,
and dollar characters. Names cannot include spaces.
■Click Next.
4Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the objects to use to create
the topology. You can also have AutoCAD Map 3D create any missing
nodes and centroids.
■Use the Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box to select
the linear objects to use to generate polygons for the topology. To use
a closed polyline to create polygon topology, you must first explode
the closed polyline.
■Use the Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box to select
the node objects to include in the topology.
702 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Use the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box on
page 1680 to have AutoCAD Map 3D create node objects where needed.
Specify the layer and block to use for the new node objects.
■Use the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box on
page 1681 to select the centroids to use.
■Use the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box
on page 1679 to create centroids where needed. Specify the layer and
block to use for the new centroids.
5In the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box on page
1686, indicate whether to highlight and/or mark detected errors with blocks.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically checks for Missing Centroids and
Intersections. Additionally, you can choose to have AutoCAD Map 3D
check for Duplicate Centroids, Incomplete Areas, and Sliver Polygons.
■To highlight errors with red Xs, select Highlight Errors.
■To mark errors with blocks of the shape and color you specify, select
Mark Errors With Blocks.
■In the Marker Size box, specify the marker size as a percent of the
screen size. A value between 3% and 7% is usually suitable.
■If you chose the Mark Errors With Blocks option, specify the shape
and color of the block to use to mark each error.
6Click Finish to create the polygon topology.
To remove highlighting, use the REDRAW, REGEN, or SAVE command.
To remove an error marker, select it and press Delete.
7If appropriate, save the topology information back to source drawings.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Create.
Menu
Create Topology
Icon
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 703
MAPTOPOCREATECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Create
Task Pane
Create Topology dialog boxDialog Box
Cleaning Data for a Polygon Topology
Clean up your data before creating polygon topology; eliminate gaps,
intersections, or overlaps between any of the linework in a polygon topology.
In addition, eliminate zero length objects or areas with missing centroids.
If AutoCAD Map 3D cannot create a polygon topology because the links in
the polygons that cross over do not have a node where they meet, the
intersections are highlighted with an X or marked with an error marker (block)
that you configure. Missing centroids are also highlighted or marked in the
same way.
NOTE The markers used to mark polygon topology errors are the same as those
used to mark drawing cleanup errors. Before creating a polygon topology, AutoCAD
Map 3D removes any markers present from previous drawing cleanup operations.
Conversely, when you run a drawing cleanup operation, AutoCAD Map 3D removes
any markers present from creating a polygon topology.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Cleaning Up Drawing Data on page 636
■Sliver Polygons on page 706
To fix crossing objects
1Use drawing cleanup on page 636 to break the crossing objects.
2Optionally, detect duplicate centroids, incomplete areas, and sliver
polygons on page 706.
3Create the topology again.
You can ensure there are no missing centroids by selecting the Create
Missing Centroids option on the Create Polygon Topology - Create New
Centroids screen.
704 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Creating Topologies for a Land Use Map
You can create a specialized polygon topology for a land use or land cover
map.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
To create a topology for a land use and land cover map
1Create areas for each type.
2Add text or a block to each area to identify the type.
3Create one topology named LAND_USE.
■On the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box, click
Select Manually.
■Click Select Objects .
■Select the text or block objects.
4Query on page 1114 the centroid value from the polygon topology with
the topology query command.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 705
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Create.
Menu
Create Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOCREATECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Create
Task Pane
Create Topology dialog boxDialog Box
Sliver Polygons
A sliver polygon is very long and thin; its perimeter is very large compared to
its area. When overlaying two topologies, AutoCAD Map 3D checks for sliver
polygons. When creating a new polygon topology, checking for sliver polygons
is optional.
If a sliver polygon is detected, AutoCAD Map 3D highlights its centroid with
an X. To clear the Xs, use the REGEN command.
Though sliver polygons are not considered errors by AutoCAD Map 3D and
your topology can still be considered correct and complete, the sliver polygons
may be unintentional, for example, the result of digitizing errors. If you see
sliver polygons, you may want to double-check your data to make sure it is
correct and that the sliver polygons are expected.
For example, imagine you digitize two adjacent polygons, such as a parcel
and a flood plain, and there are slight overlaps between the two. Then, you
create topologies for each, overlay the topologies, and the resulting topology
contains sliver polygons. These may be correct or not, depending on your
data. If the boundaries between the adjacent polygons are meant to be the
same, then the sliver polygons are incorrect and you must correct your data.
If the boundaries are not meant to be the same, then sliver polygons are
correct.
706 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Sliver polygons detected during an overlay (the Xs indicate the sliver polygons).
See also:
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Correcting or Completing a Topology on page 778
■Overlaying Two Topologies on page 1102
■To find sliver polygons when you create a polygon topology on page 707
■To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
To find sliver polygons when you create a polygon topology
1Follow the basic steps to create a polygon topology on page 699.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 707
2In the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box on page
1686, select the option for checking for Sliver Polygons.
3Do one of the following:
■To highlight errors with red Xs, select Highlight Errors.
■To mark errors with blocks of the shape and color you specify, select
Mark Errors With Blocks.
In the Marker Size box, specify the marker size as a percent of the
screen size. A value between 3% and 7% is usually suitable. Specify
the shape and color of the block to use to mark each error.
4Click Finish to create the polygon topology and locate sliver polygons.
To remove highlighting, use the REDRAW, REGEN, or SAVE command.
To remove an error marker, select it and press Delete.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click the source
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay.
2In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box on page 1719,
select Identity as the type of overlay analysis to perform. Click Next.
The result topology includes areas that appear in the source topology and
areas in the overlay topology that are within the source topology
boundary.
3In the Select Overlay Topology dialog box, select the polygon topology
to use as the overlay topology. Click Next.
4In the Topology Overlay Analysis - New Topology dialog box, do the
following:
■Select Highlight to highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Select
the highlight color.
■Enter a name and description for the new topology, and specify the
layer to place it on.
■Click Next.
5If desired, specify how to copy data to the result topology, whether to
create new nodes to complete the resulting topology, and the block to
use for centroids.
6Click Finish.
708 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOCREATE
Creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Create.
Menu
Create Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOCREATECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Create
Task Pane
Create Topology dialog boxDialog Box
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay.
Menu
Overlay Topology
Icon
MAPANOVERLAYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Task Pane
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog boxDialog Box
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 709
Specifying the Direction for a Link
You can specify the direction of movement allowed for a link in a network
topology. AutoCAD Map 3D uses this direction when tracing through network
topology for path traces, best route analysis, and flood traces.
710 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Object data
value
Property in the
Properties palette
Direction
0Bi-DirectionalBi-Directional (two-way)
1ForwardSame as created. Movement along the link
is allowed only in the direction that the
link was created.
-1ReverseReverse of created direction. Movement
along the link is allowed only in the oppos-
ite direction that the link was created.
The default direction of an arc, or a two point polyline with an arc segment,
is counterclockwise. Set the value to Bi-Directional (0) or Forward (1) for
counterclockwise, and to Reverse (-1) for clockwise.
To reverse the direction of selected links, right-click a network topology in
Map Explorer. Click Reverse Link Direction. You can also use the MAPRL
command.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 711
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Network Topology on page 695
■Performing a Shortest Path Trace on page 1090
■Performing a Best Route Analysis on page 1093
■Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
■Editing the Direction for a Link on page 734
■Updating a Topology on page 753
To specify the direction for a link
1Verify that the network topology containing the link is loaded. You can
specify link direction for network topologies only.
2In the map, double-click the link for which you want to specify direction.
If more than one topology contains the same link, select one of the
topologies. Update the other topologies on page 753 later.
3In the Properties palette, under the Topo properties, choose a setting for
the Flow Direction property:
■Bi-Directional — Movement is allowed in both directions.
■Forward — Movement is allowed only in the direction that the link
was created.
■Reverse — Movement is allowed only in the opposite direction of the
direction that the link was created.
The new direction setting is assigned to the link.
NOTE You can also store a direction value in an object data table or an external
database table. When you run a shortest path trace, best route analysis, or flood
trace, you can specify the location of this data. When storing this data, use 0 for
Bi-Directional, 1 for Forward, and -1 for Reverse.
712 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPEDITDIR
Edits the direction of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITDIRCommand Line
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command)Dialog Box
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
MAPRLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node
Direct Resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link was
created, while Reverse Resistance is the resistance in the opposite direction
along a link.
For both types, you can specify a resistance for any link in the network
topology. This resistance specifies the difficulty in traversing the link. The
default resistance is the length of the link.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses this resistance when doing a shortest path trace, best
route analysis, or flood trace. For an example of using resistance to show travel
times, see Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 713
You can also specify the Resistance of a node in a network topology, such as
setting resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Network Topology on page 695
■Performing a Shortest Path Trace on page 1090
■Performing a Best Route Analysis on page 1093
■Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099
■Editing the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 738
■Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology
1Verify that the network topology containing the link or node is loaded.
Be sure to load the topology from the current drawing. You can specify
resistance for network topologies only.
2In the map, double-click the link or node for which you want to specify
resistance.
If more than one topology contains the same link or node, select one of
the topologies. Update the other topologies on page 753 later.
3In the Properties palette, under the group of Topo properties, enter new
values for resistance. You must enter a numeric value.
■For a node, enter a value for Resistance, which is the resistance to
cross the node.
■For a link, enter values for Direct Resistance and Reverse Resistance.
Direct resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link
was created, while reverse resistance is the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. The default value is the length of the link.
The new resistance values are assigned to the objects.
NOTE You can also store a resistance value in object data or an external database.
When you run a flood trace, path trace, or best route analysis, specify the location
of this data.
714 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
If you are entering the commands on the command line, use the MAPEDITRES1
command to edit the Direct Resistance of links and the Resistance of nodes;
use the MAPEDITRES2 command to edit the Reverse Resistance of links.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITRES1
Edits the direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES1Command Line
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)Dialog Box
MAPEDITRES2
Edits the reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES2Command Line
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)Dialog Box
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Editing Topologies
Use the topology editing commands, which are accessible from Map Explorer
or the command line, to make changes to a topology without losing the
integrity of the topology.
To edit a topology
■To edit a topology on page 718
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 715
■To edit a node on page 724
■To reposition a node at the end point of a link on page 727
■To reposition a link on page 727
■To join two links, break a link, or reverse a link's direction on page 728
■To modify a link's resistance or direction on page 728
■To divide a polygon into two smaller polygons on page 731
■To merge two polygons into one polygon on page 732
■To change the appearance of points on page 734
■To edit the direction of a link on page 737
■To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 739
■To create a node on an existing link on page 742
■To add an existing node to a topology on page 742
■To create a link and add it to a topology on page 744
■To add an existing link to a topology on page 744
■To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework on page
746
■To add a polygon to a polygon topology by creating new linework on page
747
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 749
■To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
■To update a topology on page 753
■To retrieve objects to edit on page 756
■To edit the objects on page 756
■To create closed polylines from a polygon topology on page 759
Overview of Editing a Topology
Use topology editing commands to make changes to a topology without losing
the integrity of the topology. If you use object-editing commands such as
ERASE or STRETCH to modify a topology, important data may be lost. To
repair a topology edited with these commands, use the Update option on page
753.
716 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Edits to this polygon topology consist of adding a node on page 740 and then
dividing the polygon on page 730 with a link.
To edit a topology, the topology data and geometry must be loaded in the
current drawing. You can edit only one topology at a time, and multi-user
editing of a topology is not permitted. When you load a topology, an audit
checks topology integrity. This audit is only concerned with topology data,
not with geometry. Any incomplete objects are registered, because only
complete objects can be edited.
To add or insert objects into a topology, the current drawing must be where
the topology was created. If the topology was created in a source drawing, you
must open that drawing to add objects to the topology. Make the layer
containing the topology objects current so new objects have the same
properties as objects already in the topology.
If you edit a topology and then use the Undo command, the altered geometry
is restored to its former state but the altered topology remains current. To
perform further editing on the topology, unload and reload on page 767 the
topology. This applies to all topology functions.
Editing Topologies from More than One Drawing
To edit a topology that spans more than one drawing, you must edit the
topology in the drawing where it was created. The other drawings will be
attached to this drawing. First, query the topology into the drawing, then
unload on page 767 the topology from the source drawings and retrieve the
topology into the current drawing. You can edit part of a topology by querying
just the part you want, but the topology editing commands don't allow you
to edit the edges of a topology or an incomplete topology.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 717
The safest option is to use a query to retrieve the entire topology. However,
if the topology is large, it may impair performance. With large topologies,
query the area to edit plus enough of an area around the edit area to ensure
that the objects to be edited are complete.
Editing a Network Topology
To modify a network topology, for example, adding a new pipe to a water
network, you can add nodes and links to an existing network topology, and
then update on page 753 the topology to include the new pipes.
Before you edit a topology object, make sure the layer containing the topology
objects is the current layer.
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Querying a Topology on page 1114
■Correcting or Completing a Topology on page 778
■Creating a Network Topology on page 695
NOTE To edit a topology, you use the AutoCAD Map 3D topology edit commands.
When you edit a topology, the topology must be loaded from the current drawing.
To add an object to a topology, the current drawing must be the drawing where
the topology was created.
To edit a topology
■To edit a node on page 724
■To reposition a node at the end point of a link on page 727
■To divide a polygon into two smaller polygons on page 731
■To change the appearance of points on page 734
■To specify the direction for a link on page 712
■To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 714
■To create a node on an existing link on page 742
■To create a link and add it to a topology on page 744
718 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework on page
746
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 749
■To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
■To update a topology on page 753
■To retrieve objects to edit on page 756
Quick Reference
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display mode and size of point objects
Setup menu ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point
Style
Menu
DDPTYPECommand Line
MAPAL
Adds a link to a topology
MAPALCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Add New Links
Task Pane
MAPAN
Adds a node to a topology
MAPANCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Add
Node
Task Pane
MAPAP
Adds a polygon to a polygon topology
MAPAPCommand Line
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 719
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Add Polygon
Task Pane
MAPBL
Breaks a link in a topology at a specified point
MAPBLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Break Link
Task Pane
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDL
Deletes a link in a topology
MAPDLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Delete Links
Task Pane
MAPDN
Deletes a node in a topology
MAPDNCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Delete
Node
Task Pane
MAPDP
Deletes a polygon from a polygon topology
MAPDPCommand Line
720 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Delete Polygon
Task Pane
MAPDVP
Divides a polygon in a polygon topology by allowing you to add a link
MAPDVPCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Divide Polygon
Task Pane
MAPEDITDIR
Edits the direction of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITDIRCommand Line
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command)Dialog Box
MAPEDITRES1
Edits the direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES1Command Line
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)Dialog Box
MAPEDITRES2
Edits the reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES2Command Line
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)Dialog Box
MAPIL
Inserts a link in a topology
MAPILCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Insert New Link
Task Pane
MAPIN
Inserts a node in a topology
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 721
MAPINCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Insert
Node
Task Pane
MAPJL
Joins two links in a topology
MAPJLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Join Links
Task Pane
MAPMEL
Repositions an end point of a link in a topology
MAPMELCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Move End Of Link
Task Pane
MAPML
Moves a link in a topology
MAPMLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Move Links
Task Pane
MAPMN
Moves a node in a topology or moves a node at the end of a link in network
or polygon topologies
MAPMNCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Move
Node
Task Pane
MAPMP
Merges polygons in a polygon topology
MAPMPCommand Line
722 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Merge Polygon
Task Pane
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
MAPRLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Editing a Node
You can move a node in a node topology, or move a node at the end point
of a link in a network or polygon topology. Moving the node at the end point
of a link also moves that end of the chosen link. Edits to nodes and links in
a polygon topology change the centroid, the area, and perimeter values.
When you move a node, AutoCAD Map 3D checks its new location.
■In node topologies, if there is an existing node in the same location, you
must specify which node to keep.
■In network or polygon topologies, you must specify whether to join the
links and which node to use to join them.
You can also delete nodes. For more information, see Deleting Links, Nodes,
and Polygons on page 750.
If you're working with a network topology, you can also modify the resistance
on page 714 of nodes.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 723
Deleting one node that indicates adjoining links creates a single link.
To turn an explicit node into an implicit node, unload the topology, delete
the point or block representing the explicit node, and then reload the topology.
To turn an implicit node into an explicit node, first insert a block or point at
the implicit node point (use an Intersection or End snap to position the block
accurately). Then, if you are working with a node topology, right-click the
topology name in Map Explorer. Click Add Node. You cannot use the Insert
Node option. If you are working with a network or polygon topology, use the
MAPAN command.
If you retrieve the nodes of a network or polygon topology, but not the
connecting links, you can still move the nodes. However, the current topology
knows nothing about the connecting links because all the link information
is stored on the links, and saving any edited nodes back to the source drawings
will create an incorrect topology.
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■To create a node on an existing link on page 742
■To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
■To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 714
To edit a node
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
724 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
2Do one of the following:
■For a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology name.
Click Move Nodes.
■For a network or polygon topology, type mapmn at the command
line.
3When prompted, click the nodes to move.
4Press Enter when you finish selecting nodes.
5Specify the base point or displacement.
6Specify the second point of displacement.
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates
how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If
you press Enter at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the
first point is interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if
you specify 2,3 for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt,
the object moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction
from its current position.
In a node topology, if the node's new location is the same as an existing node,
specify which node to keep. In a network topology, specify whether to join
the links and which node to keep.
Quick Reference
MAPMN
Moves a node in a topology or moves a node at the end of a link in network
or polygon topologies
MAPMNCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Move
Node
Task Pane
MAPNODEDIT
Edits a node in a topology
MAPNODEDITCommand Line
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command)Dialog Box
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 725
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Editing a Link
There are several ways you can edit links in a network or polygon topology.
You can do any of the following:
■Move a link to a new location.
■Reposition one of the nodes at the end point of a link. Moving the node
at the end point of a link moves that end of the chosen link.
If you move an end point to the same location as an existing end point,
AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you to join the links and specify which node
to keep. If you select a line or arc when moving links or end points of links,
it is converted to a polyline.
■Join two links in a network or polygon topology by removing an
intersection or pseudo-node.
■Break a link at a specified break point. AutoCAD Map 3D inserts a node at
the break point.
■Reverse a link's direction in a network topology.
■Specify a link's resistance, reverse resistance, and direction.
Edits to links in a polygon topology change the centroid, the area, and the
perimeter values.
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■To create a node on an existing link on page 742
726 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Editing a Node on page 723
■To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
■Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
■Adding a Link on page 743
■To reposition a node at the end point of a link on page 727
■To reposition a link on page 727
■To join two links, break a link, or reverse a link's direction on page 728
■To modify a link's resistance or direction on page 728
To reposition a node at the end point of a link
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2Do one of the following:
■For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name. Click Move End Of Link.
■For a polygon topology, type MAPMEL on the command line.
3When prompted, click the node (end point) to move.
4When prompted, click the location of the new end point.
If the new location is the same as an existing end point in the topology,
specify whether to join the links and which node to keep.
To reposition a link
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2Do one of the following:
■For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name. Click Move Links.
■For a polygon topology, type MAPML on the command line.
3When prompted, click the link to reposition.
4When prompted, click any additional links to reposition.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 727
5Press Enter when you finish selecting links.
6Specify the base point or displacement.
7Specify the second point of displacement.
The two points define a displacement vector that indicates how far the
selected objects are moved and in what direction. If you press Enter at
the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is
interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify
2,3 for the base point and press Enter at the next prompt, the object
moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its
current position.
To join two links, break a link, or reverse a link's direction
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2Do one of the following:
■For a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name. Click a menu option.
■To join two links in a polygon topology, type MAPJL on the command
line. To break a link in a polygon topology, type MAPBL on the
command line. You cannot reverse a link's direction in a polygon
topology.
Follow the command line prompts.
To modify a link's resistance or direction
■For information about specifying values for resistance, see To edit the
resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 714.
■For information about specifying direction, To specify the direction for a
link on page 712.
Quick Reference
MAPBL
Breaks a link in a topology at a specified point
MAPBLCommand Line
728 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Break Link
Task Pane
MAPEDITDIR
Edits the direction of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITDIRCommand Line
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command)Dialog Box
MAPEDITRES1
Edits the direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES1Command Line
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)Dialog Box
MAPEDITRES2
Edits the reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES2Command Line
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)Dialog Box
MAPJL
Joins two links in a topology
MAPJLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Join Links
Task Pane
MAPMEL
Repositions an end point of a link in a topology
MAPMELCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Move End Of Link
Task Pane
MAPML
Moves a link in a topology
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 729
MAPMLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Move Links
Task Pane
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
MAPRLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Editing a Polygon
You can divide a polygon into two smaller polygons by drawing a link between
two nodes that define the polygon. You can also remove a boundary between
two polygons and combine them into one polygon. You can specify the
centroid to remove. Splitting and combining polygons change the centroid,
the area, and perimeter values.
You can also use the commands for editing nodes on page 723 and editing
links on page 726to edit a polygon topology. When you do, AutoCAD Map 3D
changes the centroid, the area, and perimeter values of the polygons
automatically.
730 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Polygons at the edge of a queried polygon topology cannot be edited.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Querying a Topology on page 1114
■Adding a Polygon on page 745
■To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
■Editing a Link on page 726
■Editing a Node on page 723
To divide a polygon into two smaller polygons
1Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
2In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Divide Polygon.
3Specify a node for the first divide point.
4Specify the node for the second divide point.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 731
To merge two polygons into one polygon
1Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
2In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Merge Polygon.
3Specify the link (boundary between two polygons) to remove.
4Specify the centroid to remove.
5On the command line, type Y to merge the polygons.
Quick Reference
MAPDVP
Divides a polygon in a polygon topology by allowing you to add a link
MAPDVPCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Divide Polygon
Task Pane
MAPMP
Merges polygons in a polygon topology
MAPMPCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Merge Polygon
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
732 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Changing the Appearance of Points
If you create nodes as ACAD_POINT, you can change their appearance.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 733
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Node Topology on page 693
■Adding a Node on page 740
To change the appearance of points
1Click Setup menu ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point Style.
2In the Point Style dialog box, select any of the point modes.
You can also change the Point Size to improve the visibility of the points.
3Click OK.
4On the command line, enter regen.
Nodes you created using ACAD_POINT appear in the point style you selected.
To reset the node display, use the Point Style dialog box to reset the point
style. Then enter regen on the command line.
Quick Reference
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display mode and size of point objects
Setup menu ➤ More Formatting Options ➤ Point
Style
Menu
DDPTYPECommand Line
Editing the Direction for a Link
You can specify the direction of movement allowed for a link in a network
topology. AutoCAD Map 3D uses this direction when tracing through network
topology for path traces, best route analysis, and flood traces.
734 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 735
Object data
value
Property in the
Properties
palette
Direction
0Bi-DirectionalBi-Directional (two-way)
1ForwardSame as created. Movement along the link is al-
lowed only in the direction that the link was
created.
-1ReverseReverse of created direction. Movement along
the link is allowed only in the opposite direction
that the link was created.
The default direction of an arc, or a two point polyline with an arc segment,
is counterclockwise. Set the value to Bi-Directional (0) or Forward (1) for
counterclockwise, and to Reverse (-1) for clockwise.
To reverse the direction of selected links, right-click a network topology in
Map Explorer. Click Reverse Link Direction. You can also use the MAPRL
command.
736 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Adding a Link on page 743
■To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
■Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
■Performing a Shortest Path Trace on page 1090
■Performing a Best Route Analysis on page 1093
■Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099
To edit the direction of a link
1Verify that the network topology containing the link is loaded. You can
specify link direction for network topologies only.
2In the map, double-click the link.
If more than one topology contains the same link, select one of the
topologies. Update the other topologies on page 753 later.
3In the Properties palette, under the Topo properties, choose a setting for
the Flow Direction property:
■Bi-Directional — Movement is allowed in both directions.
■Forward — Movement is allowed only in the direction that the link
was created.
■Reverse — Movement is allowed only in the opposite direction of the
direction that the link was created.
The new direction setting is assigned to the link.
NOTE You can also store a direction value in an object data table or an external
database table. When you run a shortest path trace, best route analysis, or flood
trace, you can specify the location of this data. When storing this data, use 0 for
Bi-Directional, 1 for Forward, and -1 for Reverse.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 737
Quick Reference
MAPEDITDIR
Edits the direction of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITDIRCommand Line
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command)Dialog Box
MAPRL
Reverses a link in a topology
MAPRLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Reverse
Link Direction
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Editing the Resistance for a Link or Node
Direct Resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link was
created, while Reverse Resistance is the resistance in the opposite direction
along a link.
For both types, you can specify a resistance for any link in the network
topology. This resistance specifies the difficulty in traversing the link. The
default resistance is the length of the link.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses this resistance when doing a shortest path trace, best
route analysis, or flood trace. For an example of using resistance to show travel
times, see Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099.
738 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
You can also specify the Resistance of a node in a network topology, such as
setting resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Adding a Link on page 743
■To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
■Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
■Performing a Shortest Path Trace on page 1090
■Performing a Best Route Analysis on page 1093
■Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology
1Verify that the network topology containing the link or node is loaded.
Be sure to load the topology from the current drawing. You can specify
resistance for network topologies only.
2In the map, double-click the link or node.
If more than one topology contains the same link or node, select one of
the topologies. Update the other topologies on page 753 later.
3In the Properties palette, under the group of Topo properties, enter new
value(s) for resistance. You must enter a numeric value.
■For a node, enter a value for Resistance, which is the resistance to
cross the node.
■For a link, enter values for Direct Resistance and Reverse Resistance.
Direct resistance is the resistance to travel in the direction that a link
was created, while reverse resistance is the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. The default value is the length of the link.
The new resistance values are assigned to the objects.
NOTE You can also store a resistance value in object data or an external database.
When you run a flood trace, path trace, or best route analysis, specify the location
of this data.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 739
If you are entering the commands on the command line, use the MAPEDITRES1
command to edit the Direct Resistance of links and the Resistance of nodes;
use the MAPEDITRES2 command to edit the Reverse Resistance of links.
Quick Reference
MAPEDITRES1
Edits the direct resistance of a node or link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES1Command Line
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)Dialog Box
MAPEDITRES2
Edits the reverse resistance of a link in a network topology
MAPEDITRES2Command Line
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)Dialog Box
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Adding a Node
You can add nodes to an existing topology. To add nodes, the current drawing
must be where the topology was created and the geometry (point, block, or
text object) must already exist. You can add a node to the end of a link or a
vertex in network or polygon topologies.
740 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Adding a node to an existing topology.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Deleting Links, Nodes, and Polygons on page 750
■Updating a Topology on page 753
■Adding a Link on page 743
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 741
To create a node on an existing link
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
To create a node and add it to a topology, the current drawing must be
the drawing where the topology was created.
NOTE To add the same point to more than one topology, select one of the
topologies. Update the other topologies on page 753 later.
2Do one of the following:
■To add a node to a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Insert Node.
■To add a node to a network or polygon topology, type mapin on the
command line.
3When prompted, select the block to use for the node.
4When prompted, specify the location for the node. You can use an object
snap such as Midpoint. Enter any other node information.
To add an existing node to a topology
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2Create the point, block, or text object that you will use as the node.
3Be sure to load the topology you want to add the node to from the current
drawing.
4Do one of the following:
■To add a node to a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Add Node.
■To add a node to a network or polygon topology, type mapan on the
command line.
5When prompted, select the object to use as the node.
Quick Reference
MAPAN
Adds a node to a topology
742 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPANCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Add
Node
Task Pane
MAPIN
Inserts a node in a topology
MAPINCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Insert
Node
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Adding a Link
You can add a new or existing link to a network or polygon topology. The
current drawing must be where the topology was created.
Create new links between existing nodes. Add nodes on page 740as needed.
For more information, see . New links cannot cross other links. If you draw a
line or arc, it is converted to a polyline.
When adding links to polygon topologies, AutoCAD Map 3D updates the
centroid, the area, and perimeter values of the polygons. You can also divide
a polygon using the MAPDVP command.
You cannot add links to node topologies.
See also:
■Adding a Node on page 740
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 743
■Editing a Link on page 726
■Editing a Polygon on page 730
■Editing a Polygon on page 730
■Editing the Direction for a Link on page 734
■Editing the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 738
To create a link and add it to a topology
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2Do one of the following:
■To create a new link in a network topology, in Map Explorer,
right-click the topology name. Click Insert New Link.
■To create a link in a polygon topology, type MAPIL on the command
line.
3When prompted, click the start point for the new link.
4When prompted, click the next point(s).
5To finish entering points, press Enter.
6Optionally, modify the values for resistance on page 714 and direction on
page 712.
To add an existing link to a topology
1Open the drawing where the network or polygon topology was created
and load the topology.
2Do one of the following:
■To add a link to a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Add New Links.
■To add a link to a polygon topology, type MAPAL on the command
line.
3When prompted, click the link to add to the topology.
4Click any additional links to add.
5When you finish selecting links, press Enter.
744 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
6Optionally, modify the values for resistance on page 714 and direction on
page 712.
Quick Reference
MAPAL
Adds a link to a topology
MAPALCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Add New Links
Task Pane
MAPIL
Inserts a link in a topology
MAPILCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Insert New Link
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Adding a Polygon
You can add a polygon using existing objects or new linework as a perimeter.
To add a polygon to a polygon topology, the current drawing must be where
the topology was created.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 745
New polygons can be added to an existing polygon topology.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework
1Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
746 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To add a polygon to a polygon topology, the current drawing must be
the drawing where the topology was created.
2Do one of the following:
■In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click Add Polygon.
■Type mapap on the command line.
3In the map, select the border objects of the polygons to add.
4Press Enter when you finish selecting polygons.
5If you have blocks defined in the drawing, you are prompted to specify
a block to use for the centroid. Press Enter to use ACAD_POINT, or type
a block name and press Enter.
To add a polygon to a polygon topology by creating new linework
1Open the drawing where the polygon topology was created and load the
topology.
2On the command line, type MAPIL.
3When prompted, specify the location for a new link. The link must define
a polygon.
Quick Reference
MAPAP
Adds a polygon to a polygon topology
MAPAPCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Add Polygon
Task Pane
MAPIL
Inserts a link in a topology
MAPILCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Insert New Link
Task Pane
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 747
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid. This is useful:
■After you import or digitize objects.
■Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
■When working with topology.
Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids
(below).
748 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Importing Polygons on page 363
■Defining the Text Insertion Point on page 793
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1Click Create menu ➤ Centroids.
2In the Create Centroids dialog box on page 1535, specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 749
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
Deleting Links, Nodes, and Polygons
You can delete a node in a node, network, or polygon topology; a link in a
network or polygon topology; or a polygon in a polygon topology. When you
delete nodes, links, or polygons, object data and external database links may
be lost.
WARNING Both the topology information and associated objects are deleted.
■Deleting a node shared by two links joins the links together. First and last
point information on the resulting link is updated.
■Deleting a dangling link deletes the dangling end node.
■Deleting a link deletes any associated nodes, unless the link is also part of
another topology or the nodes are referenced by another link.
■Deleting a polygon deletes the centroid and all references to it in
surrounding links, unless objects are part of another topology or are
referenced by another polygon.
750 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
When you remove a link, any nodes that are not connected to other links are also
removed.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Adding a Node on page 740
■Adding a Link on page 743
■Editing a Node on page 723
■Editing a Link on page 726
To delete a link, node, or polygon
1Open the drawing where the topology was created and load the topology.
2Do one of the following:
■To delete a node from a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click
the topology. Click Delete Node. To delete a node from a network or
polygon topology, type MAPDN on the command line.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 751
■To delete a link from a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click
the topology. Click Delete Links. To delete a link from a polygon
topology, type MAPDL on the command line.
■To delete a polygon from a polygon topology, in Map Explorer,
right-click the topology. Click Delete Polygon.
3Select the object(s) to delete. To select a polygon, click near its centroid.
Quick Reference
MAPDL
Deletes a link in a topology
MAPDLCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Delete Links
Task Pane
MAPDN
Deletes a node in a topology
MAPDNCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a node topology ➤ Delete
Node
Task Pane
MAPDP
Deletes a polygon from a polygon topology
MAPDPCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a polygon
topology ➤ Delete Polygon
Task Pane
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
752 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Updating a Topology
Objects in a topology have relationship data stored in an object data table. If
you modify the objects using the topology editing commands on page 716,
the topology data on the objects is updated. However, you must manually
update the topology data in the following circumstances:
■If you modify the objects using standard AutoCAD commands, such as
Move.
■If the object is referenced by more than one topology. (Only the selected
topology is updated when you modify the object. Use the Update option
to update the remaining topologies that reference the object.)
NOTE If the update options cannot restore integrity, try using Recreate. In Map
Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Administration ➤ Recreate. When you recreate
a topology, the topology is completely recreated. Any editing changes you made
to the topology object data are erased.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
To update a topology
1Verify that the topology containing the objects to update is loaded on
page 768.
■To update nodes in a node topology, in Map Explorer, right-click the
topology name. Click Update. To update nodes in a network or
polygon topology, type MAPNODUPD on the command line.
■To update links in a network topology, in Map Explorer, right-click
the topology name. Click Update. To update links in a polygon
topology, type MAPLINKUPD on the command line.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 753
■To update polygons links in a polygon topology, in Map Explorer,
right-click the topology name. Click Update. You can also type
MAPPOLYUPD on the command line.
2Select the objects to update. Press Enter
The topology data for the object is updated in the topology.
If you delete an object from one topology, and the object belongs to another
topology, the physical object is not removed from the drawing. The second
topology is not changed and no update is necessary for the deleted object.
Quick Reference
MAPLINKUPD
Updates links in a network topology
MAPLINKUPDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Update
Task Pane
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command)Dialog Box
MAPNODUPD
Updates nodes in a topology
MAPNODUPDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Update
Task Pane
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command)Dialog Box
MAPPOLYUPD
Updates a polygon topology
MAPPOLYUPDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Update
Task Pane
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command)Dialog Box
PROPERTIES
754 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Editing a Partial Topology
In general, when editing a topology, you should retrieve the entire topology.
However, if the topology is large, it may impair performance. With large
topologies, you can query in just a part of the topology.
Topology editing tools on page ? do not allow you to edit incomplete objects
at the edges of the queried area. Your query must retrieve enough of an area
around the edit area to ensure that the objects to be edited are complete.
Polygons at the edge of a queried polygon topology cannot be edited.
See also:
■Correcting or Completing a Topology on page 778
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 755
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
To retrieve objects to edit
1Open a drawing, attach the source drawings that contain the topology
you wish to edit, and make those source drawings active. Zoom to the
extents of the active source drawings.
2In Display Manager, click Data menu ➤ Add Drawing Data ➤ Query
Topology.
3In the Topology Query dialog box on page 1728, click Load.
4In the Topology Selection dialog box, select the topology to query. Click
OK.
5In the Load Topology from Source Drawing dialog box, make sure that
both the Topology Objects options are not selected. Click OK.
6In the Topology Query dialog box, select or define a query.
■To load an existing query, click Load Query and select the query.
■To define a new query, click Define Query, and then define a query
on page 1119 to retrieve the topology geometry you require.
7Select Draw mode and execute the query.
Now that the objects are in the current drawing, you can edit them.
To edit the objects
1Unload on page 768 the topology from the source drawings. Load the
topology in the current drawing.
2Make any edits to the topology with the editing topology tools on page
?.
3Add the changes to the save set.
4Save back the changes to the source drawings on page 626. Do not save
the current drawing.
756 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load
Topology.
Menu
Load Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOLOADCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Topology
Query.
Menu
Query Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query
Task Pane
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 757
Topology Query dialog boxDialog Box
MAPTOPOUNLOAD
Unloads a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload.
Menu
Unload Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOUNLOADCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Creating Closed Polylines from a Polygon
Topology
You can create closed polylines from a polygon topology. This is useful if you
want to give data to an AutoCAD user so the user can hatch polygonal areas.
While creating closed polylines from polygon topology, you can create a group
containing all the elements of complex areas, such as islands. If the islands
themselves have nested islands or other polygons, these nested polygons will
form a separate grouping automatically, creating different levels of grouping.
If two or more inner polygons are not nested but share the same outer
boundary, they will be treated as one group.
758 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
You can manipulate grouped data with the GROUP command. For more
information, see GROUP in the AutoCAD Help.
You can also copy the object data and the external database links held in the
centroids to the closed polylines.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology on page 1200
To create closed polylines from a polygon topology
1Click Create menu ➤ Create Closed Polylines.
2In the Create Closed Polylines dialog box on page 1672, click Load to load
the polygon topology or select from the Name list.
All polygons in the selected topology are automatically selected.
3Under How to Close, specify the layer to create the polylines.
4Select Group Complex Polygons if you want to create a group containing
all the elements of complex areas, such as islands.
5Select Copy Object Data From Centroid To Pline and Copy Database
Links From Centroid To Pline if you want to copy the object data and
external database links held in the centroids to the closed polylines.
6Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCLPLINE
Creates polylines from a polygon topology
Create menu ➤ Create Closed Polylines
Menu
MAPCLPLINECommand Line
Create Closed Polylines dialog boxDialog Box
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 759
Managing Topologies
■Overview of Managing Topologies on page 760
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Highlighting and Identifying Topology on page 769
■Viewing Topology Data on page 773
■Viewing Topology Statistics on page 775
■Saving Topology to Source Drawings on page 776
■Correcting or Completing a Topology on page 778
■Saving and Loading Settings Using Profiles on page 781
■Renaming Topologies and Changing Their Descriptions on page 783
■Deleting Topologies on page 784
To manage topologies
■To load a topology on page 768
■To unload a topology on page 768
■To highlight all objects in a selected topology on page 771
■To highlight and identify the topologies associated with an object on page
771
■To change the color used for highlighting on page 771
■To remove highlighting and restore objects to their original color on page
772
■To view topology object data on page 774
■To view and edit the properties of topology objects in the Properties palette
on page 774
■To view topology statistics on page 776
■To save topology to source drawings on page 777
■To audit, recreate, or complete a topology on page 779
■To test the integrity of a network topology on page 779
■To save topology analysis settings in a profile on page 782
■To load an existing topology profile on page 782
■To rename or delete profiles on page 782
■To change the name, description, or both of a topology on page 784
■To delete a topology on page 785
Overview of Managing Topologies
Using topology administration tools, you can do the following:
■Load or unload an existing topology
760 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Rename or delete a topology
■Audit or check the status of a topology to ensure its integrity
■Recreate a topology that was edited with commands other than the
topology editing tools
■Get statistics on the topologies in the current drawing
■Highlight all objects in a topology, and all topologies for a selected object.
When you use these tools, all source drawings associated with a named
topology must be attached and active.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Saving Topology to Source Drawings on page 776
■Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings on page 627
Use this method...To do this...
In Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name ➤ Administration ➤ Load Topo-
logy.
See Loading or Unloading Topologies on
page 767
Load an existing topology.
In Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topo-
logy.
See Loading or Unloading Topologies on
page 767
Unload an existing topology.
In Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name ➤ Administration ➤ Rename.
See Renaming Topologies and Changing
Their Descriptions on page 783
Rename a topology.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 761
Use this method...To do this...
In Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name. Click an option from the Administra-
tion submenu.
See Correcting or Completing a Topology
on page 778
Audit or recreate a topology
Click Analyze menu ➤ Network Analysis.
See Correcting or Completing a Topology
on page 778
Test the integrity of a topology
In Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name ➤ Statistics.
See Viewing Topology Statistics on page
775
Get statistics on the topologies in the cur-
rent drawing
Click Analyze menu ➤ Properties. Select
the object. In the Properties palette, under
View the properties of topology objects
the Topo group, view the topology prop-
erties.
See Viewing Topology Data on page 773
Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
Select the object.
See Viewing Topology Data on page 773
View topology object data
In Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name ➤ Show Geometry.
See Highlighting and Identifying Topology
on page 769
Highlight all objects in a topology.
In Map Explorer, right-click the Topologies
folder ➤ Show Topology. Click an object
in the map.
See Highlighting and Identifying Topology
on page 769
Highlight the topologies associated with
an object.
762 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Use this method...To do this...
In Map Explorer, right-click the topology
name ➤ Administration ➤ Delete.
See Deleting Topologies on page 784
Delete a topology
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load
Topology.
Menu
Load Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOLOADCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
MAPTOPOUNLOAD
Unloads a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload.
Menu
Unload Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOUNLOADCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
MAPSHOWGEOM
Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 763
At the Command prompt, enter mapshowgeom.Menu
Show Geometry
Icon
MAPSHOWGEOMCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Show
Geometry
Task Pane
MAPSHOWTOPO
Highlights objects in the selected topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Show Topology Geometry.
Menu
Show Topology
Icon
MAPSHOWTOPOCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Show
Topology
Task Pane
MAPTOPOSTATS
Displays detailed information about a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Statistics.
Menu
MAPTOPOSTATSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Topology Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
764 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
ADESELOBJS
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items
To Save Set
Menu
Add Objects to Save Set
Icon
ADESELOBJSCommand Line
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)Dialog Box
MAPTOPOAUDIT
Checks that a topology is complete and contains no errors
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Audit.
Menu
MAPTOPOAUDITCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Audit
Task Pane
MAPTOPOCOMP
Completes a network or polygon topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Complete.
Menu
Complete Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOCOMPCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Complete
Task Pane
MAPTOPORECR
Reestablishes a topology that was edited with nontopology editing commands
such as STRETCH, PEDIT, and MOVE
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Recreate.
Menu
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 765
Recreate Topology
Icon
MAPTOPORECRCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Recreate
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay.
Menu
Overlay Topology
Icon
MAPANOVERLAYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Task Pane
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis.
Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONETCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
MAPTOPOREN
Changes the name and description of a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename.
Menu
766 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPTOPORENCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename
Task Pane
Rename Topology dialog boxDialog Box
MAPTOPODEL
Removes topology data from objects and optionally deletes the objects
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Delete.
Menu
MAPTOPODELCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Delete
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
Loading or Unloading Topologies
When you load a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D loads topologies in the current
drawing and retrieves topologies from attached drawings into the current
drawing. If you save a drawing with a topology and later open the drawing,
reload the topology to use it.
In Map Explorer, topologies with colorful icons are loaded. Topologies with
grayed-out icons are unloaded.
When loading a topology from a source drawing, select Create Objects When
Loaded to create the topology in the current drawing. Otherwise, the topology
is loaded without retrieving the topology geometry.
See also:
■Saving Topology to Source Drawings on page 776
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings on page 627
■Saving Objects to the Current Drawing on page 628
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 767
To load a topology
1In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤
Load Topology.
2If the topology is stored in a source drawing, the Load Topology from
Source Drawing dialog box appears, where you can specify the following:
■Create Topology Objects When Loaded — Select this check box to
copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology
is loaded. If this option is not selected, the objects are loaded but are
not copied into the current drawing.
■Select Topology Objects For Save Back — Select this option to add
objects in the current drawing to the save back set if they are
referenced by the selected topology. This means that the objects will
be saved back to their source drawings and replace the original objects.
■Audit Geometry of Topology Objects — Select this option to verify
that objects for the selected topology are geometrically correct. Any
objects that are not correct are highlighted.
In Map Explorer, the icon for the topology becomes colorful, indicating
that the topology is loaded.
To unload a topology
1In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤
Unload Topology.
In Map Explorer, the icon for the topology is grayed to indicate it has
been unloaded.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load
Topology.
Menu
Load Topology
Icon
768 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPTOPOLOADCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
MAPTOPOUNLOAD
Unloads a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload.
Menu
Unload Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOUNLOADCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Unload Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
Highlighting and Identifying Topology
Using the topology highlighting and identification tools, you can do the
following:
■Show Geometry–Highlight the objects in a topology.
Use Show Geometry to show the location and extent of a topology.
■Show Topology–Identify and highlight the topologies associated with an
object.
Use Show Topology to show the location and extent of all the topologies
associated with an object. AutoCAD Map 3D identifies the topologies by
name on the command line.
The color used for highlighting is the Selected Grip Color, which you can
specify in the AutoCAD Options dialog box.
These tools work only with topologies that have been loaded in the current
drawing.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 769
Highlight objects in the selected topology.
Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object.
770 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■To highlight all objects in a selected topology on page 771
■To highlight and identify the topologies associated with an object on page
771
■To change the color used for highlighting on page 771
■To remove highlighting and restore objects to their original color on page
772
To highlight all objects in a selected topology
1In Map Explorer, verify that the topology you want to highlight is loaded
on page 768. A topology must be loaded before it can be highlighted.
2Right-click the topology name. Click Show Geometry.
In the drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D highlights all objects in the selected
topology. To return objects to their original color, press ESC.
To highlight and identify the topologies associated with an object
1In Map Explorer, right-click the Topologies folder. Click Show Topology.
2In the map, click the object.
If the object belongs to one or more topologies, AutoCAD Map 3D
highlights all objects that belong to those topologies and lists the topology
names on the command line. If the object does not belong to a topology,
AutoCAD Map 3D reports that on the command line.
NOTE Only topologies that are loaded are considered.
3Select another object to highlight and identify, or press ESC to end the
command.
To change the color used for highlighting
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options.
2In the Options dialog box, click the Selection tab.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 771
3From the Selected Grip Color list, select the color to use for highlighting
topologies.
4Click OK.
To remove highlighting and restore objects to their original color
■Press Esc.
Quick Reference
MAPSHOWGEOM
Highlights and identifies topologies for the selected object
At the Command prompt, enter mapshowgeom.Menu
Show Geometry
Icon
MAPSHOWGEOMCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickTopologies ➤ Show
Geometry
Task Pane
MAPSHOWTOPO
Highlights objects in the selected topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Show Topology Geometry.
Menu
Show Topology
Icon
MAPSHOWTOPOCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Show
Topology
Task Pane
772 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Viewing Topology Data
Information about each topology you create is stored in an object data table
in the current drawing as shown in this table.
Information StoredObject Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
Topology typeTYPETPMDESC_EXAMPLEEXAMPLE
Setting of VIEWRES when
created or edited
TOLERANCE
Layer for linksLINK_LAYER
Color of linksLINK_COLOR
Nodes in topology; 0=No,
1=Yes
CREATE_NODE
Layer for nodesNODE_LAYER
Type of nodesNODE_TYPE
Block used for nodesNODE_BLOCK
Centroids in topology; 0=No,
1=Yes
CREATE_CNTR
Layer for centroidsCNTR_LAYER
Color of centroidsCNTR_COLOR
Type of centroidsCNTR_TYPE
Block used for centroidsCNTR_BLOCK
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 773
This information can be used in a topology query. Depending on the type of
topology, other object data tables are created and attached to the elements of
the topology.
You can also view and edit data associated with the objects in a topology using
the Properties palette. For example, for a link in a network topology, you can
view general information about the link, such as the ID of the start and end
nodes, and you can edit specific information such as the link's direction, direct
resistance, and reverse resistance.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Querying a Topology on page 1114
■Displaying and Editing Object Data for a Drawing Object on page 880
■Viewing Properties and Attributes of Drawing Objects on page 937
■Viewing Topology Statistics on page 775
To view topology object data
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
2Select the object.
3In the Edit Object Data dialog box on page 1529, view the topology data.
If the topology data is not displayed, select a topology table from the
Table list. The topology tables start with the letters "TPM."
To view and edit the properties of topology objects in the Properties palette
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Properties.
2Select the object.
3In the Properties palette, under the Topo group, view the topology
properties.
For example, if you choose a link in a network topology, you can see the
type object you selected, information about the start and end nodes, flow
direction, direct resistance, and reverse resistance.
4To view the properties of another object, select it in the map.
774 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
ADEEDITDATA
Edits attached object data
Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data
Menu
Edit Object Data
Icon
ADEEDITDATACommand Line
Edit Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Viewing Topology Statistics
You can view information about a topology, including:
■Basic Information — name, description, and type (node, network, or
polygon).
■Extents — coordinates of the lower-left corner and upper-right corner of
the bounding rectangle for the topology.
■Object Counts — number of nodes, links, and polygons in the topology.
■Details — about area, perimeter, and length, including totals, averages,
minimum values, maximum values, variance, and deviation. These apply
to network and polygon topologies only.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 775
Variance is the average of the squares of any given area, perimeter, or
length minus the square of the average. Deviation is the square root of
variance.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Viewing Topology Data on page 773
To view topology statistics
1In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Statistics.
2Review statistics in the Topology Statistics dialog box on page 1731.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOSTATS
Displays detailed information about a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Statistics.
Menu
MAPTOPOSTATSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a topology ➤ Statistics
Task Pane
Topology Statistics dialog boxDialog Box
Saving Topology to Source Drawings
You can save the topology in the current drawing or save it back to the attached
source drawings.
If you retrieved data from source drawings, you can save back the topology
information to the source drawings, and also save the current drawing. Future
work with the topology should be done in the current drawing with the source
drawings active and attached. This method ensures that complete and correct
object data associated with the topology is available.
776 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Adding an Object to the Save Set on page 622
■Saving New Objects to Attached Drawings on page 627
■Saving Objects to the Current Drawing on page 628
To save topology to source drawings
1Click File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
2Use any selection method to add the topology objects to the save set.
3Click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
4In the Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box on page 1621, under
What To Save, make sure Save Queried Objects is selected.
If you created new node or centroid objects, or if you added objects to a
topology, also select Save Newly Created Objects.
5If you are saving new objects, select a save order.
6Click OK.
Quick Reference
ADESAVEOBJS
Saves objects in the save set back to source drawings
In the Classic workspace, click File menu ➤ Save
Source Drawing Save Set
Menu
Save to Source Drawings
Icon
ADESAVEOBJSCommand Line
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog boxDialog Box
ADESELOBJS
Creates a set of objects to be saved to source drawings
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 777
File menu ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items
To Save Set
Menu
Add Objects to Save Set
Icon
ADESELOBJSCommand Line
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)Dialog Box
Correcting or Completing a Topology
If parts of the topology are incomplete (not closed or only part of a polygon),
they are marked and excluded from editing. Two examples of incomplete
topologies created by queries are shown in the following illustration. The
outer polygons in the grid are incomplete because their outside links are parts
of polygons not included in the query.
If you use a location query to retrieve polygons, make sure you use a Crossing
window. If you are using data that is shared with other users, be sure that you
load the topology to ensure that you are using current data.
Completing a Topology
When you complete a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D looks at the objects and
object data in a drawing, and attempts to complete a network or polygon
topology by retrieving further drawing objects, such as links and centroids
referenced by the topology object data tables. Complex polygons, with one
or more islands, must be fully represented, and all internal islands referenced
by a polygon must be present for the option to work.
778 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
This option completes dangling edges in a network topology, and all
incomplete areas in polygon topologies; however, it might fill islands as well.
Auditing and Recreating a Topology
When you audit a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D checks that a topology is
complete and contains no errors. Any errors found are marked but are not
fixed. Errors in a node topology are not marked.
To reestablish a topology that was edited with nontopology editing commands
such as STRETCH and PEDIT, you recreate the topology; however, topology
data might be lost. You can only recreate a topology in the current drawing;
to recreate topology in an attached drawing, use a query to retrieve the
geometry first. Load the topology before using recreate.
To modify the geometry of a topology (the nodes, links, or polygons), use the
topology editing tools explained in Editing Topologies on page 715.
To create closed polylines for a non-AutoCAD Map 3D user, click Create menu
➤ Create Closed Polylines on page 758. This also works when you are exporting
data to an external file format that does not support topologies.
See also:
■Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies on page 1086
■Querying a Topology on page 1114
■Creating a Network Topology on page 695
■Editing a Partial Topology on page 755
■Sliver Polygons on page 706
To audit, recreate, or complete a topology
1In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name. Click an option from
the Administration submenu.
To test the integrity of a network topology
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Network Analysis.
2Select the network the topology to test.
3In the Topology Network Analysis - Select Method dialog box, click Flood
Trace on page 1100. Click Next.
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 779
4Select select a starting point for the analysis. Click Next.
5Set the Maximum Resistance to a value so that all links will be flooded.
Click Next.
6Select Highlight. Choose a color that is different from the color of the
links.
7Click Finish.
If some links are not flooded, the topology may be incorrect. Use the topology
editing tools on page 716to correct the topology.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOAUDIT
Checks that a topology is complete and contains no errors
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Audit.
Menu
MAPTOPOAUDITCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Audit
Task Pane
MAPTOPOCOMP
Completes a network or polygon topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Complete.
Menu
Complete Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOCOMPCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Complete
Task Pane
MAPTOPORECR
Reestablishes a topology that was edited with nontopology editing commands
such as STRETCH, PEDIT, and MOVE
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Recreate.
Menu
780 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Recreate Topology
Icon
MAPTOPORECRCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Recreate
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
Saving and Loading Settings Using Profiles
You can save your topology overlay analysis or network analysis (path trace,
best route analysis, or flood trace) settings in a profile and use them again
later. This can save time if you plan to use the same settings more than once.
Profiles are also useful when you automate topology analysis with scripts.
Topology profiles are saved as *.tpf files.
NOTE You cannot use profiles to save settings for creating topologies, buffering
topologies, or dissolving topologies. Topology profiles can be used to save topology
overlay analysis or network topology analysis (path trace, best route analysis, or
flood trace) settings only.
You can edit topology profiles in AutoCAD Map 3D and then save your
changes, choosing either to replace an existing profile or save it as a new
profile.
WARNING Do not edit topology profiles outside of AutoCAD Map 3D. Doing so
may produce unexpected results.
See also:
■Performing a Shortest Path Trace on page 1090
■Performing a Best Route Analysis on page 1093
■Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099
■Overlaying Two Topologies on page 1102
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 781
To save topology analysis settings in a profile
1Do one of the following:
■Click Analyze menu ➤ Overlay.
■Click Analyze menu ➤ Network Analysis.
2Specify the settings to save. For more information, see Analyzing Drawing
Topologies on page 1085.
3Click Save.
4In the Save Topology Profile dialog box, enter a name for the profile.
Click Save.
To load an existing topology profile
1In any of the Topology Overlay Analysis or Network Topology Analysis
dialog boxes, click Load.
2In the Select Topology Profile dialog box, select the profile to load.
Topology profiles are saved as *.tpf files.
3Click Open.
The settings from the selected profile become current.
To rename or delete profiles
■Right-click the profile in the Select Topology Profile or Save Topology
Profile dialog box. Click Rename or Delete.
Quick Reference
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay.
Menu
Overlay Topology
Icon
MAPANOVERLAYCommand Line
782 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Task Pane
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis.
Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONETCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
Renaming Topologies and Changing Their
Descriptions
You can change the name, description, or both of a complete, loaded topology.
When you rename a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D renames the object data
table containing the topology relationship data.
Before you rename a topology or change its description, do the following:
■Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
■Load the topology from the current drawing.
■To rename a topology or change its description without creating a backup
of an attached drawing, disable the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing
option of the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box.
NOTE You cannot undo this operation using the UNDO command.
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
Creating, Editing, and Managing Topologies | 783
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Setting Save Back Options on page 634
To change the name, description, or both of a topology
1In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤
Rename.
You can only rename topologies that are loaded and completely
represented.
2In the Rename Topology dialog box on page 1707, edit the name or
description. Click OK.
Names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen
characters. Names cannot contain spaces.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOREN
Changes the name and description of a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename.
Menu
MAPTOPORENCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename
Task Pane
Rename Topology dialog boxDialog Box
Deleting Topologies
When you delete a topology, the topology relationship data (object data) is
deleted from objects referenced by the selected topology. You can choose to
delete the referenced objects as well.
Load a topology and verify that it is completely represented before deleting
it. This ensures that all pieces of the topology are deleted, including pieces in
attached source drawings. If you delete an incomplete topology, the corrupt
topology still exists in the source drawings that were not attached.
784 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
To delete a topology
1In Map Explorer, right-click the topology name ➤ Administration ➤
Delete.
NOTE Load a topology and verify that it is completely represented before
deleting it.
2In the Delete Topology dialog box on page 1690, select Delete Geometry
to delete the referenced objects from the current drawing. The topology
relationship data is automatically deleted when you delete a topology.
3Click OK to delete the topology.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPODEL
Removes topology data from objects and optionally deletes the objects
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Delete.
Menu
MAPTOPODELCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Delete
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
Using Map Editing Tools
You can use the AutoCAD Map 3D editing tools to edit your maps and spatial
data. For information about editing objects and design data, see the AutoCAD
Help.
To use Map editing tools
■To use the AutoCAD Map 3D editing tools on page 786
Using Map Editing Tools | 785
■To move, rotate, or scale an object on page 789
■To rubber sheet two maps on page 792
■To define text location on page 794
■To fill a closed polyline with a solid-looking hatch on page 796
■To break objects at a boundary on page 798
■To save the data back to the source drawings after a boundary break on
page 799
■To create an enlarged map section on page 800
■To trim objects inside a boundary on page 802
■To use grips on page 804
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 807
■To match map edges on page 808
■To save the edited objects back to the source drawings on page 809
■To digitize points using coordinates on page 809
Overview of Using the Map Editing Tools
AutoCAD Map 3D provides special editing tools for editing maps and spatial
data, as well as AutoCAD editing tools for editing drawing objects and design
data.
Examples: Stretching a new subdivision map into a preexisting parcel map
and aligning the two maps geographically, breaking a large city map into three
tiled sections, or creating a seamless join across two or more maps.
WARNING If you use these methods on a topology, they can make it invalid and
impossible to re-create. Use topology editing commands on page 715 instead.
For information about editing objects and design data, see the AutoCAD Help.
See also:
■Editing Topologies on page 715
■Overview of Bringing in Drawing Data From DWG Files on page 297
To use the AutoCAD Map 3D editing tools
1Open the drawing containing the objects you want to edit or query the
objects into the current drawing.
2Use one or more of the following AutoCAD Map 3D editing commands:
■Transform on page 789
786 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Rubber Sheet on page 792
■Define Text Location on page 794
■Fill Closed Polylines on page 796
■Fill Polygons on page 819
■Boundary Break on page 798
■Create an Enlarged Map Section on page 799
■Boundary Trim on page 802
■Manually Edit on page 804
■Creating Centroids for Polylines on page 805
■Match Map Edges on page 808
Notes and Warnings
■To perform general and object-specific editing operations, use the AutoCAD
editing commands. For more information, see the AutoCAD Help.
■Do not use any of the methods described above to edit topologies; you
might not be able to recreate the topology. Use the topology editing
commands on page 715 instead.
Quick Reference
ADEFILLPOLYG
Fills a selected polygon
ADEFILLPOLYGCommand Line
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command)Dialog Box
ADERSHEET
Performs rubber sheeting on selected objects
Modify menu ➤ Rubber Sheet
Menu
ADERSHEETCommand Line
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command)Dialog Box
Using Map Editing Tools | 787
ADETEXTLOC
Specifies a new label point for an object
Create menu ➤ Map Labelpoint Location
Menu
Map Labelpoint Location
Icon
ADETEXTLOCCommand Line
ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)Dialog Box
ADETRANSFORM
Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects
Modify menu ➤ Transform
Menu
ADETRANSFORMCommand Line
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command)Dialog Box
MAPBREAK
Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary
Modify menu ➤ Boundary Break
Menu
Boundary Break
Icon
MAPBREAKCommand Line
Break Objects at Boundary dialog boxDialog Box
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
788 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPTRIM
Trims objects to a set of edges
Modify menu ➤ Boundary Trim
Menu
Boundary Trim
Icon
MAPTRIMCommand Line
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog boxDialog Box
Moving, Rotating, and Scaling an Object
You can simultaneously move, rotate, and scale a group of objects using the
Transform editing tool.
Differences From Simple Transformation Settings
The Transform editing tool works very differently from the Simple
Transformation settings on page 155 in the Drawing Settings dialog box. The
Simple Transformation settings temporarily adjust the position of objects as
they are retrieved during the query process. AutoCAD Map 3D reverses these
transformations during save back. The Transform editing tool permanently
scales, moves, and rotates objects within the current drawing.
See also:
■ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) on page 1387
To move, rotate, or scale an object
1Click Modify menu ➤ Transform.
2Specify whether you want to select objects or use all objects on a specified
layer.
3Select the objects you want to transform, or select a layer.
4Define the base point.
The rotation and scaling occur around this point.
Using Map Editing Tools | 789
5Specify a base rotation and scale, separated by a comma. For a simple
transformation, set the base rotation to 0 and the base scale to 1.
6Define a new zero point.
Selected objects are offset by the difference between the original base
point and the new point.
7Define a new rotation and scale, separated by a comma.
Selected objects are rotated the difference between the new rotation and
the old rotation. They are scaled based on the ratio of the new scale to
the old scale.
Quick Reference
ADETRANSFORM
Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objects
Modify menu ➤ Transform
Menu
ADETRANSFORMCommand Line
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command)Dialog Box
Rubber Sheeting Two Maps
Rubber sheeting is a nonuniform adjustment of a data set based on the
movement of known control points to new locations. For example, data
collected by aerial survey may be inaccurate because of flight alignment and
camera inaccuracies. By comparing this data with accurate ground survey data,
the aerial data can be stretched or rubber sheeted over the accurate data using
control points and monuments common to both data sets.
Use rubber sheeting when you want two or more different data sets from
different sources to align geographically: for example, when stretching a new
subdivision map into a preexisting parcel map.
790 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
The reference map is correct, but the map with new details is severely distorted. By
running the Rubber Sheeting command and selecting common control points, the
two maps can be correctly aligned.
When selecting points for rubber sheeting, select points in order around the
perimeter of the object or region to be rubber sheeted.
incorrectcorrect
The selected points are treated as the vertices of a polygon, so you will get
better results if you select the points sequentially around the perimeter.
Objects that have a given shape, such as circles, arcs, and ellipses, retain their
original shape.
WARNING Use rubber sheeting only when absolutely necessary because it can
severely compromise the accuracy of your data.
Using Map Editing Tools | 791
Because rubber sheeting is not a linear transformation, it is difficult to reverse
the effects of the transformation and return a drawing to its original state.
You should save your drawing before you perform a rubber sheeting operation.
Changing Scale
Do not rubber sheet two maps drawn at different scales. If you do, the
command matches objects and changes the original scaling of text and blocks
to match the new scaling, which can change data significantly. You should
use rubber sheeting as a last resort after exhausting other methods of object
editing and coordinate adjustment.
If you are working with two maps that have different scales and coordinate
systems, first decide which coordinate system to use for the reference map.
Then set the coordinate systems for the current and source maps.
See also:
■ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command) on page 1386
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
Rubber sheet the less accurate data to fit the more accurate data. Perform a
query to bring in the source drawing and apply rubber sheeting to the two
maps. If you have set up a system of control points, or monuments, use this
data as the reference to which you rubber sheet other maps.
To rubber sheet two maps
1Click Modify menu ➤ Rubber Sheet.
2When prompted on the command line for Base point 1, specify the first
common feature on map 2, the warped map.
3When prompted on the command line for Reference point 1, specify the
corresponding feature on map 1, the accurate map.
4Follow the prompts on the command line and continue specifying base
and reference points. When you're done, press Enter.
The order in which you select the points and the spread of the points
will affect the results. For complex curved figures, the more vertices you
enter, the more accurate the proportionate stretching.
5Select the objects to rubber sheet. Enter a to select objects by area, or s
to select objects individually. If you queried all objects in the warped
map onto their own layer, select that layer.
792 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
6Press Enter to complete the process.
Quick Reference
ADERSHEET
Performs rubber sheeting on selected objects
Modify menu ➤ Rubber Sheet
Menu
ADERSHEETCommand Line
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command)Dialog Box
Defining the Text Insertion Point
You can add text to objects using the Alter Properties feature in the Define
Query dialog box. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D positions the text at the
centroid of the object.
Using Map Editing Tools | 793
The text position relative to the object is called the label point. You can redefine
the label point using the Map Labelpoint Location option.
To use the label point, choose the .LABELPT dot variable in the Define Text
dialog box when you create the Property Alteration definition in the Define
Query dialog box.
See also:
■Adding Text to Queried Drawing Objects on page 1061
■Dot Variables on page 1289
The label point of an object specifies the starting point for text added during
a query property alteration. To define the label point for an object, do the
following:
To define text location
1Click Create menu ➤ Map Labelpoint Location.
2Select the object.
3Click the place on the object where you want the label point to be located.
To use this label point as the text insertion point during a property alteration
on page 1062, choose LABELPT as the insert point.
794 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
ADETEXTLOC
Specifies a new label point for an object
Create menu ➤ Map Labelpoint Location
Menu
Map Labelpoint Location
Icon
ADETEXTLOCCommand Line
ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)Dialog Box
Filling a Closed Polyline
You can fill closed polylines in your drawing with solid fills and hatch patterns.
For example, you can use one color to show counties with a population over
10,000 and another color to show counties under 10,000.
Filling closed polylines
Using Map Editing Tools | 795
The ADEFILLPOLYG command always creates a hatch object with the solid
fill hatch style.
You can also use the BHATCH command to fill closed polylines. Use the
MPFILL command to fill polygon objects.
NOTE If you move closed polylines that you filled using ADEFILLPOLYG, you must
move the hatch object as well. AutoCAD Map 3D considers the closed polyline
and the hatch object as separate objects.
To fill closed polylines automatically with hatch patterns or solid fills when
performing queries, use the Alter Properties feature in the Define Query dialog
box.
If you set the Create Associative Hatch Objects option on the Query tab of
the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box, AutoCAD Map 3D creates associative
hatch objects for hatch objects created by the ADEFILLPOLYG command, the
ADEQUERY command (using Alter Properties), and the MAPTHEMATIC
command (using a fill).
See also:
■Using Associative Hatch on page 222
■Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page 1044
■Modifying Polygon Objects on page 818
■Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page 1044
To fill a closed polyline with a solid-looking hatch
1On the command line, enter adefillpolyg.
2Specify whether you want to select objects or fill all objects on a specified
layer.
3Select the objects or specify a layer.
4Specify the color for the fill.
Quick Reference
ADEFILLPOLYG
Fills a selected polygon
796 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
ADEFILLPOLYGCommand Line
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command)Dialog Box
Breaking Objects at a Closed Boundary
Using the Boundary Break option, you can break any objects that cross a given
line. This capability lets you save maps back to source drawings with clean
edges or plot maps without overlapping borders. It functions like the AutoCAD
BREAK command for a selected set of objects and a polyline boundary.
The text Thonon-les-Bains remains in the central map because the text has a
MiddleCenter justification and insertion point.
The Boundary Break option
■Breaks vectors and edge objects with start and end points that straddle a
cutting edge.
■Does not break objects such as blocks, text, hatch patterns, and other
objects with a single insertion point that do not form edges; the insertion
point determines which map contains the object.
Specifying the Boundary Edge
When breaking objects, you can draw a boundary, choose one or more existing
objects that form a closed boundary, or use the save back extents of the active
Using Map Editing Tools | 797
source drawings as the boundary. Using save back extents combines the extents
of all active source drawings as the boundary.
The edges of the boundary do not have to form a rectilinear shape. If you are
breaking using lines of latitude and longitude, the edges form a trapezoidal
shape.
Retaining Object Data
You can also choose to retain existing attached object data and links to external
database records on the objects created by the break.
Once the objects are broken, you can save the data back to the source drawings.
See also:
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 611
■Defining the Text Insertion Point on page 793
■Overview of Polygons on page 811
To break objects at a boundary
1Open a drawing and attach the maps you want.
2Define and execute a query to retrieve the objects to break.
3Click Modify menu ➤ Boundary Break.
4In the Break Objects at Boundary dialog box on page 1404, under
Boundaries, choose how to specify the boundaries for breaking:
■Use Save Back Extents Of Active Source Drawings — Uses the combined
extents of all active source drawings as the boundary.
■Select Boundaries — Allows you to choose existing objects in the
current drawing. These objects need to form a closed area but do not
need to be single objects. Click Select and select the objects to use.
■Define Boundary — Allows you to draw a single closed boundary on
screen. Click Define and specify the boundary.
5Under Objects To Break, specify whether to select objects manually or
automatically, and whether to use only objects on selected layers.
6Under Break Method, specify whether to exclude topology objects, and
whether to retain object data on the objects.
798 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
7Click OK.
8In the Confirm Save Back dialog box, click Yes.
The objects are broken according to the location of the save back extents.
To save the data back to the source drawings after a boundary break
1Click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
2Under What To Save, make sure that both Save Queried Objects and Save
Newly Created Object are selected.
3Under Save Order For Newly Created Objects, select Area. Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPBREAK
Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary
Modify menu ➤ Boundary Break
Menu
Boundary Break
Icon
MAPBREAKCommand Line
Break Objects at Boundary dialog boxDialog Box
Creating an Enlarged Map Section
You can use Boundary Break to show an enlargement of a selected area.
Using Map Editing Tools | 799
Use Boundary Break to isolate an area, then move and scale up the selected area. This
is useful for map inserts.
Adding an inset to a map communicates the focus of the map better.
See also:
■Breaking Objects at a Closed Boundary on page 797
■Trimming Objects at a Boundary on page 801
To create an enlarged map section
1Draw a rectangle around the area you want to enlarge.
2Break the boundaries on page 798 inside the rectangle.
3Copy objects from the rectangle to a new location.
4Rescale the objects to a larger size.
Quick Reference
MAPBREAK
Breaks objects along a selected or defined boundary
Modify menu ➤ Boundary Break
Menu
Boundary Break
Icon
MAPBREAKCommand Line
800 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Break Objects at Boundary dialog boxDialog Box
Trimming Objects at a Boundary
Using the Boundary Trim command, you can specify a closed boundary as a
trimming edge for a selected set of objects. You can use this option to trim
objects inside or outside a boundary. Use Boundary Trim to quickly clear a
circular or rectilinear area in a complex map in order to insert a legend or
label.
You can use this command to enhance plotted maps. After trimming objects
inside an area, you can add text that will not be obscured.
You can use a boundary to trim all objects inside the boundary or outside the boundary.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
Using Map Editing Tools | 801
■Overview of Polygons on page 811
To trim objects inside a boundary
1Open a drawing and attach the maps you want.
2Define and execute a query to retrieve the objects to trim.
3Click Modify menu ➤ Boundary Trim.
4Under Boundary, select how to specify the boundary:
■Reference Last Query Boundary — Use the boundary you used in the
last query.
■Select Boundary — Use an object in the current drawing as the
boundary. Click Select and select the object to use. The object needs
to form a closed area.
■Define Boundary — Use a boundary you define. Click Define and
specify the boundary.
5Under Objects To Trim, specify whether to select objects manually or
automatically, and whether to use only objects on selected layers.
6Under Trim Method, specify whether to trim inside or outside the
boundary. Specify whether to exclude topology objects, and whether to
retain object data on the objects.
If you select Retain Object Data, object data and external link data is
duplicated on each piece of a trimmed object. If data is not retained, it
remains attached only to the original location.
7Under Objects That Cannot Be Trimmed, specify what to do with text,
hatch patterns, and blocks that cross the boundary.
8Click OK.
9To save the trim with your topology, save your changes back to the source
drawings.
To save the trim results without modifying the original topology, save
the changes to a new drawing.
Quick Reference
MAPTRIM
802 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Trims objects to a set of edges
Modify menu ➤ Boundary Trim
Menu
Boundary Trim
Icon
MAPTRIMCommand Line
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog boxDialog Box
Manually Editing Objects
Although the automatic AutoCAD Map 3D editing tools can correct many
problems, you may need to edit a drawing manually. Use commands such as
FILLET, TRIM, and EXTEND to correct situations similar to those shown in
the following illustration.
WARNING Using these editing commands to edit a topology can corrupt the
topology. Instead, use the Editing topologies on page 715 commands.
You can also use object grips to correct errors. Using grips, you can quickly
correct overlaps of coincident boundaries, such as county lines and roads or
geological boundaries and fault lines.
In this example, you can use the grips to align the two boundaries along the
fault line.
Using Map Editing Tools | 803
See also:
■Overview of Editing a Topology on page 716
To use grips
1Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options. Click the Selection tab.
2Make sure Enable Grips is selected and click OK.
You can also edit the size and color of the grips. Once grips are enabled,
squares appear on objects when you select them without starting a
command. These squares are the object grips.
3Select an object so its grips appear.
4Select an object grip.
To select more than one grip, hold down the Shift key as you select each
grip.
5Select a new point. The grip you selected is relocated to the selected point,
stretching the rest of the objects associated with that grip.
As you move the cursor, it snaps or locks onto an object grip when it
moves into the square zone representing the grip. You can use this feature
instead of using an object snap such as Endpoint or Midpoint.
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
804 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
Creating Centroids for Polylines
If you have polygon objects or closed polylines with data attached to them,
you can create centroids and move the data to the centroid.
This is useful in the following situations:
■After you import or digitize objects.
■Before using editing commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Boundary Break,
or Boundary Trim.
■When working with topology.
Using Map Editing Tools | 805
Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids
(below).
AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the lines do not intersect each other, and that
the area is greater than 0. It then creates a centroid inside each selected polygon
or closed polyline and moves any object data or SQL link data to the centroid.
For an object shaped like a figure eight, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
See also:
■Creating a Polygon Topology on page 699
■Creating Centroids for Polygons on page 748
806 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1Click Create menu ➤ Centroids.
2In the Create Centroids dialog box on page 1535, specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select the polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Click the Quick Select tool to view and filter the object type as you select
objects.
3Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
Matching Map Edges
Maps that are digitized at different times or that use different coordinate
systems can appear distorted at their edges. Edge matching creates a seamless
join across two or more maps.
Use the edge-matching process on one layer at a time. You might edge match
the roads on the two maps first.
You can avoid using edge matching by digitizing a complete map in one
session, rather than breaking the map into smaller sections. If you must digitize
Using Map Editing Tools | 807
a map in sections, allow a 3-5% overlap along the edges of a map tile and
digitize both linear and point features on each tile that are common to both
tiles of the map.
See also:
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
■Digitizing Points Using Coordinates on page 809
To match map edges
1Open a drawing and attach the maps you want to match at edges.
2Define a query to retrieve the objects to match:
■Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
■Define a location condition with a buffer fence option. When defining
the buffer fence, select the edge to match and specify a suitable buffer
fence width.
■You can also add a property condition to select objects on a specific
layer.
3Click Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
4In the Drawing Cleanup - Select Objects dialog box, click Select All. You
can specify the layer(s) you want to use, for example, the layer containing
road data, and anchor objects as needed. Click Next.
5In the Select Actions Page, in the Cleanup Actions list, click Snap Clustered
Nodes and then click Add.
6In the Selected Actions list, click Snap Clustered Nodes. Under Cleanup
Parameters, set Tolerance to a value just greater than the offset distance
between objects. You can type a value in the Tolerance box or click Pick
to specify the tolerance in the drawing.
7Under Options, choose Automatically. Click Next.
8In the Cleanup Methods Page, under Cleanup Method, select Modify
Original Objects.
9You can save your settings in a profile on page 650 to use again later.
10 Click Finish to start the drawing cleanup operation.
11 In the Confirm Save Back dialog box, click Yes.
808 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
The objects are now contiguous across the map edges. Repeat steps 4 to
11 for all other layers and objects in the edge matching part of the maps.
To save the edited objects back to the source drawings
1Click File menu ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
2Under What To Save, make sure Save Queried Objects is selected. Click
OK.
All the objects are now matched at their edges.
Quick Reference
MAPCLEAN
Performs drawing cleanup operations
Modify menu ➤ Drawing Cleanup
Menu
Drawing Cleanup
Icon
MAPCLEANCommand Line
Drawing CleanupDialog Box
Digitizing Points Using Coordinates
You can digitize new points in existing maps with precision by using the Track
Coordinates feature to specify the exact coordinates of the points.
See also:
■Tracking Coordinates on page 941
■Matching Map Edges on page 807
To digitize points using coordinates
1In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing. Click Track Coordinates.
2In the Track Coordinates pane, click Select Coordinate System.
Using Map Editing Tools | 809
3In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, choose the coordinate
system.
4Click OK.
The Track Coordinates pane displays the code and description of the
coordinate system you chose.
5Start the command for which you want to enter coordinates.
6In the X and Y text boxes, type the coordinates of the point to digitize.
7Do one of the following:
■Click Digitize.
■Press Enter.
The appropriate coordinates are entered on the command line. You can
continue to enter coordinates.
Quick Reference
MAPTRACKCS
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system
Analyze menu ➤ Track Coordinate Sytem....
Menu
Track Coordinates
Icon
MAPTRACKCSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent Drawing ➤ Track
Coordinates
Task Pane
Working with Polygon Objects
A polygon is a closed area that stores information about its inner and outer
boundaries, and about other polygons nested or grouped with it. The polygon
object (called the mpolygon) allows accurate translation of data between
AutoCAD Map 3D and other GIS packages.
810 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To work with polygon objects
■To work with polygons on page 813
■To create a polygon object on page 816
■To set the Fill property for polygon objects on page 816
■To add boundaries on page 819
■To delete boundaries on page 819
■To move boundaries on page 820
■To edit nodes on a boundary on page 820
■To change the boundary type on page 821
■To rebalance the polygon object on page 821
■To edit the fill property for the polygon object on page 821
■To set the default fill pattern for polygons on page 822
■To split a polygon object on page 824
■To convert polylines to polygons on page 826
■To convert a polygon topology to polygons on page 829
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 832
■To change the default setting for importing polygons on page 833
■To change the default fill for polygons on page 833
■To change the display of polygon edges on page 834
Overview of Polygons
A polygon is an object type with closed boundaries. Polygons store information
about their inner and outer boundaries, and about other polygons nested
within them or grouped with them.
Polygons can represent areas such as city limits, county boundaries, state
borders, buildings, and parcels, as well as more complex objects, such as islands.
Example: A state map could be composed of a single polygon with an outer
boundary representing the state, interior boundaries representing lakes, and
boundaries within those boundaries representing islands. A country map could
be composed of individual polygons representing each state.
The following table defines common terms used to describe the structure of
polygons.
DefinitionTerm
Closed boundaries that make up a polygon. Polygons can have
multiple non-intersecting boundaries, or boundaries nested
within boundaries.
Boundaries
Working with Polygon Objects | 811
DefinitionTerm
Process of recalculating which boundaries are outer or inner.
Nested boundaries are alternately classified as outer and inner.
Balancing
That is, the outermost boundary is classified as an outer
boundary. A boundary nested within this boundary is an inner
boundary. A boundary nested within the inner boundary is
classified as an outer boundary.
Nested boundary that is totally within an outer boundary.Inner boundary
The outermost boundary for any discreet set of boundaries that
define the polygon, or a boundary residing within an inner
Outer boundary
boundary. A polygon can have several unnested outer boundaries
and several nested outer boundaries.
Understanding Boundaries
The figure below shows two polygon objects, each with three boundaries. The
one on the left has two discrete outer boundaries and one inner boundary.
The inner boundary is nested within the second discrete outer boundary. The
polygon on the right also has two outer boundaries and one inner boundary.
However, the second outer boundary is nested within the inner boundary.
Polygon objects maintain a tree structure to keep track of the boundaries and
identify nesting levels. The illustration below shows the different tree structures
for the two objects shown above. The first polygon tree contains two branches,
while the second polygon tree contains a single branch.
812 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
In addition to outer and inner boundaries, there is an Annotation boundary
type. This boundary has the characteristics of an inner boundary, but only
affects the display of the pattern fill and is ignored when calculating the area
or interior of the polygon object. Its primary purpose is to allow you to
annotate your drawings without the fill pattern of the polygon obscuring the
annotations. The annotation will typically consist of text or blocks.
See also:
■Creating Polygon Objects on page 816
■Modifying Polygon Objects on page 818
■Setting Polygon Options on page 832
To work with polygons
■To create a polygon object on page 816
■To add boundaries on page 819
■To convert polylines to polygons on page 826
■To convert a polygon topology to polygons on page 829
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 832
■To change the default setting for importing polygons on page 833
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Working with Polygon Objects | 813
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
Converts closed polylines to polygons
At the Command prompt, enter
mappolylinetopolygon.
Menu
Convert Polylines to Polygons
Icon
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGONCommand Line
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
Converts an existing polygon topology to polygons
At the Command prompt, enter
maptopologytopolygons.
Menu
Convert Topology to Polygons
Icon
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONSCommand Line
Create Polygons From Topology dialog boxDialog Box
MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Turns on and off the ability to use mapping polygons
MAPUSEMPOLYGONCommand Line
MAPUSEMPOLYGONDialog Box
MAPMPEDIT
Edits polygons
Click Modify ➤ Edit MPolygon.
Menu
814 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Edit Polygon
Icon
MAPMPEDITCommand Line
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command)Dialog Box
MPFILL
Sets the default fill for polygons
At the Command prompt, enter mpfill.Menu
Polygon Fill Settings
Icon
MPFILLCommand Line
Polygon Fill Properties dialog boxDialog Box
MPOLYGON
Creates polygons
Create ➤ Mpolygon
Menu
MPolygon
Icon
MPOLYGONCommand Line
MPSPLIT
Splits an existing polygon into two new polygons
At the Command prompt, enter mpsplit.Menu
Split Polygon
Icon
MPSPLITCommand Line
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command)Dialog Box
Working with Polygon Objects | 815
Creating Polygon Objects
Create polygon objects by selecting existing closed polyline objects and circles,
or by specifying points.
The boundaries of a polygon object can overlap or touch, but they cannot
cross. When you pick points to draw a boundary, a point will be rejected if it
causes the boundary to cross itself or if it crosses a previous boundary created
by the command.
You select the fill color and pattern used to fill polygon objects. For color, you
can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors from
imported color books. For pattern, you can choose a predefined hatch pattern,
a simple line pattern of your own design, a more complex hatch pattern, or
a solid color. You can also create a gradient fill, which uses a transition between
shades of one color or between two colors. Gradient fills can be used to give
the appearance of light reflecting on an object.
See also:
■Converting Polylines to Polygons on page 825
■Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons on page 827
■Modifying Polygon Objects on page 818
■Setting Polygon Options on page 832
To create a polygon object
1Click Create menu ➤ Mpolygon.
2Click in the drawing to specify a start point, or select an existing object
to include in the polygon.
3Optionally, enter a to draw an arc as part of the polygon.
4Repeat Step 2 to add objects or specify more points.
5Enter c to close the polygon.
To set the Fill property for polygon objects
1On the command line, enter mpfill. Press Enter.
2Enter f.
816 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
3In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box on page 1558, set the polygon fill
properties.
These properties are applied to the polygon that you are drawing and all
new polygons you create or convert.
Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog
box...
To fill with...
Solid ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■For Pattern Name, select Solid.
■For Fill Color, select the fill color. Choose "Select
Color" to select from a large palette of colors.
Predefined hatch pattern ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■For Pattern Name, select a pattern.
User defined hatch pattern ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select User Defined.
■Specify the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern.
One or two color gradient ■Click the Gradient tab.
■Select the number of colors to use for the gradient
fill.
■Select the colors.
■Use the Shade/Tint slider to adjust the color.
■Click a pattern.
■Select Center to create a symmetrical fill, or clear
Center to move the "highlight" up and to the left.
■Specify an angle for the "highlighted" area.
4Continue creating the polygon by following the steps in the previous
procedure.
Working with Polygon Objects | 817
Quick Reference
MPOLYGON
Creates polygons
Create ➤ Mpolygon
Menu
MPolygon
Icon
MPOLYGONCommand Line
Modifying Polygon Objects
You can edit a polygon by editing its boundaries (adding, deleting, moving,
or disconnecting them), changing its fill properties, moving nodes in a
boundary, changing individual boundary types to Inner or Outer, or
rebalancing the polygon. For explanations of these terms, see Overview of
Polygons on page 811.
Rebalancing Polygons
If you add or delete boundaries, be sure to rebalance the polygon. A polygon
becomes unbalanced when it does not have correct information about which
is an inner boundary and which is an outer boundary. When you rebalance
the polygon, the nesting order follows an alternating outer/inner/outer order.
Area of a Polygon
The area between an inner and outer boundary is filled or not filled in an
alternating manner. In a balanced polygon, the filled area represents the total
area of the polygon object. The total area of the polygon is calculated by
subtracting the sum of the area of all inner boundaries from the sum of the
area of all outer boundaries.
Filling a Polygon
You can change the default fill color and pattern assigned to polygons. For
color, you can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors
from imported color books. For fill pattern, you can select a predefined hatch
818 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
pattern, define your own hatch pattern, choose a solid color, or define a one-
or two-color gradient fill.
See also:
■Creating Polygon Objects on page 816
■Setting Polygon Options on page 832
■Overview of Polygons on page 811
■To add boundaries on page 819
■To delete boundaries on page 819
■To move boundaries on page 820
■To edit nodes on a boundary on page 820
■To change the boundary type on page 821
■To rebalance the polygon object on page 821
■To edit the fill property for the polygon object on page 821
■To set the default fill pattern for polygons on page 822
To add boundaries
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2In the drawing area, select the polygon to edit.
3Enter a.
4Select the polygon or closed polyline to add to the polygon.
The boundary is added to the polygon and assigned an inner or outer
boundary type based on its relationship to the rest of the object
5Repeat Step 2 to add any other boundaries.
6When the selection is completed, you can rebalance the polygon by
entering r.
To delete boundaries
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2Select the polygon to edit.
Working with Polygon Objects | 819
3Enter d to delete the boundary, or enter c to delete the boundary from
the polygon but preserve it as an object.
4Click a boundary object to delete from the polygon.
The boundary is removed from the polygon.
5Repeat Step 2 to delete any other boundaries.
6When the selection is completed, you can enter r to rebalance the
polygon.
To move boundaries
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2Select the polygon to edit.
3Enter m.
4Click a boundary object to move within the polygon.
Any nested boundaries within the boundary are also selected.
5Click in the drawing to specify the base point.
6Click in the drawing to specify the displacement point.
7Repeat these steps to move any other boundaries.
To edit nodes on a boundary
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2Select the polygon to edit.
3Enter e.
4Click a boundary object to edit.
5Click the node to edit.
TIP Press the Spacebar to move to the next node.
Enter r to remove the node, m to move the node, or i to insert a new
node.
You can not modify the boundary in a way that would make it cross
another boundary in the polygon. For example, you cannot delete a node
if that would make the current boundary cross an inner boundary.
820 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
6When you finish editing nodes, press x to exit node-editing mode.
To change the boundary type
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2Select the polygon to edit.
3Enter b.
4Click the boundary object for which you want to change the type.
5Enter o, i, or a (Outer/Inner/Annotation).
Annotation boundaries behave the same as inner boundaries, but have
no effect on area calculations.
To rebalance the polygon object
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2Select the polygon to edit.
3Enter r.
The Rebalance option recalculates the polygon tree and reassigns the
Inner/Outer property of all the boundaries based on their nesting level.
To edit the fill property for the polygon object
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Mpolygon.
2Select the polygon to edit.
3Enter f.
4In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box on page 1558, edit the polygon
fill properties. These properties are applied to the polygon that you are
editing.
Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box...To fill with...
Solid ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■For Pattern Name, select Solid.
■For Fill Color, select the fill color. Choose "Select
Color" to select from a large palette of colors.
Working with Polygon Objects | 821
Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box...To fill with...
Predefined hatch pattern ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■For Pattern Name, select a pattern.
User defined hatch pattern ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select User Defined.
■Specify the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern.
One or two color gradient ■Click the Gradient tab.
■Select the number of colors to use for your gradient
fill.
■Select the colors.
■Use the Shade/Tint slider to adjust the color.
■Click a pattern.
■Select Center to create a symmetrical fill, or clear
Center to move the "highlight" up and to the left.
■Specify an angle for the "highlighted" area.
To set the default fill pattern for polygons
1On the command line, enter mpfill. Press Enter.
2Select the fill pattern and properties.
All polygons you create or convert will use the new default fill.
Editing Using Grips
In addition to the options described above, you can edit a polygon object
using grips in the same way that you edit a polyline object (stretch a vertex,
move, rotate, scale, etc.).
Quick Reference
MAPMPEDIT
822 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Edits polygons
Click Modify ➤ Edit MPolygon.
Menu
Edit Polygon
Icon
MAPMPEDITCommand Line
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command)Dialog Box
MPFILL
Sets the default fill for polygons
At the Command prompt, enter mpfill.Menu
Polygon Fill Settings
Icon
MPFILLCommand Line
Polygon Fill Properties dialog boxDialog Box
Splitting Polygon Objects
You can split an existing polygon into two new polygons. The existing polygon
is deleted.
Example: If a parcel is subdivided, you can split the existing parcel.
When you split a polygon, the split line cannot cross itself or cross an internal
boundary of the polygon.
Working with Polygon Objects | 823
This split is not allowed because it
touches one of the vertices of the
internal boundary.
This split is not allowed because
it crosses an internal boundary.
This split is allowed.
When you split the polygon, you can choose to copy any existing data from
the original polygon to both of the new polygons.
See also:
■Modifying Polygon Objects on page 818
■Setting Polygon Options on page 832
To split a polygon object
1On the command line, enter mpsplit. Press Enter.
2Select the polygon to split.
3Specify the line to split the polygon:
■To split the polygon by drawing a line, enter d.
Click in the drawing to specify the first point for the line.
Click to specify the next point, or enter a to draw an arc. For more
information on drawing arcs, see ARC in the AutoCAD Help.
■To split the polygon by using an existing line, enter s. Select the line
or lines.
4To copy attached data from the original polygon to the two new polygons,
enter y.
Otherwise, the data is deleted.
Quick Reference
MPSPLIT
Splits an existing polygon into two new polygons
At the Command prompt, enter mpsplit.Menu
Split Polygon
Icon
824 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MPSPLITCommand Line
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command)Dialog Box
Converting Polylines to Polygons
You can convert all, or a selection of, the closed polylines in an existing
drawing to polygon objects. When you convert a closed polyline, the original
polyline is erased and is replaced with a polygon object.
When exporting objects to other formats, use polygons to preserve information
about islands, holes, or discontinuous polygons.
Here are some typical situations in which you may want to convert polylines
to polygons.
Converting Polylines to Polygons
This illustration shows a map made of polylines. Every closed polyline is converted to
a polygon.
Working with Polygon Objects | 825
Converting Nested Polylines to Polygons
This illustration shows a state with lakes as closed polylines.
To create a complex polygon with islands, holes, or discontinuous polygons,
first use the GROUP command to group the objects that you want to include
in the polygon. Then use the MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON command.
WARNING When you group objects, only the data from the outermost boundary
is maintained. The data from nested objects is lost.
To preserve nested data, you may want to convert your polylines in steps. For
example, in the illustration above, you could first query in the state and lake
boundaries, group all these objects, and create a polygon. The resulting polygon
will show the state with holes for the lakes, and will maintain only the state
data. Next, query in the lake polylines, do not group them, and then convert
the lake polylines to polygons. Each of the polygons representing the lakes
will have its data attached.
See also:
■Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons on page 827
■Overview of Polygons on page 811
■Setting Polygon Options on page 832
To convert polylines to polygons
1Set the PROXYGRAPHICS system variable to 0.
2On the command line, enter mappolylinetopolygon. Press Enter.
826 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
3If you already had a selection set, the selected closed polylines are
converted. If you did not have a selection set, select the polylines to
convert. Press Enter.
Each closed polyline in the selection set is converted. If the polyline
belongs to a group, only the first (outermost) polyline is converted. Other
polylines in the group are copied into the polygon as additional
boundaries and the polygon is rebalanced.
When objects are converted to polygons, they use the color or hatch set by
the MPFILL command on page 833.
Quick Reference
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
Converts closed polylines to polygons
At the Command prompt, enter
mappolylinetopolygon.
Menu
Convert Polylines to Polygons
Icon
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGONCommand Line
Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons
You can create polygons from a polygon topology. The polygon topology is
not changed.
When exporting objects to other formats, use polygons to preserve information
about islands, holes, or discontinuous polygons.
Here are some typical situations in which you may want to create polygons
from a polygon topology.
Working with Polygon Objects | 827
This illustration shows a polygon topology. You can create polygons for each polygon
in the polygon topology, which is useful when exporting to other formats.
This illustration shows lakes as part of a state topology. To create a polygon for the
state with "holes" in it for the lakes, select the Group Complex Polygons option.
Converting Polygon Topology with Nested Boundaries
When you have nested polygons in your topology, you have several options
on how to convert them.
If you select the Group Complex Polygons option and all the polygons have
centroids, AutoCAD Map 3D will create a single balanced polygon.
If you do not select the Group Complex Polygons option, AutoCAD Map 3D
will create separate polygons, one for each centroid.
To create a single polygon from polygons nested within each other, each
nested polygon must have a centroid. For example, if you have three polygons
nested one within another, and the middle polygon does not have a centroid,
AutoCAD Map 3D will create separate polygons for the inner polygon and the
outer polygon.
828 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Converting Polylines to Polygons on page 825
■Overview of Polygons on page 811
■Setting Polygon Options on page 832
To convert a polygon topology to polygons
1On the command line, enter maptopologytopolygons. Press Enter.
2For Name, select the topology to convert.
Click Load Topology to select and load the topology.
3For Layer, select the layer on which you want to place the converted
polygons.
Click Layer Settings to create a new layer and set its properties.
4Optionally, select Group Complex Polygons to create a single polygon
from nested polygons in the topology.
If one polygon is inside another, they both become boundaries in the
resulting polygon object. There is no specific limit to the nesting level of
polygons grouped with this option, but in some conditions the resulting
inner/outer type of individual boundaries may not be what you
anticipated. You can use the MAPMPEDIT on page 819 command to correct
this.
5Optionally, select Copy Object Data From Centroid to copy object data
from the polygons to the new polygon objects.
If you selected Group Complex Polygons, the object data is copied only
from the outermost polygon.
6Optionally, select Copy Database Links From Centroid to copy database
links from the polygons to the new polygon objects.
If you selected Group Complex Polygons, the database links are copied
only from the outermost polygon.
7Click OK.
When objects are converted to polygons, they use the color or hatch set by
the MPFILL command on page 833.
Working with Polygon Objects | 829
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
Converts an existing polygon topology to polygons
At the Command prompt, enter
maptopologytopolygons.
Menu
Convert Topology to Polygons
Icon
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONSCommand Line
Create Polygons From Topology dialog boxDialog Box
Creating Centroids for Polygons
If you have data attached to polygon objects or closed polylines, you can
create centroids for the polygons or closed polylines and move the data to the
centroid.
This is useful after you import or digitize objects, before using editing
commands such as Drawing Cleanup, Map Break, or Map Trim, or when
working with topology.
830 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Object data attached to closed polylines (above) and object data moved to centroids
(below).
When you use this feature, AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the selected polygons
or closed polylines are clean; that is, that the lines do not intersect each other,
and that the area is greater than 0.
It creates a centroid inside each selected polygon or closed polyline and moves
any object data or SQL link data to the centroid. For a 'figure eight' object,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates one centroid.
Centroids are created with a Z value of 0.
See also:
■Creating Polygon Objects on page 816
Working with Polygon Objects | 831
■Overview of Polygons on page 811
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines
1Click Create menu ➤ Centroids.
2In the Create Centroids dialog box on page 1535, specify whether to create
centroids for all closed objects or only for selected closed objects. If only
for selected closed objects, select those polygons and closed polylines.
TIP Use Quick Select to view and filter the object type as you select objects.
3Specify the layer on which the centroids should be created.
4Specify the block to use for centroids, or use ACAD_POINT.
5Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves data to the centroid
Create menu ➤ Centroids
Menu
Create Centroids
Icon
MAPCREATECENTROIDSCommand Line
Create Centroids dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Polygon Options
AutoCAD Map 3D uses polygons by default for import and export. If you do
not want to use polygons, for example, for compatibility with an older drawing,
you can select the option to import polygons as polylines. You can also change
the default setting for this option.
832 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
When objects are imported as polygons, they use the default fill color and
pattern set by the MPFILL command. Boundaries come in as usual, using the
default layer color unless another color is specified in the imported file.
You can change the default fill color and pattern assigned to polygons. For
color, you can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and colors
from imported color books. For fill pattern, you can select a predefined hatch
pattern, define your own hatch pattern, choose a solid color, or define a one-
or two-color gradient fill.
You can also change the display of polygon boundaries to display just the
edges, just the fill, or both.
See also:
■Creating Polygon Objects on page 816
■Overview of Polygons on page 811
■To change the default setting for importing polygons on page 833
■To change the default fill for polygons on page 833
■To change the display of polygon edges on page 834
To change the default setting for importing polygons
1On the command line, enter mapusempolygon.
You are asked whether you want to use polygons.
2Type off or on. Press Enter.
If you turn off mpolygons, AutoCAD Map 3D creates closed polylines for
polygon objects that it imports.
To change the default fill for polygons
1On the command line, enter mpfill. Press Enter.
2In the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box on page 1558, select the polygon
fill properties.
Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box...To fill with...
Solid ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
Working with Polygon Objects | 833
Do this in the Polygon Fill Properties dialog box...To fill with...
■For Pattern Name, select Solid.
■For Fill Color, select the fill color. Choose "Select Color"
to select from a large palette of colors.
Predefined hatch pattern ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select Predefined.
■For Pattern Name, select a pattern.
User defined hatch pattern ■Click the Hatch tab.
■For Pattern Type, select User Defined.
■Specify the angle and spacing of the hatch pattern.
One or two color gradient ■Click the Gradient tab.
■Select the number of colors to use for your gradient
fill.
■Select the colors.
■Use the Shade/Tint slider to adjust the color.
■Click a pattern.
■Select Center to create a symmetrical fill, or clear
Center to move the "highlight" up and to the left.
■Specify an angle for the "highlighted" area.
All polygons you create or convert will use the new default fill. You can change
the fill for an existing polygon with the MAPMPEDIT command.
To change the display of polygon edges
1On the command line, enter polydisplay.
2Enter e to view edges only, f to view fill only, or b to view both edges
and fill.
3On the command line, enter regen.
834 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Quick Reference
MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Turns on and off the ability to use mapping polygons
MAPUSEMPOLYGONCommand Line
MAPUSEMPOLYGONDialog Box
MPFILL
Sets the default fill for polygons
At the Command prompt, enter mpfill.Menu
Polygon Fill Settings
Icon
MPFILLCommand Line
Polygon Fill Properties dialog boxDialog Box
POLYDISPLAY
Specifies whether to display edges only, fill only, or both for polygons
At the Command prompt, enter polydisplay.Menu
Polygon Display Mode
Icon
POLYDISPLAYCommand Line
Adding and Deleting Annotation
Use annotation to quickly and easily label objects with their attribute values,
display properties, and geometric values. For more information see Annotating
Drawing Objects on page 904.
Adding and Deleting Annotation | 835
Using Object Classification
Use object classification to organize drawing objects in your map based on
the real-world objects that they represent. When you create an object using
object classification, the object automatically has properties and values assigned
to it based on its classification.
NOTE This functionality applies to drawing objects only.
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
■Creating Classified Drawing Objects on page 842
■Assigning an Object Class on page 843
■Editing Object Class Data on page 845
■Selecting Objects by Object Class on page 846
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File on page 849
See also:
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
To use object classification
■To use object classification on page 838
■To create a classified drawing object on page 842
■To assign an object class to an existing object on page 843
■To unclassify an object on page 844
■To edit object class data for an object on page 845
■To select objects in your current map, based on their object class on page
847
■To select objects in source drawings, based on their object class on page
847
■To attach an object class definition file on page 849
Overview of Object Classification
Object classification helps organize and select objects in your drawings.
Use object classification to organize objects in your drawing based on the
real-world features that they represent, for example, roads or manholes. When
you create an object using object classification, the object automatically has
836 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
properties and values assigned to it based on its object classification. In
addition, you can find or select all objects in an object class.
Setting Up Object Classification
■Start by determining the standard objects you use in your organization.
For example, if your organization produces road maps, you may want a
set of standard road objects, such as Primary Road and Secondary Road.
■Determine the set of properties and data for each standard object type. For
each one, define an object class that specifies the properties and data for
that object type. All object class definitions are stored in an object class
definition file.
For example, you may want all Primary Roads to be use a polyline with a
thick lineweight, be on the Primary Roads layer, and have object data
associated with them that lists values for speed limit and number of lanes.
Similarly, Secondary Roads might go on the Secondary Roads layer, use a
thin lineweight, and include information on surface type.
■Use object class definitions to create objects with a standard set of properties
and data assigned to them.
For example, if you use the Create Classified Object command to create a
Primary Road, it is created with a polyline, a thick lineweight, on the
Primary Roads layer, and with object data that lists values for speed limit
and number of lanes. When you create a secondary road, it is on the
Secondary Roads layer, with a thinner lineweight, and different values for
surface type and number of lanes.
When you select an object that was created using object classification, the
properties that are associated with that object class are displayed on the Object
Class tab of the Properties palette. For example, when you select a road, the
Properties palette shows you the layer, lineweight, surface type, and number
of lanes. Edit properties by entering new values in the window.
Using Object Classification | 837
When you select a road in your drawing, the Object Class tab shows all the properties
associated with the object class Road. Edit a value by clicking in the box and selecting
an item from the list.
See also:
■Overview of Setting Up Object Classification on page 109
To use object classification
1Attach an object class definition file on page 849.
2Define an object class on page 112.
This step is often performed by the CAD Manager in your organization.
3Use object classification to standardize the objects in your drawings.
■Create new objects using object classification on page 842.
These new objects are created using the standard properties specified
for the object class.
■Assign an object class to an existing object on page 843.
The properties and data associated with the object are changed to
match the standards specified for the object class.
Once you have drawing objects in your drawing, you can do the following:
■Edit object class data for an object on page 845.
■Select objects by object class on page 847.
■Query objects from source drawings by object class name on page 1030.
838 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Query objects from source drawings by object class properties on page 1033.
■Modify objects based on their object class on page 1052.
■Add text to objects based on object class values on page 1062.
■Create a report that lists the object class properties of selected objects on
page 1218.
■View information about attached drawings on page 160.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
CLASSIFY
Classifies existing objects
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Classify Objects.
Menu
Classify Objects
Icon
CLASSIFYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Task Pane
Classify dialog boxDialog Box
Create Classified Object
Creates a new object based on the object classification definition
Using Object Classification | 839
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
an object class ➤ Create Classified Object
Task Pane
FEATUREDEF
Defines a new object class based on an example in thecurrent drawing
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object
Class.
Menu
Define Object Class
Icon
FEATUREDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Define Object Class
Task Pane
Define Object Classification dialog boxDialog Box
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Selects all classified objects
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select Features.
Menu
Select Classified Objects
Icon
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIEDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Task Pane
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects
command)
Dialog Box
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
Selects all objects that have no classification assigned to them
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select
Unclassified.
Menu
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIEDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Unclassified
Task Pane
840 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified
Objects command)
Dialog Box
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Selects all objects whose classification is not defined in the current object
class definition file
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select
Undefined.
Menu
MAPSELECTUNDEFINEDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Undefined
Task Pane
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects
command)
Dialog Box
NEWDEF
Creates a new object class definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition
File.
Menu
NEWDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ New Definition File
Task Pane
New Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
UNCLASSIFY
Removes classification from an object
Click Modify ➤ Unclassify Objects.
Menu
Unclassify Objects
Icon
UNCLASSIFYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Task Pane
Using Object Classification | 841
Creating Classified Drawing Objects
Use object classes to create new objects with a predefined set of properties and
values.
When you create a drawing object using object classification, properties are
set to allowable values and data is attached. In addition, the object is tagged
with the name of its object class.
For example, if you create a road using a Road object class, you are prompted
to create a normal polyline. The polyline is created on the Roads layer, has
the default properties for a road, and has the data values specified for a road
feature.
After you create a classified object, you can use the Object Class tab of the
Properties palette to edit the data associated with the object class.
To create classified objects , you must have an object class definition file
attached to your drawing. For information on the location of the object class
definition file, consult your CAD manager.
NOTE If an object class was defined with a create method of None, or if it was
defined as a base class only, you cannot create an object using that object class.
See also:
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
■Editing Object Class Data on page 845
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File on page 849
To create a classified drawing object
1In Map Explorer, right-click an object class. Click Create Classified Object.
If no object classes are listed in Map Explorer, attach an object class
definition file on page ?. For information on the location of the object
class definition file, consult your CAD manager.
2Create the object as prompted.
When you create the object, object data, external data, and topology data
are attached. Other properties included in the object class definition are
set to the current drawing setting. If this setting is not within the range
of allowable values for this property, the default value is used.
842 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
3If necessary, edit the properties on page 845 for this object.
Quick Reference
Create Classified Object
Creates a new object based on the object classification definition
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
an object class ➤ Create Classified Object
Task Pane
Assigning an Object Class
Classify existing objects by assigning object classes to them. When you classify
an object, the properties and data of the selected object class are assigned to
the object.
Before you assign an object class, make sure that the properties specified in
the object class definition are available in the drawing. For example, if the
object class definition specifies a linetype, make sure the specified linetype is
loaded into the drawing. Any properties that are not available are not updated
for the classified objects.
To classify objects, you must have an object class definition file attached to
your drawing. For information on the location of the object class definition
file, consult your CAD manager.
See also:
■Attaching an Object Class Definition File on page 849
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
To assign an object class to an existing object
1In Map Explorer, right-click the object class to assign to the object. Click
Classify Objects.
If no object classes are listed in Map Explorer, attach an object class
definition file on page ?. For information on the location of the object
class definition file, consult your CAD manager.
Using Object Classification | 843
2In the Classify Objects dialog box on page 1515, select the options you want
and click OK.
■Select Include Objects to classify objects even if the values for
properties associated with the object class are not within the range of
allowable values specified for the feature.
For these objects, the values that are outside the allowable range will
be reset to the default value.
■Select Exclude Objects to ensure that you do not overwrite an object
class already assigned to an object.
3Select the objects to classify.
If objects do not match the object type of the object class, they are filtered
out of the selection set and are not classified.
To unclassify an object
1In Map Explorer, right-click Object Classes. Click Unclassify Objects.
2Select the objects to unclassify.
3When you finish selecting objects, press Enter.
The object classification tag is removed from the selected objects.
Quick Reference
CLASSIFY
Classifies existing objects
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Classify Objects.
Menu
Classify Objects
Icon
CLASSIFYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click
Object Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Task Pane
Classify dialog boxDialog Box
UNCLASSIFY
844 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Removes classification from an object
Click Modify ➤ Unclassify Objects.
Menu
Unclassify Objects
Icon
UNCLASSIFYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Task Pane
Editing Object Class Data
Edit object class data for the selected object from the Object Class tab of the
Properties palette.
If you enter values on the Object Class tab tab that are outside the allowable
range for this property, the value resets to the default value. If you edit this
data elsewhere, such as on the Categories tab of the Properties palette, you
can enter values that are outside the range.
See also:
■Assigning an Object Class on page 843
■Creating Classified Drawing Objects on page 842
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
To edit object class data for an object
1Select the object.
2If the Properties palette is not already displayed, right-click the object.
Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, select the Object Class tab.
4Review and edit any information.
You must enter a value that is within the allowable range for this object
class.
Using Object Classification | 845
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Selecting Objects by Object Class
In your current map, you can create a selection set of objects, based on their
object class . For example, you could select all Roads.
When you select all objects in a base class, objects in object classes based on
that class are also selected.
You can use Quick Select to select objects with specific properties, such as all
two-line roads. You can also select all objects that have not been assigned to
any object class
In addition, you can use queries to select objects by object class in your source
drawing and query them into the current drawing.
See also:
■Assigning an Object Class on page 843
■Creating Classified Drawing Objects on page 842
■Editing Object Class Data on page 845
■Using Object Classification on page 836
846 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To select objects in your current map, based on their object class
Use this method...To select this...
In Map Explorer, right-click the object class
name ➤ Select Classified Objects.
Objects assigned to a specific object class
In Map Explorer, right-click Object Classes
➤ Select Classified Objects.
Objects assigned to any object class (all
classified objects)
In Map Explorer, right-click Object Classes
➤ Select Unclassified.
Objects that have not been assigned to
any object class (all unclassified objects)
In Map Explorer, right-click Object Classes
➤ Select Undefined.
All undefined objects
An undefined object was assigned to an
object class, but that object class is not
defined in the definition file attached to
the drawing.
Objects based on a property value 1Right-click in the map.
2Click Quick Select.
3In the Quick Select dialog box,
under Object Type, select the
object class.
4Under Properties, select the
object class property.
5Select an operator and a value.
To select objects in source drawings, based on their object class
See...To select this...
To retrieve drawing objects based on their
properties on page 1030
Objects in source drawings based on the
object class name or a specific value of an
object class property
Using Object Classification | 847
See...To select this...
To retrieve drawing objects based on their
object data on page 1033
Objects in source drawings based on the
value of specific object class data
Quick Reference
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED
Selects all classified objects
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select Features.
Menu
Select Classified Objects
Icon
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIEDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Classified Objects
Task Pane
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects
command)
Dialog Box
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
Selects all objects that have no classification assigned to them
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select
Unclassified.
Menu
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIEDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Unclassified
Task Pane
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified
Objects command)
Dialog Box
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
Selects all objects whose classification is not defined in the current object
class definition file
Click Map ➤ Feature Classification ➤ Select
Undefined.
Menu
848 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPSELECTUNDEFINEDCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Select Undefined
Task Pane
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects
command)
Dialog Box
Attaching an Object Class Definition File
The object class definition file includes information on how to create each
object class you have defined. You can change the object class definition file
that is associated with the current map. Only definitions in the associated
definition file can be assigned to objects or used to create new features.
NOTE For information on the location of the object class definition file, consult
your CAD manager.
See also:
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
■Creating an Object Classification File on page 119
To attach an object class definition file
1In Map Explorer, right-click Object Class Definition ➤ Attach Object
Class Definition File.
2Select the object class definition file. Click Open.
Quick Reference
ATTACHDEF
Changes the current feature definition file
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Attach Definition
File.
Menu
ATTACHDEFCommand Line
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing,
right-clickObject Classes ➤ Attach Definition File
Task Pane
Using Object Classification | 849
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog boxDialog Box
Entering Coordinate Geometry
Use coordinate geometry to enter accurate geometry when creating objects.
For example, you can create parcel boundaries from legal documents or survey
data.
To enter coordinate geometry
■To use a command transparently on page 851
■To use COGO commands on page 851
■To specify a point using angle and distance on page 853
■To specify a point using bearing and distance on page 855
■To specify a point using a deflection angle and a distance on page 856
■To specify a point using azimuth and distance on page 858
Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands
Use the coordinate geometry (COGO) input commands to enter accurate
geometry when creating objects. For example, you can create parcel boundaries
from legal documents or survey data.
COGO commands are also called “transparent.” You use them in the middle
of other commands by entering an apostrophe ( ' ) before the command name.
For example, start the Polyline (PLINE) command. When prompted for the
next point in the polyline, enter 'ad. The Angle Distance command prompts
you for the angle and distance to the new point. When you finish using the
Angle Distance command to specify the point, the Polyline command prompts
you to enter the next point. You can enter the point normally, or you can
start another transparent command to specify the point.
See also:
■Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point on page 852
■Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point on page 854
■Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point on page 856
■Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point on page 857
850 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To use a command transparently
1Start a command.
2When prompted for input, instead of specifying the input, enter an
apostrophe and the command name to use transparently.
3When the transparent command finishes, continue responding to the
prompts for the original command.
To use COGO commands
Use this method...To do this...
Use COGO to enter angle and distance to
specify a point. on page ?
Use an angle and a distance from another
point to create a new object.
Use COGO to enter bearing and distance
to specify a point. on page ?
Use a bearing and a distance from another
point to create a new object.
Use COGO to enter deflection angle and
distance to specify a point. on page ?
Use a deflection angle and a distance from
another point to create an object.
Use COGO to enter azimuth and distance
to specify a point. on page ?
Use azimuth and distance from another
point to create an object.
Quick Reference
AD
Specifies a point based on angle and distance from a given point
Angle Distance
Icon
'ADCommand Line
Command Line: ADDialog Box
BD
Specifies a point based on bearing and distance from a given point
Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands | 851
Bearing Distance
Icon
'BDCommand Line
Command Line: BDDialog Box
DD
Specifies a point based on deflection and distance from a given point
Deflection Distance
Icon
'DDCommand Line
Command Line: DDDialog Box
ZD
Specifies a point based on azimuth and distance from a given point
Azimuth Distance
Icon
'ZDCommand Line
Command Line: ZDDialog Box
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying an angle and a distance from another point.
852 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Select the line from which to measure the angle by
selecting an existing line in your drawing, or by
specifying a starting and ending point (1 and 2) for the
line. Then specify the angle (3) and the distance from
the starting point (4).
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands on page 850
To specify a point using angle and distance
1Start the command, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2To specify a point using angle and distance, enter 'ad.
3Specify the line to use to measure the angle.
■For the first point of an object, specify a starting point and ending
point for the line, or select an existing line in the drawing.
■For a later point in the object, specify just the ending point for the
line. The previous point of the object is the starting point of the line.
4Enter the angle from the line you just specified to the line that specifies
the new point.
5Enter the distance from the starting point to the new point.
6If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
Using Angle and Distance to Specify a Point | 853
NOTE The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you turned on the
Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog
box.
7To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'ad, and then enter the angle and distance from the point you just
specified.
Quick Reference
AD
Specifies a point based on angle and distance from a given point
Angle Distance
Icon
'ADCommand Line
Command Line: ADDialog Box
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying a bearing and a distance from another point.
Select a starting point (1) and a
quadrant (2). Then specify the bearing
angle (3) and the distance from the
starting point (4).
854 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands on page 850
To specify a point using bearing and distance
1Start the command to use, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2To specify a point using bearing and distance, enter 'bd.
3For the first point of an object, specify a starting point. For a later point
in the object, the previous point for the object is the starting point.
4Enter the quadrant.
■1 = northeast
■2 = southeast
■3 = southwest
■4 = northwest
5Enter the angle.
Use the current angular units setting, decimal values, such as 45.1111,
or surveyor type angles, such as 45d3'55".
6Enter the distance from the starting point.
7If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you turned on the
Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup
dialog box.
8To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'bd, and then enter the quadrant, angle, and distance from the point you
just specified.
Quick Reference
BD
Specifies a point based on bearing and distance from a given point
Using Bearing and Distance to Specify a Point | 855
Bearing Distance
Icon
'BDCommand Line
Command Line: BDDialog Box
Using Deflection and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying a deflection angle and a distance from another point.
Select the line from which to measure the deflection
angle by either selecting an existing line in your
drawing, or by specifying a starting and ending point
(1 and 2) for the line. Then specify the deflection angle
(3) and the distance from the starting point (4).
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands on page 850
To specify a point using a deflection angle and a distance
1Start the command to use, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2To specify a point using deflection angle and distance, enter 'dd.
3Specify the line to use to measure the angle.
■For the first point of an object, specify a starting point and ending
point for the line, or select an existing line in the drawing.
856 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■For a later point in the object, specify just the ending point for the
line. The previous point of the object is the starting point of the line.
4Enter the deflection angle from the line you just specified to the line of
the new direction.
Enter the angle using the current angular units setting, decimal values,
such as 45.1111, or surveyor type angles, such as 45d3'55".
5Enter the distance from the starting point.
6If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
NOTE The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you turned on the
Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog
box.
7To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'dd, and then enter the deflection angle and distance from the point you
just specified.
Quick Reference
DD
Specifies a point based on deflection and distance from a given point
Deflection Distance
Icon
'DDCommand Line
Command Line: DDDialog Box
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point
When creating an object, such as a line or an arc, you can specify a point by
specifying azimuth and distance from another point. Azimuth is the clockwise
angle from the North (or South) meridian.
Using Azimuth and Distance to Specify a Point | 857
Select a starting point (1). Then specify the azimuth
angle (2) and the distance from the starting point
(3).
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Geometry Commands on page 850
To specify a point using azimuth and distance
1Start the command to use, for example, PLINE or ARC.
2To specify a point using azimuth and distance, enter 'zd.
3For the first point of an object, specify a starting point for the
measurement. For a later point in the object, the previous point you
specified for the object is the starting point.
4Enter the azimuth, which is the clockwise angle from the North (or South)
meridian to the line of the new direction.
Enter the angle using the current angular units setting, decimal values,
such as 45.1111, or surveyor type angles, such as 45d3'55".
5Enter the distance from the starting point to the new point.
6If prompted, enter an elevation, grade, or slope.
NOTE The Elevation/Grade/Slope prompt appears only if you turned on the
Prompt For 3D Data Input option in the Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog
box.
858 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
7To specify another point, when you are prompted for the point, enter
'zd, and then enter the azimuth and distance from the point you just
specified.
Quick Reference
ZD
Specifies a point based on azimuth and distance from a given point
Azimuth Distance
Icon
'ZDCommand Line
Command Line: ZDDialog Box
Working with Attribute Data and Object Data
To use attribute data and object data
■To use the Data View on page 860
■To enter and edit object data on page 873
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data
Use the Data View to view and edit external database tables that are linked to
drawing objects. If you have joined data to geospatial features on page 439, use
the Data Table to view that information.
■Overview of Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Objects on page
860
■Opening a Database Table on page 865
■Editing a Database on page 867
■Changing the Look of the Data View on page 870
■Freezing and Hiding Data View Columns on page 871
See also:
■Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects on page 1008
Working with Attribute Data and Object Data | 859
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
To use the Data View
■To use the Data View to view and edit external database tables on page 861
■To open a table using the Task Pane on page 865
■To edit a database record that is linked to a drawing object on page 868
■To turn off AutoCommit on page 869
■To manually save changes when AutoCommit is off on page 869
■To change the width of a column in Data View on page 870
■To change the formatting of cells in a column in Data View on page 870
■To freeze columns in the Data View on page 871
■To hide columns in the Data View on page 872
Overview of Viewing External Data Sources for
Drawing Objects
Use the Data View to view and edit external database tables that are linked to
drawing objects.
The Data View shows records in an attached database table.
Using the Data View, you can sort and filter the records in the table. In
addition, if you open the table in Edit mode, you can edit the data in the
database table.
NOTE If you have joined data to geospatial features on page 439, use the Data
Table to view that information.
See also:
■Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects on page 1008
860 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
To use the Data View to view and edit external database tables
■To open a table using the Task Pane on page 865
■To edit a database record that is linked to a drawing object on page 868
■To find a database record in the Data View on page 1012
■To print a database table on page 1216
Quick Reference
AutoCommit
Automatically saves database changes when the cursor leaves the record
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Auto
Commit
Task Pane
Commit
Manually saves changes when AutoCommit is turned off
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Commit
Task Pane
(Data View) Append
Adds a new, blank record to the bottom of a database table
In the Data View:Records ➤ Append
Menu
Append Record
Icon
(Data View) Find
Finds specified text
In the Data View:Edit ➤ Find
Menu
(Data View) Format Column
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data | 861
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
In the Data View:Format ➤ Column
Menu
Column dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Freeze Column
Freezes the selected column to the left of the Data View window
In the Data View:View ➤ Freeze Column
Menu
(Data View) Header and Footer
Specifies header and footer for printing in the Data View
In the Data View:File ➤ Header and Footer
Menu
Header/Footer dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
In the Data View:Format ➤ Column
Menu
Column dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Page Setup
Sets the print options for Data View
In the Data View:File ➤ Page Setup
Menu
Page Setup dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Print
Prints the current view of the database table
In the Data View:File ➤ Print
Menu
Print
Icon
(Data View) Sort
862 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Sorts records in ascending or descending order based on the selected column,
or specifies a sort order based on more than one column
In the Data View:View ➤ Sort ➤ Multiple Columns
Menu
(Data View) Undo
Reverses the most recent operation
In the Data View:Edit ➤ Undo
Menu
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
In the Data View:View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
Menu
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
In the Data View:View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
Menu
MAPBROWSELINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to edit in the
Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Edit Linked
Table.
Menu
MAPBROWSELINKCommand Line
Double-click a link templateTask Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBROWSETBL
Opens a database table to edit in the Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Edit Table.
Menu
MAPBROWSETBLCommand Line
Double-click a tableTask Pane
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL)Dialog Box
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data | 863
MAPOPTIONS
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options
Setup menu ➤ Autodesk Map Options
Menu
Options
Icon
MAPOPTIONSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Options
Task Pane
AutoCAD Map Options dialog boxDialog Box
MAPRUNDBQUERY
Runs a database query and opens a database table displaying the results of
the query in the Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Execute Query.
Menu
MAPRUNDBQUERYCommand Line
Double-click the database query.Task Pane
Select Query dialog boxDialog Box
MAPVIEWLINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the
Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Linked
Table.
Menu
MAPVIEWLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View
Linked Table
Task Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPVIEWTBL
Opens a database table to view in the Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Table.
Menu
MAPVIEWTBLCommand Line
864 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Right-click a table ➤ View Table
Task Pane
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL)Dialog Box
Opening a Database Table
The Data View (which displays external data linked to drawing objects)
provides two modes for opening tables:
■View mode: You can change the way the table looks onscreen by formatting
columns, sorting records, or filtering records, and you can create links
between the data and objects in your drawing. You cannot edit the contents
of the database table.
■Edit mode: In addition to formatting the table onscreen, you can edit the
data in the table and add or delete records.
Database queries or views are always opened in View mode.
See also:
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings on page 184
To open a table using the Task Pane
■To view or edit a table, double-click it in Map Explorer.
■To create or edit links to a table, double-click its link template.
■To run a query, double-click the database query name.
The table opens in either Edit mode or View mode depending on the setting
on the Data Source on page 1634 tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box.
If the table is write-protected, it opens in View mode. Queries always open in
View mode.
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data | 865
Quick Reference
MAPBROWSELINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to edit in the
Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Edit Linked
Table.
Menu
MAPBROWSELINKCommand Line
Double-click a link templateTask Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBROWSETBL
Opens a database table to edit in the Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Edit Table.
Menu
MAPBROWSETBLCommand Line
Double-click a tableTask Pane
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL)Dialog Box
MAPRUNDBQUERY
Runs a database query and opens a database table displaying the results of
the query in the Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ Execute Query.
Menu
MAPRUNDBQUERYCommand Line
Double-click the database query.Task Pane
Select Query dialog boxDialog Box
MAPVIEWLINK
Opens a database table associated with a specific link template to view in the
Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Linked
Table.
Menu
MAPVIEWLINKCommand Line
866 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
In Map Explorer, right-click a link template ➤ View
Linked Table
Task Pane
Select Link Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPVIEWTBL
Opens a database table to view in the Data View
Click Map ➤ Database ➤ View Data ➤ View Table.
Menu
MAPVIEWTBLCommand Line
Right-click a table ➤ View Table
Task Pane
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL)Dialog Box
Editing a Database
Data View displays external data linked to drawing objects. You can edit a
table in the Data View as you would any database table. You can add or delete
records, or edit a record's values. You can also search a particular column for
occurrences of a specific value.
NOTE To view attribute data you have joined to a geospatial feature, use the Data
Table instead. See Overview of Joins on page 439.
To edit values in a table in Data View, you must have the proper user
authorizations, and you must open the table in Edit mode. See Opening a
Database Table on page 865.
You can add records only to the end of a table. You cannot insert a record
elsewhere in a table.
Undoing an Edit
While you are still in the record, use Undo and Redo to affect the last change
you made to the current record.
WARNING Be careful when deleting records. Undo does not restore a deleted
record. Your data is deleted permanently.
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data | 867
AutoCommit
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically saves (commits) your changes to the database
as soon as your cursor leaves the record.
If you do not want edits saved automatically, turn off AutoCommit for this
data source.
When AutoCommit is off, you can manually commit your changes. If you do
not manually commit your changes, AutoCAD Map 3D commits the changes
when you close all Data View windows for that data source or disconnect the
data source.
To use Replace, you must open the table in Edit mode and turn AutoCommit
off.
The AutoCommit setting applies to all tables in the selected data source.
See also:
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings on page 184
■Setting Up Users and Assigning Rights on page 74
To edit a database record that is linked to a drawing object
1Open a database table in the Data View in Edit mode.
2Click the data to edit.
3Type the new value.
You can undo changes to the current cell. In the Data View, click Edit
menu ➤ Undo. To undo all changes to a record, before leaving the record,
choose Undo Record.
To paste text from the Windows clipboard into a cell, click in the cell where
you want to paste the text. In the Data View, click Edit menu ➤ Paste.
WARNING You cannot use Undo Record after you move off the record you're
editing.
868 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
To turn off AutoCommit
■In Map Explorer, right-click a data source. Click AutoCommit.
If the command is not on the menu, you may have clicked a single table
or you may have clicked the data sources node. Be sure to right-click a data
source.
To manually save changes when AutoCommit is off
■In Map Explorer, right-click a data source. Click Commit.
Quick Reference
AutoCommit
Automatically saves database changes when the cursor leaves the record
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Auto
Commit
Task Pane
Commit
Manually saves changes when AutoCommit is turned off
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source ➤ Commit
Task Pane
(Data View) Append
Adds a new, blank record to the bottom of a database table
In the Data View:Records ➤ Append
Menu
Append Record
Icon
(Data View) Sort
Sorts records in ascending or descending order based on the selected column,
or specifies a sort order based on more than one column
In the Data View:View ➤ Sort ➤ Multiple Columns
Menu
(Data View) Undo
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data | 869
Reverses the most recent operation
In the Data View:Edit ➤ Undo
Menu
Changing the Look of the Data View
Data View displays external data linked to drawing objects. You can change
Data View, for example, to make a column narrower to fit better on your
screen or to widen a column to display all the text.
You can change the font, color, and alignment of text in the column. You
can also change the width and color of the column borders.
NOTE To preserve your formatting changes, be sure the Save Format And Style
Changes With Drawing option is selected on the Data Source tab of the AutoCAD
Map Options dialog box. If this option is not selected, formatting information for
the table is removed from the current drawing when you close the Data View.
When you detach a data source, AutoCAD Map 3D erases Data View formatting
information for all tables in that data source.
See also:
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings on page 184
To change the width of a column in Data View
1Move the cursor to the divider line next to the title of the column.
2When the cursor becomes the double arrow, click and drag the column
to the desired width.
To change the formatting of cells in a column in Data View
1Click the title of the column to select the column.
2In the Data View, click Format menu ➤ Column.
870 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
3In the Column dialog box on page 1412, select the font, cell colors, text
colors, border, and alignment options you want.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
In the Data View:Format ➤ Column
Menu
Column dialog boxDialog Box
Freezing and Hiding Data View Columns
You can freeze and hide columns in the Data View.
■Freeze columns to make them visible at all times. The selected columns
become the left-most columns in the Data View. They are frozen in that
position and do not scroll off the screen. For example, freeze the parcel
owner's name to have it remain onscreen as you scroll through the rest of
the record.
■Hide columns that you don't want to display or print. The columns remain
part of the database, and you can redisplay them at any time. For example,
hide maintenance comments when you print the table.
See also:
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Creating a Link Template on page 454
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings on page 184
To freeze columns in the Data View
1Open the database table in the Data View.
2Select one or more columns.
Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data | 871
3In the Data View, click View menu ➤ Freeze Column.
To release frozen columns, in the Data View, select the columns and click
View menu ➤ Unfreeze All Columns.
To hide columns in the Data View
1In the Data View, select the column header of the column that you want
to hide.
2Right-click the column header. Click Hide.
To redisplay all hidden columns, right-click the grid header in the Data View.
Click Unhide All.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
In the Data View:Format ➤ Column
Menu
Column dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Format Column
Changes the formatting of cells in a column
In the Data View:Format ➤ Column
Menu
Column dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
In the Data View:View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
Menu
(Data View) Unfreeze All Columns
Unfreezes all columns
In the Data View:View ➤ Unfreeze All Columns
Menu
872 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Entering and Editing Object Data
To enter and edit object data
■To attach data to an object on page 876
■To attach multiple records to an object on page 877
■To automatically attach data to objects on page 878
■To display and edit data for a drawing object on page 880
■To delete object data from a drawing object on page 880
■To convert object data to a linked database table on page 882
Overview of Entering and Editing Object Data
Object data is attribute data that is attached to individual objects and stored
in tables in the drawing. Object data tables store text and numerical
information related to an object.
To use object data, first define the format for the table, and then create each
record as you attach it to an object.
After you define an object data table, you can associate it with one or more
drawing objects. When you attach object data to a drawing object, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates a new record in the selected table and attaches the record to
the object. You can create more than one record for each object, and you can
attach records from more than one table to an object.
Use this method...To do this...
Click Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data.
See Creating an Object Data Table on page
180.
Create an object data table.
Do any of the following:Attach object data to objects
■Attach object data manually to selec-
ted objects on page 876 by specifying
the data values for each object.
■Automatically create and attach object
data on page 878 based on existing
block attributes or text.
■Attach object data as you digitize ob-
jects on page 893.
Entering and Editing Object Data | 873
Use this method...To do this...
See Specifying Object Data for a Drawing
Object on page 875
Right-click the object ➤ Properties.
See Displaying and Editing Object Data for
a Drawing Object on page 880
View or edit object data.
Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
See Displaying and Editing Object Data for
a Drawing Object on page 880
Delete object data.
Click Setup menu ➤ Convert Object Data
to Database Links.
See Converting Object Data to a Linked
Database Table on page 881
Convert object data to a linked database
table.
Quick Reference
ADEATTACHDATA
Attaches object data to objects
Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data
Menu
Attach/Detach Object Data
Icon
ADEATTACHDATACommand Line
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
ADEEDITDATA
Edits attached object data
Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data
Menu
Edit Object Data
Icon
874 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
ADEEDITDATACommand Line
Edit Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links
Menu
ADEGENLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template ➤ Generate Links
Task Pane
Generate Data Links dialog boxDialog Box
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying Object Data for a Drawing Object
After you define an object data table, you can associate it with one or more
drawing objects. When you attach object data to a drawing object, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates a new record in the selected table and attaches the record to
the object. You can create more than one record for each object, and you can
attach records from more than one table to an object.
You can attach object data in these ways:
■Attach object data manually to selected objects on page 876 by specifying
the data values for each object.
■Automatically create and attach object data on page 878 based on existing
block attributes or text.
■Attach object data as you digitize objects on page 893.
Entering and Editing Object Data | 875
When you attach object data to queried objects, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts
you to add the object to the save set.
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table on page 180
■Running a Drawing Query in Draw Mode on page 1074
Before you attach data to objects, create the object data table and execute a
Draw mode query to copy the objects into the current drawing.
NOTE You cannot attach data to geospatial features, but you can join external
data to geospatial features. on page 439
To attach data to an object
1Click Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data.
2In the Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box on page 1528, select a table.
3To change the value for a field in the table, select the data field and type
a new value in the Value box. Press Enter.
4To overwrite any values for this table already attached to the object, select
Overwrite.
If cleared, the object will have both the old and the new values attached.
5Click Attach To Objects.
6Select the objects.
NOTE If you are attaching data to a polygon and plan to use the data with
topology functions, be sure to attach the data to the centroid of the polygon.
Topology functions do not use data attached to the polygon border.
A record with the specified values is attached to each selected object.
Quick Reference
ADEATTACHDATA
Attaches object data to objects
876 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data
Menu
Attach/Detach Object Data
Icon
ADEATTACHDATACommand Line
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Specifying Multiple Records for an Object
By adding multiple records to the same object, you can keep track of historical
information related to the object. For example, if you have a table called
PipeMaintenance, with fields called Inspector, InspectionDate, and Condition,
you might attach a record to a pipe object each time the pipe is inspected.
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table on page 180
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
To attach multiple records to an object
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
2Select the object to which you want to add a record.
3In the Edit Object Data dialog box on page 1529, select the attached table
to which you want to add a record.
4Click Insert Record.
Record # changes from 1 of 1 to 2 of 2 as AutoCAD Map 3D advances to
the newly created record.
5For each field in the record, update the value as necessary.
Select the field in the object data field list. Enter the new value in the
Value box. Press Enter. Repeat this process for each field in the record.
6Click OK.
The new record is attached to the selected object.
Entering and Editing Object Data | 877
Quick Reference
ADEEDITDATA
Edits attached object data
Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data
Menu
Edit Object Data
Icon
ADEEDITDATACommand Line
Edit Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Automatically Specifying Object Data for Objects
You can automatically attach object data records to objects in a drawing. For
example, you can convert block attribute data to object data and attach it to
objects in one operation.
First, you must create the object data table to use for the new data. Then when
you perform the Generate Links operation, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically
records the existing data in the new object data table.
NOTE You cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or
turned off.
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table on page 180
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
NOTE Create the object data table before you begin this procedure.
To automatically attach data to objects
1Click Setup menu ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links.
2In the Generate Data Links dialog box on page 1541, select a linkage type:
■Blocks — Create links from block attribute data. The records are
attached to the blocks themselves.
878 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Text — Create links from text. The records are attached to the text
objects.
■Enclosed Blocks — Create links from block attribute data. The records
are attached to the polyline that encloses the block. Blocks that are
not enclosed by a polyline are not linked.
■Enclosed Text — Create links from text that lies within a closed
polyline. The records are attached to the closed polyline that encloses
the text. Text that is not enclosed by a polyline is not linked.
3Under Data Links, select Create Object Data Records.
4Select a table.
If you are creating links for enclosed text, select a table that has only one
field.
5If you are creating links for blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of
the block.
6Click OK.
7Enter s to select blocks or text objects, or enter a to use all blocks with
the specified name or all text objects.
Quick Reference
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links
Menu
ADEGENLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template ➤ Generate Links
Task Pane
Generate Data Links dialog boxDialog Box
Entering and Editing Object Data | 879
Displaying and Editing Object Data for a Drawing
Object
After you attach object data to a drawing object, you can edit the object data
record or delete a record from an object. You must have Edit Drawing privilege
to edit object data.
For information on changing user privileges, see Setting Up Users and Assigning
Rights on page 74.
NOTE To display and edit the attribute data for a geospatial feature (rather than
a drawing object), see Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595.
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table on page 180
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
To display and edit data for a drawing object
1Select the object in your drawing.
TIP If the drawing contains more than one object in the same location, press
Ctrl while you select the object. This turns on the AutoCAD Map 3D cycle
feature, which allows you to select each object at that location, one by one,
as you click. Click until you select the object you want. Press Enter.
2If the Properties palette is not open, right-click the object. Click Properties.
3In the Properties palette, scroll to view the object data information.
4To edit data, click the data to change and enter the new data.
NOTE If the object is a member of an object class, select the Object Class
tab in the Properties palette and see if the object data is listed on that tab. If
it is, edit the data using the Object Class tab. This tab checks the values you
enter to make sure they meet the standards set for the object class.
To delete object data from a drawing object
1Click Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data.
880 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
2Select the object in your drawing.
3To delete the current record from the selected object, click Delete Record.
4If the object has more than one record from the selected table, click Next
or Last to view a different record. If the object has records attached from
more than one table, select a table from the Table list to view object data
from that table. To delete object data for a different object, click Select
Object and select the object.
Quick Reference
ADEEDITDATA
Edits attached object data
Modify menu ➤ Edit Object Data
Menu
Edit Object Data
Icon
ADEEDITDATACommand Line
Edit Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
Converting Object Data to a Linked Database
Table
Object data is an efficient method for storing small amounts of attribute data
that you want to associate with drawing objects, but external databases store
larger amounts of data more efficiently, and allow for more complex queries.
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can convert object data into a linked database
table that has the same data structure as the object data table. For each object
containing object data in the specified table, AutoCAD Map 3D does the
following:
■Reads the object data
■Creates a new record in the external database table
■Attaches link data to the object that links the object to the record
Entering and Editing Object Data | 881
When AutoCAD Map 3D converts the data, it creates a new table in an existing
data source. It also creates a link template for the new table. In the link
template, you can choose to use an existing field as the key field, or you can
have AutoCAD Map 3D create a new field and assign a unique value to each
record.
Field Names in the New Table
By default, the fields in the new database table have the same names as the
fields in the object data table. AutoCAD Map 3D resolves any conflicts in the
following ways:
■Truncates fields that are too long and adds an incremental digit to the
resulting duplicate field names
■Replaces unsupported characters in a field name with an underscore (_)
■Converts unsupported field types to character
■Converts point fields to a character string and separates coordinates with
commas
See also:
■Creating an Object Data Table on page 180
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
■Overview of Attaching Data Sources to Drawings on page 184
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
This procedure creates a new table in an existing data source. Make sure the
appropriate data source is attached.
NOTE During the conversion, field names in the object data table become field
names in the database table. Make sure that the field names in your object data
table are not SQL reserved words such as DATE, SELECT, or CURRENT. If necessary,
rename the fields in your object data table before you convert it.
To convert object data to a linked database table
1Click Setup menu ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
2In the Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box on page 1416,
under Source Object Data Table, select an object data table.
882 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
3Select Remove Data From Objects Processed to delete the object data after
creating the link.
4Under Target Link Template, click Define to specify the link template.
5In the Define Link Template dialog box, select an available data source.
Click Connect.
6Enter a table name.
7Specify the fields to use as key fields (columns). To enter more than one
field name, separate names with a comma.
To select from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename
the fields, click Select to display the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog
box.
You can use an existing object data field as the key column or create a
new field. If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the field
in the Generate Key area. AutoCAD Map 3D sets the first record in the
database table to 1, and increments each subsequent record by 1. Click
OK to close the Select Link Template Key(s) dialog box.
8In the Define Link Template dialog box, enter a name for the link template
and click OK.
The link template stores the address of the database table and the name
of the key field. Accept the default or enter a new unique name.
9In the Convert Object Data To Database Links dialog box, specify how
to select objects with attached object data.
You can select objects automatically or manually, and you can use a filter
to restrict selection to specified layers.
10 Click Proceed.
AutoCAD Map 3D converts the object data into linked database tables.
Quick Reference
MAPOD2ASE
Converts object data tables to linked external database tables
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Menu
MAPOD2ASECommand Line
Entering and Editing Object Data | 883
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog boxDialog Box
Digitizing Objects
To attach attribute data to objects as you digitize them, use the MAPDIGITIZE
command.
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
■Overview of Digitizing Objects on page 890
■Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE on page 892
■Attaching Object Data As You Digitize on page 893
■Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize on page 895
See also:
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
■Setting Up for Digitizing on page 121
■Cleaning Up Maps on page ?
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
To digitize objects
■To digitize a map on page 889
■To digitize the objects on page 891
■To digitize links and nodes on page 892
■To attach object data as you digitize on page 893
■To link database records as you digitize on page 896
Overview of Digitizing Maps
Digitizing is the process of converting paper-based graphical information into
a digital format. When you digitize a map, you use drawing commands to
trace data from the paper map into a DWG file.
884 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Overview of Digitizing Maps | 885
Planning for Digitizing
Before you begin to digitize, consider the following:
■Suitability of source maps
■Global coordinate system
■Tiling maps
■Layer organization
■Data storage: internal or external
886 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
■Representation of node, network, and polygon topologies
If possible, plan on completing all digitizing for one map in one session because
the map media may distort over time.
Digitizing Linear Objects
Linear objects are objects such as lines, arcs, and polylines.
■If you plan to use topography later to generate 3D views from digital terrain
models, place linear objects at the elevations (Z- values) they represent.
■If you use the SKETCH command to trace an irregular line, make sure the
variable SKETCHINC is set to a reasonable value, because each line segment
ends at the interval set by SKETCHINC. The SKETCH command can create
huge files for one small line when SKETCHINC is set to a small value.
■When digitizing irregular curves with PLINE or MAPDIGITIZE on page 892,
the spacing of the selected vertex points should depend on the curvature
of the line. Straighter segments require fewer points.
Examples of digitized curves
■However accurately you work, you lose data when you digitize a curve.
You need to digitize more points when you create sharp curves to ensure
that the line is as accurate as possible; however, while you reduce the data
loss, you increase file size and complexity. If you know the parameters
used to define a regular curve, such as the radius or length, use the Arc
option of the PLINE and MAPDIGITIZE on page 892 commands for
digitizing. Irregular lines, such as topography contours, should be
continuous polylines. They can be smoothed with the Fit option of PEDIT
if necessary. Set the PLINEGEN system variable to 1 (on) before digitizing,
so that any dashed linetypes are evaluated correctly.
Overview of Digitizing Maps | 887
■When you finish digitizing a segment, mark it on the paper map so you
do not repeat the digitizing. Double digitizing increases file size.
Digitizing Topology
When digitizing data that will be used to create a topology, follow these
principles to achieve the most accurate results.
■Boundaries (or other polylines) should be completed with the Near,
Intersection, or Endpoint object snaps to ensure that closed areas such as
parcels, buildings, and water bodies are in fact complete polygons.
■Line segments should be snapped to existing end points where they
intersect.
■When you are digitizing data for network topology, do not duplicate
objects. For example, do not double-digitize boundary lines separating
adjacent polygons. It's better to digitize adjacent polygons on the same
layer with common lines defining common boundaries. If one edge serves
two or more purposes, digitize the line once, then use the COPY and
CHPROP commands to put a duplicate line on a different layer.
After you digitize the linear elements that form the basis of the topology, you
should clean up any problems on page ? before you create the topology.
Digitizing Control Data Points and Monuments
When you are trying to match digitized maps with existing digital maps, you
can use some known-to-be-accurate points common to both maps.
■Control Data Points — A system of geodetic control points covers the
entire United States. The latitude and longitude, and often elevation, are
established for these points. Similar systems exist for other countries, such
as Bench Marks and Trigonometry Points throughout the United Kingdom.
■Monuments — If you are working with maps for a city or county, points
used for establishing locations for all maps probably already exist: these
points can include features such as public buildings, hill summits, and
parts of highways.
888 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
When you are digitizing a map, use the following procedures to establish
known control points:
■Create a layer called REFERENCE. On it, digitize at least four points
corresponding to real-world coordinates such as the coordinate intersections
of latitude and longitude lines. These points should either appear at the
corners of your map sheet or surround the map features to be digitized.
Be careful to note on the drawing the location of these reference points
and their real-world coordinates. Use these points to register the map with
the TABLET command, as described in Registering the Map on page 124.
■To ensure accuracy, you can also digitize other points such as control
points and monument locations that have known positions. Digitizing
more control points is important for Matching Map Edges on page 807 or
Rubber Sheeting Two Maps on page 790 operations.
Placing Annotation
While you are digitizing, you can add text to indicate nodes or important
locations on a map. Use the STYLE command to define a text style that uses
a simple font, such as isocp.shx, with a fixed text height so that you do not
have to enter a text height each time you enter text. You can modify the text
style and height when you finish digitizing.
Use the TEXT command to enter text as you digitize. Text should be single-line
entries on the same layer as the feature it describes. If required, enter complex
or lengthy text with the MTEXT command after you finish digitizing. For
more information, look up "text" in the Help index.
Try to avoid overlaying the insertion point of the text and end points of the
objects you are annotating.
See also:
■Setting Up for Digitizing on page 121
■Digitizing Objects on page 884
To digitize a map
1Set up for digitizing on page 121.
2Digitize the objects on page 892.
Overview of Digitizing Maps | 889
Quick Reference
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Options
Menu
OPTIONSCommand Line
Right-click in the drawing area ➤ Options
Task Pane
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Menu
MAPDIGISETUPCommand Line
Digitize Setup dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
Menu
MAPDIGITIZECommand Line
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)Dialog Box
Overview of Digitizing Objects
To digitize objects, use one of the following methods:
■To attach attribute data as you digitize objects, use the MAPDIGITIZE
command. You can also specify the label point, layer, block or linetype,
rotation and scale, 2D or 3D, and snap options.
■To digitize objects without attaching attribute data or specifying other
settings as you digitize, use the drawing commands.
890 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Digitizing Using the MAPDIGITIZE Command
Use the MAPDIGITIZE command if you want to use the special options it
provides, such as attaching object data as you digitize.
NOTE Before you begin digitizing, be sure you have configured the digitizer,
registered the map, and set the digitizing specifications. See Setting Up for
Digitizing on page 121.
For detailed information on digitizing linear objects, topologies, and control
points, or on placing annotations, see Overview of Digitizing Maps on page
884.
Digitizing Using Drawing Commands
You can also digitize using drawing commands. However, you should avoid
commands such as CIRCLE, RECTANGLE, and 3DFACE. Instead, use ARC,
LINE, and PLINE to represent map features in the simplest possible forms.
This usage simplifies map cleanup.
See also:
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
■Setting Up for Digitizing on page 121
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
NOTE Before you begin digitizing, be sure you have configured your digitizer on
page 123 and registered your map on page 126.
To digitize the objects
1Check that TABLET is enabled in the status line. If not, double-click
TABLET to enable Tablet mode.
2To use the MAPDIGITIZE command, set the digitizing options on page
121.
3Digitize lines by starting the LINE, PLINE, or MAPDIGITIZE on page 892
command as appropriate.
Press F12 to access menus and dialog boxes in the floating screen area
you defined.
4Continue to add lines and arc segments until you are done. Press Enter.
Overview of Digitizing Objects | 891
When you finish digitizing, use Drawing Cleanup on page 636 to clean the
linework and fix errors.
Quick Reference
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
Menu
MAPDIGITIZECommand Line
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)Dialog Box
Digitizing Using MAPDIGITIZE
The MAPDIGITIZE command lets you attach object data or external data as
you digitize.
NOTE Before you begin digitizing, be sure you have configured the digitizer,
registered the map, and set the digitizing specifications. See Setting Up for
Digitizing on page 121.
Press F12 for access to the menus and any dialog boxes in the floating screen
area you defined.
See also:
■Attaching Object Data As You Digitize on page 893
■Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize on page 895
Before you use the MAPDIGITIZE command, set the digitizing specifications
on page 129.
To digitize links and nodes
1On the command line, enter MAPDIGITIZE. Press Enter.
2Specify the first point or polyline to digitize.
3If you selected Attach Data in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter object
data for the new object.
892 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
4If you selected Prompt For Label Point in the Digitize Setup dialog box,
specify a label point for the new object.
5If you selected Prompt For Rotation, enter the rotation in degrees for the
node block. If you selected Prompt For Scale, enter the change in scale.
For example, enter 90 to rotate the block 90 degrees. Enter 2 to double
the size of the block.
6Continue to specify points or polylines.
Data created by digitizing is not complete until you have cleaned up and
verified the data. See Overview of Cleaning Up Maps on page 638.
Quick Reference
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
Menu
MAPDIGITIZECommand Line
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)Dialog Box
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize
You can attach object data to nodes and links (linear objects) as you digitize
them. You can specify one object data table for nodes and another for links.
See also:
■Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize on page 895
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
Before you set up for digitizing, the object data table must already exist. See
Creating an Object Data Table on page 180.
To attach object data as you digitize
1On the command line, enter MAPDIGISETUP. Press Enter.
2Under Object Type, select the object type to digitize.
Attaching Object Data As You Digitize | 893
3Select Attach Data. Click Data To Attach.
4In the Data To Attach dialog box, select the object data table to use. Click
OK.
5For information on completing the other options in the Digitize Setup
dialog box, see To set digitizing specifications on page 129.
6Click OK.
7On the command line, enter MAPDIGITIZE to begin digitizing.
As you digitize each object, AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you to enter object
data values for each field in the selected object data table.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Menu
MAPDIGISETUPCommand Line
Digitize Setup dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
Menu
MAPDIGITIZECommand Line
894 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)Dialog Box
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize
You can attach data in an external database to objects as you digitize. You can
select one link template for nodes and another for links (linear objects). Before
you begin this process, be sure the link templates already exist.
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize | 895
See also:
■Attaching Object Data As You Digitize on page 893
■Overview of Digitizing Maps on page 884
To link database records as you digitize
1On the command line, enter MAPDIGISETUP. Press Enter.
2Under Object Type, select the object type to digitize.
3Select Attach Data. Click Data To Attach.
4In the Data to Attach dialog box on page 1352, under Object Data Type,
select Database Link.
5For Link Template, select the link template to use.
6Specify a Record Validation method. Click OK.
7For information on completing the other options in the Digitize Setup
dialog box, see To set digitizing specifications on page 129.
8Click OK.
9On the command line, enter MAPDIGITIZE to begin digitizing.
896 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
AutoCAD Map 3D prompts you for a key value for each object. The database
validation option you select here determines what happens as you enter a
value for each digitized object:
■Validate —AutoCAD Map 3D checks whether the value you enter exists
in the database table. If the value exists, the link data is attached to the
object; if the value does not exist, AutoCAD Map 3D requests a new value.
Use this option to link each object to an existing record in the table.
■Validate and Create —AutoCAD Map 3D checks whether the value you
enter exists in the database table. If the value exists, the link data is attached
to the object; if the value does not exist, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new
record in the database table with this value in the key column and attaches
the link data to the object. Use the Link Template Data Entry dialog box
to enter values for the other columns in the new record.
■No Validation —AutoCAD Map 3D attaches the link data to the object
without checking that the value exists in the table. Use this option if you
do not have a corresponding database record and do not want to create
one at this time.
Quick Reference
MAPDEFINELT
Defines a link template for a database table
Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Delete
Link Template.
Menu
Define Link Template
Icon
MAPDEFINELTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a data source table or
query ➤ Define Link Template
Task Pane
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)Dialog Box
MAPDIGISETUP
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes and linear objects
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Menu
MAPDIGISETUPCommand Line
Linking Database (SQL) Records as You Digitize | 897
Digitize Setup dialog boxDialog Box
MAPDIGITIZE
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with settings from mapdigisetup
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
Menu
MAPDIGITIZECommand Line
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)Dialog Box
898 | Chapter 6 Creating and Editing Data
Annotating Maps
Overview of Annotating Maps
Annotations are notes or other types of explanatory symbols or objects that are
commonly used to add information to your map. The following types of
annotation can be added to your map:
More InformationDescriptionWorks withAnnota-
tion Type
Adding Labels on page
900
Names that mark each fea-
ture on the map
FeaturesLabels
Annotating Drawing
Objects on page 904
Attached to drawing objects
and defined by annotation
templates
Drawing
objects
Drawing
object an-
notation
Creating Annotation
Layers on page 912
Contain freestanding text
features that are stored in a
data table
FeaturesAnnotation
layers
Adding a Legend on
page 916
Provides a key to feature
styles in your map
FeaturesLegends
Annotating with Auto-
CAD Text Objects on
page 918
Text objects created with the
TEXT and MTEXTcommands
AutoCAD
text ob-
jects
7
899
See also:
■Styling Features on page 540
■Setting Up Annotation Templates on page 171
Adding Labels
Labels are the names that mark each feature on the map. You can add labels
to features on feature layers.
See also:
■Theming Features on page 955
■Styling Features on page 540
Adding Labels to Features
Add labels to features on feature layers. Specify one the following for the label:
■Multiline (Specifies that the label can have multiple lines of text, but no
advanced placement functionality.)
■Advanced placement (specifies a single-line label which follows a path and
shrinks to fit. A single label is used for feature segments that have the same
property value.)
Also, specify the label text, font, size, format, color, background style and
color, alignment, and rotation of the label.
The label is placed near the line, point symbol, or polygon. For point layers,
if precise placement is important, display the label at a point location.
If a feature label obscures another label, it is not displayed. Feature labels are
drawn on top of point symbols, lines, and polygons. By default, feature labels
will not obscure point symbols. You can allow feature labels to obscure point
symbols.
NOTE For performance reasons, the maximum number of labels drawn is 2000.
If there are so many labels that geometry would be obscured if they were drawn,
AutoCAD Map 3D does not draw them.
900 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
See also:
■Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations on page 903
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points on page 903
To label features
1In Display Manager on page 1748 right-click a feature layer containing the
features to label.
2Click Edit Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges on
page 543.
4In the style geometry area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Feature Label.
5In the Style Label dialog box, select the Create a Label check box.
6Select Multiline or Advanced Placement.
Multiline specifies that the label can have multiple lines of text, but no
advanced placement functionality.
Advanced Placement specifies a single-line label which follows a path
and shrinks to fit. A single label is used for feature segments that have
the same property value.
7For Property To Display, do one of the following:
■Select a property.
■Select Expression to use an expression to specify label text.
For more information, see the Using Expressions to Label Features.
8For Font, select a font from the list.
9For Size Context, specify the type of units:
■Select Device Space to specify symbol widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
■Select Map Space to specify symbol widths and heights in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
10 For Units, select the type of units to use.
Adding Labels to Features | 901
11 For Size, enter the text size or specify the size using a number expression.
For more information, see the Creating Numeric Expressions.
12 To apply bold, italic, or underlining, click one or more of the Format
options.
13 For Text Color, click a color.
14 To specify a background style, from the Background Style list click one
of the following:
■Ghosted: Draws an opaque border around each character. Use
Background Color to specify a color for the outline.
■Opaque: Draws a background behind the labels. They are displayed
as rectangles with text inside. Use Background Color to specify a color
for the rectangles.
■Transparent: No background is applied to the labels, which are
displayed only as text on the map.
15 For Ghosted and Opaque background styles, click a color in the
Background Color list.
16 If you are adding labels to a polyline layer, use Vertical Alignment to
specify the label position.
You can select one of the available positions or select a layer property
that contains alignment information for each feature.
NOTE Horizontal and vertical alignment settings are not available for area
layers. Only the vertical alignment setting is available for line layers. Horizontal
and vertical alignment settings are available for point layers that display fixed
labels instead of symbols. For more information, see Displaying Fixed Labels
at Point Locations on page 903.
17 For Rotation, do one of the following:
■Select a value from the drop-down list.
■Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle
in the box. Click OK.
■Click Expression. Specify the rotation using a number expression.
For more information about creating a numeric expression, see
Creating Numeric Expressions.
18 Click OK.
902 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
19 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points
AutoCAD Map 3D will not draw a label if it blocks a point symbol on another
layer. The label will be drawn when you zoom in far enough to allow sufficient
space to display it. You can specify that labels on other layers be allowed to
obscure points on the selected layer.
See also:
■Adding Labels to Features on page 900
■Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations on page 903
To allow labels to obscure points on the selected layer
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, select the point layer. Click the Style
button.
2In the Style Editor, click Allow Other Labels To Obscure Feature Symbols
On This Layer.
3Click File menu ➤ Save.
Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations
If exact placement of labels is important, disable the point style and place
fixed labels at feature locations.
NOTE Fixed labels are always displayed, even if they obscure other labels or
features. While feature labels are drawn after all layer features have been drawn,
fixed labels are drawn according to the draw order of their layer within a map,
and may be obscured by features from other layers.
See also:
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
■Styling Point Features on page 544
■Adding Labels to Features on page 900
Allowing Labels to Obscure Points | 903
■Allowing Labels to Obscure Points on page 903
To place labels at points
1In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to style.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges on
page 543.
2Select the Labels Are Fixed (Not Dynamic) check box.
3In the style geometry area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Style.
4To remove the point symbol, in the Style Point dialog box, clear the Style
a Point Symbol check box. Click OK.
5In the style geometry area for the selected scale range, click the box under
Feature Label.
6To turn on and style the label, in the Style Label dialog box, select the
Style check box.
7Specify label text and style.
For more information about feature labels, see Adding Labels to Features
on page 900.
8Use the Horizontal Alignment and Vertical Alignment lists to specify the
position of the label relative to the feature.
You can select one of the available positions or select a layer property
that contains alignment information for each feature. The alignment
values in the property must be specified as follows:
■Horizontal: Left, Center, or Right.
■Vertical: Baseline, Bottom, Capline, Halfline, or Top.
9Click File menu ➤ Save.
Annotating Drawing Objects
Use annotation to quickly and easily label objects with their attribute values,
display properties, and geometric values.
904 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
See also:
■Setting Up Annotation Templates on page 171
■Theming Drawing Data on page 965
To add and delete annotation
■To use annotation on page 905
■To insert annotation on page 908
■To refresh annotation based on a specific template on page 909
■To update annotation based on a specific template on page 911
■To delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template on page
911
Overview of Annotation
Use annotation to indicate textual values on an object. These values might
be attributes, such as object data; display properties, such as a lineweight; or
geometric values, such as the line direction. You can also add graphics to your
annotation, such as arrows, static text, or other geometry, using standard
AutoCAD drawing commands.
Annotation may have both textual and graphic contents. The textual contents,
as well as properties such as layer, color, insertion point, etc., are defined in
the annotation template, and any values defined by expressions are determined
when the annotation is inserted. When you add or remove textual elements
or change properties or expressions in an annotation template, the existing
annotations based on that template do not refresh automatically. Use the
Refresh or the Update command to see those changes.
To use annotation
■Define an annotation template on page 174
■Attach annotation to objects on page 907
■Refresh annotation on page 909
■Update annotation on page 910
■Delete annotation from drawings on page 911
■Delete annotation templates on page 177
Overview of Annotation | 905
Quick Reference
MAPANNDELETE
Deletes all annotation based on the selected template
Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete
Menu
Delete
Icon
MAPANNDELETECommand Line
Annotation Delete dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNINSERT
Adds annotation to objects based on the selected annotation template
Create menu ➤ Insert Annotation
Menu
Insert Annotation
Icon
MAPANNINSERTCommand Line
Insert Annotation dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNREFRESH
Refreshes existing annotation
Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh
Menu
Refresh
Icon
MAPANNREFRESHCommand Line
Annotation Refresh dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
906 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEXT
Creates and edits annotation text
At the Command prompt, enter mapanntext.Menu
Edit Annotation Text
Icon
MAPANNTEXTCommand Line
Annotation Text dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNUPDATE
Updates existing annotation
Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update
Menu
Update
Icon
MAPANNUPDATECommand Line
Annotation Update dialog boxDialog Box
Attaching Annotation to Objects
After you have defined an annotation template, use the MAPANNINSERT
command to attach annotation to selected objects in your drawing.
See also:
■Defining Annotation Templates on page 174
■Changing Annotation Templates on page 176
Attaching Annotation to Objects | 907
To insert annotation
1Click Create menu ➤ Insert Annotation.
2Select an annotation template.
Make sure that the template name check box is selected. To insert
annotations based on multiple templates, select the check box for each
template.
3Optionally, click Advanced to insert annotations with override options
and properties.
The override information is applied only to the highlighted template.
If you subsequently use the Update command with this annotation
template, you must use the Retain option or these overrides will be lost.
4Click Insert.
5Select the objects to annotate. Press Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPANNINSERT
Adds annotation to objects based on the selected annotation template
Create menu ➤ Insert Annotation
Menu
Insert Annotation
Icon
MAPANNINSERTCommand Line
Insert Annotation dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANNTEMPLATE
Defines and modifies annotation templates
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template‚Ķ.
Menu
Define Annotation Template
Icon
MAPANNTEMPLATECommand Line
Define Annotation Template dialog boxDialog Box
908 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
Refreshing Annotation
When you make changes to the expressions in an annotation template, the
expressions in existing annotations based on that template do not change
automatically. Use the Refresh command to see those changes reflected. The
Refresh command re-evaluates the existing expressions in an annotation and
has the following options.
■Strings Only option — This option re-evaluates any expression-based text
in the annotation, but changes nothing else. For example, when you
annotate a circle, using the expression .AREA as the value of the annotation
text, the text displays the area of the circle. If you change the diameter of
the circle, and then use the Refresh command with the Strings Only option,
the text changes to reflect the new area of the circle.
■Full Annotation option — This option re-evaluates any expression-based
text in the annotation, as well as other properties of the annotation, such
as the insertion point, or the layer on which the annotation resides. For
example, if you annotated a circle, as described above, and used the
expression .CENTER to specify the insertion point of the text, the area of
the circle would be displayed in the center of the circle. If you re-size and
move the circle, the Strings Only option would change the text for the
area, but would not change the position of the text, and the annotation
text would no longer be centered in the circle. The Full Annotation option
would update the text to reflect the new area and move the annotation to
the center of the relocated circle.
See also:
■Defining Annotation Templates on page 174
■Changing Annotation Templates on page 176
To refresh annotation based on a specific template
1Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh.
2Select an annotation template, and click OK.
3On the command line, choose Full Annotation or Strings Only. Press
Enter.
Refreshing Annotation | 909
Quick Reference
MAPANNREFRESH
Refreshes existing annotation
Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh
Menu
Refresh
Icon
MAPANNREFRESHCommand Line
Annotation Refresh dialog boxDialog Box
Updating Annotation
When you add or remove textual elements in an annotation template, the
existing annotations based on that template do not change automatically.
Use the Update command to see those changes reflected. The Update command
completely erases and regenerates all annotation based on a specified
annotation template and has the following two options.
■Retain option — This option regenerates all annotation, without losing
any specific overrides. Any added or removed textual elements will be
reflected in the existing annotations, and any special modifications you
have made to specific annotations will remain. For example, after inserting
a number of annotations with property or expression overrides specified
in the Insert dialog, the Retain option will regenerate all the annotation
using those overrides.
■Discard option — This option regenerates all annotation, using the default
values in the template. Any added or removed textual elements will be
reflected in the existing annotations, but any specific overrides will be lost.
For example, using the previous example, the Discard option will regenerate
all the annotation, using the default properties and expressions in the
annotation template.
See also:
■Defining Annotation Templates on page 174
■Changing Annotation Templates on page 176
910 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
To update annotation based on a specific template
1Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update.
2Select an annotation template, and click OK.
3On the command line, choose Retain or Discard. Press Enter.
Quick Reference
MAPANNUPDATE
Updates existing annotation
Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update
Menu
Update
Icon
MAPANNUPDATECommand Line
Annotation Update dialog boxDialog Box
Deleting Annotation from Drawings
You can delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template.
To delete all annotation based on a selected annotation template
1Click Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete.
2Select an annotation template.
TIP You can select more than one template at a time.
3Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPANNDELETE
Deletes all annotation based on the selected template
Deleting Annotation from Drawings | 911
Setup menu ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete
Menu
Delete
Icon
MAPANNDELETECommand Line
Annotation Delete dialog boxDialog Box
Working with Annotation Layers
Creating Annotation Layers
Using the Display Manager on page 1748, you can create and style layers for
freestanding text that is not associated with features. Text features on text
layers are stored in a data table and are checked in like any other type of
feature.
NOTE Annotation layer style settings (which apply to the entire layer) are stored
with the layer. Style overrides (which apply only to a specific annotation feature)
are stored with that feature in the data table.
The Annotation text layer uses expressions to generate text features from
corresponding entries in the annotation data table. Most users do not need
to modify these expressions, though they offer advanced capabilities for very
specific uses.
To create an annotation layer
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ New Text Layer.
2In the Choose Spatial Database File dialog box, provide a name and
location for the SDF file that will store the layer information. Click Save.
NOTE If you specify an existing file, the new layer will overwrite the existing
layer
3In the Specify Coordinate System dialog box, set the coordinate system
for the layer. Click OK.
The new annotation layer is added to the Display Manager.
912 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
Quick Reference
MAPTEXTLAYERCREATE
Creates an annotation layer for freestanding text features
MAPTEXTLAYERCREATECommand Line
In the Display Manager, click Data ➤ New Text Layer
Task Pane
Styling an Annotation Layer
After you have added the annotation layer, specify how text on the layer
should be styled.
To style an annotation layer
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, select the annotation layer.
2Click Style.
3In the Style Editor, under Style click .
4In the Style Text Layer dialog box specify the Size Context.
■Select Device Space to specify symbol widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
■Select Map Space to specify symbol widths and heights in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
5Specify the Units.
6For Text Type, select one of the following:
■Plain—Formats annotation text uniformly using the settings specified
for the layer in the Style Text Layer dialog box. The text has no
formatting information itself.
■Mtext—Formats annotation text as multiline. The settings specified
for the layer in the Style Text Layer dialog box define the base
formatting style. You can override this formatting when you insert
individual Annotative text features.
Styling an Annotation Layer | 913
The Edit Expression button lets you specify an expression for this setting
for advanced use cases. We recommend that you do not use expressions
for Text Type.
7For Text, leave the "Label_Text" value unchanged.
This is the name of a property in the feature source. It specifies that the
text for the annotation is what you specify in the Edit Text Instance dialog
box on page 1364 when you create the annotation. The Edit Expression
button lets you specify an expression for this setting for advanced use
cases.
For more information on inserting annotations, see Adding Text to an
Annotation Layer on page 914.
8For Font Name, specify the font to use on the annotation layer.
9For Font Size, leave the "NullValue(SIZE,number)" expression.
The initial setting for font height is in mapping units and is based on the
existing view. We recommend that you try the suggested height and
adjust the number as needed. If individual instances require a different
height, adjust the value in the SIZE column in the Data Table after you
insert the annotation instances.
10 Specify other font styling using the drop downs.
If you select MText for Text Type, you can override some of these settings
using controls in the Edit Text Instance dialog box on page 1364 when you
insert the annotation.
11 For Horizontal Alignment, Vertical Alignment, and Rotation, leave the
"HORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT", "VERTICAL_ALIGNMENT", and
"ORIENTATION" expression values unchanged. These are the names of
properties in the feature source.
The Edit Expression buttons let you specify expressions for these setting
for advanced use cases. If necessary, you can modify these values in the
Data Table after you insert the annotation instances.
12 Click OK.
Adding Text to an Annotation Layer
After you have created the annotation layer and specified style settings, you
can add specific text instances.
914 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
To add text to an annotation layer
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the annotation layer. Click
Create ➤ Create New Annotation.
2Click in the map to specify a location for the text feature.
3In the Edit Text Instance dialog box on page 1364, enter the desired text.
4Specify any style overrides to apply to this particular text instance only.
Unless you specify overrides, the style you have assigned to the layer is
applied.
NOTE Style overrides cannot be undone. Style changes made to this feature
supersede the base style. To revert to the base style, you must remove the
style overrides.
5Click OK.
6When you have finished adding annotations, click Check-in Features.
Quick Reference
MAPTEXTCREATE
Adds text features to an annotation layer
MAPTEXTCREATECommand Line
In the Display Manager, right-click an annotation
layer, and click Create ➤ Create New Annotation
Task Pane
Edit Text Instance dialog boxDialog Box
Editing an Annotation
Check out annotation features to modify them. Check in annotation features
when you are finished editing.
To edit an annotation
1Right-click the annotation and click Edit Text Instance.
2Select the text to modify.
Editing an Annotation | 915
3Modify the text as needed.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPTEXTEDIT
Allows you to edit text features on an annotation layer
MAPTEXTCREATECommand Line
Edit Text Instance dialog boxDialog Box
Adding a Legend
A legend lists the styles in your map.
The legend describes the styles used in your map.
Legend Style
By default, legends use the Legend table style. To change your legend style,
modify the Legend table style using the TABLESTYLE command. For more
information, see the AutoCAD Help.
916 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager on page 535
■Getting Help with AutoCAD on page 48
To create and modify the legend, do any of the following operations.
■To create a legend on page 917
■To change the icon used for thumbnails on page 917
■To edit titles or text in the legend on page 917
■To change legend settings or use a different style on page 918
■To edit the Legend table style on page 918
■To update the Legend on page 918
To create a legend
1Zoom the drawing to the desired scale threshold.
The default legend size is based on the window size when the legend is
created.
2In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Tools ➤ Create Legend.
3Click a spot in the drawing to place the legend.
To change the icon used for thumbnails
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click a drawing layer.
Click the Style button to display the Properties palette if it is not displayed.
2On the Display tab of the Properties palette, next to Thumbnail Preview,
select the style of thumbnail to use.
For example, select the polyline icon to display an icon of a wavy line,
or choose the polygon icon to display hatch or fill.
The thumbnail settings affect both the legend and the Display Manager.
To edit titles or text in the legend
1Use the Properties palette to revise layer titles in the Display Manager.
2In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Tools ➤ Update Legend.
Adding a Legend | 917
To change legend settings or use a different style
1Select the legend.
2In the Properties palette, change any setting.
To edit the Legend table style
1At the command prompt, enter tablestyle.
2In the Table Style dialog box, do one of the following:
■Select the Legend style and click Modify.
■Click New to create a new table style and specify a name for the style.
3In the Modify Table Style dialog box, specify the settings.
To update the Legend
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, click Tools ➤ Update Legend.
Quick Reference
Display Manager Legend
Creates a Display Manager legend
In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Create Legend
Task Pane
Annotating with AutoCAD Text Objects
You can create and modify several types of AutoCAD text objects. You can
control most text style settings by defining text styles. For more information
see, Create Text and Work with Text Styles.
For more information about all types of AutoCAD annotation, see Annotate
Drawings.
918 | Chapter 7 Annotating Maps
Analyzing Data
Overview of Analyzing Data
The analysis tools in AutoCAD Map 3D help turn your raw map data into useful
information that can help you answer questions, support decisons, test
hypotheses, and reveal patterns that may not be immediately obvious.
For workflows related to analyzing data, see Create Themed Maps and Analyze
Data.
Tools and methods for analysis vary, depending on whether you are using
drawing data or geospatial feature data.
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
Drill down to get detailed in-
formation about features and
objects you want to focus on.
View feature source and attribute
data. on page 921
View native data and data joined
to features from a separate source.
on page 928
View object properties and attrib-
utes. on page 937
View external data linked to ob-
jects. on page 938
Find the data you need.
Create buffers around features
based on distance and identify
Find and select features on page
993
Use buffers to filter data. on page
1004
Find, search, filter and query
drawing data on page 1006
features within that bufffer to
see how areas are affected by
conditions. For example, find
parcels within a certain distance
from planned construction, or
roads close to flood plains.
8
919
DescriptionFor FeaturesFor Drawing Objects
Take real-world measurements
based on coodinate geometry
Track coordinates and measure
geodetic distances. on page 939
Track coordinates and measure
geodetic distances. on page 939
Use inquiry commands to ex-
tract geometric information
Use themes to analyze height,
slope, and aspect. on page 989
Add distances, display continuous
distance, display angles between
from drawing objects such aspoints in the map, display co-
lines, curves, closed polylines,
and polygons.
For supported raster formats,
analyze surface slope, aspect,
and elevation.
ordinate geometry for lines and
arcs, and determine slope and
grade on page 944.
Use themes to highlight data
distribution and patterns.
Theme geospatial features. on
page 955
Theme drawing data. on page
965
For drawing objects, use topo-
logy to analyze spatial relation-
ships between drawing objects.
For supported raster formats,
view data in 3D for more real-
Drape 2D data onto 3D surfaces
on page 979
Add contour lines. on page 976
Analyze topology on page 1085
world analyis, including walk-
throughs and recorded anima-
tions. Use contour lines to help
you analyze terrain.
Getting Information About Features and Objects
Information about features and drawing objects can be stored within the
feature or object source, as well as in an external source, such as a spreadsheet
application.
For geospatial features, attribute data is part of the feature itself. Additionally,
you can join external data to any feature. Using the Data Table, you can view
and edit all the feature source data included in your map.
For drawing objects, you can create object tables within the drawing itself to
store object attribute data. You can also link to external data using link
templates. You view and edit attribute or object class data using the Properties
palette or the Display Manager.
920 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
See also:
■Joining Data to GIS Features on page 439
■Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data) on page 451
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
To get information about features and objects
■To get information about features on page 921
■To get information about drawing objects on page 935
Getting Information about Features
To get information about features
■To access the Data Table on page 922
■To search to select data on page 925
■To create a calculated property on page 927
■To view data for a selected layer on page 929
■To view joined data on page 929
■To view unfiltered feature class data on page 929
■To view non-spatial data on page 930
■To highlight features using the Data Table on page 931
■To remove highlighting on page 931
■To highlight rows of data on page 932
■To zoom to a view on page 933
■To export from the Data Table on page 934
Overview of the Data Table
Use the Data Table to access, view and edit data for multiple feature sources
in a single window. The Data Table displays the data for all the features you’ve
added to your map.
NOTE Before you can access the Data Table, you must connect to the feature
sources you want to view or edit and add the data to the map.
You can isolate layers of data, sort, zoom to and edit data directly while
connected to a “live” feature source, or view, attach and edit attribute data
by linking to a spreadsheet application.
Getting Information about Features | 921
Some data fields are “constrained” to allow only certain values. When you
enter values for constrained fields, you are prompted to enter only valid values.
For example, the prompt might tell you to enter only values between one and
ten.
You can join attribute data from a separate data source to a layer in the Data
Table. You can use native and joined data to form the basis of the new,
calculated field. Calculated fields are available only within AutoCAD Map 3D.
They are not saved back to the original data store.
NOTE The Data Table uses your system’s default decimal separator for both display
and exporting to CSV files. You can specify the default decimal separator in your
Regional and Language Options in the Windows Control Panel.
See also:
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or
Non-Spatial Data Table on page 928
■Joining Data to GIS Features on page 439
■Setting Up Constraints in the Schema Editor on page 511
■Creating Calculated Properties on page 927
To access the Data Table
1Connect on page 265 to the data you want to view or edit.
2In the Display Manager on page 1748, select the layer whose data you want
to view.
3Click .
4The Data Table window displays the properties for the layer you selected.
For more information,
see...
Use this method...To do this...
Viewing Data for a Selected
Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature
View data for a feature in
your map.
1Select a layer in Dis-
play Manager.
922 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
For more information,
see...
Use this method...To do this...
Class, or Non-Spatial Data
Table on page 928
2Click .
Viewing Data for a Selected
Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature
View non-spatial data 1In the Data Table,
click the Data
menu. Class, or Non-Spatial Data
Table on page 928
2Select the non-spa-
tial table to view.
Data Table Dialog Box on
page 1347
Dock the Data Table 1Right-click the Data
Table title bar and
select Allow Dock-
ing.
2Drag the Data Table
by its title bar to the
top or bottom of
the application
window.
Make the Data Table
transparent.
1Right-click the title
bar of the Data
Table and choose
Transparency.
2In the Transparency
dialog box, adjust
the transparency
level and click OK.
Right-click the title bar of the
Data Table and choose Auto-
Hide.
Minimize the Data Table
automatically when you
click outside it.
Getting Information about Features | 923
For more information,
see...
Use this method...To do this...
Using Expressions to Select
Feature Data on page 925
Click Search to Select at the
bottom of the Data Table.
Find data that meets con-
ditions that you specify.
Viewing Data for a Selected
Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature
In the Data Table, select the
row or rows of data to high-
light.
Highlight areas in your
map.
Class, or Non-Spatial Data
Table on page 928
Highlighting Features Using
the Data Table on page 930
From the Options list in the
Data Table, select Select
None.
Remove highlighting
Zooming to a View Using the
Data Table on page 933
Zoom to related areas in
your map.
1In the Data Table,
click Auto-Zoom
(unless it is already
on).
2Select the rows of
data to view.
Editing Features using the
Data Table on page 595
Edit information in the
Data Table
1Select and edit cells
in the Data Table.
2Check in the feature
when you are fin-
ished.
Exporting from the Data
Table on page 1214
Export information from
the Data Table.
1Select the rows of
data to export.
2From the Options
list in the Data
Table, select Export.
3Specify a name and
location for the ex-
ported .csv file.
924 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Using Expressions to Select Feature Data
You can use the Data Table to find geospatial feature data that meets conditions
that you specify. For example, you can search for all parcels with an area
greater than five acres. When AutoCAD Map 3D completes the search, it
highlights the data rows in the Data Table and the associated features on your
map.
NOTE To search multiple layers at one time, use Edit menu ➤ Search.
See also:
■Searching For and Selecting Features on page 1000
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or
Non-Spatial Data Table on page 928
■Highlighting Features Using the Data Table on page 930
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
■Zooming to a View Using the Data Table on page 933
To search to select data
1Select the geospatial feature layer in Display Manager that contains the
data you want to view.
Getting Information about Features | 925
2If you want to select data based on its location in the map, zoom the
drawing window to the extents of the selected feature class.
3Click on the toolstrip to open the Data Table window.
4Click Search to Select at the bottom of the Data Table.
5Create the expression for your search:
■Locate On Map — Selects all features in a location you specify. You
can specify whether to select features completely within the selection
area, within or crossing the selection area, or within a specified
distance of the selection area. See Filtering by Location.
For example, use a location condition to find all manholes in one
section of town, or all parcels that touch a road, or all water pipes
within 100 meters of a road.
■Property Evaluation — Selects all features that have the property value
you specify. Insert a property, an operator, and a value. See Evaluating
Properties.
For example, to select all pipes with a diameter greater than 10, specify
Diameter > 10.
You can view and insert available values for a property from a list.
6To create a complex property evaluation, insert an AND or OR operator,
and then insert another property, operator, and value combination.
Every operator must be preceded by a property. For example, to find
parcels whose last purchase date is after 1990 and before 2005, the
expression must look like this:
Purchase_Date > 1990 AND Purchase_Date < 2005
7Validate your expression.
8To reuse your expression in the future, from the Options list in the Data
Table, select Save Expression.
9When the expression is complete and valid, click OK.
AutoCAD Map 3D highlights both the selected rows in the Data Table
and the associated features on your map.
926 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Creating Calculated Properties
You can calculate a new property for any feature, based on its existing native
properties and any joined data for that feature layer. You can use the resulting
property to filter or select data. For example, you can calculate the area of
parcels and then select parcels whose areas are above a certain area value.
You can store the resulting calculation as a new property in the Data Table.
It will be available whenever you open the map in which you created it, but
it is not saved back to the original data store. Calculated properties are gray
in the Data Table, because you cannot edit them.
There are two special calculations you can perform: finding the area of a
polygon and finding the length of a linear feature (or the perimeter of a
polygon feature).
To create a calculated property
1In the Display Manager, right-click the layer for which you want to create
a calculated property.
2Click Create A Calculation.
NOTE You can also create a calculated property from within the Data Table
by clicking Options ➤ Create A Calculation.
3Create the calculation.
Getting Information about Features | 927
4Click on the toolstrip to open the Data Table window.
The column representing the calculated property appears at the far right
side of the Data Table.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered
Feature Class, or Non-Spatial Data Table
You can use the Data Table to view data for selected layers, joins, unfiltered
feature classes, or non-spatial data tables.
See also:
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
■Zooming to a View Using the Data Table on page 933.
■Highlighting Features Using the Data Table on page 930
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
■To view data for a selected layer on page 929
■To view joined data on page 929
928 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■To view unfiltered feature class data on page 929
■To view non-spatial data on page 930
To view data for a selected layer
1Select the layer in Display Manager that contains the feature class data
you want to view.
2Click on the toolstrip to open the Data Table window.
3Select the row or rows of data to view in your map.
Specific areas of your map are highlighted based on the data you select.
To view joined data
1Select the layer in Display Manager that contains the feature class data
you want to view.
2Click to open the Data Table window.
The Data Table displays the data in joined tables in read-only format:
you cannot edit data in joined tables from the primary table. For more
information about Joins, see Overview of Joins on page 439
To view unfiltered feature class data
1Select the layer in Display Manager that contains the feature class data
you want to view.
2Click to open the Data Table window.
3From the Data drop-down list, select the Feature Class data source.
Selecting the Feature Class data source displays all records, including any
that are not associated with feature attributes. The selection and
highlighting options are not available when viewing this table.
Getting Information about Features | 929
To view non-spatial data
1On the top toolbar, click to open the Data Table window.
2In the Data drop-down list, select the non-spatial table you want to view.
The Data drop-down list will display all non-spatial data for a given
connected data source.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Highlighting Features Using the Data Table
You can select specific feature in the Data Table and highlight them
automatically in your map. For example, you can select the Data Table rows
that represent parcels on one or two streets to see those parcels highlighted
in the map. If Auto-Zoom is on, the map will also zoom to the extents of the
selected features.
See also:
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or
Non-Spatial Data Table on page 928
■Zooming to a View Using the Data Table on page 933.
930 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Using Expressions to Select Feature Data on page 925
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
To highlight features using the Data Table
1In Display Manager, select the layer containing the feature set you want
to view.
2Click to open the Data Table window.
3Select a row or rows of data to highlight the corresponding features in
your map.
To remove highlighting
1From the Options list in the Data Table, select Select None.
The highlighting is removed from the Data Table and your map.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map
You can select features in your map to highlight the corresponding rows of
data.
Getting Information about Features | 931
See also:
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or
Non-Spatial Data Table on page 928
■Zooming to a View Using the Data Table on page 933.
■Using Expressions to Select Feature Data on page 925
■Highlighting Features Using the Data Table on page 930
To highlight rows of data
1In Display Manager, select the layer containing the feature set you want
to view.
2Click to open the Data Table window.
3Click Auto-Scroll (if it is not already on) to turn on the automatic scroll
feature in the Data Table.
4Select any area or feature in your map.
The Data Table scrolls and highlights the corresponding rows of data.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
932 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Zooming to a View Using the Data Table
You can select rows of data in the Data Table to zoom in directly to data in
your map.
See also:
■Using Expressions to Select Feature Data on page 925
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
■Viewing Data for a Selected Layer, Join, Unfiltered Feature Class, or
Non-Spatial Data Table on page 928
■Highlighting Features Using the Data Table on page 930
■Highlighting Data Table Rows Using the Map on page 931
To zoom to a view
1In Display Manager, select the layer containing the feature set you want
to view.
2Click to open the Data Table window.
3In the Data Table, click Auto-Zoom (unless it is already on).
4Select the rows of data to view. AutoCAD Map 3D automatically zooms
to the corresponding data.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
Getting Information about Features | 933
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Exporting Data from the Data Table
You can export the data in the Data Table to a .csv (comma-separated text file)
that can be opened in most spreadsheet applications.
See also:
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
■Exporting and Printing Attribute Data on page 1212.
To export from the Data Table
1Select the rows of data to export.
2From the Options list in the Data Table, select Export.
3Save the .csv file to the specified name and folder.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
934 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Getting Information About Drawing Objects
You can store information about drawing objects in object data tables or in
linked external sources.
See also:
■Storing Attribute Data in the Drawing (Object Data) on page 451
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
To get information about drawing objects
■To view properties and attributes for a drawing object on page 938
■To view external data linked to drawing objects on page 938
Overview of Drawing Object Information
Drawing objects are associated with different kinds of attribute data. You can
view and edit the properties and attributes contained in your map as well as
data contained in common spreadsheet application databases.
You can get information about drawing objects in the following ways.
For more information,
see...
Use this method...To do this...
Displaying and Editing Ob-
ject Data for a Drawing Ob-
ject on page 880
View and edit object data 1Right-click a draw-
ing object in the
map.
2Click Properties.
Editing Object Class Data on
page 845
View and edit object class
data.
1Right-click a classi-
fied drawing object
in the map.
2Click Properties.
3Click the Object
Class tab.
Getting Information About Drawing Objects | 935
For more information,
see...
Use this method...To do this...
Editing a Database on page
867
Edit external data linked
to drawing objects
1Open a database
table in the Data
View.
2Click the data to
edit.
3Type the new value.
Finding Records in a Data-
base Linked to Drawing Ob-
jects on page 1008
Find data in the Data
View.
1Open a database
table in the Data
View.
2Position the cursor
in the column to
search.
3Click Edit menu ➤
Find.
4Enter the characters
to find.
5Click Find Next.
Highlighting Drawing Ob-
jects Linked to a Database
Record on page 1013
Highlight drawing objects
in your map that are
linked to a database re-
cord.
1Open a linked data-
base table in the
Data View.
2In the Data View
window, select a re-
cord.
3In the Data View,
click Highlight
menu ➤ Highlight
Objects.
936 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
For more information,
see...
Use this method...To do this...
Highlighting Drawing Ob-
jects Linked to a Database
Record on page 1013
Enter regen on the Command
line.
Remove highlighting
Highlighting Records Linked
to a Selected Object on page
1016
Highlight records linked
to a selected drawing ob-
ject
1Open a linked data-
base table in the
Data View.
2In the Data View,
click Highlight
menu ➤ Highlight
Records ➤ Select
Object. Select the
objects in your
drawing.
3Press Enter.
Printing from the Data View
on page 1215
Print information from the
Data View.
1In the Data View,
specify print op-
tions, header, foot-
er, or filters.
2In the Data View,
click File menu ➤
Print.
3Click OK.
Viewing Properties and Attributes of Drawing
Objects
You can view object data and object class data for drawing objects.
Getting Information About Drawing Objects | 937
See also:
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
■Editing Object Class Data on page 845
To view properties and attributes for a drawing object
■Right-click an object and click Properties.
The Properties palette opens showing all the information contained in the
object data of your drawing layer.
Quick Reference
PROPERTIES
Displays the Properties palette, which allows you to edit the properties of
objects
Analyze ➤ Properties
Menu
Properties
Icon
PROPERTIESCommand Line
Select object. Right-click in drawing area ➤ Properties
Task Pane
Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects
You can view the external data contained in your map by linking to an external
database, usually a common spreadsheet application.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data on page 859
To view external data linked to drawing objects
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, expand Link Templates and right-click the
link template for the data table you want.
938 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2Click View Linked Table.
The Data View window opens.
3Click the Highlight Linked Objects icon.
4In your map, select the objects whose data you want to view and press
Enter.
The Data View window reappears with the records that are linked to the
selected objects highlighted.
5Use the navigation buttons to move between highlighted records.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Highlight Objects
Highlights objects linked to the selected records
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Highlight Objects
Menu
Highlight Objects
Icon
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates
To measure and track coordinates
■To track coordinates on page 941
■To measure geodetic distance on page 943
■To measure coordinate geometry on page 944
Overview of Measuring and Tracking
Once you have assigned coordinate systems to your map, you can locate
specific coordinate points and measure the geodetic distance between points.
Measuring and Tracking Coordinates | 939
For example, you can determine the coordinates of a manhole or the centerline
of a new road.
For drawing objects in your map, there are additional coordinate geometry
commands you can use to get accurate geometric information about the
objects.
In addition, you can use AutoCAD commands, such as DIST, AREA,
PROPERTIES, and PERIMETER, to obtain information about drawing objects,
which can help you do useful calculations. For more information, refer to the
AutoCAD Help.
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Assigning a Coordinate System to the Current Drawing on page 137
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
Use the following methods to measure and track coordinates.
DescriptionFor drawing objects onlyFor all map objects
As you move the cursor around in a
drawing window, display the cursor
Tracking Coordinates
on page 941
location in a specific coordinate sys-
tem.
Measure the geodetic distance (which
takes into account the curvature of
Measuring Geodetic
Distance on page 943
the Earth) between points in your
map.
Calculate the total of several disjunct
distances between points in your
map.
Adding Distances on page
947
Add and display the distance between
one point and a number of other
Displaying Continuous Dis-
tance on page 948
points, or between a series of points.
in a drawing.
940 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
DescriptionFor drawing objects onlyFor all map objects
Display the acute and obtuse angle
between points or intersecting lines.
Displaying Angle Information
on page 950
Display coordinate geometry for lines
and arcs, including line and curve
details, area, and coordinates.
Displaying COGO Informa-
tion for Lines and Arcs on
page 951
Display the slope, grade, and horizont-
al distance between two points.
Displaying Slope on page 952
Tracking Coordinates
As you move the cursor around in a drawing window, you can display the
cursor location in the coordinate system you choose.
For example, if your attached drawing uses one coordinate system and your
current drawing uses another, you can track the source drawing's coordinates
as you move the cursor around in the current drawing.
Track Coordinates pane
See also:
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
To track coordinates
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, right-click the current drawing ➤ Track
Coordinates .
2The Track Coordinates pane appears.
Tracking Coordinates | 941
3Click Select Coordinate System.
4In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, choose the coordinate
system to track.
5Click OK.
The Track Coordinates pane displays the code and description of the
coordinate system.
6To change the format of the displayed coordinates, right-click in the
Track Coordinates pane. Click Format Lat/Longs As D,M,S.
As you move the cursor over the drawing window, the X and Y text boxes
update the cursor's coordinates in the selected coordinate system.
Tips
■If the X and Y text boxes remain empty as you move the cursor in the
drawing window, either there is no coordinate system assigned to the
current drawing or the cursor is in a region of the window that is not valid
for the specified coordinate system. You cannot track coordinates in layout
space.
■You can track coordinates using the coordinate system of a specific attached
drawing. In Map Explorer, right-click the attached drawing ➤ Track
Drawing's Coordinates. The tracker pane opens, preset to the specified
attached drawing's coordinate system. If Track Drawing's Coordinates is
not available, there is no coordinate system assigned to the attached
drawing.
Quick Reference
MAPTRACKCS
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any coordinate system
Analyze menu ➤ Track Coordinate Sytem....
Menu
Track Coordinates
Icon
MAPTRACKCSCommand Line
942 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent Drawing ➤ Track
Coordinates
Task Pane
Measuring Geodetic Distance
You can measure the geodetic distance between points in your map. Geodetic
distance takes into account the curvature of the Earth. Therefore, the geodetic
distance between any two points is longer than the straight line distance
between the same two points.
Measure geodetic distance between points in your map
See also:
■Measuring and Tracking Coordinates on page 939
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■To track coordinates on page 941
To measure geodetic distance
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Geodetic Distance.
2At the prompt, specify the starting point by clicking in the map or typing
the coordinates of the point.
3At the second prompt, specify the end point by clicking in the map or
typing the coordinates of the point.
Measuring Geodetic Distance | 943
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Notes
■If the map file does not have an assigned coordinate system on page 137,
the result is a simple straight line distance calculation.
■You can change the units on page 941in which the distance is displayed.
Quick Reference
MAPDIST
Measures the geodetic distance between points
Analyze menu ➤ Geodetic Distance
Menu
Geodetic Distance
Icon
MAPDISTCommand Line
MAPDISTDialog Box
Measuring Coordinate Geometry
Use the inquiry commands to extract geometric information from drawing
objects.
To measure coordinate geometry
■To add distances on page 948
■To display the distance between points on page 949
■To display angle information on page 950
■To display COGO information for lines and arcs on page 951
■To display the slope between two points on page 952
944 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Overview of Measuring Coordinate Geometry
Use the inquiry commands to extract geometric information from drawing
objects such as lines, curves, closed polylines, and polygons. This can help
you verify the accuracy of your data, or send the data to the field.
Inquiry commands are specific to drawing objects. They don’t work on
geospatial features.
NOTE The COGO inquiry commands use the World Coordinate System (WCS)
and ignore current User Coordinate System (UCS) settings. Therefore, north is
always considered to point along the WCS positive Y axis, and inquiry results are
reported in WCS coordinates.
See also:
■Measuring and Tracking Coordinates on page 939
■Setting Coordinate Geometry Options on page 210
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
Use this method...To do this...
Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Add
Distances.
See Adding Distances on page 947
Add distances.
Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Con-
tinuous Distance.
See Displaying Continuous Distance on
page 948
Display the distance between points.
Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Angle
Information.
See Displaying Angle Information on page
950
Display angle information.
Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Line
and Arc Information.
See Displaying COGO Information for Lines
and Arcs on page 951
Display coordinate geometry information
for lines and arcs.
Measuring Coordinate Geometry | 945
Use this method...To do this...
Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ List
Slope.
See Displaying Slope on page 952
Display the slope between points.
Quick Reference
MAPCGADIST
Adds the distances between points
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Add Distances
Menu
Add Distances
Icon
MAPCGADISTCommand Line
MAPCGCDIST
Displays the distance between points
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Continuous Distance
Menu
Continuous Distance
Icon
MAPCGCDISTCommand Line
MAPCGANG
Displays the angle between lines or points
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Angle Information
Menu
Angle Information
Icon
MAPCGANGCommand Line
MAPCGLIST
946 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Displays coordinate geometry information for lines and arcs
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Line and Arc
Information
Menu
Line and Arc Information
Icon
MAPCGLISTCommand Line
Adding Distances
You can calculate the total of several disjunct distances by selecting points in
your map, entering distances on the command line, or selecting numeric text,
such as measurements, in your map.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available
for geospatial features.
You are prompted to enter a number, specify a distance, or select text. Select
all the distances you want to add. You can select numeric text in your drawing,
click the start and end points of the distance you want to measure, or enter
the number directly on the command line. When you press Enter, AutoCAD
Map 3D displays the total of all the distances.
See also:
■Measuring and Tracking Coordinates on page 939
■Setting Coordinate Geometry Options on page 210
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
Measuring Coordinate Geometry | 947
■Displaying Continuous Distance on page 948
To add distances
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Add Distances.
2Specify the first distance by doing one of the following:
■Enter the distance on the command line.
■Select two locations in the map.
■Enter s. Select numeric text in the map, such as a measurement.
3Enter as many additional distances as you want.
4When you finish selecting distances, press Enter to view the total of the
distances.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Quick Reference
MAPCGADIST
Adds the distances between points
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Add Distances
Menu
Add Distances
Icon
MAPCGADISTCommand Line
Displaying Continuous Distance
You can add and display the distance between one point and a number of
other points, or between a series of points in a drawing.
948 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available
for geospatial features.
The Continuous option measures the dis-
tance from the starting point to the next
The Base option measures the distance from
the starting point to each of the points you
select, like the spokes of a wheel. point and from that point to the next point,
in a continuous line.
See also:
■Adding Distances on page 947
■Measuring and Tracking Coordinates on page 939
■Setting Coordinate Geometry Options on page 210
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
To display the distance between points
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Continuous Distance.
2Select Base or Continuous.
■Base: Always measures the distance from the first point you select to
each of the additional points you select.
■Continuous: Measures the distance from one point to the next.
3Select two points to display the distance between the points.
4Select another point. If you selected Base, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the
distance from first (or base) point to the new point. If you selected
Measuring Coordinate Geometry | 949
Continuous, AutoCAD Map 3D displays the distance from the last point
to the new point.
5When you finish selecting points, press Enter to view the total of the
distances.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Quick Reference
MAPCGCDIST
Displays the distance between points
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Continuous Distance
Menu
Continuous Distance
Icon
MAPCGCDISTCommand Line
Displaying Angle Information
You can display the acute and obtuse angle between points or intersecting
lines in a drawing.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available
for geospatial features.
See also:
■Measuring and Tracking Coordinates on page 939
■Setting Coordinate Geometry Options on page 210
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Displaying Continuous Distance on page 948
To display angle information
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Angle Information.
950 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2Select two lines, or enter p to specify points.
3If you entered p, specify a starting point, a vertex, and an ending point.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Quick Reference
MAPCGANG
Displays the angle between lines or points
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Angle Information
Menu
Angle Information
Icon
MAPCGANGCommand Line
Displaying COGO Information for Lines and Arcs
You can display coordinate geometry for lines and arcs. This information
includes line and curve details, area, and coordinates.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available
for geospatial features.
See also:
■Setting Coordinate Geometry Options on page 210
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
To display COGO information for lines and arcs
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Line and Arc Information.
2Select the line or arc, or enter p to specify the points for a line.
3If you entered p, specify a starting point and an ending point for the line.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Measuring Coordinate Geometry | 951
Quick Reference
MAPCGLIST
Displays coordinate geometry information for lines and arcs
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ Line and Arc
Information
Menu
Line and Arc Information
Icon
MAPCGLISTCommand Line
Displaying Slope
You can display the slope, grade, and horizontal distance between two points.
You can perform this operation only on drawing objects. It is not available
for geospatial features.
See also:
■Setting Coordinate Geometry Options on page 210
■Overview of Coordinate Systems on page 134
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
To display the slope between two points
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ List Slope.
2Select a line or an arc, or enter p to specify points.
3If you entered p, specify a starting point and an ending point for the line.
The results of the calculation are displayed on the command line. If you
don’t see the command line, press Ctrl + 9 to display it.
Quick Reference
MAPCGSLIST
952 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Displays the slope between points
Analyze menu ➤ Inquiry ➤ List Slope
Menu
List Slope
Icon
MAPCGSLISTCommand Line
Creating Themes
Themes vary the display of your data based on properties or attributes of the
data. For example, instead of styling the lakes so they are all the same shade
of blue, you can create a theme to vary the color based on the depth of the
lake.
To create themes
■To create a theme for a feature layer on page 958
■To theme drawing data on page 965
Overview of Creating Themes
A theme varies the display of data based on properties or attributes of the data,
for example area, length, pavement type, assessed value, temperature, or land
use.
You can use themes to change colors, line types, symbols, text, or other
properties that can help you present map information and tell a story. Themes
can help make information more visible, illustrate how data is distributed,
make data easier to analyze and interpret, and reveal patterns.
For example, you can use darker colors for areas with more rainfall, a larger
dot to display cities with a larger population, or a wider line to draw roads
with high traffic volume.
Creating Themes | 953
A theme showing counties by area
You can theme on specific values or a range of values. For example, an
agricultural theme might show different crops in different colors. Each crop
is a specific value. Temperature, however, can be any number along a
continuum. When you display this type of data, you define ranges for the
values. For example, you could divide temperature values into three ranges:
below 30, 30 to 60, and over 60.
You can add labels to a theme to label features or drawing objects. You can
also add a legend that lists the theme’s conditions and explains the colors,
symbols, line patterns, shadings and annotation used.
See also:
■Overview of Creating and Editing Data on page 573
■Adding Labels to Features on page 900
■Adding a Legend on page 916
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
For workflows related to analyzing data, see Create Themed Maps and Analyze
Data.
954 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
The method you use to theme data depends on the type of layer on which
the data is stored.
DescriptionSee...To theme this type
of data...
Display Manager layers from feature
sources such as SDF or Oracle that have
been added using Data Connect.
Theming Features on
page 955
Feature layers
AutoCAD layers containing drawing objects
from DWG files.
Theming Drawing Data
on page 965
Drawing layers
Raster-based surfaces, such Digital Eleva-
tion Models (DEMs), ESRI Grid files, and
Theming Surfaces to
Analyze Height, Slope,
and Aspect on page 989
Surface layers
Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) that
have been added using Data Connect.
Theming Features
You can use the theming tool to create themes for layers from feature sources
such as SDF, SHP, Oracle Spatial, or ArcSDE. Themes vary the display of features
on the feature layer based on properties or attributes associated with that layer.
For example, a theme for a point layer might display retail store locations with
a different symbol for each type of store. A polygon layer theme might display
each land use classification with a different color or shading.
Theming Features | 955
A theme showing parcels by area
Theme Rules
A theme for a feature layer has a set of scale ranges and a rule that corresponds
to each one. For example, if you are theming by parcel size, the scale ranges
would indicate different parcel sizes. The first range might comprise parcels
between 1000 and 5000 square feet, the second range might comprise parcels
5001 to 10,000 square feet, and so on. The first rule would describe how the
first range appears on the map. For example, the smallest parcels might be
lightest in color, and the colors might get darker as the parcel size goes up.
Rules can include a visual style, a legend label, and a feature label.
■Visual style options vary, depending on the type of geometry on the layer.
Polygon style options include fill and border options; line style options
include line thickness, color, and pattern; point style options include a
symbol, size specifications, and color.
■Legend labels can provide a description of a rule’s condition. For example,
you can edit the default legend label so it reads “Small parcels,” instead of
“1000...2000.”
■Feature labels display the values of a property. For example, you can label
parcels with their address or area values.
As a layer is drawn, each feature is compared to the rules in the order that
they are listed. The first rule for which the feature meets the condition is used
to specify the style and legend label for that feature. A default or empty
condition applies to all features and defines the style for features that do not
956 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
meet any of the preceding rules. A well-constructed theme contains only one
default rule and it is last in the list.
Distribution Methods
When you create a range of conditions for a feature theme, you must specify
the distribution method. The following methods are available:
DescriptionMethod
The difference between the high and low values is the
same for every range. This method is easy to interpret
Equal
and is useful for showing continuous data such as rainfall.
Features are placed in ranges based on how much their
values vary from the mean. AutoCAD Map 3D calculates
Standard Deviation
the mean and then adds or subtracts the standard devi-
ation to or from the mean to create the ranges.
Each range contains an equal number of features. This
method is useful for showing data in which values are
evenly distributed.
Quantile
Ranges are based on natural groupings of data values.
Features with similar values are grouped together. This
method shows the natural groupings in the data.
Jenks (Natural Breaks)
Features are not grouped. This distribution is useful if
values are not continuous, there is a fixed number of
values, and many features have the same value.
Individual Values
See also:
■Overview of Creating and Editing Data on page 573
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
■Adding a Legend on page 916
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
■Creating Themes for Drawing Layers on page 967
Theming Features | 957
■Adding Labels to Features on page 900
To create a theme for a feature layer
1In Display Manager on page 1748, select a feature layer. Click the Style icon
in the toolstrip.
For information about creating a new feature layer, see Bringing in GIS
Features on page 265.
2In the Style Editor, under Scale Ranges, select the scale range to theme.
For more information about scale ranges, see Defining Scale Ranges on
page 543.
3In the Polygon Style, Point Style, or Line Style area, click New Theme.
4To analyze features based on values that fall into various numerical ranges,
do the following:
■For Property, select the property on which to base the theme.
■For properties with numeric values, specify the Minimum Value and
Maximum Value for the range.
■For properties with numeric values, select a Distribution method. For
more information about distribution methods, see the Concepts tab
of this topic.
The first rule includes the Minimum Value and the last rule includes
the Maximum Value. Styles are interpolated across the range.
You can specify the number of rules to create if Distribution method
is Equal, Quantile, or Jenks (Natural Breaks). Properties containing
strings use an Individual Values distribution that does not allow the
number of rules to be edited. Adjust the number of rules to control
the granularity of the theme.
■If you are editing an existing theme, you can replace any existing
rules by selecting Replace existing rules .
5The default Style Range shows the styles that will be used for each rule.
Your options depend on the type of geometry stored on this feature layer.
■For polygon features, see To set styling options for polygon features
on page 961.
■For line features, see To set styling options for line features on page
962.
958 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■For point features, see To set styling options for point features on page
963.
6To add labels to features in the theme, do the following:
■Select the Create Feature Labels check box.
■Next to Label Ramp, click
■Select Create A Label and specify the criteria for the labels.
For more information about creating feature labels, see Adding Labels
to Features on page 900. To use expressions for labels, see Using
Expressions to Label Features.
7To create legend labels for the theme, do the following:
■Select the Create Legend Labels check box.
■For Legend Text, enter the text to appear next to each rule in the
legend.
For example, if you are theming by size, you could change the legend
text to “Square Acreage.”
■For Label Format, specify how to display the legend label.
If you theme a layer on a property that contained area information
and you used the label text Area:, the label formats might look like
the following examples:
<Label Text> <Min> to <Max>
Area: 100 to 200
<Label Text> <Min> - <Max>
Area: 100 - 200
<Min> <= <Label Text> <<Max>
100 <= Area < 200
For information on inserting a legend into your map, see Adding a
Legend on page 916.
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Theming Features | 959
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Style. In the Style Editor, click the New Theme
button.
Task Pane
Theme dialog boxDialog Box
Theme Options for Polygon Feature Layers
When you create a theme for a feature layer whose geometry consists of
polygons, the Style Polygon dialog box provides options for changing the
visual appearance of the features in the theme. You can change options relating
to the fill and border.
A polygon feature theme can be transparent so that other map data shows
through, for example, another theme or another layer of map data. The
transparency option is available only when working with themes involving
a solid fill.
Blue parcel theme made partially transparent so you can see the red planning theme
underneath
See also:
■Overview of Creating Themes on page 953
■Theming Features on page 955
960 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
To set styling options for polygon features
1Create a theme for a polygon feature layer on page 955.
2In the Theme Polygons dialog box, the default Style Range shows the
colors that will be used for each rule. To change them, click
3In the Style Area dialog box, change any of the following:
■Select Apply Fill To The Polygons and choose a Fill Pattern from the
list. To use transparency, choose Solid.
■If you chose Solid, for Foreground Transparency, specify a value
between 0 and 100, where 0 is completely solid and 100 is completely
transparent.
■For Foreground Color, select Generated Between Two Colors or Color
Palette.
For Generated Between Two Colors, specify the beginning and ending
colors for the theme. The intermediate colors will be calculated
automatically, but you can adjust them.
For Color Palette, choose a palette from the list.
■Specify a Background Color, if appropriate.
■If you want a border, select Apply A Border To The Polygons and
choose a line pattern, thickness, and color.
4Click OK twice.
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Style. In the Style Editor, click the New Theme
button.
Task Pane
Theme dialog boxDialog Box
Theming Features | 961
Theme Options for Line Feature Layers
When you create a theme for a feature layer whose geometry consists of linear
features, the Style Line dialog box provides options for changing the visual
appearance of the features in the theme. You can change options relating to
the thickness, color, and pattern.
A theme showing roads by road type
See also:
■Overview of Creating Themes on page 953
■Theming Features on page 955
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
To set styling options for line features
1Create a theme for a line feature layer on page 955.
2In the Theme Lines dialog box, the default Style Range shows the styles
that will be used for each rule. To change them, click
3In the Style Line dialog box, change any of the following:
■For Units (Device Space), select the type of units to measure line
thickness. Lines are specified in Device Space units.
962 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■For Thickness Range, specify the narrowest and widest line thicknesses
to use for the style.
■For Color Range, specify the beginning and ending colors for the
theme. The intermediate colors will be calculated automatically, but
you can adjust them.
■Choose a Patternfor the lines from the list.
4Click OK twice.
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Style. In the Style Editor, click the New Theme
button.
Task Pane
Theme dialog boxDialog Box
Theme Options for Point Feature Layers
When you create a theme for a feature layer whose geometry consists of point
features, the Style Line dialog box provides options for changing the visual
appearance of the features in the theme. You can change options relating to
the symbol, color, and size of the points.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Themes on page 953
■Theming Features on page 955
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
To set styling options for point features
1Create a theme for a point feature layer on page 955.
Theming Features | 963
2In the Theme Points dialog box, the default Style Range shows the styles
that will be used for each rule. To change them, click
3In the Style Point dialog box, change any of the following:
■For Symbol, click and choose a symbol or browse to a symbol
file.
■For Size Context, choose Device Space or Map Space and then select
the type of units to measure the point symbols.
In Device Space, you specify symbol widths and heights in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
In Map Space, you specify symbol widths and heights in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
If you chooseDevice Space, symbols remain the same size during a
zoom. If you chooseMap Space, symbols remain the same size relative
to the map. For example, if you make a symbol .1 miles in map units,
it will measure .1 miles no matter what zoom level you set.
■Set the size range for the point symbols (width and height). The
smallest size will be used for the objects in the lowest scale range and
the largest size will be used for the objects in the highest scale range.
You can type a number or use an expression to set size.
■For Fill Color Range and Edge Color Range, specify the beginning and
ending colors for the theme. The intermediate colors will be calculated
automatically, but you can adjust them.
■Choose a Rotation Rangefor the symbols from the list, or use an
expression to set rotation.
4Click OK twice.
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
964 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Style. In the Style Editor, click the New Theme
button.
Task Pane
Theme dialog boxDialog Box
Theming Drawing Data
To theme drawing data
■To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
■To edit a theme for drawing data on page 971
■To change the thumbnail used in the Display Manager on page 971
■To add a legend to your drawing on page 971
■To apply annotation to a theme for a drawing layer on page 974
Overview of Theming Drawing Data
Themes for drawing layers vary the stylization of drawing objects based on
object properties or data associated with the objects.
For example, you can vary the shade of blue used for parcels, depending on
each parcel’s assessed property value.
Change the color of each parcel based on assessed property value.
You can also use predefined themes, called ramps on page 972.
Theme Data
A theme for a drawing layer can be based on any of the following:
■A property of the objects, such as area or length
■Data stored in an object data table, such as pipe diameters
■Data stored in a linked external database, such as parcel values
Theming Drawing Data | 965
The data used for a theme on a drawing layer can be specific values, such as
pipe material, land use, or pavement type, or a range of values, such as property
value, temperature, or population.
If the data is a set of specific values, select which values you want. For example,
an agricultural theme might show different crops in different colors. Each
crop is a specific value. You can omit some crops.
If the data is ranges of values, select how many ranges you want and how to
divide the data. For example, temperature can be any number along a
continuum. You could divide temperature values into three ranges: below 30,
30 to 60, and over 60.
You can add a legend that lists the theme’s conditions and explains the colors,
symbols, line patterns, shadings and annotation used.
See also:
■Adding a Legend on page 916
■Theming Features on page 955
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
Use this method...To do this...
In Display Manager on page 1748 right-
click a drawing layer ➤ Add Style ➤
Theme.
See Theming Drawing Data on page 965
Create a theme for a drawing layer.
In Display Manager on page 1748 right-
click a drawing layer ➤ Edit Theme.
See Theming Drawing Data on page 965
Edit a theme for a drawing layer.
On the Display tab of the Properties palette
for a drawing layer, select the thumbnail
preview.
See Theming Drawing Data on page 965
Change the theumbnail image for the
theme in Display Manager.
In the Display Manager, click Tools ➤
Create Legend.
See Theming Drawing Data on page 965
Add a legend
966 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
Theme Drawing Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a drawing layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click
Add Style ➤ Theme.
Task Pane
Thematic Mapping dialog boxDialog Box
Creating Themes for Drawing Layers
The following table shows data themed using different styling options and
offers some guidance on using those options.
More InformationExampleTheme Style
Alter color
To assign line width to circles,
arcs, or lines, convert the ob-
Alter linetype
jects to polylines with the
drawing cleanup tools. See
Cleaning Up Drawing Data
on page 636.
Theming Drawing Data | 967
More InformationExampleTheme Style
To assign line width to circles,
arcs, or lines, convert the ob-
Alter lineweight
jects to polylines with the
drawing cleanup tools. See
Cleaning Up Drawing Data
on page 636.
Changes to plot styles appear
only in previews and in pub-
lished drawings.
Alter plot style
Tips for Drawing Layer
Themes: Hatch Scale on page
972
Add hatch/fill
Tips for Drawing Layer
Themes: Text Height on page
974
Add text
968 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
More InformationExampleTheme Style
To assign line width to circles,
arcs, or lines, convert the ob-
Alter linestyle
jects to polylines with the
drawing cleanup tools. See
Cleaning Up Drawing Data
on page 636.
Scale factors for blocks vary
according to the plot scale
Alter block insertion
and the size of the block. For
a map plotted at 1:2000, a
unit block (size 1 unit by 1
unit) appears clearly with a
scale of 2000.
Tips for Drawing Layer
Themes: Annotation on page
974
Tips for Drawing Layer
Themes: Text Height on page
974
Add annotation
See also:
■Adding a Legend on page 916
■Theming Features on page 955
■Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989
■To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
■To edit a theme for drawing data on page 971
Theming Drawing Data | 969
■To change the thumbnail used in the Display Manager on page 971
■To add a legend to your drawing on page 971
To create a theme for a drawing layer
1In Display Manager on page 1748 right-click a drawing layer ➤ Add Style
➤ Theme.
For information on creating a layer, see Bringing In Drawing Data From
DWG Files on page 296.
2In the Thematic Mapping dialog box, in the Theme Type list, choose the
type of theme to create.
■A Set Of Specific Values — Select this option if the data has a few
distinct values, such as pipe material, land use, or pavement type.
■A Range Of Numeric Values — Select this option if the data can be
any value along a continuum, such as property value, temperature,
or population. When you display this type of data, you define ranges
for the values.
3Next to the Theme Type list, click Values to specify the data to use for
the theme.
4In the Values dialog box, under Data Values, specify the data to use. For
Obtain From, click to choose from a list of data sources.
5To ignore or exclude certain values in the data, specify them in the Ignore
box.
These values, while present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in
the theme. Examples include null or empty data values.
6To normalize the data relative to some other data value, for Normalize
By, enter a value or an expression. Click to choose from a list of data
sources.
7Click Read Data.
AutoCAD Map 3D reads the values in the selected data source.
If there is no data, verify that there are objects in the layer. The Display
Manager does not work with civil objects or objects from attached
drawings that have been queried into the current drawing using a standard
970 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Query. To use objects from attached drawings with the Display Manager,
create a Query layer.
8If you are not working with ranges, select the values to include in your
map.
9If you are creating a theme with ranges, under Data Ranges on page 1365,
choose how to divide the values into ranges.
10 Click OK to close the dialog box.
11 Under Thematic Details on page 1378, specify how to style objects in the
theme, and the text labels to use in the legend.
12 Click Done.
To edit a theme for drawing data
■In Display Manager, right-click the drawing theme to edit and choose Edit
Theme.
To change the thumbnail used in the Display Manager
1Select the layer.
2Click Display to open Properties palette.
3On the Display tab of the Properties palette, select the thumbnail preview.
For example, choose the polygon icon for parcels or the arc icon for pipes.
To add a legend to your drawing
■In the Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Create Legend.
See also:
■Overview of Theming Drawing Data on page 965
■Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Ramps on page 972
■Thematic Mapping dialog box on page 1377
■Thematic Values dialog box on page 1379
■Range of Values dialog box on page 1365
■Adding a Legend on page 916
Theming Drawing Data | 971
Quick Reference
Theme Drawing Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a drawing layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click
Add Style ➤ Theme.
Task Pane
Thematic Mapping dialog boxDialog Box
Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Ramps
For stylizations, you can choose from pre-defined sets of stylizations, called
ramps.
A ramp is a pre-built sequence of styles, such as a set of color gradations or a set of
line types.
The information needed to create the ramp is stored in a separate file in XML
format. AutoCAD Map 3D supplies several ramp files that you can use.
Tips for Drawing Layer Themes: Hatch Scale
For standard-scale hatch patterns (those that do not have an AR- prefix), the
density of the hatching varies according to the hatch scale and plot scale you
use.
ResultHatch ScalePlot, Display, or
View Scale
Solid1 to 5001:2000
Lines clearly visible2000
Sparse, occasional lines15000
972 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
ResultHatch ScalePlot, Display, or
View Scale
No hatch or one line only20000
Solid1 to 25001:10000
Lines clearly visible10000
Sparse, occasional lines75000
No hatch or one line only100000
You can use solid fills at any scale to fill an enclosed area.
Examples of hatch patterns with
different scales on a map plotted
at 1:10000
Using too low a scale for hatch patterns can seriously impair results. For a
listing of standard hatch patterns, look up "standard libraries" in the help
index.
Theming Drawing Data | 973
Tips for Drawing Layer Themes:Text Height
Scale and height values for fill patterns, text height, and symbol size vary
according to the plotting scale you intend to use. The following table shows
suitable text heights for different plot scales.
(Text Height)Required Text Height on PlotPlot Scale
200011:2000
10000.5
1000011:10000
50000.5
Tips for Drawing Layer Themes:Annotation
Use an annotation template to add annotation to a theme. You define the
annotation templates in your map. They are stored as specially named blocks
within your drawing and define what kind of information you want to be
displayed in the annotation, as well as the layout of that information.
Annotation templates can include textual values, such as values from object
data or object properties such as a lineweight, and graphics, such as images
and arrows.
See also:
■Overview of Annotating Maps on page 899
To apply annotation to a theme for a drawing layer
1Select the annotation template you want to use.
2Specify the insertion information, such as insertion point, scale, rotation,
linetype, and color.
974 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
AutoCAD Map 3D includes tools to help you view and analyze raster-based
3D surfaces, such as Digital Elevation Models (DEMs), ESRI Grid files, and
Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED).
For example, you can create contour maps to help you analyze 3D terrain, use
raster-based theming to analyze elevation, slope, and aspect, drape map data
over surfaces and view the data in 3D, and more.
To add a raster-based surface, you use Data Connect. For more information,
see Bringing in GIS Features on page 265.
To analyze raster-based surfaces
■To create contour lines on page 978
■To edit the line styles and labels used for the contour lines on page 979
■To delete a layer of contour lines on page 979
■To drape 2D map data over a 3D surface on page 980
■To switch between 2D and 3D on page 980
■To switch between 2D and 3D on page 982
■To use 3D Zoom on page 982
■To use 3D Pan on page 983
■To use 3D Orbit on page 983
■To use walk through on page 984
■To change the Visual Style on page 984
■To specify hillshading settings on page 988
■To turn off or on hillshading on page 988
■To change the vertical exaggeration on page 988
■To theme a surface to analyze height, slope or aspect on page 991
■To change colors in a themed surface on page 992
Overview of Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces
After you add a raster-based surface to your map (such as a Digital Elevation
Model or ESRI Grid file), you can analyze it in various ways.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
Analyzing Raster-Based Surfaces | 975
Analyze a raster-based surface (such as a Digital Elevation Model or ESRI Grid
file) in the following ways.
Add contour lines on page 976 to a surface to make a contour map, also
referred to as a topographic map.
Drape 2D map data on 3D surfaces on page 979 to view all the data as
a 3D texture map.
View, navigate, and walk or fly through on page 981 a 3D map to view
the map from different perspectives.
Use hillshading on page 986 to cast real-world shadows on a surface to
make it look more realistic and easier to analyze.
Change the vertical exaggeration on page 986 to control how extreme
the elevation changes appear.
Use theming and change colors on page 989 to analyze elevation, slope,
aspect, and more.
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines
You can can add contour lines to a raster-based surface in your map to create
a contour or topographic map. You add contour lines to surface layers in
Display Manager.
With contour lines, each line connects points of equal elevation on the surface.
The lines can help you determine the elevation at a specific location on the
surface, help clarify and analyze the 3D surface terrain, and help with things
like navigation.
976 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Contour lines added to a DEM surface
Contour lines are stored as new polyline or polygon features in an SDF file,
and as a new layer in Display Manager.
You can edit and style the contour lines as you do any other feature layer.
You can also delete contour lines and recreate them.
When you add contour lines, you specify the following:
■Name of the new contour layer
■Contour elevation interval
■Units (meters or feet) used to measure elevation
■Major contour interval
■Contour labels
■Whether to create contours as polylines or polygons
■File name of the SDF that will store the contour features
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces on page 979
■Viewing Surfaces in 3D on page 981
Adding and Modifying Contour Lines | 977
■To create contour lines on page 978
■To edit the line styles and labels used for the contour lines on page 979
■To delete a layer of contour lines on page 979
To create contour lines
1In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a surface layer, and select Create
Contour Layer.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Adding Raster-Based
Surfaces to Your Map on page 373.
2In the Generate Contour dialog box, enter a name for the new Display
Manager layer that will contain the contour lines.
3In the Contour Elevation Interval list, select the interval between contour
lines. This is the difference in elevation between lines, for example, 10,
20, or 50.
4Select the units (meters or feet) used to measure the elevation in your
surface.
AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to get this unit from the surface itself, but
you can change it.
5In the Major Contour Every list, select the interval between major (bold)
contour lines.
For example, if you choose 5, every fifth contour line will be bolded.
6To label the major contour lines with the elevations they represent, select
the Label The Elevation check box.
7For Create Contour As, select the type of feature you want to use when
creating contour lines. Choose polyline or polygon.
8For Save Contours Into Filename, type a name for the new SDF file that
will store your contour line features.
9Click OK.
The new contour line features are added to your map. They are placed on a
new Display Manager layer with the layer name you specified, and stored in
an SDF file.
978 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To edit the line styles and labels used for the contour lines
1In Display Manager, click the contour layer and click Style in the toolstrip.
2In the Style Editor, modify the line styles and labels, as you would for
other features. For more information, see Editing Features on page 588.
To change other contour settings, such as elevation interval and units,
you must remove the contour layer and recreate it using the settings you
want.
To delete a layer of contour lines
1In Display Manager, select the contour layer.
2Click Remove.
Quick Reference
Create Contours
Creates contour lines for 3D raster-based surfaces
In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer, and
select Create Contour Layer.
Task Pane
Autodesk Map Contour dialog boxDialog Box
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces
To drape 2D map data over a surface in your map, switch to a 3D view.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically drapes 2D map data and displays everything
in 3D, creating a texture map.
For example, if you have a map with 2D raster satellite images, a 2D parcel
layer, and a 3D Digital Elevation Model (DEM), you can switch to 3D to drape
the satellite images and parcels over the DEM.
Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces | 979
2D parcels and roads draped over a 3D DEM surface
NOTE You cannot edit 2D data while it is draped in a 3D view. Switch back to
2D.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■Viewing Surfaces in 3D on page 981
To drape 2D map data over a 3D surface
1In Display Manager on page 1748, verify that you have a surface layer in
your map.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Adding Raster-Based
Surfaces to Your Map on page 373.
2On the status bar, click to switch to 3D.
The 3D Navigation toolbar appears, and display driver acceleration is
turned on to enhance 3D display performance.
3Use the 3D Navigation tools to move around. For more information, see
Viewing Surfaces in 3D on page 981.
4To switch back to 2D, click on the status bar.
To switch between 2D and 3D
1On the status bar, click to switch to 3D or to switch to 2D.
980 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
Drape 2D Data Over a Surface
Switch to a 3D view and 2D data is automatically draped over surfaces in
your map
Switch to 3D
Icon
Viewing Surfaces in 3D
When working with maps that include 3D data such as raster-based surfaces,
you'll often want to display different views in 3D so that you explore, examine,
and analyze the surface from different perspectives.
Use any of the following options to view your 3D map interactively:
■Switch to 3D view—Displays the 3D Navigation toolbar, which contains
the commands you need to change the 3D view (for example 3D Orbit)
and turns on display driver acceleration to enhance 3D performance.
■3D Zoom—Simulates the effect of a camera's zoom lens by making objects
appear closer or farther away.
■3D Pan—Changes the view to match where you move the cursor.
■3D Orbit Commands—Moves the surface map around a target. For example,
3DORBIT, constrained orbit, and free orbit.
■Swivel—Simulates panning with a camera in the direction that you drag.
■Walk or Fly—Simulates walking or flying through a 3D model.
■Motion Path Animation—Records and plays back a walk-through or
fly-through of a model to visually demonstrate a surface map.
■Other AutoCAD commands—Allow you to view and navigate in 3D. For
example, you can use the VISUALSTYLES to hide or show lines and shade
3D data or Camera to place a camera so that you can manipulate and save
3D perspective views.
For more information about the above commands, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
Viewing Surfaces in 3D | 981
TIP To improve the display of a surface after zooming in, use the Resample Raster
option. This resamples / requeries the data so it is as clear as possible, getting rid
of things like pixelation. For more information, see Viewing Raster Images on page
570.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■Draping Map Data Over 3D Surfaces on page 979
■Viewing Raster Images on page 570
NOTE The following procedures are intended for maps that include 3D raster-based
surfaces, which have been added using Data Connect. See Adding Raster-Based
Surfaces to Your Map on page 373.
■To switch between 2D and 3D on page 982
■To use 3D Zoom on page 982
■To use 3D Pan on page 983
■To use 3D Orbit on page 983
■To use walk through on page 984
■To change the Visual Style on page 984
To switch between 2D and 3D
■On the status bar, click to switch to 3D or to switch to 2D.
To use 3D Zoom
1On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click 3D Zoom .
You can open the 3D Navigation toolbar by right-clicking a gray area
near the upper toolbar area of the application window, and selecting
AutoCAD ➤ 3D Navigation.
982 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2Choose a zoom option:
■Realtime - Zooms interactively. When the hand cursor appears, hold
down the button on your pointing device and drag vertically to zoom
in and out.
■All - Zoom to the entire drawing
■Extents - Display all objects as large as possible and still fit in the
current drawing area.
■Window - Zoom by specifying a rectangular area you want to view.
■Previous - zoom to the previous view
3Press ENTER, press ESC, or right-click to exit.
To use 3D Pan
1On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click 3D Pan .
2When the hand cursor appears, hold down the button on your pointing
device as you move.
3If you are using a wheel mouse, hold down the wheel button and move
the mouse.
4Press ENTER, press ESC, or right-click to exit.
To use 3D Orbit
1Use one of the following 3D orbit options:
■3D Navigation toolbar: 3D Constrained Orbit
■3D Navigation toolbar:3D Free Orbit
■Enter the 3DORBIT command
2Click and drag the cursor to rotate the view.
3To exit 3D orbit, press ENTER or ESC, or click Exit on the shortcut menu.
Viewing Surfaces in 3D | 983
To use walk through
1Verify that the “step size”, or distance you move with each step, is large
enough for walking through a surface. Enter the STEPSIZE command and
make sure it is set to 80 - 1500 or more. The number you want to use may
depend on your zoom level.
2On the 3D Navigation toolbar, click Walk Through .
3A window appears describing the keyboard control you use for the walk
through. Using the arrow keys is one of the convenient options. Click
OK.
4Wait briefly as the Position Locator palette appears. Review, change
settings as needed, and then minimize or close it.
5Use the keyboard buttons to walk through your surface. For example, use
the up arrow key to move forward.
6Press ENTER or ESC when you are done.
To change the Visual Style
1Enter the VISUALSTYLES command.
2In the Visual Styles Manager, double-click the sample image of the visual
style.
The selected visual style is applied to your surface.
For information about how to improve the display of surfaces after a zoom
operation (for example to get rid of pixelation), see Viewing Raster Images on
page 570.
For information about walk and fly mode, 3D swivel, motion path animation,
and other AutoCAD commands that can help you view data in 3D, please
refer to the AutoCAD Help.
Quick Reference
3DPAN
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally
and vertically
984 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
3D Pan
Icon
3DPANCommand Line
3DZOOM
Zooms in and out on a view of your drawing
3D Zoom
Icon
3DZOOMCommand Line
3DORBIT
Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D
3D Constrined Orbit
Icon
3DORBITCommand Line
3DFORBIT
Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D, using an unconstrained
orbit
3D Free Orbit
Icon
3DFORBITCommand Line
3DCORBIT
Starts an interactive 3D view and sets the objects into continuous motion
3D Continuous Orbit
Icon
3DCORBITCommand Line
3DWALK
Viewing Surfaces in 3D | 985
Interactively changes the view of a 3D drawing so that you appear to be
walking through the model
3D Walk
Icon
3DWALKCommand Line
3DSWIVEL
Changes the target of the view in the direction that you drag
3D Swivel
Icon
3DSWIVELCommand Line
3DDISTANCE
Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away
3D Adjust Distance
Icon
3DDISTANCECommand Line
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration
Hillshading adds shading to 3D surface layers by casting the sun's light across
a surface from the direction and angle you specify.
986 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Hillshading produces a more realistic image and helps you better understand
the magnitude and relationships of the various elevation changes (that is, the
bumps and valleys) on the surface.
Surface without hillshadingSurface with hillshading
Hillshading is on by default for each surface layer in your map, however, you
can choose to turn it off (or on again) at any time on a per layer basis.
You can change the sun settings that AutoCAD Map 3D uses to apply
hillshading. These settings are used throughout AutoCAD Map 3D and are
applied to all surface layers that have hillshading turned on.
You can also control the appearance of the elevation changes, making them
appear more or less extreme, using the vertical exaggeration setting. Increasing
the vertical exaggeration intensifies the hillshading, making the elevation
changes appear more extreme. The vertical exaggeration setting is apllied to
all surfaces you are viewing.
In addition to these settings, you can use AutoCAD commands to change the
appearance of surfaces. For example, you can use the VISUALSTYLES command
to display the surface in 3D Wireframe, 3D Hidden, Realistic, and Conceptual.
For more information, refer to the AutoCAD Help.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■To specify hillshading settings on page 988
■To turn off or on hillshading on page 988
■To change the vertical exaggeration on page 988
Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration | 987
To specify hillshading settings
1Verify that you are in the Map 3D for Geospatial workspace on page 1766.
2Click Setup menu ➤ Hillshade Settings.
3Specify the Direction and Angle of the sun you want to use for hillshading
by doing one of the following:
■Enter the direction and angle of the sun manually:
■For Direction Of Sun, specify the direction from which the light
should come from, for example, East or West. You can type a
direction value into the edit box, or drag the yellow disk in the
compass to the position you want.
■For Angle Of Sun, specify how high in the sky the light is located,
such as near the horizon, directly overhead, or somewhere in
between. You can type an angle into the edit box, or drag the
yellow disk to specify an angle.
■Click the Settings button to set the direction and angle of the sun
based on a date, time and location you specify in the Sun Properties
palette. To populate the Hillshade Settings dialog box with the Sun
Properties settings, you return to the Hillshade Settings dialog box
and click Import.
4Click OK.
To turn off or on hillshading
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a surface layer, and click
Edit Display Style.
2Do one of the following:
■To turn off hillshading, set the Hillshade Band to 0.
■To turn on hillshading, set the Hillshade Band to 1 and verify that
the Elevation Band is set to 1.
To change the vertical exaggeration
■In the status bar, for Exaggeration, select the value you want to use for
vertical exaggeration from the drop-down list. Choose Custom if you want
to specify a value that is not on the list.
988 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Specify a higher number if you want to make the elevation changes appear
more extreme. Enter a lower number or a decimal if you want to make it
appear less extreme.
Quick Reference
MAPHILLSHADE
Specifies settings to use when shading 3D raster-based surfaces
Click Setup ➤ Hillshade Settings.
Menu
MAPHILLSHADECommand Line
Hillshade Settings dialog boxDialog Box
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect
You can create a theme to change the display of a surface based on height
(elevation), slope, or aspect (direction of slope).
IllustrationSurface Theme Type
Height - Changes the display based on
elevation.
Theming Surfaces to Analyze Height, Slope, and Aspect | 989
IllustrationSurface Theme Type
Slope - Changes the display based on
ground slope or steepness.
For example, you can use gray to show
areas with a slope of less than 10%.
Aspect - Varies the display based on the
direction of ground slope.
This can help you analyze the surface. For example, you can create a theme
on height to analyze the elevation data, a theme on slope to help you
determine which areas are flat enough for developing houses, or a theme on
aspect to help you find the best drainage routes.
See also:
■Adding Raster-Based Surfaces to Your Map on page 373
■Changing Colors in a Themed Surface on page 991
■Theming Features on page 955
■Using Hillshading and Vertical Exaggeration on page 986
■Adding a Legend on page 916
■Defining Scale Ranges on page 543
990 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To theme a surface to analyze height, slope or aspect
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click a surface layer. Click the Style icon
in the toolstrip.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Adding Raster-Based
Surfaces to Your Map on page 373.
2In the Style Editor, under Scale Range, specify the scale threshold to use.
For more information, see Defining Scale Ranges on page 543.
3In the Band area, for Band 1, select Theme from the Style drop-down list.
4In the Theme dialog box, for Property, select the property to theme on:
Height, Slope, or Aspect.
5Specify the other theming option, for example the palette to use. For
more information, see Theme dialog box on page 1380.
6In the Theme dialog box, click OK.
7In the Style Editor, click Apply.
Quick Reference
Theme Surface Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a surface layer in Display Manager. You can theme on
height, slope, or aspect.
In Display Manager, right-click a surface layer. Select
Edit Display Style. In the Style Editor, in the Style list,
select Theme.
Task Pane
Theme dialog boxDialog Box
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface
After you have created a theme for a surface, you can change one or more
colors to make the image more realistic or to highlight a specific area or
characteristic of the surface to help with further analysis.
For example, you might want to change the color of the lowest elevation in
a canyon to blue to show that a river runs through it in the spring, or change
a group of low elevations to red to highlight an area susceptible to flooding.
Changing Colors in a Themed Surface | 991
Colors of lowest elevations changed to blue
For information about how to theme a surface, see Theming Surfaces to Analyze
Height, Slope, and Aspect on page 989.
To change colors in a themed surface
1In Display Manager on page 1748, click a surface layer. Click the Style icon
in the toolstrip.
For information about adding a surface layer, see Adding Raster-Based
Surfaces to Your Map on page 373.
2In the Style Editor, click Band Detail.
3Click the band to change.
For example, for a theme on height, you can select the first band to
change the color of the lowest elevation
4Click the down arrow in the band color cell, and choose a new color.
5Click All Bands.
6Click Apply.
Quick Reference
Theme Feature Layer in Display Manager
Creates a theme for a feature layer in Display Manager
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer. Select
Edit Style. In the Style Editor, click the New Theme
button.
Task Pane
Theme dialog boxDialog Box
992 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Finding and Selecting Data
You can find, select, and filter features and drawing objects in your maps, but
the methods you use for features and drawing objects are different.
To find and select features, you can use Filter or Search to Select in the Data
Table on page 1747, the Search interface, or a Feature Source Query.
To find and select drawing objects, you can use Quick Select, the Data View,
or drawing queries.
To find, filter, and query data
■To find and select features on page 993
■To create a buffer on page 1004
■To change your selection or merge options after receiving a buffer warning
on page 1005
■To find and query drawing objects on page 1006
Finding and Selecting Features
AutoCAD Map 3D provides a few different ways to find, filter, and select just
the features you need to work with.
To find and select features
■To find a subset of data in the Data Table on page 998
■To clear the filter and display all records on page 998
■To search to select data on page 998
■To search for and select features on page 1000
■To filter a feature layer on page 1003
Overview of Finding and Selecting Features
You can find and focus on a specific subset of features so you don't have to
manually review the entire set of data to find what you need.
Finding and Selecting Data | 993
Use Filter By in the Data Table to filter a feature class using criteria based on a column
of data.
Use Search when you need a more comprehensive way to find features in map.
994 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
A query is similar to Search. You define the set of criteria to find and bring in just the
data you want.
TIP Using a filter can help you improve performance when working with large
sets of feature data. You can filter data after you bring it into your map, or you
can use Add To Map With Query to apply a filter while you bring in the data.
See also:
■Editing Features using the Data Table on page 595
■Bringing in GIS Features on page ?
■Creating Expressions
Use these techniques to find and focus on a specific subset of features to work
with.
DescriptionMethod
Limit the number of records displayed in
the Data Table to those that match the
Filter (Data Table) on page 996
criteria you specify. You can zoom to, se-
lect, save, or print the filtered results in the
map.
For example, find the rows of Road data
in which Type = Major Road or Address =
GROUSE DR, and highlight those features
in the map.
Find data that meets conditions that you
specify. When AutoCAD Map 3D com-
Search to Select (Data Table) on page 996
pletes the search query, it highlights the
Finding and Selecting Features | 995
DescriptionMethod
data rows in the Data Table and the associ-
ated features on your map.
For example, search for all parcels with an
area greater than five acres.
Define attribute and spatial search criteria,
combine multiple criteria to create com-
Search (Edit menu) on page 1000
plex searches, and search across multiple
feature classes in your map. Features that
meet your Search criteria are selected in
the map.
To reduce the scope of a feature layer in
your map, you can edit the query that
brings in the data.
For example, if your map has an SDF layer
containing all the parcels in California and
Filter a Feature Layer (Data Connect or
Display Manager) on page 1002
you want only the parcels in San Francisco,
you can edit the query so that the layer
displays only the parcels you want.
Finding and Filtering Data in the Data Table
Use a filter in the Data Table to display only the features or records you want
to work with.
NOTE When viewing joined data, the Data Table filter function is disabled. You
cannot use a filter on joined data.
Start by identifying the column whose values determine whether a feature or
record will be included in the results. Then specify the value or string to look
for in that column.
The records that match your criteria are selected in the Data Table and
highlighted in your map.
For example, to find only the telephone poles with transformers, your filter
would specify PoleAttachments equal to Transformer; or to find only the
commercial districts in a city, you would specify LandUse equal to Commercial.
996 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Finding and selecting parcel features with STNAME = AIRPORT RD
Use Filter with Zoom Toto magnify the resulting features in the map.
To remove a filter, specify another one, or click Remove Filter in the Data
Table.
Searching to Select Data in the Data Table
Use Search To Select in the Data Table to find data that meets conditions that
you specify. For example, you can search for all parcels with an area greater
than five acres. When AutoCAD Map 3D completes the search, it highlights
the data rows in the Data Table and the associated features on your map.
Search supports more advanced criteria, and lets you combine multiple criteria
and search across multiple feature classes in your map.
See also:
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
■Zooming to a View Using the Data Table on page ?
■Exporting and Printing Data from the Data Table on page ?
■To find a subset of data in the Data Table on page 998
■To clear the filter and display all records on page 998
Finding and Selecting Features | 997
■To search to select data on page 998
To find a subset of data in the Data Table
1In Display Manager, select the feature layer to search.
For information about creating a new feature layer, see Bringing in GIS
Features on page 265.
2Click .
3In the Data Table, change the data source in the Data list if necessary.
4For Filter By, select the column to search, for example, City or Owner
Name.
5The label changes to show your column selection.
6In the Filter By box, type the value to look for.
For example, to find all parcels in the city of Bonn, type BONN. The string
you type must exactly match the data in the column to be included in
the results.
7To zoom to the features in your map, click Auto-Zoom.
8Click Apply Filter .
9The features or records that match your criteria are displayed in the Data
Table.
10 Select a row in the Data Table to see that feature highlighted in your map.
If Auto-Zoom is on, you will zoom to the selected features.
To clear the filter and display all records
1In the Data Table, click Clear Filter , or create a different filter.
To search to select data
1Select the layer in Display Manager that contains the feature class data
you want to view.
998 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2Click on the toolstrip to open the Data Table window.
3Click Search to Select on the lower bar of the Data Table.
4Create an expression for your search. You can create the following types
of expressions:
■Property Evaluation expressions compare the value of a property to
a value you specify. For example, you can find parcels with an area
greater than a value you specify, or streets with a particular number
of lanes.
■Location Conditions find data based on its location in the map. For
example, you can draw a circle to find all parcels within that circle.
You can save your expression for reuse.
5To create a complex property evaluation, insert an AND or OR operator,
and then insert another property, operator, and value combination.
Every operator must be preceded by a property. For example, to find
parcels whose last purchase date is after 1990 and before 2005, the
expression must look like this:
Purchase_Date > 1990 AND Purchase_Date < 2005
6Validate your expression.
7To reuse your expression in the future, from the Options list in the Data
Table, select Save Expression.
8When the expression is complete and valid, click OK.
When AutoCAD Map 3D has completed the search, it highlights both
the selected rows in the Data Table and the associated features on your
map.
Quick Reference
MAPDATATABLE
Allows you to view, edit, and filter feature data
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Menu
Finding and Selecting Features | 999
Table
Icon
MAPDATATABLECommand Line
In Map Explorer or Display Manager, click the Table
button
Task Pane
Data Table Dialog BoxDialog Box
Searching For and Selecting Features
Use the Search command in AutoCAD Map 3D to find and select features in
your map based on their location or properties.
A search specifies a set of conditions (also referred to as criteria or rules) that
must be true for a feature to be found and selected. A Search can have one or
more sets of conditions. You can search the entire map (for example, across
multiple feature classes).
For example, you can find just the roads in Shanghai within a circular area
you specify. To do this, you specify criteria that limits the results to road
features whose City field is "Shanghai" and within the a circle you define.
NOTE To find data in a single feature class based on a single property, you can
also search to select in the Data Table.
See also:
■Finding and Filtering Data in the Data Table on page 996
■Overview of Finding and Selecting Features on page 993
■Overview of Creating Expressions
To search for and select features
1Make sure you are connected to the feature sources for the feature layers
you are searching.
For more information, see Bringing in GIS Features on page 265.
2Click Edit menu ➤ Search.
3In the Search dialog box, click Add Layer to select the layers to search.
1000 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4if you are creating a location condition, click Zoom Extents to zoom the
drawing window to the extents of the selected feature classes.
5Create an expression for your search. You can create the following types
of expressions:
■Property Evaluation expressions compare the value of a property to
a value you specify. For example, you can find parcels with an area
greater than a value you specify, or streets with a particular number
of lanes.
■Location Conditions find data based on its location in the map. For
example, you can draw a circle to find all parcels within that circle.
You can save your expression for reuse.
6To create a complex property evaluation, insert an AND or OR operator,
and then insert another property, operator, and value combination.
Every operator must be preceded by a property. For example, to find
parcels whose last purchase date is after 1990 and before 2005, the
expression must look like this:
Purchase_Date > 1990 AND Purchase_Date < 2005
7Validate your expression.
8To reuse your expression in the future, from the Options list in the Data
Table, select Save Expression.
9When the expression is complete and valid, click OK.
When AutoCAD Map 3D has completed the search, it highlights both
the selected rows in the Data Table and the associated features on your
map.
Quick Reference
MAPSEARCH
Searches and selects features in your map based on the location and attribute
criteria you specify
Click Edit ➤ Search.
Menu
Finding and Selecting Features | 1001
Search
Icon
MAPSEARCHCommand Line
In Display Manager, click Tools ➤ Search
Task Pane
Feature Source Query dialog boxDialog Box
Filtering a Feature Layer
Filter a feature source layer so that only some of the features appear in your
map.
To filter the layer, define a query condition or a set of conditions that specify
which features you want. The procedure is similar to performing a search.
Edit the layer query so that only some features appear in your map
TIP Using the filter can help you improve performance when working with large
sets of feature data. You can filter data after you bring it into your map, or you
can use the Add To Map With Query option while bringing it in and then use edit
query to apply a filter.
See also:
■Filtering Features When You Add Them to a Map on page 270
■Searching For and Selecting Features on page 1000
■Bringing in GIS Features on page ?
1002 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To filter a feature layer
1Make sure you are connected to the feature source for the feature layer.
For more information, see Bringing in GIS Features on page 265.
2In the Display Manager, right-click the layer and click Query To Filter
Data.
3If you are creating a location condition, click Zoom Extents to zoom the
drawing window to the extents of the selected feature class.
4Create an expression for your search. You can create the following types
of expressions:
■Property Evaluation expressions compare the value of a property to
a value you specify. For example, you can find parcels with an area
greater than a value you specify, or streets with a particular number
of lanes.
■Location Conditions find data based on its location in the map. For
example, you can draw a circle to find all parcels within that circle.
You can save your expression for reuse.
5To create a complex property evaluation, insert an AND or OR operator,
and then insert another property, operator, and value combination.
Every operator must be preceded by a property. For example, to find
parcels whose last purchase date is after 1990 and before 2005, the
expression must look like this:
Purchase_Date > 1990 AND Purchase_Date < 2005
6Validate your expression.
7To reuse your expression in the future, from the Options list in the Data
Table, select Save Expression.
8When the expression is complete and valid, click OK.
When AutoCAD Map 3D has completed the search, it highlights both
the selected rows in the Data Table and the associated features on your
map.
Finding and Selecting Features | 1003
Buffering Features in Your Map
You can create buffers around geospatial features in your map. This method
does not work for drawing objects, but you can use drawing topologies to
create buffers for drawing objects.
When you create a buffer, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a polygon around the
feature or features you have selected at the distance you specify. You can
output the buffer to a new layer in your map or append it to an existing buffer
layer. If you are buffering multiple features, you can specify whether AutoCAD
Map 3D should merge all the buffers into a single buffer, merge only the
overlapping buffers, or leave the buffers separate. AutoCAD Map 3D saves
buffer data in SDF format.
You can use buffers to select features within the specified buffer distance of
other features. For example, if you created a one-mile buffer around a
construction zone, you could use this buffer to find all parcels within one
mile of the construction area.
Buffer Warnings
If you select a very large number of features to buffer, AutoCAD Map 3D will
display a warning and give you the option of reducing the number of features
in your selection. AutoCAD Map 3D will also display this warning if you have
selected features with very complex geometry, or if you have selected merge
options for too many features or features with complex geometry.
NOTE When creating buffers around objects with complicated geometries, such
as islands, the buffer might not display correctly. If you use the merge option to
merge the buffers for all the geometries of a feature, it will display correctly.
See also:
■Buffering a Topology on page 1111
To create a buffer
1Click Analyze menu ➤ Buffer. The Buffer Feature dialog box appears.
2If you have not already selected the feature or features to buffer, click
Select Features, then click the features to buffer on your map.
1004 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
3To set the buffer distance, enter a value , or click to enter a
distance interactively on your map. Use the default measurement units
(the ones specified by the coordinate system assigned to your map), or
choose a different unit.
4For Output To Layer, specify the name of the Display Manager layer that
will contain the buffer. If you have created other buffers in this map, you
can choose one of their layers from the list.
5Select a location for the buffer’s associated SDF file. By default, the buffer
file is saved in the current drawing’s saved location.
6Select a Merge Results option:
■No Merging: Overlapping buffers are not merged. The number of
resulting buffers is equal to the number of features being buffered.
■Merge All Buffers: All overlapping buffers are merged into a single
buffer and then combined into a single polygon.
■Merge Overlapping Buffers: Only the overlapping buffers are merged.
7Click OK.
You can style the buffer as you would any other Display Manager layer.
All buffers you append to this buffer layer will use the same style. For
more information on styling features, see Styling Features on page 540.
To change your selection or merge options after receiving a buffer warning
1In the Buffer Warning dialog box, click Change.
If you click Proceed instead of Change, it may take a very long time to
create the buffer.
2In the Buffer Feature dialog box, do one or both of the following:
■Click Select Features, then click the features to buffer on your map.
■Select a new Merge Results option.
3Click OK.
Buffering Features in Your Map | 1005
Quick Reference
MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE
Creates a buffer zone around features in your map
Click Analyze ➤ Buffer.
Menu
MAPFDOBUFFERCREATECommand Line
Buffer Features dialog boxDialog Box
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects
AutoCAD Map 3D provides a few different ways to find, filter, and select just
the drawing objects you need to work with.
To find and query drawing objects
■To select drawing objects using Quick Select on page 1007
■To find records in a database linked to drawing objects on page 1009
■To query objects from attached drawings on page 1023
Overview of Finding and Querying Drawing
Objects
Use Quick Select, Data View, and queries to find drawing objects that match
a set of criteria. These methods work for drawwing objects only. For geospatial
features, see Finding and Selecting Features on page 993.
Use these methods to find and select drawing objects.
DescriptionMethod
Select drawing objects based on their ob-
ject properties (such as color), object types,
Quick Select on page 1007
or object classification, or to exclude
drawing objects from a selection set.
For example, you can select all of the red
road objects in a drawing without selecting
1006 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
DescriptionMethod
any other object, or you can select all ob-
jects except the red roads.
Find records in an attached database. If
database records are linked to objects in a
Data View on page 1008
drawing, you can highlight records linked
to objects you select.
Use queries to retrieve drawing objects and
transform them if needed.
Queries on page 1023
Using Quick Select to Select Drawing Objects
You can use Quick Select (QSELECT) to select drawing objects based on their
object properties (such as color), object types, or object classification. You can
also use Quick Select to exclude drawing objects from a selection set.
For example, you can select all of the red road objects in a drawing without
selecting any other object, or you can select all objects except the red roads.
When using Quick Select to select drawing objects based on color, linetype,
or lineweight, first consider whether these properties are set to BYLAYER in
the AutoCAD layer definition. For example, an object may appear red because
its color is set to BYLAYER and the layer color is red.
See also:
■Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing Objects on page 1008
■Querying Objects from Attached Drawings on page 1023
For more information about AutoCAD layer definitions, please refer to the
AutoCAD Help.
To select drawing objects using Quick Select
1Verify that you have drawing objects in your map.
The following example illustrates how to use Quick Select to select the
red objects in a drawing.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1007
Enter the QSELECT command.
2In the Quick Select dialog box, under Apply To, select Entire Drawing.
3Under Object Type, select Multiple.
4Under Properties, select Color.
5Under Operator, select Equals.
6Under Value, select Red.
7Under How to Apply, select Include in New Selection Set.
8Click OK.
All red objects in the drawing are selected and the Quick Select dialog
box closes. Objects that are set to BYLAYER and are red because the layer
color is red are not included in the selection set.
For more information about using Quick Select to select or exclude
drawing objects, please refer to the AutoCAD Help.
Finding Records in a Database Linked to Drawing
Objects
sing the Data View, you can find records in an attached database. If database
records are linked to objects in a drawing, you can highlight records linked
to objects you select.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
■Overview of Finding Records in a Linked Database on page 1009
■Finding a Database Record on page 1011
■Highlighting Drawing Objects Linked to a Database Record on page 1013
■Highlighting Records Linked to a Selected Object on page 1016
■Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries) on
page 1018
■Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location on page 1021
You can also bring in drawing data based on attached data and find all drawing
objects containing specific SQL information.
1008 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
See also:
■Overview of Finding and Querying Drawing Objects on page 1006
■Bringing In Drawing Objects Based on Attached Data on page 308
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information on page
1035
■Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page 1044
■Finding and Selecting Features on page 993
NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects. For information about
working with feature data, see Finding and Selecting Features on page 993.
To find records in a database linked to drawing objects
■To find a database record in the Data View on page 1012
■To highlight drawing objects linked to a database record on page 1014
■To set other Data View highlighting options on page 1015
■To highlight records linked to drawing objects on page 1017
■To set the record highlight color on page 1017
■To use a SQL filter in the Data View on page 1019
■To use a spatial filter in the Data View on page 1022
Overview of Finding Records in a Linked Database
After you create a link between a record in the database table and an object
in a drawing, you can use the information in the database table to help you
analyze, select, and display objects in your drawing. For example, you can use
data from a linked database table to find all pipes installed before 1965.
These procedures apply only to drawing objects. You can join external data
to geospatial features and use the Data Table to search that data.
See also:
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Viewing External Data Linked to Drawing Objects on page 938
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page 1044
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1009
■Joining Data to GIS Features on page 439
Use database links to do the following:
Use this method...To do this...
Use Data View to search the linked data-
base. on page ?
Find a database record
Use Data View to highlight the objects. on
page 1014
Highlight objects in the drawing that are
linked to selected records in the database
table.
Use Data View to highlight the records. on
page 1017
See which records are linked to selected
objects.
Use a SQL filter in Data View. on page 1019Display only records whose data matches
the conditions you specify.
Use a spatial filter in Data View. on page
1022
Display only records that are linked to
drawing objects you select in the drawing.
Print the current contents of Data View.
on page ?
Print linked data.
NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects.
See also:
■Highlighting Features Using the Data Table on page 930
Quick Reference
(Data View) AutoHighlight
When records are selected, automatically highlights objects in the drawing
linked to the records
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Auto Highlight
Menu
1010 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
(Data View) AutoZoom
When records are selected or deselected, automatically adjusts the zoom so
that the objects linked to the selected records fill the percent of the screen
specified by the Zoom Scale command
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Auto Zoom
Menu
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
In the Data View:Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Menu
Link Records to Objects
Icon
(Data View) Zoom Scale
Specifies the percent of the drawing display that the selected objects will
occupy
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Zoom Scale
Menu
Zoom Scale dialog boxDialog Box
Finding a Database Record
Using the Data View, you can search for text strings in a database table.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1011
The entered text must match the record exactly.
To use Replace, the table must be open in Edit mode and AutoCommit must
be turned off.
NOTE Data View is for drawing objects. Use Data Table for geospatial feature
data.
See also:
■Opening a Database Table on page 865
■Editing a Database on page 867
■Changing the Look of the Data View on page 870
■Finding and Selecting Features on page 993
To find a database record in the Data View
1Open a database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database Table
on page 865.
1012 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2Position the cursor in the column you want to search.
3Do one of the following:
■In the Data View, click Edit menu ➤ Find.
■In the Data View, click Edit menu ➤ Replace.
4In the dialog box, enter the characters to find. For Replace, enter the
replacement text.
5For Find, click Find Next.
For Replace, click Replace to replace this instance and find the next
instance. Click Replace All to replace all instances automatically.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Find
Finds specified text
In the Data View:Edit ➤ Find
Menu
Highlighting Drawing Objects Linked to a Database
Record
After you link database records to objects in a drawing, you can highlight
objects in the drawing that are linked to selected records in the database table.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1013
Highlight parcels that are linked to selected records in a database table.
You can set the following options:
■Automatically highlight objects linked to the records you select
■Automatically zoom in on highlighted objects
■Automatically create a selection set of highlighted objects
NOTE Once you set AutoZoom, Zoom Scale, and AutoHighlight, these settings
stay in effect for every drawing until you change them.
See also:
■Opening a Database Table on page 865
■Editing a Database on page 867
■Changing the Look of the Data View on page 870
■Finding and Selecting Features on page 993
To highlight drawing objects linked to a database record
1Open a linked database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database
Table on page 865.
1014 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2In the Data View window, select a record.
3In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Objects.
NOTE This command is available only if you selected a link template for the
table.
Objects that are linked to the selected record are highlighted.
To clear the highlighting, enter regen on the Command line.
To set other Data View highlighting options
■Dynamically highlight linked objects – In the Data View, click Highlight
menu ➤ AutoHighlight. When you select a record in the table, AutoCAD
Map 3D automatically highlights linked objects.
■Dynamically zoom to linked objects – Make sure AutoHighlight is on. In
the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ AutoZoom. When you select a
record in the table, AutoCAD Map 3D zooms to linked objects. You can
change the zoom scale so that the linked objects take up more or less of
the screen. In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Zoom Scaleand enter
a value.
■Dynamically add highlighted objects to the selection set – In the Data
View, click Highlight menu ➤ AutoSelect.
Quick Reference
(Data View) AutoHighlight
When records are selected, automatically highlights objects in the drawing
linked to the records
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Auto Highlight
Menu
(Data View) AutoZoom
When records are selected or deselected, automatically adjusts the zoom so
that the objects linked to the selected records fill the percent of the screen
specified by the Zoom Scale command
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Auto Zoom
Menu
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1015
(Data View) Link Records to Objects
Links the selected records to objects in your drawing
In the Data View:Links ➤ Link Records To Objects
Menu
Link Records to Objects
Icon
(Data View) Zoom Scale
Specifies the percent of the drawing display that the selected objects will
occupy
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Zoom Scale
Menu
Zoom Scale dialog boxDialog Box
Highlighting Records Linked to a Selected Object
If objects in a drawing are linked to records in a database table, you can use
the Data View to see which records are linked to selected objects.
When you select an object in the drawing, linked records are highlighted in the Data
View.
See also:
■Opening a Database Table on page 865
■Editing a Database on page 867
■Changing the Look of the Data View on page 870
1016 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries) on
page 1018
■Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location on page 1021
■Finding and Selecting Features on page 993
To highlight records linked to drawing objects
1Open a linked database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database
Table on page 865.
2In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Records ➤ Select
Object.
3Select the objects in your drawing. Press Enter.
4Use the highlighted records toolbar to move to the first, previous, next,
or last highlighted record.
5Optionally, show only highlighted records. In the Data View, click
Highlight menu ➤ Show Highlighted Records Only.
TIP To improve performance, create a filter on page 1019 to display only relevant
records.
To clear the highlighting, click on t he highlight toolbar.
To set the record highlight color
1Do one of the following:
■In the Data View, click Highlight menu ➤ Highlight Color.
■In the status bar, double-click the highlight color.
2In the Select Color dialog box, specify a color. Click OK.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Clear Highlight
Removes the highlighting from records in the table
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1017
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Highlight
Records ➤ Clear Highlight
Menu
Clear Highlight
Icon
(Data View) Highlight Color
Selects the color to use to highlight records with the Highlight Records
command
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Highlight Color
Menu
(Data View) Highlight Records
Highlights records that match objects you select in the drawing
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Highlight
Records ➤ Select Objects
Menu
Highlight Records
Icon
(Data View) Show Highlighted Records Only
Displays only the currently highlighted records
In the Data View:Highlight ➤ Show Highlighted
Records Only
Menu
Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record
Data (SQL Queries)
Use a SQL filter in the Data View to display only records whose data matches
the conditions you specify. For example, view only records with a specific
street name or records where the property value is over a specific amount.
This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Filters can improve performance in scrolling through records or in highlighting
records.
1018 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Use a SQL filter to view only records whose data matches specified conditions.
NOTE You can also filter records based on the location of linked objects. If both
a SQL filter and a spatial filter are defined, the Data View displays only those records
that match both filters.
You can set an option to determine how many filters AutoCAD Map 3D stores.
See also:
■Opening a Database Table on page 865
■Editing a Database on page 867
■Setting Data View Options on page 214
■Changing the Look of the Data View on page 870
■Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location on page 1021
To use a SQL filter in the Data View
1Open a database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database Table
on page 865.
2In the Data View, clickRecords ➤ menu SQL Filter.
3In the Table Filter dialog box on page 1429, define the condition for the
filter.
To select from a list of conditions previously defined for this table, click
History and select the condition.
To define a new condition:
■Under Where Condition, select the column to use as a filter.
■Select an operator.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1019
To use wild-card characters, select the LIKE operator. For example, to
list only those streets that begin with the letter C, select the LIKE
operator and enter C% in the Value box. Wild-card characters can be
used only with string values. For information on wild-card characters,
refer to the documentation for your database system software.
■Enter a value or click… to select from the list of possible values.
■After setting your criteria, click Add.
The conditions you set appear in the SQL Filter list.
4To add additional conditions, select AND or OR. Create and add the new
condition.
5Click OK.
The Data View displays only those records that match the filter.
You can clear all filters. In the Data View, click Records menu ➤ Clear Filter.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Clear Filter
Eliminates all current filters and requeries the database
In the Data View:Records ➤ Clear Filter
Menu
Clear Filter
Icon
(Data View) SQL Filter
Displays only records that match conditions you specify
In the Data View:Records ➤ SQL Filter
Menu
SQL Filter
Icon
Table Filter dialog boxDialog Box
1020 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Finding Data View Records Based on Object
Location
Use a spatial filter to display only records that are linked to drawing objects
you select in the drawing.
When you apply a spatial filter, the Data View displays only those records that are
linked to selected objects in the drawing.
NOTE You can also filter records based on the data in the record. If both a SQL
filter and a spatial filter are defined, the Data View displays only those records that
match both filters.
See also:
■Opening a Database Table on page 865
■Editing a Database on page 867
■Setting Data View Options on page 214
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1021
■Changing the Look of the Data View on page 870
■Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries) on
page 1018
NOTE The following procedure applies only to drawing objects. For information
about feature data, see Finding and Selecting Features on page 993. In addition,
the Spatial Filter command is available only if you have a selected a link template
for the table. See Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451.
To use a spatial filter in the Data View
1Open a database table in the Data View. See Opening a Database Table
on page 865.
2Do one of the following:
■In the Data View, click Records menu ➤ Spatial Filter.
■From the toolbar, click .
3Select objects.
4Click OK.
The Data View displays only those records that are linked to the selected
objects.
To clear all filters in the Data View – In the Data View, click Records
menu ➤ Clear Filter.
See also:
■To create a link template on page 454
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries) on
page 1018
Quick Reference
(Data View) Clear Filter
1022 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Eliminates all current filters and requeries the database
In the Data View:Records ➤ Clear Filter
Menu
Clear Filter
Icon
(Data View) Spatial Filter
Displays only records attached to objects that you select
In the Data View:Records ➤ Spatial Filter
Menu
Spatial Filter
Icon
Querying Objects from Attached Drawings
To query objects from attached drawings
■To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings on page
1024
■To retrieve drawing objects based on their location on page 1027
■To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties on page 1030
■To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data on page 1033
■To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data on page 1038
■To combine query conditions in drawing queries on page 1041
■To edit a drawing query condition on page 1043
■To modify objects as they are retrieved by a query on page 1044
■To execute a drawing query on page 1071
■To improve performance on page 1076
■To set options for drawing queries on page 1084
Overview of Queries
Use queries to retrieve the drawing objects you need from attached drawings.
When you define a query, you specify the criteria for selecting objects in one
or more drawings. You can use four types of criteria: location, property, data,
and SQL. A query searches the active attached drawings, selects the objects
that match the conditions you specify, and copies the objects to the current
drawing.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1023
Only objects in the Model Tab (model space) are queried. Objects from the
Layout Tab (paper space) are ignored.
You can view and edit the objects, then save them to a new drawing or save
them back to their original drawing.
Markup Objects
Because markup objects are not stored in the drawing file, you cannot query
these objects. To copy them from an attached drawing to the current drawing,
open the other drawing directly and copy the markup objects. Then paste
them into the current drawing.
See also:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Activating a Drawing on page 148
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering the Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
■Editing and Saving Objects in Attached Drawings on page 611
To create a query to retrieve information from attached drawings
1Open a drawing.
2In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click the
Drawings folder. Click Define/Modify Drawing Set.
3Make sure the drawings you want to query are attached and active.
4In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
5To zoom to the extents of all active drawings, click Zoom Ext in the
Define Query dialog box.
6In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, select a Query Type to define
a condition for your query based on:
■Location on page 1027— such as inside a window you define.
■Property on page 1030— such as color, layer, or elevation.
1024 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Data on page 1033— information stored with the object
■SQL on page 1038— information stored in external databases
7To add conditions on page 1041, choose And or Or, and choose a query
type.
To group conditions, select the first and last condition in the group. Click
Group. Conditions inside the parentheses are evaluated first.
8If you want, specify how to alter the properties of the objects retrieved
by the query on page ?.
9Select a Query Mode to specify how to view the objects on page 1071.
10 If you plan to use the query again, save the query on page 163.
11 Click Execute Query.
You can view and edit the objects, then save them to a new file or save them
back to their original file.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location
Location conditions retrieve drawing objects from a specified location in the
drawings.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1025
Example: Find all roads within 100 meters of a power line or all parcels within
a specific section of the drawing.
In the following illustrations, the objects that are retrieved are highlighted.
Location Types
Bufferfence
Circle
Fence
Point
1026 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Location Types
Polygon
Window
All
See also:
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific Property on page 1029
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information on page
1035
■Combining Drawing Query Conditions on page 1040
To retrieve drawing objects based on their location
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1027
2To zoom to the extents of all active drawings, click Zoom Ext.
3Click Location.
4In the Location Condition dialog box on page 1584, select a boundary and
a selection type.
5Click Define. Specify the boundary.
6In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
7Click Execute Query.
See also:
■Altering the Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
1028 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific
Property
Property conditions retrieve drawing objects based on AutoCAD Map 3D object
properties such as color, elevation, layer, or linetype
Example: Search for objects on a given layer or of a specified color.
You can use more than one object property in a query, but you must define
them one condition at a time.
Object Properties vs. Layer Properties
Some properties, such as Color or Linetype, are often specified BYLAYER, that
is, the attribute is set based on the value of the layer rather than the object
itself. These objects are not retrieved if you specify a particular color, for
instance, in the property query. Instead, you must specify BYLAYER in the
property query to retrieve these objects.
For example, querying objects with a DASHED linetype retrieves only objects
that have that explicit property, not objects that have that property because
they reside on a layer with a DASHED linetype.
If the current drawing does not have a matching layer, queried objects will
be displayed according to the characteristics of the layer in the attached
drawing. If the active drawing has a matching layer, the queried objects will
be displayed according to the characteristics of the layer in the current drawing.
Defining Numeric Range Property Queries
To define a numeric range property condition, combine condition statements
that define the upper and lower limit of the range. For example, to retrieve
objects with an elevation between 21.0 and 47.0, use the following condition
statements:
Property: ELEVATION > 21
AND Property: ELEVATION < 47
Notes
■If you query against Object Type and IMAGE is not listed even though you
have a raster image in an attached drawing, exit the query dialog boxes.
Go to the Map 3D for Drawings workspace on page 1766.Click Setup menu
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1029
➤ Image Management. In the Image Manager dialog box, click OK. Then
define the query again.
■If the property query you define uses text values, you can set an option to
specify case-sensitive text. See Setting Query Options (DWG) on page 220.
See also:
■Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location on page 1025
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information on page
1035
■Combining Drawing Query Conditions on page 1040
To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Click Property.
3In the Property Condition dialog box on page 1589, select a property.
4Select an operator.
5Enter a value for the property.
To select from a list of available values, click Values. For example, if you
select the property "layer," clicking Values displays a list of all layers in
the active attached drawings.
You can use wild-card characters to enter values for the following
properties: Block Name, Color, Text Style, Object Type, Group, Layer,
Object Class, Linetype, and Plotstyle.
6Click OK.
7In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
8Click Execute Query.
See also:
■Altering the Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Executing Queries on page ?
1030 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■To save a query on page 164
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific
Data
Data conditions retrieve drawing objects based on nongraphic information
associated with the objects.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1031
If you store pipe diameter information in an object data table, you can use a data
condition to retrieve pipe objects based on the diameter information attached to each
pipe object. In this case, all pipes with a diameter of 8 or greater are retrieved. Move
your cursor over the image to see the results.
NOTE You cannot retrieve objects based on constant block attributes.
1032 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Keep the following in mind:
■You must define and attach the data to objects before you can use a data
condition.
■The Database Link option tests the link data stored on the object, not the
data in the database table. You can retrieve objects based on data in the
linked database table on page 1035.
See also:
■Editing Object Data on page ?
■Using External Databases on page ?
■Using Object Classification on page ?
■Creating a SQL condition on page 1035
■Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location on page 1025
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information on page
1035
■Combining Drawing Query Conditions on page 1040
To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Click Data.
3In the Data Condition dialog box on page 1570, select the type of data to
query.
4Specify the specific data to query.
■For object class, select the object class of the objects to retrieve. Then,
under Properties, select the specific properties to query.
■For object data, select the table and field to query.
Note that if two attached drawings have a table with the same name,
AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first
drawing you activate.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1033
■For database link data, select the link template associated with the
objects you want to retrieve. Under Key Columns, select the key
column to query.
Because a query retrieves objects from attached drawings, only link
templates defined in your attached drawing are displayed in the list.
■For block attributes, select the block to query. Under Attribute Tags,
select the attribute tag to query, or select * from the Blocks list to see
a list of all the attribute tags of all the blocks in the active drawing.
5Specify the condition that the data must match by selecting an operator
and entering a value in the Value field.
For example, to find all values greater than 8, select the > operator and
enter 8 in the Value field.
For information on using wild cards, see Wildcard Characters on page
1278.
6Click OK.
7In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
8Click Execute Query.
See also:
■Altering the Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
1034 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific
SQL Information
A SQL condition checks information in an external database and retrieves
drawing objects that are linked to records that match the condition.
Example: If a database table stores information on supplier, owner, and cost
of furniture in a set of drawings, you can define a query to show all chairs
purchased from a specific supplier.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1035
1036 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Use a query with a SQL condition to retrieve objects based on the value in a linked
data base record. In this example, all pads with a phase type of 'C' are retrieved. Move
your cursor over the image to see the results.
NOTE If you are retrieving objects from attached drawings, you must have the
same data base attached in both the attached drawing and the current drawing.
You must link SQL data to objects before you can use a SQL query. For more
information about connecting to external databases and linking records to
objects in your drawings, see Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page
184 and Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451.
Specifying a Value
The operator and the value define the condition that the value in the table
must match. For example, if you select the operator < (less than) and enter a
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1037
value of 5, the condition retrieves all objects linked to records in which the
value in the table is less than five.
■The value must match the data type of the column. For example, if the
column requires a name, enter a text string.
■Enclose string values in single quotes. If the string contains a single
quotation mark, precede the single quotation mark with a single quotation
mark.
■For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00', for example
"Date" > TIMESTAMP`1990-05-30 11:45:00'
Troubleshooting
Because a SQL condition relies on the ability to connect to a data source, the
condition will not work if any part of the connection is broken:
■The query must specify a valid link template.
■The data source must be attached and connected.
■The data source must be in the same directory as when you connected to
it. (You must not have moved it after connecting.)
■Links must exist between drawing objects and records in the specified data
source.
See also:
■Setting Up Data Sources for Drawings on page 184
■Overview of Linking Database Records to Objects on page 451
■Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location on page 1025
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific Property on page 1029
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Combining Drawing Query Conditions on page 1040
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data
1Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
1038 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
2In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
3Click SQL.
4In the SQL Link Condition dialog box on page 1601, select the link template
for the table you want to search.
If you are querying attached drawings, the link template list includes
only link templates defined in the active attached drawings.
5Create a SQL condition by selecting a column, an operator, and a value.
To type the condition, click Type Condition.
To reuse a condition you defined previously, click History. Select the
condition.
6Click Add Condition to add the condition to the Current SQL Condition
list.
7To add more conditions, select And or Or and create another condition.
8When you finish building the SQL condition, click OK.
9In the Define Query dialog box, select a query mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
See also:
■Altering the Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1039
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Combining Drawing Query Conditions
You can combine query conditions when creating a query to retrieve drawing
objects.
Example: Combine a property condition with a location condition to find all
utility poles within 100 meters of a road.
When you combine conditions, use Or to specify the union of the conditions,
use And to specify the intersection of the condition, use Not to exclude specific
objects from the query.
■And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
AND Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds only blue objects on the First Floor layer.
■Or — Finds objects if either condition is true. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
OR Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds all objects on the First Floor layer (of any color) and all blue objects
on any layer.
■And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the second
condition is false. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
AND NOT Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds objects on the First Floor layer that are any color except blue.
■Or Not — Finds objects if the first condition is true or the second condition
is false. For example,
Property: LAYER = First Floor
OR NOT Property: COLOR = BLUE
finds all objects on the First Floor layer (of any color) and all objects on
other layers that are not blue.
1040 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
You can use Not by itself to retrieve all except a specific set of objects. For
example, the query definition, Not Property: Layer = Furniture retrieves all
objects except those on the Furniture layer.
If you use more than two or three conditions, it is a good idea to group the
conditions. Conditions inside the group are evaluated first.
If conditions are not grouped, Not conditions are evaluated first, then And,
and last Or.
See also:
■Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location on page 1025
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific Property on page 1029
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information on page
1035
To combine query conditions in drawing queries
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Choose a Query Type to define a condition for your query on page 1024.
3In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, under Query Type, select a
joining operator:
■And — Finds objects only if both conditions are true.
■Or — Finds objects if either condition is true.
■And Not — Finds objects only if the first condition is true and the
second condition is false.
■Or Not — Finds objects if either the first condition is true or the second
condition is false.
4Choose a Query Type to define the next condition for your query.
5To group conditions, select the first and last condition in the group. Click
Group. Conditions inside the parentheses are evaluated first.
6Select a Query Mode.
7Click Execute Query.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1041
See also:
■Altering the Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Editing a Drawing Query Condition
When you edit a drawing query, you can modify a condition but you cannot
change its type (location, property, data, or SQL). If you want a different query
condition type, you must delete the existing condition and define a new one.
You can also change the joining operator (And, Or, Not) for a condition.
See also:
■Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location on page 1025
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific Property on page 1029
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information on page
1035
1042 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Altering the Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
To edit a drawing query condition
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2To modify a saved query, in the Define Query dialog box on page 1572,
click Load. Select the query.
3In the Define Query dialog box, under Current Query, select the query
condition you want to edit. Click Edit.
To change the joining operator, select the new joining operator before
you click Edit.
4Make any changes.
For example, if you select a location condition and click Edit, the Location
Condition dialog box appears. Click Show to view or change the boundary
of the location condition and press Enter to return to the Location
Condition dialog box.
5Click OK.
The revised query appears under Current Query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1043
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing
Objects
Use the property alteration feature to modify drawing objects as they are
retrieved by a query.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
NOTE These procedures apply only to drawing objects.
To modify objects as they are retrieved by a query
■To alter the properties of queried drawing objects on page 1045
■To alter all retrieved drawing objects in the same way on page 1048
■To alter retrieved objects based on their properties on page 1050
■To alter the properties of drawing objects based on their object data on
page 1052
■To alter retrieved drawing objects based on linked SQL data on page 1055
■To define an expression on page 1060
■To add text to retrieved drawing objects on page 1062
■To define the label point for a drawing object on page 1065
■To fill queried drawing objects with a hatch pattern on page 1067
■To change the block color in your current drawing on page 1068
■To modify a property alteration definition on page 1069
Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried
Drawing Objects
Use the property alteration feature to modify the properties of queried drawing
objects as they are queried into the current drawing.
1044 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
You can modify object properties such as color, linetype, or polyline width,
or add text.
Example: You have a set of city maps that show roads as black polylines of
the same width. You can plot a map for a contractor that shows the roads to
be repaired in red and roads to be inspected in blue. You can alter the width
of the polylines to show road widths. You can also add text to identify elements
of your drawing.
Property alteration involves the following three general steps:
■Define a query that retrieves the objects you want to alter.
■Create a property alteration definition that specifies how to alter the
retrieved objects.
■Execute the query in Draw mode. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview or Report mode queries.
AutoCAD Map 3D performs the query, applies the property alteration definition
to the queried objects, and displays the modified objects in the current
drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
■Altering All Drawing Objects in the Same Way on page 1047
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To alter the properties of queried drawing objects
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1045
2In the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, load or create a query.
3Under Options, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, select the property
to alter.
For example, to change the color of queried objects, select Color.
5In the Expression area, specify how to alter the property.
■To modify every queried object in the same way, select the new value
for the property.
For example, if you are altering the color of objects and you want to
change the color of all queried objects to red, click Values and select
Red.
■To modify each object using a value that is stored in an associated
data source, select the data source, such as Property on page 1050, Data
on page 1052, or SQL on page 1055, and specify the location of the data.
For example, if you store color values in an object data table, click
Data and select the table and column that contains the color values.
Use this method only if the data values stored in the data source
exactly specify the value to use. For example, to alter the color of
objects, the data source must specify a valid color value.
■To modify each object based on other properties or on associated data,
select the data source and define a range table on page 1057.
For example, if you store installation dates in an associated data source,
you can modify the color of objects based on their installation date.
To do this, first select the data source for the installation dates, then
define a range table that specifies which colors to use for each range
of installation dates.
■You can add text to queried objects on page 1062 or add a hatch pattern
to objects on page 1067.
6Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
7When you finish defining the property alteration, click OK.
8Make sure Alter Properties is selected when you execute the query.
9Under Query Mode, select Draw. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview mode or Report mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
1046 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
AutoCAD Map 3D performs the query, applies the property alteration definition
to the queried objects, and displays the altered objects in the current drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Altering All Drawing Objects in the Same Way
A simple property alteration modifies all queried drawing objects in the same
way.
Here are some examples of using simple property alterations:
■Add a hatch pattern to all water pipes older than fifty years.
■Find every property lot touching a line that represents the path of the new
highway. Outline the lots in red and add a hatch pattern.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1047
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To alter all retrieved drawing objects in the same way
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
3Under Options, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, select the property
to alter.
5In the Expression area, specify how to alter the property.
For example, to change the color of all queried object to red, enter either
red or 1 (the numerical equivalent of red), or click Values to select from
a list of colors.
6Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
7When you finish defining the property alteration, click OK.
8Make sure Alter Properties is selected when you execute the query.
9Under Query Mode, select Draw. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview mode or Report mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
1048 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Altering Properties Using Object Properties
You can define a property alteration that modifies a property of queried
drawing objects based on another property of the objects.
Example: If the layers in your attached drawings are named using numbers,
you could color objects based on the layer they are on. To do this, under Select
Property, select Color as the property to alter. In the expression area, click
Property and choose Layer as the new value to use for the color.
The property you specify in the Expression area must have a value that can
be used for the property you are altering. For example, if your layers are not
named using numbers but instead use names such as Roads and Pipes, the
example above would not work. (To create a modification based on these layer
names, use a range table, where you can specify that objects on the layer
named Roads be colored red, and objects on the layer named Pipes be colored
blue. For more information, see Creating a Range Table on page 1056.)
You can also modify a property based on the same property. For example, to
double the scale of selected objects, select Scale in the Select Property area as
the property to change. In the Expression area, select Scale as the property to
base the change on and multiply it by two. The expression would look like
this:
(* x.scale 2)
Dot Variables
■Use the .Dwgname dot variable to get the drawing name for a queried
object.
■Use the .Elevation dot variable to get the Z-values for objects.
■Use the .Height dot variable to get the text height for objects.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1049
For a full listing of the dot variables that you can use for property alteration,
see Dot Variables on page 1289.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To alter retrieved objects based on their properties
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
3In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, under Select
Property, select the property to change.
For example, if you have color-coded the objects in your drawing and
you now want to move objects to layers based on their color, you would
select Layer as the property to change.
5In the Expression area, click Properties and select the property that you
want to base the change on.
In this example, we want to move objects based on their current color,
so select Color.
Click OK to close the Select Property dialog box.
6Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property Alteration
list.
1050 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■To save a query on page 164
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Altering Object Properties Using Object Data
You can define a property alteration that modifies queried drawing objects
based on data that is stored on the objects, such as object data, attribute data,
or link data.
NOTE The value stored on the object must be a valid value for the property that
you are altering. For example, if you have selected to alter the property Color, the
value stored on the object must be a valid color name or number. If the values do
not match, use a range table on page 1057.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1051
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To alter the properties of drawing objects based on their object data
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
3In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, under Select
Property, select the property to change.
For example, if you store pipe diameters as object data, you can display
each pipe with a polyline width that matches the pipe diameter. In this
example, you would select Width as the property to change.
5In the Expression area, click Data.
6Select one of the following:
■Attribute — Select a block attribute tag. This will appear in the
Expression box as @BlockTagName.
■Database Link — Select a link template and key column. These will
appear in the Expression box as &KeyColumn@LinkTemplate.
■Object Data — Select an object data table and field. These will appear
in the Expression box as :FIELD@TABLENAME.
7Click OK.
8Click Add.
The property alteration definition is displayed in the Current Property
Alterations list. When you execute the query with Alter Properties selected,
AutoCAD Map 3D changes the selected property of queried objects based
on the value stored in the specified data field.
1052 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data
You can define a property alteration that modifies queried drawing objects
based on data stored in a linked database.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1053
Using Property Alteration, parcels not zoned for residential are displayed with a
magenta solid fill, based on an external database record value.
For example, you could retrieve a set of pipes and display each pipe in a color
based on the pipe's diameter.
For information on creating and using a link template, see Overview of Linking
Database Records to Objects on page 451.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
1054 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To alter retrieved drawing objects based on linked SQL data
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query that retrieves the
objects you want to alter.
3In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, under Select
Property, select the property to change.
For example, to modify the color of retrieved objects, select Color as the
property to change.
5Click SQL.
6Select a link template.
7Select the external database column whose value you want to use as a
value in the expression.
8Click OK.
The SQL column and link template are displayed under Expression in
the Set Property Alterations dialog box, preceded by an ampersand (&).
The link template is preceded by an at (@) symbol, for example,
&Diameter@PIPES.
You can also enter the SQL data variable directly in the Expression box.
9Click Add.
The property alteration definition is added to the Current Property
Alterations list.
When you execute the query with Alter Properties selected, AutoCAD
Map 3D changes the queried objects based on the value stored in the
external database.
For more information on connecting to and using external databases, see
External Databases (Object Data) on page 185.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1055
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Range Table
A range table specifies a range of actions to take depending on the value of
the specified data or property.
■You can change the color of drawing objects based on their elevation
■If you have a street map and use object data to store information about
pavement quality, you can move each street to a layer that corresponds
to the pavement quality.
■If you have a county map showing cities, and you use an external database
to store population data for each city, you can modify the block symbol
for each city based on its population size.
The procedure tab for this topic includes general instructions for creating a
range table and specific instructions for creating a sample range table.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
1056 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
■To create a range table on page 1057
■To create a sample range table on page 1058
To create a range table
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
3If you are creating a range table for a property alteration, in the Set
Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, select the property to alter.
4Move the cursor to the Expression box and specify the location of the
value on which to base the alteration.
Enter a dot variable, a field name, or other valid expression. For example,
to modify the color of an object based on its elevation, enter .ELEVATION
in the Expression box.
5Click Range.
6In the Define Range Table dialog box, click New to create a new range
table.
7Enter a name for the range table and click OK.
8In the Define Range Table dialog box, select an operator and a value for
the first condition.
These determines which objects fall in this range.
9Specify the return value for the first condition.
The return value specifies how to modify the selected property. For
example, if you are modifying the color of an object based on its elevation,
enter the color in the Return Value box.
NOTE In the Expression Value box and Return Value box, you can enter only
simple expressions. You cannot enter compound expressions.
10 Click Add to add the condition to the Current Range Table Definition.
When you run the property alteration, each object that has the specified
expression value (for example, elevation > 200) will be modified according
to the specified return value (for example, it will be colored red).
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1057
11 Specify the remaining conditions.
12 Click OK to close the Set Property Alteration dialog box.
13 Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
14 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
Creating an Example Range Table
The following example creates a range table for a property alteration. The
example range table colors lots larger than 6000 red and lots 6000 or smaller
blue.
To create a sample range table
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2In the Define Query dialog box, click Property Alteration.
3In the Property Alteration dialog box, select the property Color.
4In the Expression area, click Property and select Area. Click OK.
5Click Ranges.
6In the Define Range Table dialog box, click New.
7Enter the name Color and click OK to close the New Range Table dialog
box.
8Enter the description Color areas over 6000.
9In the Condition area, choose the <= operator.
10 In the Expression Value area, enter 6000.
11 In the Return Value area, enter Blue.
12 Click Add.
13 In the Condition area, choose the > operator.
14 In the Expression Value area, leave the 6000 alone.
15 In the Return Value area, enter Red.
16 Click Add.
17 Click OK to close the Define Range Table dialog box.
1058 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
18 Make sure the Color range table is selected.
19 Click Add to add the color property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
20 Click OK to close the Set Property Alteration dialog box.
21 Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
22 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Defining an Expression
Use Expression Evaluator on page 1283 when you want AutoCAD Map 3D to
evaluate drawing data from different sources, or to evaluate data that is
different for each object, such as object properties, block attributes, or object
data attached to the object.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1059
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To define an expression
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2In the Define Query dialog box, load or create a query.
3Under Options, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, select the property
to alter.
For example, to change the color of queried objects, select Color.
5In the Expression area, enter an expression on page 1283.
6Click Add to add the property alteration to the Current Property
Alterations list.
7When you finish defining the property alteration, click OK.
8Make sure Alter Properties is selected when you execute the query.
9Under Query Mode, select Draw. You cannot use property alteration in
Preview mode or Report mode.
10 Click Execute Query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
1060 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Adding Text to Queried Drawing Objects
You can add text to queried objects during the property alteration process.
Example: For all retrieved pipes, print the pipe type and diameter.
You can control the text, text height, insertion point, justification, text style,
layer, color, and rotation for each text object.
Selected pipes are labeled with their length.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1061
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To add text to retrieved drawing objects
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Create or load a query that will retrieve the objects you want to add text
to.
3In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, click Text.
5In the Define Text dialog box on page 1580, specify the text.
Enter text in the Text Value box, or specify the data to use for the text
by clicking Expression. For example, click Expression and select Layer to
display the name of the layer on each object found by the query.
6Set other text options, such as the size, location, color, layer, and rotation.
7Click OK to close the Define Text dialog box.
8Click OK to close the Property Alteration dialog box.
9Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
10 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
1062 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Modifying the Text Insertion Point for a Drawing
Object
The label point of a drawing object specifies the starting point for text added
during a query property alteration. The default label point is the centroid of
the object. You can redefine the label point using the Map 3D for
Drawingsworkspace on page 1766.Click Create menu ➤ Map Labelpoint
Location.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1063
Move the label point from its default location at the center of the arc to a different
location. Move your cursor over the image to see the results.
RELATED To use the label point, choose the .LABELPT dot variable in the Define
Text dialog box when you create the Property Alteration definition in the Define
Query dialog box.
See also:
■Adding Text to Queried Drawing Objects on page 1061
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
1064 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To define the label point for a drawing object
1Click Create menu ➤ Map Labelpoint Location.
2Select the object.
3Click the place on the object where you want the label point to be located.
To use this label point as the text insertion point during a property alteration
on page 1062, choose LABELPT as the insert point.
Quick Reference
ADETEXTLOC
Specifies a new label point for an object
Create menu ➤ Map Labelpoint Location
Menu
Map Labelpoint Location
Icon
ADETEXTLOCCommand Line
ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)Dialog Box
Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch
Pattern
You can specify a hatch pattern to fill closed polylines and circles during the
property alteration process. This applies only to drawing objects.
Example: Create a query that retrieves all land parcels valued above $450,000
and displays them with a distinguishing pattern.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1065
NOTE If you set the Create Associative Hatch Objects option on the Query tab
of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box, AutoCAD Map 3D creates associative
hatch objects on page 222.
Closed polylines retrieved by a query are filled with a magenta solid hatch pattern.
See also:
■Using Associative Hatch on page 222
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
1066 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To fill queried drawing objects with a hatch pattern
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Create or load a query that will retrieve the objects you want to fill.
3In the Define Query dialog box, click Alter Properties.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, click Hatch.
5In the Hatch Options dialog box on page 1582, enter a pattern name, click
Pattern to select a pattern from the set of hatch patterns, or click
Expression to select a data value specifies the hatch name (for example,
select a field in an object data table).
AutoCAD Map 3D displays the selected hatch pattern. ISO hatch patterns
are not displayed.
If you do not enter a pattern, AutoCAD Map 3D uses a fill that appears
solid.
6Enter a scale, rotation, layer, and color for the hatch pattern.
7Click OK to close the Hatch Options dialog box.
Closed polylines and circles that are retrieved during the query are filled
with the specified hatch pattern.
8Click OK to close the Property Alteration dialog box.
9Make sure Alter Properties is selected.
10 Under Query Mode, select Draw.
11 Click Execute Query to retrieve the objects and alter them.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1067
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Changing the Color of Blocks
When you use the Color option of the Set Property Alterations dialog box,
the colors of objects change to the color you specify. However, if the queried
objects include blocks whose color is set to BYLAYER, the objects in the block
retain their original color. To have them use the color you specify, change the
block color to BYBLOCK.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Modifying a Property Alteration Definition on page 1069
To change the block color in your current drawing
1Use the INSERT command to add another instance of the block.
2Explode the new block.
3On the Command line, enter chprop
Select objects: Select the objects in the exploded block
Enter property to change (Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness)?
C
Enter new color <varies>: BYBLOCK
Enter property to change (Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness)?
Press Enter
1068 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
4Redefine the block with the BLOCK command and select the objects in
the exploded block.
This procedure redefines all instances of the block. The blocks then show the
color you defined in the Set Property Alterations dialog box.
Quick Reference
CHPROP
Changes the color, layer, linetype, linetype scale factor, lineweight, thickness,
and plot style of an object
CHPROPCommand Line
Modifying a Property Alteration Definition
After you've run a query, you may decide to modify a property alteration
definition. Or you may want to create a new property alteration based on an
existing query.
After you modify the definition, you can save the changes to the current query,
or you can save the changes to a new query.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Executing Queries on page ?
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
■Altering Object Properties Using Object Data on page 1051
■Altering Object Properties Using Linked Data on page 1053
■Filling Queried Drawing Objects with a Hatch Pattern on page 1065
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
To modify a property alteration definition
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1069
2In the Define Query dialog box, load the query to modify.
3Click the Alter Properties button.
4In the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, under Current
Property Alterations, select the property alteration definition to change.
5Double-click the definition.
The value for the property alteration definition appears in the Expression
box and the appropriate property is selected.
6Edit or insert a new value and click Update.
The revised property alteration definition appears under Current Property
Alterations. If you click Add instead of Update, the revised expression is
added to the existing expression in the list.
7Click OK.
8In the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
To save the changes to a new query, enter a new name and description.
Click OK.
9In the Define Query dialog box, click OK to save your changes without
running the query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
1070 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Executing Drawing Queries
After you define a query to retrieve drawing objects, you can execute it in
Preview, Draw, or Report mode.x
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
To execute a drawing query
■To select a query mode for retrieving drawing objects on page 1072
■To run a drawing query in Preview mode on page 1073
■To run a drawing query in Draw mode on page 1075
Overview of Executing Queries
After you define a query to retrieve drawing objects, you can execute it in one
of three modes:
■Preview mode — Displays the objects on screen, but does not retrieve them.
When you change the screen, the objects disappear.
Use Preview to test your query.
■Draw Mode — Retrieves objects (copies them into the current drawing).
You can manipulate and edit them, save them back to their attached
drawings, save them to the current drawing, or save them to a new drawing.
The objects are not changed in the attached drawings unless you save your
changes back to the attached drawings.
■Report Mode — Writes specified information about the objects to a separate
file.
Once AutoCAD Map 3D copies the objects that meet the query criteria into
the current drawing, it does not duplicate those objects if you run the query
again. If an object meets the criteria of more than one query, AutoCAD Map
3D retrieves only one copy of that object. Therefore, you will never have
multiple copies of the same object in a drawing.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1071
■Overview of Finding and Querying Drawing Objects on page 1006
To select a query mode for retrieving drawing objects
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Define or load a query.
3Under Query Mode, select Preview on page 1073, Draw on page 1075, or
Report on page 1218.
If you select Report mode, click Options to define a report template on
page 1220.
4Click Execute Query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Running a Drawing Query in Preview Mode
Preview mode provides a quick preview of the drawing objects the query will
display in the current drawing. You can run a query in Preview mode and
check the objects the query produces. If there are too few or too many objects,
or objects are displayed in the wrong location, revise the query as necessary.
1072 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE You can plot the results of a Preview query. If you assigned colors to
different pen widths in your plotter setup, plotting the results of a Preview query
recognizes those plotter assignments for different pen widths.
Queries in Preview mode show objects on layers that are locked; however,
Preview mode does not show objects on layers that are Off or Frozen. Although
you see many elements in the current drawing following a Preview query,
AutoCAD Map 3D treats each set of objects as a single object from each
drawing. If you attempt to select several objects, AutoCAD Map 3D reports
“one object found” for each of the attached drawings queried. The display of
objects is temporary and disappears when you redraw or regenerate. You can
zoom and pan to examine the queried objects, but you cannot edit them.
NOTE You can set the Query option on page 221Show Insertion Point Only to
display blocks as insertion points instead of entire objects for Preview queries. See
.
When referencing blocks or images with the same name but with different
paths, a Preview query shows both blocks or images. In Draw mode, the
geometry or image displayed is based on the first definition processed.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Setting Query Options (DWG) on page 220
■Altering the Properties of Queried Objects on page ?
■Saving a Query on page ?
■Running a Drawing Query in Draw Mode on page 1074
To run a drawing query in Preview mode
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Define or load a query.
3Under Query Mode, select Preview.
4Click Execute Query.
To clear objects queried with Preview mode, use the REDRAW or REGEN
commands. You can also click Redraw in the Define Query dialog box.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1073
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Running a Drawing Query in Draw Mode
Draw mode retrieves drawing objects from attached drawings and copies them
into the current drawing. You can save the objects in your current drawing,
or you can edit the objects and save them back to the attached drawings. If
you decide to edit the queried objects and you have set object locking in
System Options, AutoCAD Map 3D locks the individual objects so other users
cannot edit them.
Queries in Draw mode retrieve objects from layers that are Off, Locked, or
Frozen. Whether the objects remain on layers that are Off, Locked, or Frozen
when they are brought into the current drawing depends on the layers in the
current drawing: if the layers exist in the current drawing, the objects take on
the characteristics of the existing layers; if the layers do not exist, AutoCAD
Map 3D creates new layers with the characteristics of the attached drawing
layers.
AutoCAD Map 3D preserves the status of objects on locked layers when it
copies them into the current drawing. When you retrieve objects that are on
locked layers you cannot save changes back to the attached drawing. If you
want to save changes back, open the attached drawing and unlock the layer
before performing the query.
AutoCAD Map 3D does not place duplicate copies of objects in the current
drawing. Once an object is in the drawing, subsequent queries will not retrieve
that object again. See Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
1074 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE In Draw mode, if text is queried into the current drawing and the font is
missing, AutoCAD Map 3D substitutes another font. The font used is set by the
FONTALT system variable.
NOTE When referencing blocks or images with the same name but with different
paths, the geometry or image displayed is based on the first definition processed.
A Preview query displays both blocks or images.
See also:
■Overview of Queries on page 1023
■Altering the Properties of Queried Objects on page ?
■Saving a Query on page ?
■Sharing Attached Drawings on page 606
■Running a Drawing Query in Preview Mode on page 1072
To run a drawing query in Draw mode
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click Current
Query, and then click Define.
2Define or load a query.
3Under Query Mode, select Draw.
4Click Execute Query.
AutoCAD Map 3D copies the queried objects from the attached drawings to
the current drawing.
AutoCAD Map 3D does not duplicate objects that have already been queried
into the current drawing.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1075
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Improving Drawing Query Performance
You can improve the performance of a drawing query by creating an index
or by removing an assigned coordinate system.
NOTE The following apply only to drawing data.
To improve performance
■To create a drawing index on page 1077
■To remove a drawing index on page 1078
■To remove an assigned coordinate system on page 1079
Creating a Drawing Index
To reduce the amount of time it takes to perform a drawing query, create an
index. Instead of searching all location, property, object data, or database links
to find matching data, AutoCAD Map 3D searches only the relevant index.
NOTE Whenever you open a drawing that includes database links, AutoCAD Map
3D automatically creates a database link index and keeps it in memory. To save
this database index to the drawing, select the Store Links Index In Drawing File
option. To set this option, select AutoCAD Options from the Setup menu. Select
the System tab. This feature is especially useful when you edit your attached
drawings directly.
You can create the following kinds of index:
■Location index — Divides drawings into regions. AutoCAD Map 3D targets
just the regions included in the Location query.
1076 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Property index — Organizes object properties. AutoCAD Map 3D targets
only the objects with the properties you specify.
■SQL Links index — Organizes the drawing's link templates and key fields.
AutoCAD Map 3D targets only the objects with the link templates and key
field values you specify.
■EED index — Organizes Extended Entity Data (EED) attached to objects
in drawings created in AutoCAD Data Extension (ADE) 1.0. You cannot
create EED in the current release of AutoCAD Map 3D.
■Object Data index — Organizes object data. AutoCAD Map 3D targets only
the objects with the object data you specify. After you generate an object
data index, a status message appears beside each indexed field name. The
status "Current" means that the object data index on that field is valid and
consistent with the attached object data. The status "Out-of-Date" means
that the object data index on that field is not consistent with the attached
object data. An index could become out-of-date if you modify objects
without first loading AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Finding All Drawing Objects in a Specified Location on page 1025
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing a Specific Property on page 1029
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific SQL Information on page
1035
■Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873
To create a drawing index
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, right-click Drawings. Click Maintenance.
2In the Drawing Maintenance dialog box on page 1640, under Active
Drawings, select the drawings for which you want to create indexes.
If another user has activated the drawing, you cannot create an index for
it.
3Click Drawing Index.
If the selected drawing does not have an index or the index is out of date,
the check box beside the index type under Generate Index is selected.
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1077
4In the Index Maintenance dialog box, under Generate Index, select the
type of index to create.
To generate an object data index, click Object Data. Select the object data
table and fields. Click OK.
5Click OK.
6Click OK to confirm.
AutoCAD Map 3D creates the type of index you specified for each of the
selected drawings.
7Click Close.
NOTE When you create an index, you may receive a warning message that
AutoCAD Map 3D cannot calculate object extents. This indicates that a
third-party application might have created the object and that the application
is not loaded or the object may not support the geometric extents
methodology of AutoCAD Map 3D.
To remove a drawing index
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, right-click Drawings. Click Maintenance.
2In the Drawing Maintenance dialog box, under Active Drawings, select
the drawings for which you want to remove indexes.
3Click Drawing Index.
4In the Index Maintenance dialog box, under Remove Index, select the
type of index to remove.
To remove an object data index, click Object Data. Select the object data
table and fields. Click OK.
5Click OK to confirm.
AutoCAD Map 3D removes the index you specified for each of the selected
drawings.
6Click Close.
Quick Reference
ADEDWGMAINT
1078 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Removes locks from objects
Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing
Maintenance
Menu
ADEDWGMAINTCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickDrawings ➤ Maintenance
Task Pane
Drawing Maintenance dialog boxDialog Box
Removing an Assigned Coordinate System
When you retrieve data from an attached drawing, the data is automatically
transformed if the attached drawing uses one coordinate system and the
current drawing uses a different system. When data is saved back to the
attached drawing, the data is automatically transformed to match the
coordinate system of the attached drawing.
Performing these transformations can decrease performance when querying
objects. To speed up querying, you can remove an assigned coordinate system.
See also:
■Assigning Coordinate Systems on page 133
To remove an assigned coordinate system
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, right-click Current Drawing, and then click
Coordinate System.
2In the Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box, under Current
Drawing or under Source Drawings, replace the code with a period (.) in
the Code box.
Quick Reference
ADESETCRDSYS
Assigns a global coordinate system code for the current drawing or attached
drawings
Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System
Menu
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1079
Assign Coordinate System
Icon
ADESETCRDSYSCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Drawing ➤ Coordinate System
Task Pane
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog boxDialog Box
Troubleshooting Drawing Queries
Issues can arise when you retrieve blocks, text, externally referenced drawings
(xrefs), groups, and hatch patterns from drawings. The following information
helps you deal with these issues.
Block Queries in Preview Mode
In Preview mode, you can display a queried block as a block or simply as an
"X" that signifies the block's insertion point. On the Query tab of the AutoCAD
Map Options dialog box under Options, select or deselect Show Preview Block
As Point Only. To set this and other query options, see Setting Query Options
on page 221.
Block Attributes and Property Queries
When performing Property queries, you can query using block attributes, but
not constant attributes. You can define constant attributes that have the same
value for every occurrence of the block that contains them. However, Property
queries do not recognize constant attributes. Instead, use the block name in
the query.
You can, however, specify invisible attributes. An invisible attribute is not
displayed or plotted but is stored in the drawing file. For detailed information
on attributes, look up attributes in the index of the online help.
See also:
■Finding All Drawing Objects Containing Specific Data on page 1031
1080 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Queries with Blocks of the Same Name
When queries reference blocks with the same name that lie in two different
attached drawings, a Draw query references the block definition first queried
into the current drawing; a Preview query references the block definition in
the attached drawing.
For example, if a Draw query retrieves a block named parcel1 (a rectangular
parcel) from drawing one, and then a block named parcel1 (a square parcel)
from drawing two, the current drawing displays the rectangular parcel. The
block definition for parcel1 is already in the current drawing. A Preview query
displays both the rectangular parcel and the square parcel. Preview queries
create temporary objects referenced from the attached drawings.
NOTE The same considerations apply when referencing raster images with the
same name but with different paths. A Preview query displays both images. A
Draw query, displays the image based on the first definition processed.
See also:
■Running a Drawing Query in Preview Mode on page 1072
■Running a Drawing Query in Draw Mode on page 1074
Queries and Raster Images
Raster images attached to drawings using the IMAGEATTACH or MAPIINSERT
commands are objects that are part of the drawing. When queried, raster
images behave like blocks. Raster images resulting from a paste operation, that
is, an OLE frame, are not recognized as objects in queries.
When a raster image is queried during a Preview query that includes a
coordinate conversion or transformation, the image is not displayed.
When a raster image is queried during a Draw query that includes a coordinate
conversion or transformation, the object is transformed like a block insert,
around the insertion point.
See also:
■Running a Drawing Query in Preview Mode on page 1072
■Running a Drawing Query in Draw Mode on page 1074
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1081
Blocks and Property Alteration (Color)
When using Property Alteration to change the color of retrieved blocks, the
color of the components of the attached drawing block must be BYBLOCK.
Otherwise, no matter what color change you specify for the Property Alteration,
the block retains its original colors when queried.
See also:
■Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page
1044
■Changing the Color of Blocks on page 1068
Blocks and Property Alteration (Scale)
To set the scale of all the blocks retrieved by the current query to a scale of 2,
use Property Alteration and set Scale to 2. This sets the scale of all queried
blocks to 2 no matter what their current scale is.
To scale all blocks retrieved by the current query by a factor of 2, use Property
Alteration and set Scale to (* .XSCALE 2). This multiplies the existing scale of
each queried block by a factor of 2. Make sure that you leave a space between
the * and .XSCALE 2.
See also:
■Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page
1044
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
Property Alteration (Scale and Rotate)
In the Property Alteration dialog box, the Scale option applies only to blocks,
the Rotate option applies only to text and blocks.
See also:
■Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page
1044
■Altering Properties Using Object Properties on page 1049
1082 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Thickness,Width, and Property Queries
You can use a Property query to query on extruded polyline thickness using
the Thickness option in the Property Condition dialog box. You cannot query
on polyline width. AutoCAD Map 3D supports queries on Thickness for the
following kinds of objects: line, arc, text, circle, point, solid, 2D polyline, light
weight polyline, trace, and shape.
See also:
■Overview of Altering the Properties of Queried Drawing Objects on page
1044
Querying Drawings with Xrefs
When you query attached drawings that contain xrefs, AutoCAD Map 3D does
not copy the objects in the xref drawing into the current drawing. Instead,
only the name of the xref drawing appears at the xref insertion point in the
current drawing. To query the xref drawing, attach the drawing separately.
NOTE Queries in Preview mode do not display the xref drawing name, but queries
in Draw mode do.
See also:
■Overview of Attaching Drawings on page 144
■Running a Drawing Query in Preview Mode on page 1072
■Running a Drawing Query in Draw Mode on page 1074
Retrieving Groups of Objects
When you retrieve a group of objects, AutoCAD Map 3D treats them as separate
and independent objects and then restores the group when you save the
objects back to the attached drawings, even if you edit the objects in the group.
However, if you create a new object in the current drawing, you cannot
associate it with the group to be saved back to the attached drawing.
See also:
■Saving Queried Objects Back to Attached Drawings on page 625
Finding and Querying Drawing Objects | 1083
Retrieving Hatched Areas
By default, AutoCAD Map 3D retrieves hatched areas, solid objects, and raster
images using the bounding box, not the insertion point. To change the default,
use the Reference Entire Bounding Area For Objects option on the AutoCAD
Map Options dialog box.
If you hatch objects that are formed by retrieving objects from multiple
attached drawings, the hatch associativity is lost when you save back.
Associative hatching is designed to work in a single drawing environment.
We recommend against querying, editing, and saving back associative hatches.
In most cases, hatch associativity is not maintained.
See also:
■Setting Query Options (DWG) on page 220
To set options for drawing queries
■Click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD Map Options. Click the tab you want.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
1084 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Analyzing Drawing Topologies
Topologies are defined by a set of drawing objects and their relationships.
(Features are not included in topologies.)
After you create a topology in a drawing, you can analyze it to get useful
information about the spatial relationships between drawing objects.
■Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies on page 1086
■Performing a Shortest Path Trace on page 1090
■Performing a Best Route Analysis on page 1093
■Performing a Flood Trace on page 1099
■Overlaying Two Topologies on page 1102
■Dissolving a Composite Topology on page 1108
■Buffering a Topology on page 1111
■Querying a Topology on page 1114
■Saving a Temporary Topology on page 1120
Before you can use the topology analysis tools, you must create a topology
and make sure it is loaded.
See also:
■Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
NOTE The procedures below apply only to drawing objects.
To analyze drawing topologies
■To perform a shortest path trace on page 1091
■To perform a best route analysis on page 1096
■To perform a flood trace on page 1100
■To overlay two topologies on page 1105
■To dissolve a composite topology on page 1109
■To buffer a topology on page 1112
■To query a topology on page 1119
■To convert a temporary topology to a permanent topology on page 1120
Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 1085
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies
After you have created a drawing topology, you can use it to analyze spatial
relationships between the drawing objects. You can:
■Extract or create new information about a set of objects
■Determine the distribution of an object, or objects, over a network or area
■Manage relationships between objects
■Analyze the location, proximity, and orientation of objects
■Evaluate suitability and capability, estimate, predict, and interpret
■Identify conditions at a geographic location, in a spatial area, or along a
linear network, and predict effects of future events on these items
Different topologies can contain information on different aspects of a map.
For example, a political map shows county lines or cities and towns. A
geological map shows soil types or contour lines. A social map might show
the locations of crimes or high-income areas.
Before you can analyze a topology, you must create the topology and make
sure it is loaded.
See also:
■Creating Topologies on page 689
■Loading or Unloading Topologies on page 767
NOTE The procedures below apply only to drawing objects.
You can analyze drawing topologies in the following ways:
Use this method...To do this...
Perform a shortest path trace on page 1091Calculate the shortest path between two
points in a drawing or determine the op-
timal route based on values of direction
and resistance.
1086 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Use this method...To do this...
Perform a best route analysis on page 1096Calculate the best route from a starting
point in the drawing to one or more visit
points, and back to the starting point.
Perform a flood trace on page 1100Determine how many links and nodes can
be traveled before the accumulated resist-
ance exceeds the specified maximum res-
istance.
Overlay two topologies on page 708Compare two existing topologies and keep
only common geometry, remove common
geometry, or combine geometry in a spe-
cified way.
Dissolve a topology on page 1109Create a new topology by combining
polygons that share the same data value
in a specified field.
Buffer a topology on page 1112Identify objects within a specified offset of
elements in node, network, and polygon
topologies.
Query a topology on page 1119Retrieve a loaded topology and its associ-
ated data from the current drawing or an
attached drawing, or query part of a topo-
logy in a source drawing and work on that
part of a topology without having to re-
trieve all its objects.
Save a temporary topology on page 1120Save back the temporary information re-
trieved by a topology query to the draw-
ings from which it was queried.
Quick Reference
MAPANBUFFER
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 1087
Creates a buffer around an existing topology
Click Analyze ➤ Buffer.
Menu
Buffer Topology
Icon
MAPANBUFFERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer
Task Pane
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANDISSOLVE
Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes
between links that share a specific attribute
Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
Menu
Dissolve Topology
Icon
MAPANDISSOLVECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network or polygon
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Dissolve
Task Pane
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay.
Menu
Overlay Topology
Icon
MAPANOVERLAYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Task Pane
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog boxDialog Box
MAPANTOPONET
1088 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis.
Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONETCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
MAPTOPOLOAD
Loads a topology
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load
Topology.
Menu
Load Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOLOADCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Load Topology
Task Pane
Topology Selection dialog boxDialog Box
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Topology
Query.
Menu
Query Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query
Task Pane
Topology Query dialog boxDialog Box
Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies | 1089
Performing a Shortest Path Trace
Using a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their
relationship data, you can calculate the shortest path between two points in
a drawing or determine the optimal route based on values of direction and
resistance. This process is known as a shortest path trace analysis.
In a drawing of a street network, for example, you might find the shortest
path between a fire station and a school.
Shortest path trace based on resistance (time taken to traverse a segment).
You can specify a resistance for any link in the network. This resistance specifies
the difficulty in traversing the link. The default resistance is the length of the
link.
If a path has a total resistance lower than the Minimum Resistance value, the
path is ignored. Similarly, if a path has a total resistance greater than the
Maximum Resistance value, the path is ignored.
Using SQL Data in Expressions
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded:
■In the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings
1090 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■In the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out network path trace analysis on a road network based on time
rather than distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link using an object
data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the Link Direct
Resistance property to an expression that uses this speed limit data, for
example:
(/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280))
which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where
5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
The resulting analysis shows the shortest route, in terms of time, not distance,
to get from the first point to the second.
See also:
■Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
■Expression Evaluator on page 1283
■Expression dialog box on page 1316
To perform a shortest path trace
1Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies on page 689 and To load a topology on page 768.
2In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis.
3In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box on page
1703, click Shortest Path. Click Next.
4In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point, and the click (Select Point) to select the starting point in
the map. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
Performing a Shortest Path Trace | 1091
5Click End Point. To select the ending point, click (Select Point). Press
Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the end point.
6Review the start and end points you have specified. The coordinates of
the points are shown in the list.
■To double-check a point's location in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
■To delete a point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
7Click Next.
8In the Network Topology Analysis - Direction and Resistance dialog box,
select limits to put on the trace. For direction and resistance, you can
enter a constant or an expression that references an object data field or
linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for
each link. Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list.
■Link Direction — Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the
box blank, bi-directional (0) is used.
■Reverse — Select this option to use the reverse of the direction
indicated in the Link Direction box.
■Link Direct Resistance — Specify the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length
of the line (.LENGTH) is used.
■Link Reverse Resistance — Specify the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
■Node Resistance — Specify the resistance to cross the node, for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a
road network. If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
■Maximum Resistance and Minimum Resistance — Any path that has
a total resistance below the minimum or above the maximum is
ignored.
For example, if you stored the average speed limit for a link (in miles per
hour) in an object data table called street_data, you could find the fastest
1092 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
route between two points by entering the expression (/ .length (*
:speed@street_data 5280) which divides the length of each link by the
average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
9Click Next.
10 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
or not to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether to save the
trace results as a new topology.
■To view your shortest path trace onscreen, select Highlight. Choose
a highlight color from the Color list.
You should use a highlight color that's different than the color of the
objects in your map.
■To save the shortest path trace as a new topology, select Create
Topology. Enter a name and description for the new topology. The
new topology will be created on the existing objects.
11 Click Finish to perform the shortest path trace.
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis.
Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONETCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
Performing a Best Route Analysis
Using a network topology, which is made up of drawing objects and their
relationship data, you can calculate the best route from a starting point in the
Performing a Best Route Analysis | 1093
drawing, to one or more visit points, and back to the starting point. AutoCAD
Map 3D determines the optimal route based on values of direction and
resistance. For example, in a street network, you can find the best route to
travel when visiting several customer sites from your hotel.
If a path has a total resistance lower than the Minimum Resistance value, the
path is ignored. Similarly, if a path has a total resistance greater than the
Maximum Resistance value, the path is ignored.
Using SQL Data in Expressions
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates defined in the drawing where the topology is loaded —
in the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings; in
the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current drawing.
Also, be sure the appropriate data source is attached and connected in the
current drawing.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out a best route analysis on a road network based on time rather than
distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link on page 713 using an object
data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set the Link Direct
Resistance property to an expression that uses this speed limit data, for
example:
(/ .length (* :speed@street_data 5280))
which divides the length of each link by the average speed per foot (where
5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
The resulting analysis shows the best route, in terms of time, not distance.
Object Data Stored for a Best Route Topology
If you save the results of a best route analysis to a new topology, AutoCAD
Map 3D adds topology information, stored as object data, on each element
that makes up the best route topology. The object data table contains
information about the order of the links visited and the resistance used to
calculate the best route. The object data table added is like the one shown in
the following table.
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
Path Link Visit OrderBR_SAMPLESAMPLE
1094 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Object Data FieldObject Data TableTopology Name
Evaluated Link Forward Resistance
Evaluated Link Reverse Resistance
Evaluated Start Node Resistance
Evaluated End Node Resistance
Evaluated Link Direction
Displaying Visit Order Using Annotation
To display the order in which to visit points, you use AutoCAD Map 3D's
annotation feature to label the best route with the object data described above.
Editing a Best Route Topology
If you change the direction or resistance of an object in a best route topology,
the best route shown may no longer be the optimal route, and you should
recalculate the best route. For example, if you change the direction of a link
from bi-directional to forward or reverse, it may change the best route.
NOTE The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use expressions
that evaluate to zero). In layman's terms, if all resistance values equal zero, every
possible route is as good as any other route, and there is no "best" route to travel.
See also:
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
■Attaching Annotation to Objects on page 907
■Expression Evaluator on page 1283
■Expression dialog box on page 1316
■Renaming Topologies and Changing Their Descriptions on page 783
■Deleting Topologies on page 784
Performing a Best Route Analysis | 1095
To perform a best route analysis
1Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies on page 689 and To load a topology on page 768.
2In Map Explorer on page 1755 under Current Drawing, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis.
3In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box on page
1703, click Best Route. Click Next.
4In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point. Click Select Point to select the starting point in the
drawing. Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5Click Visit Point. Click (Select Point).
6In the drawing, click a point to visit during the best route analysis. It
doesn't matter which point you pick first, AutoCAD Map 3D calculates
the order in which to visit the sites as part of the calculation.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the visit point.
7Do one of the following:
■To accept the point and return to the dialog box, press Enter.
■To discard the point and return to the dialog box, press Esc.
■To accept the point and specify another point, right-click in the
drawing. Click Next Point.
8In the dialog box, review the start points and visit points you have
specified.
■To double-check a point's location in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
■To delete a point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
■To add another visit point, return to Step 5.
9Click Next.
1096 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
10 In the Network Topology Analysis - Direction and Resistance dialog box,
select limits to put on the analysis. For direction and resistance, enter a
constant or an expression that references an object data field or linked
external database column. The expression will be evaluated for each link.
Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list.
■Link Direction — Specifies a direction for the trace. If the box is blank,
bi-directional (0) is used.
■Reverse — Uses the reverse of the direction indicated in the Link
Direction box.
■Link Direct Resistance — Specifies the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If the box is blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
■Link Reverse Resistance — Specifies the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If the box is blank, the length of the line
(.LENGTH) is used.
■Node Resistance — Specifies the resistance to cross the node (for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network or a junction in a
road network). If the box is blank, zero (0) is used.
■Maximum Resistance and Minimum Resistance — Any path that has
a total resistance below the minimum or above the maximum is
ignored.
For example, if you stored the average speed limit for a link (in miles per
hour) in an object data table called street_data, you could find the fastest
route between two points by entering the expression (/ .length (*
:speed@street_data 5280) which divides the length of each link by the
average speed per foot (where 5280 is the number of feet in a mile).
NOTE The best route cannot be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal "0" (or use
expressions that evaluate to zero). In layman's terms, if all resistance values
are all zero, every possible route is as good as any other route, and there is
no "best" route to travel.
11 Click Next.
Performing a Best Route Analysis | 1097
12 In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
or not to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether to save the
trace results as a new topology.
■To view the best route analysis onscreen, select Highlight and choose
a highlight color.
Use a highlight color that is different from the color of the objects in
your map.
■To save the results of the best route analysis as a new topology, select
Create Topology and enter a name and description for the new
topology.
AutoCAD Map 3D adds topology information, stored as object data,
on each element that makes up the best route topology.
13 Click Finish to perform the best route analysis.
To display the order in which to visit points, use annotation to label the
best route with the object data stored on the best route topology objects.
For more information, see To insert annotation on page 908.
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis.
Menu
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONETCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
1098 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Performing a Flood Trace
An analysis that looks out from a point in all directions is called a network
flood trace. You can perform a flood trace on a network topology, which is
made up of drawing objects and their relationship data.
You specify the point where the network starts and the maximum distance
the network can traverse. The analysis determines how many links and nodes
can be traveled before the accumulated resistance exceeds the specified
maximum resistance. For example, you might want to find all restaurants
within a 10-minute walk of a hotel.
If you specify an expression that uses SQL data, the Link Template list includes
only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded:
■In the source drawing, if you loaded the topology from source drawings
■In the current drawing, if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing.
Using Flood Trace to Test Network Integrity
You can use flood trace analysis to check the integrity of a network topology.
If some links are not flooded, the topology is incomplete; you can use the
map editing tools to correct the geometry, and then recreate the topology.
Travel Time in Network Topologies
To carry out network flood trace analysis on a road network based on time
rather than distance, assign a speed or speed limit to each link on page 713
using an object data field or a field in a linked external database. You then set
the Link Direct Resistance parameter to an AutoLISP expression that uses this
speed limit data.
For example, to determine a flood trace analysis based on a maximum travel
time, start a flood trace, select the start point for the analysis, enter the
AutoLISP expression for the Link Direct Resistance, and specify the travel time
for Maximum Value. This analysis will show the streets that can be reached
from a start node within the specified period of time.
See also:
■Specifying the Direction for a Link on page 710
■Specifying the Resistance for a Link or Node on page 713
Performing a Flood Trace | 1099
■Expression Evaluator on page 1283
■Expression dialog box on page 1316
NOTE This procedure applies only to drawing objects.
To perform a flood trace
1Verify that you have a network topology available and it is loaded. See
Creating Topologies on page 689 and To load a topology on page 768.
2In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis.
3In the Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box on page
1703, click Flood Trace. Click Next.
4In the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box, click
Start Point. Click Select Point to select the starting point in the map.
Press Enter to return to the dialog box.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the node closest to the location you clicked as
the start point. The coordinates of the point are shown in the list.
5Review the start point you have specified. The coordinates of the point
are shown in the list.
■To double-check the point's location in the map, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Preview.
■To delete the point so that you can define a new one, highlight the
coordinates in the list. Click Delete.
6Click Next.
7In the Network Topology Analysis - Direction and Resistance dialog box,
select limits to put on the trace. For direction and resistance, you can
enter a constant or an expression that references an object data field or
linked external database column. The expression will be evaluated for
each link. Click (Expression Evaluator) to select data from a list.
■Link Direction — Specify a direction for the trace. If you leave the
box blank, bi-directional (0) is used.
■Reverse — Select this option to use the reverse of the direction
indicated in the Link Direction box.
1100 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
■Link Direct Resistance — Specify the resistance to travel in the
direction that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length
of the line (.LENGTH) is used.
■Link Reverse Resistance — Specify the resistance in the opposite
direction along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the
line (.LENGTH) is used.
■Node Resistance — Specify the resistance to cross the node, for
example, resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a
road network. If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
■Specify a maximum resistance for the trace. The analysis determines
how many links and nodes can be traveled before the accumulated
resistance exceeds the specified maximum resistance.
For example, to trace out to a maximum length of 5000, set the Link
Direct Resistance to .LENGTH and set the Maximum Resistance to 5000.
To trace out to the first node on each link, set the Link Direct Resistance
to 0, set the Node Resistance to 50 and set a Maximum Resistance of 45.
8Click Next.
9In the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box, indicate whether
to view the results of the trace onscreen and whether save the flood trace
results as a new topology.
■To view your flood trace onscreen, select Highlight. Select the highlight
color.
■To save the flood path trace as a new topology, select Create Topology.
Enter a name and description for the new topology. The new topology
is created on the existing objects.
10 Click Finish to perform the flood trace.
Quick Reference
MAPANTOPONET
Traces through a network topology (shortest path, best route, or flood trace)
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Network Analysis.
Menu
Performing a Flood Trace | 1101
Network Analyze
Icon
MAPANTOPONETCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Network Analysis
Task Pane
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog
box
Dialog Box
Overlaying Two Topologies
A powerful form of analysis is possible when you overlay two or more
topologies. Topologies can be created only from drawing objects.
There are three types of overlay analysis:
■Nodes with polygons
■Networks with polygons
■Polygons with polygons
To overlay topologies, both must be loaded into the current drawing.
Options for Overlaying Topologies
When you overlay two topologies, you choose the method in which the two
selected topologies interact. In some cases, the result varies according to which
topology is the source and which is the overlay.
1102 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE All the overlay analysis operators change arcs into a series of line segments;
for example, a complete circle consists of 32 segments. In the examples shown
above, the result topology is a tessellated (or jagged) circle after overlay analysis.
This may affect properties of the result topology, and gives different values, such
as area and perimeter.
Intersect
Intersect operations combine topologies and keep only the common geometry.
Intersect acts like the Boolean AND operation. The results are the same
whichever topology is chosen as the first or second. Object data is combined
for the two operations.
Here are some examples of using Intersect:
■Which parcels (polygons) fall within 100-year flood zones (polygons)?
Intersect shows only the flooded properties, not the whole property.
■Which crimes (nodes) fall within drug-free zones (polygons)?
■Which stream sections (networks) fall within the building area (polygons)
and need to be examined for potential negative environmental impact?
Overlaying Two Topologies | 1103
Union
Union operations combine polygons with polygons and keep all geometry.
Union acts like the Boolean OR operation and can be used only with polygons.
For example, you can combine parcels with soils information for property
assessment. Use Union to maintain both sets of geometry together and pull
them apart as needed.
Identity
Identity operations work like Union on the source topology and like Intersect
on the overlay topology. Use Identity to combine nodes, links, or polygons
with polygons and keep all the input geometry. Identity creates one topology
with one link where the link is crossed by the overlay topology.
When Identity is used with the question, Which parcels (polygons) fall within
100-year flood zones (polygons)?, all the properties in the flood zones are
shown intact.
Erase
Erase operations use the overlay polygon topology like a mask and erase
everything in the source polygon topology that is covered by the overlay
topology.
Clip
Clip operations use the overlay polygon topology as a boundary. The parts of
the source polygons outside the overlay polygons are clipped and discarded.
You can use this option to show polygons within a boundary polygon, such
as a city or state boundary.
Paste
Paste operations paste the overlay polygon topology on top of the source
polygons. The source polygons not covered by the overlay remain. The Paste
option can be used only with polygons.
Object Data in Overlay Analysis
You can copy selected object data and external database data from the source
and overlay topologies to a new object data table in the resulting topology.
You specify the name of the new object data table that will store the data in
1104 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
the resulting topology. The object data table name should be a new name.
Data fields in the resulting topology look like this:
TOPONAME_FIELD
In addition to any fields you select, overlay analysis creates these object data
fields in the resulting topology.
DataField Name
Polygon Identification NumberTOPOID
Object ID in source topology (TOPO-
NAME1 is name of Source)
TOPONAME1_ID
Object ID in overlay topology (TOPO-
NAME2 is name of Overlay)
TOPONAME2_ID
Percentage area of parent polygon in
source topology
TOPONAME1_PERCENTAREA
Percentage area of parent polygon in
overlay topology
TOPONAME2_PERCENTAREA
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■To load a topology on page 768
■Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies on page 1086
To overlay two topologies
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click the source
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay.
2NOTE Most of the overlay analysis types work only with polygon topologies.
For more information about those that work with node or network topologies,
see the Concept tab for this topic on page 1102.
Overlaying Two Topologies | 1105
3In the Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box on page 1719,
do the following:
■Select the type of overlay analysis to perform:
■Intersect — Only areas that appear in both the source and overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
■Union — Areas that appear in either the source or the overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
■Identity — The result topology includes areas that appear in the
source topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within
the source topology boundary.
■Erase — The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where it is covered by the overlay topology. The
area covered by the overlay polygons is erased from the source
polygon area.
■Clip — The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where they are outside the boundary of the overlay
topology. The source polygons are clipped to the outer boundary
of the overlay polygons.
■Paste — The overlay topology is "pasted" on the source topology.
The result topology includes the overlay topology and any areas
of the source topology that extend beyond the boundaries of the
overlay topology.
■Click Next.
4In the Select Overlay Topology dialog box, do the following:
■Select the polygon topology to use as the overlay topology.
■Click Next.
5In the Topology Overlay Analysis - New Topology dialog box, do the
following:
■Select Highlight to highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Select
the highlight color.
■Enter a name and description for the new topology, and specify the
layer to place it on.
■Click Next.
1106 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
6In the Topology Overlay Analysis Dissolve - Output Attributes dialog box,
do the following to copy data to the result topology:
■For Source Attributes For New Topology, click (Expression
Evaluator) to select the data from the source topology that you want
to include in the resulting topology. You can include fields in an
object data table or columns in an external database.
■For Overlay Attributes For New Topology, click (Expression
Evaluator) to select the data from the overlay topology that you want
to include in the resulting topology.
■Enter a name and description for the object data table that will store
the data in the new topology.
Object data and external database records are attached to the centroids
of the result topology.
■Click Next.
7In the final dialog box, choose whether to create new nodes to complete
the resulting topology. If so, specify which a block to use:
■To use a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
■To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
■To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file to
use.
8For certain overlay operations, you also specify the block to use for
centroids.
9Click Finish.
Quick Reference
MAPANOVERLAY
Overlays one topology with another, and creates a new topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Overlay.
Menu
Overlay Topology
Icon
Overlaying Two Topologies | 1107
MAPANOVERLAYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Overlay
Task Pane
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog boxDialog Box
Dissolving a Composite Topology
If a topology contains many smaller polygons, you can create a new topology
by combining polygons that share the same data value in a specified field.
This field is called the dissolve field. The dissolve field can be an object data
field or a column in a linked external database.
Note that topologies can include drawing objects only.
Dissolving Polygons
When you dissolve a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D checks each boundary
between polygons to see if the dissolve field value is the same for both. If so,
the boundary and one of the centroids are removed. All object fields except
for the dissolve and any new topology fields are removed.
If adjacent polygons do not contain the dissolve field, the boundary is not
dissolved and the resulting polygon has a blank value for that field.
Dissolving Network Links
When you dissolve a network topology, AutoCAD Map 3D checks nodes
between lines to see whether two lines intersect at a specified node and whether
the dissolve field is the same. If so, the node is removed, and the two links
1108 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
are joined to form one link. All object fields except for the dissolve and any
new topology fields are removed as shown in the following illustration.
If adjacent lines do not contain the dissolve field, the node is not dissolved
and the resulting polyline has a blank value for that field.
See also:
■Overview of Creating Topologies on page 689
■To load a topology on page 768
■Overview of Analyzing Drawing Topologies on page 1086
To dissolve a composite topology
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, right-click the topology to dissolve ➤
Analysis ➤ Dissolve.
2Note that topologies must be loaded before you can work with them. See
To load a topology on page 768.
3In the Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box on page 1718, for
Dissolve By, specify the data element to use for the new topology. To
select a field from an object data table or a column from an external
database, click (Expression Evaluator).
Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value
for the specified field or column are combined into a single polygon or
line.
Dissolving a Composite Topology | 1109
NOTE When dissolving a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D uses only data that
is attached or linked to the centroid of the polygon. It does not use data
attached to a polygon border.
4In the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box, select Highlight to
highlight the resulting topology onscreen. Specify the highlight color.
5Enter a name and description for the new topology and specify the layer.
Click Next.
6In the Topology Dissolve - Output Attributes dialog box, do the following:
■Click (Expression Evaluator) to select the data to include in the
resulting topology. You can include fields in an object data table or
columns in an external database.
■Enter a name and description for the object data table that will store
the data in the new topology.
NOTE If you do not want to populate an Object Data Table with the
dissolve information, select the last (empty) item in the list. Selecting this
empty item will not copy data from the dissolve topology.
■Click Next.
7In the final dialog box, indicate whether to create new nodes to complete
the resulting topology. If so, specify which a block to use:
■To use a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
■To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
■To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file to
use.
If you are dissolving a polygon topology, you can also specify the block
to use for centroids.
8Click Finish to dissolve the topology.
Quick Reference
MAPANDISSOLVE
1110 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Removes the boundaries between polygons in a topology or the nodes
between links that share a specific attribute
Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
Menu
Dissolve Topology
Icon
MAPANDISSOLVECommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a network or polygon
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Dissolve
Task Pane
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog boxDialog Box
Buffering a Topology
A buffer analysis identifies objects within a specified offset of elements in
node, network, and polygon topologies. A buffer is a zone that is drawn around
a topology. For example, you might specify a buffer on either side of a river
to show the extent of a flood plain.
Note that topologies can contain only drawing objects.
Use Buffer Analysis to show an area around an existing topology. In this case, the
buffer analysis of the power line network topology creates a new polygon topology.
Buffering a Topology | 1111
For buffering, you create a new polygon topology from an existing node,
network, or polygon topology and specify a buffer offset.
The buffer offset can be:
■A positive or negative numeric value
■An expression
■A value specified by object data
■A value linked to an external database record
Note that you can use negative offset values on page 1283for polygon topologies
only.
TIP You can improve the performance of buffering operations by increasing the
RAM to more than the recommended amount, or by increasing the virtual memory
on your system. This is recommended if you are buffering large topologies.
See also:
■Expression Evaluator on page 1283
■Buffering Features in Your Map on page 1004
To buffer a topology
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer.
2In the Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box on page 1712, enter
the buffer distance. Click Next. The buffer extends the specified distance
from the objects.
The buffer offset can be any of the following:
■Numeric value. To decrease the size of existing polygons, enter a
negative value.
■An expression that evaluates to a numeric value.
■A value in an object data table or a linked external database. Click
(Expression Evaluator) to select the table and field or the link
template and column from a list.
1112 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
NOTE If you are creating a buffer around a polygon and want to use a
value in an object data table or an external database, the data must be
attached to the centroid of the polygon.
3In the Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box, select Highlight to
highlight the resulting buffer topology onscreen. Specify a highlight color
that is different from the color of the objects.
4Enter a name and description for the new topology and specify the layer
to place it on. Click Next.
NOTE If you specify a locked layer, AutoCAD Map 3D can create the buffer
geometry but not the buffer topology.
5In the Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box,
specify the blocks to use for centroids and node in the resulting buffer
topology.
■To use a point, select ACAD_POINT.
■To select from a list of block definitions, click the down arrow.
■To select a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select the file.
6Click Finish to create the buffer topology.
Quick Reference
MAPANBUFFER
Creates a buffer around an existing topology
Click Analyze ➤ Buffer.
Menu
Buffer Topology
Icon
MAPANBUFFERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Buffer
Task Pane
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog boxDialog Box
Buffering a Topology | 1113
Querying a Topology
Use a topology query to retrieve a loaded topology and its associated data
from the current drawing or an attached drawing. You can also query part of
a topology in a source drawing and work on that part of a topology without
having to retrieve all the objects that make up a topology.
There are three differences between using standard queries and topology
queries:
■Topology queries work with only one topology; standard queries work
with all objects in the attached drawings.
■Because topology information is stored in object data, a Data condition
can be based on Area, Length, Perimeter, Direction, Direct Resistance, and
Reverse Resistance.
■Property alterations work differently with polygon topologies.
Creating a Result Topology
When you use a topology query, you can hold the retrieved information in
the current drawing in three types of topology:
■None — No information is added to the geometry in the current drawing.
■Temporary — Information is retrieved and stored in memory as a topology
with a name preceded by an asterisk (*).
You cannot save back the temporary topology to the queried drawings.
However, you can save the temporary topology to make it permanent on page
1120, or you can retain the topology in the current drawing.
■Permanent — The query retrieves data and creates a topology in the current
drawing. You can save back this topology to the source drawings. The
topology name must not be preceded by an asterisk (*).
1114 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Location Queries
Location queries on network topology work in the same way as queries on
any other linear or point object.
Data Retrieved by Location QueryTopology
NodesNode
Links; also nodes if part of topologyNetwork
Polygons if links or centroid selected; also
links or nodes if part of polygon topology
Polygon
Polygons are handled as true areas, not just as boundaries. In the example
following, the polygon area crosses through the query boundary so the whole
polygon is retrieved, although none of the objects that make up the polygon
intersect any part of the query boundary.
Point location queries also retrieve the polygon that includes the point.
Querying a Topology | 1115
Object Data Queries
Any topology object can be queried using object data, such as node, link, and
polygon identifiers; the "from" and "to" node information on links; the left
and right side information on links; polygons; and so on.
Topology queries can retrieve data such as areas, perimeters, numbers of links,
and more. For example, a query to retrieve objects with an area greater than
a specified value gives different results with the two query types:
■A query defined with a standard Define Query retrieves closed polylines
with areas of the specified value.
■A Define Topology Query retrieves all polygons with areas of the specified
value, whatever the objects making up the polygon (lines, arcs, or open
polylines) are.
Property Alteration with Topology Queries
When you define a property alteration for topology objects, only specific
elements of the topology are altered, as shown in the following table.
Modified ObjectsProperty Alteration
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Block Name
Nodes, links, and centroidsColor
Nodes, links, and centroidsElevation
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Height
Nodes, links, and centroidsLayer
Nodes, links, and centroidsLinetype
Nodes in node and network topologies. Centroids in
polygon topology
Rotation
1116 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Modified ObjectsProperty Alteration
Nodes, links, and centroidsScale
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology
Text Style
LinksWidth
Nodes in node and network topologies Centroids in
polygon topology (text appears at the centroid label
point)
Text Value
LinksThickness
Hatched polygonsHatch
Saving and Using Queries
If you plan to use a query more than once, you can save it with the current
drawing in the Query Library or to an external file, and edit the query or reuse
it. The following table shows the options available with topology queries.
CommandProcedureDescription
ADEQUERYIn the Define Query dialog box, click Save.
See Saving a Query on page 163.
Save a query
ADERUNQUERY
In the Map 3D for Drawings workspace
on page 1766, click Edit menu ➤ DWG
Run Query (internal)
Query. See Running a Saved Query on page
165.
ADERUNXQUERY
In the Map 3D for Drawings workspace
on page 1766, click Edit menu ➤ More
Run External Query
DWG Querying Options ➤ Run External
Topology Query.
Querying a Topology | 1117
CommandProcedureDescription
ADEQUERYLIB
In the Map 3D for Drawings workspace
on page 1766, click Setup menu ➤ More
Use the Query Lib-
rary
DWG Options ➤ Topology Query Library.
See Setting Up a Query Library on page
160.
Report Mode
In addition to the dot variables available using the standard Define Query
command, Define Topology Query has two extra dot variables.
■.TOPONAME — Contains the topology name.
■.TOPOTYPE — Contains the topology type: NODE, NETWORK, or
POLYGON.
Three of the dot variables give different results in topology queries.
■.DRAWING — The drawing name that is the source of the geometry object
in the topology.
■.AREA — The value of the AREA object data field for each polygon.
■.PERIMETER — The value of the PERIMETER object data field for each
polygon.
The Process Sub-Objects option in the Output Report Options dialog box
specifies the objects in a report.
Reported Data
Do not Process Sub-ObjectsProcess Sub-ObjectsTopology Type
NodesNodes, objects, and object dataNode
LinksLinks, start and end node dataNetwork
CentroidsCentroids, links, and nodesPolygon
1118 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
To query a topology
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click a topology
➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query.
2In the Topology Query dialog box on page 1728, select the topology to
query.
If the topology is not on the list, click Load and select the topology to
use.
3Under Result Topology, specify how to save the results of the query:
■None — Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no
topology data is created.
■Temporary — Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the
topology data is loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the
objects.
■Permanent — Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a
new topology is created.
If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
4To load an existing query, click Load Query and select the query.
To define a new query, click Define Query and define the conditions for
the query.
To close the dialog box, but have AutoCAD Map 3D remember your
selections, click OK.
5When you click Define Query, the Define Query Dialog box opens. Its
operation and options are the same for topology and AutoCAD Map 3D
queries, except for some options you have in the Property option in the
Query Type area. For more information, see Overview of Queries on page
1023.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOQUERY
Queries topologies
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Topology
Query.
Menu
Querying a Topology | 1119
Query Topology
Icon
MAPTOPOQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Analysis ➤ Topology Query
Task Pane
Topology Query dialog boxDialog Box
Saving a Temporary Topology
When you use a topology query, you can store the retrieved information in
a temporary topology. The topology name is preceded by an asterisk (*). To
save back the temporary topology to the queried drawings, first convert the
temporary topology to a permanent topology.
See also:
■Querying a Topology on page 1114
To convert a temporary topology to a permanent topology
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, under Current Drawing, right-click the
temporary topology you want to convert ➤ Administration ➤ Rename.
A temporary topology has a name preceded by an asterisk (*).
2In the Rename Topology dialog box on page 1707, enter a new name for
the topology.
To create a permanent topology, do not start the topology name with an
asterisk (*). Also note that topology names can contain letters, numbers,
and the underscore, hyphen, and dollar characters. Names cannot include
spaces.
3Optionally, enter a new description for the topology.
4Click OK to rename the topology, making it a permanent topology.
Quick Reference
MAPTOPOREN
1120 | Chapter 8 Analyzing Data
Changes the name and description of a topology
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename.
Menu
MAPTOPORENCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a
topology ➤ Administration ➤ Rename
Task Pane
Rename Topology dialog boxDialog Box
Saving a Temporary Topology | 1121
1122
Publishing and Sharing
Maps
Overview of Publishing and Sharing
There are many ways to output and share map data. Use the following table to
determine which option to use for moving your data from one format to another:
Use this option...To this format...To move this
data...
File menu ➤ Plot
See Publishing a Map to a Plotter on
page 1127and Publishing Maps on page
1126
Printer, plotter, or fileEntire map
See Publishing Map Books on page 1144Map book (divides your map into a grid
of tiles and renders each tile on a separ-
Entire map
ate page, which can be published to a
plotter or a file)
File menu ➤ Save Current Map as DWG
See Exporting Maps to DWG Format on
page 1202
DWG formatEntire map
File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤
Publish to DWF
See Publishing to DWF on page 1128
DWF (Design Web Format) to display in
Autodesk Design Review
Entire map
9
1123
Use this option...To this format...To move this
data...
File menu ➤ Plot
See Publishing to PDF on page 1136
PDF fileEntire map
File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤
Publish to DWF
See Publishing to a Web Page on page
1137
Web pageEntire map
File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤
Publish to Autodesk MapGuide
See Publishing to MapGuide on page
1140
Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007Entire map
At the Command prompt, enter etrans-
mit
See Using eTransmit on page 1139
A transmittal packageEntire map and all its
dependent files (for
example, Xrefs)
File menu ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map
3D Export
See Overview of Converting and Export-
ing on page 1166
Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File)
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages
ESRI Shapefile
GML (Geographic Markup Language)
MapInfo MIF/MID
Drawing data
MapInfo TAB
MicroStation DGN
Shape Multiclass
VML (Vector Markup Language)
File menu ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ FDO
Connection
See Exporting DWG Data to an FDO
Data Store on page 1203
Oracle
ESRI ArcSDE
Drawing data
File menu ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Raster
Image
See Exporting DWG Data to an Image
Format on page 1207
Image formatsDrawing data
1124 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Use this option...To this format...To move this
data...
File menu ➤ Save As
See Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF
File on page 1202
DXFDrawing data
In Display Manager, right-click the layer
and choose Export Layer Data to SDF or
Save Layer.
See Saving or Exporting a Display Man-
ager Layer on page 1210
Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File)Geospatial data
In Map Explorer, click Tools ➤ Bulk
Copy
See Migrating Data on page 522
Another geospatial formatGeospatial data
In the Data Table, choose Options ➤
Export.
See Exporting from the Data Table on
page 1214
A printer or a comma-separated fileData attached to
geospatial objects
At the Command prompt, enter ad-
equery.
See Creating a Drawing Object Report
(DWG) on page 1217
A printer or a comma-separated fileData attached to
drawing objects
In the Data View, click File menu ➤
Print.
See on page 1215
A printer or a comma-separated fileExternal data linked
to objects
See Publishing and Printing Metadata
on page 1255and Sharing Metadata on
page 1250
A printer or a comma-separated fileMetadata
You can also use the following options to share map data:
■Export data to a GIS format and back into DWG format on page 1207.
Overview of Publishing and Sharing | 1125
■Convert Display Manager styles to object properties on page 1202. This allows
you to share styled maps with users who do not have Display Manager (for
example, users of AutoCAD or a previous version of AutoCAD Map 3D).
Publishing Maps
When you publish a map or map book, AutoCAD Map 3D plots it and sends
it to an output format. For example, if you publish your map to a plotter, you
print a copy of the map. If you publish it to DWF, you create a file containing
the plotted map or map book.
Overview of Publishing Maps
You can publish a map to the following output formats:
■Plotters
■DWF (Design Web Format)
■PDF
■A web page
■A packaged format that includes all dependent files (eTransmit)
■MapGuide
■Map books
See also:
■Overview of Publishing and Sharing on page 1123
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Overview of Exporting Attribute Data on page 1213
1126 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Use the following methods to publish your map.
Use this methodTo publish to this format...
File menu ➤ Plot.
See Publishing a Map to a Plotter on page
1127.
Plotter
File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤
Publish to DWF.
See Publishing to DWF on page 1128.
DWF (Design Web Format)
File menu ➤ Plot and choose a PDF
printer driver.
See Publish a Sheet Setin the AutoCAD
Help.
PDF
Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options
➤ AutoCAD Publish To Web.
See Publishing to a Web Page on page 1137.
A Web page
Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options
➤ AutoCAD eTransmit.
See Package a Set of Files for Internet
Transmission in the online Help.
eTransmit
Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options
➤ Publish To Autodesk MapGuide.
See Publishing to MapGuide on page 1140.
MapGuide
See Publishing Map Books on page 1144.Map Books
Publishing a Map to a Plotter
You can publish to a plotter for a printed copy. The steps for publishing to a
plotter are slightly different for a map and for a map book on page 1162, but
you set plotting options the same way for both.
Publishing a Map to a Plotter | 1127
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
To publish to a plotter
1Save the map.
2Click File menu ➤ Plot.
3Choose a printer or plotter and set any options needed.
For information, type “To plot a drawing” in the Search tab of the help.
NOTE If your map contains feature data that you have styled to be
transparent, you can print the transparency by enabling the Plot with
Transparency option. To enable transparency plotting, enter
mapplottransparency at the command prompt, then enter On.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPPLOT
Plots a set of maps with title blocks
At the Command prompt, enter mapplot.Menu
Plot Map Set
Icon
MAPPLOTCommand Line
Plot Map Set dialog boxDialog Box
Publishing to DWF
DWF (Design Web Format™) is an open, secure file format developed by
Autodesk for sharing engineering design data. DWF files are highly compressed,
so they are small and fast to transmit and view.
1128 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
See also:
■Publishing Map Books to DWF on page 1162
■To publish a map to DWF on page 1129
■To publish attribute data to DWF on page 1131
■To prepare a map for publishing to DWF on page 1133
■To publish a map to DWF on page 1135
Overview of Publishing to DWF
DWF (Design Web Format™) is an open, secure file format developed by
Autodesk for sharing engineering design data. DWF files are highly compressed,
so they are small and fast to transmit and view.
DWF files are useful for the following:
■Publishing complex maps that use a variety of feature sources to a compact
file that can be used in the field. All information from the original map,
including stylization, is represented.
■Sharing maps with people who don’t have a copy of AutoCAD Map 3D.
These people can download the free viewer to see the maps.
All layers and styles are published, with no loss of information. If you have
joined data on page 439 to layers in your map, the joined data is published.
You can include graphical elements, including any draped raster files. You
can include attribute data.
If your map has a coordinate system assigned to it, AutoCAD Map 3D includes
that coordinate system for each sheet in the published DWF file.
See also:
■Joining Data to GIS Features on page 439
■Publishing Attribute Data to DWF on page 1130
■Preparing a Map for Publishing to DWF on page 1132
■Overview of Publishing to DWF on page 1129
To publish a map to DWF
1Specify attribute data to include with the published DWF. on page ?
Publishing to DWF | 1129
2Prepare a map for DWF publishing and set publishing options on page
1133.
3Publish the map to DWF. on page 1135
You can also do the following:
■Publish a map book to DWF on page 1162
Publishing Attribute Data to DWF
Before publishing maps to DWF™, you can specify which data to include from
the following categories:
DescriptionDWF Publishing Option
Data attached to drawing objectsobject data on page 179
Information about drawing objects that have been
assigned to classes
classification data on page 109
Spatial data objectsGIS feature sources on page 266
Data from records that have been joined to the data
for spatial data objects
joins on page 439
Data from records or fields that have been linked to
drawing objects
linked records on page 451 from
an external database
Table type, table name, record ID, and the delimiter.
This is useful if your viewer doesn't automatically dis-
play this information.
data table information on page
180
For each category of data, you can choose the individual items to include
when you publish.
1130 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
NOTE If your map has a coordinate system assigned to it, AutoCAD Map 3D
includes that coordinate system for each sheet in the published DWF file, using
the property name "Coordinate System." You cannot choose this as a DWF
Publishing Option, and you cannot change the property name. If you turn off all
publishing options (by clearing the Publish Map Information box), the coordinate
system is not included in the publish operation.
See also:
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
■Overview of Object Data on page ?
■Preparing a Map for Publishing to DWF on page 1132
■Publishing a Map to DWF on page 1135
To publish attribute data to DWF
1Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ DWF Publishing Options.
2Check Publish Map Information.
3Select the properties to include in the DWF.
■To see specific properties, expand any categories that display a plus
sign.
■Check an item with sub-items to select all its sub-items.
To save these properties for future use, click the file icon and specify the
name and location of the file for the exported properties. You can reload
these settings again later by clicking the folder icon.
4Click OK.
NOTE If you clear the Publish Map Information box, the options you checked
remain checked, but they are not included in the publish operation. When
you check Publish Map Information again, the options will be included.
5Set up on page 1133 and publish the map to DWF on page 1135.
Quick Reference
MAPDWFOPTIONS
Publishing to DWF | 1131
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options for publishing to DWF
Click Map ➤ Tools ➤ DWF Publishing Options.
Menu
MAPDWFOPTIONSCommand Line
Preparing a Map for Publishing to DWF
For best results, use the following techniques to prepare your map before
publishing to DWF:
■Set the paper size larger than it is set for normal plotting and fit the map
to the paper size.
If you publish a detailed drawing to a small paper size, Autodesk Design
Review cannot display the detail. Zooming in doesn’t help if the entities
in the map are smaller than the pen weight used to draw lines on the paper.
■Use virtual pens to display details.
To be sure that users can see all the available detail in a map, use
zero-weight pens. These allow users to zoom in without causing the lines
to get thicker. Zero-weight lines display as one pixel wide on screen.
Define pen settings (including weights) using AutoCAD Plot Style Tables,
which are stored in .CTB files. You can see a list of CTB files in the Plot
Style Manager. The .CTB files are used by page setups, which are stored in
.PC3 files. You can see a list of PC3 files in the AutoCAD Page Setup
Manager. The .PC3 files are used by several commands, including PLOT,
PUBLISH, and the Sheet Set Manager. For information about the Plot Style
Tables and the Plot Style Manager, see Manage Plot Style Tables in the
AutoCAD Help.
■Set a high display resolution.
By default, DWF files are produced with a vector grid of 1200 dots per inch
(DPI), which means the files have roughly the same precision and security
as paper.
Specify a DPI setting based on how small your objects are, relative to the
plot scale. The maximum number of virtual DWF dots allowed on a page
is 231 (2,147,483,647 in each dimension). To find the maximum allowed
DPI for your map, divide the maximum number of dots (231) by the
number of inches of the longest paper dimension. For example, for 42"x36"
paper, you can have a maximum DWF DPI of about 51 million
dots-per-inch. However, precision increases file size: a fifty-million-DPI
file is about twice the size of a 1200-DPI file (file size is not linear with
1132 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
resolution). Set the DPI for DWF files using the DWF6 ePlot.PC3 settings.
See Set the DWF File Resolution in the AutoCAD Help.
NOTE While it is safe to use very large DPI values for vectors, increasing
gradient or raster DPI increases your file size exponentially. This can cause
system failure.
■Assign a coordinate system on page 133 to the map.
Make sure that the coordinate system is valid for the data in the map. For
example, a coordinate system for Canada might not support converting
x,y values to latitude and longitude for a map of Thailand.
■Make sure that the graphics fall within the region of the coordinate system.
See also:
■Overview of Publishing to DWF on page 1129
■Publishing Attribute Data to DWF on page 1130
■Publishing a Map to DWF on page 1135
To prepare a map for publishing to DWF
1Display and set up the layout you plan to use for your publishing job.
A layout is an AutoCAD paper space environment where you can specify
the size of your sheet, add a title block, display multiple views, and create
dimensions and notes for your map. For more information about creating
or editing a layout, see Create Multiple-View Drawing Layouts (Paper Space)
in the AutoCAD Help.
2Choose any attributes to include on page 1130 with the published DWF.
3Save the map.
4Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish To DWF.
5In the Publish dialog box, do any of the following:
■For each item in the Sheets to Publish list, click in the Page Setup/3D
DWF field and choose or import a layout from the drop-down list.
Make sure the Status column shows no errors. To exclude a sheet from
the publish operation, right-click it and choose Remove.
Publishing to DWF | 1133
NOTE By default, the model space view and the two default layout views
are included in the list. You can change the settings for the sheets that
are automatically included by clearing the check boxes under Include
When Adding Sheets. You can also save the current sheet list and reload
it for future publishing jobs.
■To specify publishing options, click Publish Options.
To specify the attributes or object data to publish with this map, scroll
down to Map Options and click in the field. To use your DWF
Publishing settings, this field must be set to “Include.” To view or
change the settings on page 1130, click the button labeled “...” Make
sure that the Publish Map Information box in the DWF Publishing
Options dialog box is checked. Otherwise, the coordinate system is
not included in the publish operation.
To publish each display layer in your map to a separate layer in the
DWF, click in the Layer Information field under DWF Data Options
and change it to Include. Design Review can display each resulting
layer independently. Each DWF layer has the same name as its Display
Manager layer, but if multiple layers share the same name, the DWF
layer will have _1 appended to the first duplicate name, _2 to the
second, and so on.
■Click the DWF file option under Publish To.
■Change any other publishing options as desired. For information
about these options, click Help.
6Publish the map to DWF. on page ?
Quick Reference
PUBLISH
Publishes a drawing to DWF format
File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to
DWF
Menu
Publish
Icon
PUBLISHCommand Line
1134 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Publishing a Map to DWF
When you publish to DWF, you create an electronic version of the map that
can be displayed using Autodesk® Design Review, which you can download
from the Autodesk Design Review page on the Autodesk website.
Autodesk Design Review includes the ability to measure, add redline markups,
define and place custom stamps and symbols, convert DWG files to DWF,
convert raster image formats to DWF, add/remove/reorder DWF sheets to
create custom packages, define and save new 3D views, and more.
Publishing Georeferenced DWFs
As long as you have assigned a coordinate system to all the maps in your DWF
file, the publishing operation will automatically convert the coordinate
information to latitude/longitude coordinates. Autodesk Design Review 2008
can automatically navigate to a specific location when you enter coordinates,
and displays coordinates of any location in the map when you move your
mouse over that location. When your computer is integrated with a GPS
device, field workers can center the map to the coordinates provided by the
integrated GPS device on your system, and display the “my coordinates” icon
within the map. GPS devices must use the NMEA 0183 protocol. Earlier versions
of the DWF Viewer do not support georeferenced DWFs. For product
information and a free trial version, refer to the Autodesk Design Review page
on the Autodesk website.
NOTE Use the Publish command to create a georeferenced DWF file. Plotting to
DWF will not work.
See also:
■Overview of Publishing to DWF on page 1129
■Publishing Attribute Data to DWF on page 1130
■Preparing a Map for Publishing to DWF on page 1132
To publish a map to DWF
1Save the map.
2Prepare the map for publishing to DWF. See Preparing a Map for
Publishing to DWF on page 1133.
3Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish To DWF.
Publishing to DWF | 1135
4In the Publish dialog box, click the DWF file option under Publish To.
5Set publishing options and click Publish.
6In the Select DWF File dialog box, specify the name and location for the
DWF output and click Select.
7Indicate whether to save the current sheet set for future publishing
operations.
The status area shows the progress of the publishing operation. When it
is complete, a pop-up message lists the details of the job, including any
warnings or errors that occurred.
NOTE If you are creating a georeferenced DWF and want to use it with a
GPS-enabled device, set the GPS device for NMEA output and WGS84 coordinates.
If you are not sure how to do this, review the documentation that came with your
GPS device.
Quick Reference
PUBLISH
Publishes a drawing to DWF format
File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to
DWF
Menu
Publish
Icon
PUBLISHCommand Line
Publishing to PDF
Recipients of PDF files can view and print them using Adobe® Reader versions
5 or later. You can publish a single PDF file or multiple PDF files containing
separate layouts.
For more information about publishing to PDF, see Publish a Sheet Setin the
AutoCAD Help.
1136 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
See also:
■Overview of Publishing Maps on page 1126
Publishing to a Web Page
You can save your map in HTML format for display as a static web page. The
result is a “snapshot” of the map that cannot be edited in AutoCAD Map 3D,
but can be viewed by any web browser.
You use a wizard to guide you through the publishing process. Once you have
created a web page with this wizard, you can update the information for the
web page if the map file changes.
For more information, see Use the Publish to Web Wizard to Create Web Pages
in the AutoCAD Help.
NOTE You can also use the MapGuide technology to publish map-related data
on the web or on an intranet.
See also:
■Overview of Publishing Maps on page 1126
■Publishing to MapGuide on page 1140
To publish a map as a web page
1Save your map.
2Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ AutoCAD Publish To Web.
3Click Create New Web Page and click Next.
NOTE Once you create a web page with this wizard, you can choose Edit
Existing Web Page. You select the web page to edit, and then you can change
any of the settings for that web page and republish it.
4Specify a name and location for the web page files.
■Type a name for the web page (without any file name extension).
■Specify the parent directory for the web page files by clicking the
button labeled “...” next to the default path. Choose or create a folder
for the files and click Open.
Publishing to a Web Page | 1137
■Type a description for the web page in the space provided.
■Click Next.
5Choose an image type.
As you select an image type from the drop-down list, the description
provides information for that option. The last one you select will be used.
For JPEG and PNG, you can specify an image size.
■Review the image types and select the one you want.
■Select an image size (if appropriate).
■Click Next.
6Choose a page template.
As you select a template from the list, the preview and description update
for that option.
■Review the templates and select the one you want.
■Click Next.
7Choose a formatting theme for the web page.
As you select a theme from the drop-down list, the preview illustrates it.
■Review the themes and select the one you want.
■Click Next.
8Choose whether to use i-drop™ or not and click Next.
The i-drop option lets you post copies of the DWG files that comprise
your map so viewers can access those files.
9Choose the drawings for your web page.
■Specify the map file for the web page by clicking the button labeled
“...” next to the default file name. Choose the file and click Open.
■Choose a layout (model space or one of the layouts you’ve defined
for this map file).
■Type a label and a description to annotate the image on the resulting
web page
■Click Add.
1138 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
If you need to change one of your entries, select it in the Image list,
make your changes in Image Settings, and click Update.
■Click Next.
10 Click Next on the Generate Images page of the wizard to create the web
page.
11 Preview and post the resulting web page.
■Click Preview to see how the web page will look.
If you need to change anything, close the browser window in which
the preview appears and click Back to make your changes.
■Click Post Now to post the web page.
Navigate to the location for the web page and click Save.
■Click Send Email to create an email message that contains a link to
your web page.
12 Click Finish.
Using eTransmit
When you send a map file to another AutoCAD Map 3D user, it is easy to omit
some of the dependent files needed to edit that map effectively. You can use
eTransmit to package all dependent files for a map (for example, SHP, SDF,
and MDB files to which you are connected) and ensure that the recipient has
all the required information. Then you can email the resulting file to the
recipient, along with a report explaining how to use the files.
The eTransmit feature also packages all local edits.
NOTE If your map includes data from a feature store such as an Oracle database,
that data will be available to the recipient, even if the recipient does not have
access to that data store.
For more information, see Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission in the
online Help.
See also:
■Overview of Publishing Maps on page 1126
Using eTransmit | 1139
Publishing to MapGuide
The MapGuide technology lets you publish map-related data on the web or
on an intranet. The MapGuide technology is available as Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2009 and under an open source license. For more information, see
the Mapping & GIS Solutions page on the Autodesk website.
When you publish to MapGuide, all layers, layer definitions, dynamic labels,
queries, filters, and styles (including point, line, raster, and other styles) in
your map are published in the format that MapGuide needs.
NOTE If you are using a previous release (Autodesk MapGuide 2008 or earlier),
you cannot use this command. Instead, export your map to SDF2 format on page
1210 and send the resulting file to your MapGuide server.
Metadata is not included when you publish to MapGuide. You can export
metdata from the Metadata Viewer on page 1250.
MapGuide and Joined Data
If you have joined data to layers that you are publishing, you cannot publish
the joined data with this command. The layer will be published, but the joined
data will not. To publish both, save the layer with the joined data to SDF
(which converts the joined data into a flat table) and then publish the resulting
SDF file. This publishes only the data that was on the server at the time you
created the SDF file. The features are no longer connected to the original
databases and data. For more information about saving a layer to SDF, see
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on page 1210.
MapGuide and SHP or SDF Layers
If your map includes SHP or SDF layers, AutoCAD Map 3D copies the source
files for those layers to the server. If your map includes layers that come from
a central database, AutoCAD Map 3D includes pointers to the original data
stores. If your map includes layers composed of objects from drawing files,
AutoCAD Map 3D copies those objects as high-fidelity DWF files.
See also:
■Sharing Metadata on page 1250
■Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on page 1210
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) on page 323
1140 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on page 1210
■Importing ESRI ShapeFiles on page 333
To publish a map for use with MapGuide
1Save the map.
2Click File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish To Autodesk
MapGuide.
3In the Publish To MapGuide dialog box, specify the URL for the target
website. If the site requires a password, a Connect to Site dialog box
appears. Enter your user name and password.
4Check Overwrite existing resources of the same name if you want to
overwrite such files.
5Check Show map in web browser after publishing if you want to review
the published map immediately.
6Choose a folder for the published files.
7Click Publish. You can monitor the progress and result of the operation
in the status bar.
Quick Reference
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE
Publish to the new MapGuide technology (Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise
2007 or MapGuide Open Source)
File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to Autodesk
MapGuide
Menu
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDECommand Line
Viewing Publish to MapGuide Results
When you publish to Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2009, you can check the
results of the publish operation, including the number of layers that were
Viewing Publish to MapGuide Results | 1141
published and the number that failed. The following types of problems can
occur:
■Layers without assigned coordinate systems may not display correctly in
MapGuide.
■Features from third-party data sources, such as Oracle databases or ArcSDE,
will cause problems if no corresponding data store exists on the MapGuide
server.
■If the program cannot determine the source type for data, or cannot open
the current map or configuration file, some data may not be published.
■Layers that are joined to external data sources are not published.
■If a map with the same name already exists on the server, the publish
operation will fail if you set the MapGuide publishing options to stop the
publish operation in this situation.
■If a folder name or its path contain invalid characters, the publish operation
will fail. Invalid characters are \, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |, &, %, =, and /.
■Situations like a session expiration, a timeout, or the inability of the server
to parse the XML can also cause the publish operation to fail.
To resolve MapGuide publishing errors
1On the Publish to MapGuide Results dialog box, click View Log.
2Examine the log file to see which layers failed and why.
3Resolve the publishing errors in the following ways:
■Errors due to joined data: You can detach the joined data from the
layers before publishing to omit that data but still publish the layers.
If you need to include the joined data, save layers with joined data
to SDF format (which converts the join into a flat table), remove the
layers from the map (turning them off is not sufficient), and publish
the resulting map. Then copy the SDF containing the joined data layer
to the MapGuide server. This places a “static” copy of the data on the
server (the features no longer point to the original databases and data).
You will need to reconstruct the map on the server to add the SDF
layer back in. For information on how to save a layer to SDF, see Saving
or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on page 1210.
■Errors resulting from layers without assigned coordinate systems:
Display the Data Connect dialog box, select the data source whose
layers are missing a coordinate system, and click Edit Coordinate
1142 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Systems. Click Edit and select a coordinate system. Click OK in both
dialog boxes to apply your changes.
■ODBC DSN errors: If feature sources in the map use an ODBC DSN
(Data Source Name) on the local computer, the DSN must exist on
the machine where the server resides, and it must have the same name
as the DSN on the local machine.
■Errors related to missing provider components on the server: If you
publish a map layer from a provider that requires software or
components, such as an Oracle database, ArcSDE data source, SQL
server, or a third-party database provider you set up, you must install
that software on the MapGuide server and configure it correctly. For
example, if you publish a layer from an Oracle database, you must
install the Oracle client on the server.
NOTE MapGuide Enterprise installs some provider support automatically,
while the open source version does not. However, in both cases, you will
need to install components for some providers.
■Errors due to a failure to determine the source data type or read the
configuration file: These errors are usually the result of using data
from third-party FDO providers. Contact Autodesk technical support,
or the support group for the FDO provider you are using.
■Errors due to existing files on the server: If you specified that this
publish operation should stop if it encounters existing files with the
same names as new ones, and if those files exist, you can either remove
the existing files from the server or change the publishing options to
overwrite the existing files. For more information, see Publishing to
MapGuide on page 1140.
■Errors due to invalid characters: Rename the offending files or folders
to avoid invalid characters.
4Republish.
Quick Reference
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE
Publish to the new MapGuide technology (Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise
2007 or MapGuide Open Source)
Viewing Publish to MapGuide Results | 1143
File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to Autodesk
MapGuide
Menu
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDECommand Line
Publishing Map Books
■To create and publish a map book on page 1145
■To set up a map book template on page 1148
■To identify layout placeholders on page 1150
■To create a map book on page 1151
■To rebuild a map book on page 1152
■To import a plot map set on page 1153
Overview of Map Books
A map book divides your map into multiple “tiles” and displays each tile on
a separate page. Picture a grid overlaying your map. Each section of the grid
represents a tile. Once you create a map book, you can publish the entire map
or selected tiles to a plotter or to DWF.
Each map book is associated with an AutoCAD sheet set. For more information
about AutoCAD sheet sets, see Create and Manage a Sheet Set in the AutoCAD
Help.
NOTE If a map book becomes dissociated from its sheet set (for example, if you
rename the map file after creating a map book), you will be prompted to regenerate
the sheet set when you select an existing map book or create a new map book.
You can choose the sheet set from the older version of the map file, or you can
create a new one. To regenerate the sheet set at any other time, right-click the
map book (on the Map Book tab of the Task Pane) and choose Rebuild Sheet Set.
When you package and send your map files to a recipient using eTransmit, the
sheet set is packaged with the map file and your recipient does not have to
regenerate it.
To create a map book, you must first set up a map book template. You can
start with a sample template and adapt it to your needs. When the template
is complete, you generate the map book. You can update the original map at
any time and regenerate the map book without changing the template, or
you can change the template and regenerate the map book. The new map
book will reflect your changes.
1144 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Map book with tiles listed by row and column
You can create more than one map book for a map, but only one can be
current at a time.
See also:
■Overview of Publishing and Sharing on page 1123
To create and publish a map book
1Set up a map book template on page 1147.
2Identify layout placeholders on page 1150.
3Create a map book on page 1151.
4View or edit the map book tiles on page 1158.
5Publish the map book on page 1161.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKCREATE
Creates a map book to publish your data
In the Map Classic workspace, Click Map ➤ Map Book.
Menu
MAPBOOKCREATECommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map
Book.
Task Pane
Publishing Map Books | 1145
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
Creates a new map book from a previously saved map books settings file
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGSCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map
Book from Settings.
Task Pane
Select Map Book Settings dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
Edits the settings of an existing map book
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGSCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click Tools ➤ Edit Settings
and Rebuild Map Book.
Task Pane
Edit Map Book dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
Imports settings from a map plot set
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSETCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map
Book from Plot Set.
Task Pane
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
Names the viewports and element placeholders in the layout template
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDERCommand Line
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
Saves map book settings to an external file
1146 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGSCommand Line
Save Map Book Settings dialog boxDialog Box
Setting Up a Map Book Template
Every map book requires a template that specifies printer settings (such as
paper size and the printer driver to use) and defines the size and position of
elements on the page (for example, the legend, title block, and map tiles).
A template can contain one or more layouts. If it contains multiple layouts,
you must specify the one to use for a particular map book.
Once you define the map book template and save your map, you can publish
the map book to a plotter or to a DWF file.
Viewports
In your map book template, each element appears within a viewport, which
is similar to a frame on a web page. A viewport has a shape and a position on
the page, and you specify the type of information that appears within it. You
must include a main viewport in your map book template. Other viewports
are optional and can include the following:
■Tileview viewport displays the corresponding tile, and determines the shape
of that tile. Templates for map books must include a tileview viewport.
■Keyview viewport displays a thumbnail view of the entire area included in
the map book. You can create a simplified view of the mapped area to use
in this viewport, save that view to a separate drawing file, and then link
the viewport to that drawing. You can display a different linked file in this
viewport, instead of the thumbnail. For example, you can save a detail of
the map in a separate file and use the keyview viewport to display it as an
inset. You can also display selected AutoCAD layers for the entire map.
NOTE When you generate the map book, you can choose any of the above
alternatives, or you can choose to omit the keyview viewport altogether.
■Legend viewport displays a legend. and specifies where it will appear in the
map book. If you created a display legend for your map, you can select it
for this viewport, or you can select an area of your map to use as a legend.
This viewport is optional.
Publishing Map Books | 1147
■Adjacent arrows are blocks at each edge of the tile that point to and identify
the adjacent tile. Each arrow has a property that specifies the adjacent tile
in that direction and displays the name of that tile within the arrow. You
can specify the text that appears within the arrowheads. When you generate
the map book, you can choose a drawing for an adjacent block. That
drawing replaces the original adjacent block defined in the template layout.
■Title block displays a defined DWG block that can include title information,
such as your company or group name and the name of the map. Many
organizations have standard title blocks to insert in this element. You can
define certain attributes of the title block from within your template. Title
blocks defined in the sample templates include a frame that surrounds the
entire tile. When you generate the map book, you can choose a drawing
for the title block. That drawing replaces the original title block contents
defined in the template layout.
Map book template
See also:
■Overview of Publishing and Sharing on page 1123
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
To set up a map book template
1Open an existing map book template. Map book templates for a variety
of paper sizes are included in the Templates folder. Choose from 8.5x11,
8.5x14, 11x17, A3, or A4.
2Do the following:
■Right-click a layout tab and choose Rename. Type a new name for
this layout.
1148 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
NOTE If you don’t see the layout tabs, click Setup menu ➤ AutoCAD
Options ➤ Display tab, check Display Layout and Model Tabs, and
create a new layout.
■Right-click the renamed layout tab. Choose Page Setup Manager to
specify plotter and paper information.
NOTE This information will be used every time you publish your map
book to a plotter. You cannot change these settings at print time. For
more information about this dialog box, type “Page Setup Manager” in
the Search tab of the help.
3Resize the viewports on the layout as needed:
■To resize a viewport, click it to select it. Click and drag a corner grip.
■If you don’t want to use one of the viewports that appear on the
template, select it and press the Delete key on your keyboard.
4Customize the viewports on the template as desired:
■Double-click the outside frame of the title block to change its attributes
or text properties. Items that display pound signs (###) are variables.
Right-click a variable to change its value.
■Double-click an arrow block to change its text properties.
5When the elements appear as you want them, you must Identify the
layout placeholders on page 1150.
6After identifying the placeholders, save the map file as a DWT (AutoCAD
Drawing Template) file.
NOTE You can also create a map book layout in an existing map, and use that
map as your map book template. Be sure to rename the layout tab that you plan
to use for map books. You can have multiple layout templates in a map.
Quick Reference
PAGESETUP
Displays the Page Setup Manager for a layout
Publishing Map Books | 1149
File menu ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Page Setup
Manager
Menu
PAGESETUPCommand Line
Identifying Layout Placeholders
You must identify each element in your map book template as a placeholder
for a particular type of information. For example, you select the viewport
intended for the title and identify it as a title block placeholder.
See also:
■Setting Up a Map Book Template on page 1147
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
To identify layout placeholders
1Select the layout tab you defined for the map book.
2On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click Tools ➤ Identify Template
Placeholders.
3Click an item in the Layout Placeholders list. For example, click Main
Viewport. Then click Select Placeholders.
4In your layout, click the outline of the viewport to use for the item you
selected. For example, for the Main viewport, click the viewport that will
display the map tile.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each of the following elements in your layout:
■Main viewport
■Keyview viewport
■Legend viewport
■Adjacent arrow blocks
■Title block
6When you have identified all the elements, click Close.
1150 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
Names the viewports and element placeholders in the layout template
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDERCommand Line
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Map Book
You can create a map book from a map you styled in Display Manager or from
objects in model space.
By default, the map book uses the current map in the Display Manager,
whether you have saved it or not. If you specify the model space instead, the
map book will show the current contents of the model space. You can also
choose a map you saved in the Display Manager.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Setting Up a Map Book Template on page 1147
To create a map book
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, , click New ➤ Map Book.
2In the Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box on page 1561, select an
option under each of the following and enter the required information:
■Source
■Sheet Template
■Tiling Scheme
■Naming Scheme
■Sheet Set
3Optionally, you can select options under the following:
■Key
Publishing Map Books | 1151
■Legend
4Click Preview to see a preview of the tile outlines on the map.
5Click Generate.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKCREATE
Creates a map book to publish your data
In the Map Classic workspace, Click Map ➤ Map Book.
Menu
MAPBOOKCREATECommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map
Book.
Task Pane
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog boxDialog Box
Rebuilding a Map Book
If you make changes to a map book template, you must rebuild the map book
to apply the changes.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Setting Up a Map Book Template on page 1147
To rebuild a map book
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book to rebuild.
2Right-click the map book name and click Rebuild.
1152 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Importing Plot Map Sets
You can import settings from plot map sets that you created in previous releases
of the software.
See also:
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Map Book Settings on page 1153
To import a plot map set
1Open the file that contains the plot map set.
2On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book From
Plot Set.
3Select the plot map set to convert. Click OK.
4In the Create Map Book dialog box, edit the imported plot map set
information as desired. Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
Imports settings from a map plot set
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSETCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map
Book from Plot Set.
Task Pane
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog boxDialog Box
Map Book Settings
■Overview of Map Book Settings on page 1154
■Saving Map Book Settings on page 1155
■Creating New Map Books from Saved Settings on page 1156
Publishing Map Books | 1153
■Editing Map Book Settings on page 1157
■To save map book settings on page 1155
■To create a new map book from saved settings on page 1156
■To edit map book settings on page 1157
Overview of Map Book Settings
You can save and reuse the settings you specified for a particular map book.
See also:
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Creating New Map Books from Saved Settings on page 1156
■Editing Map Book Settings on page 1157
Use this method...To do this...
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane,
right-click the map book name. Click Save
Settings.
See Saving Map Book Settings on page 1155
Save map book settings
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane,
click New ➤ Map Book From Settings.
See Creating New Map Books from Saved
Settings on page 1156
Use saved map book settings
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane,
select a map book and click Tools ➤ Edit
Settings And Rebuild Map Book.
See Editing Map Book Settings on page 1157
Edit saved map book settings
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
Saves map book settings to an external file
1154 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGSCommand Line
Save Map Book Settings dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
Creates a new map book from a previously saved map books settings file
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGSCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map
Book from Settings.
Task Pane
Select Map Book Settings dialog boxDialog Box
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
Edits the settings of an existing map book
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGSCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click Tools ➤ Edit Settings
and Rebuild Map Book.
Task Pane
Edit Map Book dialog boxDialog Box
Saving Map Book Settings
Map book settings are automatically saved in the map file as soon as you create
the map book. You can save these settings in a separate MBS (Map Book
Settings) file to use with other map books.
See also:
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Creating New Map Books from Saved Settings on page 1156
To save map book settings
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book whose settings
you want to use.
2Right-click the map book name. Click Save Settings.
Publishing Map Books | 1155
3Give the file a unique name.
4Click Save.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
Saves map book settings to an external file
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGSCommand Line
Save Map Book Settings dialog boxDialog Box
Creating New Map Books from Saved Settings
If you saved the settings for a map book in a Map Book Settings file, you can
use those settings for a new map book.
See also:
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Saving Map Book Settings on page 1155
To create a new map book from saved settings
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book From
Settings.
2Navigate to a map book settings (MBS) file and open it.
3In the Create Map Book dialog box, change the settings as desired.
4Click Generate.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
Creates a new map book from a previously saved map books settings file
1156 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGSCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click New ➤ Map
Book from Settings.
Task Pane
Select Map Book Settings dialog boxDialog Box
Editing Map Book Settings
You can edit the settings of an existing map book.
See also:
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Saving Map Book Settings on page 1155
■Rebuilding a Map Book on page 1152
To edit map book settings
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book whose settings
you want to change, and click Tools ➤ Edit Settings And Rebuild Map
Book.
2In the Edit Map Book dialog box, change the settings as desired.
3Click Generate.
Quick Reference
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
Edits the settings of an existing map book
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGSCommand Line
In the Map Book task pane, click Tools ➤ Edit Settings
and Rebuild Map Book.
Task Pane
Edit Map Book dialog boxDialog Box
Publishing Map Books | 1157
Viewing and Editing Map Books
You can view or edit individual tiles and their corresponding layouts.
■Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles on page 1158
■Viewing a Map Book on page 1159
■Viewing Map Book or Tile Properties on page 1160
■Viewing Tiles in Model Space on page 1160
■Viewing Layouts on page 1161
■To view a map book on page 1159
■To hide all map books on page 1159
■To view map book or tile properties on page 1160
■To view a tile on page 1161
■To view several tiles on page 1161
■To view all tiles on page 1161
■To view a layout on page 1161
Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles
Map books divide a single map into a set of tiles and display each tile on a
separate map book page. You use a template to specify the layout of the pages.
You can view and change individual tiles or layouts for existing map books.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
Use the following methods to view and edit map book tiles.
Use this method...To view or edit this...
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane,
select the map book to view from the Map
An entire map book
Book list. See Viewing a Map Book on page
1159.
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane,
right-click a map book or tile and click
Map book or tile properties
1158 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Use this method...To view or edit this...
Properties. See Viewing Map Book or Tile
Properties on page 1160.
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane,
right-click a map book or tile and click
Map book tiles in model space
Zoom Tiles. See Viewing Tiles in Model
Space on page 1160.
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane,
right-click a tile and click Zoom Layout.
See Viewing Layouts on page 1161.
Map book tile layouts
Viewing a Map Book
When you open a map containing one or more map books, none of the map
books is current until you select one. When you select a map book, you
automatically zoom to its extents and see the tile outlines. If the map book is
based on a display map, you will see the stylization associated with that display
map.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles on page 1158
To view a map book
■On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book to view from
the Map Book list.
To hide all map books
■On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select <None> from the Map Book
list.
Publishing Map Books | 1159
NOTE If the map book is based on a display map, this will hide only the tile
outlines. To turn off stylization, use the Display Manager.
Viewing Map Book or Tile Properties
You can view basic properties about map books or tiles. In the Map Book
Properties dialog box on page 1564, you can view the map’s name, scale,
orientation, coordinate system, and number of tiles. In the Tile Properties
dialog box on page 1565, you can view a tile’s name and the numbers of its
adjacent tiles.
NOTE The map book properties are strings, for use as field values in sheets. They
do not change the actual properties of the map book.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles on page 1158
To view map book or tile properties
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, do one of the following:
■Right-click the map book name.
■Right-click a tile name.
2Click Properties.
Viewing Tiles in Model Space
You can view selected tiles in model space.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles on page 1158
1160 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To view a tile
■On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click a tile name. Click Zoom
Tile.
To view several tiles
■Select multiple tile names. Right-click one of the selected tiles. Click Zoom
Tiles.
To view all tiles
■Right-click the map book containing the tiles. Choose Zoom Tiles.
Viewing Layouts
You can view layouts for selected tiles, one at a time.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Overview of Viewing and Editing Map Book Tiles on page 1158
To view a layout
■On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click a tile name. Click Zoom
Layout.
Publishing Map Books
You can publish a map book to a DWF file for electronic distribution or to a
plotter for a printed map book based on the current plot settings.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
Publishing Map Books | 1161
■Overview of Publishing to DWF on page 1129
■Publishing a Map to a Plotter on page 1127
■To publish a map book to DWF on page 1162
■To publish a map book to a plotter on page 1163
Publishing Map Books to DWF
The steps for publishing a map to DWF on page 1128 and publishing a map
book to DWF are slightly different, but you set DWF Publishing Options the
same way for both.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Overview of Publishing to DWF on page 1129
■Publishing Attribute Data to DWF on page 1130
To publish a map book to DWF
1Save the map.
2Set up options for publishing attribute data on page 1130.
3On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book to publish,
and click Tools ➤ Publish To DWF.
4In the Select DWF File dialog box, choose a name and location for the
DWF file and click Select.
Publishing Map Books to a Plotter
You can publish to a plotter for a printed copy. The steps for publishing a map
to a plotter on page 1127 and publishing a map book to a plotter are slightly
different. The plotter and plotting options are specified in your layout for this
map book, so the map book is sent to the plotter as soon as you choose the
command.
1162 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Publishing a Map to a Plotter on page 1127
To publish a map book to a plotter
1Save the map.
2Make sure you have set up the printer or plotter you want to use.
3On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, select the map book to publish,
and click Tools ➤ Publish To Plotter.
Managing Map Books and Tiles
■To rename a map book or tile on page 1163
■To delete a map book or tile on page 1164
Rename Map Books or Tiles
You can rename entire map books or individual tiles.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Delete Map Books or Tiles on page 1164
To rename a map book or tile
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, do one of the following:
■Right-click the map book to rename.
■Right-click the tile to rename.
2Click Rename.
Publishing Map Books | 1163
3Type the new name.
4Press Enter.
NOTE Renaming a tile does not rename its associated layout.
Delete Map Books or Tiles
You can delete tiles from a map book or delete the entire map book.
See also:
■Overview of Map Books on page 1144
■Creating a Map Book on page 1151
■Rename Map Books or Tiles on page 1163
To delete a map book or tile
1On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, do one of the following:
■Right-click the map book to delete.
■Right-click the tile to delete.
2Click Delete.
3Click Yes.
WARNING You cannot undo the deletion.
Converting and Exporting
To convert or export drawing objects
■To prepare your data for export on page 1168
■To export drawing objects to other file formats on page 1168
■Before moving drawing data to SDF on page 1174
■To specify the name for the index property used in export on page 1175
■To move data into SDF format on page 1175
■To export DWG data to SDF2 format on page 1176
1164 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation on page
1179
■To export to Arc/INFO on page 1179
■To include all object types when exporting drawing objects to ESRI SHP
format on page 1183
■To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation on page
1183
■To export to SHP format on page 1183
■To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation on page
1184
■To export to MapInfo MIF/MID on page 1184
■To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation on page
1186
■To export to MapInfo TAB on page 1186
■To change the seed file for a single file on page 1188
■To change the default seed file on page 1189
■To export to DGN on page 1189
■To verify language encoding settings for export to GML on page 1190
■To export to GML on page 1190
■To export to VML on page 1191
■To export multiple feature classes on page 1192
■To combine multiple layers into one feature class on page 1194
■To change the class names that are assigned automatically on page 1194
■To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation on page
1196
■To export to SHP Multi-class on page 1196
■To map fields when exporting to Shape Multiclass on page 1196
■To create polygons when exporting to SHP Multiclass on page 1196
■To export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified on
the Data tab. on page 1197
■To map drawing attributes to feature class properties on page 1197
■To map AutoCAD drawing attribute values to feature class property values
on page 1198
■To export text enclosed in a polyline as attribute data on page 1199
■To export polygons from a polygon topology on page 1201
■To create a DXF file on page 1202
■To save a styled map to DWG format on page 1203
■To export DWG data to Oracle: on page 1204
■To export DWG data to ESRI ArcSDE: on page 1205
■To save drawing objects in an image format on page 1207
■To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import
method on page 1209
Converting and Exporting | 1165
■To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the Data
Connect method on page 1209
■To export layers in SDF format on page 1212
■To save a layer’s styles and pointers to its data on page 1212
Overview of Converting and Exporting
You can share all or some of the drawing objects in your map with users of
other software programs by exporting to another format. You can print or
export attribute data and metadata separately. The Convert DWG To command
on the File menu affects DWG objects only. Spatial data is ignored. However,
you can export a Display Manager layer on page 1210 containing spatial data
to SDF format, or you can use Bulk Copy on page 522 to convert features from
one geospatial format to another.
When you convert or export your drawing objects to other formats, you can
convert or export not only the objects themselves, but also data associated
with the objects. In addition, AutoCAD Map 3D can automatically perform a
coordinate conversion on the objects as they are converted or exported.
During conversion or export, AutoCAD Map 3D will copy objects from the
active map to the specified file or location. To convert or export objects from
a source DWG file, query those objects into the active map before you begin
the export.
Using Saved Settings
If you saved export settings (from Autodesk Map Release 4.5 or later), you can
reload those settings.
Selecting Drawing Objects
You can automatically select all drawing objects, or you can manually select
the ones you want. In addition, you can export drawing objects on selected
layers or in selected classes. You can also export drawing objects from a polygon
topology.
The status bar tells you how many objects are currently selected and how
many are filtered out. In addition, you can preview the objects that will be
exported.
1166 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Data
You can export data associated with drawing objects, including object data,
block attributes, linked external data, object properties, and topology data.
You can also map drawing attributes to feature class properties during export.
Choose the data you want on the Data or Feature Class tab of the Export dialog
box.
NOTE You cannot export metadata using the Export dialog box. Instead, export
metadata from the Metadata Viewer. See Sharing Metadata on page 1250.
When you export external data, two options are available:
■If the external file format does not support external databases, export the
entire record associated with each linked object. The information from
the record is attached to the exported object as attribute data.
■If the external file format supports external database files, export only the
key field.
Text
DWG text elements are exported as points (using the insertion point of the
text). If your text elements are MTEXT objects, and you want to preserve the
actual text as well as text properties such as rotation and style, you must specify
the data attributes during export. If you then import the resulting file, you
will have AutoCAD points with AutoCAD Map 3D object data. You can use
the AutoCAD Map 3D ADE Query feature to alter the point objects and display
them as text, using the attributes to define the text value, rotation and style.
When you export to SDF or SHP and then connect to the resulting file in
Display Manager, you can display the point and label it using any of the
attributes that were defined.
Coordinate Conversion
If the active map has a coordinate system assigned to it, you can convert
objects from that coordinate system to a different coordinate system.
NOTE The settings specified in the UNITS command do not effect the export
process. The UNITS command affects only the way data is displayed; it does not
affect the coordinate values stored with the objects themselves.
Overview of Converting and Exporting | 1167
Stylized Objects
For maps saved or exported from the Display Manager, AutoCAD Map 3D
saves or exports original object properties regardless of any map stylizations,
except for text. Text entities created by text stylizations are saved or exported.
To avoid saving or exporting text entities, turn off any text stylization before
exporting your data. For more information, see Overview of the Display
Manager on page 535.
You can export stylized objects to DWG format. See Exporting Maps to DWG
Format on page 1202.
See also:
■Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format on page 1175
■Migrating DWG Data to GIS on page 530
■Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties on page 1197
■Converting Data From Other Formats to Drawing Objects on page 315
To prepare your data for export
■To convert or export objects from source drawings, query those objects
into the current map.
■To perform a coordinate transformation during export, be sure you have
assigned a coordinate system to the map.
To export drawing objects to other file formats
1Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
NOTE If you are exporting to Autodesk SDF, you can also choose File ➤
Convert DWG To ➤ Autodesk SDF . You can export to SDF 3 using either
command.
2In the Export Location dialog box, select the file format and location for
the exported files. For information on the file format choices, see
Supported Formats on page 1172. Click OK.
3In the Export dialog box on page 1440, specify how to export objects. To
use settings that you stored previously, click Load and select the profile
containing the settings.
1168 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
4On the Selection tab, specify the objects to export.
■To select a subset of objects, click Select manually and choose either
Select Objects or Quick Select.
■To filter the selection to export only objects on specific layers or in
specific classes, specify the layers and classes to include.
■To export polygons from a polygon topology, select the topology.
■To preview the objects that will be exported, click Preview filtered
selection.
5On the Data or Feature Class tab, click Select Attributes and select the
data to export with the objects.
TIP If you are exporting data from an external database, you can export the
entire record from the database or just the key fields. Because the key field
values are stored in the map, choosing the key field (listed under Link
Templates) makes the export faster.
6On the Feature Class or Options tab, select the options you want.
■To perform a coordinate conversion, you must have a coordinate
system assigned to the map on page 137.
■Check Treat closed polylines as polygons (if it is available) unless you
want only polygon objects to be exported as polygons.
■If you are exporting to Oracle on page 1203, Autodesk SDF on page 1173,
or ESRI ArcSDE on page 1179, specify how classes will be created on the
Feature Class tab. See Exporting to Multiple Classes on page 1191.
If you are exporting to Shape Multiclass on page 1194, your choices on
the Options tab and on the Data tab work together to determine how
attributes are assigned to the exported feature classes. See Exporting
To Shape Multiclass on page 1194.
■If you are exporting to DGN version 7 or 8, click Map Layers To DGN
Levels to map each layer in the current map to a level in the DGN
drawing. Click Map Layers To Levels to specify names for the DGN
levels. Closed polylines are always exported as polygons; they will be
shapes in the DGN v8 file. You cannot clear the Treat Closed Polylines
as Polygons check box.
■Click Driver Options to set options specific to the export format you
specified. For information on driver options, see the following:
■Exporting To ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages on page 1178
Overview of Converting and Exporting | 1169
■Exporting to ESRI ShapeFile on page 1180
■Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) on page 1189
■Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 on page
1186
■Exporting To Shape Multiclass on page 1194
■Exporting To VML (Vector Markup Language) on page 1190
While other formats are supported, they do not have driver options.
7Click OK to begin the export process.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
Supported Objects
The following object types are exported:
■Arc
■Attribute Definition
■Text
■Block Reference (exports as point)
■Circle
■Ellipse
1170 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■Face
■Hatch
■Line
■MLine
■MText
■Point
■Polygon
■Polyline
■2dPolyline
■3dPolyline
■Shape
■Solid
■Spline
■Trace
■Xref (exports as point)
Unsupported Object Types
The following object types are not exported:
■Attribute
■Body
■Dimension
■Gradient fill for polygon objects (MPolygons)
■Image
■Leader
■OleFrame
■Ole2Frame
■Proxy objects (from other applications)
Supported Objects | 1171
■Ray
■Region
■Viewport
■Xline
See also:
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
Supported Formats
The following formats are supported for export:
■Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) on page 1173
■Autodesk SDF2 on page 1175 (MapGuide 6.5 and earlier)
■ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages on page 1178
■ESRI ArcSDE on page 1179
■ESRI ShapeFile on page 1180
■GML (Geographic Markup Language) on page 1189 (version 3.1.1 )
■MapInfo MIF/MID on page 1183
■MapInfo TAB on page 1185
■MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 on page 1186
■Shape Multiclass on page 1194
■VML (Vector Markup Language) on page 1190
■Image Formats on page 1207
See also:
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format on page 1175
■Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store on page 1203
1172 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■Exporting Maps to DWG Format on page 1202
Exporting To Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File)
SDF is a native Autodesk file-based geospatial format that is optimized for
storing large, classified data sets.
SDF is similar to SHP format in that it contains both spatial data and attribute
data. However, unlike SHP, it stores both types of data in a single file rather
than a set of files.
When drawing data is stored as SDF, you can use Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2007 to style and publish the data to the Internet. You can also
publish map data directly to MapGuide on page 1140, without exporting to SDF.
Versions
The current version, which works with AutoCAD Map 3D and Autodesk
MapGuide Enterprise, is SDF version 3. AutoCAD Map 3D refers to this version
as “SDF.”
SDF version 2 is still supported by MapGuide 6.5 (and earlier releases), and
AutoCAD Map 3D can import and export SDF 2 using a separate import/export
interface.
Advantages
SDF has the following advantages over DWG:
■It stores and manages an order of magnitude more data than DWG
■It is very fast, allowing Autodesk applications, such as AutoCAD Map 3D
and MapGuide, to read and display tens of thousands of features per second.
■It provides the power of a database without the overhead and cost of a full
relational database management system (RDBMS) such as SQL Server or
Oracle.
■An SDF file can store a single feature class, or it can store multiple feature
classes.
■It is easy to manage, providing access to the database schema.
Exporting To Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) | 1173
Exporting
If you export to an existing file, you can choose to overwrite that file or append
the new data to it. Overwriting destroys the existing file and creates a new
one. Appending will add the data in the current export operation to the
existing data without deleting any existing data.
When you append, any existing classes in the target file remain unchanged.
New feature classes and new properties for existing feature classes will be
added.
If the target file contains properties for which the source file has no values,
the resulting file may show those properties as being null or as having default
values, depending on what was specified in the schema.
If the source data contains classes that are not in the target file, those classes
will be created and will have the properties of the source data.
NOTE An index property is added to each feature class when you export. You can
specify the name for this property in the MapExport.ini file on page 240.
A message reports on the export results. Because some entities belong to
multiple feature classes, the number of entities exported may not match the
number of SDF entities created. The message will tell you how many DWG
entities were exported more than once. If you base the exported feature classes
on object data or link templates, an entity may be exported more than once
if more than one data table is attached or linked to it.
Driver Options
SDF has no export driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■Before moving drawing data to SDF on page 1174
■To specify the name for the index property used in export on page 1175
■To move data into SDF format on page 1175
Before moving drawing data to SDF
■Clean up any geometry errors. on page 1328
1174 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Use the AutoCAD Map 3D cleanup tools to correct any geometry errors
introduced during drafting, digitizing, or converting the data before you
export it.
■Add attribute data to objects on page 859 or classify on page 836 the drawing
(DWG) objects you are exporting.
If you create object data tables within a map and add attribute information
or linked objects to data in an external data source, such as a database,
you can export those attributes. If you classify objects, you can use those
classes as the basis for your export.
■Decide how to export the data to SDF.
You can export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified
on the Feature Class tab. To do this, click Create a single class from all
selected objects and type a name for that class.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time on page 1191 and combine
the data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Feature
Class tab to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
To specify the name for the index property used in export
■Specify a different name in the MapExport.ini file on page 240, under the
FDO_SDF entry, where you see Driver:fdo_index_column.
To move data into SDF format
■Export to SDF on page 1166 – Exports drawing objects to SDF (version 3).
■Export to SDF 2 on page 1175 – Imports and exports the data in the previous
SDF format to and from DWG.
■Bulk Copy on page 522 – Moves data to and from SDF (version 3) and other
geospatial data stores.
Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format
Export drawing objects to SDF 2 format to use as a map layer in Autodesk
MapGuide version 6.5 and earlier.
NOTE This format is not readable by Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007 or
MapGuide Open Source. You can publish to Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007
fomat on page 1140.
Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format | 1175
Along with the objects, you can export data attached to the objects (such as
object data, external data, attribute data, or properties) to use for the following
SDF fields:
■SDF Name — the popup label
■Key — the link to an external database
■URL — the embedded web link that jumps to another web page
Export only one type of object — point, line, polygon, or annotation — to an
SDF file. The associated SIF file is a spatial index format (SIF) file.
Use the coordinate system set in AutoCAD Map 3D or export the file using a
different global coordinate system. You can also define your own coordinate
system for the translation.
After creating the SDF 2 file, you can use Autodesk MapGuide Author and
Autodesk MapGuide Server to produce the files needed to create and deliver
web-viewable maps.
For information about Autodesk MapGuide SDF and SIF files, refer to the
Autodesk MapGuide SDF Loader Help.
See also:
■Publishing to MapGuide on page 1140
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) on page 323
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Importing Autodesk SDF 2 on page 325
To export DWG data to SDF2 format
1Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ As SDF2 (Autodesk MapGuide 6.x).
2In the Export dialog box, specify a location and file name. Click Save.
3On the Selection tab of the Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box on
page 1318, under SDF Type, specify the type of data to export:
■Point — Points and inserts.
■Line — Lines, arcs (segmented), polylines, and plines with bulges
(segmented).
■Polygon — Closed polylines and circles.
1176 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■Annotation — Text and mtext (mtext exports a single point object).
4On the Selection tab, specify how to select objects for the export.
5On the Options tab, under SDF Description, type a description for the
SDF file to which you're exporting data.
6Under Data Expressions, you can create expressions as follows:
■Use the Key option to define an expression to act as the link between
the SDF file and a field in an external database.
■Use the Name option to define an expression for the SDF Name field.
■Use the URL option to define an expression to act as a URL (Uniform
Resource Locator).
To create an expression using data attached to the object, such as object
data, external data, attribute data, or property values, click… to select
from a list of available data and properties.
NOTE When exporting a map to SDF format, if you use an expression that
references a SQL value, the export process will require a large amount of
swap space. It may be necessary to partition your data into smaller sections.
7Under Coordinate Conversion, select Convert To. To specify a coordinate
conversion as part of the file export, enter the coordinate system code.
8Under Other, select Create Key Index File (KIF) to create a KIF file along
with the SDF file.
9To save your settings as a profile, click Save.
10 Click OK to begin exporting the data.
Quick Reference
MAP2SDF
Exports an SDF 2 format file for use with Autodesk MapGuide, versions 6.5
and earlier.
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Autodesk SDF2
(MapGuide6.x...).
Menu
MAP2SDFCommand Line
Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format | 1177
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog boxDialog Box
Exporting To ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages
AutoCAD Map 3D supports Arc/INFO version 7.2, 7.3, and 8.x, and E00.
ESRI Arc/INFO stores coverages on your hard disk as a directory of files. The
main coverage directory, called the workspace, always includes one subdirectory
called INFO. Each coverage is written to its own subdirectory. If you don't
have a coverage workspace on your computer, AutoCAD Map 3D creates one
for you when you export to an Arc/INFO coverage.
Arc/INFO uses elevation values but they are stored in the coverage as a field
in the attribute table. Select the Elevation property to export elevation.
When exporting, the exported file is stored in memory before it is written to
the file. If you run into problems exporting a large drawing, increase the size
of your virtual memory.
PC coverages are single precision. UNIX coverages can be single or double
precision. AutoCAD Map 3D always exports double-precision coverages,
although it does import single- or double-precision coverages.
Map objects such as arcs, splines, and circles are segmented in the coverage.
You can change the settings used for segmentation by editing the mapimport.ini
file.
Exporting Restrictions
When specifying a coverage name, use fewer than 14 characters and don't use
periods in the name. If you use double-byte characters, you can use 6 or fewer
characters.
If you specify a directory name that already exists and it contains a log or text
file, those files may be overwritten.
Arc/INFO also supports a transfer format called E00 which writes all
information out to a single file, which can become quite large.
When exporting text or mtext to Arc/Info Coverages, the resulting objects in
the Coverage data are annotation. AutoCAD Map 3D does not support attribute
data for annotation. As a result any data linked to text objects will be lost
during the export process. The text value itself will be maintained.
1178 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Driver Options
When exporting to E00 or coverage format, you can set the following options:
DescriptionOption
Select Double or Single. The default is Double.Coverage Precision
Select None, Partial, or Full.Compression (available only for E00)
Select Create or Bypass. The default is Create.Linear Topology
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To change the settings used for segmentation on page 1183
■To export to Arc/INFO on page 1179
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
■Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To export to Arc/INFO
■Use the Export instructions. on page 1166
Exporting to ESRI ArcSDE
You can export data from your DWG to a connected ESRI ArcSDE database.
Exporting
You cannot append data to an ESRI ArcSDE data store when exporting from
AutoCAD Map 3D. You must map your DWG data to the existing database
schemas.
Exporting to ESRI ArcSDE | 1179
Driver Options
ESRI ArcSDE has no export driver options.
See also:
■Bringing In Features from ArcSDE on page 274
Exporting to ESRI ShapeFile
AutoCAD Map 3D supports up to ArcView version 3.2 and 8.x.
About SHP Files
ESRI SHP files store both geometry and attributes (data) for features. A single
shape can have as many as five physical files with the same filename, but
different file extensions:
■.shp— Geometric data. Data for multiple points, polylines, and polygons
can be stored in one SHP file, but each SHP file can store only one type of
geometry. For example, a line SHP file can contain data for rivers, roads,
and pipes.
■.shx — A geometric index to the map features, which can be used by some
applications to find features in disparate sections of a large map.
■.dbf— Attribute data associated with the map features.
■.prj—Projection and coordinate system data. This file is created only if your
map has an assigned coordinate system.
■.idx—Identifies the index field for the related SHP file, which is the unique
identifier for each entity in the SHP file.
Exporting
DWG files can contain multiple geometry types, while SHP files contain only
one. Each ESRI SHP file stores a single type of spatial data: point, line, text, or
polygon. The text SHP files contain attribute text associated with points.
When you export, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically filters the selected objects
and exports the correct type of object to the corresponding SHP file. The
filenames produced by the export operation use the name of the feature class
followed by the geometry type, for example, PARCELS_POLYGON.SHP.
1180 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
NOTE You cannot name a SHP feature class FeatId. This is a reserved name.
Export Options
You can export a single object to a single file, or you can export multiple
objects to a set of files. There are two methods for multi-file export.
■The single-file option
Unless you have modified the MapExport.ini file, choosing ESRI Shapefile
from the drop-down list in the Export dialog box exports a single geometry
type to a single SHP file. You specify the geometry type on the Selection
tab of the Export dialog box.
■The MapExport.ini folder export option.
You can modify the initialization file on page 245 to include all object types
when exporting drawing objects to ESRI SHP format. This will remove the
object type options and display File Name Prefix field on the Options tab
of the Export dialog box, which lets you create a folder of SHP files using
this prefix, appended by each object type name.
This method is effective when you export all the geometry from a DWG
file and visual fidelity is more important than the preservation of classes
and attributes.
All objects of the same geometry type will be grouped in a single SHP. For
example, if pipes, roads, and streams are all represented by lines, you will
export one SHP containing the geometry and attributes for all three object
types. If streams have attributes that are not shared by pipes, those
attributes will have null values for pipes.
To create polygons in the SHP files using the folder option, you must select
the Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons option. To export closed polylines
as lines, select the Line object type.To export closed polylines as polygons,
select the Polygon object type and select Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons
on the Options tab.
All new SHP classes that contain text entities will have a property called
TEXTSTRING. To bring this information back into AutoCAD Map 3D,
select the import option to import points as text.
■The Shape Multiclass on page 1194 export option.
This is a separate option on the drop-down list in the Export dialog box
that exports multiple drawing objects to a set of SHP files in a folder you
specify. Each resulting SHP will contain the geometry and attributes for a
single geometry type, and will be stored in files that indicate that type, for
example, PARCELS_POLYGON.SHP.
Exporting to ESRI ShapeFile | 1181
You can specify that the resulting files use a single feature class or multiple
feature classes based on layer, object classification, object data, or link
templates.
You can also export object data or external database links to the corresponding
SHP database (DBF) file.
Export Restrictions
SHP files do not support color; in ArcView, each theme is assigned a color that
is used when an item is drawn.
SHP files do not support circular arcs. During export, arcs, splines, and ellipses
are converted to segmented polylines. You can change the settings used for
segmentation.
Overwriting or Appending
If you export to an existing file, or to a folder containing files with the same
names as those that will be generated by the export, you can choose to
overwrite the existing data or append the new data to it. Overwriting can
destroy existing files when it creates new ones. Appending will add the data
in the current export operation to the existing data without deleting any
existing data.
If you append and you are transforming the coordinate system for the data,
the old data and the new data must both use the same source and target
coordinate systems.
You cannot use the append option to update existing data, but only to add
new data.
If you are using either the folder or the multi-file Shape option and you choose
to append, AutoCAD Map 3D will check the target folder for existing files that
use the same feature class name, even if those files do not have the appropriate
geometry indicator in their file names. For example, exporting parcels would
usually result in a file called PARCELS_POLYGON.SHP. However, if the folder
contains PARCELS.SHP, AutoCAD Map 3D will check its geometry type and
will append to it if it contains polygon information.
NOTE If your data meets these criteria but the export operation fails, try deleting
the .prj file in the target folder and then retrying the export operation.
1182 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Driver Options
When exporting to SHP, you can select 2 Dimension Shape Files or 3
Dimension Shape Files from the driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To include all object types when exporting drawing objects to ESRI SHP
format on page 1183
■To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation on page
1183
■To export to SHP format on page 1183
To include all object types when exporting drawing objects to ESRI SHP format
1Modify the initialization file, on page 245 MapExport.ini.
This will remove the object type options and display File Name Prefix
field on the Options tab of the Export dialog box.
2Choose the ESRI Shapefile file option from the drop-down list in the
Export dialog box to export to a folder of files.
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
■Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To export to SHP format
■Use the regular Export instructions. on page 1166
■Use the Shape Multiclas on page 1194 export option.
Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID
MIF/MID is a file standard used by MapInfo, a desktop mapping system.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports MapInfo up to version 7 MIF/MID files.
Exporting To MapInfo MIF/MID | 1183
About MapInfo MIF/MID Files
MapInfo MIF/MID format stores both geometry and attributes (data) for
features, and is a set of two physical files that work together:
■.mif— Vector geometric data. A single .mif file can contain many different
types of geometry.
■.mid— Attributes for the geometric data.
Exporting
The MIF/MID format does not support ellipses with an angled bounding box
(i.e, ellipses whose axes are at an angle to the X and Y axes), so when you
export such ellipses from AutoCAD Map 3D to MIF/MID, they are segmented.
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation, edit the
mapexport.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo MIF/MID has no export driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation on page
1184
■To export to MapInfo MIF/MID on page 1184
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
■Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID
■Use the Export instructions. on page 1166
1184 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting To MapInfo TAB
MapInfo TAB, also referred to as the MapInfo native format, is a
two-dimensional format that stores both feature geometry and attributes (data)
in a set of physical files that have the following file extensions:
About MapInfo TAB Files
■.tab— The main file for a MapInfo table. It is associated with the appropriate
.dat, .id, .map, and .ind files.
■.dat— Tabular data for a table in MapInfo's native format.
■.id— An index to a MapInfo graphical objects (.map) file.
■.map— Contains geographic information describing map objects.
■.ind— An index to a MapInfo tabular (.dat) file.
With AutoCAD Map 3D, you can import and export MapInfo TAB up to version
7.
Exporting
The TAB format does not support ellipses with an angled bounding box (i.e,
ellipses whose axes are at an angle to the X and Y axes), so when you export
ellipses from AutoCAD Map 3D to TAB, they are segmented. You can change
the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation in the mapexport.ini file.
Driver Options
MapInfo TAB has no export driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To change the default text justification setting for MapInfo TAB on page
339
■To export to MapInfo TAB on page 1186
Exporting To MapInfo TAB | 1185
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
■Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To export to MapInfo TAB
■Use the Export instructions. on page 1166
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and
8
You can import and export Microstation DGN version 7 and 8. Bentley Systems,
Inc., and MicroStation programs use the DGN format, which is similar to a
DWG file; points, lines, areas, text, and other object types can all be present
in the same file.
Exporting
There are two separate choices for Microstation DGN (version 7 and version
8) in the Export dialog box. You can map layers in the map to DGN levels
when you export. The default is to map layers to level names using the same
name as the layer.
Geometry in DGN 7 files is stored in fixed-point integers. When you export
map data with large coordinate values, you can overflow these values with
unpredictable results. The seed file you use for export has a dramatic effect
on the resulting DGN data.
Every DGN file requires a seed file to give it default information (similar to
the acad.dwg prototype or template file). The seed file controls working units,
global origin, the version to export, etc. Several seed files ship with AutoCAD
Map 3D.
The default for a version 7 DGN file is lrgseed.dgn. The default for a version
8 DGN file is lrgseed3d_v8.dgn. Both of these are three-dimensional seed files.
To export to a two dimensional DGN file, or to set a specific global origin or
specific working units, reference the file name of the desired seed file. The
global origin and units of resolution should be set in a seed file that is
appropriate to your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing coordinates.
1186 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
The seed file you use significantly affects the outcome of the export process.
If the design plane coordinate bounds in the seed file do not fully contain the
extents of the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D will repeat the
export operation automatically using the Compute Optimal Seed File option.
If the second export operation fails, manually choose a seed file that works
for your region and coordinate system.
Export Restrictions
Closed objects are not filled, even if they were filled originally.
Hatch patterns are not exported. If you export polygon data that is hatched
in AutoCAD Map 3D, the resulting data will not be filled in MicroStation.
Driver Options for DGN 7
You can set the following options when exporting DGN 7 files:
DescriptionOption
Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub.
Select the unit that matches the default unit in your Auto-
Coordinate Units
CAD Map 3D drawing. For example, if the default unit in
your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing is meters, and you are
using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master. The default is the Master unit.
Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the
output DGN file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional,
Seed File
sets the coordinate units, sets global origin, etc. You must
use a version 7 DGN seed file.
Select this option to override all seed file settings and have
AutoCAD Map 3D calculate the settings for you. AutoCAD
Compute Parameters
Map 3D determines the largest dimension for the set of
exported objects and sets the appropriate range and pre-
cision. It sets the UOR per Sub to 10, and sets the Global
Origin to the center of the bounding rectangle of the ex-
ported objects.
Select this option to override the global origin setting in
the seed file. Specify the global origin to use.
Override Global Origin
Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 | 1187
Driver Options for DGN 8
You can set the following options when exporting DGN 8 files:
DescriptionOption
Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub.
Select the unit that matches the default unit in your Auto-
Coordinate Units
CAD Map 3D drawing. For example, if the default unit in
your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing is meters, and you are
using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master. The default is the Master unit.
Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the
output DGN file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional,
sets the coordinate units, sets global origin, etc.
Seed File
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■Importing Objects with Links to an External Database on page 366
■To change the seed file for a single file on page 1188
■To change the seed file on page 1189
■To export to DGN on page 1189
To change the seed file for a single file
1In the Export dialog box, click the Options tab.
2Click Driver Options.
3In the Design File Output Settings dialog box, under Seed File, click
.
NOTE If you are a limited rights user, be sure that the seed file is in a location
where you have access to it.
4In the Select Seed File dialog box, navigate to the location of the seed file
to use and select the file.
1188 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
NOTE Be sure to specify a seed file designed for the version of DGN you
specified in the Export Location dialog box. You cannot use a DGN version
8 seed file when exporting to DGN version 7.
5Click Open.
To change the default seed file
1Open the mapexport.ini file using a text editor such as WordPad.
This file is in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Map 3D\R17.2 folder.
2Find the section labeled [DGN_V7] or [DGN_V8]. This is where the default
seed file is specified.
3Specify the new default seed file.
For example: Driver:RUNTIME_MACROS=_SEED,"C:\Program Files\Common
Files\Autodesk Shared\GIS\ImportExport\4.0\design\seed3d_ft.dgn".
4Save and close the .ini file.
To export to DGN
■Use the Export instructions. on page 1166
Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML)
GML (Geography Markup Language) is an OpenGIS® Implementation
specification that defines an XML encoding for the transport and storage of
geographic information. The specification can be found on the
http://www.opengis.org/OpenGIS Consortium web site.
You can import and export GML in and out of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Exporting
You can export GML version 3.1.1 files.
If you are exporting GML data in Asian languages, verify that mapexport.ini
contains the language encoding settings you need to export valid GML data
in the desired language.
Exporting To Geographic Markup Language (GML) | 1189
Driver Options
GML has no export driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■To verify language encoding settings for export to GML on page 1190
■To export to GML on page 1190
To verify language encoding settings for export to GML
■Make sure the language encoding settings in the mapexport.ini file export
valid GML data in the desired language.
For more information, see Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files
on page 240.
To export to GML
■Use the Export instructions. on page 1166
Exporting To VML (Vector Markup Language)
AutoCAD Map 3D supports VML (Vector Markup Language). VML, which is
written using the XML syntax, is a text-based markup language used for
describing vector graphics. VML is an export-only format.
Exporting
When you export to VML format, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a single HyperText
Markup Language (HTML) file with the VML data contained in the <body>
region of the HTML.
When you export objects, be sure the objects have a color that will be visible
on the target page. For example, if you are exporting to a page with a white
background, be sure the objects themselves are not white.
1190 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
You can specify the following attributes for VML objects:
DescriptionVML Attribute
The title of the feature that may be displayed by the VML
viewer. (The title appears as a ToolTip when the user places
their mouse over the feature. Range: string Default: none
vml_title
The URL to jump to if this feature is clicked. Range: string De-
fault: none
vml_url
The target frame in the URL. Range: string Default: nonevml_target
The z-index of the feature in the output VML file. Positive
numbers are in front of the screen; negative numbers are be-
vml_z_index
hind the screen. Features having a higher z-index obscure
features with a lower z-index. Range: integer Default: 0 for
vml_polygon features 10 for vml_polyline features 11 for
vml_point features 12 for vml_text features
Driver Options
VML has no export driver options.
To export to VML
■Use the Export instructions. on page 1166
Exporting to Multiple Classes
You can export selected data to multiple feature classes during one export
operation for the following formats:
■Autodesk SDF on page 1173
■Oracle on page 1203
■ESRI ArcSDE on page 1179
Exporting to Multiple Classes | 1191
Using the Feature Class Tab on the Export Dialog Box
Use the Feature Class tab for attributes that should be associated with all output
feature classes. For example, suppose you have created three sets of objects:
each set contains water lines, electrical lines, and sewer lines, but you have
color-coded them to represent different maintenance dates. You can select
objects based on color, and export them to multiple feature classes (water,
electrical, and sewer). You can select an attribute on the Feature Class tab
(maintenance date, for example), and apply it to all three feature classes when
you export them.
However, if the objects you are exporting already have associated attributes,
it may be best if you don’t select any attributes on the Feature Class tab.
See also:
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store on page 1203
■Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store on page 1203
■To export multiple feature classes on page 1192
■To combine multiple layers into one feature class on page 1194
■To change the class names that are assigned automatically on page 1194
To export multiple feature classes
1Click Create multiple classes based on a drawing property on the Feature
Class tab of the Export dialog box on page 1166.
2Specify a classification method.
Only the methods relevant to your map are listed. For example, if you
didn’t classify objects in the map, you won’t see the Object Classification
option.
1192 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
The classification method you choose determines the resulting feature
class attributes, as shown in the following table:
End resultSelect Attributes
Dialog Box set-
tings
OutputMultiple class
export
classification
method
No attributes in the output
feature classes
Nothing selectedA feature class
for each expor-
ted layer
Layers
All feature classes contain all
attributes that were selected in
Attributes selectedA feature class
for each expor-
ted layer
Layers
the Select Attributes dialog
box.
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the Object
Nothing selectedA feature class
for each object
Object Data on
page 179 or Link
Data table or Link Template
definitions.
associated
with an object
Templates on
page 451
data table or
link template.
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the Object
Attributes selectedA feature class
for each object
Object data or
link templates
Data table or Link Templateassociated
definitions AND all attributeswith an object
selected in the Select Attributesdata table or
link template. dialog box are also assigned to
all output feature classes.
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the object
class.
Nothing selectedA feature class
for each expor-
ted object
class.
Object class on
page 108
Output feature classes inherit
their attributes from the Object
Attributes selectedA feature class
for each expor-
Object class
Class AND all attributes selec-ted object
class. ted in the Select Attributes
Exporting to Multiple Classes | 1193
End resultSelect Attributes
Dialog Box set-
tings
OutputMultiple class
export
classification
method
dialog box are also assigned to
all output feature classes.
To combine multiple layers into one feature class
1On the Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box on page 1166, select Create
a single class from all selected objects.
2In the Feature Class column, give the new feature class an appropriate
name.
For example, if your DWG file has three layers called text_City,
text_County, and text_Region, you can name the combined feature class
“Text” in the Feature Class column.
To change the class names that are assigned automatically
1Click the Feature Class field.
2Edit the proposed class names as needed.
3Click OK.
Exporting To Shape Multiclass
Drawing (DWG) objects can contain multiple geometry types, while SHP files
contain only one. However, the Shape Multiclass option lets you export
multiple drawing objects to a set of SHP files in a folder you specify. Each
resulting SHP will contain the geometry and attributes for a single geometry
type. For example, if pipes, roads, and streams are all represented by lines,
you will export three sets of SHP files, each one containing the geometry and
attributes for one of those object types. For information about the set of files
produced for SHP and their naming conventions, see Importing ESRI ShapeFiles
on page 333.
NOTE There is also an MapExport.ini folder on page 333 export option.
1194 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting
You can specify that the resulting files use a single feature class or multiple
feature classes based on layer, object classification, object data, or link
templates.
All new SHP classes that contain text entities will have a property called
TEXTSTRING. To bring this information back into AutoCAD Map 3D, select
the import option to import points as text.
To create polygons when you use this export option, select the Treat Closed
Polylines As Polygons option.
You can export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified
on the Data tab. To do this, click One class and type a name for that class.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time on page 1191 and combine
the data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Data tab
to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
Export Restrictions
SHP files do not support color; in ArcView, each theme is assigned a color that
is used when an item is drawn.
SHP files do not support circular arcs. During export, arcs, splines and ellipses
are converted to segmented polylines. You can change the settings used for
segmentation in the mapexport.ini file.
You cannot map fields when you export to Shape Multiclass. If you need to
map fields, export your DWG data to SDF first, and then use Migrating Data
on page 522 Bulk Copy to export the data to SHP.
Overwriting and Appending
If you export to an existing folder containing files with the same names as
those that will be generated by the export, you can choose to overwrite the
existing data or append the new data to it. Overwriting can destroy the existing
files when it creates new ones. Appending will add the data in the current
export operation to the existing data without deleting any existing data. If
you append and you are transforming the coordinate system for the data, the
old data and the new data must both use the same source and target coordinate
systems. You cannot use the append option to update existing data, but only
to add new data.
Exporting To Shape Multiclass | 1195
NOTE If your data meets these criteria but the export operation fails, try deleting
the relevant .prj files in the target folder and then retry the export operation.
Driver Options
When exporting to SHP files, you can select 2 Dimension Shape Files or 3
Dimension Shape Files from the driver options.
See also:
■Customizing the Import and Export .ini Files on page 240
■Importing ESRI ShapeFiles on page 333
■To change the settings used for segmentation on page 1196
■To export to SHP Multi-class on page 1196
■To map fields when exporting to Shape Multiclass on page 1196
■To create polygons when exporting to SHP Multiclass on page 1196
■DataTo export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified
on the tab. on page 1197
To change the settings AutoCAD Map 3D uses for segmentation
■Edit the mapexport.ini file.
See To edit the .ini file on page ?.
To export to SHP Multi-class
■Use the Export instructions. on page 1166
To map fields when exporting to Shape Multiclass
1Export your DWG data to SDF first.
2Use Migrating Data on page 522 Bulk Copy to export the data to SHP.
Bulk Copy allows you to map fields.
To create polygons when exporting to SHP Multiclass
1Select the Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons option.
1196 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
2Do one of the following:
■To export closed polylines as lines, select the Line object type.
■To export closed polylines as polygons, select the Polygon object type
and select Treat Closed Polylines As Polygons on the Options tab
To export to a single feature class that uses all the items you specified on the
Data tab.
1Click One class.
2Type a name for that class.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time on page 1191 and
combine the data organization in your drawing with your selections on
the Data tab to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties
You can map drawing attribute properties to feature class properties when
you export DWG data to the SDF format. You can also map specific values of
the AutoCAD drawing properties .COLOR, .LINETYPE, and .LINEWEIGHT to
specific feature class property values. For example, you could specifythat all
pipes drawn with green lines are eight-inch pipes, or that all roads drawn with
.25 mm lines are two-lane roads.
For more information on exporting drawing data to the Autodesk SDF format,
see Exporting To Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data File) on page 1173.
To map drawing attributes to feature class properties
1In the Export dialog box, click the Feature Class tab.
2Select the drawing objects you want to map to feature class properties.
3In the Feature Class column, click the [...] button.
4In the Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box, select or enter the
feature class property to which the drawing attributes should be mapped.
5You can select additional drawing objects and attributes to export by
clicking the Select Attributes button.
6Click OK.
Mapping Drawing Attributes to Feature Class Properties | 1197
To map AutoCAD drawing attribute values to feature class property values
1In the Export dialog box, click the Feature Class tab.
2Select the drawing attributes you want to map to feature class properties.
3In the Feature Class column, click the [...] button.
4In the Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box, select the feature class
property to which the drawing attribute values should be mapped.
5You can select additional drawing properties and attributes to export by
clicking the Select Attributes button.
6In the Drawing Attributes column, click the [...] button in the field of the
attribute to be mapped to the feature class property.
7In the New Property Data Type dialog box, select the appropriate data
type from the drop-down list.
8Click OK.
9In the Property Value Mapping dialog box, map the drawing attribute
values to the specific feature class values.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
MAPEXPORTFDO
Export to an FDO data store
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ FDO Connection.
Menu
_MAPEXPORTFDOCommand Line
1198 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline
If your map includes text that is enclosed in a polyline, you can turn that text
into object data and export it as attribute data attached to the polyline.
See also:
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Setting Up Object Data on page 179
To export text enclosed in a polyline as attribute data
1Create an object data table on page 180 with one field.
2Use the Generate Links on page 878 command to automatically attach
data to objects.
In the Generate Data Links dialog box on page 1541, select the Enclosed
Text option. This option links the text data to the polyline enclosing the
text.
Under Data Links, select Create Object Data Records and select the name
of the table you created in step 1.
Click OK and select the objects you want. For each selected object,
AutoCAD Map 3D will create a new record in the selected object data
table and fill the record with the enclosed text.
3Click File menu ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export to export the
polylines. On the Data or Feature Class tab of the Import dialog box on
page 1446, select the table you created in step 1. Select any other export
options you want and export the objects.
Quick Reference
ADEDEFDATA
Defines object data
Setup menu ➤ Define Object Data
Menu
Define Object Data
Icon
Exporting Text Enclosed in a Polyline | 1199
ADEDEFDATACommand Line
Define Object Data dialog boxDialog Box
ADEGENLINK
Automatically links objects to object data or external database records
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
Link Template Options ➤ Generate Links
Menu
ADEGENLINKCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click a link
template ➤ Generate Links
Task Pane
Generate Data Links dialog boxDialog Box
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology
Exporting polygons from a polygon topology is useful when you export data
to an external file format that supports polygons.
During this operation, you can create a group containing all the elements of
complex areas, such as islands. If the islands themselves have nested islands
or other polygons, these nested polygons will form a separate grouping
automatically, creating different levels of grouping. If two or more inner
polygons are not nested but share the same outer boundary, they will be
treated as one group.
See also:
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
1200 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■Creating Closed Polylines from a Polygon Topology on page 758
■Converting Polylines to Polygons on page 825
■Converting Polygon Topology to Polygons on page 827
To export polygons from a polygon topology
1Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
2In the Import dialog box on page 1446, select the topology to export.
All complete polygons in the selected topology are automatically selected.
3Select Group Complex Polygons to group nested polygons into a single,
balanced polygon.
If you do not select the Group Complex Polygons option, AutoCAD Map
3D will create a separate polygon for each centroid.
To create a single polygon from nested polygons, each nested polygon
must have a centroid. For example, if three polygons are nested one
within another, and the middle polygon does not have a centroid,
AutoCAD Map 3D will create separate polygons for the inner polygon
and the outer polygon.
4Set any other export options.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORT
Exports drawing objects and their attribute data to an external file format
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Menu
Export Map File
Icon
MAPEXPORTCommand Line
Export dialog boxDialog Box
Exporting Polygons from a Polygon Topology | 1201
Saving Drawing Objects to a DXF File
You can create DXF files for use with previous versions of AutoCAD or with
any other application that supports the DXF format.
NOTE All topology information, links to external databases, object data, and civil
objects are lost when you use this command.
See also:
■Importing DXF Files on page 327
To create a DXF file
1Click File menu ➤ Save As.
2Select a type of DXF from the Files of Type list.
3Specify a name and location for the file and click Save.
Quick Reference
SAVEAS
Saves an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the current drawing
File menu ➤ Save As
Menu
SAVEASCommand Line
Exporting Maps to DWG Format
You can save both geospatial features and DWG objects to DWG format from
the Display Manager. This allows you to share styled maps with users who do
not have Display Manager (for example, users of AutoCAD or a previous version
of AutoCAD Map 3D).
In the output drawing, styling is preserved, but object attributes, labels, and
any joined data on page 439 are not. The output drawing can be viewed by
previous versions of AutoCAD Map 3D and by AutoCAD, and the output
drawing can be used by the Sheet Set Manager.
1202 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Each display layer in your map is saved to a corresponding layer in the target
drawing.
To output multiple maps based on different zoom scales, you must save
individual maps for each desired zoom scale.
See also:
■Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again on page 1207
■Work with Geospatial Features and Drawing Objects on page 21
To save a styled map to DWG format
1Build your map, styling your feature and drawing layers as desired.
2Display the map at the scale you want recipients to share.
3Choose File ➤ Save Current Map as DWG
4In the Export Current Map to DWG dialog box, specify a location and
file name for the exported map and click Save.
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store
You can move DWG (drawing object) data into any Oracle database to which
you have connected in AutoCAD Map 3D. You can also move DWG data into
existing ESRI ArcSDE data stores to which you have connected in AutoCAD
Map 3D.
Exporting DWG Data to Oracle
When you export to an existing Oracle table, you can use the data to populate
both new and existing classes.
You can export a single class at a time and use the Feature Class tab to match
your output fields to the existing fields. The left-hand column on the Feature
Class tab (on the Export dialog box) is an expression, which allows you to
concatenate fields or do calculations on them.
You can export data to multiple classes at one time on page 1191 and combine
the data organization in your drawing with your selections on the Feature
Class tab to determine the attributes for each exported feature class.
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store | 1203
Object class property values are written to the feature class in Oracle if their
data types match. Otherwise, AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to convert to a
supported data type.
You can also use scripting to perform export operations. For single-class export,
the parameters for each export operation can be saved in a profile and you
can export multiple classes with a single script. This is helpful for the cases
where the same complex set of operations needs to be done frequently.
Exporting DWG Data to ESRI ArcSDE
When you export data to ArcSDE format, you can export only to an existing
ArcSDE data store with a complete schema. You cannot create or modify
ArcSDE schemas using AutoCAD Map 3D.
See also:
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Exporting to Multiple Classes on page 1191
■Bringing In Features from Oracle on page 271
■Importing From ESRI ArcSDE on page 327
■Migrating GIS Data (Bulk Copy) on page 523
To export DWG data to Oracle:
1Connect to the Oracle data store on page 271 to which you want to move
the data.
2Before moving drawing data to Oracle, do the following to your DWG
drawing objects:
■Assign a coordinate system on page 133. This lets you position your
data accurately in a real-world geographic location and align imported
survey or GPS point data. Once you assign a coordinate system, you
can convert to a different system when you export.
■Clean up any geometry errors on page 636. Use the AutoCAD Map 3D
cleanup tools to correct any errors introduced during drafting,
digitizing, or converting the data.
3Click File menu ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ FDO Connection.
1204 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
4In the dialog box that appears, choose the Oracle connection for the
export and click OK.
5On the Selection tab of the Map Export dialog box on page 1458, specify
which objects to export.
This tab determines how items are selected for export, and not how they
are organized in their exported form. You specify how to organize the
exported material on the Feature Class tab.
6On the Feature Class tab, specify which object properties and attributes
to export to feature class attributes.
All attributes you specify here will be included in all the resulting features
you create in Oracle. For information on how the choices on this tab
determine the properties of the exported feature class, see Exporting to
Multiple Classes on page 1191.
7On the Options tab on page 1440, specify whether to convert the coordinate
system during the export process and choose the coordinate system.
Specify whether to treat closed polylines as polygons when you export.
8Specify how to create classes in the Oracle data store.
■To create a single feature class containing all the items you selected
on the Selection tab, click Create a single class from all exported
objects and type a name for that class.
■To create multiple feature classes for the items you selected on the
Selection tab, click Create multiple classes based on a drawing object
and specify an “auto-classification” method
For information about these methods, see Exporting to Multiple
Classes on page 1191.
9To change the automatically assigned class names, click theFeature Class
field and edit the names as needed, then click OK.
10 Click Save.
To export DWG data to ESRI ArcSDE:
1Query the data you want from the DWG drawing into your map.
2Connect to the ESRI ArcSDE data store on page 274 to which you want to
move the data.
Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store | 1205
3Before moving drawing data to ESRI ArcSDE, do the following to your
DWG drawing objects:
■Assign a coordinate system on page 133. This lets you position your
data accurately in a real-world geographic location and align imported
survey or GPS point data. Once you assign a coordinate system, you
can convert to a different system when you export.
■Clean up any geometry errors on page 636. Use the AutoCAD Map 3D
cleanup tools to correct any errors introduced during drafting,
digitizing, or converting the data.
4Click File menu ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ FDO Connection.
5In the dialog box that appears, choose the data source for the export and
click OK.
6On the Selection tab of the Map Export dialog box on page 1458, specify
which objects to export.
This tab determines how items are selected for export, and not how they
are organized in their exported form. You specify how to organize the
exported material on the Feature Class tab.
7On the Feature Class tab, specify which object properties and attributes
to export to feature class attributes. Note that you cannot create or modify
ArcSDE schemas. You can only map object properties and attributes to
existing feature class attributes.
All attributes you specify here will be included in all the resulting features
you export to ESRI ArcSDE. For information on how the choices on this
tab determine the properties of the exported feature class, see Exporting
to Multiple Classes on page 1191.
8On the Options tab on page 1440, specify whether to convert the coordinate
system during the export process and choose the coordinate system.
Specify whether to treat closed polylines as polygons when you export.
9Click Save.
Quick Reference
MAPEXPORTFDO
Export to an FDO data store
1206 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ FDO Connection.
Menu
_MAPEXPORTFDOCommand Line
Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format
You can save the drawing objects in the current map to an image format, such
as BMP, JPEG, or PNG. The resulting image file will not contain geospatial
features. If your map includes geospatial features, save it to DWG format before
you use this feature.
When you export to an image format, you use the Render Output File Dialog
Box.
See also:
■Exporting Maps to DWG Format on page 1202
To save drawing objects in an image format
1Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ As Image.
2In the dialog box that appears, choose the image format for the new file
from the Files of Type list.
3Specify a name and location for the image file and click Save.
4If the format you chose has any further options, specify them in the
dialog box that appears and click OK.
For information about these options, see the corresponding topic in the
AutoCAD Help. For example, for information about the JPEG options,
see the JPEG Image Options Dialog Box topic.
All drawing objects in your map are rendered and saved to the image file.
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again
You can move AutoCAD drawing data from AutoCAD Map 3D to SDF or Oracle
and back into AutoCAD Map 3D. For example, you can export drawing objects
to an SDF file to give to someone who needs to change those objects. Once
the changes are made, you can incorporate them into your original drawing
file.
Exporting DWG Data to an Image Format | 1207
Attributes
If you connect to the data, rather than import it, and extract the geometry
from the feature data, the attributes are lost.
Bringing the Data Back Into AutoCAD Map 3D
After changes have been made to the data, you can bring it back into AutoCAD
Map 3D in one of the following ways:
■Import the data in DWG format. If anyone changes the data after that,
those changes will not appear in your map unless you re-import. Import
gives you a "snapshot" of the data at the moment that you import. This
method is best for changes to many objects in one area of the map. It works
best if you classify the objects before you export them, and then map to
those object classes when you re-import.
■Connect to the data (using Data Connect) and then extract the geometry
from the changed features. You can then update your original DWG files
with the new information. The data remains in its original format, and
any further changes in its data store appear in your map. This method is
best for small changes.
If you plan to re-import SDF data using either method, you will get the best
results if you export only the properties you want edit to a multi-class SDF
file. You can then map the properties to separate layers when you import the
SDF file.
Preserving Visual Styles
When you export styled drawing data, the visual styling is lost. You can use
two alternative methods to preserve styling information:
■Set up a drawing template file (.dwt) that includes styling information for
the drawing objects you wish to include (layers, linetypes, blocks, etc.).
For more information on using drawing templates, see the AutoCAD 2009
User’s Guide.
■Publish your map to the DWF format., which preserves all styling. Use
Autodesk Design Review to examine and mark up the resulting map. You
can then update the original DWG data from those markups.
See also:
■Publishing to DWF on page 1128
1208 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store on page 1203
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) on page 323
■Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects on page 316
■To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import
method on page 1209
■To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the Data
Connect method on page 1209
To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the import
method
1Export the drawing data to an SDF file or to Oracle. See Overview of
Converting and Exporting on page 1166, Exporting DWG Data to an FDO
Data Store on page 1203, and Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files)
on page 323.
If your drawing data has been styled, be sure to check the appropriate
properties on the Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box when you
export the data. Although the visual styling will not appear in the
resulting feature data, you will be able to reconstruct the styling when
you re-import the data later.
2Once the feature data has been changed, open the original DWG file in
AutoCAD Map 3D to update it with those changes.
3Remove any objects that will be replaced with the imported data.
4Connect to the data store with the new data and import the data to add
it to your original drawing.
See Overview of Converting Geospatial Data to Drawing Objects on page
316. If your original drawing contains layers that specify visual styling,
import the data into the appropriate layer to restore its styling
information.
To move drawing data to a spatial data store and back using the Data Connect
method
1Export the drawing data to SDF or Oracle.
Moving DWG Data to a Spatial Data Store and Back Again | 1209
See Exporting DWG Data to an FDO Data Store on page 1203, Overview of
Converting and Exporting on page 1166, and Importing Autodesk SDF
(Spatial Data Files) on page 323.
If your drawing data has been styled, be sure to check the appropriate
properties on the Feature Class tab of the Export dialog box when you
export the data. Although the visual styling will not appear in the
resulting feature data, you will be able to reconstruct the styling when
you re-import the data later.
Alternately, you can use a drawing template that includes all the styling
information you wish to include. For more information on using a
drawing template to preserve drawing data stylization, see Preserving
Visual Styles on page 1208
2Once the feature data has been updated, open your original DWG file in
AutoCAD Map 3D to update it with those changes.
3Connect to the spatial data source containing the changed data.
See Bringing in GIS Features on page 265.
4Check out any new or changed features and use Extract Geometry From
Feature to convert them to drawing objects.
See Checking Out Features on page 583 and Extracting Feature Geometry
on page 598
NOTE The resulting drawing objects will lose any attribute data that was
connected to them.
5Check the features back in and remove the display layers that use the
feature source data.
6Disconnect from the feature source.
7Click Create menu ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data.
8Attach any existing object data to the new geometry.
See Specifying Object Data for a Drawing Object on page 875.
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer
You can save or export information about geospatial layers in Display Manager
(including annotation layers) to separate files. Only geospatial features are
saved or exported.
1210 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
This allows you to package data that is ordinarily stored in a central data store,
such as an Oracle database, into a geospatial data file. However, all connection
to the original data store is lost and changes you make to the SDF file will not
update the central data store.
Saving vs. Exporting
If you use the export option, you can export a single layer to an Autodesk SDF
(version 3) file. The resulting file contains geometry and attribute data, but
no styling data.
If you have joined data on page 439 to the layers you are exporting, the joined
data is also exported. However, metadata is not exported with the layer. For
information about exporting metadata, see Sharing Metadata on page 1250.
If you use the save option, you can save one layer at a time. When you save
a layer, you save its styling information and pointers to the data source that
defines its geometry and attributes. You can drag and drop saved layers into
any map to re-use them.
You cannot use a saved layer and an exported layer together because saved
layers point to the current data for the layer while exported layers contain a
“snapshot” of the data at the time they were exported, and these data
definitions may differ.
Using Exported Layers
You can use exported layers for any of the following:
■As a map layer in Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise or MapGuide Open
Source.
NOTE This format is not readable by Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 or earlier.
Instead, see Exporting DWG Data to SDF2 Format on page 1175.
■To package the layer contents as a personal geospatial data store. The
resulting SDF file can be opened and edited in any application that supports
this format. However, once you export the layers, they lose their connection
to their original data store, and any changes you make will not be updated
in that data store.
NOTE You can also export all DWG objects to SDF3 format, and you can copy
features from one geospatial format to another using Bulk Copy.
Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer | 1211
See also:
■Overview of the Display Manager on page 535
■Overview of Converting and Exporting on page 1166
■Importing Autodesk SDF (Spatial Data Files) on page 323
■Migrating Data on page 522
To export layers in SDF format
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a layer and choose ➤
Export Layer Data to SDF.
2Specify a name and location for the file.
3Click Save.
To save a layer’s styles and pointers to its data
1In the Display Manager on page 1748, right-click the layer ➤ Save Layer.
2Specify a name and location for the file.
3Click Save.
Exporting and Printing Attribute Data
To print and export attribute data
■To export from the Data Table on page 1215
■To print a database table on page 1216
■To set print options on page 1216
■To specify the header and footer on page 1216
■To apply a filter on page 1217
■To create a drawing object report on page 1217
1212 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data
You can export attribute data in the following ways:
■From the Data Table: Attribute data for geospatial features appears in the
Data Table. You can export all or some of this data to a comma-separated
file, which you can then print from a supporting application.
■From the Data View: Data you linked to drawing objects from an external
source appears in the Data View. You can print some or all of this data, or
you can copy and paste it into another application.
■From the Metadata Viewer: Metadata is is structured information that
describes the content, quality, condition, and other characteristics of data.
In AutoCAD Map 3D, you can examine this data in the Metadata Viewer.
You can share metadata by exporting it from the Metadata Viewer.
■As a report: You can query objects in attached drawings to retrieve object
data and properties that match your criteria. You define a template to
specify which of that information to include in the resulting report, which
is written out to a comma-separated file.
See also:
■Exporting from the Data Table on page 1214
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
■Printing from the Data View on page 1215
■Viewing External Data Sources for Drawing Object Data on page 859
■Sharing Metadata on page 1250
■Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) on page 1217
Use the following methods to export or print attribute data.
Use this methodTo export this type of data...
In the Data Table, select the desired data
and click Options ➤ Export.
See Exporting from the Data Table on page
1214.
Geospatial attribute data
Overview of Exporting Attribute Data | 1213
Use this methodTo export this type of data...
In the Data View, specify print options and
click File menu ➤ Print.
See Printing from the Data View on page
1215.
External data linked to drawing objects
Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options
➤ Define Query and define and execute
Drawing object data and properties (as a
report)
the query. Then click Report in the same
dialog box to create a report template and
specify a file name for the report.
See Creating a Drawing Object Report
(DWG) on page 1217.
Click Export or Publish in the Metadata
Viewer. Select the source data type and
specify the location for the exported data.
See Sharing Metadata on page 1250.
Metadata
Exporting from the Data Table
Attribute data for geospatial features appears in the Data Table. You can export
all or some of this data to a comma-separated file. Exported data is stored in
a comma-separated file for use in other applications, such as Microsoft®
Access™ or Excel™.
If your data includes decimal values, the exported data will use the format for
your current user locale (the current setting in the Windows Regional Settings
control panel on your computer.) For this reason, the data may not actually
be separated by commas. For example, in a German locale, items are separated
by semicolons.
If you have joined data on page 439 to geospatial features whose data you are
exporting, the exported data will include the joined properties.
NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data Table and paste them into a
spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel.
1214 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
See also:
■Overview of the Data Table on page 921
To export from the Data Table
1In Map Explorer on page 1755, click the feature layer whose data you want
to export.
2Click Table.
3Filter the display to see the data you want.
4Select the data to export. To select all the data currently displayed, click
Select in the upper right corner.
5Click Options ➤ Export (at the bottom of the Data Table window).
6Specify a name and location for the comma-separated file, and click Save.
Printing from the Data View
Data you linked to drawing objects from an external source appears in the
Data View. You can print all or part of the active table. If you have filters in
effect, only the records that match the filter are printed. You can set print
options for margins, titles, grid lines, header, and footer.
You can print from a Data View table.
Printing from the Data View | 1215
NOTE You can also copy cells from the Data View and paste them into a
spreadsheet program, such as Microsoft Excel.
See also:
■Opening a Database Table on page 865
■Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries) on
page 1018
■Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location on page 1021
■Freezing and Hiding Data View Columns on page 871
■To print a database table on page 1216
■To set print options on page 1216
■To specify the header and footer on page 1216
■To apply a filter on page 1217
To print a database table
1Open a database table in the Data View on page 938.
2Specify print options, header, footer, or filters.
3In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Print.
4Click OK.
To set print options
1In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Page Setup.
2In the Page Setup dialog box on page 1423, select the print options you
want. Click OK.
To specify the header and footer
1In the Data View, click File menu ➤ Header And Footer.
2In the Header/Footer dialog box on page 1421, set options for headers and
footers. Click OK.
If you've applied a filter to the table, only the filtered records print.
1216 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
To apply a filter
■See Finding Records in the Data View Based on Record Data (SQL Queries)
on page 1018.
■See Finding Data View Records Based on Object Location on page 1021.
Quick Reference
(Data View) Header and Footer
Specifies header and footer for printing in the Data View
In the Data View:File ➤ Header and Footer
Menu
Header/Footer dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Page Setup
Sets the print options for Data View
In the Data View:File ➤ Page Setup
Menu
Page Setup dialog boxDialog Box
(Data View) Print
Prints the current view of the database table
In the Data View:File ➤ Print
Menu
Print
Icon
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG)
To create a drawing object report
■To run a query in Report mode on page 1218
■To create a report template on page 1220
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) | 1217
Running a Query in Report Mode
You can run a special query on objects in attached drawings to retrieve
information about the object properties and object data. You can use Report
mode to save the results of the query to a comma-separated file, which you
can use in a spreadsheet program or database.
For example, you can create a list of pipes and their diameters (when the
diameters are stored in object data).
You use a report template to control the information that is included in the
report. Depending on your use of blocks, layers, object data, links to external
databases, block attributes, color, and other data, you can create various printed
reports.
NOTE Queries in Report mode retrieve objects from layers that are Off or Frozen.
See also:
■Defining Queries on page 1006
■Altering Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Saving Queries on page ?
■Creating a Report Template on page 1219
To run a query in Report mode
1Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
2Define or load a query.
3Under Query Mode, select Report.
4Click Options.
5In the Output Report Options dialog box on page 1587, To create a report
template on page 1220. Click OK.
6Click Execute Query.
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
1218 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Report Template
Control the information that is included in a report query by defining a report
template.
For example, you can create a report that displays pipe lengths and diameters
by querying the feature class PIPES, and defining a report template that
includes the property LENGTH and an object data field that contains pipe
diameter information.
A template can include variables that represent:
■object properties
■feature classification
■object data
■topology information
■SQL data in an external database table
■block attributes
For a complete listing of variables you can use in a template, see Variables on
page 1288.
TIP Objects that include several elements have multiple entries in the output file.
Use the .TYPE dot variable to identify such objects, and edit the output file to
remove duplicate references to the object.
The report template is saved when you save the query.
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) | 1219
NOTE Report mode queries retrieve objects from layers that are Off or Frozen.
See also:
■Running a Query in Report Mode on page 1218
■Altering Properties of Defined Queries on page ?
■Saving Queries on page ?
If you run a Report query, the report template specifies the information to
write to an external file.
To create a report template
1Click Setup menu ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
2In the Define Query dialog box, under Query Mode, click Report.
3Click Options.
4In the Output Report Options dialog box on page 1587, specify the
information to include in the report.
Click Expression and select the item to include.
You can edit the expression box to add a calculation to the variable. For
example, you can edit an area dot variable to reflect the scale of a map.
5To associate a range with the expression, select the range table name
from the Range list. To define a range table on page 1057, click Ranges.
6Click Add to add each expression to the Report Template list.
7Select Process Sub-Objects to create a line in the report for each
component of an object, for example, polyline vertices or centroids, links,
and nodes in a polygon topology.
8Select Apply Transformation to apply a transformation to the values
displayed report.
If you have used either a coordinate system transformation or a simple
transformation in the current map, you must select this option to apply
the transformation to the values in the report.
9Specify a name and location for the output report file.
10 Click OK to close the dialog box.
1220 | Chapter 9 Publishing and Sharing Maps
Quick Reference
ADEQUERY
Controls defining, modifying, saving, loading, and executing a query
In the Classic workspace, click Setup menu ➤ More
DWG Options ➤ Define Query
Menu
Define Query
Icon
ADEQUERYCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-clickCurrent
Query ➤ Define-or- Right-click a query ➤ Edit
Task Pane
Define Query dialog boxDialog Box
Creating a Drawing Object Report (DWG) | 1221
1222
Working with Metadata
Overview of Working with Metadata
Metadata is data about data. Geospatial metadata describes your GIS data
according to an established standard to help those who might want to use your
maps understand them. Organizing your data according to standards helps you
manage it more efficiently, enforces data quality, and facilitates data sharing.
In AutoCAD Map 3D, you can automatically generate metadata for DWGs; their
resources on page 1760, such as object or feature classes; and non-DWG files.
AutoCAD Map 3D currently supports two standards for geospatial metadata:
the FGDC CSDGM Standard on page 1751 and ISO 19139 on page 1225.
The FGDC Standard (United States)
In 1998, the Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) released the
http://www.fgdc.gov/metadata/documents/workbook_0501_bmk.pdfContent Standard
for Digital Geospatial Metadata (the FGDC CSDGM Standard on page 1751). Its goal
is to promote electronic, geospatial information-sharing between various agencies
and regions around the world. Some agencies in the United States may be
required to create geospatial metadata that complies with this standard.
The FGDC standard specifies seven major sections of GIS metadata. Each section
has several data elements, and compound elements on page 1745. Each element
must meet one of the following conditions:
■Mandatory
■Optional
■Conditional
10
1223
Conditional elements are “mandatory if applicable.” For example, if a particular
data set neither has nor needs distribution information as defined by the
FGDC, you need not complete any of the fields in the Distribution Information
section, even if some fields in that section are mandatory.
Related EditorRequirementDescriptionInformation Type
Contact Inform-
ation Editor
MandatoryBasic information about the dataIdentification Information
(FGDC
Metadata) on
page 1492
Citation Inform-
ation Editor
ConditionalOverall quality of the dataData Quality Information
(FGDC
Metadata) on
page 1488
Spatial Data
Organization
ConditionalHow spatial information is repres-
ented in the data
Spatial Data Organization Inform-
ation
Information Ed-
itor (FGDC
Metadata) on
page 1494
Horizontal Co-
ordinate Sys-
ConditionalDetails about the spatial refer-
ence of the data, such as coordin-
ates
Spatial Reference Information
tem Definition
Editor (FGDC
Metadata) on
page 1499
Attribute Do-
main Values Ed-
ConditionalThe features and constraints of
the data
Entity and Attribute Information
itor (FGDC
Metadata) on
page 1504
Standard Order
Process Editor
ConditionalWho provides the data, and how
it can be obtained
Distribution Information
1224 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Related EditorRequirementDescriptionInformation Type
(FGDC
Metadata) on
page 1506
Time Period In-
formation Edit-
MandatoryHow current the metadata is, and
who maintains it
Metadata Reference Information
or (FGDC
Metadata) on
page 1491
Because GIS data is so general, it remains usable outside the United States
when formatted with this standard. For example, the FGDC standard shares
many common fields with ISO 19139. To learn more about the FGDC and its
GIS metadata standard, visit http://www.fgdc.gov/metadata.
ISO 19139
AutoCAD Map 3D supports ISO 19139. If your version of AutoCAD Map 3D
is for any country except the United States, it will be configured with ISO as
the default. If you need to switch to a different standard, you can do so in the
Metadata Options dialog box on page 1485.
See also:
■Setting Metadata Options on page 1225
■Creating and Viewing Metadata on page 1227
■Working with Metadata Templates on page 1231
■Editing Metadata on page 1239
■Sharing Metadata on page 1250
Setting Metadata Options
You can select the metadata on page 1756 standard you want to work with, set
template options, specify the precision to which the metadata measures your
map’s latitude/longitude values, and indicate whether or not you want the
Setting Metadata Options | 1225
metadata for a data source to be updated as soon as you select it in the
Metadata Viewer on page 1479.
Setting your metadata standard
The default standard is FGDC on page 1751 for AutoCAD Map 3D in the United
States, and ISO 19139 for all other countries. You can change the standard in
the Metadata Options dialog box on page 1485.
Keeping your metadata current
When Auto Update is selected, metadata for a data source is updated as soon
as you select it in the Metadata Viewer on page 1479. If you import on page ?
metadata from another AutoCAD Map 3D user, and remain connected to the
data source, the metadata is updated when the data is updated. For example,
if your organization keeps classified DWGs on page 1745 on a shared network,
and someone updates an object in a DWG, the metadata you have imported
from that object updates automatically.
If you do not always want your metadata to be automatically updated (for
example, if you want to check it for accuracy first), do not select the Auto
Update check box. Instead, click Update All each time you want to refresh
your metadata.
Saving time with metadata templates
Using metadata templates on page 1232 prevents repetitive data entry, saving
time do perform your other job functions. You can save frequently-used
metadata in a template to reuse as often as necessary.
See also:
■Metadata Options dialog box on page 1485
■Updating Metadata on page 1243
To set metadata options
1Open the Metadata Viewer on page 1479.
2On the Metadata Viewer on page 1479 toolbar, click Options.
3On the Template tab, do any of the following:
■Under Metadata Standard, select a standard.
1226 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
■Import a template. on page 1233
■Set a default template. on page 1235
■Preview a template. on page 1235
■Deactivate a template. on page 1236
■Export a template. on page 1237
■Rename a template. on page 1234
■Remove a template. on page 1238
4Click the Preference tab. Set the latitude and longitude precision.
Enter the number of digits (0 - 10) that display after the decimal point
for your reported latitude and longitude values. Both values are 6 by
default.
5If desired, select the Auto Update check box.
When Auto Update is selected, metadata is updated as soon as you select
it in the Metadata Viewer.
6Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Creating and Viewing Metadata
When you open the Metadata Viewer on page 1479 for the first time, metadata
on page 1756 is automatically generated and displayed for the current drawing.
When you select a resource on page 1760 from the Current Drawing tree view,
or a file from the Folder Shortcut tree view, the available metadata for that
resource is displayed in the Metadata Viewer.
Creating and Viewing Metadata | 1227
Some metadata information can be generated for the following resources:
Web ServicesFDO RDBMS-based
data
FDO file-based dataDWG files
WFSOracle SpatialSDF filesDWGs that contain
classified drawing
objects
WMSMySQL with spatialSHP filesDWGs that do not
contain classified
drawing objects
SDERaster files
SQL Server with spatial
Metadata for resources in the Current Drawing tree view are stored in the
drawing file. Metadata for resources in the Folder Shortcut tree view are stored
in an automatically generated MTD file. The MTD file is saved in the same
directory as the resource.
See also:
■Overview of Object Classification on page 836
■Updating Metadata on page 1243
Use this method...To do this...
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click
Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Display the Metadata Viewer on page 1479
In the Display Manager, right-click a layer
➤ View Metadata.
Create metadata for a drawing
In the Metadata Viewer, select the DWG
or data source from the Current Drawing
tree view.
Create metadata for a resource on page
1760
1228 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Use this method...To do this...
To create metadata for a non-DWG file 1In the Metadata Viewer, in the
Folder Shortcut area, click Add.
2Select the file.
To add your own style sheet 1Import the stylesheet. on page
1230
2At the top of the Metadata tab
on page 1482 click the Style sheet
menu.
To display metadata in XML format 1At the top of the Metadata tab,
click the Stylesheet menu.
2Select XML.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Working with Metadata Style Sheets
The style of the metadata on page 1756 in the Metadata Viewer on page 1479 is
controlled by a style sheet. You can use the default style sheet (FGDC Classic
for FGDC on page 1751 metadata or ISO Classic for ISO metadata), one that you
import from elsewhere, or no style sheet (unformatted XML).
Working with Metadata Style Sheets | 1229
To import a style sheet into the Metadata Viewer
1Obtain a style sheet in valid XML format.
NOTE The use of stylesheets supplied by parties other than Autodesk is subject
to the terms and conditions published by the provider(s) of those stylesheets.
2Save it to the following location:
For FGDC
■C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\Support\Metadata\FGDC\Configuration\Style\
For ISO
■C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\Support\Metadata\ISO\Configuration\Style\
3Open the following file in any text or XML editor:
C:\Program Files\AutoCAD Map 3D
2009\Support\Metadata\MetadataConfiguration.xml.
4Inside the <MetadataStylesheetSet> tags, add a <MetadataStylesheet>
element. Use the following FGDC example as your guide:
<MetadataStandard>
<Name>FGDC</Name>
<MetadataProfile>
<MetadataStyleSheetSet>
<MetadataStylesheet>
<Name>Stylesheet1</Name>
<Path>Support\Metadata\FGDC\Configura
tion\Style\Stylesheet1.xsl</Path>
</MetadataStylesheet>
</MetadataStyleSheetSet>
</MetadataStandard>
5Open the Metadata Viewer on page 1479. (In the Display Manager, select
a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.)
6Select the new style sheet from the Stylesheet menu at the top of the
Metadata tab on page 1482.
1230 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
NOTE If your style sheet does not appear in the Stylesheet menu after you perform
these steps, restart AutoCAD Map 3D, re-launch the Metadata Viewer, and click
Stylesheet again.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Working with Metadata Templates
Overview of Metadata Templates
Metadata templates allow you to reuse metadata on page 1756 such as the contact
information for your organization, or other common values that rarely change.
Templates can be especially useful if your organization must create metadata
for large numbers of legacy drawings. You can create new templates from
existing metadata, or import on page ? them from other sources to increase
your productivity.
See also:
■Overview of Editing Metadata on page 1239
■Updating Metadata on page 1243
To use metadata templates
1Create on page ? or import on page ? the template you want.
2Apply the template on page ?.
Working with Metadata Templates | 1231
3If desired, set a default template:
■Preview on page ? the templates to see which one you want.
■Set a default template on page ? for all metadata you generate from
this point on.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Using Metadata Templates
You can create or import (upload) an existing metadata on page 1756 template.
Metadata templates must be in an XML file, and must comply with the
structure of the standard with which you are working.
You can apply imported templates to your metadata. Applying a template will
overwrite any existing values. However, if they overwrite any values in
forced-update fields on page 1751, those values will revert to the values from
their data sources once the metadata is refreshed.
Once you have created or imported templates, you can set the one you will
use most often as a default.
See also:
■Setting Metadata Options on page 1225
■To create a new template on page ?
■To import a template on page ?
■To set a default template on page ?
■To export a template on page 1237
■To deactivate a template on page 1236
1232 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
■To remove a template on page 1238
■To create a new template on page 1233
■To import a template on page 1233
■To apply a template on page 1233
■To rename a template on page 1234
To create a new template
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, select the data source from which
you want to create a template.
2Click Create Template.
3Enter a name for your template.
4Click OK.
Your template is saved as an XML file. If you open the Metadata Options
dialog box on page 1485, your new template will be listed in the Use
Template window.
To import a template
1In the Metadata Viewer, click Options.
2Click Import.
3Browse to and select a template (an XML file).
4Click Open.
The template is displayed in the Use Template window.
To apply a template
1In the Metadata Viewer, select the data source to which you want to apply
the template.
2Right-click the data source.
3Click Regenerate Metadata from Template.
An additional menu is displayed, listing all your saved metadata templates.
If you have a default template already set, it is checked with an orange
checkmark.
Using Metadata Templates | 1233
4Select the template you want to apply.
The template is applied, and the Metadata tab refreshes with the updated
metadata.
To rename a template
1On the Metadata Viewer on page 1479 toolbar, click Options.
2Select a template from the Use Template window.
3Do one of the following:
■Click Rename. Enter the new name and press ENTER.
■Right-click a template in the Use Template window and rename it.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Previewing Metadata Templates
You can preview a template to make sure it displays the intended metadata
before you select it as a default. The Metadata Preview window behaves
similarly to the Metadata tab in the Metadata Viewer on page 1479. The links
are live, and you can collapse and expand levels of metadata to focus on
specific areas.
See also:
■To create a new template on page 1233
■To import a template on page 1233
■To set a default template on page 1235
■To apply a template on page 1233
1234 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
■To deactivate a template on page 1236
■To export a template on page 1237
■To rename a template on page 1234
■To remove a template on page 1238
To preview a template
1On the Metadata Viewer on page 1479 toolbar, click Options.
2Select the template to preview from the Use Template window.
3Click Preview.
Setting a Default Metadata Template
Once you have created or imported templates, you can set the one you will
use most often as a default.
See also:
■To create a new template on page 1233
■To import a template on page 1233
■To preview a template on page 1235
■To apply a template on page 1233
■To deactivate a template on page 1236
■To export a template on page 1237
■To rename a template on page 1234
■To remove a template on page 1238
To set a default template
1On the Metadata Viewer on page 1479 toolbar, click Options.
2From the Use Template window, select the template to set as the default.
3Select the Use Template check box.
Setting a Default Metadata Template | 1235
4Click OK.
The template you selected is set to be the default.
Deactivating Metadata Templates
If you have applied a template to your metadata on page 1756, but decide you
do not want to use it, you can deactivate it. When you deactivate a metadata
template, values that had come from the template will be overwritten by
values from the data source. Fields that had been populated by values from
the template, but that do not have corresponding values in the data source
will be cleared.
See also:
■To create a new template on page 1233
■To import a template on page 1233
■To apply a template on page 1233
■To set a default template on page 1235
■To export a template on page 1237
■To remove a template on page 1238
To deactivate a template
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, click Options.
2If the Use Template check box is selected, clear it.
3Click OK.
4Select the data source.
5Click Update All.
6Click Yes in the warning message that is displayed.
The metadata is updated with values from the data source you selected.
1236 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Exporting Metadata Templates
Once you create a metadata on page 1756 template, you can export it as an XML
file to share with others in your organization.
See also:
■To create a new template on page 1233
■To import a template on page 1233
■To apply a template on page 1233
■To set a default template on page 1235
■To deactivate a template on page 1236
■To remove a template on page 1238
To export a template
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, click Options.
2Select a template from the Use Template window.
3Click Export.
4Browse to, and select the location to save the template.
5Optionally, rename the template in the File Name field.
NOTE If a file name is already displayed, rename it unless you are sure you
want to overwrite the existing file with the one you are saving.
6Click Save.
Exporting Metadata Templates | 1237
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Removing Metadata Templates
If you no longer want a metadata on page 1756 template to be available for use,
you can remove it. If you have applied the template to metadata, removing
the template will not cause any of the values in that metadata to change. To
remove metadata that came from a template, see Deactivating Metadata
Templates on page ?.
See also:
■Editing Metadata on page 1239
■To create a new template on page 1233
■To import a template on page 1233
■To apply a template on page 1233
■To set a default template on page 1235
■To deactivate a template on page 1236
■To export a template on page 1237
To remove a template
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, click Options.
2Select the template to remove in the Use Template window.
3Click Remove.
1238 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAOPTIONS
Displays the Metadata Options dialog box
MAPMETADATAOPTIONSCommand Line
Metadata OptionsDialog Box
Editing Metadata
Overview of Editing Metadata
Although the best practices for creating most metadata on page 1756 are
auto-generation on page 1743, updating from the data source, using templates
on page ?, copying and pasting, or importing on page 1251 from similar sources,
some data must be entered manually. Metadata Editor on page 1483 provides
an interface in which to enter and manage your metadata.
See also:
■Metadata Fields on page 1484
■Keyboard Controls and Shortcuts on page 1485
■To enter or edit metadata manually on page 1240
■To add a new item to a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor on page
1241
■To select an item from a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor on page
1241
■To edit an item in a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor on page 1241
■To delete an item in a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor on page
1241
■To enter text into a free-form field in the Metadata Editor on page 1241
■To edit text in a free-form field in the Metadata Editor on page 1242
■To delete text in a free-form field on page 1242
Editing Metadata | 1239
To enter or edit metadata manually
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, select the file or resource to edit.
2Click Edit.
3On the left side of the Metadata Editor on page 1483, click the tab for the
section you want to edit. If all the tabs do not display on your screen, do
one of the following:
■Stretch the Metadata Editor vertically to make it longer.
■Click the edges of the lowest tab, and select the tab you want from
the menu that is displayed.
4Click to the left of a field group to reveal additional fields within
that group.
■
■Click to contract a field group.
5Enter the required changes in the appropriate fields.
6Click Apply to save your changes and continue editing.
1240 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
7Click OK to save your changes and close the Metadata Editor.
To add a new item to a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor
1Click the field. A drop down arrow is displayed.
2Click the drop down arrow. A menu is displayed.
3Click New. A compound element metadata editor on page 1488 is displayed
with empty fields.
4Enter the new item.
5Click OK. The item is saved, and will appear in the drop down menu the
next time you click the arrow.
To select an item from a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor
■Double-click the item.
To edit an item in a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor
1Click the field. A drop down arrow is displayed.
2Click the drop down arrow. A menu is displayed.
3Select the item to edit.
4Click Edit. A compound element metadata editor on page 1488 is displayed,
showing the metadata from your selection.
5Edit the metadata.
6Click OK to save the edits.
To delete an item in a drop down menu in the Metadata Editor
1Click the field. A drop down arrow is displayed.
2Click the drop down arrow. A menu is displayed.
3Select the item to delete.
4Click Delete.
To enter text into a free-form field in the Metadata Editor
1Click the field. A drop down arrow is displayed.
Overview of Editing Metadata | 1241
2Click the arrow. The field expands.
3Select the bottom, right-hand corner of the field, and drag it outward
until it is the size and shape that you want.
4Enter text into the field, or paste it in from another source.
5When you are finished, click somewhere else on the screen. The field is
no longer displayed.
6Click OK to save the text.
To edit text in a free-form field in the Metadata Editor
1Click the field. A drop down arrow is displayed.
2Click the arrow. The field expands.
3Select the bottom, right-hand corner of the field, and drag it outward
until it is the size and shape that you want.
4Edit the text like you would in a simple text editor.
5When you are finished, click somewhere else on the screen. The field is
no longer displayed.
6Click OK to save your edits.
To delete text in a free-form field
1Click the field. A drop down arrow is displayed.
2Click the arrow. The field expands.
3Select the bottom, right-hand corner of the field, and drag it outward
until it is the size and shape that you want.
4Delete text like you would in a simple text editor.
5When you are finished, click somewhere else on the screen. The field is
no longer displayed.
6Click OK to save the deletion.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
1242 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Updating Metadata
You can specify that your metadata on page 1756 is updated automatically, or
you can update it manually.
Update Automatically
If you select the Auto Update check box in the Metadata Options dialog box
on page 1485, your metadata will be updated as soon as its data source is updated
if the drawing is connected to the data source. If the drawing is not connected,
the metadata will update the next time you connect to the source.
Update Manually
To update metadata manually, you can use Update Auto in the Metadata
Viewer on page 1479 or in the Metadata Editor on page 1483. This will update the
values for forced-update fields on page 1751. Forced-update fields are derived
directly from their data source. Any manual overrides to values in the fields
will be updated to those from the data source when you click Update Auto.
The labels for forced-update fields are highlighted in turquoise if you click
Highlight in the Metadata Editor on page 1483.
Fields that are not forced-update fields will maintain your manual overrides.
Use Update All to update all fields. This will override any temporary fields or
values you entered manually.
See also:
■Keyboard Controls and Shortcuts on page 1485
To update metadata for all fields
■In the Metadata Viewer or Metadata Editor, click Update All.
Updating Metadata | 1243
To update metadata for forced-update fields only
■In the Metadata Viewer, click Update Auto.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Copying and Pasting Metadata
You can copy metadata on page 1756 from one source and paste it into another.
You can copy and paste all the metadata from a data source, but not select
parts. Because metadata standards require the metadata for forced-update fields
on page 1243 to come directly from their data sources, any pasted metadata that
differs from the values in these fields will not be saved.
To copy and paste metadata
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, right-click the data source from which
you want to copy metadata.
2Click Copy Metadata to Clipboard.
3Right-click the data source to which you want to paste the metadata.
4Click Paste Metadata from Clipboard.
The pasted metadata is displayed in the Metadata Tab on page 1482.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
1244 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Adding and Deleting Records in the Metadata Editor
Some metadata elements can have multiple records. You can add or delete
these records within the Metadata Editor.
See also:
■Creating and Viewing Metadata on page 1227
■Compound Element Metadata Editors on page 1488
To add a new record to a metadata element
■Click .
To delete a record from a metadata element
■Click .
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Adding and Deleting Records in the Metadata Editor | 1245
Working with Compound Metadata Elements
Some metadata elements consist of multiple elements. These are called
compound elements. Some compound elements on page 1745 have their own
editors within the Metadata Editor on page 1483. These compound element
editors on page 1488 have more detailed field labels, as well as explanations of
those fields.
A compound element that has its own editor will display an ellipsis on
the right side of the field when you click it.
See also:
■Using the Record Navigator on page 1247
To edit a compound metadata element
1In the Metadata Editor on page 1483 click a field that displays an ellipsis
on the right side of the field.
2Click the ellipsis .
3In the compound element editor, make the required edits.
4Click OK.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
1246 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Using the Record Navigator
Some of the compound element editors on page 1246 have fields or field groups
that can save more than one entry. These fields have a small button with four
arrows on the right side of the field. If you hover over this button, the Record
Navigator is displayed. The Record Navigator is inactive until you enter values
into the field or fields for which it stores records. Once a value is saved, you
can keep entering values in the same field,.
When you hover over the Record Navigator button, the Record Navigator is displayed.
Here, the Record Navigator is transparent because it is not yet storing any records.
See also:
■Creating and Viewing Metadata on page 1227
■Editing Metadata on page 1239
■To add records using the Record Navigator on page 1248
Using the Record Navigator | 1247
■To locate a record in the Record Navigator on page 1248
■To delete a record in the Record Navigator on page 1248
To add records using the Record Navigator
1If the fields in the compound element editor are blank, enter values into
them as you normally would.
2If the fields are populated, and you want to add more values, hover over
the Record Navigator button. The Record Navigator is displayed.
3Click in the Record Navigator. The related fields in the editor are
cleared to accept new entries.
4Enter values into the field(s).
5Click anywhere on the screen to hide the Record Navigator.
6Click OK to save the new records.
To locate a record in the Record Navigator
1Hover over the Record Navigator button. The Record Navigator is
displayed.
2Hover over the Record Navigator. It is no longer transparent.
■Click to go to the first record.
■Click to go to the last record.
■Click to move one record toward the first.
■Click to move one record toward the last.
To delete a record in the Record Navigator
1Locate the record you want to delete.
2Click .
1248 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Auditing Metadata
The Metadata Editor on page 1483 has an auditor to help you comply with the
metadata on page 1756 standard you are using. The auditor marks empty required
fields with auditing symbols that look like caution signs .
These symbols also appear on the tabs along the left side of the Metadata
Editor to indicate errors in that section. If no auditing symbol is displayed on
a tab, the auditor found no errors in that section.
Once an acceptable value is entered into the field, or other fields in the same
field group, the auditing symbol will not be displayed the next time you click
Audit.
To audit metadata
■In the Metadata Editor on page 1483, click .
To view auditing descriptions
■Hover over an auditing symbol .
To clear an auditing symbol
■Enter a valid value into the field.
Auditing Metadata | 1249
■Click .
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Sharing Metadata
Overview of Sharing Metadata
The best practice for sharing metadata on page 1756 within an organization is
to store the source data on a server. This will ensure that any metadata that
you work with on your local machine will remain current. If you save a
file-based data source to your local machine, the file that keeps the metadata
linked to the source data will look for that data on your machine. This can be
problematic if you want to share the metadata file. The linking mechanism
will attempt to locate the data in the same place that you stored it. To work
around this, send the data source to the new user. They will either need to
save everything in the exact same locations as you did, or edit the FSD file to
point to the data source’s new location.
See also:
■Importing Metadata on page 1251
■Exporting Metadata on page 1253
1250 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Use this method...To do this...
Print metadata 1In the Metadata Viewer on
page 1479, select a style sheet.
2click Print.
Export on page ? metadata ■In the Metadata Viewer, click Export.
Import on page ? metadata ■In the Metadata Viewer, click Import.
Publish on page ? metadata ■In the Metadata Viewer, click Publish.
Importing Metadata
One way to share metadata on page 1756 is by to import metadata created in
AutoCAD Map 3D.
For Object Classes
When you import metadata for an object class (one type of resource on page
1760), you can either open the DWG on page 1749 file containing that class (and
its metadata), or append the metadata for the object class to the metadata for
an existing object class in your current drawing. To do so, the object class’s
metadata you are importing must have the exact same name as the existing
object class.
For feature classes
When importing metadata for a feature class (another type of resource on
page 1760), AutoCAD Map 3D tries to connect to the feature source by launching
the Data Connect dialog box with its connection parameter fields filled.
In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, you can import a metadata storage (MTD)
file.
Importing Metadata | 1251
Import metadata values
In the Metadata Editor on page 1483, you can import an XML file. As long as
the file is structured according to the standard, the metadata values in it will
overwrite the current ones, except for the values in forced-update fields.
See also:
■Import Metadata Options dialog box on page 1486
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
■Editing Metadata on page 1239
■Exporting Metadata on page 1254
■Publishing Metadata on page 1255
To import metadata for DWGs or their resources
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, click Import.
2Browse to, and select the MTD file you want to import.
3Click Open.
4Select one of the following:
■Open the original project DWG file
■Append the source metadata to the current metadata
5Click OK.
To import metadata for Non-DWG files
1In the Metadata Editor on page 1483, click Import.
2Browse to, and select the XML file you want to import.
3Click Open.
To import ESRI metadata
1In ESRI, use ArcCatalog to export metadata in an ESRI profile to the FGDC
or ISO standard in XML format.
2In the AutoCAD Map 3D Metadata Editor on page 1483, click Import
Metadata Values.
1252 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
3In the Open dialog box, select the XML file you exported from ESRI, and
click Open.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
Exporting Metadata
You can share your metadata on page 1756 with other AutoCAD Map 3D users
by exporting it. If you wish to share metadata with users of other products,
see Publishing and Printing Metadata on page 1255.
For current drawing classified DWGs
For a classified DWG on page 1745 used as the current drawing, the metadata is
stored inside the DWG. Because the DWG file stores the location of the data
source, the metadata will be updated on page ? with each data update, or
each time it connects to updated data.
When you export metadata from a current classified DWG, it is transferred to
an MTD file. Although the file has an .mtd extension, its format is XML. A
linking file is also created and placed in the same location as the MTD file. If
the following conditions are met, the linking file retains the location of the
data, and the exported metadata will be kept current.
■The MTD file and the linking file are kept together
■The data source remains in the same location
■Auto update is selected in the Metadata Options dialog box on page 1485
Exporting Metadata | 1253
For non-DWG files and feature classes
An MTD file is also generated when you create metadata for a non-DWG file
or a feature class (which is one type of resource on page 1760).
When you export metadata for a feature class, a feature source definition (FSD)
file is created in addition to the MTD. In this case, it is the FSD file that keeps
the metadata linked to its source data.
See also:
■Updating Metadata on page ?
■Importing Metadata on page 1252
■Publishing Metadata on page 1255
■Setting Up Object Classification on page 108
To export metadata
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, click Export.
■For the current drawing DWG
Click Selected Item.
■For resources
Click All Items In, and select the applicable resources.
2Click Browse to select a location to save the files.
3Click Export.
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
1254 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Publishing and Printing Metadata
Publishing metadata
You can publish metadata on page 1756 to the following file formats: XML,
HTML, and TXT.
If you publish metadata for an object class or feature source, AutoCAD Map
3D will create an XML file for each object or each feature. If you publish a
DWG containing feature sources and object classes, the XML file will describe
each object and feature in the DWG, but not as thoroughly as it will if you
publish them separately.
NOTE It is possible to publish metadata that does not comply with the standard
with which you are working. Audit your metadata to check for errors (see Auditing
Metadata on page 1249).
Printing metadata
When you print metadata on page 1756, the printout is formatted using the style
sheet that is currently selected in the Metadata Viewer on page 1479.
See also:
■Importing Metadata on page 1251
■Exporting Metadata on page 1253
To publish metadata
1In the Metadata Viewer on page 1479, click Publish.
2Optionally, rename the file.
3Select a location to save the file.
4Under Save As Type, select a file type.
5Click OK.
To print metadata
1In the Metadata Viewer, select a style sheet.
2Click Print.
Publishing and Printing Metadata | 1255
Quick Reference
MAPMETADATAVIEWER
Displays the Metadata Viewer
MAPMETADATAVIEWERCommand Line
In Map Explorer, right-click the current drawing ➤
View Metadata.
Task Pane
Metadata ViewerDialog Box
1256 | Chapter 10 Working with Metadata
Reference Guide
This section provides comprehensive information about AutoCAD Map 3D commands,
expressions and variables, and the dialog boxes where many of the AutoCAD Map 3D settings
can be specified.
1257
1258
Command Reference
AutoCAD Map 3D adds its own unique mapping and spatial data management commands
to the AutoCAD command set. You get all the power and design capabilities of AutoCAD plus
the spatial context needed for mapping.
Commands can be accessed using a variety of methods:
■Enter a command in the drawing area or on the command line.
■Select the command from the menu.
■Click the toolbar icon for the command.
■Right-click an object in the drawing or an item in the Task Pane and select the command
from the shortcut menu
This section provides information about the mapping commands in AutoCAD Map 3D.
For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
To learn more about the various ways you can use a command, click the Quick Reference tab
of a help topic.
■Mapping Commands on page 1259
■Discontinued Commands on page 1274
■MAPWSACTION on page 1277
■REFEDIT on page 1278
■Wildcard Characters on page 1278
■Improving Performance on page 1279
Mapping Commands
Following is a list of mapping commands. Click a command name for
information about how to use it.
11
1259
For information about AutoCAD commands, see the AutoCAD Help.
DescriptionCommand
Specifies a point based on angle and dis-
tance from a given point
AD on page ?
Attaches object data to objectsADEATTACHDATA on page 876
Defines a global coordinate systemADEDEFCRDSYS on page 86
Defines object dataADEDEFDATA on page 181
Manages the drawing setADEDRAWINGS on page 146
Removes locks from objectsADEDWGMAINT on page 1640
Displays drawing statisticsADEDWGSTAT on page 1646
Edits attached object dataADEEDITDATA on page 881
Fills a selected polygonADEFILLPOLYG on page 796
Automatically links objects to object data
or external database records
ADEGENLINK on page 452
Controls defining, modifying, saving,
loading, and executing a query
ADEQUERY on page 1025
Maintains the library of queriesADEQUERYLIB on page 169
Performs a quick display of active drawingsADEQVIEWDWGS on page 620
Removes objects from the save set so they
aren't saved to source drawings
ADEREMOBJS on page 1619
Performs rubber sheeting on selected ob-
jects
ADERSHEET on page 793
1260 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionCommand
Runs queries in the Query LibraryADERUNQUERY on page 166
Runs externally saved queriesADERUNXQUERY on page 167
Saves objects in the save set back to source
drawings
ADESAVEOBJS on page 1621
Creates a set of objects to be saved to
source drawings
ADESELOBJS on page 1620
Assigns a global coordinate system code
for the current drawing
ADESETCRDSYS on page 138
Displays the objects in the save setADESHOWOBJS on page 1621
Redefines the default label point of an ob-
ject for text
ADETEXTLOC on page 795
Moves, scales, and rotates a set of objectsADETRANSFORM on page 790
Displays the current owner of a selected
locked object
ADEWHOHASIT on page 1623
Performs a ZOOM command to display
the extents of selected active drawings
ADEZEXTENTS on page 618
Changes the current object class definition
file
ATTACHDEF on page 849
Specifies a point based on bearing and
distance from a given point
BD on page 855
Classifies existing objectsCLASSIFY on page 844
Specifies a point based on deflection and
distance from a given point
DD on page 857
Mapping Commands | 1261
DescriptionCommand
Defines a new object class based on an
example in the current drawing
FEATUREDEF on page 113
Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk
MapGuide 6.5 or earlier. Same as MAPEX-
PORTMAPGUIDE.
MAP2SDF on page 1177
Gives information about AutoCAD Map 3DMAPABOUT
Adds a link to a network topologyMAPAL on page 745
Adds a node to a topologyMAPAN on page 742
Creates a buffer around an existing topo-
logy
MAPANBUFFER on page 1113
Dissolves a topology into constituent topo-
logies
MAPANDISSOLVE on page 1110
Deletes all annotation based on selected
template
MAPANNDELETE on page 911
Adds annotation to objects based on selec-
ted annotation template
MAPANNINSERT on page 1312
Refreshes existing annotationMAPANNREFRESH on page 910
Defines and modifies annotation templatesMAPANNTEMPLATE on page 175
Creates and edits annotation textMAPANNTEXT on page 175
Updates existing annotationMAPANNUPDATE on page 911
Overlays one topology with another, and
creates a new topology
MAPANOVERLAY on page 1107
1262 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionCommand
Traces through a network topology
(shortest path trace, best route analysis, or
flood trace)
MAPANTOPONET on page 1087
Adds a polygon to a polygon topologyMAPAP on page 747
Attaches a data source to a drawingMAPATTACHDB on page 189
Automatically checks-out features that are
edited
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT on page 584
Breaks a link in a topology at a specified
point
MAPBL on page 728
Breaks objects along a selected or defined
boundary
MAPBREAK on page 799
Opens a database table associated with a
specific link template to edit in the Data
View
MAPBROWSELINK on page 866
Opens a database table to edit in the Data
View
MAPBROWSETBL on page 866
Discards edits and unlocks the features in
the feature source. Edits are not discarded
if Update Edits Automatically is enabled
MAPCANCELCHECKOUT on page 586
Adds the distances between pointsMAPCGADIST on page 948
Displays the angle between lines or pointsMAPCGANG on page 951
Sets the azimuth baseMAPCGAZBASE on page 211
Displays the distance between pointsMAPCGCDIST on page 950
Mapping Commands | 1263
DescriptionCommand
Displays coordinate geometry information
for lines and arcs
MAPCGLIST on page 952
Specifies coordinate geometry settingsMAPCGSETUP on page 211
Displays the slope between pointsMAPCGSLIST on page 952
Saves modified features back to their fea-
ture source and unlocks the features in the
feature source
MAPCHECKIN on page 583
Makes feature available for editing and if
locking is available, sets locks on the source
MAPCHECKOUT on page 584
Performs drawing cleanup operationsMAPCLEAN on page 639
Creates polylines from a polygon topologyMAPCLPLINE on page 759
Configures the connection to an external
data source
MAPCONFIGDB on page 192
Connects to a feature sourceMAPCONNECT on page 269
Connects to an attached data sourceMAPCONNECTDB on page 193
Toggles default connection pooling setting.MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING on page 81
Creates a centroid in a polygon and moves
data to the centroid
MAPCREATECENTROIDS on page 749
Converts drawing objects to features to
create new features.
MAPCREATEFEATUREFROMGEOMETRY on
page 582
Opens the Data Table, which allows you
to view, edit and filter feature data
MAPDATATABLE on page 925
1264 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionCommand
Defines a link template for a database tableMAPDEFINELT on page 455
Deletes database links from objectsMAPDELETELINKS
Deletes a link templateMAPDELETELT
Detaches a data source from a drawingMAPDETACHDB on page 193
Sets up user options for digitizing nodes
and linear objects
MAPDIGISETUP on page 123
Digitizes nodes and linear objects with
settings from mapdigisetup
MAPDIGITIZE on page 893
Disconnects an attached, connected data-
base
MAPDISCONNECTDB on page 193
Turns on and off the Display Library
palette.
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY on page 1357
Turns on and off the Display Manager.MAPDISPLAYMANAGER on page 1357
Measures the geodetic distance between
points
MAPDIST on page 944
Deletes a link in a network topology.MAPDL on page 752
Deletes a node in a topology.MAPDN on page 752
Deletes a polygon from a polygon topo-
logy.
MAPDP on page 752
Docks and undocks the Task PaneMAPDOCKWSPACE on page 1628
Divides a polygon in a polygon topology
by allowing you to add a link
MAPDVP on page 732
Mapping Commands | 1265
DescriptionCommand
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D options for publish-
ing to DWF.
MAPDWFOPTIONS on page 1130
Edits direction of a link in a network topo-
logy
MAPEDITDIR on page 713
Edits direct resistance of a node or link in
a network topology
MAPEDITRES1 on page 715
Edits reverse resistance of a link in a net-
work topology
MAPEDITRES2 on page 715
Updates feature edits automaticallyMAPEDITSETAUTO on page 586
Toggles default setting for Update Edits
Automatically
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT on page 81
Exports data from AutoCAD Map 3D to an
external file format
MAPEXPORT on page 1170
Exports an SDF 2 file for use with Autodesk
MapGuide 6.5 and earlier. Same as
MAP2SDF
MAPEXPORTMAPGUIDE on page 1177 (Same
as MAP2SDF)
Extracts the geometry from a feature to
use AutoCAD commands that are not
available for features
MAPEXTRACTFEATUREGEOMETRY on page
599
Creates a buffer zone around features in
your map
MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE on page 1006
Edits a feature.MAPFEATUREEDIT on page 588
Specifies options for editing featuresMAPFEATUREEDITOPTIONS on page 217
1266 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionCommand
Merges features and assigns feature prop-
erty values for the resulting feature
MAPFEATUREMERGE on page 594
Splits features and assigns feature property
values for resulting features
MAPFEATURESPLIT on page 593
Specifies the settings to use for shading 3D
raster-based surfaces
MAPHILLSHADE on page 989
Makes frames enclosing raster images, vis-
ible or invisible
MAPIFRAME on page 426
Determines whether or not the rules for
split and merge are used
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES on page
1391
View file, image, object property, and cor-
relation information about selected images
MAPIINFO on page 406
Inserts a raster imageMAPIINSERT on page 393
Inserts a link in a topologyMAPIL on page 745
View list of images in current drawing,
change drawing order, erase or zoom to
selected images
MAPIMANAGE on page 406
Imports an external file format into Auto-
CAD Map 3D
MAPIMPORT on page 320
Imports an SDF 2 file from Autodesk Map-
Guide 6.5 or earlier. Same as MAPSDFIN.
MAPIMPORTMAPGUIDE on page 326 (Same
as MAPSDFIN)
Inserts a node in a topology.MAPIN on page 742
Mapping Commands | 1267
DescriptionCommand
Specify default image correlation settings,
display options, detach options, paths, and
memory settings
MAPIOPTIONS on page 226
Joins two links in a topologyMAPJL on page 728
Creates a new LineString featureMAPLINESTRINGCREATE on page 1392
Edits a LineString featureMAPLINESTRINGEDIT on page 1393
Edits a link in a network topologyMAPLINKEDIT on page 728
Edits the link data attached to an objectMAPLINKMANAGER on page 465
Updates links in a network topologyMAPLINKUPD on page 754
Log in as an AutoCAD Map 3D userMAPLOGIN on page 133
Repositions an end point of a link in a net-
work topology
MAPMEL on page 728
Moves a link in a network topologyMAPML on page 728
Moves a node in a node topology or moves
a node at the end of a link in network or
polygon topologies
MAPMN on page 725
Merges polygons in a polygon topologyMAPMP on page 732
Creates a new MultiLineString featureMAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE on page
1394
Edits a MultiLineString featureMAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT on page 1395
Creates a new MultiPoint featureMAPMULTIPOINTCREATE on page 1396
1268 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionCommand
Edits a MultiPoint featureMAPMULTIPOINTEDIT on page 1397
Creates a new MultiPolygon featureMAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE on page 1398
Edits a MultiPolygon featureMAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT on page 1399
Edits a node in a topologyMAPNODEDIT on page 725
Updates nodes in a topologyMAPNOUPD on page 754
Converts object data tables to linked extern-
al database tables.
MAPOD2ASE on page 464
Sets AutoCAD Map 3D optionsMAPOPTIONS on page 197
Creates a new Point featureMAPPOINTCREATE on page 1401
Creates a new Polygon featureMAPPOLYGONCREATE on page 1401
Edits a polygon featureMAPPOLYGONEDIT on page 1402
Converts closed polylines to polygonsMAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON on page 827
Updates a polygon topologyMAPPOLYUPD on page 754
Edits the database table name or location
in a link template
MAPPROPSLT on page 467
Publishes to the new MapGuide techno-
logy (Autodesk MapGuide Enterprise 2007
or MapGuide Open Source)
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE on page 1141
Reverses a link in a network topology.MAPRL on page 713
Mapping Commands | 1269
DescriptionCommand
Runs a database query and opens a data-
base table displaying the results of the
query in the Data View
MAPRUNDBQUERY on page 861
Imports an SDF format file from Autodesk
MapGuide
MAPSDFIN on page 326
Searches for and selects features in your
map, based on the location and attribute
criteria you specify
MAPSEARCH on page 1001
Highlights features in the drawing that are
from the selected feature source
MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT on page 584
Selects all classified objectsMAPSELECTCLASSIFIED on page 848
Selects all objects that have no classifica-
tion assigned to them
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED on page 848
Selects all objects whose classification is
not defined in the object class definition
file
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED on page 848
Highlights objects in the selected topologyMAPSHOWGEOM on page 772
Highlights and identifies topologies for the
selected object
MAPSHOWTOPO on page 772
Shows or hides the Map status bar.MAPSTATUSBAR on page 81
Adds text features to an annotation layerMAPTEXTCREATE on page 915
Allows you to edit text features on an an-
notation layer
MAPTEXTEDIT on page 916
1270 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionCommand
Creates an annotation layer for freestand-
ing text features
MAPTEXTLAYERCREATE on page 913
Checks that a topology is complete and
contains no errors
MAPTOPOAUDIT on page 780
Completes a network or polygon topologyMAPTOPOCOMP on page 780
Creates a new topology.MAPTOPOCREATE on page 692
Removes topology data from objects, and
optionally deletes the objects
MAPTOPODEL on page 785
Loads a topologyMAPTOPOLOAD on page 768
Converts an existing polygon topology to
polygons
MAPTOPOLOGY on page 830
Queries topologiesMAPTOPOQUERY on page 1119
Reestablishes a topology that was edited
with nontopology editing commands such
as STRETCH, PEDIT, and MOVE
MAPTOPORECR on page 780
Changes the name, description, or both
of a topology
MAPTOPOREN on page 784
Displays detailed information about a topo-
logy
MAPTOPOSTATS on page 776
Unloads a topologyMAPTOPOUNLOAD on page 768
Tracks the coordinates of the cursor in any
coordinate system
MAPTRACKCS on page 942
Trims objects to a set of edgesMAPTRIM on page 802
Mapping Commands | 1271
DescriptionCommand
Merges new or existing drawing object
geometry with a feature.
MAPUPDATEFEATUREGEOMETRY on page
600
Enables/disables use of mapping polygonsMAPUSEMPOLYGON on page 835
Performs administrative functionsMAPUSERADMIN on page 76
Opens a database table associated with a
specific link template to view in the Data
View
MAPVIEWLINK on page 456
Opens a database table to view in the Data
View
MAPVIEWTBL on page 866
Disconnects you from feature sources and
caches all your feature data connections,
MAPWORKOFFLINE on page 600
allowing you to work with a local copy of
your feature data.
Reestablishes connections with your feature
sources so you are working live again and
can check in any changes.
MAPWORKONLINE on page 600
Indicates that a shortcut menu command
in the Task Pane has no link to an AutoCAD
Map 3D command
MAPWSACTION on page 1277
Shows or hides the Task PaneMAPWSPACE on page 1628
Redisplays the Task PaneMAPWSREFRESH on page 1628
Edits polygonsMAPMPEDIT on page 822
Sets the default fill for polygonsMPFILL on page 835
Creates polygonsMPOLYGON on page 818
1272 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionCommand
Splits an existing polygon object into two
new polygon objects
MPSPLIT on page 824
Creates a new object class definition fileNEWDEF on page 120
Changes the display of polygon edges and
fill
POLYDISPLAY on page 835
Removes classification from an objectUNCLASSIFY on page 844
Specifies a point based on azimuth and
distance from a given point
ZD on page 859
Changed or Replaced Commands
Some commands have been replaced or discontinued in this release. Some of
the commands still function, but they may not be available in future releases.
You should update any scripts you have to use new commands. For more
information, see Discontinued Commands on page 1274.
Using Wildcard Characters with Commands
Most AutoCAD Map 3D commands are wildcard character-enabled. For more
information, see Wildcard Characters on page 1278.
See also:
■REFEDIT on page 1278
Mapping Commands | 1273
Discontinued Commands
The following commands have been discontinued or replaced. Some may still
function in this release. However, you should update your scripts to use new
commands.
NotesDiscontinued Com-
mand
Category
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOATTACHFeature Data Objects
(FDO)
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOCONFIGURE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCONNECT.
FDOCONNECT
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODETACH
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODISASSOCIATE
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDODISCONNECT
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCHECKOUT.
FDOEDITSETADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCANCELCHECKOUT.
FDOEDITSETREMOVE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPCHECKIN.
FDOEDITSETSAVE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPSELECTCHECKEDOUT.
FDOEDITSETSHOW
1274 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
NotesDiscontinued Com-
mand
Category
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOLOCKS
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOQUERY
DiscontinuedFDOREFRESH
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOSCHEMA
Discontinued. Not used any
more.
FDOSHOWOWNER
DiscontinuedFDOSYSADMIN / SYSAD-
MIN
DiscontinuedMAPSKINMAPGeneral
DiscontinuedMAPIMPORT4Import Export (Release
4)
DiscontinuedMAPEXPORT4
Discontinued in Autodesk Map
6. New command is MAP-
CLEAN.
ADEDWGCLEANDrawing Cleanup
Discontinued. For information
about the new way, see Bring-
ORACONNECTOracle Spatial (Older
Method)
ing In Features from Oracle on
page 271.
DiscontinuedORADISCONNECT
DiscontinuedORAERUPDATE
Discontinued Commands | 1275
NotesDiscontinued Com-
mand
Category
DiscontinuedORAEXPORT
DiscontinuedORAIMPORT
DiscontinuedORAINDEX
DiscontinuedORAUPDATE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANBUFFER
MAPBUFFERTopology
Discontinued. New command
is MAPTOPOCREATE
MAPCREATE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANDISSOLVE
MAPDISSOLVE
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANTOPONET
MAPFLOOD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPAL
MAPLINKADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPDL
MAPLINKDEL
Discontinued. New command
is MAPRL
MAPLINKREV
Discontinued. New command
is MAPAN
MAPNODADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPDN
MAPNODDEL
1276 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
NotesDiscontinued Com-
mand
Category
Discontinued. New command
is MAPIN
MAPNODINS
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANOVERLAY
MAPOVERLAY
Discontinued. New command
is MAPAP
MAPPOLYADD
Discontinued. New command
is MAPDP
MAPPOLYDEL
Discontinued. There are several
new commands,for example,
MAPTOPOADMIN
MAPTOPOLOAD and MAPTO-
PODEL. For a complete list, see
Managing Topologies on page
760.
Discontinued. There are several
new commands, for example,
MAPTOPOEDIT
MAPAN, MAPDL, and MAPMP.
For a complete list, see Editing
Topologies on page 715.
Discontinued. New command
is MAPANTOPONET
MAPTRACE
MAPWSACTION
This text represents a shortcut menu command in the Task Pane that has no
link to an AutoCAD Map 3D command. For example, some topology
commands that you choose from the shortcut menu in the Task Pane do not
have corresponding AutoCAD Map 3D commands.
MAPWSACTION | 1277
If you right-click in the drawing after completing such an action, you see
"Repeat MAPWSACTION" in the menu. If you click this item, nothing will
happen, by design. Likewise, if you right-click the command line, you see
MAPWSACTION as one of the Recent Commands, but clicking on it will do
nothing. The action that MAPWSACTION represents is not repeatable by
typing MAPWSACTION on the command line. You must repeat the action
from the Task Pane.
NOTE You cannot undo this operation using the UNDO command.
REFEDIT
Use the reference editing command to make modifications to Xrefs and blocks.
While in REFEDIT mode, the Task Pane and Data View are grayed-out and
some commands are unavailable. If you attempt to use one of these commands,
AutoCAD Map 3D displays a message that the command is not allowed during
reference editing
Wildcard Characters
Most dialog boxes and command line entries support the following wildcard
characters.
These wildcard characters can be used in object data queries and property
queries. To use wildcard characters in SQL queries, refer to your database
software for a list of supported characters.
DescriptionWildcard
Matches any numeric digit.#(pound)
Matches any alphabetic character.@(at)
Matches any nonalphanumeric character..(period)
Matches any string, including the null string. It can be used
at the beginning, middle, or end of a string.
*(asterisk) or%(per-
cent)
Matches any single character.?(question mark)
1278 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
DescriptionWildcard
Matches anything but the next pattern.~(tilde)
Matches any one of the characters enclosed.[ ] (brackets)
Matches any character not enclosed.[~ ] (tilde and brack-
ets)
Specifies a range for a single character when inside brackets.-(hyphen)
Escape character; reads the next character literally.'(reverse quote)
Enters a set when used between items.,(comma)
NOTE Most AutoCAD Map 3D commands are wildcard character-enabled. To
use a wildcard character as a literal character, precede the wildcard character with
a back quote (`). For example, if you have a layer named "Floor Plan #1," from
which you want to query some objects, type Floor Plan `#1 when you create the
query. If you select the name from a list box, the back quote is added automatically
to the text that appears in any corresponding edit box. The wildcard characters
for which this is valid include #, @, .(period), ~.
Improving Performance
You can improve performance in many areas by taking a few steps in advance.
For example, creating indexes can greatly speed up queries and save back.
The following table lists some of the steps you can take to improve
performance. For more information on an item, click the link.
Feature Layers
You can filter a feature layer to reduce the number of features
in the layer and improve performace. You can filter data as
Filtering a Feature Layer
on page 1002
you bring it into your map (in Data Connect, click Add To
Improving Performance | 1279
Feature Layers
Map With Query), or after you bring it in (right-click the layer
and choose Query To Filter Data).
Query Attached
Drawings
Using the AutoCAD Map 3D global coordinate systems re-
quires many complex calculations and can decrease perform-
To turn off a global co-
ordinate system on
page 140 ance for operations such as querying objects from attached
drawings and saving back objects.
To reduce the amount of time it takes to perform a query,
create an index. Instead of searching all locations, properties,
To create a drawing in-
dex on page 1077
object data, or database links to find matching data, AutoCAD
Map 3D searches only the relevant index. If you created in-
dexes in a previous release of AutoCAD Map 3D, it may help
to recreate the indexes in this release to ensure that they in-
clude any new features, such as color book names.
Raster Images
When you hide an image, the image does not display on-
screen, nor does it plot. Only the image boundary displays
To hide an image on
page 416
onscreen. Hiding images is a convenient way to speed re-
generation time. You can easily redisplay the image when
you are ready to plot.
To conserve memory use and enhance performance, you
can unload images that you do not currently need to view
and/or plot.
To unload an image on
page 418
Because memory management can be an issue when
working with large images, you can configure the Raster
To configure memory for
images on page 235
Extension for best performance. Specify the amount of
memory reserved for the image swap file. The higher the
Memory Limit, the less swapping to hard disk occurs and
the faster your images load and display. For best perform-
ance, use a local drive for your temporary swap file.
1280 | Chapter 11 Command Reference
Raster Images
Display your images in high quality or draft quality. High
quality dithers the pixels so that the areas between shading
To change the image
display quality on page
230 appear more gradual. Draft quality can speed up the per-
formance of your system, but may reduce the quality of how
some color and gray scale images appear onscreen.
Topology
Improve the performance of buffering operations by increas-
ing the RAM to more than the recommended amount, or
Buffering a Topology
by increasing the virtual memory on your system. This is
recommended if you are buffering large topologies.
DataView
Filter, or limit, the data displayed in the Data View. Filters
let you view only the records you want. This can improve
To use a SQL filter in the
Data View on page 1019
performance in scrolling through many records or in high-
lighting records.
Other
Using the Erase Short Objects cleanup action, you can locate
any objects shorter than the specified tolerance and erase them.
To erase short linear
objects on page 666
This action reduces the number of unnecessary linear objects
and nodes in a map.
Simplifying linear objects reduces file size and improves perform-
ance but also reduces the resolution of the data.
To simplify objects
on page 682
When modifying or working with a large number of objects, you
can enhance performance by adding the objects to the EditSet
(locking them) prior to working with them.
To add objects to
the save set and lock
the objects on page
624
Improving Performance | 1281
1282
Expression Evaluator
Use expressions and variables to define data based on other information in your drawings or
in external databases.
Most places where you can enter an expression, you can use the Expression dialog box to
select from a list of available variables. You can combine expressions and variables to create
complex expressions.
■Functions on page 1283
■Variables on page 1288
■Using Color in Expressions on page 1295
■Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator on page 1297
Functions
Expressions can include many types of functions.
See also:
■Variables on page 1288
Arithmetic Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following arithmetic functions. The words
in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
DescriptionExpression
Returns the sum of all numbers.(+ number number [number] ...)
12
1283
DescriptionExpression
Subtracts the second and following numbers from
the first and returns the difference.
(- number number [number] ...)
Returns the product of all numbers.(* number number [number] ...)
Divides the first number by the product of the remain-
ing numbers and returns the quotient.
(/ number number [number] ...)
Returns the absolute value of the number.(abs number)
Returns the arctangent of the number expressed in
radians.
(atan num1 [num2] )
Returns the cosine of the angle expressed in radians.(cos angle)
Returns the constant e (a real number) raised to a
specified power (the natural antilog).
(exp number)
Returns a number raised to a specified power.(expt basepower)
Returns the conversion of a real number into the
nearest smaller integer.
(fix number)
Returns the natural log of a number as a real number.(log number)
Returns the base 10 logarithm for a number.(log10 number)
Returns the sine of an angle as a real number ex-
pressed in radians.
(sin angle)
Returns the square root of a number as a real num-
ber.
(sqrt number)
Returns the tangent of an angle, measured in radians.(tan angle)
1284 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
String-Handling Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following string-handling functions.
The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
DescriptionExpression
Returns a string where all alphabetic characters have
been converted to uppercase or lowercase.
(strcase string [which] )
Returns a string that is the concatenation of multiple
strings.
(strcat string1 [string2] ...)
Returns an integer that is the number of characters
in a string.
(strlen [string] ...)
Returns a substring of a string.(substr stringstart [length] )
Returns the conversion of an integer representing an
ASCII character code into a single-character string.
(chr integer)
ads the beginning of a string with spaces until the
string reaches the length specified.
(LPAD stringlength)
ads the end of a string with spaces until the string
reaches the length specified.
(RPAD stringlength)
Trims strings from the beginning, middle, or end of
a string based on the mode. Mode can be B (begin-
(trim string [mode] )
ning), M (middle), or E (end), or any combination.
If no mode is specified, BE is used.
String-Handling Functions | 1285
Equality and Conditional Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following equality and conditional
functions. The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
DescriptionExpression
Returns T if all arguments are numerically equal, and
returns nil otherwise.
(= numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if the arguments are not numerically equal,
and nil if the arguments are numerically equal.
(/= numstr [numstr] ...) or (<>
numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically less than
the argument to the right, and returns nil otherwise.
(< numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically less than
or equal to the argument to the right, and returns
nil otherwise.
(<= numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically greater
than the argument to the right, and returns nil oth-
erwise.
(> numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns T if each argument is numerically greater
than or equal to the argument to the right, and re-
turns nil otherwise.
(>= numstr [numstr] ...)
Returns the logical AND of a list of expressions.(and expr ...)
Returns the logical OR of a list of expressions.(or expr ...)
1286 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Symbol-Handling Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following symbol-handling function.
The words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
DescriptionExpression
Verifies that the item evaluates to nil.(not item)
Conversion Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following conversion functions. The
words in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
DescriptionExpression
Converts an angular value in radians into a string.(angtos angle [mode [precision] ]
)
Returns the conversion of the first character of a
string into its ASCII character code (an integer).
(ascii string)
Converts the lineweight (first argument) to a real.
If the optional second argument is non-nil, returns
(lwtof lineweight [metric] )
the lineweight as millimeters, otherwise returns it
as inches.
Converts a number into a string.(rtos number [mode [precision] ] )
Symbol-Handling Functions | 1287
Other Functions
The expression evaluator supports the following other functions. The words
in italics can be replaced by an actual value or a variable.
DescriptionExpression
Returns the value of the dot variable for the object as it
is stored in the drawing. If the object was queried from
entity .dotvariable
a source drawing, returns the value for the object in the
source drawing, before any transformations are applied.
Returns the value of the dot variable for the object as it
is stylized in the Display Manager.
style .dotvariable
Returns pi (approx. 3.1415926).PI
Returns the value of the expression after it has been
processed by the specified range table. The range table
must be defined in the current drawing.
(Range expression
range_table)
Returns the current viewport scale, expressed as the
apparent size of a screen pixel in drawing units.
(viewscale)
Returns the current twist angle for the current viewport.
This is equivalent to the viewtwist system variable.
(viewtwist)
Variables
Expressions can include many types of variables and expressions.
See also:
■Object Data Variables on page 1292
1288 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Dot Variables
Use dot variables to represent object properties. For example, use the .LENGTH
variable in a property alteration to have AutoCAD Map 3D add text to all lines
specifying their length. In an output report, use the .TYPE variable to list the
type of objects in your report.
DescriptionExpression
For most objects, returns the angle in the XY plane.
For ellipse objects, returns the angle of the major axis; for point
objects, returns the ECS rotation; for trace objects, returns the
.ANGLE
angle between the middle points of the start and end edges;
for circle objects, returns the angle of the circle normal projec-
ted plus PI/2 onto the WCSmdash;if no ECS, returns 0; for ob-
jects with 1 or 0 grip points, returns 0; for attdef, text, mtext,
insert, shape, and raster images objects, returns rotation.
Area of a closed polyline or circle.
Topology queries only: Value of AREA object data field for each
polygon.
.AREA
Name of a block..BLOCKNAME
Bulge factor for a polyline segment..BULGE
Center point of an object's extents.
If the object is a polygon (a closed polyline), this coordinate is
always inside the closed area regardless of the area's dimension.
.CENTER
Center point of an object's extents; that is, the intersection of
the diagonals of its bounding rectangle.
.CENTROID
Object class name..CLASSNAME
ACI color of an AutoCAD Map 3D object.Color BYLAYER evalu-
ates as 256.Color BYBLOCK evaluates as 0.
.COLOR
Dot Variables | 1289
DescriptionExpression
Name of the object's source drawing.
Topology queries only: Name of the geometry object's source
drawing.
.DWGNAME
Ending angle of an arc object, using radians, interpreted from
the coordinate space where the object exists.
.EANGLE
Handle of the queried object..EHANDLE
Value for the Z coordinate..ELEVATION
Ending width of a polyline. Does not adjust to the ending width
of individual polyline segments.
.EWIDTH
Height of a text object..HEIGHT
Location for text associated with an object..LABELPT
Layer of an object..LAYER
Length of a line, arc, polyline, or circle. Circle length is given
as the circle circumference.
.LENGTH
Linetype of an object..LINETYPE
Lineweight of an object..LINEWEIGHT
User responsible for the lock..LOCKSTAT
Topology queries only: Value of PERIMETER object data field
for each polygon.
.PERIMETER
Plotstyle of an object..PLOTSTYLE
Radius of a circle..RADIUS
1290 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
DescriptionExpression
Rotation angle of a block or text, using radians..ROTATION
Starting angle of an arc, using radians, interpreted from the
coordinate space where the object exists.
.SANGLE
Name of an AutoCAD Map 3D shape..SHAPENAME
Size of an AutoCAD Map 3D shape..SIZE
Value of a string (can be the value of an attribute or text)..STRING
Style of a text string or attribute..STYLE
Starting width of a polyline..SWIDTH
All AutoCAD Map 3D attribute tags for an object. Usually used
with .STRING to return an attribute tag and its string value
(that is, .TAG, .STRING).
.TAG
AutoCAD Map 3D thickness of an object..THICKNESS
Topology name (Topology queries only)..TOPONAME
Topology type: NODE, NETWORK, or POLYGON (Topology
queries only).
.TOPOTYPE
True color or color book value of an AutoCAD Map 3D object..TRUECOLOR
AutoCAD Map 3D object type..TYPE
URL information linked to an object.
An object with no URL link returns nil.
.URL
NOTE An object can take only one URL. URL data can be
entered in the following formats:
http://servername/pathname/filename.dwg
Dot Variables | 1291
DescriptionExpression
ftp://servername/pathname/filename.dwg
file://drive/pathname/filename.dwg
Components of a line's starting point--X, Y, or Z..X1, .Y1, .Z1
Components of a line's ending point--X, Y, or Z..X2, .Y2, .Z2
Third definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If
used on any other object, returns nil.
.X3, .Y3, .Z3
Fourth definition point of a shape or three-dimensional face. If
used on any other object, returns nil.
.X4, .Y4, .Z4
Scale factor along the X axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
.XSCALE
Scale factor along the Y axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
.YSCALE
Scale factor along the Z axis, interpreted using the coordinate
space where the object exists.
.ZSCALE
All numeric return values are in decimals.
Object Data Variables
The syntax for using an object data variable in an expression is
:ObjectDataFieldName@ObjectDataTableName
For example, to retrieve the values in the Diameter field of the Pipes table,
enter :diameter@pipes.
Block Attribute Variables
The syntax for using a block attribute variable in an expression is
1292 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
@BlockTagName
For example, the retrieve the values for the block attribute tag VALVETYPE,
enter @VALVETYPE.
SQL Variables and Expressions
The syntax for using a SQL variable in an expression is
&ColumnName@LinkTemplate
For example, to retrieve the values in the PRICE column in the table referenced
by the link template HOUSES, enter &PRICE@HOUSES.
To relate a second table to the table specified in the link template and return
a value from one of its fields, use this syntax
&[ [ [catalog. ] schema. ] colname@LT [.lnka1, lnka2, ..., lnkaN [.lnkb1, lnkb2, ...,
lnkbN ] ]
The expression must be entered on one line.
■The parameters preceding the @ symbol identify the related table. The LT
parameter identifies the primary table. If no schema or catalog is defined,
it is assumed the related table exists in the same schema as the primary
table.
■The lnk parameter (or lnk1,lnk2,...,lnkN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to reference for the relation if you are not using
the key or keys identified in the link template. If no lnk column is defined
it is assumed that the columns identified in the link template exist in both
tables and are referenced for the relation.
■The lnka parameter (or lnka1,lnka2,...,lnkaN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to use in the primary table.
■The lnkb parameter (or lnkb1,lnkb2,...,lnkbN parameter list) identifies the
column name (or names) to use in the related table if the column name
(or names) to reference for the relation are not the same in both tables.
The number of lnka parameters and lnkb parameters must be the same.
SQL Expressions and SQL Statements
The expression:
SQL Variables and Expressions | 1293
&catalog.schema.table.colname
@linktemplate.lnka1,lnka2,...,lnkaN.lnkb1,lnkb2,...,lnkbN
is equivalent to the following SQL statement:
SELECT catalog.schema.table.colname FROM catalog.schema.table WHERE
lnka1 = lnkb1 AND lnka2 = lnkb2 AND ... AND lnkaN = lnkbN AND
linktemplatekey1 = linktemplatevalue1 AND linktemplatekey2 =
linktemplatevalue2 AND ... AND linktemplatekeyN = linktemplatevalueN
where lnka1,...,lnkaN are columns from the primary table, lnkb1,...,lnkbN are
columns from the secondary table, linktemplatekey1,...,linktemplatekeyN are
link template key columns from the primary table, and
linktemplatevalue1,...,linktemplatevalueN are the key column values obtained
from the object.
Object Classification Variables
The syntax for using an object class property variable in an expression is
#ObjectClassName.Category.Property
For example, to retrieve the values in the Diameter field of the Pipes table in
the PipeRun object class, enter #Piperun.OD:Pipes.Diameter. To retrieve the
values in the layer property, which is in the General category, enter
#Piperun.General.Layer. To retrieve the values of the end node of the
LocalRoads topology in the Roads object class, enter
#Road.Topo:LocalRoads."end node". Use quotation marks so the space in the
name "end node" is interpreted correctly as part of the property name.
AutoLISP Variables
The syntax for using an AutoLISP variable is
!AutoLISPVariable
For example, to retrieve the values assigned to a variable defined as DIAMETER,
enter !DIAMETER.
EED Expressions
The syntax for using an EED expression is
1294 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
$EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for string fields)
$#EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for numeric fields)
$&EEDFIELD@REGAPP (for SQL fields)
For example, to retrieve the values for the AGE field registed under the
application ADE, enter $#AGE@ADE.
Using Color in Expressions
When specifying color in an expresssion, you can use any of the following:
■AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) number
■RGB triplet
■color book color
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
You can specify the color using an ACI color name (red, yellow, green, cyan,
blue, magenta and white), the ACI index number (0-256), BYLAYER (256), or
BYBLOCK (0).
Examples:
■(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "blue")""))
■(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "5")""))
■(ade_altpdefine "color" "red")
■(ade_altpdefine "color" "1")
RGB Triplet
An RGB triplet specifies the amount of red, green, and blue used to create the
color. The values represent the intensity of the red, green, and blue
components. The combination of these values can be manipulated to create
a wide range of colors. For each component, enter a value between 0 and 255.
To enter an RGB color, enter the value for each of the components separated
by commas. Enclose the three numbers in single quotation marks. For example,
enter the color Red as '255,0,0' and enter cyan as '0,255,255'.
Using Color in Expressions | 1295
Only the following operators are valid: = and < >.
Examples:
■(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "\"255,0,0\"" )""))
■(ade_altpdefine "color" "255,0,0")
Color Book and Color Name
You can specify colors using third-party color books (such as Pantone) or
user-defined color books.
To specify a color book color, enter the name of the color book and the name
of the color separated by a comma. Enclose the entire string in single quotation
marks. For example, to specify the Pantone process coated cyan, enter
'Pantone(R) process coated, PANTONE Process Cyan C'. When you enter the
color book and color name, be sure to type them exactly.
If you are unsure of the color name or color book name, display the Select
Color dialog box. On the Color Books tab, look at the name of the color book
and the color name.
For information on adding color books, click Help in the Color Books tab of
the Select Color dialog box.
Only the following operators are valid: = and < >.
Examples:
■(ade_qrydefine '("" "" "" "Property" ("color" "=" "\"Pantone,Pantone 647
CVC\"")""))
■(ade_altpdefine "color" "Pantone,Pantone 647 CVC")
Combining Colors
When you specify the range of valid colors, you can combine any of the color
specifications. Separate each color with a comma. In addition, for ACI colors,
you can specify a continuous range. For example:
1,5,[7,11],'255,128,64','Pantone(R) process coated, PANTONE Process Cyan C'
1296 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator
■Not all operators are valid with all types of comparisons. When comparing
strings, If, =, /=, >=, <= are valid, but not <. No error results, but the accuracy
of the results can be affected.
■For strings, the standard wild-card characters listed in Wildcard Characters
on page 1278 are valid. For example, if the expression (IF (= .LAYER ELEC*)
EDISON) is placed in the condition, all objects in the query on layers
beginning with ELEC are displayed on the layer EDISON. In addition, the
operators = and /= are valid with wild cards.
■For real numbers less than one, enter all decimal values with a leading
zero; that is, enter .001 as 0.001.
■When nil is a possible parameter, AutoCAD Map 3D uses zero.
■The expression evaluator deals only in strings; it does not distinguish
between strings and numerics. The expression evaluator converts strings
to their numeric values for math operations and converts the results back
to strings.
■If you use variables set using AutoLISP, you must precede the variable with
an exclamation point (!).
■To keep a space within a string, enclose the string in quotation marks. For
example, "this string" evaluates as one string, with a space between the
two words. Without the quotation marks, this string evaluates as two
separate strings. The expression evaluator ignores quotation marks.
■You must enclose named objects with spaces in the name in parentheses
when used in evaluator functions. These objects include layers, blocks,
hatches, and linetypes.
■The following expressions handle a maximum of three arguments: +, –, *,
/, AND, OR, STRCAT, =, and /=. All other expressions handle one or two
arguments. If you use +, –, *, or /, you must supply more than one
argument. For example, (+ 5 6) evaluates to 11; (+ 5 3 2) evaluates to 10.
■An expression evaluates numbers with scientific notation in compound
simple expressions. For example, (+ 1e+001 1) evaluates to 11.0000; 1e+001
evaluates to 10.0.
■AutoCAD Map 3D evaluates pi only in compound expressions; the program
treats pi as a string in simple expressions. For example, (STRCAT pi "_%")
evaluates to 3.14%; pi by itself evaluates to "pi."
Tips and Suggestions for the Expression Evaluator | 1297
■You can specify color on page 1295 using ACI, True Color, or Color Book
color values.
1298 | Chapter 12 Expression Evaluator
Expression Builder
Use expressionsto filter the geospatial information displayed in your map, to create calculated
fields, and to change the styles used for a feature layer based on certain conditions.
Using the Expression Builder
The Expression Builder is displayed when you are doing the following:
■Adding Layers to a Map with a Query
■Filtering a Feature Layer
■Filtering by Location
■Searching to Select Feature Layers
■Creating a Calculation
■Using Expressions to Label Features
■Using Expressions In Split/Merge Rules
Expressions you build with the Expression Builder affect geospatial data only
and cannot be used for drawing objects. For help with expressions that affect
drawing data, see the Expression Evaluator on page 1283 section.
13
1299
1300
Dialog Boxes
1301
1302
Analyzing Data Dialog
Boxes
Buffer Features dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the buffer distance and merging options for
buffering features in AutoCAD Map 3D.
To create a buffer on page 1004
Click Analyze menu ➤ Buffer.
The Buffer Features dialog box has the following options:
Features to Buffer
Specifies the features to buffer in your map.
Buffer Distance
Specifies the buffer distance. By default, the buffer distance unit of measure
matches the unit of measure specified in your map’s coordinate system. You
can select another unit of measure from the Units drop-down list.
14
1303
(Specify buffer distance)
Click to pick the buffer distance interactively on your map.
Output Buffers
Specifies the layer for your new buffer feature and the name of the SDF file
that will store the buffere features. By default, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a
new layer for your buffer. Alternately, you can append your buffer to a
pre-existing buffer layer.
Merge Options
Specifies the merge options for buffering multiple features. The options are
no merging (overlapping buffers are not merged), merge all (all overlapping
buffers are merged into a single buffer, then combined into a single
multi-polygon), and merge overlapping only.
Buffer Warning dialog box
Use this dialog box to respond to buffer warnings.
To change your selection or merge options after receiving a buffer warning on
page 1005
Click Analyze menu ➤ Buffer.
You may have selected too many features to buffer in a reasonable amount
of time. You can change your feature selection or merge options to improve
performance of the buffer task.
Proceed
Applies your selected options and executes the buffer task. If you choose
to proceed after receiving a buffer warning, the buffer may take a very long
time to complete.
Change
Returns you to the Buffer Features dialog box to change your feature
selection and/or merge options.
1304 | Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes
Contour dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the settings for new contour lines for a
raster-based surface.
To create contour lines on page 978
In Display Manager on page 1748, right-click a surface layer, and select Create
Contour Layer
NOTE This functionality applies only to raster-based surface data brought into
AutoCAD Map 3D using Data Connect.
The Contour dialog box has the following options:
New Contour Layer Name
Specifies the name for the new contour layer in Display Manager.
Contour Elevation Interval
Specifies the difference in elevation between contour elevations, for example
10, 20 or 50.
Units
Specifies the units (meters or feet) used to measure the elevation (height)
in your surface. AutoCAD Map 3D attempts to get this data from the surface
itself, but you can change it if you need to.
Major Contour Every
Specifies the difference in elevation between major (bold) contour lines.
Label the Elevation
Labels the contour lines with the elevation.
Create Contour As
Specifies the type of feature to use when creating contour lines. Either
polyline or polygon.
Save Contours Into Filename
Specifies the name of the SDF file that will store the contour line features.
Contour dialog box | 1305
Hillshade Settings dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the settings for shading applied to raster-based
surfaces in AutoCAD Map 3D.
To specify hillshading settings on page 988
Click Setup menu ➤ Hillshade Settings.
The Hillshade Settings dialog box includes the following options:
Direction Of Sun
Specifies the direction from which the light should come from, for example,
East or West. You can type a direction value into the edit box, drag the
yellow disk in the compass to the position you want, or use the Settings
button.
Angle Of Sun
Specifies high in the sky the light is located, such as near the horizon,
directly overhead, or somewhere in between. You can type an angle into
the edit box, drag the yellow disk to specify an angle, or use the Setting
button.
Date, Time, and Location
Allows you to specify sun settings using date, time and location. Click
Settings to go to the Sun Properties palette, where you specify these values.
To populate the Hillshade Settings dialog box with the settings from Sun
Properites, return to the Hillshade Settings dialog box and click Import.
1306 | Chapter 14 Analyzing Data Dialog Boxes
Annotation Dialog Boxes
Annotation Delete dialog box
Use this dialog box to delete an annotation template from the list of available
templates.
To edit an annotation on page 915
Click Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Delete.
Annotation Refresh dialog box
Use this dialog box to refresh an annotation template.
To edit an annotation on page 915
Click Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Refresh.
15
1307
Annotation Text dialog box
Use this dialog to specify text elements for annotation templates, and set
entity properties and text options.
To define an annotation template on page 174
To change an annotation template on page 176
--
Attribute
Tag
Specifies a name for the annotation text object.
Value
Specifies the content of the annotation text. Click to specify an
expression.
Object Properties
Layer
Selects the layer for the annotation text. Click to specify an expression.
Color
Selects the color for the annotation text. Click to specify an expression.
Lineweight
Selects the lineweight. Click to specify an expression.
1308 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Text Options
Style
Selects the style for the annotation text. Click to specify an expression.
Height
Specifies the default height of the annotation text. Click Select Point to pick
points in the drawing, or click to specify an expression.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle to use when inserting annotation. Click Select
Point to pick points in the drawing, or click to specify an expression.
NOTE Values you enter directly in this field are interpreted using the current
setting for the AUNITS system variable. However, if you enter an expression,
the resulting values are interpreted using radians. If necessary, you can modify
your expression to include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Justification
Specifies the justification for the annotation text. Click to specify an
expression.
Annotation Update dialog box
Use this dialog box to update an annotation template from the list of available
templates.
To edit an annotation on page 915
Click Setup ➤ More Annotation Options ➤ Update.
Annotation Update dialog box | 1309
Define Annotation Template dialog box
Use this dialog to define or change the text and graphic elements, default
properties, and insertion options of annotation templates.
To define an annotation template on page 174
To change an annotation template on page 176
To delete all references to a selected annotation template on page 178
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template.
Annotation Template
Template Name
Select an annotation template.
New
Creates a new annotation template.
Copy
Copies the selected annotation template with a new name.
Rename
Renames the selected annotation template.
Delete
Deletes the selected annotation template.
Default Properties
Layer
Selects a layer for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Linetype
Selects a linetype. Click to specify an expression.
1310 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Lineweight
Selects a lineweight for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Color
Selects a color for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Default Insertion Options
Insertion Point
Specifies the annotation insertion location based on the selected template.
Click Select Point to pick a point in the drawing, or click to specify
an expression.
Scale
Specifies the scale to use when inserting annotation based on the selected
template. Click Select Point to pick points in the drawing, or click to
specify an expression.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle to use. Click Select Point to pick points in the
drawing, or click to specify an expression.
NOTE Values you enter directly in this field are interpreted using the current
setting for the AUNITS system variable. However, if you enter an expression,
the resulting values are interpreted using radians. If necessary, you can modify
your expression to include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Edit Template Contents
Specifies the contents of the selected annotation template.
Define Annotation Template dialog box | 1311
Edit Expression dialog box
Use this dialog box to edit an expression. For information about the Expression
Evaluator, see Expression Evaluator on page 1283.
To define an expression on page 1060
Click Create ➤ Insert Annotation.
--
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template.
You can type an expression, or click to select from a list of variables in
your drawing.
Insert Annotation dialog box
Use this dialog to select an annotation template, and specify insert properties.
To insert annotation on page 908
Click Create ➤ Insert Annotation.
Annotation Templates
Select an annotation template to use when inserting annotation into your
drawing.
Basic
Expands or contracts the Insert Annotation dialog box. Click to specify
insertion information.
1312 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Insert Options
Insertion Point
Specifies the annotation insertion location. Click Select Point to pick a point
in the drawing, or click to specify an expression.
Scale
Specifies the scale to use when inserting annotation based on the selected
template. Click Select Point to pick points in the drawing, or click to
specify an expression.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle to use when inserting annotation. Click Select
Point to pick points in the drawing, or click to specify an expression.
NOTE Values you enter directly in this field are interpreted using the current
setting for the AUNITS system variable. However, if you enter an expression,
the resulting values are interpreted using radians. If necessary, you can modify
your expression to include a conversion from degrees to radians (divide the
degree value by 360/(2*pi)).
Insert Properties
Layer
Selects a layer for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Linetype
Selects a linetype for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Lineweight
Selects a lineweight for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Insert Annotation dialog box | 1313
Color
Selects a color for the annotation. Click to specify an expression.
Match
Click to copy the insertion options and properties from an annotation
already in the drawing.
New Annotation Template Name dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a name for an annotation template.
To define an annotation template on page 174
Click Setup ➤ Define Annotation Template.
1314 | Chapter 15 Annotation Dialog Boxes
Autodesk MapGuide
Dialog Boxes
Publish to Autodesk MapGuide
Use this dialog box to publish the current display map to Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2007, a platform that lets you publish map-related data on the web
or on an intranet.
To publish a map for use with MapGuide on page 1141
Click File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to Autodesk MapGuide.
URL
Specify the URL for the target website. If the site requires a password, a
Connect to Site dialog box appears. Enter your user name and password.
Publishing Options
Specify how to deal with files of the same name that already exist in the target
folder. You can choose to overwrite the old files, make a new copy, or cancel
the operation when such files are encountered.
Folder Name
Choose a folder for the published files.
16
1315
Publish to MapGuide Results
Use this dialog box to resolve any errors that result from a Publish to MapGuide
operation.
To resolve MapGuide publishing errors on page 1142
Click File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ Publish to Autodesk MapGuide.
Expression dialog box
Use this dialog box to add a variable to an expression.
To define an expression on page 1060
Click File ➤ Convert DWG to ➤ Autodesk SDF.
Select an item from this list and click OK to add the item to your expression.
For example, expand Object Data Tables to see the list of tables in the current
drawing. Expand again to see the list of fields in the table. For more
information about expressions for drawing objects, see Expression Evaluator
on page 1283.
1316 | Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Define New Object Data Field dialog box
Use this dialog box to create new fields in existing object data tables when
you are importing Autodesk MapGuide SDF 2 files into AutoCAD Map 3D.
To import SDF 2 files on page 326
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Autodesk SDF 2 (MapGuide 6.x).
Field Name
Specifies a name for the new field.
The name cannot contain any spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character.
Type
Specifies the valid data type of the new field.
Integer
An integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
Character
Any characters
Point
Three real numbers separated by commas representing the X, Y, and Z values
of a point
Real
A real number between -1.7E308 and 1.7E308
If you select Integer, numbers are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Description
Specifies a description for the new field.
This description appears in the Object Data Fields list.
Default
The value must match the data type you selected above.
Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to
an object.
Define New Object Data Field dialog box | 1317
New Layer dialog box
Use this dialog box to create layers from imported SDF data.
To import SDF 2 files on page 326
To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 749
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Autodesk SDF 2 (MapGuide 6.x).
Click Create ➤ Centroids.
The new layer name may not contain any of the following characters.
< > / \ : ? * | , = " ` "
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify settings for exporting DWG data to Autodesk
MapGuide SDF 2 files for use with Autodesk MapGuide version 6.5 and earlier.
To export DWG data to SDF2 format on page 1176
Click Map ➤ Tools ➤ Export to Autodesk MapGuide.
If you have previously saved your settings in this dialog box, you can click
Load to reload those settings. To save the current settings for use later or to
use in a script, click Save.
Selection Tab
SDF Type
Select the type of data to export. Objects of other entity types will be filtered
out of the export. To export these other entity types, run the Autodesk
MapGuide Export feature again. Note that some objects in an AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing may be exported as more than one entity type.
1318 | Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Select Objects Automatically
Selects all objects of the specified type. If Filter Selection By Layer is selected,
only objects on the specified layers will be selected.
Select Objects Manually
Lets you individually select the objects to export. To modify the selection
set, click Select Objects or Quick Select. Selected objects that do not match
the filter will not be exported.
Filter Selection area
Use the Filter Selection options to filter the selected objects based on layer.
Click Filter Selection By Layer and specify the layers to include. Enter the
names of the layers to include, or click the button to select from a list of all
layers in the drawing. Objects that are not on the selected layers will be
filtered out of the export. The status line shows how many objects are
selected and how many have been filtered out.
Preview Filtered Objects
Preview the objects that will be exported. In the preview, objects that will
be exported are highlighted. To leave the preview and return to this dialog,
press ESC.
Options Tab
SDF Description
Specifies a description for the SDF 2 file.
Data Expression
Enter expressions to specify the Key, Name, and URL fields for the SDF 2 file.
Key
Type an expression to specify the Key field, or click to open the
Expression Chooser dialog box, in which you can create an expression for
the Key field.
Name
Type an expression to specify the Name field, or click to open the
Expression Chooser dialog box, in which you can create an expression for
the Name field.
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog box | 1319
URL
Type an expression to specify the URL field, or click to open the
Expression Chooser dialog box, in which you can create an expression for
the URL field.
Coordinate Conversion
To convert the exported objects to a different coordinate system, check
Convert To and enter the coordinate system code for the export file or click
Select Coordinate System to select one.
If this box is greyed, your current map does not have an assigned coordinate
system. You can cancel this dialog box, assign a coordinate system, and
then retry this operation.
Create Key Index File
Creates a corresponding Key Index File (KIF) for the SDF 2 file.
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify settings for importing Autodesk MapGuide SDF
2 files into AutoCAD Map 3D.
To import SDF 2 files on page 326
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Autodesk SDF 2 (MapGuide 6.x).
Import Layer
Import to Layer
Imports SDF 2 data to a specified layer. Click New Layer to open the New
Layer dialog box, in which you can create a new layer for the imported SDF
2 data.
Data Elements
Assign to Object Data Table
Assigns Key, Name, and URL data from the SDF 2 file to an object data table
in the current drawing.
1320 | Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Table
Specifies the object data table to which the SDF 2 data will be assigned.
Click New Table to open the Define New Object Data Table dialog box, in
which you can define a new object data table to hold the SDF 2 data.
Key
Specifies the field in the object data table to assign the SDF 2 Key data. Click
Create New Field to open the Define New Object Data Field dialog box, in
which you can define a new field in the object data table to hold the SDF
2 data.
Name
Specifies the field in the object data table to assign the SDF 2 Name data.
Click Create New Field to open the Define New Object Data Field dialog
box, in which you can define a new field in the object data table to hold
the SDF 2 data.
URL
Specifies the field in the object data table to assign the SDF 2 URL data.
Click Create New Field to open the Define New Object Data Field dialog
box, in which you can define a new field in the object data table to hold
the SDF 2 data.
Create Hyperlinks From URL Field
Creates hyperlinks from the URL expressions in the SDF 2 file.
Coordinate Conversion
Convert From
Specifies the coordinate system of the SDF 2 file. This function is only
available if the current drawing has an assigned coordinate system. AutoCAD
Map 3D converts the data from the SDF 2 coordinate system to the active
drawing coordinate system. Click Select Coordinate System to open the
Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, in which you can select the
coordinate system of the SDF 2 file.
Import by Location
Define an Area to Import From the SDF File
Imports a specific area of the SDF 2 file.
X Min
Specifies the X coordinate of the lower left corner of the area to import.
Y Min
Specifies the Y coordinate of the lower left corner of the area to import.
Autodesk MapGuide Import dialog box | 1321
X Max
Specifies the X coordinate of the upper right corner of the area to import.
Y Max
Specifies the Y coordinate of the upper right corner of the area to import.
Import Profile
Load
Loads previously saved SDF Import Profiles (SIP files) containing import
settings.
Save
Saves the current import settings as an SDF Import Profile (SIP file).
1322 | Chapter 16 Autodesk MapGuide Dialog Boxes
Cleaning Up Maps Dialog
Boxes
Cleanup Methods Page
Use this dialog box to specify what to do with the original objects after the
cleanup process is complete.
To specify how to convert the objects after cleanup on page 646
To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile on page 650
Click Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
Cleanup Method
Modify Original Objects
The processed drawing will use the original layer and as much of the original
data as possible.
Retain Original Objects And Create New Objects
Keeps the original objects and puts the new objects on a layer you specify.
Delete Original Objects And Create New Objects
When you create new objects, existing object data and database links are
copied to the new objects.
17
1323
Use Original Layer
Places new objects on the same layer as the source objects.
Create On Layer
Enter the name of a layer or click Select Layers to select from a list of layers.
If the layer does not exist, it will be created.
Convert Selected Objects
Specify whether to convert lines, arcs, and 3D polylines to 2D polylines,
and convert circles to arcs as well as 2D polylines. Use these conversion
options in the following cases:
■To use the results of the
■operation in another program that accepts only polylines.
■To modify the line width of the arcs, circles, or lines so you can use
them in a thematic map. You can only assign line width to polylines.
When you convert arcs to polylines, the polyline is created using a true arc,
not a set of straight line segments.
When you convert a circle to a polyline, the polyline is created using two
true arcs, not a set of straight line segments.
NOTE If you use the Convert Selected Objects options to convert objects to
different entity types, classified objects may be modified so that they no longer
meet the feature class definition and will be unclassified. You must re-classify
them manually.
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Displays the Error Markers Page on page 1325. Available only if you selected
the Interactive option on the previous Select Actions page.
Finish
Performs the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings.
1324 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Error Markers Page
Use this dialog box to specify the marker shape and color for each cleanup
action. Specify the marker size, and set options for erasing or maintaining
markers before and after cleanup.
To set up markers for interactive mode on page 649
To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile on page 650
Click Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
This page is available only when you select Interactive on the Select Actions
page on page 1326.
In Interactive mode, AutoCAD Map 3D displays each error for you to accept
or reject the correction. You can place a markers at error locations to help you
find them more easily.
Parameters
Set options for removing markers before and after the drawing cleanup, and
specify the size of the markers, relative to the screen size.
Erase Markers When Cleanup Starts
Deletes markers from an earlier operation before placing new markers.
Deleting old markers prevents confusion. Clear this check box to display
both sets of markers.
Maintain Markers When Command Ends
Keeps markers in the drawing after the drawing cleanup operation.
Marker Size
Specifies the marker size as a percent of the screen size. A value between
3% and 7% is usually suitable.
Blocks And Colors
For each operation listed, select a marker shape and marker color from the
pull-down lists.
Error Markers Page | 1325
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Finish
Performs the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings and
displays a list of detected errors in the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box
on page 1329. You can place markers, review errors, and decide whether or
not to make the suggested corrections.
Select Actions Page
Use this dialog box to select the cleanup actions to perform, the parameters
to use, and whether to review errors in interactive mode or have AutoCAD
Map 3D automatically correct errors.
To select cleanup actions and set options on page 643
To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile on page 650
Click Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
Although you can perform several cleanup actions simultaneously, it is
recommended that you perform only one or a few actions at a time to make
it easier to track changes. And for Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines, it is
recommended that you run these by themselves (do NOT run them with other
actions).
Cleanup Actions list
Displays a list of available cleanup actions. To perform a cleanup action,
add it to the Selected Actions list by selecting the in the Cleanup Actions
list and clicking Add. For more information about each cleanup action,
click one of the following links:
Delete Duplicates on page 663
Erase Short Objects on page 665
Break Crossing Objects on page 667
1326 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Extend Undershoots on page 669
Apparent Intersection on page 671
Snap Clustered Nodes on page 673
Dissolve Pseudo Nodes on page 676
Erase Dangling Objects on page 678
Simplify Objects on page 680
Zero-Length Objects on page 683
Weed Polylines on page 684
NOTE When you perform cleanup actions that create a new object or break
the object into multiple segments (such as break crossing objects or extend
undershoots with the break target option), on data that has been classified, the
classification information remains with only the one segment that contains the
start point of the original object. You need to classify the other segments
manually.
Add
Adds selected action(s) to the Selected Actions list.
Remove
Removes selected action(s) from the Selected Actions list.
Selected Actions list
Specifies the cleanup actions to perform. Actions are performed in the order
they appear in the list. Order is important and can affect your results.
NOTE If you perform Simplify Objects and Weed Polylines with other cleanup
actions, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically performs Simplify and Weed first,
regardless of their position in the list.
Up arrow
Moves the selected action up one position in the Selected Actions list.
Down arrow
Move the selected action down one position in the Selected Actions list.
Cleanup Parameters
Specify the cleanup parameters to use for the selected action. Each action
has it's own, unique set of parameters, so it is important that you set up
each action individually. To set parameters for an action, select it in the
Selected Actions list. Enter the settings to use.
Many of the cleanup actions use a tolerance value when detecting errors.
Tolerance is the radial search distance for locating geometric errors. You
can enter a tolerance value into the Tolerance box, or click Pick to specify
Select Actions Page | 1327
a tolerance by specifying a distance in the drawing area. For example, if you
set the tolerance to 5 units, two nodes within 10 units of each other are
within the tolerance and will be corrected.
Some cleanup actions have different or additional parameters, and a few
have none at all. For detailed information about the cleanup parameters
for a specific cleanup action, click a cleanup action link above.
Options
Interactive
Specifies that you want to review errors and decide how to handle them.
For example, you can decide to correct the errors, place marker blocks on
them, or ignore them.
For Simplify Objects or Weed Polylines, AutoCAD Map 3D changes the map
automatically, regardless of which option is selected.
Automatic
Specifies that AutoCAD Map 3D will correct errors automatically.
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Displays the Cleanup Methods page on page 1323.
Finish
Performs the drawing cleanup operation using the current settings.
Drawing Cleanup
Drawing cleanup helps you improve the accuracy of your maps, correct
common map errors (resulting from surveying, digitizing, scanning errors, for
example), and remove unnecessary detail from complex maps. This is essential
when you need accurate and complete maps suitable for defining topologies,
performing map analyses, or plotting and presentations.
To clean up objects in a mapmaps;maps:cleaning;Drawing Cleanup;Drawing
Cleanup:usingdrawings;drawing... on page ?
To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile on page 650
1328 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Click Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
Drawing Cleanup is a sequence of pages that guide you through specifying
the set of objects to include in a drawing cleanup operation, the objects to
anchor, the cleanup actions to perform and the settings to use, how to treat
the objects after cleanup, and the error marker settings (for interactive mode
only).
Drawing Cleanup includes the following pages:
Select Objects Page on page 1331
Select Actions Page on page 1326
Cleanup Methods Page on page 1323
Error Markers Page on page 1325
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Displays the Select Actions Page on page 1326.
NOTE Do not use Drawing Cleanup to correct topologies; you might make a
topology invalid and not be able to recreate it. To edit topologies, use the topology
editing commands on page 715.
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box
Use this dialog box to step through the errors, review them in the map, decide
whether to correct the errors, place markers on errors that you want to review
later.
To set up markers for interactive mode on page 649
To review errors before correcting them on page 655
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box | 1329
Click Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
This dialog box displays the cleanup actions performed on the drawing and
the errors detected for each action. This dialog box is displayed only if you
select Interactive on the Drawing Cleanup - Cleanup Actions dialog box. If
you select Automatic, all errors are corrected automatically.
The Drawing Cleanup Errors are grouped in the following areas:
Cleanup Action
List of cleanup actions
Initially, the first cleanup action with detected errors is selected. The icons
next to the cleanup action show you what the error marker for that action
will look like (marker shape and color) if you mark errors in the map. Expand
a cleanup action to display the list of detected errors (Error 1 of...).
All cleanup actions performed, except Simplify Objects, are represented in
the Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box. When using Simplify Objects,
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically simplifies the objects, even when you
select the Interactive option.
If you are cleaning up short objects, AutoCAD Map 3D divides the detected
errors into three groups: Short Degenerate Objects, Short Line Objects, and
Short Polyline Objects so you can evaluate and correct these types of errors
separately. If you are cleaning up zero length objects, AutoCAD Map 3D
divides the errors into two groups: Zero Length Line Objects and Zero Length
Polyline Objects.
To display the list of errors detected (Error 1 of...) for a cleanup action, click
the plus (+) next to the cleanup action's name.
To work with all errors for a cleanup action at once, verify that the action
you want is selected and choose any of the following:
■To correct all errors for the selected action, click Fix All.
■To mark all errors for the selected action with error markers, making
them easily visible in the map, click Mark All.
■To skip all errors for the selected action without correcting them, remove
any error markers, and go to the next cleanup action in the list, click
Remove All.
■To go to the next cleanup action in which errors are detected, without
correcting errors, click Next Action.
1330 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
To step through the errors for a cleanup action one at a time, select its list
of errors (Error 1 of...), and then use any of the following:
■To correct the selected error and go to the next error on the list, click
Fix.
■To place an error marker on the selected error, click Mark.
■To skip the current error without correcting it, remove any error marker,
and go to the next error in the list, click Remove.
■To go to the next error on the list without correcting the selected error,
click Next.
Zoom Settings
Zoom % box
Specifies the percent of the drawing display that highlighted objects will
occupy. For example, specify 100% to zoom the display to the extents of
the highlighted objects, specify < 100 to display more of the drawing outside
the highlighted objects, or specify 0 to maintain the current zoom level.
Auto Zoom
Automatically adjusts the zoom so that the selected error fills the percent
of the screen specified in the Zoom % box.
Zoom
Zooms to the selected error. This button is available only when you clear
Auto Zoom.
Select Objects Page
Use this dialog box to select the objects to include in the cleanup process and
the objects to anchor.
To select and anchor objects for drawing cleanup on page 640
To save drawing cleanup settings as a profile on page 650
Click Modify ➤ Drawing Cleanup.
Select Objects Page | 1331
If you have previously saved your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file,
click Load to reload those settings.
Objects To Include In Drawing Cleanup
Select objects to clean up. In general, you can clean up linear objects only
(lines, arcs, circles, and polylines), although a few cleanup actions also support
points, blocks, text, and mtext. Any unsupported object types are not cleaned
up.
Select All
Selects all objects.
Select Manually
Specifies that you want to select objects. To select the objects, first specify
any layer or feature class filters, and then click Objects To Be Included.
Layers
Limits (filters) the layers used for object selection. Objects that are not on
the selected layers will be filtered out during objection selection. The status
line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been filtered
out.
Enter the layer names, or click the button to select from a list. You can use
wild-card characters in the Layers box. To use all layers, enter an asterisk
(*).
Feature Classes
Limits (filters) object selection based on feature class. Objects that are not
in the selected feature classes will be filtered out. The status line shows how
many objects are selected and how many have been filtered out. You enter
feature classes the same way you enter layers.
If your map does not contain feature classes, feature class filter options are
grayed-out.
Select Objects To Be Included
Temporarily closes the Select Objects page so that you can select the set of
objects to include in the cleanup. Press Enter to return to the Select Objects
page.
Objects To Anchor In Drawing Cleanup
Select the objects to anchor. Anchored objects are used as reference points
during cleanup and are not altered or moved; objects being cleaned will be
moved towards anchored objects. You can anchor linear objects, points, blocks,
text, and mtext.
1332 | Chapter 17 Cleaning Up Maps Dialog Boxes
Select Objects To Be Anchored
Temporarily closes the Select Objects page so that you can select the objects
to anchor. Press Enter to return to the Select Objects page.
Layers
Limits (filters) the layers used when selecting anchored objects.
Feature classes
Limits (filters) object selection based feature class.
Other
Load
Loads a profile file that contains drawing cleanup settings saved previously.
Save
Saves your drawing cleanup settings in a profile file for later use.
Next
Displays the Select Actions page on page 1326.
Select Objects Page | 1333
1334
Coordinate Systems
Dialog Boxes
MAPDIST
Use this command to measure the geodetic distance between points in your
map.
To measure geodetic distance on page 943
Click Analyze ➤ Geodetic Distance.
The geodetic distance is the actual distance along the ground, taking into account
the curvature of the Earth. For example, if you have a Mercator map of the
world, use this command to measure how many miles wide Greenland is.
Note that this command is different from the DIST command, which measures
the simple Pythagorean distance between two points, not the underlying physical
distance. Because of map distortion (due to the chosen coordinate system), the
actual distance on the ground will be considerably different from what's
measured on the surface of the map.
When prompted, specify the first point and the second point, either by entering
the coordinates or by clicking the mouse. AutoCAD Map 3D displays the
following information on the command line:
18
1335
Distance
The geodetic distance from the first point to the second point, expressed
in units of the current drawing's assigned coordinate system.
Azimuth
The angle, expressed in degrees east of north, of the line from the first point
to the second point, measured at the first point.
Delta X, Delta Y
These are the same as the DIST command.
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog box
Use this dialog box to assign the coordinate systems before you bring objects
or features into the current drawing.
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing on page 138
Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
When you bring objects and features into the current drawing, AutoCAD Map
3D checks whether the coordinate system assigned to the object or feature
matches that of the current drawing. If it does not, AutoCAD Map 3D
transforms the object or feature to the current drawing coordinate system. If
you edit and save the object or feature back to its source, AutoCAD Map 3D
transforms it back to its original coordinate system.
Current Drawing
To assign a global coordinate system to the current drawing, enter the code
in the Code box, or click Select Coordinate System to select from a list of
available coordinate systems.
You cannot assign a coordinate system to the current drawing if it contains
any objects that have been queried from source drawings.
Source Drawings
To assign a global coordinate system to attached drawings, click Select
Drawings and select the attached drawings. Enter the code for these drawings
in the Code box, or click Select Coordinate System to select from a list of
1336 | Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
available coordinate systems. All the selected drawings are assigned the
specified code. To assign a different code to other source drawings, use this
command again.
You cannot assign a coordinate system to a source drawing if that drawing
currently has queried objects in the current drawing.
If you are using the Canadian National Transformation, you must copy the
data files to the Autodesk shared coordinate system directory.
NOTE For information on using custom coordinate systems you defined in a
previous release of AutoCAD Map 3D, look up “coordinate systems, updating” in
the help index.
Coordinate system transformations may not work as expected on raster objects.
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the file names of drawings to which you want to
attach the coordinate system.
To assign a coordinate system to a source drawing on page 136
Click Setup menu ➤ Assign Global Coordinate System.
Select the file names and click Add. You can change the drive or folder and
continue to add files to the Selected Drawings list. When you have added all
the drawings you want, click OK
Look In
Select a drive alias from the list. AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for
drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use.
If the drive or folder you want is not listed, click Create/Edit Aliases
to display the Drive Alias Administration dialog box where you define a
new drive alias.
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate System dialog box | 1337
To open a preview window that displays a preview of the selected
drawing, click Preview. In some instances, such as if a drawing is locked,
the Preview window is blank.
File List
Lists all drawings in the current directory.
Filter
Use wild-card characters to filter the display of file names. For example,
enter t* to view only file names starting with the letter t.
Add
Add the selected drawing names to the Selected Drawings list.
Remove
Remove the selected drawing names from the Selected Drawings list.
Selected Drawings
To use these drawings, click OK.
1338 | Chapter 18 Coordinate Systems Dialog Boxes
Data Connect Dialog
Boxes
Create a Join / Edit a Join dialog box
Use this dialog box to join a table of attribute data to features in your map so
they have more properties, or edit an existing join.
To create a join on page 443
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Create A Join.
To create a join, you select the primary table (feature layer), secondary table of
data you want to join to (for example an Access database), the columns of data
to use to link the tables (often referred to as join keys), the type of join, and the
relationship between primary and secondary records.
Primary Table Initiating The Join
Displays the name of the table you are joining to. For example, the layer of
features.
Table (Or Feature Class) To Join To
Select the table of attributes that you want to join to the primary table. This
table is often referred to as the secondary table. Note that you must have a
19
1339
connection on page 265to the secondary table set up before you can join
to it.
This Column From The Left Side
Choose the column(s) from the primary table you want to use to link the
primary table to the secondary table.
Matches This Column From The Right Side
Choose the column(s) from the secondary table that will be used to link
the tables. Note that this column does not have to have the same name as
the column on the left side. However, it must have the same data type.
Only columns with matching data types will be displayed in the list.
Type of Join
Choose one of the following joins types:
Keep All Records On The Left
Features from the primary table will be displayed in the map, even if there
is no matching value in the secondary table. This is sometimes referred to
as a left outer join.
Keep Only Left-Side Records With A Match
Features will not display if there is no matching record in the secondary
table. This is sometimes referred to as an inner join.
Relationship With Secondary Records (Cardinality)
Choose one of the following:
One-To-One
One feature to one record in the secondary table, even if multiple records
in the secondary table exist.
One-To-Many
One feature can have multiple secondary records associated with it.
Create Data Store dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new data store, which is a collection of feature
classes in a single storage location that can store your features.
To create a data store for a database provider on page 505
1340 | Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
In Display Manager, click Data menu ➤ Connect To Data.
A default schema will be created for you; after you click OK to create the new
data store, you will be given the opportunity to edit the default schema.
Data Store Name
Enter a name for the new data store.
Password
Enter a password.
Confirm Password
Enter your password again to confirm it.
Description
Enter a description for the new data store.
Data Store Coordinate System
Click [...] to select the coordinate system.
Data Store Extents
Enter the extents.
Storage Resolution
Enter the resolution.
Data Store Tablespace
Enter the tablespace.
Feature Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to view feature information for the selected object,
including feature source, schema, key value, and the current lock status.
Feature Source Scope
Use this dialog box to select the feature sources and classes to include in this
query or search.
For example, to limit the query or search to one class, select only that class.
Feature Information dialog box | 1341
Feature Source Administration dialog box
Use this dialog box to view and release feature source locks.
Feature Source
Select the feature source whose locks you want to review.
Feature Locks
Lists locked objects in the selected feature source.
To release a lock, select the object in the list and click Release Selected.
You can release locks only if you have appropriate rights in the feature
source.
NOTE This dialog does not display objects in the edit set for the current drawing.
To remove locks for these objects, remove the objects from the edit set.
Feature Source Connection dialog box
Use this dialog box to connect to an attached feature source.
To bring in features from Oracle on page 272
In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
Feature Source
Select a feature source to connect. The lists displays feature sources attached
to the current drawing.
TIP If the feature source you want is not listed, click Define and attach it to the
current drawing.
Properties
In the Value column, enter any connection information required to connect
to the selected feature source. Press Enter.
If you do not know the values to enter, contact your database administrator.
1342 | Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
Manage Layer Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to modify, edit, and delete joins and calculations for a
selected primary table (layer of features).
To create a calculated property based on joined data on page 448
In Display Manager, right-click the feature layer with the join to modify, and
select Manage Joins
In the Data Table, click Options menu ➤ Manage Calculations.
New
To create a new join, click New menu ➤ Join.
To create a new calculation, first select the layer whose properties will be
used for the calculation. Use Shift or Ctrl to select multiple layers. Then
click New menu ➤ Calculation.
Edit
To edit an existing join or calculation, select the item to modify and click
Edit. You can edit only one item at a time.
Delete
To delete an existing join or calculation, select the item to delete and click
Delete. Use Shift or Ctrl to select multiple layers.
Save Features dialog box
Use this dialog box to save modified features back to their feature source.
Objects in the edit set are saved back to their feature source.
If you right-clicked a single feature source and clicked Save, only objects in
the edit set for the selected feature source are saved. If you right-clicked the
Feature Sources node, all objects in the edit set are saved back to their feature
source.
Status
Lists the number of objects that will be saved to the feature source.
Click Show to highlight the objects in the drawing.
Manage Layer Data dialog box | 1343
Save Queried Features
Saves edited objects back to the feature source.
Clear this check box if you want to save only newly created objects to the
feature source.
Save Newly Created Features
Saves new objects to the feature source.
TIP If the status does not list your newly created objects, be sure you have
added the objects to the edit set for this feature source.
Clear this check box if you want to save only objects that were queried in
from the feature source.
Save Version dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how to handle changed objects when the object
has been changed in both the parent and the child version.
To create a new version on page 603
In Map Explorer, right-click the feature source and click Manage Versions.
Favor Changes in the Parent Version
Keep the object in the parent version and discard changes in the child
version.
Favor Changes in the Child Version
Overwrite the object in the parent version with the changes from the child
version.
Quit without Saving the Version
Stop the Save operation.
You can then determine which version of the objects you want to keep and
modify the child version so it contains only changes you want.
1344 | Chapter 19 Data Connect Dialog Boxes
User Credentials dialog box
Use this dialog box to log in to data sources that require user credentials. If
you do not know your user name and password, check with your System
Administrator.
To access data through FDO on page 268
In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
User Name
Enter your user name.
Password
Enter your password.
Remember Password
Optionally select this option to have AutoCAD Map 3D remember this user
name and password and log in whenever you open this map file.
View Query Statement dialog box
Use this dialog box to view the current feature source filter statement.
To filter feature data when you add it to a map on page 270
In Display Manager on page 1748, click Data ➤ Connect To Data.
Query Statement
For information on queries, see Using the Expression Builder on page 1299
User Credentials dialog box | 1345
1346
Data Table Dialog Box
Data Table dialog box
Use the Data Table on page 1747 much as you would a database spreadsheet.
To find and select features on page 993
Click Edit ➤ Data Table.
Access the Data Table dialog box from either the Display Manager or Map
Explorer Task Panes.
■Columns — Resize columns by dragging left or right.
Sort columns by clicking the column header. Arrow pointing up or down
indicates sort order.
■Rows — Resize rows by dragging up or down.
The functionality described below applies only to features.
Data
Select feature source or table data to view or edit.
Click this icon to automatically zoom to the selected rows.
20
1347
Click this icon to automatically scroll to the current selection in your map.
Filter by
Select a filter value from the drop-down list.
Search to Select
Click this link to select features using a query.
Options
■Export—Exports the data from the selected row(s) to a text file (.csv).
■Select All—Selects all rows in the data table window.
■Select None—Deselects all rows in the data table window.
■Zoom To—Zooms to the selected row.
■Create a Join—Create a join for this data table
■Create A Calculation—Create a calculated property for this data table.
It does not affect the original data store, but is available in this map
only.
■Manage Joins—Manage data joined to this table.
■Manage Calculations—Manage calculated properties you’ve created.
■Delete Joins—Delete joins for this table
■Help—Opens the Data Table help topic.
Click this icon to filter data based on column values.
This icon indicates a filter has been applied to the data table window based
on the column value selected. If you double-click this icon, the original
data table window will be restored.
1348 | Chapter 20 Data Table Dialog Box
Row counter
In the status bar area of the data table dialog box, there is a Row field, where
you can enter row numbers and the data table will scroll immediately to
that data.
In addition, when you select rows of data, the corresponding row numbers
will appear in this field.
Data Table dialog box | 1349
1350
Digitizing Dialog Boxes
MAPDIGITIZE (Digitize command)
Use this command to digitize nodes and linear objects with settings from
MAPDIGISETUP.
To digitize links and nodes on page 892
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
Digitizing Nodes
Respond to the prompts:
Specify insertion point:
Specify the location of the first nodes. Continue to specify nodes. When you
finish, press Enter.
Digitizing Linear Objects
Respond to the prompts:
From point:
Specify the starting point of the linear object.
21
1351
Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/<Endpoint of line>:
For information on this prompt, look up PLINE command in the help index.
Continue to specify linear objects. When you finish, press Enter two times.
Digitizing Setup
The specified nodes or linear objects are digitized using the settings specified
in the Digitize Setup dialog box.
■If you selected Attach Data in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter the data
values for each digitized object.
■If you selected Prompt For Label Point in the Digitize Setup dialog box,
specify a label point for each digitized object.
■If you selected Prompt For Rotation in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter
a rotation in degrees. (Use the UNITS command to view or change the
current direction.)
■If you selected Prompt For Scale in the Digitize Setup dialog box, enter a
real number. For example, enter 2 to double the size of the block, or enter
.5 to halve the size of the block.
Data to Attach dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the type of data and the source for the data when
you attach data to node or linear objects as they are digitized.
To attach object data as you digitize on page 893
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize.
Object Data Type
Select Object Data to use data in an object data table in the current drawing.
Select Database Link to use data in an external database.
Object Data Tables Name
If you are using data from an object data table, select the table.
1352 | Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Link Template
If you are using data from an external database, select the link template
associated with that database.
To associate databases to link templates, use the Define Link Template dialog
box (MAPDEFINELT) on page 1419.
Record Validation
As AutoCAD Map 3D digitizes your drawing, it prompts you for the key
value to associate with each object. Select the validation option to use.
Validate
AutoCAD Map 3D checks the database for the key value you specify. If it
does not find a match, you are prompted for a new key value.
Validate And Create
AutoCAD Map 3D checks the database for the key value you specify. If it
does not find a match, it creates a new row in the database. You will be
prompted to enter information for all the columns in the new row.
No Validation
AutoCAD Map 3D associates the specified key value with the object whether
or not the key value matches a row in the database.
NOTE To attach data to node or linear objects, make sure the Attach Data
option is selected on the Digitize Setup dialog box.
Digitize Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to set options for digitizing nodes and linear objects.
To set digitizing specifications on page 129
Click Map ➤ Data Entry ➤ Digitize Setup.
Object Type
Select whether you are digitizing nodes (points or blocks) or linear objects
(polylines).
Digitize Setup dialog box | 1353
Attach Data
Select this option to attach object data to the digitized objects. Click Data
To Attach to display the Data to Attach dialog box, where you can select
the data source and location.
When you digitize objects, you are prompted for the data for each object.
Prompt for Label Point
Select this option to change the default location of the label point for
digitized objects. The label point determines the location of text associated
with the object during queries.
As the objects are digitized, you are prompted for the new label point.
Node Object Settings
Specify settings for the node objects that are created during the digitizing
process.
Create On Layer
Specify the layer for new node objects.
To select from a list of layers in the drawing set, click Layers. To create a
new layer, type the layer name in the box.
Block Name
Specify the block to reference when creating node objects.
To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks. To
use point objects, select ACAD_POINT.
Prompt for Rotation
Select this option to specify the rotation for each block as it is digitized.
If this option is not selected, objects are not rotated. ACAD_POINT objects
cannot be rotated.
Prompt for Scale
Select this option to specify the scale for each block as it is digitized.
If this option is not selected, the scale is set to 1. ACAD_POINT objects
cannot be scaled.
Object Snap to End
Snaps the location of the node object to the closest endpoint of an arc,
elliptical arc, line, mline, polyline segment or ray, or the closest corner of
a trace, solid, or 3D face.
For more information about the OSNAP command, see the AutoCAD help.
1354 | Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Linear Object Settings
Specify settings for the linear objects that are created during the digitizing
process.
Create on Layer
Specify the layer for new linear objects.
To select from a list of layers in the drawing set, click Layers. To create a
new layer, type the layer name in the box.
Linetype
Specify the linetype to assign to the linear objects.
To select from a list of linetypes in the drawing set, click Linetypes.
Elevation
Select 3D to have the linear objects support three dimensions.
Width
Specify the width of the polyline for 2D linear objects.
You cannot specify a width for 3D linear objects.
Object Snap to Insert
Snaps the location of the new linear object to the insertion point of an
attribute, block, shape, or text.
For more information about the OSNAP command, see the AutoCAD help.
Link Template Data Entry dialog box
Use this dialog box to add information to your external database as you attach
external database information to digitized objects. This dialog box appears
only if you have selected the Validate and Create validation method.
To convert object data to a linked database table on page 463
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Link Template Data Entry dialog box | 1355
The Link Template area lists the full path and table associated with the link
template.
■To edit any value, highlight the value, type the new value in the Column
Value box, and press Enter to update the value. When you finish updating
values for the current object, click OK.
■To attach no additional data to the current object, click Cancel.
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog box
Use this dialog box to review or modify the external data that is attached to
digitized objects.
To convert object data to a linked database table on page 463
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
The Link Template area lists the full path and table associated with the link
template. It also displays the current validation method.
■To accept the displayed values, click OK.
■To change any value, highlight the value, type the new value in the Key
Value box, and press Enter to update the value. When you finish updating
values for the current object, click OK.
■To cancel the digitize operation, click Cancel.
1356 | Chapter 21 Digitizing Dialog Boxes
Display Manager Dialog
Boxes
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY (Display Library command)
Use this command to turn on and off the display of the Display Library palette.
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER (Display Manager command)
Use this command to load a display map, update the display, or turn on and
off the stylization of maps.
Respond to the prompts:
Display Manager [?/Load/Update/Stylization/eXit]
Do one of the following:
Enter ? to display the current settings for the Display Manager.
Enter l to load a display map.
Enter u to update the display of the current map.
Enter s to turn stylization on/off.
Enter x to exit the command.
Alter Block Insertion dialog box
Use this dialog box to control how blocks are inserted for a specific range of
entities or for a specific value in a theme.
22
1357
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Name
Select a block from those already defined in the current drawing or click
to go to the Select Drawing File dialog box.
Layer
Select a layer for the block, or click to go to the Layer Properties
Manager dialog box.
Scale
Specify the scale for the block. Use positive numbers. For example, 2 doubles
the size, 0.5 halves it.
Angle
Specify the angle to rotate the blocks.
Alter Line Format dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the line formatting for a specific range of entities
or for a specific value in a theme.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
1358 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Linetype
Select a line type to represent the data values or click to go to the Select
Linetype dialog box.
Layer
Select a layer for the new lines, or click to go to the Layer Properties Manager
dialog box.
Width
Specify the width of the polylines in the thematic map.
To assign line width to circles, arcs, or lines, convert the objects to polylines
with the drawing cleanup tools. See Cleaning Up Drawing Data on page 636.
Alter Linetype dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a linetype for a specific range of entities or for a
specific value in a theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Alter Lineweight dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a lineweight for a specific range of entities or for
a specific value in a theme.
Alter Linetype dialog box | 1359
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Alter Plotstyle dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a plotstyle for a specific range of entities or for a
specific value in a theme from those already defined in the current drawing.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Copy Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to copy all the styles from an existing scale.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
1360 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Define Hatch dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the addition of hatching for a specific range of
entities or for a specific value in a theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Pattern
Select a hatch pattern from those already defined in the current drawing
or click to go to the Select Pattern dialog box.
Layer
Select a layer for the new hatch, or click to go to the Layer Manager dialog
box.
Color
Specify the color of the hatch or click to go to the Select Color dialog box.
Scale
Specify the scale for the hatch pattern. Use positive numbers. For example,
2 doubles the size, 0.5 halves it.
Angle
Specify the angle to rotate hatch created for the thematic map.
Define Hatch dialog box | 1361
For standard-scale hatch patterns (those that do not have an AR- prefix), the
density of the hatching varies according to the hatch scale and plot scale you
use, as shown in the following table and figure
ResultHatch ScalePlot Scale
Solid1 to 5001:2000
Lines clearly visible2000
Sparse, occasional lines15000
No hatch or one line only20000
Solid1 to 25001:10000
Lines clearly visible10000
Sparse, occasional lines75000
No hatch or one line only100000
You can use solid fills at any scale to fill an enclosed area.
Define Text dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the addition of text for a specific range of entities
or for a specific value in a theme.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
1362 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Style
Select a style for the text from those already defined in the current drawing
or click to go to the Text Style dialog box.
Layer
Select a layer for the new text, or click to go to the Layer Manager dialog
box.
Insert Point
Select the point on objects to create new text. The default is labelpt.
Justification
Select the justification (left, right, center, middle) for text created for the
thematic map. The default is center.
Color
Specify the color of the text or click to go to the Select Color dialog box.
Height
Specify the height of the text.
Angle
Specify the angle to rotate text created for the theme.
Scale and height values for fill patterns, text height, and symbol size vary
according to the plotting scale you intend to use. The following table shows
suitable text heights for different plot scales.
(Text Height)Required Text Height on PlotPlot Scale
200011:2000
10000.5
1000011:10000
50000.5
Define Text dialog box | 1363
Edit Text Instance dialog box
Specifies the text and style for individual text feature instances on annotation
layers.
To edit an annotation on page 915
In the map, select the text feature, right-click it, and click Edit Text Instance.
Style changes made in this dialog box supersede the base style of the
annotation layer. To revert to the base style, you must remove the style
overrides. For more information about styling annotation layers, see Style
Text Layer dialog box on page 1376
Specifies the text and the following text styles: font, bold, italic, underline,
overline, font size, and color.
Import Old Theme dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to import a theme or an entire thematic map definition
from the old thematic wizard into the Display Manager.
Map
Select the map definition.
Themes
If you are importing a single theme, select the theme. The theme is imported
as an element in the current Display Manager map.
After you import a theme into the Display Manager, you can edit it:
■To edit the query used to select objects for the element, select the element
in the Display Manager. In the Properties palette, under Element Source,
select the Query field and click
1364 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
■To edit the theme style, right-click an element in the Display Manager.
Click Edit Theme.
New Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new scale.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Range of Values dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the source of thematic data and partition it into
ranges.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Data Values area
Obtain From
Click . In the Choose Data Expression dialog box, select the data source
from the lists under Properties, Link Templates, Blocks, or Object Data.
New Scale dialog box | 1365
Ignore
Select data values to exclude from the thematic display. These values, while
present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in the thematic map.
Examples include null or empty data values.
Normalize By
Enter a value or an expression if you want to normalize the data values
relative to some other data value. Click… to display the Choose Data
Expression dialog box.
Read Data
Reads the data from the data source according to the expression you defined.
Data Ranges area
Group Value By
Select a method for partitioning data values.
Optimal The optimal method groups data values based upon a determination
of the natural breaks in the data. Because the calculations are iterative, this
method quite literally finds the optimal sets of values in a group based upon
the position of values upon a number line. It is most useful for complex
non-uniform distributions where calculation time is less important than
the accuracy of grouping. This is the default method.
Quantile Divides the data so that each range contains an equal number of
values. Also known as equal count, this method is most appropriate where
the data values are linear (equally distributed).
Equal Interval Divides the data into a specified number of groups from the
minimum value to the maximum. Also known as equal step, this method
has the disadvantage that it may over generalize the data and place too
many values in one range and too few in another.
Standard Deviation This method calculates how far data values differ from
the arithmetic mean. It is most effective when the data approximates a
normal distribution (bell-shaped curve). This is rarely the case with
geographical data, but is fairly common when considering demographic
data. Because of this curve preference, standard deviations are best used
with an even number of groups. Standard deviations are often used to
emphasize how far a specific value is above or below the mean value.
Number
Select the number of ranges to create.
Precision
Specify the numeric precision. This option rounds the values up or down
to the decimal point you specify. Rounding only affects the range value
calculations and resulting range divisions. It does not affect the actual data
1366 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
values stored in the data source. For more information, see Notes About
Precision below.
Use Thousands Separator
Adds a punctuation mark to separate the thousands in values such as
population data.
Find Ranges
Divides the data into ranges according to the parameters you entered.
Ranges Area
This area displays the data divided into ranges according to the parameters
you entered.
Notes About Precision
When numeric data is read into the AutoCAD Map 3D as part of Thematic
Mapping, it is stored as an eight byte floating point number. You may fine-tune
the formatting of these numbers by selecting a decimal precision or integer
rounding up.
For instance, suppose you have a number that was originally entered into a
database or into an object data field with the value 12.34. This number could
be displayed in several ways depending upon the format specified. Formats
that contain a decimal point will generate the specified number of digits to
the right of the decimal point. Formats without a decimal point will round
up. The following table will make this more clear.
OuputExplanationFormat
12.34use two decimal points.01
12.4use one decimal point.1
13nearest whole number1
20nearest ten10
100nearest hundred100
Range of Values dialog box | 1367
Select Display Element dialog box
Use this dialog box to select drawing elements on the Display Manager.
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
To bring in drawing objects based on object classes in the current drawing on
page 303
To bring in drawing objects from AutoCAD layers in the current drawing on
page 301
To bring in drawing objects based on topology on page 312
To add a raster image to the map on page 372
When you select an item, such as a layer or a object class, a new layer is added
to the Display Manager and all objects in that item are added to the new layer.
If you select multiple items, for example two layers, then multiple layers are
added to the Display Manager.
List of Items
Select the items whose objects you want to include in this element.
Feature Class
Lists all feature classes in the active Feature Definition file.
Layer
Lists all the layers in the current drawing. To select from layers in attached
drawings, create a property query on page 307.
Topology
Lists all topologies in the current drawing. If the selected topology is
unloaded when you view the display map, it will be loaded.
Image
Lists all images in the current drawing. If the selected image is unloaded
when you view the display map, it will be loaded.
Group Selection
If you choose more than one item, you can select this option to group all
the new elements under one heading in the Display Manager. When
elements are grouped, you can easily turn off all the elements by turning
off the group.
1368 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Source Drawing Scope dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which drawings to include in the query.
To bring in drawing objects based on object data or external (SQL) data on
page 309
To bring in drawing objects based on location on page 304
To bring in drawing objects based on object properties on page 307
To create a drive alias on page 150
Click File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach Source Drawings.
Click a drawing to select it. The icon is grayed out for unselected drawings.
■If you select a nested drawing, its parent drawing is automatically selected.
■If you deselect a parent drawing, all nested drawings are automatically
deselected.
■You can select a parent drawing and deselect a child, but you cannot
deselect a parent and select a child.
■If the drawing is attached using a drive alias, the drive alias name appears
in the file path.
Style Band dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use this dialog box to specify the first and last color of the color ramp for
styling or theming your feature data. The color ramp will smoothly transition
from the first to last color.
To set styling options for polygon features on page 961
Source Drawing Scope dialog box | 1369
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style.
Style Label dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use this dialog box to add and style labels for features.
To label features on page 901
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style.
Create a Label
Select the checkbox to turn on labels.
Multiline
Specifies that the label can have multiple lines of text, but no advanced
placement functionality.
Advanced Placement
Specifies a single-line label which follows a path and shrinks to fit. A single
label is used for feature segments that have the same property value.
Property To Display
Select a property or select Expression to define an expression for the label
text. For more information, see Using the Expression Builder on page 1299.
Font
Select a font from the list.
Size Context
Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen units.
Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
1370 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate
System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles,
Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units
Select the type of units to use.
Size
Enter the text size or specify the size using an expression.
For more information, see Using the Expression Builder on page 1299.
Format
To apply bold, italic, or underlining, click one or more of the Format options.
Text Color
Select a text color.
Background Style
Select one of the following background styles:
■Ghosted: Draws an opaque border around each character. Use
Background Color to specify a color for the outline.
■Opaque: Draws a background behind the labels. They are displayed as
rectangles with text inside. Use Background Color to specify a color for
the rectangles.
■Transparent: No background is applied to the labels, which are displayed
only as text on the map.
Background Color
For Ghosted and Opaque background styles, click a color in the Background
Color list.
Horizontal Alignment
Horizontal alignment is available for point layers with fixed labels instead
of symbols.
Vertical Alignment
Vertical alignment is available for labels on polyline layers.
Select one of the available positions or select a layer property that contains
alignment information for each feature.
Rotation
Do one of the following:
■Enter the amount to rotate the text.
Style Label dialog box | 1371
■Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle in
the box. Click OK.
■Click Expression. Specify the rotation using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder on page 1299.
NOTE Horizontal and vertical alignment settings are not available for area layers.
Only the vertical alignment setting is available for line layers. Horizontal and vertical
alignment settings are available for point layers that display fixed labels instead of
symbols. For more information, see Displaying Fixed Labels at Point Locations on
page 903.
Style Line dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use this dialog box to create styles for line geometry.
To apply styles to lines on page 546
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style.
Apply Styles To The Line checkbox
Select to apply styles to lines.
Create Composite Lines/Reset To Single Line
Click to build up a composite line style. Style the first line in the composite.
Click New to add a new component to the line. Style the new component
as desired. Control the position of the selected component in the overall
composite line by clicking the up and down arrows. Click Reset To Single
Line to style a single line.
Units (Device Space)
Select the type of units to measure line thickness. Lines are specified in
Device Space units.
1372 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Thickness
Specify polyline thickness. Select 0 thickness to draw the line as thinly as
possible.
Color
Select a color.
Pattern
Select a pattern.
Style Point dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use this dialog box to specify symbols to represent and display point features.
To apply styles to points on page 545
To place labels at points on page 904
To allow labels to obscure points on the selected layer on page 903
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style.
Style A Point Symbol checkbox
Select to apply styles to points.
Symbol
Symbols are AutoCAD blocks stored in drawings. Click and navigate to
the drawing that contains the symbol you want to use.
Size Context
Select Device Space to specify label widths and heights in screen units.
Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
Select Map Space to specify label widths and heights in Mapping Coordinate
System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards, Miles,
Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units
Select the type of units to use.
Style Point dialog box | 1373
Width
Enter the symbol width or specify the width using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder on page 1299.
Height
Enter the symbol height or specify the height using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder on page 1299.
Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox
To maintain width-to-height proportions when you change the width or
height of the symbol, select the Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox.
Fill Color
To override the fill color of the symbol, select a color. If you do not specify
an override, the default fill color from the symbol is used.
Edge Color
To override the edge color of the symbol, select a color. If you do not specify
an override, the default edge color from the symbol is used.
Rotation
Do one of the following:
■Enter the amount to rotate the text.
■Click Any Angle. Specify the angle using the slider or enter an angle in
the box. Click OK.
■Click Expression. Specify the rotation using an expression. For more
information, see Using the Expression Builder on page 1299.
Style Area dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use this dialog box to create styles for polygon geometry.
To apply styles to areas on page 548
1374 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style.
Apply Fill To The Area
Apply Fill To The Area checkbox
Select to fill polygons.
Fill Pattern
Select Solid or a pattern.
Foreground Transparency
For solid fills, specify Foreground Transparency if desired.
Foreground Color
Specify Foreground Color for solid or pattern fills.
Background Color
For pattern fills, specify Background Color. If you do not want a background
color for the pattern, click Transparent.
NOTE In polygons with transparent backgrounds, the colors you see on the
map may differ from the colors displayed in the Preview frame because the
Preview frame uses a white background, which may differ from the color beneath
the transparent objects in your map.
Apply A Border To The Area
Apply A Border To The Area checkbox
Select to apply a border to polygons.
Line Pattern
Specify the pattern for the area border
Units (Device Space)
Select the type of units to use to measure border thickness.
Line Thickness
Specify border thickness. Select 0 thickness to draw the border as thinly as
possible.
Line Color
Specify border color.
Style Area dialog box | 1375
Style Text Layer dialog box
Specifies how text on the selected annotation is displayed.
To style an annotation layer on page 913
In Display Manager, right-click an annotation layer. Click Edit Style ➤ Style
field.
Size context
Select one of the following:
■Device Space. Specifies that symbol widths and heights are in screen
units. Available units are Points, Inches, Millimeters, or Centimeters.
■Map Space. Specifies that symbol widths and heights are in Mapping
Coordinate System (MCS) units. Available units are Inches, Feet, Yards,
Miles, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters, and Kilometers.
Units
Specifies the units for the annotation layer.
Text Type
Select one of the following:
■Plain—Formats annotation text uniformly using the settings specified
for the layer in this dialog box. The text has no formatting information
itself.
■Mtext—Formats annotation text as multiline. The settings specified for
the layer in this dialog box define the base formatting style. You can
override this formatting when you insert individual annotative text
features.
The Edit Expression button lets you specify an expression for this setting
for advanced use cases. It is recommended that you do not use expressions
for Text Type.
Text
Displays the name of a property in the feature source. It specifies that the
text for the annotation is what you specify in the Edit Text Instance dialog
1376 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
box on page 1364 when you create the annotation. The Edit Expression button
lets you specify an expression for this setting for advanced use cases.
For more information on inserting annotations, see Adding Text to an
Annotation Layer on page 914.
Font Name
Specifies the font for the annotation layer.
Font Size
Specifies the font size for the annotation layer. Leave the
"NullValue(SIZE,number)" expression. The initial setting for font height is
in mapping units and is based on the existing view. We recommend that
you try the suggested height and adjust the number as needed. If individual
instances need a different height, adjust the value in the SIZE column in
the Data Table after you insert the annotation instances.
Horizontal Alignment
Displays the name of a property in the feature source. It specifies that the
text for the annotation is what you specify in the Edit Text Instance dialog
box on page 1364 when you create the annotation. The Edit Expression button
lets you specify an expression for this setting for advanced use cases.
Vertical Alignment
Displays the name of a property in the feature source. It specifies that the
text for the annotation is what you specify in the Edit Text Instance dialog
box on page 1364 when you create the annotation. The Edit Expression button
lets you specify an expression for this setting for advanced use cases.
Rotation
Displays the name of a property in the feature source. It specifies that the
text for the annotation is what you specify in the Edit Text Instance dialog
box on page 1364 when you create the annotation. The Edit Expression button
lets you specify an expression for this setting for advanced use cases.
Preview
Displays a preview of the text with the specified styles applied.
Thematic Mapping dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Thematic Mapping dialog box | 1377
Use this dialog box to specify the data you will use for the theme and the ways
in which you want to stylize the objects.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Data Values
Specify whether the data you will use for this theme is a set of distinct, specific
values, or whether it is a set of values that can be broken into ranges, and then
specify the data you want to use.
Theme Type
Select one of the following:
■A Set of Specific Values: Choose this option if each item in this element
has a distinct value. This option is appropriate for string and integer
data. Examples of distinct values are different types of pipe material or
different land use designations.
■A Range of Numeric Values: Choose this option if the values can be
grouped into ranges. This is appropriate for numeric data only. Examples
are property values, temperature, or population.
Values
Displays either the Thematic Values dialog box on page 1379 or the Range of
Values dialog box on page 1365 where you specify the data source to use for
the values and the specific values to use.
Thematic Details
Specify which properties you want to stylize and the stylizations for each
range or value in this theme.
Table
Select ways to stylize the objects.
■In the column heading, select the check boxes for the properties you
want to stylize.
1378 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
■Click one of the cells in a stylization column to edit the stylization for
a specific value.
■Click one of the cells in the Legend column to edit the text that will
appear next to each value in the map legend.
■To reverse the order of rows in the selected column, right-click a column
heading and click Flip. Flip is available for all columns except Values
and Legend.
■To change the value of a particular range, click one of the cells in the
Values column and edit the number. To redefine all of the values, click
the Values button.
Hide Unused Columns
Hides any columns that are not selected.
Ramps
Select from a list of pre-built stylization sequences, for example a set of color
gradations, hatch patterns, or linestyles.
Scale Ramp to Fit
Divides the selected ramp sequence into equal intervals according to the
number of values. If you do not select this option, the ramp styles are applied
in sequence, up to the number of values that you have.
Thematic Values dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box (from the Thematic Mapping dialog box on page 1377) to
specify the source of thematic data and then select one or more discrete values
from that data.
To create a theme for a drawing layer on page 970
In Display Manager, right-click a drawing layer. Click Add Style ➤ Theme.
Thematic Values dialog box | 1379
Data Values area
Obtain From
Click . In the Choose Data Expression dialog box, select the source of
the data to use.
Ignore
Select data values to exclude from the thematic display. These values, while
present in the data, may be inappropriate for use in the thematic map.
Examples include null or empty data values.
Normalize By
Enter a value or an expression if you want to normalize the data values
relative to some other data value. Click to display the Choose Data
Expression dialog box.
Read Data
Reads the data from the data source according to the expression you defined.
Select Specific Values area
Shows the values read from the data source, together with the number of
occurrences (Count). Select the value(s) to appear in the thematic map. To
quickly select all the values, right-click and choose Select All.
Theme dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to features.
Use this dialog box to create a theme for a feature source layer, based on a
range of conditions.
To create a theme for a feature layer on page 958
In Display Manager, right-click a feature layer ➤ Edit Style.
1380 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
A theme consists of a collection of rules. Each rule specifies a style and feature
label for the features that meet the specified condition. You can add a legend
label to provide a description of a rule’s condition.
Rules
Specifies the number of ranges to create and how to handle any existing rules.
Create Rules
Enter the number of ranges to create and whether new ranges replace
existing ranges or are added before or after existing ranges.
You can specify the number of ranges to create if Distribution method is
Equal, Quantile, or Jenks (Natural Breaks). Properties containing strings use
an Individual Values distribution that does not allow the number of rules
to be edited. Adjust the number of rules to control the coarseness of the
theme. For more information about distribution methods, see Understanding
Distribution Methods.
Existing Rules
Specify whether new ranges replace existing rules (ranges) or are added
before or after existing rules.
Create A Range Of Conditions
Check the Create A Range Of Conditions check box to analyze features based
on values that fall into various numerical ranges. If you clear the Create A
Range Of Conditions check box, the theming tool creates a set of ranges with
interpolated styles and labels, but with empty conditions. You can then fill
in the conditions manually.
Property
Select the property on which to base the theme.
Minimum Value
Specify the minimum value for the range.
Maximum Value
Specify the maximum value for the range.
The first rule includes the Minimum Value and the last rule includes the
Maximum Value. Styles are interpolated across the range.
Distribution
Select a method. For more information, see Understanding Distribution
Methods
Theme dialog box | 1381
Interpolate Styles Across The Range Of Conditions
Check the Interpolate Styles Across The Range of conditions check box to
interpolate styles across the range of conditions. The first rule uses the From
style and the last rule uses the To style. Styles are interpolated across the range.
If you clear this box, the theming tool creates a range of conditions with blank
styles. Then, you can fill in the styles manually.
Choose of the following:
Style Ramp
Allows you to define a style ramp manually. Click . The Style Point,
Style Line, or Style Area dialog box is displayed depending on the type of
data associated with the layer. An additional column of controls is provided
for defining the end-of-range style.
Palette
Allows you to select from a list of predefined palettes.
Create Feature Labels For The Range Of Conditions
Select the Create Feature Labels For The Range Of Conditions check box to to
add labels to the features in your theme. The label is placed near the line,
point symbol, or polygon.
Label Ramp
Click to specify the property to display, font, size, format, color,
background style and color, alignment, and rotation of the label. For more
information, see the Style Label dialog box on page 1370.
Create Legend Labels For The Range Of Conditions
Check the Create Legend For The Range Of Conditions check box to label the
theme in the legend.
Label Text
Enter the text to appear next to each rule in the legend
Label Format
For Label Format, specify how to display the legend label.
If you theme a layer on a property that contained area information and you
used the label text Area:, the label formats might look like the following
examples:
<Label Text> <Min> to <Max>
Area: 100 to 200
<Label Text> <Min> - <Max>
1382 | Chapter 22 Display Manager Dialog Boxes
Area: 100 - 200
<Min> <= <Label Text> <<Max>
100 <= Area < 200
Theme dialog box | 1383
1384
Editing Maps Dialog
Boxes
ADEFILLPOLYG (Fill Closed Polyline command)
Use this command to fill a closed polyline with a color.
To fill a closed polyline with a solid-looking hatch on page 796
Respond to the prompts:
Select/<Layer>:
Enter s to select individual objects, or l to fill all objects on a layer.
Select objects/Layer to fill:
Select the individual objects you want to fill, or enter the name of a layer.
Color to fill <Bylayer>:
Enter the name of a color, such as RED.
The selected closed polylines are filled with a solid hatch. To display text or
other objects on top of the hatch, use the DRAWORDER command.
You can set an option to determine whether the hatch object created by this
command is associative.
23
1385
ADERSHEET (Rubber Sheet command)
Use this command to get two or more data sets from different sources to align
geographically: for example, when stretching a new subdivision map into a
preexisting parcel map.
To rubber sheet two maps on page 792
Click Modify ➤ Rubber Sheet.
WARNING Use rubber sheeting only when it is absolutely necessary because it
can severely compromise the accuracy of your data.
Respond to the prompts:
Base point 1:
Specify a point.
Reference point 1:
Specify the new location for the first point.
Base point 2:
Specify another point. When you finish specifying points, press Enter. Keep
in mind that the more points you enter, the more accurate the results will
be.
Select objects by <Area>/Select:
Enter a to select all objects in the polygon, or enter s to select objects
individually.
Objects wholly within the original polygon are modified to fit the new shape
and location of the polygon.
1386 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
When selecting points for rubber sheeting, select points in order around the
perimeter of the object or region to be rubber sheeted.
incorrectcorrect
The selected points are treated as the vertices of a polygon, so you will get
better results if you select the points sequentially around the perimeter.
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command)
Use this command to move, rotate, and scale a single object or a group of
objects. (To transform an entire source drawing while it is active, use the
transformation options in the Drawing Settings dialog box on page 1642.
To move, rotate, or scale an object on page 789
Click Modify ➤ Transform.
Respond to the prompts:
Select/<Layer>:
Enter S to select objects or enter L to choose all objects on a layer.
Select objects:
Use any AutoCAD selection method to select the objects you want to
transform. If you chose Layer, enter the names of the layers you want to
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) | 1387
transform. You can use “wild-card characters” such as * and ? to select a set
of layers.
First source point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point.
First destination point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point. Objects
are translated the relative distance between the first source point and this
new point.
Second source point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point.
Second destination point:
Select a point in your drawing or enter the coordinates of the point.
Source and Destination Points
The difference between the first source point and the first destination point
is the offset for the selected objects.
The difference in angle between the two source points and the two destination
points is the rotation.
The ratio of the length between the two destination points to the length
between the two source points is the change in scale.
MAPFEATUREMERGE
NOTE This command must be used with at least one feature.
Use this command to merge features and assign feature property values for
resulting features.
1388 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
When you merge features, the resulting feature property values are determined
by rules you specify in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box on page 1405.
To create split/merge rules using expressionspolygons:splitting using expres-
sions;polygons:merging u...
Click Modify ➤ Merge.
Respond to the prompts:
Select features to merge:
Select at least two objects to merge, one of which must be a feature. Press
ENTER when you are done selecting the feature or features you want to
merge.
Specify Feature ID for use [Select/New] <Select>:
Specify whether you want to select the feature that has the feature ID you
want to use or you want to create a new feature ID.
Select
Allows you to select the feature that has the ID you want to use for the merged
feature.
New
Specifies that a new feature ID will be created for the merged feature.
MAPFEATURESPLIT
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to split features and assign feature property values for
resulting features.
MAPFEATURESPLIT | 1389
When you split a feature, the resulting feature property values are determined
by rules you specify in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box on page 1405.
To split a feature on page 592
Click Modify ➤ Split.
Respond to the prompts:
Select one or more linear or polygonal features to split:
Select one or more linear or polygonal features in your map to split. Press
ENTER when you are done selecting the feature or features you want to
split.
Create a new or multi-part [New/Multipart] feature:
Specify whether you want the feature or features split into new features or
a multipart feature.
New
Creates new features.
Multipart
Creates a multipart feature.
Generate new feature ID or use existing [New/Existing] <New>:
Specify whether you want the new feature to use the existing feature ID or
a new one.
Would you like to Draw or Select the line for split? [Select/Draw]:
Select or draw a split line. If you use a polyline as your split line, make sure
it intersects with feature geometry you are splitting. You can also used a
closed polyline.
If you use a polygon (or mpolygon) to split a feature, the part that falls
outside of the polygon becomes one feature, and the part that falls inside
the polygon becomes another feature.
1390 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
Use this command to specify whether or not feature property values are
calculated based on the rules specified in the Split and Merge Rules dialog box
on page 1405 when the following commands are used on features:
■Split (MAPFEATURESPLIT on page 1389)
■Merge (MAPFEATUREMERGE on page 1388)
■JOIN
■Join option of PEDIT
■BREAK
■TRIM
Even when MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES is set to Yes, the following default
rules are applied when splitting or merging features. For more information
about these rules, see Split and Merge Rules dialog box on page 1405
Default Merge RuleDefault Split RuleProperty Type
First SelectedCopyString
SumCopyInteger (Int)
SumCopyDouble
To turn on or off Ignore Split and Merge Rules on page 593
In the Data Table, click Options ➤ Set Split and Merge Rules.
Click Modify ➤ Split.
Click Modify ➤ Merge.
MAPIGNORESPLITMERGERULES | 1391
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to create a new LineString feature on a layer that contains
LineString feature data.
To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature on page 580
The MAPLINESTRINGCREATE command is based on the PLINE command.
For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point:
Specify a starting point for the LineString.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]:
Specify the next point or enter an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the LineString. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the LineString.
1392 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to edit a LineString feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
The MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command. For
more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Join/Edit vertex/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option. For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in
the AutoCAD Help.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the LineString, connecting the last segment
with the first. The LineString is considered open unless you close it using the
Close option. If the LineString is closed the first option is Open.
Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed
unless you open it using the Open option. If the LineString is open the first
option is Closed.
Join
Joins two open LineStrings into one. The ends must be touching.
Select objects:
Select the two LineStrings to be joined.
Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the LineString by drawing an X on the screen. If you
have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in
that direction.
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT | 1393
Next/Previous/Insert/Move/eXit] <Next>:
Enter an option. For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in
the AutoCAD Help.
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the edit session.
Exit
Ends the MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command.
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to create a new MultiLineString feature on a layer that
contains line feature data. A MultiLineString is a set of LineStrings that behave
as one feature. When you complete the first LineString you are prompted to
begin another one until you have created the set.
To create a new LineString or MultiLineString feature on page 580
The MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE command is based on the PLINE
command. For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the
AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point
Specify a starting point for the first LineString.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]
Specify the next point or enter an option.
LineString/eXit <eXit>:
Create another LineString or exit the command.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
1394 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the LineString. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the LineString.
LineString
Begins the MAPLINESTRINGCREATE command so you can create another
LineString.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE command.
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to edit a MultiLineString feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
The MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command.
For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT | 1395
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option.
Add
Adds a new LineString to the MultiLineString. For more information, see
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE on page 1392.
Delete
Deletes a LineString from the MultiLineString.
Move
Moves a LineString in the MultiLineString.
Select Objects:
Select the object to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected LineStrings are to be
moved and in what direction.
Edit
Edits a LineString in the MultiLineString. For more information, see
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT on page 1393.
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT operation.
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to create a new MultiPoint feature on a layer that contains
point feature data. A MultiPoint feature is a set of points that behave as one
1396 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
feature. When you complete the first point you are prompted to begin another
one until you have created the set.
To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature on page 578
Respond to the prompts.
Specify a point:
Specify the location of the new MultiPoint feature.
Specify a point or [Undo]:
Specify the location of the next point or undo the last point.
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to edit a MultiPoint feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
Respond to the prompts:
Add
Adds a new point to the MultiPoint feature. For more information, see
MAPPOINTCREATE on page 1401.
Delete
Deletes a point from the MultiPoint feature.
Move
Moves a point in the MultiPoint feature.
Select Objects:
Select the object to move.
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT | 1397
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected points are to be moved
and in what direction.
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT operation.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to create a new MultiPolygon feature on a layer that
contains polygon feature data. A MultiPolygon is a set of polygons that behave
as one feature. When you complete the first polygon you are prompted to
begin another one until you have created the set.
To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature on page 579
The MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command.
For more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point:
Specify a starting point for the MultiPolygon.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]:
Specify the next point or enter an option.
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
1398 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polygon.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the polygon. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the polygon.
Ring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Repeats the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Polygon
Begins the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command so you can create another
polygon.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE command.
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to edit a MultiPolygon feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT | 1399
The MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command.
For more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/addRing/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option.
Add
Adds a new polygon to the MultiPolygon. For more information, see
MAPPOLYGONCREATE on page 1401.
Addring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Specify the polygon to which you will add the ring. Repeats the
MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Delete
Deletes a polygon from the MultiPolygon.
Move
Moves a polygon in the MultiPolygon.
Select objects:
Select the polygon to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved
and in what direction.
Edit
Edits a polygon in the MultiPolygon. For more information, see
MAPPOLYGONEDIT on page 1402.
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT operation.
1400 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
MAPPOINTCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to create a new point feature on a layer that contains point
feature data.
To create a new Point or MultiPoint feature on page 578
Respond to the prompt.
Specify a point:
Specify the location of the new point feature.
MAPPOLYGONCREATE
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to create a new polygon feature on a layer that contains
polygon feature data.
The MAPPOLYGONCREATE command is based on the PLINE command. For
more information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
To create a new Polygon or MultiPolygon feature on page 579
Respond to the prompts.
Specify start point:
Specify a starting point for the polygon.
Specify next point or [Arc/Length/Undo]:
Specify the next point or enter an option.
MAPPOINTCREATE | 1401
Next Point
Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated.
Arc
Adds arc segments to the polygon.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/CEnter/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo]:
Specify the endpoint of the arc or enter an option. If you have already
created one arc, you have the option to close the polygon. For more
information about the prompts, see PLINE in the AutoCAD Help.
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, the new line segment is drawn
tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line:
Specify a distance.
Undo
Removes the most recent segment added to the polygon.
Ring
Creates a polygon inside a polygon. This is considered a hole. Additional rings
are islands. Repeats the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
Exit
Ends the MAPPOLYGONCREATE command.
MAPPOLYGONEDIT
NOTE This command applies only to geospatial features, and not to drawing
objects.
Use this command to edit a polygon feature.
To edit a feature using feature editing commands on page 591
1402 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
The MAPPOLYGONEDIT command is based on the PEDIT command. For
more information about the prompts, see PEDIT in the AutoCAD Help.
Respond to the prompts:
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/Undo/eXit] <eXit>:
Enter an option.
Add
Adds an outer polygon or a ring or island to the selected polygon. For more
information, see MAPPOLYGONCREATE on page 1401.
Delete
Deletes the outermost polygon or rings or islands from the selected polygon.
Move
Moves the outermost polygon or rings or islands in the selected polygon.
Select objects:
Select the polygon to move.
Specify base point:
Specify a base point for the Move operation.
Specify second point:
Specify the second point for the Move operation. The two points you specify
define a vector that indicates how far the selected polygons are to be moved
and in what direction.
Edit
Edits a vertex on the outer ring or an island or hole. For more information,
see MAPLINESTRINGEDIT on page 1393.
Undo
Undoes the last step in the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation.
Exit
Ends the MAPPOLYGONEDIT operation.
MAPPOLYGONEDIT | 1403
Break Objects at Boundary dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a clean map edge by cutting lines, 2D polylines,
arcs, and circles that cross a specified edge.
To break objects at a boundary on page 798
Click Modify ➤ Boundary Break.
Before
After
Boundaries
Specify what to use as the boundary.
Use Save Back Extents Of Active Source Drawings
Use the save back extents specified in the current drawing's drawing settings.
You can change the save back extents in the Drawing Settings dialog box.
In Map Explorer, right-click Drawings ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set. In
the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box on page 1638, click Drawing
Settings.
Select Boundaries
Use existing objects as the boundary. If you select this option, click Select.
Select the objects to use.
1404 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Define Boundary
Use selected points to specify the boundary. If you select this option, click
Define. Select points to delineate the boundary.
Objects to Break
Select the objects to break.
Select Automatically
Use all objects within or crossing the boundary.
Select Manually
Use only selected objects. If you select this option, click Select <. Select the
objects to break.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
Filter On Layers
Only objects on the selected layers will be broken. Click Layers to select
from a list of all available layers in the current drawing.
Break Method
Select the objects to skip or object data to retain during a break operation.
Skip Topology Objects
Select this option to protect topology data. Any objects that have topology
data are not broken.
Retain Object Data
Select this option to save object data from the original object. The data is
duplicated on each new piece.
Split and Merge Rules dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how class property values are calculated when
you use the following commands on features.
■Split (MAPFEATURESPLIT on page 1389)
■Merge (MAPFEATUREMERGE on page 1388)
■JOIN
Split and Merge Rules dialog box | 1405
■Join option of PEDIT
■BREAK
■TRIM
To create split/merge rules using expressions
In Map Explorer, right click on a feature class and then click Set Split and
Merge Rules.
In the Data Table, click Options ➤ Set Split and Merge Rules.
Click Modify ➤ Merge.
Click Modify ➤ Split.
Feature Properties
Displays the selected feature class and its properties. Use the shortcut menu
options to select multiple properties or property types. You can only set
rules for properties that are not read-only.
Property Attributes
Displays attribute information for the selected property or properties.
Split and Merge Rules
Specifies how class property values will be calculated when features are split
or merged.
Split Rule
Specifies the rule for calculating class property values when you split features.
■Calculation. For numeric properties, sets the property value based on a
custom calculation specified in the Expression field.
■Copy. Copies the property values to each new feature. (Default)
■Divide. Divides the property values equally into each new feature.
(Numeric properties only)
■Empty. Sets the property values to “empty” or a default for new features.
The original feature retains the original property values.
■Expression. Allows you to specify an expression.
1406 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
■Proportional. Distributes the property values proportionally into each
new feature based on the numeric value specified in the Based On field.
Expression
Specifies a custom calculation. To change the custom calculation, type it
in or click the Expression Builder button to launch the Expression Builder.
This options is displayed when the Split Rule is set to Calculation or the
selected feature property is a string.
Based On
Specifies the value on which the Proportional rule distributes the property
values. This option is only displayed when Split Rule is set to Proportional.
Merge Rule
Specifies the rule for calculating class property values when you merge
features.
■Average. Averages the property values from the merged features.
(Numeric properties only)
■Calculation. Sets the property value based on a custom calculation
specified in the Expression field.
■Concatenation. Concatenates the property values together separated by
the text in the Separator Text field.
■Empty. Sets the property value to “empty” or a default for the merged
feature.
■Expression. Allows you to specify an expression.
■First Selected. Sets the property value to that of the first selected feature.
■Last Selected. Sets the property value to that of the last selected feature.
■Maximum. Sets the property value to that of the maximum property
value of the merged features.
■Median. Sets the property value to the median value taken from the
merged features.
■Minimum. Sets the property value to that of the minimum property
value of the merged features
■Standard Deviation. Sets the property value to the standard deviation
taken from the property values of the merged features.
Split and Merge Rules dialog box | 1407
■Sum. Sets the property value to the sum of property values of the merged
features.
Expression
Specifies a custom calculation. To change the custom calculation, type it
in or click the Expression Builder button to launch the Expression Builder.
This options is displayed when the Merge Rule is set to Calculation or the
selected feature property is a string.
Separator Text
Specifies the text which separates the property values when the
Concatenation merge rule is specified.
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box
Use this dialog box to trim objects at a specified boundary, excluding either
what is inside the boundary (Trim Inside), or what is outside (Trim Outside).
The trimmed objects are created new in the current drawing and do not retain
links to their source drawings.
To trim objects inside a boundary on page 802
Click Modify ➤ Boundary Trim.
Trim Inside / Trim Outside
Given some drawing data...
1408 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
Trim Inside / Trim Outside
And a trim boundary...
Trim Inside looks like this...
And Trim Outside like this...
Boundary
Specify what to use as the boundary.
Reference Last Query Boundary
Use the last spatial boundary that was referenced in a query.
Select Boundary
Use an existing object as the boundary. If you select this option, click Select
and select the closed polyline or circle to use as the boundary.
Define Boundary
Use selected points to specify the boundary. If you select this option, click
Define and select points to delineate the boundary. You must specify at
least three points, and the boundary cannot cross itself.
Objects to Trim
Select the objects to trim.
Select Automatically
Trim all objects within or crossing the boundary.
Select Manually
Trim only selected objects. If you select this option, click Select and select
the objects to trim.
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog box | 1409
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
Filter On Layers
Only objects on the selected layers will be trimmed. Click Layers to select
from a list of all available layers in the current drawing.
If circle objects cross the selected boundary, they are converted to arcs before
they are trimmed.
Trim Method
Set rules for the trim operation.
Trim Inside/Outside Boundary
Specify whether to trim all objects inside the specified boundary and cut a
hole in the drawing, or whether to trim all objects outside the boundary
and create a neat border.
Skip Topology Objects
Select this option to protect topology data. Any objects that have topology
data are not trimmed.
Retain Object Data
Select this option to duplicate object data and external database links on
each piece of the trimmed object. If you do not select this option, the data
remains attached only to the original location.
Objects That Cannot be Trimmed
Specify what to do with objects that cannot be trimmed, such as text.
Ignore
Do not delete the objects.
Delete
Delete the objects.
Reference Insertion Point
Delete an object only if its insertion point is inside the area to be trimmed.
1410 | Chapter 23 Editing Maps Dialog Boxes
External Databases
Dialog Boxes
Associate Database Versions dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to set options related to database versions and file extensions.
To associate database versions with files extensions on page 219
Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
You can associate a database file extension with the version of the database
software that you use to edit the file. When you drop a database file on the Map
Explorer tab of the Task Pane, AutoCAD Map 3D checks the file extension and
uses the specified version of the database software.
Always Prompt
Each time you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer tab, AutoCAD Map
3D will prompt for the version of the database software to use with the file.
Select this option if you use more than one type of database.
24
1411
Always Use
When you drop a database file onto the Map Explorer, AutoCAD Map 3D
uses the specified version of the database software.
For example, if all your dBASE files are in dBASE III format, select the Always
Use option, and then select dBASE III from the list. If you have files in both
dBASE III and dBASE IV format, select the Always Prompt option under
dBASE/FoxPro.
For files created with Excel 95, select the Excel 7.0 driver.
Column dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify column display options.
To change the formatting of cells in a column in Data View on page 870
Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
By default, your formatting changes are saved with the current drawing.
Whenever you open this table from this drawing, the table uses the saved
formatting. If you do not want to save the formatting, clear the Save Format
And Style Changes With Drawing option on the Data Source tab of the
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628. If this option is cleared,
AutoCAD Map 3D erases formatting information when you close a table.
When you detach a data source, AutoCAD Map 3D erases formatting
information for all tables in that data source.
If you modify table column order outside of the Data View, the Data View
formatting may no longer be correct. To clear the formatting for a single table,
close the table when the Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing option
is cleared. To clear the formatting for all tables in a data source, detach the
data source.
Use the Font tab to specify text options for the selected column.
Use this Interior Pattern tab to specify the background of cells in the selected
column.
Use the Borders tab to specify borders for the selected column.
1412 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Use Align tab to specify text alignment for the selected column.
Font tab
Font
Select a font from the list of fonts installed on your system. Row height
adjusts automatically for the font size.
Outline
Select a font style. Font styles available depend on the selected font.
Size
Select a font size. Sizes available depend on the selected font.
Effects
Select Strikeout to print hyphens through the text. Select Underline to
underline the text.
Text Color
Select a color for the text.
Preview
Preview how the font options will look.
Color tab
Interior Pattern
Select a pattern. For no pattern, select the asterisks.
Foreground
Specify the color for the foreground of the pattern. Be sure to select a color
that doesn't hide the text.
Background
Specify the color for the background of the pattern. Be sure to select a color
that doesn't hide the text.
3D-Effect
Select a 3D effect for the cell.
Preview
Preview how the pattern and 3D effects will look.
Column dialog box | 1413
Borders tab
Border
Click in a box to select a border for the Left, Right, Top, or Bottom of each
cell in the column. The border uses the currently selected line type.
Type
Click a line type to select it.
Color
Select a color for the border.
Align tab
Horizontal
Align text on the left of the cell, the right of the cell, or in the horizontal
center of the cell. Select Standard to right-align numeric fields and left-align
all other fields.
Vertical
Align text with the top of the cell, the bottom of the cell, or in the vertical
center of the cell.
Wrap Text
Allow text to wrap in the cell. If this option is not selected, text that is too
long is not displayed or printed.
Allow Enter
Pressing Enter clears the cell. If this option is not selected, pressing Enter
moves to the next cell.
Auto Size
Automatically adjust the column width to the longest value in the column.
Column Values dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify values for a SQL filter in the Data View.
To use a SQL filter in the Data View on page 1019
1414 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
Scroll through the list, select the value you want, and click OK. The new value
is inserted into the Value field.
Configure Data Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to enter a name for a new data source or select an existing
data source from the list.
To automatically configure a data source on page 191
Click Setup ➤ Create/Edit a Source of Data ➤ External Records.
When you click OK, the Microsoft Windows Data Link Properties dialog box
appears, where you can define or modify a data link file for the data source.
If the data source you want is not listed, it may not be in the data sources
folder.
For more information on configuring a data source, refer to your Microsoft
Windows documentation.
NOTE If you modify a data source that is currently connected, the changes will
not take effect until you reconnect the data source.
Configure Data Source dialog box | 1415
Connect Data Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to select a data source to connect.
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane on
page 188
Click File ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Connect to External Records.
Click File ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect from External Records.
The list includes data sources that are attached to the current drawing but are
currently disconnected. Select the data sources you want. Click Connect.
If the data source you want is not listed, it may not be attached to this drawing.
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box
Use this dialog box to convert object data in your drawing to external data.
To convert object data to a linked database table on page 463
To automatically link records to objects using object data on page 460
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane on
page 188
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
NOTE Before you run this command, you must attach the data source to the
current drawing. In Map Explorer, right-click Data Sources ➤ Attach.
1416 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Do either of the following:
■Take an object data table and create a database table with the same
structure. For each selected object, the object data is read and a new record
is created in the external database table. If an object has multiple records
from the object data table, multiple records are created in the external
database table. Also, a database link is generated linking the object to the
record in the new database table.
■Use object data in your drawing that matches information in an external
database table and automatically create links based on the matched
information.
You can choose to leave the object data in the drawing or remove the object
data from the objects as each record is created.
When you are finished with this dialog box, click Proceed.
Source Object Data Table
Select the object data table you want to convert or link. You can work with
object data tables defined in the current drawing. To work with object data
tables in attached drawings, you must open those drawings directly.
Name
Select the object data table from the list.
Remove Data From Objects Processed
Deletes the object data currently associated with the object.
Target Link Template
Select an option and then click Define to specify the link template.
Convert Object Data To Database
Converts object data to records in a database and links objects to the new
data.
Link Object Data To Database
Links objects with attached object data to records in a database table using
key fields.
Define
Displays a dialog box where you specify the link template to identify the
database table.
Convert Object Data to Database Links dialog box | 1417
Object Selection
Choose how you want to select objects, and whether you want to select all
objects or only objects on specific AutoCAD layers.
Select Automatically
Uses all objects unless Filter On Layers is selected.
Select Manually
Selects individual objects. To select objects, choose Select Manually and
click Select.
Filter On Layers
Specifies the AutoCAD layers on which to search. The default is all layers.
Click Layers to select from a list of AutoCAD layers in the current drawing.
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPOD2ASE)
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to specify the table name for the new database table and
to define the link template that identifies the database table.
To create a link template on page 454
Click Setup ➤ Convert Object Data to Database Links.
Data Source
Select a data source from the list.
If you are connected to the data source, a check appears in the check box.
If you are not connected, click Connect.
Catalog/Schema
Select a catalog and schema from the list.
These options are not required for all data sources.
1418 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Table Name
Specify a unique name for the link template.
Key Columns
Specify the columns to use as key columns.
To enter more than one column, separate names with a comma. To select
from a list of field names in the object data table, or to rename the fields,
click Select to display the Select Link Template Key dialog box on page 1531.
Link Template
Specify a unique link template name.
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT)
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to define the location of a table and the columns to use
as key columns for a link template.
To convert object data to a linked database table on page 463
Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Define Link Template.
If you use the same table and key columns for multiple drawings, choose a
consistent naming scheme for link templates.
Data Source list
Lists the attached and connected data sources in the current drawing. If
you open the dialog box from an existing table, it lists the data source for
the table.
Table Name list
Lists tables for the selected data source. If you open the dialog from an
existing table, it lists the table name.
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPDEFINELT) | 1419
Link Template box
Lists link templates defined for the selected table. Enter a new name.
Key Selection area
Lists column names and data types for the columns in the selected table.
To select a column as a key column, click a box in the Key column. The
values in the key column are used to identify records in the table, so select
a column or set of columns that has a unique value for each record.
NOTE If the link template does not immediately appear on the Map Explorer tab
of the Task Pane, right-click on a blank space in the Map Explorer tab. Click Refresh.
Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to view all data sources attached to the current drawing.
To attach a data source by dragging the database file to the Task Pane on
page 188
Click File ➤ Attach/Detach ➤ Attach External Records.
Select the data sources. Click Detach. The selected data sources are disconnected
and removed from the current drawing.
Disconnect Data Source dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
1420 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to view data sources that are attached to the current
drawing and are currently connected.
To disconnect a data source on page 193
Click File ➤ Connect/Disconnect ➤ Disconnect from External Records.
Select the data sources you want. Click Disconnect. If the data source you
want is not listed, it may not be attached to this drawing or it may not be
currently connected. When you disconnect a data source, it remains attached
to the current drawing.
Header/Footer dialog box
Use this dialog box to define the header and footer for a Data View report.
To specify the header and footer on page 1216
In the Data View: File ➤ Header and Footer
Select the Header or Footer tab and enter the text. You can also enter certain
variables.
Replaced with at print timeVariable
Application name$A
Current page number$P
Total number of pages$N
Header/Footer dialog box | 1421
Replaced with at print timeVariable
Current date$D
To change the font, select the cell. Click Font. In the Font dialog box, select
the formatting options you want. Note that font formatting applies to all text
in a cell.
Distance to Frame
Dimensions are in cm if your Windows system-wide measurement system is
set to Metric, in inches if it is set to U.S. To view or set the measurement
system, from the Windows Control Panel choose Regional Settings ➤ Number
tab ➤ Measurement System.
Header
Specify the distance from the top margin to the bottom of the Header text.
Footer
Specify the distance from the bottom margin to the top of the Footer text.
First Page No.
Enter the starting page number.
Additional pages are numbered consecutively.
Link Template Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to change the width of the Column Name or Data Type
columns.
To edit the database path in a link template on page 466
Click Setup ➤ Edit Link Template Properties.
Place the cursor over the column divider. Click and drag the column to the
desired width.
1422 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Page Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify margins, headers, grid, print order, and centering
options.
To set print options on page 1216
In the Data View: File ➤ Page Setup
Margins
Margin dimensions are in cm if your Windows system-wide measurement
system is set to Metric, in inches if it is set to U.S. To view or set the
measurement system, from the Windows Control Panel choose Regional
Settings ➤ Number tab ➤ Measurement System.
Left
Enter the distance from the left edge of the paper to the beginning of each
line.
Right
Enter the distance from the right edge of the paper to the end of the
printable area.
Top
Enter the distance from the top of the paper to the top of the first line.
Bottom
Enter the distance from the bottom of the paper to the bottom of the last
line.
Headers and Grid Lines
Row Headers
Print row headers.
Column Headers
Print column headers.
Print Frame
Print a frame around the table.
Page Setup dialog box | 1423
Vertical Lines
Print vertical lines between each column.
Horizontal Lines
Print horizontal lines between each row.
Only Black And White
Print using only black and white. Text that has a color assigned to it will
be printed using a pattern.
Page Order
If a table extends beyond the limits of a single page, it is divided into page-size
tiles. This setting governs the order of printing the tiles.
First Rows, Then Columns
Print tiles from left to right by rows, top row first.
First Columns, Then Rows
Print tiles from top to bottom by columns, left column first.
Center on Page
Vertical
Center the table between the specified top and bottom margins.
Horizontal
Center the table between the specified left and right margins.
Select Database Version dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to select the database to use with this file from the list of
available databases.
To set data source options on page 213
1424 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Options.
Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
Always Use This Database For Files Of This Type
Select to use the selected database version for all databases with this
extension. You will not be prompted again. To turn prompting back on,
change the setting on the Data Source tab of the Autodesk Map Options
dialog box.
To specify default database versions for other extensions, use the Data Source
tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
Select Existing Link Template dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the appropriate link template, specify the key
fields in the object data to use, and then select a database validation option.
To open a linked database table on page 456
Click Edit ➤ More External Record Options ➤ View Linked Table.
The list of link templates include those available for the current drawing.
Link Template
Select a link template for the database table containing the data matching
your object data table. In the OD Column, specify the fields in the object data
table to use for key fields.
Database Validation
Select a validation option.
None
Create links without checking the database.
Select Existing Link Template dialog box | 1425
Record Must Exist
Create a link only where the text or attribute tag value matches an existing
record's key field value.
Create If New
Create a new record in the table if no existing record matches. If you choose
this option, you can use the grid below to map data from fields in the object
data table to non-key fields in the database.
Select Link Template dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to select the appropriate data source and then select the
link template. .
To open a linked database table on page 456
Click Edit ➤ More External Record Options ➤ View Linked Table.
The lists include the data sources and link templates available for the current
drawing
Select Link Templates dialog box
Use this dialog box to select link templates to delete.
To delete links for a group of objects on page 465
1426 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Click Setup ➤ More Link Template Options ➤ Link Manager.
If you are deleting links or link templates for selected objects, the list includes
link templates for records linked to the selected objects. Once you select the
link templates and click OK, link data associated with the selected link
templates is removed from the selected objects.
Select Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to select the query whose records you want to view.
To open a table using the Task Pane on page 865
Click Edit ➤ More External Record Options ➤ Execute Query.
Select the appropriate data source and then select the query. A Data View
window displays the records that match the query.
NOTE You cannot edit the data resulting from a database query.
Data Source
Lists data sources currently attached and connected to the current drawing.
Query
Lists the queries associated with the selected data source. These are queries
that were defined in the external database program.
Select Query dialog box | 1427
Select Table dialog box (MAPBROWSETBL)
NOTE This functionality applies only to an attribute data source that you use with
drawing objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use
with a feature source.
Use this dialog box to select a data table to view or edit.
To open a table using the Task Pane on page 865
Click Edit ➤ More External Record Options ➤ Edit Table.
Select the appropriate data source and then select the table.
Data Source
Lists data sources currently attached and connected to the current drawing.
Table
Lists tables in the selected data source.
Sort dialog box
Use this dialog box to sort the Data View.
To use the Data View on page 860
In the Data View: View ➤ Sort ➤ Multiple Columns
Before you begin sorting, note the following:
■Records are sorted based on the value in the column selected in the Sort
By box.
1428 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
If multiple records have the same value in this column, those records are
further sorted by the column specified in the first Then By box.
■If you don't specify a sort column, records are sorted in database order.
■To sort the table by additional columns, use the remaining Then By lists.
■You can sort up to five columns simultaneously.
You cannot sort columns that have binary or user-defined data types, and
these columns do not appear in the sort lists.
■To clear all the lists, click Reset.
Sort By
Lists the columns in the table. Click the down arrow and select the column
by which you want to sort the table. Columns with binary or user-defined
data types are not listed.
Ascending
Sort from the beginning of the alphabet, the lowest number, or the earliest
date.
Descending
Sort from the end of the alphabet, the highest number, or the latest date.
Table Filter dialog box
Use this dialog box to select records from the database table.
To use a SQL filter in the Data View on page 1019
In the Data View: Records ➤ SQL Filter
When you apply the filter, the Data View searches the current database table
and displays only records that match the specified conditions.
To edit an existing condition, select the line in the SQL Filter list. Edit the
information in the Where Condition area. When you finish editing, click
Update.
Table Filter dialog box | 1429
To add a new line, select a joining operator (And/Or/Not). Select a column
and an operator and specify a value. When you finish, click Add.
SQL Filter area
Displays the current filter. If lines in the filter have been grouped, the group
is indented.
Group
Groups the selected conditions. Conditions in the group are evaluated
before other conditions.
Ungroup
Deletes the parentheses from the selected line and from the matching ending
or beginning line of the group.
Delete
Deletes the selected condition.
Clear All
Deletes all conditions.
Where Condition area
Use the Where Condition area to edit an existing condition in the filter or
to add a new condition.
And
Specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Or
Specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Not
And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first condition can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
For the very first condition in the list, you do not specify And or Or, but
you can select Not.
Column
Displays columns from the current table.
1430 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Operator
Specifies how to test the values in the column.
DescriptionOperator
The value of the selected column is equal to the value you enter in
the Value box.
=
The value of the selected column is greater than the value you enter
in the Value box.
>
The value of the selected column is greater than or equal to the
value you enter in the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected column is less than the value you enter
in the Value box.
<
The value of the selected column is less than or equal to the value
you enter in the Value box.
<=
The value of the selected column is not equal to the value you enter
in the Value box.
<>
The selected column is linked to the object and contains the spe-
cified value. If you specify multiple values, separate each value with
a comma. Enclose values in single quotes, for example, '1','2','3'.
IN
The selected column is linked to the object and is empty. Do not
enter a value in the Value box.
IS NULL
The selected column is linked to the object and contains part of
the value specified. Applies to string (character) data types only.
Use the percent sign (%) as a wild-card character in the Value box.
LIKE
For information on the wild-card characters supported by your database
system, refer to the documentation for your database system software.
Table Filter dialog box | 1431
Value
Specify the value you want to search for. To select from a list of existing
values in the column, click .
To use wild-card characters for string values, select the LIKE operator. For
example, type B% to find all values that begin with the letter B.
Add
Add the condition line to the SQL Filter list.
Update
Replace the selected condition in the SQL Filter list with the new condition.
To use a filter you previously defined for this table, click History at the bottom
of the screen. Select the filter from the list.
Table Filter History dialog box
Use this dialog box to manage the filters you previously defined for this table.
To use a SQL filter in the Data View on page 1019
In the Data View: Records ➤ SQL Filter
To use a filter, select it in the list and click OK, or double-click the filter. To
erase a filter, select it in the list and click Delete. To erase all filters, click Delete
All.
The maximum number of filters stored on this list is determined by the setting
for Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List on the Current Drawing
tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
1432 | Chapter 24 External Databases Dialog Boxes
Table Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to view information about the selected table or query.
To view external data linked to drawing objects on page 938
Click the Highlight Linked Objects icon.
To change the width of the Column Name or Column Type columns, place
the cursor over the column divider. Click and drag the column to the desired
width.
Name
Displays the name of the selected table or query.
Structure
Displays the column name and column type for each column.
Zoom Scale dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the percentage of the display area that
highlighted objects will fill.
To set other Data View highlighting options on page 1015
In the Data View: Highlight ➤ Zoom Scale
Specify 100% to zoom the display to the extents of the selected objects. Specify
a smaller number to display more of the drawing outside the highlighted
objects.
Specify 0% to maintain the current zoom level.
Table Properties dialog box | 1433
1434
Import Export Dialog
Boxes
Attribute Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the attribute data to import for the selected input
layer. This is sometimes called a theme, level, or file.
To specify the data to import on page 359
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Do Not Import Attribute Data
Data attached to the objects in the source drawing is not imported.
Create Object Data
Data attached to the objects in the source drawing is imported into an object
data table.
Object Data Table To Use
Select an object data table or enter a name for a new one. A table name can
include the characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9, $ and _. It cannot include spaces. It must
start with an alphanumeric character.
25
1435
For a new object data table name, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new object
data table with fields that match the fields you're importing. To change
these defaults, click Select Fields.
For an existing object data table, incoming fields are imported into object
data fields with the same name by default. If no object data field exists with
the same name, the incoming field is not imported. To change these defaults,
click Select Fields.
When the data is imported, it will be converted to the following object data
types:
■Integer32, Integer16, and Boolean data types are converted to the Integer
data type. For Boolean data, false is converted to 0 and true is converted
to 1.
■Float, Double, and Decimal data types are converted to the Real data
type.
■Char and Date data types are converted to the Character data type.
Incoming data is converted to the data type of the matching object data
field. If this conversion fails, AutoCAD Map 3D uses 0 for integers, 0.0 for
real numbers, and "" for characters.
Select Fields
Select the fields to import and specify names for the object data fields.
Add Unique Key Field
Automatically creates a field with a unique entry for each imported object.
You can edit the field name.
The unique ID numbers increment within a single AutoCAD Map 3D session,
but restart when you restart AutoCAD Map 3D. To extend the unique key
across multiple imported files, import them all during the same AutoCAD
Map 3D session.
Add To Database Table
Appends data attached to the objects in the source to an external database
table. The links to the data are imported with the objects. Select the link
template to use. Optionally, import only the link data.
If no link templates are defined in the current drawing, the option is not
available.
Link Template
Select a link template from the list.
1436 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Select Fields
Selects fields to import from the source drawing. If you select only key fields,
they are imported as link data, and the database table is not updated.
Create Link Only
Imports link data only. Links are maintained from the imported objects to
their appropriate row in the table, but no changes are made to the database
table.
If you import only the key field, this option is automatically selected.
Block Mapping dialog box
This dialog box was used to list all values in the import file for the specified
Control Data Element and the block name to which they were mapped. It has
been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Conflict Resolution dialog box
Use this dialog box to resolve conflicts during import.
To specify the data to import on page 359
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
You can map incoming attribute data to target data fields in the AutoCAD
Map 3D drawing using both the Data and Object Class columns. This may
Block Mapping dialog box | 1437
result in mapping two different incoming data fields to the same target data
field. Before proceeding with the import, you must resolve such conflicts.
For example, the Object Class field can specify that a AutoCAD Map 3D object
data field called “Wire_Data” stores an imported attribute “Voltage,” while
the Data column specifies that the same “Wire_Data” object data field stores
another imported attribute, “EMF.” You cannot store two data values in one
target field. The Conflict Resolution dialog box lets you specify which incoming
data values to use.
Conflicts Detected For Input Layer <Layer Name>
Indicates that conflicts between the attribute mapping specified in the Data
and Object Class columns have been found for the specified layer.
Conflict List
Lists the data-mapping conflicts to resolve before proceeding with the import.
Specify which of the incoming attributes (the one defined in the Object Class
or the one specified in the Data column) should be stored in the AutoCAD
Map 3D data field.
Class Input Field
Click in this column to use the value specified by the Object Class.
Data Input Field
Click in this column to use the value specified by the Data column.
Target
Displays the target attribute data field in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
The syntax used for the Target field is
CATEGORY:TABLE.FIELD
Where
Type of data, for example "OD" for object
data, or "LT" for link template (linked ex-
ternal database).
CATEGORY
Object data table name or database table
name.
TABLE
Data field name.FIELD
Use Class
Resolves all conflicts using the Class Input Field definitions.
1438 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Use Data
Resolves all conflicts using the Data Input Field definitions.
OK
Accept the current settings and return to the Import dialog box.
Coordinate System Translation dialog box
This dialog box was used to convert the file from one coordinate system to
another. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures
or commands.
To export to DGN on page 1189
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID Use the Export instructions. on page ?
To export to SHP format on page 1183
To export to Arc/INFO on page 1179
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
If the coordinate system you want is not listed in any category, you can create
a new coordinate system on page 82.
Input Settings area
From the Coordinate System list, select the coordinate system code for the
existing file. This list displays all codes in the selected category. To display
the codes for a different category, select the new category from the Category
list.
Output Settings area
From the Coordinate System list, select the coordinate system code you
want for the new file. This list displays all codes in the selected category.
To display the codes for a different category, select the new category from
the Category list.
Coordinate System Translation dialog box | 1439
Define Link Template dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to define a new link template when importing an
external map file into AutoCAD Map 3D format. It has been discontinued.
Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
OK
When you click OK, a link template is created for the table using the key
columns in the Key Selection Area that have been set to On.
Table Specification Area
Select a data source, catalog, and schema. Enter the name of a table. To
select from a list of table names, click List.
Link Template Area
Enter a name for the link template. Link template names can be up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Key Selection Area
Specify a key column by selecting the column and clicking On.
Export dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the drawing objects to export, and specify export
options. You cannot export feature data.
To export drawing objects to other file formats on page 1168
1440 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
If you have previously saved your settings in this dialog box, you can click
Load to reload those settings. To save the current settings for use later or to
use in a script, click Save.
The dialog box has the following tabs:
■Selection Tab on page 1441
■Data Tab on page 1443
■Options Tab on page 1444
If you export to SDF, Oracle, or ArcSDE, the Export dialog box substitutes
Feature Class Tab on page 1442 for the Data Tab.
Selection Tab
Specify the objects to export.
Object Type
For some formats, you must select the object type you want to export.
Objects of other types will be filtered out of the export. To export these
other object types, run the Export feature again. Note that some objects in
an AutoCAD Map 3D drawing may be exported as more than one type.
Select Objects To Export
Select the objects that you want to export.
Select All
Selects all objects.
Select Manually
Lets you individually select the objects to export. To modify the selection
set, click Select Objects or Quick Select.
Filter Selection area
Filters the selected objects based on layer or object class. To apply a filter,
enter the names of the layers or object classes you want to include, or click
the button to select from a list. Objects that are not on the selected layers
and in the selected object classes will be filtered out of the export. The status
line shows how many objects are selected and how many have been filtered
out.
Export dialog box | 1441
Select Polygon Topology To Export
Name
Select the polygon topology to export. All the polygons in the selected
topology will be converted to polygon objects and exported.
These objects are in addition to any objects selected above.
Group Complex Polygons
Groups nested polygons into a single balanced polygon. Each nested polygon
must have a centroid.
If you do not select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D will create separate
polygons, one for each centroid.
Preview Filtered Selection
Preview the objects that will be exported. In the preview, objects that will
be exported are highlighted. To leave the preview and return to this dialog,
press ESC.
Feature Class Tab
Choose a method for organizing the selected drawing objects into logical
feature classes.
DWG to Feature Class Mapping
Specify how DWG objects map to FDO feature classes.
Create a single class from all selected objects
Creates a single FDO feature class for all selected DWG objects. This is the
default selection.
Create multiple feature classes based on a drawing property
Lets you create multiple feature classes based on drawing properties
(AutoCAD layer, object data tables, Object Classification classes, orLink
Template tables). To select the drawing propery from which to create feature
classes, use the Drawing property to use pick list.
Select Attributes
Displays the Select Attributes dialog box. Allows you to select specific
attributes to export. You can select attributes for both single-class and
multiclass export operations. For multiclass export operations, these
attributes will be added to every feature class.
Drawing Property
Select the drawing properties you want to export.
1442 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Feature Class
Displays the feature class to which you are exporting your data. If you are
exporting to an existing FDO data store, you can use the drop-down list to
map your data to existing fields. Exisiting feature classes are displayed in
blue text. You can map more than one drawing property to a single feature
class.
To access feature-class-level property mapping, click the button in the
Feature Class field. The Feature Class Mapping dialog box will appear,
allowing you to map specific drawing properties to specific feature class
properties.
Geometry
Use the drop-down list to select the geometry data you want to export for
each drawing property. To display the drop-down list, click in the
appropriate field, then click the down arrow. For pre-existing classes, this
field displays the geometry type already associated with that class.
Show Schemas
Check this box to display the schemas of the feature class to which you are
mapping your data.
Data Tab
Data
To include data with the exported objects, select the data fields to export. The
selected fields appear in the table. You can also enter an expression.
NOTE If you are exporting to SHP format using object classification to create
feature classes, you may not want to specify attributes here, as all feature classes
will then receive all attributes you check on this tab. If you don’t select attributes
here, properties for those feature classes are defined by the original object classes.
Select Attributes
Displays the Select Attributes dialog box, where you can select properties,
object properties, topology information, object class information, or fields
from link template data, object data, or block attributes.
TIP To export only the key values, select the fields in the Link Templates section.
Since the key values are stored in the drawing as link data, selecting only key
fields improves performance.
In the list of attributes, Object Data is map-specific and includes the
attributes of any objects in the map that have object data tables associated
with them. Object Properties are the properties of each entity type. These
Export dialog box | 1443
are the same attributes that appear in the Properties palette. Properties are
attributes that apply to every DWG object in the map.
Source Field
Lists the data you've selected to export. Click Select Attributes to select
additional data, or enter an expression.
Output Field
Enter a name for the field in the output file. Output field names can use
any alpha-numeric character and the underscore symbol ("_").
Create Unique Key Field
Creates a unique value for each exported object. You can specify a name
for this field.
The unique ID numbers increment within a single AutoCAD Map 3D session,
but restart when you restart AutoCAD Map 3D. If you want the unique key
to extend across a number of files you are exporting, be sure to export all
the files in the same AutoCAD Map 3D session.
Options Tab
Coordinate Conversion
To convert the exported objects to a different coordinate system, check
Convert To. Enter the coordinate system code for the export file or click
Select Coordinate System to select one from a list.
If the Convert To box is grayed, your current drawing does not have a
coordinate system assigned to it. You can cancel this dialog box, assign a
coordinate system to the current drawing, and then re-run the export
command.
Other
The options that appear in this section depend on your choice of export
format.
Treat Closed Polylines as Polygons
Exports closed polylines as polygons. If this check box is not selected, only
polygon objects will be exported as polygons.
NOTE If you are exporting a polygon topology that includes closed polylines
and those closed polylines are part of the selection set, selecting this check box
may create duplicate polygons in the exported file.
Additional settings
The Options tab may include other settings for the particular format you
chose. In addition, for some formats, you can click Driver Options to specify
1444 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
additional options. For formats without additional driver options, this
button is grayed. For more information about the options for a particular
format, see Supported Import Formats on page 323.
Additional Notes
■AutoCAD Map 3D exports original object properties regardless of any map
stylizations, except for some text. Text entities created by text stylizations
are exported. To avoid exporting text entities, turn off any text stylization
before exporting your data. To export stylized drawing objects, first save
the stylizations to a linked output drawing, and then export the linked
objects. You can export stylized feature layers using Display Manager. For
more information, see Saving or Exporting a Display Manager Layer on
page 1210.
■Settings saved with the MAPEXPORT command from version 4.0 or earlier
of AutoCAD Map 3D cannot be loaded in this dialog box.
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how you want to map the attribute data from
the incoming file to the object class definitions in the AutoCAD Map 3D
drawing.
To assign an object class to an input layer on page 355
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Select An Object Class
Displays the object classes defined in the AutoCAD Map 3D drawing.
Input Fields
Displays the incoming attribute data fields that are available to be mapped
to Target Fields in the object class definition.
Target Fields
Lists the attributes in the selected object class that require mapping. You
should map as many Target Fields as possible.
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog box | 1445
After you map a target field, it no longer appears in the Target Fields list,
so when there are no more target fields in the Target Fields list, you've
mapped them all. This ensures that each target field is mapped to only one
incoming data field.
If you don't map a target field, the default object class value will be used.
The syntax used for the Target field is
CATEGORY:TABLE.FIELD
Where
Type of data, for example "OD" for object
data, or "LT" for link template (linked ex-
ternal database).
CATEGORY
Object data table name or database table
name.
TABLE
Data field name.FIELD
OK
Use the current settings and return to the Import dialog box.
Cancel
Close the dialog box, cancel any settings made, and return to the Import
dialog box.
Import dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify options and settings for imported files.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To specify an area to import on page 351
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import on page 353
To assign an object class to an input layer on page 355
To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing on page 138
To specify the data to import on page 359
To specify how to import points on page 361
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
1446 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
In the table, you can specify properties for each input layer (sometimes called
a schema, level, or file).
To import an input layer, select the check box next to its name. To change
other settings for an input layer, click in the field you want to change. Click
the down arrow to choose from a list of choices, or click to for additional
choices.
To sort on a specific column, right-click the column heading. Click Sort
Ascending or Sort Descending.
To copy the contents of a field, right-click in the field. Click Copy. Right-click
in the target field. Click one of the Paste options. To copy the contents of a
field to all other layers, right-click in the field. Click one of the Paste To All
Layers options. Note that when pasting into Object Class fields, the object
class name and data mappings are pasted separately, and if data mapping
conflicts are detected, the pasted data mappings options will not be available.
Current Drawing Coordinate System
Displays the global coordinate system for the current drawing. To change
this coordinate system, or to assign a coordinate system, click Assign Global
Coordinate System.
Driver Options
For some import formats, you can click Driver Options to specify additional
options. Some formats do not have any additional driver options. For more
information about the options for a particular format, see Supported Import
Formats on page 323.
NOTE If you import from DGN Version 8, there may be more than one model
in the drawing. If so, you will see input layers reflecting each one. Each model
corresponds roughly to a model space in AutoCAD Map 3D (for example, Layout
1 or Layout 2). The input layers will be named using the syntax
ModelName_LevelNumber, ModelName_LevelName, or
ModelName_GeometryType, depending on the settings you choose in Driver
Options.
Be sure to set driver options before you modify the table. Changing driver
options may reset some of the settings in the table.
Spatial Filter
Specify the area into which you want import data.
Import dialog box | 1447
None
Place no area limit on the incoming file and import the entire incoming
file.
Current Display
Limits the import to the area shown in the current drawing window.
Define Window
Limits the import to a rectangular area you define in the drawing. Click
Select. Drag your cursor from right to left to define the area. Objects that
the rectangular window encloses or crosses will be imported. Notes:
■AutoCAD Map 3D does not display a preview of the incoming data.
■If the coordinate system assigned to the Map drawing differs from the
coordinate system specified in the Coordinate System column, AutoCAD
Map 3D will perform a reverse transformation to determine the correct
coordinate space (area) for the incoming data.
Import Properties Table
Input Layer
Lists all layers (sometimes called schema, levels, or files) for the selected file
or folder. Select the check box next to an input layer name to import objects
from that layer.
Drawing Layer
Specifies the target layer in the current drawing. Objects will be imported
to the selected layer. Select an existing layer or create a new layer. To use
layer names stored in data, click . Select the data field.
Object Class
Specifies the name of the object class to use for the incoming data. For
example, objects on an incoming Shapefile input layer can be classified and
included in the "LAND USE" object class in Map.
Click the down-arrow to select from a list of valid object classes. Click
to specify the incoming data attributes you want to use to populate the
object class definition. This process is referred to as attribute mapping. If
you don't map the attributes, AutoCAD Map 3D populates the object class
with the default object class values.
1448 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
NOTE This column is available only if you have object classes defined in your
Map drawing. For more information about setting up object classes, see Setting
Up Object Classification on page 108.
Input Coordinate System
Displays the coordinate system of the incoming layer. Objects will be
converted from input coordinate system to the coordinate system assigned
to the current drawing. Click to specify the coordinate system code
for the incoming objects.
NOTE This column is available only if you've assigned a coordinate system to
the current drawing. To assign a coordinate system to the current drawing,
click Assign Global Coordinate System under Current Drawing Coordinate
System.
Data
Displays the name of the object data table or link template to use for
incoming data. Click to specify a name for the table and select the
incoming fields you want to include in the object data table.
Note that data is imported only if it is associated with an imported object.
If no imported objects are associated with the incoming data, the table is
not created.
Points
Lists the block to use for point objects. Select ACAD_POINT or a block name
from the list. To create text or get block names from incoming data, click
and select the data field.
Saved Profiles
To save your settings as a profile, click Save. To use settings that you've
previously saved, click Load. You can use your saved setting to help automate
scripts.
NOTE Settings saved with the MAPIMPORT command in version 4.0 or earlier
of AutoCAD Map 3D cannot be loaded in this dialog box.
Import Polygons As Closed Polylines
Specifies that you want to import polygons as closed polylines, which is
useful if you plan to use the polygons in a polygon topology. If this option
Import dialog box | 1449
is not selected, polygons are imported as polygon objects. To change the
default state of this option, use the MAPUSEMPOLYGON command.
Use Class Defaults For Out Of Range Values
Specifies that you want to use object class default values for incoming data
values that are not within the specified object class range. Choosing this
option ensures that the incoming data will be accurately classified, but may
require AutoCAD Map 3D to modify some of the incoming data values.
Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify how objects and data in the import file
are imported into AutoCAD Map 3D. It has been discontinued. Instead, use
one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Proceed
Click Proceed to convert the selected file.
OK
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Import Graphics Area
Perform Coordinate Conversion
To convert the file from one coordinate system to another, select Perform
Coordinate Conversion. Click Define to display the Coordinate System
Translation dialog box.
Map Data Element To Layers
Select this option to use the attribute data in the import file to determine
the target layer for the AutoCAD Map 3D objects that are created.
1450 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Click Layers to display the Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box, where
you can map the values for a selected data element to specific layers in the
output file.
Map Data Element To Block Name
Select this option to use the attribute data in the import file to determine
the target block name for point and polygon centroid objects that are
created.
Click Blocks to display the Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box,
where you can map the values for a selected data element to specific block
names in the output file.
Import Data Elements Area
Ignore Data Elements
Select this option to ignore attribute data in the import file (other than data
that is used in the layer and block name mapping above).
Select this option if you do not want to convert the attribute data to object
data or create links to SQL tables. Only the graphical objects in the file will
be converted.
Map Data Elements To Object Data
Select this option to convert the attribute data in the import file to object
data.
Click Data to display the Object Data Table dialog box, where you can select
the name of an existing object data table or create a new one.
Map Data Elements To SQL Table
Select this option to use the attribute data in the import file to create links
to existing SQL tables or to create new tables.
Click SQL to display the Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box, where you
can map specific data elements to specific columns in an external database.
Options Area
Load
Use import settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Import Data Options dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) | 1451
Layer Mapping dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify all values in the import file for the specified
Control Data Element and the layer they are mapped to. It has been
discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import)
Use this dialog box to specify a target layer in the current drawing for the
selected layer in the incoming file. This is sometimes called a schema, level,
or file.
To specify an AutoCAD layer during import on page 353
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Create on Existing Layer
Puts incoming objects on an existing layer in the drawing. Click the down
arrow to select the layer.
If you assigned the incoming layer to an object class with a layer property,
the default is the layer specified in the object class.
Create on New Layer
Puts incoming objects on a new layer. Enter a name for the new layer.
1452 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Use Data Field For Layer Name
Puts incoming objects on a layer based on data attached to the objects.
Click the down arrow and select the field to use for layer names. For each
object, AutoCAD Map 3D will read the value in the specified field and put
the object on a layer with the same name. If the layer does not exist, it will
be created. If an object does not have a value in the specified field, it will
go on Layer 0.
AutoCAD Map 3D uses only the first 255 characters of the value in the field.
If the incoming file has field values that are longer, you may want to change
the value before you import the file.
NOTE If a conflict between the layer specified by the Drawing Layer setting
and an Object Class with a layer property is found, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the
Drawing Layer setting, except when Drawing Layer is set to <None>. In that
case, the Object Class setting is used. When Use Class Defaults is checked,
AutoCAD Map 3D forces the data to the correct Drawing Layer.
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a name for the corresponding level in the
exported DGN file for each layer in the current drawing.
To export to DGN on page 1189
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
To change a DGN level name, click in the DGN Level field you want to change
and enter a new name. DGN version 7 names can be numbers or strings. For
DGN version 8, names must be strings.
Related procedures:
■Exporting To MicroStation Design (DGN) Versions 7 and 8 on page 1186
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box | 1453
Link Template to Export dialog box
This dialog box was used to select the link template to use in the export
operation. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To export to DGN on page 1189
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID Use the Export instructions. on page ?
To export to SHP format on page 1183
To export to Arc/INFO on page 1179
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
If you select the Map SQL Data To Data Element option, the data from the
referenced table will be exported.
If you select the Map Database Link To Data Element option, the key column
value that links the object to the table will be exported.
Map Data Elements to Block Name dialog box
(MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify which data element to use for determining
the block for points or polygon centroids. It has been discontinued. Instead,
use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
When the file is converted, the value of the selected data element for each
object determines the block to use.
1454 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
To map a value to a block name, select the value in the Values Available list
and select a block from the Target Block Name list. Click >>.
Control Data Element area
Select the data element to use to determine the target block.
Values Available list
Displays all the values in the import file for the selected data element.
Target Block Name area
Select a block name. To load a block, click Load.
>>
Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values
Assigned list for the selected block name.
<<
Remove the selected values from the selected block name and return them
to the Values Available list.
Values Assigned list
Displays the values assigned to the current block name.
Auto Block
Assign each value to a block name of the same name.
List
Display the Block Mapping dialog box, which lists the block name
assignment for each value in the selected data element.
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to specify the data element to use when determining
the target layer for objects. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the
following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Map Data Elements to Layers dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) | 1455
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
When the file is converted, the value of the selected data element for each
object will determine its layer.
To map a value to a layer, select the value in the Values Available list and
select a layer from the Target Layer list. Click >>.
Control Data Element area
Select the data element to use to determine the target layer.
Values Available list
Displays all the values in the import file for the selected data element.
Target Layer area
Select a layer. To create a new layer, click New.
>>
Move the selected values from the Values Available list to the Values
Assigned list for the selected layer.
<<
Remove the selected values from the selected layer and return them to the
Values Available list.
Values Assigned list
Displays the values assigned to the current layer.
Auto Layer
Assign each value to a layer of the same name. If a layer does not exist, one
will be created.
List
Display the Layer Mapping dialog box, which lists the layer assignment for
each value in the selected data element.
1456 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box (MAPIMPORT4)
This dialog box was used to map data elements in the import file to specific
columns in external database tables. It has been discontinued. Instead, use
one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Database Link Method area
Specify whether to link objects to an existing database table or to create a
new database table and link objects to the new table.
When the file is imported, each object in the import file is linked to the
record in the external database table with the matching key column value.
Or a new table is created using the values from the data elements, and links
are created to the new table.
To link a data element to a key value, select the data element in the Import
Data Elements list and select the key value in the Link Template list. Click
>>.
Import Data Elements area
Displays all data elements in the import file.
Link Template area
Select a link Template from the list.
To create a new link template, click Define to display the Define Link
Template dialog box.
>>
Link the selected import data element to the selected key in the link
template.
<<
Remove the selected link from the Link Template list and return the data
element to the Import Data Elements list.
Map Data Elements to SQL dialog box (MAPIMPORT4) | 1457
Map Export dialog box
This dialog box was used to export data from AutoCAD Map 3D to an external
file format. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To export to DGN on page 1189
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID Use the Export instructions. on page ?
To export to SHP format on page 1183
To export to Arc/INFO on page 1179
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Proceed
When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Map Export Options
dialog box, where you can specify how to export graphics and data.
OK
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Export File area
Format
Select the format to export to.
Name
Enter a name and location for the new file or directory.
If you are not sure of the location, click Browse to view existing files and
directories. If you are creating a coverage, the parent directory for the new
directory must be a "workspace" directory, containing only other coverage
directories, and the new directory must be empty of all files. The default
coverage format is UNIX ArcInfo. If the workspace directory contains an
existing PC ArcInfo coverage, the new coverage will be in PC ArcInfo format.
File Type area
Select the file type for the information you are exporting. This option is
not necessary for all file formats.
Object Selection area
Select Automatically
Use all objects on the specified layers and of the specified file type.
1458 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Select Manually
Select individual objects. Click Select < to select objects.
Objects will be filtered for the specified layers and file type.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Filter On Layers
Specify the layers to search. The default is all layers. To select from a list of
layers in the current drawing, click Layers.
Map Export Options dialog box
This dialog box was used to specify how objects and data in the current drawing
are exported. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To export to DGN on page 1189
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID Use the Export instructions. on page ?
To export to SHP format on page 1183
To export to Arc/INFO on page 1179
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Proceed
Click Proceed to export to the selected file format.
OK
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current export options.
Export Geometry area
Select Perform Coordinate Conversion to convert the objects from one
coordinate system to another. Click Define to display the Coordinate System
Translation dialog box.
Map Export Options dialog box | 1459
Export Object Properties area
Map Layer Name To Data Element
Transfer the layer name for each object to the specified data element name
in the export file.
Map Block Name To Data Element
Transfer the block name for each object to the specified data element name
in the export file.
Map Linetype To Data Element
Transfer the linetype name for each object to the specified data element in
the export file.
Export Data Elements area
No Data Mapping
Export only graphical objects. No data is exported.
Map Object Data To Data Element
Export object data for each object.
Click Data to display the Object Data Table dialog box where you can select
the object data table to export.
Map SQL Data To Data Element
Export data from an external database that is linked to the objects.
Click SQL to display the Link Template to Export dialog box, where you
can select the link template that defines the external table.
Map Database Link To Data Element
Export information about the database link. This option exports the key
column value that links the object to the table.
Click Link to display the Link Template to Export dialog box, where you
can select the link template that defines the external table.
Options area
Load
Use export settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save your current export settings so you can use them again.
1460 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
New Property Data Type dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a property type for a newproperty when you
export data to a geospatial format. Once the property type has been selected,
it cannot be edited. To change the property type, you must create a new
property.
To export drawing objects to other file formats on page 1168
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
New Property Data Type is only available for three specific AutoCAD properties:
.COLOR, LINETYPE, and LINEWEIGHT.
Data Type
Select the data type for the new class property from the drop-down list.
Feature Class Property Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to map data to existing feature classes in the target data
store when you export to a geospatial format. To select attributes to map to
this feature class only, click the Select Attributes button. The rows in this
dialog box display both the global attributes selected from the Export Dialog
Box and the attributes that apply to this feature class only.
To export drawing objects to other file formats on page 1168
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Drawing Attribute
Select the drawing attributes you wish to map to FDO feature classes. This
field is not editable.
New Property Data Type dialog box | 1461
For .COLOR, LINETYPE, and LINEWEIGHT attributes, click to display
the Property Value Mapping dialog box.
Feature Class Properties
Select the feature class property to which you want to map your drawing
attributes. If you are exporting to an existing FDO feature class, you can
select feature class properties from a drop-down list. Existing properties are
displayed in bold blue text.
Property Value Mapping
Use this dialog box to map specific drawing attribute properties to specific
feature class properties when you export to a geospatial format. for example,
you could map the color RED to the string CLAY.
To export drawing objects to other file formats on page 1168
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Property Value Mapping is only available for three specific AutoCAD properties:
.COLOR, LINETYPE, and LINEWEIGHT.
... Value
The left column is the AutoCAD drawing attribute property value. This will
display as .COLOR Value, LINETYPE Value, or LINEWEIGHT Value as
appropriate. Select the checkbox next to each property value you want to
map.
... Value
The right column is the target feature class property value. This will display
with the feature class property name you entered in the Feature Class
Property Mapping dialog box.
1462 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Map Import dialog box
This dialog box was used to translate an external map file into AutoCAD Map
3D format. It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following
procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
You can import coverages in both UNIX ArcInfo and PC ArcInfo format. If
you are importing a coverage, you must have the coverage subdirectory and
the associated INFO subdirectory before using the MAPIMPORT4 command.
To set a text size for coverages, set the TEXTSIZE variable before using the
MAPIMPORT4 command.
NOTE If a SHP file is located on a read-only drive or directory, you cannot import
the file if the name contains any of the following characters: pound sign (#),
exclamation point (!), comma (,), or accent grave (`). To import the file, either
rename the file or move it to a directory to which you have write access.
When you have set options, click Proceed to display the Import Data Options
dialog box, where you can specify how to import graphics and data.
Click OK to close the dialog box but keep the current import options.
Format
Select the format of the file to import.
Name
Enter the name of the existing file or coverage.
If you are not sure of the name or location, click Browse to view existing
file names and directories.
Map Import dialog box | 1463
New Layer dialog box
This dialog box was used to specify a name for a new imported layer. It has
been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
New layers are created with color number 7 and the CONTINUOUS linetype.
Object Data Table dialog box (Export)
This dialog box was used to select the object data table to export. It has been
discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
To export to DGN on page 1189
To export to MapInfo MIF/MID Use the Export instructions. on page ?
To export to SHP format on page 1183
To export to Arc/INFO on page 1179
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Click the down arrow to select from a list of object data tables in the current
drawing.
You can select only one object data table. To export data from multiple tables,
repeat the export command for each table.
1464 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Object Data Table dialog box (Import)
This dialog box was used to select the object data table to import data into.
It has been discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or
commands.
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
To create a table, exit the import operation and use the ADEDEFDATA
command.
During the import operation, data elements in the import file are transferred
to a matching field name.
Table box
Displays the target object data table name. If you enter a value in this box
that does not reference an existing object data table, Map creates a new
table that includes all data elements in the import file.
Tables
Display a list of all defined object data tables in the current drawing.
Selecting an existing table populates only fields whose names exactly match
the name of a data element.
Object Data/External Database Mapping dialog box
Use these dialog boxes to specify which fields from the incoming file should
be mapped to fields in an object data table or external database.
To specify the data to import on page 359
Object Data Table dialog box (Import) | 1465
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Input Fields
Select the fields from the incoming file you want to import.
Target Fields
Select the field in the object data table or external database to which you
want to import each field.
■If you are importing to an external database:
To select a Target Field, click in the box. Click the down arrow to select
from a list of existing fields.
If you selected Create Link Only in the Attribute Data dialog box, or if
you select only the key field in this dialog box, AutoCAD Map 3D will
import the key field as link data and will not modify the external
database.
■If you are importing to an object data table:
To import into an existing field in the table, click in the box. Click the
down arrow to select from a list of existing fields.
To import into a new field, type the name of the new field in the box.
To change a target field, click in the box and select or type the field you
want.
Point Mapping dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify how to import points for the selected layer. This
is sometimes called a schema, level, or file.
To specify how to import points on page 361
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
1466 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Create As Points
Converts points as points. Points are imported using ACAD_POINT.
Create As Text From Data
Converts points as text. Select the data field in the incoming file that
contains the value to use for the text. If an object does not have a value in
the selected data field, the point will be imported using ACAD_POINT.
Text will use the text style for the current drawing. To change the text style
for the current drawing, click Text Style and select the style you want.
Create As Blocks
Converts points as blocks. Select the block to use.
Get Block Name From Data
Converts points as blocks and uses a block name stored in attribute data.
Select the data field in the incoming file that contains the value to use for
the block name. If the block does not exist, then the point will be imported
using ACAD_POINT.
Get Attribute Values From Fields
Imports attribute values attached to the incoming points. If an attribute
name on the block that is being created matches a field name on the
incoming point, the data for that attribute will be imported with the point.
This option is available only if you select either Create As Blocks or Get
Block Name From Data.
Design File Input Settings
Use this dialog box to set options when you import data from Microstation
Design. Options may differ, depending on whether you are importing DGN7
or DGN 8, and the order of the items in the dialog may also change by version.
To import DGN files on page 344
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Design File Input Settings | 1467
Group Elements By
Level
Groups incoming objects by their DGN level. Only levels that contain
elements are imported.
Level Names
Groups incoming objects by their DGN level name. Only levels that contain
elements are imported. This option is available for DGN 8 only.
Geometry
Groups incoming objects by entity type.
Linkage Extraction
Allows you to extract MSLinks and FRAMME attribute linkage values from the
DGN 7 file.
MSLink
AutoCAD Map 3D imports up to three links per object for DGN 7. For each
link, two fields are added to the object data table: mslinks_n, which specifies
the key value, and entity_num_n, which specifies the table.
FRAMME
The following fields are added to the object data table: comp_count,
comp_num, dgnfile, feat_num, state_num, and ufid
Coordinate Units
Master/Sub
Each DGN 7 file defines a UOR (unit of resolution); in addition, it can define
Sub units and Master units. Select Master or Sub to specify which of these
units in the DGN 7 file matches the default unit in the AutoCAD Map 3D
map. For example, if the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map is
meters, and meters are the Sub unit in the imported file, select Sub. If you
select Sub or Master, the UORs in the DGN 7 file are converted to Sub or
Master units according to the conversion factor in the DGN file header.
When you import the file, one Master or Sub unit (whichever you choose)
will become one drawing unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D map.
Unit Ratio
Indicates the ratio between the Master and Sub units. For example, if the
ratio is 1:12 (as it would be for Feet/Inches), imported object coordinates
will be scaled 12 times bigger if you select Sub.
1468 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Element Expansion
Explode multi-text
Explodes multi-text objects into their component parts.
Create Text From Tags
Converts the contents of tags to text.
Explode Complex Chains
Returns each component of a complex chain as its own feature (no feature
will be returned for the complex chain as a whole). Otherwise, all elements
of the complex chain merge into a single linear feature, any arcs in the
complex chain become linestrings, and any linkages on the component
elements themselves are lost.
Cell Expansion
Create blocks From Cells
By default, cells are expanded into blocks, maintaining the cell grouping
structure.
Explode Cells
Expands the contents of the DGN cells into their component parts. The
expansion is a single level deep. It does not expand all sublevels.
Create As Points
Expands the contents of the DGN cells into points instead of blocks,
maintaining the cell grouping structure.
Reference File
Ignore
Ignores all external reference files (xrefs) attached to the source data set.
Create DWG
Reads all external reference files (xrefs) attached to the source data set. If
the reference file has nested references, they are also imported, but circular
references are not. If you select this option, you specify a location for the
folder for these files. If the folder already exists, you can choose to replace
it (overwrite its contents) or cancel and specify a different location. The
default folder location is the same as the selected DGN file location.
Design File Input Settings | 1469
Design File Output Settings
Use this dialog box to set options when you export data to Microstation Design
(DGN7).
To export to DGN on page 1189
Click File ➤ Convert DWG To ➤ Map 3D Export.
Coordinate Units
Master/Sub Select the coordinate units of the features: Master or Sub.
Select the unit that matches the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D
drawing. For example, if the default unit in your AutoCAD Map 3D drawing
is meters, and you are using a seed file that defines meters as the Master unit,
then select Master. The default is the Master unit.
Seed File Select the seed file, which controls whether or not the output DGN
file is two-dimensional or three-dimensional, sets the coordinate units, sets
global origin, etc. For DGN version 7, you must use a version 7 DGN seed file.
Override Global Origin (DGN 7 only) Select this option to override the global
origin setting in the seed file. Specify the global origin to use.
Compute Parameters (DGN 7 only) Select this option to override all seed
file settings and have AutoCAD Map 3D calculate the settings for you. AutoCAD
Map 3D determines the largest dimension for the set of exported objects and
sets the appropriate range and precision. It sets the UOR per Sub to 10, and
sets the Global Origin to the center of the bounding rectangle of the exported
objects.
Seed File
1470 | Chapter 25 Import Export Dialog Boxes
Managing Data Dialog
Boxes
Schema Editor
Use the Schema Editor to view or change settings for the entire schema hierarchy:
schemas, feature classes, and properties.
To create a schema on page 510
To edit a schema on page 520
In Map Explorer, select the feature source on page 1751 in the connection
tree (at the top of the pane) and click Schema ➤ Edit Schema.
You cannot control every aspect of a schema from the Schema Editor. For
example, you cannot create object or association properties, or specify that the
system auto-generate a value for a property. However, if you have set up these
attributes for a schema, the Schema Editor will display the current settings.
The settings you see depend on what the provider supports. For example, the
Long Transactions option won’t appear if the provider doesn’t support
versioning.
Schema settings
Name The name that will appear in the Schema tree. It must follow the naming
rules of the provider.
Description A description of the schema (optional)
26
1471
Feature class settings
Name The feature class name that will appear in the Schema tree. It must
follow the naming rules of the provider.
Description A description of the feature class (optional)
Type One of the following:
A feature class has an associated geometry. For most providers, each feature
class requires a unique identifier to distinguish it from other features (unless
the feature class has a base class from which it inherits an identifier).
A non-feature class specifies non-spatial data (with no geometry) and can be
used as a standalone class or a contained class. As a standalone class, it has
no association with another class and requires a unique identifier. As a
contained class, it defines a property of another non-feature or feature class.
For example, Sidewalk could be a property of a Road feature class; the Sidewalk
class defines the Road.Sidewalk property. In this case, the Sidewalk class does
not need an identity property, although it could have one.
Base feature class Indicates the inheritance aspects of this feature, if any. If
this feature class inherits from another feature class, select that superclass;
otherwise select None. This setting applies only to feature classes (not
non-feature classes) and is available only if the provider supports inheritance.
Abstract Indicates whether this feature class is an abstract class. You can’t
create features for an abstract class but you can use it as a base class. This
setting applies only to features classes (not non-feature classes) and is available
only if the provider supports inheritance.
Identifier properties Specifies which properties comprise the unique identifier
(for non-null primary-key values) for this feature class. Use the check boxes
to select one property for a simple identifier or multiple properties for a
compound identifier (some providers support only simple identifiers). Create
these properties before you create any others. Use the up-arrow and
down-arrow buttons to reorder the properties.
You must specify a value for any non-null property of a feature before you
check that feature into the data store. If you don’t, you won’t be able to check
the feature in.
Ordinarily, identifier properties use an auto-generated integer. This means
that when you add new features to this feature class, they automatically receive
an auto-generated, unique identifier. If you don’t specify auto-generated
integer for this property, you must manually enter a unique identifier for each
new feature that uses it.
1472 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
Constraints Specifies the criteria features must meet in order to be added to
this feature class. Enter a constraint for this feature class in the Constraints
box and click New to apply it. Repeat this step to create additional constraints
if necessary. Use the up-arrow and down-arrow buttons to reorder the
constraints. To remove a constraint, select it and click Delete. This setting is
available only if the provider supports constraints. Constraint syntax is
provider-specific.
Locking Specifies whether the user who checks out a feature controls that
feature to the exclusion of other users, until it is checked back in. This setting
applies only to providers that support locking.
Long transaction Enables long transactions. A long transaction groups
conditional changes to one or many features. Long transactions are used to
create different versions of a feature or set of features. This setting applies only
to providers that support versioning.
Property settings
Name The name of the property that will appear in the Schema tree. It must
follow the naming rules of the provider.
Each property is a single attribute of a feature class. For example, a Road feature
class may have properties called Name, DateConstructed, and Location.
Type One of the following:
A data property is non-spatial. It has a value whose type is either boolean,
byte, date/time, decimal, single, double, Int16, Int32, Int64, or string. For
example, a Road feature can have a data property called DateConstructed
whose type is date/time.
A geometry property defines an object’s shape. The default geometry property
specifies one of four shapes: point (0 dimensions), curve/line (1 dimension),
surface/polygon (2 dimensions), and solid (3 dimensions). A feature class has
one main geometry property, but can have additional geometry properties. A
geometry property is associated with a spatial context. All instances of a
geometric property must have the same ordinate dimension. Not all providers
support all geometry types or all dimensionalities; SHP supports only XY
points, for example, whereas Oracle supports XY, XYZ, XYZM, and XYM
points. The default is XY. Additionally, it can have attributes that describe
elevation and measure: HasElevation for Z and HasMeasure for M.
The association property may appear in the list, but it is not supported by
AutoCAD Map 3D. Choose this property type only if existing data uses it and
you want to maintain that data after it is moved to a different data store.
Description A description of the property (optional).
Schema Editor | 1473
System generated Specifies whether the system will auto-generate values for
this property. Generally, identifier properties whose values identify each feature
uniquely are auto-generated. You cannot set this option. It indicates the current
setting for this property in an existing schema.
Data attributes Specifies values for the attributes of the property. The list
changes dynamically to show the different attributes that are available for the
selected property type. Click an attribute name to display its description in
the Data Attributes table. If you can change or specify the value for this
property, a down-arrow or a blinking cursor appears in the value field and
you can choose or type a value.
Bulk Copy
Use Bulk Copy to copy the complete feature source or a subset based on
specified schemas, feature classes, or properties.
To copy data from one feature source to another on page 525
In Map Explorer, click Tools ➤ Bulk Copy.
From The feature source from which the data will be copied. Select a feature
source in the Connection Name list.
Version The version to use for copying. If the selected feature source supports
versioning, select a version from the list.
To The destination feature source. Select a feature source in the top list.
Version The version to use for copying If the destination feature source
supports versioning, select a version from the list.
Select items to copy Specifies the individual schemas, features classes, and
properties to copy to the destination feature source. Check the items to copy.
Selecting any schema element automatically selects all its child elements
(selecting a feature class also selects all its properties, for example). A square
(instead of a check) in a check box means that some of that element’s children
are not selected.
1474 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
Click on an item to select a different input name Click the arrow for each
item whose counterpart you selected in the left-hand tree to map the source
item to its destination item.
Ignore the following errors during the copy process The error types to
ignore during processing. If you leave error types unchecked, Bulk Copy stops
processing and reports these errors when they occur.
If the Insert Errors option is checked, Bulk Copy continues if there is an error
inserting an object, but objects that fail are skipped. Errors can occur if there
are any anomalies in the object data being copied, for example, an unmatched
feature ID, a value that is outside the range allowed for a property, a constraint
violation (for example, each item must be unique and the source is trying to
copy over an object that already exists in the target), or an inappropriate value
(for example, a string value that is too long).
If the Unmatched data or geometric type errors option is checked, Bulk Copy
skips association and object properties that the target data store does not
support.
NOTE AutoCAD Map 3D does not support either association or object properties,
but they may be present in existing schemas created outside AutoCAD Map 3D.
Some dimension properties are also skipped. For example, if you copy 3D data
to a 2D target, the z-coordinate is silently removed. Some fields can be
converted, for example, from int32 to int64, from int32 to double, or from
int32 to string. However, if a target does not support a data type (for example,
blob or polygon geometry), the data cannot be converted and the object is
skipped.For information about how fields are converted, see Understanding
How Bulk Copy Converts Data Types on page 526.
If the Coordinate system option is checked, AutoCAD Map 3D copies the
geometry without performing a coordinate system transformation. Use this
option if information for the source or target coordinate systems is missing,
but you are sure that the geometry coordinate systems are the same. For
example, if you are missing the .PRJ file for the .SHP file you are copying, but
you know that the coordinate system is the same as the target, use this option.
If you are not sure of one of the coordinate systems, this option can produce
undesired results.
Schema Mapping To save the current settings in an XML mapping file, click
Save. Click Load to open a saved mapping file.
Note: Before loading a mapping file, connect to the source and destination
feature sources.
Copy Now Copies the data for the specified schema elements. Bulk Copy
reports warnings and errors depending on the data formats of the two feature
Bulk Copy | 1475
sources, and the copying options you selected. Click View Log to see details
on page 529.
Create Data Store Dialog Box
Use this dialog box to create a new data store in a database data source. The
available settings in the dialog box vary by provider.
To create a data store for a database provider on page 505
To create an SDF or SHP data store on page 506
For a database data store, connect to and log into the data store in the Data
Connect window. In the Data Store list, select Add New Data Store (or type
a name that does not appear in the list already) and press Enter
For an SDF or SHP data store, in Map Explorer, click Schema ➤ Create SDF
or ➤ Create SHP.
Data store name Enter the name of the new data store or accept the default
name. This name will appear in the Data Connections by Provider list in Data
Connect.
Password Type the user password (Oracle only).
Confirm password Re-type the user password (Oracle only).
Data store name Enter the name of the new data store or accept the default
name. This name will appear in the Data Connections by Provider list in Data
Connect.
Description Optionally enter a description of the new feature source.
Data store coordinate system Enter the coordinate system code for the new
data store. If you don’t know the code, click to select a coordinate system.
In the Select Global Coordinate System dialog box, select a category. Select
from a list of available coordinate systems. Click Properties to view the
properties of the selected coordinate system. Click OK. Choose a coordinate
system that both the provider and AutoCAD Map 3D support.
Data store extents Enter the new data store’s minimum and maximum X
and Y spatial extents or accept the default values. You can’t add objects that
are outside these extents.
1476 | Chapter 26 Managing Data Dialog Boxes
For SQL Server, you must specify the extents of the data store or BulkCopy
will fail when copying data from any other provider source to SQL Server.
MySQL and Oracle support expanding the extents automatically if incoming
data are beyond the scope of the extents.
Storage resolution Enter the new data store’s X and Y tolerance or accept the
default value. If the distance between two points is smaller than the resolution,
the points are considered to be equivalent for most spatial tests.
Data store tablespace Enter the new data store’s tablespace name (Oracle
only).
Create Data Store Dialog Box | 1477
1478
Metadata Dialog Boxes
Metadata Viewer
27
1479
Use the Metadata Viewer to view metadata for the current drawing or other
resources.
To view metadata on page 1228
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
From the Metadata Viewer you can also perform the following actions:
■Import metadata
■Export metadata
■Print metadata
■Publish metadata to an XML, HTML, or TXT file
■Update forced-update fields
■Update all fields
■Edit metadata (through the Metadata Editor on page 1483)
■Create a template from the current metadata
■Specify metadata options on page 1485
■Specify the metadata stylesheet
■Display additional metadata that is not part of the standard (FGDC or ISO)
specified in the Metadata Options dialog box
Metadata Viewer Toolbar
Use the Metadata Viewer toolbar to perform the following actions.
ActionToolbar Button
Imports metadata from another programImport
Exports metadata to be read by another
program
Export
1480 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
ActionToolbar Button
Prints metadataPrint
Publishes metadata to an XML, HTML, or
TXT file
Publish
Updates forced-update fieldsUpdate Auto
Updates all fields (assumes that the auto-
matic update option is turned off)
Update All
Opens the Metadata EditorEdit
Creates a template from the currently-dis-
played metadata
Create Template
Opens the Metadata Options dialog boxOptions
Opens the New Features WorkshopLearn More
Opens online Help to Creating MetadataHelp
Current Drawing
The Current Drawing tree view lists the current drawing DWG on page 1749,
and any feature classes or object classes (resources on page 1760) associated with
it.
Show All Feature Classes
Specifies that the tree view displays metadata for all feature classes from
connected feature sources.
Folder Shortcut
The Folder Shortcut tree view allows you to display metadata for other types
of files on your local machine or a server.
If you add or remove files from a folder that you have uploaded to the Folder
Shortcut tree view, right-click somewhere in the tree view, and click Refresh.
Metadata Viewer | 1481
Add
Allows you to create and view metadata for additional files.
Remove
Removes additional files that you’ve added to the Folder Shortcut tree view.
Metadata Tab
Displays all the metadata related to the selected data source.
As soon as you select a data source, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically identifies
all the relevant metadata that it can, categorizes it according to the standard
with which you are working, and displays it in the Metadata Viewer. This tab
behaves like a web browser, with links and various levels that you can expand
or contract by clicking your mouse. The metadata content is completely
expanded by default.
The Summary tab
If the selected data source is a file, displays basic information about the file,
such as its type, size, and location.
Stylesheet
Controls the display of the metadata.
FGDC Classic/ISO Classic
Specifies a metadata standard for displaying the metadata.
XML
Specifies that the metadata is displayed in freeform XML format.
Text
Specifies that the metadata is displayed as text.
More Metadata
Displays additional metadata that is not part of the standard (FGDC or ISO)
specified in the Metadata Options dialog box on page 1485.
1482 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Metadata Editor
Allows you to edit and update metadata.
To view metadata on page 1228
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Metadata Editor Toolbar
Use the Metadata Editor toolbar to perform the following actions:
ActionToolbar Button
Applies a template on page ? to your
metadata.
Updates on page ? fields with values from
the current data source.
Audits on page ? your metadata for
compliance with the metadata standard
you are using.
Imports on page ? metadata values from
an XML file that complies with the
metadata standard you are using.
Highlights the field labels of forced-up-
date fields on page 1751.
Metadata Editor | 1483
Create a template on page ? from the
metadata you are working with.
Expand fields and field groups.
Collapse fields and field groups.
Metadata Fields
Allows you to enter metadata. A description and additional information are
displayed in the bottom area of the Metadata Editor when a field name or
field is selected.
Required fields are marked with a <Required> temporary placeholder. Some
fields will only accept certain types of data. For example, on the Identification
tab, under Spatial Domain, an attempt to enter a text string in the North
Bounding Coordinate field will be ignored. That is because the domain on
page 1748 of that field is any real number between -90.0 and +90.0, inclusive.
Some fields store past entries. If a drop down menu with past entries is
displayed when you begin to make an entry, you can do one of the following:
■Select on page ? the entry
■Add on page ? a new entry
■Edit on page ? a past entry
■Delete on page ? an entry
Fields that have specific values pre-defined by their standard, may provide a
drop-down list. Although these types of fields will also accept and save valid,
free-form entries, they will not display these entries the next time you click
the drop-down arrow.
Some fields provide a free-form text area.
1484 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
NOTE For ISO date fields, use one of the following formats: YYYY-MM-DD,
YYYY-MM, or YYYY. For ISO date and time fields, use the following format:
YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ss.
Keyboard Controls and Shortcuts
In addition to using a mouse to navigate the Metadata Editor, you can traverse
fields using standard Windows keyboard controls such as pressing Tab to move
to the next field, and Shift + Tab to move back one field. You can also use
standard Windows keyboard shortcuts whenever one of the letters on a button
is underlined.
Apply
Saves changes to the metadata without closing the Metadata Editor.
Attribute Editor
Allows you to edit ISO element attributes. The title and fields of the Attribute
Editor change dynamically depending upon the attribute.
To enter or edit metadata manually on page 1240
In the Metadata Editor, right-click an element field name and select Edit Attribute.
Metadata Options dialog box
To import a templatemetadata:importing templates;templates:importing for
metadataIn the Metadata Vie... on page ?
To export a template on page 1237
To remove a templatemetadata:removing templates;templates:removing from
metadataIn the Metadata View... on page ?
on page 1243
Using Metadata Templates on page 1232
Attribute Editor | 1485
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Template Tab
Metadata standard
Specifies the metadata standard.
The default metadata standard has been set according to your version of
AutoCAD Map 3D.
Use template
Specifies that the selected metadata template in the window below will be
used as the default template.
Import
Imports a metadata template.
Export
Exports a metadata template.
Rename
Renames the selected metadata template.
Remove
Removes the selected metadata template.
Preference Tab
Latitude/Longitude Precision
Sets the number of digits after the decimal point you want to display for
latitude and longitude in your metadata. The default is 6.
Auto Update
Specifies that metadata will be updated as soon as the data source is updated
(or as soon as the metadata is reconnected to its updated data source).
Import Metadata Options dialog box
To import a templatemetadata:importing templates;templates:importing for
metadataIn the Metadata Vie... on page ?
1486 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
To enter or edit metadata manuallyediting:metadata;metadata:editing;specialized
metadata editorsIn t... on page ?
To create a new templatemetadata:creating templates;templates:creating for
metadataIn the Metadata V... on page ?
To import metadata for DWGs or their resources on page 1252
To import metadata for Non-DWG files on page 1252
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Open the original project DWG File
Opens the original DWG as the current project. Any resources on page 1760
for the imported DWG are displayed in the Current Drawing on page 1481
tree view. You can then edit the metadata for any of those resources, or
save it as a template.
Append the source metadata to the current metadata
Overwrites the metadata with the source metadata.
Export Metadata dialog box
To export metadata on page 1254
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Select the source data type for which you want to export
metadata
Selected items
Select this option if you only want to export metadata for the items selected
in the Metadata Viewer on page 1479 .
All items in
Select Feature class if you want to export metadata for all features in the
selected class. Select Object class if you want to export metadata for all
Export Metadata dialog box | 1487
objects in the selected class. Select both if you want to include all features
and objects.
Create Metadata Template dialog box
Creates a template from the current metadata.
To create a new template on page 1233
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Template
Specifies the name of the template.
Compound Element Metadata Editors
Citation Information Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field. Most of this information is quite robust, with detailed
examples of best practices, and answers to frequently-asked questions.
Use the Citation Information Editor to enter information about published
geospatial data, using the United States FGDC CSDGM Standard on page 1751
field definitions.
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
1488 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
The Citation Information Editor is divided into the following sections:
General Information
Title
The NOAA Coastal Services Center suggests including a topic, time period,
and place in geospatial metadata titles. In addition, you can include the file
name, the data source, and the data resolution (if applicable). AutoCAD
Map 3D populates the field with the name of the selected resource in the
Metadata Viewer on page 1479.
Originator
The originator is usually the name of the organization responsible for
creating the resource, such as a county planning department. You can
include more than one originator. Put “ed.” after the name of an editor,
and “comp.” after the name of a compiler. Use the Record Navigator on
page 1247 to locate a previous entry, delete an entry, or add a new one.
Publication date
Accepts a date in one of the following formats:
■YYYYMMDD
■bcYYYYMMDD
■ccYYYYY
■cdYYYYY
If the date is not known, select one of the options in the drop down menu.
Publication time
Accepts a time in one of the following formats:
■HHMMSSSS
■HHMMSSSSshhmm
■HHMMSSSSZ
Edition
The version of the publication.
Geospatial data presentation form
The format or media used to present the data. Select one of the options
from the drop down menu, or enter a an FGDC-approved alternative. If
you enter an alternative, it will be saved in the current field, but will not
be added to the list for later selection.
Citation Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1489
Other citation details
Additional information to help users easily access and use your data.
Online linkage
The URL of the online resource where the data is published. Use the most
specific URL possible so users will not have to hunt around for it on a web
site or server. Use the Record Navigator on page 1247 to locate, add, or delete
URLs.
Series Information
Series name
If the data is part of a series, enter the name of the series.
Issue identification
If the data is part of a series, enter the issue number.
Publication Information
Publication place
The city in which the data was published. If the name is not unique, include
the state or province, and country as well.
Publisher
The name of the person or organization that published the data.
Large Work Citation
Larger work citation
If the data is part of a large work with several data sets that require their
own citation information, click Detail to launch an empty Citation
Information Editor. You can continue to do this for as many data sets as
necessary.
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringtitleTitle8.4
StringoriginOriginator8.1
Date/timepubdatePublication date8.2
Date/timepubtimePublication time8.3
1490 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringeditionEdition8.5
StringgeoformGeospatial data
presentation
form
8.6
StringothercitOther citation
details
8.9
URLonlinkOnline linkage8.10
StringsernameSeries name8.71
StringissueIssue ID8.72
StringpubplacePublication place8.81
StringpublishPublisher8.82
VariouslworkcitLarger work cita-
tion
8.11
Time Period Information Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field. Most of this information is quite robust, with detailed
examples of best practices, and answers to frequently-asked questions.
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
Time Period Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1491
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
CompoundsngdateSingle date/time9.1
DatecaldateCalendar date9.1.1
TimetimeTime of day9.1.2
CompoundmdattimMultiple
dates/times
9.2
CompoundrngdatesRange of
dates/times
9.3
DatebegdateBeginning date9.3.1
TimebegtimeBeginning time9.3.2
DateenddateEnding date9.3.3
TimeendtimeEnding time9.3.4
Contact Information Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field. Most of this information is quite robust, with detailed
examples of best practices, and answers to frequently-asked questions.
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
1492 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Contact information is part of the Distribution section of the FGDC
specification. The Distribution section is conditional (mandatory if applicable).
The requirements for individual elements and compound elements on page
1745 assume you are going to include contact information in your metadata. A
requirement of mandatory in this context means that it is mandatory if you
are including contact information.
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
Select one of two
choices
cntperpPrimary contact10.1
StringcntperPerson name10.1.1
StringcntorgOrganization10.1.2
StringcntposContact position10.3
Menu choiceaddrtypeAddress type10.4.1
StringaddressAddress10.4.2
StringcityCity10.4.3
StringstateState or province10.4.4
StringpostalPostal code10.4.5
StringcountryCountry10.4.6
StringcntvoiceContact voice
phone
10.5
Contact Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1493
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringcnttddTDD/TTY tele-
phone
10.6
StringcntfaxFacsimile tele-
phone
10.7
StringcntemailE-mail address10.8
StringhoursHours of Service10.9
StringcntinstContact instruc-
tions
10.10
Spatial Data Organization Information Editor (FGDC
Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field. Most of this information is quite robust, with detailed
examples of best practices, and answers to frequently-asked questions.
The Spatial Data Organization Information Editor is accessed from the Metadata
Editor on page 1483. It provides an interface for you to explain which method/s
you used to represent spatial information in the data set, and how the data is
organized. It includes both direct and indirect spatial references. The fields in
the Spatial Data Organization Information Editor accept metadata about the
number and type of objects in your data set, the terminology set you use to
describe the data, and other qualitative and quantitative information about
the nature of the data.
To add records using the Record Navigatormetadata:record navigat-
or;metadata:adding records;records (... on page ?
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
1494 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Spatial Data Organization
The Spatial Data Organization section provides fields to explain how you
describe your data in both direct and indirect terms. Indirect data describes
the location of the spatial data, while direct data tells users how you visually
represented the data in your resource.
Indirect spatial reference
Tells which method/s you used to identify geographic locations, whether
they are formal methods, such as the Geographic Names Index system
(GNIS) place names, Public Land Survey System (PLSS) locations, or Federal
Information Processing System (FIPS) location codes; or less formal methods
such as the name of a county, or a street address. These references do not
include coordinates.
Direct spatial reference method
Select one of the following direct methods used to represent objects:
■Point
■Vector
■Raster
Point and vector object information
The type of vector or non-gridded point objects used in the data set, and
how many there are. If the direct spatial reference method is either Point
or Vector, select whether you use SDTS terms or VPF terms.
If you select either Point or Vector, the following fields are displayed:
■SDTS terms
■VPF terms
■VPF topology level
■Point and vector object type
■Point and vector object count
SDTS Terms/VPF Terms
This field name changes depending upon which terminology set you select.
SDTS terms description
Point or vector information that use terminology and concepts from Spatial
Data Concepts, Part 1, Chapter 2, in Department of Commerce, 1992, Spatial
Data Transfer Standard (SDTS) (Federal Information Processing Standard
173): Washington, Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards
Spatial Data Organization Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1495
and Technology. The reference to the SDTS is used only as a name for the
method used to describe the point and vector objects. This method is
selected by default in the dialog box.
NOTE If you select one of the options, but later decide to select the other, close
the Spatial Data Organization Information Editor and re-open it to reset the
fields.
If you select SDTS terms, complete the following fields:
SDTS point and vector object type
The type of point or vector objects that you use to identify zero-, one-, and
two-dimensional locations in the data set. Select one of the 26 items in the
drop down menu.
Point and vector object count
The number of point or vector objects in your data set.
VPF terms description
If you select VPF terms, complete the following fields as many times as
necessary. Use the Record Navigator to add new fields.
VPF topology level
How completely the topology is represented in the data set. This field
becomes active if you select VPF terms. These levels are defined in the
following publication: Department of Defense, 1992, Vector Product Format
(MIL-STD-600006): Philadelphia, Department of Defense, Defense Printing
Service Detachment Office. The reference to the VPF is used only as a name
for the method used to describe the point and vector objects.
VPF point and vector object type
Select one of the following choices from the drop down menu:
■Node
■Edge
■Face
■Text
This is point or vector information that use the terminology and concepts
defined in: Department of Defense, 1992, Vector Product Format
(MIL-STD-600006): Philadelphia, Department of Defense, Defense Printing
Service Detachment Office.
1496 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
VPF point and vector object count
The number of point or vector objects in your data set.
Raster object information
If you select Raster as the direct spatial reference method, the following
fields are displayed:
■Raster object type
■Row count
■Column count
■Vertical count
This describes the types of raster objects in the data set, and how many
rows and columns they have for flat, rectangular objects; or the number of
objects along the Z-axis (verticals) for three-dimensional, rectangular objects.
Raster object type
Select one of the four items from the drop down menu. This indicates the
type of raster objects that you use to identify zero-, one-, and
two-dimensional locations in the data set.
If the raster data is rectangular (you selected Point, Pixel, or Grid Cell) complete
the following fields:
Row count
The number of object rows along the Y-axis of the raster.
Column count
The number of object rows along the X-axis of the raster.
If the raster data is rectangular and three-dimensional, complete the Vertical
Count field.
Vertical count
The number of objects along the vertical Z-axis.
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringindsprefIndirect spatial
reference
3.1
Menu choicedirectDirect spatial ref-
erence method
3.2
Spatial Data Organization Information Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1497
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
CompoundptvctinfPoint and vector
object informa-
tion
3.3
Menu choicesdtstypeSDTS point and
vector object
type
3.3.1.1
IntegerptvctcntPoint and vector
object count
3.3.1.2
CompoundvpftermVPF terms descrip-
tion
3.3.2
IntegervpflevelVPF topology
level
3.3.2.1
CompoundvpfinfoVPF point and
vector object in-
formation
3.3.2.2
IntegervpftypeVPF point and
vector object
type
3.3.2.2.1
CompoundrastinfoRaster object in-
formation
3.4
StringrasttypeRaster object
type
3.4.1
IntegerrowcountRow count3.4.2
IntegercolcountColumn count3.4.3
IntegervrtcountVertical count3.4.4
1498 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC
Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field. Most of this information is quite robust, with detailed
examples of best practices, and answers to frequently-asked questions.
The Horizontal Coordinate System Definition section is conditional overall.
The requirements for elements and compound elements on page 1745 within
the definition assume that you are going to include it.
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
CompoundhorizsysHorizontal co-
ordinate system
4.1
CompoundgeographGeographic4.1.1
Real numberlatresLatitude resolu-
tion
4.1.1.1
Real numberlongresLongitude resolu-
tion
4.1.1.2
Menu choicegeogunitGeographic co-
ordinate units
4.1.1.3
CompoundplanarPlanar4.1.2
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1499
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
Menu choicemapprojnMap projection
name
4.1.2.1.1
Real numberstdparllStandard parallel4.1.2.1.23.1
Real numberlongcmLongitude of
central meridian
4.1.2.1.23.2
Real numberlatprjoLatitude of projec-
tion origin
4.1.2.1.23.3
Real numberfeastFalse easting4.1.2.1.23.4
Real numberfnorthFalse northing4.1.2.1.23.5
Real numbersfequatScale factor at
equator
4.1.2.1.23.6
Real numberheightptHeight of per-
spective point
above surface
4.1.2.1.23.7
Real numberlongpcLongitude of pro-
jection center
4.1.2.1.23.8
Real numberlatprjcLatitude of projec-
tion center
4.1.2.1.23.9
Real numbersfctrlinScale factor at
center line
4.1.2.1.23.10
CompoundobqlazimOblique line azi-
muth
4.1.2.1.23.11
Real numberazimanglAzimuthal angle4.1.2.1.23.11.1
1500 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
Real numberazimptlAzimuth measure
point longitude
4.1.2.1.23.11.2
CompoundobqlptOblique line
point
4.1.2.1.23.12
Real numberobqllatOblique line latit-
ude
4.1.2.1.23.12.1
Real numberobqllongOblique line lon-
gitude
4.1.2.1.23.12.2
Real numbersvlongStraight vertical
longitude from
pole
4.1.2.1.23.13
Real numbersfprjorgScale factor at
projection origin
4.1.2.1.23.14
IntegerlandsatLandsat number4.1.2.1.23.15
IntegerpathnumPath number4.1.2.1.23.16
Real numbersfctrmerScale factor at
central meridian
4.1.2.1.23.17
CompoundgridsysGrid coordinate
system
4.1.2.2
Menu choicegridsysnGrid coordinate
system name
4.1.2.2.1
CompoundutmUniversal trans-
verse mercator
(UTM)
4.1.2.2.2
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1501
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
IntegerutmzoneUTM zone num-
ber
4.1.2.2.2.1
CompoundupsUniversal polar
stereographic
(UPS)
4.1.2.2.2.3
Menu choiceupszoneUPS zone identifi-
er
4.1.2.2.2.3.1
CompoundspcsState plane co-
ordinate system
(SPCS)
4.1.2.2.4
StringspcszoneSPCS zone identi-
fier
4.1.2.2.4.1
CompoundarcsysARC coordinate
system
4.1.2.2.5
IntegerarczoneARC system zone
identifier
4.1.2.2.5.1
StringothergrdOther grid sys-
tem’s definition
4.1.2.2.6
CompoundlocalpLocal planar4.1.2.3
StringlocalpdLocal planar de-
scription
4.1.2.3.1
StringlocalpgiLocal planar
georeference in-
formation
4.1.2.3.2
CompoundplanciPlanar coordinate
information
4.1.2.4
1502 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
Choose one of
three
plancePlanar coordinate
encoding meth-
od
4.1.2.4.1
CompoundcoordrepCoordinate pair4.1.2.4.2
Real numberabsresAbscissa resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.2.1
Real numberordresOrdinate resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.2.2
Real numberdistbrepDistance and
bearing
4.1.2.4.3
Real numberdistresDistance resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.3.1
Real numberbearresBearing resolu-
tion
4.1.2.4.3.2
Menu choicebearunitBearing units4.1.2.4.3.3
Menu choicebearrefdBearing reference
direction
4.1.2.4.3.4
Menu choicebearrefmBearing reference
meridian
4.1.2.4.3.5
Menu choiceplanduPlanar distance
units
4.1.2.4.4.
CompoundlocalLocal4.1.3
StringlocaldesLocal description4.1.3.1
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1503
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringlocalgeoLocal georefer-
ence information
4.1.3.2
CompoundgeodeticGeodetic model4.1.4
Menu choicehorizdnHorizontal datum
name
4.1.4.1
Menu choiceellipsEllipsoid name4.1.4.2
Real numbersemiaxisSemi-major axis4.1.4.3
Real numberdenflatDenominator of
flattening ratio
4.1.4.4
Attribute Domain Values Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field. Most of this information is quite robust, with detailed
examples of best practices, and answers to frequently-asked questions.
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
Choose one of
four
attrdomvAttribute domain
values
5.1.2.4
1504 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
CompoundedomEnumerated do-
main
5.1.2.4.1
StringedomvEnumerated do-
main value
5.1.2.4.1.1
StringedomvdEnumerated do-
main value defini-
tion
5.1.2.4.1.2
StringedomvdsEnumerated do-
main value defini-
tion source
5.1.2.4.1.3
CompoundrdomRange domain5.1.2.4.2
StringrdomminRange domain
minimum
5.1.2.4.2.1
StringrdommaxRange domain
maximum
5.1.2.4.2.2
StringattrunitAttribute units of
measure
5.1.2.4.2.3
RealattrmresAttribute meas-
urement resolu-
tion
5.1.2.4.2.4
CompoundcodesetdCodeset domain5.1.2.4.3
StringcodestnCodeset name5.1.2.4.3.1
StringcodesetsCodeset resource5.1.2.4.3.2
Attribute Domain Values Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1505
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringudomUnrepresentable
domain
5.1.2.4.4
Standard Order Process Editor (FGDC Metadata)
NOTE Information about each field is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box
when you click in the field. Most of this information is quite robust, with detailed
examples of best practices, and answers to frequently-asked questions.
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringfeesFees6.4.3
StringorderingOrdering instruc-
tions
6.4.4
StringturnaroundTurnaround6.4.5
Choose one of
two
stdorderStandard order
process
6.4
StringnondigNon-digital form
option
6.4.1
Menu choiceformnameFormat name6.4.2.1.1
1506 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringformspecSpecification6.4.2.1.4
StringformvernFormat version
number
6.4.2.1.2
DateformverdFormat version
date
6.4.2.1.3
Real numbertransizeTransfer size6.4.2.1.7
CompoundonlinoptOnline option
collection
6.4.2.2.1
Choose one of
two
computerComputer con-
tact information
6.4.2.2.1.1
CompoundnetworkaNetwork address6.4.2.2.1.1.1
StringnetworkrNetwork resource
name
6.4.2.2.1.1.1.1
CompounddialinstDialup instruc-
tions
6.4.2.2.1.2
IntegerlowbpsLowest bps6.4.2.2.1.1.2.1
IntegerhighbpsHighest bps6.4.2.2.1.1.2.2
IntegernumdataNumber databits6.4.2.2.1.2.3
IntegernumstopNumber stopbits6.4.2.2.1.1.2.4
Menu choiceparityParity6.4.2.2.1.1.2.5
Menu choicecompressCompression
support
6.4.2.2.1.1.2.6
Standard Order Process Editor (FGDC Metadata) | 1507
Data TypeShort NameField TitleFGDC Field ID
StringdialtelDialup telephone6.4.2.2.1.1.2.7
StringdialfileDialup file name6.4.2.2.1.1.2.8
StringaccinstrAccess instruc-
tions
6.4.2.2.1.2
StringoncompOnline computer
and operating
system
6.4.2.2.1.3
CompoundoffoptnOffline option
collection
6.4.2.2.2
Menu choiceoffmediaOffline media6.4.2.2.2.1
Real numberrecdenRecording dens-
ity
6.4.2.2.2.2.1
StringrecdenuRecording dens-
ity units
6.4.2.2.2.2.2
StringrecfmtRecording format6.4.2.2.2.3
StringcompatCompatibility in-
formation
6.4.2.2.2.4
Responsible Party Editor (ISO Metadata)
Allows you to enter metadata for the Responsible Party compound element.
Related procedures:
■To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
1508 | Chapter 27 Metadata Dialog Boxes
The Citation Editor (ISO Metadata)
Allows you to enter metadata for the Citation compound element
To edit a compound metadata element on page 1246
In the Display Manager, select a layer. Click Tools ➤ View Metadata.
The Citation Editor (ISO Metadata) | 1509
1510
Object Classification
Dialog Boxes
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED (Select Classified Objects
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to select all objects that have been classified with specific
object classes.
To select objects in your current map, based on their object class on page 847
Click Edit ➤ Select Classified Objects.
Respond to the prompts:
Select objects
Do one of the following:
■Press Enter to select all classified objects.
■Enter the name of the object class whose objects you want to select. You
can use wildcards to select multiple object classes. For example, enter r*
28
1511
to specify all object classes whose name begins with "r". For more
information on using wildcards, see Wildcard Characters on page 1278.
Objects classified with the specified object classes are selected.
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED (Select Unclassified Objects
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to select all objects that have not been classified.
To select objects in your current map, based on their object class on page 847
Click Edit ➤ Select Unclassified Objects.
Unclassified objects are selected.
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED (Select Undefined Objects
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to select all objects that have been classified, but whose
object class definition is not included in the object class definition file attached
to the drawing.
To select objects in your current map, based on their object class on page 847
1512 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Click Edit ➤ Select Undefined Objects.
An object can be classified but not included in the object class definition file
attached to the drawing if you classify the objects using one object class
definition file, and then attach a different object class definition file that does
not include a definition for this object class.
Undefined objects are selected.
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
The object class definition file includes the set of object classes you will use
with this drawing.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the file that you want to insert on the command line.
For more information, see the AutoCAD help.
To attach an object class definition file on page 849
To use object classification on page 836
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Attach Definition File.
Look In
Select the drive and folder that contains the object class definition file.
File Name
Type or select the name of the object class definition file.
Files Of Type
Leave this set to Object Definition File.
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog box | 1513
Classified Property List dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to review the properties included in this object class
definition and the settings for those properties.
To define an object class on page 112
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
To change any settings, return to the Define Object Classification dialog box
and select the property you want to edit.
Classify dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Assign an object class to selected objects.
To assign an object class to an existing object on page 843
To create a classified drawing object on page 842
Click Create ➤ Classify Objects.
Classification Name
Lists the object classes and the object types to which they can be assigned.
Select the object class you want to assign to the objects.
Include Objects...
Classifies objects even if their property values do not meet the classification
rules for this object. Property values that are out of range will be reset to
1514 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
the default value for the property. If you clear this option, objects with
out-of-range values are not classified.
Exclude Objects...
Does not classify objects that have another object class already assigned. If
you clear this option, the existing object class is removed and the new one
is assigned.
Classify Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Apply the specified object class to the selected objects.
To assign an object class to an existing object on page 843
To create a classified drawing object on page 842
In Map Explorer, under Current Drawing, right-click an object class ➤ Create
Classified Object.
Include Objects...
Classifies objects even if their property values do not meet the classification
rules for this object class. If you clear this option, objects with out-of-range
values are not classified.
Exclude Objects...
Does not classify objects that have another object class already assigned. If
you clear this option, the existing object class is removed and the new one
is assigned.
Color Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Classify Objects dialog box | 1515
Use this dialog box to specify which colors to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property on page 116
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
Click Add below the List Of Colors following your selection. All colors listed
in the List Of Colors are valid colors for this object class.
Color Range
Allow Any Color
Accepts any color as valid for this object class.
Add A Specific Color
Adds a specific color to the List Of Colors.
In the Color list, select the color to include, or choose Select Color to display
the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an index color, a true
color, or a color book color.
Add A Range Of Colors
Adds a range of colors to the List Of Colors.
In the First Color list, select the color at the beginning of the range. In the
Last Color list, select the color at the end of the range.
All colors whose index color number falls between the two selected colors
are considered valid for this object class.
List Of Colors
Lists the colors currently included in the object class.
■To delete a color from the list, select the color and click Remove.
■To add a color to the list, choose Add A Specific Color or Add A Range
Of Colors, and select the colors you want to add.
■To modify a color in the list, select the color in the list, choose Add A
Specific Color or Add A Range Of Colors, and select the colors you want
to add. Click Update.
1516 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Define Object Classification dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create a new object class definition or edit an existing
definition.
To define an object class on page 112
To set up object classificationobject classification:setting upCreate a sample
object that has all t... on page ?
To attach an object class definition file on page 849
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
The new object class definition is added to the current object class definition
file. Users can use these object class definitions to create objects that
automatically have the properties you define in this dialog box.
Class Name
Specifies the name for the object class. The name can include spaces, and
is not case sensitive.
Description
Specifies the description for the object class.
Based On
Specifies that this object class will be based on an existing object class
definition. All of the settings for the base object class are automatically
included in this object class definition, and if you modify the base class,
the modifications are included in this object class definition. You can add
additional settings to this object class definition.
To select a base class, the base class must have the same create method as
the class you are defining.
Use As Base Object Classification Only
Specifies that the current class can be used only as a base class. You will not
be able to create an object using this object class.
The dialog box has the following tabs:
Applies To on page 1518
Define Object Classification dialog box | 1517
Properties List on page 1518
Class Settings on page 1520
Feature Source Settings on page 1520
Applies To
Object Types
Specifies the object types that may be tagged with this definition. Available
object types are determined by the base class, if there is one, and the selected
example objects.
TIP Select the most specific object type that applies to all objects in this object
class. For example, if all the objects will be circles, select AcDbCircle.
Properties List
Available Properties
Specifies the properties that will apply to all objects created with this object
class. Available properties are based on the objects selected in the drawing,
the base class, if one is selected, and the object types selected on the Applies
To tab.
(Note that if no properties appear, you need to first select an object type
on the Applies To tab.)
Select a check box to include the property in the object class. Highlight a
property to view or change its attribute values.
If this object class is based on another object class, you cannot clear a check
box for a property that is assigned in the "based on" class.
Property Attributes
Specifies the settings for each property.
To change the value for Type, Range, Default, Visible, or Read Only, click on
the value.
Type
For properties that you've created, set the data type. Specify Integer, Real,
Text String, 3D Point, or Yes/No. For other properties, the type is set
automatically and can't be changed. (For information on creating a new
property, see New Property on page ? below.)
Range
Specify the allowable values for this property. This allowable range is used
in the following situations:
■When users classify an existing object with this object class definition.
1518 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
■When users use the Object Class tab of the Properties palette to edit
property values for an object classified with this object class definition.
In each case, the value for the property must fall within this range.
For many properties, such as color, lineweight, line type, plot style, and
layer, you can select from a list of available values. To display the list, click
on the value you want to change. Click [...] to display a dialog where you
can specify the range.
When specifying the range values, keep these points in mind:
■To enter a list of values for the range, separate each value with a comma,
for example, 15,25,35, or Paved,Gravel,Dirt. To enter a continuous range,
use square brackets around the first and last value, for example, [2,8].
■When specifying integers, you can specify values between -2147483628
and +2147483627 (32-bit signed integer).
■To specify a lineweight, enter the decimals as integers. For example, to
specify a lineweight of 0.13, enter 13.
■To delete a range, enter two dashes ( "--" ).
Default
The default is used when an object has a value assigned that is out of the
range. This can happen if the value is assigned before the object is classified
or if the object is edited outside the Object Class tab. As soon as the object
is selected when the Object Class tab is active, the value will be reset to the
default.
When specifying the default for properties such as color, lineweight, line
type, plot style, and layer, you can select from a list of available values. To
display the list, click on the value you want to change. Click the down
arrow to display a list of available value, or click [...] to see additional choices.
Visible
Specify whether the property should appear on the Object Class tab of the
Properties palette. You may want to turn visibility off if you want a property
set to a single value that users can't edit. In this case, set both the range and
the default to the same value.
Read Only
Controls whether the property of a classified object is editable on the Object
Class tab. If this is set to Yes, the value is displayed in gray.
To view attribute settings for all selected properties, click Show List.
Define Object Classification dialog box | 1519
New Property
Displays the New Property dialog box on page 1523, where you can add a new
property to the Available Properties list.
The new property appears in the Properties palette and can be edited in the
same way as other properties.
Show List
Displays the Classified Property List dialog box on page 1514, which lists all
the selected properties and their attribute settings. This is a convenient way
to check your properties before you save the definition.
Class Settings
Show Object Class In Map Explorer
Displays the object class name in Map Explorer. When this option is cleared,
this object class name is hidden in Map Explorer.
Class Icon
Selects the bitmap to use for this object class in Map Explorer.
Be sure the location you specify is available to everyone who will use this
object class definition file. If you store the object class definition file on the
network, it's a good idea to store the bitmaps in the same location.
Use Standard Icon
Displays the standard icon for the object class in Map Explorer. When this
option is cleared, you can choose the icon you want to display.
Create Method
Specifies the object to create when creating a new object in this object class.
You can select only objects that are appropriate for the object type you
selected on the Applies To tab.
Select None if you don't want to specify a create method for this object
class. This is useful for base classes, where each subclass may specify a
different create method.
In the Geometric Settings table, specify any additional parameters to set
when creating objects in this object class.
Feature Source Settings
Specify how to treat linked data when you add an object to a feature source.
Move my linked data to Feature Source
When you add an object with linked data to a feature source, the data from
the linked data source is copied to the feature source.
1520 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Keep my data linked in Feature Source
When you add an object with linked data to a feature source, the link is
copied to the feature source.
Layer Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which AutoCAD layers to allow for this object
class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property on page 116
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
You can choose from a list of all AutoCAD layers in the current drawing.
Layer Range
Allow Any Layer
Accepts any AutoCAD layer as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Layers
Accepts only specific AutoCAD layers for this object class. In the Layer list,
select the AutoCAD layers to include.
Linetype Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which linetypes to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property on page 116
Layer Range Editor dialog box | 1521
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
You can choose from a list of all linetypes in the current drawing.
Linetype Range
Allow Any Linetype
Accepts any linetype as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Linetypes
Accepts only specific linetypes for this object class. In the Linetype list,
select the linetypes to include.
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which lineweights to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property on page 116
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
Lineweight Range
Allow Any Lineweight
Accepts any lineweight as valid for this object class.
Choose Specific Lineweights
Accepts only specific lineweights for this object class. In the Lineweight
list, select the lineweights to include.
1522 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
New Object Class Definition File dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create an object definition file.
To create a new object classification file on page 120
To set up object classification on page 109
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ New Definition File.
The object class definition file includes information on how to create each of
the object classes you've defined. Only definitions in the object class definition
file attached to a drawing can be assigned to objects in the drawing or used
to create new objects.
NOTE To create a new object class definition file, you must have Alter Object
Class privileges on page 75.
Look In
Select the drive and folder where you want to store the object class definition
file.
File Name
Type a name for the new object class definition file.
Files Of Type
Leave this set to Object Definition File.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the object class definition file that you want to create
on the command line. For more information, see the AutoCAD help.
New Property dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
New Object Class Definition File dialog box | 1523
Use this dialog box to create a new property for the object class.
To define an object class on page 112
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
Property Heading Category
Specify a category for the new property.
Property Name
Specify a name for the new property.
When you close this dialog box, the new property will appear in the Properties
List of the Define Object Classification dialog box. If you add this new property
to the current object class definition file, the property will appear on the
Object Class tab of the Properties palette.
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify which plotstyles to allow for this object class.
To specify a default value and a range for a property on page 116
Click Setup ➤ Classification Tools ➤ Define Object Class.
You can choose from a list of all plotstyles in the current drawing.
Plotstyle Range
Allow Any Plotstyle
Accepts any plotstyle as valid for this object class.
1524 | Chapter 28 Object Classification Dialog Boxes
Choose Specific Plotstyles
Accepts only specific plotstyles for this object class. In the plotstyle list,
select the plotstyles to include.
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box | 1525
1526
Object Data Dialog
Boxes
Attach Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Use this dialog box to view the fields in the table and to view or edit the values
for those fields.
To attach data to an object on page 876
Click Create ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data.
■The Object Data Field area lists the fields in the table and the values for those
fields. To change any value, highlight the value, type the new value in the
Value box, and press Enter. When you finish updating values, click OK.
29
1527
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Use this dialog box to add data to an object data table and attach that data to
an object, or to detach existing data from an object.
To attach data to an object on page 876
Click Create ➤ Attach/Detach Object Data.
Table
Lists all the tables in the current drawing. Select the table containing the
data fields to attach.
Object Data Field
Lists all the data fields in the selected table and the current value for each
field.
Note that if two attached drawings have a table with the same name,
AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing
you activate.
To change the value to attach, highlight the field and type a new value in
the Value box.
Value
Displays the default value for the selected field.
To specify a different value, type a new value in the box.
Attach to Objects <
Returns to your map, where you can select the objects to attach the data
to.
Detach from Objects
Returns to your map, where you can select the objects to detach.
All data from the selected table is removed from the objects.
1528 | Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes
Overwrite
Overwrites any existing values for this table with the new values.
If the box is not selected, the object will have two values assigned for the
data fields in the table.
Select the box when you want only one set of values attached to the object,
as when specifying a pipe diameter or a desk height. Deselect the box if you
want the object to have multiple sets of values assigned to it, as when
specifying software installed on a computer or types of plants in a landscape
section.
Define
Displays the Define Object Data dialog box, where you can create new tables
or modify existing tables.
To attach data to an object, select a table and review or change the default
values. Click Attach To Objects <. When you finish selecting objects in your
drawing, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a record for each object and attaches the
records to the objects.
If you selected Overwrite, the new record replaces any existing record from
this table. If you don't select Overwrite, the object can have more than one
record from the table.
To detach data, select a table. Click Detach From Objects. When you return
to your map, select all the objects you want to detach the data from.
Edit Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Use this dialog box to view and edit object data.
To modify an object data table on page 182
Edit Object Data dialog box | 1529
Click Setup ➤ Define Object Data.
■To view data from a different table, select the table from the list.
■To view data for a different object, click Select Object <.
■To change a value, enter a new value in the box and press Enter. You must
have Edit Drawing privileges to edit object data. See User Administration
dialog box on page 1653
Table
Lists all tables that have data attached to the selected object.
Select a table to view or edit.
Object Data Field/Value
Displays the field values for the selected object.
If the object has more than one record from the selected table, use Next,
Prior, First, and Last to view the other records.
Nested Data
Determines whether the values displayed are for the nested object, or only
for its parent object.
■If the box is selected, the Object Data Field/Value list shows information
for just the selected object.
■If the box is not selected, the Object Data Field/Value list shows
information for the parent object. If the object has more than one parent
object, select one from the list.
Value
Displays the current value for the selected field.
To change the value, enter a new value in the box and press Enter.
Select Object <
To view and edit data for another object, click Select Object < , and select
a new object.
Insert Record
Attach a new record from this table to the object. The record contains the
current values for each field.
1530 | Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes
Delete Record
Remove the record from the object.
Rename Table dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Use this dialog box to rename the selected table.
To modify an object data table on page 182
Click Setup ➤ Define Object Data.
The table name cannot include spaces.
Before you rename a table:
■All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the table will not be renamed for
that drawing.
■Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened the
current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source drawings
or close the current drawing and reopen it.
If you change a table name, be sure to update any queries that reference the
table.
Select Link Template Key dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to attribute data that you use with drawing
objects. It does not apply to a feature source or to attribute data you use with a
feature source.
Rename Table dialog box | 1531
Use this dialog box to select the fields from the current object data table to
use as key fields in the database table.
To open a linked database table on page 456
Click Edit ➤ More External Record Options ➤ View Linked Table.
Method area
Select the method for setting key fields.
Reference Existing Fields
Use existing fields as key fields.
If you select this option, select the fields to use in the Existing Fields area.
Generate Key Field
Create a new field to use as the key field.
If you select this option, specify a name for the field in the Generate Key
area. When the database table is created, this field will contain a unique
number for each record.
Existing Fields area
If you select Reference Existing Fields, select the fields to use as key fields.
■To specify a key field, select the field and click On.
■To deselect a key field, select the field and click Off.
■To change the name of a field, select the field, type a new name in the
Rename box. Click Rename.
Generate Key area
If you select Generate Key Field, specify a name for the new field. The name
must be different from other fields in the table.
1532 | Chapter 29 Object Data Dialog Boxes
Other Dialog Boxes
ADETEXTLOC (Map Labelpoint Location command)
Use this command to specify a new label point for an object.
An object's label point is used as the reference point when you add text to an
object during property alteration. By default, the label point is the centroid of
the object. Use this command to specify a different label point.
Respond to the prompts:
Select object:
Use any object selection method.
Pick new text location <X,Y>:
Enter new X and Y coordinates, separated by a comma.
To use this label point when inserting text during a property alteration, choose
LABELPT from the Insert Point list in the Define Text dialog box.
AutoCAD Map Messages dialog box
This dialog box displays information and error messages.
To view additional information about a message, select the message and click
Show Log File.
The dialog box has the following windows:
Messages
Briefly explains the error.
30
1533
Message details
Displays additional details about the error, and the code associated with it.
Browse/Search dialog box
Use this dialog box to display preview images of drawings, open drawings,
and search for files. Use the browser to search for files across multiple
directories on a single drive or on multiple drives.
The Browse tab displays small bitmap images of drawings in the specified
directory. You can sort the preview images by file type.
Browse tab
File Name
Displays the name of the currently selected drawing.
Directories
Displays the names of the directories on the current drive.
Drives
Displays the names of the available drives.
List Files of Type
Specifies file types to browse for, including drawing files (DWG), drawing
interchange format files (DXF), and drawing template files (DWT).
Size
Changes the size of the preview images. The options are Small, Medium,
and Large.
Network
Displays the Map Network Drive dialog box (a Windows system window)
for connecting to networked drives
Search tab
Files
Displays a list of files that meet the search criteria.
Search Pattern
Specifies a pattern to search for in file name, based on file type. For example,
you can enter floor* to search for all files that begin with "floor" and are of
the file type specified.
1534 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
This option handles wild-card characters in the following way: if the search
string does not contain path separators, the search attempts to match either
the full path or just the file name portion of the path.
File Types
Specifies the types of files for which the system searches.
Date Filter
Controls whether the system searches forward or backward from the specified
time or date.
Time
Specifies the time from which the system searches forward or backward.
Date
Specifies the date from which the system searches. The specified date must
be 1/1/80 or later
Search Location
Specifies which drives and paths the system searches.
Drive
Lists all currently attached drives.
All Drives
Lists all local hard drives, including removable and network drives.
Path
Lists directories.
Open
Opens the selected file.
Search
Begins searching for the named file according to the search location
information. Changes to Stop Search once the search begins.
Create Centroids dialog box
Use the Create Centroids dialog box to create centroids in the middle of
selected closed polylines or polygons, and move any object data or SQL link
data from the closed object to the centroid.
Create Centroids dialog box | 1535
When you use this feature, AutoCAD Map 3D checks that the selected polygons
and closed polylines are clean; that is, that the lines do not intersect each
other, and that the closed object has an area greater than 0. Centroids are
created with a Z value of 0.
If the closed object has holes, the centroid will be placed in the center of the
enclosed area, regardless of whether it falls within a hole or not. For a 'figure
eight' polygon, AutoCAD Map 3D will create one centroid.
Create Centroids In
Select the polylines or polygons for which you want to create centroids.
All Closed Objects
Create centroids for all polygons and closed polylines.
Selected Only
Create centroids only for selected polygons and polylines. Click Select
Objects or Quick Select to select the polylines and polygons.
Creation Options
Specify where to create the centroids and what point or block to use for
centroids.
Create on Layer
Specify the layer for the new centroids. Click the down arrow to select from
a list of layers in the drawing. If the layer you want is not listed, it may be
frozen or locked. To create the centroids on a new layer, click Create On
Layer.
Create Using
To create centriods as points, select ACAD_POINT. To create centroids using
an existing block, click the down arrow and select the name of the block.
Related procedures:
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 749
Data Expression dialog box
Select a data location.
1536 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Attribute
To use data in an attribute, select Attribute. Select the attribute from the
Attributes list. To view attributes in a different block, select the block from
the Blocks list.
Object Data
To use data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select the field from
the Object Data Fields list. To view fields in a different table, select the table
from the Tables list.
Database Link
To use data in link data stored on an object, select Database Link. Select the
column from the Key Columns list. To view columns in a different link
template, select the link template from the list.
Define New Object Data Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new object data table or to modify an existing
table.
■To add a data field, enter a new Field Name in the Field Definition section.
Enter the information for the new data field. When you finish, click Add.
■To edit an existing field, select it from the Object Data Fields list. Edit the
information in the Field Definition section. When you finish, click Update.
Table Name
If you are modifying an existing table, the name of the table appears in the
box.
If you are creating a new table, enter a name for the table. A table name
cannot include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric character.
NOTE Do not use a table name that is already used in another drawing, unless
this table will have the same field definitions as that table. If two source drawings
have tables with the same name but different definitions, AutoCAD Map 3D
uses the table definition in the first drawing that is activated, and data from the
second table is not available.
Object Data Fields
Use the Object Data Fields area to select a data field to update or to delete
a field.
The Object Data Fields list displays all data fields in the selected table.
Define New Object Data Table dialog box | 1537
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
■To edit a data field, select its name in the list. Information about the
field appears in the Field Definition section. Change any information.
Click Update.
■To delete a field, select its name in the list. Click Delete.
■To delete all the fields in the list, click Delete All.
Field Definition
Use the Field Definition area to change information about an existing field
or to specify information for a new field.
To change information about an existing field, select its name in the Object
Data Fields list. Information about the field appears in the Field Definition
area. Change any information. Click Update.
To add a new field, enter a new name in the Field Name box. Enter information
about the field. Click Add.
NOTE Before you add a field to an existing object data table, be sure all drawings
that use this table are attached and active. Objects in active drawings are
automatically updated to include the new field and are assigned the default value
for the field. If an object that uses this table is not in an active drawing when the
table is modified, the data attached to the object is not modified.
Field Name
Enter a name for the data field.
The name cannot contain any spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character.
Type
Select a data type.
Integer
An integer between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647
Character
Any characters, up to 132 characters
Point
Three real numbers separated by commas representing the X, Y, and Z values
of a point
1538 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Real
A real number between -1.7E308 and 1.7E308
If you select Integer, numbers are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Description
Enter a description for the data field.
This description appears in the Object Data Fields list.
Default
Specify a default value for the data field.
The value must match the data type you selected above.
Enter the value you will use most often when you assign this data field to
an object.
Before you modify a table
■All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the table definition will not be
updated for that drawing. If two source drawings have tables with the
same name but different definitions, this operation affects the table
definition in the first drawing that is activated, and data from the second
table is not available.
■Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened
the current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source
drawings or close the current drawing and reopen it.
You can modify newly defined tables until you perform a save operation
(either saving objects back to source drawings or saving the current drawing).
Once you perform a save operation, the table can be modified only by a
Superuser. Use the User Login dialog box on page 1656 command to log in as a
Superuser, or contact your system administrator.
Related procedures:
■To create an object data table on page 180
Define Object Data dialog box
Use this dialog box to create object data tables and data fields. Object data
tables store information about the objects in your drawings.
Define Object Data dialog box | 1539
Create an object data table by entering a name for the table and defining the
fields in the table.
Table list
Lists all tables in the current drawing.
To view the object data fields in a table, select the table name from the list.
Object Data Fields
Lists the fields in the selected table.
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD
Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
To view Field Definition information for a field, select the field.
Field Definition
Displays the values for the selected field.
Field Name
displays the name of the field.
Data Type
displays the type of information that can be entered in the field.
Description
displays the description assigned to the field.
Default
displays the default value assigned to the field.
To change any values, click Modify.
New Table
Display the Define Object Data Table dialog box, where you can create a
new table and define new object data fields.
Modify
Display the Modify Object Data Table dialog box, where you can modify
the selected table and define or delete object data fields.
You can modify newly defined tables until you perform a save operation
(either saving objects back to source drawings or saving the current drawing).
Once you perform a save operation, the table can be modified only by a
Superuser. Use the MAPLOGIN command to log in as a Superuser, or contact
your system administrator.
Rename
Display the Rename Table dialog box, where you can enter a new name for
the selected table.
1540 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
NOTE If you rename a table, be sure to update any queries that call that table.
Delete
Delete the selected table.
NOTE If any data from this table is attached to objects, the data is deleted
from those objects when you remove the table.
Before you delete a table
■All source drawings that use the table should be attached and active.
If a drawing is not attached and active, the object data from the table
is not removed from that drawing.
■Do not perform a Draw mode query.
If you have already performed a Draw mode query since you opened the
current drawing, you must save the objects back to their source drawings
or close the current drawing and reopen it.
This dialog box displays information about the tables in your drawing.
Some of the tables on this list contain information that AutoCAD Map 3D
needs. If you select one of these needed tables, you cannot change the
information or remove or rename the table. You can view the information.
Related procedures:
■To create an object data table on page 180
Generate Data Links dialog box
If you have text in your drawing that matches information in a table, use this
dialog to automatically create links based on the matched information. You
can create links to an external database table or to an object data table stored
with the current drawing.
Select a linkage type. Set options for that type. After you click OK, you are
prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks, or enclosed text.
NOTE You cannot create links to objects on layers that are locked, frozen, or
turned off.
Generate Data Links dialog box | 1541
Block
If you are creating links to blocks or enclosed blocks, select the name of the
block.
Keys and Tags
For each key field in the link template, select a tag from the block attribute.
You can assign a tag to only one key field. (If you are creating links to
enclosed text, skip this step.)
Use Insertion Point as Label Point
Select to use the insertion point of the text or block as the default label
point for the object.
Table/Link Template
Select the table or the link template for the database table containing the
matching data. The complete record is linked to the object.
■If you link data from blocks or enclosed blocks to an object data table,
the attribute data is linked only if attribute tags match field names in
the table.
■If you link data from blocks or enclosed blocks to an external table, use
the Data Links area to specify which attribute tags correspond to the
key fields.
■If you link data to text or enclosed text, you must select a table with
only one field or a link template with only one key field. The remaining
controls are grouped in the following areas:
Data Links
Specify whether you are linking to object data or an external database.
Create Object Data Records
Create records in an object data table stored with the current drawing. These
new records are attached to the objects.
Create Database Links
Create links to an external database table. Select a Database Validation
option to specify whether to link only to existing records or to create new
records.
Linkage Type
Select a linkage type.
After you click OK, you are prompted to select the blocks, text, enclosed blocks,
or enclosed text.
1542 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Blocks
Create links from block attribute data. The links are created on the blocks
themselves.
Text
Create links from text. The link data is stored on the text object.
Enclosed Blocks
Create links from block attribute data. The links are created on the polyline
that encloses the block. Blocks that are not enclosed by a polyline are not
linked.
Enclosed Text
Create links from text that lies within a closed polyline. The links are created
on the closed polyline that encloses the text. Text that is not enclosed by
a polyline is not linked.
Database Validation
If you are creating links to an external table, select a validation option.
None
Create links without checking the database.
Link Must Exist
Create a link only where the text or attribute tag value matches an existing
record's key field value. If you are creating links to an Excel spreadsheet,
the selected link template must point to a named range and not to a
worksheet.
Create If New
Create a new record in the table if no existing record matches. The new
record will have the key field values filled in, but other fields will be blank.
Related procedures:
■To automatically attach data to objects on page 878
■To automatically link records to objects using text or block attribute data
on page 460
New Layer dialog box
The new layer name may not contain any of the following characters.
New Layer dialog box | 1543
< > / \ : ? * | , = " ` "
Related procedures:
■To import SDF 2 files on page 326
■To create centroids for polygons and closed polylines on page 749
Select dialog box
■To select an item, click on the item.
■To select a group of items, click on the first one. Hold down the Shift key
while you click on the last one.
■To select additional items, hold down the Ctrl key while you click on each
item.
When you finish selecting items, click OK.
Select Block dialog box
Click on the block to select it.
Click OK.
Select Blocks dialog box
Select the blocks you want by clicking on them.
When you finish selecting blocks, click OK.
Select Data dialog box - Query
This dialog box lists data in the current drawing. Select the type of data to
include:
1544 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Attribute
The Attribute Tags list displays the attributes for the current block. To see
the attribute tags for a different block, select the block from the Block list.
Object Data
The Object Data Fields list displays the data fields for the current table. To
see the fields for a different table, select the table from the Table list.
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name, AutoCAD
Map 3D uses only the fields defined in the first drawing you activate.
Database Link
The Key Columns list displays the key columns for the current link template.
To see the key columns for a different link template, select the link template
from the link template list.
Select the data value and click OK.
Related procedures:
■To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Select dialog box
Select from the list of available values.
Some types of values are available only if they are in an active drawing.
Related procedures:
■To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties on page 1030
■To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click on page 424
■To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Select Drawings to Attach dialog box
Use this dialog box to add source drawings to your current drawing set.
Select the file names of drawings to attach. Click Add. You can change the
drive or folder and continue to add files to the Selected Drawings list. When
you finish, click OK.
Select dialog box | 1545
Look In
Select a drive alias from the list. AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for
drive C. You must create drive aliases for all other drives that you use.
If the drive or folder you want is not listed, click Create/Edit Aliases
to display the Drive Alias Administration dialog box where you define a
new drive alias.
To open a preview window that displays a preview of the selected
drawing, click Preview. In some instances, such as if a drawing is locked,
the Preview window is blank.
File List
Lists all drawings in the current directory.
Filter
Use wild-card characters to filter the display of file names. For example,
enter t* to view only file names starting with the letter t.
Add
Add the selected drawing names to the Selected Drawings list.
Remove
Remove the selected drawing names from the Selected Drawings list.
Selected Drawings
To use these drawings, click OK.
You must have Alter Drawing Set privileges to attach and detach drawings.
Change privileges using the User Administration dialog box on page 1653.
Related procedures:
■Attaching Drawings on page 144
Select Feature Classes dialog box
Select the feature classes you want by clicking on them.
When you finish selecting feature classes, click OK.
1546 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
Select Features dialog box
Select the features you want by clicking on them.
When you finish selecting features, click OK.
Select Layer dialog box
Select the layer you want by clicking on it
Click OK.
Select Layers dialog box
Select the layers you want by clicking on them.
Select Property dialog box
Select the property and click OK.
Related procedures:
■To alter retrieved objects based on their properties on page 1050
Select SQL Column dialog box
To see the columns for a different link template, select the link template from
the list.
Select the column you want and click OK.
Select Features dialog box | 1547
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT: Object Data)
This dialog box was used to select an object data table from the list of all object
data tables in the current drawing during an import procedure. It has been
discontinued. Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
■Related procedure:
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
■Related command:
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
Select Table Dialog Box (MAPIMPORT: Database Table)
This dialog box was used to select a database table from the list of all tables
in the current drawing during an import procedure. It has been discontinued.
Instead, use one of the following procedures or commands.
■Related procedure:
To import data from other formats on page 318
To import from Arc/INFO on page 332
To import from MapInfo MIF/MID on page 337
To import SHP data on page 334
■Related command:
Click File ➤ Create DWG From ➤ Map 3D Import.
SQL Expression dialog box
Select a column in an external database.
To see columns from a different database table, select the link template for
the table from the Link Templates list.
In most cases, the Link Template list includes only link templates for active
source drawings. If the link template you want is not listed, be sure it is defined
1548 | Chapter 30 Other Dialog Boxes
in the source drawing, and the appropriate data source is attached and
connected.
If you are using a command that involves topology, the Link Template list
includes only link templates for the drawing where the topology is loaded. If
you loaded the topology from source drawings, the list displays link templates
defined in the source drawing; if you loaded the topology from the current
drawing, the list displays link templates in the current drawing.
SQL Expression dialog box | 1549
1550
Polygon Object Dialog
Boxes
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON (Convert Polylines to
Polygons command)
Use this command to convert an existing closed polyline to a polygon.
To convert polylines to polygons on page 826
Respond to the prompts:
Select objects:
Select the polylines to convert. Press Enter.
Each closed polyline in the selection set is converted into a polygon. If the
polyline belongs to a group, only the first (outermost) polyline in the group is
converted. Other polylines in the group are copied into the polygon as additional
boundaries. The polygon is automatically rebalanced.
When objects are converted to polygons, they use the default color or hatch
set by the To change the default setting for importing polygons on page 833.
31
1551
MAPUSEMPOLYGON
Use this command to change the default setting for how polygon are imported.
To change the default setting for importing polygons on page 833
Respond to the prompts:
Enter new value for MAPUSEMPOLYGON:
Do one of the following:
■Enter ON to turn on the use of mpolygons. Polygons imported into
AutoCAD Map 3D are created using the polygon object.
■Enter OFF to turn off the use of mpolygons. Polygons imported into
AutoCAD Map 3D are creating using the polyline object.
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command)
Use this command to modify a polygon object.
To add boundaries on page 819
To edit nodes on a boundary on page 820
To edit the fill property for the polygon object on page 821
To edit nodes on a boundary on page 820
Click Modify ➤ Edit MPolygon.
You can add, delete, and move polygon boundaries, edit nodes, convert a
boundary to an object, change a boundary type, change the fill color or pattern,
and rebalance the polygon.
Respond to the prompts:
Select polygon:
Use any object selection method.
1552 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Enter an option [Add/Delete/Move/Edit/disConnect/Boundary
type/Fill/Rebalance/eXit]:
Enter the letter of the option you want.
Add
Enter a to add a boundary to the polygon. Respond to the prompt:
Select new boundary:
Select the object to use as the new boundary. The object can be a polygon,
rectangle, circle, or another mpolygon.
The new boundary is added to the polygon.
Delete
Enter d to delete a boundary from the polygon. Respond to the prompt:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to delete from the current polygon. If it is a complex
polygon, you can select additional boundaries. When you finish, press
Enter.
The selected boundaries are deleted from the polygon. Enter r to rebalance
the polygon.
Move
Enter m to move a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to move. If it is a complex polygon, you can select
additional boundaries. When you finish selecting boundaries, press Enter.
Select Basepoint or displacement:
Select the starting point for the move.
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Select the ending point for the move.
The selected boundaries are moved according to the distance and direction
between the basepoint and the second point of displacement.
Edit
Enter e to edit a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to edit.
MAPMPEDIT (Edit Polygon command) | 1553
Enter a node editing option [Next/Previous/Remove/Insert/Move/eXit]:
Enter the letter of the option you want.
■Enter n to move to the next node.
■Enter p to move to the previous node.
■Enter r to remove the current node. You cannot remove a node if the
resulting new line would cross another boundary in the current polygon.
■Enter i to insert a node before the current node. Note that you cannot
insert a node if the resulting new line would cross another boundary in
the current polygon.
■Enter m to move the current node. You cannot move a node so that the
current boundary crosses another boundary in the current polygon.
■Enter x to exit node-editing mode.
disConnect
Enter c to disconnect a boundary from the polygon, but preserve the boundary
object. Respond to the prompt:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary to disconnect.
The boundary is deleted from the polygon, but remains in the drawing as
a polyline or circle object.
If you disconnect a boundary that has nested boundaries, all the nested
boundaries are also disconnected.
Boundary type
Enter b to change the boundary type for a boundary. Respond to the prompts:
Select boundary:
Select the boundary whose type you want to change.
Enter boundary type [Outer/Inner/Annotation] <Outer>:
Enter o to make the selected boundary an outer boundary, enter i to the
make it an inner boundary, or enter a to make it an annotation boundary.
Annotation boundaries behave the same as inner boundaries, but have no
effect on area calculations.
Fill
Enter f to change the fill for the polygon. This displays the Polygon Fill
Properties dialog box on page 1558, where you can select a hatch pattern or
a gradient fill.
1554 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Rebalance
Enter r to rebalance the polygon. The polygon is rebalanced so the nesting
order follows an alternating outer/inner/outer order.
Undo
Enter u to undo the last action.
eXit
Enter x to exit the mapmpedit command.
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command)
Use this command to split an existing polygon object into two new polygon
objects. The original polygon object is deleted.
To split a polygon object on page 824
You can draw a new line to split the polygon, or you can selecting an existing
line.
The existing polygon is split into two new polygons.
MPSPLIT (Split Polygon command) | 1555
If the polygon has internal boundaries, your split line must not cross one of
the internal boundaries, nor can it touch one of the vertices of an internal
boundary.
This split is not allowed because
it touches one of the vertices of
the internal boundary.
This split is not allowed because it
crosses an internal boundary.
This split is allowed.
You can choose to copy data from the original mpolygon to the two new
mpolygons, or you can delete the data.
Respond to the prompts:
Select the mpolygon to split:
Use any object selection method.
Would you like to Draw or Select the line for split? [Draw/Select]:
Enter the letter of the option you want.
Draw
Enter d to draw the line. Respond to the prompts:
Specify start point or [eXit] <eXit>:
Select the starting point for the divider line.
Specify next point or [Arc/Undo]:
Do one of the following:
■Select the next point for the divider line.
■Enter a to draw an arc. For more information on drawing arcs, see the
AutoCAD help.
■Enter u to undo the last action.
1556 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
When you finish drawing the line, press Enter.
Select
Enter s to select an existing polyline to use as the dividing line. Respond to
the prompts:
Select objects:
Select the polyline you want. When you finish selecting polylines, press
Enter.
Would you like to copy data from the original mpolygon to the split mpolygons?
[Yes/No]:
Do one of the following:
■Enter y to copy object data or external database links from the original
mpolygon to both of the new mpolygons.
■Enter n to delete the data.
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box
Use this dialog box to create polygons directly from a polygon topology.
To convert a polygon topology to polygons on page 829
At the Command prompt, enter maptopologytopolygons.
Name
Select the topology to convert. Click Load Topology to select and load the
topology if you need to.
Layer
Select the layer on which you want to place the converted polygon(s). Click
Layer Settings to create a new layer and set its properties.
Group Complex Polygons
Create a single polygon from nested polygons in the topology.
Create Polygons From Topology dialog box | 1557
Copy Object Data From Centroid
Copy object data from the topology polygons to the new polygon objects.
Copy Database Links From Centroid
Copy database links from the polygons to the new mpolygon objects.
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the fill color and pattern to use for polygon
objects. You can choose from a variety of colors including true colors and
colors from imported color books. You can also define the pattern type, pattern
properties, and attributes for hatch, solid, and gradient fill.
To edit the fill property for the polygon object on page 821
Click Modify ➤ Edit MPolygon.
The dialog box has the following tabs:
The Hatch tab defines the appearance of the hatch pattern (or solid color) to
be used to fill polygons.
The Gradient tab defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be used to fill
polygons.
Hatch tab
Pattern Type
Sets the pattern type. Choose one of the following:
■Predefined — Specifies a predefined pattern.
■User Defined — Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype
in your drawing.
■Custom — Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file that
you have added to the search path.
1558 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Pattern Name
Lists the available predefined patterns. AutoCAD Map 3D stores the selected
pattern in the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern option is available
only if you set Type to Predefined. Click [...] to display preview images for
all predefined patterns at once.
Angle
Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current
UCS.
Scale
Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern.
Relative To Paper Space
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option,
you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your
layout. This option is available only from a layout.
Fill Color
Click the down arrow to select from a list of colors. To choose from a greater
variety of colors, including true colors and colors from imported color books,
choose the Select Color Option.
Gradient tab
One Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and
lighter tints of one color.
Two Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.
Color Swatch
Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click [...] to display the Select Color
dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color, true color, or
color book color.
Shade and Tint Slider
Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected
color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.
Centered
Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option is not
selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion
of a light source to the left of the object.
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box | 1559
Angle
Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the
current UCS.
Gradient Patterns
Select one of the nine fixed patterns for gradient fills.
For more information on setting hatch options, see the AutoCAD help.
1560 | Chapter 31 Polygon Object Dialog Boxes
Printing and Publishing
Dialog Boxes
Create Map Book/Edit Map Book dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the data to use to create or edit a map book.
To create a map book on page 1151
To edit map book settings on page 1157
Click Map ➤ Map Book.
Expand a node in the left pane of the dialog box to specify the necessary
information on the right
Source node
Create a map book from a display or model space. If your map contains
drawing objects, you can specify Model Space to include all the objects, or
Map Display to include only objects you’ve added in Display Manager.
■Select Map Display to publish a display map that you created in the Display
Manager.
■Select Model Space to publish objects in model space.
32
1561
Sheet Template node
Click the heading Sheet Template to specify a template file and layout to
use. Indicate whether to include a title block and adjacent sheet links. (You
can include these only if you defined placeholders for them.)
If you include a title block, specify its name. If it isn’t in the list, click
to find it. If you include adjacent sheet links, specify the name of the file
that represents the adjacent sheet.
By default, the scale factor is 1, meaning a scale ratio of 1:1.
Tiling Scheme node
Select the way to specify the area to publish. Click the heading Tiling Scheme
to specify further information.
■By Area calculates the number of tiles based on the map scale and the
size of the main viewport in the layout template. Specify a layer for the
grid that forms the tile in your map book. If you defined a grid layer,
choose it in the list. Otherwise, type a name for a new layer to contain
the grid. Click Select area to tile and draw a rectangle for the area to
include in the map book.
■By Number calculates the number of tiles based on the map scale, the
size of the main viewport in the layout template, and the specified
number of rows and columns. Specify the upper left corner and how
many columns and rows to create. Be sure to preview the map book to
see how much of the map is included when you use this tiling scheme.
■Custom generates the tiles from the closed polylines you select. Click
Select Tiles and define the tiles. If you have already defined the tiles in
a separate layer, you can use the layer manager to turn off other layers
and window-select the tiles on your grid layer.
Naming Scheme node
Select the way to name the tiles.
■Columns And Rows names each tile with a column indicator and a row
indicator, for example, A1.
■Grid Sequential numbers the first tile with a digit and augments each
subsequent tile number by the increment you choose. Specify which
order to go in and the increment between tile numbers.
■Sequential is designed for custom tiling schemes and numbers only the
tiles you specified in your custom tiling scheme. Specify which order to
go in and the increment between tile numbers.
1562 | Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes
■Data Driven lets you choose an expression for your naming scheme
based on data in the map.
Key node
If you defined a keyview viewport, choose what to display in it. If you choose
External Reference, specify the file to display in this viewport. If you specify
Layers, specify which layers will appear in the keyview thumbnail. If you
created a new grid layer under Tiling Scheme that you want to use in the
Key node, you must click the layer icon at the top of the dialog box and
type that name in the list.
If you specify Layers, choose a small subset of layers that help the viewer
identify a specific area of the map. Too many layers will result in a crowded
and hard-to-read thumbnail. This step is optional.
Legend node
Specify the source for a legend. If you created a display legend in Display
Manager, choose Map Display. To use an area of your map as a legend, click
Select Modelspace Bounds and select that area. This step is optional.
Sheet Set node
Specify whether to create a new sheet set for this map book or to make it a
subset of an existing sheet set.
Map book sheet sets are based on AutoCAD sheet sets. For more information
about AutoCAD sheet sets, type “create and manage a sheet set” on the
Search tab of the help.
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the viewport and element placeholders in the
sheet template layout.
To identify layout placeholders on page 1150
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click Tools ➤ Identify Template
Placeholders.
Layout Placeholders
Select the viewport or element to identify.
Identify Map Book Template Placeholders dialog box | 1563
Select button
In your layout, select the viewport or element that corresponds to the item
you selected in the Layout Placeholders list.
Map Book Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to view basic properties of a map book.
To view map book or tile properties on page 1160
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click the map book name. Click
Properties.
NOTE Except for the name, these properties are strings used as field values in
sheets. They do not change the actual properties of the map book. For example,
if you change a property in this dialog box, the corresponding map book property
does not change. However, if your layout template contains a text element with
a field that references the property you changed, that text element will change.
Name
Identifies the map book name.
Scale
Identifies the scale used for the selected map book.
Orientation
Identifies the rotation orientation of the selected map book.
Coordinate System
Identifies the coordinate system, if one was specified.
Tile Count
Indicates the number of tiles in the selected map book.
1564 | Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes
Tile Properties dialog box
Use this dialog box to view basic properties of a map book tile.
To view map book or tile properties on page 1160
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, right-click a tile name. Click Properties.
NOTE These properties are strings used as field values in sheets. They do not
change the actual properties of the tile. For example, if you change a property in
this dialog box, the corresponding tile property does not change. However, if your
layout template contains a text element with a field that references the property
you changed, that text element will change.
Name
Identifies the tile name.
Adjacent Tiles
Identifies all tiles that are immediately adjacent to the selected tile.
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog box
Use this dialog box to select a plot map set that you want to convert to a map
book.
To import a plot map set on page 1153
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book From Plot Set.
Tile Properties dialog box | 1565
Map Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the types of information to include when
publishing to DWF™.
To publish attribute data to DWF on page 1131
Click File ➤ More Plotting Options ➤ DWF Publishing Options.
Publish Map Information
Specifies that the checked items in the list are included in the publish
operation. If you clear the Publish Map Information box, the options remain
checked, but they are not included in the publish operation.Check Publish
Map Information again to include them.
Properties tree
Categories listed here vary, depending on the contents of your map. Expand
a category to see its layers, and expand a layer to see its objects. If you select
an item with sub-items, all the sub-items are automatically checked.
File icon
Specify the file for the properties.
Folder icon
Find a saved properties file to load.
NOTE If you assigned a coordinate system to your map, it is always included for
each sheet in your published DWF file, unless you clear the Export Map Properties
check box.
1566 | Chapter 32 Printing and Publishing Dialog Boxes
Plot Map Set dialog boxes
The Plot Map Set functionality has been replaced with the Map Books feature.
While you can continue to use your existing map plot sets, we recommend
that you import your plot sets into map books.
To import a plot map set on page 1153
On the Map Book tab of the Task Pane, click New ➤ Map Book From Plot Set.
Plot Map Set dialog boxes | 1567
1568
Query Dialog Boxes
NOTE Query functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Alternate Font dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify a different font for the queried drawing object.
Use these procedures to bring drawing objects into your map on page 300
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
The font specified for a queried drawing object cannot be found. Select an
alternate font to use.
Change Category dialog box
Use this dialog box to assign queries to categories.
To add a category to the query library on page 168
33
1569
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
Current Category displays the name of the category the query is currently
assigned to. (If you are changing the category for multiple queries, this area
may be blank.) Select a category from the New Category list, and click OK.
The query is reassigned to the new category.
You can assign a query to only one category.
Data Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a data condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on their object data on page 1033
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
A data condition searches data that you have attached to drawing objects.
Object Class / Object Properties / Database Link / Object Data / Attribute options
Select the data to query.
■To search data associated with a object class, select Object Class. Select
an object class from the Class list. Select the property.
To search all subclasses of the selected object class, select Include
Subclasses. If this option is not selected, only data in objects tagged with
the selected object class is searched.
■To search data stored in custom objects, select Object Properties. When
selected, you can choose from a list of all object types and properties
defined either in all source drawings or in the current drawing,
depending on whether the source or current drawing is queried.
To search all subclasses of the selected object type and/or property, select
Include Subclasses. If this checkbox is cleared, the query will be limited.
1570 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
It is recommended the user select Include Subclasses when running an
Object Properties query.
■To search data in link data stored on an object, select Database Link.
Select the link template from the Link Templates list. Select the key
column. Note that this option searches only the link data stored on
objects. To search the database table, use a SQL condition.
■To search data in an object data table, select Object Data. Select a table
from the Tables list. Select the object data field.
Note that if two source drawings have a table with the same name,
AutoCAD Map 3D recognizes only the fields defined in the first drawing
you activate.
■To search data in a block attribute, select Attribute. Select a block from
the Blocks list. Select the attribute tag.
NOTE The lists you select from (for example the Link Templates list and the
Object Data list) display only the information available in the source(s) you are
querying. For example, if you are querying database links in your source
(attached) drawings, the Link Templates list will display only the link templates
in your source drawings.
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
DescriptionOperator
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the
value you enter the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than
the value you enter the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than
or equal to the value you enter the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the
value you enter the value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or
equal to the value you enter the value box.
<=
Data Condition dialog box | 1571
DescriptionOperator
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to
the value you enter the Value box.
<>
NOTE If you are querying database link data, only the = (equals) operator is
available.
Value box
Specify the value to search for. You can use Wildcard Characters on page
1278.
To enter a value that includes a comma, such as an RGB color or a Colorbook
color, enclose the value in double quotes, for example, "255,255,255" or
"PANTONE(R) process coated,PANTONE Process Cyan C".
Define New Category dialog box
Use this dialog box to create a new category in the Query Library.
To add a category to the query library on page 168
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
Enter a new name in the New Category Name box. Click OK. Category names
cannot contain any spaces.
Define Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1572 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to define, modify, save, load, or execute queries.
Defining Queries on page 1006
Querying Topologies on page 1119
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
The dialog box settings reflect the properties of the current query. If you
change a setting, you modify the current query. If you load a query from the
query library or from a file, you replace the current query.
Note the difference between pressing Execute Query and pressing OK:
Execute Query
Saves dialog box settings and executes the current query.
OK
Saves dialog box settings without executing. You also use this button if you
are creating an element for the Display Manager.
NOTE You can set several query options. See the Query tab of the AutoCAD
Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
Current query
This area shows the conditions in your current query. You can edit, group, or
delete the conditions.
Current query list
Displays all conditions in the current query. If conditions have been
grouped, the group is indented and enclosed within parentheses. (Conditions
in a group are evaluated before conditions outside the group.)
■To edit a condition, select it. Click Edit.
■To group conditions, select the first and last condition that you want
in the group. Click Group.
■To delete a condition, select it. Click Delete.
Edit
Edit the selected condition.
If you select more than one condition, Edit is unavailable.
Define Query dialog box | 1573
You can also edit a condition by double-clicking it in the list.
Group
Group the selected conditions.
When you run the query, conditions inside the group are evaluated before
conditions outside the group.
The easiest way to specify a group is to select the first and last conditions
in the group and click Group. All conditions between the first and the last
selected conditions are included in the group and enclosed within
parentheses.
You can nest groups.
Ungroup
Ungroup the selected group.
To ungroup conditions, select the first or last condition in the group. Click
Ungroup.
Delete
Deletes the selected query condition.
Clear Query
Delete all conditions in the list.
Clearing the query does not remove settings from the Set Property
Alterations dialog box or from the Output Report Options dialog box.
Query type
Use this area to create conditions for your query.
And/Or/Not options
Determines how the condition is combined with other conditions.
And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included
in the query.
Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included
in the query.
And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first conditions can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
Location
Display the Location Condition dialog box on page 1584, where you can
define a condition based on the location of the object in relation to points
you specify.
For example, search for all objects that fall inside a circle or that cross a
line.
1574 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Property
Display the Property Condition dialog box on page 1589, where you can define
a condition based on the object's properties.
For example, search for all objects on a specified layer, all objects of a certain
color, or all text in a certain text style.
Data
Display the Data Condition dialog box on page 1570, where you can define
a condition based on object data attached to an object.
For example, if you attach a field named Pipe Diameter to several objects,
you can search for all objects where that field has a value of 10" or more.
For more information on defining and attaching data, see Creating an Object
Data Table on page 180 and Entering and Editing Object Data on page 873.
SQL
Display the SQL Link Condition dialog box on page 1601, where you can
define a condition based on the external data linked to an object.
For example, if you are trying to determine the best location for a new park
and you have linked data from a table containing information about the
households, you can search for all parcels where the household has young
children.
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
Query mode
In this area, specify the type of query to run. Note that if you are creating an
element for the Display Manager, Draw is the only available option.
Preview
Preview the objects that match the query conditions, but don't actually pull
the objects into the current drawing.
When you redraw the screen, the objects will be gone. Property alterations
do not appear in a Preview mode query.
Draw
Get the objects that match the query and bring them into the current
drawing. If you are creating an element for the Display Manager, gets the
objects and adds them to the element.
If a property alteration has been defined, objects are modified as they are
copied into the current drawing.
You must have Draw Query privileges to perform a draw query. See To add
a new user on page 75.
Define Query dialog box | 1575
Report
Execute the query and save the results in a report file.
To specify a template for the report, click Options to display the Output
Report Options dialog box on page 1587.
Property alterations are not reflected in the report.
Options
Display the Output Report Options dialog box on page 1587, where you specify
a template for the report. The Options button is available only if Report
query mode is selected.
NOTE For topology queries, the Options button is available with both Draw
and Report query modes.
Options
The Options area includes buttons for setting property alterations, saving the
query so you can execute it later, loading a query you've previously saved,
redrawing the screen, or setting options.
If you are creating a element for a display map, not all of the options are
available.
Alter Properties check box
Determines whether the query executes the property alteration. If this is
not selected, property alterations are ignored when you execute the query.
Alter Properties button
Display the Set Property Alterations dialog box on page 1598, where you
specify how to modify objects that are found by the query.
Save
Display the Save Current Query dialog box on page 1596, where you save the
current query so you can run it later.
Load
Display the Load Internal Query dialog box on page 1583, where you load a
query that you've previously saved.
Redraw <
Redraw the screen to clear any previews.
Zoom Ext <
Display the Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box on page 1734, where you select
any active drawings in your drawing set. AutoCAD Map 3D then zooms the
screen to the extents of the selected drawings.
1576 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Drawings
Display the Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box on page 1638, where you
can change which drawings are attached to the current drawing, and which
drawings are active for queries.
More
Display the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page
1628, where you change query options such as whether searches are case
sensitive and whether to preview text as an insertion point.
Define Range Table dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create, rename, or delete range tables.
To create a range table on page 1057
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
A range table specifies a range of actions to take depending on the actual value
of object data or properties associated with drawing objects.
■For property alteration, specify different alterations for a property
depending on the value of the property. For example, you could specify
that all buildings under two stories be colored blue, all buildings two stories
to ten stories be colored green, and all buildings above ten stories be colored
red.
■For an output report, specify different actions to take depending on the
value of the data. For example, you could specify that if a lot is valued at
less than $10,000, report the value in the Land Value A column of your
database; if the lot is valued at over $10,000, report the value in the Land
Value B column.
You can create range tables and save them with the current drawing to use
again.
Define Range Table dialog box | 1577
Range Table area
Use this area to select an existing table, rename a table, create a new table,
or delete a table.
Range Table list
Lists all tables in the current drawing.
To view tables, click the down arrow. Select the table you want.
Rename
Display the Rename Range Table dialog box on page 1595, where you can
specify a new name for the current range table.
New
Display the New Range Table dialog box, where you can save the current
table definitions to a new range table.
Remove
Remove the current range table.
Be careful not to delete a range table used by your queries.
Current Range Table Definition area
Use this area to view, edit, or delete rows in the range table.
Current Range Table Definition list
Displays all rows in the current range table.
To edit or delete a row, select the row and click Edit or Delete.
Edit
Copy the selected row to the Condition section of the dialog box, where
you can modify it.
When you finish modifying the condition, click Add To List to update the
row in the Current Range Table Definition list.
Delete
Delete the selected row.
Clear List
Delete all rows from the current range table.
Expressions in the Current Range Table Definition list are evaluated from
top to bottom, that is, in the order you enter them. As soon as one condition
is evaluated as TRUE, AutoCAD Map 3D stops evaluating, ignores the
remaining expressions, and returns the value associated with the TRUE
condition in the range table.
For example, assume you enter the following expressions:
If < 0 Return: Low
1578 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
If < 15 Return: Medium
If < 30 Return: High
If < 45 Return: Very High
With a value of 20, the first condition evaluates to FALSE because 20 is not
less than 0. The second condition also evaluates to FALSE since 20 is not
less than 15. However, the third condition evaluates to TRUE since 20 is
less than 30, and the value returned by the range table is High. The last
condition, although TRUE, is ignored.
Condition area
Use this area to edit an existing row, or to create a new one.
■To edit an existing row, select the row in the Current Range Table
Definition list and click Edit. When you finish, click Update.
■To create a new condition, select an operator, specify an expression and
a return value, and click Add.
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
DescriptionOperator
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value
you enter the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than the
value you enter the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal
to the value you enter the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the value
you enter the value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to
the value you enter the value box.
<=
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the value
you enter the Value box.
/=
Define Range Table dialog box | 1579
DescriptionOperator
Specify the action to take none of the preceding conditions are
met.If you include an OTHERWISE condition, it must be at the
end of the list.
OTHERWISE
Expression Value box
Enter a simple expression.
If an object matches the value of this expression, the object is affected by
the return value.
Return Value box
Specify a return value for this condition.
The return value specifies what happens if the object matches the expression.
Enter a value or a simple expression. Do not enter a compound expression.
Add
Add the current condition to the Current Range Table Definition list.
Update
Update the selected condition in the Current Range Table Definition list
with the current condition.
Define Text dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify text to add to all drawing objects found by the
query.
To define text location on page 794
To add text to retrieved drawing objects on page 1062
Click Create ➤ Map Labelpoint Location.
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
Text Value
Specify the text to add.
You can enter the text, or choose a variable by clicking Expression.
■If you enter text in the box, that text is added to each object.
1580 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
■If you choose a variable, the text for each object is based on the value
of the variable.
For example, if you choose the property Elevation, the elevation is added
as text to each retrieved object.
If select a field from an object data table, the value in that field is added to
each object. If an object does not have a record attached from the selected
table, no text is added to the object.
Text Height
Specify a text height.
If none is specified, text uses the AutoCAD Map 3D default text height.
Insert Point
Specify an insertion point for the text.
Centroid
Insert text at the centroid of the object.
Labelpt
Insert text at the label point of the object.
The default location for the label point is the centroid of the object. To
change the location of the label point, use the ADETEXTLOC command.
Justification
Specify the justification for the text. The list displays options for center,
middle, and right, or combinations of these with top (T), middle (M), and
bottom (B).
Text Style
Enter a text style, or click Styles to select from a list of styles in the active
drawings.
Layer
Enter a layer for the text, or click Layers to select from a list of layers in the
active drawings. If you enter a new layer name, the layer is created. To easily
hide or delete text, insert it on its own layer.
Color
Specify a color for the text.
Enter a color name, or click Color Palette to select a color.
Rotation
Enter a rotation value. Enter 0 for no rotation.
Define Text dialog box | 1581
For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction.
(Use the DDUNITS command to view or change the current direction.)
For each option, enter a value in the box, enter an expression or variable, or
select a value. For information on expressions and variables, see Expression
Evaluator on page 1283.
Hatch Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to add a hatch pattern to drawing objects found by the
query.
To fill queried drawing objects with a hatch pattern on page 1067
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
Pattern
Enter a hatch pattern, or click Patterns to select from a list of hatch patterns
defined in the active drawings, or click Expression to use an expression to
specify the hatch pattern. If you leave the box empty, AutoCAD Map 3D
uses a solid fill.
The box displays the selected hatch option. ISO hatch patterns are not
displayed.
Scale
Specify a scale for the pattern. A small scale creates a smaller pattern and
takes longer to display and print.
Rotation
Enter the rotation. Enter 0 for no rotation.
For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the current direction.
(Use the DDUNITS command to view or change the current direction.)
Layer
Enter a layer for the hatch, or click Layers to select from a list of layers in
the active drawings. If you enter a new layer name, the layer is created.
To easily hide or delete the hatch, insert it on its own layer.
1582 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Color
Specify a color for the hatch.
Enter a color name, or click Color Palette, and select a color.
For each option, enter a value in the box or enter an expression or variable.
For example, to use a hatch pattern specified in the Hatch field of the Design
object data table, enter :hatch@design. For information on expressions and
variables, see Expression Evaluator on page 1283.
You can set an option to determine whether the hatch object created by this
command is associative. See the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options
dialog box on page 1628 and To have hatch created by property alteration be
associative on page 223.
NOTE Use the DRAWORDER command to have objects appear on top of the
hatch.
Load Internal Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load a previously saved query.
To add a category to the query libraryquery library:categoriesqueries:categori-
escategories:for queri... on page ?
To edit a query saved with the current drawing on page 170
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
The definition of the loaded query appears in the Define Query dialog box.
Depending on the options you specified when you saved the query, it may
change the active drawings or load property alteration settings. You can modify
the query or click Execute Query to execute the query.
Category list
Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select
a category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
Load Internal Query dialog box | 1583
Queries list
Lists all the queries assigned to the selected category.
To load a query, choose it from the list. Click OK.
Selected Query display
Displays the name and description of the selected query.
Location Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a location condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on their location on page 1027
To edit a drawing query condition on page 1043
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
A location condition finds drawing objects based on location relative to a
specified boundary. You can specify whether objects must be completely inside
the boundary or have any part inside the boundary.
For blocks or text objects, you can specify if their location is determined by
their insertion point or their bounding box. For hatch, solid, and raster objects,
you can specify if their location is determined by their area or their boundary.
See the Query tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
Location Coordinates
Displays the coordinates for the current location condition.
Define <
Displays your current drawing, where you can specify the points to define
the boundary.
Show <
Shows the boundary of the condition you are editing.
To change the colors used to display the boundaries, use the Query tab on
the Autodesk Map Options dialog box.
1584 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Boundary Type
Select a boundary type.
All
Returns all objects in the active drawings.
Buffer Fence
Returns all objects within a specified distance from a fence.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the fence and the distance.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the buffer fence,
or select the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the buffer fence,
or select the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Bufferfence Width Enter the width of the buffer fence in the current unit.
Circle
Returns all objects in a defined circle.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the circle.
Center point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the center of the circle, or select
the point.
Radius Enter a number in the current unit.
Fence
Returns all objects that cross a defined line.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the fence.
A fence does not need to be closed and can cross itself.
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the fence, or select
the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the fence, or select
the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Point
Returns all areas that surround a selected point.
Click Define < to select the point.
Coordinates of Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the point, or select the
point.
Polygon
Returns all objects in a defined polygon.
The polygon can be any shape, but cannot cross or touch itself. If you don't
close the polygon, AutoCAD Map 3D connects the final point to the first
point to create a closed polygon.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the polygon.
Location Condition dialog box | 1585
First Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first point of the polygon, or
select the point.
Next Point Enter the X,Y coordinates of the next point of the polygon, or
select the point. Press Enter when done entering points.
Polyline
Returns all objects that cross an existing polyline.
Select a selection type, select a polyline mode. Click Define < to select the
polyline.
Select Polyline Select a polyline, line, or arc. If you selected the Polygon
polyline mode, you can select only a polyline.
Bufferfence Width Enter the width of the buffer fence in the current unit.
(This prompt appears only if you select the Buffer Fence polyline mode.)
Window
Returns all objects in a specified window.
Select a selection type. Click Define < to define the window.
First Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the first corner of the window, or
select the point.
Other Corner Enter the X,Y coordinates of the opposite corner of the
window, or select the point.
Selection Type
Inside
Select to find only objects that are completely within the boundary.
Crossing
Select to find objects that are completely within or crossing the boundary.
NOTE When you perform location queries close to blocks or text objects, be
aware that the bounding box for these objects can extend significantly beyond
the extents of the objects. You can set an option to retrieve objects based on
their bounding box or their insertion point. See AutoCAD Map Options dialog
box on page 1628.
Polyline Mode
If you select a polyline boundary, select the mode to define the polyline border.
Polygon
Closes the polyline to create a polygon. If the polyline contains arcs,
AutoCAD Map 3D connects the ends of the arcs with a straight line.
Fence
Returns all objects that cross the polyline.
1586 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Buffer Fence
Returns all objects within a specified distance from the polyline.
New Range Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to name a new range table.
To create a range table on page 1057
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
Enter a name for the new range table.
Output Report Options dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects. Reports will include
information about drawing objects only.
Use this dialog box to specify the name for your report file, and to define a
template for the file.
To create a report template on page 1220
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
An output report lists information about drawing objects that were found by
a query of an attached drawing file. This information can include properties
(such as layer, color, or object type), data attached to the object, or data linked
to the object from an external database. You set up expressions to limit the
objects found to those that match specific criteria. For example, you can create
a query that finds all structures larger than a certain size, and then prints a
New Range Table dialog box | 1587
report listing the object type and size. You can also include information from
sub-objects.
To specify which information you want in the report, create a template.
Report Template area
Report Template list
Lists all expressions in the current template. New expressions are added to
the bottom of the list, unless an expression in the list is selected, and then
the new expression is added above that expression.
Edit
Select an expression in the Report Template list and click Edit to copy it to
the Expression box, where you can modify it. When you finish modifying
the expression, click Update.
Delete
Select an expression in the Report Template list and click Delete to remove
it.
Clear List
Erases the entire report template.
Expression area
Use this area to create a new expression or to modify an existing one.
Expression box
Enter an expression to add to the template or edit an existing expression.
To create an expression, specify the variable that represents the information
to include in the report and click Add.
To select from a list of available variables, click Expression.
Expression
Displays the Expression dialog box on page 1316, which lists all drawing object
properties, object classes, object data, and external data in the drawing you
are querying.
Range list
Displays the current range table.
To see a list of all range tables defined in the drawing you are querying,
click the down arrow.
Ranges
Displays the Define Range Table dialog box on page 1577, where you can
create a new range table.
1588 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Add
Adds the current expression to the Report Template list.
Update
Updates the edited expression in the Report Template list.
Output File Name area
Lists the path and file name for the report.
Type a path and file name or click Browse to choose one.
Unless you specify otherwise, the file name extension is .txt. The output
file is in text format regardless of the file name extension you use.
Process Sub-Objects
If this option is not selected, the output report contains information about
the selected object, but not its component parts.
For example, select this option to print information for all points in a
polygon. If the option is not selected, the output report will contain
information for only the first point.
The following table shows the information included in a topology query,
depending on whether you select Process Sub-Objects or not.
SelectedNot selectedTopology type
Nodes, objects, and object dataNodesNode topology
Links, start and end node dataLinksNetwork topology
Centroids, links, and nodesCentroidsPolygon topology
Apply Transformation
If objects from the drawing you are querying have been transformed using
a coordinate system transformation or a simple offset, scale, or rotate
transformation, check this option to have the report query evaluate the
transformed objects.
If this option is not selected, the report query evaluates only the
untransformed objects in the drawing.
Property Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Property Condition dialog box | 1589
Use this dialog box to create or modify a property condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on their properties on page 1030
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
A property condition finds drawing objects based on a property, such as color,
layer, length, or text style.
Select Property Area
Specify the property to search for.
Area
Returns objects based on their area.
Area only works on circles, ellipses, polylines, splines, regions, and solids.
It does not work on objects created from line segments. For example, Area
will not work on a rectangle created of four separate lines.
Block Name
Returns objects based on their block name.
To select from a list of block names in the active drawings, click Values.
Color
Returns objects based on their color.
To select a color, click Values.
Elevation
Returns objects based on their elevation.
Elevation is the Z value from the XY plane where the object is defined.
Object Type
Returns objects based on their type.
To select from a list of types in the active drawings, click Values.
If an object type, does not appear on the list, it may be a custom object. To
add a custom object to the list, run a command that will load the object's
dbx.
NOTE To specify a polyline object type, enter 2Dpolyline or 3Dpolyline.
1590 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Group
Returns objects based on the groups they are members of.
To select from a list of groups in the active drawings, click Values.
The group is not maintained in the current drawing.
Layer
Returns objects based on their layer.
To select from a list of layers in the active drawings, click Values.
Length
Returns objects based on their length.
Linetype
Returns objects based on their linetype.
To select from a list of linetypes, click Values.
If the linetype is not loaded in the current drawing, the objects will appear
with a CONTINUOUS linetype.
Text Style
Returns objects based on their text style.
To select from a list of text styles, click Values.
Text Value
Returns objects based on their text value.
To set an option for case-sensitive match for text values, use the Query tab
of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
Thickness
Returns objects based on their thickness.
Thickness is the distance an object is extruded above or below its elevation.
Object Class
Returns objects based on their object classification.
To select from a list of object classes, click Values.
Select Include Subclasses to return all objects tagged with the selected object
class and all objects tagged with any subclasses of the selected object class.
If the option is not selected, the query returns only objects tagged with the
selected object class.
Lineweight
Returns objects based on their lineweight.
To select from a list of lineweights, click Values.
Plotstyle
Returns objects based on their plot style.
Property Condition dialog box | 1591
To select from a list of plot styles, click Values.
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value you
enter the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than the value you
enter the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal to
the value you enter the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the value you
enter the value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to the
value you enter the value box.
<=
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the value you
enter the Value box.
<>
If you have selected Layer, Object Classname, or Plotstyle as the property,
= (equal) is the only available operator.
Value box
Specify the value to find.
To specify more than one value, separate each value with a comma. The
query will find objects that match any of the values.
You can use wild-card characters for: Block Name, Object Type, Group,
Layer, Linetype, and Text Style.
To select values from a list, click Values.
Values
Display a list of values defined for the property in any of the active drawings
attached to this drawing.
Select the values you want from the list.
NOTE For topology queries, some of the options are different. For more
information on querying a topology, see To query a topology on page 1119.
1592 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Query Library Administration dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to rename, create, or delete query categories, to move a
query from one category to another, to change a query description, to attach
queries from external files, or to delete queries you no longer use.
To add a category to the query library on page 168
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
Category
Use this area to select, rename, create, or delete a category.
Category list
Lists all query categories in the current drawing.
Select the category you want. The Available Queries list updates to show all
queries in the selected category.
Rename
Display the Rename Category dialog box on page 1595, where you rename
the current category.
New
Display the Define New Category dialog box on page 1572, where you create
a new category.
Remove
Delete the current category.
You can remove a category only if it has no queries assigned to it. To delete
a category that still has queries in it, you must first delete the queries or
assign them to new categories (by clicking Category).
Available Queries
Use this area to delete queries or assign them to new categories.
Available Queries list
Lists all queries in the current category.
Query Library Administration dialog box | 1593
To view additional queries, select a different category from the Category
list.
Delete
Delete the selected queries.
Select All
Highlight all queries in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all queries in the list.
Category
Display the Change Category dialog box, where you move the query to a
different category.
A query can be assigned to only one category.
Selected Query
Use this area to add an external query to the current drawing, or to view
information about the selected query in the Available Queries list.
To add an external query, select External from the Query Type list. (You may
need to erase the query Name box first.) Specify the path and file name for
the external query in the File Name box. Once the external query is found,
you can modify its name or description. Click Add to add the query to the
current category.
To modify information about an existing query, select it in the Available
Queries list and change any information you want. When you finish, click
Update. To assign a query to more than one category, copy the query by
selecting it in the Available Queries list. Enter a new name for the query, click
Add and assign the new query to a different category.
Name box
Specify a name for the query.
A query name must be unique in the current drawing.
Description box
Specify a query description.
File Name box
If the query is external, specify the path and file name for the file where
the query is stored.
1594 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Query Type list
Specify internal (the query is stored with the current drawing) or external
(the query is saved in a separate file).
Add
Add the query to the Available Queries list for the current category.
Update
Update the existing query in the Available Queries list.
Rename Category dialog box
Use this dialog box to rename a category in a Query Library.
To add a category to the query library on page 168
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
The Current Category Name area displays the current name of the category.
Enter a new name and click OK. Category names cannot contain any spaces.
All queries assigned to the previous category name are assigned to the new
name. The old category name no longer exists.
Rename Range Table dialog box
Use this dialog box to rename a range table.
To create a range table on page 1057
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
Rename Category dialog box | 1595
The Current Range Table Name area shows the current name for the range
table. Enter a new name in the New Range Table Name box.
NOTE If you have any queries that use the current table name, edit those queries
to use the new table name.
Run Library Query dialog box
Use this dialog box to run a query you saved to the Query Library.
To run a query from the Query Library on page 165
Click Edit ➤ DWG Query.
Select a query from the query library. Click Run Query. To view queries from
a different category, select the category from the Category list. You can run
queries that have been saved with the current drawing or external queries that
have been added to the library.
Category list
Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select
a category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
Queries list
Lists all the queries assigned to the selected category.
To load a query, choose it from the list. Click OK.
Selected Query display
Displays the name and description of the selected query.
Save Current Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1596 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to save your current query. Once a query is saved, you can
run it again later.
To save a query on page 164
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Query Library.
Category List
Select a category to save your query in.
Use categories to organize queries. (When you run a query, you first select
a category, and then see all the queries in that category.)
If you have only a few queries, you can save them all in the same category.
New Category
Display the Define New Category dialog box where you can create a new
query category.
Name
Enter a name for the query. Query names cannot contain any spaces. Each
query name must be unique.
Description
Enter a description for the query. Use a description that will help you
remember the query when you look for it later.
Save to External File
Select this box to save the query to an external file instead of in the current
drawing.
Specify a name for the file.
If you want the query description to appear in the current drawing query
library, select Keep Reference In Library.
File name
Specify a name for the external file where you want to save the query. To
select a different directory, click [...].
Each external query must be saved in a separate file.
Keep Reference In Library
If you save the query to an external file, use this check box to list the query
description along with other queries in this drawing's query library.
Save Current Query dialog box | 1597
Save List of Active Drawings
If this box is selected, the saved query specifies which drawings in the
drawing set will be active when the query is executed.
If the box is not selected, the query searches whatever drawings are active
when you execute the query.
Save Location Coordinates
If this box is selected, the coordinates for any location conditions are saved
with the query.
If the box is not selected, you will need to specify the coordinates when
you execute the query.
Save Alter Properties
If this box is selected, property alteration specified in the Set Property
Alterations dialog box are saved with the query.
If the box is not selected, the property alterations are not saved with the
query.
Auto Execute
If this box is selected, when you run the saved query, it is automatically
executed.
If the box is not selected, the query is loaded as the active query, but is not
executed until you click Execute Query in the Define Query dialog box.
If you save the query to an external file and do not keep a reference in the
current drawing library, you do not need to provide a name or description for
the query.
Set Property Alterations dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how drawing objects found in a query will be
modified as they are brought into the current drawing.
To modify objects as they are retrieved by a query on page ?
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
1598 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
You can alter object properties such as color, layer, block name, or thickness,
or you can add text to objects. In addition, you can create a range table that
modifies objects in different ways based on where they fall in a range of values.
Property alteration is a fast way to modify a group of objects. For example,
make objects stand out in their source drawings by adding color or hatch,
move a group of objects to a new layer, or add informational text.
NOTE To have a property alteration take effect, execute a Draw mode query.
Property alterations do not work in Preview or Report mode queries.
To save property alterations back to source drawings, add the objects to the
save set.
Current Property Alterations list
Lists all expressions in the property alteration list.
Edit
Copy the selected expression to the expression section of the dialog box,
where you can modify it.
Delete
Delete the selected expression.
Clear List
Remove all expressions from the Current Property Alterations list.
Select Property area
Use this area to select the property to alter.
To change the color of retrieved blocks, the color of the components of the
source drawing block must be BYBLOCK. Otherwise, the block retains its
original colors.
Color alterations on a bitonal raster image affect both the image and the
boundary. On multiple color raster images, the alteration affects only the
boundary.
Properties
Select the property to alter.
Text
Display the Define Text dialog box, where you specify text to add, and its
height, insertion point, justification, text style, layer, color, and rotation.
Hatch
Display the Hatch Options dialog box, where you specify the hatch to add.
Set Property Alterations dialog box | 1599
Expression area
Use this area to create or modify an expression that defines how you want
to alter a property on objects that are found by the query.
To modify an existing expression, select it in the Current Property Alterations
list. Click Edit. When you finish modifying the expression, click Update.
To create a new expression, enter the expression in the Expression box. Use
the Values, Property, Data, and SQL s to help you create the expression.
When you are done, click Add.
Each expression must list the property you want to modify, and how the
property should be modified. To modify objects based on where they fall
in a range of values, select an existing range table from the Range list, or
create a new table using the Ranges.
Expression box
Enter the expression to add to the Current Property Alterations list.
Range list
Displays the current range table.
To see a list of all range tables defined in the current drawing, click the
down arrow.
Ranges
Displays the Define Range Table dialog box on page 1577, where you can
create a new range table.
Add
Adds the current expression to the Current Property Alterations list.
Update
Updates the edited expression in the Current Property Alterations list.
Values
For the property selected in the Select Property area, displays all values in
the active drawings.
Expression
Displays the Expression dialog box on page 1316, which lists all properties,
object data fields, and SQL link template fields in the active source drawings.
1600 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
SQL Condition History dialog box
Use this dialog box to copy a condition to your current SQL query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data on page 1038
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
This dialog box lists the SQL conditions specified in this drawing. Each line
includes the link template and the condition.
To copy a condition from this list to your current SQL query, select the
condition. Click OK.
Clear History
Remove all SQL conditions from the list.
To specify a maximum length for this list, use the Data Source tab of the
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
SQL Link Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a SQL condition in a query.
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data on page 1038
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
A SQL condition searches for objects based on data in an external database.
(Use the Map Database commands to link external data to objects.)
SQL Condition History dialog box | 1601
NOTE Before you execute a query with a SQL condition, be sure the appropriate
data source is attached and connected.
To create a SQL condition, specify the link template. Specify the column to
check and the value for the column.
Build a SQL condition using this dialog box, or type a condition by choosing
Type It.
Current SQL Condition area (SQL Link Condition)
This area displays the current SQL condition. You can add, delete, or edit any
line in the condition.
Current SQL Condition list
Displays the current SQL condition.
If lines in the condition have been grouped, the group is indented. (Lines
in a group are evaluated before lines outside the group.)
Edit
Copy the selected line to the Condition section so you can edit it.
Group
Group the selected lines.
Select the first and last lines that you want in the group. Click Group.
When you run the query, lines inside the group are evaluated before the
rest of the condition.
Ungroup
Delete the parentheses from the selected line and from the matching ending
or beginning line of the group.
Delete
Remove the selected line from the condition.
Clear All
Remove all lines from the current SQL condition.
Condition area (SQL Link Condition)
Use this area to edit an existing line in the condition or to add new lines.
To edit an existing line, select the line in the Current SQL Condition list. Edit
the information in the Condition area. Click Update.
To add a new line, select the operator (And/Or/Not). Select a column and an
operator and specify a value. Click Add Condition.
1602 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
And/Or/Not options
Determines how the condition is combined with other conditions.
And specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included
in the query.
Or specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included
in the query.
And Not specifies that the first condition must be met and the second
condition must not be met for the object to be included in the query.
Or Not specifies that either the first conditions can be met or the second
condition cannot be met for the object to be included in the query.
Column list
Select a column from the list.
The list displays columns from the current table.
Operator list
Select an operator from the list.
DescriptionOperator
The value of the selected property or data is equal to the value
you enter in the Value box.
=
The value of the selected property or data is greater than the
value you enter in the Value box.
>
The value of the selected property or data is greater than or equal
to the value you enter in the Value box.
>=
The value of the selected property or data is less than the value
you enter in the Value box.
<
The value of the selected property or data is less than or equal to
the value you enter in the Value box.
<=
The value of the selected property or data is not equal to the
value you enter in the Value box.
<>
The value of the selected property or data matches any of the
values you enter in the Value box. When you use the IN operator,
IN
you must enclose each value in single quotation marks, separate
SQL Link Condition dialog box | 1603
DescriptionOperator
the values with commas, and enclose the entire list in parentheses,
for example, ('1','2','3').
The value of the selected property or data is empty. Do not enter
a value in the Value box.
IS NULL
The value of the selected property or data contains the value you
enter in the Value box. Applies to string (character) data types
LIKE
only. Use the percent sign (%) as a wild-card character. For ex-
ample, to retrieve all objects that have a value starting with B,
choose the LIKE operator and enter B% in the Value box. For in-
formation on the wild-card characters supported by your database
system, refer to the documentation for your database system
software.
Value box
Specify the value to search for.
The value must match the data type of the column.
If the string you want to use contains a single quotation mark, you must
precede the single quotation mark with another single quotation mark.
For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00', for example,
TIMESTAMP'1993-06-20 11:24:00'.
To use wild-card characters with string values, use the LIKE operator. For
example, to retrieve all objects that have a value starting with B, choose the
LIKE operator and enter B%. Refer to the documentation for your database
software to see which wild-card characters are supported.
Add Condition
Add the condition line to the Current SQL Condition list.
The new line is added to the bottom of the list. If any line in the list is
selected, the new line is added above it.
Update
Update the selected condition in the Current SQL Condition list.
Other Controls
Link template list
Select the link template that specifies the table containing the data to use
for this query condition.
1604 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
This list displays only the link templates available in the source(s) you are
querying. For example, if you are querying source (attached) drawings, the
list will display only the link templates in your source drawings. If you are
querying the current drawing, the list will display only the link templates
in the current drawing.
You can query only one link template in a SQL condition. To query a
different link template, create a new SQL condition.
History
Display the SQL Condition History dialog box on page 1601, where you select
from a list of SQL conditions you've previously added.
Type It
Display the Type SQL Condition dialog box on page 1605, where you type
your SQL condition.
Type SQL Condition dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create or modify a SQL condition, if you are familiar
with SQL.
To retrieve drawing objects based on linked SQL data on page 1038
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Define Query.
History
To modify a condition you've used previously, select it in from the list. The
condition is copied to the Enter SQL Condition area, where you can modify
it.
Link Template
Select the link template that specifies the table to use with this condition.
The SQL condition tests information linked from this table to the queried
objects. Because queries apply only to objects in active source drawing, this
list displays only link templates in your source drawings.
Type SQL Condition dialog box | 1605
Enter SQL Condition
To create a new condition, type it in the box.
SQL Condition Syntax
SQL has a strict grammatical structure and syntax. Here are some rules to
follow when you define SQL statements.
■Character values (data type CHAR) must be enclosed in single quotation
marks ('XXX').
■If the column has a data type of string or data, enclose the column name
in double quotes. If the column has a numeric data type, do not enclose
the column name in double quotes.
■Database values are case sensitive, but field (column) names are not.
■Do not end each statement with a semicolon (;) as in standard SQL syntax.
■For dates, use the format TIMESTAMP'YYYY-MM-DD 00:00:00'. For example:
"DATE">TIMESTAMP'1993-06-20 11:24:00'
■Do not use AutoCAD Map 3D or DOS wild cards such as * or ? as part of
column values or names.
■Do not use SQL keywords as identifiers. Examples of keywords are SQL
commands and data types such as CHAR, GROUP, SQL, TABLE, USER,
SECTION, BY, and CURRENT. Examples of identifiers are table and column
names. For example, if you try to create a table with a column name of
CURRENT, AutoCAD Map 3D displays an error message.
AutoCAD Map 3D supports standard SQL syntax as formally defined in the
ANSI X3.135-1989 SQL standard.
1606 | Chapter 33 Query Dialog Boxes
Raster Image Dialog
Boxes
MAPIFRAME (Image Frame command)
Use this command to turn on or off the display of frames.
To display image frames on page 426
Image Correlation dialog box
Use this dialog box to correlate an image within the drawing when you insert
it.
To insert a raster image on page 391
To correlate an image during insertion on page 395
Click Create ➤ Insert an Image.
The Source tab displays correlation information from the selected correlation
source. The Insertion tab shows how these settings apply to the current drawing.
34
1607
Correlation Source list
You can select a correlation source for the image from this list. For example,
if a resource or world file exists for the image, then it is displayed in this
list.
Insertion Point area
Contains the insertion point (X, Y, and Z coordinates) for the lower-left
corner of the image frame. On the Source tab, this information is in the
units specified in the Units area at the bottom of the tab. On the Insertion
tab, this information is in current drawing units.
Rotation box
Contains the amount of rotation in current drawing angle units for the
image. This value uses the lower-left corner as the base point.
Scale box
Contains a scale factor for the image. A scale factor > 1 enlarges the image,
while a scale factor
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
Density box
Displays the dots (or pixels) per unit for the image.
Units list
Select the units for the insertion point and density from this list. For
example, if your image was scanned at 300 dpi, then select Inches as the
unit.
Apply
Click Apply to secure the changes you have made to the insertion point,
rotation, scale, and frame color.
Pick <
Click Pick (on the Insertion tab) to draw a frame for the image. For more
information, see To manually adjust the image frame during insertion on
page 396.
Frame Color box
Displays the current color for the image frame and for the foreground of a
bitonal image. Usually, this is the current AutoCAD Map 3D color. However,
when you insert a bitonal image, AutoCAD Map 3D first looks for the
foreground color in the image header file or in a resource file. If it cannot
find the color information, then the foreground color defaults to the current
AutoCAD Map 3D color. To change the color, click Select (on the Insertion
tab).
1608 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Image Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to view data about the selected images in your drawing.
To display the Image Management dialog box on page 405
Click View ➤ Imaging Tools ➤ Information.
File area
Displays the image name, where the image is stored, the file type, size, and
date that it was created and modified.
Image area
Displays the image density, depth, width, height, and color type.
Object area
Displays the linetype and layer of the image frame.
Correlation area
Displays the insertion point, scale, and rotation of the selected image.
NOTE If you select more than one image, and the information varies for different
images, then varies is displayed.
Image Management dialog box
Use this dialog box to view information about images in your drawing.
To display the Image Management dialog box on page 405
Managing Raster Images on page 404
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Image Information dialog box | 1609
The Image Management dialog box displays the names of the images that are
inserted into the drawing, the current display order, and other image
information. Each image that is in your drawing, even if it is unnamed or a
copy, is listed in this dialog box. To indicate copies, the dialog box numbers
them in the following format: imagename:1, imagename:2.
The images are listed in display order. The image at the top of the list is
displayed on top and drawn last. You can modify the image display order by
clicking an image name and dragging it up or down in the list.
Image
The name of the image file.
File
The full path name for the image file.
Layer
The layer on which the image is located.
Created
The date that the file was created.
Density
Dots per inch that the image was scanned at. Synonymous with resolution.
Depth
Every pixel of an image has information associated with it that defines its
color. The amount of information stored with each pixel is referred to as
depth. The more information that is stored with each bit, the greater the
number of colors that can be represented.
Type
The format type of the image.
Visible
The display status of the image.
Last Modified
The date that the image was last modified.
File Size
The file size of the image in bytes.
1610 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Layout
Click Layout to display the Image Management Layout dialog box on page
1611, where you can determine which topic columns are displayed and in
what order they are displayed in the Image Management dialog box.
To view additional information about an image, select the image and
right-click. Click Information to display the Image Information dialog box.
NOTE You can change the size and position of this dialog box. Any changes you
make will be retained in future sessions.
Image Management Layout dialog box
Use this dialog box to control which topic columns are displayed and the
order in which they are displayed in the Image Management dialog box.
Managing Raster Images on page 404
Click Setup ➤ Image Management.
Image Topics list
Select or clear the check box next to a topic to display or remove that topic
column. You can also change the order of the topic columns by dragging
a selected topic up or down.
Description area
Provides a brief description of the selected topic in the Image Topics list.
Image Select dialog box
Use this dialog box to control the selection of multiple images in your drawing.
To select an image by pressing Shift + left-click on page 424
Image Management Layout dialog box | 1611
Click Create ➤ Insert an Image.
You can select images by placing your cursor over them and pressing Shift +
left-click. If you select more than one image, the Image Select dialog box is
displayed.
List of images
Lists each image that you have inserted into the drawing. Each image that
is currently selected is highlighted. Click an image name to select or deselect
it.
Select All
Click to select all the images in your drawing.
Select None
Click to remove all selected images from the selection set.
Insert Image dialog box
Use this dialog box to insert raster images whose formats are not supported
by Data Connect.
To insert a raster image on page 391
Click Create ➤ Insert an Image.
You can select one or more images to insert into a drawing. You can view
information about an image and preview the image before you insert it.
NOTE If the FILEDIA variable is set to 0, then this dialog box is not displayed and
you can type the name of the image to insert on the command line.
Look In
Select the drive and folder (or directory) that contains the image.
1612 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
File Name
Type or select the name of the image or images to insert.
Files Of Type
From the list of available image formats, select the type of file that you want
to display in the list.
Show Frame(s) Only
Select this option to insert only a frame placeholder for the image. The
image is not loaded into memory and not displayed. This is useful if you
are inserting a group of images and don't want to wait for each image to
display. (To display the image later, select the image frame. Right-click the
image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show Image.)
If this option is not selected, the image is loaded into memory and displayed
as it is inserted.
Modify Correlation
Select this option to display the Image Correlation dialog box on page 1607
when you click Open. The Image Correlation dialog box lets you review
and modify the correlation settings for the image. This option is not
available if multiple images are selected. If you do not select this option,
the image is inserted using its default correlation settings. Default settings
are determined by searching for correlation data in the following order.
1World file
2Resource file (.res extension)
3Tab files (.tab extension)
4Image file
5Defaults set in the Raster Extension Options dialog box
Information >>
Click this to display information about the image file and preview the image.
Insert Image dialog box | 1613
Raster Extension Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to configure options for raster images you insert with the
Insert An Image dialog box.
Setting Raster Image Options on page 226
Click Setup ➤ Raster Options.
Configure raster image options using the following tabs:
Paths
Use the Paths tab to set the directory for resource files. Resource files store
information about an image’s insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
Resource files have the same base name as the raster image with an .res
extension.
Resource File Directory
The directory where AutoCAD Map 3D searches for resource files. Click [...]
to locate a directory. Note that this directory applies only to resource (.res)
files and not to other correlation sources.
When you insert an image, AutoCAD Map 3D looks in the Resource File
Directory path to see if there is a resource file associated with the image. If
it locates a resource file, then you can select this file as the source of
correlation information. If you leave the resource file path blank, then
AutoCAD Map 3D searches the directory or directories from where the
images were inserted.
Use Resource File Directory Before Using Image Directory
Informs AutoCAD Map 3D to search for resource files in the resource file
directory before searching the image path stored in the drawing.
General
Use the General tab to set how frames are displayed, the display quality of
images, image detach options, and the Shift + left-click setting.
1614 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Display Preferences
Image Frame list
Use this list to specify how AutoCAD Map 3D displays the image frames in
your drawing. You can hide the frames by selecting Frames Off, you can
have the frames appear in front of the images by selecting Frame Drawn
Above Image, or you can have the frames drawn behind the images by
selecting Frame Drawn Below Image.
Display Quality High
This option dithers the pixels onscreen so that the changes between shades
and colors appears more gradual. This setting is recommended for color
and grayscale images.
Display Quality Draft option
This option does not dither the pixels. This setting is recommended for
bitonal images.
Image Detach Preferences
Ask Before Detach
Select this option to be prompted to detach an image if there are no more
frames in the drawing that reference the image.
Always Detach
Select this option if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to automatically detach
an image when you erase the image frames.
Never Detach
Select this option if you want AutoCAD Map 3D to keep the image attached,
even if you erase the frames.
Shift + Left Click
Shift + Left Click Image Select
Select to be able to select images by placing your cursor over them and
clicking the left mouse button while pressing Shift. This feature is very
useful when you are zoomed in to the image and you cannot see the image
frame.
Image Defaults
Use the Image Defaults tab to set correlation defaults. Most images have
correlation data that is stored in the image file header, or in a resource file,
World file, or tab file. However, some images may not have any correlation
data. For those cases, you can specify default correlation data. In addition, if
Raster Extension Options dialog box | 1615
the correlation source does not include information on the scale or the density,
AutoCAD Map 3D uses the default values on this tab when inserting the image.
TIP Setting the correlation defaults can save you time if you have multiple images
that require the same insertion point, scale, rotation, and density.
Insertion Values
X
Enter the default AutoCAD Map 3D X coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Y
Enter the default AutoCAD Map 3D Y coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Z
Enter the default AutoCAD Map 3D Z coordinate to define the lower-left
corner of images.
Rotation
Enter a default rotation for images.
Scale
Enter a default numeric scaling factor for images.
For example, to make the image twice as large, type 2 in the Scale box.
Density
Density
Type a default density (or resolution) for images. You should set the this
value to the most common density value at which your images are scanned.
Insertion Point and Density Units list
Select the default insertion point and density units for the images. For
example, a common North American scanning resolution is 300 dpi (300
dots per inch). To set this value as your default density, type 300 in the
Density edit box and select inches as the Units. If you insert images that
have density value and density unit information stored in the correlation
source, then these defaults are not used.
For an illustration of how to set the density value and units for an image,
see Setting Image Density on page 398.
1616 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Memory
Use the Memory tab to specify the amount of memory (RAM) that AutoCAD
Map 3D can use for images before using a temporary swap file. You can also
define the location of the temporary swap file.
Temporary File Location
Temporary File Location
The location to use for your temporary swap file. Click [...] to locate a drive
and directory. AutoCAD Map 3D uses this temporary swap file when the
memory limit has been exceeded.
NOTE You must close and restart AutoCAD Map 3D for these settings to take
effect.
RAM Settings
Physical RAM
This value is the amount of physical RAM in your system.
Memory Limit
The amount of RAM that AutoCAD Map 3D will use before creating a swap
file.
NOTE Increasing the default amount may degrade your system’s performance.
Be sure to leave enough RAM for your operating system and other applications.
Default
Click to restore the memory setting to the default RAM amount, 25% of
the total physical memory.
MB, KB, and Bytes
The units (megabytes, kilobytes, or bytes) used for defining the Memory
Limit.
Transparency Color dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify the color that should appear transparent in the
image.
To make an image transparent on page 431
Transparency Color dialog box | 1617
Click Setup ➤ Raster Options.
Click Select and pick a color on the image. When transparency is turned on,
the selected color is transparent.
Setting transparency color is available only if the image is loaded and the
Raster Extension is loaded. To load the image, select the image, then right-click
the image frame ➤ Image ➤ Show Image. To load the Raster Extension,
choose a Raster Extension command.
NOTE The transparency color is stored in the drawing as an AutoCAD Map 3D
custom object. If you send the drawing to other users, they can see the
transparency color only by opening the drawing in AutoCAD Map 3D or Autodesk
Raster Design. If they open the drawing in AutoCAD, they see a message that
AutoCAD cannot reference the custom object and will not display the transparent
color.
1618 | Chapter 34 Raster Image Dialog Boxes
Saving Objects Dialog
Boxes
ADEREMOBJS (Remove Objects from Save Set command)
Use this command to unlock selected locked objects in the current drawing and
remove them from the save set.
To remove objects from the save set and unlock the objects on page 631
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Remove Items from Save Set.
Respond to the prompts:
Erased/<Select>:
Enter e to remove all objects that have been erased from the current drawing.
Enter s or press Enter to select individual objects.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method to select the objects to unlock and remove
from the save set. Press Enter when you finish.
Press Enter to confirm.
35
1619
Objects that are locked in their source drawings are unlocked so that other
users can edit them. They are removed from the list to be saved back to source
drawings.
Any changes made to the objects in the current drawing still exist in the
drawing. To save these changes to a new file, click File menu ➤ Save As.
Objects that were erased from the current drawing remain erased from the
drawing, but they will not be erased from source drawings.
ADESELOBJS (Select Objects for Save Back command)
Use this command to add objects the save set and lock the objects.
To add objects to the save set and lock the objects on page 624
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Add Items to Save Set.
If object locking is on, adding an object to the save set locks the object to
prevent anyone else from editing it while you are using it. When an object is
locked, other users can view it, but they cannot edit it.
Respond to the prompts:
Add objects to save set: Select/<allNew>:
Enter s to individually select objects, or press Enter to add all objects created
since opening the current drawing.
Select objects:
Use an object selection method.
If you plan to edit more than one object, lock them all at the start of your
editing session. That way, no other users can modify or lock them before you
get to them.
If an object is on a locked layer in the source drawing, you cannot add it to
the save set. If you are working in paper space, you cannot add objects to the
save set.
1620 | Chapter 35 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes
Objects in the save set are saved to source drawings when you use the Save
Objects to Source Drawings dialog box on page 1621 command.
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command)
Use this command to highlight all objects in the current drawing that are
marked to be saved to source drawings.
To view objects in the save set on page 625
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Show Items in Drawing Save Set.
To remove the highlighting, press Enter.
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog box
Use this dialog box to save the objects that are currently in the save set back
to source drawings.
To save queried objects back to attached source drawings on page 626
Click File ➤ Save Source Drawing Save Set.
If you are saving new objects, specify the source drawings to save objects to
and the method used to save objects. Queried objects are saved back to their
original layer in their original source drawing.
You must have Edit Drawing privileges to save objects to source drawings. See
the User Administration dialog box on page 1653.
ADESHOWOBJS (Show Objects in Save Set command) | 1621
Status area
Lists the number of queried objects and the number of newly created objects
that are in the save set.
Save Queried Objects
Select this option to save queried objects to source drawings. Queried objects
are saved back to their original layer in their original source drawing.
If you have redefined a block, layer, or text style definition and you want
to save the new definition, be sure the option to save the definition is
selected on the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on
page 1628.
Save Newly Created Objects
Select this option to save objects created in the current drawing to source
drawings.
Under Save Order For Newly Created Objects, specify the source drawings
to save objects to and the method used to save objects.
Save Order for Newly Created Objects
Specify the method to use when saving objects created in the current drawing.
Objects are saved by the first method that applies to them.
Area
Saves objects to the first source drawing in the list within whose boundary
they lie. This is useful for tiled drawings. This method does not save objects
outside the boundary of the source drawings.
You can specify the drawing boundary by setting save back extents in the
Drawing Settings dialog box on page 1642. If no save back extents are set, the
drawing extents are used as the boundary. If an object lies partially outside
the save back extents, the drawing extents are modified to include the
object, but the save back extents are not changed.
Layer
Saves objects to the first source drawing in the list that includes a layer of
the same name as the layer the object is on in the current drawing. This is
useful for stacked drawings. This method does not save objects on layers in
the current drawing that have no corresponding layer in the source drawings.
Selective
Prompts you to choose which objects to save and which drawings to save
them in. Objects are saved to the same layer as they are on in the current
drawing. If the source drawing does not have a layer of the same name, one
is created. This method applies to all objects, so you cannot specify other
save back methods after this one.
1622 | Chapter 35 Saving Objects Dialog Boxes
Drawings to Save New Objects to list
Specify which drawings to save objects to. If you use the Selective method,
AutoCAD Map 3D prompts for the objects to save to each selected drawing.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box on page 1642, you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Who Has It Information dialog box
Use this dialog box to find out who has an object locked, what source drawing
and current drawing it comes from, and the date and time it was locked.
To find out who has an object locked on page 609
Click File ➤ Drawing Save Set Options ➤ Who Has It?.
Who Has It Information dialog box | 1623
1624
Setting Map Options
Dialog Boxes
MAPABOUT (About AutoCAD Map 3D command)
Use this command to display the About AutoCAD Map 3D screen, which shows
the version number and date of AutoCAD Map 3D.
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT
Use this command to specify whether or not features are automatically checked
out when edited.
To check out features automatically on page 584
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT
36
1625
MAPDOCKWSPACE (Dock Task Pane command)
Use this command to dock or undock the Task Pane.
To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 196
Double-click the title bar (floating) or the double bar at the top of the pane
(docked).
MAPEDITSETAUTO
Use this command to specify whether or not edits to features are automatically
reflected in the feature source.
To update edits automatically on page 587
MAPEDITSETAUTO
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS
Use this command to specify whether features are checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects or as geospatial features.
To check out features on page 584
Feature Editing Options dialog box on page 1648
1626 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
This setting determines the way you work with your data.
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use some common ACAD
editing commands in addition to geospa-
Allows you to use many common ACAD
editing commands
tial feature-specific editing commands (for
example, MAPFEATURESPLIT on page 1389
and MAPFEATUREMERGE on page 1388)
Edited features are represented as geospa-
tial geometries (for example, MAPPOLY-
GONS).
Edited features represented as AutoCAD
geometries (for example, closed polylines
are used to represent polygonal features)
Supports multipart (multipolygons, mul-
tilines, and multipoints) geospatial features
and editing, such as the Hawaiian islands.
Most existing custom or third-party editing
applications (LISP, VB or ObjectARX)
should continue to work. Some may re-
quire minor updates.
Preserves and allows you to edit M and Z
values.
Some existing AutoCAD Map 3D editing
commands will continue to work on fea-
tures (for example, rubbersheeting [ADER-
SHEET on page 1386]).
Allows you to use feature styling.Allows you to use feature styling.
MAPWSFOCUS
Use this command to set the keyboard or mouse focus to the Task Pane. You
can also set the focus by clicking in the Task Pane.
To return the focus to the command line, press ESC or click in the command
line area. Whenever you return to AutoCAD Map 3D after using another
application, the focus is reset to the command line.
MAPWSFOCUS | 1627
MAPWSPACE (Task Pane command)
Use this command to hide or show the Task Pane.
To hide or display the Task Pane within your current session on page 200
Click View menu ➤ Task Pane.
MAPWSREFRESH
Use this command to refresh the Task Pane. This is sometimes necessary if
Map Explorer does not reflect your recent changes to the drawing or if the
icons in the Display Manager need to be refreshed.
To refresh Map Explorer on page 200
Right-click a clear area in Map Explorer, and click Refresh.
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box
Use this dialog box to define options for the Task Pane, drawings, queries,
save options, data sources, coordinate systems, and the system.
To use the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 196
1628 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Click Setup ➤ AutoCAD Map Options.
Task Pane on page 1629
Current Drawing on page 1629
Query on page 1631
Save Back on page 1633
Data Source on page 1634
Multi-User on page 1635
System on page 1635
Coordinate Systems tab on page 1636
Task Pane
Specify Task Pane options.
Map Explorer Categories To Display
Select the categories to display in Map Explorer. When you turn off the
display of the category, all functionality associated with the category is still
available.
TIP To reduce screen clutter, turn off the display of categories you don’t use.
These settings are user-specific and will affect any drawing that you open.
These settings will take effect the next time you start AutoCAD Map 3D.
Show Task Pane on startup
If the Task Pane is hidden, you can display it by entering mapwspace at the
command prompt.
Show Properties Palette on startup
If the Properties palette, is hidden, you can display it by entering properties
at the command prompt.
Current Drawing
Specify options for attached drawings, coordinate transformations, and
drawing-specific data sources.
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1629
Activate Attached Drawings
Specifies the default active/inactive status for drawings you attach to the
current drawing and whether the active status is saved with the current
drawing.
Coordinate Transformation Adjustments
Specifies how you want AutoCAD Map 3D to perform coordinate
transformations.
Adjust Sizes And Scales - For Changes In Units
Specifies whether the units used in the coordinate system of an attached
drawing are scaled to the units used in the coordinate system of the current
drawing.
For example, if an attached drawing uses meters and the current drawing
uses U.S. Survey Feet, you can scale text and blocks so that their size or scale
measures in feet rather than meters.
If you don't set the For Changes In Units option, AutoCAD Map 3D doesn't
size or scale text and block objects. In that case, a block that is five meters
long in an attached drawing will be five feet long when you bring it into
the current drawing.
Do not change this setting after you bring objects into the current drawing,
or you may introduce unintended changes to text and blocks when you
save them back to their source drawings.
Adjust Sizes And Scales - For Map Distortion
Adjusts the size and scale of text and blocks to correct for map distortion
introduced when you represent a spherical object (earth) in a Cartesian
coordinate system.
For example, two objects, located at the northern and southern extremes
of a map, of equal length in coordinate system X will remain the same
length when transformed to coordinate system Y.
If you don't select this option, the two objects will be scaled to different
lengths in coordinate system Y according to the relative map distortion (or
grid scale factor).
This option is not available if For Changes In Units under Adjust Sizes And
Scales is not selected.
Adjust Rotations - For Map Distortion
Adjusts the angle of text and blocks to correct for map distortion due to the
convergence angle (the deviation of the Y axis of a Cartesian coordinate
system from true north).
1630 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Adjust Rotations - For Zero-Rotation Objects
Specifies that text and blocks that have a rotation value of zero in the source
drawing are adjusted to correct distortion due to the convergence angle
(the deviation of the Y axis of a Cartesian coordinate system from true
north).
If you set this option, AutoCAD Map 3D calculates the convergence angle
for text and blocks with a zero rotation value. If you don't set this option,
AutoCAD Map 3D does not rotate text and blocks with a zero rotation value
even if there is a convergence angle.
This option is not available if For Map Distortion under Adjust Rotations
is not selected.
Adjust Elevations
Adjusts the elevation (Z axis) of objects when you select For Changes In
Units and For Map Distortion under Adjust Sizes and Scales.
Data Source Options
Specifies drawing-specific data source options.
Number Of SQL Conditions To Keep In History List
Specifies the maximum number of SQL conditions that are stored in the
SQL Condition History dialog box and in the Table Filter History dialog
box. Once the history list is full, the oldest, or first added, condition is
removed from the list to make room for a new condition. If memory is
limited on your system, keep this number low.
Query
Query Options
Use the Query tab to specify query options and default settings for queries.
Save Current Query With Drawing
Saves the current query definition with the current drawing, even if you
have not saved the query. When you next open this drawing, the query
loads as the current query definition.
Use Case Sensitivity When Matching Text Values
Specifies whether text values in Property Condition queries must match
the case used in the query definition.
Create Selection Set From Queried Objects
Specifies whether the selection set contains the items retrieved by the query.
To use this selection set when editing, enter p (to use the previous selection
set) when prompted to select objects. (Note that as soon as you select other
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1631
objects, AutoCAD Map 3D clears this selection set and replaces it with your
new selection.)
If your query finds a large number of objects, this feature can take time. If
you do not need to put the objects into a selection set, clear this check box
to save time during queries.
Create Associative Hatch Objects
Specifies whether AutoCAD Map 3D creates associative hatch objects for
hatch objects created by the ADEFILLPOLYG, ADEQUERY (using alter
properties), MAPTOPOQUERY, and MAPTHEMATIC (using fill) commands.
If this box is not selected, hatch objects created by these commands are
nonassociative hatch objects.
Preview Queries
Specifies options to use when displaying blocks and raster images in Preview
Query mode.
Show Insertion Point Only
Specifies whether to show only the insertion point of inserted blocks in a
Preview query and not the objects. An insertion point is represented as an
X.
Show Image Clipping Boundary Only
Specifies whether a Preview query displays only the clipping boundary of
raster images.
Preview Definitions From
Specifies the location to use for definitions of layers, linetypes, blocks, etc.
when running a query in Preview mode.
Select Current to speed up the preview, though some items may not display
exactly as they will when the query is executed in Draw mode.
Location Queries
Specifies options to use when creating Location queries.
Boundary Color For And/Or Conditions
Specifies the boundary color for And and Or conditions when you edit a
Location query and click Show.
Boundary Color For Not Conditions
Specifies the boundary color for Not conditions when you edit a Location
query and click Show.
1632 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Reference Entire Bounding Area For Objects
Specifies whether Location queries reference the entire bounding area of
hatch, solid, and raster objects or only the bounding edge. (The bounding
edge for raster objects is the clipping boundary.)
When you select this option, a hatch boundary is treated as an area. If the
query location is on any part of the hatch object, even if it touches only a
hatch boundary, the whole hatch object (the hatch and the hatch boundary)
is included in the selection.
When you clear this option, the hatch boundary is treated as an edge. The
query location must intersect or enclose the boundary edge of the hatch
object to include the object in the selection. If the query selects only the
space inside the hatch area, but not the hatch boundary, the hatch object
(the hatch and the hatch boundary) is not selected.
This setting affects the ADEQUERY, MAPTOPOQUERY, and MAPTHEMATIC
commands.
Determine Block Locations Using
Specifies whether AutoCAD Map 3D uses the block's insertion point or its
bounding box as its location to determine whether a block meets a Location
condition.
Determine Text Locations Using
Specifies whether AutoCAD Map 3D uses the text's insertion point or its
bounding box as its location to determine whether text meets a Location
condition.
Default Joining Operator
Specifies the default joining operator to use in the Define Query dialog box.
And
Specifies that both conditions must be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Or
Specifies that either condition can be met for the object to be included in
the query.
Save Back
Use the Save Back tab to specify options for saving queried objects back to
attached drawings.
Save Set
Specifies options for adding objects to the save set.
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1633
Save Back To Source Drawings
Specifies the behavior of objects when you save them back to their source
drawings.
Redefine Block Definitions On Save Back
Saves changes to block definitions back to attached drawings.
Redefine Layer Definitions On Save Back
Saves changes to layer definitions back to attached drawings.
Redefine Text Style Definitions On Save Back
Saves changes to text style definitions back to attached drawings.
Create History File Of Changes
Creates a file of all changes made to each source drawing. The history file
has the same name as the source drawing file, but has the extension .hst.
Create Backup File Of Source Drawing
Creates a back up file of attached drawings before saving changes. Backup
drawing files have the extension .bak.
Data Source
Display Of Multiple Tables
Use the Data Source tab to specify options for Data View behavior, data source
path name display, and database file associations. These settings apply to
attribute tables
Specifies the number of Data Views to use when displaying tables.
Show Each Table In A Separate Data View
Opens a new Data View window for each open table. Move between tables
by clicking on the window you want.
Show All Tables In One Data View
Opens only one Data View window. When you open a new table, the
previous table is automatically closed.
Data Views
Specifies the behavior of the Data View.
Open In Read-Only Mode
Opens the Data View in read-only mode. When this option is selected, you
cannot edit data in the Data View.
1634 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Save Format And Style Changes With Drawing
Saves all formatting changes, such as column width, font, color, or borders,
that you make in the Data View.
Keep On Top
Specifies whether the Data View window remains on top of all other
windows, even when it is not the active window.
Associate Database Versions With File Extensions
Click Associate to display the Associate Database Versions dialog box where
you specify the database version to use for each database file extension.
When you drop a database file on the Map Explorer tab, AutoCAD Map 3D
checks the file extension and uses the specified version of the database
software.
Default Provider For Microsoft Access Databases
Select the default driver to use when you drop an MDB file onto the Map
Explorer tab.
Multi-User
Multi-User Options
Use the Multi-User tab to specify options for user login and object locking.
You must have Superuser privileges to modify multi-user options.
Specifies options that apply to all users in a multi-user environment.
Force User Login
Requires users to log in before using AutoCAD Map 3D.
Enable Object Locking
Locks objects that are selected for the save set. If an object is locked, other
AutoCAD Map 3D users can view it, but cannot edit it.
If an AutoCAD user does not have AutoCAD Map 3D, they cannot open a
drawing that an AutoCAD Map 3D user has open.
You cannot disable object locking while drawings are active.
System
Log File Options
Use the System tab to specify system settings.
Log files keep track of error messages and other AutoCAD Map 3D system
messages. If the log file is active, it is updated each time you use AutoCAD
Map 3D. To save space on your disk, you can delete or archive the log file and
start a new one.
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box | 1635
Log File Active
Stores error messages and other AutoCAD Map 3D system messages in the
log file.
Log File Name
Specifies a name for the log file. Click Browse to search through existing
names or to change the drive or directory. If you don't specify a name,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates the acadmap.log file in the current directory.
Message Level
Specifies which kind of error messages to store in the log file.
Number Of Drawings Loaded In Memory At Once
Specifies the number of drawings that AutoCAD Map 3D can have open in
memory at the same time. This number does not limit the number of active
drawings. AutoCAD Map 3D opens and closes files in memory as it needs
them.
If your system has a lot of memory, you can enter a larger number (up to
200) to make queries go faster.
Default Query File Directory
Specifies the default directory for queries saved to external files.
Default Cache File Directory
Specifies the default directory where your cache files are stored. Click Clear
Cache to enhance performance of AutoCAD Map 3D.
Coordinate Systems tab
Coordinate System Definitions Stored In Drawing
Specifies the program behavior when opening drawings that contain coordinate
system definitions. For more information about coordinate systems, see
Assigning Coordinate Systems on page ?.
Ignore Definitions
Specifies that the program will ignore coordinate system definitions when
opening drawing files.
Prompt User To Add Definitions to Dictionaries
Specifies that the program will prompt you for action when opening drawing
files that contain coordinate system definitions.
1636 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Automatically Add Definitions To Dictionary
Specifies that, when opening drawing files that contain coordinate system
definitions, the program will automatically add the coordinate system
definitions from the drawing file to your coordinate system dictionary.
Geodetic Distance
Units For Display
Specifies the units to use to display geodetic distances.
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify settings to use with the Coordinate Geometry
features.
To set coordinate geometry options on page 211
At the Command prompt, enter mapcgsetup.
Set North Direction
Direction From Y Axis If North on your map is not on the Y axis, specify
the direction from the Y axis to North on your map. Enter a number that
represents the angular distance measured clockwise from the Y axis.
Note that this option sets the ANGBASE system variable.
Azimuth Measurements
Define Bearings Relative To North Select this option if bearings in
your map are relative to North.
Define Bearings Relative to South Select this option if bearings in your
map are relative to South. This is most often the case for maps of the
southern hemisphere.
Elevation Settings
Prompt For 3D Data Input Select this option to have AutoCAD Map
3D always prompt for 3D data, such as elevation, grade, or slope. If this
option is not selected, all elevations are assumed to be 0.
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog box | 1637
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box
Use this dialog to define or modify the drawing set for the current drawing.
Attach drawings that you will use with the current drawing. Activate only
those drawings you want to search for the current query.
To attach drawings on page 144
Click Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
In addition, you can change drawing settings such as description, simple
transformation, or save back extents.
AutoCAD Map 3D stores the changes you make to the drawing set with the
current drawing. The next time you open this drawing, your new settings will
be in effect.
Attached Drawings list
Lists all drawings attached to the current drawing.
The first column specifies if the drawing is active. Only active drawings are
searched during queries.
■Yes indicates the drawing is active.
■Locked indicates the drawing is inactive, and you have locks on objects
in the drawing.
■No indicates the drawing is inactive.
If the drawing has a description assigned to it, that description appears in
the list instead of the file name. For information on how to assign a
description to a drawing, see Drawing Settings Dialog Box.
Activate
Activate all selected drawings.
Queries search only active drawings; they do not search inactive drawings.
Deactivate
Deactivate all selected drawings.
1638 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Queries do not search deactivated drawings. Queries search only active
drawings.
If you deactivate a drawing that contains objects you've locked, the status
of the drawing changes to Locked.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Drawing Settings
Display the Drawing Settings dialog box on page 1642, where you can change
the drawing description, simple transformation settings, or save back extents.
Show Nested
When selected, the Attached Drawings list displays nested drawings attached
to active drawings. Nested drawings attached to inactive drawings are not
displayed.
If a drawing has nested drawings, a plus sign (+) appears before the drawing
name.
A nested drawing is a drawing that is not attached directly to the current
drawing, but is attached to a drawing in the drawing set.
When not selected, only top-level drawings appear in the Attached Drawings
list.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box on page 1642, you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Attach
Display the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box on page 1545, where you
can attach additional source drawings to the current drawing.
To attach drawings to a source drawing, open the source drawing directly,
and then attach the drawings. To open the source drawing, click File menu
➤ Open.
Detach
Detach the selected drawings from the current drawing.
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog box | 1639
If you detach a parent drawing, all nested drawings attached to that drawing
are also detached.
Drawing Maintenance dialog box
Use this dialog box to remove locks from drawings and create drawing indexes.
To create a drawing index on page 1077
To release all locked objects on page 610
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance.
Use the options in the Active Drawings area to see which drawings currently
have locks.
Use the options in the Locks area to see which users have objects locked, and
to remove those locks. This feature is particularly useful if a user's system goes
down while objects are locked.
To display information in the Locks area, click User List.
Active Drawings
Use this area to see which drawings currently have locks.
Active Drawings list
Lists all attached active drawings for the current drawing.
■To display information about locked objects in a drawing, select the
drawing in the list. Click User List. The area at the bottom of the screen
updates to show the names of users who have locks on objects in the
drawing, and the number of objects they have locked.
■To update indexes for a drawing, select the drawing in the list. Click
Drawing Index.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
1640 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box on page 1642, you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Drawings Index
Displays the Index Maintenance dialog box on page 1650, where you can
specify which types of indexes to create for the selected drawings.
User List
Update the display of users that have locks on objects in source drawings.
Locks
Use this area to see which users have objects locked, and to remove those
locks. This feature is particularly useful if a user's system goes down while
objects are locked.
To display information in this area, click User List.
User Name list
Lists all users who have locks on objects in the selected drawings. The
Number Of Objects Locked column shows how many locked objects each
user has.
To update this list, select an active drawing. Click User List.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Remove Locks
Unlock objects locked by the selected users. Be careful not to unlock objects
that other users are currently editing, as this may cause work to be lost.
Only Superusers can remove locks for other users.
Drawing Maintenance dialog box | 1641
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify separate filters for file names and for descriptions.
To attach drawings on page 144
Click Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
Filters can include wild-card characters:
Asterisk (*) can represent any set of letters.
Question mark (?) can represent any single letter.
For example, if you enter *\ch* in the file name filter field, the drawing list
displays all file names that start with the letters ch in all directories.
To display drawings in a specific directory, enter the path to that directory.
For example, enter c:\office1\* to view all drawings in the office1 directory.
When specifying drives, use the drive aliases assigned in the Drive Alias
Administration dialog box on page 1647
Nested drawings are also filtered. If the parent drawing is filtered out, none
of its nested drawings appear in the list. If the parent drawing appears in the
list, the filter applies to the nested drawings.
To display all drawings, enter *\*.dwg in the File Name box. To display all
descriptions, enter * in the Description box.
Drawing Settings dialog box
Use this dialog box to change the drawing description, specify simple
transformation settings, or define save back extents.
To modify drawing settings on page 153
1642 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Click Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
To change a drawing's settings, select the drawing in the list. Enter the new
information in the fields in the dialog box. When you finish, click Apply. You
can then select a new drawing.
Specify the transformation of objects in the source drawing as they are brought
into the current drawing. AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the
current drawing. The source drawing does not change. This feature is useful
if you want to overlay drawings or tile them.
Active Drawings list
Select the drawing to change.
This list displays all the active drawings in the drawing set. If a coordinate
system code is assigned to the drawing, that code is displayed in the left
column.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box on page 1642, you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
Drawing Description box
Enter a new description for the selected drawing.
Descriptions make it easy for you to remember what is in a drawing. If a
description is assigned to the drawing, it appears in the drawing list instead
of the file name.
Simple Transformation area
Specify the transformation of objects in the source drawing as they are brought
into the current drawing. AutoCAD Map 3D stores this information with the
current drawing. The source drawing does not change. This feature is useful
if you want to overlay drawings or tile them.
Drawing Settings dialog box | 1643
If the document has a coordinate system code assigned to it, you cannot use
the simple transformation section.
When objects are saved back to their source drawings, their original scale,
offset, and rotation are restored. To permanently transform an object, use the
ADETRANSFORM (Transform command) on page 1387 command.
Simple Transformation
Turn the simple transformation settings on and off.
When not selected, the settings are not used.
If the document has a global coordinate system code assigned to it, you
cannot use the simple transformation option.
Simple transformations let you tile, scale, or overlay drawings.
Scale box
Specify the change in scale of objects from the source drawing to the current
drawing.
Enter a real number. For example, enter 2 to double the size of objects, or
enter .5 to halve the size of objects.
Rotation box
Specify the rotation of objects from the source drawing to the current
drawing.
Enter an angle. For example, enter 90 to rotate objects 90 degrees in the
current direction. (To view or change the current direction, open the source
drawing and use the DDUNITS command.)
Offset (X,Y) box
Specify the offset of objects from the source drawing to the current drawing.
1644 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Enter two real numbers (one for X and one for Y), separated by a comma.
For example, enter 5,-4 to offset objects 5 units to the right and 4 units
down. (To view or change the current unit, open the source drawing and
use the DDUNITS command.)
If you specify save back extents for the drawing, those extents are also offset.
Pick <
Display the drawing, where you can specify points to determine the scale,
rotation, and offset.
■The difference between the old base point and the new base point is the
offset for objects in the source drawing.
■The difference in angle between the two old points and the two new
points is the rotation. 0,0 is the base point for the rotation.
■The ratio of the length between the two new points to the length
between the two old points is the change in scale.
Save Back Extents area
Specify the area that is saved back to the source drawing. By specifying save
back extents, you can prevent boundaries from expanding and intruding on
the boundaries of adjacent drawings. These save back extents are stored with
the source drawing.
Save Back Extents list
Displays the coordinates of the current save back extents.
Define <
Display your drawing, where you can select points to specify the save back
extents.
NOTE This displays the current window. To view or change the extents for the
entire drawing, zoom to drawing extents before starting this command. To
zoom drawing extents, click View menu ➤ Extents.
Show <
Display the current save back extents in the current drawing. Save back
extents are indicated by a dotted line.
NOTE This shows only the extents displayed in the current window. To view
the extents for the entire drawing, zoom to drawing extents before starting this
command. To zoom drawing extents, click View menu ➤ Extents.
Drawing Settings dialog box | 1645
Reset
Reset the values to the original drawing extents adjusted for simple
transformations.
The default save back extents are the extents of the source drawing adjusted
for simple transformation.
Drawing Statistics dialog box
Use this dialog box to view information about the active source drawings in
the current drawing.
To view information about attached drawings on page 160
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Statistics.
Select the drawings you want information about. Click an information button.
AutoCAD Map 3D searches the selected source drawings and displays the
information in the box at the bottom of the screen.
Active Drawings list
Lists all the active attached drawings in the current drawing.
■Use the Select All to select all drawings.
■Use the Clear All to remove the highlighting from all items.
■Use the Filter to filter the list of drawings.
Filter
Select Filter to turn on the current drawing filter.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box on page 1642, you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
1646 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Object Counts
Displays the number and type of objects in the source drawing.
Symbol Tables
Displays symbol tables and their values for each of the selected drawings.
Symbol tables include Blocks, Layers, Linetypes, Text Styles, and Regapps,
which are registered applications that contain xdata (extended data) within
the drawing.
Object Data
For the selected drawings, this displays
■Link Templates
■Object Data tables
■Attributes
Feature Classes
Displays feature classes used in the selected drawings and the number of
features in each feature class.
Drive Alias Administration dialog box
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a drive alias for drive C. You must create drive aliases
for all other drives that you use.
To create a drive alias on page 150
Click Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
Drive aliases are useful as typing shortcuts or as a reminder of what drawings
are contained in the directory. In addition, they make it easy for multiple
users to share drawings.
The alias you assign appears in the Drive list whenever you select drawings.
To modify an existing drive alias, select it in the list, enter a new Actual Path,
and click Update.
Drive Alias Administration dialog box | 1647
To create a new drive alias, enter a new Drive Alias, enter an Actual Path, and
click Add.
Drive List
Lists aliases you've created.
Drive Alias box
Enter the alias to use.
The name must be unique, use only alphanumeric characters (including
hyphen and underscore), contain no spaces or colons, and start with a
character.
Actual Path box
Enter the path, including drive or server name and directories.
If you are not sure of the drive or directory, click Browse.
Note that xrefs and raster objects use their assigned paths and are not affected
by drive aliases.
Feature Editing Options dialog box
Use this dialog to set options for automatically checking out features and
updating feature sources, whether features are checked out as drawing objects
or geospatial features, and how often you are prompted to check in features.
To specify Feature Edit Options on page 217
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS on page 1626
Check out and Update Features
Specifies options for automatically checking out features and updating feature
source.
Automatically check out features when edited.
Specifies that features are automatically checked out when you edit them.
1648 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Automatically update data resources with edits
Specifies that edits to features are automatically reflected in the feature
source
Feature Checkout Options
Specifies whether features are checked out as drawing objects or geospatial
features.
AutoCAD Drawing Objects
Specifies that features are checked out as AutoCAD drawing objects.
NOTE Features checked out as AutoCAD drawing objects will be listed as custom
features when you use the LIST command. In addition, custom LISP applications
may not work with custom features.
Geospatial features
Specifies that features are checked out as geospatial features.
This setting determines the way you work with your data.
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use some common ACAD
editing commands in addition to geospa-
Allows you to use many common ACAD
editing commands
tial feature-specific editing commands (for
example, MAPFEATURESPLIT on page 1389
and MAPFEATUREMERGE on page 1388)
Edited features are represented as geospa-
tial geometries (for example, MAPPOLY-
GONS).
Edited features represented as AutoCAD
geometries (for example, closed polylines
are used to represent polygonal features)
Supports multipart (multipolygons, mul-
tilines, and multipoints) geospatial features
and editing, such as the Hawaiian islands.
Most existing custom or third-party editing
applications (LISP, VB or ObjectARX)
should continue to work. Some may re-
quire minor updates.
Preserves and allows you to edit M and Z
values.
Some existing AutoCAD Map 3D editing
commands will continue to work on fea-
tures (for example, rubbersheeting [ADER-
SHEET on page 1386]).
Feature Editing Options dialog box | 1649
Features checked out as geospatial
features
Features checked out as AutoCAD
drawing objects
Allows you to use feature styling.Allows you to use feature styling.
Other Options
Specifies whether or not you are prompted to check in features and how often.
Prompt To Check In Every
Specifies that you will be prompted to check in features at intervals of the
specified value.
Generate Object Data Index dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the tables and fields to include in the index.
To create a drawing index on page 1077
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance.
In the Object Data Tables list, select a table. In the Fields list, select the object
data fields to include in the index. If a table has fields selected for the index,
the table is checked in the list.
Index Maintenance dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which types of indexes to create for the selected
source drawings.
To create a drawing index on page 1077
1650 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance.
Indexes speed up queries, but they add to the size of your source drawings. If
size is an issue, create indexes for just the types of queries you perform most
often. For example, if you mostly perform queries based on location, create
just a location index.
■To create an index, select the check box for the type of index you want.
To create an object data index, click Object Data. At the Generate Object
Data Index dialog box on page 1650 select the tables and fields to index.
To improve the performance of object data and SQL queries, create object
data and SQL indexes for all drawings in the data set, even if they don't
contain object data or SQL link information.
■To remove an existing index, select the check box for that type of index.
To remove an object data index, click Object Data. At the Remove Object
Data Index dialog box on page 1652 select the tables and fields to remove
from the index.
Removing an index reduces the size of the drawing, and reduces the time
it takes to save the drawing.
Because indexes are saved in the source drawing, you can create indexes only
if the drawing is not in a read-only directory and you have Edit Drawing
privileges. See User Administration dialog box on page 1653.
Once you create an index, AutoCAD Map 3D automatically updates the index
each time you change the drawing and save the changes back. However, you
will need to recreate the index in the following circumstances:
■If you notice that queries are taking longer. Over time, automatic updates
can cause degeneration of an index. It is a good idea to periodically use
this command to recreate the indexes.
■If you modify a drawing with AutoCAD or with AutoCAD Map 3D when
the drawing is not attached, you need to use this command to recreate the
indexes.
Index Maintenance dialog box | 1651
NOTE To check if a source drawing has an index created, select the drawing in
the Drawing Maintenance dialog box. Click Drawing Index to display the Index
Maintenance dialog box. If the source drawing contains a usable index, the check
box for that index is not selected. If the drawing does not contain an index, or if
the index is out of date, the check box for the index is selected.
Remove Object Data Index dialog box
Use this dialog box to remove object data fields from an index.
To create a drawing index on page 1077
Click Setup ➤ More DWG Options ➤ Drawing Maintenance.
In the Object Data Tables list, select a table. In the Fields list, select the object
data fields to remove. If a table has fields selected to be removed from the
index, the table is checked in the list.
Select Alias dialog box
Use this dialog box to select the alias to use with this drawing.
To create a drive alias on page 150
Click Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
More than one alias is associated with the path to the file you selected. Select
the alias to use with this drawing
1652 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box
Use this dialog box to resolve problems with undefined drive aliases.
To attach drawings on page 144
Click Setup ➤ Define/Modify Drawing Set.
The drawing you are activating or attaching has an alias assigned to it that is
not defined.
■To attach this drawing without defining an alias, click Skip. You cannot
activate the drawing until you define a path for the alias. To define the
alias later, see To create a drive alias on page 150.
■To define a path for the alias now, click Define <.
User Administration dialog box
Use this dialog box to add or delete users or modify user settings
To add a new user on page 75
Click Setup ➤ User Administration.
Do any of the following:
■To add a user, enter information in the User Profile section. Click Add.
■To delete a user, select the name and click Delete.
■To modify a user, select the name and change information in the User
Profile section. Click Update.
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog box | 1653
User List
Lists all users set up for AutoCAD Map 3D.
Login Name box
Specify the login name for the user.
■Each login name must be unique.
■Login names are not case-sensitive.
■The login name cannot contain spaces or any of the following characters.
" / \ [ ] ; : | = , + ? < >
Password box
Specify the password for the user.
■Passwords are case-sensitive.
■Passwords cannot contain spaces.
For a new user, you might want to set the password to PASSWORD and
have the user change it to something they can remember.
To be effective, passwords should have a combination of letters and numbers,
and a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.
Privileges
Select privileges for the user.
Superuser
Select this option to let the user perform user administration tasks, set
system options, and perform any other AutoCAD Map 3D operation.
Alter Drawing Set
Select this option to let the user attach and detach drawings. If this option
is not selected, the user can activate and deactivate drawings, but cannot
attach and detach them.
Alter Feature Class
Select this option to let the user define and edit feature class definitions. If
this option is not selected, users can only assign feature classes and change
the current feature definition file.
Edit Drawing
Select this option to let the user edit objects and save them back to source
drawings. If this option is not selected, the user can edit objects but cannot
save them back to source drawings.
1654 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Draw Query
Select this option to let the user execute Draw mode queries, which copy
objects into the current drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do
Preview and Report mode queries only.
User Information dialog box
This dialog box displays information about the current AutoCAD Map 3D
user.
To add a new user on page 75
Click Setup ➤ User Administration.
To change your privileges, see your system administrator.
Login Name
Displays the name used to log in to AutoCAD Map 3D.
Privileges
Displays the privileges of the current user.
Superuser
User can perform user administration tasks, set system options, and perform
any other AutoCAD Map 3D operation.
Alter Drawing Set
User can attach and detach drawings. If this option is not selected, the user
can activate and deactivate drawings, but cannot attach and detach them.
Alter Feature Class
User can define and edit feature class definitions. If this option is not
selected, users can only assign feature classes and change the current feature
definition file.
User Information dialog box | 1655
Edit Drawing
User can edit objects and save them back to source drawings. If this option
is not selected, the user can edit objects but cannot save them back to source
drawings.
Draw Query
User can execute Draw mode queries, which copy objects into the current
drawing. If this option is not selected, users can do Preview and Report
mode queries only.
User Login dialog box
Log in to AutoCAD Map 3D on this computer. If you do not know your login
name or password, check with your system administrator
To log in to AutoCAD Map 3D on page 133
Click Setup ➤ User Login.
Some actions, such as modifying object data tables and removing locks for
other users, require Superuser access. To log in as a Superuser, enter the login
name Superuser. Enter the password SUPERUSER. In offices where the system
administrator reserves the Superuser login name, contact your system
administrator to gain access to object data tables, object locks, or system
options.
If user login is not required, you can log in at any time, even if you did not
log in at the beginning of your current AutoCAD Map 3D session. For example,
you can log in under your own name, or as a different user, while working in
a drawing with active source drawings.
1656 | Chapter 36 Setting Map Options Dialog Boxes
Topology Dialog Boxes
NOTE Topology functionality applies only to drawing objects.
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To edit the direction of a link on page 737
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology for which you want to modify direction. To
display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new value (Bi-directional/From->To/To->From)<B>:
Enter B for bi-directional, F for From->To, or T for To->From.
37
1657
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit the direct resistance of a selected link or node in
an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology
information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 739
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology for which you want to modify resistance.
To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Edit resistance of (Links/Nodes) <L>:
Enter L for Links or N for Nodes.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new direct resistance <1.000>:
Enter a new value.
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit the reverse resistance of a selected link an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 739
Respond to the prompts:
1658 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology for which you want to modify resistance.
To display a list of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the objects.
Enter new reverse resistance <1.000>:
Enter a new value.
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a link to a topology. The new command is MAPAL.
Use this command to add a link to an existing network or polygon topology
while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To create a link and add it to a topology on page 744
MAPAL
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to add the link to. To display a list of all
loaded topologies, enter ?.
Enter first point:
Enter the coordinates for the first point of the line, or select the point.
Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width/<Endpoint of line>:
For information about this prompt, see the PLINE command in the AutoCAD
help.
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link command) | 1659
You can use MAPLINKADD to add a link in three ways:
■In space (connecting no existing nodes). Two new nodes are created at the
link endpoints in space.
■From one existing node to a point in space. A new node is created at the
end point in space.
■From one existing node to another existing node.
A topology must have a node at the end points of all link objects. This node
is part of the topology data structure and is assigned a topology ID. However,
a node can be implicit (referenced in the topology data structure) or explicit
(a physical object in the drawing). Use the MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node
command) on page 1663 or MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command) on
page 1665 command to create a new node.
When you add a link to a topology, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a node when
necessary. If the link joins two existing nodes, no new nodes are created.
Remember these features of nodes and links:
■A node can reference many links.
■A link can reference only two nodes.
■Only one node can exist at a specific point.
If the new link splits an existing area in a polygon topology into two areas,
AutoCAD Map 3D creates a new centroid and updates the existing centroid.
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a link in a network topology. The new command is
MAPDL.
1660 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Use this command to delete a link from an existing network or polygon
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
MAPDL
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to delete the link from. To display a list of
all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select object:
Use any selection method to select the object to delete.
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to edit a link in an existing network or polygon topology
while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To reposition a node at the end point of a link on page 727
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select link to edit:
Select the object using any selection method.
For information about the prompts, see the PEDIT command in the AutoCAD
help.
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link command) | 1661
You cannot delete the first or last vertex of a polyline.
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction of Topology Link
command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for reversing a link in a network topology. The new command is
MAPRL.
Use this command to reverse the direction of a link in an existing network
topology while maintaining the topology information.
To edit the direction of a link on page 737
MAPRL
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select link to edit:
Use any selection method to select the object whose direction you want to
reverse.
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology Link command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you modify a link using standard editing commands, the topology
information associated with the link is not updated. Use this command to
have the topology relationship information on the link updated. (If you
1662 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
modified the link using an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as
MAPLINKEDIT, the topology information was automatically updated and you
do not need to use this command.)
To update a topology on page 753
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select link to update:
Use any selection method to select the object to update.
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a node to a topology. The new command is MAPAN.
Use this command to add a an existing block or point to a topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To create a node on an existing link on page 742
MAPAN
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to add the node to. To display a list of all
loaded topologies, enter ?.
MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) | 1663
Select block or point to add:
Select an existing block or point.
You can use this operation to create a new block object at the location of an
existing implicit node. MAPNODADD prompts you to select the new block
or point object.
You cannot add a new node to a topology with this command. To insert a
node on an existing link, use the MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node
command) on page 1665 command.
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a node in a topology. The new command is MAPDN.
Use this command to delete a node from an existing topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
MAPDN
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to delete the node from. To display a list
of all loaded topologies, enter ?.
Select node to delete:
Use any selection method to select the node to delete.
If the node has only one link, choose whether to delete the dangling link.
If the node has two links, the two links are combined. Choose which set of
object data to preserve.
You cannot delete a node that has more than two links.
1664 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to move a node in an existing topology while maintaining
the integrity of the topology information.
To edit a node on page 724
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select node to update:
Use any selection method to select the object to edit.
Specify new insertion point:
Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point onscreen. If a node already
exists in the new location, you are prompted to delete one of the nodes.
The node is moved to the new location, and all associated links move their
endpoints.
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for inserting a node in a topology. The new command is MAPIN.
Use this command to insert a node on an existing link while maintaining the
integrity of the topology information.
To create a node on an existing link on page 742
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology Node command) | 1665
MAPIN
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Specify insertion point:
Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point on the screen. If any block
definitions exist in the drawing, you are prompted for a block to reference.
The default block name is the last block name referenced in the drawing.
To add a node at the end of a dangling link, or to add a node not on a link,
use the MAPNODADD (Add Topology Node command) on page 1663 command.
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology Node command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to have the topology relationship data on the node updated.
To update a topology on page 753
When you modify a node using standard editing commands, the topology
data associated with the node is not updated. (If you modified the node using
an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as MAPNODEDIT, the topology
data was updated automatically and you do not need to use this command.)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select node to update:
Use any selection method to select the object to update.
1666 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for adding a polygon to a polygon topology. The new command
is MAPAP.
Use this command to add a centroid in an existing topology while maintaining
the integrity of the topology information.
To add a polygon to a polygon topology using existing linework on page 746
MAPAP
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Enter the coordinates of a point or select a point on screen. The point must
be in a defined area that does not currently contain a centroid.
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for deleting a polygon from a polygon topology. The new command
is MAPDP.
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology Polygon command) | 1667
Use this command to delete a polygon from an existing topology while
maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
MAPDP
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
Select objects:
Use any selection method to select the centroid of the polygon to delete.
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topology Polygon command)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this command to have the topology data on the polygon updated.
To update a topology on page 753
When you modify a polygon using standard editing commands, the topology
data associated with the polygon is not updated. (If you modified the polygon
using an AutoCAD Map 3D topology command, such as MAPPOLYADD,
AutoCAD Map 3D updated the topology for you.)
Respond to the prompts:
Enter topology name (? for list) <toponame>:
Enter the name of the topology to modify. To display a list of all loaded
topologies, enter ?.
1668 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Select object:
Use any selection method to select the centroid of the polygon to update.
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box -
MAPTOPOADMIN Delete
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to confirm the deletion of topology objects.
To delete a link, node, or polygon on page 751
MAPDL
MAPDN
MAPDP
If you select Delete Topology Objects, the referenced objects are deleted from
the current drawing, if either of the following conditions exist:
■It was loaded from the source and all objects were created when loaded.
■It was loaded from the current drawing.
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOEDIT
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to confirm the change to an object shared by multiple
topologies.
To edit a topology on page 718
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box - MAPTOPOADMIN Delete | 1669
MAPTOPOEDIT
The object you are modifying is referenced by more than one topology. If you
modify the object in the selected topology, the other topologies may be invalid.
You must To update a topology on page 753 the other topologies.
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box -
MAPTOPOADMIN Rename
Use this dialog box to confirm the renaming of a topology.
To change the name, description, or both of a topology on page 784
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Rename.
Before you rename a topology:
■Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
■Load the topology. The topology needs to be completely represented, either
in source files or in the current drawing.
■You cannot rename a topology if there are any queried objects in the
current drawing. You must save all queried objects back to their source
drawings or detach them from their source drawings before you can rename
any topology.
■Be sure the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing option is not selected
on the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
You cannot undo this rename operation using the UNDO command.
1670 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Centroid Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the centroids to include when you create a
topology.
To create a topology on page 691
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Centroid information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each
centroid is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed
whenever you use a topology command.
Object Selection
Select Automatically / Manually options
■Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
■Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects. If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology. Enter
an asterisk (*) to search all layers. To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box
Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology.
■To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
Centroid Objects dialog box | 1671
■To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Object Creation
Create on Layer box
If new nodes or centroids are created, specify on which layer they should
be placed. To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Create Using box
If new nodes or centriods are created, specify what block to use to create
them.
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■To create nodes or centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter
ACAD_POINT.
Create Closed Polylines dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create polylines from a polygon topology.
To create closed polylines from a polygon topology on page 759
Click Create ➤ Create Closed Polylines.
Topology Name
Name box
Select the topology you want.
The list displays topologies loaded from the current drawing. If the topology
you want is not listed, click Load and load it.
Type
Displays the type of the selected topology.
Description
Displays the description of the selected topology.
1672 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Number of Polygons Referenced
Displays the number of polygons referenced by the selected topology. If
the topology is loaded as partial, this is the number of polygons in the
partial subset.
How to Close
Create on Layer box
Specify a layer for the new plines.
Click Layers to select from a list of layers in the current drawing or enter a
new layer name.
Group Complex Polygons
Select this option to group all closed plines that make up the original
complex topology polygon. A complex polygon is one that includes islands.
If the islands themselves have nested islands or other polygons, these nested
polygons will form a separate grouping automatically, creating different
levels of grouping. If two or more inner polygons are not nested but share
the same outer boundary, they will be treated as one group.
Copy Object Data from Centroid to Pline
Select this option to copy object data from the centroid to the closed pline
that is created.
Object data on islands are copied to the outer polygon edge.
Copy Database Links from Centroid to Pline check box
Select this option to copy database links from the centroid to the closed
pline that is created.
Database links on islands are copied to the outer polygon edge.
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create node objects at the endpoint of links when you
create a network topology.
To create a network topology on page 697
Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box | 1673
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Create New Nodes
Specify whether or not to create nodes in the current object to complete
the topology. (Nodes are optional.)
Layer
If new nodes are created, you can specify a new layer or click the down
arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set.
Point Object for Node Creation
If new nodes are created, specify what block to use to create them.
■To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select from the list.
■To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and
select the file you want to use. Selecting this file will insert the entire
DWG as a single block.
■To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1674 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to select the links for a network topology.
To create a network topology on page 697
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Select the links to include in the topology. You can select all links in the map
or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) link selection to a subset
of links, in which you include only the links that are on specified layers and
in specified object classes.
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all links that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the links that you manually select in the map. Click Select
Objects to select the links. Only links that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset of links,
in which you include only the links that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset
of links, in which you include only the links that are in the specified object
classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select Object
Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Create Network Topology - Select Links dialog box | 1675
Next
Click to display the Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box on
page 1676.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Network Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in a network topology.
To create a network topology on page 697
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Nodes are useful when performing some types of analysis. You can select all
nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) node
selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are
on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map. Click Select
Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes,
in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers. This
1676 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the topology. To
search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select from
a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To select
point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset
of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Network Topology - Create New Nodes dialog
box on page 1673.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in a node topology.
To create a node topology on page 694
Create Node Topology - Select Nodes dialog box | 1677
Click Create ➤ Topology.
You can select all nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also
filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only
the nodes that are on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in
specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map. Click the Select
Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes,
in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the topology. To
search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select from
a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To select
point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset
of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
1678 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog
box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to create centroids for any areas that are missing centroids
and to specify the layer and block to use for the new centroids.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
Click Create ➤ Topology.
If you do not select the Create Missing Centroids option, and an area is missing
a centroid, you are notified that the topology has not been created. The areas
that are missing centroids are marked or highlighted using the error markers
you specify in the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box on
page 1686.
Create Missing Centroids
Creates centroids where needed.
Layer
Specify the layer on which to place the new centroids. Enter a layer name
or click the down arrow to select from a list of layers in the drawing set. If
a layer you want is not listed, it may be frozen or locked.
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog box | 1679
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block to use to represent the new centroids. To create centroids
using an existing block, click the down arrow and select the name of the
block from the list. To use a point instead of a block, select ACAD_POINT.
To use a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and select the file.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box
on page 1686.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify whether to create explicit node objects at the
endpoints of links when creating a polygon topology. If so, specify the layer
on which to place the new nodes and the block to use to create the nodes.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Create New Nodes
Specify whether nodes that are not present in the current object selection
should be created to complete the topology. (Explicit nodes are optional.)
1680 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Layer
If new nodes are created, specify on which layer they should be placed. You
can specify a new layer or click the down arrow to select from a list of layers
in the drawing set.
Point Object for Node Creation
If new nodes are created, specify what block to use to create them.
■To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select from the list.
■To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse, and
select the file you want to use. Selecting this file will insert the entire
DWG as a single block.
■To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box
on page 1681.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the point and block objects to use as centroids
for the polygons.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
Create Polygon Topology - Select Centroids dialog box | 1681
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Each polygon in a polygon topology has a centroid, which is a point or block
element within the polygon, and contains information about the area it
encloses. Centroid information is stored as object data and saved with the
map. Each centroid is given a unique ID number, which is automatically
processed whenever you use a topology command.
You can select all point or block elements in the map or select them manually.
You can also filter (restrict) object selection to a subset of objects, in which
you include only the objects that are on specified layers, are of specified block
types, or in specified object classes.
Select All
Use all point or block objects that meet the filter criteria as centroids.
Select Manually
Include only the point or block objects that you manually select in the map.
Click Select Objects to select the objects. Only objects that meet the filter
criteria will be selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) object selection to a subset of
objects, in which you include only the objects that are on the specified
layers. This filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects.
To select from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers,
enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify the point or block objects to use to filter object selection. To use all
points and blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select
from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To
select point objects, select ACAD_POINT.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) object selection to a subset
of objects, in which you include only the objects that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
1682 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Centroids dialog
box on page 1679.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after
you enter a valid, unique name for the topology.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Every area forms a polygon; and each polygon in a polygon topology consists
of a set of links. When you create polygon topology, use this dialog box to
select the links to include in the topology.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
Click Create ➤ Topology.
You can select all links in the map or select them manually. You can also filter
(restrict) link selection to a subset of links, in which you include only the links
that are on specified layers and in specified object classes.
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all links that meet the filter criteria.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Links dialog box | 1683
Select Manually
Include only the links that you manually select in the map. Click the Select
Objects to select the links. Only links that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset of links,
in which you include only the links that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) link selection to a subset
of links, in which you include only the links that are in the specified object
classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select Object
Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box on
page 1684.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a polygon topology, use this dialog box to select the nodes
you want to be part of the topology.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
1684 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Nodes are useful when performing some types of analysis. You can select all
nodes in the map or select them manually. You can also filter (restrict) node
selection to a subset of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are
on specified layers, are of specified block types, or in specified object classes.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select All
Include all nodes that meet the filter criteria.
Select Manually
Include only the nodes that you manually select in the map. Click the Select
Objects to select the nodes. Only nodes that meet the filter criteria will be
selected.
Layers
Specify the layers to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset of nodes,
in which you include only the nodes that are on the specified layers. This
filter is used for both automatic and manual selection of objects. To select
from a list of layers in the map, click Select Layers. To use all layers, enter
an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank.
Block Names
Specify which blocks to search for nodes to be used in the topology. To
search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the box blank. To select from
a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Select Blocks. To select
point objects, select ACAD_POINT from the list.
Object Classes
Specify the object classes to use to filter (restrict) node selection to a subset
of nodes, in which you include only the nodes that are in the specified
object classes. To select from a list of object classes in the map, click Select
Object Classes. To use all object classes, enter an asterisk (*) or leave the
box blank.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Create Polygon Topology - Select Nodes dialog box | 1685
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Create Polygon Topology - Create New Nodes dialog
box on page 1680.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available after
you enter a valid, unique name for the topology.
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how to mark errors in your polygon topology.
If you mark errors with blocks, specify the size, shape, and color of the marker
blocks.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
Click Create ➤ Topology.
AutoCAD Map 3D automatically checks for missing centroids and intersections.
These are considered serious errors and if detected, prevent topology creation.
You can choose whether you want Map to check for other potential problems,
including duplicate objects, incomplete areas, and sliver polygons.
Marker Parameters
Specify whether or not to highlight errors and/or mark them with blocks. Also
specify the marker size.
Highlight Errors
Highlight errors in red (nodes or centroids are highlighted with a red X).
To remove the highlighting, use the REDRAW, REGEN, or SAVE command.
1686 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Mark Errors With Blocks
Mark errors with blocks of the shape and color you specify below. To remove
a marker block, select it and then press Delete.
Marker Size
Specify the marker size as a percent of the screen size. A value between 3%
and 7% is usually suitable.
Missing Centroids
Mark each area with a missing centroid with a block of the shape and color
you specify. This option is disabled if you selected the Create Missing
Centroids option on the previous dialog box.
Intersections
Mark each duplicate object with a block of the shape and color you specify.
Duplicate Centroids
Select the check box to mark each area in the drawing with more than one
centroid. If you don't select the check box, AutoCAD Map 3D creates a
topology even if an area contains more than one point object which qualifies
to be a centroid. The topology data is added to only one of the centroid
objects.
Incomplete Areas
Select the check box to detect links that are not part of a closed area. If you
don't select this option, AutoCAD Map 3D ignores links that are not part
of a closed area and they do not receive any topology data.
Highlight Sliver Polygons
Select the check box to check for sliver polygons and mark their centroids
with red Xs. Sliver polygons are long, thin polygons, which can occur if
data is digitized or drawn inaccurately. Map will create your topology
regardless of the sliver polygons, but you should check that your data is
accurate.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Display the previous dialog box in the list.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Create Polygon Topology - Set Error Markers dialog box | 1687
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings.
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the type of topology to create and to specify the
topology name and description.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Before you create network or polygon topologies, you should clean up your
map to make sure it doesn't have certain types of errors. Node topologies do
not usually require cleanup.To clean up a map, click Modify menu ➤ Drawing
Cleanup. For more information, see Cleaning Up Drawing Data on page 636.
Topology Type
Select the type of topology to create: node, network, or polygon.
■Node topologies involve independent points. Some examples of node
topologies are street lights, city-maintained trees, or drill holes for core
samples.Cleaning Up Maps on page ?
■Network topologies involve linear objects, and can have nodes where
linear objects connect. In addition, linear objects can have direction or
resistance. Some examples of network topologies are a water distribution
network, a river network, or a street network.
1688 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
■Polygon topologies involve polygons that define areas. Some examples
of polygon topologies are city blocks, land parcels, and political
boundaries.
Topology Name
Enter a unique name for the topology. Names can contain letters, numbers,
and the underscore, hyphen, and dollar characters. Always use unique
names for a topology; topologies with the same name may become corrupt
if you insert one drawing with a topology into another.
Topology Description
Enter a description for the topology. Providing a description can help you
and other users identify the topology more easily.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating the topology.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Display the next dialog box. This varies, depending on the type of topology
you are creating.
Finish
Create the topology using the current settings. Enter a unique name for the
topology and click Finish.
Create Topology - Select Topology dialog box | 1689
Create Topology Warning dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to indicate whether you want to continue creating the
topology.
To create a polygon topology on page 702
Click Create ➤ Topology.
You selected 25,000 links for your topology. Creating a topology of this size
may take longer to create.
■To continue creating the topology, click OK.
■To return to the previous dialog box without creating a topology, click
Cancel.
If you don't want to see this warning again, select Do Not Warn Me Before
Creating A Large Topology.
Delete Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to delete an entire topology.
To delete a topology on page 785
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Delete.
1690 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
When you delete a topology, the topology relationship data is automatically
deleted from objects referenced by the selected topology.
Select Delete Geometry to delete the referenced objects from the current
drawing.
You can delete a topology under the following conditions:
■It was loaded from source and all objects were created at load.
■It was loaded from the current drawing and completed.
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to edit the direct resistance of a selected link or node in
an existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology
information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 714
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resistance command) on page 1658
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resistance command) on page 1658
Value box
Displays the direct resistance for the object. Enter a new value and click
OK.
The value must be numeric.
Edit Direction dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box | 1691
Use this dialog box to edit the direction of a selected linear object in an existing
topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To specify the direction for a link on page 712
MAPEDITDIR
MAPRL
Direction box
Select the direction for the link from the list and click OK. You can choose
Bi-Directional, From -> To , or To -> From.
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to edit the reverse resistance of the selected link in an
existing topology while maintaining the integrity of the topology information.
To edit the resistance of a link or node in a network topology on page 714
MAPEDITRES1
MAPEDITRES2
Value box
Displays the reverse resistance for the object. Enter a new value and click
OK.
The value must be numeric.
Edit Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1692 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
WARNING This command will not be supported in future releases. This is the
old command for editing geometry, direction, and resistance in a topology. There
are several new commands for editing topologies, such as MAPAN, MAPDL,
MAPMP. For a complete list, see Editing Topologies on page 715.
Use this dialog box to modify objects in a topology without damaging the
topology relationship data. If you modified objects using standard editing
commands, use the Update option to correct the topology relationship data
for that object.
To edit a topology on page 718
Topology Name area
Select a topology from the list of loaded topologies. When you modify the
selected object, the topology data for that object will be updated in the
selected topology.
NOTE If the object is referenced by more than one topology, you will need to
use the update option to modify the other topologies.
If the topology you want is not loaded, click Load.
Object Type
Select the object type to edit. Object options are unavailable if they do not
match the topology type you are choosing.
Edit Operation
Specify the edit operation to perform on the selected object type.
Click OK to perform the specified operation and make your selections.
To cancel the topology edit operation, click Close.
Node ObjectsPolygon ObjectsLink Objects
MAPNODEDIT (Edit Topology
Node command) on page 1665
MAPPOLYDEL (Delete Topology
Polygon command) on page 1667
MAPLINKEDIT (Edit Topology Link
command) on page 1661
MAPNODADD (Add Topology
Node command) on page 1663
MAPPOLYADD (Add Topology
Polygon command) on page 1667
MAPLINKADD (Add Topology Link
command) on page 1659
Edit Topology dialog box | 1693
Node ObjectsPolygon ObjectsLink Objects
MAPNODINS (Insert Topology
Node command) on page 1665
MAPPOLYUPD (Update Topo-
logy Polygon command) on
page 1668
MAPLINKDEL (Delete Topology
Link command) on page 1660
MAPNODDEL (Delete Topology
Node command) on page 1664
MAPLINKREV (Reverse Direction
of Topology Link command) on
page 1662
MAPNODUPD (Update Topology
Node command) on page 1666
MAPLINKUPD (Update Topology
Link command) on page 1662
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resist-
ance command) on page 1658
MAPEDITDIR (Edit Direction com-
mand) on page 1657
MAPEDITRES1 (Edit Direct Resist-
ance command) on page 1658
MAPEDITRES2 (Edit Reverse Resist-
ance command) on page 1658
Link Objects dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
When you create a topology, use this dialog box to select the links to include
in the topology.
To create a topology on page 691
Link information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each link
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
1694 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Select Automatically/Manually options
■Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
■Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Load Topology Conflict dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load the topology from either the source drawing or
the current drawing.
To load a topology on page 768
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology.
This dialog box is displayed when AutoCAD Map 3D detects duplicate topology
names in a source drawing and the current drawing.
Click OK.
Load Topology Conflict dialog box | 1695
Load Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to load a topology.
To load a topology on page 768
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology.
Topology Location options
Select whether to load a topology that is in a source drawing or in the
current drawing.
Name
Select the topology to load. If the list does not display the topology you
want, be sure you have selected the correct in the Topology Location area.
The list of topology names comes from the object data tables. These tables
may exist in the current drawing but the topology objects may only exist
in the source drawings.
Type
Displays the type of the selected topology.
Description
Displays the description of the selected topology.
Create Topology Objects When Loaded
If the selected topology is from a source drawing, select this check box to
copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology is loaded.
If this option is not selected, the objects are loaded but are not copied into
the current drawing.
Select Topology Objects For Save Back
Select this option to add objects in the current drawing to the save back set
if they are referenced by the selected topology.
1696 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Audit Geometry Of Topology Objects
Select this option to verify that objects for the selected topology are
geometrically correct. Any objects that are not correct are highlighted.
Complete Existing Topology Objects
If the selected topology is from the current drawing, select this option to
complete any incomplete objects in the topology.
Use this option to ensure that the objects in the current drawing are available
for topology editing. Map queries all the objects from the source drawings
that are required to create a self-contained subset of the topology objects.
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog to set options when loading a topology from a source drawing.
To load a topology on page 768
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology.
Topology Objects
Create Topology Objects When Loaded
If the selected topology is from a source drawing, select this check box to
copy the topology objects into the current drawing as the topology is loaded.
If this option is not selected, the objects are loaded but are not copied into
the current drawing.
Select Topology Objects For Save Back
Select this option to add objects in the current drawing to the save back set
if they are referenced by the selected topology. This means that the objects
will be saved back to their source drawings and replace the original objects.
Load Topology From Source Drawing dialog box | 1697
Topology Verification
Audit Geometry of Topology Objects
Select this option to verify that objects for the selected topology are
geometrically correct. Any objects that are not correct are highlighted.
Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the locations to use for your network analysis.
To perform a shortest path trace on page 1091
To perform a best route analysis on page 1096
To perform a flood trace on page 1100
Click Analyze ➤ Network Analysis.
When you choose points, AutoCAD Map 3D locates the closest node to the
point you select.
■Shortest path — Specify a starting point and ending point.
■Best route — Specify a starting point and one or more visit points.
■Flood trace — Specify a start point only.
Start Point
Select a start point. Click Select Point to select a point in the map. Press
Enter to return to this dialog box. All three forms of network analysis require
a start point.
Visit Point
Select one or more visit points for best route analysis. Click Select Point to
select points in the map. While in the map, click a point to select it. Accept
the point, cancel the selected point, or select additional points:
■To accept the point and return to the dialog box, press Enter, or
right-click and click Enter.
1698 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
■To discard the point and return to the dialog box, press ESC, or right-click
and click Cancel.
■To accept the point and specify another point, right-click. Click Next
Point.
End Point
Selects an end point for a shortest path analysis. Click Select Point to select
a point in the map. Press Enter to return to this dialog box.
List of Locations
The points you specify are displayed in the list.
■To see the location of a point in the map, select the coordinates in the
list. Click Preview.
■To remove a point from the list, select the coordinates. Click Delete.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Display the Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog
box on page 1701.
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path
trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point.
For a flood trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point.
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box | 1699
Use this dialog box to view the results of the network analysis onscreen.
To perform a shortest path trace on page 1091
To perform a best route analysis on page 1096
To perform a flood trace on page 1100
Click Analyze ➤ Network Analysis.
You can specify a name and description for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Create Topology
Create a new topology using the results of the analysis.
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
1700 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path
trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point.
For best route analysis, the Finish is available after you select a start point
and at least one visit point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after
you select a start point.
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction
dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify how to determine resistance for links and nodes
and to specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the network
analysis.
To perform a shortest path trace on page 1091
To perform a best route analysis on page 1096
To perform a flood trace on page 1100
Click Analyze ➤ Network Analysis.
Direction
Specify how to determine the direction of link objects for the analysis.
Link Direction
Enter a value or enter the location of the data to use to determine the
direction of the links. To select the location of the data from a list, click
Expression Builder. Select the data to use. You can also enter any valid
expression. See Expression Evaluator on page 1283. If you leave the box blank,
bi-directional (0) is used.
Link Direction is...If the expression evaluates to...
Bi-directional>0 or a character
The physical directionA positive number
Network Topology Analysis - Resistance and Direction dialog box | 1701
Link Direction is...If the expression evaluates to...
The reverse of the physical directionA negative number
Reverse
Select this option to use the reverse of the direction indicated in the Link
Direction field.
Resistance
Specify how to determine resistance for links and nodes. Enter the location
of the data to use to determine the direct resistance and reverse resistance
of link objects and the resistance of nodes. To use values in an object data
table or external database, click Expression Builder. Select the data to use.
You can also enter any valid expression.
■Link Direct Resistance — Specify the resistance to travel in the direction
that a link was created. If you leave the box blank, the length of the line
(.LENGTH) is used.
■Link Reverse Resistance — Specify the resistance in the opposite direction
along a link. If you leave the box blank, the length of the line (.LENGTH)
is used.
■Node Resistance — Specify the resistance to cross the node, for example,
resistance for a valve in a pipe network, or a junction in a road network.
If you leave the box blank, zero (0) is used.
■Specify a minimum and maximum resistance for the trace.
TIP The best route cannot be be calculated if the network topology contains
negative resistance values or if all resistance values equal zero (or use expressions
that evaluate to zero). If all resistance values equal zero, every route is as good
as another, and there is no "best route."
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
1702 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Next
Click to display the Network Topology Analysis - Output dialog box on
page 1699.
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings.
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the type of network analysis to perform.
To perform a shortest path trace on page 1091
To perform a best route analysis on page 1096
To perform a flood trace on page 1100
Click Analyze ➤ Network Analysis.
Shortest Path
Calculates the optimal route between two nodes. For example, you could
find the shortest distance between an accident site and a hospital. A path
trace between the start and end points must have a total resistance of more
than the minimum and less than the maximum.
Best Route
Finds the optimal route from a start point, to one or more intermediate
points, and back to the start point. The distance between nodes takes into
consideration the direction and resistance of intermediate links and nodes.
Network Topology Analysis - Select Method dialog box | 1703
Flood Trace
Shows all possible routes from a chosen node, summing the resistance value
of each link and node it travels through. The path stops when the sum
reaches the maximum resistance set for the trace. For example, you could
create a flood trace of a fifteen-minute travel time from a start point by
referencing street length and speed limit.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the network analysis.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Network Topology Analysis - Choose Locations dialog
box on page 1698.
1704 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Finish
Perform the network analysis using the current settings. For a shortest path
trace, the Finish is available after you select a start point and an end point.
For best route analysis, the Finish is available after you select a start point
and at least one visit point. For a flood trace, the Finish is available after
you select a start point.
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon
Topologies)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in the topology when you
create a topology.
To create a topology on page 691
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
■Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
■Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Node Objects dialog box - Network and Polygon Topologies) | 1705
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box
Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology.
■To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Create Node Objects
Specify whether nodes that are not present in the current object selection
should be created to complete the topology. (Nodes are optional.)
Create on Layer box
If new nodes or centroids are created, specify on which layer they should
be placed.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Create Using box
If new nodes or centriods are created, specify what block to use to create
them.
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■To create nodes or centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter
ACAD_POINT.
Node Objects dialog box (Node topology)
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the nodes to include in the topology when you
create a topology.
To create a topology on page 691
1706 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Create ➤ Topology.
Node information is stored as object data and saved with the map. Each node
is given a unique ID number, which is automatically processed whenever you
use a topology command.
Select Automatically/Manually options
■Select Automatically selects all objects that meet the object type and
filter criteria.
■Select Manually lets you manually select objects for the topology. Click
Select < to select objects.
Filter Selected Objects
If this option is selected, only objects that are on the specified layers or
blocks are selected. The filters are used for both automatic and manual
selection of objects.
If this option is not selected, the filters are ignored.
Layer Filters box
Specify which layers to search for objects to be used for the topology.
Enter an asterisk (*) to search all layers.
To select from a list of layers, click Layers.
Block Filters box
Specify which blocks to search for objects to be used for the topology.
■To search all blocks, enter an asterisk (*).
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click Blocks.
■To select point objects, enter ACAD_POINT.
Rename Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Rename Topology dialog box | 1707
Use this dialog box to rename a topology.
To change the name, description, or both of a topology on page 784
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Rename.
Before you rename a topology, check the following:
■Attach all source drawings that are referenced by the topology. If the source
drawings are not attached, you could corrupt your data set.
■Make sure the topology is loaded. The topology needs to be completely
represented, either in source files or in the current drawing.
■You cannot rename a topology if there are any queried objects in the
current drawing. You must save all queried objects back to their source
drawings or detach them from their source drawings before you can rename
any topology.
■Be sure the Create Backup File Of Source Drawing option is not selected
on the Save Back tab of the AutoCAD Map Options dialog box on page 1628.
■You cannot undo this rename operation using the UNDO command.
New Name
Enter a new name for the topology. Names can contain letters, numbers,
and the underscore and hyphen characters. Names cannot contain spaces.
New Description
Enter a description for the topology.
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1708 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to select the data to attach to the result topology when
performing a topology overlay.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Click Analyze ➤ Overlay.
The selected fields and columns are incorporated into a new object data table
that is attached to the result topology.
Source Data Area
Select fields and columns. You can combine data from different tables.
To select a field from an object data table, select the Object Data option,
and then select the table from the list. In the Available Fields/Columns list,
select the fields to use. Click >>.
To select a column from an external database, select the SQL Data option,
and then select the link template from the list. In the Available
Fields/Columns list, select the columns to use. Click >>.
The Link Template list includes only link templates for the drawing where
the topology is loaded. That is, if you loaded the topology from source
drawings, the list displays link templates defined in the source drawing; if
you loaded the topology from the current drawing, the list displays link
templates in the current drawing. In addition, be sure the appropriate data
source is attached and connected in the current drawing.
Destination Data Area
Specify a table name and description for the new object data table that will
be created for the result topology.
A table name cannot include spaces. It must start with an alphanumeric
character. The table name must be unique.
Available Fields/Columns List
Lists the fields in the selected object data table or the selected external
database.
To add fields or columns to the new object data table, select them from the
list. Click >>.
Select Data dialog box - Topology Overlay | 1709
Selected Fields/Columns List
Lists the fields that will be created in the new object data table. This table
can include values from more than one object data table and external
database.
Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog
box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting buffer topology.
To buffer a topology on page 1112
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Buffer.
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block used to represent centroids.
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
■To create centroids from a block saved as a DWG file, click [...] and select
the file to use.
■To create centroids as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
■To create nodes from a block saved as a DWG file, click [...] and select
the file you want to use.
■To create nodes as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
1710 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Finish
Creates the buffer using the current settings after you specify the buffer
distance and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting buffer topology
onscreen.
To buffer a topology on page 1112
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Buffer.
You can specify the name, description, and layer for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer
Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in the
current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the name
in the box.
Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box | 1711
NOTE Do not specify a locked layer. If you do, AutoCAD Map 3D can complete
only part of the buffer process (it can create the buffer geometry but not the
buffer topology). To use a locked layer, unlock it first.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without creating a buffer.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Topology Buffer - Create New Centroids and Nodes
dialog box on page 1710.
Finish
Creates the buffer using the current settings. The Finish is available after
you specify the buffer distance and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Buffer - Set Buffer Distance dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the distance from the object to the buffer. The
buffer will extend the specified distance from the objects. You can enter a
number, an expression, a field in an object data table, or an external database.
To buffer a topology on page 1112
Click Map ➤ Topology ➤ Buffer.
A buffer is a zone that is drawn around a topology. Using a buffer, you can
easily identify objects within a specified offset of elements in node, network,
and polygon topologies.
Buffer Distance
Enter distance from the object to the buffer. The buffer will extend the
specified distance from the objects. To create a buffer inside an existing
1712 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
polygon, enter a negative value for the buffer offset. The buffer offset can
be any of the following:
■Numeric value. To decrease the size of existing polygons, enter a negative
value.
■An expression that evaluates to a numeric value. For information on
valid expressions, see Expression Evaluator Functions and Variables.
■A value in an object data table. Click Expression Builder to select the
table and field.
■A value in an external database. Click Expression Builder to select the
link template and column.
NOTE If you are creating a buffer around a polygon and want to use a value
in an object data table or an external database, the data must be attached
to the centroid of the polygon.
Expression Builder
Click to select a field in an object data table or an external database from
a list of available data.
Next
Click to display the Topology Buffer - New Topology dialog box on page
1711.
Finish
Creates the buffer using the current settings after you specify the buffer
distance and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes
dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting dissolve topology.
To dissolve a composite topology on page 1109
Topology Dissolve - Create New Centroids and Nodes dialog box | 1713
Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block used to represent centroids.
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
■To create centroids from a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use.
■To create centroids a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■To select from a list of block definitions in the drawing set, click the
down arrow.
■To create nodes from a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use.
■To create nodes as a point, leave the box blank or enter ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
1714 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to create new nodes at the
endpoints of links where they are missing in the resulting dissolve topology.
If so, you specify the block to use to create the nodes.
To dissolve a composite topology on page 1109
Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
Create New Nodes For Topology
Select this check box to create new nodes as needed at the endpoints of
links in the resulting topology. This is optional, but can be useful if you are
going to analyze the resulting topology later on.
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
■To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Create Nodes dialog box | 1715
Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting dissolve
topology onscreen.
To dissolve a composite topology on page 1109
Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
You can specify the name, description, and layer for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer
Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in the
current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the name
in the box.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
1716 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Next
Click to display the Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box on page
1717.
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to createor specify the result table (the object data table
that will store the dissolve result field data).
You can reference an existing object data table or define a new one. The
dissolve field can be an object data variable or any expression.
To dissolve a composite topology on page 1109
Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
The dissolve operation starts with a single item and "joins" all adjacent objects
that share the same value for this item. The resulting topology data includes
only the field used to perform the dissolve.
For example, you could perform a dissolve operation on a map of zip code
boundaries that reference a county name as a data field. Dissolving the zip
codes by county results in the county boundaries as a geometry. The result
data holds the county name. In that case, the result table stores the result field
consisting of the county name.
Object Data Table
Select an object data table from the list of tables in the current drawing.
Object Data Field
Select a field from the list of fields in the selected table. To add a new field,
click Define.
Topology Dissolve - Object Data dialog box | 1717
Define
Click to add a new object data field.
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings after you specify the
dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Dissolve - Set Parameter dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the data on which to base the dissolve.
To dissolve a composite topology on page 1109
Click Analyze ➤ Dissolve.
When you perform a dissolve, you create a new topology by combining
polygons that share the same data value in a specified field. This field is called
the dissolve field. The dissolve field can be an object data field or a column
in a linked external database.
Dissolve By
Select the data on which to base the dissolve. This is often referred to as the
dissolve field.
■To use object data or data in an external data base, click Expression
Builder. Select the data to use.
Note that the Dissolve command uses only data that is attached or linked
to the centroid of the polygon. It does not use data attached to a polygon
border.
■You can also enter any valid expression. See Expression Evaluator on
page 1283.
Any two adjacent polygons or connected lines that have the same value for
this field are combined into a single polygon or line.
1718 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the dissolve.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Topology Dissolve - New Topology dialog box on page
1716.
Finish
Dissolves the topology using the current settings. The Finish is available
after you specify the dissolve parameter and enter a valid topology name.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the type of overlay analysis to perform: Intersect,
Union, Identity, Erase, Clip, or Paste.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Click Analyze ➤ Overlay.
To overlay topologies, both must be loaded into the current drawing. To load
topologies from the current drawing or from attached source drawings, click
Analyze menu ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load Topology.
Overlay Analysis Operations
Select an overlay operation:
■Intersect – Only areas that appear in both the source and overlay
topologies are in the result topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box | 1719
Source Overlay Result
■Union – Areas that appear in either the source or the overlay topologies
are in the result topology.
Source Overlay Result
■Identity – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology and areas in the overlay topology that are within the source
topology boundary.
Source Overlay Result
■Erase – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where it is covered by the overlay topology. The area
covered by the overlay topology is erased from the source topology area.
Source Overlay Result
1720 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
■Clip – The result topology includes areas that appear in the source
topology except where they are outside the boundary of the overlay
topology. The source topology is clipped to the outer boundary of the
overlay topology.
Source Overlay Result
■Paste – The overlay topology is "pasted" on the source topology. The
result topology includes the overlay topology and any areas of the source
topology that extend beyond the boundaries of the overlay topology.
Source Overlay Result
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay analysis.
Back
Disabled because this is the first dialog box in the list.
Next
Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology
dialog box on page 1727.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Analysis Type dialog box | 1721
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create New Centroids and
Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the block to use to create nodes and centroids
in the resulting overlay topology.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Click Analyze ➤ Overlay.
Point Object for Centroid Creation
Specify the block used to represent centroids.
■To create centroids using using a block defined in the drawing set, click
the down arrow and select a block from the list.
■To create centroids using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse.
Select the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■To create centroids as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
■To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
1722 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to create new nodes at the
endpoints of links where they are missing in the resulting overlay topology.
If so, you specify the block to use to create the nodes.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Click Analyze ➤ Overlay.
Create New Nodes For Topology
Select this check box to create new nodes as needed at the endpoints of
links in the resulting topology. This is optional, but can be useful if you are
going to analyze the resulting topology later on.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Create Nodes dialog box | 1723
Point Object for Node Creation
Specify the block used to represent nodes.
■To create nodes using a block defined in the drawing set, click the down
arrow and select a block from the list.
■To create nodes using a block saved as a DWG file, click Browse. Select
the file to use. This inserts the entire DWG as a single block.
■To create nodes as a point, select ACAD_POINT.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Disabled because this is the last dialog box in the list.
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify settings for viewing the resulting overlay topology
onscreen.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
1724 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Click Analyze ➤ Overlay.
You can specify the name, description, and layer for the new topology.
Highlight
Show the results of the analysis on screen using the color specified in the
Color.
Color
Select the color you want to use to highlight the results of the analysis in
the map. To clear the color when you finish viewing the results in the map,
click View menu ➤ Redraw.
Name
Enter a unique name for the new topology. Topology names can contain
letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen characters.
Description
Enter a description for the new topology.
Layer
Specify a layer for the new topology. To select from a list of layers in the
current drawing, click the down arrow. To create a new layer, type the name
in the box.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog
box on page 1726
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog box | 1725
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Attributes dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the data to attach to the result topology when
performing a topology overlay.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Click Analyze ➤ Overlay.
The selected fields and columns are incorporated into a new object data table
that is attached to the result topology.
Source Attributes for New Topology
To copy data from the source topology to the result topology, click
Expression Builder. In the Expression Chooser dialog box, select the object
data fields or external database columns to copy.
Overlay Attributes for New Topology
To copy data from the overlay topology to the result topology, click
Expression Builder. In the Expression Chooser dialog box, select the object
data fields or external database columns to copy.
Expression Builder s
Click to display the Expression Chooser dialog box, where you can select
the data to include in the resulting topology.
New Object Data Table Name
Enter a name for the object data table that will store the data in the new
topology. The Table Name should be a new name.
1726 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
New Table Description
Enter a description for the new object data table in the resulting topology.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the next dialog box. Next is disabled if your source topology
is a node topology.
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog
box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select the polygon topology to use as the overlay
topology.
To find sliver polygons when overlaying two topologies on page 708
Click Analyze ➤ Overlay.
Topology Overlay Analysis - Select Overlay Topology dialog box | 1727
Polygon Topology to Overlay
Select the polygon topology to use as the overlay topology.
Load
Use settings that you previously saved.
Save
Save the current settings so you can use them again.
Cancel
Close the dialog box without performing the topology overlay.
Back
Display the previous dialog box.
Next
Click to display the Topology Overlay Analysis - Output Topology dialog
box on page 1724.
Finish
Perform the topology overlay using the current settings. The Finish is
available after you select the overlay topology and enter a valid topology
name for the resulting topology.
Topology Query dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to execute topology relationship queries using the following
tools.
To query a topology on page 1119
Click Create ➤ Topology Query.
Query Topology area
Select the topology to query.
If the topology is not loaded, click Load and select the topology you want.
1728 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Result Topology area
Select a result topology type.
None
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no topology data is
created.
Temporary
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the topology data is
loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the objects.
You can use a temporary topology with the following commands: Buffer,
Dissolve, Overlay, Trace, Unload, Rename, Statistics, and Delete. You cannot
edit a temporary topology.
As soon as you close the current drawing, the temporary topology is removed
from memory.
If you decide to save a temporary topology, click Analyze menu ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Rename. Specify a name without an asterisk.
Permanent
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a new topology is created.
If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and
hyphen characters. For temporary topologies, the name must begin with
an asterisk (*).
Define Query
Display the Define Query dialog box on page 1572, where you can create a
query by defining conditions.
The dialog box you use for a topology query is the same as for a standard
query using the ADEQUERY command, except for the Property option in
the Query Type area.
Load Query
Display the Load Internal Query dialog box on page 1583, where you can
select an existing query to load.
When you choose Define Topology Query, you use the same dialog boxes as
you do for a standard query. The dialog box options are the same for topology
queries and standard queries using the ADEQUERY command, except for
choices in the Property option in the Query Type area.
Topology Query dialog box | 1729
Topology and standard queries differ in the following ways:
■Topology queries work with only one topology, while standard queries
work with all objects in the attached drawings. Use a topology query when
working only with topologies, or when to select one topology or query.
■You can base topology property queries on polygon values of Area, Length,
Perimeter, and Direction. Linear objects also have predefined object data
for Direct Resistance and Direction.
■Property alterations work differently with polygon topologies.
■For Report mode, additional dot variables, .TOPONAME, and .TOPOTYPE,
are available for topology queries. The dot variables .DRAWING, AREA,
and .PERIMETER yield different results in topology queries.
Topology Query Result dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to specify the type of topology to create with the queried
objects. If you create a temporary or permanent topology, specify a name and
description for the topology.
To query a topology on page 1119
Click Create ➤ Topology Query.
Topology names can contain letters, numbers, and the underscore and hyphen
characters. For temporary topologies, the name must begin with an asterisk
(*).
None
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, but no topology data is
created.
Temporary
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and the topology data is
loaded into memory. This data is not saved to the objects.
1730 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
You can use a temporary topology with the following commands: Buffer,
Dissolve, Overlay, Trace, Unload, Rename, Statistics, and Delete. You cannot
edit a temporary topology.
As soon as you close the current drawing, the temporary topology is removed
from memory.
If you decide to save a temporary topology, click Analyze menu ➤ More
Topology Options ➤ Rename. Specify a name without an asterisk.
Permanent
Objects are retrieved into the current drawing, and a new topology is created.
Topology Selection dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Use this dialog box to select a topology.
To load a topology on page 768
To load the topology, click Analyze menu ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Load
Topology.
Click a topology and click OK.
If the topology you want is not listed, check the following:
■If you are selecting a topology to rename, unload, view statistics, audit,
etc., it may not be listed because it has not been loaded yet.
■If you are selecting a topology to load, it may not be listed because it's
already loaded.
Topology Statistics dialog box
NOTE This functionality applies only to drawing objects.
Topology Selection dialog box | 1731
Use this dialog box to view information about the selected topology.
To view topology statistics on page 776
Click Analyze ➤ More Topology Options ➤ Statistics.
Selected Topology area
Name
Displays the name of the current topology.
Description
Displays the description of the topology.
Type
Displays the type of topology. Topologies can be Node, Network, or Polygon.
Extents area
This area displays the coordinates of the lower-left corner and upper-right
corner of the bounding rectangle for the selected topology.
Object Counts area
This area displays the total number of nodes, links, and polygons in the
selected topology.
Details area
This area displays area and perimeter information for polygon topologies,
and length information for network topologies. It does not apply to node
topologies.
Perimeter is the sum of all of the edges in a polygon topology (not just the
outer edge of the topology).
Variance is the average of the squares of any given area, perimeter, or length
minus the square of the average.
Deviation is the square root of variance.
1732 | Chapter 37 Topology Dialog Boxes
Viewing Dialog Boxes
Quick View Drawings dialog box
Use this dialog box to select drawings to include in the Quick View.
To view objects in source drawings on page 619
Click View ➤ Quick View Drawings.
Quick View displays all objects in the selected active source drawings. You can
zoom and pan, but you cannot edit the objects. When you regenerate or redraw,
the objects are cleared from the current drawing.
Select Active Drawings to Quick View
Lists all active drawings attached to the current drawing. Click on the drawing
to view. Use Select All and Clear All to quickly highlight or remove highlighting
from all drawings in the list.
Filters
Turns the current drawing filter on or off. When the filter is on, only drawings
that match the filter are displayed. If the parent drawing of a nested drawing
is filtered, the nested drawing is not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
Filters
Displays the Drawing Set Display Filter dialog box, where you can create or
change the filters for file names and descriptions.
38
1733
Zoom to the Extents of Selected Drawings
Zoom the current drawing to the extents of the selected source drawings.
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box
Use this dialog box to zoom to the extents of a set of drawings.
To zoom to the extents of selected drawings on page 618
In the Map Classic workspace, click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Zoom Drawing Extents.
Select the drawings you want. Click OK. The display zooms to the extents of
the selected drawings. Drawing extents are the bounds of the area occupied
by objects.
Select Active Drawings to Zoom list
Lists all active drawings attached to the current drawing.
Select the drawings to use to define the extents.
Select All
Highlight all drawings in the list.
Clear All
Remove the highlighting from all drawings in the list.
Filter
Select Filter to turn the current drawing filter on or off.
When the filter is on, only drawings that match the filter are displayed. If
the parent drawing of a nested drawing is filtered, the nested drawing is
not displayed, even if it matches the filter.
To create or change the filter, click Filter. In the Drawing Set Display Filter
dialog box on page 1642, you can create separate filters for file names and
descriptions.
1734 | Chapter 38 Viewing Dialog Boxes
Define Document View dialog box
Use this dialog box to define a document view to view external documents
attached to an object.
In the Map Classic workspace, click Map ➤ Object Data ➤ Define Document
View.
To create a new document view, enter a new name in the Name field. Specify
the location of the document name, the document type, and the application
to use to display the document, and click Add.
To modify an existing document view, select it in the list. Enter new
information in the Document View Definition section, and click Update.
Document view definitions are stored in the current drawing and not in the
source drawings.
Document View Definitions
Displays the document views defined in this drawing.
To modify a view, select it and edit the information that appears in the
Document View Definition section.
Delete
Delete the selected document view definition.
NOTE If you have associated documents that use this view, be sure to define
a new view for those documents.
Delete All
Delete all document views in the list.
NOTE If you have associated documents that use these views, be sure to define
new views for those documents.
Name
Enter a name for a new document view.
Names cannot contain spaces.
Description
Enter a description for the document view.
Define Document View dialog box | 1735
Expression
Enter information on where to find the name of the document associated
with an object:
■If the name of the associated document is stored in an object data table,
click Expression and select the table and field that contains the document
name.
When you attach a record from this object data table to an object, the
document listed in the specified field will be associated with the object.
■If the name of the associated document is stored in an external database,
click Expression and select the link template and column.
When you attach a record from this database to an object, the document
listed in the specified column will be associated with the object.
■If the name of the associated document is stored elsewhere, for example,
by giving the document the same name as the layer the object is on,
enter an expression that specifies the location of the document name.
For information on valid expressions, see Expression Evaluator on page
1283.
■You can type the name of a specific file. This file is then associated with
every object.
Directory
Enter the directory where documents for this view are stored.
If you are unsure of the location, click [...] to locate the directory.
Ext
Enter the three-letter file extension for documents using this view.
For example, if you are creating a view for Word documents, enter doc. If
the data attached to an object specifies a file name and extension, the
extension in this field is ignored. If the data attached to the object does not
specify the extension, AutoCAD Map 3D uses the extension in the field
when searching for the document.
Command Line
Enter the command to run the associated application.
For example, if you are creating a view for a Word document, enter the path
and file name for the Word program file.
If you are unsure of the location, click [...] to search your directories and
locate the application file.
1736 | Chapter 38 Viewing Dialog Boxes
Launch Method
Select a launch method.
■Select Default if the application specified for Command Line is a
Windows application.
■Select User if the application specified for Command Line is an ARX
application. Enter the name of the viewing function. The function must
be defined in the ARX application and made available through the use
of acedDefun( ). AutoCAD Map 3D uses acedInvoke( ) to access the
user-defined function. For more information about acedDefun( ),
acedInvoke( ), or on how to create ARX applications, refer to the
AutoCAD Object ARX online help.
If you are unsure, select Default.
Define Key View dialog box
Use this dialog box to specify which layers are displayed at different key view
zoom levels. For example, you can display fewer layers when zoomed out, but
display complete details when zoomed in.
In the Map Classic workspace, click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Define Key View.
To add a new condition, enter a drawing window width and specify the layers
to display at that width. Click the Layers to select from a list of the layers in
the active drawings. When you finish, click Add.
To modify an existing condition, select the condition to modify and click
Edit. Add or delete layers. When you finish, click Update.
Key views are saved with the current drawing and apply to layers in the current
drawing and all active drawings.
Current Key View Definition List
Display the drawing window width conditions defined in this drawing.
Edit
Copy the selected condition to the bottom of the screen, where you can
change the width and add or remove layers.
Define Key View dialog box | 1737
Delete
Delete the selected condition.
Clear List
Delete all conditions.
Width > box
Enter the width to define.
The width is the distance across the drawing window as measured in drawing
units. The more you zoom in, the smaller this number is.
TIP Before you use the ADEDEFKEYVIEW command, use the DISTANCE
command to measure the width of the window at the zoom magnifications you
want to define.
Show Only These Layers box
Specify the layers to display when the drawing window displays a greater
width than specified in the Width > box. Separate layer names with a
comma.
Click the Layers to select from a list of layers in the active drawings. You
can use wild-card characters to specify a set of layers.
Layers
Display a list of layers in the active drawings. Select the layers to display at
the specified window width.
Whenever the number of drawing units displayed in the drawing window
becomes greater than a defined key view condition, AutoCAD Map 3D displays
the layers specified for that condition.
When you use key views, AutoCAD Map 3D previews the specified layers from
source drawings. Objects already in the current drawing are not affected by
key views.
Document View dialog box
More than one document is associated with the object you selected. Select
the document type you want from the list. Click View.
In the Map Classic workspace, click Map ➤ Object Data ➤ View Associated
Document.
1738 | Chapter 38 Viewing Dialog Boxes
Select Document View list
Lists the document types for this object. Select a document type. Click View
to start the associated application and view the associated document.
Select Object
Select a new object and view its associated documents.
View
View the document associated with the selected document type.
Key View dialog box
Select a zoom level or pan the current zoom. AutoCAD Map 3D previews
objects from source drawings for only the key view layers specified for the
selected magnification. Objects already in the current drawing are not affected
by key views.
In the Map Classic workspace, click Map ➤ Drawings ➤ Show Key View.
Zoom Window
Zoom to a window that you specify onscreen, showing only the key layers
for that magnification.
Zoom Previous
Zoom to the previous view, showing only the key layers for that
magnification.
Zoom Extents
Zoom to the extents of all active drawings, showing only the key layers for
that magnification.
Zoom Out
Zoom out .8x, showing only the key layers for that magnification.
Pan
Pan the current view using one of these methods:
Displacement
At the first prompt, specify the displacement. At the second prompt, press
Enter. The drawing moves by the amount you specified.
Key View dialog box | 1739
Points
At the first prompt, specify a point. At the second prompt, specify a new
point. The drawing moves so the first point is moved to the location of the
second point.
Redisplay
View the selected layers for the current magnification.
1740 | Chapter 38 Viewing Dialog Boxes
Programming Interfaces
Learn how to use the ProductName Application Programming Interfaces (APIs), including:
■ActiveX
■AutoLISP
■Feature Data Objects (FDO)
■Geospatial Platform
■.NET
■ObjectARX
For more information, click Help menu > Additional Resources > AutoCAD Map 3D Developer
Help.
39
1741
1742
Glossary
.layer file Layer definition file. In AutoCAD Map 3D, a file that saves all of the
information needed to recreate a layer, that is, the references to the source
data and the styles that have been applied to it.
adjacent sheet block An annotation on page 1743 block used to indicate adjacent
tiles.
annotation Text and graphics used to dynamically label objects in a drawing.
annotation definitions Specially created blocks on page 1744 containing
attributes with Map expression on page 1750 assigned to the attribute properties.
Used with drawing data.
as-built Data that depicts the final installed configuration (physical or
functional). As-built data incorporates any field markups on the original
construction drawings.
as-designed Data that depicts the original plan for construction or installation,
for example, the design for a new electric service or a new pipe installation.
aspect Direction of ground slope.
attributes or attribute data Tabular data that describes the characteristics of
feature(s) on page 1751 or drawing objects on page 1749, for example, the number
of lanes and pavement-type belonging to a road. For features, attributes can
be stored with the geometry, or stored in a database and joined to feature
data. For drawing objects, attributes are stored in a database and linked to
selected drawing objects. See also property on page 1758, external data on page
1750 and object data on page 1757.
auto-generated field (metadata) A type of field in the Metadata feature, the
value of which is derived from the data source, and populated automatically
by AutoCAD Map 3D. Metadata auto-generation is triggered by selecting the
resource in the Metadata Viewer. See also: forced-update field on page 1751
Glossary | 1743
AutoCAD layer A layer in AutoCAD. An AutoCAD layer differs from a map
layer you create in Display Manager on page 1748. See also layer on page 1754,
drawing layer on page 1748, feature layer on page 1751, or surface layer on page 1763.
Autodesk Design Review The free viewer and editor for the DWF file format
(formerly DWF Viewer).
azimuth A clockwise angle measured from a reference meridian. Also known
as north azimuth. It can range from 0 to 360 degrees. A negative azimuth is
converted to a clockwise value.
bearing An angle measured from North or South, whichever is nearest, with
the added designation of East or West. The angle is always less than 90 degrees
(PI/2 radians or 100 grads) and is usually referenced by a quadrant number.
best route analysis Calculates the shortest path or optimal route from a start
point in a drawing, one or more intermediate points, and back to the start
point. For example, the best route to follow on a street map when visiting
multiple customer sites.
blocks In AutoCAD or AutoCAD Map 3D, compound objects that have been
saved for reuse in the drawing or in multiple drawings, for example, a North
arrow. In MapGuide Studio, blocks are converted into symbols when they are
loaded. See also symbol on page 1763.
buffer A zone of a specific radius created around a selected feature. Used to
select features within a specific distance of another feature. In AutoCAD Map
3D, you can define buffers for drawing topologies and for features, but you
define them differently.
buffer fence A fence, or line, at a specified distance from a center line. Used
to define a selection boundary.
bulge For contours that contain curves, the bulge value is a maximum
mid-ordinate distance along a polyline curve. If the mid-ordinate distance is
longer than specified, then points are added to better define the shape of the
curve.
The bulge factor can add more vertices to a polyline curve, making it appear
more curve-like. The smaller the value, the more vertices are added.
Cartesian coordinate system A global coordinate system on page 1752 defined
using three perpendicular axes (X, Y, and Z) to specify locations in
three-dimensional space. Compare with spherical coordinate system on page
1762.
1744 | Glossary
cartographic coordinate system A global coordinate system on page 1752 that
is referenced directly to an ellipsoid on page 1750. Compare with geodetic
coordinate system on page 1752.
centroids Points or blocks on page 1744 that are part of a polygon in a drawing
topology. The centroid holds information about the polygon’s area and
perimeter.
chained join An advanced type of join, where two or more secondary tables
are joined to a primary table in a chain-like fashion, that is primary linked to
secondary linked to another secondary and so on.
checkout The action of locking features in a data store before editing them.
See also explicit checkout on page 1750, implicit checkout on page 1753.
class See feature class on page 1750 and object class on page 1757.
classified DWG An AutoCAD Map 3D DWG (drawing) file that contains object
classes, and uses them to represent real-world objects in the drawing. A DWG
file that contains object class definitions, but does not have any objects to
which these definitions are applied, is not considered a classified DWG.
clustered nodes Nodes within a specified tolerance of one another.
COGO Short for Coordinate Geometry. COGO inquiry commands extract
geometric information from drawing objects such as lines, curves, closed
polylines, and polygons. This information is useful if you want to verify the
accuracy of your data, or send the data to the field. Inquiry commands are
specific to drawing objects. They don’t work on features.
column A specific category of information in a table, such as Address or
Diameter, also called a FGDC CSDGM Standard on page 1751. See also table on
page 1763.
compound element (metadata) A group of data elements in the FGDC CSDGM
Standard on page 1751. A compound element can consist of individual data
elements, other compound elements, or both.
conformal projection, conformality Conformal projections maintain local
angles. A map projection is conformal when the scale is the same in every
direction at any point. Meridians and parallels intersect at right angles; the
shape of small areas and angles with very short sides are preserved. Most larger
area sizes are distorted.
conic projection A map projection in which the earth’s surface is drawn as
it would appear if projected on a cone wrapped around the earth. The Lambert
Conformal Conic is often used for maps of the continental United States,
France, and other countries.
Glossary | 1745
constraint In a database, a restriction specified for a certain feature class on
page 1750, which is validated when a new feature is added to that class. For
example, a "minor road" feature class may have a constraint that specifies that
the speed attribute must always be 25, 30, or 50 miles per hour.
continuous data Data that can fall anywhere in a broad range. When creating
a theme, continuous data is usually organized into smaller ranges that show
data trends. For example, property value is continuous data that can be placed
into the ranges 0 to $50,000, $50,000 to $100,000, and over $100,000, with
each range displayed in a different color. Compare with discrete data on page
1747.
contour lines A line that connects points of the same elevation or value
relative to a specified reference datum. The lines can help you determine the
elevation at a specific location on a surface, help clarify and analyze the 3D
surface terrain, and help with things like navigation.
control points Locations with established latitude and longitude, and often
elevation, used for accuracy and precise location of maps. A system of geodetic
control points covers the entire United States. Similar systems exist for all
countries, such as Bench Marks and Trigonometry Points in the United
Kingdom. See also monuments on page 1756, geodetic coordinate system on page
1752.
coordinate geometry commands See COGO on page 1745.
coordinate system See global coordinate system on page 1752.
credentials The user ID and password needed to connect to a database.
cylindrical projection A map projection, in which the earths surface is drawn
as it would appear if projected on a cylinder wrapped around the earth in a
north-south direction. Compare with transverse cylindrical projection on page
1765. See also Mercator projection on page 1756 and conic projection on page 1745.
dangle A link or line, one end of which lacks a connection to another link or
node.
Data Connect The window you use to connect a geospatial data store on page
1747 to your map. You specify each feature class on page 1750 from that data store
to add to your map.
data element (metadata) A single piece of data that can be entered directly,
as a value in a field. In the Metadata feature, single data elements are expressed
as fields to be completed with values defined in the FGDC CSDGM Standard
on page 1751. See also: compound element (metadata) on page 1745.
1746 | Glossary
data provider A recognized FDO on page 1750 feature source provider, used to
connect to geospatial data.
data source A UDL (universal data link) file that points to a collection of data
and provides information on how to access the data.
data store In FDO on page 1750, a collection of feature classes contained in a
single storage location. The data store consists of an integrated set of objects,
which are modeled by classes or feature classes defined within one or more
schemas. Data stores can be either file-based, such as SDF, or a database, such
as Oracle Spatial. See also FDO provider on page 1750 and feature class on page
1750.
Data Table In AutoCAD Map 3D, a grid based on FDO on page 1750 data, in
which you can view and edit attributes of selected map features, perform
searches, and work with selection sets.
Data View In AutoCAD Map 3D, the grid in which you can view and edit
external database tables that are linked to drawing objects.
database query A set of conditions for specifying the selection of records from
a database. External database queries, also called views, are created using your
database software and can be run from the Map Explorer on page 1755 tab of the
Task Pane on page 1764. See also map query on page 1755.
datum A mathematical model that provides a smooth approximation of the
earths surface. Each datum includes both an ellipsoid, which specifies the size
and shape of the earth, and a base point for latitude and longitude. If two
maps use different datums, points on the map may not line up. Also called a
geodetic coordinate system on page 1752.
DEM Digital Elevation Model. A file that contains a representation of surface
terrain. The surface is stored as a grid in which each cell can have any one of
several different meanings, such as elevation, color, density, and so on.
digitize To convert existing data from paper maps, aerial photos, or raster
images into digital form by tracing the maps on a digitizer. Object locations
are recorded as X,Y coordinates.
discrete data Data that falls into explicit categories. For a feature layer on page
1751 that uses a theme on page 1764, each value is displayed differently. For
example, an agricultural thematic map might show each crop in a different
color. Compare with continuous data on page 1746.
display information A description of the appearance of a drawing object:
includes items such as layer, color, hatch pattern, and line type.
Glossary | 1747
Display Manager A view of the Task Pane on page 1764 that shows each Display
Manager layer on page 1748 in your current display map, and has commands
for styling and managing those layers. To view Display Manager, select its tab
in the Task Pane.
Display Manager layer A set of objects in Display Manager on page 1748. The
set could be all the objects on a layer or in a feature class on page 1750, or objects
that share a certain property. Each layer can be stylized or themed individually.
display map A set of map presentations, consisting of Display Manager layers,
that can be stored in a DWG file. See Display Manager layer on page 1748.
display properties Same as display information on page 1747.
dissolve To remove the boundaries that exist between polygons sharing a
specific attribute.
dither To use a pattern of solid dots to simulate more colors than are actually
available when displaying images.
domain (metadata) In the Metadata feature, the domain refers to element
values that are defined as valid within the FGDC CSDGM Standard on page 1751.
A domain can be a list of pre-defined values in a menu, a range of numbers,
free-form text, or any other type of value that can be assigned to a given field.
dot variable Variable that refers to an object property. It consists of a period
(.) followed by the variable name for that property. Dot variables can be entered
in expressions used for building a template file for Report mode queries and
for property alteration. See also query on page 1759 and expression on page 1750.
draping The process of overlaying feature(s) on page 1751 or a raster on page
1759 image on a surface so that the features or the image reflect the underlying
terrain.
draping The process of overlaying a set of feature(s) on page 1751 or a raster on
page 1759 image on a surface so that the features or the image reflect the
underlying terrain.
drawing layer A layer in Display Manager on page 1748 that contains drawing
objects on page 1749 from a DWG file. See also AutoCAD layer on page 1744, feature
layer on page 1751, layer on page 1754, surface layer on page 1763.
drawing layer A layer in Display Manager on page 1748 that contains drawing
objects from a DWG file. See also AutoCAD layer on page 1744, drawing layer on
page 1748, feature layer on page 1751, and surface layer on page 1763. drawing
source In AutoCAD Map 3D, a drawing source is a drawing (DWG) file and
also its associated information, such as attached drawing files, drawing-based
feature classes, linked template data, and topologies.
1748 | Glossary
drawing objects Objects that exist in a drawing file (DWG) or come from an
attached drawing. Compare to feature(s) on page 1751.
drawing set The set of source drawings attached to a drawing. See source
drawing on page 1761.
drawing source In AutoCAD Map 3D, a drawing source is a drawing (DWG)
file and also its associated information, such as attached drawing files,
drawing-based feature classes, linked template data, and topologies. Compare
with feature source on page 1751.
drive alias The mechanism that points to the folder where attached DWG
files are stored.
drive alias In AutoCAD Map 3D, the mechanism that points to the folder
where attached DWG files are stored.
DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data.
duplicate objects Objects that share the same start and end points. Object
types that can be considered duplicate include linear objects, points, blocks,
text, and mtext.
DWF An Autodesk file format for sharing 2D, 3D, and spatially-enabled design
data. DWF files are easy to publish and view on the Web. See also georeferenced
DWF on page 1752, Autodesk Design Review on page 1744.
DWG Drawing file. The Autodesk file format for storing 2D, 3D, and
spatially-enabled design data.
edge matching A DWG cleanup function available in AutoCAD Map 3D that
allows for distortion between adjacent maps, and produces a true match of
drawing objects at the edges of maps.
EditSet When users decide to lock objects in Oracle Spatial, those objects are
immediately locked. Edits of locked objects are put into an EditSet. You can
then update the database, which updates the locked records with the contents
of the EditSet.
element (Oracle Spatial database) The basic building block of an Oracle
Spatial geometry (Oracle Spatial database) on page 1752. The supported spatial
element types are points, line strings, and polygons. For example, elements
might model water wells (point clusters), roads (line strings), and county
boundaries (polygons).
elevation The vertical distance from a datum to a point or object on the
Earth's surface. The datum is generally considered to be at sea level. Equivalent
to the Z coordinate in an XYZ coordinate system.
Glossary | 1749
ellipsoid An approximation of the earth’s shape that does not account for
variations caused by the nonuniform density of the earth. Synonymous with
spheroid on page 1762. See also geoid on page 1752.
equal area A map projection in which every part, as well as the whole, has
the same area as the corresponding part on the earth, at the same reduced
scale. No flat map can be equal area and represent true shape.
equidistant projections Projections showing true distances only from the
center of the projection or along a special set of lines. No flat map can be both
equidistant and equal area.
exaggeration See vertical exaggeration on page 1765.
explicit checkout The action of checking out features using the Check Out
Features command. See also checkout on page 1745, implicit checkout on page
1753.
expression An automatic calculation used to specify values for URL, tooltip,
and feature labels. For example, you might create a text expression that
specifies a state name and population for a label. To express the population
in millions, you might apply a number expression that divides the population
value by 1,000,000.
expression evaluator The mechanism that analyzes the statement you enter
in the Expression box in the Output Report Options dialog box or the Property
Alteration dialog box.
external data Attribute data linked to a drawing object but contained in a
database apart from the drawing file. See also attributes or attribute data on
page 1743 and object data on page 1757.
FDO Feature Data Objects. An Autodesk software standard and general purpose
API for accessing features and geospatial data regardless of the underlying data
store. See also feature(s) on page 1751, feature class on page 1750.
FDO provider An implementation of the FDO on page 1750 API that provides
access to data in a particular data store, such as an Oracle or ArcSDE database,
or to a file-based data store, such as SDF or SHP.
feature class For feature data, a schema element that describes a type of
real-world object. It includes a class name and property definitions. Commonly
used to refer to a set of features of a particular class, for example, the feature
class "roads" or the feature class "hydrants." See also FDO on page 1750, property
on page 1758, schema on page 1760.
Feature Data Objects See FDO on page 1750.
1750 | Glossary
feature layer A layer in Display Manager on page 1748 containing feature(s) on
page 1751 from a feature source such as SDF, ESRI SHP, or ArcSDE. Feature layers
are brought in using Data Connect. See also AutoCAD layer on page 1744, layer
on page 1754, drawing layer on page 1748, or surface layer on page 1763.
feature source In AutoCAD Map 3D, any source of feature data that has been
connected by means of FDO on page 1750. In MapGuide Studio, one of the two
types of resources created either by loading file-based data or by connecting
to a spatial database. Feature sources are stored in the repository either in SDF
3 format or as database connections and contain raw geometry only. Compare
with drawing source on page 1749.
feature(s) An abstraction of a natural or man-made real world object. A spatial
feature has one or more geometric properties. For example, a road feature
might be represented by a line, and a hydrant might be represented by a point.
A non-spatial feature does not have geometry, but can be related to a spatial
feature that does. For example, a road feature may contain a sidewalk feature
that is defined as not containing any geometry. In AutoCAD Map 3D, features
are accessed and added to maps using Data Connect (FDO on page 1750). See
also attributes or attribute data on page 1743. Compare to drawing objects on
page 1749.
FGDC CSDGM Standard Content Standard for Digital Geospatial Metadata.
A standard XML schema for publishing and sharing GIS metadata on page 1756,
released by the United States Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC) in
1998. The schema is comprised of seven major sections, each of which contains
several individual data elements and compound elements. Depending upon
the nature of the GIS data, each section, element, and compound element is
mandatory, optional, or conditional (mandatory if applicable).
field A specific category of information in a data file, such as Address or
Diameter. Also called a column on page 1745. See also table on page 1763.
filtered record A record that matches the conditions of an SQL filter or spatial
filter and is therefore available for selection.
flood trace For a network topology on page 1756, a trace that begins at a specified
point and traces out in all directions for a specified distance or resistance.
forced-update field A type of auto-generated field (metadata) on page 1743 in
the Metadata feature, the value of which is required to be derived from the
data source within a GIS resource (metadata) on page 1760, according to the rules
of the FGDC CSDGM Standard on page 1751. Forced-update fields are updated
each time metadata is updated.
Glossary | 1751
generalization A method of reducing the number of vertices in the source
data by a specific percentage.
geodetic coordinate system A coordinate system that is referenced directly
to a datum. Compare with cartographic coordinate system on page 1745.
geographic analysis Analytical techniques that identify existing conditions
of a geographic location, a spatial area, or a linear network, and predict the
effects of certain future events on these features.
geographic data Information about geographic features. See feature(s) on page
1751.
geoid An ellipsoid with a highly irregular surface used to describe the shape
of the earth. See also ellipsoid on page 1750.
geometry (Oracle Spatial database) The representation of a spatial feature(s)
on page 1751, modeled as an ordered set of primitive elements. See element
(Oracle Spatial database) on page 1749.
geometry mapping The process of transforming the geometry elements of
AutoCAD Map 3D objects to Oracle Spatial geometry, and transforming the
geometry elements of the records back to AutoCAD Map 3D objects.
georeferenced DWF A DWF file published by AutoCAD Map 3D or AutoCAD
Civil 3D 2008 that contains a global coordinate system and defined latitude
and longitude coordinates based on the WGS84 datum. See also DWF on page
1749, Autodesk Design Review on page 1744.
georeferenced image An image that references real-world coordinates in its
correlation source. Example: Georeferenced images include GeoSPOT, GeoTIFF,
and images that use world files as their correlation source.
GeoTIFF A type of tagged image file format (TIFF) that supports georeferencing
information.
GIS (Geographic Information System) A computerized decision support
system that integrates geographic data, attribute data, and other
spatially-referenced data. A GIS is used to capture, store, retrieve, analyze, and
display spatial data.
global coordinate system A method that converts the earth’s spherical
coordinates representing latitude and longitude into an AutoCAD Map 3D
drawings Cartesian coordinate system, and accounts for the curvature of the
earths surface with a projection. A coordinate system is usually defined by a
projection, an ellipsoid definition, a datum definition, one or more standard
parallels, and a central meridian.
1752 | Glossary
grid surface See surface on page 1763.
hatch A regular pattern used to fill an area with a series of cross-angled lines.
hillshading The addition of shading to a surface to suggest
three-dimensionality, shadow, or degrees of light and dark. Hillshading adds
shading by casting the sun's light across a surface from the direction and angle
you specify.
implicit checkout The action of checking out features by selecting them,
without using the Check Out Features command. See also checkout on page
1745, explicit checkout on page 1750.
inner join A type of join where records in the primary table are displayed
only if there is a matching record in the joined secondary table. See also join,
left outer join.
intersection (expression) Two or more conditions joined with the logical
operator And. An item is selected only if the item meets all specified conditions.
Compare with union on page 1765.
intersection (geometry) The location where one line, surface, or solid crosses
another so as to have one or more points in common.
join A relationship that is established between attribute data and feature
sources for the purposes of creating a new view of the data or for ad-hoc
analysis.
JPG2000 An advanced raster image format from Joint Photographics Expert
Group, featuring options for lossless compression, wavelet compression,
incremental decompression, and support for up to 48-bit color.
key column One or more columns in a table whose values are used to uniquely
identify a record. To provide useful links, a key column should contain a
unique value for each record. Also called a key field.
key value A value stored on an object that specifies that value to match in
the key field of a table.
key view In a map book, an overview of the entire map with the current tile
boundaries displayed.
label Text placed on or near map feature(s) on page 1751 to describe or identify
them.
latitude The first part of a spherical coordinate system used to record positions
on the earths surface. Latitude indicates the angular distance north or south
of the equator. See also longitude on page 1754.
Glossary | 1753
layer A resource that references a feature source or a drawing source. The layer
contains styling and theming information, and optionally a collection of scale
ranges. You add a layer to your map using Display Manager on page 1748. Specific
types of layers are drawing layer on page 1748, feature layer on page 1751, and
surface layer on page 1763.
layout template In a map book, a named composition of viewports and
annotation on page 1743 in paperspace. It includes the intended paper size and
output scale for plotting and publishing. See also map book template on page
1755.
left outer join A type of join where all records in the primary table are
displayed, whether or not they have a matching record in the joined, secondary
table.
LIDAR LIght Detection And Ranging. A remote-sensing method that can be
used to generate an image of a surface.
link (external databases) The connection between a drawing object and its
related database data. The link data is stored on the linked drawing object and
contains the name of the link template and the key value used to identify the
associated record in the linked table. An object may have more than one link.
link (geometry) An element of geometry that connects nodes. In a polygon
topology, a link defines a polygon edge. Links can contain vertices and true
arcs, and can be represented as a line, polyline, or arc. See also node on page
1756.
link template A data structure that contains the path information to a database
table and specifies one or more key fields in that table.
lock To make all or part of a disk file read-only so that it cannot be modified
by other users on a network. Object locking applies to objects that are being
edited by another user. File locking applies to entire files, for example when
an AutoCAD user wants to open a file while the file is being edited in AutoCAD
Map 3D.
logical operator A symbol such as And, Or, Not, =, >, >=, <, and <= used to
define logical relationships.
long transaction Transactions that extend over hours, days, or months, unlike
the more typical database transactions that last for only seconds. Long
transactions support atomicity, consistency, and durability, and can be
committed or rolled back.
longitude The second part of a spherical coordinate system used to record
positions on the earths surface. Longitude measures angular distance east or
1754 | Glossary
west of the prime meridian, which runs through Greenwich, England. See
also latitude on page 1753.
main viewport The viewport that represents a map tile in a sheet. See also
viewport (paper space) on page 1765.
map A collection of layers displayed within a consistent coordinate system
and extents. See also layer on page 1754.
Map Book Manages your map book on page 1755 and contains commands for
creating, editing, and publishing them. To view Map Book, click its tab in the
Task Pane on page 1764.
map book A publishing option that divides a map into tiles and formats them
into pages with a legend and an index/key. Create and edit map books from
the Map Book tab in the Task Pane on page 1764.
map book template A special type of sheet set template used by a map book
to generate sheets. The map tiles are generated based on the layout and
viewport placeholder properties.
Map Explorer Manages your mapping resources. To view Map Explorer, click
its tab in the Task Pane on page 1764.
map projection A systematic representation of a spherical body, such as the
earth, in a flat (planar) surface. Each map projection has specific properties
that make it suitable for specific mapping needs.
map query A set of conditions that specify the selection of drawing objects
from source drawings. Conditions in a Map query can be based on the location
or properties of an object or on data stored in the drawing or in a linked
database table. See also topology query on page 1765 and database query on page
1747.
map tile A specific region of a map (model space view) for use on an individual
sheet.
MapGuide Enterprise A software platform for distributing spatial data over
the Internet or on an intranet. MapGuide Enterprise is supported by Autodesk.
MapGuide Open Source A software platform for distributing spatial data over
the Internet or on an intranet. MapGuide Open Source is supported by the
community (www.mapguide.osgeo.org)
MapGuide Server The component of MapGuide Open Source or MapGuide
Enterprise that hosts services and responds to requests from client applications
through TCP/IP protocol.
Glossary | 1755
MapGuide Viewer (AJAX viewer) The version of the MapGuide Viewer
component that does not need a download (also known as “zero-client
viewer”). It works with Microsoft Internet Explorer, running on Windows, or
with browsers such as Firefox on other operating systems, such as MacOS or
Linux.
MapGuide Viewer (DWF Viewer) The version of the MapGuide Viewer
component that is based on a Microsoft ActiveX Control and has full support
for the DWF format. It works with the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser
only.
MapGuide Web Server Extensions The MapGuide component that exposes
the services offered by the MapGuide Server to client applications over the
Internet or on an intranet using HTTP protocol.
Mercator projection A map projection, designed by Gerhardus Mercator, in
which the earths surface is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cylinder
wrapped around the earth. See also cylindrical projection on page 1746.
meridian A great circle passing through both poles, corresponding to a line
of longitude.
metadata Data about data. In the GIS context, metadata consists of
information that describes the essential characteristics of geospatial data sets.
See also FGDC CSDGM Standard on page 1751
monuments Features with known coordinates, used to establish accurate and
precise location on a map. See also control points on page 1746.
mpolygon A polygon object. A polygon differs from a closed polyline in that
it stores information about its inner and outer boundaries.
naming scheme The method of determining an individual map tile name.
Examples include column/row, sequential, and data driven.
network analysis, network flood trace See flood trace on page 1751.
network topology A description of the spatial relationship between linear
drawing objects (links and, sometimes, nodes). For example, a network
topology can represent pipelines, streets, electrical transmission lines, and
rivers.
node A single point or a link end point or intersection in a topology. A node
can be represented as a block or point object.
node topology A description of the spatial relationship between geographic
point objects in a drawing. Examples of node topologies include point sources
of pollution and road signs.
1756 | Glossary
normalizing In a theme, the scaling of data values relative to another data
value. A common example is adjusting the thematic value based on the area,
length, or perimeter of the entity.
object class All the drawing objects that have been created using a specific
object class definition. Use object classification to organize objects in your
drawing based on the real-world features they represent, such as roads. Object
classes allow you to create new objects that automatically have the appropriate
properties and values for objects in your drawing. See also feature class on page
1750.
object class definition A definition of how to create a classified drawing
object in a drawing. An object class definition can include information about
the object type, default properties of the object, or default data that should
be attached to the object.
object data Attribute data attached to an object and stored in the drawing
file. Compare with external data on page 1750.
OGC Open Geospatial Consortium. A non-profit, international, voluntary
consensus standards organization that leads the development of standards for
geospatial and location based services. (www.opengeospatial.org)
one-to-many join A join in which one record in the primary table corresponds
to more than one record in the secondary table.
one-to-one join A join in which one record in the primary table corresponds
to one record in the secondary table.
OpenGIS Agent The component of the MapGuide Server Web Extensions
that implements a number of the OpenGIS Web-mapping protocols to expose
the services offered by the MapGuide Server to standards-based OpenGIS
clients.
Oracle schema See schema on page 1760.
Oracle Spatial (OSE) feature An earlier version of the Feature Data Objects
(FDO on page 1750) feature, used to store maps in Oracle Spatial.
OSGeo Open Source Geospatial Foundation. A foundation created to support
and build the highest-quality open source geospatial software. The foundation's
goal is to encourage the use and collaborative development of community-led
projects. (www.osgeo.org)
overlay To create a new topology by combining elements of two distinct
topologies. At least one of the original topologies must be a polygon topology.
Glossary | 1757
package In MapGuide, a compressed file that can speed up the process of
loading data onto the server. Large source-data files can be zipped up in this
file format and saved to a network location or copied to a CD.
parallel A degree of latitude that circles the earth parallel to the Equator.
path trace For a network topology, a trace begins at a specified point, finds
the shortest distance to another point and is based on resistance (the length
by default).
persistent locking The ability to edit checked-out objects while you are offline,
and then save your changes back to the data source when you return online.
placeholder Specifies location and size of elements (viewports, scale bar, north
arrow, legend) in a map sheet.
plot template block An AutoCAD block that contains plotting information
such as title page text, plot layouts, legend, and other map annotation on page
1743.
polygon A polygon is a closed area that stores information about its inner
and outer boundaries, and about other polygons nested within it or grouped
with it. In a polygon topology, the polygon can be enclosed by any lines or
arcs in the drawing. In addition, AutoCAD Map 3D supports a polygon object,
sometimes called an mpolygon on page 1756 or mapping polygon.
polygon topology A description of the spatial relationship between geographic
area features. Polygon topologies contain geometric links, nodes, and centroids.
Examples of polygon topologies are land use and land cover maps, political
boundaries, parcels, and soil types.
primary key The property whose value uniquely identifies each feature within
a feature class. Many feature classes use a single property for this purpose, for
example, FeatureId. However, a feature class could have a list of properties
such as street number, street name, and street type to uniquely identify a
house address. You cannot edit primary key values for joined data.
prime meridian The line of longitude drawn through Greenwich, England,
used as the origin for longitude measurements.
profile User-defined settings specific to a given drawing.
property For feature(s) on page 1751 data, a single attribute of a class. A class is
described by one or more property definitions. For example, a Road feature
class on page 1750 may have properties called Name, NumberLanes, or Location.
See also attributes or attribute data on page 1743.
1758 | Glossary
property alteration definition The definition of properties you want to
change during a query.
property data Values associated with a geographic object, such as river depth,
road width, or pipe diameter. In AutoCAD Map 3D, these items are represented
as block attributes, values in object data tables, or values in a linked external
database.
pseudo node An unnecessary node in a geometric link. A pseudo node can
be used to store information about geographic point location or to represent
change from one link to another.
publish To generate output from a map book.
purge To remove all unused object definitions from an open drawing.
query A set of executable statements that retrieve specific objects. For example,
a layer-based query that displays only the objects on the layers that contain
state and district boundaries. See map query on page 1755, topology query on
page 1765, and database query on page 1747.
Query Library The set of queries saved in a drawing. You can add, delete, and
modify queries in the Query Library.
ramp A sequence of display properties used to render a theme; for example,
a sequence of colors, linestyles, or hatch patterns.
range of values In a theme, a segment of data along a continuum, such as
property value, temperature, or population.
raster Images containing individual dots (called pixels or cells) with color
values, arranged in a rectangular, evenly spaced array. Aerial photographs and
satellite images are examples of raster images used in mapping. Compare with
vector on page 1765.
raster-based surface layer See surface layer on page 1763.
reference point For a symbol, the point that controls the position of a symbol
over a feature in a map. The default reference point is the center of the symbol.
registration The preparation of a map for digitizing by calibrating a digitizing
table to convert an analog source to a digital file. See digitize on page 1747.
resistance Resistance is a measure of how hard it is to travel a link. The default
measure of resistance is the length of the link. You can set the resistance to
be related to what the link represents, such as pipe diameter or traffic speed.
resolution In a raster image, the density of pixels-per-inch (ppi) or
dots-per-inch.
Glossary | 1759
resource In MapGuide, a feature source, drawing source, or application
component that is stored in the resource repository and can be reused and
shared.
resource (metadata) In the Metadata feature, a resource is a generic term
meaning any type of data set for which AutoCAD Map 3D can generate
metadata on page 1756. A resource could be a feature class, an object class, a
schema, or a file.
resource repository In MapGuide, an XML database that stores the resources
created either by loading file-based data or by connecting to databases.
rubber sheeting An editing method, used only when necessary, that attempts
to correct errors by stretching a map to fit known control points or
monuments.
rule (for feature themes) A feature theme consists of a collection of rules.
Each rule specifies a style and feature label for the features that meet the
specified condition. You can add a legend label to provide a description of a
rule's condition. As a layer is drawn, each feature(s) on page 1751 is compared
to the rules in the order that they are listed. The first rule for which the feature
meets the condition is used to specify the style and feature label for that
feature.
save set Objects that have been created or modified in the current drawing
and are marked to be saved back to source drawings.
scale The ratio of the distance on a paper map to the distance on the ground.
If a paper map has a scale of 1:100,000 (also represented as 1/100000), then
a distance of 1 unit on the paper map corresponds to 100,000 units on the
ground. On a digital map, scale represents the scale of the map from which
the digital map was derived.
scale threshold You can define different stylizations at different scale
thresholds. For example, turn on the display of road names only when the
drawing scale factor is below 1:5000.
schema The definition of multiple feature classes and the relationships between
them. A schema is the logical description of the data types used to model
real-world objects, and does not reference the actual data instances (a particular
road or land parcel). Rather, it is metadata. See also feature class on page 1750.
SDF Spatial Data File. The proprietary Autodesk file format that contains the
spatial data (such as roads, cities, and countries) used in maps. See SDF 2 on
page 1761, SDF 3 on page 1761.
1760 | Glossary
SDF 2 The previous version of the SDF file format. It was the native file format
for Autodesk MapGuide (the last release was Autodesk MapGuide 6.5). Each
SDF 2 file generally contained one feature class on page 1750 or type of data, for
example points, lines, polygons, or text.
SDF 3 The current version of the SDF format. It is the native format for
MapGuide Enterprise and MapGuide Open Source. Each SDF 3 file can contain
multiple feature classes or types of data stored in tables with attributes and
geometry. See feature class on page 1750.
service An Oracle database.
shading See hillshading on page 1753.
sheet An individual named object in a sheet set that can be published.
References a layout. In a DWF file, a plot layout containing a specific view of
the original data.
sheet set A named collection of sheets and subsets for publishing.
sheet subset A named collection of sheets within a sheet set. An individual
sheet can only be a member of a single subset.
sheet template A drawing file that defines a title block and a layout for use
in sheets. Can be specified for sheet sets and sheet subsets.
shortest path trace See path trace on page 1758.
site The collection of servers that process MapGuide requests.
Site Administrator A Web-based application, installed with MapGuide Server,
for managing a site and its servers.
Site Explorer The tree view in MapGuide Studio that displays the resources
stored in the resource repository.
site server In a site, the server that contains the resource repository.
slope A method of reporting surface inclination as a ratio that expresses the
horizontal distance in which the elevation changes by one linear unit. For
example, if the ground rises 3 units over a horizontal distance of 15 linear
units (meters or feet), the slope is 5:1 (5 to 1).
source drawing A drawing file attached to another drawing. The set of all
source drawings attached to a drawing is called the drawing set. Use a Map
query to retrieve selected objects from multiple source drawings.
spatial A generic term used to reference the mathematical concept of
n-dimensional data.
Glossary | 1761
spatial analysis The process of understanding, extracting, or creating
information about a set of objects. Spatial analysis includes techniques used
to determine the distribution of objects over a network or area, and the
relationships between those objects. The location of, proximity to, and
orientation of objects can be analyzed with spatial analysis. It is useful for
evaluating suitability and capability, for estimating and predicting, and for
interpreting.
spatial context The general metadata or parameters within which the
geometry for a collection of features resides. In particular, the spatial context
includes the definition of the coordinate system, spheroid parameters, units,
spatial extents, and so on for a collection of geometries owned by features.
spatial data Information about the location and shape of geographic features,
and the relationships between those features. See also feature(s) on page 1751.
Spatial Data File See SDF on page 1760.
spatial database A database containing information indexed by location.
spatial filter A selection of objects that specify which records to display in
the active table or query. When a spatial filter is active, the Data View displays
only those records linked to selected objects. Compare with SQL filter on page
1762.
spatial index An index created in an Oracle Spatial database by dividing the
extents of the drawings in the database into rectangular tiles. AutoCAD Map
3D uses the index to locate the geometry to be imported.
spherical coordinate system A coordinate system measured on the surface
of a sphere and expressed as angular distances. Compare with Cartesian
coordinate system on page 1744.
spheroid See ellipsoid on page 1750.
SQL filter A series of SQL expressions that specify which records to select in
the active table or query. When an SQL filter is active, the Data View displays
only those records that match the filter criteria. Compare with spatial filter on
page 1762.
style Settings that specify how to display the feature(s) on page 1751 or drawing
objects in a Map Display layer. For example, a polygon style that makes parcel
polygons 50% transparent and which appears at a scale of 1:50000. One or
more styles can be applied to a single element.
style library Use the style library to store the styles you use frequently. You
can drag and drop these styles onto any element in any other display map.
1762 | Glossary
styling The process of assigning display characteristics (such as line color, line
pattern, fill color, fill pattern, and so on) to feature(s) on page 1751 (points,
polylines, polygons). See also theming on page 1764.
stylization Visually or textually changing the display of drawing objects
according to the assigned styles, rather than displaying them with their native
object properties. See also style on page 1762.
superuser A user who controls user IDs, passwords, and access to sensitive
procedures.
supplementing distance The maximum distance between 3D polyline vertices.
If the distance between vertices is greater than specified, then points will be
added along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are less than or equal
to the supplementing distance.
supplementing factors Add vertices along 3D polylines that are long and
contain few vertices. The supplementing distance is the maximum distance
between vertices. If the distance between vertices is greater than specified,
then points will be added along the 3D polyline in equal increments that are
less than or equal to the supplementing distance. The smaller the distance,
the greater the number of supplemented points.
surface A network of elevation data. AutoCAD Map 3D supports raster-based
grid surfaces, such as DEM, DTED, and ESRI Grid. In these types of surfaces,
the points of a surface are connected into a grid, which are then used to
interpolate contours, and to generate profiles and cross-sections. A surface
represents the ground condition at a particular time or event.
surface layer A layer in Display Manager on page 1748 containing a raster-based
surface such as a Digital Terrain Model (DEM), an ESRI Grid file, or Digital
Terrain Elevation Data (DTED). A surface layer is brought in using Data
Connect. See also feature layer on page 1751, drawing layer on page 1748, AutoCAD
layer on page 1744.
symbol A bitmap or vector image that is used to represent a point.
symbol library In MapGuide Studio, a collection of related symbols. Image
files are converted into symbols when they are brought into the symbol library.
The symbol library is stored in the resource repository.
symbol table A term referring to the storage of named objects, including
linetypes, layers, text styles, and blocks.
table A set of data arranged in records (rows) and fields (columns). When a
table is displayed in a grid, records display in horizontal rows and fields display
in vertical columns. Each field value in the table displays in a cell.
Glossary | 1763
Task Pane A AutoCAD Map 3D window that provides the tools you need to
accomplish your main mapping tasks: creating, displaying, styling, analyzing,
and publishing maps. The Task Pane contains tabbed views: Map Explorer on
page 1755, Display Manager on page 1748, and Map BookMap Book on page 1755.
Map Explorer enables you to manage the resources you will use to create your
maps. Display Manager provides tools to create maps, and create styles and
themes. With Map Book, you can print, publish and share maps. You can
resize the Task Pane palette and place it where you want.
template file A file that formats another file, such as a text file for saving
information from queried objects. See also dot variable on page 1748, query on
page 1759, and link template on page 1754.
thematic map See theme on page 1764.
theme A theme is a special kind of style used to vary the stylization based
on some property of the objects. For example, instead of just coloring the
lakes blue, you could vary the shade of blue based on the depth of the lake.
Instead of just altering the line width of the roads, you could vary the line
width based on traffic flow.
theming The process of styling feature(s) on page 1751 according to an attribute
value. See also styling on page 1763.
tiling scheme The method of breaking a large map into multiple smaller tiles.
Options include by area, by number, and custom.
tolerance A radius around a node or linear object used to search for drawing
errors.
tolerance (drawing cleanup) The minimum distance allowed between linear
objects or nodes during drawing cleanup. If two linear objects or nodes are
separated by a distance less than the tolerance, AutoCAD Map 3D corrects the
error.
Topobase An Autodesk data management solution for utility companies,
municipalities, and engineering firms. Autodesk Topobase consists of a set of
industry-specific modules built on AutoCAD Map 3D and MapGuide, all of
which use Oracle as the central data store.
topology A set of geometric relationships between drawing objects, including
links, nodes, and centroids. Topology describes how lines, nodes, and polygons
connect and relate to each other, and forms the basis for advanced GIS
functions such as network tracing, spatial analysis, buffer analysis, overlay
analysis, and dissolving a polygon topology.
1764 | Glossary
topology query An extension to a Map query that applies to a loaded topology.
See also map query on page 1755.
transparent command A command started while another is in progress.
Precede transparent commands with an apostrophe.
transverse cylindrical projection A map projection, in which the earths
surface is drawn as it would appear if projected on a cylinder wrapped around
the earth in an east-west direction. Compare with cylindrical projection on page
1746.
UDL (Universal Data Link) File with.udl extension that includes the name
and location of the database table and the software used to create the file.
Windows uses a UDL file to identify a data source. Using the information in
this file, programs such as AutoCAD Map 3D can view and update data from
external databases.
undershoot Two or more lines within a specified tolerance of each other that
do not meet.
union Two or more conditions joined with the logical operator Or. An item
is selected only if the item meets at least one of the specified criteria. Compare
with intersection (expression) on page 1753.
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) projection A specific implementation
of the Mercator projection, designed for use around the world. See also Mercator
projection on page 1756.
vector A mathematical calculation of an object with precise direction and
length. Vector data is stored as X,Y coordinates that form points, lines, and
areas. Compare with raster on page 1759.
versioning A database function that allows multiple copies of a spatial dataset
to be stored and tracked by date of creation, data of change, and so on.
vertical exaggeration An increase of vertical scale relative to horizontal scale,
used to make elevation changes easier to differentiate.
viewport (paper space) A view of modelspace from a layout.
wavelet A multiple resolution image file compressed using a lossy compression
that enables large graphics to load much faster due to the reduction in file
size. Wavelet compression is based on a mathematical algorithm in which
graphic images can be reduced to a small fraction of their original size.
weeding The removal of points along a selected 3D polyline, which may
represent a contour. The weeding factors determine the amount of points
removed. You can use weeding to reduce the amount of point information
Glossary | 1765
taken from the contours that may not be necessary to generate an accurate
surface.
weeding factors You can use the weeding factor settings to reduce redundant
points along 3D polylines by ignoring vertices that are close together or along
a straight line. A larger distance and deflection angle will weed a greater
number of points. Distance is an absolute measure and the angle is measured
in degrees. The larger the distance value, the greater the number of weeded
points. The weeding factors must be less than the supplementing factors.
A point is weeded by calculating its location in relation to the vertices before
and after it. If the length between these three points is less than the weeding
length value, and the deflection angle is less than the weeding angle value,
then the middle point will not be added to the contour data file.
WFS Web Feature Service. A web service based on the specification defined
by the OGC. Acts as a source of feature(s) on page 1751 data.
WMS Web Map Service. A web service based on the specification defined by
the OGC. Produces an image (for example, a PNG or JPG image) of geospatial
data.
workspace Contains the commands and tools for specific tasks. The Map 3D
For Geospatial workspace is tailored to working with spatial feature(s) on page
1751 while Map 3D For Drawings is optimized for working with drawing objects.
To change your workspace, click View menu ➤ Menu/Toolbar Layout. Click
a workspace.
zero-client viewer See MapGuide Viewer (AJAX viewer) on page 1756.
zoom To change the display magnification so that it focuses on progressively
smaller areas (when you zoom in) or larger areas (when you zoom out) of an
image.
zoom extents To magnify a drawing based on its extents so that the view
shows the largest possible view of all spatial objects.
1766 | Glossary
Index
.bmp files 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
.ddf files (SDTS format) 349
importing 349
.dgn files 340, 344, 1186
exporting to 1186
importing 340, 344
.dib files 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
.dpf files 650
.dwg files 1203
exporting maps to 1203
.dwk files 206, 606, 609
.dxf files 327, 1202
exporting 1202
importing 327
.eoo files 332
exporting 332
importing 332
.gml files 347, 1189
exporting to 1189
importing 347
.ini files 150, 225, 240, 245
and drive aliases 150
customizing 240
for import and export 245
.jpg files 375–376
adding with Data Connect 375–376
.mif files 335, 1183
exporting to 1183
importing 335
.mil files 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
.pct files 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
.pcx images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
.png files 375–376
adding with Data Connect 375–376
.rst files 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
.sdf files 288, 323, 1173, 1175, 1212
exporting 1173, 1175
importing 323
saving Display Manager layers
as 1212
using as a data source 288
.shp files 285–286, 334
adding feature data to maps 286
converting to drawing objects 285
importing 334
.sif files 1175
.sys files 225
.tab files 338–339, 1185
exporting to 1185
importing 338–339
.tga files 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
.tif files 375–376
adding with Data Connect 375–376
.vml files 1190–1191
exporting 1191
exporting to 1190
.vpf files 350
importing 350
2D 376, 980
adding rasters to maps 376
draping over 3D surfaces 980
viewing 980
3D 979–980, 982
orbit options 982
surfaces 979
viewing 980, 982
3D surfaces 980, 982
draping 2D data on 980
walkthroughs 982
A
abstract classes 1471
in Schema Editor 1471
Index | 1767
acadmap.ini file 150, 225
acadmap.sys file 225
ACADOPTIONS command 81
ACADPUBLISH command 1135–1136
ACADSAVE command 615
ACADSAVEAS command 1202
accessing 272, 277, 280, 283, 286, 288,
291, 294, 316
ArcSDE data in maps 277
Autodesk SDF data in maps 288
Microsoft Access data in maps 291
MySQL data in maps 283
ODBC data in maps 291
Oracle data in maps 272
SHP files in maps 286
SQL Server data in maps 280
vs importing data for maps 316
WFS data in maps 294
activating source drawings 149
Add Class Property dialog box
(Export) 1461
Add To Map With Query 270
adding 148, 272, 277, 280, 283, 286,
288, 294, 374, 376, 379, 624,
635, 742, 744, 746, 794, 868,
908, 948, 1062
2D rasters to maps 376
annotation to maps 908
ArcSDE data to maps 277
Autodesk SDF data to maps 288
database records in Data View 868
digital elevation models to
maps 374
digital terrain elevation data to
maps 374
distances 948
drawings to save sets for maps 624
drawings to the current map 148
ESRI grid files to maps 374
ESRI SHP data to maps 286
linear objects to topology 744
MySQL data to maps 283
nodes to topology 742
objects to save set 635
Oracle data to maps 272
polygons to topology 746
raster images to maps 374
raster-based surfaces to maps 374
SHP data to maps 286
SQL Server data to maps 280
surfaces to maps 374
text to drawing objects 1062
text to objects 794
WFS (Web Feature Service) data to
maps 294
WMS (Web Map Service) data to
maps 379
ADEATTACHDATA command 874, 877,
1528
ADEDEFCRDSYS command 84
ADEDEFDATA command 180–181,
1200, 1539
ADEDRAWINGS command 146, 148,
1638
ADEDWGCLEAN command
(discontinued) 1274
ADEDWGMAINT command 610, 1079,
1640
ADEDWGSTAT command 154, 160,
1646
ADEEDITDATA command 881, 1529
ADEFILLPOLYG command 797, 1385
ADEGENLINK command 461, 875, 879,
1200, 1541
ADEQUERY command 1025, 1047,
1072, 1219, 1221, 1573
ADEQUERYLIB command 168–169,
1593
ADEQVIEWDWGS command 620, 1733
ADEREMOBJS command 615, 631, 1619
ADERSHEET command 793, 1386
ADERUNQUERY command 166, 1596
ADERUNXQUERY command 167
ADESAVEOBJS command 615, 622, 626,
628, 1621
ADESELOBJS command 615, 624, 1620
ADESETCRDSYS command 137–138,
1080, 1336
ADESHOWOBJS command 625, 1621
ADETEXTLOC command 795, 1533
ADETRANSFORM command 790, 1387
ADEWHOHASIT command 609
1768 | Index
ADEZEXTENTS command 618, 1734
adjacent arrows 1147
for map books 1147
aerial imagery 53, 65
purchasing 65
samples 53
affine transformation 124
and digitizing 124
aliases for drives 150
aligning 144, 157, 789
attached drawings 144
drawing objects in maps 789
drawings 157
maps 144
Alter Block Insertion dialog box 1357
Alter Line Format dialog box 1358
Alter Linetype dialog box 1359
Alter Lineweight dialog box 1359
Alter Plotstyle dialog box 1360
Alternate Font dialog box (drawing
queries) 1569
analyzing data 919
overview 919
anchoring 640
objects for Drawing Cleanup 640
angle information 950
displaying 950
ANGLE variable 1289
annotating 899
maps 899
annotation 171, 174, 176, 178, 557,
904–905, 907–911, 915, 965, 974
adding for drawing layers 557, 965
applying for drawing layer
themes 965
attaching to drawing objects in
maps 907
changing templates 176
defining templates 174
deleting in maps 911
deleting references to templates 178
deleting templates 178
editing on an annotation layer 915
for drawing layer themes 974
inserting in maps 908
refreshing in maps 909
templates 171
templates from xrefs 171
updating in maps 911
Annotation Delete dialog box 1307
annotation layers 912–913, 915
adding text to 915
creating 912
styling 913
Annotation Refresh dialog box 1307
Annotation Text dialog box 1308
Annotation Update dialog box 1309
apostrophe 850
and coordinate geometry
commands 850
apparent intersection 643, 649, 673
and Drawing Cleanup 673
marking for cleanup 649
selecting 643
tolerance for extending 643
appending 1173, 1180
when exporting to SDF 1173
when exporting to SHP 1180
Arc/INFO Coverages 245, 318, 330,
1166, 1178
export defaults 245
exporting 1166
exporting to 1178
importing 318, 330
arcs 646, 853, 855–856, 858, 951
converting to polylines during
Drawing Cleanup 646
displaying COGO information
for 951
specifying with angle and
distance 853
specifying with azimuth and
distance 858
specifying with bearing and
distance 855
specifying with deflection and
distance 856
ArcSDE 274, 276–277, 328, 498, 500,
531
adding feature data to maps 277
importing data from 328
moving DWG data to 531
Index | 1769
provider capabilities in maps 274
schemas 498
setting up for 276
working with data 500
ArcView ShapeFile 245, 318, 1180
exporting as folder 245
exporting to 1180
importing 318
importing as folder 245
area 158, 548, 1030, 1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
finding drawing objects by 1030
specifying save back extents 158
style options for 548
AREA variable 1289
arithmetic functions 1283
aspect 989, 991
and theming 989
theming surfaces for 991
Assign Global Coordinate System dialog
box 1336
Associate Database Versions dialog
box 1411
associating 439, 443
data with map features 443
association properties 1471
in Schema Editor 1471
associations 439
data and map features 439
associative hatch 223
Attach Object Class Definition File dialog
box 1513
Attach Object Data dialog box 1527
Attach/Detach Object Data dialog
box 1528
ATTACHDEF command 850, 1513
attaching 148, 167, 188, 452, 1062
data sources for drawings 188
data to drawing objects in maps 452
drawings to the current map 148
external data to maps 188, 452
queries to the current drawing 167
text to drawing objects 1062
attribute data 26, 253, 309, 359, 367–
368, 439–440, 443, 460, 878,
921, 1033, 1052, 1084, 1131,
1166, 1199, 1213
adding drawing objects to maps
by 309
adding to features 440
adding using joins 439, 443
altering drawing objects based
on 1052
and maps 253
and queries 1084
displaying as text 368
exporting 1166, 1213
exporting text enclosed in a
polyline 1199
finding drawing objects by 1033
importing 359, 367
including when publishing to
DWF 1131
linking records to drawing
objects 460
linking to drawing objects in
maps 878
overview 26
reports 1213
viewing for features 921
Attribute Data dialog box 1435
Attribute Domain Values Editor 1504
Attribute Editor (metadata) 1485
auditing 779, 1249
metadata 1249
topology 779
Australian coordinate systems 101–102
changes 102
grid data files 101
AutoCAD Civil 3D 472
bringing data into AutoCAD Map
3D 472
AutoCAD Color Index 1295
AutoCAD commands 589, 597–598
editing features with 589, 597–598
AutoCAD layers 301, 353, 355
adding drawing objects to maps 301
assigning object classes during
import 355
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 353
1770 | Index
AutoCAD Map 3D 37–40, 44, 48, 52, 69,
76, 105, 133, 194–195, 1203,
1625
checking version 1625
command line interface 44
coordinate system files 105
customizing 76, 194–195
logging in as Superuser 133
menus and toolbars 39
opening display maps in previous
versions 1203
sample data 52
setting options 194–195
setting up 69
Task Pane 40
templates 52
tutorials 48
user interface tour 37
user privileges 133
workspaces 38
AutoCAD Map Confirmation dialog box
(drawing topology) 1669–1670
AutoCAD Map Messages dialog box 1533
AutoCAD Map Options dialog box 1628
AutoCAD Raster Design images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
AutoCommitting changes in the Data
View 868
Autodesk Design Review 1129, 1133,
1135
Autodesk digital animation 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Autodesk DWF Viewer 1129
Autodesk MapGuide 326, 1141, 1175–
1176
exporting to version 6.5 and
earlier 1175–1176
importing from 326
publishing to Enterprise 2007
version 1141
Autodesk MapGuide Export dialog
box 1318
Autodesk mapGuide Import dialog
box 1320
Autodesk SDF 287–288, 323–324
about file format 323
adding feature data to maps 288
provider capabilities for maps 287
Autodesk value chain 12
AutoLISP variables 1294
automatic drawing cleanup 652
automatic save file 629
automatic update 80, 586
changing default setting 80
for feature data 586
autox.sv$ file 629
azimuth base 211
setting to South 211
B
backup files 635
balancing polygon boundaries 811
base feature classes 1471
in Schema Editor 1471
base object classes 114
base or abstract classes (inheritance) 520
setting in schemas 520
best route analysis 710, 713, 1094, 1096
and direct resistance 713
and direction 710
BIL images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
bitonal images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
block attributes 460, 878, 1033, 1084,
1292
and queries 1084
finding drawing objects by 1033
linking data to drawing objects in
maps 460
linking to drawing objects in
maps 878
variables 1292
Block Mapping dialog box 1437
block names 1030, 1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
finding drawing objects by 1030
block queries 1080
and property queries 1080
in preview mode 1080
Index | 1771
BLOCKNAME variable 1289
blocks 129, 204, 361, 460, 557, 633,
635, 878, 965, 1045, 1068, 1080,
1084
adjusting for map distortion 204
altering name with queries 1045
and property alteration 1080
exploding when saving back from
maps 633
for drawing layers 557
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 361
linking to data for maps 460
linking to records automatically 878
options 204
querying 1084
redefining on save back 635
saving to source drawings from
maps 633
scaling for drawing layer
themes 965
specifying color 1068
specifying for digitized nodes 129
theming for drawing layers 965
units 204
BMP files 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
boundaries 628, 798, 802, 811, 819,
833, 1027
breaking drawing objects at 798
changing for polygons in maps 819
displaying for polygons 833
inner and outer for polygons 811
query location 1027
trimming objects at 802
using to save drawing objects 628
Boundary Break command 798
boxes 1508
Responsible Party Editor (ISO
Metadata) dialog box 1508
Break Objects at Boundary dialog
box 1404
breaking 798
drawing objects at boundaries 798
brightness 557
for drawing layers 557
Browse/Search dialog box 1534
Buffer Features dialog box 1303
Buffer Warning dialog box 1304
bufferfence boundary for query
location 1027
buffers 1004, 1112
and topology 1112
for drawing objects 1112
for features 1004
for geospatial features 1004
warnings 1004
BULGE variable 1289
Bulk Copy 523, 525–526, 528–529, 1474
and geometry issues 528–529
copying data from one feature source
to another 525
copying foreign schemas 525
data types 526
ignoring errors 1474
log files 529
overview 523
widening conversion 526
Bulk Copy dialog box 1474
Bursa/Wolfe conversion method 86
buying data 52
C
caching 601
CAD 12
integrating with GIS 12
calculated properties 448, 927
and joined data 448
creating 927
calibration 124, 126
and digitizing maps 126
options when digitizing 124
CALS images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Canadian National Transformation 104
cancelling check out for features 585
Cartesian coordinate system 124, 134,
204
adjusting for distortion in maps 204
and digitizing 124
1772 | Index
categories 89, 94, 168
for coordinate systems 89, 94
for queries 168
cells (in database) 868
editing in Data View 868
CENTER variable 1289
central meridian 134
Centroid Objects dialog box (drawing
topology) 1671
CENTROID variable 1289
centroids 363, 366, 702, 704, 749, 794,
807, 832
creating for closed polylines 807
creating for polygon topology 702
creating for polygons 366, 749,
807, 832
creating if missing 704
importing to in AutoCAD Map
3D 363
moving data to 363, 749
moving label point 794
removing duplicates 704
CG4 images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Change Category dialog box (drawing
queries) 1569
check out features 584
automatically 584
checking in features 582
checking out features 584–586
and automatic update 586
and locking 584
and working offline 584
cancelling 585
circles 646, 1027
boundary for query location 1027
converting to 2D polylines during
Drawing Cleanup 646
converting to arcs during Drawing
Cleanup 646
Citation Editor (ISO Metadata) dialog
box 1509
Citation Information Editor 1488
Civil 3D 470, 472
bringing data into AutoCAD Map
3D 472
exporting data to SHP 472
objects supported by AutoCAD Map
3D 470
classified DWG 842–843
Classified Property List dialog box (object
classification) 1514
CLASSIFY command 844
Classify dialog box (object
classification) 1514
Classify Objects dialog box 1515
classifying objects 842–843, 847
cleanup 637–638, 640, 643, 646, 649–
650, 652, 655, 658, 661, 664,
666, 668, 671, 673, 675, 677,
679, 682–683, 687, 704
actions 658
anchoring objects 640
apparent intersection 673
breaking crossing objects 668, 704
correcting errors automatically 652
correcting errors interactively 655
correction methods 652
dangling objects 679
deleting duplicates 664
displaying markers 655
elevation for new objects 646
erasing short linear objects 666
extending undershoots 671
for topology 658
layers for new objects 646
line width for new objects 646
markers 649
order of actions 643
order of operations 658
overview 637
profiles 650
pseudo nodes 677
reviewing errors before
correcting 655
selecting actions 643, 661
selecting objects 640
simplifying objects 682
snapping clustered nodes 675
tolerance for 643
weeding 687
zero-length objects 683
Index | 1773
Cleanup Methods dialog box page 1323
closed polylines 366, 759, 807, 832,
1201
creating centroids for 366, 807, 832
creating from polygon topology 759
creating from polygons during
export 1201
clustered nodes 643, 649, 675
marking for cleanup 649
snapping 675
tolerance for deleting 643
COGO 850–852, 854, 856–857
angle and distance 852
azimuth and distance 857
bearing and distance 854
deflection and distance 856
entering commands 851
input commands 850
transparent commands 850
Color Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1516
COLOR variable 1289
colors 129, 546, 548, 557, 965, 992,
1030, 1045, 1050, 1068, 1295
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
altering using queries 1045
and styles 548
changing for blocks 1068
digitizing 129
finding drawing objects by 1030
for drawing layers 557
for lines 546
for surface themes 992
in expressions 1295
list of 1295
setting feature default 1295
theming for drawing layers 965
using to modify thematic
objects 1045
Column dialog box 1412
Column Values dialog box 1414
columns (in database tables) 454, 870–
871
for link templates in maps 454
formatting in Data View 870
hiding or freezing in Data View 871
combining maps 148
comma-separated files 934, 1215
and user locale 1215
exporting from Data Table 934,
1215
command line 44, 79, 402
inserting images 402
interface in AutoCAD Map 3D 44
showing by default in geospatial and
drawing workspaces 79
Command prompt 44
in AutoCAD Map 3D 44
commands 1259, 1274, 1278
blocked during refedit 1278
changed from previous
releases 1259
committing changes in the Data
View 868
complete topology 779
complex linear objects 649, 682, 687
marking for cleanup 649
simplifying 682, 687
composite line styles 546, 559
for drawing layers 559
Computer Aided Acquisition images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
conditional functions 1286
conditions 313
using to add drawing objects to
maps 313
conditions for queries (drawing
objects) 1024–1025, 1027,
1030, 1033, 1038, 1041, 1043
block attribute conditions 1033
combining 1041
data conditions 1033
editing 1043
link data conditions 1033
location conditions 1027
object data conditions 1033
overview 1025
precedence 1041
property conditions 1030
SQL conditions 1038
Configure Data Source dialog box 1415
1774 | Index
configuring 123, 191
data sources 191
digitizers 123
conformal projections 134
Connect Data Source dialog box 1416
connecting 193, 272, 277, 280, 283,
286, 288, 291, 294
data sources for drawings 193
to ArcSDE data sources for maps 277
to Autodesk SDF data sources for
maps 288
to Microsoft Access data for
maps 291
to MySQL data in maps 283
to ODBC data for maps 291
to Oracle data sources for maps 272
to SHP files for maps 286
to SQL Server data for maps 280
to WFS data 294
connection pooling 80
constraints 511–512, 520
setting in schemas 511–512, 520
Contact Information Editor 1493
continuous distances 949
base option 949
Contour dialog box 1305
contour lines 668, 682, 884, 976, 979
and Drawing Cleanup 668
deleting 979
digitizing 884
editing 979
overview 976
simplifying with Drawing
Cleanup 682
control points for digitizing 884
conversion functions 1287
convert 1166
DWG data 1166
to other format 1166
Convert DWG To... 1166
Convert Object Data to Database Links
dialog box 1416
converting 318, 463, 523, 646, 759, 826,
1166, 1168, 1201
data from one format to
another 523
drawing objects during Drawing
Cleanup 646
drawings from other formats 318
elevation during Drawing
Cleanup 646
files from other programs 318
geospatial features to DWG
format 318
layers during Drawing Cleanup 646
line width during Drawing
Cleanup 646
maps to other formats 1168
object data to database tables 463
overview 1166
polygons to polylines during
export 1201
polygons to polylines in AutoCAD
Map 3D 759
polylines from 3D to 2D during
Drawing Cleanup 646
polylines to polygons 826
coordinate conversion 357, 1166
during export 1166
during import 357
coordinate geometry 211, 850–852, 854,
856–857, 940, 945, 951
angle and distance 852
azimuth and distance 857
bearing and distance 854
commands 940
deflection and distance 856
displaying information for lines and
arcs 951
measuring 945
options 211, 945
Coordinate Geometry Setup dialog
box 1637
Coordinate System Translation dialog
box 1439
coordinate systems 85–86, 88–90, 94–
96, 101–102, 104–105, 134, 136,
138–142, 204, 209, 268, 809,
941, 943, 1079, 1166, 1474
and feature sources in maps 268
assigning to current drawing 138
assigning to source drawings 136
Index | 1775
Australia and New Zealand 101
basing on datum 85
basing on ellipsoid 85
categories 89, 94
changes to Australian 102
datum shift issues for North American
users 104
defining 85
defining a datum 86
defining an ellipsoid 88
deleting 90
digitizing points 809
files 105
for current drawing 134
for source drawings 134
GDC files 96
geodetic 139
grid data catalog (GDC) files 95–96
ignoring in Bulk Copy 1474
latitude and longitude 85
measuring geodetic distance 943
modifying 90
options 204, 209
overview 134
removing from drawings 140, 1079
specifying for export 1166
tracking coordinates 941
transformation options 209
transforming for a drawing 142
viewing for source drawing 141
coordinate transformation 134, 136, 209
options 209
coordinates 383, 809, 940–941
changing format for 941
digitizing 809
measuring 940
specifying for raster images 383
tracking 940–941
Copy Scale dialog box 1360
copying 525, 539
data from one feature source to
another 525
display layers 539
correcting topology 779
Coverages 245, 318, 330, 1178
export defaults 245
exporting to 1178
importing 318, 330
Create A Calculation 927
Create a Join dialog box 1339
Create Centroids dialog box 1535
Create Closed Polylines dialog box
(drawing topology) 1672
Create Data Store dialog box 1341, 1476
Create Map Book dialog box 1561
Create Metadata Template dialog
box 1488
Create Network Topology Create New
Nodes dialog box 1673
Create Network Topology Select Links
dialog box 1675
Create Network Topology Select Nodes
dialog box 1676
Create Node Topology Select Nodes dialog
box 1677
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Centroids dialog box 1679
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Nodes dialog box 1680
Create Polygon Topology Select Centoids
dialog box 1681
Create Polygon Topology Select Links
dialog box 1683
Create Polygon Topology Select Nodes
dialog box 1684
Create Polygon Topology Set Error Markers
dialog box 1686
Create Polygons From Topology dialog
box 1557
Create Topology Select Topology dialog
box 1688
Create Topology Warning dialog
box 1690
creating 86, 88–89, 260, 510, 578–580,
691, 694, 697, 702, 816, 842,
958, 1077, 1151, 1227
classified drawing objects 842
coordinate system categories 89
datums 86
ellipsoids 88
feature classes in schemas 510
geospatial features 578
1776 | Index
linestring features 580
map books 1151
maps 260
metadata 1227
multilinestring features 580
multipoint features 578
multipolygon features 579
network topology 697, 702
node topology 694
point features 578
polygon features 579
polygons in maps 816
properties in schemas 510
query indexes 1077
schemas 510
themes for feature layers 958
topology 691
crossing linear objects 649, 668, 704
breaking 668, 704
marking for cleanup 649
customizing 76–77, 129, 157, 194–195,
200, 204, 206, 208–209, 213,
215, 219, 221, 225, 240, 245,
635, 1014, 1155
.ini files 240
AutoCAD Map 3D 76, 194–195, 225
automatically highlighting linked
objects 1014
coordinate system 209
coordinate transformation 204
data sources 204, 213, 219
Data View 215
digitizing 129
drawing origin 157
drawing settings 204
export 245
import 245
log files 208
map books 1155
mapexport.ini 245
mapimport.ini 245
multi-user settings 206
overview 194–195
queries 221
save back settings 635
saving options 225
system settings 208
Task Pane 200
workspaces for AutoCAD Map
3D 77
D
dangling objects 643, 649, 679
and Drawing Cleanup 679
marking for cleanup 649
tolerance for deleting 643
data 52, 129, 182, 188, 191, 253, 359,
367–368, 439, 452, 523, 525,
694, 697, 702, 774, 861, 868,
876–878, 880, 893, 896, 919,
932, 998, 1033, 1052, 1166, 1209
altering drawing objects based
on 1052
analyzing 919
and maps 253
attaching data sources 188
attaching multiple records to drawing
objects 877
attaching object data to drawing
objects 876
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 878
attaching to objects 188
attaching while digitizing 129, 893,
896
configuring data sources 191
converting 1166
copying from one feature source to
another 525
displaying as text 368
editing external data in Data
View 868
editing object data 880
exporting 1166
external data 188
external data for drawing
objects 861
finding drawing objects by 1033
finding for features 998
finding patterns 919
for network topology 697
Index | 1777
for node topology 694
for polygon topology 702
highlighting in Data Table 932
importing 359, 367
joining to features 439
linking to drawing objects in
maps 452
migrating 523
modifying object data tables 182
round-trip from DWG and
back 1209
samples included with AutoCAD Map
3D 52
saving changes in Data View 868
viewing for topology 774
viewing with Data View 861
data access 467–468
extending capabilities 467–468
data attributes 1471
for properties in Schema
Editor 1471
Data Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1570
data conditions for queries 1033, 1043
editing 1043
Data Connect 268, 372, 505
accessing feature sources with 268
adding images 372
creating feature sources 505
data formats 523
converting between 523
data properties 1471
in Schema Editor 1471
Data Source Name (DSN) 188, 191, 291
creating in Windows XP 291
data sources 18, 188, 191, 193, 204,
211, 213, 219, 253, 271, 274,
282, 285, 287, 289, 293, 328,
345, 505
ArcSDE 274
attaching 188
Autodesk SDF 287
combining in maps 18
configuring automatically 191
configuring coordinate
geometry 211
configuring manually 191
connecting 193
creating 505
customizing 219
default database versions 219
detaching 188
disconnecting 193
for maps 253
importing ArcSDE data 328
importing Oracle data 345
Microsoft Access 289
MySQL 282
ODBC 289
options 204, 213, 219
Oracle 271
SDF 287
SHP 285
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 188
WFS 293
data stores 479, 505, 507
creating 505
definition 479
deleting 507
overview 479
Data Table 589, 595, 921–922, 925, 927,
929–934, 993, 996, 998, 1213,
1215, 1347
auto-hiding 922
calculated properties 927
dialog box 1347
displaying 922
editing features with 589, 595
exporting data from 1213
exporting from 934, 1215
filtering 998
finding data 998
highlighting areas in map 931
highlighting rows of data 932
making transparent 922
overview 921
removing highlighting in map 931
searching feature data 993, 996
selecting data 998
selecting data with 925
selecting features 993, 996
1778 | Index
viewing data for all feature
classes 929
viewing feature class data 929
viewing joined data 929
viewing non-spatial data 930
zooming to a view 933
Data to Attach dialog box 1352
data types 526
when converting with Bulk
Copy 526
Data View 215, 454, 456, 458, 466, 860–
861, 865, 868, 870–871, 938,
1010, 1012, 1014, 1017–1019,
1022, 1213, 1216
adding records 868
and database queries 865
Auto Commit 868
changing alignment 870
changing colors 870
changing columns 870
changing fonts 870
checking records linked to drawing
objects 1010
copying data to Windows
Clipboard 868
customizing 870–871
deleting records 868
editing records 868, 1012
filtering 1019
filtering by location 1022
filtering records 1010
finding records 1010, 1012
hiding and showing columns 871
highlighting objects in
drawings 1010, 1014
highlighting records linked to drawing
objects 1017
link template paths 466
link templates 454
linked tables 456
linking records to drawing
objects 458
navigating 861
opening tables 865
options 215
overview 861
printing 1010
printing data from 1213
printing tables 1216
saving changes to data 868
spatial filter 1022
SQL queries 1018
SQL queries for drawing data 1019
viewing external data for drawing
objects 938
database link index 1077
database queries 865
database tables 188, 191, 193, 219, 367–
368, 452, 454, 456, 458, 460,
466, 861, 865, 868, 882, 1010,
1012, 1014, 1017, 1019, 1022,
1038, 1055, 1216
adding records 868
altering drawing objects based
on 1055
and Data View 861
attaching 191
attaching to drawing 188
connecting 193
converting object data to 882
default version 219
deleting records 868
disconnecting 193
displaying as text 368
editing in Data View 868
filtering 1019
filtering by location 1022
finding records 1010
highlighting linked drawing
objects 1014
highlighting records linked to drawing
objects 1017
importing links 367
key columns for link templates 454
link template paths 466
link templates for maps 454
linked 456
linking records to drawing
objects 458
linking to drawing objects in
maps 452, 460
navigating in Data View 861
Index | 1779
opening in Data View 865
opening linked 456
printing from Data View 1216
querying 865
saving changes 868
searching 1012
SQL conditions 1038
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 188, 191
viewing external data 861
database views 514, 516
accessing from native schemas 514
exposing in AutoCAD Map 3D 514
mapping to feature classes 514, 516
databases 185, 188, 191, 193, 219, 253,
452, 458, 460–461, 463, 502–503,
861, 868, 896, 938, 1010, 1012,
1014, 1017, 1019, 1022, 1038,
1055
adding records 868
altering drawing objects based
on 1055
and Data View 861
and maps 253
and object data 461
attaching 188
attaching to maps 185
configuring 191
connecting 193
converting from object data 463
default version 219
deleting records 868
detaching 188
disconnecting 193
editing in Data View 868
filtering 1019
filtering by location 1022
finding records 1010
highlighting linked drawing
objects 1014
highlighting records linked to drawing
objects 1017
linking records to drawing
objects 458
linking to drawing objects in
maps 452, 460
linking to while digitizing 896
navigating in Data View 861
opening queries for 185
saving changes 868
searching 1012
setting up users for AutoCAD Map
3D 502–503
SQL conditions 1038
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 188, 191
viewing for drawing objects 861
viewing in Data View 938
viewing properties 185
DATAVIEWHEADERANDFOOTER
command 1217
DATAVIEWPAGESSETUP
command 1217
DATAVIEWPRINT command 1217
datum (for coordinate system) 86, 91,
102, 104, 139
changes to Australian 102
defining 86
deleting 91
geodetic coordinate systems 139
modifying 91
shift issues 104
DB files 188, 219
attaching to drawing 188
setting default version 219
dBASE 188, 219
attaching database to drawing 188
setting default version 219
DBF files 188, 219
attaching to drawing 188
setting default version 219
defaults 116, 180, 188
database versions 188
for object classes 116
for object data fields 180
Define Annotation Template dialog
box 1310
Define Hatch dialog box 1361
Define Link Template dialog box 1418–
1419
Define New Category dialog box (drawing
queries) 1572
1780 | Index
Define New Object Data Field dialog
box 1317
Define New Object Data Table dialog
box 1537
Define Object Classification dialog
box 1517
Define Object Data dialog box 1539
Define Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1573
Define Range Table dialog box (drawing
queries) 1577
Define Text dialog box 1362
Define Text dialog box (drawing
queries) 1580
Define/Modify Drawing Set dialog
box 1638
defining 85–86, 88, 111–112
coordinate systems 85
datums 86
ellipsoids 88
object classes 111–112
definition file 849
for object classes 849
Delete Topology dialog box 1690
deleting 90–92, 94, 140, 182, 445, 465,
507, 521, 751, 760, 785, 868,
911, 1164
annotation from maps 911
coordinate system assignment 140
coordinate system categories 94
coordinate systems 90
data stores 507
database links 465
database records 868
datums 91
ellipsoids 92
feature classes in schemas 521
feature sources 507
joins 445
links (linear objects) from
topology 751
map book tiles 1164
map books 1164
nodes from topology 751
object data tables 182
points (nodes) from topology 751
polygons from topology 751
properties in schemas 521
schemas in feature sources 521
topology 760, 785
DEM (Digital Elevation Model) 370,
372–374
adding to maps 370
adding with Data Connect 372, 374
density 383
specifying for raster images 383
descriptions 155, 180
for object data fields 180
for source drawings 155
Design File Input Settings dialog box
(Import) 1467
Design File Output Settings dialog box
(Export) 1470
Design Web Format 1129, 1133, 1135,
1162
publishing map books to 1162
publishing maps to 1129, 1133,
1135
Detach Data Source dialog box 1420
detaching 188, 624
data sources 188
drawings from maps 624
deviation 124
and calibration 124
DGN files 245, 318, 340, 344, 1166,
1186
changing export default to imperial
units 245
changing the default seed file 245
exporting 1166
exporting to 1186
importing 318, 340, 344
seed file for 1186
units of measurement 245
dialog boxes 1142, 1278, 1283, 1303–
1310, 1312, 1314–1318, 1320,
1323, 1325–1326, 1328–1329,
1331, 1336–1337, 1339, 1341–
1345, 1352–1353, 1355–1362,
1364–1365, 1368–1370, 1372–
1374, 1376, 1378–1380, 1404–
1405, 1408, 1411–1412, 1414–
Index | 1781
1416, 1418–1429, 1432–1433,
1435, 1437, 1439–1440, 1445–
1446, 1452–1453, 1461–1462,
1465–1467, 1470–1471, 1474,
1476, 1479, 1483, 1485–1488,
1491, 1493–1494, 1499, 1504,
1506, 1508–1509, 1513–1517,
1521–1524, 1527–1529, 1531–
1537, 1539, 1541, 1543–1545,
1548, 1557–1558, 1561, 1563–
1566, 1569–1570, 1572–1573,
1577, 1580, 1582–1584, 1587,
1590, 1593, 1595–1598, 1601,
1605, 1607, 1609, 1611–1612,
1614, 1617, 1621, 1623, 1628,
1637–1638, 1640, 1642, 1646–
1648, 1650, 1652–1653, 1655–
1656, 1669, 1671–1673, 1675–
1677, 1679–1681, 1683–1684,
1686, 1688, 1690–1692, 1694–
1698, 1700–1701, 1703, 1705–
1706, 1708–1713, 1715–1719,
1722–1724, 1726–1728, 1730–
1734
Add Class Property (Export) 1461
Alter Block Insertion 1357
Alter Line Format 1358
Alter Linetype 1359
Alter Lineweight 1359
Alter Plotstyle 1360
Alternate Font (drawing
queries) 1569
Annotation Delete 1307
Annotation Refresh 1307
Annotation Text 1308
Annotation Update 1309
Assign Global Coordinate
System 1336
Associate Database Versions 1411
Attach Object Class Definition
File 1513
Attach Object Data 1527
Attach/Detach Object Data 1528
Attribute Data 1435
Attribute Domain Values
Editor 1504
Attribute Editor (metadata) 1485
AutoCAD Map Confirmation (drawing
topology) 1669
AutoCAD Map Messages 1533
AutoCAD Map Options 1628
Autodesk MapGuide Export 1318
Autodesk MapGuide Import 1320
Block Mapping 1437
Break Objects at Boundary 1404
Browse/Search 1534
Buffer Features 1303
Buffer Warning 1304
Bulk Copy 1474
Centroid Objects (drawing
topology) 1671
Change Category (drawing
queries) 1569
Citation Editor (ISO Metadata) 1509
Citation Information Editor 1488
Classified Property List (object
classification) 1514
Classify (object classification) 1514
Classify Objects 1515
Cleanup Methods page 1323
Color Range Editor (object
classification) 1516
Column 1412
Column Values 1414
Configure Data Source 1415
Connect Data Source 1416
Contact Information Editor 1493
Contour 1305
Convert Object Data to Database
Links 1416
Coordinate Geometry Setup 1637
Coordinate System Translation 1439
Copy Scale 1360
Create a Join 1339
Create Centroids 1535
Create Closed Polylines (drawing
topology) 1672
Create Data Store 1341, 1476
Create Map Book 1561
Create Metadata Template 1488
Create Network Topology Create New
Nodes 1673
1782 | Index
Create Network Topology Select
Links 1675
Create Network Topology Select
Nodes 1676
Create Node Topology Select
Nodes 1677
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Centroids 1679
Create Polygon Topology Create New
Nodes 1680
Create Polygon Topology Select
Centoids 1681
Create Polygon Topology Select
Links 1683
Create Polygon Topology Select
Nodes 1684
Create Polygon Topology Set Error
Markers 1686
Create Polygons From
Topology 1557
Create Topology Select
Topology 1688
Create Topology Warning 1690
Data Condition (drawing
queries) 1570
Data Expression 1536
Data to Attach 1352
Define Annotation Template 1310
Define Hatch 1361
Define Link Template 1418–1419
Define New Category (drawing
queries) 1572
Define New Object Data Field 1317
Define New Object Data Table 1537
Define Object Classification 1517
Define Object Data 1539
Define Query (drawing
queries) 1573
Define Range Table (drawing
queries) 1577
Define Text 1362
Define Text (drawing queries) 1580
Define/Modify Drawing Set 1638
Delete Topology 1690
Design File Input Settings
(Import) 1467
Design File Output Settings
(Export) 1470
Detach Data Source 1420
Digitize Setup 1353
Disconnect Data Source 1421
Drawing Cleanup 1323, 1325–1326,
1328, 1331
Drawing Cleanup Errors 1329
Drawing Maintenance 1640
Drawing Set Display Filter 1642
Drawing Settings 1642
Drawing Statistics 1646
Drive Alias Administration 1647
Edit a Join 1339
Edit Direct Resistance (drawing
topology) 1691
Edit Direction (drawing
topology) 1692
Edit Expression 1312
Edit Object Data 1529
Edit Reverse Resistance (drawing
topology) 1692
EditText (text layers) 1364
Error Markers page 1325
Export 1440
Export Metadata 1487
Expression 1283, 1316
External Database Mapping 1465
Feature Class Mapping
(Export) 1461
Feature Editing Options 1648
Feature Information 1341
Feature Source Administration 1342
Feature Source Connection 1342
Feature Source Scope 1341
Generate Data Links 1541
Generate Object Data Index 1650
Hatch Options (drawing
queries) 1582
Header/Footer 1421
Hillshade Settings 1306
Horizontal Coordinate System
Definition Editor (FGDC
Metadata) 1499
Identify Map Book Layout
Placeholders 1563
Index | 1783
Image Correlation (Insert Image
command) 1607
Image Information 1609
Image Management (Insert Image
command) 1609
Image Management Layout (Insert
Image command) 1611
Image Select (Insert Image
command) 1611
Import 1446
Import Data Mapping 1465
Import Metadata Options 1486
Import Old Theme 1364
Index Maintenance 1650
Insert Annotation 1312
Insert Image 1612
Layer Mapping (Import FDO) 1452
Layer Range Editor (object
classification) 1521
Layers to DGN Levels 1453
Linetype Range Editor (object
classification) 1521
Lineweight Range Editor (obejct
classification) 1522
Link Objects (drawing
topology) 1694
Link Template Data Entry 1355
Link Template Key Column
Entry 1356
Link Template Properties 1422
Load Internal Query (drawing
queries) 1583
Load Topology 1696
Load Topology Conflict 1695
Load Topology From Source
Drawing 1697
Location Condition (drawing
queries) 1584
Manage Joins 1343
Map Book Properties 1564, 1566
Metadata Editor 1483
Metadata Options 1485
Metadata Viewer 1479
Network Topology Analysis Choose
Locations 1698
Network Topology Analysis
Output 1700
Network Topology Analysis Resistance
and Direction 1701
Network Topology Analysis Select
Method 1703
New Annotation Template
Name 1314
New Layer 1318, 1543
New Object Class Definition
File 1523
New Property (object
classification) 1524
New Range Table (drawing
queries) 1587
New Scale 1365
Node Objects (drawing
topology) 1705–1706
Object Class Attribute
Mapping 1445
Object Data Mapping 1465
Output Report Options (drawing
queries) 1587
Page Setup 1423
Plotstyle Range Editor (object
classification) 1524
Point Mapping 1466
Polygon Fill Properties 1558
Property Condition (drawing
queries) 1590
Property Value Mapping
(Export) 1462
Publish to Autodesk
MapGuide 1315
Publish to MapGuide Results 1142
Publish To MapGuide results 1316
Query Library Administration
(drawing queries) 1593
Quick View Drawings 1733
Range of Values 1365
Raster Extension Options (Insert
Image command) 1614
Remove Object Data Index 1652
Rename Category (drawing
queries) 1595
1784 | Index
Rename Range Table (drawing
queries) 1595
Rename Table 1531
Rename Topology 1708
Responsible Party Editor (ISO
Metadata) 1508
Run Library Query (drawing
queries) 1596
Save Current Query (drawing
queries) 1597
Save Features 1343
Save Objects to Source
Drawings 1621
Save Version 1344
Schema Editor 1471
Select Actions page 1326
Select Alias 1652
Select Block 1544
Select Data 1544
Select Data (drawing topology) 1709
Select Database Version 1424
Select Display Element 1368
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate
System 1337
Select Drawings to Attach 1545
Select Existing Link Template 1425
Select Feature Classes (Display
Manager) 1368
Select Images (Display
Manager) 1368
Select Layers (Display
Manager) 1368
Select Link Template 1426
Select Link Template Key 1532
Select Link Templates 1426
Select Objects page 1331
Select Plot Set to Convert 1565
Select Query 1427
Select Table 1428
Select Topologies (Display
Manager) 1368
Set Property Alterations (drawing
queries) 1598
Sort (records) 1428
Source Drawing Scope 1369
Spatial Data Organization
Editor 1494
Split and Merge Rules 1405
SQL Condition History (drawing
queries) 1601
SQL Expression (link
templates) 1548
SQL Link Condition (drawing
queries) 1601
Standard Order Process Editor 1506
Style Area 1374
Style Band 1369
Style Label 1370
Style Line 1372
Style Point 1373
Style Text Layer 1376
Table Filter 1429
Table Filter History 1432
Table Properties 1433
Thematic Mapping 1378
Thematic Values 1379
Theme (features) 1380
Tile Properties 1565
Time Period Information
Editor 1491
Topology Buffer Create New Centroids
and Nodes 1710
Topology Buffer New
Topology 1711
Topology Buffer Set Buffer
Distance 1712
Topology Dissolve Create New
Centroids and Nodes 1713
Topology Dissolve Create
Nodes 1715
Topology Dissolve New
Topology 1716
Topology Dissolve Object Data 1717
Topology Dissolve Set
Parameter 1718
Topology Overlay Analysis Analysis
Type 1719
Topology Overlay Analysis Create
New Centroids and
Nodes 1722
Index | 1785
Topology Overlay Analysis Create
Nodes 1723
Topology Overlay Analysis Output
Attributes 1726
Topology Overlay Analysis
OutputTopology 1724
Topology Overlay Analysis Select
Overlay Topology 1727
Topology Query 1728
Topology Query Result 1730
Topology Selection 1731
Topology Statistics 1732
Transparency Color (Insert Image
command) 1617
Trim Objects at Boundary 1408
Type SQL Condition (drawing
queries) 1605
Undefined Alias Referenced 1653
User Administration 1653
User Credentials 1345
User Information 1655
User Login 1656
using wild-card characters 1278
View Query Statement 1345
Who Has It Information 1623
Zoom Drawing Extents 1734
Zoom Scale 1433
DIB images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Digital Elevation Model 53, 370, 372–
373
adding to maps 370
sample images 53
digital elevation models 976, 978, 980,
988, 992
adding contour lines 978
analyzing 976
applying hillshading 988
applying vertical exaggeration 988
changing theme colors 992
draping vector data on 980
Digital Terrain Elevation Data 370, 372–
373
adding to maps 370
DigitalGlobe 52
Digitize Setup dialog box 1353
digitizing 121–124, 126, 129, 638, 706,
809, 884, 891–893, 896
and alignment 884
and external data 896
and LABELPOINT 892
and object data 891, 893
and registering maps 126
and rotation 892
and sliver polygons 706
calibration options 124
configuration 123
correcting errors 638
drawings 884
layers 129
maps 122, 884
options 129
overview 884
setting up 121
tablet 121–122
transformation types 124
using coordinates 809
width 129
with MAPDIGITIZE 891–892
dimensions 633
saving to source drawings from
maps 633
direct resistance 713
for links in network topology 713
direction 710, 727, 737
changing for links in topology 737
editing for topology 727
for links in network topology 710
directories 150, 208
drive aliases for 150
for external queries 208
Disconnect Data Source dialog box 1421
Display Manager 42, 200, 262, 296–297,
372, 535, 537–539, 541, 550–551,
557, 559–561, 563–564, 917, 920,
958, 970, 1203, 1212
adding drawing objects to maps 297
adding images to maps 372
and drawing layers 296
and Properties palette 920
combining styles 559
controlling display order 538
1786 | Index
creating styles for drawing
layers 557
creating themes 958
displaying 200, 537
exporting layers 1212
layers 262
legend 917
Map Base layer 297
modifying styles for drawing
layers 560
multiple display maps 539
overview 535
refreshing 537
repairing broken connections 296
saving layers 1212
scale threshold 564
sharing maps 1203
Style Library 561, 563
styles for drawing objects 550
tab in Task Pane 42
themes for drawing layers 970
theumbnails for drawing layers 970
thumbnails for layers 262
updating 537
using 541, 551
using layers in MapGuide
2007 1212
display order 262, 538
controlling in the Display
Manager 538
for layers in maps 262
display styles 538, 557, 559–561, 563–
564, 566, 917
combining 559
controlling display order 538
for drawing layers 557
legend 917
modifying 560
modifying for scale thresholds 564
referencing 563
saving 561
viewing at all scales 566
displaying 158, 160, 405, 538, 950–951
angle information 950
COGO information for lines and
arcs 951
map draw order 538
raster image information 405
save back extents 158
source drawing information 160
dissolving 677, 1109
pseudo nodes 677
topology 1109
distances 943, 948–949, 952, 1004,
1091, 1096, 1100, 1112
adding 948
and buffers 1004
best route 1096
buffering a topology by 1112
continuous 949
finding shortest 1091
flood trace 1100
horizontal between points 952
measuring geodetic distance 943
distortion in maps 792
distribution methods 955
equal 955
individual values 955
Jenks (natural breaks) 955
quantile 955
standard deviation 955
dot variables 794, 1049, 1289
LABELPT 794
Draw mode queries 1071–1072, 1075
draw order 263, 538
changing for map layers 263
in Display Manager 538
Drawing Cleanup 637–638, 640, 643,
646, 649–650, 652, 655, 658,
661, 664, 666, 668, 671, 673,
675, 677, 679, 682–683, 687, 704
actions 658
anchoring objects 640
and sliver polygons 704
apparent intersection 673
Automatic mode 652
breaking crossing objects 668, 704
correcting errors automatically 652
correcting errors interactively 655
correction methods 652
dangling objects 679
deleting duplicates 664
Index | 1787
displaying markers 655
elevation for new objects 646
erasing short linear objects 666
extending undershoots 671
for topology 658
Interactive mode 655
layers for new objects 646
line width for new objects 646
markers 649
order of actions 643
order of operations 658
overview 637
profiles 650
pseudo nodes 677
reviewing errors before
correcting 655
selecting actions 643, 661
selecting objects 640
simplifying objects 682
snapping clustered nodes 675
tolerance for 643
using 638
weeding 687
zero-length objects 683
Drawing Cleanup dialog box 1323,
1325–1326, 1328, 1331
Drawing Cleanup Errors dialog box 1329
drawing data 253, 573
combining with feature data for
maps 253
overview of editing in AutoCAD Map
3D 573
drawing layers 296, 353, 555, 965–966,
970, 972, 974
creating themes for 966, 970
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 353
styles for 555
styling with annotation 974
styling with hatch patterns 972
styling with ramps 972
styling with text height 974
themes for 965
vs. AutoCAD layers 296
Drawing Maintenance dialog box 1640
drawing objects 21, 112, 152, 160, 223,
253, 296–297, 301, 303–304, 307,
309, 312–313, 318, 321, 452,
458, 460, 463, 465, 550–551,
573, 581, 599, 604, 606, 608–
610, 612, 619, 621, 624–626, 628–
631, 635, 640, 646, 664, 666,
668, 671, 673, 675, 677, 679,
682–683, 687, 702, 704, 716,
753, 771, 789, 794, 796, 798,
800, 802, 804, 842–843, 845,
847, 850, 876–878, 880, 884,
893, 896, 935, 938, 948, 1006–
1007, 1010, 1014, 1017–1019,
1022, 1024, 1027, 1029–1030,
1035, 1041, 1043, 1045, 1048,
1050, 1052, 1055, 1060, 1062,
1065, 1067, 1071–1072, 1080,
1086, 1166, 1168, 1202, 1204–
1205, 1209, 1218
adding distances 948
adding hatch during a query 1067
adding text with queries 1062
adding to Display Manager
layers 301
adding to maps by attribute
data 309
adding to maps by location 304
adding to maps by object class 303
adding to maps by property 307
adding to maps by topology 312
adding to maps with multiple
conditions 313
adding to save sets 624
aligning 789
altering based on queries 1052,
1055
altering with queries 1045, 1048,
1050
anchoring for cleanup 640
and labels 794
and maps 253, 296
apparent intersection 673
associative hatch 223
attaching external data while
digitizing 896
1788 | Index
attaching multiple records to 877
attaching object data
automatically 878
attaching object data manually 876
attaching object data while
digitizing 893
attributes in Properties palette 938
breaking at a boundary edge 798,
800
breaking crossing objects 668, 704
centroids and topology 702
classified properties 845
classifying 112, 842–843
combining query conditions 1041
combining with geospatial
features 21
converting during Drawing
Cleanup 646
converting to features in AutoCAD
Map 3D 581
counting 160
creating using object classes 842
dangling objects 679
database links 1010
defining expressions for 1060
defining label point 1065
deleting duplicates 664
digitizing 884
Display Manager styles for 551
displaying thematically 1045
dissolving pseudo nodes 677
editing for topology 716
editing in map source drawings 621
editing in maps 804
editing in source drawings 152
editing links to external data 465
editing object class data 845
editing object data 880
editing query conditions 1043
entering geometry when
creating 850
erasing on save back 635
erasing short linear objects 666
executing queries 1071
exporting 1166
exporting Oracle 1204–1205
exporting to other file formats 1168
exporting to SDF or Oracle and back
again 1209
extending undershoots 671
filling 796
filtering records by location 1022
filtering with SQL queries 1019
finding 1006
finding by location 1027
finding by property 1030
finding with queries 1024
grips in maps 804
highlighting in Data View 1014
highlighting linked records in Data
View 1017
highlighting locked objects 625
highlighting topology associated
with 771
importing 318
including in maps 297
linking to data using object
data 460
linking to external data for
maps 463
linking to external data in maps 460
linking to external database
records 452, 458
listing for queries 1218
locking 624
locking in AutoCAD Map 3D 606,
608
merging with existing features 599
moving 789
object properties and layer
properties 1029
overview for AutoCAD Map 3D 604
overview of editing in AutoCAD Map
3D 573
previewing in map source
drawings 619
querying 1024
Quick Select 1007
releasing locks in AutoCAD Map
3D 610
removing from save set 631
retrieving by groups 1080
Index | 1789
retrieving during queries 1072
retrieving hatched areas 1080
rotating 789
saving as DXF 1202
saving in AutoCAD Map 3D 612
saving to new drawings 630
saving to source drawings 626, 628
saving to the current map 629
scaling 789
selecting 1006
selecting by properties 1007
selecting for cleanup 640
selecting with object
classification 847
sharing 606
simplifying complex objects 682
snapping clustered nodes 675
SQL conditions 1035
SQL queries 1018
styles for 550
styling on import 321
text insertion point 794
transforming 789
trimming at a boundary edge 802
updating for topology 753
using topologies 1086
viewing information for 935
viewing locked objects 625
viewing locks in AutoCAD Map
3D 609
weeding 687
zero-length objects 683
drawing origin 157
modifying for source drawings 157
drawing set 75, 144, 146, 148–149, 153,
204
activating drawings 149
adding drawings 148
creating 146
modifying settings 153
options 204
overview 144
privileges 75
Drawing Set Display Filter dialog
box 1642
Drawing Statistics dialog box 1646
drawing workspace 76, 79
showing command line by
default 79
drawings 75, 136, 138, 140–142, 144,
146, 148–150, 152–153, 155, 157–
158, 160, 167, 185, 188, 193,
204, 225, 318, 606, 609, 612,
618–619, 621, 624, 626, 628–630,
633, 635, 638, 689, 792, 884,
938, 1024, 1077, 1079, 1203
activating 149
activating automatically 204
adding queries 167
aligning 144, 157
and xrefs 146
assigning coordinate system 136,
138
attaching databases to 185
attaching to maps 148
attributes in Properties Palette 938
backup files 635
cleaning 638
connecting data sources 193
coordinate systems 142
correcting errors 638
creating from existing drawings 612
creating with saved drawing
objects 630
descriptions 155
detaching 624
detaching data sources 188
digitizing 884
disconnecting data sources 193
distorting 792
distortion 204
dragging onto the Task Pane 148
drawing set 144
drive aliases for 150
editing in AutoCAD Map 3D 621
global coordinate systems 136, 138,
142
importing 318
indexing 1077
nested 146, 149
offset for source drawings 157
opening source drawings 152
1790 | Index
options 204, 225
previewing 619
problems saving 633
querying 1024
Quick View 619
removing coordinate system
assignment 140, 1079
retrieving objects from 1024
rotating source drawings 157
rubber sheeting 792
save back extents 158, 628
saving 612, 624, 1203
saving objects to 629
saving queried objects to 626, 628
scaling source drawings 157
settings 153
sharing 150, 606, 624
stretching 792
tiled 628
tiles 144
topology 689
transforming 157
transforming coordinate system 142
updating 626, 628
user privileges for 75
viewing coordinate systems 141
viewing information 160
viewing locks 609
zooming to extents in AutoCAD Map
3D 618
Drive Alias Administration dialog
box 1647
drive aliases 150, 1647
creating 150
driver options 213, 318, 330, 333, 340,
1178, 1180, 1183, 1186, 1194
DGN version 7 and 8 340, 1186
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 330, 1178
MapInfo MIF/MID files 1183
setting default 213
SHP files 333, 1180
SHP Multiclass 1194
when importing 318
DSN (Data Source Name) 188, 191, 291
creating in Windows XP 291
DTED (Digital Terrain Elevation Data
) 370, 372–373
adding to maps 370
duplicate objects 643, 649, 664
deleting 664
marking for cleanup 649
tolerance for deleting 643
DWF (Design Web Format) 1129, 1131,
1133, 1135, 1162
and attribute data 1131
publishing map books to 1162
publishing maps to 1129, 1133,
1135
setting publishing options 1131
DWG format 315–316, 318, 531, 1203
converting data to 315–316, 318
exporting maps to 1203
moving data to geospatial
formats 531
DWGNAME variable 1289
DWK files 206, 606, 609
DXF files 327, 1202
exporting drawing data to 1202
importing 327
Dynamic Input 44
in AutoCAD Map 3D 44
E
EANGLE variable 1289
ECW images 375–376
adding with Data Connect 375–376
edges 798, 802, 808, 833
breaking drawing objects at 798
displaying for polygons 833
matching for maps 808
trimming objects at 802
Edit a Join dialog box 1339
Edit Direct Resistance dialog box (drawing
topology) 1691
Edit Direction dialog box (drawing
topology) 1692
Edit Expression dialog box 1312
Edit Object Data dialog box 1529
Edit Reverse Resistance dialog box
(drawing topology) 1692
Index | 1791
Edit Text Layer dialog box (text
layers) 1364
editing 75, 90–92, 94, 155, 170, 182,
520, 595, 621, 716, 724, 727,
731, 756, 804, 819, 845, 868,
880, 1043, 1045, 1069, 1158,
1240
attached drawings 621
coordinate system categories 94
coordinate systems 90
data in Data View 868
datums 91
drawing descriptions 155
drawing objects in map source
drawings 621
drawing objects in maps using
grips 804
ellipsoids 92
external data in Data View 868
feature classes in schemas 520
features with Data Table 595
linear objects in topology 727
map books 1158
metadata 1240
nodes in topology 724, 727
object class data 845
object data 880
object data tables 182
partial topology 756
polygons in maps 819
polygons in topology 731
privileges 75
properties in schemas 520
property alteration definition 1069
queried objects 1045
queries 170
query conditions 1043
schemas in feature sources 520
source drawings 621
topology 716, 756
EED expressions 1294
EED index 1077
EHANDLE variable 1289
electric symbols 61
samples 61
elements (Display Manager) 297, 301,
304, 307, 309, 312–313, 538,
557, 559–560, 564, 566
adding drawing objects to maps by
attribute data 309
adding drawing objects to maps by
property 307
adding drawing objects to maps by
topology 312
bringing in drawing objects 297
combining styles 559
controlling display order 538
creating styles 557
drawing objects by location 304
grouping drawing objects by
layer 301
modifying styles 560
scale thresholds 564
using multiple conditions to add
drawing objects to
maps 313
viewing styles at all scales 566
elevation 65, 646, 976, 978, 1030, 1045,
1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
altering with queries 1045
displaying with contour lines 976,
978
finding drawing objects by 1030
for objects created during Drawing
Cleanup 646
purchasing data 65
ELEVATION variable 1289
ellipsoid 88, 92
defining 88
deleting 92
modifying 92
emergency response symbols 61
samples 61
Enhanced Compressed Wavelet
images 375–376
adding with Data Connect 375–376
enlarged map sections 800
EOO files 332
exporting 332
1792 | Index
importing 332
EPSG values 379
for Web Map Service (WMS) 379
equal distribution 955
equality functions 1286
ER Mapper images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
erasing 630
saved back drawing objects 630
Error Markers dialog box page 1325
errors 638, 652, 655, 786, 1142
cleaning up 638
correcting automatically 652
correcting in maps 786
correcting interactively 655
correction methods in Drawing
Cleanup 652
displaying cleanup markers 655
resolving for Publish to
MapGuide 1142
reviewing during Drawing
Cleanup 655
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 245, 318, 330,
1166, 1178
export defaults 245
exporting 1166
exporting to 1178
importing 318, 330
ESRI ArcSDE 328, 498, 500, 1179
exporting to 1179
importing from 328
schemas 498
working with data 500
ESRI data 467
ESRI grid files 370, 372–374, 976, 978
adding contour lines 978
adding to maps 370
adding with Data Connect 372, 374
analyzing 976
ESRI Personal Database 467–468
accessing 468
ESRI ShapeFiles 285–286, 333–334,
1166, 1180, 1194, 1196
adding feature data to maps 286
converting to drawing objects 285
exporting 1166
exporting multiclass 1196
exporting to 1180
importing 333–334
multiclass 1194
provider capabilities for maps 285
EWIDTH variable 1289
exaggeration 986, 988
applying to surfaces 988
Excel 188, 219, 498
attaching spreadsheet to
drawing 188
setting default version 219
setting up database ranges 498
explicit nodes 1105
Export dialog box 1440
Export Metadata dialog box 1487
export settings 245
exporting 167, 239, 245, 332, 336, 518,
934, 1166, 1168, 1170, 1172,
1175, 1190–1192, 1194, 1199,
1201–1205, 1207, 1209–1210,
1212–1213, 1215, 1254
.gml files 1190
.ini file for 245
.vml files 1191
and profiles 239
Arc/INFO Coverages 332
Arc/INFO Coverages and line
segments 245
ArcView ShapeFiles as folder 245
attribute data 1166, 1213
coordinate conversion 1166
Coverages 332
drawing objects in maps 1168
DWG to SDF or Oracle and
back 1209
DXF files 1202
EOO files 332
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 332
external data 1166
from Data Table 934, 1215
Geography Markup Language 1190
GML 1190
GML (Geography Markup
Language) 1166
layers as SDF 1210
Index | 1793
layers from Display Manager 1212
line segmentation 245
MapGuide SDF 2 files 1175
MapInfo MIF/MID 336, 1166
MapInfo TAB 1166
maps to DWG format 1203
metadata 1254
MicroStation DGN 1166
MicroStation DGN (in imperial
units) 245
multiple layers to a single feature
class 1194
mutliple feature classes 1192
object data 1166
object properties 245
Ordinance Survey of Great Britain
GML v2 1190
overview 1166
polygons 1201
procedure overview 1168
queries 167
saving settings for 1166
schemas 518
SDF 2 files 1175
supported formats 1172
supported object types 1170
text as points 1166
text enclosed in a polyline 1199
to image files 1207
to Oracle 1204–1205
to web pages 1191
VML 1190
VML (Vector Markup
Language) 1166, 1191
vs. saving as SDF 1210
Expression dialog box 1316
expression evaluator 1283
expressions 901, 925, 1060, 1283, 1285–
1289, 1292–1295, 1297
arithmetic 1283
AutoLISP 1294
block attributes 1292
conditional functions 1286
conversion 1287
defining for drawing objects 1060
dot variables 1289
EED 1294
entity 1288
equality 1286
object classification 1294
object data variables 1292
pi 1288
range 1288
reusing in queries 1283
SQL 1293
string-handling 1285
style 1288
symbol-handling 1287
tips on using 1297
using as labels 901
using colors in 1295
using to select features 925
variables 1288
extending 649, 671, 673
to apparent intersection 673
undershoots 649, 671
extents 158, 618, 628
setting save back extents 158
using to save drawing objects 628
zooming to for drawings 618
external data 129, 188, 191, 193, 213,
215, 219, 309, 367, 452, 458,
460, 463, 465, 860, 868, 882,
896, 935, 938, 1010, 1038, 1055,
1062, 1109, 1166, 1218
adding drawing objects to maps
by 309
adding text to queried objects 1062
altering drawing objects based
on 1055
attaching 188
attaching while digitizing 129, 896
committing changes in Data
View 868
configuring 191
connecting 193
converting from object data 463
converting object data to 882
database links 1010
detaching 188
disconnecting 193
editing in Data View 868
1794 | Index
exporting 1166
for drawing objects 860
importing 367
lediting links 465
linking to drawing objects 460
linking to drawing objects in
maps 452, 463
linking to objects manually 458
options 213, 215, 219
printing using report queries 1218
saving changes 868
SQL conditions 1038
using to dissolve topology 1109
viewing for drawing objects 935
viewing in Data View 938
External Database Mapping dialog
box 1465
external queries 167, 208
adding to library 167
default directory 208
extracting feature geometry 598
F
fade 557
for drawing layers 557
false origins 84
FDO 482
overview of schemas 482
FDO developer help 49
FDO features 265–266, 268, 439, 443,
479, 541, 544, 549, 573, 577–
578, 586, 901
and automatic update 586
and joins 439
and maps 265
bringing into maps 268
creating and editing 577
creating joins 443
creating new 578
defining scale for layers 544
labeling 901
loading styles 549
managing 479
overview 479
overview of editing 573
provider capabilities 266
saving styles 549
styles for 541
FDO providers 271, 274, 282, 285, 287,
289, 293, 467–468, 475, 505,
507, 509
adding 468
ArcSDE 274
Autodesk SDF 287
creating data stores 505
deleting data stores 507
Microsoft Access 289
MySQL 282
ODBC 289
Oracle 271
overview 475
Schema Editor 509
SDF 287
SHP 285
WFS 293
FDOATTACH command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOCONFIGURE command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOCONNECT command
(discontinued) 1274
FDODETACH command
(discontinued) 1274
FDODISASSOCIATE command
(discontinued) 1274
FDODISCONNECT command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOEDITSETADD command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOEDITSETREMOVE command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOEDITSETSAVE command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOEDITSETSHOW command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOLOCKS command 1342
FDOLOCKS command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOSCHEMA command
(discontinued) 1274
FDOSHOWOWNER command 1341
Index | 1795
FdoUserManager utility 502–503
Feature Class Mapping dialog box
(Export) 1461
feature classes 479, 510, 514, 516, 520–
522, 1192, 1194, 1228, 1471
creating in schemas 510
definition 479
deleting in schemas 521
editing in schemas 520
exporting multiple 1192
exporting multiple layers to 1194
mapping to database views 514, 516
metadata for 1228
overview 479
setting physical configuration 520
settings in Schema Editor 1471
undoing schema changes 522
feature data 253, 573, 577, 603, 1203
and maps 253
combining with drawing data for
maps 253
creating and editing 577
exporting to DWG format 1203
understanding 573
versioning 603
feature editing options 217
setting 217
Feature Editing Options dialog box 1648
Feature Information dialog box 1341
feature layers 296
repairing broken connections 296
Feature Source Administration dialog
box 1342
Feature Source Connection dialog
box 1342
feature source layers 479
overview 479
Feature Source Scope dialog box 1341
feature sources 27, 253, 266, 268, 271,
274, 282, 285, 287, 289, 293,
328, 345, 502, 505, 507, 509,
525, 587, 602–603, 929, 931
accessing in maps 268
and coordinate systems in maps 268
and locking 266
and maps 253
and persistent locking 266
and schema editing 266
and versioning 266
ArcSDE 274
Autodesk SDF 287
copying from one to another 525
creating 505
deleting 507
importing ArcSDE data 328
importing Oracle data 345
Microsoft Access 289
MySQL 282
ODBC 289
Oracle 271
overview 27, 266
removing highlighting in map 931
Schema Editor 509
SDF 287
setting up 502
SHP 285
updating automatically 587
versioning 602–603
viewing data for all 929
WFS 293
FEATUREDEF command 113, 116–117,
1517
features 265–266, 268, 272, 277, 280,
283, 286, 288, 291, 294, 439,
443, 479, 525, 541, 544, 549,
573, 576–582, 584–587, 589, 591–
592, 594–595, 597–599, 601–603,
900–901, 921, 925, 929, 931,
958, 993, 995–996, 998, 1000,
1003–1004
accessing WFS data 294
adding ArcSDE data to maps 277
adding Autodesk SDF data to
maps 288
adding Microsoft Access data to
maps 291
adding MySQL data to maps 283
adding ODBC data to maps 291
adding Oracle data to maps 272
adding properties 443
adding SHP data to maps 286
adding SQL Server data to maps 280
1796 | Index
and automatic update 586
and generated IDs 577
and joined properties 439
and joins 439
and locking 576
and maps 265
and multiuser environment 576
and persistent locking 586
and revision numbers 586
bringing into maps 268
buffering 1004
cancelling check out 585
checking in 582
checking out 584
checking out automatically 584
copying from one feature source to
another 525
creating and editing 577
creating from geometry 581
creating joins 443
creating linestring 580
creating multilinestring 580
creating multipoint 578
creating multipolygont 579
creating new 578
creating point 578
creating polygon 579
creating themes for 958
creation methods 577
defining scale for layers 544
editing 589
editing commands 591
editing offline 601
editing with AutoCAD
commands 597–598
editing with Data Table 595
filtering 996
filtering by conditions 1003
finding 993, 996
finding and selecting 995
finding in Data Table 998
highlighting in map 931
labeling 549, 900–901
loading styles 549
merging 594
overview 479
overview of editing 573
provider capabilities in maps 266
saving styles 549
searching for 1000
selecting 993
selecting checked out 582
selecting in Data Table 925, 998
selecting with queries 925
splitting 592
styles for 541
updating automatically 587
updating geometry 599
versioning 602–603
viewing attribute data 921
viewing data for 929
Federal Geospatial Data Committee 1223
standard for metadata 1223
fence boundary for query location 1027
FGDC CSDGM Standard 1223
downloading 1223
for metadata 1223
fields (in records) 180, 182, 359, 367–
368, 882, 1033, 1038, 1166
adding to tables 182
creating for object data 180
displaying as text 368
exporting with objects 1166
finding drawing objects by 1033
importing 359, 367
modifying for object data 182
SQL conditions 1038
when converting object data to
database tables 882
file formats 316, 386, 1166, 1172, 1175
for exporting 1166
for exporting from AutoCAD Map
3D 1172
for importing data to maps 316
for raster files outside Data
Connect 386
SDF 2 files 1175
SIF files 1175
file sharing 606
file-based data sources 253
and maps 253
Index | 1797
files 95–96, 318, 1218
for query results 1218
grid data catalog (GDC) 95–96
importing 318
fill 548, 796, 816, 819, 833, 1067
adding to closed polylines 796
adding to queried drawing
objects 1067
changing default for polygons in
maps 819
changing for polygons in maps 819
default for polygons in maps 833
for areas 548
gradients for polygons in maps 816,
833
specifying for polygons in maps 816
filtering 270, 1003
features using conditions 1003
geospatial features when adding to
maps 270
filters 1003, 1022
conditions for features in
maps 1003
spatial (Data View) 1022
finding 993, 1006
drawing objects 1006
features 993
fixed screen area 123
for digitizing 123
FLC images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
FLI images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
floating screen area 123
for digitizing 123
flood trace analysis 710, 713, 1100
and direct resistance 713
and direction 710
fly through for surfaces 982
folders 150
drive aliases for 150
fonts 245
setting for export and import 245
formats 316, 1172
for importing data to maps 316
supported for map export 1172
FoxPro 188, 219
attaching database to drawing 188
setting default version 219
frame color 383
specifying for raster images 383
FSD files 1254
functions 1283, 1285–1288
arithmetic 1283
conditional 1286
conversion 1287
entity 1288
equality 1286
pi 1288
range 1288
string-handling functions 1285
style 1288
symbol-handling 1287
G
GDAL provider 467
GDC files 96
Generate Data Links dialog box 1541
Generate Object Data Index dialog
box 1650
geodata 52
geodata portal 65
geodatabase 467–468
accessing ESRI data 468
geodetic coordinate systems 139
determining 139
geodetic distance 943
measuring 943
geographic analysis 1086
Geography Markup Language
(GML) 318, 347–348, 518,
1166, 1189–1190
exporting 1166, 1190
exporting as schema 518
exporting to 1189
importing 318, 347–348
importing as schema 518
geometry 528–529, 581, 591, 598–599,
850, 1471
and Bulk Copy 528–529
creating features from 581
1798 | Index
editing for features 591, 598
entering when creating objects 850
properties in Schema Editor 1471
updating for features 599
georeferencing 386, 1129, 1133, 1135
and publishing to DWF 1129, 1133,
1135
and raster images 386
geospatial data 479
understanding hierarchy 479
geospatial feature layers 296
repairing broken connections 296
geospatial features 21, 270, 315–316,
318, 475, 479, 482, 541, 544,
549, 578, 586, 901, 921, 925,
929, 931, 958, 993, 995–996,
998, 1000, 1003–1004, 1215
buffering 1004
combining with maps 21
converting to DWG format 315–
316, 318
creating new 578
creating themes for 958
defining scale for layers 544
definition 479
exporting data for 1215
filtering 996
filtering using conditions 1003
filtering when adding to maps 270
finding 993, 996
finding and selecting 995
finding in Data Table 998
labeling 901
loading styles 549
managing 479
overview 479
overview of providers 475
overview of schemas 482
saving styles 549
searching for 1000
selecting 993
selecting in Data Table 998
selecting with queries 925
styles for 541
viewing attribute data 921
viewing data for 929
geospatial workspace 76, 79
showing command line by
default 79
GeoSpot images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
GeoTIFF images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
GIS features 12, 265–266, 268, 439, 443,
573, 577–578, 586
and automatic update 586
and joins 439
and maps 265
bringing into maps 268
creating and editing 577
creating joins 443
creating new 578
integrating with CAD 12
overview of editing 573
provider capabilities 266
global coordinate systems 84
GML (Geography Markup
Language) 318, 347–348, 518,
1166, 1189–1190
exporting 1190
exporting as schema 518
exporting maps 1166
exporting to 1189
importing 318, 347–348
importing as schema 518
GP4 images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
GPS data 289
and ODBC 289
grade 952
displaying 952
grid data catalog (GDC) files 95–97, 100–
101
Australia 101
New Zealand 101
setting up for US 100
United States 97
grips in maps 804
grouping layers in maps 263
groups 263, 635, 1030, 1050, 1084
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
Index | 1799
changing for layers 263
finding drawing objects by 1030
querying 1084
removing on save back 635
unused 635
Groups button 263
H
hatch 223, 557, 633, 796, 833, 965, 972,
1067, 1084
adding to closed polylines 796
adding to queried drawing
objects 1067
and queries 223
associative 223
boundaries when saving 633
default for polygons 833
displaying for polygons 833
for drawing layers 557
querying 1084
saving to source drawings from
maps 633
scaling for drawing layer
themes 965
theming for drawing layers 965, 972
Hatch Options dialog box (drawing
queries) 1582
Header/Footer dialog box 1421
height 989, 991, 1045
altering with queries 1045
and theming 989
theming surfaces for 991
HEIGHT variable 1289
help 46, 51
InfoCenter 46
printing 51
hiding 80, 200, 871, 922, 1159
Data Table 922
Data View columns 871
map books 1159
map status bar 80
Task Pane 200
highlighting 625, 771, 931–932, 1014,
1017
drawing objects linked to external
data 1014
features in maps 931
locked objects 625
records linked to drawing
objects 1017
removing from features in maps 931
rows in Data Table 932
topology associated with
objects 771
Hillshade Settings dialog box 1306
hillshading 986, 988
applying to surfaces 988
Horizontal Coordinate System Definition
Editor (FGDC Metadata) dialog
box 1499
horizontal distance 952
displaying 952
hyperlinks 326, 1175
exporting to SDF 2 files 1175
importing from SDF 1 or 2 files 326
I
ialog boxes 1670
AutoCAD Map Confirmation (drawing
topology) 1670
Identify Map Book Layout Placeholders
dialog box 1563
IG4 images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
IGS images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
IKONOS images 370
adding to maps 370
Image Correlation dialog box (Insert Image
command) 1607
image formats 1207
exporting drawing data to 1207
Image Information dialog box 1609
Image Insertion dialog box 383
Image Management dialog box (Insert
Image command) 1609
1800 | Index
Image Management Layout dialog box
(Insert Image command) 1611
Image Select dialog box (Insert Image
command) 1611
Image Systems Gray Scale images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Image Systems Group 4 images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
ImageConnect 52
images 372, 386, 402
adding with Data Connect 372
inserting at command line 402
inserting with Raster Extension 386
imperial units 245
for exported MicroStation DGN
files 245
implicit nodes 1105
Import Data Mapping dialog box 1465
Import dialog box 1446
Import Metadata Options dialog
box 1486
Import Old Theme dialog box 1364
importing 167, 188, 239, 245, 315–316,
318, 321, 324, 326–328, 332,
334, 336, 339, 344–345, 348–351,
353, 355, 357, 359, 361, 367–
368, 518, 1153, 1252
.ddf files (SDTS format) 349
.gml files 348
.ini file for 245
.shp files 334
.tab files 339
.vpf files 350
and assigning object classes 355
and coordinate conversion 357
and profiles 239
and styling drawing objects 321
Arc/INFO Coverages 318, 332
ArcSDE data 328
ArcView ShapeFiles 318
ArcView ShapeFiles as folder 245
areas 351
attribute data 359, 361, 367–368
AutoCAD layers into AutoCAD Map
3D 353
Autodesk MapGuide files 326
blocks 361
data 315, 368
data types for AutoCAD Map
3D 359, 367
databases 188
DGN files 344
driver options 318
DXF files 327
EOO files 332
ESRI Arc/INFO Coverages 332
ESRI ShapeFiles 334
external data 318, 359, 367–368
file-based 245
folder-based 245
GML (Geography Markup
Language) 318, 348
layers into AutoCAD Map 3D 353
limiting area 351
MapGuide files 326
MapInfo MIF/MID as folder 245
MapInfo MIF/MID files 318, 336
MapInfo TAB 318, 339
metadata 1252
MicroStation DGN 318, 344
MIF/MID files as folder 245
object data 359, 367–368
object properties 245
Oracle data 345
Ordinance Survey of Great Britain
GML v2 318, 348
overview 318
plot map sets for map books 1153
point data as text 361
preparation for maps 316
queries 167
schemas 518
SDF 1 or 2 files 326
SDF 1, 2, or 3 324
SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer
Standard) 318, 349
ShapeFiles 334
SHP files 334
SHP files as folder 245
Spatial Data Transfer Standard 349
spatial filters for 351
supported formats for maps 316
Index | 1801
TAB files 339
TAB files as folder 245
Vector Product Format as folder 245
Vector Product Format files 350
VPF (Vector Product Format) 318,
350
VPF as folder 245
vs. accessing data for maps 316
incomplete topology 779
Index Maintenance dialog box 1650
indexes 1077
creating for drawings 1077
individual values distribution 955
InfoCenter 46
information 160, 180, 405, 776, 1218,
1220
for raster images 405
printing using report queries 1218,
1220
specifying type for tables 180
viewing for raster images 405
viewing for source drawings 160
viewing for topology 776
inheritance (base or abstract classes) 520
setting in schemas 520
Insert Annotation dialog box 1312
insert errors 1474
ignoring in Bulk Copy 1474
Insert Image dialog box 1612
insertion point 383, 794
for labels 794
for text in maps 794
specifying for raster images (Data
Connect) 383
insets for maps 800
installing 53
sample data 53
integers 359, 367
importing 359, 367
integrating CAD with GIS 12
Intermap 52
internal queries 165, 1072
executing 165, 1072
international coordinate systems 134
intersecting lines 950
displaying acute angles 950
displaying obtuse angles 950
islands 702, 759, 779, 811, 819, 826,
829, 1201
adding to polygons in maps 819
converting to polygons 829
creating from grouped polylines 826
creating in polygons 811
for topology 702, 759, 779
rebalancing in maps 819
when exporting polygons 1201
within boundaries 702
ISO 19139 metadata 1225
J
Jenks distribution 955
Jet provider for Microsoft Access 188
JFIF images 370, 386
adding to maps 370
inserting with Raster Extension 386
join keys 440
joins 439–440, 443, 445, 447–449, 929
about 439–440
advanced techniques 440
and calculated properties 448
and non-matching data 440
creating 443
deleting 445
editing joined data 447
exporting data 449
managing 445
modifying 445
publishing data 449
removing 445
saving 449
sharing data 449
viewing in Data Table 929
Joint Photographic Experts Group
images 370, 372
adding with Data Connect 372
JPEG images 370, 372, 375–376
adding with Data Connect 372,
375–376
JPEG2 images 370, 372, 375–376
adding with Data Connect 372,
375–376
1802 | Index
justification 245
setting for export and import 245
K
key columns for link templates 454
keyview viewport 1147
for map books 1147
KIF files 1175
exporting 1175
L
L74 images 370
adding to maps 370
label point 129, 794, 1065
changing 794
defining 794
defining for drawing objects 1065
specifying while digitizing 129
labeling 549
features 549
LABELPT variable 794, 1289
labels 794, 900–901, 903–904, 979
adding to features 900
allowing to obscure points 903
for contour lines 979
insertion point 794
on features 901
on points 904
Lambert Conformal Conic
projection 134
land cover map 705
land use map 705
LANDSAT FAST images 370
adding to maps 370
latitude 124
when digitizing 124
layer CS code 379
for Web Map Service (WMS) 379
Layer Mapping dialog box (Import
FDO) 1452
Layer Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1521
LAYER variable 1289
layers 129, 262–264, 296, 301, 303–304,
307, 318, 353, 355, 537–539,
544, 550, 635, 929, 1030, 1045,
1050, 1166, 1194, 1278
adding drawing objects to by
property 307
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
altering with queries 1045
and map styles 262
assigning object classes during
import 355
changing draw order 263
changing groups for 263
changing thumbnail 264
changing thumbnail styles in Display
Manager 263
copying 539
creating for drawing objects in
maps 301
defining scale for 544
display order in maps 262
draw order 538
drawing vs. AutoCAD layers 296
exporting 1166
exporting to a feature class 1194
finding drawing objects by 1030
for drawing objects in maps by
location 304
for drawing objects in maps by object
class 303
for styled drawing objects 550
grouping in maps 263
importing 318
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 353
redefining on save back 635
specifying for digitized objects 129
updating in Display Manager 537
using wild-card characters 1278
viewing data for 929
Layers to DGN Levels dialog box 1453
layout 1150
for map books 1150
LDF files 549
loading 549
Index | 1803
saving 549
legends 52, 63, 917, 970, 1147
creating 917, 970
samples 52, 63
viewport for map books 1147
length 1030, 1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
finding drawing objects by 1030
LENGTH variable 1289
levels 318
importing 318
library for queries 161, 165
LIDAR data 289
and ODBC 289
line features 962
theming 962
line width 646, 965
assigning for drawing layer
themes 965
for objects created during Drawing
Cleanup 646
linear objects 245, 638, 643, 649, 664,
666, 668, 671, 673, 675, 677,
679, 682–683, 687, 697, 704,
712, 714, 727, 737, 739, 744,
751, 753, 884, 1109
adding to topology 744
breaking crossing 668, 704
changing direction in topology 737
changing resistance in topology 739
cleaning up 638
dangling objects 679
deleting duplicates 664
digitizing 884
dissolving 1109
dissolving pseudo nodes 677
editing 727
erasing short 666
extending to apparent
intersection 673
extending undershoots 671
marking for cleanup 649
removing from topology 751
segmentation during export 245
simplifying 682
snapping clustered nodes 675
specifying direction 712, 714
tolerance for deleting duplicates 643
topology 697
updating for topology 753
weeding 687
zero-length objects 683
lines 129, 245, 546, 559, 677, 683, 853,
855–856, 858, 951
digitizing 129
displaying COGO information
for 951
dissolving pseudo nodes 677
scale ranges for 546
segmentation during export 245
specifying with angle and
distance 853
specifying with azimuth and
distance 858
specifying with bearing and
distance 855
specifying with deflection and
distance 856
styles for 546, 559
zero-length 683
linestring features 580
creating 580
linestyles 965
theming for drawing layers 965
Linetype Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1521
LINETYPE variable 1289
linetypes 129, 245, 557, 965, 1030,
1045, 1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
altering with queries 1045
finding drawing objects by 1030
for drawing layers 557
setting for export and import 245
specifying for digitized objects 129
theming for drawing layers 965
Lineweight Range Editor dialog box (obejct
classification) 1522
lineweights 245, 318, 557, 965, 1030
finding drawing objects by 1030
1804 | Index
for drawing layers 557
for imported lines 318
setting for export and import 245
theming for drawing layers 965
link data 367, 1052
altering drawing objects based
on 1052
importing 367
link index 1077
Link Objects dialog box (drawing
topology) 1694
Link Template Data Entry dialog
box 1355
Link Template Key Column Entry dialog
box 1356
Link Template Properties dialog
box 1422
link templates 454, 456, 466
about 454
creating for maps 454
deleting 466
editing paths 466
opening linked database tables 456
linking 188, 439, 443, 452, 458, 460,
463, 465, 876, 896
data sources to drawings 188
data to drawing objects 876
drawing objects to object data 460
records to drawing objects 458
records to drawing objects in
maps 452, 460, 463, 465
records to drawing objects while
digitizing 896
using joins 439, 443
links (database) 367–368, 452, 458, 460,
463, 465, 896, 1010, 1022, 1055
altering drawing objects based
on 1055
creating while digitizing 896
Data View 1010
deleting 465
displaying as text 368
editing 465
filtering by location 1022
importing 367
overview 1010
to external data 452, 458, 460, 463
links (linear objects) 638, 649, 664, 666,
668, 671, 673, 675, 677, 679,
682–683, 687, 697, 704, 712,
714, 727, 737, 739, 744, 751,
753, 884, 1109
adding to topology 744
breaking crossing 668, 704
changing direction in topology 737
changing resistance in topology 739
cleaning up 638
dangling objects 679
deleting 664
digitizing 884
dissolving 1109
dissolving pseudo nodes 677
editing 727
erasing short 666
extending to apparent
intersection 673
extending undershoots 671
marking for cleanup 649
removing from topology 751
simplifying 682
snapping clustered nodes 675
specifying direction 712, 714
topology 697
updating for topology 753
weeding 687
zero-length objects 683
lists 511
for schema property values 511
LizardTech images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Load Internal Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1583
Load Topology Conflict dialog box 1695
Load Topology dialog box 1696
Load Topology From Source Drawing
dialog box 1697
loading 170, 518, 549, 760, 768
feature styles 549
queries 170
schemas 518
topology 760, 768
Index | 1805
location 157, 304, 466
adding drawing objects to maps
by 304
for source drawings 157
link templates 466
Location Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1584
location conditions for queries 1027,
1043
editing 1043
location index 1077
locking 266, 520, 576, 584, 606, 608–
610, 624–625, 631, 635, 1471
and working offline 584
drawing objects 606, 608, 624
drawings 606
enabling in schema 520
features 576
for feature sources in maps 266
in Schema Editor 1471
removing locks from drawing
objects 631
removing locks on save back 635
viewing lock owners 609
viewing locked drawing objects 625
LOCKSTAT variable 1289
log files 208, 529, 1142
for Bulk Copy 529
for MapGuide publishing 1142
options 208
logging in 133, 206
forcing 206
long transactions 279, 520, 1471
and SQL Server 279
in Schema Editor 1471
versioning 520
longitude 124
when digitizing 124
M
Manage Joins dialog box 1343
managing 445, 479, 603
FDO data 479
joins 445
versions of data 603
Map 3D for Drawings 38
Map 3D for Geospatial 38
Map Base (Display Manager) 297
Map Book Properties dialog box 1564,
1566
Map Book tab 43
in Task Pane 43
map books 1144–1145, 1147–1148,
1150–1153, 1155–1164
adjacent arrows 1147
and sheet sets 1144
creating 1151
creating from saved settings 1156
deleting 1164
editing 1158
editing settings 1157
hiding 1159
importing plot map sets 1153
keyview viewport 1147
layout placeholders 1150
legend viewport 1147
MBS files 1155
overview 1144–1145
printing 1163
publishing to DWF 1162
publishing to plotter 1163
rebuilding 1152
renaming 1163
saving settings 1155
setting up templates 1147–1148
sheet templates 1148
viewing 1158–1159
viewing layouts 1161
viewing properties 1160
viewing tiles 1161
Map Books 53, 59
sample templates 53, 59
Map Classic 38
Map Explorer tab 41
map status bar 80
hiding 80
MAP2SDF command 1178
MAPABOUT command 1625
MAPAL command 745
MAPAN command 742
MAPANBUFFER command 1113
1806 | Index
MAPANDISSOLVE command 1110
MAPANNINSERT command 1308, 1312
MAPANNTEMPLATE command 1310
MAPANOVERLAY command 1107
MAPANTOPONET command 1087,
1093, 1098, 1101
MAPATTACHDB command 189
MAPAUTOCHECKOUT command 1625
MAPBL command 728
MAPBOOKCREATE command 1146,
1152
MAPBOOKCREATEFROMSETTINGS
command 1146, 1155, 1157
MAPBOOKEDITSETTINGS
command 1146, 1155, 1157
MAPBOOKIMPORTPLOTSET
command 1146, 1153
MAPBOOKPLACEHOLDER
command 1146, 1151
MAPBOOKSAVESETTINGS
command 1147, 1155–1156
MAPBREAK command 799, 1404
MAPBROWSELINK command 866
MAPBROWSETBL command 866, 1428
MAPBUFFER command
(discontinued) 1274
MAPCLEAN command 639
MAPCLPLINE command 1672
MAPCONFIGDB command 193, 1415
MAPCONNECTDB command 194, 1416
MAPCONNECTIONPOOLING
command 81
MAPCREATE command
(discontinued) 1274
MAPCREATECENTROIDS
command 749, 832
MAPDATAGRID command 595, 1347
MAPDEFINELT command 455, 1418–
1419, 1426
MAPDELETELINKS command 465, 1426
MAPDELETELT command 467
MAPDETACHDB command 189, 1420
MAPDIGISETUP command 122, 130,
1353
MAPDIGITIZE command 129, 891–893,
1351
setting options 129
MAPDISCONNECTDB command 194,
1421
MAPDISPLAYLIBRARY command 1357
MAPDISPLAYMANAGER command 1357
MAPDISSOLVE command
(discontinued) 1274
MAPDIST command 944, 1335
MAPDL command 752
MAPDN command 752
MAPDOCKWSPACE command 1626
MAPDP command 752
MAPDVP command 732
MAPDWFOPTIONS command 1132
MAPEDITDIR command 713, 738, 1657,
1692
MAPEDITRES1 command 1658, 1691
MAPEDITRES2 command 1658, 1692
MAPEDITSETAUTO command 1626
MAPEDITSETAUTODEFAULT
command 81
MAPEXPORT command 237, 240, 1170,
1200, 1440
mapexport.ini 240, 245
customizing 240
MAPFDOBUFFERCREATE
command 1006
MAPFEATUREEDITTOOLS
command 1626
MAPFEATUREMERGE command 1388
MAPFEATURESPLIT command 1389
MAPFIGNORESPLITMERGERULES
command 1391
MAPFLOOD command
(discontinued) 1274
mapforeignfileproperties.ini 241
customizing 241
MapGuide 326, 1141–1142, 1175–1176
exporting to version 6.5 and
earlier 1175–1176
importing from 326
publishing to Enterprise 2007
version 1141
Index | 1807
publishing to Open Source
version 1141
resolving publishing errors 1142
viewing log file after
publishing 1142
MAPIFRAME command 423, 426, 1607
MAPIINFO command 406, 1609
MAPIINSERT command 390, 1607, 1612
MAPIL command 745
MAPIMANAGE command 406, 409,
412, 1609, 1611
MAPIMPORT command 238, 240, 321,
323, 325, 330, 333, 335, 337,
340, 345, 347, 349–351, 1446
mapimport.ini 241, 245
customizing 241
MAPIN command 743
MapInfo MIF/MID 245, 318, 335, 1166,
1183
exporting 1166
exporting to 1183
importing 318, 335
importing as folder 245
MapInfo TAB 245, 318, 338–339, 1166,
1185
exporting 1166
exporting to 1185
importing 318, 338–339
importing as folder 245
MAPIOPTIONS command 229, 1614
MAPJL command 729
MAPLINESTRINGCREATE
command 1392
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT 591
MAPLINESTRINGEDIT command 1393
MAPLINKADD command
(discontinued) 1274, 1659
MAPLINKDEL command
(discontinued) 1274, 1661
MAPLINKEDIT command 1661
MAPLINKMANAGER command 466
MAPLINKREV command
(discontinued) 1274, 1662
MAPLINKUPD command 754, 1663
MAPLOGIN command 133, 1656
MAPML command 729
MAPMN command 725
MAPMP command 732
MAPMPEDIT command 1552
MAPMULTILINESTRINGCREATE
command 1394
MAPMULTILINESTRINGEDIT
command 1395
MAPMULTILINESTRNGEDIT 591
MAPMULTIPOINTCREATE
command 1397
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT 591
MAPMULTIPOINTEDIT command 1397
MAPMULTIPOLYGONCREATE
command 1398
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT 591
MAPMULTIPOLYGONEDIT
command 1399
MAPNODADD command
(discontinued) 1274, 1663
MAPNODDEL command
(discontinued) 1274, 1664
MAPNODEDIT 1665
MAPNODINS command
(discontinued) 1274, 1665
MAPNODUPD command 754, 1666
MAPOD2ASE command 461, 463–464,
1416, 1425
MAPOPTIONS command 81, 194–195,
197, 201, 205–206, 208, 210,
214, 216, 220, 222, 226, 616,
636, 1628
MAPOVERLAY command
(discontinued) 1274
MAPPLOT command 1128
MAPPOINTCREATE command 1401
MAPPOLYADD command
(discontinued) 1274, 1667
MAPPOLYDEL command
(discontinued) 1274, 1668
MAPPOLYGONCREATE command 1401
MAPPOLYGONEDIT 591
MAPPOLYGONEDIT command 1402
MAPPOLYLINETOPOLYGON
command 827, 1551
MAPPOLYUPD command 754, 1668
MAPPROPSLT command 467, 1422
1808 | Index
MAPPUBLISHTOMAPGUIDE
command 1141, 1144
MAPRL command 730, 738
MAPRUNDBQUERY command 866,
1427
maps 9, 11, 13, 33, 52, 63, 126, 134,
136, 138, 142, 144, 148, 157,
194–195, 204, 253, 258, 260, 262–
265, 268, 318, 533, 538–539,
619, 630, 638, 689, 716, 786,
790, 792, 798, 800, 802, 808,
884, 891–892, 899, 917, 1123,
1126, 1128, 1135, 1137, 1141,
1151–1152, 1203
adding GIS features 268
aligning 157
and data 253
and GIS features 265
and Quick View 619
annotating 899
assigning coordinate system 136,
138
attaching drawings 144, 148
breaking drawing objects at
boundaries 798, 800
changing draw order for layers 263
changing thumbnail for layers 264
cleaning 638
contents of 11
coordinate system 134
creating 260
creating and editing overview 13
creating map books 1151
creating multiple display maps 539
creating with saved drawing
objects 630
digitizing 884, 891–892
discontinuous edges 808
distorting 792, 808
distortion 204
draw order for layers 538
editing tools 786
editing topology 716
enlargements 800
exporting to DWG format 1203
importing data for 318
insets 800
irregular 808
joining at seams 808
layer display order 262
legends 917
matching 792
matching edges 808
on web sites 33
options 194–195
output formats 1126
overview 9
overview of map creation 258
overview of printing 1123
previewing 619
publishing 1126
publishing as web pages 1137
publishing in HTML format 1137
publishing overview 1123
publishing to Autodesk MapGuide
Enterprise 2007 1141
publishing to MapGuide Open
Source 1141
publishing to plotter 1128
publshing to DWF format 1135
rebuilding map books 1152
registering for digitizing 126
rubber sheeting 790, 792
sample data for AutoCAD Map
3D 52, 63
scale 157, 539
sections 157
sharing 33, 1123, 1203
styles 533
tiling 808
topology 689
transforming 157
transforming coordinate system 142
trimming drawing objects at
boundaries 802
MAPSDFIN command 326
MAPSELECTCLASSIFIED command 848,
1511
MAPSELECTUNCLASSIFIED
command 848, 1512
MAPSELECTUNDEFINED
command 849, 1512
Index | 1809
MAPSHOWGEOM command 763, 772
MAPSHOWTOPO command 763, 772
MAPSTATUSBAR command 81
MAPTOPOADMIN command
(discontinued) 1274
MAPTOPOADMIN Delete
command 1669
MAPTOPOADMIN Rename
command 1670
MAPTOPOAUDIT command 765, 780
MAPTOPOCOMP command 765, 780
MAPTOPODEL command 767, 785
MAPTOPOEDIT command 1669
MAPTOPOEDIT command
(discontinued) 1274, 1693
MAPTOPOLOAD command 763, 768
MAPTOPOLOGYTOPOLYGONS
command 830, 1557
MAPTOPOQUERY command 1119, 1728
MAPTOPORECR command 765, 780
MAPTOPOREN command 766, 784
MAPTOPOSTATS command 764, 776
MAPTRACE command
(discontinued) 1274
MAPTRACKCS command 943
MAPTRIM command 803, 1408
MAPUSEMPOLYGON command 835,
1552
MAPUSERADMIN command 76, 1653
MAPVIEWLINK command 867, 1532
MAPVIEWTBL command 867
MAPWSACTION command 1277
MAPWSFOCUS command 1627
MAPWSPACE command 1628
MAPWSREFRESH command 1628
markers 649, 655
for Drawing Cleanup 649, 655
matching 808
map edges 808
maximum speed for links and nodes 714
measuring 940, 943, 945, 948–949
continuous distances 949
coordinate geometry 945
coordinates 940
distances 948
geodetic distance 943
menus 39
in AutoCAD Map 3D 39
Mercator projection 134
merge rules 593
ignoring 593
merging 594
features 594
metadata 53, 218, 1223, 1225–1228,
1230–1231, 1233–1238, 1240–
1242, 1244–1245, 1248–1250,
1252, 1254–1255, 1482, 1488,
1491, 1493–1494, 1499, 1504,
1506, 1508–1509
about 1223
adding records 1245, 1248
applying templates 1233
Attribute Domain Values
Editor 1504
auditing 1249
boxes 1508
Responsible Party Editor
(ISO) 1508
Citation Editor (ISO) 1509
Citation Information Editor 1488
Contact Information Editor 1493
copying and pasting 1244
creating 1227–1228
creating templates 1233
deactivating templates 1236
default template 1235
deleting records 1245
editing 1240
exporting 1254
exporting templates 1237
free-form fields 1241–1242
Horizontal Coordinate System
Definition Editor (FGDC
Metadata) 1499
importing 1252
importing templates 1233
ISO 19139 1225
previewing templates 1235
printing 1255
publishing 1255
record navigator 1248
removing templates 1238
1810 | Index
renaming templates 1234
samples 53
setting options 1226
setting options for 218
sharing 1250
Spatial Data Organization
Editor 1494
Standard Order Process Editor 1506
standards for 1223
stylesheets for 1230
templates 1231
Time Period Information
Editor 1491
updating automatically 1226
viewing 1227
viewing a summary 1482
Metadata Editor 1483
Metadata Options dialog box 1485
Metadata Viewer 1213, 1230, 1479, 1482
exporting data from 1213
importing stylesheets 1230
Summary tab 1482
Microsoft Access 289, 291
adding feature data to maps 291
provider capabilities for maps 289
Microsoft Excel 188, 219, 498
attaching spreadsheet to
drawing 188
setting default version 219
setting up database ranges 498
Microsoft Jet 4.0 provider 188
Microsoft Visual FoxPro 188, 219
attaching database to drawing 188
setting default version 219
MicroStation DGN 245, 318, 340, 344,
1166, 1186
changing export default to imperial
units 245
changing the default seed file 245
exporting 1166
exporting to 1186
importing 318, 340, 344
seed file for 1186
units of measurement 245
MIF/MID files 245, 318, 335, 1166, 1183
exporting 1166
exporting to 1183
importing 318, 335
importing as folder 245
migrating data 523
overview 523
MIL images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
model space 1023
queries in 1023
modifying 90–92, 94, 182
coordinate system categories 94
coordinate systems 90
datums 91
ellipsoids 92
object data tables 182
monuments for digitizing 884
motion path animation 982
MPEDIT command (See
MAPMPEDIT) 1552
MPFILL command 823, 835
MPOLYGON command 818
MPSPLIT command 825, 1555
MrSID images 370, 372, 375–376
adding with Data Connect 372,
375–376
MTD files 1254
multi-page DWF 1129
Multi-Resolution Seamless Image Database
images 370, 372
adding with Data Connect 372
multilinestring features 580
creating 580
multiple features 1196
exporting from AutoCAD Map
3D 1196
multiple user options 194
multipoint features 578
creating 578
multipolygon features 579
creating 579
multiuser environment 206, 225, 576,
606
and editing 576
locking drawings 606
options 206, 225
Index | 1811
MySQL 282–283, 489, 491
adding feature data to maps 283
provider capabilities for maps 282
schemas 489
working with data 491
N
naming 180
object data tables 180
natural breaks distribution 955
NAVTEQ 52
nested drawings 146, 149
activating 149
network topology 695, 697, 710, 712–
714, 716, 737, 739, 884, 1091,
1096, 1100
and object data 695
best route 1096, 1100
changing link direction 737
changing resistance 739
creating 697
digitizing objects for 884
direct resistance 713
editing 716
overview 695
path trace analysis 710
shortest path 1091
specifying link direction 712, 714
testing integrity 1100
travel time 1091
Network Topology Analysis Choose
Locations dialog box 1698
Network Topology Analysis Output dialog
box 1700
Network Topology Analysis Resistance and
Direction dialog box 1701
Network Topology Analysis Select Method
dialog box 1703
New Annotation Template Name dialog
box 1314
New Layer dialog box 1318
New Object Class Definition File dialog
box 1523
New Property dialog box (object
classification) 1524
New Range Table dialog box (drawing
queries) 1587
New Scale dialog box 1365
New Zealand grid data files 101
NEWDEF command 120, 1523
NITF images 370
adding to maps 370
Node Objects dialog box (drawing
topology) 1705–1706
node topology 693–694, 884
and object data 693
creating 694
digitizing objects for 884
overview 693
nodes (Map Explorer) 200
displaying 200
nodes (topology) 129, 361, 643, 649,
675, 677, 679, 682–683, 694,
724, 727, 734, 739, 742, 751,
753, 809, 884, 1027, 1105
adding 742
changing appearance 734
changing resistance in topology 739
clustered 675
creating 694
dangling objects 679
digitizing 129, 884
digitizing by coordinates 809
dissolving pseudo nodes 677
dissolving psuedo nodes 649
editing 724
explicit 1105
implicit 1105
importing 361
marking for cleanup 649
pseudo 677
query location 1027
removing from topology 751
repositioning 727
simplifying lines 682
snapping clusters 649, 675
styling 734
tolerance for deleting clusters 643
updating for topology 753
weeding 682
zero-length objects 683
1812 | Index
non-feature classes 1471
in Schema Editor 1471
non-spatial data 930
viewing in Data Table 930
North American datum shift issues 104
north arrows 52, 63
samples 52, 63
not-null 511
for schema property values 511
notes 899
adding to maps 899
numbers 180
specifying type for tables 180
numeric ranges 1029–1030
for property queries 1030
for queries 1029
O
Object Class Attribute Mapping dialog
box 1445
object classes 111–112, 114–116, 118,
120, 303, 355, 845, 849, 935,
1030, 1045, 1062, 1228
adding drawing objects to maps
by 303
adding text to queried objects 1062
assigning during import 355
defining 111–112, 115
defining range of values 116
definition file 849
editing data 845
files 120
finding drawing objects by 1030
hierarchies 114–115
metadata for 1228
modifying definitions 118
range of allowable values 116
renaming 112
setting property ranges 116
using to modify thematic
objects 1045
viewing information about 935
object classification 75, 109, 112, 114–
116, 118–120, 836, 838, 842–843,
845, 847, 849, 1192, 1294
and export 1192
assigning to existing drawing
objects 843
base classes 114
creating files 120
creating objects using 842
defining objects 112, 115–116
definition file 849
editing data 845
files 119
general procedure 838
modifying definitions 118
overview 109, 836
privileges 75
removing from drawing objects 843
selecting objects using 847
setting up 109
variables 1294
object data 129, 160, 180, 182, 309,
359, 363, 367–368, 460–461, 463,
693, 695, 699, 749, 773–774,
873, 876–878, 880, 882, 891,
893, 935, 938, 1033, 1052, 1062,
1077, 1109, 1166, 1199, 1218,
1292
adding drawing objects to maps
by 309
adding text to queried objects 1062
altering drawing objects based
on 1052
and database links 461
and digitizing 891
and network topology 695
and node topology 693
and polygon topology 699
attaching multiple records 877
attaching to drawing objects 876
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 878
attaching while digitizing 129, 893
converting to a linked database
table 882
converting to external data 463, 882
Index | 1813
creating tables 180
displaying as text 368
editing 880
exporting 1166
exporting text enclosed in a
polyline 1199
finding drawing objects by 1033
for polygon topology 876
for topology 773
importing 359, 367
indexing 1077
linking automatically to records 460
linking to enclosed blocks and
text 878
listing tables in source drawings 160
modifying tables 182
moving to polygon centroids 363,
749
overview 873
printing using report queries 1218
using to dissolve topology 1109
variables 1292
viewing for drawing objects 935
viewing for topology 774
viewing in Properties palette 938
Object Data Mapping dialog box 1465
object locking 206, 606, 608–610
enabling 206
overview 606
releasing locks 610
turning on 608
viewing lock owners 609
object type 1030, 1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
finding drawing objects by 1030
ODBC 188, 289, 291, 496–497, 930
adding feature data to maps 291
compliant databases 188
provider capabilities for maps 289
schemas 496
setting up 497
viewing data in Data Table 930
working with data 497
offline 601
editing features 601
offset 157
for source drawings 157
OGC Basic Web Map Service 379
using with maps 379
OGR provider 467
one-to-many joins 440
one-to-one joins 440
online 601
returning 601
open source providers 467–468
adding 468
opening 152, 456, 865
attached drawings 152
database tables in Data View 865
linked database tables 456
source drawings 152
options 129, 148, 157–158, 194–195,
200, 204, 206, 208–209, 211,
213, 215, 217–219, 221, 225–226,
635, 650, 782, 1155
acadmap.ini file 225
acadmap.sys file 225
AutoCAD Map 3D 194–195, 225
coordinate system 209
coordinate transformation 204
data sources 204, 213, 219
Data View 215
digitizing 129
drawing origin 157
drawing scale 157
feature editing 217
for coordinate geometry 211
for drawings 204
log files 208
map books 1155
metadata 218
multi-user 206
overview 194–195
queries 221
Raster Extension 226
rotation 157
save back 635
save back extents 158
saving 225
saving for Drawing Cleanup 650
saving for topology 782
1814 | Index
setting while attaching
drawings 148
system 208
Task Pane 200
transformation 157
Oracle 271–272, 345, 482, 485–486,
531, 1204–1205, 1209
adding feature data to maps 272
exporting drawing data to 1204–
1205
exporting from DWG and
back 1209
importing data from 345
moving DWG data to 531
provider capabilities for maps 271
schemas 482
version-enabling 482, 485
working with data 486
ORACONNECT command
(discontinued) 1274
ORADISCONNECT command
(discontinued) 1274
ORAERUPDATE command
(discontinued) 1274
ORAEXPORT command
(discontinued) 1274
ORAIMPORT command
(discontinued) 1274
ORAINDEX command
(discontinued) 1274
orbiting 982
surfaces in 3D 982
Order button 263
Ordinance Survey of Great Britain 318,
347–348, 1189–1190
exporting GML v2 1190
exporting to 1189
importing 347
importing GML v2 318, 348
origin 157
modifying for source drawings 157
orthogonal transformation 124
and digitizing 124
osgeo 467–468
downloading providers from 468
Output Report Options dialog box
(drawing queries) 1587
output reports for queries 1218, 1220
overlay topology 707
to find sliver polygons 707
overposting 903
overshoots 643, 679
and dangling objects 679
tolerance for deleting 643
P
Page Setup dialog box 1423
PAGESETUP command 1150
panning 982
surfaces in 3D 982
paper space 689, 1023
and map topology 689
queries in 1023
Paradox 188, 219
attaching database to drawing 188
setting default version 219
parcel data 53
samples 53
parcels 702, 824
creating polygon topology for 702
splitting polygons for 824
passwords 75, 133
default 133
for AutoCAD Map 3D users 75
path trace analysis 710, 713, 1091
and direct resistance 713
and direction 710
paths 466
for link templates 466
patterns 548, 919
filling areas with 548
finding in data 919
PCT images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
PCX images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
performance 140, 601, 1076–1077,
1079, 1279
improving 1279
improving by working offline 601
Index | 1815
improving for queries 140, 1076–
1077, 1079
PERIMETER variable 1289
persistent locking 266, 576, 586
and automatic update 586
for feature sources in maps 266
personal geodatabase 467–468
accessing ESRI data 468
photographs 372
adding with Data Connect 372
physical configuration 520
setting for feature classes 520
setting for properties 520
PICT images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
pipes 697, 712, 737, 739, 1100
changing direction in topology 737
changing resistance in topology 739
creating network topology 697
specifying direction 712
tracing in topology 1100
plot map sets 1153
importing for map books 1153
plot styles 965, 1030
finding drawing objects by 1030
theming for drawing layers 965
plot transparency 1128
Plotstyle Range Editor dialog box (object
classification) 1524
plotters 1128, 1163
publishing map books to 1163
publishing maps to 1128
plotting 1128
plotting transparent features 1128
PNG images 370, 372, 375–376
adding with Data Connect 372,
375–376
point boundary for query location 1027
point data 289
and ODBC 289
point features 578, 963
creating 578
theming 963
Point Mapping dialog box 1466
points 545, 853, 855–856, 858, 903–
904, 950, 952, 1373
and fixed labels 904
displaying angles between 950
displaying grade between 952
displaying horizontal distance
between 952
displaying slope between 952
obscuring with labels 903
scale ranges for 545
specifying with angle and
distance 853
specifying with azimuth and
distance 858
specifying with bearing and
distance 855
specifying with deflection and
distance 856
styles for 545
styling 1373
symbols for 545
points (geometric) 361, 809, 1027
boundary for query location 1027
digitizing by coordinates 809
importing as text 361
query location 1027
points (nodes) 361, 638, 643, 649, 675,
677, 679, 682–683, 694, 714,
724, 734, 739, 742, 751, 753,
809, 884, 1105
adding to topology 742
and topology 694
changing appearance in
topology 734
changing resistance in topology 739
cleaning up 638
clustered 675
dangling objects 679
digitizing 884
digitizing by coordinates 809
editing in topology 724
explicit 1105
implicit 1105
importing as text 361
marking for cleanup 649
pseudo 677
1816 | Index
removing from topology 751
simplifying lines 682
specifying resistance 714
tolerance for deleting clusters 643
updating for topology 753
weeding 682
zero-length objects 683
points of interest symbols 62
POLYDISPLAY command 835
polygon boundary for query
location 1027
polygon features 579, 961
creating 579
theming 961
Polygon Fill Properties dialog box 1558
polygon topology 699, 702, 704–705,
707, 884, 1105, 1201
and Drawing Cleanup 704
and missing centroids 704
and object data 699
and sliver polygons 704, 707
creating 702
digitizing objects for 884
exporting 1201
for land cover map 705
for land use map 705
overlaying 1105
overview 699
polygons 363, 366, 548, 702, 706, 731,
746, 749, 751, 753, 759, 779,
807, 811, 816, 819, 824, 826,
829, 832–833, 876, 1027, 1030,
1109, 1166, 1201
adding boundaries 819
adding fill 548
adding holes 819
adding islands 819
adding to topology 746
and gradient fill 816, 833
and islands 811
attaching object data 876
boundaries for 811
changing fill 819
converting polylines to 826
converting to polylines during
export 1201
converting to polylines from
topology 759
converting topology to 829
creating centroids 366
creating centroids for 702, 749,
807, 832
creating in maps 816
default fill 833
disabling for maps 833
displaying boundaries 833
displaying edges 833
dissolving 1109
dividing 731, 824
editing 819
editing in topology 731
exporting 1201
exporting polylines as 1166
filling 816
finding drawing objects by 1030
importing into AutoCAD Map
3D 363
incomplete in topology 779
inner and outer boundaries 811
merging in topology 731
nested 826, 829
overview of using in maps 811
query location 1027
rebalancing 819
removing from topology 751
slivers 706
splitting 824
splitting in topology 731
topology 702
updating for topology 753
polyline segments 682–683, 687
simplifying 682
weeding 687
zero-length 683
polylines 129, 646, 677, 682–683, 687,
727, 759, 779, 796, 826, 1166,
1199, 1201
and Drawing Cleanup 646
converting 3D to 2D 646
converting drawing objects to 646
converting to polygons 826
creating from polygon topology 759
Index | 1817
creating from polygons during
export 1201
digitizing 129
dissolving pseudo nodes 677
editing in topology 727
exporting as polygons 1166
exporting text enclosed in 1199
filling 796
incomplete in topology 779
simplifying 682
supplementing 687
weeding 687
zero-length 683
Portable Network Graphic images 370,
372
adding with Data Connect 372
Preview mode queries 1071–1073
previewing 165, 619, 1072–1073
drawing objects in attached
drawings 619
queries 165, 1072–1073
source drawings for maps 619
previous releases of AutoCAD 626
updating source drawings 626
primary key (identifier properties) 520
setting in schemas 520
printing 1123, 1128, 1163, 1216, 1218,
1255
Data View tables 1216
map books 1163
metadata 1255
overview 1123
query reports 1218
transparency 1128
privileges for users 75
problem-solving 633
saving drawings 633
profiles 239, 650, 782
compatibility across product
versions 239
for Drawing Cleanup 650
for import/export 239
for topology 782
projections 134
projective transformation 124
and digitizing 124
properties 185, 307, 439, 443, 510–512,
520–522, 901, 922, 938, 1030,
1050, 1160
adding drawing objects to maps
by 307
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
and joins 439, 443
constraining 511–512
creating in schemas 510
deleting in schemas 521
editing in schemas 520
finding drawing objects by 1030
for attached databases 185
map books 1160
setting identifier (primary key) in
schemas 520
setting physical configuration 520
undoing schema changes 522
using as labels 901
viewing for drawing objects 938
viewing for features 922
PROPERTIES command 846
Properties palette 920, 938
and Display Manager 920
drawing attributes 938
property alteration 794, 1045, 1048,
1050, 1052, 1055, 1062, 1067,
1069, 1080, 1119
adding hatch to objects 1067
adding text to objects 1062
based on external data 1055
based on object data 1052
based on object properties 1050
modifying 1069
overview 1045
text insertion point 794
topology queries 1119
with queries 1048
Property Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1590
property conditions for queries 1030,
1043
editing 1043
property index 1077
1818 | Index
property settings 1471
in Schema Editor 1471
Property Value Mapping dialog box
(Export) 1462
providers 266
capabilities in maps 266
pseudo nodes 677
dissolving 677
Publish to Autodesk MapGuide dialog
box 1315
Publish to MapGuide Results dialog
box 1142
Publish To MapGuide Results dialog
box 1316
publishing 1123, 1126, 1128, 1131,
1137, 1141, 1162–1163, 1255
attribute data 1131
map books to DWF format 1162
map books to plotters 1163
maps 1126
maps as web pages 1137
maps to plotters 1128
metadata 1255
options for DWF 1131
overview for maps 1123
to MapGuide 1141
purchasing data 52
Q
QSELECT command 1007
quantile distribution 955
queries 75, 140, 161, 164–165, 167–168,
170, 185, 208, 221, 313, 626,
628, 756, 865, 925, 993, 1023–
1024, 1027, 1029–1030, 1033,
1035, 1038, 1041, 1043, 1045,
1048, 1050, 1052, 1055, 1062,
1067, 1069, 1071–1073, 1075–
1077, 1079–1080, 1084, 1119,
1218, 1220, 1278, 1283
adding drawing objects to maps
with 313
adding hatch to retrieved drawing
objects 1067
adding text to retrieved
objects 1062
altering properties of retrieved
objects 1045, 1048, 1050,
1052, 1055
and numeric ranges 1029
and raster images 1080
and topology 756
block attribute conditions 1033
boundary for 1027
categories 168
combining conditions 1041
database 865
default directory 208
defining for drawing data 1024
Draw mode 1071–1072, 1075
drawings with xrefs 1080
editing after saving 170
editing conditions 1043
executing 1071
external 164, 167
for attached databases 185
for features 993
improving performance 140, 1076–
1077, 1079
indexes for 1077
issues with groups 1084
issues with hatch 1084
joining conditions 1043
library 161, 165
link data conditions 1033
loading 170
location conditions 1027
model space 1023
modes 1072
modifying property alterations 1069
object data conditions 1033
operators 1041
options 221
overview 1023
paper space 1023
precedence of conditions 1041
Preview mode 1071–1073
previewing 1073
privileges for 75
problem solving 1084
Index | 1819
property conditions 1030
Report mode 1071–1072, 1218,
1220
rerunning 165
running 1218
saving 164
saving objects back to source
drawings 626, 628
selecting feature data with 925
SQL conditions 1035, 1038
storing 161
topology 1119
using expressions 1283
using wild-card characters 1278
with blocks of same name 1080
writing results to file 1218
xrefs 1084
query library 161, 164–165, 167–168
adding external queries 167
categories 168
overview 161
running stored queries 165
saving queries 164
Query Library Administration dialog box
(drawing queries) 1593
Quick Select 1007
for drawing objects 1007
Quick View 619
redrawing the screen 619
Quick View Drawings dialog box 1733
Quickbird images 370
adding to maps 370
R
RADIUS variable 1289
ramps 972
for drawing layer themes 972
Range of Values dialog box (for
theming) 1365
range table 1057
creating 1057
ranges 116, 511, 1030
finding drawing objects using 1030
for object classes 116
for schema property values 511
Raster Design 382, 386
and image location 382
inserting images with Raster
Extension 386
Raster Extension 226, 228–233, 235,
385–386
correlation defaults 233
correlation source 228
detaching images 231
display quality 230
frame options 229
inserting images with 386
memory use 235
options 226
resource file directory 228
selection methods 232
Raster Extension Options dialog box
(Insert Image command) 1614
raster images 253, 370, 372–377, 381,
383, 385–386, 391, 393, 396, 398–
399, 402, 404–405, 407, 409–410,
412–413, 416–421, 424–427, 429–
430, 432, 434, 436, 569–570,
976, 978, 1207, 1228
2D 376
adding contour lines 978
adding to maps 370
adding with Data Connect 372, 374
adjusting brightness 569
adjusting contrast 569
analyzing 976
and maps 253
and REGEN 391
and transparency 381
changing transparency 381
displaying extents 570
displaying in color or greyscale 570
exporting drawing objects to 1207
formats not supported by Data
Connect 385–386, 391,
393, 396, 398–399, 402, 404,
407, 409–410, 412–413, 416–
421, 424–427, 429–430, 432,
434, 436
formats supported by Data
Connect 375, 377
1820 | Index
information for 405
inserting from the command
line 402
inserting manually 383
metadata for 1228
resampling 570
setting insertion point 383
setting single-color
transparency 569
styles for 569
viewing information 405
web-based 377
Raster Object Enabler 385
raster-based surfaces 370, 372–374
adding to maps 370
adding with Data Connect 372, 374
Rebuild Sheet Set 1144
records 935
viewing for drawing objects 935
records (database records) 129, 180,
359, 367–368, 452, 458, 460,
463, 465, 868, 876–878, 880,
893, 896, 1010, 1012, 1019,
1022, 1033, 1038, 1055, 1166,
1216
adding in Data View 868
altering drawing objects based
on 1055
attaching multiple to drawing
objects 877
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 878
attaching while digitizing 129, 893,
896
copying 868
deleting in Data View 868
displaying as text 368
editing in Data View 868
editing in object data 880
editing links 465
exporting with objects 1166
filtering 1019
filtering by location 1022
finding drawing objects by 1033
finding in Data View 1010, 1012
importing 359, 367
linking automatically to drawing
objects 460
linking to drawing objects 452,
458, 876
linking to drawing objects in
maps 463
object data 180
printing 1216
SQL conditions 1038
records (metadata) 1248
redrawing the screen 619
after Quick View 619
REFEDIT command 1278
commands blocked during 1278
registering maps 126
relational database tables 289, 502
and feature classes 289
setting up users for AutoCAD Map
3D 502
relational databases 503
setting up users for AutoCAD Map
3D 503
releasing locks for drawing objects 610
Remove Object Data Index dialog
box 1652
removing 140
coordinate system assignment 140
Rename Category dialog box (drawing
queries) 1595
Rename Range Table dialog box (drawing
queries) 1595
Rename Table dialog box 1531
Rename Topology dialog box 1708
renaming 182, 760, 784, 1163
map books 1163
object data fields 182
object data tables 182
topology 760, 784
Report mode queries 1071–1072, 1218,
1220
reports 1119, 1213, 1218, 1220
creating during a query 1218, 1220
for attribute data 1213
template for 1220
topology 1119
residual calibration 124
Index | 1821
resistance 714, 724, 727, 739, 1091,
1096, 1100
and network topology 714
editing for topology 724, 727
for links and nodes in topology 739
using in best route analysis 1096
using in flood trace analysis 1100
using in path trace analysis 1091
resource file directory 228
Raster Extension 228
resources 1244
copying metadata 1244
reusing 1212, 1283
expressions in queries 1283
layers from Display Manager 1212
revision numbers 586
and automatic update 586
RGB color system 245
importing objects using 245
rights 75
RLC 1 and 2 images 370
adding to maps 370
RLC images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
RLE images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
RMS error 124
roads 697, 712, 737, 739, 1100
changing direction in topology 737
changing resistance in topology 739
creating network topology 697
specifying direction 712
tracing in topology 1100
rotating 157, 789
drawing objects in maps 789
drawings 157
rotation 383, 1045
altering with queries 1045
using to specify image location 383
ROTATION variable 1289
routes 1091, 1096, 1100
finding best 1096
finding shortest 1091
flood trace 1100
RST images 386
inserting with Raster Extensions 386
rubber sheeting 790, 792
maps 792
Run Library Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1596
S
sample data 52–53, 62
downloading 53
for AutoCAD Map 3D 52
on product CDs 53
symbol libraries 62
SANGLE variable 1289
satellite imagery 53, 65
purchasing 65
samples 53
save back 633, 635, 1079
improving performance 1079
options 635
problem-solving 633
save back extents 158, 628
resetting 158
using to save drawing objects 628
viewing 158
Save Current Query dialog box (drawing
queries) 1597
Save Features dialog box 1343
Save Objects to Source Drawings dialog
box 1621
save sets 606, 622, 624–626, 628, 631,
633, 635
adding drawing objects
automatically 635
adding objects to 624
for maps 622
object locking 606
options 635
problem-solving 633
removing drawing objects from 631
saving queried objects to source
drawings 626, 628
turning off prompt 635
viewing objects in 625
Save Version dialog box 1344
1822 | Index
saving 164, 518, 549, 612, 624, 626,
628–630, 633, 635, 777, 1120,
1207, 1210, 1212
drawing objects 612
drawing objects as raster
images 1207
drawing objects to new drawing 630
drawing objects to source
drawings 626, 628
drawings 612
drawings and exploding blocks 633
feature styles 549
layers as SDF 1210
layers from Display Manager 1212
new drawing objects to
drawings 624
objects to the current map 629
options for drawings 635
problem-solving 633
queries 164
schemas 518
topology 777, 1120
vs. exporting as SDF 1210
scale 383, 538–539
setting for map 538–539
specifying for raster images 383
scale bars 52, 63
samples 52, 63
scale factors 157, 204, 789, 1045
altering with queries 1045
for drawing objects 789
for source drawings 157
for text 204
scale ranges 543–544
defining for layers in Display
Manager 544
understanding 543
scale reduction factor 84
scale thresholds (Display Manager) 564,
566
creating 564
modifying 564
viewing all styles 566
scaling 157, 789
drawing objects in maps 789
drawings 157
Schema Editor 266, 509–510, 518–522
abstract classes (inheritance) 520
backing up schemas 518
base classes 520
constraints 520
creating schemas 510
deleting schemas 521
editing schemas 520
enabling long transactions 520
exporting schemas 518
for feature sources in maps 266
identifier properties (primary
key) 520
importing schemas 518
overview 509
physical configuration 520
undoing schema changes 522
versioning 520
viewing schemas 519
Schema Editor dialog box 1471
schemas 318, 479, 482, 486, 489, 491,
494, 496, 498, 500, 508–512,
514, 518–522, 525, 1474
and Bulk Copy 1474
ArcSDE 498
backing up 518
constraints 511–512
copying foreign 525
creating 510
defintiion 479
deleting 521
editing 520
exporting with Schema Editor 518
importing 318
importing with Schema Editor 518
MySQL 489
ODBC 496
Oracle 482
overview 479, 482
overview of procedures 508
Schema Editor 509
SDF 491
SHP 494
SQL Server 486
undoing changes to 522
using native views 514
Index | 1823
viewing 519
WFS (Web Feature Service) 500
screen pointing area 123
for digitizing 123
SDF 25, 324
SDF 1 or 2 files 326
importing 326
SDF 2 files 1175–1176
exporting 1175–1176
SDF files 287, 323, 491, 493, 505, 531,
1173, 1209–1210, 1212
creating 505
exporting from DWG and
back 1209
exporting to 1173
exporting vs. saving 1210
importing 323
moving DWG data to 531
provider capabilities for maps 287
saving Display Manager layers
as 1212
schemas 491
working with data 493
SDTS (Spatial Data Transfer
Standard) 318, 349
importing 318, 349
overview 349
Search To Select 925
searching 925, 1000
DataTable 925
for features 1000
seed file 245, 1186
default for exporting DGN files 245
for DGN files 1186
Select Actions dialog box page 1326
Select Alias dialog box 1652
Select Data dialog box 1544
Select Data dialog box (drawing
topology) 1709
Select Database Version dialog box 1424
Select Display Element dialog box 1368
Select Drawings to Assign Coordinate
System dialog box 1337
Select Drawings to Attach dialog
box 1545
Select Existing Link Template dialog
box 1425
Select Feature Classes dialog box (Display
Manager) 1368
Select Images dialog box (Display
Manager) 1368
Select Layers dialog box (Display
Manager) 1368
Select Link Template dialog box 1426
Select Link Template Key dialog
box 1532
Select Link Templates dialog box 1426
Select Objects dialog box page 1331
Select Plot Set to Convert dialog
box 1565
Select Query dialog box 1427
Select Table dialog box 1428
Select Topologies dialog box (Display
Manager) 1368
selecting 582, 640, 847, 993, 1006–
1007, 1012
checked out features 582
classified objects 847
drawing objects 1006–1007
features 993
objects for Drawing Cleanup 640
records in databases 1012
server CS code 379
for Web Map Service (WMS) 379
Set Property Alterations dialog box
(drawing queries) 1598
SETELEMENTS command 1563
setup 69
overview 69
Seven Parameter Transformation
conversion method 86
Shape Multiclass 1166, 1194, 1196
exporting 1166, 1196
exporting to 1194
ShapeFile 245, 285–286, 318, 333, 1180,
1196
adding feature data to maps 286
converting to drawing objects 285
exporting as folder 245
exporting multiclass 1196
exporting to 1180
1824 | Index
folder option 1180
importing 318, 333
importing as folder 245
importing vs. adding.to maps 285
provider capabilities for maps 285
SHAPENAME variable 1289
sheet sets 1144
and map books 1144
short linear objects 643, 649, 666
erasing 666
marking for cleanup 649
tolerance for deleting 643
shortest path trace 1091
Show Foreign Data Stores 272, 280, 283
SHP files 285–286, 333–334, 472, 494–
495, 505, 1180, 1194, 1196
adding feature data to maps 286
creating 505
exporting data from Civil 3D 472
exporting multiclass 1196
exporting to 1180
importing 333–334
importing vs. adding 285
multiclass 1194
provider capabilities for maps 285
schemas 494
working with data 495
SID images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
SIF files 1175
exporting 1175
SIZE variable 1289
SL King Provider 467
sliver polygons 704, 706–707
finding when creating topology 707
finding when overlaying
topologies 707
removing 704
slope 952, 989, 991
and theming 989
displaying 952
theming surfaces for 991
snapping nodes 675
soil drawings 53
samples 53
solid fill 796
adding to closed polylines 796
Sort dialog box (records) 1428
Source Drawing Scope dialog box 1369
source drawings 136, 141, 144, 148–
150, 152–153, 155, 157–158, 160,
606, 612, 618–619, 621, 626,
628, 635, 716, 777, 808, 1024,
1077
activating 149
aligning 157
assigning coordinate system 136
attaching to the current
drawing 148
backup files 635
descriptions 155
drive aliases for 150
editing in AutoCAD Map 3D 621
editing topology 716
global coordinate systems 136
indexing 1077
locking 606
matching edges 808
offset for 157
opening 152
previewing objects in 619
querying 1024
Quick View 619
retrieving objects from 1024
rotating 157
save back extents 158, 628
saving objects to 612
saving queried objects to 626, 628
saving topology to 777
scaling 157
settings 153
symbol table information 160
tiled 144, 628
transforming 157
viewing coordinate systems 141
viewing information 160
zooming to extents 618
spatial analysis 1086
spatial data 1228
metadata for 1228
Spatial Data File 25, 324
Index | 1825
Spatial Data Organization Editor 1494
Spatial Data Transfer Standard files 318,
349
importing 318, 349
overview 349
spatial databases 479
overview 479
spatial filters 351
during import 351
spatial filters (Data View) 1022
spatial indexes 528–529
and Bulk Copy 528–529
speed 714, 739
for links and nodes in
topology 714, 739
Split and Merge Rules dialog box 1405
split rultes 593
ignoring 593
splitting 592
features 592
SPOT images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
SQL Condition History dialog box
(drawing queries) 1601
SQL conditions 204, 309, 1035, 1038,
1043
dates 1038
editing 1043
for drawing queries 1035
maximum number in history
list 204
operators 1038
quotation marks 1038
selecting drawing objects for maps
by 309
strings 1038
troubleshooting 1038
SQL Expression dialog box (link
templates) 1548
SQL Link Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1601
SQL links index 1077
SQL queries 1018–1019
for drawing data in Data View 1019
for drawing objects 1018
SQL Server 279–280, 486, 488
adding feature data to maps 280
and long transactions 279
provider capabilities for maps 279
schemas 486
working with data 488
SQL variables 1293
standard deviation 124, 955
and digitizing 124
Standard Order Process Editor 1506
state plane coordinate systems 134
statistics 160, 405, 776, 1218, 1220
for raster images 405
for source drawings 160
for topology 776
printing using report queries 1218,
1220
viewing for raster images 405
street centerline data 53
samples 53
stretching drawings 792
STRING variable 1289
string-handling functions 1285
Style Area dialog box 1374
Style Band dialog box 1369
Style Label dialog box 1370
Style Library 561, 563
Style Line dialog box 1372
Style Point dialog box 1373
Style Text Layer dialog box 1376
STYLE variable 1289
styles 262, 533, 541, 545–546, 548, 550–
551, 555, 557, 559–561, 563, 979
and map layers 262
and symbols 557
combining 559
composite styles for drawing
layers 559
composite styles for lines 546
for areas 548
for contour lines 979
for display elements 561
for drawing layers 555, 557, 559
for drawing objects 550–551
for features 541
for lines 546
1826 | Index
for maps 533
for points 545
modifying for drawing layers 560
referencing 563
saving in library 561
stylesheets 1230
for metadata 1230
styling 321, 953
drawing objects on import 321
using themes 953
Superuser 75, 133, 182, 206, 606, 608,
610
default password 133
forcing user login 206
logging in as 133
modifying object data tables 182
options 206
releasing locks 610
setting up privileges 75
turning on object locking 606, 608
surfaces 370, 372–374, 976, 978–980,
982, 986, 988, 991–992
3D 979
adding contour lines 978
adding to maps 370
adding with Data Connect 372, 374
analyzing 976
and contour lines 976
applying hillshading 988
applying vertical exaggeration 988
changing theme colors 992
draping 2D data on 980
fly through 982
hillshading 986
motion path animation 982
orbiting 982
panning 982
swiveling 982
theming to display height, slope, or
aspect 991
vertical exaggeration 986
viewing in 3D 982
walk through 982
zooming in 3D 982
survey points 289
and ODBC 289
SWIDTH variable 1289
swiveling surfaces in 3D 982
symbol libraries 61
samples 61
symbol tables 160
viewing for source drawings 160
symbol-handling functions 1287
symbols 52, 61–62, 545, 557, 559
adding to point layers 545
combining styles 559
for drawing layers 557
general use 62
samples 61
system-generated properties 1471
in Schema Editor 1471
T
TAB files 245, 318, 338–339, 1166, 1185
exporting 1166
exporting to 1185
importing 318, 338–339
importing as folder 245
Table Filter dialog box 1429
Table Filter History dialog box 1432
Table Properties dialog box 1433
tables (database tables) 188, 191, 193,
215, 452, 454, 456, 458, 460,
463, 465–466, 861, 865, 868,
896, 1010, 1012, 1019, 1022,
1038, 1216
adding records in Data View 868
and Data View 861
attaching to drawings 188
connecting 193
converting from object data 463
deleting link templates 466
deleting links 465
deleting records in Data View 868
detaching from drawings 188
disconnecting 193
editing database path 466
editing in Data View 868
editing links 465
filtering records 1019
filtering records by location 1022
Index | 1827
finding records 1010
key columns 454
link templates 454
linked 456
linking records to drawing
objects 458
linking to drawing objects in
maps 452, 460
linking to while digitizing 896
navigating in Data View 861
opening 456
opening in Data View 865
options 215
printing 1216
querying 865
saving changes in Data View 868
searching 1012
SQL conditions 1038
UDL (Universal Data Link) file
for 188, 191
viewing for drawing objects 861
tables (object data) 180, 182, 359, 367–
368, 463, 694, 697, 702, 774,
876–878, 880, 893, 1166
adding fields 182
attaching multiple records to drawing
objects 877
attaching records to drawing
objects 876
attaching to drawing objects
automatically 878
converting to database tables 463
creating 180
creating while digitizing 893
deleting 182
displaying as text 368
editing 182, 880
exporting 1166
for network topology 697
for node topology 694
for polygon topology 702
importing 359, 367
modifying fields 182
renaming 182
viewing for topology 774
tablet for digitizing 121, 123
TABLET mode 891
and digitizing¶ 891
TAG variable 1289
Tagged Image File Format images 372,
375–376
adding with Data Connect 372,
375–376
TARGA images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Task Pane 40–43, 200, 213, 535, 537,
551, 1628
data source options 213
Display Manager tab 42, 535, 537,
551
hiding 200, 1628
in AutoCAD Map 3D 40
making transparent 200
Map Book tab 43
Map Explorer tab 41
options 200
refreshing 200
showing 1628
templates 52, 59, 321, 909, 911, 1148,
1220, 1226, 1231, 1233–1238
and annotation 909, 911
applying for metadata 1233
creating for metadata 1233
deactivating for metadata 1236
exporting from metadata 1237
for map books 59, 1148
for metadata 1226, 1231
for query reports 1220
for styling drawing objects 321
importing for metadata 1233
installed location for 59
previewing for metadata 1235
removing from metadata 1238
renaming for metadata 1234
samples 59
setting default for metadata 1235
text 180, 204, 361, 368, 460, 557, 794,
915, 965, 1030, 1045, 1050,
1062, 1166, 1199
adding for drawing layers 965
adding to annotation layers 915
adding to queried objects 1062
1828 | Index
adjusting for map distortion 204
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
altering with queries 1045
attaching to objects in maps 794
displaying data as 368
exporting as points 1166
exporting when enclosed in a
polyline 1199
finding drawing objects by 1030
for drawing layers 557
height for drawing layer themes 965
importing points as 361
insertion point 794
label point 794
linking to external data for
maps 460
options 204
specifying type for tables 180
units 204
text styles 361, 635, 974, 1030, 1045,
1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
altering with queries 1045
finding drawing objects by 1030
for drawing layer themes 974
redefining on save back 635
when importing points into
maps 361
texture maps 979
TGA images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
Thematic Mapping dialog box 1378
thematic maps 917
legend 917
Thematic Values dialog box 1379
Theme dialog box (features) 1380
themes 953, 955, 958, 961–963, 965–
966, 970, 989, 992
based on height, slope, or
aspect 989
by layer type 953
changing colors for 992
creating for drawing layers 965, 970
creating for feature layers 958
distribution methods 955
for drawing data 966
methods to use 955
transparency 961–963
using for analysis 953
thickness 1030, 1045, 1050
altering drawing objects based
on 1050
altering with queries 1045
finding drawing objects by 1030
THICKNESS variable 1289
third party providers 467–468
adding 468
thumbnail 264
changing for map layers 264
TIFF images 372, 375–376
adding with Data Connect 372,
375–376
Tile Properties dialog box 1565
tiled drawings 628, 808
matching edges 808
saving back to 628
tiles 1158, 1161, 1163–1164
deleting from map books 1164
renaming for map books 1163
viewing and editing in map
books 1158
viewing in map books 1161
Time Period Information Editor 1491
tolerance for Drawing Cleanup 643
toolbars 39
in AutoCAD Map 3D 39
topographic map 976
topology 312, 363, 658, 675, 677, 679,
682–683, 689, 691, 693–695, 697,
699, 702, 704–706, 712, 714,
716, 724, 727, 731, 734, 737,
739, 742, 744, 746, 749, 751,
753, 756, 760, 768, 771, 773–
774, 776–777, 779, 782, 784–785,
829, 884, 1086, 1091, 1094,
1096, 1100, 1102, 1105, 1109,
1112, 1119–1120, 1201
adding drawing objects to maps
by 312
adding linear objects 744
Index | 1829
adding links 716
adding nodes 716, 742
adding polygons 716, 746
analysis settings 782
analyzing 1086
and clip operations 1102
and Drawing Cleanup 658, 704
and erase operations 1102
and identity 1102
and paste operations 1102
and union operations 1102
auditing 779
best route 1096
buffering 1112
changing appearance of nodes 734
changing link direction 737
changing resistance 739
clustered nodes 675
combining 1105
completing 779
converting to polygons 829
correcting 779
creating 691, 694, 697, 702
creating centroids for
polygons 363, 702, 749
dangling objects 679
deleting 760, 785
deleting objects 716
digitizing objects for 884
dissolving 1109
dividing polygons 731
editing 716, 724, 737
editing partial 756
editing polygons 731
errors 779
exporting 1201
flood trace 1100
highlighting objects 771
islands 779
land cover map 705
land use map 705
left-right relationships 702
links 697
loading 760, 768
managing 760
merging polygons 731
network topology 695, 697
node topology 694
object data for 773
object data stored for best
route 1094
overlay analysis 1102
overlaying 1105
overview 689
polygon topology 702
profiles for 782
pseudo nodes 677
querying 756, 1119
removing objects 751
renaming 760, 784
repositioning nodes 727
result 1120
saving 1120
saving to source drawings 777
shortest path trace 1091
simplifying lines 682
sliver polygons 706
specifying link direction 712, 714
splitting polygons 731
temporary 1120
testing integrity 779
unloading 768
updating manually 753
viewing object data 774
viewing statistics for 776
weeding nodes 682
zero-length objects 683
Topology Buffer Create New Centroids and
Nodes dialog box 1710
Topology Buffer New Topology dialog
box 1711
Topology Buffer Set Buffer Distance dialog
box 1712
Topology Dissolve Create New Centroids
and Nodes dialog box 1713
Topology Dissolve Create Nodes dialog
box 1715
Topology Dissolve New Topology dialog
box 1716
Topology Dissolve Object Data dialog
box 1717
1830 | Index
Topology Dissolve Set Parameter dialog
box 1718
Topology Overlay Analysis Analysis Type
dialog box 1719
Topology Overlay Analysis Create New
Centroids and Nodes dialog
box 1722
Topology Overlay Analysis Create Nodes
dialog box 1723
Topology Overlay Analysis Output
Attributes dialog box 1726
Topology Overlay Analysis
OutputTopology dialog
box 1724
Topology Overlay Analysis Select Overlay
Topology dialog box 1727
Topology Query dialog box 1728
Topology Query Result dialog box 1730
Topology Selection dialog box 1731
Topology Statistics dialog box 1732
TOPONAME variable 1289
TOPOTYPE variable 1289
trace analysis 1091, 1096, 1100
best route 1096
flood trace 1100
shortest path 1091
tracking coordinates 940–941
using coordinate system for attached
drawing 941
transactions 520
long (versioning) 520
transforming 157, 204, 209, 789
coordinates 204, 209
drawing objects in maps 789
entire source drawing 157
transparency 200, 381, 548, 961–963,
1128
and printing 1128
and styles 548
and themes 961–963
for raster images 381
for Task Pane 200
Transparency Color dialog box (Insert
Image command) 1617
transparent commands 850–851
using 851
transparent features 1128
Transverse Mercator projection 134
Trim Objects at Boundary dialog
box 1408
trimming objects 802
troubleshooting 281, 296, 528–529,
1004, 1035, 1038, 1080, 1084
broken connections in Display
Manager 296
buffers 1004
Bulk Copy 528–529
data stores from previous versions of
AutoCAD Map 3D 281
drawing queries 1080, 1084
SQL conditions 1035, 1038
True Colors 245
importing objects using 245
TrueVision images 386
inserting with Raster Extension 386
tutorials 48
AutoCAD Map 3D 48
Type SQL Condition dialog box (drawing
queries) 1605
TYPE variable 1289
U
UDL (Universal Data Link) file 188, 191
editing 191
overview 188
UNCLASSIFY command 845
Undefined Alias Referenced dialog
box 1653
undershoots 643, 649, 671
extending 671
marking for cleanup 649
tolerance for extending 643
undoing 522
feature class changes in
schemas 522
property changes in schemas 522
schema changes in feature
sources 522
uniquness 511
for schema property values 511
United States grid data files 97
Index | 1831
units 204
default 204
units of measurement 204, 245
converting for text 204
default for exporting DGN files 245
Universal Transverse Mercator
System 134
unloading topology 768
unlocking drawing objects 610, 631
unmatched data or geometric type
errors 1474
ignoring in Bulk Copy 1474
Update Edits Automatically 80, 587, 601
changing default setting 80
enabling 587
turning off 601
updating topology 753
URL variable 1289
URLs 326, 1175
exporting to SDF 2 files 1175
importing from SDF 1 or 2 files 326
User Administration dialog box 1653
User Coordinate System (UCS) 945
User Credentials dialog box 1345
User Information dialog box 1655
user interface in AutoCAD Map 3D 77
User Login dialog box 1656
users 75, 503
database and AutoCAD Map 3D 503
rights 75
valid usernames 75
V
value chain 12
variables 794, 1283, 1288–1289, 1292–
1294
AutoLISP 1294
block attributes 1292
dot variables 1289
LABELPT 794
object class properties 1294
object data 1292
SQL 1293
vector data 65, 980
draping on 3D surfaces 980
purchasing 65
Vector Markup Language (VML)
files 1166, 1190–1191
exporting 1166, 1191
exporting to 1190
Vector Product Format (VPF) 245
importing as folder 245
Vector Product Format (VPF) files 318,
350
importing 318, 350
version-enabling 485
Oracle 485
versioning 266, 520, 602–603, 1474
and Bulk Copy 1474
for feature data 603
for feature sources in maps 266
long transactions 520
versions 603
activating for feature data 603
creating for feature data 603
discarding for feature data 603
vertical exaggeration 986
View Query Statement dialog box 1345
viewing 141, 158, 160, 405, 519, 619,
774, 776, 861, 982, 1158–1161,
1227
coordinate system assignment 141
database tables 861
drawing objects in attached drawings
for maps 619
external data for drawing
objects 861
in 3D 982
map book properties 1160
map book tiles 1161
map books 1158–1159
metadata 1227
raster image information 405
save back extents 158
schemas 519
source drawing information 160
source drawings for maps 619
statistics for source drawings 160
topology data 774
topology statistics 776
using Quick View 619
1832 | Index
views 514
database 514
viewscale expressions 1288
viewtwist expressions 1288
Visual FoxPro 188, 219
attaching database to drawing 188
setting default version 219
VML (Vector Markup Language)
files 1166, 1190–1191
exporting 1166, 1191
exporting to 1190
VPF (Vector Product Format) 245
importing as folder 245
VPF (Vector Product Format) files 318,
350
importing 318, 350
W
walk through for surfaces 982
water data 53
samples 53
water symbols 61
samples 61
watersheds 702
creating polygon topology for 702
weather data 65
purchasing 65
Web Feature Service (WFS) 293–294,
1228
adding feature data to maps 294
metadata for 1228
provider capabilities for maps 293
Web Map Service (WMS) 377, 379, 1228
adding images to maps 379
specifying version 379
making background transparent 379
metadata for 1228
provider capabilities 377
specifying format 379
web pages 1137, 1190–1191
exporting to 1190–1191
publishing maps as 1137
web-based raster images 377
weeding 682, 684, 687
and bulge 684
and supplementing factors 684
defined 684
lines with Drawing Cleanup 682,
687
polylines 687
wells 694
creating topology for 694
WFS (Web Feature Service) 293–294,
500–501, 1228
adding feature data to maps 294
metadata for 1228
provider capabilities for maps 293
schemas 500
working with data 501
Who Has It Information dialog box 1623
widening conversion 526
and Bulk Copy 526
width 129, 1045
altering with queries 1045
digitizing 129
wild-card characters 1278, 1297
using in dialog boxes 1278
using in expressions 1297
windows 1027
finding all objects in 1027
WMS (Web Map Service) 370, 372–373,
377, 379, 1228
adding images to maps 370, 379
adding surfaces to maps 373
adding with Data Connect 372
metadata for 1228
provider capabilities 377
working offline 584, 601
and checking out features 584
workspaces 38, 76–77
creating for AutoCAD Map 3D 77
in AutoCAD Map 3D 76
switching between 38
World Coordinate System (WCS) 945
X
XLS files 188, 219
attaching to drawing 188
setting default version 219
Index | 1833
XMI files 518
importing as schemas 518
XML files 120, 518
exporting schemas as 518
for object class definitions 120
importing as schemas 518
xrefs 146, 1084
and drawings 146
querying 1084
XSCALE variable 1289
Y
YSCALE variable 1289
Z
zero-length objects 683
identifying and removing 683
Zoom Drawing Extents dialog box 1734
Zoom Scale dialog box 1433
zooming 566, 570, 618, 933, 982
Display Manager 566
surfaces in 3D 982
to drawing extents 618
to raster image extents 570
using Data Table 933
ZSCALE variable 1289
1834 | Index

Navigation menu